0900P-4 Complete

Pneumatic Actuator Products
Cylinders, Guided Cylinders and Rotary Actuators

Catalog 0900P-4
Catalog0900P-4
PneumaticActuatorProducts
GlobalPneumatics,Warning,OfferofSale
Thisiconcanbefoundnexttoproductsthatarewidely supportedbyParkerPneumaticsworldwidemanufacturing andsalesnetwork.Whenyouseethisicon,youcan beconfidentthatthisproductismanufacturedand/or stocked*worldwideforrapiddelivery.Inadditiontolocal manufacturingorinventory,oursalesnetworkhasbeen specificallytrainedontheseproductstoprovideour customerswiththebestpossibleservice.
Global Pneumatics
Productsnotshowingthisiconarestillsoldanddistributed worldwide.However,TheGlobalPneumaticsiconrepresents productsthatcustomerscanexpectthebestlevelofsupport. Ifyouareamulti-nationalcompany,seekglobalsourcingor shipglobally,dependonParkerPneumaticforPREMIER CUSTOMER SERVICE.

*Stockinglevelsvarybycountry
! WARNING
FAILUREORIMPROPERSELECTIONORIMPROPERUSEOFTHEPRODUCTSAND/ORSYSTEMSDESCRIBEDHEREIN ORRELATEDITEMSCANCAUSEDEATH,PERSONALINJURYANDPROPERTYDAMAGE. ThisdocumentandotherinformationfromParkerHannifinCorporation,itssubsidiariesandauthorizeddistributorsprovide productand/orsystemoptionsforfurtherinvestigationbyusershavingtechnicalexpertise.Itisimportantthatyouanalyzeall aspectsofyourapplicationincludingconsequencesofanyfailure,andreviewtheinformationconcerningtheproductorsystem inthecurrentproductcatalog.Duetothevarietyofoperatingconditionsandapplicationsfortheseproductsorsystems,the user,throughitsownanalysisandtesting,issolelyresponsibleformakingthefinalselectionoftheproductsandsystemsand assuringthatallperformance,safetyandwarningrequirementsoftheapplicationaremet. Theproductsdescribedherein,includingwithoutlimitation,productfeatures,specifications,designs,availabilityandpricing, aresubjecttochangebyParkerHannifinCorporationanditssubsidiariesatanytimewithoutnotice.
OfferofSale
The items described in this document are hereby offered for sale by Parker Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries or its authorizeddistributors.Thisofferanditsacceptancearegovernedbytheprovisionsstatedontheseparatepageofthis documententitledOfferofSale.
Copyright2008ParkerHannifinCorporation.AllRightsReserved
ParkerHannifinCorporation PneumaticDivision Wadsworth,Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
Catalog 0900P-4
Index
Pneumatic Actuator Products Product Selection Chart
Application Engineering Data Tie Rod Cylinders ISO Cylinders Round Body Cylinders Compact Cylinders Guided Cylinders Rodless Cylinders Rotary Actuators Pneumatic Grippers Air Motors Complementary Products Electronic Sensors , Safety Guide, Fax Forms Offer of Sale
3MA/4MA Series, 3MAJ/4MAJ Series, 2MNR Series, ACVB Option, LPSO Option, 2A/2AN Series, S Series, C Series
A B C D E F G H J K L M N
Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
P1D Series, P1A Series
SR Series, SRM Series, SRD/SRDM Series, SRX Series, P1L Series, P Series
P1M Series, P1M Series with Tooling Plate, P1M Series Swing Clamp, LP/LPM Series, C05 Series, P1G Series
P5T Series, P5T2 Series, P5TT/TD, P5L Series, HB Series, P5E Series
P1X Series, RC Series, P1Z Series
PV Series, PRN(A) Series, WR Series, PTR Series, B671/F672 Series, HP Series, P5W Series
For Complete Information, Refer to Catalog 1900-2
PV1S
Linear Alignment Couplers, Flow Controls, 3TK Air Oil Tanks, RL Series, Shock Absorbers, Transition Kits
Solid State, Reed and Proximity Sensors
Application FAX Forms
Fax Forms, Safety Guide, Offer of Sale
Electronic Sensors
Complementary Products
Air Motors
Pneumatic Grippers
Rotary Cylinders
Rodless Cylinders
Guided Cylinders
Compact Cylinders
Round Body Cylinders
ISO Cylinders
Tie Rod Cylinders
Engineering Data
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data
Catalog 0900P-4
Contents
Product Selection Guide ..................................................................................................... A-A3 Fluids, Temperature Range and Warranty ................................................................................ A4 Operating Principles and Construction ..................................................................................... A5 Push and Pull Forces ............................................................................................................... A6 Mounting Information Straight Line Force Transfer (Group ) ................................................................................... A7 Straight Line Force Transfer (Group 3) ................................................................................... A8 Pivot Force Transfer (Group ) ............................................................................................... A9 Accessories .......................................................................................................................... A0 Removable Trunnion Pins ..................................................................................................... A0 Ports ....................................................................................................................................... A Stroke Data & Adjusters Tie Rod Supports ......................................................................... A Stop Tubing & Mounting Classes ............................................................................................ A3 Stroke Selection Chart ........................................................................................................... A4 Deceleration Forces and Air Requirements ............................................................................ A5 Cushion Rating and Air Requirements ................................................................................... A6 Air Requirements ............................................................................................................ A7-A8 NFPA Rod End Data & Piston Rods ....................................................................................... A9 Modifications, Special Assemblies, Tandem ........................................................................... A0 Rotary Actuator Torque Requirements ................................................................................................... A-A3 Moments of Inertia ............................................................................................................. ..A4 Basic Equations ................................................................................................................... .A5 Conversion Factors ................................................................................................................. A26
A
Catalog 0900P-4
Selection Guide

Bore Size -/6" -/8" -/4" -/" -3/4" -/" 3-/4" 3-5/8" 4-/" 5/6" 7/6" 9/6" 3/4" 7/8" 0" " u u 4" u u " " 3" 4" 5" 6" 7" u 8" 00mm u u u u S u u n
Catalog Section
Cylinder Series 6mm
00mm
5mm u u u u u u u u n
3MA 4MA B Tie Rod 3MAJ 4MAJ 2A 2AN ACVB S C C ISO P1D P1A SR D Round Body SRM SRD SRDM SRX P1L P P1M P1M Tooling Plate E Compact P1M Swing Clamp LP LPM C05 C05S P1G G Rodless P1X RC P1Z n n n n n n n n n n n n u u u u n n n n n n n n u n n u n u u u u n u u u u u n u u u u u u u u
u u u u u u u u u n
u u u u u u u
u u u u u u u u
u u u u u u u u n
u u u u u u u
u u n
u u
u u u u u
u u
u u u u u n u n n n u u n n
u u
u n u n
u n u n n u n
n u n n n u u n n
n u n n n u u
u u n n
u u
u u
n n n
n n
n n
n n
u = Inch Bore Size n = Metric Bore Size l = Standard m = Optional R = Required F = Fixed Cushions E = End of Stroke Only S = Special, Consult Factory
A
60mm u u u u S n
0mm
mm
6mm
0mm
5mm
3mm
40mm
50mm
63mm
80mm
8mm
Catalog 0900P-4
Selection Guide
End Cap Material # of Mountings Cylinder Body Material Construction

Catalog Section Pressure Range (PSI) Flexible Porting Option Piston Sensing Option Double Acting Adjustable Air Cushions Single Acting
Cylinder Series
NFPA NFPA NFPA NFPA NFPA NFPA NFPA N/A N/A ISO/VDMA Non-repairable Non-repairable Non-repairable Non-repairable Non-repairable Non-repairable Threaded Snap-Ring Bolted Bolted Bolted Tie Rod Tie Rod Block Block Cartridge Band-Type Rodless Band-Type Rodless Magnetically Coupled Rodless
Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Steel Steel N/A Brass Aluminum Aluminum Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Nickel Plated Brass Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum
Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Steel Steel N/A Steel Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Delrin Delrin Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum N/A N/A N/A Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum
0 5 5 8 8 7 5 5 0 4 8 4 3 9 4 6 3 4 6 6 5 5 3
50 50 00 00 50 50 45 00 00 45 45 50 50 00 00 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 00 00 5 00
N/A S N/A S S S N/A m m S m l l S S S m m
l l l l l l N/A l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
m m l l m m N/A F m m m m m N/A
l m l m E E N/A
3MA 4MA 3MAJ 4MAJ 2A 2AN ACVB S C B Tie Rod (Inch) G Rodless E Compact D Round Body C ISO
l l
P1D P1A SR
l l l
SRM SRD SRDM SRX P1L P P1M P1M Tooling Plate P1M Swing Clamp LP LPM C05 C05S P1G
m m l l l
m m m m m l
m m l l N/A
l l l
l l l
l R l
l m l
l m l
P1X RC P1Z
Delrin is a registered trademark of Dupont
A3
Catalog 0900P-4
Fluids, Temperature Range and Warranty

Operating Fluids and Temperature Range

Warning
!
Fluidpower cylinders are designed for use with pressurized air, hydraulic oil and fire resistant fluids, in some cases special seals are required.
Standard Seals (class 1)

Class seals are what is normally provided in a cylinder unless otherwise specified. They are intended for use with fluids such as: air, nitrogen, mineral base hydraulic oil or MIL-H-5606 within the temperature range of -0F (-3C) to +65F (+74C). Generally they are nitrile except for piston rod seals in hydraulic cylinders. However the individual seals may be nitrile (Buna-N) enhanced polyurethane, polymyte, P.T.F.E. or filled P.T.F.E.
Water Base Fluid Seals (class 2)

Generally class seals are intended for use with water base fluids within the temperature of -0F (-3C) to +65F (+74C) except for High Water Content Fluids (H.W.C.F.) in which case Class 6 seals should be used. Typical water base fluids are: Water, Water-Glycol, Water-in Emulsion, Houghto-Safe 7, 60, 5040, Mobil Pyrogard D, Shell Irus 905, Ucon Hydrolube J-4. These seals are nitrile. Lipseal will have polymyte or P.T.F.E. back-up washer when required. O-rings will have nitrile back-up washers when required.
The piston rod stud and the piston rod to piston threaded connections are secured with an anaerobic adhesive which is temperature sensitive. Cylinders specified with Class 5 seals are assembled with anaerobic adhesive having a maximum temperature rating of +50F (+74C). Cylinders specified with all other seal compounds are assembled with anaerobic adhesive having a maximum operating temperature rating +65F (+74C). These temperature limitations are necessary to prevent the possible loosening of the threaded connections. Cylinders originally manufactured with class seals (Nitrile) that will be exposed to ambient temperatures above +65F (+74C) must be modified for higher temperature service. Contact the factory immediately and arrange for the piston to rod and the stud to piston rod connections to be properly re-assembled to withstand the higher temperature service.
Lipseal Pistons
Under most conditions lipseals provide the best all around service for pneumatic applications. Lipseals with a back-up washer are often used for hydraulic applications when virtually zero static leakage is required. Lipseals will function properly in these applications when used in conjunction with moderate hydraulic pressures.
Ethylene Propylene (E.P.R.) Seals (class 3)

Class 3 seals are intended for use with some Phosphate Ester Fluids between the temperatures of -0F (-3C) to +30F (+54C). Typical fluids compatible with E.P.R. seals are Skydrol 500 and 700. E.P.R. are Ethylene Propylene. Lipseals will have a P.T.F.E. back-up washer when required. O-rings will have EPR back-up washers when required. Note: E.P.R. seals are not compatible with mineral base hydraulic oil or greases. Even limited exposure to these fluids will cause severe swelling. P.T.F.E. back-up washer may not be suitable when used in a radiation environment.
Water Service
For pressures up to 400 PSIG, 4ML series cylinders can be modified to make them more suitable for use with water as the operating medium. Chrome plated 7-4 PH stainless steel piston rod is recommended to inhibit corrosion.
Warranty
Parker Hannifin will warrant cylinders modified for water or high water content fluid service to be free of defects in materials or workmanship, but cannot accept responsibility to premature failure due to excessive wear due to lack of lubricity or where failure is caused by corrosion, electrolysis or mineral deposits within the cylinder.
Low Temperature Nitrile Seals (class 4)

Class 4 seals are intended for low temperature service with the same type of fluids as used with Class seals within the temperature range of -50F (-46C) to +50F (+66C). Lipseals will have leather, polymyte or P.T.F.E. back-up washers when required. O-rings will have nitrile back-up washers when required.
Non-Lubricated Air Cylinders

Cylinder series rated "Non-Lube" (such as 3MA, 4MA, PD, PL, AN, etc.) are recommended for non-lubricated air service. These cylinders are originally lubricated at the factory and typically do not require any additional lubrication for most applications. Please note that the use of air-line oil lubricators will wash away the original grease lubricant, so it must be continued until the cylinder is serviced with the appropriate grease lubricant.
Fluorocarbon Seals (class 5)

Class 5 seals are intended for elevated temperature service or for some Phosphate Ester Fluids such as Houghto-Safe 00, 055, 0; Fyrquel 50, 0, 300, 350; Mobile Pyrogard 4, 43, 53, and 55. Note: In addition, class 5 seals can be used with fluids listed below under standard service. However, they are not compatible with Phosphate Ester Fluids such as Skydrols. Class 5 seals can operate with a temperature range of -0F (-3C) to +50F (+C). Class 5 seals may be operated to +400F (+04C) with limited service life, but please consult the Actuator Division for possible cylinder material changes. For temperatures above +50F (+0C) the cylinder must be manufactured with non-studded piston rod and thread and a pinned piston to rod connection. Class 5 Lipseals will have P.T.F.E. back-up washers when required. O-rings will have fluorocarbon back-up when required. Class No.
(Standard) (Nitrile Polyurethane) Optional Water Base Fluid Seal
Many of the terms and drawings in this Engineering Section (such as mounting styles) utilize A, 3MA or 4MA Series cylinders as examples. Although the terms, designs and drawings for other product series may be different, many basic principles apply. Please refer to these individual product sections in this catalog for additional information.
Typical Fluids
Air, Nitrogen, Hydraulic Oil, Mil-H-5606 Oil Water, Water-Glycol, H.W.C.F. See Class 6 below. Water-in-Oil Emulsion Houghto-Safe, 7, 60, 5040 Mobil Pyrogard D, Shell Irus 905 Ucon Hydrolube J-4
Temperature Range
-0F (-3C) to +65F (+74C) -0F (-3C) to +65F (+74C)
3 Special (E.P.R.) (At extra cost)
Some Phosphate Ester Fluids Skydrol 500, 7000 Note: (E.P.R.) seals are not compatible with Hydraulic Oil 4 Special (Nitrile) (At extra cost) 5 Optional (At extra cost) (Fluorocarbon Seals) Low Temperature Air or Hydraulic Oil
-0F (-3C) to +30F (+54C) -50F (-46C) to +50F (+66C) See above paragraph on fluorocarbon seals for recommended temperature range.
High Temperature Houghto-Safe 00, 055, 0 Fyrquel 50, 0, 300, 550 Mobil Pyrogard 4,43,53,55 Note: Fluorocarbon seals are not suitable for use with Skydrol fluid, but can be used with hydraulic oil if desired
A4
Catalog 0900-4
Operating Principles and Construction Fundamental Cylinders

Standard Double-Acting Cylinders Power stroke is in both directions and is used in the majority of applications. Single-Acting Cylinders When thrust is needed in only one direction, a singleacting cylinder may be used. The inactive end is vented to atmosphere through a breather/filter for pneumatic applications, or vented to reservoir below the oil level in hydraulic application. Double-Rod Cylinders Used when equal displacement is needed on both sides of the piston, or when it is mechanically advantageous to couple a load to each end. The extra end can be used to mount cams for operating limit switches, etc. Spring Return, Single-Acting Cylinders Usually limited to very small, short stroke cylinders used for holding and clamping. The length needed to contain the return spring makes them undesirable when a long stroke is needed. Ram Type, Single-Acting Cylinders Containing only one fluid chamber, this type of cylinder is usually mounted vertically. The weight of the load retracts the cylinder. They are sometimes know as displacement cylinders, and are practical for long strokes. Telescoping Cylinders Available with up to 4 or 5 sleeves; collapsed length is shorter than standard cylinders. Available either single or doubleacting, they are relatively expensive compared to standard cylinders. Tandem Cylinders A tandem cylinder is made up of two cylinders mounted in line with pistons connected by a common piston rod and rod seals installed between the cylinders to permit double acting operation of each. Tandem cylinders allow increased output force when mounting width or height are restricted. Duplex Cylinders A duplex cylinder is made up of two cylinders mounted in line with pistons not connected and with rod seals installed between the cylinders to permit double acting operation of each. Cylinders may be mounted with piston rod to piston (as shown) or back to back and are generally used to provide three position operation.

Illustration B29
A5
Catalog 0900P-4
Push and Pull Forces
Calculation of Cylinder Forces Inch Based Product

Theoretical Push and Pull Forces for Pneumatic Cylinders
Push Force and Displacement
Cylinder Push Stroke Force in Pounds at Various Pressures Cu. Ft. Free Air at 80 lbs. Cylinder (PSI) Pressure, Required to Move Bore Size Piston Max. Load 1 Inch (inch) Area (in2) 25 50 65 80 100 250
-/8 -/ -/ 3- /4 4 5 6 7 8 0.994 .767 3.4 4.9 8.30 .57 9.64 8.7 38.49 50.7 5 44 79 3 08 34 49 707 96 57 50 88 57 45 45 68 98 44 94 53 65 5 04 39 540 87 77 838 50 368 80 4 5 393 664 006 57 6 3079 40 99 77 34 49 830 57 964 87 3849 507 49 443 785 8 075 343 490 7068 963 568 0.0037 0.00659 0.07 0.0830 0.03093 0.04685 0.0730 0.054 0.4347 0.8740
Displacement Per Inch of Stroke (ft3)

0.000575 0.0005 0.0087 0.00844 0.004803 0.007743 0.03657 0.063599 0.0743 0.09094
Deductions for Pull Force and Displacement

Piston Rod Diameter Force In Pounds At Various Pressures (PSI) To determine Cylinder Pull Force or Displacement, deduct the following Force or Displacement corresponding to Rod Size, from selected Push Stroke Force or Displacement Piston Piston corresponding to Bore Size in table above. Rod Dia. Rod Area (in2) 25 50 65 80 100 250 (inch)
3/8 / 5/8 -3/8 -3/4 0.0 0.96 0.307 0.785 .49 .4 3 5 8 0 37 60 6 0 5 39 75 7 3 0 5 97 57 9 6 5 65 9 93 0 3 79 49 4 8 49 77 96 373 603
Cu. Ft. Free Air at 80 lbs. Pressure, Required to Move Max. Load 1 Inch
0.0004 0.00073 0.004 0.0093 0.00554 0.00897
Displacement Per Inch of Stroke (ft3)

0.0000636 0.00034 0.000776 0.000454 0.00086 0.003946
General Formula
The cylinder output forces are derived from the formula: F= P x A Where F = Force in pounds. P = Pressure at the cylinder in pounds per square inch, gauge. A = Effective area of cylinder piston in square inches. Free Air refers to normal atmospheric conditions of the air at sea level (4.7 PSI). Use above cu. ft. free air required data to compute CFM required from a compressor at 80 PSI. Cu. ft. of free air required at other pressures can be calculated using formula below. (P + 4.7) V 4.7 Where V = Free air consumption per inch of stroke (cubic feet). V = Cubic feet displaced per inch of stroke. P = Gauge pressure required to move maximum load. V =
A6
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Information
Single rod type, fluid power cylinders are commonly available in 0 standard mounting styles ranging from head or cap end mounts to intermediate mounts. Many mounting styles are also available in double rod type cylinders. Refer to NFPA Std. B93.5-98 or Parker air or hydraulic cylinder catalogs for detailed description. Standard mounting styles for fluid power cylinders fall into three basic groups. The groups can be described as follows. Group 1 Straight line force transfer with fixed mounts which absorb force on cylinder centerline. Group 3 Straight line force transfer with fixed mounts which do not absorb force on cylinder centerline. Group 2 Pivot force transfer with pivot mounts which absorb force on cylinder centerline and permit cylinder to change alignment in one plane. Cylinder mounting directly affects the maximum pressure at which the fluid power cylinder can be used, and proper selection of mounting style will have a bearing on cylinder operation and service life. Whether the cylinder is used in thrust or tension, its stroke length, piston rod diameter and the method of connection to load also must be considered when selecting a mounting style. Many pneumatic cylinders are offered for use with air pressure up to 50 PSI. The industrial tie rod types, known as NFPA cylinders, with square heads and caps, plus mountings lend themselves to standardized mounts which are similar in appearance for air cylinders.
A
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Straight Line Force Transfer (Group 1)

Cylinders with fixed mounts (Group ) which absorb the force on centerline are considered the best for straight line force transfer. Tie rods extended, flange or centerline lug mounts are symmetrical and allow the thrust or tension forces of the piston rod to be distributed uniformly about the cylinder centerline. Mounting bolts are subjected to simple tension or simple shear without compound forces, and when properly installed damaging cylinder bearing sideloading is kept to a minimum. Tie Rods Extended are considered to be of the centerline mount type. The cylinder tie rods are designed to withstand maximum rated internal pressure and can be extended and used to mount the cylinder at cap or head end. This often overlooked mounting will securely support the cylinder when bolted to the panel or machine member to which the cylinder is mounted. The torque value for the mounting nuts should be the same as the tie rod nut torque recommended by the cylinder manufacturer. Cylinders are available with tie rod extended both ends. In such applications one end is used for mounting and the opposite end to support the cylinder or to attach other machine components. Tie rod mount cylinders may be used to provide thrust or tension forces at full rated pressures. Tie rods extended head end (Style TB), cap end (Style TC) or extended both ends (Style TD) are readily available and fully dimensioned in Parker cylinder product catalogs. Flange Mount cylinders are also considered to be centerline mount type and thus are among the best mounts for use on straight line force transfer applications. The machine designer has a choice of mounting styles at each end, such as head rectangular flange (Style J), head square flange (Style JB), cap rectangular flange (Style H), and cap square flange (Style HB). Selection of a flange mounting style depends, in part, upon whether the major force applied to the load will result in compression (push) or tension (pull) stresses of the cylinder piston rod. Cap end mounting styles are recommended for thrust loads (push), while head end mounting styles are recommended where the major load puts the piston rod in tension (pull).
Tie rods extended head end, Style TB
Tie rods extended cap end, Style TC
Tie rods extended both ends, Style TD J
JB
A7
Catalog 0900P-4
Catalog 0900P-4
Flange mounts are best used when end face is mounted against the machine support member. (Fig. ) This is especially true where head rectangular flange type (Style J) is used with major load in tension. In this mode, the flange is not subjected to flexure or bending stresses, nor are the mounting bolts stressed to unusually high levels. The use of head rectangular flange (Style J) mount with major load in compression (see Fig. ) is not recommended except on reduced pressure systems. The use of Style J mount in compression subjects the flange to bending and the mounting bolts to tension stresses, which could result in early fatigue failure. For applications where push forces require full rated system pressure, head square flange (Style JB) mounts are recommended. Cap flange mounts are also best used when end face is mounted against the machine support member. The use of cap rectangular flange mount, Style H, is not recommended on applications where the major load is in tension (pull) except at reduced pressure. For applications where pull forces involved require full rated system pressure, cap square flange, Style HB mounts are recommended.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Straight Line Force Transfer (Group 3)

Side Mount cylinders are considered to be fixed mounts which do not absorb force on their centerline. Cylinders of this group have mounting lugs connected to the ends, and one style has side tapped holes for flush mounting. The plane of their mounting surfaces is not through the centerline of the cylinder, and for this reason side mounted cylinders produce a turning moment as the cylinder applies force to the load. (Fig. 4) This turning moment tends to rotate the cylinder about its mounting bolts. If the cylinder is not well secured to the machine member on which it is mounted or the load is not well-guided, this turning moment results in side load applied to rod gland and piston bearings. To avoid this problem, side mount cylinders should be specified with a stroke length at least equal to the bore size. Shorter stroke, large bore cylinders tend to sway on their mountings when subjected to heavy loads, especially side end lug or side and angle mounts. (Fig. 5) Side mount cylinders are available in several mounting styles, such as side lug (Style C), Side tapped (Style F or TEF), side end lug (Style G) and side end angle (Style CB). Of these, the side lug mount its the most popular and reliable, since the mounting lugs are part of the head and cap (4MA and A) or a structural steel bracket (3MA). Side tapped mount is the choice when cylinders must be mounted side by side at minimum center-to-center distance. Another narrow side mount style is the side end lug mount which has lugs threaded to the tie rods. Thus the end lugs serve a dual function of holding the cylinder together and act as a means of mounting. This mounting style should be used only on medium- to light-duty applications, because the end lugs are subjected to compound stresses which could result in early failure.
HB H
Fig. 4
H S1 a S2 b
Fig. 5
G CB
A8
Catalog 0900P-4
The side end angle mount is also a narrow mount type, but is the weakest of the side mount styles. Its use should be limited to a maximum pressure of 50 PSI and minimum stroke length of two times the bore size. For pressure rating of longer strokes, consult the cylinder manufacturer. Consideration should also be given to design of the machine frame used to support cylinders non-centerline mount, since stronger members are often required to resist bending moments. (See Fig. 6) Side mount cylinders depend wholly on the friction of their mounting surfaces in contact with the machine member to absorb the force produced. Thus the torque applied to the mounting bolts is an important consideration. Since the mounting bolts are the same diameter as the tie rods for a given cylinder, it is recommended that the torque applied to the mounting bolts be the same as the tie rod torque recommended by the cylinder manufacturer for the given bore size. For heavy loads or high shock conditions, side mounted cylinders should be held in place to prevent shifting by keying or pinning. A shear key, consisting of a plate extending from side of cylinder, can be supplied on most cylinders. (Fig. 7) This method may be used where a keyway can be milled into a machine member. It serves to take up shear loads and also provides accurate alignment of the cylinder. Side lug mounts are designed so as to allow dowel pins to be used to pin the cylinder to the machine member. Pins, when used, are installed on both sides of the cylinder but not at both ends. (See Fig. 8) The use of a separate shear key is fairly common. It should be placed at the proper end of the cylinder to absorb the major load. (see Fig. 9) Side mount cylinders should not be pinned or keyed at both ends. Changes in temperature and pressure under normal operating conditions cause the cylinder to increase (or decrease) in length from its installed length and therefore must be free to expand and contract. If pinned or keyed at both ends, the advantages of cylinder elasticity in absorbing high shock loads will be lost. (Fig. 0) If high shock loads are the major consideration, the cylinder should be mounted and pins or shear key so located as to take full advantage of the cylinders inherent elasticity. For major shock load in tension, locate key at rear face of head or pin the head in place. For major shock load in thrust, pin cap in place or locate key at front face of cap.
FT
Integral Key
Pivot Force Transfer (Group 2)

Cylinders with pivot mounts which absorb force on centerline should be used on applications where the machine member to be moved travels in a curved path. There are two basic ways to mount a cylinder so that it will pivot during the work cycle: clevis or trunnion mounts, with variations of each. Pivot mount cylinders are available in cap fixed clevis (Style BB), cap detachable clevis (Style BC), cap spherical bearing (Style SB), head trunnion (Style D), cap trunnion (Style DB), and intermediate fixed trunnion (Style DD). Pivot mount cylinders can be used on tension (pull) or thrust (push) applications at full rated pressure, except long stroke thrust cylinders are limited by piston rod column strength. See Piston Rod Selection Chart on page B36. Clevis or single ear mounts are usually an integral part of the cylinder cap (though one style is detachable) and provide a single pivot point for mounting the cylinder. A pivot pin of proper length and of sufficient diameter to withstand the maximum shear load developed by the cylinder at rated operating pressure is included as a part of the clevis mount style. The fixed clevis mount, Style BB, is the most popular of the pivot force transfer types and is used on applications where the piston rod end travels in a curved path in one plane. It can be used vertically or horizontally or any angle in between. On long stroke push applications it may be necessary to use a larger diameter piston rod to prevent buckling or stop tube to minimize side loading due to jackknife action of cylinder in extended position. Fixed clevis mount cylinders will not function well if the curved path of piston rod travel is other than one plane. Such an application results in misalignment and causes the gland and piston bearing surfaces to be subjected to unnecessary side loading. For applications where the piston rod will travel in a path not more than 3 either side of the true plane motion, a cap spherical bearing mount is recommended. A spherical bearing rod eye should be used at rod end. Most spherical bearing mounts have limited pressure ratings. Consult cylinder manufacturers product catalog.
Clevis Mount Cylinder
Trunion Mount Cylinder
A9
Catalog 0900P-4

Spherical Bearing Mount
Cap detachable clevis mounts are usually used for air service. Cap detachable clevis mounts are longer, centerline of pivot pin to shoulder of piston rod, than fixed clevis mount in any given bore size. They are most often specified to avoid port relocation charges. Application parameters are the same as described for fixed clevis mounting. Trunnion mount cylinders are a second type of pivot mounts used on applications where the piston rod travels in a curved path in one plane. Three styles are available head trunnion (Style D), cap trunnion (Style DB) and intermediate fixed trunnion (Style DD). Trunnion pins are designed for shear loads only and should not be subjected to bending stresses. Pillow blocks, rigidly mounted with bearings at least as long as the trunnion pins, should be used to minimize bending stresses. The support bearings should be mounted as close to the head, cap or intermediate trunnion shoulder faces as possible. Cap end trunnion mounts are used on cylinder applications similar to fixed clevis mounts, and the same application data applies. Head trunnion mount cylinders can usually be specified with smaller diameter piston rods than cylinders with pivot point at cap end or at an intermediate position. This is evident in data shown in piston rod selection chart on page B36. On head end trunnion mount, long stroke, cylinder applications consideration should be given to the overhanding weight at cap end of cylinder. To keep trunnion bearing loading within limits, stroke lengths should be not more than 5 times the bore size. If cylinder stroke is greater than 5 times the bore size and piston speed exceeds 35 ft/minute, consult factory. Intermediate fixed trunnion mount is the best of the trunnion mount types. The trunnion can be located so as to balance the weight of the cylinder, or it can be located at any point between the head or cap to suit the application. It is of fixed design, and the location of the trunnion must be specified (XI dimension) at time of order. The location cannot be easily changed once manufactured. Thrust exerted by a pivot transfer cylinder working at an angle is proportional to the angle of the lever arm which it operates. In Fig. that vector force, T, which is at right angle to the lever axis, is effective for turning the lever. The value of T varies with the acute angle A between cylinder centerline and lever axes. To calculate effective thrust T, multiply cylinder thrust by the power factor shown in table below.
Fig. 11 D
DB
DD
Accessories
Rod clevises or rod knuckles are available for use with either fixed or pivot mount cylinders. Such accessories are usually specified with pivot mount cylinders and are used with pivot pin centerline in same axis as pivot pin centerline on cylinder. Pivot pins for accessories must be ordered separately. Pin size of rod clevis or rod knuckle should be at least equal in diameter to the pin diameter of the cap fixed clevis pin for the cylinder bore size specified. Larger accessories are more costly and usually result in a mismatch of pin diameters, especially when used with oversize piston rods.
Clevis Mount Cylinder
T Effective Thrust F Cylinder Thrust Angle (A)
Fig. 12
Removable Trunnion Pins

Removable trunnion pins are a convenience when machine structures or confined space prohibit the use of separate pillow blocks situated close to the cylinder sides.
Lever Arm
Power Factor Table

Angle A Degrees 5 0 5 0 5 30 35 40 45 Pwr. Factor (SIN A) 0.087 0.74 0.59 0.34 0.43 0.500 0.573 0.643 0.707 Angle A Degrees 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 Pwr. Factor (SIN A) 0.766 0.89 0.867 0.906 0.940 0.966 0.985 0.996 .000
A0
Catalog 0900P-4
Ports Ports
Parker hydraulic and pneumatic cylinders can be supplied with S.A.E. straight O-ring ports or N.P.T.F. pipe thread ports. For the type of port recommended and port size, see respective product catalogs. If specified on your order, extra ports can be provided on the sides of heads or caps that are not occupied by mountings or cushion valve on all cylinders. Standard port location is position as shown on line drawings in product catalog and Figure below. Cushion adjustment needle valves are at positions and 4 (or 3), depending on mounting style. Heads or caps which do not have an integral mounting can be rotated and assembled with ports at 90 or 80 from standard position. Mounting styles on which head or cap can be rotated at no extra charge are shown in Table A below. To order, specify by position number. In such assemblies the cushion adjustment needle valves rotate accordingly, since their relationship with port position does not change.
Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data Cylinder Port Options

Option T SAE Straight Thread O-Ring Port. Recommended for most hydraulic applications. Conventional NPTF Ports (Dry-Seal Pipe Threads). Recommended for pneumatic applications only. BSPP Port (British Parallel Thread). ISO 8 port commonly used in Europe. SAE Flange Pots Code 6. Recommended for hydraulic applications requiring larger port sizes. BSPT (British Tapered Thread). Metric Straight Thread Port similar to Option R with metric thread. Popular in some European applications. ISO-649- Metric Straight Thread Port. Recommended for all hydraulic applications designed per ISO standards.
Option U
Option R Option P
Option B Option G
Figure 1
1
Option Y
Ports can be supplied at positions other than those shown in Table A at an extra charge. To order, specify port position as shown in Figure . Head Cap
Head (Rod) End
International Ports
Other port configurations to meet international requirements are available at extra cost. Parker cylinders can be supplied, on request, with British standard taper port (BSPT). Such port has a taper of in 6 measured on the diameter (/6" per inch). The thread form is Whitworth System, and size and number of threads per inch are as follows:
Table A
Mounting Style T, TB, TC, TD, H, HB, J, JB, DD BB, DB D C, F Head End , , 3 or 4 , , 3 or 4 or 3 Cap End , , 3 or 4 or 3 , , 3 or 4
Table D British Standard Pipe Threads

Nominal Pipe Size
/8 /4 3/8 / 3/4 -/4 -/
Straight Thread Ports

The S.A.E. straight thread O-ring port is recommended for hydraulic applications. Parker will furnish this port configuration at positions shown in Table A above. This port can also be provided at positions other than those shown in Table A at an extra charge. Size number, tube O.D. and port thread size for S.A.E. ports are listed in Table C. S.A.E. ports are available at extra cost.
No. Threads Per Inch

8 9 9 4 4
Pipe O.D.
.383 .58 .656 .85 .04 .309 .650 .88 .347
Table C S.A.E. Straight Thread O Ring Ports

Size No.
3 4 5 6 8 0
Tube Thread O.D. (In.) Size

/8" 3/6" /4" 5/6" 3/8" /" 5/8" 5/6 - 4 3/8 - 4 7/6 - 0 / - 0 9/6 - 8 3/4 - 6 7/8 - 4
Size No.
6 0 4 3
Tube O.D. (In.)

3/4" " -/4" -/" "
Thread Size
-/6 - - 5/6 - -5/8 - -7/8 - -/ -
British standard parallel internal threads are designated as BSP and have the same thread form and number of threads per inch as the BSPT type and can be supplied, on request, at extra cost. Unless otherwise specified, the BSP or BSPT port size supplied will be the same nominal pipe size as the N.P.T.F. port for a given bore size cylinder. Metric ports options G or Y can also be supplied to order at extra cost.
Note: For the pressure ratings of individual connectors, contact your connector supplier.
A
Catalog 0900P-4
Stroke Data & Adjusters, Tie Rod Supports
Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data Stroke Adjusters

(only with metallic piston) Stroke Adjusters For the requirement where adjusting the stroke is specified. Parker has several designs to offer, one of which is illustrated below. This is suitable for infrequent adjustment and is economical.*
PA
SEAL FOR THREADS 1" & UP STOP PIN D-THREADS
Stroke Data
Parker cylinders are available in any practical stroke length. The following information should prove helpful to you in selecting the proper stroke for your cylinder application. W Stroke Tolerances Stroke length tolerances are required due to build-up of tolerances of piston, head, cap and cylinder body. Standard production stroke tolerances run +/3" to -/64" up to 0" stroke, +/3" to -.00" for " to 60" stroke and +/3" to -/3" for greater than 60" stroke. For closer tolerances on stroke length, it is necessary to specify the required tolerance plus the operating pressure FA and temperature at which the cylinder will operate. Stroke tolerances smaller than .05" are not generally practical due to elasticity of cylinders. If machine design requires such close tolerances, use of a stroke adjuster (below) may achieve the desired result.
PD or PE
INTEGRAL KEY
WRENCH JSQUARE SEAL FOR 1/2 & 3/4 THREADS
K (MIN.)
Here a retracting stroke adjuster must be called for in specifications, and the length of the adjustment must be specified. Where frequent adjustment or cushions at the cap end are required, other designs are available according to application needs. Please contact Wadsworth, Ohio facility for more W information.
*Infrequent is defined by positioning the retract stroke in a couple of attempts at original machine set up. The frequent stroke adjuster is SEAL FOR THREADS 1" & UP recommended for adjustments required after the original equipment Tie Rod Supports STOP PIN has been adjusted by the original machine manufacturer. Rigidity of Envelope The pre-stressed tie rod construction
PD or PE
of Parker cylinders has advantages in rigidity within the limits of the cylinder tube to resist buckling. For long stroke cylinders within practical limits, Parker provides exclusive TIE ROD SUPPORTS (see table below) which move the tie rod centerlines radially outward (US patent number 30844). Standard tie rod supports are kept within the envelope dimensions of the head and cap, and generally do not L interfere with mounting a long cylinder.
Number of Supports Required Bore Stroke (inches)
D-THREADS
PA
Bore Size -/,

J-/, 3-/4, 4 SQUARE SEAL5, 6 1/2 FOR & 3/4 THREADS WRENCH
D / - 0 3/4 - 6 - 4
PT
INTEGRAL KEY
5/6 7/6 5/8 5/6
K 5/6 -/4
L (Max.) 5 8 9 8
-/6 -/8
K (MIN.)
-/ -
36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168

PD or PE
Consult Factory W 3 3
PA
-/
3
4 3
-/ 4
3-/4
Note: 5" through 4" bore sizes no supports required.
PT
INTEGRAL KEY
A
Catalog 0900P-4
Stop Tubing & Mounting Classes Stop Tubing

(only with metallic piston) Long stroke cylinders, fixed or pivot mounted, tend to jackknife or buckle on push load applications, resulting in high bearing loading at the rod gland or piston. Use of a stop tube to lengthen the distance between the gland and piston when cylinder rod is fully extended is recommended to reduce these bearing loads. The drawing below shows stop tube construction for fluid power cylinders. Refer to chart on next page to determine stop tube length. When specifying cylinders with long stroke and stop tube, be sure to call out the net stroke and the length of the stop tube. Machine design can be continued without delay by laying in a cylinder equivalent in length to the NET STROKE PLUS STOP TUBE LENGTH, which is referred to as GROSS STROKE. Refer to the next page to determine stop tube length.
UNTHREADED PISTON CUSHION SLEEVE SPACER PISTON (CAP END)
Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data Mounting Classes

Standard mountings for fluid power cylinders fall into three basic groups. The groups can be summarized as follows: Group 1 Straight Line Force Transfer with fixed mounts which absorb force on cylinder centerline. Group 2 Pivot Force Transfer. Pivot mountings permit a cylinder to change its alignment in one plane. Group 3 Straight Line Force Transfer with fixed mounts which do not absorb force on cylinder centerline. Because a cylinders mounting directly affects the maximum pressure at which the cylinder can be used, the charts below should be helpful in the selection of the proper mounting combination for your application. Stroke length, piston rod connection to load, extra piston rod length over standard, etc. should be considered for thrust loads. Alloy steel mounting bolts are recommended for all mounting styles, and thrust keys are recommended for Group 3.
GROUP 1 FIXED MOUNTS which absorb force on cylinder centerline.
(HEAD END)
HEAVY-DUTY SERVICE For Thrust Loads ______ For Tension Loads _____
NET STROKE TOTAL STOP TUBE LENGTH GROSS STROKE LF + GROSS STROKE
Mtg. Styles TC Mtg. Styles TB Mtg. Styles H, HB Mtg. Styles J, JB Mtg. Styles J, JB Mtg. Styles H, HB GROUP 2 PIVOT MOUNTS which absorb force on cylinder centerline.
MEDIUM-DUTY SERVICE For Thrust Loads ______ For Tension Loads _____ LIGHT-DUTY SERVICE For Thrust Loads ______ For Tension Loads _____
Double piston design is supplied on air cylinders with cushion head end or both ends.
PISTON (HEAD END) STOP TUBE (CAP END)
HEAVY-DUTY SERVICE For Thrust Loads ______ For Tension Loads _____ MEDIUM-DUTY SERVICE For Thrust Loads ______ For Tension Loads _____
NET STROKE GROSS STROKE LF + GROSS STROKE STOP TUBE LENGTH
Mtg. Styles DD, D Mtg. Styles BB, BC, DD, D, DB Mtg. Styles BB, BC, BE Mtg. Styles BB, BC, BE GROUP 3 FIXED MOUNTS which do not absorb force on the centerline.
This design is supplied on cushioned cap or non-cushioned cylinders.
Cushion Selection
Cushions are required when cylinder piston rod speed exceeds 4" per second.
HEAVY-DUTY SERVICE For Thrust Loads ______ For Tension Loads _____ MEDIUM-DUTY SERVICE For Thrust Loads ______ For Tension Loads _____ LIGHT-DUTY SERVICE For Thrust Loads ______ For Tension Loads _____
Mtg. Styles C Mtg. Styles C Mtg. Styles F Mtg. Styles F Mtg. Styles CB Mtg. Styles CB
Mounting style CB recommended for maximum pressure of 50 PSI.

A3
Catalog 0900P-4
Stroke Selection Chart

Piston Rod Stroke Selection Chart

ROD DIAMETER
300
200 BASIC LENGTHINCHES
1
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 5 8
20
10 100 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10,000 THRUSTPOUNDS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 100,000 2 3
How to Use the Chart

The selection of a piston rod for thrust (push) conditions requires the following steps: . Determine the type of cylinder mounting style and rod end connection to be used. Then consult the chart below and find the stroke factor that corresponds to the conditions used. . Using this stroke factor, determine the basic length from the equation: Basic Actual Stroke = x Length Stroke Factor The graph is prepared for standard rod extensions beyond the face of the gland retainers. For rod extensions greater than standard, add the increase to the stroke in arriving at the basic length. 3. Find the load imposed for the thrust application by multiplying the full bore area of the cylinder by the system pressure. 4. Enter the graph along the values of basic length and thrust as found above and note the point of intersection: A) The correct piston rod size is read from the diagonally curved line labeled Rod Diameter next above the point of intersection. B) The required length of stop tube is read from the right of the graph by following the shaded band in which the point of intersection lies. C) If required length of stop tube is in the region labeled consult factory, submit the following information for an individual analysis: ) Cylinder mounting style. ) Rod end connection and method of guiding load. 3) Bore, required stroke, length of rod extension (Dim. LA or LAF) if greater than standard, and series of cylinder used. 4) Mounting position of cylinder. (Note: If at an angle or vertical, specify direction of piston rod.) 5) Operating pressure of cylinder if limited to less than standard pressure for cylinder selected.
Warning
Piston rods are not normally designed to absorb bending moments or loads which are perpendicular to the axis of piston rod motion. These additional loads can cause the piston rod end to fail. If these types of additional loads are expected to be imposed on the piston rods, their magnitude should be made known to our Engineering Department so they may be properly addressed. Additionally, cylinder users should always make sure that the piston rod is securely attached to the machine member.
Recommended Mounting Styles for Maximum Stroke and Thrust Loads Groups 1 or 3
Long stroke cylinders for thrust loads should be mounted using a heavy-duty mounting style at one end, firmly fixed and aligned to take the principal force. Additional mounting should be specified at the opposite end, which should be used for alignment and support. An intermediate support may also be desirable for long stroke cylinders mounted horizontally. Machine mounting pads can be adjustable for support mountings to achieve proper alignment.
Rod End Connection

Fixed and Rigidly Guided Pivoted and Rigidly Guided Supported but not Rigidly Guided Pivoted and Rigidly Guided Pivoted and Rigidly Guided Pivoted and Rigidly Guided
Case
I
Stroke Factor
0.50
II
0.70
III
.00
Group 2
Style D Trunnion on Head
IV
.00
Style DD Intermediate Trunnion
.50
Style DB Trunnion on Cap or Style BB Clevis on Cap
VI
.00
A4
INCHES OF STOP TUBE
CONSULT FACTORY 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 8
3 4
1 2
31 2
41 2
51 2
Catalog 0900P-4
Deceleration Force and Air Requirements

Cushion ratings for Air Cylinders Only are described in Table b-2 and Graph b-1. To determine whether a cylinder will adequately stop a load without damage to the cylinder, the weight of the load (including the weight of the piston and the piston rod from Table b-1) and the maximum speed of the piston rod must first be determined. Once these two factors are known, the Kinetic Energy Graph may be used. Enter the graph at its base for the value of weight determined, and project vertically to the required speed value. The point of intersection of these two lines will be the cushion rating number required for the application. To determine the total load to be moved, the weight of the piston and rod must be included. Total Weight = weight of the piston and non-stroke rod length (column ) + weight of the rod per inch of stroke x the inches of stroke (Column ) + the load to be moved. Example: a 3-/4" bore cylinder with a " rod diameter and 5" of stroke; external load to be moved is 85 lbs. Total load to be moved is then (3.3 lbs) + (0.3 lbs/inch X 5 inches) + (85 lbs) for a total of 93.9 lbs.

3MA and 4MA Piston Rod Assembly Weight Table
Table b-1
Bore Rod Dia. MM 5/8 5/8 Column 1 Basic Weight for Piston and NonStroke Rod (lbs) . n/a . Column 2 Basic Weight for each 1" of Stroke (lbs) 0.087 n/a 0.087
-/
Kinetic Energy Graph Air Cylinders

Graph b-1
1000
9 8 7 15 2 25 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 15 2 25 3
. 0.3 5/8 .5 0.087 -/ .3 0.3 3.3 0.3 3-/4 -3/8 4.9 0.4 3.8 0.3 4 -3/8 5.4 0.4 5.0 0.3 5 -3/8 6.5 0.4 8.3 0.4 -3/8 6 .8 0.68 -3/4 -3/8 .4 0.4 8 -3/4 5.0 0.68 Note: aluminum piston used for weight calculation
9 1
15
25
1 9 8 7 6 5 4
CONSULT FACTORY
500
4
3 2.5
45
25
42
200 150
18
39 36 33 30 10 26 6
15
100
9
1 9 8 7 6 5 4
14
VELOCITY (FPM)
8 7 6
50
4
22 2
3 2.5
3 25
20 15
15
10 10 15 20
25 3 4
50
9 100
150 200
WEIGHT (LB)
25
500
1000
1500 2000
25
5000
9 10,000
CONSULT FACTORY
A5
Catalog 0900P-4
Cushion Ratings and Air Requirements

Shock absorbers provide the greatest selection of decelerating products, and many can be incorporated into the cap end of cylinders for retract stroke deceleration. Additional product information can be found in Industrial Shock Absorbers Catalog AU08-0-/NA, and please contact the Wadsworth, OH facility for cylinder modification details.
Now refer to Table b-2 and find the cushion ratings, using bore size and rod diameter of the cylinder selected. If a simple circuit is used, with no meter out or speed control, use the Rating with No Back Pressure column values. If a meter out or speed control is to be used, use the Rating with Back Pressure column values. If the cushion rating found in Table b-2 below is greater than the number determined in Graph b-1, then the cylinder will stop the load adequately. If the cushion rating in Table b-2 is smaller than the number found in Graph b-1, then a larger bore cylinder should be used. In those applications where back pressures exist in the exhaust lines, it is possible to exceed the cushion ratings shown in Table b-2. In these cases, consult the factory and advise the amount of back pressure.
Air Cylinder Cushion Ratings Table Table b-2

3MA Cushion Ratings Rating Rod with No Dia. Back MM Pressure 5/8 8 5/8 5/8 4 8 0 3 4MA Cushion Ratings Rating Rod with No Dia. Back MM Pressure 5/8 8 n/a 5/8 9 5/8 4 4 8 -3/8 7 0 0 -3/8 3 -3/8 3 -3/8 6 -3/4 6 -3/8 9 9 -3/4 Rating with Back Pressure 4 8 0 4 7 8
Bore -/ -/ 3-/4 4 5
Shock Absorber
Bore
Rating with Back Pressure 4 n/a 8 5 0 9 4 3 7 6 8 8 3 3 35 34
NuCushion Bumper 2-1/2" - 4" Bores
-/ -/ 3-/4 4 5 6 8
Inch Based Cylinders Air Requirement Per Inch of Cylinder Stroke

The amount of air required to operate a cylinder is determined from the volume of the cylinder and its cycle in strokes per minute. This may be determined by use of the following formulae which apply to a single-acting cylinder. V = 3.46 L D 4 C = V 78
In general, if the cushion rating number from the Kinetic Energy Graph is greater than the cushion rating for a particular bore and rod diameter, other and external means of decelerating the load will be necessary for proper cylinder application. Parker options include shock absorbers, Par-Check hydraulic resistance units and NuCushion bumpers.
Where: V = Cylinder volume, cu. in. L = Cylinder stroke length, in. D = Internal diameter of cylinder in. C = Air required, cfm = Number of strokes per minute The air requirements for a double-acting cylinder is almost double that of a single-acting cylinder, except for the volume of the piston rod.
A6
Catalog 0900P-4
Air Requirements
The air flow requirements of a cylinder in terms of cfm should not be confused with compressor ratings which are given in terms of free air. If compressor capacity is involved in the consideration of cylinder air requirements it will be necessary to convert cfm values to free air values. This relationship varies for different gauge pressures. Thrust (pounds) = operating pressure x area of cylinder bore. Note: That on the out stroke the air pressure is working on the entire piston area but on the in stroke the air pressure works on the piston area less the rod area. Graph b-2 and b-3 offer a simple means to select pneumatic components for dynamic cylinder applications. It is only necessary to know the force required, the desired speed and the pressure which can be maintained at the inlet to the air preparation system. The graphs assume average conditions relative to air line sizes, system layout, friction, etc. At higher speeds, consider appropriate cushioning of cylinders. Graph b-2

The general procedure to follow when using these graphs is: . Select the appropriate graph depending upon the pressure which can be maintained to the system Graph b-2 for 00 PSIG and Graph b-3 for 80 PSIG. . Determine appropriate cylinder bore. Values underneath the diagonal cylinder bore lines indicate the maximum recommended dynamic thrust developed while the cylinder is in motion. The data in the table at the bottom of each graph indicates available static force applications in which clamping force is a prime consideration in determining cylinder bore. Please reference table number b-3 and b-4 for approximate thrust developed at a given operating pressure.
THIS GRAPH IS DETERMINED BY HAVING 100 PSIG AVAILABLE UNDER FLOWING CONDITIONS.
14 12 10 8
1 39 0" B 20 O LB RE S. 8" 25 B O 00 R LB E S.
3 41 -1/4" 0 LB BO S. RE 2 24 -1/2 0 "B LB O S. RE
2 15 " B 5 OR LB E S.
1 88 -1/2 LB " B S. OR E
6 14 " B 00 OR L E 5 BS 98 " B . 0 OR LB E S.
4 62 " B 0 OR LB E S.
0.5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 100 150
ROD SPEED fpm
Table b-3 Thrust Developed

Bore Size
Dynamic Thrust (lbs.) Static Thrust (lbs.)
1-1/2"
88 77
2"
55 34
2-1/2"
40 49
3-1/4"
40 830
4"
60 50
5"
980 960
6"
400 80
8"
500 500 Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
A7
CV FOR INDIVIDUAL VALVE & SPEED CONTROLS
Catalog 0900P-4
Air Requirements

Example 2: Assume similar conditions to Example 1 except that only 80- PSIG will be available under flowing conditions. Using Graph b-3, a 6-inch bore cylinder is indicated. Read upward on the 60 fpm line to the intersection point. Interpolation of the right-hand scale indicates a required valve and speed control Cv of over 2.8. Example 3: Assume similar conditions to Example 1 except that the load is being moved in a horizontal plane with a coefficient of sliding friction of 0.2. Only a 180-pound thrust is now required (900 lb. x 0.2). Consult Graph b-3. The 2-1/2 inch bore cylinder will develop sufficient thrust, and at 60 fpm requires a valve and speed control Cv of about 0.5.
3. Read upward on appropriate rod speed line to intersection with diagonal cylinder bore line. Read right from intersection point to determine the required Cv of the valve and the speed controls. Both the valve and speed controls must have this Cv. The following examples illustrate use of the graphs: Example 1: Assume it is necessary to raise a 900-pound load 24 inches in two seconds. With 100 PSIG maintained at the inlet to the air preparation system, use Graph b-2. The 5-inch bore cylinder is capable of developing the required thrust while in motion. Since 24 inches in two seconds is equal to 60 fpm, read upward on the 60 fpm line to the intersection of the 5-inch bore diagonal line. Reading to the right indicates that the required valve and speed controls must each have a Cv of over 1.9.
Graph b-3
THIS GRAPH IS DETERMINED BY HAVING 80 PSIG AVAILABLE UNDER FLOWING CONDITIONS.

14 12 10
1 25 0" B 00 O LB RE S. 8" 16 B O 00 R LB E S.
3 26 -1/4" 0 LB BO S. RE 216 1/2 0 "B LB O S. RE
2 10 " B 0 OR LB E S.
1 60 -1/2 LB " B S. OR E
6 90 " B 0 OR LB E S. 5" 63 B 0 OR LB E S. 4 40 " B 0 OR LB E S.
0.6 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 100 150
ROD SPEED fpm
Table b-4 Thrust Developed

Bore Size
Dynamic Thrust (lbs.) Static Thrust (lbs.)
1-1/2"
60 4
2"
00 5
2-1/2"
60 393
3-1/4"
60 663
4"
400 000
5"
630 570
6"
900 60
8"
600 400 Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
A8
CV FOR INDIVIDUAL VALVE & SPEED CONTROLS
Catalog 0900P-4
NFPA Rod End Data and Piston Rods

Rod End Data
Rod end dimension symbols as shown comply with the National Fluid Power Association dimensional code. The following chart indicates the symbols used in this catalog.
Description Thread diameter and pitch Length of thread Length of rod extension from face of gland retainer to end of retracted rod Symbol KK or CC A LA or LAF (Male Thread) W or WF (Female Thread)

International Rod End Threads
Piston rod threads to meet international requirements are available at extra cost. Parker cylinders can be supplied with British standard fine (W) or metric (M). To order, specify in model number. For dimensions, consult factory.
Special Rod Ends

If a rod end configuration other than the standard styles is required, such special rod ends can be provided. The designation Style 3 is assigned to such specials and is incorporated in the cylinder model number. To order, specify Style 3 and give desired dimensions for KK; A; LA, LAF, W, or WF. If otherwise special, send a dimensioned sketch.
Five rod ends for Parker cylinders are offered as shown on the dimension pages of this catalog. They are Parker styles 4, 6, 8, 9 and 55, and all five are optional without price penalty.
Special Assemblies from Standard Parts

Each dimensioned drawing in this catalog has position numbers shown on the end view to identify the four sides of the cylinder. These aid in communications and simplify the writing of specifications that cover changes in port positions, etc. Following are several suggested special assemblies that can be made up from standard parts. a) By calling out the position numbers for the desired locations for head and cap ports, many mounting styles can be assembled with ports located at 90 or 80 from standard. In such special assemblies, the cushion needle valves are also repositioned since their relation with the port position does not change. b) On mounting styles D, DB and DD, the cushion needle valves are provided only on the side position 3 on the head or cap which accommodates the mounting. The opposite head or cap can be rotated. c) Standard mountings in different combinations can be provided: for example Style J mounting on head end with Style C on the cap end. This would be made up from standard parts and would be designated Model (bore size) JC-4MAU4A (stroke).
Warning !
Piston rods are not normally designed to absorb bending moments or loads which are perpendicular to the axis of piston rod motion. These additional loads can cause the piston rod end to fail. If these types of additional loads are expected to be imposed on the piston rods, their magnitude should be made known to our Application Engineering Department so they may be properly addressed. Additionally, cylinder users should always make sure that the piston rod is securely attached to the machine member. On occasion cylinders are ordered with double rods. In some cases a stop is threaded onto one of the piston rods and used as an external stroke adjuster. This can cause a potential safety concern and can also lead to premature piston rod failure. The external stop will create a pinch point and the cylinder user should consider appropriate use of guards. If an external stop is not parallel to the final contact surface it will place a bending moment on the piston rod. An external stop will also negate the effect of a cushion and will subject the piston rod to an impact loading. These two () conditions can cause piston rod failure. The use of external stroke adjusters should be reviewed with our Application Engineering Department.
Single-Acting Cylinders
Double-acting cylinders are supplied as standard. They can also be used a single-acting cylinders where air or hydraulic force is applied to only one side of the piston, with the load or other external forces acting to return the piston after pressure is exhausted. Spring-Returned, Single-Acting Cylinders (only with metallic piston) Single-acting, spring-returned models can also be provided. Load conditions and friction factors must be considered in supplying the proper spring for the application. In addition, it is necessary that information be supplied as to which side of the piston the spring should act upon. Specify Spring to return piston rod or Spring to advance piston rod. On longer stroke spring-returned cylinders, it is recommended that tie rod extensions be specified on the cylinder end in which the spring is located so that the cap or head against which the spring is acting can be backed-off slowly until compression of the spring is relieved. In such cases it should also be specified that the tie rod nuts be welded to the tie rods at the opposite end of the cylinder to further insure safe disassembly. Consult factory when ordering spring-returned cylinders.
Piston Rod End Threads

Standard piston rod end thread lengths are shown as dimension A in Catalog dimension pages. Special rod end threads which are two times standard length can be supplied at a small extra cost. Available thread lengths are shown in the table below. To order, add suffix to piston rod model number code and specify as Style #4 or Style #8.
Optional Piston Rod End Studs

Rod End Thread Piston Rod Dia. Style #42 Thread Dia. & Pitch (KK) 5/8 -3/8 -3/4 7/6-0 3/4-6 -4 -/4 - Length (= 2 A) -/ -/4 3-/4 4 Rod End Thread Style #82 Thread Dia. & Pitch (CC) /-0 7/8-4 -/4 - -/ - Length (= 2 A) -/ -/4 3-/4 4
A9
Catalog 0900P-4
Modifications, Special Assemblies, Tandem

Tandem Cylinders
A tandem cylinder is made up of two cylinders mounted in line with pistons connected by a common piston rod and rod seals installed between the cylinders to permit double acting operation of each. Tandem cylinders allow increased output force when mounting width or height are restricted. Please contact the Wadsworth, OH facility for more information.
Modifications
The following modifications can be supplied on most cylinders.
Metallic Rod Wiper Gland Assembly

When specified metallic rod wipers can be supplied instead of the standard wiper. Recommended in applications where contaminants tend to adhere to the extended piston rod and would damage the standard wiper. Installation of metallic rod wiper does not affect cylinder dimensions. It is available at extra cost. Please contact the Wadsworth, OH facility for more information.
MM
Rod End Boots

Most Parker cylinders have a hardened bearing surface on the standard piston rod to resist external damage, and are equipped with a high efficiency wiper to remove external dust and dirt. Exposed piston rods that are subjected to contaminants with air hardening properties, such as paint, should be protected. In such applications, the use of a collapsing cover should be considered. This is commonly referred to as a boot. Calculate the longer rod end required to accommodate the collapsed length of the boot from the following data.
RD OD LF / -/4 .3 5/8 -/4 .3 -5/8 .3
1/2
Duplex Cylinders
A duplex cylinder is made up of two cylinders mounted in line with pistons not connected and with rod seals installed between the cylinders to permit double acting operation of each. Cylinders may be mounted with piston rod to piston (as shown) or back to back and are generally used to provide three position operation. Please contact the Wadsworth, OH facility for more information.
-3/8 3 .3
-3/4 3-3/8 .3

5/8
MM
MM
MM
BOOT DIA. (OD)
ROD DIA. (RD) BL
To determine extra length of piston rod required to accommodate boot, calculate: BL = Stroke x LF + -/8" BL + std LAF (male rod end) or WF (female rod end) dimension = length of piston rod to extend beyond the head face. Note: Please compare the Boot OD size to the standard E dimension per desired cylinder series and bore. This may be critical for foot mounted cylinders. Rod Boots are available for many cylinder series. Please contact the Wadsworth, OH facility for rod boot options.
A0
Catalog 0900P-4
Rotary Actuator Torque Requirements Design Torque

Design torque represents the maximum torque that an actuator must supply in an application. This maximum is the greater of the Demand Torque or the Cushion Torque. If the demand torque exceeds what the actuator can supply, the actuator will either move too slowly or stall. If the cushion torque is too high, the actuator may be damaged by excessive pressure. Demand torque and cushion torque are defined below in terms of load, friction, and acceleration torque. Equations for calculating demand torque and cushion torque for some general applications are provided on the following pages.
Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data TC - Cushion Torque

This is the torque that the actuator must apply to provide a required deceleration. This torque is generated by restricting the flow out of the actuator (meter-out) so as to create a back pressure which decelerates the load. This back pressure (deceleration) often must overcome both the inertia of the load and the driving pressure (system pressure) from the pump. See applications.
Equation 4-6)
Tc = Ta +
PrV Tf TL
T - Torque
The amount of turning effort exerted by a rotary actuator.
TD - Demand Torque
This is the torque required from the actuator to do the job and is the sum of the load torque, friction torque, and acceleration torque, multiplied by an appropriate design factor. Design factors vary with the applications and the designers knowledge. Equation 4-3)
The friction torque Tf reduces the torque the actuator must apply to stop the load. The load torque TL may add to, or subtract from the torque required from the actuator, depending upon the orientation of the load torque. For example, a weight being swung upward would result in a load torque that is subtracted. Warning: Rapid deceleration can cause high pressure intensification at the outlet of the actuator. Always insure that cushion pressure does not exceed the manufacturers pressure rating for the actuator.
TD = Ta + Tf + TL
KE Kinetic Energy (1/2 Jm2)
TL - Load torque
This is the torque required to equal the weight or force of the load. For example, in Fig. 4-8a, the load torque is 563 Nm (5000 lb-in.); in Fig. 4-8b the load torque is zero; in Fig. 4-8c the load torque is 563 Nm (5000 lb-in.). The load torque term is intended to encompass all torque components that arent included in the friction or acceleration terms.
This is the amount of energy that a rotating load has. The rotator must be able to stop the load. All products have kinetic energy rating tables. Choose the appropriate deceleration option (i.e., bumper, cushions, shock absorbers, etc.) that meets or exceeds the kinetic energy of the load.
Tf - Friction torque
This is the torque required to overcome friction between any moving parts, especially bearing surfaces. In Fig. 4-8a, the friction torque is zero for the hanging load; in Fig. 4-8b the friction torque is 775 Nm (6880 lb-in) for the sliding load; in Fig. 4-8c the friction torque is zero for the clamp. Equation 4-4)
Tf = mWr
Ta - Acceleration Torque
This is the torque required to overcome the inertia of the load in order to provide a required acceleration or deceleration. In Fig. 4-8a the load is suspended motionless so there is no acceleration. In Fig. 4-8b, the load is accelerated from 0 to some specified angular velocity. If the mass moment of inertia about the axis of rotation is I and the angular acceleration is a, the acceleration torque is equal to Ia. In Fig. 4-8c there is no acceleration. Some values for mass moment of inertia are given in Table 4. Some useful equations for determining a are listed in Table 5. Equation 5 below shows the general equation for acceleration torque. Equation 4-5)
Ta = Ia
A
Pages A21-A22 and A24-A25 excerpted from the Parker Hannifin Design Engineers Handbook.
Catalog 0900P-4
Rotary Actuator Torque Requirements Demand Torque Examples
A) Example of load torque The load is held motionless as shown.
TD = Ta + Tf + TL Ta = 0 Tf = 0 TL = (500 lb)(0 in) = 5,000 lb-in TD = 5,000 lb-in
Figure 4-8a
B) Due to friction and acceleration The 500 lb rotating index table is supported by bearings with a coefficient of friction of 0.5. The tables acceleration a is rad/sec. The tables mass moment of inertia I is ,330 lb-in-sec.
TD = Ta + Tf + TL Ta = Ia = (,330 lb-in-sec)(/sec) = 4,660 lb-in Tf = Wrb = 0.5 (500 lb)(55 in) = 6,880 lb-in TL = 0 TD = 4,660 lb-in + 6,880 lb-in = ,540 lb-in
Figure 4-8b
C) Load torque example
TD = Ta + Tf + TL Ta = 0 Tf = 0 TL = (500 lb)(0 in) = 5,000 lb-in TD = 5,000 lb-in
Figure 4-8c
A
Catalog 0900P-4
Rotary Actuator Torque Requirements Torque Selection

Parker rotary actuators provide output torque up to 0,000 lb-in. The chart to the right shows the nominal torque output range of various actuator models at 00 PSI.
Caution:
This chart is intended as a guide only. Refer to actual product data in this catalog before specifying an actuator. Factors such as pressure rating, rotation, and actual torque output may be affected by specific product details and options.
Output Torque (lb-in) 0000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3500 3000 500 000 750 500 50 000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 50 00 50 00 80 60 40 35 30 5 0 5 0 5 0
Nominal Torque at 100 PSI

Rotation < 95 Vane Models Rack & Pinion Models HP0 Vane Models Rotation > 100 Rack & Pinion Models HP0
HP4.5
HP4.5
PRN800D PV46D PRN800S PV44D PRN300D PV36D, PV4D
B674 PTR3
B674 PTR3
PRN800S PTR3, B673 PTR5 PV46 PTR3, B673 PTR5
PTR0, B67 PV4D, PRN50D PV33D, PRN300S PTR0 PTR5, XR0 PRN50S PVD, PRN50D PRN30D PRN50S PRN30S PVD PRNA0S PV0D PRNA0S XR05 PRNAS, PRNA3S XR07 PTR0, XR0 PTR5, B67 XR5 PTR0 PTR5
PV44 PV36, PRN300S PV4 PV33, PRN50S
PTR0, B67 PTR5 PTR0 PTR5, XR0 PTR5, B67 XR5
PV PRN50S PRN30S
PTR0 PTR0, XR0
PRNA0S XR07 PV, PRNA0S PV0 PRNAS, PRNA3S XR05
A3
Catalog 0900P-4
Rotary Actuator Moments of Inertia Table 4: Mass Moments of Inertia
A
Rectangular prism
1 m b2 + c 2 12 1 Iy = m c 2 + a 2 12 1 Iz = m a2 + b 2 12 Ix =
Circular cylinder
1 ma 2 2 1 I y = I z = m 3a 2 + L2 12 Ix =
Thin rectangular plate

1 m b2 + c 2 12 1 Iy = mc 2 12 1 Iz = mb 2 12 Ix =
Circular cone
3 ma 2 10 3 1 I y = Iz = m a 2 + h 2 5 4 Ix =
Sphere
I x = I y = Iz = 2 ma 2 5
Thin disk
1 mr 2 2 1 I y = I z = mr 2 4 Ix =
Parallel Axis Theorem:

I p = I + md 2
Ip = Mass moment of inertia about an axis parallel to a centroidal axis I = Mass moment of inertia about a centroidal axis m = Mass d = Distance between axes
When acceleration is constant:

= 0t + t 2 = 0t + t t = 0 + t = (0 + )/ = t2 = (t - 0) = (t - 0) t
When velocity is constant: = t

t t 0 A4 = = = = = time angular position angular velocity at time = t angular velocity at time = 0 angular acceleration
Catalog 0900P-4
Rotary Actuator Basic Equations
Basic Velocity, Acceleration, Kinetic Energy And Torque Equations
A
Equations below are based on triangular velocity profile. Where: = Angle of Rotation (Degrees) t = Time to rotate through (sec) = Angular velocity, radians/sec = Angular accelerations (radians/sec)
max = .035 max 57.3 max (t )
WL = Weight of load (lbf) Ta = Torque to accelerate load (lb-in) Us = Coefficient of static friction Jm* = Rotational mass moment of inertia (lb-in-sec) Tf = Torque to overcome friction (lb-in) TL = Torque to overcome effects of gravity
*Use I values from Table 4.
K.E. = / Jm Ta = Jm
Tf TL
= W Us =
Distance from pivot point to center of external bearings WL cos ()
Torque arm length to C.G. of load
Where = Angle between torque arm and horizontal plane
Coefficients of Friction
Material* Steel on Steel Steel on Steel (lubricated) Aluminum on Steel Copper on Steel Brass on Steel Teflon on Steel
*dry contact unless noted
s 0.80 0.6 0.45 0. 0.35 0.04
k 0.40 0.03 0.30 0. 0.9 0.04
A5
Catalog 0900P-4
Conversion Factors
Force Conversion Factors

Multiply value A by conversion factor in table to calculate value B.
B A
oz lbf N kg(f)
oz
6 3.5970 35.740
lbf
0.065 0.48 .050
N
0.780 4.448 9.8068
kg(f)
0.084 0.4536 0.00
Torque Conversion Factors

B A
oz-in lb-in lb-ft Nm
oz-in
6 9 4.6
lb-in
0.065 8.8507
lb-ft
5.083E-03 0.0833 0.7376
Nm
7.066E-03 0.30 .356
Rotational Inertia Conversion Factors

B A
oz-in2 oz-in-sec2 lb-in2 lb-in-sec2 lb-ft2 lb-ft-sec2 kg-m2 kg-m-sec2 kg-cm2
oz-in2
3.860E+0
oz-in-sec2
lb-in2
lb-in-sec2
lb-ft2
lb-ft-sec2
kg-m2
kg-m-sec2
kg-cm2
kg-cm-sec2
.5900E-03 6.500E-0 .690E-04 4.3403E-04 .3490E-05 .890E-05 .8650E-06 .890E-0 .8650E-04 .430E+0 6.500E-0 .6760E-0 5.080E-03 7.060E-03 7.00E-04 7.060E+0 7.00E-0 .5900E-03 6.9444E-03 .583E-04 .960E-04 .9840E-05 .960E+00 .9840E-03 .680E+00 8.3333E-0 .300E-0 .50E-0 .300E+03 .50E+00 3.080E-0 4.40E-0 4.970E-03 4.40E+0 4.970E-0 .3560E+00 .384E-0 .3560E+04 .384E+0 .090E-0 .0000E+04 .090E+0 9.830E+04 .0000E+0 .090E-03
.6000E+0 4.44E-0
6.767E+03 .6000E+0 3.860E+0
.3040E+03 5.9666E+00 .4400E+0 3.7300E-0
7.49E+04 .90E+0 4.6333E+03 .000E+0 3.75E+0
5.4675E+04 .460E+0 3.476E+03 8.8496E+00 .3730E+0 7.3746E-0
5.369E+05 .3887E+03 3.35E+04 8.6806E+0 .37E+0 7.338E+00 9.835E+00
5.4675E+00 .460E-0 3.476E-0 8.8496E-04 .3730E-03 7.3746E-05 .0000E-04 .09E-05
kg-cm-sec2 5.369E+03 .3887E+0 3.35E+0 8.6806E-0 .37E+00 7.338E-0 9.835E-0 .0000E-0 9.835E+0
Length/Distance Conversion Factors

B A
in ft mm cm m
in
0.03937 0.3937 39.37
ft
0.0833 0.0038 0.038 3.8
mm
5.4 304.8 0 000
cm
.54 30.48 0. 00
m
0.054 0.3048 0.00 0.0
A6
Tie Rod Design Pneumatic Cylinders

Inch Based Product
B
3MA/4MA
Section B
B1
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Section B Overview
Section B Tie Rod Design Pneumatic Cylinders NFPA Cylinders

3MA/4MA Series
Lightweight Aluminum Construction 9 Bore Sizes: 1-1/8" through 8 " Mounting styles: 3MA 18 standard 4MA 20 Standard 3MA Series: General Purpose Cylinder 4MA Series: All Purpose Cylinder with Many Options
2MNR Series
Non-Rotating 6 Bore Sizes: 1-1/8" through 4" Mounting styles: 14 Standard High Temperature Option Available
ACVB Series
Cylinder / Valve Combination Two Different Manifold Sizes/Three Different Valve Sizes Utilizes 3MA, 4MA and 2A Series Cylinders with B Series Valves Field Adaptable to Standard NFPA Cylinders
2A/2AN Series
Heavy Duty Steel Construction 13 Bore Sizes: 1" through 14" Mounting styles: 18 standard 2AN for Non-Lubed Service
Other Tie Rod Cylinders

S Series
Universal Midget Cylinder Bore Sizes: 3/4", 1", 1-1/8", 1-1/4" Single or Double Acting Versions Mounting styles: Universal (Bottom Tapped) or Nose Mounting
C Series
Medium Duty Industrial Cylinders Bore Sizes: 1-1/4", 1-3/4", 2-1/2", 3-5/8", 4-1/2" Three Mounting Styles 200 PSI Maximum Operating Pressure
Also in the Guided Cylinders Section:

HB Series (powered by 2A, 3MA and 4MA Cylinders)
B2
3MA/4MA Series
Non-Lube NFPA Air Cylinders
B
3MA/4MA Contents
3MA Series 1-1/2" to 5" Bore....................................... B5-B10 4MA Series 1-1/2" to 5" Bore..................................... B11-B15 How to Select a 3MA or 4MA Cylinder ..............................B16 3MA Dimensions 1-1/2" to 5" Bore ......................... B17-B18 4MA Dimensions 1-1/2" to 5" Bore ......................... B19-B20 3MA K Series Dimensions...............................................B21 Dimensions ................................................................ B22-B28 4MA Series 6" and 8" Bore ..................................... B29-B36 4MA K Series Dimensions...............................................B37 4MA Dimensions 6" and 8" Bore ............................ B38-B45 3MA Series 1-1/8" Bore ............................................. B47-B59 3MAJ/4MAJ Series .................................................... B60-B89 3MA/4MA ACVB ........................................................ B90-B99 4MA with LPSO ..................................................... B100-B104 3MA/4MA Options ................................................. B105-B107 3MA/4MA Accessories .......................................... B108-B109 Maintenance Section ............................................. B110-B123
B3
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
Air Cylinders 3MA/4MA Series
B4
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA Series Cylinder Features
Endcap Fasteners Zinc plated steel endcap fasteners for tough environments. Stainless steel is available as an option.
Rod Bearing and Piston Manufactured from tough, impact-resistant, bearinggrade materials, the composite rod bearing and piston provide excellent wear resistance. Other advantages include noise reduction without the need for bumpers and lower friction than other materials. Aluminum piston with wear band is available for bumper piston seals and other options.
Rod Seal Carboxylated nitrile rounded-lip rod seal combines low friction with leak-free service and long service life.
Magnetic Piston Ring Included as a standard feature for use with a variety of sensors. Cylinder Body Extruded aluminum profile cylinder body offers integrated sensor grooves to minimize sensor installation time, maximize sensor protection and eliminate the need for brackets. Grooves readily accept both Global and Mini-Global Sensors. Anodized and bright-dipped for corrosion resistance, maximum seal life and lower friction.
Adjustable Cushions Included as a standard feature. Piston Rod Standard case-hardened (50-64 Rc), hard chrome plated and polished carbon steel piston rod for reliable performance, long rod seal life and low friction. Grades of stainless steel are available as options. Rod Wiper Outboard urethane rod wiper protects the cylinder by removing external debris and adherents from the piston rod during the entire stroke. Heads and Caps High-pressure die cast aluminum heads and caps are designed with the most flexible mounting platform. TEF mount is standard. Anodized for corrosion resistance.
For a complete list of 3MA options, please see pages B6 and B16.
B5
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Piston Seals Carboxylated nitrile rounded-lip piston seals combine low friction with leak-free service and long service life. Optional bumper piston seals provide additional noise reduction and smooth end-of-stroke deceleration.
3MA/4MA
Piston Assembly High strength steel fastener (composite piston) or piston rod thread (aluminum piston) connects the piston to the rod and is secured in place with anaerobic adhesive.
B
Ports NPTF ports are standard.
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA Model Code for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore
3MA cylinders can be specified by model number by using the table below.
How to Order 3MA Series Cylinders for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore J 3MA
Series 3MA
2.00
C
Double Rod Cylinder Specify K only if double rod cylinder is required.
U
Ports Standard (NPTF)
1
Piston Rod Number Standard (rod code number 1) 3
6.000
Stroke Length Specify stroke length required in inches.
Bore Size 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.25 4.00 5.00 Cushion Head End C
Seals Blank Standard (nitrile seals) E Fluorocarbon rod wiper and rod seal only 2
Mounting Style Specify mounting style code (see table on following page). Piston Type
Standard (cushioned head end)
Blank Noncushioned head end
Cushion Cap End Standard (cushioned cap end) Blank Non-cushioned cap end C Piston Rod Thread Type A Standard (UNF Unified Thread) W BSF British Fine M Metric (see page B106) Rod Material Code Blank Y J S Standard 17-4 PH stainless steel 303 stainless steel 316 stainless steel
Blank Standard (lipseals and magnetic ring) 1 Lipseals, no magnetic ring 2 Lipseals, no magnetic ring (aluminum piston) 3 Lipseals and magnetic ring (aluminum piston) 4 Bumper seals, no magnetic ring 6 Bumper seals and magnetic ring B Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumpers both ends1 H Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumper head end1 C Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumper cap end1 D Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumpers both ends1 F Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumper head end1 R Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumper cap end1
Special Modification Specify S only for special modification other than rod end, and then describe modification in item notes.
Piston Rod Thread Style 4 8 9 55 3 Small male Intermediate male Short female For use with Split Coupler 4 Special (and specify all dimensions required)
Addition of 1/4" bumper results in a 1/4" stroke loss per bumper, per end. For example, a 6" stroke cylinder with 1/4" bumpers at both ends (option B) has an effective stroke of 5-1/2". Used for external chemical compatibility applications, not high temperature. Review Piston Rod Selection Chart on page B136 to determine proper piston rod diameter. (Note: 3MA has only one rod diameter per bore size, so proper piston rod diameter from chart result may lead to bore size change). For oversize rod within the same bore size, please see 4MA section. For additional information regarding this style, refer to page B105. If non-standard Rod Material Code is required with this option, please place an S for special in Special Modification field and specify rod material in the item notes. How to order 3MA Series cylinders with sensors: Sensors must be ordered separately and are not mounted to the cylinder prior to shipment. 1. Cylinder model number must have a Piston Type with a magnetic ring ((blank), 3, 6, D, F or R). 2. Please refer to pages B113-B120 for sensor part numbers and specifications. Global, Mini-Global, NAMUR and Weld Immune Sensors will fit the 3MA Series. 3. Style DD mounts and tie rod versions with Global Sensors will require tie rod bracket P8S-TMA0X. Please refer to page B117 for more information.
2 3
B6
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA Mounting Styles for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore

Mounting Code
TEF T TE F J H TB TC TD C CB G NB BB BC BE DD KTEF*

Available Bore Sizes 3MA
1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 4 1-1/2 - 4 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 4 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5
3MA Series Mounting Styles for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore

NFPA Mounting
MX5/MS4 MX0 MX5 MS4 MF1 MF2 MX3 MX2 MX1 MS2 MS1 MS7 N/A MP1 MP2 MP4 MT4 MDX5/MDS4
Description
Sleeve Nut with Side Tap (standard mount) No Mount (same construction as TEF) Sleeve Nut (same construction as TEF) Side Tap (same construction as TEF) Head Rectangular Flange Cap Rectangular Flange Tie Rods Extended Head End Tie Rods Extended Cap End Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Side Lug Side End Angle Side End Lug Base Bar Cap Fixed Clevis Cap Detachable Clevis Cap Detachable Eye Intermediate Trunnion Double Rod End, TEF Mount
B
3MA/4MA
Tie Rods Ext. Head End Style TB (NFPA MX3) Side End Angle Style CB (NFPA MS1) Cap Detachable Clevis Style BC (NFPA MP2) Style KTEF
*Double rod end cylinders can be ordered with head mountings, i.e. KJ (see page B19). Standard Mount Style TEF Head Rectangular Flange Style J Cap Rectangular Flange Style H
(NFPA MX5/MS4) Tie Rods Ext. Cap End Style TC
(NFPA MF1) Tie Rods Ext. Both Ends Style TD
(NFPA MF2) Side Lug Style C
(NFPA MX2) Side End Lug Style G
(NFPA MX1) Base Bar Mount Style NB
(NFPA MS2) Cap Fixed Clevis Style BB
(NFPA MS7) Cap Detachable Eye Style BE Intermediate Trunnion Style DD
(NFPA MP1) Double Rod End
(NFPA MP4)
(NFPA MT4)
(NFPA MDX0)
B7
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA General Specifications General Specifications

NFPA interchangeable Bore sizes 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2", 3-1/4", 4" and 5" Strokes available in any practical stroke length Rod diameters 5/8" and 1" Rod end styles 4 standard, specials available Single rod end or double rod ends Cushions standard and adjustable at both ends, optional non-cushioned Operating pressure 250 PSIG (17 Bar) maximum air service

Media dry, filtered air Temperature range -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) Mounting styles 18 standard styles One porting style NPTF RoHS compliant For material options, including seals and piston rods, please see Material Specifications on next page.
Standard Cushion Position

Mounting Code All 3MA mounts Position 2
Cylinder Weights 3MA Cylinders

Bore (inch) 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 Rod (inch) 5/8 5/8 5/8 1 1 1 No Mount Single Rod 3MA Base Wt. (lbs.) 1.57 2.13 2.87 5.73 7.51 10.99 Per Inch (lbs.) 0.20 0.21 0.23 0.42 0.49 0.61
Standard Port Sizes

Bore 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 NPTF 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2
Mounting Weight Adders

Bore (inch) 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 Weight (lbs) by Mounting Style J, H 0.51 0.76 1.13 2.76 4.05 6.46 BB 0.15 0.26 0.38 0.98 1.35 1.20 CB, G 0.36 065 1.05 1.38 2.20 4.29 DD 1.70 2.38 3.00 5.35 6.75 8.77 BE 0.23 0.32 0.42 1.26 1.62 N/A C 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.35 0.35 0.57 BC 0.20 0.29 0.41 1.06 1.49 2.41
For a guided version of the 3MA Series, please see the HB Series in Section F.
B8
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA Material Specifications and Options

Head and cap ................... Black anodized aluminum alloy Head and cap screws ...... Zinc plated steel alloy Cylinder body ................... Clear anodized aluminum alloy Piston rod ......................... Case-hardened, chrome plated carbon steel Rod seal ........................... Carboxylated nitrile (Nitroxile) Rod wiper ......................... Molythane Rod bearing...................... Composite Needle valve inserts ......... Composite Piston ............................... Composite (standard) Aluminum alloy (optional) Piston seals ...................... Carboxylated nitrile (Nitroxile) Piston bearing .................. Composite (for standard piston) MolyGard (for aluminum piston) Magnetic ring.................... Plastic-bound magnetic material

Piston fastener ................. Zinc plated steel alloy (for composite piston) Piston rod for aluminum piston O-rings.............................. Nitrile End seals ......................... Nitrile Cushion seals................... Urethane Cushion needle valves ..... Composite Tie-rods/studs .................. Blackened carbon steel (some mounts) Tie-rod nuts ...................... Steel alloy, SAE J995 Grade 8 (some mounts)
Material Specifications Standard Temperatures and Applications
B
3MA/4MA 2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR C S 2A/2AN 2MNR LPSO Option ACVB Option 3MAJ/4MAJ
Other Standard Options Material and Part Changes

Cylinder seal options Fluorocarbon rod wiper and rod seal for external chemical compatibility Other seal options available, please consult factory Carboxylated nitrile (Nitroxile) for standard temperatures Case-hardened, chrome plated carbon steel (standard) 17-4 PH stainless steel, chrome plated 303 stainless steel, chrome plated 316 stainless steel, chrome plated (for stainless steel without chrome plating, please consult factory) Urethane
Bumper piston seal options Piston rod material options
1/4" thick bumpers option
B9
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
B10
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA Series Cylinder Features
Endcap Fasteners Zinc plated steel endcap fasteners for tough environments. Stainless steel is available as an option. Rod Seal Carboxylated nitrile rounded-lip rod seal combines low friction with leak-free service and long service life. Rod Wiper Outboard urethane rod wiper protects the cylinder by removing external debris and adherents from the piston rod during the entire stroke.
Piston Seals Carboxylated nitrile rounded-lip piston seals combine low friction with leak-free service and long service life. Optional bumper piston seals provide additional noise reduction and smooth end-of-stroke deceleration.
Magnetic Piston Ring Included as a standard feature for use with a variety of sensors. Cylinder Body Extruded aluminum profile Adjustable cylinder body offers integrated Cushions sensor grooves to minimize Available sensor installation time, maximize sensor protection and eliminate the need for Heads and Caps brackets. Grooves readily High-strength aluminum heads accept both Global and Miniand caps are designed with the Global Sensors. Anodized and most flexible mounting platform. bright-dipped for corrosion TEF mount is standard. Using resistance, maximum seal life our proprietary extrusion, we and lower friction. can offer customization of the endcaps for unique designs, including extra ports, duplex, tandem and many special mountings. Anodized for corrosion resistance.
Piston Rod Standard case-hardened (50-64 Rc), hard chrome plated and polished carbon steel piston rod for reliable performance, long rod seal life and low friction. Grades of stainless steel are available as options.
Rod Gland/Bearing Threaded bronze rod gland is externally removable, without cylinder disassembly, for easy maintenance. Machined flats permit the use of common tools for removal and installation. Options include HI LOAD design for side load conditions and metallic wiper design for extremely tough rod contaminant/adherent applications.
B11
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Piston Manufactured from tough, impact-resistant, bearinggrade materials, the composite piston provides excellent wear resistance. Other advantages include noise reduction without the need for bumpers and lower friction than other materials. Aluminum piston with wear band (shown) is available for bumper piston seals, hydraulic service and other options.
Piston Assembly High strength steel fastener or piston rod thread connects the piston to the rod and is secured in place with anaerobic adhesive.
B
Ports NPTF ports are standard. Other port styles available.
3MA/4MA
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA Model Code for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore
How to Order 4MA Series Cylinders for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore J 4MA
Series 4MA Air service 4ML Hydraulic service 2 U R B T
2.00
U
Ports NPTF BSPP BSPT SAE Seals Blank Standard (nitrile seals) V Fluorocarbon seals 4 E Fluorocarbon rod wiper and rod seal only 5 4 Low temperature seals 4 M Metallic rod wiper, nitrile seals 6 Special Modification
1
Piston Rod Number Specify rod code number for required diameter.8, 2
6.000
Stroke Length Specify stroke length required in inches.11 Cushion Cap End Blank Non-cushioned cap end C Cushioned cap end (not available for 4ML)
Bore Size 1.50 1 2.00 2.50 3.25 4.00 5.00
Mounting Style Specify mounting style code (see table on following page). Cushion Head End
Blank Non-cushioned head end C Cushioned head end (n/a for 1.50" bore with 1" rod or 4ML) Piston Type 2 Blank Standard (lipseals and magnetic ring) 1 Lipseals, no magnetic ring 2 Lipseals, no magnetic ring (aluminum piston) 3 Lipseals and magnetic ring (aluminum piston) (standard for 4ML) 4 Bumper seals, no magnetic ring 6 Bumper seals and magnetic ring B Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumpers both ends 3 H Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumper head end 3 C Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumper cap end 3 D Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumpers both ends 3 F Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumper head end 3 R Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumper cap end 3
1 2
Piston Rod Thread Type A Standard (UNF Unified Thread) W BSF British Fine M Metric (see page B106) Rod Material and Gland Code Blank Standard rod and gland H Standard rod and HI LOAD gland Y 17-4 PH stainless steel rod and standard gland Z 17-4 PH stainless steel rod and HI LOAD gland J 303 stainless steel rod and standard gland 10 K 303 stainless steel rod and HI LOAD gland 10 S 316 stainless steel rod and standard gland 10 T 316 stainless steel rod and HI LOAD gland 10
Specify S only for special modification other than rod end, and then describe modification in item notes. (Includes 4MA with Linear Position Sensor Option)7 Piston Rod Thread Style 4 8 9 55 3 Small male Intermediate male Short female For use with Split Coupler 9 Special (and specify all dimensions required)
8
4 5 6
Not available with Linear Position Sensor Option (LPSO). Piston Types (blank), 1, 4 and 6 not available for 4ML. Piston Types (blank) and 1 not available for oversize rod numbers 2 and 3. Seals option V only available with Piston Types 2 and 4. Seals option 4 only available with Piston Types 2 and 3. Addition of 1/4" bumper results in a 1/4" stroke loss per bumper, per end. For example, a 6" stroke cylinder with 1/4" bumpers at both ends (option B) has an effective stroke of 5-1/2". Reed and solid-state sensors only available with standard seals or options E and M. See footnote 2. Used for external chemical compatibility applications, not high temperature. If fluorocarbon seals are required with this option, please place an S for special in the Special Modification field and specify the fluorocarbon seals and metallic rod wiper in the item notes. For Linear Position Sensor Option (LPSO), please include the following information for the Special Modification item notes: a. Sensor part number (see pages B100-B104) b. Sensor position c. Port position (if other than position 1) d. Length of stop tubing, gross stroke and net stroke (if required) Also, Piston Type option (blank), 3, 6, D, F or R is required.
Review Piston Rod Selection Chart on page B136 to determine proper piston rod diameter. 9 For additional information regarding this style, refer to page B105. If non-standard Rod Material and Gland Code is required with this option, please place an S for special in Special Modification field and specify Rod Material and Gland Code in the item notes. 10 Not available for 4ML. 11 If a stop tube is required, specify gross stroke (net stroke + stop tube) in the model number, then place an S for special in the Special Modification field and specify the stop tube length in the item notes. Not available with Piston Types (blank) and 1. How to order 4MA/4ML Series cylinders with sensors: Sensors must be ordered separately and are not mounted to the cylinder prior to shipment. 1. Cylinder model number must have a Piston Type with a magnetic ring ((blank), 3, 6, D, F or R). 2. Please refer to pages B113-B120 for sensor part numbers and specifications. Global, Mini-Global, NAMUR and Weld Immune Sensors will fit the 4MA/4ML Series. 3. Style DD mounts and tie rod versions with Global Sensors will require tie rod bracket P8S-TMA0X. Please refer to page B117 for more information.
B12
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA Mounting Styles for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore

NFPA Mounting Style
MX5/MS4 MX0 MX5 MS4 MF1 MF2 MX3 MX2 MX1 MS2 MS1 MS7 N/A MP1 MP2 MP4 MT1 MT2 MT4 MDX5/MDS4

Available Bore Sizes 4MA/4ML-LPSO 4MA/4ML-LPSO w/o Stop Tube w/Stop Tube
2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2 - 5** 2 - 5** 2-5 2-5 2-4 2-4 2 - 5** 2 - 5** 2 - 5** 2-5 2 - 5** 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2 - 5** 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-4 2-4 2 - 5** 2 - 5** 2 - 5** 2-5 2 - 5** 2-5
4MA Series Mounting Styles for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore

Mounting Code
TEF T TE F J H TB TC TD C CB G NB BB BC BE D DB DD KTEF***
Description
Sleeve Nut with Side Tap (standard mount) No Mount (same construction as TEF) Sleeve Nut (same construction as TEF) Side Tap (same construction as TEF) Head Rectangular Flange Cap Rectangular Flange Tie Rods Extended Head End Tie Rods Extended Cap End Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Side Lug Side End Angle Side End Lug Base Bar Cap Fixed Clevis Cap Detachable Clevis Cap Detachable Eye Head Trunnion Cap Trunnion Intermediate Trunnion Double Rod End, TEF Mount
4MA/4ML
1-1/2 - 5* 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5* 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 4* 1-1/2 - 4* 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5* 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5 1-1/2 - 5
B
* Mounts TEF, F, G, NB and D not available for 1-1/2" bore with 1" rod. ** May interfere with mounting. Please provide clearance for Linear Position Sensor overhang (see page B99).
Standard Mount Style TEF
Head Rectangular Flange Style J
Cap Rectangular Flange Style H
Tie Rods Ext. Head End Style TB
(NFPA MX5/MS4) Tie Rods Ext. Cap End Style TC
(NFPA MX3) Side End Angle Style CB
(NFPA MX1) Base Bar Mount Style NB
(NFPA MS2) Cap Fixed Clevis Style BB
(NFPA MS1) Cap Detachable Clevis Style BC
(NFPA MS7) Cap Detachable Eye Style BE Head Trunnion Style D
(NFPA MP1) Cap Trunnion Style DB
(NFPA MP2) Intermediate Trunnion Style DD
(NFPA MT1)
(NFPA MT2) ***Double rod end cylinders can be ordered with head mountings, i.e. KJ (see page B21).
(NFPA MT4)
Style KTEF
(NFPA MDX0)
B13
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA and 4ML General Specifications General Specifications

NFPA interchangeable Bore sizes 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2", 3-1/4", 4" and 5" Strokes available in any practical stroke length Rod diameters 5/8", 1" and 1-3/8" Rod end styles 4 standard, specials available Single rod end or double rod ends Cushions optional and adjustable at either end or both ends (n/a for 4ML Hydraulic Version) Operating pressure 4MA = 250 PSIG (17 Bar) maximum air service 4ML = 400 PSIG (27 Bar) maximum hydraulic service

Media 4MA = dry, filtered air 4ML = filtered hydraulic oil Temperature range -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) with standard seals -10F to +250F (-23C to +121C) with fluorocarbon seals option -50F to +150F (-46C to +66C) with low temperature seals option Mounting styles 20 standard styles RoHS compliant For material options, including seals, piston rods and glands, please see Material Specifications on next page.
Cylinder Weights 4MA/4ML Cylinders

Bore (inch) 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 Rod (inch) 0.625 0.625 1.00 0.625 1.00 1.00 1.375 1.00 1.375 1.00 1.375 No Mount Single Rod 4MA/4ML Base Wt. (lbs.) 1.73 2.40 2.99 3.25 4.06 6.45 7.93 8.80 10.29 13.20 14.72 Per Inch (lbs.) 0.20 0.21 0.35 0.23 0.37 0.42 0.62 0.49 0.69 0.61 0.81 No Mount Double Rod Base Wt. (lbs.) 2.16 3.05 4.34 3.96 5.74 7.65 11.46 10.32 14.37 15.84 18.89 Per Inch (lbs.) 0.28 0.30 0.58 0.31 0.60 0.64 1.05 0.71 1.12 0.84 1.24

Mounting Code All except D, DB, DD D, DB, DD Position 2 3
Standard Port Sizes

Bore 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 NPTF 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 BSPT Rc3/8 Rc3/8 Rc3/8 Rc1/2 Rc1/2 Rc1/2 BSPP G3/8 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 G1/2 G1/2 SAE 6 6 6 10 10 10

Bore (inch) 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 Weight (lbs) by Mounting Style J, H 0.51 0.76 1.13 2.76 4.05 6.46 D, DB 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 BB 0.15 0.26 0.38 0.98 1.35 1.20 CB, G 0.36 065 1.05 1.38 2.20 4.29 DD 1.70 2.38 3.00 5.35 6.75 8.77 BE 0.23 0.32 0.42 1.26 1.62 1.26 C 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.35 0.35 0.57 BC 0.20 0.29 0.41 1.06 1.49 2.41
For a guided version of the 4MA or 4ML Series, please see the HB Series in Section F.
B14
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA and 4ML Material Specifications

Head and cap ................Black anodized aluminum alloy Head and cap screws ...Zinc plated steel alloy Cylinder body ................Clear anodized aluminum alloy Piston rod ......................Case-hardened, chrome plated carbon steel Rod seal ........................Carboxylated nitrile (Nitroxile) Rod wiper ......................Molythane Rod bearing (gland) ......Bronze alloy Piston ............................Composite (standard) Aluminum alloy (optional) Piston seals ...................Carboxylated nitrile (Nitroxile) Piston bearing ...............Composite (for standard piston) MolyGard (for aluminum piston)

Magnetic ring.................Plastic-bound magnetic material Piston fastener ..............Zinc plated steel alloy (for composite piston) Piston rod for aluminum piston O-rings...........................Nitrile End seals ......................Nitrile Cushion seals................Urethane Cushion needle valves ..Stainless steel Tie-rods/studs ...............Blackened carbon steel (some mounts) Tie-rod nuts ...................Steel alloy, SAE J995 Grade 8 (some mounts)
B
4MA Options Material and Part Changes

High temperatures (-10F to +250F) All seals and wiper are fluorocarbon Aluminum piston only (without magnetic ring) Low temperatures (-50F to +150F) Rod seal, piston seals, o-rings and end seals are low temperature-rated nitrile Aluminum piston only
4ML Hydraulic Version Material and Part Changes

Hydraulic service (general) Aluminum piston only (all temperatures) Cushions and bumper piston seals not available Polyurethane TS-2000 rod seal and nitrile piston seals (for hydraulic use) Hydraulic service (high temp) Fluorocarbon TS-2000 rod seal; wiper and all seals are fluorocarbon (for hydraulic use)
Hydraulic service (std temp)

Cylinder seal options Fluorocarbon for high temperatures or chemical compatibility Other seal options available, please consult factory Carboxylated nitrile (Nitroxile) for standard temperatures Fluorocarbon for high temperatures or chemical compatibility Urethane HI LOAD gland option Metallic rod scraper option B15 Piston rod material options Case-hardened, chrome plated carbon steel (standard) 17-4 PH stainless steel, chrome plated 303 stainless steel, chrome plated (n/a for 4ML) 316 stainless steel, chrome plated (n/a for 4ML) (for stainless steel without chrome plating, please consult factory) Composite bearing pressed into bronze alloy gland Dual high strength bronze wipers with PTFE (5/8" rod only) or fluorocarbon energizer
Bumper piston seal options (4MA only, n/a for 4ML) 1/4" thick bumpers option
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Selection How to Select a 3MA or 4MA Cylinder
Parker cylinders are available based on air or hydraulic operating pressure. The many styles, sizes and optional features available assure that your application requirements are precisely met. To select a cylinder, follow these simple steps: Step 1 - Determine the correct cylinder bore size necessary to achieve required force using the available operating pressure.
Step 2 - Determine the series cylinder to use, based on operating pressure. Step 3 - Turn to the appropriate cylinder selection section. Select the mounting style that fits your installation needs. Determine the bore and rod sizes available for the model you select. Then complete model selection. - Choose a rod end style and the desired rod end accessories. - Size the cylinder to meet your application requirements. Step 4 - Consider the following conditions which may require further modifications to the cylinder you have selected. Application Condition Quick Starts or Stops
Check the Following Confirm that determined thrust is sufficient to accelerate or decelerate cylinder and load within prescribed distance. Optional cushions should be used to reduce shock during deceleration, check that peak pressures will be within tolerable limits. Check whether stop tube (4MA with aluminum piston only) is required to prevent excessive bearing loads and wear. Determine if standard size piston rod is strong enough to accommodate intended load. See Application Engineering section for recommendations. Determine if standard size piston rod is strong enough to accommodate intended load. For temperatures between 165F and 250F use 4MA or 4ML cylinder with high temperature seals.
Long Push Stroke High-column Loading Long Push Stroke Long Horizontal Stroke High Operating Temperatures
General Options and Modifications 3MA Non-Cushioned (adjustable cushions standard) Non-Magnetic piston (magnetic ring standard) Piston Bumper Seals Piston Bumpers (1/4" thick) Port Relocation (cushions will follow) Double Rod End Rod End Modifications Rod Materials (grades of stainless steel) Fluorocarbon Rod Wiper and Rod Seal only Mixed Mountings Round Tube and Tie Rod Construction Stainless Steel Fasteners/Tie Rods Par-Check unit for smooth hydraulic control Air Cylinder/Valve Combination (ACVB) Adjustable Point Sensors (order separately) Rod lock version (see 3MAJ) 4MA Adjustable Cushions Non-Magnetic Piston (magnetic ring standard) Piston Bumper Seals Piston Bumpers (1/4" thick) Port and Adjustable Cushion Relocation Port Thread Styles Multiple Ports 4MA (continued) Special Heads, Caps, Pistons and Mounts Double Rod End Oversize Rod Diameters Rod End Modifications Rod Materials (grades of stainless steel) Fluorocarbon Rod Wiper and Rod Seal only Fluorocarbon Seals (all cylinder seals) Metallic Rod Wiper HI LOAD Gland Assembly Stop Tube Mixed Mountings Round Tube and Tie Rod Construction Stainless Steel Fasteners/Tie Rods Shock Absorber on Cap End NuCushion Bumpers LECTROFLUOR Coating Par-Check unit for smooth hydraulic control Air Cylinder/Valve Combination (ACVB) Adjustable Point Sensors (order separately) Continuous Linear Position Sensing (LPSO) High Temperature Service (to +250F) Low Temperature Service (to -50F) Hydraulic Service (4ML) (400 PSIG) Rod lock version (see 4MAJ)
B16
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA Single Rod Dimensioned Drawings
3MA Single Rod Dimensioned Drawings for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore Size (Styles TEF, T, TE and F)
EE
B
P + Stroke DD DH (Hex Size)
WF MM
G C1
J C2
TH XT SN + Stroke LF + Stroke ZJ + Stroke

LAF WF
TN NT Thread, ND Deep 4 Tapped Mtg. Holes
C NA KK or CC MM BS
For dimensions of all standard rod end styles, please see page B18. BS = pilot diameter VS = length of pilot diameter
D Wrench Flats
3MA Cylinder Dimensions Styles TEF, T, TE and F

Thread Rod Bore Rod Dia. Style 8 Style 4 & 9 Size No. MM CC KK
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 5/8 5/8 5/8 1 1 1 1/2-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 7/8-14 7/8-14 7/16-20 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16
AA
BG
+.000 -.004 BG1 BS
C1
C2
D
1/2
DD
1/4-28
DH
1/4
E
2.000
EE (NPTF)
3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2
G
1.438 1.375 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.344
0.750 2.020 0.562 0.374 1.124 0.385 1.000 0.500 0.750 2.600 0.562 0.362 1.124 0.385 1.148 0.711 0.750 3.100 0.562 0.362 1.124 0.385 1.117 0.711 1.125 3.900 0.700 0.500 1.499 0.510 1.350 0.881 1.125 4.700 0.700 0.500 1.499 0.510 1.350 0.881 1.125 5.800 0.781 0.531 1.499 0.510 1.350 0.975
1/2 5/16-24 5/16 2.500 1/2 5/16-24 5/16 3.000 7/8 7/8 7/8 3/8-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 3/8 3/8 1/2 3.750 4.500 5.500
Rod Bore Rod Dia. Size No. MM

1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 5/8 5/8 5/8 1 1 1
LAF
NA
ND
NT
+.005 -.005 TH
Add Stroke TN VF VS
-
WF
XT
LF
SN
ZJ
0.938 1.750 0.563 0.375 1/4-20 0.938 1.750 0.563 0.625 3/8-16 1.125 2.500 0.938 0.750 1.125 2.500 0.938 0.750 1/2-13 1.219 2.500 0.938 0.938 5/8-11
1.430 0.993 0.625 0.615
1.000 1.938 1.875 3.625 2.313 2.250 4.625
0.938 1.750 0.563 0.438 5/16-18 1.840 1.243 0.875 0.615 0.250 1.000 1.938 1.875 3.625 2.313 2.250 4.625 2.190 1.493 1.250 0.615 0.250 1.000 1.938 1.938 3.750 2.375 2.375 4.750 3.320 2.243 2.063 0.865 0.250 1.375 2.438 2.438 4.250 2.625 2.625 5.625 4.100 2.743 2.688 0.865 0.250 1.375 2.438 2.438 4.500 2.875 2.875 5.875 1/2-13 2.760 1.868 1.500 0.865 0.250 1.375 2.438 2.438 4.250 2.625 2.625 5.625
B17
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
VF VS
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
BG BG1
3MA/4MA
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod End Dimensions 1-1/2" to 5" Bore
3MA Rod End Dimensions 1-1/2" to 5" Bore Size

Thread Style 4 (NFPA Style SM) Small Male Thread Style 8 (NFPA Style IM) Intermediate Male
LAF A WF VF VS C NA MM BS NA C MM BS LAF A WF VF VS
KK
D WRENCH FLATS
CC
D WRENCH FLATS
Thread Style 9 (NFPA Style SF) Short Female

VF VS C KK NA D WRENCH FLATS A WF MM BS
Thread Style 55 For use with Split Coupler (see page B105 for more information)
WG VF VS
AM AF
MM
BS
AE AD
GROOVE HAS 1/16" INTERNAL RADII AT CORNERS
Applies to all rod ends: BS = pilot diameter VS = length of pilot diameter Rod End Dimensions
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 5/8 5/8 5/8 1 1 1 1/2-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 7/8-14 7/8-14 7/16-20 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16
AD
AE
AF
+.000 -.004 AM BS
D
1/2 1/2 1/2 7/8 7/8 7/8
LAF
NA
VF
VS
-
WF
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.375 1.375 1.375
WG
1.750 1.750 1.750 2.375 2.375 2.375
0.750 0.625 0.250 0.375 0.570 1.124 0.385 0.750 0.625 0.250 0.375 0.570 1.124 0.385 0.750 0.625 0.250 0.375 0.570 1.124 0.385 1.125 0.938 0.375 0.688 0.950 1.499 0.510 1.125 0.938 0.375 0.688 0.950 1.499 0.510 1.125 0.938 0.375 0.688 0.950 1.499 0.510
1.750 0.563 0.615
1.750 0.563 0.615 0.250 1.750 0.563 0.615 0.250 2.500 0.938 0.865 0.250 2.500 0.938 0.865 0.250 2.500 0.938 0.865 0.250
Thread Style 3 - Special Thread

Special threads, rod extensions, rod eyes, blanks, etc. are also available. To order, specify Style 3 and give desired dimensions for KK or CC, A and W or WF. If otherwise special, please supply dimensioned sketch.
B18
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA Single Rod Dimensioned Drawings
4MA Single Rod Dimensioned Drawings for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore Size (Styles TEF, T, TE and F)
Y EE
LAF A C NA KK OR CC MM B WF VF
P+Stroke DH (Hex Size) DD BG BG1
B
WF MM
G C1 C2
For dimensions of all standard rod end styles, please see page B18.
D WRENCH FLATS
D1 WRENCH FLATS
R TH.003 XT TN NT Thread, ND Deep 4 Tapped Mtg. Holes SN+Stroke LF+Stroke ZJ+Stroke
1-1/2" bore with 1" rod is TE mount, F mount not available
4MA Cylinder Dimensions Styles TEF, T, TE and F

1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 5/8 1/2-20 1 7/8-14 5/8 1/2-20 1 7/8-14 5/8 1/2-20 1 7/8-14 1 7/8-14 1-3/8 1-1/4-12 1 7/8-14 1-3/8 1-1/4-12 1 7/8-14 1-3/8 1-1/4-12 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-14
1-1/2" bore with 1" rod cannot have a cushion at head end
EE (NPTF)
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
A
0.750 1.125 0.750 1.125 0.750 1.125 1.125 1.625 1.125 1.625 1.125 1.625
+.000 -.002 AA B BG BG1

2.020 2.020 2.600 2.600 3.100 3.100 3.900 3.900 4.700 4.700 5.800 5.800 1.124 1.499 1.124 1.499 1.124 1.499 1.499 1.999 1.499 1.999 1.499 1.999 0.562 0.562 0.562 0.562 0.562 0.562 0.700 0.700 0.700 0.700 0.781 0.781 0.374 0.374 0.362 0.362 0.362 0.362 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.531 0.531
C
0.385 0.510 0.385 0.510 0.385 0.510 0.510 0.635 0.510 0.635 0.510 0.635
C1
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188
C2
D1
DD
DH
1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2
E
2.000 2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
G
1.438 1.438 1.375 1.375 1.344 1.344 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594
0.500 1/2 1 1/4-28 0.500 7/8 1-3/8 1/4-28 0.562 1/2 1 5/16-24 0.562 7/8 1-3/8 5/16-24 0.594 1/2 1 5/16-24 0.594 7/8 1-3/8 5/16-24 0.719 7/8 1-3/8 3/8-24 0.719 1-1/8 1-7/8 3/8-24 0.719 7/8 1-3/8 3/8-24 0.719 1-1/8 1-7/8 3/8-24 0.813 7/8 1-3/8 1/2-20 0.813 1-1/8 1-7/8 1/2-20

1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1 3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
J
0.938 0.938 0.937 0.937 0.938 0.938 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.219 1.219
LAF
1.750 2.500 1.750 2.500 1.750 2.500 2.500 3.250 2.500 3.250 2.500 3.250
NA
0.563 0.938 0.563 0.938 0.563 0.938 0.938 1.313 0.938 1.313 0.938 1.313
ND
NT
+.003 -.003 TH
0.993 0.993 1.243 1.243 1.493 1.493 1.868 1.868 2.243 2.243 2.743 2.743
Add Stroke TN
0.625 0.875 0.875 1.250 1.250 1.500 1.500 2.063 2.063 2.688 2.688
VF
0.615 0.865 0.615 0.865 0.615 0.865 0.865 0.990 0.865 0.990 0.865 0.990
WF
1.000 1.375 1.000 1.375 1.000 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625
XT
1.938 1.938 2.313 1.938 2.313 2.438 2.688 2.438 2.688 2.438 2.688
Y
1.875 2.250 1.875 2.250 1.938 2.313 2.438 2.688 2.438 2.688 2.438 2.688
LF
3.625 3.625 3.625 3.625 3.750 3.750 4.250 4.250 4.250 4.250 4.500 4.500
P
2.313 2.313 2.313 2.313 2.375 2.375 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.875 2.875
SN
2.250 2.250 2.250 2.375 2.375 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.875 2.875
ZJ
4.625 5.000 4.625 5.000 4.750 5.125 5.625 5.875 5.625 5.875 5.875 6.125
0.375 1/4-20 1.430 1.430 0.438 5/16-18 1.840 0.375 5/16-18 1.840 0.625 3/8-16 2.190 0.625 3/8-16 2.190 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.938 0.938 1/2-13 1/2-13 1/2-13 1/2-13 5/8-11 5/8-11 2.760 2.760 3.320 3.320 4.100 4.100
B19
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod End Dimensions 1-1/2" to 5" Bore
4MA Rod End Dimensions 1-1/2" to 5" Bore Size

Thread Style 4 (NFPA Style SM) Small Male Thread Style 8 (NFPA Style IM) Intermediate Male
LAF A WF VF C NA KK D WRENCH FLATS D1 WRENCH FLATS MM B CC NA D WRENCH FLATS C MM B A LAF WF VF
D1 WRENCH FLATS

WF VF
VF MM AM AF AE AD WG
KK NA
MM A
GROOVE HAS 1/16" INTERNAL RADII AT CORNERS D1 WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS
D1 WRENCH FLATS
Rod End Dimensions

1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1 1
Thread Style 8 Style 4 & 9 CC KK

1/2-20 7/8-14 1/2-20 7/8-14 1/2-20 7/8-14 7/8-14 7/8-14 7/8-14 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-14
AD
AE
AF
+.000 -.002 AM B
D
1/2 7/8 1/2 7/8 1/2 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8
D1
1 1 1
LAF
NA
VF
WF
WG
0.750 0.625 0.250 0.375 0.570 1.124 0.385 1.125 0.938 0.375 0.688 0.950 1.499 0.510 0.750 0.625 0.250 0.375 0.570 1.124 0.385 1.125 0.938 0.375 0.688 0.950 1.499 0.510 0.750 0.625 0.250 0.375 0.570 1.124 0.385 1.125 0.938 0.375 0.688 0.950 1.499 0.510 1.125 0.938 0.375 0.688 0.950 1.499 0.510 1.125 0.938 0.375 0.688 0.950 1.499 0.510 1.125 0.938 0.375 0.688 0.950 1.499 0.510
1.750 0.563 0.615 1.000 1.750 1.750 0.563 0.615 1.000 1.750 1.750 0.563 0.615 1.000 1.750
1-3/8 2.500 0.938 0.865 1.375 2.375 1-3/8 2.500 0.938 0.865 1.375 2.375 1-3/8 2.500 0.938 0.865 1.375 2.375 1-3/8 2.500 0.938 0.865 1.375 2.375 1-7/8 3.250 1.313 0.990 1.625 2.750 1-3/8 2.500 0.938 0.865 1.375 2.375 1-7/8 3.250 1.313 0.990 1.625 2.750 1-3/8 2.500 0.938 0.865 1.375 2.375 1-7/8 3.250 1.313 0.990 1.625 2.750
1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12
1.625 1.063 0.375 0.875 1.320 1.999 0.635 1-1/8 1.625 1.063 0.375 0.875 1.320 1.999 0.635 1-1/8 1.625 1.063 0.375 0.875 1.320 1.999 0.635 1-1/8

B20
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA K-type for 1-1/2" to 5" Bore

To determine dimensions for a double rod end cylinder, first refer to the desired single rod end mounting style cylinder shown in this catalog section. After selecting the necessary dimensions from that drawing, return to this page and supplement the single rod end dimensions with those shown in the drawings and dimension table below. Note that double rod end cylinders have a head dimension (G)

at both ends, and that LG replaces LF, PK replaces P, etc. The double rod end dimensions differ from, or are in addition to, those for single rod cylinders. When a double rod end cylinder has two different rod ends, please clearly state which rod end is to be available at which head end.

ZM+(2 X STROKE) Y WF LG+STROKE PK +STROKE EE MM
Mounting Corresponding Styles for Mounting Styles Single Rod for Double Rod Models Models
C CB D DD F G J NB T TB TD TE TEF KC KCB KD KDD KF KG KJ KNB KT KTB KTD KTEF KTE
B
3MA/4MA
ROD END #1 G G
ROD END #2

ZM+(2 X STROKE) Y WF LG+STROKE PK+STROKE EE MM
ROD END #1 G G
ROD END #2
Cylinder Dimensions K-type

Bore Rod Size No.
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
EE (NPTF)
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
G
1.438 1.438 1.438 1.438 1.438 1.438 1.688 1.688 1.688 1.688 1.660 1.660
WF
1.000 1.375 1.000 1.375 1.000 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625
Y
1.875 2.250 1.875 2.250 1.938 2.313 2.438 2.688 2.438 2.688 2.438 2.688
LG
4.125 4.125 4.125 4.125 4.250 4.250 4.750 4.750 4.750 4.750 4.938 4.938 LF
PK
2.375 2.375 2.375 2.375 2.375 2.375 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.813 2.813 P
SAK
6.125 6.500 6.125 6.125 6.250 6.250 7.250 7.250 7.250 7.250 7.688 7.688 SA CB
Add Stroke XAK SSK

6.125 6.500 6.125 6.500 6.250 6.625 7.375 7.625 7.375 7.625 7.688 7.938 XA 3.375 3.375 3.375 3.375 3.500 3.500 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.563 3.563 SS C
SNK
2.250 2.250 2.250 2.375 2.375 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.813 2.813 SN TEF, F
SEK
6.375 6.750 6.750 7.125 7.125 7.750 7.750 8.000 8.000 SE G
XEK
6.250 6.438 6.813 6.688 7.063 7.625 7.875 7.750 8.000 XE
Add 2X Stroke ZM
6.125 5.760 6.125 6.875 6.250 7.000 7.500 8.000 7.500 8.000 7.688 8.188 All
Replaces Dimension On Single Rod Mounting Styles
All Styles
B21
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions 1-1/2" to 5" Bore

Head Rectangular Flange Style J (NFPA MF1)
UF 1
LA FB 4 HOLES W
LB+STROKE
B
R1 4
2 E
3 TF
F ZJ+STROKE
Note: Style J has a W dimension instead of WF and a LA dimension instead of LAF because of the flange installation. Please use dimensions W and LA regarding rod ends only for Style J. For reference, WF = W + F and LA = W + A. Cap Rectangular Flange Style H (NFPA MF2)
UF 1
R1 F ZJ+STROKE ZF+STROKE
3 TF
FB 4 HOLES
Cylinder Dimensions Styles J and H

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
Add Stroke A
0.750 1.125 0.750 1.125 0.750 1.125 1.125 1.625 1.125 1.625 1.125 1.625
E
2.000 2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
F
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
FB
0.313 0.313 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563
LA
1.375 2.125 1.375 2.125 1.375 2.125 1.875 2.625 1.875 2.625 1.875 2.625
R1
1.430 1.430 1.840 1.840 2.190 2.190 2.760 2.760 3.320 3.320 4.100 4.100
TF
2.750 2.750 3.375 3.375 3.875 3.875 4.688 4.688 5.438 5.438 6.625 6.625
UF
3.375 3.375 4.125 4.125 4.625 4.625 5.500 5.500 6.250 6.250 7.625 7.625
W
0.625 1.000 0.625 1.000 0.625 1.000 0.750 1.000 0.750 1.000 0.750 1.000
LB
4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.125 4.125 4.875 4.875 4.875 4.875 5.125 5.125
ZF
5.000 5.375 5.000 5.375 5.125 5.500 6.250 6.500 6.250 6.500 6.500 6.750
ZJ
4.625 5.000 4.625 5.000 4.750 5.125 5.625 5.875 5.625 5.875 5.875 6.125
B22
Catalog 0900P-4

Tie Rods Ext. Head End Style TB (NFPA MX3)
DD 2
B
ZJ+STROKE
ZJ+STROKE 1 K DD
Tie Rods Ext. Both Ends Style TD (NFPA MX1)

1 DD
DD
3 R
BB
Cylinder Dimensions Styles TB, TC and TD

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
BB
1.000 1.000 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.813 1.813
DD
1/4-28 1/4-28 5/16-24 5/16-24 5/16-24 5/16-24 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20
E
2.000 2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
K
0.250 0.250 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.438 0.438
R
1.430 1.430 1.840 1.840 2.190 2.190 2.190 2.760 3.320 3.320 4.100 4.100
1 2 1 3 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 3
5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
4.625 5.000 4.625 5.000 4.750 5.125 5.125 5.875 5.625 5.875 5.875 6.125 Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
B23
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
Rod No.
Rod Dia. MM
Add Stroke ZJ
ZJ+STROKE
BB
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
3 R
BB
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Tie Rods Ext. Cap End Style TC (NFPA MX2)
3MA/4MA
BB
Catalog 0900P-4

Side Lug Style C for 3MA (NFPA MS2)
E 1
AB 4 HOLES 2 ST1
LH
SW
3 SW TS US
ST2 XS
SW1 SS+STROKE ZJ+STROKE
SW1
Side Lug Style C for 4MA/4ML (NFPA MS2)

E LH .003 E AB 4 HOLES ST ZJ+STROKE
SW SW SW TS US SW
SW XS SS+STROKE
SW
Cylinder Dimensions Style C

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
AB
0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563 0.563 0.563 0.813 0.813
E
2.000 2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
LH
0.993 0.993 1.243 1.243 1.493 1.493 1.868 1.868 2.243 2.243 2.743 2.743
ST
0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.000 1.000
ST1
1.000 1.000 1.250 1.250 1.343 1.343 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
ST2
0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.188 0.188 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250
SW
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.688 0.688
SW1
0.495 0.495 0.495 0.495 0.495 0.495 0.688 0.688 0.688 0.688 0.938 0.938
TS
2.750 2.750 3.250 3.250 3.750 3.750 4.750 4.750 5.500 5.500 6.875 6.875
US
3.500 3.500 4.000 4.000 4.500 4.500 5.750 5.750 6.500 6.500 8.250 8.250
XS
1.375 1.750 1.375 1.750 1.375 1.750 1.875 2.125 1.875 2.125 2.063 2.313
Add Stroke SS ZJ
2.875 2.875 2.875 2.875 3.000 3.000 3.250 3.250 3.250 3.250 3.125 3.125 4.625 5.000 4.625 5.000 4.750 5.125 5.625 5.875 5.625 5.875 5.875 6.125
B24
Catalog 0900P-4

Side End Angle* Style CB (NFPA MS1)
4

ZA+STROKE XA+STROKE 1 2 AB 6 HOLES AH AT AO AT F AE SA+STROKE AL1 AO
3 S
B
3MA/4MA
AL
Cylinder Dimensions Style CB

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
AB
0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563 0.563 0.563 0.688 0.688
AE
1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.875 1.875 2.000 2.000
AH
1.188 1.188 1.438 1.438 1.625 1.625 1.938 1.938 2.250 2.250 2.750 2.750
AL
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.250 1.250 1.875 1.875 1.375 1.375
AL1
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 -
AO
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.625 0.625
AT
0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.188 0.188
E
2.000 2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
F
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
S
1.250 1.250 1.750 1.750 2.250 2.250 2.750 2.750 3.500 3.500 4.250 4.250
SA
6.000 6.000 6.000 6.000 6.125 6.125 7.375 7.375 7.375 7.375 7.875 7.875
Add Stroke XA ZA
5.625 6.000 5.625 6.000 5.750 6.125 6.875 7.125 6.875 7.125 7.250 7.500 6.000 6.375 6.000 6.375 6.125 6.500 7.375 7.625 7.375 7.625 7.875 8.125
Side End Lug Style G (NFPA MS7)

1 GH 4 2 ET ET 3 R ET
ZE+STROKE XE+STROKE (NOTE: MTG HOLE TO ROD)
EO EM EL
EO
Cylinder Dimensions Style G

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4
Rod No.
1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500
EB
0.281 0.344 0.344 0.344 0.344 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406
EL
0.750 0.938 0.938 1.063 1.063 0.875 0.875 1.000 1.000
EM
1.125 1.313 1.313 1.438 1.438 1.500 1.500 1.625 1.625
EO
0.250 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375
ET
0.563 0.688 0.688 0.813 0.813 1.000 1.000 1.188 1.188
GH
0.993 1.243 1.243 1.493 1.493 1.868 1.868 2.243 2.243
R
1.430 1.840 1.840 2.190 2.190 2.760 2.760 3.320 3.320
SE
5.500 5.875 5.875 6.250 6.250 6.625 6.625 6.875 6.875
Add Stroke XE ZE
5.375 5.563 5.938 5.813 6.188 6.500 6.750 6.625 6.875 5.625 5.875 6.250 6.125 6.500 6.875 7.125 7.000 7.250
B25
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
SE+STROKE (NOTE: MTG HOLE TO MTG HOLE)
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
NOTE: DIM S IS FOR THE HOLES IN THE MOUNT (NOT THE SCREW TO SCREW DIM) *Maximum recommended pressure for this mount is 150 PSIG
Catalog 0900P-4

Base Bar Mount Style NB for 3MA
AB 4 HOLES ST3 E LH1 SW SW TS US XS SU SS+STROKE ZJ+STROKE SU SW
Base Bar Mount Style NB for 4MA

AB HOLES 4 PLACES ST3 E LH1 . 005 SW SW TS US XS SU SS+STROKE ZJ+STROKE SU SW
Note: Fasteners for NB base bar mount have been applied with removable threadlocking compound and torqued to bottom of endcaps.
Cylinder Dimensions Style NB

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4
Rod No.
1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
AB
0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563 0.563 0.563
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500
LH1
1.243 1.493 1.493 1.868 1.868 2.368 2.368 2.743 2.743
ST3
0.250 0.250 0.250 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500
SU
1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250
SW
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500
TS
2.750 3.250 3.250 3.750 3.750 4.750 4.750 5.500 5.500
US
3.500 4.000 4.000 4.500 4.500 5.750 5.750 6.500 6.500
XS
1.375 1.375 1.750 1.375 1.750 1.875 2.125 1.875 2.125
Add Stroke SS ZJ
2.875 2.875 2.875 3.000 3.000 3.250 3.250 3.250 3.250 4.625 4.625 5.000 4.750 5.125 5.625 5.875 5.625 5.875
B26
Catalog 0900P-4

Cap Fixed Clevis Style BB (NFPA MP1)

Note: For maximum swivel angle of BB mount with rear mounting plate, see Cylinder Accessories on page B108.
CD LR MR F L XC+STROKE ZC+STROKE 2 4 1
B
3MA/4MA 2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR C S 2A/2AN 2MNR
ZD2
6.375 6.750 6.375 6.750 6.563 6.313 8.375 8.625 8.375 8.625 8.625 8.875
CW
CW CB
Cap Detachable Clevis Style BC (NFPA MP2)
CD
1 2 4
MR1 F L1 XD+STROKE ZD1+STROKE CW 3 CW CB
Cap Detachable Eye* Style BE (NFPA MP4)
CD1
1 2
MR2 F L1 XD+STROKE ZD2+STROKE
4 3
CB
*Not available for 5" bore 3MA, please specify 4MA Cylinder Dimensions Styles BB, BC and BE
Bore Rod Size No.
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
+.000 +.002 -.002 +.004 CB CD CD1 CW

0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 0.501 0.501 0.501 0.501 0.501 0.501 0.751 0.751 0.751 0.751 0.751 0.751 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
E
2.000 2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
F
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
L
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
LR
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
L1
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250
MR
0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.938 0.938 0.938 0.938 0.938 0.938
MR1 MR2
0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.688 0.688 0.875 0.875 0.875 0.875 0.875 0.875
XC
5.375 5.750 5.375 5.750 5.500 5.875 6.875 7.125 6.875 7.125 7.125 7.375
Add Stroke XD ZC ZD1

5.750 6.125 5.750 6.125 5.875 6.250 7.500 7.750 7.500 7.750 7.750 8.000 6.000 6.375 6.000 6.375 6.125 6.500 7.813 8.063 7.813 8.063 8.063 8.313 6.250 6.625 6.250 6.625 6.375 6.750 8.250 8.500 8.250 8.500 8.500 8.750
B27
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4

Head Trunnion* Style D (only for 4MA/4ML) (NFPA MT1)
4 UT 1
TD
TL
TL
XG ZJ+STROKE
*Not available for 1-1/2" bore with 1" rod Cap Trunnion Style DB (only for 4MA/4ML) (NFPA MT2)
2
UT 1
TD
TL
TL
XJ+STROKE ZJ+STROKE
Intermediate Trunnion Style DD (NFPA MT4)

UV 4
UM 1
BD
2 TD
TL
3 E TM
TL
XI ZJ+STROKE
Cylinder Dimensions Styles D, DB and D

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Note: Tie rod nuts for Style DD have a slot instead of internal hex.
Rod No.
1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
E
2.000 2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
BD
1.250 1.250 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000
+.000 -.001 TD
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Add Stroke TL
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TM
2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.500 3.500 4.500 4.500 5.250 5.250 6.250 6.250
UM
4.500 4.500 5.000 5.000 5.500 5.500 6.500 6.500 7.250 7.250 8.250 8.250
UT
4.000 4.000 4.500 4.500 5.000 5.000 5.750 5.750 6.500 6.500 7.500 7.500
UV
2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.500 3.500 4.250 4.250 5.000 5.000 6.000 6.000
XG
1.750 1.750 2.125 1.750 2.125 2.250 2.500 2.250 2.500 2.250 2.500
Min. XI
3.125 3.500 3.250 3.625 3.250 3.625 4.125 4.375 4.125 4.375 4.063 4.313
XJ
4.125 4.250 4.125 4.500 4.250 4.625 5.000 5.250 5.000 5.250 5.250 5.500
ZJ
4.625 5.000 4.625 5.000 4.750 5.125 5.625 5.875 5.625 5.875 5.875 6.125
B28
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA Features 6" and 8" Bore
Air Cylinders 4MA Series 6" and 8" Bore

Piston Seals (hidden) Carboxylated nitrile rounded-lip piston seals combine low friction with leak-free service and long service life. Piston Assembly (hidden) Aluminum piston with wear band increases service life and eliminates metalto-metal contact. Optional magnetic piston ring for use with a variety of sensors. Anaerobic adhesive is used to permanently lock and seal the piston to the rod.
B
Piston Rod Standard case-hardened (50-64 Rc), hard chrome plated and polished carbon steel piston rod for reliable performance, long rod seal life and low friction. Grades of stainless steel are available as options.
Heads and Caps High-strength aluminum heads and caps are anodized for corrosion resistance. We can offer customization of the endcaps for unique designs, including extra ports, duplex, tandem and many special mountings.
Ports NPTF ports are standard. Other port styles available. Adjustable Cushions Available
Cylinder Body Hard anodized aluminum for corrosion resistance, maximum seal life and lower friction. Rod Wiper Outboard urethane rod wiper protects the cylinder by removing external debris and adherents from the piston rod during the entire stroke. Tie Rod Construction Steel tie rods and nuts for heavy-duty use. Stainless steel is available as an option.
Rod Gland/Bearing Threaded bronze rod gland is externally removable, without cylinder disassembly, for easy maintenance. Machined flats permit the use of common tools for removal and installation. Options include HI LOAD design for side load conditions and metallic wiper design for extremely tough rod contaminant/ adherent applications. Rod Seal (hidden) Carboxylated nitrile rounded-lip rod seal combines low friction with leakfree service and long service life.
B29
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA Model Code 6" and 8" Bore
How to Order 4MA Series Cylinders for 6" and 8" Bore J 4MA
Series 4MA Air service 4ML Hydraulic service U R B T
6.00
U
Ports NPTF BSPP BSPT SAE Seals Blank Standard (nitrile seals) V Fluorocarbon seals 1 E Fluorocarbon rod wiper and rod seal only 2 4 Low temperature seals 1 M Metallic rod wiper, nitrile seals 3
1
Piston Rod Number Specify rod code number for required diameter.5
12.000
Bore Size 6.00 8.00
Mounting Style Specify mounting style code (see table on following page). Cushion Head End Blank Non-cushioned head end C Cushioned head end (not available for 4ML) Piston Type Blank Standard (lipseals, no magnetic ring) 3 Lipseals and magnetic ring
Piston Rod Thread Type A Standard (UNF Unified Thread) W BSF British Fine M Metric (see page B106) Rod Material and Gland Code Blank Standard rod and gland H Standard rod and HI LOAD gland Y 17-4 PH stainless steel rod and standard gland Z 17-4 PH stainless steel rod and HI LOAD gland J 303 stainless steel rod and standard gland 7 K 303 stainless steel rod and HI LOAD gland 7 S 316 stainless steel rod and standard gland 7 T 316 stainless steel rod and HI LOAD gland 7
Special Modification Specify S only for special modification other than rod end, and then describe modification in item notes. (Includes 4MA with Linear Position Sensor Option)4 Piston Rod Thread Style 4 8 9 55 3 Small male Intermediate male Short female For use with Split Coupler 6 Special (and specify all dimensions required)
Reed and solid-state sensors only available with standard seals or options E and M. Used for external chemical compatibility applications, not high temperature. If fluorocarbon seals are required with this option, please place an S for special in the Special Modification field and specify the fluorocarbon seals and metallic rod wiper in the item notes. For Linear Position Sensor Option (LPSO), please include the following information for the Special Modification item notes: a. Sensor part number (see pages B100-B104) b. Sensor position c. Port position (if other than position 1) d. Length of stop tubing, gross stroke and net stroke (if required) Also, Piston Type 3 is required.
Review Piston Rod Selection Chart on page B136 to determine proper piston rod diameter. For additional information regarding this style, refer to page B105. If non-standard Rod Material and Gland Code is required with this option, please place an S for special in Special Modification field and specify Rod Material and Gland Code in the item notes. Not available for 4ML. If a stop tube is required, specify gross stroke (net stroke + stop tube) in the model number, then place an S for special in the Special Modification field and specify the stop tube length in the item notes.
How to order 6"-8" Bore 4MA/4ML Series cylinders with sensors: Sensors must be ordered separately and are not mounted to the cylinder prior to shipment. 1. Cylinder model number must have Piston Type 3. 2. Please refer to pages B111-B118 for sensor part numbers and specifications. Global, NAMUR and Weld Immune Sensors will fit the 6"-8" Bore 4MA/4ML Series. 3. Tie rod bracket P8S-TMA0X will be required for Global Sensors. Please refer to page B117 for more information.
7 8
B30
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA Series Mounting Styles 4MA Series Mounting Styles 6" and 8" Bore
Mounting Code NFPA Mounting Style Description

Available Bore Sizes 4MA/4ML-LPSO w/o Stop Tube
4MA/4ML
4MA/4ML-LPSO w/Stop Tube

6-8 6 6* 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 6 - 8* 6 - 8* 6* 6-8 6 - 8* 8 6-8
No Mount Style T
(NFPA MX0) Tie Rods Ext. Cap End Style TC
(NFPA MF2) Sleeve Nut Style TE
(NFPA MX3)
Style C
(NFPA MX2) Side End Lug Style F
(NFPA MX5) Cap Fixed Clevis Style BB
(NFPA MS2) Cap Detachable Clevis Style BC
(NFPA MS4) Cap Detachable Eye Style BE
(NFPA MS1) Head Trunnion Style D
(NFPA MP1) Cap Trunnion Style DB
(NFPA MP2) Intermediate Trunnion Style DD
(NFPA MP4) Head Square Style JB
(NFPA MT1) Cap Square Style HB
(NFPA MT2) Double Rod End
(NFPA MT4) Style KT
(NFPA ME3)
(NFPA ME4)
(NFPA MDX0)
B31
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
Side Lug
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
T MX0 No Mount 6-8 6-8 J MF1 Head Rectangular Flange 6 6* H MF2 Cap Rectangular Flange 6 6* TB MX3 Tie Rods Extended Head End 6-8 TC MX2 Tie Rods Extended Cap End 6-8 TD MX1 Tie Rods Extended Both Ends 6-8 TE MX5 Sleeve Nut 6-8 6-8 TEF MX5/MS4 Sleeve Nut with Side Tap 6-8 6-8 C MS2 Side Lug 6-8 6-8 F MS4 Side Tap 6-8 6-8 CB MS1 Side End Angle 6-8 6-8 BB MP1 Cap Fixed Clevis 6-8 6 - 8* BC MP2 Cap Detachable Clevis 6-8 6 - 8* BE MP4 Cap Detachable Eye 6 6* D MT1 Head Trunnion 6-8 6-8 6-8 6 - 8* DB MT2 Cap Trunnion Intermediate Trunnion 6-8 DD MT4 Head Square 8 JB ME3 HB ME4 Cap Square 8 KT** MDX0 Double Rod End, No Mount 6-8 6-8 * May interfere with mounting. Please provide clearance for Linear Position Sensor overhang (see page B99). ** Double rod end cylinders can be ordered with head mountings, i.e. KJ (see page B35).
B
3MA/4MA 3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA and 4ML General Specifications General Specifications

NFPA interchangeable Bore sizes 6" and 8" Strokes available in any practical stroke length Rod diameters 1-3/8" and 1-3/4" Rod end styles 4 standard, specials available Single rod end or double rod ends Cushions optional and adjustable at either end or both ends (n/a for 4ML Hydraulic Version) Operating pressure 4MA = 250 PSIG (17 Bar) maximum air service 4ML = 400 PSIG (27 Bar) maximum hydraulic service

Media 4MA = dry, filtered air 4ML = filtered hydraulic oil Temperature range -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) with standard seals -10F to +250F (-23C to +121C) with fluorocarbon seals option -50F to +150F (-46C to +66C) with low temperature seals option Mounting styles 20 standard styles RoHS compliant For material options, including seals, piston rods and glands, please see Material Specifications on next page.
Cylinder Weights 4MA/4ML Cylinders

Bore (inch)
6 8

Mounting Code All except D, DB, DD D, DB, DD Position 2 3
Rod (inch)
1.375 1.75 1.375 1.75
No Mount Single Rod 4MA/4ML Base Wt. Per Inch (lbs.) (lbs.)
20.50 22.61 35.50 37.63 0.87 1.13 1.25 1.51
No Mount Double Rod Base Wt. (lbs.)

25.65 30.41 41.15 45.90
Per Inch (lbs.)

1.30 1.82 1.68 2.20
Standard Port Sizes

Bore NPTF 3/4 3/4 BSPT Rc3/4 Rc3/4 BSPP G3/4 G3/4 SAE 12 12 6 8

Bore (inch)
6 8
Weight (lbs) by Mounting Style J, H

10.74 N/A
D, DB
1.22 1.22
BB
2.91 2.91
CB
5.88 7.84
DD
15.52 25.01
BE
2.91 N/A
C
0.69 0.67
BC
11.38 17.31
B32
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA and 4ML Material Specifications

Head and cap ................Black anodized aluminum alloy Cylinder body ................Clear hard-coat anodized aluminum alloy Piston rod ......................Case-hardened, chrome plated carbon steel Rod seal ........................Carboxylated nitrile (Nitroxile) Rod wiper ......................Molythane Rod bearing (gland) ......Bronze alloy Piston ............................Aluminum alloy Piston seals ...................Carboxylated nitrile (Nitroxile) Piston bearing ...............MolyGard Magnetic ring.................Plastic-bound magnetic material

Piston fastener ..............Piston rod for aluminum piston O-rings...........................Nitrile End seals ......................Nitrile Cushion seals................Urethane Cushion needle valves ..Brass cushion needle valves Tie-rods .........................Blackened carbon steel Tie-rod nuts ...................Steel alloy, SAE J995 Grade 8
B
3MA/4MA

High temperatures (-10F to +250F) All seals and wiper are fluorocarbon Aluminum piston only (without magnetic ring) Low temperatures (-50F to +150F) Rod seal, piston seals, o-rings and end seals are low temperature-rated nitrile

Hydraulic service (general) Hydraulic service (std temp) Cushions not available Hydraulic service (high temp) Fluorocarbon TS-2000 rod seal; wiper and all seals are fluorocarbon (for hydraulic use) LPSO Option 2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR B33

Cylinder seal options Fluorocarbon for high temperatures or chemical compatibility Other seal options available, please consult factory Case-hardened, chrome plated carbon steel (standard) 17-4 PH stainless steel, chrome plated 303 stainless steel, chrome plated (n/a for 4ML) 316 stainless steel, chrome plated (n/a for 4ML) (for stainless steel without chrome plating, please consult factory) HI LOAD gland option Metallic rod scraper option Composite bearing pressed into bronze alloy gland Dual high strength bronze wipers with fluorocarbon energizer
Piston rod material options
2A/2AN 2MNR
Polyurethane TS-2000 rod seal and nitrile piston seals (for hydraulic use)
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Selection How to Select a 6" - 8" Bore 4MA Cylinder
Parker cylinders are available based on air or hydraulic operating pressure. The many styles, sizes and optional features available assure that your application requirements are precisely met. To select a cylinder, follow these simple steps: Step 1 - Determine the correct cylinder bore size necessary to achieve required force using the available operating pressure. Step 2 - Determine the series cylinder to use, based on operating pressure. Step 3 - Turn to the appropriate cylinder selection section. Select the mounting style that fits your installation needs. Determine the bore and rod sizes available for the model you select. Then complete model selection. - Choose a rod end style and the desired rod end accessories. - Size the cylinder to meet your application requirements. Step 4 - Consider the following conditions which may require further modifications to the cylinder you have selected.
Application Condition Quick Starts or Stops
Check the Following Confirm that determined thrust is sufficient to accelerate or decelerate cylinder and load within prescribed distance. Optional cushions should be used to reduce shock during deceleration, check that peak pressures will be within tolerable limits. Check whether stop tube is required to prevent excessive bearing loads and wear. Determine if standard size piston rod is strong enough to accommodate intended load. See Application Engineering section for recommendations. Determine if standard size piston rod is strong enough to accommodate intended load. For temperatures between 165F and 250F use 4MA cylinder with high temperature seals. Metallic Rod Wiper HI LOAD Gland Assembly Stop Tube Mixed Mountings Shock Absorber on Cap End Air Cylinder/Valve Combination (ACVB) Adjustable Point Sensors (order separately) Continuous Linear Position Sensing (LPSO) High Temperature Service (to +250F) Low Temperature Service (to -50F) Hydraulic Service (4ML) (400 PSIG) Rod lock version (see 4MAJ)
General Options and Modifications: Adjustable Cushions Magnetic Piston Port and Adjustable Cushion Relocation Port Thread Styles Multiple Ports Special Heads, Caps, Pistons and Mounts Double Rod End Oversize Rod Diameters Rod End Modifications Rod Materials (grades of stainless steel) Stainless Steel Tie Rods and Nuts Fluorocarbon Rod Wiper and Rod Seal only Fluorocarbon Seals (all cylinder seals)
B34
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA Series Single Rod Dimensions
4MA Series Single Rod Dimensions 6" and 8" Bore

LAF A WF VF C NA KK OR CC D WRENCH FLATS D1 WRENCH FLATS MM B
EE
B
3MA/4MA
J
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1.910 1.910 1.810 1.810
P+STROKE
G 1 MM 4 2 R E WF
LF+STROKE ZJ+STROKE
Cylinder Dimensions Style T

Bore Size
6 8
1 3 1 3
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
1-1/4 - 12 1-1/2 - 12 1-1/4 - 12 1-1/2 - 12
1-14 1-1/4 - 12 1-14 1-1/4 - 12
1.625 2.000 1.625 2.000
6.900 6.900 9.100 9.100
1.999 2.374 1.999 2.374
0.635 0.760 0.635 0.760
1-1/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/2
1-7/8 2-3/16 1-7/8 2-3/16
Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
Add Stroke J
1.410 1.410 1.440 1.440
K
0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563
LAF
3.250 3.875 3.250 3.875
NA
1.313 1.688 1.313 1.688
R
4.880 4.880 6.440 6.440
VF
0.990 1.115 0.990 1.115
WF
1.625 1.875 1.625 1.875
Y
2.813 3.063 2.750 3.000
LF
5.000 5.000 5.125 5.125
P
3.125 3.125 3.250 3.250
ZJ
6.625 6.875 6.750 7.000
B35
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
Rod No.
Rod Dia. MM
Style 8 CC
Style 4 & 9 KK
AA
D1
EE (NPTF)
Thread
+.000 -.002 B
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod End Dimensions 6" and 8" Bore
4MA Rod End Dimensions 6" and 8" Bore Sizes

Thread Style 4 (NFPA Style SM) Small Male
LAF A WF VF C NA KK D WRENCH FLATS D1 WRENCH FLATS MM B CC NA D WRENCH FLATS C MM B A
Thread Style 8 (NFPA Style IM) Intermediate Male

LAF WF VF
D1 WRENCH FLATS

KK NA A C
WF VF
VF MM AM AF AE AD WG
MM
GROOVE HAS 1/16" INTERNAL RADII AT CORNERS D1 WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS
D1 WRENCH FLATS
Rod End Dimensions

Rod Bore Rod Dia. Size No. MM 6 8 1 3 1 3 Thread Style 8 CC Style 4 & 9 KK 1-14 1-1/4 - 12 1-14 1-1/4 - 12 A 1.625 2.000 1.625 2.000 AD 1.063 1.313 1.063 1.313 AE 0.375 0.500 0.375 0.500 AF 0.875 1.125 0.875 1.125 AM 1.320 1.700 1.320 1.700 +.000 -.002 B 1.999 2.374 1.999 2.374
C 0.635 0.760 0.635 0.760
D 1-1/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/2
D1 1-7/8 1-7/8
LAF 3.250 3.250
NA 1.313 1.688 1.313 1.688
VF 0.990 1.115 0.990 1.115
WF 1.625 1.875 1.625 1.875
WG 2.750 3.125 2.750 3.125
1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 1-3/4 1-1/2 - 12 1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 1-3/4 1-1/2 - 12
2-3/16 3.875 2-3/16 3.875

B36
Catalog 0900P-4
4MA K-type / Rod Ends 6" and 8" Bore

To determine dimensions for a double rod end cylinder, first refer to the desired single rod end mounting style cylinder shown in this catalog section. After selecting the necessary dimensions from that drawing, return to this page and supplement the single rod end dimensions with those shown in the drawings and dimension table below. Note that double rod end cylinders have a head dimension

(G) at both ends, and that LG replaces LF, PK replaces P, etc. The double rod end dimensions differ from, or are in addition to, those for single rod cylinders. When a double rod end cylinder has two different rod ends, please clearly state which rod end is to be available at which head end.
B
4MA Series K-type Drawing 6" and 8" Bore

ZM+(2 X STROKE) Y WF LG+STROKE PK +STROKE EE K Mounting Styles for Single Rod Models C CB D DD F J T TB TD TE TEF Corresponding Mounting Styles for Double Rod Models KC KCB KD KDD KF KJ KT KTB KTD KTE KTEF
MM ROD END #2
ROD END #1 G G
Cylinder Dimensions Style KT

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
EE (NPTF)
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
G
1.910 1.910 1.810 1.810
K
0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563
WF
1.625 1.875 1.625 1.875
Y
2.813 3.063 2.750 3.000
LG
5.500 5.500 5.500 5.500 LF
PK
3.125 3.125 3.250 3.250 P
Add Stroke SAK XAK

8.250 8.250 9.125 9.125 SA CB 8.500 8.750 8.938 9.188 XA
SSK
4.125 4.125 4.125 4.125 SS C
SNK
3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125 SN F, TEF
Add 2X Stroke ZM
8.750 9.250 8.750 9.250 All
All Styles
B37
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions 6" and 8" Bore

Head Rectangular Flange Style J (NFPA MF1) (only 6" Bore)
UF 1
B
R1 4
FB 4 HOLES
LA W
LB+STROKE
3 TF
F ZJ+STROKE
Note: Style J has a W dimension instead of WF and a LA dimension instead of LAF because of the flange installation. Please use dimensions W and LA regarding rod ends only for Style J. For reference, WF = W + F and LA = W + A.
Cap Rectangular Flange Style H (NFPA MF2) (only 6" Bore)

LB+STROKE
UF 1
R1 2 F ZJ+STROKE ZF+STROKE
4 E
3 TF
FB 4 HOLES

Bore Size
6
Rod No.
1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4
Add Stroke A
1.625 2.000
E
6.500 6.500
F
0.750 0.750
FB
0.563 0.563
LA
2.500 3.125
R1
4.880 4.880
TF
7.625 7.625
UF
8.625 8.625
W
0.875 1.125
LB
5.750 5.750
ZF
7.375 7.625
ZJ
6.625 6.875
B38
Catalog 0900P-4

1
BB DD
2 AA
B
R ZJ+STROKE

K 1 DD
E 4
R AA ZJ+STROKE
BB

BB 1 DD BB DD
2 AA
ZJ+STROKE

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
AA
6.900 6.900 9.100 9.100
BB
1.813 1.813 2.313 2.313
DD
1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 5/8-18
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
K
0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563
R
4.880 4.880 6.440 6.440
Add Stroke ZJ
6.625 6.875 6.750 7.000 Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
B39
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
Catalog 0900P-4

Sleeve Nut Style TE (NFPA MX5)
1 DD
ZJ+STROKE
2 AA
R BG BG
Cylinder Dimensions Style TE

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
AA
6.900 6.900 9.100 9.100
BG
0.500 0.500 0.620 0.620
DD
1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 5/8-18
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
R
4.880 4.880 6.440 6.440
Add Stroke ZJ
6.625 6.875 6.750 7.000
B40
Catalog 0900P-4

Side Lug Style C (NFPA MS2)
E 1
AB 4 HOLES
ZJ+STROKE
ST LH.003
B
SW SW SS+STROKE XS
SW SW TS US
SW

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
AB
0.813 0.813 0.813 0.813
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
+/-.003 LH
3.243 3.243 4.243 4.243
ST
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
SW
0.688 0.688 0.688 0.688
TS
7.875 7.875 9.875 9.875
US
9.250 9.250 11.250 11.250
XS
2.313 2.563 2.313 2.563
SS
3.625 3.625 3.750 3.750
ZJ
6.625 6.875 7.000 6.750
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
2 TH.003 3 E TN XT SN+STROKE ZJ+STROKE
NT THREAD, ND DEEP 4 TAPPED MOUNTING HOLES
Cylinder Dimensions Style F

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
ND
1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
NT
3/4-10 3/4-10 3/4-10 3/4-10
+/-.003 TH
3.243 3.243 4.243 4.243
Add Stroke TN
3.250 3.250 4.500 4.500
XT
2.813 3.063 2.813 3.063
SN
3.125 3.125 3.250 3.250
ZJ
6.625 6.875 6.750 7.000
B41
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
Side End Lug Style F (NFPA MS4)
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
Rod Dia. MM
Add Stroke
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
SW
Catalog 0900P-4

Side End Angle* Style CB (NFPA MS1)
ZA+STROKE
B
4
E 1
XA+STROKE
AB 6 HOLES AH AO AT F AL AE SA+STROKE AL AO
3 S
AT
NOTE: DIM. "S" IS FOR THE HOLES IN THE MOUNT (NOT THE TIE ROD TO TIE ROD DIM.)
*Maximum recommended pressure for this mount is 150 PSIG

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
Add Stroke AB
0.813 0.813 0.813 0.813
AE
2.125 2.125 1.813 1.813
AH
3.250 3.250 4.250 4.250
AL
1.375 1.375 1.813 1.813
AO
0.625 0.625 0.688 0.688
AT
0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
F
0.750 0.750
S
5.250 5.250 7.125 7.125
SA
8.500 8.500 8.750 8.750
XA
8.000 8.250 8.563 8.813
ZA
8.625 8.875 9.250 9.500
B42
Catalog 0900P-4


CD LR 2 MR F L XC+STROKE ZC+STROKE CB CW 3 CW 4 1
B
3MA/4MA
ZC
9.250 9.500 9.375 9.625
CD
MR1 F L1 XD+STROKE ZD+STROKE
3 CW CB
CW
Cylinder Dimensions Styles BB and BC

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
CB
1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
CW
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
F
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750
L
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750
LR
1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250
L1
1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
MR
1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
MR1
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
XC
8.125 8.375 8.250 8.500
XD
8.875 9.125 9.000 9.250
ZD
9.875 10.125 10.000 10.250
1- 3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
1.001 1.001 1.001 1.001
Cap Detachable Eye Style BE (NFPA MP4)
CD1
2 MR2 F L1 XD+STROKE ZD1+STROKE 3
CB
Cylinder Dimensions Style BE

Bore Size
6
Rod No.
1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4
CB
1.500 1.500
+.002 +.004 CD1

1.000 1.000
Add Stroke E
6.500 6.500
F
0.750 0.750
L1
1.500 1.500
MR2
1.125 1.125
XD
8.875 9.125
ZD1
10.000 10.250 Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
B43
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
Rod Dia. MM
+.000 -.002 CD
Add Stroke
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4

Head Trunnion Style D (NFPA MT1)
4 UT 1
TD 2 XG ZJ+STROKE
B
Cap Trunnion Style DB (NFPA MT2)
TL
3 E UT 1
TL
TD 2 4
TL
3 E
TL
XJ+STROKE ZJ+STROKE
Intermediate Trunnion Style DD (NFPA MT4)
UM TD UV
BD
TL E TM
TL
XI ZJ+STROKE
Cylinder Dimensions Style D, DB and DD

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
BD
2.500 2.500 2.500 2.500
+.000 -.001 TD
1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
TL
1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
TM
7.625 7.625 9.750 9.750
UM
10.375 10.375 12.500 12.500
UT
9.250 9.250 11.250 11.250
UV
7.000 7.000 9.500 9.500
XG
2.625 2.875 2.625 2.875
Min. XI
4.813 5.063 4.750 5.000
Add Stroke XJ
5.875 6.125 6.000 6.250
ZJ
6.625 6.875 6.750 7.000
B44
Catalog 0900P-4

Head Square Style JB (NFPA ME3) (only 8" Bore)
EB 4 HOLES
ZJ+STROKE
TE G
B
3MA/4MA
1 4 E 3 EB 4 HOLES
3 E
TE 2 J XK+STROKE
Cylinder Dimensions Styles JB and HB

Bore Size
8
Rod No.
1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4
E
8.500 8.500
EB
0.688 0.688
G
1.810 1.810
J
1.440 1.440
TE
7.570 7.570
XK
5.313 5.563
ZJ
6.750 7.000
B45
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
Add Stroke
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
Cap Square Style HB (NFPA ME4) (only 8" Bore)
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
Air Cylinders 3MA 1-1/8" Bore
B46
Catalog 0900P-4
1-1/8" Bore 3MA Cylinder Features
Adjustable Cushion Spacers Available
Piston Rod Hard chrome plated and polished carbon steel piston rod for reliable performance, long rod seal life and low friction. Grades of stainless steel are available as options.
Endcap Fasteners Zinc-plated steel endcap fasteners (and tie rods for some mounts) for heavy-duty use. Stainless steel is available as an option.
B47
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
Heads and Caps Steel alloy heads and caps are black zinc-plated for corrosion resistance
Cylinder Body Extruded aluminum profile cylinder body offers integrated sensor grooves to minimize sensor installation time, maximize sensor protection and eliminate the need for brackets. Grooves readily accept MiniGlobal Sensors. Anodized and bright-dipped for corrosion resistance, maximum seal life and lower friction. A few mounts require anodized aluminum tube and steel tie rod construction (tie rod brackets for sensors available).
2A/2AN 2MNR
Rod Wiper Outboard urethane rod wiper protects the cylinder by removing external debris and adherents from the piston rod during the entire stroke.
Magnetic Piston Ring Included as a standard feature for use with a variety of sensors.
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
Rod Bearing This composite rod bearing is designed for side load. Wear resistance far exceeds commonly-used bronze rod bearings.
3MAJ/4MAJ
Rod Seal Inboard nitrile rod lipseal combines low friction with leak-free service and long service life.
Ports 1/8" NPTF ports are standard.
3MA/4MA
Piston Seals Nitrile piston lipseals combine low friction with leak-free service and long service life. Optional bumper piston seals provide additional noise reduction and smooth end-of-stroke deceleration.
Piston Assembly Aluminum piston with wear band increases service life and eliminates metal-to-metal contact. Anaerobic adhesive is used to permanently lock and seal the piston to the rod.
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA Series Model Code for 1-1/8" Bore
How to Order 3MA Series Cylinders for 1-1/8" Bore J 3MA

Series 3MA Air service 3ML Hydraulic service
1.12
U
Ports U 1/8" NPTF (standard) T SAE #4 (adapter)5 Seals Blank Standard (nitrile seals) V Fluorocarbon seals 2 E Fluorocarbon rod wiper and rod seal only 3
1
Piston Rod Number 1 3/8" rod 3 1/2" rod Specify rod code number for required diameter.
4.000
Bore Size 1.12 1-1/8"
Mounting Style Specify mounting style code (see table on following page). Cushion Head End Blank Non-cushioned head end C Cushioned head end (not available for 3ML) Piston Type
Piston Rod Thread Type A Standard (UNF Unified Thread) W BSF British Fine M Metric (see page B106) Special Modification Specify S only for special modification other than rod end, and then describe modification in item notes. Blank Y J S Rod Material Code Standard 17-4 PH stainless steel 303 stainless steel 1 316 stainless steel 1
Blank Standard (lipseals and magnetic ring) 2 Lipseals, no magnetic ring 4 Bumper seals, no magnetic ring 1 6 Bumper seals and magnetic ring 1
Piston Rod Thread Style

1 2
Not available for 3ML Reed and solid-state sensors only available with standard seals or seal option E. Used for external chemical compatibility applications, not high temperature. If a stop tube is required, specify gross stroke (net stroke + stop tube) in the model number, then place an S for special in the Special Modification field and specify the stop tube length in the item notes. Not available with US mount. Adapter height is approximately 0.83" when installed. Adapter body extends 0.15" from cap face. Use of mountings at cap end may be affected by this port type. How to order 1-1/8" Bore 3MA/3ML Series cylinders with sensors: Sensors must be ordered separately and are not mounted to the cylinder prior to shipment. 1. Cylinder model number must have Piston Type (blank) or 6. 2. Please refer to pages B115-B120 for sensor part numbers and specifications. Mini-Global, NAMUR and Weld Immune Sensors will fit the 1-1/8" Bore 3MA/3ML Series (Global Sensors not available). 3. Tie rod bracket P8S-TMA0Z will be required for Mini-Global Sensors with Mounting Styles US, F, MR, TB, TC, TD or other tie rod versions. Please refer to page B119 for more information.
6 4 9 3
Full male Small male Short female Special (and specify all dimensions required)
B48
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA Series Mounting Styles for 1-1/8" Bore 3MA Series Mounting Styles for 1-1/8" Bore
No Mount Basic Style T Head Rectangular Flange Style J
Head Rect. Flange (no pilot) Style J7
B
Side Thru Hole Style US Side Tap Style F Head Tap Style MR Tie Rods Ext. Head End Style TB
(NFPA MS8) Tie Rods Ext. Cap End Style TC
(NFPA MS9) Tie Rods Ext. Both Ends Style TD
(NFPA MR1) Threaded Nose Style NS
(NFPA MX3) Cap Pivot Eye Style BE
Double Rod End Style KT Double rod end cylinders can be ordered with head mountings, i.e. KJ (see page B51).
(NFPA MDX0)
Note: Styles US, F, MR, TB, TC and TD are tie rod construction only, profile body not available. If Mini-Global sensors are required, please order one tie rod bracket (P8S-TMA0Z) for each sensor.
B49
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
(NFPA MX2)
(NFPA MX1)
(NFPA MN1)
(NFPA MP3)
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
(NFPA MX0)
(NFPA MF1)
(NFPA MF7)
(NFPA MF2)
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA General Specifications for 1-1/8" Bore General Specifications

NFPA interchangeable NFPA/T3.6.11 R1-1998 (R2004) Strokes available in any practical stroke length Rod diameters 3/8" and 1/2" Rod end styles 3 standard, specials available Single rod end or double rod ends Cushions optional and adjustable at either end or both ends (n/a for 3ML Hydraulic Version) Operating pressure 3MA = 250 PSIG (17 Bar) max. air service 3ML = 1,100 PSIG (76 Bar) max. hydraulic service

Media 3MA = dry, filtered air 3ML = filtered hydraulic oil Temperature range -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) with standard seals -10F to +250F (-23C to +121C) with fluorocarbon seals option -50F to +150F (-46C to +66C) with low temperature seals (consult factory) Mounting styles 13 standard styles For material options, including seals and piston rods, please see Material Specifications on next page.
Cylinder Weights 1-1/8" Bore 3MA/3ML Cylinders

Bore (inch) Rod (inch)
3/8 1-1/8 1/2 1.26
No Mount Single Rod 3MA Base Wt. Per Inch (lbs.) (lbs.)
0.10 0.13

Mounting Code
All mounts
Position
2
Standard Port Size

Bore
1-1/8
NPTF
1/8
Recommended Maximum Extend Stroke Length

Rod (inch)
3/8 1/2
100
26" 46"
Pressure (PSIG) 200 500

18" 32" 12" 21"
1100
9" 15"
Please consult Actuator Division for longer stroke lengths.
B50
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA Material Specifications for 1-1/8" Bore

Head and cap ................Black zinc plated steel alloy Head and cap screws ...Zinc plated steel alloy Cylinder body ................Clear anodized aluminum alloy Piston rod ......................Chrome plated carbon steel Rod seal ........................Nitrile Rod wiper ......................Molythane Rod bearing...................Composite Piston ............................Aluminum alloy Piston seals ...................Nitrile Piston bearing ...............MolyGard Magnetic ring.................Plastic-bound magnetic material Piston fastener ..............Piston rod for aluminum piston

O-rings...........................Nitrile End seals ......................Nitrile Cushion spacer .............Black zinc plated steel alloy Cushion seals................Urethane Cushion needle valves ..Stainless steel Tie-rods .........................Blackened carbon steel (some mounts) Tie-rod nuts .................. Black oxided steel alloy (some mounts) Cylinder accessories .... Black zinc plated steel alloy
B

High temperatures (-10F to +250F) All seals and wiper are fluorocarbon Aluminum piston only (without magnetic ring) Low temperatures (-50F to +150F) Rod seal, piston seals, o-rings and end seals are low temperature-rated nitrile (consult factory)

Hydraulic service (general) Hydraulic service (std temp) Cushions and bumper piston seals not available Nitrile rod seal and piston seals (for hydraulic use) Hydraulic service (high temp) All seals and wiper are fluorocarbon (for hydraulic use)

Cylinder seal options Fluorocarbon for high temperatures or chemical compatibility Other seal options available, please consult factory Carboxylated nitrile (Nitroxile) for standard temperatures Fluorocarbon for high temperatures and chemical compatibility Piston rod material options Chrome plated carbon steel (standard) 17-4 PH stainless steel 303 stainless steel (n/a for 3ML) 316 stainless steel (n/a for 3ML) (for stainless steel with chrome plating, please consult factory) Case-hardened, chrome plated carbon steel
Bumper piston seal options (3MA only, n/a for 3ML)
B51
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Selection How to Select a 1-1/8" Bore 3MA Cylinder
Parker cylinders are available based on air or hydraulic operating pressure. The many styles, sizes and optional features available assure that your application requirements are precisely met. To select a cylinder, follow these simple steps: Step 1 - Verify that the 1-1/8" bore size is appropriate to achieve required force using the available operating pressure. Step 2 - Determine the series cylinder to use, based on operating pressure. Step 3 - Turn to the appropriate cylinder selection section. Select the mounting style that fits your installation needs. - Choose a rod end style and the desired rod end accessories. - Size the cylinder to meet your application requirements. Step 4 - Consider the following conditions which may require further modifications to the cylinder you have selected.
Application Condition Quick Starts or Stops
Check the Following Confirm that determined thrust is sufficient to accelerate or decelerate cylinder and load within prescribed distance. Optional cushions should be used to reduce shock during deceleration, check that peak pressures will be within tolerable limits. Check whether stop tube is required to prevent excessive bearing loads and wear. Determine if standard size piston rod is strong enough to accommodate intended load. See Application Engineering section for recommendations. Determine if standard size piston rod is strong enough to accommodate intended load. For temperatures between 165F and 250F use 3MA or 3ML cylinder with high temperature seals. Fluorocarbon Rod Wiper and Rod Seal only Fluorocarbon Seals (all cylinder seals) Stop Tube Mixed Mountings Round Tube and Tie Rod Construction Stainless Steel Fasteners/Tie Rods Shock Absorber on Cap End LECTROFLUOR Coating Adjustable Point Sensors (order separately) High Temperature Service (to +250F) Hydraulic Service (3ML) (1,100 PSIG)
General Options and Modifications: Adjustable Cushions (Cushion Spacers) Non-Magnetic Piston (magnetic ring standard) Piston Bumper Seals Port and Adjustable Cushion Relocation Port Thread Styles Multiple Ports Special Heads, Caps, Pistons and Mounts Double Rod End Oversize Rod Diameters Rod End Modifications Rod Materials (grades of stainless steel)
B52
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA Basic Dimensions 1-1/8" Bore
Single Rod, Double Rod and Cushioned Cylinder Dimensions

Single Rod T Mount Dimensions
2.625+STROKE WF A 1 KK OR CC 2.250+STROKE 1.500+STROKE 1/8" NPTF
B
B MM
D ACROSS FLATS 1.500 .125
.750
.500
Double Rod KT Mount Dimensions

3.250+(2 X STROKE) WF 2.500+STROKE 1.500+STROKE B BOTH ENDS MM ROD END #2 .750 .750 1/8" NPTF A KK OR CC
D ACROSS FLATS BOTH ENDS
ROD END #1 .125 BOTH ENDS
Single rod end mounts T, J, J7, TB, TD and NS can become double rod end mounts KT, KJ, KJ7, KTB, KTD and KNS. Please use the appropriate dimensions from head face of the single rod end mount drawings with KT drawing above for double rod end cylinder dimensions.
Cushioned Cylinder Dimensions

3.250+STROKE 1 4 2 .500 .500 1/8" NPTF
Rod End Dimensions

Bore Rod Size No.
1-1/8 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
3/8 1/2
Thread Style 6 Style 4 Style 9 CC KK KK

3/8-24 1/2-20 5/16-24 7/16-20 1/4-28 3/8-24
A
0.625 0.750
-0.001 -0.003 B
0.750 0.750
D
5/16 7/16
LAF
1.000 1.125
WF
0.375 0.375
Note: Adjustable cushions will add 0.50" to each end. Cushions at both ends will add a total of 1.00" to the base cylinder length. Single rod configuration shown above. Available with single rod and double rod cylinders.
B53
Catalog 0900P-4
3MA Series Rod End Dimensions
3MA Series Rod End Dimensions 1-1/8" Bore

Thread Style 4 Small Male Thread Style 6 Full Male
LAF A WF A LAF WF
B
KK
MM
B CC D WRENCH FLATS
MM
D WRENCH FLATS
.125
.125
Thread Style 9 Short Female

WF A
KK
MM
D WRENCH FLATS
.125
Rod End Dimensions

Bore Size
1-1/8
Rod No.
1 3
Rod Dia. MM
3/8 1/2
Style 6 CC
3/8-24 1/2-20
Thread Style 4 KK
5/16-24 7/16-20
Style 9 KK
1/4-28 3/8-24
A
0.625 0.750
-0.001 -0.003 B
0.750 0.750
D
5/16 7/16
LAF
1.000 1.125
WF
0.375 0.375

B54
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions 1-1/8" Bore

1
.219 4 HOLES
.250 .125
4 1.000
2 1.500 .750+.000 -.003 3 2.000 2.500 .250 2.875+STROKE
B
3MA/4MA
0.250
.219 4 HOLES
.125
4 1.000
1.500 .250 2.625+STROKE
2.000 2.500
W dimension = .125
Cap Rectangular Flange Style H (NFPA MF2)

1
.219 4 HOLES
4 1.000
1.500 2.625+STROKE 2.875+STROKE
3 2.000 2.500
B55
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
Head Rectangular Flange (no pilot) Style J7 (NFPA MF7)
3MAJ/4MAJ
W dimension = .375
Catalog 0900P-4

Side Thru Hole Style US (NFPA MS8)
1.000
B
1 4
.328 x .205 .203 THRU FOR #10 SHCS
1.750+STROKE .625
2 1.500 3
1.500
Side Tap Style F (NFPA MS9)

4
1.000
.625
1.750+STROKE 2.625+STROKE
#10-32 THREAD, .250 MIN. DEEP 3 TAPPED MTG. HOLES
Head Tap Style MR (NFPA MR1)

#10-32 UNF-2B X .250 MIN. DEEP 1 2 1.125 .125
1.125
2.625+STROKE
B56
Catalog 0900P-4

.130 10-32 UNF - 2A 2 .500
B
3MA/4MA
.130 .500 10-32 UNF - 2A
.500
1.125
1.125

10-32 UNF - 2A 1
2 .500 1.125
B57
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
10-32 UNF - 2A
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4

Threaded Nose Style NS (NFPA MN1)
3.375+STROKE
1.125
2 1-14 UNS-2A .125 INCOMPLETE THREAD .875
WF dimension = 1.125
Cap Pivot Eye Style BE (NFPA MP3)

.438
3.063+STROKE 4
.370
R.445 3 1 .312 3.375+STROKE .375
B58
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Accessories Cylinder Accessories

Note: Pivot Pin Assembly must be ordered separately
Rod Clevis P/N 1458030038
+ .375 + .004 THRU .002 .500
.375
.379
.875 .562 .875
B
3MA/4MA
1.375 SQ.
.125
3/8-24 THREAD TO SLOT
Rod Eye P/N 1458040038

+ .375 + .004 THRU .002 .438 .875 .375 .373
3/8-24 THREAD X .312 DP
.750
Clevis Bracket P/N 1458050038

+ .004 .375 + .002 THRU
1.375 SQ.
.531 1.250 .375
.379
Eye Bracket P/N 1458060038

.375 + .004 THRU + .002 4X C'BORED HOLE FOR #10 SHCS
.750
1.000 SQ.
.437 .937 .312
.373
Pivot Pin Assembly P/N 0856640038

1.145 .374 +.001 -.002
B59
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
.875
1.000 SQ.
LPSO Option
.500
4X C'BORED HOLE FOR #10 SHCS
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
3MAJ and 4MAJ Cylinders Features
Air Cylinders 3MAJ/4MAJ Series
B
Rod lock port for air signal to release rod lock. NPTF port is standard.
3MA or 4MA cylinder for heavy-duty applications and reliable performance.
Manual override shaft for rod lock release during non-production activities. Rod lock automatically springs back to the locked state when override is released and appropriate air signal is absent.
Adjustable Cushions at Both Ends are Standard
Standard NFPA rod end dimensions from the face of the rod lock.
Rod Wiper Outboard fluorocarbon rod wiper protects the cylinder by removing external debris and adherents from the piston rod during the entire stroke. Piston Rod Standard case-hardened (50-64 Rc), hard chrome plated and polished carbon steel piston rod for reliable performance, long rod seal life and low friction. 17-4PH stainless steel available as an option.
B60
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod Lock Features and Specifications
NFPA Non-Lube Pneumatic Cylinder with Manual Override Rod Lock Rod lock versions of the 3MA Series (the 3MAJ) and 4MA Series (the 4MAJ) are available. These rod lock version provides precise load holding with virtually zero backlash and features high accuracy for demanding applications. The rod lock is a spring-activated type with air pressure release and clamps the piston rod to lock it into position. In the absence of an appropriate air signal, full holding force is applied to the piston rod. When a 60 PSI (or greater) air signal is present, the locking device is released. All rod locks include a manual override shaft to free the rod lock without air pressure during non-production activities.
3MAJ and 4MAJ Series Cylinders
B
Some key benefits of the 3MAJ and 4MAJ Series Cylinders:

Bolt-On Modularity As a true cylinder accessory, the rod lock may be removed without affecting the base cylinder (1-1/2" to 5" bores). The same, great cylinder remains intact, allowing the rod lock to bolt-on with minimal length change. This modularity can be extremely important for special installations or while servicing the cylinder. Rod locks for 6" - 8" bores and all Style DD mounts (NFPA MT4) are fastened to the base cylinder using the base cylinders tie rods. See drawings below. Aesthetics we have designed our rod locks with the same anodized aluminum extrusion used for the cylinder endcaps, resulting in a virtually seamless assembly. In addition, we focused every effort to create the shortest overall package, minimizing the need for customers to accommodate significantly longer cylinder lengths. 1-1/2" to 5" Bores Functionality With a holding force corresponding to 100 PSI on the cap end for nearly every bore size, the rod lock can be used for a variety of holding applications. The manual override shaft allows occasional release of the piston rod and automatically returns the rod lock back to the locked state when it is released and the appropriate air signal is absent. The front pilot diameter meets NFPA specifications and facilitates proper installation of the cylinder to customer equipment or cylinder accessories. Ease of Order Entry To order the 3MA or 4MA Series with the rod lock option, just change the product series to 3MAJ or 4MAJ (the J is required for the rod lock option). See model code on page B64 for additional information. 6" to 8" Bores and all Style DD Mounts (NFPA MT4)
B61
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod Lock Features and Specifications 3MAJ and 4MAJ Series Cylinders
NFPA Non-Lube Pneumatic Cylinder with Manual Override Rod Lock Connection Sample Pneumatic Circuit
The signal air for the locking device can be obtained directly from a main air supply, or from the air supply serving the valve that controls the cylinder itself. For controlled ON/OFF operation of the locking device, a separate quick-venting valve is used. The piston rod should not be moving when the locking device is activated. The locking device is not intended to brake a movement in repeated sequences.
NOTE: The 3MAJ and 4MAJ is not intended for use in water service applications, or in environments that have high humidity levels and/or splashing fluids present. NOTE: Exhaust air from the rod lock can be piped away when there are demands for a contaminant-free environment. Operation at pressures lower than 60 PSI may lead to inadvertent engagement of the rod lock device.
3/2 LOCK VALVE (internal pilot)
5/3 CYLINDER VALVE (external pilot)
Other Cylinder and Rod Lock Features:

The 3MAJ and 4MAJ rod lock will operate in both directions, engaging with the same holding force. The 3MAJ and 4MAJ can be mounted in any position. Piston rod rotation is not allowed when the rod lock is engaged (not intended for torsional braking). Rod lock is suitable for infrequent dynamic braking (emergency stops). Since the 3MAJ and 4MAJ rod lock is designed for static applications, repeated dynamic stops will cause rod and/or bearing wear and reduce holding forces. The rated holding force corresponds to static load conditions. If the rated value is exceeded, slipping and other problems may occur. If personal safety is required, an unrelated, redundant safety system is recommended.
Auxiliary Supply Main Supply
1. Lock valve must be maintained energized during cylinder motion, otherwise rod lock is engaged and cylinder valve shifts to mid position. 2. Cylinder valve must be maintained energized during extend or retract. Also keep energized at end of stroke until change of direction is desired. 3. Mid position of 5/3 Cylinder valve may be pressurized outlets if the combination of pressure load on the cylinder and inertia effects of the attached load do not exceed the holding force rating of the rod lock device, including allowance for wear. 4. Do not use cylinder lines for any logic functions pressure levels vary too much.
Basic Rod Lock Specifications

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
Air Chamber Volume (in3)

0.25 0.71 0.68 1.26 1.49 3.20 2.11 6.73 4.78 11.50 9.50 14.08 12.75 22.66 23.21
Engagement Time (seconds)

0.030 0.040 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.070 0.060 0.100 0.100 0.150 0.130 0.175 0.165 0.265 0.265
Minimum Torque Rated Holding to Override Force (lbs) (ft-lbs to hex shaft)
180 314 250 491 491 830 830 1,256 1,256 1,963 1,963 2,830 2,830 5,026 5,026 2 5 5 7 7 17 17 45 45 72 72 135 135 160 160
Note: This specification data applies only to the rod lock part of the 3MAJ and 4MAJ cylinder. For cylinder volume and performance, please use cylinder dimensions and application criteria.
B62
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
B
3MA/4MA B63
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
3MAJ/4MAJ Series Model Code
3MAJ/4MAJ cylinders can be specified by model number by using the table below.
How to Order 3MAJ/4MAJ Series Cylinders for 1-1/2" to 8" Bore J 4MAJ
Series 4MAJ 4MA Rod Lock Cylinder 3MAJ 3MA Rod Lock Cylinder U R B T
2.00
C
U
Ports4 NPTF BSPP BSPT SAE Seals Blank Standard (nitrile seals) V Fluorocarbon seals 2,5 E Fluorocarbon rod wiper and rod seal only 6
1
Piston Rod Number Specify rod code number for required diameter.8
6.000
Stroke Length Specify stroke length required in inches.10
Bore Size 1.501 2.00 2.50 3.25 4.00 5.00 6.00 2 8.00 2
Mounting Style Specify mounting style code (see table on following page).
Cushion Head End Cushioned head end C is required.
Cushion Cap End Cushioned cap end C is required. Piston Rod Thread Type A Standard (UNF Unified Thread) W BSF British Fine M Metric (see page B106) Rod Material Code Blank Standard rod and gland H Standard rod and HI LOAD gland 2 Y 17-4 PH stainless steel rod and standard gland Z 17-4 PH stainless steel rod and HI LOAD gland 2
Piston Type 11 Blank Standard (lipseals and magnetic ring) 1 Lipseals, no magnetic ring 2 Lipseals, no magnetic ring (aluminum piston) 3 Lipseals and magnetic ring (aluminum piston) 4 Bumper seals, no magnetic ring 6 Bumper seals and magnetic ring B Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumpers both ends 3 H Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumper head end 3 C Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumper cap end 3 D Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumpers both ends 3 F Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumper head end 3 R Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumper cap end 3
Special Modification Specify S only for special modification other than rod end, and then describe modification in item notes. (Includes 4MAJ with Linear Position Sensor Option)7 Piston Rod Thread Style 4 8 9 55 3 Small male Intermediate male Short female For use with Split Coupler9 Special (and specify all dimensions required)
1 2 3
5 6 7
Not available with 1" rod diameter (rod number 2) for 1-1/2" bore. Not available with Linear Position Sensor Option (LPSO). Not available for 3MAJ, please specify 4MAJ. Addition of 1/4" bumper results in a 1/4" stroke loss per bumper, per end. For example, a 6" stroke cylinder with 1/4" bumpers at both ends (option B) has an effective stroke of 5-1/2". Port thread styles only for base cylinder. Rod lock port is always NPTF. If a different rod lock port thread style is required, place an S for special in the Special Modification field and indicate the desired rod lock port thread style in the item notes. NPTF cylinder ports are must be ordered for 3MAJ. Fluorocarbon seals for 4MAJ are only for external chemical compatibility applications, not high temperature. Used for external chemical compatibility applications, not high temperature. For Linear Position Sensor Option (LPSO), please include the following information for the Special Modification item notes: a. Sensor part number (see pages B100-B104) b. Sensor position c. Port position (if other than position 1) d. Length of stop tubing, gross stroke and net stroke (if required) LPSO not available for 3MAJ, please specify 4MAJ. Cylinder dimensions will approximate dimensions for 4MAJ. Piston Type option (blank), 3, 6, D, F or R is required. Please consult the Actuator Division for additional information.
Review Piston Rod Selection Chart on page B136 to determine proper piston rod diameter. 9 For additional information regarding this style, refer to page B105. If non-standard Rod Material and Gland Code is required with this option, please place an S for special in Special Modification field and specify Rod Material and Gland Code in the item notes. 10 If a stop tube is required, specify gross stroke (net stroke + stop tube) in the model number, then place an S for special in the Special Modification field and specify the stop tube length in the item notes. Not available with Piston Types (blank) and 1 for 1-1/2" - 5" bore cylinders. Stop tube not available for 3MAJ, please specify 4MAJ. 11 6"-8" bore 4MAJ can accept only Piston Types (blank) and 3. The (blank) piston for 6"-8" bores is aluminum, lipseals, no magnetic ring. Composite pistons not available with oversize rod number 3.
8
How to order 3MAJ/4MAJ Series cylinders with sensors: Sensors must be ordered separately and are not mounted to the cylinder prior to shipment. 1. Cylinder model number must have a Piston Type with a magnetic ring ((blank, thru 5" bore) 3, 6, D, F or R). 2. Please refer to pages B113-B120 for sensor part numbers and specifications. Global, NAMUR and Weld Immune Sensors will fit the 3MAJ/4MAJ Series. 3. Style DD mounts, 6"-8" Bore and other tie rod versions with Global Sensors will require tie rod bracket P8S-TMA0X. Please refer to page B117 for more information.
B64
Catalog 0900P-4
3MAJ/4MAJ Series Mounting Styles 3MAJ/4MAJ Series Mounting Styles

Mounting Code
T J H TB TC TD C F CB G BB BC BE D DB DD KT

Available Bore Sizes 4MAJ-LPSO w/o Stop Tube
2-8 2 - 6** 2 - 6** 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-4 2 - 8** 2 - 8** 2 - 6** 2-8 2 - 8** 2-8
NFPA Mounting Style

MX0 MF1 MF2 MX3 MX2 MX1 MS2 MS4 MS1 MS7 MP1 MP2 MP4 MT1 MT2 MT4 MDX0 No Mount
Description
Head Rectangular Flange Cap Rectangular Flange Tie Rods Extended Head End Tie Rods Extended Cap End Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Side Lug Side Tap Side End Angle Side End Lug Cap Fixed Clevis Cap Detachable Clevis Cap Detachable Eye Head Trunnion Cap Trunnion Intermediate Trunnion Double Rod End, No Mount
4MAJ/3MAJ*
1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 6 1-1/2 - 6 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 4 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 6 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 8 1-1/2 - 8
4MAJ-LPSO w/Stop Tube

2-8 2-6 2 - 6** 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-4 2 - 8** 2 - 8** 2 - 6** 2-8 2 - 8** 2-8
B
3MA/4MA
* 3MAJ utilizes base 3MA cylinder and is available in 1-1/2" to 5" bore sizes. Mounting style codes C, D and DB not available for 3MAJ ** May interfere with mounting. Please provide clearance for Linear Position Sensor overhang (see page B99).
No Mount Basic Style T
Tie Rods Ext. Cap End Style TC
(NFPA MX0) Tie Rods Ext. Both Ends Style TD
(NFPA MF2) Side Tap Style F
Cap Fixed Clevis Style BB
(NFPA MP1) Intermediate Trunnion
(NFPA MP2) Style DD
(NFPA MT1) Style KT
(NFPA MT2)
(NFPA MT4)
(NFPA MDX0)
B65
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
Cap Detachable Clevis Cap Detachable Eye Style BE Style BC
Head Trunnion Style D
Cap Trunnion Style DB
(NFPA MX1)
(NFPA MS2)
(NFPA MS4)
(NFPA MS1)
(NFPA MS7)
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
3MAJ/4MAJ General Specifications General Specifications

NFPA interchangeable* Bore sizes 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2", 3-1/4", 4", 5", 6" and 8" Strokes available in any practical stroke length Rod diameters 5/8", 1", 1-3/8" and 1-3/4" Rod end styles 4 standard, specials available Single rod end or double rod ends Cushions required and adjustable at both ends Operating pressure 100 PSIG (6.9 Bar)** maximum air service, except for 2" bore with 1" rod (rated at 80 PSIG)

60 PSIG (4.1 Bar) minimum air pressure to release rod lock Media dry, filtered air Temperature range -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) Mounting styles 18 standard styles
* NFPA standards do not specify rod lock cylinder dimensions. The base 3MA or 4MA cylinder and mounting accessories subscribe to NFPA standards. ** The pressure ratings are for these devices as stated. However, the rated holding forces of the rod locks are as stated on page 62. For material options, including seals and piston rods, please see Material Specifications on next page.
Cylinder Weights 3MAJ and 4MAJ

Bore (inch)
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8

No Mount Double Rod Base Wt. (lbs.)
4.66 6.55 7.84 8.46 10.24 15.15 19.46 22.32 26.37 33.84 36.89 60.63 65.41 100.15 104.90
Rod (inch)
0.625 0.625 1.00 0.625 1.00 1.00 1.375 1.00 1.375 1.00 1.375 1.375 1.75 1.375 1.75
No Mount Single Rod 3MAJ and 4MAJ Base Wt. (lbs.)

4.23 5.90 6.49 7.75 8.56 13.95 15.93 20.80 22.29 31.20 32.72 55.50 57.61 94.50 96.63
Mounting Code
All except D, DB, DD D, DB, DD (4MAJ only)
Position
2 3
Per Inch (lbs.)

0.20 0.21 0.35 0.23 0.37 0.42 0.62 0.49 0.69 0.61 0.81 0.87 1.13 1.25 1.51
Per Inch (lbs.)

0.28 0.30 0.58 0.31 0.60 0.64 1.05 0.71 1.12 0.84 1.24 1.30 1.82 1.68 2.20
Standard Cylinder Port Sizes***

Bore
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8
NPTF / BSPT
3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4
BSPP
G3/8 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 G1/2 G1/2 G3/4 G3/4
SAE
6 6 6 10 10 10 12 12
Port thread styles for base cylinder only. Rod lock port is always NPTF. If a different rod lock port thread style is required, place an S for special in the Special Modification field and indicate the desired rod lock port thread style in the item notes. Standard rod lock port sizes are detailed in cylinder dimension tables. ***3MAJ only available with NPTF ports.

Bore (inch)
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8
J, H
0.51 0.76 1.13 2.76 4.05 6.46 10.74 N/A
D, DB
0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 1.22 1.22
Weight (lbs) by Mounting Style BB CB, G DD BE

0.15 0.26 0.38 0.98 1.35 1.20 2.91 2.91 0.36 065 1.05 1.38 2.20 4.29 5.88 7.84 1.70 2.38 3.00 5.35 6.75 8.77 15.52 25.01 0.23 0.32 0.42 1.26 1.62 1.26 2.91 N/A
C
0.15 0.15 0.15 0.35 0.35 0.57 0.69 0.67
BC
0.20 0.29 0.41 1.06 1.49 2.41 11.38 17.31
B66
Catalog 0900P-4
3MAJ/4MAJ Material Specifications

Same as 3MA for 3MAJ, and 4MA for 4MAJ, with the following additions/changes: Piston rod .................... Case-hardened, (other materials chrome plated carbon steel not available) (standard). 17-4 PH stainless steel, chrome plated. Rod lock housing ......... Black anodized aluminum alloy Rod lock wiper ............. Fluorocarbon Manual override shaft .. 416 stainless steel Rod lock screws .......... Black oxided steel alloy
B
3MA/4MA B67
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Selection How to Select a 3MAJ and 4MAJ Cylinder
Parker cylinders are available based on air operating pressure. The many styles, sizes and optional features available assure that your application requirements are precisely met. To select a cylinder, follow these simple steps: Step 1 - Determine the correct cylinder bore size necessary to achieve required force using the available operating pressure.
Step 2 - Determine the series cylinder to use, based on operating pressure. Step 3 - Turn to the appropriate cylinder selection section. Select the mounting style that fits your installation needs. Determine the bore and rod sizes available for the model you select. Then complete model selection. - Choose a rod end style and the desired rod end accessories. - Size the cylinder to meet your application requirements. Step 4 - Consider the following conditions which may require further modifications to the cylinder you have selected. Application Condition Quick Starts or Stops Check the Following Confirm that determined thrust is sufficient to accelerate or decelerate cylinder and load within prescribed distance. Mandatory cushions can be used to reduce shock during deceleration, check that peak pressures will be within tolerable limits. Check whether stop tube (4MAJ with aluminum piston only) is required to prevent excessive bearing loads and wear. Determine if standard size piston rod is strong enough to accommodate intended load. See Piston Rod Selection Chart or Application Engineering section for recommendations. Determine if standard size piston rod is strong enough to accommodate intended load. - Piston Bumper Seals (1-1/2" through 5") - Piston Bumpers (1-1/2" through 4") - Port and Cushion Adjust Relocation - Port Thread Styles - Multiple Ports - Adjustable Sensors - Linear Position Sensing Option (LPSO) - Double Rod End - Rod End Modifications - Stop Tube - Mixed Mountings - Shock Absorber on Cap End - Round Tube and Tie Rod Construction - LECTROFLUOR Coating - Air Cylinder/Valve Combination (ACVB) - Par-Check for smooth hydraulic control
Long Push Stroke High-column Loading Long Push Stroke Long Horizontal Stroke Options and Modifications (4MAJ only, please refer to 3MA section regarding 3MAJ option availability beyond model code)
For a guided version of the 4MAJ Series, please see the HB Series in Section F.
B68
Catalog 0900P-4
3MAJ/4MAJ Single Rod Dimensions

LAF WF A KK OR CC MM VD
3MAJ/4MAJ Series Single Rod Dimensions 1-1/2" to 5" Bore Size

No Mount Basic Style T (NFPA MX0)
B
3MA/4MA
P + STROKE EE J LF + STROKE
B NA D WRENCH FLATS K2
Y R SQ. 4 1 N2 E SQ. NR N3 N1 VD WF EF H .23 EF MM 3 B A KK K2 Q
Bore Rod Size No.

1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Thread Rod Dia. Style 8 Style 4 & 9 MM CC KK

5/8 1/2-20 5/8 1/2-20 1 7/8-14 5/8 1/2-20 1 7/8-14 1 7/8-14 1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 1 7/8-14 1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 1 7/8-14 1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-14
A
0.750 0.750 1.125 0.750 1.125 1.125 1.625 1.125 1.625 1.125 1.625
AA
2.020 2.600 2.600 3.100 3.100 3.900 3.900 4.700 4.700 5.800 5.800
+.000 -.002 B
1.124 1.124 1.499 1.124 1.499 1.499 1.999 1.499 1.999 1.499 1.999
D
1/2 1/2 7/8 1/2 7/8 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/8
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
EE EF (NPTF) (NPTF)
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
G
1.438 1.375 1.375 1.344 1.344 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594
H
2.625 2.875 3.875 2.875 4.000 4.500 4.875 4.875 5.125 5.375 5.750
J
0.938 0.937 0.937 0.938 0.938 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.219 1.219
Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
K2
0.250 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500
LAF
1.750 1.750 2.500 1.750 2.500 2.500 3.250 2.500 3.250 2.500 3.250
N1
0.220 0.340 0.338 0.346 0.346 0.631 0.813 0.625 0.771 0.720 0.720
N2
0.140 0.130 0.146 0.150 0.148 0.180 0.247 0.240 0.276 0.220 0.220
Hex N3
5/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8
NA
0.563 0.563 0.938 0.563 0.938 0.938 1.313 0.938 1.313 0.938 1.313
NR
0.190 0.265 0.275 0.265 0.265 0.340 0.350 0.500 0.490 0.500 0.490
Q
0.715 0.895 1.065 0.755 1.120 1.510 1.645 1.725 1.679 1.995 2.330
R
1.430 1.840 1.840 2.190 2.190 2.760 2.760 3.320 3.320 4.100 4.100
VD
0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.625 0.500 0.750 0.500 0.750
WF
1.000 1.000 1.375 1.000 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625
Y
4.500 4.750 6.125 4.813 6.313 6.938 7.563 7.313 7.813 7.813 8.438
Add Stroke LF
6.250 6.500 7.500 6.625 7.750 8.750 9.125 9.125 9.375 9.875 10.250
P
2.313 2.313 2.313 2.375 2.375 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.875 2.875
B69
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
D WRENCH FLATS
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
3MAJ/4MAJ Rod End Dimensions Rod End Dimensions 1-1/2" to 5" Bore Size

LAF WF A VD
LAF WF A VD
B
MM B
KK MM B
CC
NA D WRENCHFLATS
K2
NA D WRENCHFLATS
K2
WF A KK
VD MM R1/16 AM
MM B NA
AF K2 AE AD WG K2
D WRENCHFLATS
Rod End Dimensions

1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1 1 1/2-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 1/2-20 7/8-14 7/8-14 7/8-14 7/8-14 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-14
A
0.750 0.750 1.125 0.750 1.125 1.125 1.625 1.125 1.625 1.125 1.625
AD
0.625 0.625 0.938 0.625 0.938 0.938 1.063 0.938 1.063 0.938 1.063
AE
0.250 0.250 0.375 0.250 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375
AF
0.375 0.375 0.688 0.375 0.688 0.688 0.875 0.688 0.875 0.688 0.875
AM
0.570 0.570 0.950 0.570 0.950 0.950 1.320 0.950 1.320 0.950 1.320
+.000 -.002 B
1.124 1.124 1.499 1.124 1.499 1.499 1.999 1.499 1.999 1.499 1.999
D
1/2 1/2 7/8 1/2 7/8 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/8
K2
0.250 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500
LAF
1.750 1.750 2.500 1.750 2.500 2.500 3.250 2.500 3.250 2.500 3.250
NA
0.563 0.563 0.938 0.563 0.938 0.938 1.313 0.938 1.313 0.938 1.313
VD
0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.625 0.500 0.750 0.500 0.750
WF
1.000 1.000 1.375 1.000 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625
WG
1.750 1.750 2.375 1.750 2.375 2.375 2.750 2.375 2.750 2.375 2.750
1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12

B70
Catalog 0900P-4
1-1/2" to 5" Bore Size K-type 3MAJ/4MAJ


1-1/2" to 5" Bore Size K-type 3MAJ/4MAJ
Mounting Styles for Single Rod Models C CB D DD F G J T TB TD
Corresponding Mounting Styles for Double Rod Models KC KCB KD KDD KF KG KJ KT KTB KTD
B
ZM + 2 X STROKE Y WF PK+STROKE LG+STROKE EE 1
MM ROD END #1 K2 G G ROD END #2

Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
EE (NPTF)
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
G
1.438 1.375 1.375 1.344 1.344 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594
K2
0.250 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500
WF
1.000 1.000 1.375 1.000 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625
Y
4.500 4.750 6.125 4.813 6.313 6.938 7.563 7.313 7.813 7.813 8.438
LG
6.750 7.000 8.000 7.125 8.250 9.250 9.625 9.625 9.875 10.313 10.688 LF
PK
2.375 2.375 2.375 2.375 2.375 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.813 2.813 P
SAK
8.750 9.000 9.125
Add Stroke XAK SSK

8.750 9.000 9.125 3.375 3.375 3.375 3.500 3.500 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.563 3.563 SS C
SNK
2.250 2.250 2.250 2.375 2.375 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.813 2.813 SN F
SEK
9.000 9.625 10.000
XEK
8.875 9.313 9.563
Add 2X Stroke ZM
8.750 9.000 9.125
10.000 10.375 10.250 10.625 11.750 11.875 12.125 12.500 12.125 12.250 12.375 12.750 13.063 13.063 13.438 13.688 SA CB XA
10.625 10.688 10.750 11.125 11.063 11.000 12.250 12.125 12.000 12.625 12.750 12.875 12.875 12.625 12.375 13.125 13.125 13.125 SE G XE 13.063 13.938 All
All Styles
B71
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions 1-1/2" to 5" Bore Sizes


LA
UF 1
ZJ+STROKE LB+STROKE
R1
4 3 E TF
FB 4HOLES
Note: Style J has a W dimension instead of WF and a LA dimension instead of LAF because of the flange installation. Please use dimensions W and LA regarding rod ends only for Style J. For reference, WF = W + F and LA = W + A. Cap Rectangular Flange Style H (NFPA MF2)
ZF+STROKE LB+STROKE UF 1 4 3 E TF E
R1
FB 4 HOLES

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
Add Stroke A
0.750 0.750 1.125 0.750 1.125 1.125 1.625 1.125 1.625 1.125 1.625
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
F
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
FB
0.313 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563
LA
1.375 1.375 2.125 1.375 2.125 1.875 2.625 1.875 2.625 1.875 2.625
R1
1.430 1.840 1.840 2.190 2.190 2.760 2.760 3.320 3.320 4.100 4.100
TF
2.750 3.375 3.375 3.875 3.875 4.688 4.688 5.438 5.438 6.625 6.625
UF
3.375 4.125 4.125 4.625 4.625 5.500 5.500 6.250 6.250 7.625 7.625
W
0.625 0.625 1.000 0.625 1.000 0.750 1.000 0.750 1.000 0.750 1.000
LB
6.625 6.875 7.875 7.000 8.125 9.375 9.750 9.750 10.000 10.500 10.875
ZF
7.625 7.875 9.250 8.000 9.500 10.750 11.375 11.125 11.625 11.875 12.500
ZJ
7.250 7.500 8.875 7.625 9.125 10.125 10.750 10.500 11.000 11.250 11.875
B72
Catalog 0900P-4

Tie Rods Extended Head End Mount Style TB (NFPA MX3)
1 E SQ. 4 3 R SQ. 2 AA
DD
B
BB
1 E SQ. 4 3 R SQ. 2 AA K BB
DD
1 E SQ. 4 3 R SQ. 2 AA
DD
DD
BB
BB

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
AA
2.020 2.600 2.600 3.100 3.100 3.900 3.900 4.700 4.700 5.800 5.800
BB
1.000 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.813 1.813
DD
1/4-28 5/16-24 5/16-24 5/16-24 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
K
0.250 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.438 0.438
R
1.430 1.840 1.840 2.190 2.190 2.760 2.760 3.320 3.320 4.100 4.100 Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
B73
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Mount Style TD (NFPA MX1)
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Tie Rods Extended Cap End Mount Style TC (NFPA MX2)
3MA/4MA
Catalog 0900P-4

Side Lug Mount Style C (only 4MAJ) (NFPA MS2)
E 1 AB 4HOLES ST SW TS US SW LH SW G SS+STROKE J SW
4 3 SW
SW
XS

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
AB
0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563 0.563 0.563 0.813 0.813
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
G
1.438 1.375 1.375 1.344 1.344 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594 1.594
J
0.938 0.937 0.937 0.938 0.938 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.219 1.219
+/-.003 LH
0.993 1.243 1.243 1.493 1.493 1.868 1.868 2.243 2.243 2.743 2.743
ST
0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.000 1.000
SW
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.688 0.688
TS
2.750 3.250 3.250 3.750 3.750 4.750 4.750 5.500 5.500 6.875 6.875
US
3.500 4.000 4.000 4.500 4.500 5.750 5.750 6.500 6.500 8.250 8.250
XS
4.000 4.250 5.625 4.250 5.750 6.375 7.000 6.750 7.250 7.438 8.063
Add Stroke SS
2.875 2.875 2.875 3.000 3.000 3.250 3.250 3.250 3.250 3.125 3.125
Side Tap Mount Style F (NFPA MS4)

E SQ. 4
2 TH 3 TN NT THREAD, ND DEEP 4 TAPPED MTG. HOLES XT SN + STROKE

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
ND
0.375 0.438 0.375 0.625 0.625 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.938 0.938
NT
1/4-20 5/16-18 5/16-18 3/8-16 3/8-16 1/2-13 1/2-13 1/2-13 1/2-13 5/8-11 5/8-11
+/-.003 TH
0.993 1.243 1.243 1.493 1.493 1.868 1.868 2.243 2.243 2.743 2.743
Add Stroke TN
0.625 0.875 0.875 1.250 1.250 1.500 1.500 2.063 2.063 2.688 2.688
XT
4.563 4.813 6.188 4.813 6.313 6.938 7.563 7.313 7.813 7.813 8.438
SN
2.250 2.250 2.250 2.375 2.375 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.875 2.875 Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
B74
Catalog 0900P-4

Side End Angle Mount Style CB (NFPA MS1)
E 4 E 3 1
AB 6HOLES
B
3MA/4MA
AT
2 AH AO AL
AT SA+STROKE
AL1
AO

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
AB
0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563 0.563 0.563 0.688 0.688
AH
1.188 1.438 1.438 1.625 1.625 1.938 1.938 2.250 2.250 2.750 2.750
AL
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.250 1.250 1.875 1.875 1.375 1.375
AL1
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.375 1.375
AO
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.625 0.625
AT
0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.188 0.188
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
S
1.250 1.750 1.750 2.250 2.250 2.750 2.750 3.500 3.500 4.250 4.250
Add Stroke SA
8.250 8.500 9.500 8.625 9.750 11.250 11.625 12.250 12.625 13.000
ZE+STROKE XE+STROKE 1 E SQ. 4 E T EB 4HOLES ET 3 R ET 2 GH EO EM SE+STROKE EL EO
Cylinder Dimensions Style G

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
Add Stroke E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500
EB
0.281 0.344 0.344 0.344 0.344 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406
EL
0.750 0.938 0.938 1.063 1.063 0.875 0.875 1.000 1.000
EM
1.125 1.313 1.313 1.438 1.438 1.500 1.500 1.625 1.625
EO
0.250 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.313 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375
ET
0.563 0.688 0.688 0.813 0.813 1.000 1.000 1.188 1.188
+/-.003 GH
0.993 1.243 1.243 1.493 1.493 1.868 1.868 2.243 2.243
R
1.430 1.840 1.840 2.190 2.190 2.760 2.760 3.320 3.320
SE
8.125 8.750 9.750 9.125 10.250 11.125 11.500 11.750 12.000
XE
8.000 8.438 9.813 8.688 10.188 11.000 11.625 11.500 12.000
ZE
8.250 8.750 10.125 9.000 10.500 11.375 12.000 11.875 12.375
B75
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
Side End Lug Mount Style G (NFPA MS7)
LPSO Option
12.500
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4

Cap Fixed Clevis Mount Style BB (NFPA MP1)

ZC+STROKE LB+STROKE CD LR MR F XC+STROKE L CB CW 3 CW ESQ. 1 2 4
Cap Detachable Clevis Mount Style BC (NFPA MP2)

ZD1+STROKE LB+STROKE CD E SQ. 1 2 L1 XD+STROKE F MR1 CB CW 3 CW 4

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
CB
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250
+.000 -.002 CD
0.501 0.501 0.501 0.501 0.501 0.751 0.751 0.751 0.751 0.751 0.751
Add Stroke CW
0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
F
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
L
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
L1
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250
LR
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MR
0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.938 0.938 0.938 0.938 0.938 0.938
MR1
0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.750 0.750 0.750
LB
6.625 6.875 7.875 7.000 8.125
XC
8.000 8.250 8.375
XD
8.375 8.625 8.750
ZC
8.625 8.875 9.000
ZD1
8.875 9.125 9.250
9.625 10.000 10.250 10.500 9.875 10.250 10.500 10.750
9.375 11.375 12.000 12.313 12.750 9.750 12.000 12.625 12.938 13.375 9.750 11.750 12.375 12.688 13.125
0.750 10.000 12.250 12.875 13.188 13.625 0.750 10.500 12.500 13.125 13.438 13.875 0.750 10.875 13.125 13.750 14.063 14.500 Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
B76
Catalog 0900P-4

Cap Detachable Eye Mount* Style BE (NFPA MP4)
ZD2+STROKE LB+STROKE CD1 E SQ. 1 2 MR2 F XD+STROKE L1 CB 3 4
B
3MA/4MA
ZD2
9.000 9.250 10.625 9.438 10.313 12.875 13.500 13.250 13.750 14.000 14.625
*Not available for 5" bore 3MAJ, please specify 4MAJ

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Add Stroke E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
CB
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250
F
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
L1
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250
MR2
0.625 0.625 0.625 0.688 0.688 0.875 0.875 0.875 0.875 0.875 0.875
LB
6.625 6.875 7.875 7.000 8.125 9.375 9.750 9.750 10.000 10.500 10.875
XD
8.375 8.625 10.000 8.750 10.250 12.000 12.625 12.375 12.875 13.125 13.750
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750
B77
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
Rod Dia. MM
+.002 +.004 CD1
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4

Head Trunnion Mount Style D (only 4MAJ) (NFPA MT1)
UT
B
E 4 TL
2 TD 3 E TL XG
Cap Trunnion Mount Style DB (only 4MAJ) (NFPA MT2)

UT 1 E 4 3 TL E TL XJ+STROKE 2 TD
Cylinder Dimensions Styles D and DB

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
+.000 -.001 TD
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TL
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UT
4.000 4.500 4.500 5.000 5.000 5.750 5.750 6.500 6.500 7.500 7.500
XG
4.375 4.625 6.000 4.625 6.125 6.750 7.375 7.125 7.625 7.625 8.250
XJ
6.750 7.000 8.375 7.125 8.625 9.500 10.125 9.875 10.375 10.625 11.250
B78
Catalog 0900P-4

Intermediate Trunnion Mount Style DD (NFPA MT4)
UM E SQ. 1 UV 4 2 TD
BD
B
3MA/4MA
TL
TL
XI
Cylinder Dimensions Style DD

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
Rod No.
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8
E
2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 4.500 4.500 5.500 5.500
BD
1.250 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000
+.000 -.001 TD
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TL
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TM
2.500 3.000 3.000 3.500 3.500 4.500 4.500 5.250 5.250 6.250 6.250
UM
4.500 5.000 5.000 5.500 5.500 6.500 6.500 7.250 7.250 8.250 8.250
UV
2.500 3.000 3.000 3.500 3.500 4.250 4.250 5.000 5.000 6.000 6.000
Min. XI
9.000 9.937 11.312 9.937 11.437 12.500 13.312 13.375 13.875 14.500 15.125
Min. Stroke
3.250 4.000 4.000 3.875 3.875 4.375 4.375 4.875 4.875 5.125 5.125
Note: Tie rod nuts for Style DD have a slot instead of external hex. Note: Style DD requires Minimum Stroke per table.
B79
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3 TM
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions - 6" to 8" Bore Sizes

No Mount Style T (NFPA MX0)
LAF A WF VD
MM B
NA
KK or CC D WRENCH FLATS K For dimensions of all standard rod end styles, please see page B81.
Y H R SQ. 4 MM E SQ. 3 1 N3 N2 AA 2 NR D WRENCH FLATS N1 VD EF B KK .26 EF Q A
P + STROKE
EE
WF
LF + STROKE

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4

1-1/4 - 12 1-1/2 - 12 1-1/4 - 12 1-1/2 - 12 1-14 1-1/4 - 12 1-14 1-1/4 - 12
A
1.625 2.000 1.625 2.000
AA
6.900 6.900 9.100 9.100
+.000 -.002 B
1.999 2.374 1.999 2.374
D
1-1/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/2
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
EE EF (NPTF) (NPTF)
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
G
1.910 1.910 1.810 1.810
H
6.375 6.875 6.625 7.125
J
1.410 1.410 1.440 1.440
Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
K
0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563
LAF
3.250 3.875 3.250 3.875
N1
1.165 1.495 1.305 1.570
N2
0.177 0.177 0.177 0.177
Hex N3
1-5/16 1-5/16 1-5/16 1-5/16
Add Stroke NA
1.313 1.688 1.313 1.688
NR
0.750 0.740 0.740 0.740
Q
2.705 3.055 2.885 3.145
R
4.880 4.880 6.440 6.440
VD
0.755 0.875 0.755 0.875
WF
1.625 1.875 1.625 1.875
Y
9.188 9.938 9.375
LF 11.375 11.875 11.750
P 3.125 3.125 3.250 3.250
10.125 12.250
B80
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod End Dimensions 6" to 8" Bore Sizes Rod End Dimensions 6" to 8" Bore Sizes
LAF A WF VD MM B KK D WRENCH FLATS K

LAF A WF VD MM B CC D WRENCH FLATS K
B
3MA/4MA
NA
NA

WF A KK MM B NA DWRENCH FLATS K VD
MM R1/16 AM AF AE AD WG K
Rod End Dimensions

6 8 1 3 1 3
A
1.625 2.000 1.625 2.000
AD
1.063 1.313 1.063 1.313
AE
0.375 0.500 0.375 0.500
AF
0.875 1.125 0.875 1.125
AM
1.320 1.700 1.320 1.700
D
1-1/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/2
K
0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563
LAF
3.250 3.875 3.250 3.875
NA
1.313 1.688 1.313 1.688
VD
0.755 0.875 0.755 0.875
WF
1.625 1.875 1.625 1.875
WG
2.750 3.125 2.750 3.125
1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 1-3/4 1-1/2 - 12 1-3/8 1-1/4 - 12 1-3/4 1-1/2 - 12
1-14 1-1/4 - 12 1-14 1-1/4 - 12
1.999 2.374 1.999 2.374

B81
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
+.000 -.002 B
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4


K-type drawings
Mounting Styles for Single Rod Models C CB D DD F J T TB TD Corresponding Mounting Styles for Double Rod Models KC KCB KD KDD KF KJ KT KTB KTD
ZM + 2 X STROKE Y WF PK + STROKE LG +STROKE EE
MM ROD END #1 G ROD END #2 K

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
EE (NPTF)
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
G
1.910 1.910 1.810 1.810
K
0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563
WF
1.625 1.875 1.625 1.875
Y
9.188 9.938 9.375 10.125
LG
11.875 12.375 12.125 12.625 LF
PK
3.125 3.125 3.250 3.250 P
Add Stroke SAK XAK

14.625 15.125 15.750 16.250 SA CB 14.875 15.625 15.563 16.313 XA
SSK
4.125 4.125 4.125 4.125 SS C
SNK
3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125 SN F
Add 2X Stroke ZM
15.125 16.125 15.375 16.375 All
All Styles
B82
Catalog 0900P-4

Head Rectangular Flange Mount Style J (NFPA MF1) (only 6" Bore)
UF 1
LA W
ZJ + STROKE LB + STROKE
B
3MA/4MA
R 4
TF
LB + STROKE 1
3 E TF
FB 4 HOLES

Bore Size 6 Rod No. 1 3 Rod Dia. MM 1-3/8 1-3/4 Add Stroke A 1.625 2.000 E 6.500 6.500 F 0.750 0.750 FB 0.563 0.563 LA 2.500 3.125 R 4.880 4.880 TF 7.625 7.625 UF 8.625 8.625 W 0.875 1.125 LB 12.125 12.625 ZF 13.750 14.500 ZJ 13.000 13.750
B83
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
ZF + STROKE
UF
LPSO Option
Cap Rectangular Flange Mount Style H (NFPA MF2) (only 6" Bore)
ACVB Option
Note: Style J has a W dimension instead of WF and a LA dimension instead of LAF because of the flange installation. Please use dimensions W and LA regarding rod ends only for Style J. For reference, WF = W + F and LA = W + A.
3MAJ/4MAJ
3 E
FB 4 HOLES
Catalog 0900P-4

Tie Rods Extended Head End Mount Style TB (NFPA MX3)
1
DD
E SQ.
2 AA K BB
3 R SQ.
Tie Rods Extended Cap End Mount Style TC (NFPA MX2)

1 DD
E SQ.
2 AA K BB
3 R SQ.
Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Mount Style TD (NFPA MX1)

1 DD DD
E SQ.
2 AA 3 R SQ. BB K K BB

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
AA
6.900 6.900 9.100 9.100
BB
1.813 1.813 2.313 2.313
DD
1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 5/8-18
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
K
0.438 0.438 0.563 0.563
R
B84
Catalog 0900P-4

Side End Angle Mount Style CB (NFPA MS1)
E 4
AB 4 HOLES 1 S
B
AT
2 AH AO AL
AT AL SA + STROKE AO

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
AB
0.813 0.813 0.813 0.813
AH
3.250 3.250 4.250 4.250
AL
1.375 1.375 1.813 1.813
AO
0.625 0.625 0.688 0.688
AT
0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
S
5.250 5.250 7.125 7.125
Add Stroke SA
14.125 14.625 15.375 15.875
Side Tap Mount Style F (NFPA MS4)
E SQ.
2 TH 3 TN NT THREAD, ND DEEP 4 TAPPED MTG. HOLES
XT
SN + STROKE

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
ND
1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
NT
3/4-10 3/4-10 3/4-10 3/4-10
+/-.003 TH
3.243 3.243 4.243 4.243
TN
3.250 3.250 4.500 4.500
XT
9.188 9.938 9.438 10.188
Add Stroke SN
B85
Catalog 0900P-4

Side Lug Mount Style C (NFPA MS2)
E 1
B
E 4
AB 4 HOLES
2 LH SW 3 TS US SW ST SW XS G SS + STROKE J
SW
SW
SW

Bore Size
6
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
AB
0.813 0.813 0.813 0.813
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
G
1.910 1.910 1.810 1.810
J
1.410 1.410 1.440 1.440
+/-.003 LH
3.243 3.243 4.243 4.243
ST
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
SW
0.688 0.688 0.688 0.688
TS
7.875 7.875 9.875 9.875
US
9.250 9.250 11.250 11.250
XS
8.688 9.438 8.938 9.688
Add Stroke SS
3.625 3.625 3.750 3.750
B86
Catalog 0900P-4

ZC + STROKE LB + STROKE CD E SQ. 1
B
4
2 MR F L CB CW E SQ. CD 1 3 CW
XC + STROKE ZD + STROKE LB + STROKE
2 MR1 L1 F XD + STROKE CW 3 CB CW

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
CB
1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
CW
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
F
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750
L
0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750
L1
1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
LR
1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250
MR
1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
XC
XD
ZC
ZD
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
1.001 1.001 1.001 1.001
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
12.125 14.500 15.250 15.625 16.250 12.625 15.250 16.000 16.375 17.000 12.500 14.875 15.625 16.000 16.625 13.000 15.625 16.375 16.750 17.375
2 MR2 F XD + STROKE L1 3 CB

Bore Size
6
Rod No.
1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4
CB
1.500 1.500
+.002 +.004 CD1

1.000 1.000
E
6.500 6.500
F
0.750 0.750
L1
1.500 1.500
MR2
1.125 1.125
Add Stroke LB
12.125 12.625
XD
15.250 16.000
ZD1
16.375 17.125
B87
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
Cap Detachable Eye Mount Style BE (NFPA MP4) (only 6" Bore)
ZD1 + STROKE LB + STROKE CD1
E SQ.
2A/2AN 2MNR
Rod Dia. MM
+.000 -.002 CD
Add Stroke MR1 LB
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
LR
Catalog 0900P-4

Head Trunnion Mount Style D (NFPA MT1)
UT 1
B
E 4 TL
2 TD 3 E TL XG
Cap Trunnion Mount Style DB (NFPA MT2)
UT 1
2 TD 3
TL
TL
XJ + STROKE
Cylinder Dimensions Styles D and DB

Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
+.000 -.001 TD
1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
TL
1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
UT
9.250 9.250 11.250 11.250
XG
9.000 9.750 9.250 10.000
XJ
12.250 13.000 12.625 13.375
B88
Catalog 0900P-4

Intermediate Trunnion Mount Style DD (NFPA MT4)
UM 1
BD
B
TD XI TL
3 E SQ. TL TM
Bore Size
6 8
Rod No.
1 3 1 3
Rod Dia. MM
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
E
6.500 6.500 8.500 8.500
BD
2.500 2.500 2.500 2.500
+.000 -.001 TD
1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
TL
1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
TM
7.625 7.625 9.750 9.750
UM
10.375 10.375 12.500 12.500
UV
7.000 7.000 9.500 9.500
Min. XI
16.750 17.500 17.625 18.375
Min. Stroke
6.125 6.125 6.500 6.500
Note: Style DD requires Minimum Stroke per table.
B89
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
Cylinder Dimensions Style DD
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
UV
Catalog 0900P-4
How To Order ACVB Option
Air Cylinders 3MA/4MA ACVB
How to Order ACVB Option fully assembled to 3MA or 4MA Cylinder 2.00
Bore Size 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.25 4.00 5.00 Double Rod Cylinder Specify K only if double rod cylinder is required. Mounting Style Specify mounting style code per available 3MA or 4MA mount. Cushion Head End Blank Non-cushioned head end C Cushioned head end Piston Type Blank Standard (lipseals and magnetic ring) 1 Lipseals, no magnetic ring 2 Lipseals, no magnetic ring (aluminum piston) 3 Lipseals and magnetic ring (aluminum piston) 4 Bumper seals, no magnetic ring 6 Bumper seals and magnetic ring B Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumpers both ends H Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumper head end C Lipseals, 1/4" thick bumper cap end D Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumpers both ends F Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumper head end R Lipseals and magnetic ring, 1/4" thick bumper cap end Special Modification Specify S for ACVB options and any other special modification other than rod end. See examples below.
4MA
Series 3MA 4MA U
U
Ports NPTF
1
Piston Rod Number See 3MA/ 4MA section for more details.
6.000
Stroke Length Specify stroke length required in inches. Cushion Cap End Blank Non-cushioned cap end C Cushioned cap end
Seals Blank Standard (nitrile seals) E Fluorocarbon rod wiper and rod seal only M Metallic rod wiper, nitrile seals* A
Piston Rod Thread Type Standard (UNF Unified Thread) W BSF British Fine M Metric (see page B106) Rod Material and Gland Code Blank Standard rod and gland H Standard rod and HI LOAD gland* Y 17-4 PH stainless steel rod and standard gland Z 17-4 PH stainless steel rod and HI LOAD gland* J 303 stainless steel rod and standard gland K 303 stainless steel rod and HI LOAD gland* S 316 stainless steel rod and standard gland T 316 stainless steel rod and HI LOAD gland* *4MA only. ACVB Minimum Stroke Requirements** Bore 1.50 2.00 2.50 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.25 4.00 5.00 3MA/4MA 0.500 0.500 0.438 5.813 5.813 5.750 5.500 5.500 5.250 Compact Manifold **For desired strokes less than the minimum requirement, specify a stop tube for the cylinder assembly. Total stroke should be (desired net stroke) + (stop tube length to help exceed minimum stroke). Stop tube only available for 4MA with aluminum piston. Example: 1.50" bore 4MA with 5.000 of desired net stroke: Gross stroke = 5.813" Stop tube = 0.813" Net stroke = 5.000" Note: place gross stroke in cylinder model number and specify stop tube length and net stroke in the item notes.
Piston Rod Thread Style 4 8 9 55 3 Small male Intermediate male Short female For use with Split Coupler Special (and specify all dimensions required)
Example
2.00 CJ3MAUS14AC 6.000 S = ACVB Valve Combination S = 3C2B54 Manifold Code (See following page.)
Flow Control Option

Add S = with SP37 Flow Controls to item notes
Muffler Option
Add S = with EM Mufflers to item notes
For ACVB with the 2A Series, please use the 2A Series Model Code and specify the following in the item notes: S = ACVB Valve Combination S = (Manifold Code from following page)
Full Manifold
B90
Catalog 0900P-4
How To Order ACVB Option ACVB Series Valve/Manifold Codes
Valve Series 3 5 6 B3 B5 B6 A B 0 Manifold Type / Location C D F G Compact Manifold / Cap End (For use with B3 valve only) Compact Manifold / Head End (For use with B3 valve only) Full Manifold / Cap End (For use with B3, B5 or B6 valves) Full Manifold / Head End (For use with B3, B5 or B6 valves)
Pilot / Source Internal / Port #1 (B5, B6 only) Internal / Port #1 Vented (B3 only) None / Remote Voltage
B
4 5 X 24 VDC 110 VAC Remote Pilot
Connector / Valve Series Available (Connector can be rotated in 90 increments for Options A-H) 0 None / B3, B5, B6 (Remote Pilot) 5 15mm 3-PIN DIN 43650C / B3, B5, B6 (Male Connector) 6 15mm 3-PIN DIN 43650C (rotated 180) / B3, B5, B6 (Male Connector) A 30mm Square 3-PIN ISO 4400 Form A / B5, B6 (Male Connector) B 22mm Rectangular 3-PIN Type B Industrial / B5, B6 (Male Connector) C 3-PIN Automotive Mini / B5, B6 (Female Connector) D 5-PIN Automotive Mini / B5, B6 (Female Connector) F Hazardous Duty 1/2 Conduit 18" Leads / B5, B6 H 1/2" NPT Conduit 18 Leads / B5, B6
Customer orientation of connector at 45 degree increments possible on Options A through H on B5 and B6 valves.
Operator Type / Function 1 2 3 4 Single Solenoid / Air Return Double Solenoid Single Remote Pilot / Air Return Double Remote Pilot
NOTE: Cylinders with single solenoid valves mounted at the CAP END will be NORMALLY RETRACTED. Cylinders with single solenoid valves mounted at the HEAD END will be NORMALLY EXTENDED.
Example: 6 F 2 A 5 5 6
B6 Valve
F
Cap Mounted Full Manifold
2
Double Solenoid
A
Internal Pilot (Port 1)
5
15mm 3-PIN Square Connector
5
110 VAC
B91
Catalog 0900P-4
ACVB Specifications Compact Manifold
Standard Fluid Dry, filtered air. Standard Temperature -5F to 120F (-15C to 49C). Maximum 145 PSI operating pressure. Fits 1-1/2" through 2-1/2" Bore 3MA and 4MA standard cylinders. Uses standard Parker fittings, tubing, and seals. Compact manifold accommodates B3 Series valve from Parker Pneumatic Division North America without field modification to cylinder.
Full Manifold
Standard Fluid Dry, filtered air. Standard Temperature -5 F to 120 F (-15C to 49C). Maximum 145 PSI operating pressure. Fits 1-1/2" through 5 Bore 3MA and 4MA standard cylinders. Uses standard Parker fittings, tubing, and seals. Full manifold accommodates B3, B5 and B6 series Parker Pneumatic valves, without field modification to cylinder (B6 series shown). Bolt pattern conforms to NAMUR standard on B5 and B6 valves. Manifold and valve do not overhang beyond head or cap fasteners. B92
Catalog 0900P-4
ACVB Sizing Information
Rod Speed Chart - Extend Speed

6.00
Feet Per Second
5.00 4.00 3.00 2.00 1.00 0.00 1.5" 2" 2.5" Bore Size
B3 Valve w/ Compact Manifold B3 Valve w/ Full Manifold B5 Valve B6 Valve
B
3MA/4MA
3.25"
4"
5"
Steps to size a cylinder-valve system

Step 1. Gather the Application Parameters
Total load Maximum velocity needed to move load in specified time* Minimum pressure available
Step 2. Size Cylinder

Use equations in engineering section of Pneumatic Actuator Catalog to calculate minimum bore size
Step 3. Size Valve/Manifold

Use the Rod Speed Chart above Choose valve/manifold system that will supply maximum velocity needed for bore size chosen above
Specify necessary valve and manifold Choose type of control required Choose type of connection and voltage required
* If maximum velocity is not easily calculated, divide the total stroke distance by the total stroke time and multiply by 2. ** See the ACVB Series Valve/Manifold Code page for more details.
B93
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
Step 4. Choose the Appropriate Model Code**
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Valve Cap End Compact Manifold

VH 0.63 (16.0)

VK
B
VE (CAP FACE TO VALV E BODY) VC 1.25 (31.8) SQ. VZ E SQ.
EE (3 PLACES) (SEE VA LV E SOLENOID OPTIONS FOR PORT SPA CING)
2.60 (65.3) (MA NIFOLD LENGTH)
Full Manifold
VH
VK
VE 1.00 (25.4) 1.50 (38.1) VC VZ
EE (3 PLACES) (SEE VA LV E SOLENOID OPTIONS FOR PORT SPACING)
E SQ. 6.90 (175.3) (MANIFOLD LENGTH)
2.00 (50.8)
Dimensions
Bore E (SQ.) Manifold Compact 1-1/2 2 Full Compact 2 2-1/2 Full Compact 2-1/2 3 Full Valve B3 B3 B5 B6 B3 B3 B5 B6 B3 B3 B5 B6 B3 3-1/4 3-3/4 Full B5 B6 B3 4 4-1/2 Full B5 B6 B3 5 5-1/2 Full B5 B6 VE* 0.17 (4.3) 3.78 (96.3) 3.48 (88.4) 2.97 (75.4) 0.17 (4.3) 3.78 (96.3) 3.36 (85.3) 2.97 (75.4) 0.17 (4.3) 3.78 (96.3) 3.36 (85.3) 2.97 (75.4) 3.90 (99.1) 3.48 (88.4) 3.10 (78.7) 3.90 (99.1) 3.48 (88.4) 3.10 (78.7) 3.90 (99.1) 3.48 (88.4) 3.10 (78.7) VZ** 3MA/4MA 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.13 (3.3) 0.13 (3.3) 0.23 (5.8) 0.13 (3.3) 0.13 (3.3) 0.13 (3.3) 0.23 (5.8) 0.13 (3.3) 0.13 (3.3) 0.13 (3.3) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 * VE = Dimension from edge of endcap to edge of valve body. ** VZ = Dimension from edge of endcap to edge of manifold. Note: Dimensions shown are for a single solenoid enclosure with Option 5. For other valve or enclosure option dimensions, see pages B96-B97.
Valve
EE (NPTF) 1/8
VH 1.09 (27.7) 1.12 (28.4) 1.12 (28.4)
VK 4.67 (118.6) 5.78 (146.8) 6.67 (169.4)
VC Compact Manifold Full Manifold Full Manifold Full Manifold 2.12 (53.8) 2.37 (60.2) 2.81 (71.4) 2.81 (71.4)
B3
B5 B6
1/4 3/8
B94
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Valve Head End Compact Manifold

VE
VK
VH 0.63 (16.0)
B
VC VZ E SQ. 2.57 (65.3) (MANIFOLD LENGTH)
Full Manifold
VK
VH
VE 1.00 (25.4) 1.50 (38.1) SQ. VC VZ EE (3 PLACES) (SEE VALVE SOLENOID OPTIONS FOR PORT SPA CING)
2.00 (50.8)
6.90 (175.3) (MANIFOLD LENGTH)
Dimensions
Bore E (SQ.) Manifold Compact 1-1/2 2 Full Compact 2 2-1/2 Full Compact 2-1/2 3 Full Valve B3 B3 B5 B6 B3 B3 B5 B6 B3 B3 B5 B6 B3 3-1/4 3-3/4 Full B5 B6 B3 4 4-1/2 Full B5 B6 B3 5 5-1/2 Full B5 B6 VE* 3MA/4MA 0.26 (6.6) 4.21 (106.9) 3.79 (96.3) 3.41 (86.6) 0.26 (6.6) 4.21 (106.9) 3.79 (96.3) 3.41 (86.6) 0.33 (8.4) 4.27 (108.5) 3.86 (98.0) 3.47 (88.1) 4.40 (111.8) 3.98 (101.1) 3.60 (91.4) 4.40 (111.8) 3.98 (101.1) 3.60 (91.4) 4.40 (111.8) 3.98 (101.1) 3.60 (91.4) VZ** 3MA/4MA 0.20 (5.1) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.20 (5.1) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.27 (6.9) 0.38 (9.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) * VE = Dimension from edge of endcap to edge of valve body. ** VZ = Dimension from edge of endcap to edge of manifold. Note: Single Solenoid with enclosure 5 shown. For other valve options, see pages B96-B97.
Valve
EE (NPTF) 1/8
VH 1.09 (27.7) 1.12 (28.4) 1.12 (28.4)
VK 4.67 (118.6) 5.78 (146.8) 6.67 (169.4)
VC Compact Manifold Full Manifold Full Manifold Full Manifold 2.12 (53.8) 2.37 (60.2) 2.81 (71.4) 2.81 (71.4)
B3
B6
3/8
B95
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
B5
1/4
2A/2AN 2MNR
E SQ.
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
1.25 (31.8) SQ.
EE (3 PLACES) (SEE VA LV E SOLENOID OPTIONS FOR PORT SPA CING)
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Valve Solenoid Options B3 Valve

VP VI
1.13 (28.8) VH
VK (SINGLE SOLENOID) VL (DOUBLE SOLENOID)
VM (SINGLE REMOTE) VN (DOUBLE REMOTE)
VX VT VB EE (3 PLACES)
B5 and B6 Valve
VP VI
VH
1.89 (48.0)
VK (SINGLE SOLENOID) VL (DOUBLE SOLENOID)
VM (SINGLE REMOTE) VN (DOUBLE REMOTE)
VX VT EE (3 PLACES)
VB
Dimensions
Valve B3 B5 B6 EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/4 3/8 VB 0.87 (22.1) 1.31 (33.3) 1.31 (33.3) VH 1.09 (27.7) 1.12 (28.4) 1.12 (28.4) VI 1.93 (49.0) 2.70 (68.6) 3.60 (91.5) VK 4.67 (118.6) 5.78 (146.8) 6.67 (169.4) VL 6.44 (163.6) 7.51 (190.8) 8.41 (213.6) VM 3.12 (79.2) 4.37 (111.0) 5.26 (133.6) VN 3.33 (84.6) 4.70 (119.4) 5.59 (142.0) VP 2.25 (57.2) 2.40 (61.0) 2.40 (61.0) VT 0.56 (14.2) 0.88 (22.4) 1.17 (29.7) VX 1.12 (28.4) 1.75 (44.5) 2.34 (59.4)
B96
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Solenoids and Mufflers Optional Electrical Connections

0.84 (21.3) 1.96 (49.7) 1.43 (36.3) 0.84 (21.3) VA 4.28 (108.8) VA 3.05 (77.6) 3.05 (77.6)
0.54 (13.7)
VA
3.05 (77.6)
B
SOLENOID OPTION A, B, C, D, F, & H ENCLOSURE C, D ENCLOSURE A CAN BE ROTATED IN 45 INCREMENTS AS SHOWN
2.28 (58.0) 1.53 (38.7) 1.02 (25.9)
45 INCREMENTS
0.82 (20.7) VA 3.05 (77.6) VA VT
ENCLOSURE 5
ENCLOSURE F, H B5 AND B6 ONLY
ENCLOSURE B
Optional Electrical Connections Dimensions

Valve B3 B5 B6 VA 0.63 (16.0) 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) VT 2.25 (57.2) 2.40 (61.0) 2.40 (61.0)
Optional Flow Controls /Mufflers

FL HEX ML HEX FD TH'D FP HEX FD TH'D
FJ
_ 0.22 + .03 _ [5.6 + .8] TH'D ENGAGMENT

FH FC (FULL OPEN)
_ 0.22 + .03 _ [5.6 + .8] TH'D ENGAGMENT

MF
Optional Flow Controls Dimensions

Valve B3 B5 B6 FC 1.48 (37.6) 1.92 (48.8) 1.92 (48.8) FD 1/8 1/4 3/8 FJ 10-32 1/4-28 1/4-28 FH 0.90 (22.9) 1.17 (29.7) 1.27 (32.3) FL 1/2 9/16 11/16 FP 3/8 7/16 7/16 MF 1.00 (25.4) 1.32 (33.5) 1.54 (39.1) ML 7/16 9/16 11/16
B97
Catalog 0900P-4
ACVB Kits and Parts Manifold Kits Without Valve

Bore Size Kit w/ Tubing Kit w/o Tubing Max. Stroke for Kit w/ Tubing* Tubing Part # Compact Manifold 1-1/2", 2", and 2-1/2" L078350000 L078370000 34.5" 0880383836
Full Manifold 1-1/2", 2" and 2-1/2" L078380000 L078400000 39.5" 0880386336 3-1/4", 4", and 5" L078390000 L078410000 39"
Example: Manifold Kits:

Without Tubing Include: Manifold Grease O-rings for all applicable valves All necessary fasteners All necessary fittings Assembly Instructions With Tubing Include: All without tubing items 36" of appropriate tubing
3/8" O.D. for compact manifold 5/8" O.D. for full manifold lengths.
See above table for maximum stroke
Valve:
To Order Valve: Consult latest revision of Parker
Pneumatic Products Catalog (Catalog #0600P).
Example: B61TBCH4901A defines:

B6 ACVB Single Solenoid Valve, Flush Locking Override, with 1/2" NPT conduit, using 24VDC voltage with operator on 12 end.
Specify T code as port size/thread

type on B3, B5 or B6 valve order. locking overrides (code C). valves only.
All valves supplied with flush, Manifolds designed for 2 position
Flow Controls & Mufflers:

Order as separate line items.
Valve Size B3 B5 B6 Port Size (NPTF) 1/8 1/4 3/8 Flow Control Part # 0881480001 0881480002 0881480003 Muffler Part # 0882410013 0882410025 0882410038
! WARNING
The Prestomatic fittings on the manifold and cylinder end caps are to be used in conjunction with Parker Air Brake tubing PFT-6B and PFT-10B only. The use of other tubing may not be compatible with the Prestomatic fittings. This may lead to a tubing failure which could cause the cylinder piston rod to suddenly retract or extend at high speed.
B98
Catalog 0900P-4
ACVB Electrical Connectors/Accessories Female Electrical Connectors

15mm 3-Pin DIN 43650C
(Use with Enclosure 5)
Connector PS2932BP PS294679BP PS294683BP
Note:
2.3mm Top of light
Connector with 6' (2m) Cord PS2932JBP PS2946J79BP* PS2946J83BP*
Description Unlighted Light 110/120VAC
17.4mm
B
3MA/4MA
Light 24VAC or DC
15mm
1
*LED with surge suppression. Max 6.5mm cable size required for connector w/o 6' (2m) cord. IP65 rated when properly installed.
30mm Square 3-Pin ISO 4400, DIN 43650A

(Use with Enclosure A)
Note:
Description Unlighted Light 6-48V, 50/60Hz, 6-48VDC Light 120V/60Hz

30mm 42mm 30mm
*LED with surge suppression. Max 6.5mm cable size required for connector w/o 6' (2m) cord. IP65 rated when properly installed.
22mm Rectangular 3-Pin Type B Industrial

(Use with Enclosure B)
Note:
Description Unlighted Light 24V/60Hz, 24VDC Light 120V/60Hz
30mm
40.5mm 22mm 11mm 30mm
Max 6.5mm cable size required for connector w/o 6' (2m) cord. IP65 rated when properly installed.
3-Pin / 5-Pin Male Automotive Connectors

(Use on 22mm Rectangular 3-Pin Solenoid)
3-Pin PS2893CP PS2893C##P 5-Pin PS2893DP PS2893D83P Description Unlighted Lighted - Voltage 3-Pin 5-Pin
57mm 33mm
## 83 for 120VAC 79 for 24VDC & 24VAC
B99
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
*LED with surge suppression.
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
18mm
ACVB Option
27mm
3MAJ/4MAJ
Molded 6' Cord Shown
Catalog 0900P-4
Linear Position Sensor Option Linear Position Sensor for Continuous Position Feedback
Air Cylinders 4MA with LPSO
Generation of the ultrasonic torsion pulse in a metallic conductor based on the principle of magnetostriction.
Electromagnetic field Mechanical wave
Damping
Mechanical wave
Waveguide Position marker with magnets
Initial pulse Signal converter coil (patented process) Copper conductor Receiver
Principles of Operation
The measuring element (waveguide), consists of a special nickel-alloy tube. A copper conductor is introduced through the length of this tube. The start of measurement is initiated by a short current pulse. This current generates a circular magnetic field which rotates around the waveguide. A permanent magnet at the point of measurement is used as the marker element, whose lines of field run at right angles to the electromagnetic field. In the area on the waveguide where the two fields intersect, a magneto-strictive effect causes an elastic deformation of the waveguide, which propagates along the wave guide in both directions in the form of a mechanical wave. The propagation velocity of this wave in the waveguide is 2830 m/s, and is nearly insensitive to environmental effects (e.g., temperature, shock, contamination). The component of the wave which reaches the far end of the waveguide is damped there, whereas the component which arrives at the signal converter is changed into an electrical signal by reversing the magnetostrictive effect. The wave travel time from its point of origin to the signal converter is directly proportional to the distance between the permanent magnet and the signal converter. A time measurement then allows the distance to be determined with extremely high accuracy.
Design
The transducers are made to the same safety and reliability standards for use in the harshest conditions: The electronics unit is compactly designed using SMD technology. The boards are protected in a space-saving, rugged aluminum extruded housing. The waveguide is protected in the extruded aluminum housing.
Quality
Each and every transducer undergoes a specially designed, computer-controlled testing procedure which includes 100% checking of all specified data.
B100
Catalog 0900P-4
Linear Position Sensor Option

The drawings below show that the Linear Position Sensor is longer than the cylinder of the same stroke length. The sensor overhang on the head end of the cylinder, as indicated by dimension A, may be eliminated by adding stop tubing, which effectively increases the gross stroke of the cylinder. The recommended stop tube lengths are provided in the

table below for each bore size. The examples show that the electrical stroke of the sensor will always match the net stroke of the cylinder. As a result of the limited sensing range of the sensor, it will overhang at the cap end of the cylinder by the amount of dimension B.
NO STOP TUBE
2.75 Damping Zone Electrical Stroke XXX
4.10 3.73 3.10 Null Zone
B
3MA/4MA
B
0.50 A 0.14
WITH STOP TUBE

2.75 Damping Zone Electrical Stroke XXX
4.10 2.25 3.73 3.10 Null Zone 1.68 1.36
0.15 0.14 1.17
1.73
Example B: To eliminate sensor overhang on the head end of a 2.0" bore cylinder, add 1.0" of recommended stop tube length. The cylinder gross stroke becomes 13" and the net stroke remains 12". Specify a sensor with an electrical stroke of 12". Note that the electrical stroke equals cylinder net stroke length.
Bore
2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8
Example C: To eliminate sensor overhang on the head end of a 5.0" bore cylinder, add 0.625" of recommended stop tube length. The cylinder gross stroke becomes 12.625" and the net stroke remains 12". Specify a sensor with an electrical stroke of 12". Note that the electrical stroke equals cylinder net stroke length.
With Stop Tube B
1.3 1.25 1.0 0.99 0.79 0.46 0.44
Rod Code
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Rod Diameter
5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
A
0.95 0.90 0.64 0.63 0.55 0.47 0.28
Stop Tube Length

1.0 1.0 0.75 0.75 0.625 0.50 0.375
A1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B
1.3 1.25 1.0 0.99 0.79 0.45 0.44
B101
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
No Stop Tube
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
0.50
ACVB Option
Example A: 12" Stroke cylinder without stop tube equals 12" Electrical Stroke for the Sensor.
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Analog Interface Profile Series

Output signal Transducer interface Input interface

analog A analog analog E analog
Ordering code Output voltage Output current Load current max. ripple. Load resistance System resolution Hysteresis Repeatability Output update rate max. non-linearity Temperature coefficient Voltage output Current output
BTL5-A11-M_ _ _ _-RSU022S32 0...10 V
BTL5-E1_-M_ _ _ _-RSU022S32 4...20 mA
max. 10 mA 5 mV 0.1 mV
500 Ohm 0.2 A
Shock loading Vibration Traverse velocity of magnet Operating voltage Current draw Polarity reversal protected Overvoltage protection Dielectric constant Operating temperature Storage temperature S32 Pin assignments Output signals Pin 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 Color YE GY PK GN BU BN WH
4 m 6 m (hysteresis + resolution) STANDARD = 1 ms 1400 mm 100 m to 500 mm stroke 0.02 % 501...3606 mm stroke [150 V/C + (5 ppm/CxPxU/L)]xDT [0.6 A/C + (10 ppm/CxPxI/L)]x DT 100 g/11 ms per IEC 68-2-27 12 g, 10...2000 Hz per IEC 68-2-6 any 24 V DC 20% 150 mA yes Transzorb protection diodes 500 V (Ground to housing) -40...185 F (-40...85C) -40...212 F (-40...100C) BTL5-A11... not used signal GND 10...0 V 0...10 V GND +24 V DC (GND) BTL5-E1...BTL5-E7... 4...20 mA 20...4 mA 0 V output 10...0 V 0...10 V GND +24 V DC (GND) Specifications subject to change.
Supply voltage
Connect shield to housing.
Ordering Sample: Please enter code for output signal and nominal stroke in ordering code.
BTL5-A11-M_ _ _ _-R-SU 022S32

Output signal
1 increasing and decreasing (for A) 0 increasing 7 decreasing (for E)
BTL transducers with analog outputs are available in the ranges of 0...10V, 4...20mA with rising or falling signal.
Standard stroke lengths (mm)
B102
Catalog 0900P-4
Digital Pulse Interface Profile Series M Interface

Differential START/STOP control-specific interface.
Air Cylinders 4MA with LPSO P Interface

Compatible with BTA processors and various OEM controls. Reliable signal transmission, even over cable lengths up to 500 m (1640ft.) between BTA and BTL, is assured by the especially noise-immune RS485 differential drivers and receivers. Noise signals are effectively suppressed. BTL5 Low Profile pulse M pulse M BTL5 Low Profile pulse P pulse P
Series Transducer interface User interface
B
Ordering code System resolution Repeatability Resolution Hysteresis Standard sampling rate max. non-linearity Temperature coefficient of overall system Traverse velocity of magnet Operating voltage Current draw Operating temperature Storage temperature S32 Pin assignments Input/output signals Input Output Input Output Supply voltage Pin 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 Color YE GY PK GN BU BN WH
BTL5-M1-M_ _ _ _-RSU022S32
BTL5-P1-M_ _ _ _-RSU022S32
Process-dependent /control dependent Hysteresis + Resolution 2 m 4 m STANDARD = 1 kHz 1400 mm 100 m to 500 mm nominal stroke 0.02 % 501...3750 mm nominal stroke (6 m + 5 ppm x L)/C any 24 V DC 20 % or 15V DC 2% (optional) 100 mA 40...185 F (-40...85C) 40...212 F (-40...100C) BTL5-M1-M... INIT START/STOP INIT START/STOP GND +24 V DC (GND) BTL5-P1-M... INIT START/STOP INIT START/STOP GND +24 V DC (GND) Specifications subject to change.
Shield connected to housing
Please enter code for nominal stroke in ordering code.
Ordering Sample:
BTL5-P1-M_ _ _ _-R-SU 022S32

Output signal Standard stroke lengths (mm)
B103
Catalog 0900P-4
How To Order LPSO Option Sensor Ordering Code BTL-5 A 1 1 - M
0305
- R
SU022
S32
Output Signal A 0...10V E 4...20mA M Differential Start/Stop, leading edge active P Differential Start/Stop, trailing edge active
Connection Type Nominal Stroke Specify whole mm using 4 digits, i.e. 0305 = 305mm active electrical stroke* * Electrical stroke = net cylinder stroke. S32 KA05 8-pin Quick Disconnect Metal Connector Integral Axial Cable (specify cable length in whole meters using 2 digits, i.e. 05 = 5m)
Supply Voltage 1 24 V 20% Output Signal (Analog only) 1 0 7 Vmin or Vmax at Connector End, i.e. user selectable rising or falling* lmin at Connector End (rising toward opposite end)** lmax at Connector End (falling toward opposite end)** R
Housing Geometry Low Profile Extrusion
Please see page B12 or B30 to order 4MA cylinder configuration.
* Available only with 0...10V output signal (A). **Available only with 4...20mA output signal (E).
Standard Lengths
Electrical Stroke inches mm 2 0051 3 0077 4 0102 5 0127 6 0152 7 0178 8 0203 9 0230 10 0254 11 0280 12 0305 13 0330 inches 15 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 36 40 mm 0381 0407 0457 0508 0560 0610 0661 0711 0762 0813 0914 1016 inches 42 48 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 mm 1067 1220 1270 1524 1778 2032 2286 2540 2794 3048
B104
Catalog 0900P-4
Standard Options Parker Style 55 Piston Rod End

Rod end flange coupling for Parker 3MA, 4MA, 4ML, 3MAJ and 4MAJ Series cylinders: Simplifies alignment Reduces assembly time Allows full rated pneumatic pressure in push and pull directions Available in 5/8" through 1-3/4" piston rod diameters
MM R1/16

How To Order
Complete Model Number and place a 55 in the Piston Rod End designator position. Example: 2.00 CJ4MAJU155C 6.000 Consult factory for availability of mounting accessories and hardware.
B
Style 55 Rod End Dimensions

MM Rod Dia. 5/8 1 AD 5/8 1-5/16 1-1/16 1-5/16 AE 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 AF 3/8 11/16 7/8 1-1/8 AM .57 .95 1.32 1.70 WG 1-3/4 2-3/8 2-3/4 3-1/8
AM
1-3/8 1-3/4
AF AE AD WG
See 3MA, 4MA or 3MAJ/4MAJ Series sections for more dimensions
Example: Style 55 Rod End shown on 4MAJ Series cylinder
Split Couplers and Weld Plates

C D F BOLTS
A B
WARNING: Piston rod separation from the machine member can result in severe personal injury or even death to nearby personnel. The cylinder user must make sure the weld holding the weld plate to the machine is of sufficient quality and size to hold the intended load. The cylinder user must also make sure the bolts holding split coupler to the weld plate are of sufficient strength to hold the intended load and installed in such a way that they will not become loose during the machines operation.
NOTE: Screws are not included with split coupler or weld plate.
STYLE 55 ROD END SPLIT COUPLER WELD PLATE
Table 1 Part Numbers and Dimensions

Rod Dia. 0.625 1.00 1.375 1.75 A 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 B 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 C 0.50 0.50 0.63 0.63 D 0.56 0.88 1.00 1.25 E 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 F 4 6 6 8 Bolt Size #10-24 x .94 LG .250-20 x 1.25 LG .312-18 x 1.50 LG .312-18 x 1.75 LG Bolt Circle 1.125 1.500 2.000 2.375 Split Coupler Part No. 1472340062 1472340100 1472340138 1472340175 Weld Plate Part No. 1481740062 1481740100 1481740138 1481740175
Note: All dimensions without a tolerance are reference dimensions.
B105
Catalog 0900P-4
Standard Options Metric Rod Threads

Rod Dia. MM 3/8
Standard Metric Thread Sizes for Piston Rod Thread Type M

Styles 4 & 9 KK M6 x 1.0 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M26 x 1.5 M33 x 2.0 Style 8* CC M8 x 1.25 M12 x 1.25 M12 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 M30 x 2.0 M39 x 2.0
1/2 5/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/4
*Style 6 for 1-1/8" bore 3MA Note: All other rod end dimensions are standard per catalog.
Check Seal Cushions
For Increased Productivity and Maximum Performance

The check seal cushion is new and different from ordinary cushion designs. It combines the sealing capabilities of a lipseal for efficient capture of air to effectively cushion and to provide check valve action for quick stroke reversal. The design also provides floating cushions to assure cushion repeatability and long life. At the start of the stroke in each direction, the check valve design allows full flow to piston face with a minimum pressure drop for a maximum power stroke. Additional benefits of the new check seal cushions are increased productivity and top performance for faster cycle time, minimum wear, easy adjustment and low pressure drop. The basic cushion design is available at both ends without change in envelope or mounting dimensions. A captive cushion adjusting needle is supplied for easy, precise adjustment on all bore sizes.
Bumpers
Impact dampening conventional bumpers can be provided on one or both sides of the piston with a 1/4" stroke loss per bumper. This style of bumper is ideal for applications subjected to high speeds where cycle time may discourage the use of cushions. Available in 1-1/2" - 4" bore sizes for 3MA, 4MA, 4ML, 3MAJ and 4MAJ Series cylinders.
Bumper Option
1/4
1/4
HI LOAD Gland Assembly

Applications with inherent side load require a slide package for maximum service life. In some cases, there may be limitations to the size or expense of these additional components. One possible solution may be the use of the optional HI LOAD gland assembly that incorporates a high strength composite bearing for radial load conditions. Extensive testing showed an approximate 50% increase in service life for general applications. Please note that each application is unique and results may vary. Includes seal options for standard, high and low temperature applications with air (4MA) or hydraulic (4ML) service.
B106
Catalog 0900P-4
Standard Options Bumper Seal Option

Impact dampening Bumper Seals are now optional on all 3MA, 4MA, 3MAJ and 4MAJ cylinders from 1-1/8" to 5" bore. The Bumper Seal piston combines the features of low-friction, rounded lipseals and impact-damping bumpers to provide reduced noise and smoother end-of-stroke deceleration. At pressure greater than 80 PSI, the compressible Buna Nitrile or Fluorocarbon Bumper Seal has minimal effect on stroke loss. When specified, Bumper Seals will be supplied on both ends of the piston, eliminating the need to specify head end or cap end only.

Bumper Seal Option
B
LOSS OF STROKE LOSS OF STROKE
Summary of Accelerometer Test Results

Bore Size 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" Piston Type Standard Piston Bumper Seal Piston Standard Piston Bumper Seal Piston Standard Piston Bumper Seal Piston Cushioning Efficiency (Maximum G's of Deceleration Force Created) 13.4 5.1 12.6 7.8 12.2 5.2 Cushioning Time (ms) 22 22 33 26 36 24
Bumper Seals Reduce Noise

The special profile of the Bumper Seal prevents the piston from noisily banging into the end cap at the end of stroke. Independent testing shows that the Bumper Seal, when combined with cushions, will absorb the final piston inertia and reduce the stroke noise by as much as 20 dB. The Sound Level Comparison graph illustrates the noise-reducing effects of the Bumper Seal piston when combined with cushions. Impact noise was recorded at a distance of 3 feet from the front of the cylinder, inside a semi-anechoic chamber. Cylinders were operating at 95 PSI.
120
No Bumpers or Cushions With Bumper Seals and Cushions
Sound Level dB
100
80
60
1 Bore
2 Bore
3 Bore
The accompanying chart depicts typical amounts of overall stroke loss incurred at various system pressures. The amount of stroke loss may vary slightly due to design tolerances of seal size, variance in seal durometer and compression set associated with cylinder wear. To determine the stroke loss at either end of the cylinder, divide the values by two.
Pressure (PSI) 0 20 40 60 80 100
Typical Overall Loss of Stroke (inch) by Bore Size 1-1/2" 0.16 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05 2" 0.13 0.11 0.08 0.07 0.05 0.03 2-1/2" 0.19 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.05 0.02 3-1/4" 0.22 0.18 0.12 0.09 0.06 0.04 4" 0.22 0.18 0.12 0.09 0.06 0.04
B107
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
Sound Level Comparison Bumper Seals have Minimum Effect on Stroke Length
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Accessories 1-1/2" to 8" Bore Cylinder Accessories
Rod end accessories can be selected by cylinder rod end thread size from Table A & B below. Mating parts for rod end accessories are listed just to the right of the knuckle or clevis selected. Mounting plates for style MP1 & MP4 cylinder mounts are selected by bore size from Table C.
Rod End Thread Size 7/16-20 1/2-20 3/4-16 7/8-14 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12
TABLE A Female Rod Clevis 1458030044 1458030050 1458030075 1458030088 1458030100 1458030125 1458030150 Mating Parts Eye Bracket 1458060050 1458060050 1458060075 1458060100 1458060100 1458060138 1458060175 Pivot Pin 0856640050 0856640050 0856640075 0856640100 0856640100 0856640138 0856640175 Knuckle 1458040044 1458040050 1458040075 1458040088 1458040100 1458040125 1458040150
TABLE B Mating Parts Clevis Bracket 1458050050 1458050050 1458050075 1458050100 1458050100 1458050138 1458050175 Pivot Pin 0856640050 0856640050 0856640075 0856640100 0856640100 0856640138 0856640175 Bore Size 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8
TABLE C Mounting Plates For Mtg. Style MP1 Cylinder 1458060050 1458060050 1458060050 1458060075 1458060075 1458060075 1458060100 1458060100 For Mtg. Style MP4 Cylinder 1458050050 1458050050 1458050050 1458050075 1458050075
Note: For 1-1/8 bore 3MA cylinder accessories, please refer to page B59.
Pivot Pin
CL CD +.001 -.002
A
Symbol 0856640044 0856640050 0856640075 0856640100 0856640138 0856640175 CD CL Shear Cap. (lbs) 7/16 1-5/16 6600 1/2 1-7/8 8600 3/4 2-5/8 19300 1 3-1/8 34300 1-3/8 4-1/8 65000 1-3/4 5-3/16 105200
Maximum Pivot Angle for Rear Clevis Mounts (BB Mounts) and Accessories
Bore Angle A 1-1/2 52 2 43 2-1/2 3-1/4 29 50 4 49 5 45 6 42 8 42
Note: Pivot Pin must be ordered separately for single lug pivot mounting.
B108
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Accessories Female Rod Clevis

CW CB CW ER
+.004 CD +.002

Symbol A CB CD CE CW
CE A
1458030044 1458030050 1458030075 1458030088 1458030100 1458030125 1458030150 3/4 3/4 1/2 1-1/2 1/2 1/2 7/16-20 4250 3/4 3/4 1/2 1-1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2-20 4900 1-1/8 1-1/4 3/4 2-1/8 5/8 3/4 3/4-16 11200 1-5/8 1-1/2 1 2-15/16 3/4 1 7/8-14 18800 1-5/8 1-1/2 1 2-15/16 3/4 1 1-14 19500 2 2 1-3/8 3-3/4 1 1-3/8 1-1/4-12 33500 2-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/4 4-1/2 1-1/4 1-3/4 1-1/2-12 45600
ER KK Load Capacity (lbs)
B
KK THREAD
Rod Eye Knuckle

ER CD CD CD CA CD
+.004 +.002 FULL THREAD
Symbol 1458040044 1458040050 1458040075 1458040088 1458040100 1458040125 1458040150 A CA

A
3/4 1-1/2 3/4 1/2 23/32 7/16-20 5000
3/4 1-1/2 3/4 1/2 23/32 1/2-20 5700
1-1/8 2-1/16 1-1/4 3/4 1-1/16 3/4-16 12100
1-1/8 2-3/8 1-1/2 1 1-7/16 7/8-14 13000
1-5/8 2-13/16 1-1/2 1 1-7/16 1-14 21700
2 3-7/16 2 1-3/8 1-31/32 1-1/4-12 33500
2-1/4 4 2-1/2 1-3/4 2-1/2 1-1/2-12 45000
CB CD ER
KK
THREAD
KK
CB
Load Capacity (lbs)
Clevis Bracket
MR CW M FL F R E R E 25 LR DD DIA. 4 HOLES CB CW CD
+.004 +.002
Symbol CB CD CW DD E F FL LR M MR R Load Capacity (lbs)
1458050044 15/32 7/16 3/8 17/64 2-1/4 3/8 1 5/8 3/8 1/2 1.75 3600
1458050050 3/4 1/2 1/2 13/32 3-1/2 1/2 1-1/2 3/4 1/2 5/8 2.55 7300
1458050075 1-1/4 3/4 5/8 17/32 5 5/8 1-7/8 1-3/16 3/4 29/32 3.82 14000
1458050100 1-1/2 1 3/4 21/32 6-1/2 3/4 2-1/4 1-1/2 1 1-1/4 4.95 19200
1458050138 2 1-3/8 1 21/32 7-1/2 7/8 3 2 1-3/8 1-21/32 5.73 36900
1458050175 2-1/2 1-3/4 1-1/4 29/32 9-1/2 7/8 3-5/8 2-3/4 1-3/4 2-7/32 7.50 34000
Mounting Plate & Eye Bracket

CB MR M FL F R E R E 25 LR DD DIA. 4 HOLES CD
+.004 +.002
Symbol CB CD DD E F FL LR M MR R Load Capacity (lbs)
1458060031 15/16 15/16 17/64 2-1/4 3/8 1 5/8 3/8 1/2 1.75 1700
1458060050 3/4 1/2 13/32 2-1/2 3/8 1-1/8 3/4 1/2 9/16 1.63 4100
1458060075 1-1/4 3/4 17/32 3-1/2 5/8 17/8 1-1/4 3/4 7/8 2.55 10500
1458060100 1-1/2 1 21/32 4-1/2 7/8 2-3/8 1-1/2 1 1-1/4 3.25 20400
1458060138 2 1-3/8 21/32 5 7/8 3 2-1/8 1-3/8 1-5/8 3.82 21200
1458060175 2-1/2 1-3/4 29/32 6-1/2 1-1/8 3-3/8 2-1/4 1-3/4 2-1/8 4.95 49480
B109
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section Mounting Kits Mounting Kit Assembly

Perform the following steps when installing mounting kits onto 1-1/2" - 5" bore 3MA, 4MA and 4ML cylinders with the standard mount (TE or TEF). 1) Clean mating parts to remove oil, grease and dirt.
Air Cylinders 3MA/3ML Series

Side Lug Mount Style C (not shown) Place one bracket over one cylinder endcap. Align the lower two fastener holes in the endcap with the thru holes in the bracket. Note that the bracket can be rotated allowing for different cylinder port locations. Secure the bracket to the endcap (finger tight) using two fasteners. Repeat for the other bracket and endcap. Place the assembly with the brackets down on a flat surface and torque the four fasteners on both brackets to specifications shown in the table below.
Fig. 1 - Pivot Mounting Kit
2) Fasteners should be clean, dry and burr free. 3) Brush mounting fastener threads thoroughly with anti-seize lubricant. 4) Follow the appropriate procedure below for the desired mounting. Rear Pivot Mounting Kits Style BB, BC and BE (Fig. 1) Place pivot mount over end cap, lining up the four fastener holes in the end cap with the pivot mounting plate. Note that the pivot mount can be rotated allowing for different cylinder port locations. Secure mounting to cylinder cap (finger tight) using the four fasteners. Torque the fasteners to the specifications in the table below.
Fasteners (4)
(Head End)
(Cap End)
Style BB, BC or BE Mount

Fig. 2 - End Angle Mounting Kit
End Angle Mounting Kit Style CB (Fig. 2) The end angles bolt to the front and rear of the cylinder end caps. The spacer plate** provided is to be assembled at the rod end under the angle plate. Line up the two holes of the spacer plate and angle plate with the two fastener holes in the cylinder head. If 2 different length fasteners are in the kit, use the longer fasteners for the cylinder head end (rod end) mount. Secure (finger tight) using two fasteners. Repeat this assembly at the opposite end (less spacer). Place the assembly with the end angles down on a flat surface and torque the four fasteners to the specifications shown in the table below.
Flange Mounting Kits Style J and H Single and Double Rod Cylinders (Fig. 3) Place rectangular flange plate over appropriate end cap. Line up the four holes in the mounting plate with the four fastener holes in the cylinder end cap. Note that the rectangular mounting plate can be rotated to allow for different port locations. Secure the rectangular mounting plate to the end cap (finger tight) using the four fasteners. Then torque the four fasteners to the specifications shown in the table below. Side End Lug Mounting Kits Style G (Fig. 4) Attach the two longer lugs with the fasteners provided in the kit to the cylinder head as shown. Attach the two shorter lugs to the cylinder cap in a similar fashion. Place the assembly with the lugs down on a flat surface and torque the four fasteners to the specifications shown in the table below.
Fasteners (2) Spacer
Fasteners (2)
(Head End)
(Cap End)
Style CB End Angle Mount

Fig. 3 - Flange Mounting Kit
Fasteners (4)
Fasteners (4)
(Head End)
(Cap End)
Style J Mount (or) Style H Mount

Fig. 4 - Side End Lug Mounting Kit - Style MS7
Fasteners (2)
Fasteners (2)
(Head End) Style G Mount
(Cap End)
Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
J (MF1) Head Rectangular Flange Kit Number

L079700150 L079700200 L079700250 L079700325 L079700400 L079700500
H (MF2) Cap Rectangular Flange Kit Number

L079700150 L079700200 L079700250 L079700325 L079700400 L079700500
BB (MP1) Cap Fixed Clevis Kit Number

L079710150 L079710200 L079710250 L079710325 L079710400 L079710500
3MA and 4MA Mounting Kits BC (MP2) BE (MP4) CB (MS1) Cap Cap Side End Detachable Detachable Angles Clevis Eye Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number
L079730150 L079730200 L079730250 L079730325 L079730400 L079730500 L079720150 L079720200 L079720250 L079720325 L079720400 N/A L079740150 L079740200 L079740250 L079740325 L079740400 L079740500
C (MS2) Side Lug (3MA only) Kit Number

L079830150 L079830200 L079830250 L079830325 L079830400 L079830500
G (MS7) Side End Lug Kit Number

L079750150 L079750200 L079750250 L079750325 L079750400 N/A
Kit Fastener Torque Units USA inch-lbs

32 - 36 72 - 82 72 - 82 216 - 228 216 - 228 360 - 372
Metric N-m
3.6 - 4.1 8-9 8-9 24 - 25.3 24 - 25.3 41 - 42
** Spacer plate not used for 4 bore or double rod cylinders
B110
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section 1-1/8" 3MA Kits
Air Cylinders 3MA/3ML Series
1-1/8" Bore 3MA/3ML Individual and Complete Cylinder Kits

3MA kits pneumatic service only 3ML kits hydraulic service Temperatures: Nitrile -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) Fluorocarbon -10F to +250F (-23C to +121C) Non-cushioned (3MA or 3ML)
12 31 5 6 18 11 13 27 12 11 8 18
B
Symbol
1 2 3 5 6 8 11 12 13 14 15 18 19 23 24 27 28 30 31
Description
Cylinder body Head Cap Rod wiper Rod seal Piston Piston seal (lipseal) Piston seal (bumper seal option) Magnetic ring Head fastener Cap fastener O-ring - cylinder body to head & cap Piston rod Cushion check seal Tie rod nut (Some mounts) Wear band Tie rod (Some mounts) Cushion spacer Rod bearing (1-1/2" bore)
3 19 14 2 1
15
Cushioned (3MA only)

12 31 5 6 18 18 23 11 13 27 12 11 8 23 18 18
3 19 15 14 2 30 1 30
1 tube of Lube-A-Cyl is also included with each kit.

Magnetic Ring Endcap Fastener Symbol 13 Only or Tie Rod Torque with Nitrile Seals Units USA Metric Part Number inch-lbs N-m
086513S112 32-36 3.6-4.1
3MA Kits
Rod Dia.
3/8 1/2
Rod No.
1 3
PK - Piston Seal Kit, Standard Lipseals Includes (2) each of symbol 11 & 18, and (1) of symbol 27 Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Kit Number Kit Number
PK11003MA1 PK11003MA5
BK - Piston Seal Kit, Bumper Seals Includes (2) each of symbol 12 & 18, and (1) of symbol 27 Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Kit Number Kit Number
BK01123MA1 BK01123MA5
Rod Dia.
3/8 1/2
Rod No.
1 3
Nitrile Seals Kit Number

SK11103MA1 SK11303MA1
Fluorocarbon Seals Kit Number

SK11103MA5 SK11303MA5
CH11003MA1 CH11003MA1
CH11003MA5 CH11003MA5
32-36
3.6-4.1
3ML Kits Rod Rod Dia. No.

3/8 1/2 1 3
PK - Piston Seal Kit, Standard Lipseals Includes (2) each of symbol 11 & 18, and (1) of symbol 27 Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Kit Number Kit Number
PK1123ML01 PK1123ML01 PK1123ML05 PK1123ML05
Magnetic Ring Symbol 13 Only with Nitrile Seals Part Number

086513S112 086513S112
SK - Complete Cylinder Kit Includes Endcap Fastener 1 each of symbol 5, 6, 31 and or Tie Rod Torque Standard Piston Seal Kit Units Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon Seals USA Metric Kit Number Kit Number inch-lbs N-m
SK11103ML1 SK11303ML1 SK11103ML5 SK11303ML5 32-36 3.6-4.1
B111
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
CH - Cushion Kit for either end Includes 1 each of symbol 18, 23 and cushion needle valve assembly (no symbol) Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Kit Number Kit Number
SK - Complete Cylinder Kit Includes 1 each of symbol 5, 6, 31 and Standard Piston Seal Kit
Endcap Fastener or Tie Rod Torque Units USA Metric inch-lbs N-m
2A/2AN 2MNR
Servicing the complete cylinder The SK kit offers all parts to service an entire 3MA or 3ML cylinder with standard piston lipseals. Kits are available with Nitrile or Fluorocarbon seals. This kit is a combination of the rod wiper, rod seal, rod bearing and standard Piston Seal Kit.
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
Symbol Legend
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section Piston Seal Kits 1-1/2" - 5" Bore 3MA Piston Seal Kits (Piston and cylinder body seals)
Pneumatic service only Temperatures: Nitrile -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C)
13 4 16 5 6 17 7 18 23 8 11 12
Air Cylinders 3MA Series
11 12
8 23
18 7 17 3
19 14 2 22 21 20 1 10 9 15
Composite piston assembly shown above. Aluminum piston options available. The same piston lipseals fit both piston types. Servicing the piston seals see next page
Every standard piston seal kit (PK) contains 2 of the following:

Symbol
11 18 Piston seal (lipseal) O-ring - cylinder body to head & cap
Description
Every bumper piston seal kit (BK) contains 2 of the following:

Symbol
12
Description
Piston seal (bumper seat cushion) O-ring - cylinder body to head & cap
Warning ! The piston rod (or fastener) to piston threaded
18
connection is secured with an anaerobic adhesive that is temperature sensitive. Cylinders are assembled with an anaerobic adhesive having a maximum operating temperature rating of +165F (+74C). This temperature limitation is necessary to prevent possible loosening of the threaded connections. Note: the maximum temperature rating for the 1-1/2"-5" bore 3MA is +165F (+74C).
1 tube of Lube-A-Cyl is also included with each PK or BK kit.
PK - Piston Seal Kit, Standard Lipseals Includes 2 each of symbol 11 & 18
BK - Piston Seal Kit, Bumper Seals Includes 2 each of symbol 12 & 18
Includes wear band (#27) for aluminum pistons and 4" and 5" composite pistons Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5

PK1503MA01 PK2003MA01 PK2503MA01 PK3253MA01 PK4003MA01 PK5003MA01

BK01503MA1 BK02003MA1 BK02503MA1 BK03253MA1 BK04003MA1 BK05003MA1
Magnetic Ring (not replaceable for Torque Units Endcap composite piston, Fastener only for aluminum or Tie Rod piston) USA inch- Metric Part Number lbs N-m
0865130151 0865130200 0865130250 0865130325 0865130400 0865130500 32 - 36 72 - 82 72 - 82 216 - 228 216 - 228 360 - 372 3.6 - 4.1 8-9 8-9 24 - 25.3 24 - 25.3 41 - 42
B112
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section Piston Seal Kits

Parker Lube-A-Cyl...
Is recommended for use in air cylinders during normal operation, and particularly when servicing and reassembling cylinders. It is a multi-purpose lubricant in grease form that provides lubrication without deteriorating effects on synthetic seals. It produces a thin film which will not blow out with exhaust air. It provides piston, rod and seal lubrication, and has excellent resistance to water and mechanical breakdown with temperature range of -10F (-23C) to +350F (+177C). Lube-A-Cyl is packaged in 1.5 oz. tubes, a sufficient quantity for average size air cylinder. One application should last for a period of 6 to 18 months depending upon service. Order by part number 0761630000. Servicing the Piston Seals Disassemble the cylinder completely, remove the old seals and clean all the parts. The cylinder bore and piston should then be examined for evidence of scoring. (The light scratch marks usually present on both cylinder bore and piston will generally have no detrimental effects on the performance of the cylinder.) Apply Parker Lube-A-Cyl to O.D. of piston and all grooves. Install one piston Lipseal (sym. # 11 or 12) in the groove nearest the rod. The two lips of this seal should face toward the rod end of the piston. Aluminum and 4" & 5" composite pistons only If required, install magnetic ring (sym. #13) in the bottom of the middle groove and then install wear band (sym. #27) in the top of the middle groove. Coat the inside of the cylinder body with Parker Lube-A-Cyl and insert the piston cap end first into the cylinder body as shown in detail 2 below. Next, turn the cylinder body on its side and push the piston and rod assembly through the barrel just far enough to expose the groove for the second Lipseal. (See detail 3 below.) For aluminum pistons, be careful not to move the piston too far so as to expose the wear strip (sym. #27). If the piston should move too far, push the piston and rod assembly completely through the cylinder body and again start the piston from the original end. Now install the second Lipseal (sym. # 11 or 12) in the exposed groove with the two lips facing away from the rod and pull the piston into the cylinder body.

The piston and rod are securely locked together with anaerobic adhesive. This threaded connection should only be disassembled or reassembled by factory trained personnel. NOTE: An extreme pressure lubricant (such as molybdenum disulphate) should be used on the tie rod threads and bearing faces to reduce friction and tie rod twist. Assemble both cap and head, complete with cylinder body O-Rings (sym. # 18), to each end of the cylinder body. Install end cap fasteners and tighten to appropriate torque, using opposite corner to corner torquing sequence. In case of a DD center trunnion mounted cylinder, care must be taken to prevent binding the cylinder body when repositioning the trunnion collar. The proper method of assembling this type of cylinder is as follows: After all the piston seals have been installed on the piston and the piston is in the cylinder body, fit the cap with its Oring (sym. # 18) in position onto the cylinder body. Then stud into the trunnion collar the four tie rods that connect the cap to the trunnion collar. Hand tighten the four tie rod nuts at the cap. Distances from the inner face of the cap to the finished face of the trunnion collar should the be made equal at all four tie rods when all four tie rod nuts are in contact with the cap. When the assembly is ready for final torquing, it may be necessary to adjust the tie rods at the cap when torquing the tie rods at the head in order to position the trunnion collar in its final position. As a check, to be certain the trunnion mount will not interfere with cylinder operation, move the piston and rod assembly by hand to determine whether there is any tendency for the piston to bind at the spot where the trunnion collar is located. If any binding is noticeable, readjust the tie rods.
B
12 11 13
12 11
Detail 1
Detail 2
Detail 3
B113
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section 3MA Cylinder Kits 1-1/2"- 5" Bore 3MA Complete Cylinder Kits (All parts to service entire cylinder)
Pneumatic service only Temperatures: Nitrile -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) Fluorocarbon rod seals only (all other Nitrile) -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C)
11 23 31 2 5 6 13 18 8 12 12 11 8 23 18
13 4 16
3
17 6 7
18 23 8
11 12
11 12
8 23
18 7 17 3
19 14 10 20 22 21 1 9 15
19 14 2 22 21 20 1 10 9 15
1-1/2" Bore Servicing the complete cylinder The SK kit offers all parts to service an entire 3MA cylinder with the standard piston lipseals. Kits are available with Nitrile seals or Fluorocarbon rod seals only (all other Nitrile). This kit a combination of the rod wiper, rod seal, rod bearing, Standard Piston Seal Kit, two Cushion Kits and any other necessary seals. These kits can service cylinders with either the composite or aluminum piston (lipseal). Depending on cylinder configuration, some parts may not be used. Please refer to the pages or bulletins of these individual kits for service instructions.
SK - Complete Cylinder Kit Includes (1) each of symbol Endcap Fastener 5, 6, 31 (or 4); or (1 Standard Piston Seal Kit Tie Rod and (2) Cushion Kits Torque Units Fluorocarbon Rod Seals Only Bore Rod Rod Nitrile Seals (all other Nitrile) USA Metric Size Dia. No. Kit Number Kit Number inch-lbs N-m
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 5/8 5/8 5/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SK15003MA1 SK20003MA1 SK25003MA1 SK32003MA1 SK40003MA1 SK50003MA1 SK15003MA5 SK20003MA5 SK25003MA5 SK32003MA5 SK40003MA5 SK50003MA5 32 - 36 72 - 82 72 - 82 3.6 - 4.1 8-9 8-9
2"-5" Bores Symbol Legend

Symbol
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 27 28 31 Cylinder body Head Cap Rod bearing insert (2"-5" bores) Rod wiper Rod seal Needle valve insert Piston (composite or aluminum) Piston fastener (only for composite piston) O-ring - piston fastener to piston Piston seal (lipseal) Piston seal (bumper seal option) Magnetic ring Head fastener Cap fastener O-ring - rod bearing insert O-ring - needle valve insert O-ring - cylinder body to head & cap Piston rod Cushion needle valve O-ring - cushion needle valve Cushion knob Cushion check seal Tie rod nut (Style DD mounts) Wear band (aluminum and 4" & 5" composite pistons) Tie rod (Style DD mounts) Rod bearing (1-1/2" bore)
Description
216 - 228 24 - 25.3 216 - 228 24 - 25.3 360 - 372 41 - 42
Cushion Kits
CH - Cushion Kit for either end Endcap Fastener Includes 1 each of symbol 7, or Tie Rod 17, 18, 20, 21, 22 & 23 Torque Units Bore Rod Rod Nitrile Seals USA Metric Size Dia. No. Kit Number inch-lbs N-m
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 5/8 5/8 5/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CH15003MA1 CH20003MA1 CH25003MA1 CH32003MA1 CH40003MA1 CH50003MA1 32 - 36 72 - 82 72 - 82 3.6 - 4.1 8-9 8-9
1 tube of Lube-A-Cyl is also included with each SK or CH kit.
216 - 228 24 - 25.3 216 - 228 24 - 25.3 360 - 372 41 - 42
B114
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section Gland Kits 4MA Gland Kits (Gland cartridges and rod seals)
Pneumatic service only Temperatures: Nitrile -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) Fluorocarbon -10F to +250F (-23C to +121C)

41 45
40
Standard Rod Gland

41 45
To remove the old gland cartridge from the cylinder: 1. Inspect the piston rod to be sure it is free of burrs or other foreign material that would prevent sliding the gland off the rod. 2. Disconnect any attachments to the piston rod end thread. 3. Lubricate the rod with Lube-A-Cyl (included in kit). 4. Unscrew the gland cartridge from the head using the appropriate wrench (see D1 dimension in catalog). 5. Slide the gland cartridge off the piston rod. 6. Verify that the gland-to-head o-ring (#45) is also removed from the head. To install the new gland cartridge onto the cylinder: 1. Re-inspect the surface of the piston rod for scratches, dents and other surface damage, and repair if necessary. 2. Clean and lubricate the surface of the piston rod with Lube-A-Cyl (included in kit). 3. Lubricate the rod wiper (#40), rod seal (#41), o-ring (#45) and the inside surfaces of the gland cartridge with Lube-A-Cyl. 4. Slide the gland cartridge onto the piston rod, align it with the threads in the head, and tighten (clockwise) until seated firmly against the head. 5. Torque the gland cartridge to the specifications shown below. Tools are available to assist this process (see below). Note: Make sure the gland cartridge is sufficiently tight. Failure to do so may result in loosening during operation.
Rod Dia.
5/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/4
40
14
HI LOAD Rod Gland (includes composite bearing)

41 45
14
Metallic Rod Wiper Gland

Every gland cartridge kit contains 1 each of the following: Symbol
14 40 41 45
Standard & HI LOAD Gland Gland Wrench

0695800000 0695810000 0695820000 0695830000
Metallic Rod Wiper Gland Gland Wrench

0695900000 0695910000 0695920000 0695930000
Spanner Wrench
0116760000 0116760000 0117030000 0116770000
Description
Gland Rod Wiper Rod Seal O-ring - Gland to head Gland to Head Torque Units USA Metric Ft-Lbs N-m 40 - 45 54 - 61 45 - 50 61 - 68 40 - 45 54 - 61 45 - 50 61 - 68 40 - 45 54 - 61 45 - 50 61 - 68 45 - 50 61 - 68 75 - 80 102 - 108 45 - 50 61 - 68 75 - 80 102 - 108 45 - 50 61 - 68 75 - 80 102 - 108 75 - 80 102 - 108 90 - 95 122- 129 75 - 80 102 - 108 90 - 95 122- 129
Standard Rod Gland Cartridge Kit HI LOAD Rod Gland Cartridge Kit Metallic Rod Wiper Gland Cartridge Kit Rod Rod Includes 1 each of symbol 14, 40, 41 & 45 Includes 1 each of symbol 14, 40, 41 & 45 Includes 1 each of symbol 14, 40, 41 & 45 Bore Dia. No. Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Nitrile & PUR Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Size Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number 5/8 1 RG04MA0061 RG04MA0065 RG04MAH061 RG04MAH065 RG04MAM061 RG04MAM065 1-1/2 1 2 RG04MA0101 RG04MA0105 RG04MAH101 RG04MAH105 RG04MAM101 RG04MAM105 5/8 1 RG04MA0061 RG04MA0065 RG04MAH061 RG04MAH065 RG04MAM061 RG04MAM065 2 1 3 RG04MA0101 RG04MA0105 RG04MAH101 RG04MAH105 RG04MAM101 RG04MAM105 5/8 1 RG04MA0061 RG04MA0065 RG04MAH061 RG04MAH065 RG04MAM061 RG04MAM065 2-1/2 1 3 RG04MA0101 RG04MA0105 RG04MAH101 RG04MAH105 RG04MAM101 RG04MAM105 1 1 RG04MA0101 RG04MA0105 RG04MAH101 RG04MAH105 RG04MAM101 RG04MAM105 3-1/4 1-3/8 3 RG04MA0131 RG04MA0135 RG04MAH131 RG04MAH135 RG04MAM131 RG04MAM135 1 1 RG04MA0101 RG04MA0105 RG04MAH101 RG04MAH105 RG04MAM101 RG04MAM105 4 1-3/8 3 RG04MA0131 RG04MA0135 RG04MAH131 RG04MAH135 RG04MAM131 RG04MAM135 1 1 RG04MA0101 RG04MA0105 RG04MAH101 RG04MAH105 RG04MAM101 RG04MAM105 5 1-3/8 3 RG04MA0131 RG04MA0135 RG04MAH131 RG04MAH135 RG04MAM131 RG04MAM135 1-3/8 1 RG04MA0131 RG04MA0135 RG04MAH131 RG04MAH135 RG04MAM131 RG04MAM135 6 1-3/4 3 RG04MA0171 RG04MA0175 RG04MAH171 RG04MAH175 RG04MAM171 RG04MAM175 1-3/8 1 RG04MA0131 RG04MA0135 RG04MAH131 RG04MAH135 RG04MAM131 RG04MAM135 8 1-3/4 3 RG04MA0171 RG04MA0175 RG04MAH171 RG04MAH175 RG04MAM171 RG04MAM175
B115
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
40
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
Servicing the rod gland (Cylinder disassembly is not required) Air leakage around the piston rod at the gland area will normally indicate a need to replace the gland cartridge. The Parker 4MA gland is a unique cartridge design. It is threaded into the cylinder head and all sizes are removable without disturbing the endcap fasteners.
14
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section Piston Seal Kits 4MA Piston Seal Kits (Piston and cylinder body seals)
Magnetic Ring (Order seperately if required) 12 11 10 18
12
13
11
DETAIL A
Composite piston assembly shown above. Aluminum piston options available. The same piston lipseals fit both piston types. Servicing the piston seals see next page Warning The piston rod (or fastener) to piston threaded connection is secured with an anaerobic adhesive that is temperature sensitive. Cylinders specified with all fluorocarbon seals are assembled with an anaerobic adhesive having a maximum operating temperature rating of +250F (+121C). Cylinders specified with other seal compounds are assembled with an anaerobic adhesive having a maximum operating temperature rating of +165F (+74C). These temperature limitations are necessary to prevent possible loosening of the threaded connections. Cylinders originally manufactured with Class 1 seals (Nitrile) that will be exposed to ambient temperatures above +165F (+74C) must be modified for higher temperature service. Contact the Wadsworth, OH facility immediately and arrange for the piston to rod connection to be properly re-assembled to withstand the higher temperature service and other cylinder changes. Note: the maximum temperature rating for the composite piston is +165F (+74C).
Every standard piston seal kit (PK) contains 2 of the following:

Symbol
11 18 Piston seal (lipseal) O-ring - cylinder body to head & cap
Description
Every bumper piston seal kit (BK) contains 2 of the following:

Symbol
12 18
Description
Piston seal (bumper seat cushion) O-ring - cylinder body to head & cap
1 tube of Lube-A-Cyl is also included with each PK or BK kit.
Bore Size
PK - Piston Seal Kit, Standard Lipseals BK - Piston Seal Kit, Bumper Seals Magnetic Ring (not Torque Units Includes 2 each of symbol 11 & 18 Includes 2 each of symbol 12 & 18 replaceable for Endcap Fastener or Tie Rod Includes wear band (#27) for aluminum pistons and 4" and 5" composite pistons composite piston) Only with Nitrile Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon Seals USA Metric Seals Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number inch-lbs N-m Part Number
PK1504MA01 PK2004MA01 PK2504MA01 PK3254MA01 PK4004MA01 PK5004MA01 PK6004MA01 PK8004MA01 PK1504MA05 PK2004MA05 PK2504MA05 PK3254MA05 PK4004MA05 PK5004MA05 PK6004MA05 PK8004MA05 BK01504MA1 BK02004MA1 BK02504MA1 BK03254MA1 BK04004MA1 BK05004MA1 N/A N/A BK01504MA5 BK02004MA5 BK02504MA5 BK03254MA5 BK04004MA5 BK05004MA5 N/A N/A 0865130151 0865130200 0865130250 0865130325 0865130400 0865130500 0865130600 0865130800 32 - 36 72 - 82 72 - 82 216 - 228 216 - 228 360 - 372 420 - 432 960 - 972 3.6 - 4.1 8-9 8-9 24 - 25.3 24 - 25.3 41 - 42 48 - 49 109 - 115
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8
B116
Catalog 0900P-4

Parker Lube-A-Cyl...
Is recommended for use in air cylinders during normal operation, and particularly when servicing and reassembling cylinders. It is a multi-purpose lubricant in grease form that provides lubrication without deteriorating effects on synthetic seals. It produces a thin film which will not blow out with exhaust air. It provides piston, rod and seal lubrication, and has excellent resistance to water and mechanical breakdown with temperature range of -10F (-23C) to +350F (+177C). Lube-A-Cyl is packaged in 1.5 oz. tubes, a sufficient quantity for average size air cylinder. One application should last for a period of 6 to 18 months depending upon service. Order by part number 0761630000. Servicing the Piston Seals Disassemble the cylinder completely, remove the old seals and clean all the parts. The cylinder bore and piston should then be examined for evidence of scoring. (The light scratch marks usually present on both cylinder bore and piston will generally have no detrimental effects on the performance of the cylinder.) Apply Parker Lube-A-Cyl to O.D. of piston and all grooves. Install one piston Lipseal (sym. # 11 or 12) in the groove nearest the rod. The two lips of this seal should face toward the rod end of the piston. Aluminum and 4" & 5" composite pistons only If required, install magnetic ring (sym. #13) in the bottom of the middle groove and then install wear band (sym. #27) in the top of the middle groove. Coat the inside of the cylinder body with Parker Lube-A-Cyl and insert the piston cap end first into the cylinder body as shown in detail 2 below. Next, turn the cylinder body on its side and push the piston and rod assembly through the barrel just far enough to expose the groove for the second Lipseal. (See detail 3 below.) For aluminum pistons, be careful not to move the piston too far so as to expose the wear strip (sym. #27). If the piston should move too far, push the piston and rod assembly completely through the cylinder body and again start the piston from the original end. Now install the second Lipseal (sym. # 11 or 12) in the exposed groove with the two lips facing away from the rod and pull the piston into the cylinder body.

The piston and rod are securely locked together with anaerobic adhesive. This threaded connection should only be disassembled or reassembled by factory trained personnel. NOTE: An extreme pressure lubricant (such as molybdenum disulphate) should be used on the tie rod threads and bearing faces to reduce friction and tie rod twist. Assemble both cap and head, complete with cylinder body O-Rings (sym. # 18), to each end of the cylinder body. Install end cap fasteners and tighten to appropriate torque, using opposite corner to corner torquing sequence. In case of a DD center trunnion mounted cylinder, care must be taken to prevent binding the cylinder body when repositioning the trunnion collar. The proper method of assembling this type of cylinder is as follows: After all the piston seals have been installed on the piston and the piston is in the cylinder body, fit the cap with its Oring (sym. # 18) in position onto the cylinder body. Then stud into the trunnion collar the four tie rods that connect the cap to the trunnion collar. Hand tighten the four tie rod nuts at the cap. Distances from the inner face of the cap to the finished face of the trunnion collar should the be made equal at all four tie rods when all four tie rod nuts are in contact with the cap. When the assembly is ready for final torquing, it may be necessary to adjust the tie rods at the cap when torquing the tie rods at the head in order to position the trunnion collar in its final position. As a check, to be certain the trunnion mount will not interfere with cylinder operation, move the piston and rod assembly by hand to determine whether there is any tendency for the piston to bind at the spot where the trunnion collar is located. If any binding is noticeable, readjust the tie rods.
B
12 11 13
12 11
Detail 1
Detail 2
Detail 3
B117
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section 4MA Cylinder Kit 4MA Complete Cylinder Kits (All parts to service entire cylinder)
13 11 26 5 16 6 23 18 8 10 12 11 12 8 18 40
23 18
27 25 11
11 13 8 18
3
16 5 6
19 14 2 20 29 15 21 1 9
3 40
Symbol Legend
Symbol 1 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 40 Description
1-1/2"-5" Bore
19 26
Cylinder body Head Cap Rod wiper Rod seal Piston (composite or aluminum) Piston fastener (only for composite piston) O-ring - piston fastener to piston Piston seal (lipseal) Piston seal (Bumper seal option) Magnetic ring Head fastener Cap fastener O-ring - gland to head O-ring - cylinder body to head & cap Piston rod Cushion needle valve O-ring - cushion needle valve Cushion needle valve retainer (6" & 8") Cushion check seal - head Tie rod nut (6" & 8" bore or Style DD mounts) Head cushion sleeve Gland Wear band (aluminum and 4" & 5" composite pistons) Tie rod (6" & 8" bore or Style DD mounts) Retaining washer Cushion check seal - cap SK - Complete Cylinder Kit Includes 1 each of Standard Rod Gland Kit, Standard Piston Seal Kit, Head Cushion Kit and Cap Cushion Kit Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Kit Number Kit Number SK15104MA1 SK15104MA5 SK15304MA1* SK15304MA5* SK20104MA1 SK20104MA5 SK20304MA1 SK20304MA5 SK25104MA1 SK25104MA5 SK25304MA1 SK25304MA5 SK32104MA1 SK32104MA5 SK32304MA1 SK32304MA5 SK40104MA1 SK40104MA5 SK40304MA1 SK40304MA5 SK50104MA1 SK50104MA5 SK50304MA1 SK50304MA5 SK60104MA1 SK60104MA5 SK60304MA1 SK60304MA5 SK80104MA1 SK80104MA5 SK80304MA1 SK80304MA5
B 28 1
24
6" - 8" Bores
21 20 22
18
Servicing the complete cylinder This kit offers all parts to service an entire 4MA cylinder with the standard rod gland and standard piston lipseals. Kits are available with Nitrile or Fluorocarbon seals. This kit is a combination of the Standard Gland Kit, Standard Piston Seal Kit, Head Cushion Kit and Cap Cushion Kit. The kits can service cylinders with either the composite or aluminum piston (lipseal). Depending on cylinder configuration, some parts may not be used. Please refer to the pages or bulletins of these individual kits for service instructions. 1 tube of Lube-A-Cyl is also included with each SK kit.
Gland to Head Torque Units USA Ft-Lbs 40 - 45 45 - 50 40 - 45 45 - 50 40 - 45 45 - 50 45 - 50 75 - 80 45 - 50 75 - 80 45 - 50 75 - 80 75 - 80 90 - 95 75 - 80 90 - 95 Metric N-m 54 - 61 61 - 68 54 - 61 61 - 68 54 - 61 61 - 68 61 - 68 102 - 108 61 - 68 102 - 108 61 - 68 102 - 108 102 - 108 122- 129 102 - 108 122- 129 Endcap Fastener or Tie Rod Torque Units USA inch-lbs 32 - 36 72 - 82 72 - 82 216 - 228 216 - 228 360 - 372 420 - 432 960 - 972 Metric N-m 3.6 - 4.1 8-9 8-9 24 - 25.3 24 - 25.3 41 - 42 48 - 49 109 - 115
Bore Size
Rod Dia. 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
Rod No. 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8
*Does not include Head Cushion Kit (not available)
B118
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section Gland Kits

Hydraulic service (includes TS-2000 rod seal) Temperatures: Nitrile/Polyurethane (PUR) -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) Fluorocarbon -10F to +250F (-23C to +121C)
Servicing the rod gland (Cylinder disassembly is not required) Fluid leakage around the piston rod at the gland area will normally indicate a need to replace the gland cartridge. The Parker 4ML gland is a unique cartridge design. It is threaded into the cylinder head and all sizes are removable without disturbing the endcap fasteners. To remove the old gland cartridge from the cylinder: To remove the old gland cartridge from the cylinder: 1. Inspect the piston rod to be sure it is free of burrs or other foreign material that would prevent sliding the gland off the rod. 2. Disconnect any attachments to the piston rod end thread. 3. Lubricate the rod with clean light oil. 4. Unscrew the gland cartridge from the head using the appropriate wrench (see D1 dimension in catalog). 5. Slide the gland cartridge off the piston rod. 6. Verify that the gland-to-head o-ring (#45) is also removed from the head. To install the new gland cartridge onto the cylinder: 1. Re-inspect the surface of the piston rod for scratches, dents and other surface damage, and repair if necessary. 2. Clean and lubricate the surface of the piston rod with clean light oil. 3. Lubricate the rod wiper (#40), rod seal (#41), o-ring (#45) and the inside surfaces of the gland cartridge with clean light oil. 4. Slide the gland cartridge onto the piston rod, align it with the threads in the head, and tighten (clockwise) until seated firmly against the head. 5. Torque the gland cartridge to the specifications shown below. Tools are available to assist this process (see below). Note: Make sure the gland cartridge is sufficiently tight. Failure to do so may result in loosening during operation.
Rod Dia.
5/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/4
Air Cylinders 4ML Series

41 45
4ML Gland Kits (Gland cartridges and rod seals)
40
14
B
3MA/4MA
Standard Rod Gland

41 45
40
14
HI LOAD Rod Gland (includes composite bearing)

41 45
40
14
Metallic Rod Wiper Gland

Every gland cartridge kit contains 1 each of the following: Symbol
14 40 41 45
0695800000 0695810000 0695820000 0695830000
0695900000 0695910000 0695920000 0695930000
0116760000 0116760000 0117030000 0116770000
Standard Rod Gland Cartridge Kit HI LOAD Rod Gland Cartridge Kit Metallic Rod Wiper Gland Cartridge Kit Rod Rod Includes 1 each of symbol 14, 40, 41 & 45 Includes 1 each of symbol 14, 40, 41 & 45 Includes 1 each of symbol 14, 40, 41 & 45 Bore Dia. No. Nitrile & PUR Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Nitrile & PUR Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Nitrile & PUR Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Size Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number Kit Number 5/8 1 RG04ML0061 RG04ML0065 RG04MLH061 RG04MLH065 RG04MLM061 RG04MLM065 1-1/2 1 2 RG04ML0101 RG04ML0105 RG04MLH101 RG04MLH105 RG04MLM101 RG04MLM105 5/8 1 RG04ML0061 RG04ML0065 RG04MLH061 RG04MLH065 RG04MLM061 RG04MLM065 2 1 3 RG04ML0101 RG04ML0105 RG04MLH101 RG04MLH105 RG04MLM101 RG04MLM105 5/8 1 RG04ML0061 RG04ML0065 RG04MLH061 RG04MLH065 RG04MLM061 RG04MLM065 2-1/2 1 3 RG04ML0101 RG04ML0105 RG04MLH101 RG04MLH105 RG04MLM101 RG04MLM105 1 1 RG04ML0101 RG04ML0105 RG04MLH101 RG04MLH105 RG04MLM101 RG04MLM105 3-1/4 1-3/8 3 RG04ML0131 RG04ML0135 RG04MLH131 RG04MLH135 RG04MLM131 RG04MLM135 1 1 RG04ML0101 RG04ML0105 RG04MLH101 RG04MLH105 RG04MLM101 RG04MLM105 4 1-3/8 3 RG04ML0131 RG04ML0135 RG04MLH131 RG04MLH135 RG04MLM131 RG04MLM135 1 1 RG04ML0101 RG04ML0105 RG04MLH101 RG04MLH105 RG04MLM101 RG04MLM105 5 1-3/8 3 RG04ML0131 RG04ML0135 RG04MLH131 RG04MLH135 RG04MLM131 RG04MLM135 1-3/8 1 RG04ML0131 RG04ML0135 RG04MLH131 RG04MLH135 RG04MLM131 RG04MLM135 6 1-3/4 3 RG04ML0171 RG04ML0175 RG04MLH171 RG04MLH175 RG04MLM171 RG04MLM175 1-3/8 1 RG04ML0131 RG04ML0135 RG04MLH131 RG04MLH135 RG04MLM131 RG04MLM135 8 1-3/4 3 RG04ML0171 RG04ML0175 RG04MLH171 RG04MLH175 RG04MLM171 RG04MLM175
Gland to Head Torque Units USA Metric Ft-Lbs N-m 40 - 45 54 - 61 45 - 50 61 - 68 40 - 45 54 - 61 45 - 50 61 - 68 40 - 45 54 - 61 45 - 50 61 - 68 45 - 50 61 - 68 75 - 80 102 - 108 45 - 50 61 - 68 75 - 80 102 - 108 45 - 50 61 - 68 75 - 80 102 - 108 75 - 80 102 - 108 90 - 95 122- 129 75 - 80 102 - 108 90 - 95 122- 129
B119
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
Standard & HI LOAD Gland Gland Wrench
Metallic Rod Wiper Gland Gland Wrench Spanner Wrench
Description
Gland Rod Wiper Rod Seal O-ring - Gland to head
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section Piston Seal Kits 4ML Piston Seal Kits (Piston and cylinder body seals)
Hydraulic service Temperatures: Nitrile -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) Fluorocarbon -10F to +250F (-23C to +121C)
Magnetic Ring (Order separately if required). See Detail "A"

11 27 13 39
18
Detail A
Servicing the piston seals see next page Warning The piston rod (or fastener) to piston threaded connection is secured with an anaerobic adhesive that is temperature sensitive. Cylinders specified with all fluorocarbon seals are assembled with an anaerobic adhesive having a maximum operating temperature rating of +250F (+121C). Cylinders specified with other seal compounds are assembled with an anaerobic adhesive having a maximum operating temperature rating of +165F (+74C). These temperature limitations are necessary to prevent possible loosening of the threaded connections. Cylinders originally manufactured with Class 1 seals (Nitrile) that will be exposed to ambient temperatures above +165F (+74C) must be modified for higher temperature service. Contact the Wadsworth, OH facility immediately and arrange for the piston to rod connection to be properly re-assembled to withstand the higher temperature service and other cylinder changes.
Every piston seal kit (PK) contains (2) of symbols 11, 18 and 39, and (1) of symbol 27
Symbol 11 18 27 39
Description Piston seal (lipseal) O-ring - cylinder body to head & cap Wear band Piston seal backup washer
PK - Piston Seal Kit, Standard Lipseals Bore Size Includes 2 each of symbol 11, 39 & 18 Wear band (#27) for aluminum piston included Nitrile Seals Kit Number
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8 PK1504ML01 PK2004ML01 PK2504ML01 PK3254ML01 PK4004ML01 PK5004ML01 PK6004ML01 PK8004ML01
Magnetic Ring Symbol 13 Only with Nitrile Seals Part Number

0865130151 0865130200 0865130250 0865130325 0865130400 0865130500 0865130600 0865130800
Endcap Fastener or Tie Rod Torque Units USA inch-lbs

32 - 36 72 - 82 72 - 82 216 - 228 216 - 228 360 - 372 420 - 432 960 - 972
Fluorocarbon Seals Kit Number

PK1504ML05 PK2004ML05 PK2504ML05 PK3254ML05 PK4004ML05 PK5004ML05 PK6004ML05 PK8004ML05
Metric N-m
3.6 - 4.1 8-9 8-9 24 - 25.3 24 - 25.3 41 - 42 48 - 49 109 - 115
B120
Catalog 0900P-4

Servicing the Piston Seals
Disassemble the cylinder completely, remove the old seals and clean all the parts. The cylinder bore and piston should then be examined for evidence of scoring. (The light scratch marks usually present on both cylinder bore and piston will generally have no detrimental effects on the performance of the cylinder.) Apply clean light oil to O.D. of piston and all grooves. Install one piston Lipseal (sym. # 11) & one Back-Up Washer (sym. #39) in the groove nearest the rod. The two lips of the Lipseal (sym. #11) should face toward the rod end of the piston and the Back-Up Washer (sym. #39) should be installed in the same piston groove as shown. If required, install the magnetic ring (sym. # 13) in the bottom of the middle groove. (See detail 1 below) Next, install the wear strip (sym. # 27) in the top of the middle groove (See detail 2 below). Coat the inside of the cylinder body with clean light oil and insert the piston cap end first into the cylinder body as shown in detail 3 below. Next, turn the cylinder body on its side and push the piston and rod assembly through the barrel just far enough to expose the piston groove for the second Lipseal. (See detail 4 below.) Be careful not to move the piston too far so as to expose the wear strip (sym. # 27). If the piston should move too far, push the piston and rod assembly completely through the cylinder body and again start the piston from the original end. Now install the second Lipseal (sym. # 11) & Back-Up Washer (sym. #39) in the exposed groove with the two lips of the Lipseal (sym. #11) facing away from the rod and the Back-Up Washer (sym. #39) positioned as shown. Then pull the piston into the cylinder body. The piston and rod are securely locked together with anaerobic adhesive. This threaded connection should only be disassembled or reassembled by factory trained personnel.

NOTE: An extreme pressure lubricant (such as molybdenum disulphate) should be used on the tie rod threads and bearing faces to reduce friction and tie rod twist. Assemble both cap and head, complete with cylinder body O-Rings (sym. # 18), to each end of the cylinder body. Install end cap fasteners and tighten to appropriate torque, using opposite corner to corner torquing sequence. After screws are torqued, firmly torque the rod gland against the head. In case of a DD center trunnion mounted cylinder, care must be taken to prevent binding the cylinder body when repositioning the trunnion collar. The proper method of assembling this type of cylinder is as follows: After all the piston seals have been installed on the piston and the piston is in the cylinder body, fit the cap with its O-ring (sym. # 18) in position onto the cylinder body. Then stud into the trunnion collar the four tie rods that connect the cap to the trunnion collar. Hand tighten the four tie rod nuts at the cap. Distances from the inner face of the cap to the finished face of the trunnion collar should the be made equal at all four tie rods when all four tie rod nuts are in contact with the cap. When the assembly is ready for final torquing, it may be necessary to adjust the tie rods at the cap when torquing the tie rods at the head in order to position the trunnion collar in its final position. As a check, to be certain the trunnion mount will not interfere with cylinder operation, move the piston and rod assembly by hand to determine whether there is any tendency for the piston to bind at the spot where the trunnion collar is located. If any binding is noticeable, readjust the tie rods.
B
11
39
13
27
39
11
Detail 1
Detail 2
Detail 3
Detail 4
B121
Catalog 0900P-4
Maintenance Section 4ML Cylinder Kit 4ML Complete Cylinder Kits (All parts to service entire cylinder)
Hydraulic service Temperatures:
Nitrile/Polyurethane (PUR) -10F to +165F (-23C to +74C) Fluorocarbon -10F to +250F (-23C to +121C)
Servicing the complete cylinder This kit offers all parts to service an entire 4ML cylinder with the standard rod gland and standard piston lipseals. Kits are available with Nitrile/Polyurethane or Fluorocarbon seals. This kit is a combination of the Standard Gland Kit and Standard Piston Seal Kit. Please refer to the pages or bulletins of these individual kits for service instructions.
Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8
Rod Dia.
5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 1-3/4
Rod No.
1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
SK - Complete Cylinder Kit Includes 1 each of Standard Rod Gland Kit and Piston Seal Kit Nitrile & PUR Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Kit Number Kit Number
SK15104ML1 SK15304ML1 SK20104ML1 SK20304ML1 SK25104ML1 SK25304ML1 SK32104ML1 SK32304ML1 SK40104ML1 SK40304ML1 SK50104ML1 SK50304ML1 SK60104ML1 SK60304ML1 SK80104ML1 SK80304ML1 SK15104ML5 SK15304ML5 SK20104ML5 SK20304ML5 SK25104ML5 SK25304ML5 SK32104ML5 SK32304ML5 SK40104ML5 SK40304ML5 SK50104ML5 SK50304ML5 SK60104ML5 SK60304ML5 SK80104ML5 SK80304ML5
Gland to Head Torque Units USA Ft-Lbs

40 - 45 45 - 50 40 - 45 45 - 50 40 - 45 45 - 50 45 - 50 75 - 80 45 - 50 75 - 80 45 - 50 75 - 80 75 - 80 90 - 95 75 - 80 90 - 95
Endcap Fastener or Tie Rod Torque Units USA inch-lbs

32 - 36 72 - 82 72 - 82 216 - 228 216 - 228 360 - 372 420 - 432 960 - 972
Metric N-m
54 - 61 61 - 68 54 - 61 61 - 68 54 - 61 61 - 68 61 - 68 102 - 108 61 - 68 102 - 108 61 - 68 102 - 108 102 - 108 122- 129 102 - 108 122- 129
Metric N-m
3.6 - 4.1 8-9 8-9 24 - 25.3 24 - 25.3 41 - 42 48 - 49 109 - 115
B122
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod Lock Removal and Re-assembly Rod Lock Removal and Re-assembly 1-1/2" to 5" Bores
Air Cylinders 3MA/4MA Series 6" to 8" Bores and all Style DD Mounts (NFPA MT4)
B
3MA/4MA 1. Remove the 3MAJ/4MAJ cylinder from the application to a serviceable area. 2. Using a corner-to-corner sequence, loosen the four SHCS fasteners (1-1/2" to 5" bores) or tie rod nuts (6" to 8" bores and all Style DD mounts (NFPA MT4) at the rod lock face and remove them from the rod lock. Please note that the tie rod nuts for 6" to 8" bores and all Style DD mounts are also used to assemble the base cylinder. 3. Apply a minimum of 60 PSI air pressure to the rod lock port, or apply the appropriate amount of torque to the manual override shaft, in order to release the rod lock from the piston rod. 4. Carefully slide the rod lock off the piston rod and away from the base cylinder. The rod lock is piloted and sealed to the gland OD, so some force may be required. 5. Particularly at larger bores, the rod lock can be heavy. Please remove the rod lock from the piston rod and follow all necessary safety precautions.
3MAJ/4MAJ Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8
1. Remove all dirt and debris from the mating features of the rod lock, base cylinder, fasteners (or nuts) and threads. 2. Apply a minimum of 60 PSI air pressure to the rod lock port, or apply the appropriate amount of torque to the manual override shaft, in order to open the rod lock. 3. Carefully slide the rod lock onto the piston rod and toward the base cylinder. The rod lock is piloted and sealed to the gland OD, so some force may be required. Press the rod lock to the head face as close as possible, avoiding damage to the rod lock o-ring that seals the gland OD. 4. Using a corner-to-corner sequence, install and tighten, to approximately 75% of final torque specifications, the SHCS fasteners (1-1/2" to 5" bores) or tie rod nuts (6" to 8" bores and all Style DD mounts (NFPA MT4)) at the rod lock face. See torque specification table below. 5. Using a calibrated torque wrench, tighten the fasteners or nuts to the final torque specification using the same corner-to-corner sequence. 6. Remove the air pressure from the rod lock port or remove the torque from the manual override shaft to return the rod lock to the locked state. The rod lock units are not field-repairable and must be returned to the Pneumatic Division for any repairs. Please contact the Wadsworth, Ohio facility for any assistance.
SHCS Fastener Torque or Tie Rod Torque inch-lbs

32-36 72-82 72-82 216-228 216-228 360-372 420-432 960-972
Nm
3.6-4.1 8-9 8-9 24-25.3 24-25.3 41-42 48-49 109-115
B123
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
To remove the rod lock from the 3MAJ/4MAJ cylinder in order to service the base 3MAJ/4MAJ cylinder, please perform the following steps:
To re-assemble the rod lock to the base 3MAJ/4MAJ cylinder, please perform the following steps:
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
B124
2MNR Series
Non-Rotating Pneumatic Cylinders
B
3MA/4MA Contents
Features ........................................................................ B126 Ordering Information...................................................... B127 Specifications / Mounting Styles .................................... B128 Technical Data .................................................... B129-B130 Envelope and Mounting Dimensions ................... B131-B139 Cylinder Accessories ........................................... B140-B141 Service Kits ................................................................... B142
B125
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Multiple Piston Rods Three hard-chrome plated and polished piston rods provide stability and strength for higher bearing support. Precision machining provides precise fit for antirotation.
Non-Rotating Pneumatic Cylinders 2MNR Series
Retainer 1 Retainer is easily removed for access to rod gland assemblies.
Check Seal Cushion Molded uretuane cushion combines the sealing capabilities of a lipseal for effective cushioning with check valve action for quick stroke reversal. Floating cushions assure cushion repeatability and long life.
Rounded Lip Piston Seals Carboxylated nitrile w/PTFE seals glide over lubricant film instead of scraping it off.
Tooling Plate Cold rolled carbon steel tooling plate with corrosionresistant finish is easily removable for maintenance.
Rod Seal/Wiper
Combination rod seal and rod wiper, available in either nitrile or fluorocarbon, is inserted into the bearing, creating a rod gland. Completely self-compensating for zero leakage at all pressures.
Rod Bearing 2
Permanently lubricated sintered bronze bearing provides excellent performance in nonlube applications. Bearings are easily removed for service.
Piston and Wear Band Aluminum lightweight piston with nylon wear band (not shown) eliminates metal-to-metal contact to extend cylinder life. Formed, shaped wear band makes installation and repair easier than regular wear strip. Cylinder Body 3 Lightweight anodized aluminum body is wear resistant. The smooth extruded design eliminates areas for contamination.
Cushion Needle Valves Adjustable captive design makes precise adjustment quick and easy. Can be adjusted while cylinder is under pressure.
Caustic washdown version available.
1-1/8" Bore
1 2 3
Retainer is steel on 1-1/8" bore. Rod seals are also inboard. Rod bearing is close-grained cast iron on 1-1/8" bore. 1-1/8" bore has traditional tube and tie-rod design.
B126
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information How to Order 2MNR Series Cylinders
Parker 2MNR Series pneumatic cylinders can be specified by model number by using the table below.
2.00
Bore Size*
1.13 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.25 4.00
2MNR
6.000
Stroke*
Mounting Style* See Mounting Style Table A below.
Use C only if Head End Cushion is required. Double Rod/Double End Cylinder Blank Single End Cylinder K Double Rod Cylinder (three Rods with Tooling Plate One End, Single Rod on the opposite side)
Blank 3
Standard Piston Magnet Ports* U R NPTF Ports BSPP Ports Seals Blank V Std Nitrile Seals Fluorocarbon 9 3 A
Use C only if cap end cushion is required. Piston Rod Thread Type* UNF
Piston Rod Thread Styles* Standard Special and specify dimensions required (Note: Always specify thread size KK, thread depth A and W when special Tooling Plates required.) Tooling Plates* T Standard P Style P Tooling Plate M Special Tooling Plate
Magnetic piston option is available with standard seals only. Special Modifications Use S for Special modifications only.
*Required for Basic Cylinder Model Number For Bumpers, please consult factory.
Note: For sensor specifications and part numbers, please refer to the Electronic Sensors section.
Table A Cylinder Mounting Styles

Mounting Style Code T TC F BB*** BC*** BE*** H*** J*** TE NB NPFA Style MX0 MX2 MS4 MP1 MP2 MP4 MF2 MF1 MX5 Non NFPA Style Mounting Description No Mount (Basic) Tie Rods Extended Cap End Side Tapped Cap Fixed Clevis Cap Detachable Clevis Detachable Pivot Eye Cap Rectangular Flange Head Rectangular Flange Sleeve Nut (Cap End Only) Base Bar
How to Order Parker 2MNR Series Cylinders with Sensors:

Ssensors are not mounted to the cylinder prior to shipment. When ordering a cylinder to accommodate a sensor: 1. Derive a proper model number as shown in the table above. 2. Place a 3 in the piston column of the model number. 3. Order appropriate brackets and sensor as separate line items. See Section H for specifications and part numbers. Example: For cylinder prepared for sensor 2.00CJ2MNR3UT9AC 6.000
***Mounting styles with asterisks can be ordered assembled to the cylinder or as a basic (T) no-mount cylinder.
B127
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Cushion Head End
Piston
Cushion Cap End
3MA/4MA
Specify stroke length required in inches.
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications / Mounting Styles Standard Specifications

N.F.P.A. Interchangeable (Bores 1-1/8" - 4") Cushions: optional at either end or both ends* Strokes: available in any practical length Operating Pressure: 250 psi (17.2 Bar) Standard Fluid: dry, filtered air

Standard Temperature: -10 to 165F (-23 to 73C) High Temperature Option: -20 to 250F (-29 to 121C) Single Rod End or Double Rod End Eleven Mounting Styles (only seven available on 1-1/8" Bore) Non-Rotating, Multi-Rod Design
* Not on 1-1/8" Bore 1-1/8" Bore is twin rod design; 1-1/2" - 4" Bores are triple rod design.
Available Mounting Styles

Basic Mount Tie Rods Extended Cap End* Sleeve Nut (Cap End Only)*
Style T 1-1/8" - 4" Bores Side Tapped
Style TC 1-1/2" - 4" Bores Head Rectangular Flange
Style TE 1-1/2" - 4" Bores Cap Rectangular Flange
Style F 1-1/8" - 4" Bores Cap Detachable Clevis
Style J 1-1/8" - 4" Bores Cap Fixed Clevis*
Style H 1-1/8" - 4" Bores Detachable Pivot Eye
Style BC 1-1/8" - 4" Bores Base Bar
Style BB 1-1/2" - 4" Bores Cap End Trunnion*
Style BE 1-1/8" - 4" Bores Double Rod*
Style NB 1-1/8" - 4" Bores
Style DB 1-1/2" - 4" Bores
K Style 1-1/2" - 4" Bores

B128
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Air Cylinder Cushion Ratings

Bore Size Single Ended Cylinders and Double Ended Cylinders Multi-Rod Both Ends Cylinder End Cap Rod Cap Rod Cap Rod Cap Rod Cap Rod Rating with No Back Pressure 12 6 14 10 17 11 21 15 23 17 Rating with Back Pressure 17 11 20 14 23 15 26 20 28 23
Double Ended Cylinders Single Rod One End Cylinder End SingleRod Triple Rod Single Rod Triple Rod SingleRod Triple Rod SingleRod Triple Rod SingleRod Triple Rod Rating with No Back Pressure 7 6 11 10 12 11 15 15 17 17 Rating with Back Pressure 12 11 16 14 18 15 20 20 23 23
1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 4"
B
3MA/4MA
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 25 15 1 9 8 7 6 4 3 25 2 15 7 8 9 10,000
9 8 7
CONSULT FACTORY
500
4
3 2.5
45 42 39
18
150
36 33 30
100
9
14
VELOCITY (FPM)
8 7 6
10 26 6
22 2
2.5
15
10 10 15 20
25 3 4
50
9 100
150 200
WEIGHT (LB)
25
500
1000
1500 2000
25
5000
CONSULT FACTORY
B129
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
20
50
2A/2AN 2MNR
200
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
1000
15
25
9 1
15
25
9 1
15
25
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Loading Information

Side Load Versus Stroke
80.0
Side Load
70.0 60.0 50.0 40.0 30.0 20.0 10.0 0.0 1 5 10 15 Stroke (in.) 20 25 30
Load
Load (lbs.)
1.125 1.5 2 2.5 3.25 & 4
Torsional Load Versus Stroke
Torsional Load
Load
120.0 100.0
1.125
80.0 60.0 40.0 20.0
Torsion (In-lbs)
1.5 2 2.5 3.25 4
Load
1 5 10 15 Stroke (in.) 20 25 30
0.0
Theoretical Extend and Retract Forces in Pounds

Bore Size 1-1/8" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 4" Movement Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Effective Area (in2) 1.227 1.080 1.767 1.537 3.142 2.553 4.909 3.988 8.296 7.375 12.566 11.646 Pressure (PSI) 20 25 22 35 31 63 51 98 80 166 148 251 233 40 49 43 71 61 126 102 196 160 332 295 503 466 60 74 65 106 92 188 153 295 239 498 443 754 699 80 98 86 141 123 251 204 393 319 664 590 1005 932 100 123 108 177 154 314 255 491 399 830 738 1257 1165 150 184 162 265 231 471 383 736 598 1244 1106 1885 1747 200 245 216 353 307 628 511 982 798 1659 1475 2513 2329 250 307 270 442 384 785 638 1227 997 2074 1844 3142 2911 Cu. Ft. of Displacement per inch of Stroke 0.00071 0.00062 0.00102 0.00089 0.00182 0.00148 0.00284 0.00231 0.00480 0.00427 0.00727 0.00674
Double Rod Extend Forces Single Rod Style

Bore Size 1-1/8" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 4" Rod Size 1/2" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 1" 1" Effective Area (in2) 0.798 1.460 2.835 4.602 7.510 11.781 Pressure (PSI) 20 16 29 57 92 150 236 40 32 58 113 184 300 471 60 48 88 170 276 451 707 80 64 117 227 368 601 942 100 80 146 283 460 751 1178 150 120 219 425 690 1127 1767 200 160 292 567 920 1502 2356 250 199 365 709 1150 1878 2945 Cu. Ft. of Displacement per inch of Stroke 0.00046 0.00085 0.00164 0.00266 0.00435 0.00682
B130
Catalog 0900P-4
Envelope and Mounting Dimensions Basic Single End Style T (NFPA MX0)
Y W MM ROD DIA. 1
P + STROKE EE K1
4 2 3
E Sq.
B
F H C G LB + STROKE ZJ + STROKE J
Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4
Rod Dia. MM 5/16 8mm 12mm 16mm 16mm 16mm
C 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
E 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2
F 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8
G 1 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-11/16 1-11/16
H 5/8 3/4 1 1 1
J 5/8 15/16 15/16 15/16 1-3/16 1-3/16
K1 1/8 5/32 5/32 3/16 3/16
W 1.10 1.10 1.35 1.10 1.10
Y 2-1/32 2-3/4 2-3/4 3-1/16 3-7/16 3-7/16
Add Stroke LB 2-1/2 4 4 4-1/8 4-7/8 4-7/8 P 1-15/32 2-5/16 2-5/16 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 ZJ 3-3/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 5-1/2
*Twin Rod Only (not shown)
Y W MM ROD DIA.
P + STROKE EE DD 1
4 E Sq.
F H C G LB + STROKE ZJ + STROKE
Table 2 Envelope and Mounting Dimensions

Bore 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Rod Dia. MM 8mm 12mm 16mm 16mm 16mm BB 1 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-3/8 C 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 DD 1/4-28 5/16-24 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 E 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 EE (NPTF) 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 Add Stroke F 3/8 3/8 3/8 G 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-7/16 H 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 J 15/16 K 1/4 R 1.43 1.84 2.19 2.76 3.32 W 1.10 1.10 1.35 1.10 1.10 Y 2-3/4 2-3/4 LB 4 4 P ZJ
2-5/16 5-1/2 2-5/16 5-1/2
15/16 5/16 15/16 5/16 1-3/16 1-3/16 3/8 3/8
3-1/16 4-1/8 2-3/8 5-7/8 3-7/16 4-7/8 2-5/8 6-5/8 3-7/16 4-7/8 2-5/8 6-5/8
5/8 1-11/16 5/8 1-11/16
B131
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
K J
3 BB R Sq.
2A/2AN 2MNR
Tie Rods Extend Cap End Style TC
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
Catalog 0900P-4
Envelope and Mounting Dimensions

UF TF 1 MM ROD DIA. Y W P + STROKE K1 EE
4 2 3 E
FB 4 HOLES

Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Rod Dia. MM
5/16
C 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
E 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2
F 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8
FB 7/32 3/8 3/8
G 1 1-7/16 1-7/16
H 5/8 3/4 3/4 1 1 1
J 5/8 15/16
K1 1/8
R 1.00 1.43 1.84 2.19 3.32
TF 2 2-3/4 33/8 3-7/8
UF 2-1/2 3-3/8 4-1/8 4-5/8
W 1.10 1.10 1.35 1.10 1.10
Add Stroke LB 4 4 P ZJ
2-1/32 2-1/2 1-15/32 3-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-5/16 5-1/2 2-5/16 5-1/2 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 5-7/8 6-5/8 6-5/8
8mm 12mm 16mm 16mm 16mm
5/16 1-7/16
15/16 5/32 15/16 5/32 1-3/16 3/16 1-3/16 3/16
3-1/16 4-1/8 3-7/16 4-7/8 3-7/16 4-7/8
7/16 1-11/16 7/16 1-11/16
2.76 4-11/16 5-1/2 5-7/16 6-1/4
Cap Rectangular Flange Style H (NFPA MF2)

UF TF 1 4 2 3 E FB 4 HOLES F H C G LB + STROKE ZF + STROKE J F MM ROD DIA. W Y P + STROKE EE

Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Rod Dia. MM 5/16 8mm 12mm 16mm 16mm 16mm C 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 E 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 F 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 FB 7/32 5/16 3/8 3/8 G 1 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-7/16 H 5/8 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 J 5/8 1-5/16 1-5/16 1-5/16 1-3/16 1-3/16 R 1.00 1.43 1.84 2.19 2.76 3.32 TF 2 2-3/4 3-3/8 3-7/8 5-7/16 UF 2-1/2 3-3/8 4-1/8 4-5/8 6-1/4 W 1.10 1.10 1.35 1.10 1.10 Y 2-1/32 2-3/4 2-3/4 3-1/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 Add Stroke LB P ZF 4
2-3/4 1-15/32
4-3/8 2-5/16 5-7/8 4-3/8 2-5/16 5-7/8 4-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 6-1/4 7-1/4 7-1/4
7/16 1-11/16 7/16 1-11/16
4-11/16 5-1/2
B132
Non-Rotating Pneumatic Cylinders 2MNR Series Sleeve Nut (Cap End Only) Style TE (NFPA MX5)
Y W MM ROD DIA. EE DD 1 P + STROKE
4 E Sq.
B
3MA/4MA
BG
3 R Sq.

Bore 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Rod Dia. MM 8mm 12mm 16mm 16mm 16mm BG 0.45 0.48 0.48 0.50 0.50 C 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 DD 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 E 2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 EE (NPTF) 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 F 3/8 3/8 3/8 G 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-7/16 H 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 J 15/16 15/16 15/16 1-3/16 1-3/16 R 1.43 1.84 2.19 2.76 3.32 W 1.10 1.10 1.35 1.10 1.10 Y 2-3/4 2-3/4 Add Stroke LB 4 4 P 2-5/16 2-5/16 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 ZF 5.10 5.10 5.35 5.23 5.98 ZJ 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-7/8 6-5/8 6-5/8
5/16-24 2-1/2
3-1/16 4-1/8 3-7/16 4-7/8 3-7/16 4-7/8
5/8 1-11/16 5/8 1-11/16
Y W MM ROD DIA. 1 4 2 TH 3 NT THREAD, ND DEEP 4 TAPPED MTG. HOLES TN F H C XT G
P + STROKE EE K1
E Sq.
J SN + STROKE LB + STROKE ZJ + STROKE

Bore Rod Dia. MM 8mm C E EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 F 1/4 G 1 H 5/8 J 5/8 K1 ND 1/4 3/8 NT 10-32 TH
0.003
TN 1/2 5/8 7/8
XT 2
Add Stroke LB 4 4 P SN ZJ
1-1/8* 5/16 1-1/2 2
5/8 1-1/2 3/4 2 3
0.750
2-1/32 2-1/2 1-15/32 1-1/2 3-3/4 2-5/16 2-1/4 5-1/2 2-5/16 2-1/4 5-1/2
3/8 1-7/16 3/4 15/16 1/8 3/8 1-7/16 1
1/4-20 0.993
1.10 2-13/16 2-3/4 1.10 2-13/16 2-3/4
12mm 3/4 2-1/2
3/8 1-7/16 3/4 15/16 5/32 7/16 5/16-18 1.243 15/16 5/32 5/8 5/8 1-11/16 1 1-3/16 3/16 3/4 5/8 1-11/16 1 1-3/16 3/16 3/4
2-1/2 16mm 3/4 4
3/8-16 1.493 1-1/4 1/2-13 1.868 1-1/2
1.35 3-1/16 3-1/16 4-1/8 2-3/8 2-3/8 5-7/8 1.10 3-7/16 3-7/16 4-7/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 6-5/8
3-1/4 16mm 3/4 3-3/4 16mm 3/4 4-1/2 *Twin Rod Only (not shown)
1/2-13 2.243 2-1/16 1.10 3-7/16 3-7/16 4-7/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 6-5/8
B133
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
Side Tapped Mount Style F (NFPA MS4)
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Envelope and Mounting Dimensions Cap End Trunnion Style DB (NFPA MT2)
Y W 1 MM ROD DIA.
P + STROKE EE K1
2 TD
TL
3 E Sq. UT
TL H C
F G LB + STROKE XJ + STROKE ZJ + STROKE J

Rod Dia. MM 8mm 12mm 16mm 16mm 16mm EE (NPTF) 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 TD
Bore 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Bore 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4
C 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
E 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2
F 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8
G 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-11/16 1-11/16
H 3/4 3/4 1 1 1
J 15/16 15/16 15/16 1-3/16 1-3/16
K1 1/8 5/32 5/32 3/16 3/16
+0.000, -0.001
TL 1 1 1 1 1
UT 4 4-1/2 5 5-3/4 6-1/2
W 1.10 1.10 1.35 1.10 1.10
Y 2-3/4 2-3/4 3-1/16 3-7/16 3-7/16
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Add Stroke LB 4 4 4-1/8 4-7/8 4-7/8 P 2-5/16 2-5/16 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 XJ 5 5 5-3/8 6 6 ZJ 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-7/8 6-5/8 6-5/8
B134
Catalog 0900P-4
Envelope and Mounting Dimensions

Y W MM ROD DIA. EE K1 CD 2 MR 1 F H C G LB + STROKE XD + STROKE ZD1 + STROKE J F1 L1 3 CW CW CB 1 P + STROKE
4 E Sq.
B
3MA/4MA
Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4
Rod Dia. MM 5/16 8mm 12mm 16mm 16mm 16mm W 1.10 1.10 1.35 1.10 1.10
C 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 Y 2-1/32 2-3/4 2-3/4 3-1/16 3-7/16 3-7/16
CB 3/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 1-1/4 1-1/4
+.000, .002
CD
CW 1/4 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8
E 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2
F 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8
F1 1/2 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8
G 1 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-11/16 1-11/16
H 5/8 3/4 3/4 1 1 1
J 5/8 15/16 15/16 15/16 1-3/16 1-3/16
K1 1/8 5/32 5/32 3/16 3/16
L1 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 1-1/4 1-1/4
MR1 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4
0.375 0.501 0.501 0.501 0.751 0.751
Add Stroke 3 4-3/8 4-3/8 4-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 1-15/32 2-5/16 2-5/16 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 4-7/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 7 8-1/2 8-1/2 5-1/4 7-1/8 7-1/8 9-1/4 9-1/4 *Twin Rod Only (not shown) 7-1/2

Y W MM ROD DIA. EE CD LR MR F H C G LB + STROKE XC + STROKE ZC + STROKE J F L 2 1 P + STROKE K1
4 E Sq. 3
CW
CW CB

Bore 1-1/2 2 Rod Dia. MM 8mm C 3/4 CB 3/4 3/4 3/4
+.000, -.002
CD
CW 1/2 1/2
E 2 3
EE (NPTF) 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2
LR 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1
MR 5/8 5/8 5/8
W 1.10 1.10
Add Stroke LB P XC ZC 6-7/8 6-7/8 7-1/4
0.501 0.501 0.501
3/8 1-7/16 3/4 3/8 1-7/16 3/4 3/8 1-7/16 5/8 1-11/16 5/8 1-11/16 1 1 1
15/16 3/8 15/16 3/8 15/16 3/8 1-3/16 5/8 1-3/16 5/8
2-3/4 4-3/8 2-5/16 6-1/4 2-3/4 4-3/8 2-5/16 6-1/4
12mm 3/4
1/2 2-1/2 5/8 3-3/4 5/8 4-1/2
2-1/2 16mm 3/4 4
1.35 3-1/16 4-1/2 2-3/8 6-5/8
3-1/4 16mm 3/4 1-1/4 0.751 16mm 3/4 1-1/4 0.751
15/16 1.10 3-7/16 5-1/2 2-5/8 7-7/8 8-13/16 15/16 1.10 3-7/16 5-1/2 2-5/8 7-7/8 8-13/16
B135
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
LB
XD
ZD1
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900-4
Envelope and Mounting Dimensions Detachable Pivot Eye Style BE (NFPA MP4)
Y W MM ROD DIA.
P + STROKE EE K1 CD 1 2 MR 2 F L1 G LB + STROKE XD + STROKE ZD2 + STROKE J F1 3 CB 1
B
H C
4 E Sq.

Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Rod Dia. MM 5/16 8mm 12mm 16mm 16mm 16mm W 1.10 1.10 1.35 1.10 1.10 C 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 Y 2-1/32 2-3/4 2-3/4 3-1/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 CB 3/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 CD1 +.002 +.004 0.375 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.750 0.750 E 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 F 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 F1 1/2 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 G 1 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-11/16 1-11/16 H 5/8 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 J 5/8 15/16 15/16 15/16 1-3/16 1-3/16 K1 1/8 5/32 5/32 3/16 3/16 L1 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 MR2 3/8 5/8 5/8 11/16 7/8 7/8
Add Stroke LB 3 4-3/8 4-3/8 4-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 P 1-15/32 2-5/16 2-5/16 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 XD 4-7/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 7 8-1/2 8-1/2 ZD2 5-1/4 7-1/4 7-1/4 7-11/16 9-3/8 93/8
B136
Catalog 0900-4
Envelope and Mounting Dimensions Base Bar Style NB
Y W MM ROD DIA. 1 AB HOLES 4 4 PLACES ST 3 SW TS US H F C XS
P + STROKE EE K1
E Sq. LH SW G SS + STROKE LB + STROKE ZJ + STROKE
B
SU SU J SW

Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Rod Dia. MM 5/16 8mm 12mm 16mm 16mm 16mm W 1.10 1.10 1.35 1.10 1.10 AB 13/64 7/16 7/16 7/16 9/16 9/16 XS 1-3/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-7/8 2-7/8 C 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 Y 2-1/32 2-3/4 2-3/4 3-1/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 E 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 F 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 G 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 H 5/8 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 J 5/8 15/16 15/16 15/16 1-3/16 1-3/16 K1 1/8 5/32 5/32 3/16 3/16 LH
.005
ST 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2
SU 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/4
SW 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2
TS 1-7/8 2-3/4 3-1/4 3-3/4 4-3/4 5-1/2
US 2-3/8 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5-3/4 6-1/2
1.000 1.243 1.493 1.868 2.368 2.743
Add Stroke LB 2-1/2 4 4 4-1/8 4-7/8 4-7/8 P 1-15/32 2-5/16 2-5/16 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 SS 1-3/4 2-7/8 2-7/8 3 3-1/4 3-1/4 ZJ 3-3/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 5-1/2
B137
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
Catalog 0900-4
Envelope and Mounting Dimensions Double End* Style K

Three Rods with Tooling Plate One End Single Rod on the Opposite End
PK + STROKE VF
WF CC or KK MM B
D WRENCH FLATS A K1 G LG + STROKE ZMK + 2 X STROKE G F

Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Bore 1-1/8* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Rod No. 1 1 1 1 1 Y 1-7/8 1-7/8 1-15/16 2-7/16 2-7/16 Rod Dia. MM 3/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 1 1 Thread Style 8 CC 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 7/8-14 Thread Style 4&9 KK 7/16-20 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 3/4-16
For dimensions not shown on Table 1, please refer to table corresponding to specific mounting style. A 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/8 B
+0.000 -0.002
C 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
D 5/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 7/8 7/8
F 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8
G 1 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-11/16 1-11/16
H 5/8 3/4 3/4 1 1 1
K1 1/8 5/32 5/32 3/16 3/16
VF 1/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4
WF 3/8 1 1 1 1-3/8 1-3/8
1.124 1.124 1.124 1.499 1.499
Add Stroke LG 2-7/8 4-1/8 4-1/8 4-1/4 4-3/4 4-3/4 SSK 2-1/4 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-1/2 3-3/4 3-3/4 SS NB SNK 1-7/8 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 SN F PK 1-27/32 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8
Add 2X Stroke ZMK 4-5/8 7 7 7-3/8 8-1/2 8-1/2 ZMR 7-7/8 7-7/8 8-1/2 9-1/2 9-1/2
Replaces Dimension On Mtg. Style *Twin Rod Cylinder not shown
B138
Catalog 0900-4
Tooling Plate Dimensions Standard Tooling Plate Style T
Table 4 Dimensions
Bore H 5/8 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 QQ 6-32 10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 TB 0.75 1.12 1.43 1.84 2.19 2.76 TP 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 4 3-1/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2
TP Sq.
QQ THREAD 4 PLACES
B
3-1/4 4
TB Sq.
Tooling Plate Style P

Table 5 Dimensions
Bore
QQ THREAD 4 PLACES
H 5/8 3/4 3/4 1 1 1
QQ 6-32 10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24* 3/8-24
TT 0.75 1.12 1.43 1.84 1.79 3.44
TZ 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4
1-1/8 1-1/2 2
TZ Sq.
2-1/2 3-1/4 4
* Thread depth is 1/2".

TT Sq. H
B139
Catalog 0900-4
Cylinder Accessories Mounting Plate & Eye Bracket

Eye Bracket Dimensions
Bore Size 11/8 0877110000 3/8 3/8 21/64 13/64 1-1/2 1/2 1-1/8 5/8 3/8 1.12 5/16 11/2, 2, 21/2 1458060050 3/4 1/2 13/32 2-1/2 3/8 1-1/8 3/4 1/2 9/16 1.63 31/4, 4 1458060075 1-1/4 3/4 17/32 3-1/2 5/8 1-7/8 1-1/4 3/4 7/8 2.55 Part No. CB
+.004 CD +.002
MR
25
CB
FL
DD 4 HOLES F
CD DB DD E F FL LR M MR R TB
LR R E R E
DB
TB TYPICAL 4 CORNERS PART NO. 0877110000 ONLY
Clevis Bracket Dimensions

CB MR
Clevis Bracket Dimensions

Bore Size
CW
11/8 0877120000 3/8 3/8 1/4 13/64 1-1/2 1/2 1-1/8 5/8 3/8 3/8 1.15 5/16
11/2, 2, 21/2 1458050050 3/4 1/2 1/2 13/32 3-1/2 1/2 1-1/2 3/4 1/2 5/8 2.55
31/4, 4 1458050075 1-1/4 3/4 5/8 17/32 5 5/8 1-7/8 1-3/16 3/4 29/32 3.82
25
CW
Part No. CB CD CW DD E
DD 4 HOLES
+.004 CD +.002
FL
LR R E R E
F FL LR M MR R TB
DB
TB
TYPICAL 4 CORNERS PART NO. 0877120000 ONLY
Bore Angle A*
1-1/8 1-1/2 45 52
2 43
2-1/2 3-1/4 29 50
4 49
* Angle of rotation specified is for BB Style mount only.
B140
Catalog 0900-4
Cylinder Accessories Pilot Adapter Plate

(For use with Style P Tooling Plate only)
CC TH'D 2 PLACES
Pilot Adapter Plate Dimensions

Bore 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 Part Number 0877130112 0877130150 0877130200 0877130250 0877130325 0877130400 A 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 7/8 7/8 CC 1/4-20 5/16-18 5/16-18 3/8-16 1/2-13 1/2-13 D 1.260 1.575 1.969 2.480 3.150 3.937 GG 0.750 0.860 1.180 1.500 1.970 2.760 TZ 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 V 0.16 0.16 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
B
GG TZ SQ.
V A
KIT INCLUDES SCREWS
Female Rod Clevis

ER CD +.002
CE A KK THREAD +.004 CW CB CW
Female Rod Clevis Dimensions

Part Number A CB CD CE CW ER KK 1458030044 3/4 3/4 1/2 1-1/2 1/2 1/2 7/16 - 20 1458030050 3/4 3/4 1/2 1-1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 - 20 1458030075 1-1/16 1-1/4 3/4 2-1/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 - 16
Rod Eye Knuckle

ER CD CD CD CA CD +.004 +.002 A
FULL THREAD
Rod Eye Dimensions

Part Number A CB CD
KK THREAD CB
1458040044 3/4 3/4 1/2 1-1/2 23/32 7/16 - 20
1458040050 3/4 3/4 1/2 1-1/2 23/32 1/2 - 20
1458040075 1-1/8 1-1/4 3/4 2-1/16 1-1/16 3/4 - 16
CA ER KK
1-1/8" Bore Pin

1.25 1.03 .50
Part Number 0883030000
.38
Pivot Pin
CL CD -.002
+.001
Pivot Pin Dimensions

Part Number CD CL 0856640050 1/2 1-7/8 0856640075 3/4 2-5/8
B141
Catalog 0900-4
Service Kits Seal Kits

Bore Size
1-1/2"
Complete Cylinder Kit Type

Standard Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Standard Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Standard Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Standard Seals Fluorocarbon Seals Standard Seals Fluorocarbon Seals
Kit Number
SG2MNR1501 SG2MNR1505 SG2MNR2001 SG2MNR2005 SG2MNR2501 SG2MNR2505 SG2MNR3201 SG2MNR3205 SG2MNR4001 SG2MNR4005
2" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 4"
B142
Series 2A/2AN
Heavy Duty Air Cylinders
B
3MA/4MA Contents
Features ..........................................................................B144 Ordering Information........................................................B145 Mounting Styles ...............................................................B146 How to Order ...................................................................B147 Specifications ........................................................ B148-B149 Mounting Dimensions 1" to 6" Bores ..................... B150-B159 Mounting Dimensions 7" Bores ............................. B160-B161 Mounting Dimensions 8" to 14" Bores ................... B162-B171 Spherical Bearing Mounting .................................. B172-B173 Double Rod Models .........................................................B174 Style 55 Rod End.............................................................B175 Adjustable Cushions ........................................................B176 Non-Lube Cylinder (2AN) ................................................B177 Cylinder Accessories ............................................. B178-B180 Service Kits ........................................................... B181-B183
B143
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Primary Seal Unique Serrated Lipseal is a proven leakproof design, (Parker Patent #2997318) completely selfcompensating and selfrelieving to withstand variations and conform to mechanical deflection that may occur.
Heavy Duty Air Cylinders 2A / 2AN Series

Piston Rod Medium carbon steel, induction case-hardened, hard chromeplated and polished to 10 RMS finish. Piston rods are made from 90,000 to 100,000 PSI minimum yield material in 1/2" through 4" diameters. Larger diameters vary between 57,000 and 90,000 PSI minimum material, depending on rod diameter. The piston thread equals the catalog style #4 rod end thread for each rod diameter to assure proper piston-to-rod thread strength. Two wrench flats are provided for rod end attachment. Steel Cap Bored and grooved to provide concentricity for mating parts. Ports NPTF ports are standard.
Piston Rod Stud Furnished on 2" diameter rods and smaller when standard style #4 rod end threads are required. Also available in 2 times the catalog A dimension length. Studs have rolled threads and are made from high strength steel. Anaerobic adhesive is used to permanently lock the stud to the piston rod.
Steel Head Bored and grooved to provide concentricity for mating parts. Ports NPTF ports are standard.
End Seals Pressure-actuated cylinder body-tohead and cap O rings.
Alloy Steel Tie Rod Nuts
Jewel Rod Gland Assembly Externally removable without cylinder disassembly. Long bearing surface is inboard of the seals, assuring positive lubrication from within the cylinder. An O ring is used as a seal between gland and head, and also serves as a prevailing torquetype lock.
High Strength Secondary Tie Rods Made Seal from 100,000 PSI Double-Service minimum yield steel Wiperseal with rolled threads for (Parker Patent added strength. #2907596) acts as a secondary Adjustable Floating Cushions pressure seal Cushions are optional and can be on the extend supplied at head end, cap end, or stroke and OPTIONALboth ends without change in envelope PISTONS cleans the rod or mounting dimensions. on the return stroke. One-Piece Nodular Iron Piston The wide piston surface contacting cylinder bore reduces bearing loads. Anaerobic adhesive is used to permanently lock and seal the piston to the rod. Pistons on Cylinder Bores 8" and larger come standard with a wear band to ensure long service life.
Align-A-Groove (Patent #3043639) A 3/16" wide surface machined at each end of the cylinder body. Makes precise mounting quick and easy. The Cylinder Body Hard chrome-plated bore, steel tubing honed to a 15 micro inch finish on 1-1/2" through 14" bore sizes. 1" bore size is aluminum with hard-coated bore.
Prelubricated Wearing Surfaces BRONZE PHENOLIC FILLED Parker Series 2A Air Cylinders are factory BEARINGS TEFLON RINGS prelubricated. Lube-A-Cyl applied to seals, piston, cylinder bore, piston rod and gland surfaces provides lubrication for normal operation. Lube-A-Cyl has been field and laboratory tested, and is recommended by Parker for air cylinders where lubricant should remain in the cylinder and not be SYNTHETIC RUBBER EXPANDER RINGS expelled into the atmosphere. Piston with Retainer Nut Optional at extra charge.
Piston Lipseal Fully dynamic and self-compensating for variations in pressure, mechanical deflections and wear.
For guided version of the 2A cylinder, please see the HB Series in Section F.
B144
Catalog 0900P-4
Model Numbers
Parker Series 2A cylinders can be completely and accurately described by a model number consisting of coded symbols. To develop a model number, select only those symbols that represent the cylinder required, and place them in the sequence indicated below.
Series 2A Model Numbers How to Develop Them How to Decode Them
6.00
2A
12.000
B
Bore Size* Specify in inches. Cushion Head End Use C only if cushion head end is required.
Series* 2A Std. 2AN NonLube
Piston Rod Number* For single rod cylinders, select one only.
Note: Check rod selection chart in Engineering Section for appropriate piston rod diameter.
Stroke* 2 Specify in inches.
Cushion Cap End Use C only if cushion cap end is required.
Double Rod** Use K only if double rod cylinder is required. Mounting Style* TB, TC, TD, J, H, JB, HB, C, F, BB, D, DB, DD 1, SB Mounting Modifications Blank P M R None Thrust Key (Styles C & F only) Manifold Port O-Ring Seal (Style C only) Removable Trunnions Combination Mounting Style Any practical mounting style as listed under Mounting Style. Blank F V W
Special Modifications Use S only if special modifications are required. Do not use S for rod end modifications. Common Modifications None Nut Retained Piston Fluorocarbon Seals Water Service 4 7
Piston Rod Threads* A W M UNF Standard BSF (British Fine) Metric
Piston Rod Alternate Thread Blank 2 Standard Length Stud two times longer than standard
Piston Rod End* Small Male Female Thread for Spherical Rod Eye 8 Intermediate Male 9 Short Female 55 Rod End for Flange Coupling 3 3 Special (Specify)
Ports* U T R B NPTF (Dry Seal Pipe Thread) (standard) Used only for SAE Straight Thread (O-Ring Port) Used only for BSP (Parallel Thread ISO 228) Used only for BSPT (Taper Thread ISO 7-Rc) Used only for Metric Thread Used only for Metric Thread per ISO 6149
**Double Rod Cylinders For double rod cylinders, specify rod number and rod end symbols for both piston rods. A typical double rod model number would be: 6.00 KJ2AU14A/14A 12.000
G Y
* 1 2 3
Required for Basic Cylinder Model Number Specify XI dimension In case of Stop Tube, call out gross stroke length (net stroke + stop tube length). For information regarding Style 55 Rod Ends, please refer to page B205.
Cylinder serial numbers are factory production record numbers and are assigned to each cylinder in addition to the model number.
NOTE: For sensor specifications and part numbers, please see the Electronic Sensors section. Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
B145
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Styles
Heavy Duty Air Cylinders 2A / 2AN Series Available Mounting Styles
Tie Rods Extended Head End Style TB
Tie Rods Extended Cap End Style TC
Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Style TD
B
(NFPA MX3) 1"-6", Pg B180 (NFPA MX2) 7", B190 8"-14", Pg B192 (NFPA MX1) 1"-6", Pg B180 8"-14", Pg B192 1"-6", Pg B180 8"-14", Pg B192 Cap Square Flange Style HB (NFPA MF1) 1"-6", Pg B180 Side Lug Style C
Head Square Flange Style JB
(NFPA MF5)
1"-6", Pg B182 (NFPA MF2) 7", B190 8"-14", Pg B192
(NFPA MF6) 1"-6", Pg B180
1"-6", Pg B182 (NFPA MS2) 7", B190 8"-14", Pg B192
1"-6", Pg B184 7", B191 8"-14", Pg B194
Side Tapped Style F
Cap Fixed Clevis Style BB
Head Trunnion Style D
Cap Trunnion Style DB
(NFPA MS4)
1"-6", Pg B184 (NFPA MP1) 8"-14", Pg B196
1"-6", Pg B188 (NFPA MT1) 7", B191 8"-14", Pg B198
1"-6", Pg B186"- (NFPA MT2) 14", Pg B200
1"-6", Pg B186 7", B191 8"-14", Pg B200
Intermediate Fixed Trunnion Style DD
Spherical Bearing Style SB
Double Rod Cylinders Style KTB Shown
(NFPA MT4) 1-1/2"- 6", Pg B186 8"-14", Pg B200
1-1/2"- 6", Pg B202 8"-14", Pg B203
Most of the above illustrated mounting styles are available in double rod cylinders. See Catalog page B174.
B146
Catalog 0900P-4
How to Order Series Cylinders
When ordering Series 2A cylinders, please review the following:

Note: Duplicate cylinders can be ordered by giving the SERIAL NUMBER from the nameplate of the original cylinder. Factory records supply a quick positive identification. Piston Rods: Specify rod code number based on diameter. Give thread style number for a standard thread or specify dimensions. See Style 3 Rod End below. Cushions: If cushions are required specify according to the model number on the next page. If the cylinder is to have a double rod and only one cushion is required, be sure to specify clearly which end of the cylinder is to be cushioned. Special Modifications: Additional information is required on orders for cylinders with special modifications. This is best handled with descriptive notes. For further information, consult factory. Fluid Medium: Series 2A hydraulic cylinders are equipped with seals for use with lubricated air.
B
3MA/4MA
Class 1 Seals
Class 1 seals are the seals provided as standard in a cylinder assembly unless otherwise specified. For further information on fluid compatibility or operating limitations of all components, see section C. For the 2A series cylinders the following make-up Class 1 Seals: Primary Piston Rod Seal Nitrile with PTFE back-up washers
Combination Mountings
Single Rod End The first mounting is the one called out on the head end of the cylinder. The second or subsequent mountings are called out as they appear in the assembly moving away from the rod end. Exception: When tie rod mountings are part of a combination, the model number should contain an S (Special) in the model code and a note in the body of the order clarifying the mounting arrangement. The P is used to define a thrust key and is not considered to be a mounting. However, it is located at the primary end. Example: 4.00 CCBB2ALTS14AC x 10.000 Combination C mounting head only. BB mounting cap end This cylinder is also cushioned at both ends. Double Rod End In general, the model number is read left to right corresponding to the cylinder as viewed from left to right with the primary end at rod end #1. See Double Rod Models information page in this section. For this option the piston rod number, piston rod end, and piston rod threads are to be specified for both ends. The simplest are for symmetric cylinders such as: TD, C, E, F, G, and CB mounts. All other mounting styles, the description of the first rod end will be at the mounting end. In the case of multiple mounts, the description of the first rod end will be at the primary mounting end. For DD mounts, the description of the first rod end will be the same location as the XI dimension. Example: 4.00 KDD2ALT24A/18A x 10.000 XI=8 This is a center trunnion mounting cylinder with the XI dimension measured from the code 2 rod side of the cylinder which has the style 4 thread. The opposite end code 1 rod with the style 8 thread.
Style 3 Rod End

A style 3 rod end indicates a special rod end configuration. All special piston rod dimensions must have all three: KK; A; W/WF or LA/LAF specified with the rod fully retracted. A sketch or drawing should be submitted for rod ends requiring special machining such as snap ring grooves, keyways, tapers, multiple diameters, etc. It is good design practice to have this machining done on a diameter at least 0.065 inches smaller than the piston rod diameter. This allows the piston rod to have a chamfer preventing rod seal damage
during assembly or maintenance. Standard style 55 rod ends with a longer than standard WG dimension should call out a style 3 rod end and the note: same as 55 except WG=____. A drawing should be submitted for special 55 rod ends that have specific tolerances or special radii. Special rod ends that have smaller than standard male threads, larger than standard female threads, or style 55 rod ends with smaller than standard AF or AE dimensions are to be reviewed by Engineering for proper strength at operating pressure.
Service Policy
On cylinders returned to the factory for repairs, it is standard policy for the Cylinder Division to make such part replacements as will put the cylinder in as good as new condition. Should the condition of the returned cylinder be such that expenses for repair would exceed the costs of a new one, you will be notified. Address all correspondence and make shipments to, Service Department at your nearest regional plant listed in the pages of this catalog.
Certified Dimensions
Parker Cylinder Division guarantees that all cylinders ordered from this catalog will be built to dimensions shown. All dimensions are certified to be correct, and thus it is not necessary to request certified drawings.
B147
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Piston Rod Wiper Nitrile Piston Seals Nitrile with polymyte back-up washers O-Rings Nitrile
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications Standard Specifications

Heavy Duty Service ANSI/(NFPA) T3.6.7R2-1996 Specifications and Mounting Dimension Standards Standard Construction Square Head Tie Rod Design Nominal Pressure Up to 250 PSI Air Service Standard Fluid Filtered Air Standard Temperature* -10F to +165F Bore Sizes 1" through 14" (Larger sizes available)** Piston Rod Diameter 1/2" through 5-1/2" ** Mounting Styles 15 standard styles at various application ratings Strokes Available in any practical stroke length Cushions Optional at either end or both ends of stroke. Float Check at cap end. Rod Ends Three Standard Choices Specials to Order
* See page A4, Operating Fluids and Temperature Range for higher temperature service. ** See table below for standard bore sizes and available piston rod diameters. NOTE: Series 2A Air Cylinders fully meet ANSI/(NFPA) T3.6.7R21996 Specifications and Mounting Dimension Standards for Square Head Industrial Fluid Power Cylinders. Parker Style TB, JB, HB, C, DB, and BB are available in 7" bore size, see pages C190-C191.
In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, specifications in this catalog are subject to change.
Available Bore Sizes and Piston Rod Diameters

Bore Size 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 4" 5" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" Piston Rod Diameter 1/2" l 5/8" l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 1" 1-3/8" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 4-1/2" 5" 5-1/2"
B148
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Weights
The weights shown in Tables A and B are for Parker Series 2A/2AN cylinders with various piston rod diameters. To determine the net weight of a cylinder, first select the proper basic weight for zero stroke, then calculate the weight of the cylinder stroke and add the result to the basic weight. For

extra rod extension use piston rod weights per inch shown in Table B. Weights of cylinders with intermediate rods may be estimated from table below by taking the difference between the piston rod weights per inch and adding it to the Code 1 weight for the cylinder bore size involved.
B
Single Rod Cylinders Basic Wt. Zero Stroke T, TB, TC, BB, C, D, DB TD, F, H, J
2.5 2.6 3.7 4.5 6.5 7.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 13.2 16.5 17.0 27.0 26.0 26.5 36.0 39.0 39.5 63.0 68.0 100.0 80.0 82.0 94.0 168.0 182.0 258.0 274.0 350.0 435.0 510.0
Add Per Inch of Stroke 2A, 2AN

.20 .23 .3 .4 .5 .63 .8 .6 .73 1.1 .8 1.0 1.4 1.0 1.2 2.0 1.1 1.3 3.6 1.5 4.5 2.0 3.5 2.0 8.0 2.5 8.5 3.5 9.5 4.5 10.0
1" 1-1/2"
1/2" 5/8" 5/8" 1" 5/8" 1" 1-3/8" 5/8"
2.9 3.0 4.3 5.1 6.9 7.5 8.9 9.7 10.0 13.6 17.5 18.0 28.0 31.0 31.5 42.0 46.0 46.5 66.0 77.0 102.0 85.0 87.0 99.0 172.0 188.0 264.0 282.0 358.0 448.0 519.0
4.7 4.9 4.2 5.8 8.2 9.0 11.2 11.4 12.0 19.8 22.0 22.5 43.0 33.0 33.5 53.0 48.0 48.5 96.0 80.0 144.0 92.0 96.0 108.0 256.0 178.0 330.0 270.0 420.0 440.0 490.0
5.5 5.7 4.8 6.7 8.6 9.5 11.6 12.1 12.5 20.5 23.0 23.5 44.0 38.0 38.5 58.0 55.0 55.5 103.0 89.0 153.0 97.0 101.0 113.0 261.0 184.0 335.0 280.0 430.0 655.0 705.0
.40 .46 .6 .8 1.0 1.6 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.0 2.8 2.0 2.5 4.0 2.2 2.6 7.2 3.0 9.0 4.0 7.0 4.0 16.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 20.0 1.6 1.3
2-1/2"
1" 1-3/4" 1"
3-1/4"
1-3/8" 2" 1"
4"
1-3/8" 2-1/2" 1"
5"
1-3/8" 3-1/2" 1-3/8" 4" 1-3/8" 2" 1-3/8" 51/2" 1-3/4" 5-1/2" 2" 5-1/2" 2-1/2" 5-1/2"
6" 7" 8" 10" 12" 14"
Table B
Rod Dia.
5/8" 1" 1-3/8" 1-3/4"
Piston Rod Wt. Per Inch

0.09 0.22 0.42 0.68
Rod Dia.
2" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2"

0.89 1.40 2.00 2.72
Rod Dia.
4" 4-1/2" 5" 5-1/2"

3.56 4.51 5.56 6.72
B149
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
19.0
17.0
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
2"
3MAJ/4MAJ
Bore Size
Rod Dia.
Double Rod Cylinders Basic Wt. Zero Stroke KF, KJ KT KC, KD KTB, KTD KDD, KJB
Add Per Inch of Stroke 2A, 2AN
DD, HB, JB
3MA/4MA
Table A Cylinder Weights, in pounds, for Series 2A/2AN cylinders
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Information 1" to 6" Bore Sizes

Tie Rods Extended* Style TB (NFPA Style MX3)
Basic Mounting (T) NFPA MX0 no tie rods extended can be supplied upon request.
E 1
Heavy Duty Air Cylinders Series 2A

C052
ZB + STROKE Y W P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
AA E 4 2 R
MM DD
3 R
BB
* Style TB (NFPA MX3), Head Tie Rods Extended, illustrated. Style TC (NFPA MX2), Cap Tie Rods Extended; and Style TD (NFPA MX1), Both Ends Tie Rods Extended are also available. All T styles can be dimensioned from Style TB drawing at right.
Head Rectangular Flange Style J (NFPA Style MF1)
UF 1
MM
3 E TF FB 4 HOLES
F WF
Cap Rectangular Flange Style H (NFPA Style MF2)
ZF + STROKE Y W P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
UF 1
MM
4 E
K F
G XF
3 E TF
Rod End Dimensions see table 2 Thread Style 4 Thread Style 8

(NFPA Style SM) Small Male
LA A C KK W V CC A C
Thread Style 9
(NFPA Style SF) Small Female
A
(NFPA Style IM) Intermediate Male

LA W V
1/8 KK
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
A high strength rod end stud is supplied on thread style 4 through 2" diameter rods. Larger sizes or special rod ends are cut threads. Style 4 rod ends are recommended where the workpiece is secured against the rod shoulder. When the workpiece is not shouldered,
style 4 rod ends are recommended through 2" piston rod diameters and style 8 rod ends are recommended on larger diameters. Use style 9 for applications where female rod end threads are required. If rod end is not specified, style 4 will be supplied.
Special Thread Style 3 Special thread, extension, rod eye, blank, etc., are also available. To order, specify Style 3 and give desired dimensions for CC or KK, A and LA. If otherwise special, furnish dimensioned sketch.
B150
Catalog 0900P-4

Table 1Envelope and Mounting Dimensions
Bore
1* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6

C052
AA
1.53 2.02 2.6 3.1 3.9 4.7 5.8 6.9
BB
3/4 1 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-13/16 1-13/16
DD
10-24 1/4-28 5/16-24 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 1/2-20
E
n 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 5-1/2 6-1/2
EE NPTF
1/4 3/8** 3/8** 3/8** 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4
F
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4
FB
1/4 5/16 3/8 3/8 7/16 7/16 9/16 9/16
G
1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2
J
1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2
K
3/16 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 7/16 7/16
R
1.08 1.43 1.84 2.19 2.76 3.32 4.10 4.88
TF
2 2-3/4 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-11/16 5-7/16 6-5/8 7-5/8
UF
2-1/2 3-3/8 4-1/8 4-5/8 5-1/2 6-1/4 7-5/8 8-5/8
Add Stroke LB P
3-7/8 4 4 4-1/8 4-7/8 4-7/8 5-1/8 5-3/4 2-1/8 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-7/8 3-1/8
B
* Cushions not available on 1" bore. ** On 1", 1-1/2", 2" and 2-1/2" bore sizes, the head-end (only) pipe thread is not full depth on cylinders with No. 2 rods. Minimum of three full threads available. n 1" bore head dimension is 1-3/4" x 1-1/2". See page B183.
Table 2Rod Dimensions

Rod Dia. MM
1/2 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1-3/8 1 5/8 1-3/4 1 1-3/8 1 2 1-3/8 1-3/4 1 2-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 1 3-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 4 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2

Rod Extensions and Pilot Dimensions +.000 -.002 B
.999 1.124 1.124 1.499 1.124 1.999 1.499 1.124 2.374 1.499 1.999 1.499 2.624 1.999 2.374 1.499 3.124 1.999 2.374 2.624 1.499 4.249 1.999 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 1.999 4.749 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249
Bore
1 1-1/2
Rod No.
1(Std.) 2 1(Std.) 2 1(Std.) 2 3 1(Std.) 2 3 4 1(Std.) 2 3 4 1(Std.) 2
Thread Style Style 4&9 8 KK CC

7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 1/2-20 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1/2-20 1-1/2-12 7/8-14 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1-3/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 7/8-14 2-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 7/8-14 3-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 1-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 1-14 3/4-16 7/16-20 1-1/4-12 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-1/2-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 3/4-16 1-7/8-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 3/4-16 2-1/2-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 1-14 3-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12
Add Stroke
A
5/8 3/4 3/4 1-1/8 3/4 1-5/8 1-1/8 3/4 2 1-1/8 1-5/8 1-1/8 2-1/4 1-5/8 2 1-1/8 3 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 1-1/8 3-1/2 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 1-5/8 4 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2
C
3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 3/4 1/2 5/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 3/4 1/2 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1/2 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 5/8 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1
D
3/8 1/2 1/2 7/8 1/2 1-1/8 7/8 1/2 1-1/2 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 1-11/16 1-1/8 1-1/2 7/8 2-1/16 1-1/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 7/8 3 1-1/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 1-1/8 3-3/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3
LA
1-1/4 1-3/8 1-3/8 2-1/8 1-3/8 2-7/8 2-1/8 1-3/8 3-1/2 2-1/8 2-7/8 1-7/8 3-5/8 2-5/8 3-1/4 1-7/8 4-5/8 2-5/8 3-1/4 3-5/8 1-7/8 5-1/8 2-5/8 3-1/4 3-5/8 4-5/8 5-1/8 2-1/2 5-1/2 3-1/8 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5
NA
7/16 9/16 9/16 15/16 9/16 1-5/16 15/16 9/16 1-11/16 15/16 1-5/16 15/16 1-15/16 1-5/16 1-11/16 15/16 2-3/8 1-5/16 1-11/16 1-15/16 15/16 3-3/8 1-5/16 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 1-5/16 3-7/8 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8
V
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/4 5/8 1/2 1/4 3/4 1/2 5/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/4 5/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/4 5/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2
W
5/8 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1-1/4 1 5/8 1-1/2 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-3/8 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
WF
1 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-5/8 1-3/8 1 1-7/8 1-3/8 1-5/8 1-3/8 2 1-5/8 1-7/8 1-3/8 2-1/4 1-5/8 1-7/8 2 1-3/8 2-1/4 1-5/8 1-7/8 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 1-5/8 2-1/4 1-7/8 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4
Y
1-15/16 1-15/16 1-15/16 2-5/16 1-15/16 2-9/16 2-5/16 1-15/16 2-13/16 2-5/16 2-9/16 2-7/16 3-1/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 2-7/16 3-5/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 3-1/16 2-7/16 3-5/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 3-1/16 3-5/16 3-5/16 2-13/16 3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16
XF
4-1/2 4-1/2 4-5/8 5 4-5/8 5-1/4 5 4-3/4 5-5/8 5-1/8 5-3/8 5-5/8 6-1/4 5-7/8 6-1/8 5-5/8 6-1/2 5-7/8 6-1/8 6-1/4 5-7/8 6-3/4 6-1/8 6-3/8 6-1/2 6-3/4 6-3/4 6-5/8 7-1/4 6-7/8 7 7-1/4 7-1/4 7-1/4
ZB
4-11/16 4-11/16 4-7/8 5-1/4 4-15/16 5-9/16 5-5/16 5-1/16 5-15/16 5-7/16 5-11/16 6 6-5/8 6-1/4 6-1/2 6 6-7/8 6-1/4 6-1/2 6-5/8 6-5/16 7-3/16 6-9/16 6-13/16 6-15/16 7-3/16 7-3/16 7-1/16 7-11/16 7-5/16 7-7/16 7-11/16 7-11/16 7-11/16
ZF
4-7/8 4-7/8 5 5-3/8 5 5-5/8 5-3/8 5-1/8 6 5-1/2 5-3/4 6-1/4 6-7/8 6-1/2 6-3/4 6-1/4 7-1/8 6-1/2 6-3/4 6-7/8 6-1/2 7-3/8 6-3/4 7 7-1/8 7-3/8 7-3/8 7-3/8 8 7-5/8 7-3/4 8 8 8
2-1/2
3-1/4
3 4 5 1(Std.) 2 3
4 5 6 7 2 3
1(Std.) 1-3/8
4 5 6 7
B151
Catalog 0900P-4

Head Square Flange Style JB (NFPA Style MF5)
UF E 1

C052
B
UF E 4
2 R TF
MM
FB 8 HOLES
3 R TF
F WF
Cap Square Flange Style HB (NFPA Style MF6)

ZF + STROKE Y W P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
UF E 1
MM
TF
R 2
4 E UF
K F G XF J F
FB 8 HOLES
3 R TF

Thread Style 9
A

LA W V
1/8 KK
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
B152
Catalog 0900P-4

Bore
1* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6

C052
E
n 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 5-1/2 6-1/2
EE NPTF
1/4 3/8** 3/8** 3/8** 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4
F
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4
FB
1/4 5/16 3/8 3/8 7/16 7/16 9/16 9/16
G
1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2
J
1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2
K
3/16 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 7/16 7/16
R
1.08 1.43 1.84 2.19 2.76 3.32 4.10 4.88
TF
2 2-3/4 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-11/16 5-7/16 6-5/8 7-5/8
UF
2-1/2 3-3/8 4-1/8 4-5/8 5-1/2 6-1/4 7-5/8 8-5/8
Add Stroke LB P
3-7/8 4 4 4-1/8 4-7/8 4-7/8 5-1/8 5-3/4 2-1/8 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-7/8 3-1/8
1-1/2 1
1-1/2
4 1.53 DIA.
2 1.08
B
3MA/4MA
1-3/4

Rod Dia. MM
1/2 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1-3/8 1 5/8 1-3/4 1 1-3/8 1 2 1-3/8 1-3/4 1 2-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 1 3-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 4 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2

.999 1.124 1.124 1.499 1.124 1.999 1.499 1.124 2.374 1.499 1.999 1.499 2.624 1.999 2.374 1.499 3.124 1.999 2.374 2.624 1.499 4.249 1.999 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 1.999 4.749 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249
Bore
1 1-1/2
Rod No.

7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 1/2-20 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1/2-20 1-1/2-12 7/8-14 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1-3/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 7/8-14 2-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 7/8-14 3-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 1-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 1-14 3/4-16 7/16-20 1-1/4-12 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-1/2-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 3/4-16 1-7/8-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 3/4-16 2-1/2-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 1-14 3-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12
Add Stroke
A
5/8 3/4 3/4 1-1/8 3/4 1-5/8 1-1/8 3/4 2 1-1/8 1-5/8 1-1/8 2-1/4 1-5/8 2 1-1/8 3 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 1-1/8 3-1/2 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 1-5/8 4 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2
C
3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 3/4 1/2 5/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 3/4 1/2 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1/2 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 5/8 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1
D
3/8 1/2 1/2 7/8 1/2 1-1/8 7/8 1/2 1-1/2 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 1-11/16 1-1/8 1-1/2 7/8 2-1/16 1-1/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 7/8 3 1-1/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 1-1/8 3-3/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3
LA
1-1/4 1-3/8 1-3/8 2-1/8 1-3/8 2-7/8 2-1/8 1-3/8 3-1/2 2-1/8 2-7/8 1-7/8 3-5/8 2-5/8 3-1/4 1-7/8 4-5/8 2-5/8 3-1/4 3-5/8 1-7/8 5-1/8 2-5/8 3-1/4 3-5/8 4-5/8 5-1/8 2-1/2 5-1/2 3-1/8 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5
NA
7/16 9/16 9/16 15/16 9/16 1-5/16 15/16 9/16 1-11/16 15/16 1-5/16 15/16 1-15/16 1-5/16 1-11/16 15/16 2-3/8 1-5/16 1-11/16 1-15/16 15/16 3-3/8 1-5/16 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 1-5/16 3-7/8 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8
V
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/4 5/8 1/2 1/4 3/4 1/2 5/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/4 5/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/4 5/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2
W
5/8 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1-1/4 1 5/8 1-1/2 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-3/8 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
WF
1 1 1 1-3/8 1 1-5/8 1-3/8 1 1-7/8 1-3/8 1-5/8 1-3/8 2 1-5/8 1-7/8 1-3/8 2-1/4 1-5/8 1-7/8 2 1-3/8 2-1/4 1-5/8 1-7/8 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 1-5/8 2-1/4 1-7/8 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4
Y
1-15/16 1-15/16 1-15/16 2-5/16 1-15/16 2-9/16 2-5/16 1-15/16 2-13/16 2-5/16 2-9/16 2-7/16 3-1/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 2-7/16 3-5/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 3-1/16 2-7/16 3-5/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 3-1/16 3-5/16 3-5/16 2-13/16 3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16
XF
4-1/2 4-1/2 4-5/8 5 4-5/8 5-1/4 5 4-3/4 5-5/8 5-1/8 5-3/8 5-5/8 6-1/4 5-7/8 6-1/8 5-5/8 6-1/2 5-7/8 6-1/8 6-1/4 5-7/8 6-3/4 6-1/8 6-3/8 6-1/2 6-3/4 6-3/4 6-5/8 7-1/4 6-7/8 7 7-1/4 7-1/4 7-1/4
ZB
4-11/16 4-11/16 4-7/8 5-1/4 4-15/16 5-9/16 5-5/16 5-1/16 5-15/16 5-7/16 5-11/16 6 6-5/8 6-1/4 6-1/2 6 6-7/8 6-1/4 6-1/2 6-5/8 6-5/16 7-3/16 6-9/16 6-13/16 6-15/16 7-3/16 7-3/16 7-1/16 7-11/16 7-5/16 7-7/16 7-11/16 7-11/16 7-11/16
ZF
4-7/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 5 5-5/8 5-1/8 6 5-1/2 5-3/4 6-1/4 6-7/8 6-1/2 6-1/4 7-1/8 6-3/4 6-7/8 7-3/8 6-3/4 7 7-1/8 7-3/8 7-3/8 7-3/8 8 7-5/8 7-3/4 8 8 8 6-1/2 6-1/2 6-3/4 5-3/8
2-1/2
3-1/4
4 5 1(Std.) 2 3 5 4 5 6 7 2 3 6 4 5 6 7
1(Std.) 1-3/8
B153
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
* Cushions not available on 1" bore. ** On 1", 1-1/2", 2" and 2-1/2" bore sizes, the head-end (only) pipe thread is not full depth on cylinders with No. 2 rods. Minimum of three full threads available. n 1" bore head dimension is 1-3/4" x 1-1/2". See drawing at right.
3 1.08
Head Dimensions for 1" Bore Size (Cap is 1-1/2" square.)
Catalog 0900P-4

Side Lug Style C (NFPA Style MS2)

C052
ZB + STROKE
B
E 4
US 1
P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
2 E -.005 2 -.010 ST 3
MM
SW SW
E TS
SB SW 4 HOLES SW
F SW XS
G SU SS + STROKE SU
K SW
Side Tapped Style F (NFPA Style MS4)

E 1
2 E -.005 2 -.010 3 TN
MM
F NT THREAD, ND DEEP 4 TAPPED MTG. HOLES XT
G SN + STROKE

Thread Style 9
A

LA W V
1/8 KK
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
B154
Catalog 0900P-4

Bore
1* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6

C052
E
n 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 5-1/2 6-1/2
EE NPTF
1/4 3/8** 3/8** 3/8** 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4
Add Stroke F
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4
G
1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2
J
1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2
K
3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 3/8 7/16 7/16
NT
10-24 1/4-20 3/8-16 1/2-13 1/2-13
SB*
9/32 7/16 7/16 7/16 9/16 9/16
ST
5/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1
SU
3/4 15/16 15/16 15/16 1-1/4 1-1/4
SW
5/16 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2
TN
9/16 5/8 7/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 2-1/16 3-1/4
TS
2-1/8 2-3/4 3-1/4 3-3/4 4-3/4 5-1/2 7-7/8
US
2-3/4 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5-3/4 6-1/2 8-1/4 9-1/4
LB
3-7/8 4 4 4-1/8 4-7/8 4-7/8 5-1/8 5-3/4
P
2-1/8 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-7/8 3-1/8
SN
2-1/8 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-7/8 3-1/8
SS
2-7/8 2-7/8 2-7/8 3 3-1/4 3-1/4 3-1/8 3-5/8
5/16 5/16-18
B
5/8-11 1-3/16 3/4-10 1-3/16
1-9/16 11/16 2-11/16 6-7/8 1-9/16 11/16
* Cushions not available on 1" bore. ** On 1", 1-1/2", 2" and 2-1/2" bore sizes, the head-end (only) pipe thread is not full depth on cylinders with No. 2 rods. Minimum of three full threads available. Upper surface spot-faced for socket head screws. n 1" bore head dimension is 1-3/4" x 1-1/2". See page B183.

Thread Rod No.
1(Std.) 2 1(Std.) 2 1(Std.) 2 2 3 1(Std.) 2-1/2 2 3 4 1(Std.) 3-1/4 2 3 4 1(Std.) 2 4 3 4 5 1(Std.) 2 3 5 4 5 6 7 2 3 6 4 5 6 7

.999 1.124 1.124 1.499 1.124 1.999 1.499 1.124 2.374 1.499 1.999 1.499 2.624 1.999 2.374 1.499 3.124 1.999 2.374 2.624 1.499 4.249 1.999 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 1.999 4.749 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249
Add Stroke
Bore
1 1-1/2
Rod Dia. MM
1/2 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1-3/8 1 5/8 1-3/4 1 1-3/8 1 2 1-3/8 1-3/4 1 2-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 1 3-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 4 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2
Style 8 CC
7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 1/2-20 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1/2-20 1-1/2-12 7/8-14 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1-3/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 7/8-14 2-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 7/8-14 3-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 1-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12
Style 4&9 KK
5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 1-14 3/4-16 7/16-20 1-1/4-12 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-1/2-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 3/4-16 1-7/8-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 3/4-16 2-1/2-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 1-14 3-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12
A
5/8 3/4 3/4 1-1/8 3/4 1-5/8 1-1/8 3/4 2 1-1/8 1-5/8 1-1/8 2-1/4 1-5/8 2 1-1/8 3 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 1-1/8 3-1/2 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 1-5/8 4 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2
C
3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 3/4 1/2 5/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 3/4 1/2 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1/2 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 5/8 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1
D
3/8 1/2 1/2 7/8 1/2 1-1/8 7/8 1/2 1-1/2 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/8 1-1/2 7/8 2-1/16 1-1/8 1-1/2 7/8 3 1-1/8 1-1/2 2-1/16 2-5/8 1-1/8 3-3/8 1-1/2 2-1/16 2-5/8 3
LA
1-1/4 1-3/8 1-3/8 2-1/8 1-3/8 2-7/8 2-1/8 1-3/8 2-1/8 2-7/8 1-7/8 2-5/8 1-7/8 4-5/8 2-5/8
NA
7/16 9/16 9/16 15/16 9/16 1-5/16 15/16 9/16 15/16 1-5/16 15/16 1-5/16 15/16 2-3/8 1-5/16
V
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/4 5/8 1/2 1/4 3/4 1/2 5/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/4 5/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/4 5/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2
W
5/8 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1-1/4 1 5/8 1-1/2 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-3/8 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
ND
1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 1-1/32 1-1/32 1-1/32 7/16 7/16 7/16 7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8
XS
1-5/16 1-5/16 1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/8 2 1-3/4 1-3/8 2-1/4 1-3/4 2 1-7/8 2-1/2 2-1/8 2-3/8 1-7/8 2-3/4 2-1/8 2-3/8 2-1/2 2-1/16 2-15/16 2-5/16 2-9/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 2-15/16 2-5/16 2-15/16 2-9/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 2-15/16 2-15/16
XT
ZB
1-15/16 1-15/16 4-11/16 1-15/16 1-15/16 4-11/16 1-15/16 1-15/16 2-5/16 2-9/16 2-5/16 2-5/16 2-9/16 2-5/16 4-7/8 5-1/4 5-9/16 5-5/16 5-1/16 5-7/16 5-11/16 6 6-5/8 6-1/4 6-1/2 6 6-7/8 6-1/4 6-1/2 6-5/8 6-5/16 7-3/16 6-9/16 6-15/16 7-3/16 7-3/16 7-1/16 7-11/16 7-5/16 7-7/16 7-11/16 7-11/16 7-11/16
1-15/16 1-15/16 4-15/16
1-15/16 1-15/16 2-5/16 2-9/16 2-7/16 3-1/16 2-5/16 2-9/16 2-7/16 3-1/16
3-1/2 1-11/16
2-13/16 2-13/16 5-15/16
1-11/16 3-5/8 1-15/16 3-1/4 1-11/16
2-11/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 2-15/16 2-7/16 3-5/16 2-7/16 3-5/16
2-11/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 2-15/16 3-1/16 2-7/16 3-5/16 3-1/16 2-7/16 3-5/16
3-1/4 1-11/16 1-7/8 5-1/8 2-5/8 15/16 3-3/8 1-5/16
1-11/16 3-5/8 1-15/16
2-11/16 2-11/16 3-1/16 3-5/16 3-5/16 3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-1/16 3-5/16 3-5/16 3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16
3-1/4 1-11/16 4-5/8 5-1/8 2-1/2 5-1/2 2-3/8 2-7/8 1-5/16 3-7/8
2-15/16 2-15/16 6-13/16
1-11/16 3-5/8 1-15/16
1(Std.) 1-3/8
2-13/16 2-13/16
3-1/8 1-11/16 4-1/2 5 5 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8
1-11/16 3-1/2 1-15/16
B155
Catalog 0900P-4

Head Trunnion Style D (NFPA Style MT1)
UT 1

C052
1R 8 E 4 2 TD
MM
3 TL E TL
F XG
Cap Trunnion Style DB (NFPA Style MT2)
UT 1
1R 8 E 4 2 TD MM
3 TL E TL
G XJ + STROKE
Intermediate Fixed Trunnion Style DD (NFPA Style MT4)
ZB + STROKE Y W P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE BD
UM 1
1R 8 UV E 4 2 TD MM
3 E TL TM TL
G XI**

Thread Style 9
A

LA W V
1/8 KK
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
B156
Catalog 0900P-4


C052
Add Stroke Bore

1* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6
BD
1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 2 2-1/2
E
n 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 5-1/2 6-1/2
EE NPTF
1/4 3/8** 3/8** 3/8** 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4
F
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4
G
1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2
J
1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2
K
3/16 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 7/16 7/16
+.000 -.002 TD
.750 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.375
TL
3/4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1-3/8
TM
2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4-1/2 5-1/4 6-1/4 7-5/8
UM
4-1/2 5 5-1/2 6-1/2 7-1/4 8-1/4 10-3/8
UT
3 4 4-1/2 5 5-3/4 6-1/2 7-1/2 9-1/4
UV
2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4-1/4 5 6 7
LB
3-7/8 4 4 4-1/8 4-7/8 4-7/8 5-1/8 5-3/4
P
2-1/8 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-7/8 3-1/8
Style DD Min. Stroke

1/4 1/2 3/8 7/8 7/8 5/8 1-1/8
B
* Cushions not available on 1" bore. ** On 1", 1-1/2", 2" and 2-1/2" bore sizes, the head-end (only) pipe thread is not full depth on cylinders with No. 2 rods. Minimum of three full threads available. Mounting style not available in 1" bore. n 1" bore head dimension is 1-3/4" x 1-1/2". See page B183.

Rod Dia. MM
1/2 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1-3/8 1 5/8 1-3/4 1 1-3/8 1 2 1-3/8 1-3/4 1 2-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 1 3-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 4 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2

Rod Extensions and Pilot Dimensions +.000 -.002 B C D LA NA V
.999 1.124 1.124 1.499 1.124 1.999 1.499 1.124 2.374 1.499 1.999 1.499 2.624 1.999 2.374 1.499 3.124 1.999 2.374 2.624 1.499 4.249 1.999 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 1.999 4.749 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 3/4 1/2 5/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 3/4 1/2 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1/2 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 5/8 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1 3/8 1/2 1/2 7/8 1/2 1-1/8 7/8 1/2 1-1/2 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/8 1-1/2 7/8 2-1/16 1-1/8 1-1/2 7/8 3 1-1/8 1-1/2 2-1/16 2-5/8 1-1/8 3-3/8 1-1/2 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-3/8 2-1/8 1-3/8 2-7/8 2-1/8 1-3/8 2-1/8 2-7/8 1-7/8 2-5/8 1-7/8 4-5/8 2-5/8 7/16 9/16 9/16 15/16 9/16 1-5/16 15/16 9/16 15/16 1-5/16 15/16 1-5/16 15/16 2-3/8 1-5/16 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/4 5/8 1/2 1/4 3/4 1/2 5/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/4 5/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/4 5/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2
Bore
1 1-1/2
Rod No.
Thread Style Style 8 4&9 CC KK

7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 1/2-20 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1/2-20 1-1/2-12 7/8-14 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1-3/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 7/8-14 2-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 7/8-14 3-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 1-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 1-14 3/4-16 7/16-20 1-1/4-12 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-1/2-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 3/4-16 1-7/8-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 3/4-16 2-1/2-12 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 1-14 3-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12
Add Stroke Min.** Xi

* * 3-3/16 3-9/16 3-5/16 3-15/16 3-11/16 3-5/16 4-3/16 3-11/16 3-15/16 4-3/16 4-13/16 4-7/16 4-3/16 5-1/16 4-7/16 4-13/16 4-5/16 5-1/16 4-7/16 413/16 5-1/16 5-1/16 5-9/16 5-3/16 5-5/16 5-9/16 5-9/16 5-9/16
A
5/8 3/4 3/4 1-1/8 3/4 1-5/8 1-1/8 3/4 2 1-1/8 1-5/8 1-1/8 2-1/4 1-5/8 2 1-1/8 3 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 1-1/8 3-1/2 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 1-5/8 4 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2
W
5/8 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1-1/4 1 5/8 1-1/2 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-3/8 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
XG
1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2-1/8 1-3/4 2-3/8 2-1/8 1-3/4 2-5/8 2-1/8 2-3/8 2-1/4 2-7/8 2-1/2 2-3/4 2-1/4 3-1/8 2-1/2 2-3/4 2-7/8 2-1/4 3-1/8 2-1/2 2-3/4 2-7/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 2-5/8 3-1/4 2-7/8 3 3-1/4 3-1/4 3-1/4
Y
1-15/16 1-15/16 1-15/16 2-5/16 1-15/16 2-9/16 2-5/16 1-15/16 2-13/16 2-5/16 2-9/16 2-7/16 3-1/16 2-11/16 2-7/16 3-5/16 2-11/16 3-1/16 2-7/16 3-5/16 2-11/16 3-1/16 3-5/16 3-5/16 3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16
XJ
4 4 4-1/8 4-1/2 4-1/8 4-3/4 4-1/2 4-1/4 5-1/8 4-5/8 4-7/8 5 5-5/8 5-1/4 5-1/2 5 5-7/8 5-1/4 5-1/2 5-5/8 5-1/4 6-1/8 5-1/2 5-3/4 5-7/8 6-1/8 6-1/8 5-7/8 6-1/2 6-1/8 6-1/4 6-1/2 6-1/2 6-1/2
ZB
4-11/16 4-11/16 4-7/8 5-1/4 4-15/16 5-9/16 5-5/16 5-1/16 5-15/16 5-7/16 5-11/16 6 6-5/8 6-1/4 6-1/2 6 6-7/8 6-1/4 6-1/2 6-5/8 6-5/16 7-3/16 6-9/16 6-13/16 6-15/16 7-3/16 7-3/16 7-1/16 7-11/16 7-5/16 7-7/16 7-11/16 7-11/16 7-11/16
2-1/2
3-1/2 1-11/16
3-1/4
1-11/16 3-5/8 1-15/16 3-1/4 1-11/16
4-11/16 2-15/16
3 4 5 1(Std.) 2 3
3-1/4 1-11/16 1-7/8 5-1/8 2-5/8 15/16 3-3/8 1-5/16
4-11/16 2-15/16
1-11/16 3-5/8 1-15/16
4 5 6 7 2 3
3-1/4 1-11/16 4-5/8 5-1/8 2-1/2 5-1/2 2-3/8 2-7/8 1-5/16 3-7/8
4-11/16 2-15/16
1-11/16 3-5/8 1-15/16
1(Std.) 1-3/8
4-15/16 2-13/16
3-1/8 1-11/16 4-1/2 5 5 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8
4 5 6 7
1-11/16 3-1/2 1-15/16
* Mounting style DD not available in 1" bore. **Dimension XI to be specified by customer.
B157
Catalog 0900P-4

Cap Fixed Clevis Style BB (NFPA Style MP1)

C052
ZC + STROKE
B
MM
Y W
P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE CD
PIVOT PIN HARD CHROME PLATED
E 1
2
MR LR K F
G XC + STROKE
3 CW CB CW
The 1", 4", 5" and 6" bore sizes have tie rod nuts at both ends as shown. Tie rods thread into cap on all other bore sizes.

Thread Style 9
A

LA W V
1/8 KK
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
B158
Catalog 0900P-4

Bore
1* 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6

C052
CB
+.000 -.002 CD
.441 .501 .501 .501 .751 .751 .751 1.001
Add Stroke CW
1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4
E
n 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4 4-1/2 5-1/2 6-1/2
EE NPTF
1/4 3/8** 3/8** 3/8** 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4
F
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4
G
1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2
J
1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2
K
3/16 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 7/16 7/16
L
1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2
LR
1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1-1/4
M
7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 1
MR
1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 15/16 15/16 15/16 1-3/16
LB
3-7/8 4 4 4-1/8 4-7/8 4-7/8 5-1/8 5-3/4
P
2-1/8 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-7/8 3-1/8 2-5/8
3/4 3/4 3/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2
B
* Cushions not available on 1" bore. ** On 1", 1-1/2", 2" and 2-1/2" bore sizes, the head-end (only) pipe thread is not full depth on cylinders with No. 2 rods. Minimum of three full threads available. In 1" bore size model only, a single eye mounting, 7/16" thick, is used. Dimension CD (.441") is hole diameter pin not supplied. Dimension CD is pin diameter except in 1" bore. n 1" bore head dimension is 1-3/4" x 1-1/2". See page B183 .

Rod Dia. MM
1/2 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1-3/8 1 5/8 1-3/4 1 1-3/8 1 2 1-3/8 1-3/4 1 2-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 1 3-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 1-3/8 4 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2

.999 1.124 1.124 1.499 1.124 1.999 1.499 1.124 2.374 1.499 1.999 1.499 2.624 1.999 2.374 1.499 3.124 1.999 2.374 2.624 1.499 4.249 1.999 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 1.999 4.749 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249
Bore
1 1-1/2
Rod No.

7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 1/2-20 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1/2-20 7/8-14 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1-1/4-12 7/8-14 1-1/4-12 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 7/16-20 1-14 3/4-16 7/16-20 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-14 3/4-16 1-14
Add Stroke
A
5/8 3/4 3/4 1-1/8 3/4 1-5/8 1-1/8 3/4 2 1-1/8 1-5/8 1-1/8 2-1/4 1-5/8 2 1-1/8 3 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 1-1/8 3-1/2 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 1-5/8 4 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2
C
3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 3/4 1/2 5/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 3/4 1/2 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1/2 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 5/8 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1
D
3/8 1/2 1/2 7/8 1/2 1-1/8 7/8 1/2 1-1/2 7/8 1-1/8 7/8 1-11/16 1-1/8 1-1/2 7/8 2-1/16 1-1/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 7/8 3 1-1/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 1-1/8 3-3/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3
LA
1-1/4 1-3/8 1-3/8 2-1/8 1-3/8 2-7/8 2-1/8 1-3/8 3-1/2 2-1/8 2-7/8 1-7/8 3-5/8 2-5/8 3-1/4 1-7/8 4-5/8 2-5/8 3-1/4 3-5/8 1-7/8 5-1/8 2-5/8 3-1/4 3-5/8 4-5/8 5-1/8 2-1/2 5-1/2 3-1/8 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5
NA
7/16 9/16 9/16 15/16 9/16 1-5/16 15/16 9/16 1-11/16 15/16 1-5/16 15/16 1-15/16 1-5/16 1-11/16 15/16 2-3/8 1-5/16 1-11/16 1-15/16 15/16 3-3/8 1-5/16 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 1-5/16 3-7/8 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8
V
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/4 5/8 1/2 1/4 3/4 1/2 5/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/4 5/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/4 5/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2
W
5/8 5/8 5/8 1 5/8 1-1/4 1 5/8 1-1/2 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-3/8 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
Y
1-15/16 1-15/16 1-15/16 2-5/16 1-15/16 2-9/16 2-5/16 1-15/16 2-13/16 2-5/16 2-9/16 2-7/16 3-1/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 2-7/16 3-5/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 3-1/16 2-7/16 3-5/16 2-11/16 2-15/16 3-1/16 3-5/16 3-5/16 2-13/16 3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16
XC
5 5 5-3/8 5-3/4 5-3/8 6 5-3/4 5-1/2 6-3/8 5-7/8 6-1/8 6-7/8 7-1/2 7-1/8 7-3/8 6-7/8 7-3/4 7-1/8 7-3/8 7-1/2 7-1/8 8 7-3/8 7-5/8 7-3/4 8 8 8-1/8 8-3/4 8-3/8 8-1/2 8-3/4 8-3/4 8-3/4
ZC
5-7/16 5-7/16 5-7/8 6-1/4 5-7/8 6-1/2 6-1/4 6 6-7/8 6-3/8 6-5/8 7-5/8 8-1/4 7-7/8 8-1/8 7-5/8 8-1/2 7-7/8 8-1/8 8-1/4 7-7/8 8-3/4 8-1/8 8-3/8 8-1/2 8-3/4 8-3/4 9-1/8 9-3/4 9-3/8 9-1/2 9-3/4 9-3/4 9-3/4
2-1/2
1-1/2-12 1-1/4-12
3-1/4
1-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-1/2-12 1-1/4-12 2-1/4-12 1-7/8-12 1-1/2-12 1-1/4-12 1-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 7/8-14 1-1/4-12 3/4-16 1-14 3-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 1-1/2-12 1-1/4-12 1-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 2-1/4-12 1-7/8-12 2-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 1-14 3-12
3 4 5 1(Std.) 2 3
4 5 6 7 1(Std.) 2 3
1-1/2-12 1-1/4-12 1-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 2-1/4-12 1-7/8-12 2-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 3-1/4-12 2-1/2-12
4 5 6 7
B159
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Information 7" Bore Sizes

Tie Rods Extended Style TB (NFPA MX3) Style TB Head Tie Rods Extended, TC (NFPA Style MX3) illustrated: StyleRods(NFPA MX2), Cap Tie
Heavy Duty Air Cylinders Series 2A/2AN

C052
Extended; and Style TD (NFPA MX1), Both Ends Tie Rods Extended are also available. All T styles can be dimensioned from Style TB drawing at right.
E 4
E 1
AA
2 R MM
DD
3 TTSQ. R
F WF BB
Head Square Flange Style JB (NFPA Style ME3)
E 1
E 4
2 TE MM
3 TTSQ. TE
EB 4 HOLES
F WF
Cap Square Flange Style HB (NFPA Style ME4)
ZJ + STROKE Y W P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
E 1
MM
TE 2
4 E
K F G XK + STROKE J
3 TE EB 4 HOLES

LA C KK A W V A C LA W V KK 1/8
Thread Style 9
A

A
LA
MM B
CC
LA A MM
B
A C
W V
D WRENCH FLATS NA 1/8
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
W C V KK 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
KK
NA C W
CC
V
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
A high strength rod end stud is supplied on thread style 4 through 2" diameter rods. Larger sizes or special rod ends are cut threads. Style 4 rod ends are recommended where the workpiece is secured against the rod shoulder. When the workpiece is not shouldered, style 4 rod
ends are recommended through 2" piston rod diameters and style 8 rod ends are recommended on larger diameters. Use style 9 for applications where female rod end threads are required. If rod end is not specified, style 4 will be supplied.
Special Thread Style 3 Special thread, extension, rod eye, blank, etc., are also available. To order, specify Style 3 and give desired dimensions for CC or KK, A and LA. If otherwise special, furnish dimensional sketch.
B160
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Information 7" Bore Sizes


ZB + STROKE Y
C052
E TTSQ. 1
US 1
B
J K
MM
E 4
MM
E .005 2 .010
ST 3 TTSQ. E TS
SB F SW XS G SU SS + STROKE SU J K SW
3 TN
NT THREAD, ND DEEP 4 TAPPED MTG. HOLES F XT G SN + STROKE
SW SW
SW 4 HOLES SW


1R 8
1R 8
E 4
2 TD
MM
E 4
2 TD
MM
G XJ + STROKE
TL
TL
TL
3 TTSQ. E
TL
F XG
CD
MM MR LR
E 2
3
M
G XC + STROKE
CW
CB
CW
Note: Other mounting styles and double rod end cylinders are available on request. Consult factory for details.

Bore AA 7 BB CB DD E EB EE F G J K L LR M MR ND NT R SB ST SU SW TE TL TN TS US UT LB P SN SS
8.1 2-5/16 1-1/2 1.001 3/4 5/8-18 7-1/2 9/16 3/4 3/4 2 1-1/2 9/16 1-1/2 1-1/4 1 1-3/16 1-1/8 3/4-10 5.73 13/16 1 1-9/16 11/16 1.375 6-3/4 1-3/8 3-1/2 8-7/8 10-1/4 10-1/4 5-7/8 3-1/4 3-1/4 3-3/4

Thread Rod Bore No. 1 7 2 3 Rod Dia. MM Style 8 CC Style 4&9 KK 1-14 +.000 -.002 B Rod Extensions and Pilot Dimensions

Add Stroke
A 2
C 5/8 7/8
D 1-1/8 1-1/2
LA 2-1/2
NA 1-5/16
V 1/4
W 7/8
WF
TT 4 4 4
XG
XS
XT
XC
XJ 6
XK 5-1/4
ZB
ZC
ZJ 7
1-35/8 1-1/4-12 2
1-5/8 1.999
1-5/8 2-13/16 2 3-3/16
2-5/8 2-5/16 2-13/16 8-1/4 2-7/8 2-9/16 3
7-5/16 9-1/4 6-3/4 7-9/16 9-1/2
1-3/4 1-1/2-12 1-1/4-12
2.374 3/48
3-1/8 1-115/16 3/8 1-1/8 1-7/8 3-1/16
3-1/16 8-1/2 6-1/4 5-1/2
1-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 2-1/4 2.624
1-11/16 3-1/2 1-15/16 1/2 1-1/4
2-11/16 3-3/16 8-5/8 6-3/8 5-5/8 7-11/16 9-5/8 7-1/8
B161
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
+.000 -.002 CD CW
+.000 -.002 TD
Add Stroke
2A/2AN 2MNR
ZC + STROKE Y W P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE PIVOT PIN
LPSO Option
3 TTSQ. E
ACVB Option
UT 1
UT 1
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
E .005 2 .010
Catalog 0900P-4

Tie Rods Extended Style TB (NFPA Style MX3)
Style TB (NFPA MX3) Head Tie Rods Extended, illustrated: Style TC (NFPA MX2), Cap Tie Rods Extended; and Style TD (NFPA MX1), Both Ends Tie Rods Extended are also available. All T styles can be dimensioned from Style TB drawing at right.
E 4

C052
E 1
B
Mounting styles TB & TD not offered in 8" bore, rod codes #2, 9 and 0.
AA
2 R MM
DD
3 TTSQ. R
F WF BB
Head Square Flange Style JB (NFPA Style ME3)
E 1
E 4
2 TE MM
3 TTSQ. TE
EB 4 HOLES
F WF
Cap Square Flange Style HB (NFPA Style ME4)
ZJ + STROKE Y W P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
E 1
MM
TE 2
4 E
K F G XK + STROKE J
3 TE EB 4 HOLES

Thread Style 9
A

LA W V
1/8 KK
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
B162
Catalog 0900P-4

Bore
8 10 12 14

C052
AA
9.1 11.2 13.3 15.4
BB
2-5/16 2-11/16 2-11/16 3-3/16
DD
5/8-18 3/4-16 3/4-16 7/8-14
E
8-1/2 10-5/8 12-3/4 14-3/4
EB
11/16 13/16 13/16 15/16
EE NPTF
3/4 1 1 1-1/4
Add Stroke F
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
G
2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/4
J
1-1/2 2 2 2-1/4
K
9/16 11/16 11/16 3/4
R
6.44 7.92 9.40 10.90
TE
7.57 9.40 11.10 12.87
LB
5-7/8 7-1/8 7-5/8 8-7/8
P
3-1/4 4-1/8 4-5/8 5-1/2
B
3MA/4MA

Rod Dia. MM
5-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2

1.999 6.249 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 5/8 1 3/4 1 1 1 1 1 1 3/4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1-1/8 4-5/8 1-1/2 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 2-1/2 7 3-1/8 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 3-1/8 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 1-5/16 5-3/8 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 53/8 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
Bore
Rod No.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 3 4 5

1-1/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-14 4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12
A
1-5/8 5-1/2 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2
W
7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
TT
4 7 4 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 4 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7
WF
1-5/8 2-1/4 1-7/8 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 1-7/8 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4
Y
3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-1/8 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2
XK
5-7/8 5-1/2 5-5/8 5-7/8 5-7/8 5-7/8 5-7/8 5-7/8 5-7/8 6-1/4 6-3/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 6-7/8 7-1/8 7-1/8 7-1/8 7-1/8 7-1/8 7-1/8 7-1/8
ZB
7-5/16 715/16 7-9/16 7-11/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 8-15/16 9-1/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-9/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8
ZJ
6-3/4 7-3/8 7 7-1/8 7-3/8 7-3/8 7-3/8 7-3/8 7-3/8 8-1/4 8-3/8 8-5/8 8-5/8 8-5/8 8-5/8 8-5/8 8-7/8 9-1/8 9-1/8 9-1/8 9-1/8 9-1/8 9-1/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 9-1/8 8-5/8 8-5/8 7-3/8
1(Std.) 1-3/8
2-13/16 5-1/4
7/8 1-11/16 3-1/2
1(Std.) 1-3/4
7/8 1-11/16 3-1/2
7 8 9 0 1(Std.) 3 4 12 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 14 5 6 7 8
1-11/16 3-1/2
1(Std.) 2-1/2
3-13/16 8-1/8 3-13/16 8-1/8 3-13/16 8-1/8 3-13/16 8-1/8 3-13/16 8-1/8 3-13/16 8-1/8 3-13/16 8-1/8
B163
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
10
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
Add Stroke
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4


C052
US 1
B
E 4 2
MM
E .005 2 .010 ST 3 TTSQ. E TS

SB F SW XS G SU SS + STROKE SU J K SW
SW SW
SW 4 HOLES SW

Thread Style 9
A

A
LA
MM B
CC
LA A MM
B
A C
W V
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
W C V KK 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
KK
NA C W
CC
V
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
B164
Catalog 0900P-4

Bore
8 10 12 14

C052
E
8-1/2 10-5/8 12-3/4 14-3/4
EE NPTF
3/4 1 1 1-1/4
Add Stroke F
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
G
2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/4
J
1-1/2 2 2 2-1/4
K
9/16 11/16 11/16 3/4
SB*
13/16 1-1/16 1-1/16 1-5/16
ST
1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2
SU
1-9/16 2 2 2-1/2
SW
11/16 7/8 7/8 1-1/8
TS
9-7/8 12-3/8 14-1/2 17
US
11-1/4 14-1/8 16-1/4 19-1/4
LB
5-7/8 7-1/8 7-5/8 8-7/8
P
3-1/4 4-1/8 4-5/8 5-1/2
SS
3-3/4 4-5/8 5-1/8 5-7/8
B
3MA/4MA
* Upper surface spotfaced for socket head screws.

1-1/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-14 4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12

1.999 6.249 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 5/8 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1-1/8 4-5/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 1-1/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 2-1/2 7 3-1/8 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 3-1/8 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 61/2 7 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 1-5/16 53/8 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
Bore
Rod No.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 3 4 5
Rod Dia. MM
5-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2
A
1-5/8 5-1/2 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 41/2 5 5-1/2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2
W
7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
TT
4 7 4 4 4
XS
2-5/16 2-15/16 2-9/16 2-11/16 2-15/16
Y
2-13/16 3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-1/8 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16
ZB
7-5/16 7-15/16 7-11/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 8-15/16 9-1/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-9/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 9-13/16
1(Std.) 1-3/8
5-1/2 2-15/16 5-1/2 2-15/16 5-1/2 2-15/16 7 7 4 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7 2-15/16 2-15/16 2-3/4 2-7/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 2-7/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8
1(Std.) 1-3/4
7 8 9 0 1(Std.) 3 4 12 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 14 5 6 7 8
5--1/2 5-1/4-12
1(Std.) 2-1/2
B165
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
10
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
7-9/16
ACVB Option
Add Stroke
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4


C052
ZB + STROKE Y
E TT 1
SQ.
B
E 4 2
MM
E .005 2 .010
3 TN
NT THREAD, ND DEEP 4 TAPPED MTG. HOLES F XT G SN + STROKE J

Thread Style 9
A

A
LA
MM B
CC
LA A MM
B
A C
W V
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
W C V KK 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
KK
NA C W
CC
V
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
B166
Catalog 0900P-4

Bore
8 10 12 14

C052
E
8-1/2 10-5/8 12-3/4 14-3/4
EE NPTF
3/4 1 1 1-1/4
Add Stroke F
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
G
2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/4
J
1-1/2 2 2 2-1/4
K
9/16 11/16 11/16 3/4
ND
1-1/8 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-7/8
NT
3/4-10 1-8 1-8 1-1/4-7
R
6.44 7.92 9.40 10.90
TN
4-1/2 5-1/2 7-1/4 8-3/8
LB
5-7/8 7-1/8 7-5/8 8-7/8
P
3-1/4 4-1/8 4-5/8 5-1/2
SN
3-1/4 4-1/8 4-5/8 5-1/2
B
3MA/4MA

1-1/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-14 4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12

1.999 6.249 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 5/8 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1-1/8 4-5/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 2-1/2 7 3-1/8 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 3-1/8 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 1-5/16 5-3/8 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 1-11/16 1- 15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
Rod Bore No.

2 3 4 8 5 6 7 8 9 0 3 4 5 10 6 7 8 9 0 1(Std.) 3 4 12 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 14 5 6 7 8
Rod Dia MM
5-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2
A
1-5/8 5-1/2 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2
W
7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 11/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
TT
4 7 4 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 4 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7
XT
3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-1/8 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2
Y
3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-1/8 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2
ZB
7-5/16 7-15/16 7-11/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 8-15/16 9-1/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-9/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 9-13/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 7-15/16
1(Std.) 1-3/8
2-13/16 2-13/16
1(Std.) 1-3/4
1(Std.) 2-1/2
3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 313/16 3-13/16 313/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16
B167
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
7-9/16
ACVB Option
Add Stroke
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4


C052
ZC + STROKE Y W P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE CD PIVOT PIN
E 1
B
MM
E 2
MR LR
K F G XC + STROKE J L M
3 CW CB CW

Thread Style 9
A

A
LA
MM B
CC
LA A MM
B
A C
W V
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
W C V KK 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
KK
NA C W
CC
V
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
B168
Catalog 0900P-4

+.000 -.002 CD*
1.001 1.376 1.751 2.001

C052
Add Stroke CW
3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/4
Bore
8 10 12 14
CB
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 2-1/2
E
8-1/2 10-5/8 12-3/4 14-3/4
EE NPTF
3/4 1 1 1-1/4
F
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
G
2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/4
J
1-1/2 2 2 2-1/4
K
9/16 1-1/16 1-1/16 3/4
L
1-1/2 2-1/8 2-1/4 2-1/2
LR
1-1/4 1-7/8 2-1/8 2-3/8
M
1 1-3/8 1-3/4 2
MR
1-3/16 1-5/8 2-1/8 2-3/8
LB
5-7/8 7-1/8 7-5/8 8-7/8
P
3-1/4 4-1/8 4-5/8 5-1/2
B
3MA/4MA
* CD is pin diameter.

Rod Dia. MM
5-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2

1.999 6.249 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 2.374 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 2.624 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249 3.124 3.749 4.249 4.749 5.249 5.749 6.249
Bore
Rod No.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 3 4 5

1-1/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-3/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 2-1/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-1/4-12 4-3/4-12 5-1/4-12 1-14 4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 1-1/2-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 3-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 4-12
A
1-5/8 5-1/2 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 2-1/4 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2
C
5/8 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D
1-1/8 4-5/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 1-11/16 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 2-1/16 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8
LA
2-1/2 7 3-1/8 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 3-1/8 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 3-1/2 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 4-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7
NA
1-5/16 5-3/8 11-1/16 11-5/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 1-15/16 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8
V
1/4 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
W
7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
TT
4 7 4 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 4 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7 4 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7 4 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 7 7 7
Y
2-13/16 3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-1/8 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16 3-13/16
XC
8-1/4 8-7/8 8-1/2 8-5/8 8-7/8 8-7/8 8-7/8 8-7/8 8-7/8 8-7/8 10-3/8 10-1/2 10-3/4 10-3/4 10-3/4 10-3/4 10-3/4 10-3/4 10-3/4 11-1/8 11-3/8 11-3/8 11-3/8 11-3/8 11-3/8 11-3/8 11-3/8 12-7/8 12-7/8 12-7/8 12-7/8 12-7/8 12-7/8 12-7/8
ZC
9-1/4 9-7/8 9-5/8 9-7/8 9-7/8 9-7/8 9-7/8 9-7/8 11-3/4 11-7/8 12-1/8 12-1/8 12-1/8 12-1/8 12-1/8 12-7/8 13-1/8 13-1/8 13-1/8 13-1/8 13-1/8 13-1/8 14-7/8 14-7/8 14-7/8 14-7/8 14-7/8 14-7/8 14-7/8 13-1/8 12-1/8 12-1/8 9-7/8
1(Std.) 1-3/8
1(Std.) 1-3/4
7 8 9 0 1(Std.) 3 4 12 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 14 5 6 7 8
1(Std.) 2-1/2
B169
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
10
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
9-1/2
ACVB Option
Add Stroke
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4


C052
UT 1
1R 8
E 4
2 TD
MM
TL
3 TTSQ. E
TL
F XG
UT 1
1R 8
E 4
2 TD
MM
TL
3 TTSQ. E
G XJ + STROKE
TL
Intermediate Fixed Trunnion Style DD (NFPA Style MT4)
ZB + STROKE Y W P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE BD
UM 1
1R 8 UV E 4 2 TD
MM
3 TTSQ. E TL TM TL
G XI**

Thread Style 9
A

A
LA
MM B
CC
LA A MM
B
A C
W V
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
W C V KK 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
KK
NA C W
CC
V
MM B
MM B D WRENCH FLATS
MM B
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA 1/8
NA C W V
B170
Catalog 0900P-4

Table 1 - Envelope and Mounting Dimensions

C052
Add Stroke Bore

8 10 12 14
BD
2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2
E
8-1/2 10-5/8 12-3/4 14-3/4
EE NPTF
3/4 1 1 1-1/4
F
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
G
2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/4
J
1-1/2 2 2 2-1/4
K
9/16 1-1/16 1-1/16 3/4
+.000 -.001 TD
1.375 1.750 1.750 2.000
TL
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/4 2
TM
9-3/4 12 14 16-1/4
UM
12-1/2 15-1/2 17-1/2 20-1/4
UT
11-1/4 14-1/8 16-1/4 18-3/4
UV
9-1/2 11-3/4 13-3/4 16
LB
5-7/8 7-1/8 7-5/8 8-7/8
P
3-1/4 4-1/8 4-5/8 5-1/2
Style DD Min. Stroke

7/8 7/8 3/8 3/8
B
3MA/4MA

Rod Rod Dia. Bore No. MM
2 3 4 8 5 6 7 8 9 0 3 4 5 10 6 7 8 9 0 1(Std.) 3 4 12 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 14 5 6 7 8

5/8 1 3/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 3/4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1-1/8 4-5/8 1-1/2 2-1/2 1-5/16 7 5-3/8 1/4 1/2
W
7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
TT
4 7 4 4 4
XG
3-1/4 2-7/8 3 3-1/4
Y
3-7/16 3-1/16 3-3/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-7/16 3-1/8 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2
XJ
6 6-5/8 6-1/4 6-3/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 6-5/8 7-1/4 7-3/8 7-5/8 7-5/8 7-5/8 7-5/8 7-5/8 7-5/8 7-5/8 7-7/8 8-1/8 8-1/8 8-1/8 8-1/8 8-1/8 8-1/8 8-1/8 9-1/4 9-1/4 9-1/4 9-1/4 9-1/4 9-1/4 9-1/4
ZB
7-5/16 7-15/16 7-9/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 7-15/16 8-15/16 9-1/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-5/16 9-9/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 9-13/16 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 9-13/16 7-11/16
1(Std.) 1-3/8 1-1/4-12 5-1/2 5-1/4-12 1-3/4 1-1/2-12 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 1-3/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-3/4-12 1-3/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-3/4-12 1-3/4-12 2-3/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-3/4-12 2-1/2 2-1/4-12 3-1/2 3-1/4-12 4-1/2 4-1/4-12
1-14 4-12 1-1/4-12 1-7/8-12
1-5/8 1.999 5-1/2 6.249 2 3 2.374 3.124
2-5/8 4-15/16 2-13/16 5-9/16 5-3/16 5-5/16 5-9/16 5-3/16 5-9/16 5-9/16 5-9/16 5-9/16 5-11/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16 6-1/16
3-1/8 1-11/16 3/8 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
2-1/16 4-1/2 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2
2-1/4-12 3-1/2 3.749 2-1/2-12 3-1/2 4.249 3-12 3-1/2-12 1-1/4-12 1-7/8-12 4 5 2 3 4.749 5.749 2.374 3.124 3-1/4-12 4-1/2 5.249
5-1/2 3-1/4 5-1/2 3-1/4 5-1/2 3-1/4 7 7 4 4 4 3-1/4 3-1/4 3 3-3/8
1(Std.) 1-3/4 1-1/2-12 2-1/2 2-1/4-12 3-1/2 3-1/4-12 4-1/2 4-1/4-12 5-1/2 5-1/4-12 2-1/2 2-1/4-12 3-1/2 3-1/4-12 4-1/2 4-1/4-12 5-1/2 5-1/4-12 3 4 5 2-3/4-12 3-3/4-12 4-3/4-12
3-1/8 1-11/16 3/8 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 2-3/8 2-7/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-3/8 4-7/8 5-3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
1-1/2-12 2-1/4 2.624 2-1/4-12 3-1/2 3.749 2-1/2-12 3-1/2 4.249 3-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 1-7/8-12 4 5 4.749 5.749 3-1/4-12 4-1/2 5.249 5-1/2 6.249 3 3.124
7/8 1-11/16 3-1/2 1-15/16 3/8 2-1/16 4-1/2 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7
3-1/8 5-13/16
5-1/2 3-3/8 5-1/2 3-3/8 5-1/2 3-3/8 7 7 7 4 4 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8
1-1/2-12 2-1/4 2.624 2-1/4-12 3-1/2 3.749 2-1/2-12 3-1/2 4.249 3-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 1-7/8-12 4 5 3 4.749 5.749 3.124 3-1/4-12 4-1/2 5.249 5-1/2 6.249
7/8 1-11/16 3-1/2 1-15/16 3/8 2-1/16 4-1/2 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 2-5/8 3 3-3/8 3-7/8 4-1/4 4-5/8 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7 5 5 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 7
3-1/8 5-13/16
5-1/2 3-3/8 5-1/2 3-3/8 7 7 7 4 3-3/8 3-3/8 33/8
1(Std.) 2-1/2 2-1/4-12 3-1/2 3-1/4-12 4-1/2 4-1/4-12 5-1/2 5-1/4-12
2-1/16 4-1/2
3-5/8 6-13/16 3-13/16
2-1/4-12 3-1/2 3.749 2-1/2-12 3-1/2 4.249 3-12 3-1/2-12 4-12 4 5 4.749 5.749 3-1/4-12 4-1/2 5.249 5-1/2 6.249
5-1/2 3-5/8 6-13/16 3-13/16 5-1/2 3-5/8 6-13/16 3-13/16 5-1/2 3-5/8 6-13/16 3-13/16 7 7 7 3-5/8 6-13/16 3-13/16 3-5/8 6-13/16 3-13/16 3-5/8 6-13/16 3-13/16
**Dimension XI to be specified by customer.
B171
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
5-1/2 3-3/8
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
1-1/2-12 2-1/4 2.624
7/8 1-11/16 3-1/2 1-15/16 3/8
ACVB Option
Add Stroke Min.** XI
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Spherical Bearing Mounting

Style SB 1-1/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

C052
XL + STROKE CE
LUBRICATION FITTING
ZC + STROKE XC + STROKE
MA
LUBRICATION FITTING 1
B
4
1
KE ER
MS
CD 3 EX
LE W A NR
CD 3 EX
KK
Rod Bore
1-1/2
Rod Dia. MM
1 1-3/8 1 1-3/4 1 1-3/8 1 2 1-3/8 1-3/4 1 2-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 1 3-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 4 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2
No.
2 2 3 2 3 4 1(Std.) 2 3 4 1(Std.) 2
Thread Style Style 9 7 KK KK

7/16-20 ** 7/16-20 ** ** 7/16-20 ** ** ** 3/4-16 ** ** ** 3/4-16 ** ** ** ** 3/4-16 ** ** ** ** ** ** 1-14 ** ** ** ** ** ** 7/16-20 7/16-20 7/16-20 7/16-20 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14
Add Stroke
A
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8
W
5/8 1 5/8 1-1/4 1 5/8 1-1/2 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-3/8 1 1-1/4 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 3/4 1-5/8 1 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
XC
5-3/8 5-3/4 5-3/8 6 5-3/4 5-1/2 6-3/8 5-7/8 6-1/8 6-7/8 7-1/2 7-1/8 7-3/8 6-7/8 7-3/4 7-1/8 7-3/8 7-1/2 7-1/8 8 7-3/8 7-5/8 7-3/4 8 8 8-1/8
XL
6-1/4 6-5/8 6-1/4 6-7/8 6-5/8 6-3/8 7-1/4 6-3/4 7 8-1/8 8-3/4 8-3/8 8-5/8 8-1/8 9 8-3/8 8-5/8 8-3/4 8-3/8 9-1/4 8-5/8 8-7/8 9 9-1/4 9-1/4 10
ZC
KE
CD*
CE
ER
EX
LE
3/4
MA
3/4
MS
15/16
NR
5/8
Max. Oper. PSI 2A

250
1(Std.) 5/8 1(Std.) 5/8
6-1/8 1- 1/2 -.0005 6-1/2 1-7/8 .5000 6-1/8 6-3/4 6-1/2 6-1/4 7-1/8 6-5/8 6-7/8 7-7/8 8-1/2 8-1/8 8-3/8 7-7/8 8-3/4 8-1/8 8-3/8 8-1/2 8-1/8 9 8-3/8 8-5/8 8-3/4 9 9 9-3/8 10 1-1/2 2-1/8 1-7/8 1-1/2 2-3/8 -.0005 1-7/8 .5000 2-1/8 2 -.0005 .5000
7/8 13/16 7/16
7/8 13/16 7/16
3/4
3/4
15/16
5/8
250
1(Std.) 5/8 2-1/2
7/8 13/16 7/16
3/4
3/4
15/16
5/8
250
3-1/4
2-5/8 -.0005 1-1/4 1-1/8 2-1/32 1-1/16 2-1/4 .7500 2-1/2 2 2-7/8 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-5/8 2 2-7/8 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-5/8 2-7/8 2-7/8 2-3/4 3-3/8 3 3-1/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 -.0005 1-7/8 1-1/4 1.0000 7/8 -.0005 1-1/4 1-1/8 2-1/32 1-1/16 .7500 -.0005 1-1/4 1-1/8 2-1/32 1-1/16 .7500
1-3/8
250
3 4 5 1(Std.) 2 3
1-3/8
250
4 5 6 7 2 3
1-3/8
250
1(Std.) 1-3/8
8-3/4 10-5/8
8-3/8 10-1/4 9-5/8 8-1/2 10-3/8 9-3/4 8-3/4 10-5/8 8-3/4 10-5/8 8-3/4 10-5/8 10 10 10
4 5 6 7
1-7/16 1-1/4 1-11/16 1-1/4
250
Maximum operating pressure at 4:1 design factor is based on tensile strength of material. Pressure ratings are based on standard commercial bearing ratings. Note: For additional dimensions see Series 2A, page B158. * Dimension CD is hole diameter. ** Corresponding rod eye pin diameter may not match pin diameter of cap. Rod No. 1 is standard.
B172
Catalog 0900P-4
Spherical Bearing Mounting

Style SB 8" to 14" Bore Sizes

C052
XL + STROKE CE
KE ER
ZC + STROKE XC + STROKE
MA
B
2 4
MS
CD 3 EX
LE W A NR
CD 3 EX
KK
Bore
Rod No.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 3 4 5
Rod Dia. MM
5-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2
Thread Style Style 9 7 KK KK

1-14 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 1-1/2-12 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/4-12
Add Stroke
A
1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2-1/4
W
7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
XC
XL
ZC
KE
2-3/4 3 3-1/8
CD*
CE
ER
EX
LE
MA
MS
NR
Max. Oper. PSI 2A
1(Std.) 1-3/8
8-1/4 10-1/8 9-1/2 8-1/2 10-3/8 9-3/4 8-5/8 10-1/2 9-7/8
8-7/8 10-3/4 10-1/8 3-3/8 8-7/8 10-3/4 10-1/8 3-3/8
-.0005 1-7/8 8-7/8 10-3/4 10-1/8 3-3/8 1.0000 8-7/8 10-3/4 10-1/8 3-3/8
1-1/4
7/8
1-7/16 1-1/4 1-11/16 1-1/4
250
8-7/8 10-3/4 10-1/8 3-3/8 8-7/8 10-3/4 10-1/8 3-3/8
1(Std.) 1-3/4 1-1/4-12
1-1/8 10-3/8 12-1/2 12-1/4 3-1/4 1-1/2 10-3/4 12-7/8 12-5/8 3-5/8 1-1/2 10-3/4 12-7/8 12-5/8 3-5/8 1-1/2 10-3/4 12-7/8 12-5/8 3-5/8 1-1/2 10-3/4 12-7/8 12-5/8 3-5/8 1-1/2 10-3/4 12-7/8 12-5/8 3-5/8 1-1/2 10-3/4 12-7/8 12-5/8 3-5/8 1-1/2 10-3/4 12-7/8 12-5/8 3-5/8 1-1/4 11-1/8 13-5/8 13-5/8 3-3/4 1-1/2 11-3/8 13-7/8 13-7/8 1-1/2 11-3/8 13-7/8 13-7/8 1-1/2 11-3/8 13-7/8 13-7/8 1-1/2 11-3/8 13-7/8 13-7/8 1-1/2 11-3/8 13-7/8 137/8 1-1/2 11-3/8 13-7/8 13-7/8 1-1/2 11-3/8 13-7/8 13-7/8 4 4 4 4 4 4 2-7/8 2-1/16 250 4 -.0005 2-1/2 2-1/16 11-7/32 2-1/8 2-1/2 1.7500 -.0005 2-1/8 1-11/16 1-3/16 1.3750 17/8 1-7/8 2-7/16 1-5/8 250
10
6 7 8 9 0 1(Std.) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4
1-1/2-12 2-1/4 1-1/2-12 2-1/4 1-1/2-12 21/4 1-1/2-12 2-1/4 1-1/2-12 2-1/4 1-1/2-12 2-1/4 1-1/2-12 2-1/4 1-7/8-12 1-7/8-12 1-7/8-12 1-7/8-12 1-7/8-12 1-7/8-12 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
12
1(Std.) 2-1/2 1-7/8-12
1-1/2 12-7/8 15-5/8 15-3/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 12-7/8 15-5/8 15-3/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 12-7/8 15-5/8 15-3/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 12-7/8 15-5/8 15-3/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 12-7/8 15-5/8 15-3/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 12-7/8 15-5/8 15-3/8 4-1/4 1-1/2 12-7/8 15-5/8 15-3/8 4-1/4 -.0005 2-3/4 2.0000 2-1/2 1-3/4 2-1/2 2-1/2 3-5/16 2-3/8 250
14
5 6 7 8
Maximum operating pressure at 4:1 design factor is based on tensile strength of material. Pressure ratings are based on standard commercial bearing ratings. Note: For additional dimensions see Series 2A, page B210. * Dimension CD is hole diameter. ** Corresponding rod eye pin diameter may not match pin diameter of cap. Rod No. 1 is standard.
B173
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
1-1/4 10-1/2 12-5/8 12-3/8 3-3/8
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
8-7/8 10-3/4 10-1/8 3-3/8
3MAJ/4MAJ
3MA/4MA
Catalog 0900P-4
Double Rod Models 1" to 14" Bore Sizes

C052
ZM + 2 X STROKE ZL + STROKE P + STROKE LD + STROKE EE
How to Use Double Rod Cylinder Dimensioned Drawings

1"- 6" Bores Rod End #1
MM W Y
Rod End #2
G G F
7"- 14" Bores

W
ZM + 2 X STROKE Y P + STROKE LD + STROKE EE
Dimensions Shown on Mounting This Page Supplement Mounting Styles for Dimensions on Pages Styles for Corresponding Listed Below Single Rod Double Rod Models 1" - 6" 8" - 14" Models* Bores Bores
Rod End #1
MM
Rod End #2
T TB** TD J JB** C** F D DD
KT KTB KTD KJ KJB KC KF KD KDD
B192 B192 B192 B102 B194 B196 B196 B198 B198
B204 B204 B204 B204 B206 B208 B212 B212

F WF G G F K
*If only one end of these Double Rod Cylinders is to be cushioned, be sure to specify clearly which end this will be. **Available in 7" bore, pages B190-B191. Specify XI dimension from rod end #1. Mounting style KDD not available in 1" and 7" bore sizes.
To determine dimensions for a double rod cylinder, first refer to the desired single rod mounting style cylinder shown on preceding pages of this catalog. (See table at left.) After selecting necessary dimensions from that drawing, return to this page supplement the single rod dimensions with those shown on drawings at right and dimension table below. Note that double rod cylinders have a head (Dim. G) at both ends and that dimension LD replace LB and ZL replaces ZB, etc. The double rod dimensions differ from,
or are in addition to those for single rod cylinders shown on preceding pages and provide the information needed to completely dimension a double rod cylinder. On a double rod cylinder where the two rod ends are different, be sure to clearly state which rod end is to be assembled at which end. Port position 1 is standard. If other than standard, specify pos. 2, 3 or 4 when viewed from rod end #1 only. See port position information in the Engineering Section (Section A).
All dimensions are in inches and apply to Code 1 rod sizes only. For alternate rod sizes, determine all envelope dimensions (within LD dim.) as described above and then use appropriate rod end dimensions for proper rod size from single rod cylinder.
Rod Dia. MM
1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 1 1 1 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2
Bore
1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14
Rod No.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LD
4-3/4 4-7/8 4-7/8 5 6 6 6-1/4 7 7-1/8 7-1/8 8-1/8 8-5/8 10-1/8 LB
Add Stroke ZL SSK

5-1/2 5-3/4 5-13/16 5-15/16 7-1/8 7-1/8 7-7/16 8-5/16 ZB 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-1/2 3-3/4 3-3/4 3-5/8 4-1/8 4-1/4 4-1/4 4-7/8 5-3/8 6-3/8 SS C
SNK
2-1/8 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-7/8 3-1/8 3-1/4 3-1/4 4-1/8 4-5/8 5-1/2 SN F
Add 2X Stroke ZM
6 6-1/8 6-1/8 6-1/4 7-1/2 7-1/2 7-3/4 8-3/4 8-7/8 8-7/8 10-3/8 11-1/8 13-1/8 All Mtgs.
Replaces: On single rod mounting styles:
All Mtg. Styles
B174
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Parker Style 55 Piston Rod End

Rod end flange coupling for Parker Series 2A and 2AN Pneumatic Cylinders: n Simplifies alignment n Reduces assembly time n Allows full rated pneumatic pressure in push and pull directions n Available in 5/8" through 5-1/2" piston rod diameters

How To Order
Complete Model Number and place a 55 in the Piston Rod End designator position. Example: 6.00J2AU155X12.000 Consult Factory for availability of mounting accessories and Hardware.
C052
B
Dimensions Style 55 Rod End

MM Rod Dia. 5/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 AD 5/8 15/16 1-1/16 1-5/16 1-11/16 1-15/16 2-7/16 2-11/16 2-11/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-15/16 AE 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-7/8 AF 3/8 11/16 7/8 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-3/4 2-1/4 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 3-7/8 4-3/8 AM .57 .95 1.32 1.70 1.95 2.45 2.95 3.45 3.95 4.45 4.95 5.45 WG 1-3/4 2-3/8 2-3/4 3-1/8 3-3/4 4-1/2 4-7/8 5-5/8 5-3/4 6-1/2 6-5/8 7-1/2
R 1/16
AM
MM
AF
AE AD WG
G F or RT DEPENDING ON MOUNTING
4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2
Series 2A/2AN
See Cylinder Catalog for F, G and RT per bore and series.
Split Couplers and Weld Plates

C D F BOLTS
A B
! WARNING: Piston rod separation from the machine member can result in severe personal injury or even death to nearby personnel. The cylinder user must make sure the weld holding the weld plate to the machine is of sufficient quality and size to hold the intended load. The cylinder user must also make sure the bolts holding split coupler to the weld plate are of sufficient strength to hold the intended load and installed in such a way that they will not become loose during the machines operation.
NOTE: Screws are not included with split coupler or weld plate.
STYLE 55 ROD END SPLIT COUPLER WELD PLATE

Rod Dia. 0.625 1.00 1.375 1.75 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 A 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 5.00 5.88 6.38 6.88 7.38 8.25 B 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 4.50 5.50 7.00 7.00 8.00 8.00 9.00 C 0.50 0.50 0.63 0.63 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.25 D 0.56 0.88 1.00 1.25 1.63 1.88 2.38 2.63 2.63 3.13 3.13 3.88 E 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 F 4 6 6 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 Bolt Size #10-24 x .94 LG .250-20 x 1.25 LG .312-18 x 1.50 LG .312-18 x 1.75 LG .375-16 x 2.25 LG .375-16 x 2.50 LG .500-13 x 3.25 LG .625-11 x 3.50 LG .625-11 x 3.50 LG .625-11 x 4.00 LG .625-11 x 4.00 LG .750-10 x 5.00 LG Bolt Circle 1.125 1.500 2.000 2.375 2.687 3.187 4.000 4.687 5.187 5.687 6.187 6.875 Split Coupler Part No. 147234 0062 147234 0100 147234 0138 147234 0175 147234 0200 147234 0250 147234 0300 147234 0350 147234 0400 147234 0450 147234 0500 147234 0550 Weld Plate Part No. 148174 0062 148174 0100 148174 0138 148174 0175 148174 0200 148174 0250 148174 0300 148174 0350 148174 0400 148174 0450 148174 0500 148174 0550
B175
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Adjustable Floating Cushions

Cushions are optional, and can be supplied at head end, cap end, or both ends without change in envelope or mounting dimensions. All Parker cushions are adjustable.

Cushion Length
Cylinder Bore (Inches)
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5
C052
Rod Diameter* (Inches)

5/8 1 5/8 1-3/8 5/8 1-3/4 1 2 1 2-1/2 1 3-1/2
Cushion Length (Inches) Rod Number

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Head*
7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 1-1/8 13/16 1-1/8 13/16 1-1/8 13/16
Cap
13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 1 1 1 1 1 1
The Series 2A cylinder design incorporates the longest cushion sleeve and cushion spear that can be provided in the standard envelope without decreasing the rod bearing and piston bearing lengths. (1) When a cushion is specified at the head end: a. A self-centering sleeve is furnished on the piston rod assembly. b. A needle valve is provided that is flush with the side of the head when wide open. It may be identified by the fact that it is socket-keyed. It is located on side number 2, in all mounting styles except D, DB and DD. In these styles it is located on side number 3. c. A springless check valve is provided that is also flush with the side of the head and is mounted adjacent to the needle valve except on certain bores of mounting style C where it is mounted opposite the needle valve. It may be identified by the fact that it is slotted. d. The check and needle valves are interchangeable in the head. (2) When a cushion is specified at the cap end: a. A cushion spear is provided on the piston rod assembly. b. A float check self-centering bushing is provided which incorporates a large flow check valve for fast outstroke action. c. A socket-keyed needle valve is provided that is flush with the side of the cap when wide open. It is located on side number 2 in all mounting styles except D, DB and DD. In these styles it is located on side number 3.
Cylinder Bore (Inches)

6 7 8 10 12 14
Rod Diameter* (Inches)

13/8 4 1-3/8 2 1-3/8 5-1/2 1-3/4 5-1/2 2 5-1/2 2-1/2 5-1/2
Cushion Length (Inches) Rod Number

1 2 1 4 1 2 1 0 1 9 1 8
Head*
1-3/8 1-1/16 1-1/16 1-1/16 1-1/16 1-5/16 1-5/16 1-3/16 1-5/16 1-3/16 1-3/4 1-11/16
Cap
1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2 2
* Head end cushions for rod diameters not listed have cushion lengths with the limits shown. For cushion selection and sizing see Engineering Section.
B176
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Non-Lube Air Cylinder (2AN)

Today's industrial market demands more from a pneumatic cylinder. Cylinders are still required to handle tough, heavyduty applications. But, more and more, these cylinders operate in environments or circumstances where it is not possible or advantageous to add lubrication to the compressed air entering the cylinder. Certain packaging and assembly operations, food environments, and microprocessor chip manufacturing are typical examples of areas where the exhausting of oil into the environment is not desirable. In many other situations, "non-lube" systems are used when proper air line lubrication is not present because of the time and expense of keeping lubricators filled and operating correctly. Piston Lipseals

C052
In bore sizes to 12" diameter and rod diameters to 2-1/2", the Parker Series 2AN air cylinder features rounded lip rod and piston seals. These seals glide over the PTFE based lubricant that is provided at the time of manufacture. The Parker Series 2AN Non Lubricated Air Cylinder maintains the lubricant film where it belongs; on the seals bearing surfaces, piston rod and cylinder bore. Benefits include long seal and bearing life. No oil needs to be added through the use of lubricators. As the cylinder strokes, no oil is expelled into the atmosphere with the exhaust air.
B
Gland Lipseals
For Millions of Trouble Free Cycles Standard Specifications

Heavy Duty Service ANSI/(NFPA) T3.6.7R2-1996 Specifications and Mounting Dimension Standards NFPA Interchangeable 15 Standard Mounting Styles Strokes Available in any Practical Stroke Length Cushions Optional at either end or both ends of stroke. Float Check at cap end. Exceeds Automotive Specifications Nominal Pressure 250 PSI Air Service Standard Temperature -10F to +165F Standard Fluid Filtered Dry Air
In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, specifications in this catalog are subject to change.
Anatomy of Series 2AN Sealing and Lubricant Retention Systems

Rounded sealing lip glides over lubricant film instead of scraping it off. Reduces friction, increases life and eliminates the need for added lubrication. Increased heel thickness and outer lip extension improve stability, resist rolling.
Drawing not to scale
High integrity lubricant film with suspended PTFE particles
Available Bore and Rod Sizes*

Bore Sizes Available Rod Sizes Available 1-1/2" 5/8" 2" 1" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 1-3/8" 1-3/4" 4" 2" 5" 2-1/2" 6" 3" 8" 3-1/2" 10" 4" 12" 4-1/2" 14" 5" 5-1/2"
*For specific cylinder bore size/piston rod availabilities and dimensions, see Series 2A Cylinder.
B177
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Accessories
8 2 6

C052
2 Female Rod Clevis

ER CW CB CW
+.004 CD +.002 CE A
B
3 4
Order to fit thread size.

KK THREAD
Parker offers a complete range of cylinder accessories to assure you of greatest versatility in present or future cylinder applications.
3 Knuckle (Female Rod Eye)

+.004 +.002
Rod End Accessories
Accessories offered for the rod end of the cylinder include Rod Clevis, Eye Bracket, Knuckle, Clevis Bracket and Pivot Pin. To select the proper part number for any desired accessory, refer to Chart A below and look opposite the thread size of the rod end as indicated in the first column. The Pivot Pins, Eye Brackets and Clevis Brackets are listed opposite the thread size which their mating Knuckles or Clevises fit. Mating Parts Rod Eye Clevis Bracket Pin Mating Parts Clevis Knuckle Bracket Pin
74075 69089 69090 69091 69091 69092 69093 69093 69094 69094 69095 69096 69097 69098 69099 69100 73536 73437 73438 73439 74076 69205 69205 69206 69206 69207 69207 69207 69208 69208 69209 69210 69210 69211 69212 69213 73542 73542 73543 73544 74078 68368 68368 68369 68369 68370 68370 68370 68371 68371 68372 69215 69215 68374 68375 69216 73545 73545 82181 73547
ER CD CD
CD
A FULL THREAD
CB
KK THREAD CD CA
Order to fit thread size. Alignment Coupler

134757 0031 134757 0044 134757 0050 134757 0075 134757 0075 134757 0088 134757 0100 134757 0100 134757 0125 134757 0125 133739 0150 133739 0175 133739 0188
Thread Size
5/16-24 51221 74077 7/16-20 50940 69195 68368 1/2-20 50941 69195 68368 3/4-16 50942 69196 68369 3/4-16 133284 69196 68369 7/8-14 50943 *85361 68370 1-14 50944 *85361 68370 1-14 133285 *85361 68370 1-1/4-12 50945 69198 68371 1-1/4-12 133286 69198 68371 1-1/2-12 50946 *85362 68372 1-3/4-12 50947 *85363 68373 1-7/8-12 50948 *85363 68373 2-1/4-12 50949 *85364 68374 2-1/2-12 50950 *85365 68375 2-3/4-12 50951 *85365 68375 3-1/4-12 50952 73538 73545 3-1/2-12 50953 73539 73547 4-12 50954 73539 73547 4-1/2-12
4 Clevis Bracket for Knuckle

CW MR M 25 LR FL F R E R E DD DIA 4 HOLES CB CW CD + .004 + .002
Order to fit Knuckle.
8 Mounting Plate or 5 Eye Bracket

CB CD + .004 + .002
MR
Consult Factory
FL
25 LR
DD DIA 4 HOLES
F R E R E
For alignment coupler dimensions, see Section C. *Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard NFPA/T3.6.8 R1-1984, NFPA recommended standard fluid power systems cylinder dimensions for accessories for cataloged square head industrial types. Parker adopted this standard in April, 1985. Eye Brackets or Mounting Plates shipped before this date may have different dimensions and will not necessarily interchange with the NFPA standard. For dimensional information on older style Eye Brackets or Mounting Plates consult Drawing #144805 or previous issues of this catalog. NOTE: For economical accessory selection, it is recommended that rod end style 4 be specified on your cylinder order.
1. When used to mate with the Rod Clevis, select from Chart A. 2. When used to mount the Style BB cylinders, select from the Mounting Plate Selection Table. See Chart B at lower left.
Accessory Load Capacity
Chart B The various accessories on Pages B209 and B210 have been load rated for your Mtg. Plate Series 2A convenience. The load capacity in lbs. shown Part No. Bore Size on page B209, is the recommended maximum 74076 1" load for that accessory based on a 4:1 design 69195 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2" factor in tensions. (Pivot Pin is rated in shear.) Before specifying, compare the actual load or 69196 3-1/4", 4", 5" the tension (pull) force at maximum operating 6", 7", 8" pressure of the cylinder with the load capacity *85361 of the accessory you plan to use. If load or 69198 10" pull force of cylinder exceeds load capacity of *85362 12" accessory, consult factory.
*85363 14"
6 Pivot Pin
CL CD +.001 .002
1. Pivot Pins are furnished with Clevis Mounted Cylinders as standard. 2. Pivot Pins are furnished with (2) Retainer Rings. 3. Pivot Pins must be ordered as a separate item if to be used with Knuckles, Rod Clevises, or Clevis Brackets.
Mounting Plates
Mounting Plates for Style BB (Clevis mounted) Bracket P/N 74076. cylinders are offered. To select proper part number for your application, refer to Chart B, above right.
Mounting plate for 1" bore single lug BB cylinder mounting style is Clevis
B178
Catalog 0900P-4
51221 A CB CD CE CW ER KK
Load Capacity Lbs. O

C052 Female Rod Clevis Part Number 133284 1-1/8 1-1/4 3/4 2-3/8 5/8 3/4 3/4-16 11200 50943 1-5/8 1-1/2 1 3/4 1 7/8-14 18800 50944 1-5/8 1-1/2 1 3/4 1 1-14 19500 133285 1-5/8 1-1/2 1 3-1/8 3/4 1 1-14 19500 50945 1-7/8 2 1-3/8 3-3/4 1 1-3/8 133286 2 2 1-3/8 4-1/8 1 1-3/8 50946 2-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/4 4-1/2 1-1/4 1-3/4 50947 3 2-1/2 2 5-1/2 1-1/4 2 50948 3 2-1/2 2 5-1/2 1-1/4 2 50949 3-1/2 3 2-1/2 6-1/2 1-1/2 2-1/2 50950 3-1/2 3 3 6-3/4 1-1/2 2-3/4 50951 3-1/2 3 3 6-3/4 1-1/2 2-3/4 50952 3-1/2 4 3-1/2 7-3/4 2 3-1/2 50953 4 4-1/2 4 2-1/4 4 50954 4 4-1/2 4 2-1/4 4 4-12
50940 3/4 3/4 1/2 1-1/2 1/2 1/2
50941 3/4 3/4 1/2 1-1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2-20 4900
50942 1-1/8 1-1/4 3/4 2-1/8 5/8 3/4 3/4-16 11200
13/16 11/32 5/16 2-1/4 13/64 19/64
2-15/16 2-15/16
8-13/16 8-13/16
5/16-24 7/16-20 2600 4250
1-1/4-12 1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 33500 33500 45600 65600 65600 98200 98200 98200
B
156700 193200 221200
74075 A CA CB CD ER KK
Load Capacity Lbs.O
69089 3/4 1-1/2 3/4 1/2 23/32
69090 3/4 1-1/2 3/4 1/2 23/32 1/2-20 5700
69091 1-1/8 2-1/16 1-1/4 3/4 1-1/16 3/4-16 12100
69092 1-1/8 2-3/8 1-1/2 1 1-7/16 7/8-14 13000
69093 1-5/8 2-13/16 1-1/2 1 1-7/16 1-14 21700
69094 2 3-7/16 2 1-3/8 1-31/32
Knuckle Part Number 69095 69096 69097 2-1/4 4 2-1/2 1-3/4 2-1/2 2-1/4 4-3/8 2-1/2 2 3 5 2-1/2 2
69098 3-1/2 5-13/16 3 2-1/2 3-9/16
69099 3-1/2 6-1/8 3 3 4-1/4
69100 3-5/8 6-1/2 3-1/2 3 4-1/4
73536 4-1/2 7-5/8 4 3-1/2
73437 5 7-5/8 4 3-1/2
73438 5-1/2 9-1/8 4-1/2 4 4-12 273800
73439 5-1/2 9-1/8 5 4 5-11/16 4-1/2-12 308500
3/4 1-1/2 7/16 7/16 19/32
2-27/32 2-27/32
4-31/32 4-31/32 5-11/16
5/16-24 7/16-20 3300 5000
1-1/4-12 1-1/2-12 1-3/4-12 1-7/8-12 2-1/4-12 2-1/2-12 2-3/4-12 3-1/4-12 3-1/2-12 33500 45000 53500 75000 98700 110000 123300 161300 217300
Clevis Bracket for Knuckle Part Number CB CD CW DD E F FL LR M MR R

Load Capacity Lbs.O
74076 15/32 7/16 3/8 17/64 2-1/4 3/8 1 5/8 3/8 1/2 1.75 3600
69205 3/4 1/2 1/2 13/32 3-1/2 1/2 1-1/2 3/4 1/2 5/8 2.55 7300
69206 1-1/4 3/4 5/8 17/32 5 5/8 1-7/8 1-3/16 3/4 29/32 3.82 14000
69207 1-1/2 1 3/4 21/32 6-1/2 3/4 2-1/4 1-1/2 1 1-1/4 4.95 19200
69208 2 1-3/8 1 21/32 7-1/2 7/8 3 2 1-3/8 1-21/32 5.73 36900
69209 2-1/2 1-3/4 1-1/4 29/32 9-1/2 7/8 3-5/8 2-3/4 1-3/4 2-7/32 7.50 34000
69210 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1-1/16 12-3/4 1 4-1/4 3-3/16 2-1/4 2-25/32 9.40 33000
69211 3 2-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/16 12-3/4 1 4-1/2 3-1/2 2-1/2 3-1/8 9.40 34900
69212 3 3 1-1/2 1-5/16 12-3/4 1 6 4-1/4 3 3-19/32 9.40 33800
69213 3-1/2 3 1-1/2 1-5/16 12-3/4 1 6 4-1/4 3 3-19/32 9.40 36900
73542 4 3-1/2 2 1-13/16 15-1/2 1-11/16 6-11/16 5 3-1/2 4-1/8 12.00 83500
73543 4-1/2 4 2 2-1/16 17-1/2 1-15/16 7-11/16 5-3/4 4 4-7/8 13.75 102600
73544 5 4 2 2-1/16 17-1/2 1-15/16 7-11/16 5-3/4 4 4-7/8 13.75 108400
CB CD DD E F FL LR M MR R
Load Capacity Lbs.O
74077 5/16 5/16 17/64 2-1/4 3/8 1 5/8 3/8 1/2 1.75 1700
69195 3/4 1/2 13/32 2-1/2 3/8 1-1/8 3/4 1/2 9/16 1.63 4100
69196 1-1/4 3/4 17/32 3-1/2 5/8 1-7/8 1-1/4 3/4 7/8 2.55 10500
85361* 1-1/2 1 21/32 4-1/2 7/8 2-3/8 1-1/2 1 1-1/4 3.25 20400
Eye Bracket and Mounting Plate Part Number 69198 85362* 85363* 2 2-1/2 2-1/2 1- 3/8 1-3/4 2 21/32 29/32 1-1/16 5 6-1/2 7-1/2 7/8 1-1/8 1-1/2 3 3-3/8 4 2-1/8 2-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 1-5/8 2-1/8 2-7/16 3.82 4.95 5.73 21200 49480 70000
85364* 3 2-1/2 1-3/16 8-1/2 1-3/4 4-3/4 3 2-1/2 3 6.58 94200
85365* 3 3 1-5/16 9-1/2 2 5-1/4 3-1/4 2-3/4 3-1/4 7.50 121900
73538 4 3-1/2 1-13/16 12-5/8 1-11/16 5-11/16 4 3-1/2 4-1/8 9.62 57400
73539 4-1/2 4 2-1/16 14-7/8 1-15/16 6-7/16 4-1/2 4 5-1/4 11.45 75000
CD CL
Shear Capacity Lbs.O
74078 7/16 1-5/16 6600
68368 1/2 1-7/8 8600
68369 3/4 2-5/8 19300
68370 1 3-1/8 34300
68371 1-3/8 4-1/8 65000
68372 1-3/4 5-3/16 105200
Pivot Pin Part Number 68373 69215 68374 2 2 2-1/2 5-3/16 5-11/16 6-3/16 137400 137400 214700
68375 3 6-1/4 309200
69216 3 6-3/4 309200
73545 3-1/2 8-1/4 420900
82181 4 8-5/8 565800
73547 4 9 565800
*Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard NFPA/T3.6.8 R1-1984, NFPA recommended standard fluid power systems cylinder dimensions for accessories for cataloged square head industrial types. Parker adopted this standard in April, 1985. Eye Brackets or Mounting Plates shipped before this date may have different dimensions and will not necessarily interchange with the NFPA standard. For dimensional information on older style Eye Brackets or Mounting Plates consult Drawing #144805 or previous issues of this catalog.
O See Accessory Load Capacity note on page B186. These sizes supplied with cotter pins. Includes Pivot Pin. Consult appropriate cylinder rod end dimensions for compatibility.
B179
Catalog 0900P-4
Accessories / Spherical Bearing Mounting

Parker offers a complete range of Cylinder Accessories to assure you of the greatest versatility in present or future cylinder applications. Accessories offered for the respective cylinder include the Rod Eye, Pivot Pin and Clevis Bracket. To select the proper part number for any desired accessory refer to the charts below.

C052
Spherical Rod Eye

CD ER (MAX)
Bore Size Series 2A 1-1/2, 2 & 2-1/2 Rod Eye

EX
3-1/4, 4 & 5 132291

.7500 -.0005 1 1-1/4 21-32 1-1/8 1-1/16 3/4-16 1-5/16 9441
6&8 132292
1-1/2 1-7/8 7/8 1-1/4 1-7/16 1-14 1-1/2 16860
10 132293
2 2-1/8 1-3/16 1-11/16 1-7/8 1-1/4-12 2 28562
12 132294
2-1/8 2-1/2 1-17/32 2-1/16 2-1/8 1-1/2-12 2-1/4 43005
14 132295
2-7/8 2-3/4 1-3/4 2-1/2 2-1/2 1-7/8-12 2-3/4 70193
Part No.
CD A CE EX ER LE JK JL
132290
.5000 -.0005 11/16 7/8 7-16 13/16 3/4 7/16-20 7/8 2644
1.0000 -.0005 1.3750 -.0005 1.7500 -.0005 2.0000 -.0005
LE
LUBE FITTING
CE
JK THD
JL
DIA
Load Capacity Lbs.
Order to fit Piston Rod Thread Size.
Pivot Pin
CL
Bore Size Series 2A 1-1/2, 2 & 2-1/2 Pivot Pin Part No.
CD CL
CD
3-1/4, 4 & 5 83963

.7497 -.0005 2-1/32 19300
6&8 83964
.9997 -.0005 2-1/2 34300
10 83965
3-5/16 65000
12 83966
4-7/32 105200
14 83967
4-15/16 137400
83962
.4997 -.0004 1-9/16 8600
1.3746 -.0006 1.74960 -.0006 1.9996 -.0007
Load Capacity Lbs.
Pivot Pins are furnished with (2) Retainer Rings.
Clevis Bracket
Bore Size Series 2A 1-1/2, 2 & 2-1/2 Clevis Bracket Part No. 83947
CD CF
CW
3-1/4, 4 & 5 83948

3/4 21/32 5/8 17-32 3-3/4 5/8 2 1-3/8 7/8 1 2.76 9450
6&8 83949
1 7/8 3/4 17/32 5-1/2 3/4 2-1/2 1-11/16 1 1-3/16 4.10 14300
10 83950
1-3/8 1-3/16 1 21/32 6-1/2 7/8 3-1/2 2-7/16 1-3/8 1-5/8 4.95 20322
12 83951
1-3/4 1-17/32 1-1/4 29/32 8-1/2 1-1/4 4-1/2 2-7/8 1-3/4 2-1/16 6.58 37800
14 83952
2 1-3/4 1-1/2 29/32 10-5/8 1-1/2 5 3-5/16 2 2-3/8 7.92 50375
1/2 7/16 1/2 13/32 3 1/2 1-1/2 15/16 1/2 5/8 2.05 5770
MR M LR FL F R E DD DIA 4 HOLES
CF
CW CD + .004 + .002
CW DD E F FL LR M MR R Load Capacity Lbs.
R E
Order to fit Mounting Plate or Rod Eye.
B180
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits Seal Kits for Class 1 & 2 Service

RG Gland (Sym. 62) Cartridge Kits Contains Symbols 14, 40, 41, 43 & 45
RG2AHL 0051 RG2AHL 0061 RG2AHL 0101 RG2AHL 0131 RG2AHL 0171 RG2AHL 0201 RG2AHL 0251 RG2AHL 0301 RG2AHL 0351 RG2AHL 0401 RG2AHL 0451 RG2AHL 0501 RG2AHL 0551
Rod Dia
1/2 5/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5* 5-1/2*
Series 2A (Class 1 Series 3L, 2H, VH RK Rod Seal Kits Contains Symbols Gland 40, 41, 43 & 45 Wrench
RK2AHL 0051 RK2AHL 0061 RK2AHL 0101 RK2AHL 0131 RK2AHL 0171 RK2AHL 0201 RK2AHL 0251 RK2AHL 0301 RK2AHL 0351 RK2AHL 0401 RK2AHL 0451 RK2AHL 0501 RK2AHL 0551 069590 0000 069590 0000 069591 0000 069592 0000 069593 0000 069594 0000 069595 0000 069596 0000 069597 0000 069598 0000 083877 0000 069599 0000 069600 0000
Spanner Wrench
011676 0000 011676 0000 011676 0000 011703 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011678 0000 011678 0000 011678 0000 011678 0000
B
*RG & RK kits listed are not applicable to 10" & 12" bore series 2H cylinders. See bulletin 0995-M4.
Bore Size
1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14
PK/Piston Seal Kits Series Series 2A Only Contains 2 Ea. Symbols: 42, 44 & 47
PK1002A001 PK1502A001 PK2002A001 PK2502A001 PK3202A001 PK4002A001 PK5002A001 PK6002A001 PK7002A001 PK8002A001 PK9002A001 PK9202A001 PK9402A001
Bore Size
1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14
CB Cylinder Body Seal Kits Series 2A Series Contains 2 Ea. Symbol 47

CB102HL001 CB152HL001 CB202HL001 CB252HL001 CB322A0001 CB402A0001 CB502A0001 CB602A0001 CB702A0001 CB802A0001 CB902A0001 CB922A0001
B181
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits Seal Kits for Class 5 Service

RG Gland (Sym. 62) Cartridge Kits Contains Symbols 14, 40, 41, 43 & 45
RG2AHL 0055 RG2AHL 0065 RG2AHL 0105 RG2AHL 0135 RG2AHL 0175 RG2AHL 0205 RG2AHL 0255 RG2AHL 0305 RG2AHL 0355 RG2AHL 0405 RG2AHL 0455 RG2AHL 0505 RG2AHL 0555
Rod Dia
1/2 5/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5* 5-1/2*
Series 2A, 2H, 3L & VH Cylinders RK Rod Seal Kits Contains Symbols Gland 40, 41, 43 & 45 Wrench
RK2AHL 0055 RK2AHL 0065 RK2AHL 0105 RK2AHL 0135 RK2AHL 0175 RK2AHL 0205 RK2AHL 0255 RK2AHL 0305 RK2AHL 0355 RK2AHL 0405 RK2AHL 0455 RK2AHL 0505 RK2AHL 0555 069590 0000 069590 0000 069591 0000 069592 0000 069593 0000 069594 0000 069595 0000 069596 0000 069597 0000 069598 0000 083877 0000 069599 0000 069600 0000
Spanner Wrench
011676 0000 011676 0000 011676 0000 011703 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011678 0000 011678 0000 011678 0000 011678 0000
*RG & RK kits listed are not applicable to 10" & 12" bore series 2H cylinders. See bulletin 0995-M4.
Bore Size
1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14
PK/Piston Seal Kits Series Series 2A Only Contains 2 Ea. Symbols: 42, 44 & 47
PK1002A005 PK1502A005 PK2002A005 PK2502A005 PK3202A005 PK4002A005 PK5002A005 PK6002A005 PK7002A005 PK8002A005 PK9002A005 PK9202A005 PK9402A005
Bore Size
1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14
CB Cylinder Body Seal Kits Series 2A Series Contains 2 Ea. Symbol 47

CB102HL005 CB152HL005 CB202HL005 CB252HL005
Use (PK) Piston Seal Kits for these Sizes
B182
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits Seal Kits for 2AN & MAN

Bore Size
1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14
PK Piston Seal Kits for Series 2AN & MAN Cylinders

PK1502 AN01 PK2002 AN01 PK2502 AN01 PK3202 AN01 PK4002 AN01 PK5002 AN01 PK6002 AN01 PK7002 AN01 PK8002 AN01 PK9002 AN01 PK9202 AN01 PK9402 AN01
CB Cylinder Body Seal Kits for Series 2AN & MAN

CB152H L001 CB202H L001 CB252H L001 CB322A 0001 CB402A 0001 CB502A 0001 CB602A 0001 CB702A 0001 CB802A 0001 CB902A 0001 CB922A 0001 CB942A 0001
Rod Dia.
5/8 1 1-3/8 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5* 5-1/2*
Gland Cartridge Wrenches Part No.

069590 0000 069591 0000 069592 0000 069593 0000 069594 0000 069595 0000 069597 0000 069598 0000 083877 0000 069599 0000 069600 0000
Spanner Wrenches Part No.

011676 0000 011676 0000 011703 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011678 0000 011678 0000 011678 0000 011678 0000
B
B183
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
B184
S Series
Universal Midget Pneumatic Cylinders
B
3MA/4MA Contents
Features ..........................................................................B186 Ordering Information........................................................B187 Specifications / Mounting.................................................B188 Dimensional Data .................................................. B189-B196 Mounting Kits / Accessories ............................................B197 Service Kits .....................................................................B198
B185
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Air Cylinders S Series

Your choice of mountings basic cylinder can be mounted four different ways (1) with mounting bolts through the top of the head and cap (position 1); (2) into tapped holes in the bottom of the head and cap (position 3); (3) into tapped holes in the front of the head; and (4) into tapped holes in the back of the cap. Additional clevis and flange attachments provide a mounting to meet every requirement. Nose mounted models are standard.
C086
Square head and cap are made of precision machined steel for durable long lasting performance.
The flush-type tie rod mount assembly provides a sound base for kit mounting.
Positive O-ring seals, with extra long bronze rod bearing, provide wear resistance and long life. Mounting holes are counter bored from the top and tapped at the bottom on the head and cap for easy and accurate mounting.
The one piece steel piston is permanently brazed to the piston rod so it cannot work loose in service. A lipseal design is available. O-ring seal is standard.
The corrosion resistant body ensures excellent wear qualities and long life. Stainless steel piston rod has a tough rust-proof construction for smooth operation and reliable performance. Oil impregnated rod bushing is bronze, reamed to a close tolerance to ensure smooth operation and long life.
Factory prelubricated for millions of maintenance free cycles.
Availability
Double-acting Parker Universal Midget Cylinders can be shipped from stock in 1/2", 1", 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2" and 3" stroke lengths in all bore sizes. Universal Midget Cylinders with other strokes up to 12 can be shipped within five days. Spring return cylinders are available from stock in 1" and 2" strokes in basic style USR (pressure to be applied at cap end). Other spring return models can be shipped within five days.
OPTIONAL FEATURE
Lipseal Pistons
B186
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information How to Order S Series Cylinders

Each Parker S Series Cylinder is assigned a model number, which together with the bore size and stroke, is a coded description of the cylinder. The outline below shows all possible elements of such a model number, and explains the use of each. To order S Series Cylinders, specify Bore Size, Model Number and Stroke.

C086
1-1/8"
Bore Size 3/4" 1" 1-1/8" 1-1/4" Cushion Head End* Blank C No Cushion Cushion
2.000
Stroke
B
3MA/4MA 2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR C S S 2A/2AN 2MNR C LPSO Option 2A/2AN ACVB 4MNR ACVB 3MAJ/4MAJ Option
Lipseal Piston Blank Std. Piston L Lipseal Piston Ports U NPTF Seals Double Rod Blank Single Rod K Double Rod Mounting Style U N Universal Nose Mounted Blank V Buna-N Fluorocarbon Spring Blank E R No Spring Spring Extend Spring Return Special Features Use S only if special feature is required (specify). Note: Do not use Symbol S for Rod End Modifications.
Specify in inches.
Cushion Cap End* Blank C No Cushion Cushion
Rod End Thread** 6 3 Standard Special specify KK, A and LA dimensions.
Rod Diameter No. 1 3 Standard Oversize
* Note: Cushion will increase cylinder length by 1/2" each end. Cushions are fixed and non-adjustable. ** On a double-end rod cylinder where the two rod ends will be different, be sure to state clearly which rod end is to go at which end of the cylinder. NOTE: Mounting attachments and accessories must be ordered separately. See accessories page for part numbers.
B187
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications Standard Specifications

Nominal pressure up to 200 PSI air service. Standard temperature -10F to +165F. Fluorocarbon seals (optional) for high temperature service -10F to +250F Standard construction square head steel design. Stainless steel piston rod is provided as standard for smooth performance and long life. Fixed cushions are available on all bore sizes. Four bore sizes available: 3/4", 1", 1-1/8", 1-1/4" bores. Standard and oversize piston rods Factory pre-lubed. Rod bushing is oil impregnated bronze. Spring return and extend cylinders available. Multiple mounting styles available front or bottom. Attachable mounting kits are available. Field-repairable. Strokes available in any practical stroke length up to 12". For longer stroke length, consult the factory.

Force Data
C086
To determine force, multiply your operating pressure by the area figures. Bore 3/4 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 Rod Dia. STD. 1/4 O.S. 5/16 STD. 5/16 O.S. 3/8 STD. 3/8 O.S. 1/2 STD. 3/8 O.S. 1/2 Major Area (Sq. In.) 0.442 0.785 0.994 1.227 Minor Area (Sq. In.) 0.393 0.365 0.709 0.675 0.884 0.799 1.117 1.031
Available Mounting Styles Single Rod

Basic Style US (Universal Mounting)
Available Mounting Styles Double Rod

Style KNS Double Rod (Nose Mounting)
Basic Style NS (Nose Mounting)
Style KUS Double Rod (Universal Mounting)
B188
Catalog 0900P-4
3/4" Double Bore Acting

Basic Style US Universal Mounting
C'BORED FOR #8-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE #10-32 X .37 DEEP THD. OPPOSITE SIDE 3 HOLES .62 J WRENCH FLATS #6-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 4 2 3 .78 .624-.003 KK THD. 1.31 1.12 .75

C086 .75 1.75 + STROKE * .50 1.00 SQ. 1/8 NPTF PORT .25 .25 #8-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES .50 2 .18 .12 1.31 + STROKE * 3 1 4 1/8 NPTF PORT
B
*For lipseal dimension add 1/2" to dimension shown.
Mounting Style KUS Double Rod Universal Mounting
C'BORED FOR #8-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE #10-32 X .37 DEEP THD. OPPOSITE SIDE 2 HOLES .62 J WRENCH FLATS
.18
1/8 NPTF PORTS
1.12 + STROKE
1.00 SQ. .75 .75 2.00 + STROKE * .25 .25
#6-32 X .25 DEEP .25 2 HOLES 1 .75 TYP. 4 2 .78 3 .624-.003 KK THD. TYP. 1.12 1.31 .12
Basic Style NS Nose Mounting

.75 .25 KK THD. .687+.003 J WRENCH FLATS 5/8-18 THD. NOSE PILOT RING OPTIONAL
1.62 .62 .12 .25 .75
1.75 + STROKE * .50 .25
1.00 SQ. 1/8 NPTF PORTS
Mounting Style KNS Double Rod Nose Mounting
5/8-18 THD. J WRENCH FLATS KK THD. TYP. 1/8 NPTF PORTS 1.12 + STROKE
1.00 SQ. .687+.003 NOSE PILOT RING OPTIONAL .75 .62 .25 .75 2.00 + STROKE * .25
Bore 3/4"
Rod End Dimensions Rod Thd. KK No.

1-Std. 3-O.S.
.75 TYP.
Dia.
1/4 5/16
Style 6
1/4-20 5/16-18
J
7/32 1/4
.25 .12 1.62
B189
Catalog 0900P-4
3/4" Bore Single Acting

Basic Style US Universal Mounting Spring Extend
J WRENCH FLATS .62

C086 .75 1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 1.00 SQ. 1/8 NPTF PORT .25
C'BORED FOR #8-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE #10-32 X .37 DEEP OPPOSITE SIDE 3 HOLES #6-32 X .25 DEEP 1.12 + STROKE 2 HOLES 1 .75 4 2 .624-.003 3 KK THD. .78 .12 1.31 + STROKE
.25
#8-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 .50 2 4 3
1/8 NPTF PORT
.18
1.31 + 2X STROKE *
Basic Style US Universal Mounting Spring Retract
J WRENCH FLATS .62
.75
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 1.00 SQ.
C'BORED FOR #8-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE #10-32 X .37 DEEP OPPOSITE SIDE 3 HOLES #6-32 X .25 DEEP 1.12 2 HOLES 1 .75 4 2 3 .78 .624-.003 KK THD. 1.31
1/8 NPTF PORT .25 .25
#8-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 .50 1/8 NPTF PORT 2 4 3
.18 .12
1.31 + 2X STROKE *
Basic Style NS Nose Mounting Spring Extend
1.62 + STROKE .62 .75 .25 KK THD. .687+.003 J WRENCH FLATS 5/8-18 THD. NOSE PILOT RING OPTIONAL 1/8 NPTF PORTS .12 .25 .75
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 .25
1.00 SQ.
Basic Style NS Nose Mounting Spring Retract

1.62 .62 .12 .25 .75
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 .25
Bore 3/4"

1-Std.
Dia.
1/4
Style 6
1/4-20 5/16-18
J
7/32 1/4
3-O.S. 5/16
B190
Catalog 0900P-4
1" Bore Double Acting

C'BORED FOR #10-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE 1/4-20 X .37 DEEP THD. OPPOSITE SIDE 3 HOLES .87 J WRENCH FLATS #8-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 4 2 .749-.003 3 1.06 KK THD. 1.37 1.12 .75

.75 1.75 + STROKE * .50 1.37 SQ. 1/8 NPTF PORT .25 .25 C086
#10-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES .62 2 1 4 3 1/8 NPTF PORT
B
.25 .12 1.25 + STROKE *
C'BORED FOR #10-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE 1/4-20 X .37 DEEP THD. OPPOSITE SIDE 2 HOLES .87 J WRENCH FLATS
.25
1/8 NPTF PORTS
1.12 + STROKE
1.37 SQ. .75 .25 .75 2.00 + STROKE * .25
#8-32 X .25 DEEP .25 2 HOLES 1 .75 TYP. 4 2 3 1.06 .749-.003 KK THD. TYP. 1.12 1.37 .12

1.62 .62 .12 .25 .75
1.75 + STROKE * .50 .25
1.37 SQ. .813+.003 NOSE PILOT RING OPTIONAL .62 .25 .75 TYP. .75 .75 2.00 + STROKE * .25
Bore 1"

1-Std. 3-O.S.
Dia.
5/16 3/8
Style 6
5/16-18 3/8-24
J
1/4 5/16
.25 .12 1.62
B191
Catalog 0900P-4
1" Bore Single Acting

J WRENCH FLATS .87

C'BORED FOR #10-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE 1/4-20 X .37 DEEP OPPOSITE SIDE 3 HOLES #8-32 X .25 DEEP 1.12 + STROKE 2 HOLES 1 .75 4 2 .749-.003 3 KK THD. 1.06 .12 1.37 + STROKE
.25
#10-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 .62 2 4 3
1/8 NPTF PORT
.25
1.25 + 2X STROKE *
J WRENCH FLATS .87
.75
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 1.37 SQ.
C'BORED FOR #10-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE 1/4-20 X .37 DEEP OPPOSITE SIDE 3 HOLES #8-32 X .25 DEEP 1.12 2 HOLES 1 .75 4 2 3 1.06 .749-.003 KK THD. 1.37
1/8 NPTF PORT .25
.25
#10-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 .62 2 4 3
1/8 NPTF PORT
.25 .12
1.25 + 2X STROKE *
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 .25
1.37 SQ.

.75 .25 KK THD. .813+.003
1.62 .62 .12 .25 .75
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 .25
Bore 1"

1-Std. 3-O.S.
Dia.
5/16 3/8
Style 6
5/16-18 3/8-24
J
1/4 5/16
J WRENCH FLATS 3/4-16 THD. NOSE PILOT RING OPTIONAL
B192
Catalog 0900P-4
1-1/8" Bore Double Acting

C'BORED FOR #10-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE 1/4-20 X .37 DEEP THD. OPPOSITE SIDE 3 HOLES 1.00 J WRENCH FLATS #10-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 4 2 .749-.003 3 1.12 KK THD. 1.37 1.12 .75

.75 1.75 + STROKE * .50 1.50 SQ. 1/8 NPTF PORT .25 .25 C086
B
.25 .12 1.25 + STROKE *
C'BORED FOR #10-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE 1/4-20 X .37 DEEP THD. OPPOSITE SIDE 2 HOLES 1.00 J WRENCH FLATS
.25
1/8 NPTF PORTS
1.12 + STROKE
1.50 SQ. .75 .25 .75 2.00 + STROKE * .25

1.62 .62 .12 .25 .75
1.75 + STROKE * .50 .25
1.50 SQ. .813+.003 NOSE PILOT RING OPTIONAL .62 .75 TYP. .25 .75 .75 2.00 + STROKE * .25
Bore 1-1/8"

1-Std. 3-O.S.
Dia.
3/8 1/2
Style 6
3/8-24 1/2-20
J
5/16 7/16
.25 .12 1.62
B193
Catalog 0900P-4
1-1/8" Bore Single Acting

J WRENCH FLATS 1.00

.25
#10-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 .62 2 4 3
1/8 NPTF PORT
.25
1.25 + 2X STROKE *
*For lipseal dimension add 1/2 to dimension shown.
J WRENCH FLATS 1.00
.75
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 1.50 SQ.
1/8 NPTF PORT .25
.25
#10-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 .62 2 4 3
1/8 NPTF PORT
.25 .12
1.25 + 2X STROKE *
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 .25
1.50 SQ.

.75 .25 KK THD. .813+.003
1.62 .62 .12 .25 .75
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 .25
Bore 1-1/8"

1-Std. 3-O.S.
Dia.
3/8 1/2
Style 6
3/8-24 1/2-20
J
5/16 7/16
B194
Catalog 0900P-4
1-1/4" Bore Double Acting

C'BORED FOR #10-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE 1/4-20 X .37 DEEP THD. OPPOSITE SIDE 3 HOLES 1.00 J WRENCH FLATS #10-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 4 2 .749-.003 3 1.12 KK THD. 1.37

C086 .75 1.75 + STROKE * .50 1.50 SQ. 1/8 NPTF PORT .25 .25
1.12 .75
B
.25 .12 1.25 + STROKE *
C'BORED FOR #10-32 S.H.C.S. THIS SIDE 1/4-20 X .37 DEEP THD. OPPOSITE SIDE 2 HOLES 1.00 J WRENCH FLATS
.25
1/8 NPTF PORTS
1.12 + STROKE
1.50 SQ. .75 .25 .75 2.00 + STROKE * .25

1.62 .62 .12 .25 .75
1.75 + STROKE * .50 .25
1.50 SQ. .813+.003 NOSE PILOT RING OPTIONAL .75 .75 2.00 + STROKE * .25
Bore 1-1/4"

1-Std. 3-O.S.
.62 .75 TYP.
.25
Dia.
3/8 1/2
Style 6
3/8-24 1/2-20
J
5/16 7/16
.25 .12 1.62
Note: Oversize rods shown are maximum size allowable.
B195
Catalog 0900P-4
1-1/4" Bore Single Acting

J WRENCH FLATS 1.00

.25
#10-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 .62 2 4 3
1/8 NPTF PORT
.25
1.25 + 2X STROKE *
J WRENCH FLATS 1.00
.75
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 1.50 SQ.
1/8 NPTF PORT .25
.25
#10-32 X .25 DEEP 2 HOLES 1 .62 2 4 3
1/8 NPTF PORT
.25 .12
1.25 + 2X STROKE *
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 .25
1.50 SQ.

.75 .25 KK THD. .813+.003
1.62 .62 .12 .25 .75
1.75 + 2X STROKE * .50 .25
Bore 1-1/4"
Rod End Dimensions Rod Thd. KK No. 1-Std. 3-O.S. Dia. 3/8 1/2 Style 6 3/8-24 1/2-20
J 5/16 7/16
Note: Oversize rods shown are maximum size allowable.
B196
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Kits / Accessories Accessories

Rod Eye (Knuckle)
Rod Eyes (Rod End Knuckles) are available to fit standard KK TAP S Series Rod Ends. To order, .63 .25 specify part name and number. FULL THREAD
1.19 .94

C086
.25R. .50
.5
Bore 3/4 1 1-1/8 1-1/4
Rod No.
1-STD. 3-O.S. 1-STD. 3-O.S. 1-STD. 3-O.S. 1-STD. 3-O.S.
Rod Dia.
1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2
Rod Eye
0179270000 0179280000 0179280000 0179290000 0179290000 0179290000
Part Numbers Clevis Bracket Nose Ring

0179300000 0179300000 0179300000 0179300000 0179320000 0179330000 0179330000 0179330000
Clevis Bracket
Clevis Brackets to fit the Type B Clevis Mounting Attachment and also the Rod Eyes are available. Pivot pin is furnished with the bracket. To order, specify part name and number.
B
.5 2 .25 DIA.
2 HOLES
1.25
Bore 3/4
Rod No.
1-STD. 3-O.S. 1-STD. 3-O.S. 1-STD. 3-O.S. 1-STD. 3-O.S.
Rod Dia.
1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2
B Clevis
0179180000 0179190000 0179190000 0179190000
Part Numbers H Flange

0179210000 0179220000 0179230000 0179230000
J Flange
0179240000 0179250000 0179260000 0179260000
.25R.
Note: Mounting attachments or accessories may be ordered separately for use with S Series cylinders. Specify by part name and number.
.25 .25 1.5
1.5 1.25
1-1/8 1-1/4
Mounting Kits
Dimensions
Symbol D F G H M R V X Y Bore Size 3/4"
0.50 0.81 0.37 1.00 0.75 2.00 1.50 0.50 8-32
1"
0.62 1.00 0.50 1.38 0.87 2.37 1.87 0.87 10-32
1-1/8"
0.62 1.00 0.50 1.50 0.87 2.50 2.00 1.00 10-32
1-1/4"
0.62 1.00 0.50 1.50 0.87 2.50 2.00 1.00 10-32
F D .43 G M C'BORED FOR 'Y' SHCS TYP. .25
.22 DIA. 4 HOLES
.22 DIA. 4 HOLES
X H .25
X H .25
Type B Clevis (Cap End) Mounting
Type J Flange (Head End) Mounting
Type H Flange (Cap End) Mounting
NOTE: Mounting attachments, together with their mounting screws, are bagged and packed loose in the cylinder carton for assembly at time of cylinder installation. To order, specify part name and number.
Right Angle Flow Controls

Available mounted to the cylinder or packaged with your cylinder. #1 Brass with threaded NPT threads. #2 Presto-Lok with an internal grab ring for use on plastic or soft metal piping.
Model # 32510125 L073910012 32511215 32511225
Thread
1/8 NPT 1/8 NPT Includes Barbed Fitting 1/8 NPT 1/8 NPT
Tube Size
5/32 1/4
B197
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits

Seal Kits (Standard Seals) "Cushion Kits (Standard Seals)"
Bore Size
Rod Dia.
Rod No.
Contains: Piston seals, Rod seals & End seals for single rod cylinders.* "O-Ring type Piston" Part No. "Lipseal type Piston" Part No. SKL075S025 SKL075S031 SKL100S031 SKL100S037 SKL112S037 SKL112S050 SKL125S037 SKL125S050
B
3/4" 1" 1 1/8" 1 1/4" 1/4" 5/16" 5/16" 3/8" 3/8" 1/2" 3/8" 1/2" 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
"Includes seals for one end only. Order 2 kits for cushioned both ends" Part No. CK0075S025 CK0075S031 CK0100S031 CK0100S037 CK0112S037 CK0112S050 CK0125S037 CK0125S050
"Cushion Kits (Fluorocarbon Seals)"
SK0075S025 SK0075S031 SK0100S031 SK0100S037 SK0112S037 SK0112S050 SK0125S037 SK0125S050
Seal Kits (Fluorocarbon Seals) Contains: Piston seals, Rod seals & End seals for single rod cylinders.* "O-Ring type Piston" Part No. 3/4" 1" 1 1/8" 1 1/4" 1/4" 5/16" 5/16" 3/8" 3/8" 1/2" 3/8" 1/2" 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 SK0075SV25 SK0075SV31 SK0100SV31 SK0100SV37 SK0112SV37 SK0112SV50 SK0125SV37 SK0125SV50 "Lipseal type Piston" Part No. SKL075SV25 SKL075SV31 SKL100SV31 SKL100SV37 SKL112SV37 SKL112SV50 SKL125SV37 SKL125SV50
Bore Size Rod Dia. Rod No.
"Includes seals for one end only. Order 2 kits for cushioned both ends" Part No. CK0075SV25 CK0075SV31 CK0100SV31 CK0100SV37 CK0112SV37 CK0112SV50 CK0125SV37 CK0125SV50
* For double rod cylinder seal kits, consult factory. ** Order 2 kits for cushioned ends.
B198
C Series
Medium Duty Air Cylinders
B
3MA/4MA Contents
Design Features / Specifications .....................................B200 Ordering Information........................................................B201 Dimensions, Mounting Kits & Accessories ......................B202 Service Kits .....................................................................B203
B199
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Features / Specifications
Self-Compensating Floating Cushion Bushing with Built-in Check Valve Bronze Rod Bushing
Air Cylinders C Series

(Cap End)
Low-Friction Piston Construction Adjustable Cushions (optional) Hard Coated Aluminum Cylinder Body
Wiperseal Case Hardened and Chrome-Plated Piston Rod
Aluminum Alloy Head and Cap (Head End) Cylinder Can Be Mounted at Either End
Parker C Series Cylinders

Parker C Series cylinders are designed for the budget conscious user who demands a high-quality cylinder. Advanced manufacturing processes provide a cylinder that ensures long-term performance at an affordable price.
Specifications
Bore Sizes: 1-1/4", 1-3/4", 2-1/2", 3-5/8", and 4-1/2" Strokes: Available in any practical stroke length, with a maximum stroke of 20" standard. For longer stroke lengths, consult the Actuator Division. Operating Pressure: 200 PSI Air Maximum Operating Temperature: -4 to +165F for optimal service life. C Series cylinders can be operated up to 200F with reduced service life. Spring Extend & Spring Return Models: Can be supplied upon request. LB and LD dimensions may increase in length. For specific dimensional information on spring return or spring extend cylinders, consult the Actuator Division. Force Data: To determine force, multiply your air pressure by these area figures:
Bore 1-1/4" 1-3/4" 2-1/2" 3-5/8" 4-1/2" Cap End Major Area 1.23 sq. in. 2.40 sq. in. 4.91 sq. in. 10.32 sq. in. 15.90 sq. in. Head End Minor Area 1.03 sq. in. 2.10 sq. in. 4.60 sq. in. 9.54 sq. in. 15.12 sq. in.
Innovative Design
C Series cylinders incorporate many innovative design features, such as: Wiperseal rod seal minimizes the possibility of leakage, while keeping contamination out. Oil impregnated, bronze rod bushing provides maximum bearing area and a non-abrasive surface for long service life. Synthetic rubber coated piston is designed to compensate for wear, eliminating metal-to-metal contact. Fully adjustable, floating cushions offer an efficient means of decelerating heavy loads. Modular design offers flexibility by providing three different mounting options with the basic cylinder. In addition to this, four different mounting kits can be bolted on quickly and easily.
In line with our policy of continuing product improvements, specifications in this catalog are subject to change.
Prelubrication C Series air cylinders are factory pre-lubricated. Parker Lube-A-Cyl is applied to cylinder bore, piston rod and seals. Lube-A-Cyl is an extreme pressure lubricant which adheres to the surfaces and for medium duty service, additional lubrication is not necessary.
B200
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information How to Order Parker C Series Cylinders 1-3/4"

Bore Size 1-1/4" 1-3/4" 2-1/2" 3-5/8" 4-1/2" Cushion Head End Blank C No Cushion Cushion Double Rod Blank Single Rod K Double Rod * Specify end of cylinder to which pressure will be applied. Cylinder will be longer than standard. Consult factory for addition to dimensions LB or LD.
Note: All standard basic cylinders are furnished with a jam nut on the piston rod.
C
Ports U
X6
Stroke Specify in inches. Show symbol X just ahead of required stroke length.
NPTF Seals
B
Blank
Standard Spring Blank E R No Spring Spring Extend* Spring Return* Special Features Use S only if special feature is required (specify). Note: Do not use Symbol S for Rod End Modifications. Rod Diameter No. 1 Standard 6 3
Cushion Cap End Blank C No Cushion Cushion
Rod End Thread Standard Special specify KK, A and LA dimensions.
Specify the following: Basic Model Number Mounting Kits (if required) specify kit numbers Rod End Accessory Kits (if required) specify kit number Quantities Desired Delivery Date
Mounting Kit Numbers

Bore Size 1-1/4" 1-3/4" 2-1/2" 3-5/8" 4-1/2" Part Numbers Rectangular Detachable End Lugs Flange Clevis* Head & Cap Head or Cap (Cap End) Set of 4 End
L-4501 L-4502 L-4503 L-4504 L-4505 L-4506 L-4507 L-4508 L-4509 L-4510 L-4511 L-4512 L-4513 L-4514 L-4515
Rod End Accessory Kit Numbers

Detachable Eye (Cap End)
L-4516 L-4517 L-4518 L-4519 L-4520
Bore Size 1-1/4" 1-3/4" 2-1/2" 3-5/8" 4-1/2"
Long Clevis* (Female)

L-4521 L-4522 L-4522
Part Numbers Short Clevis* (Female)

L-4523 L-4524 L-4524 L-4525 L-4525
Rod Button
18153 18154 18154 74718 74718
* Furnished complete with pivot pin and cotter pin.
* Furnished complete with pivot pin and cotter pin. Mounting Kits include fasteners for attaching to basic cylinders.
B201
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions
Symbol
A B
+0.000 -0.005

1-3/4"
1 1.124 7/8 6 5/8 1-1/2 7/8 3/4 5/8 1/2 1/2 1-3/16 9/32 9/16 1-37/64 13/16 3 1/2 15/16 5/16 5/16 2-1/4 5/16-24 3/8 1/4 7/16 5/16 5/8 1/2 1/2 3/8 1-1/4 1-3/4 1-1/8 1/2-20 5/8 1-5/8 3-31/32 4-19/32 5/8 1/2 5/16-18 x 3/8 2-19/32 1.62 1-1/8 2-11/32 1.62 3 11/16 3-5/8 2-1/4 1/8 1/8 1-3/4 1-5/8 4-19/32 5-7/32 5-27/32
1-1/4"
1 0.999 7/8 6 5/8 1-1/2 7/8 3/4 9/16 1/4 3/8 1-1/16 1/4 1/2 1-39/64 23/32 2-7/8 7/16 13/16 1/4 1/4 1-3/4 1/4-28 9/32 1/4 7/16 5/16 9/16 1/4 3/8 9/32 1 1-3/4 1-1/8 7/16-20 9/16 1-9/16 3-13/16 4-7/16 1/2 1/2 10-24 x 1/4 2-7/16 1.18 1-1/8 2-3/16 1.18 2-3/8 5/8 2-7/8 1-3/4 1/8 3/16 1-11/16 1-9/16 4-3/8 5 5-9/16
Bore Size 2-1/2"

1 1.124 7/8 6 5/8 1-1/2 7/8 3/4 5/8 1/2 1/2 1-3/16 9/32 9/16 1-37/64 13/16 3 1/2 15/16 5/16 5/16 2-7/8 5/16-24 3/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 11/16 1/2 1/2 3/8 1-1/2 1-7/16 1-1/16 1/2-20 5/8 1-5/8 3-21/32 4-1/32 5/8 9/16 5/16-18 x 1/2 2-5/32 2.18 15/16 2-5/32 2.18 3-9/16 1-1/4 4-1/8 2-7/8 1/8 1/8 1-9/16 1-9/16 4-9/32 4-21/32 5-9/32
Single Rod End Cylinders

3-5/8"
1-5/8 1.749 7/8 7-7/8 1-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/8 1-1/8 1 3/4 3/4 2-1/4 5/8 7/16 4 3/8-24 7/16 1/2 11/16 7/16 1 3/4 3/4 7/16 1-7/8 2 1-1/2 7/8-14 1-1/8 2-5/8 4-29/32 5-13/32 1 7/8 3/8-16 x1 2-25/32 3.00 1-5/16 2-25/32 3.00 4-7/8 1-3/4 5-5/8 4 3/16 1/4 2-5/16 2-5/16 5-29/32 6-13/32 7-13/32
4-1/2"
1-5/8 1.749 1-7/8 7-7/8 1-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/8 1-1/8 1 3/4 3/4 2-1/4 5/8 7/16 5 1/2-20 9/16 1/2 3/4 1/2 1-1/8 3/4 3/4 9/16 2-1/4 1-29/32 1-13/32 7/8-14 1-1/8 2-5/8 4-15/16 5-7/16 1 1 5/8-11 x 1-1/4 2-7/8 3.87 1-9/32 2-7/8 3.87 6-1/8 2-1/4 7-1/8 5 3/16 1/4 2-9/32 2-9/32 5-15/16 6-7/16 7-7/16
CE KK BD JAM NUT BF BE BG BJ JAM NUT L CD CD CD BH KK
4 2 3
TE
1
Y EA
BOTH ENDS TAPPED
ZB + STROKE P EE NPTF
+ STROKE
KK E
4 2
THREAD
BD
BE BF BG BH BJ C CB CD CE CH CJ CK CM CN CP CQ CR CW E EA EB EE EL EO ET EW F FB FL G J KK L LA LB LD MM MR NT P R SL SN TE TF TN UF UL V W XT Y ZB ZL ZM
E 2
3
TE
B MM
TN E
NT
LA A
SL XT G C
SN LB
+ STROKE
J
+ STROKE
Double Rod End Cylinders

TE
1
Y EA
BOTH ENDS TAPPED
V
THREAD
ZM + STROKE ZL + STROKE P EE NPTF
+ 2X STROKE
KK E
4 2
TE
B MM
TN E
NT
LA A
SL XT G C
SN LD
+ STROKE
SL G A
+ STROKE
Mounting Kits
Mountings are available in packaged kits. Detachable Clevis is furnished with pivot and cotter pins. See Ordering Information page for Kit Numbers.
End Lugs (Head and Cap)

1
Detachable Clevis (Cap End)

1
CD E 2 EB UL ET
3
ET ET R EL EO FL MR
CR CB
CR
Rectangular Flange (Head End)

E R
1
LA C
Detachable Eye (Cap End)

1
F CD
2 4
MR UF
4 2
TF FB
4 HOLES
3
FL
EW
Detachable Clevis and Detachable Eye are mating parts that provide for mounting of cylinder to a structural member.
Rod End Accessories
Accessories are available packaged separately. Clevis furnished complete with pivot and cotter pins. See Ordering Information page for Kit Numbers.
Rod Button
Short Clevis (Female)

CW CB CW
Long Clevis (Female)

KK CM
JAM NUT
CH CJ
CN
CK
CH CP CQ
FEMALE
B202
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits

Bore Size 1-1/4" 1-3/4"
SK1700C061 CH1700C001 CC1700C001
2-1/2"
SK2500C061 CH2500C001 CC2500C001
3-5/8"
SK3600C101 CC3600C001 CC3600C001
4-1/2"
SK4500C101 CC4500C001 CC4500C001
Complete Cylinder Seal Kit Cushion Kit - Head End Cushion Kit - Head End
SK1200C051 CH1200C001 CC1200C001
B
3MA/4MA
B203
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
B204
2MA Series
Non-Lube NFPA Air Cylinder
2MAE Series
Clean Plus Air Cylinder
2ML Series
Hydraulic Cylinder
B
3MA/4MA
The 2MA, 2MAE and 2ML Series are planned to become obsolete and unavailable for purchase in the near future. These series are directly replaceable with the 3MA/4MA Series which are included in this catalog. Please review their product sections for more information. If you require any information of the 2MA, 2MAE or 2ML Series, please view this information online at http://www.parker.com/pneu/2MA
B205
2MA/2MAE 2ML/2MNR
2A/2AN 2MNR
LPSO Option
ACVB Option
3MAJ/4MAJ
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
Air Cylinders 2MA / 2MAE / 2ML Series
B206
ISO Pneumatic Cylinders
Section C
C
P1A C1
P1D
Catalog 0900P-4
Section C Overview
Section C ISO Pneumatic Cylinders ISO / VDMA Tie Rod Cylinders

P1D Series
Conforms to ISO 6431/ISO15552/VDMA 24562 Flexible Design With 3 Major Versions (Standard, Clean, and Removable Gland) Standard Version Performance at an Affordable Price Removable Gland Version Performance, Ease of Maintenance and Customization at all Bore Sizes Clean Version For Applications Requiring High Cleanliness and Sanitary Standards Rod Lock Options Available 10 Bar (145 PSI) Air Service
Mini-ISO Cylinders
P1A Series (Non-Repairable)
Conforms to ISO 6432 and CETOP RP52P Standards Stainless Steel Body with Black Anodized Aluminum End Caps Stainless Steel Piston Rod Magnetic Piston and Bumpers Standard 5 Bore Sizes, 10mm through 25mm 10 Bar (145 PSI) Air Service

P5E Series
Low Profile Guided Assembly Powered by the P1D Cylinder Bore Sizes 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 and 100mm Rod Lock Options Available 10 Bar (145 PSI) Air Service
HB Series
Medium Duty to Extremely Heavy Duty Linear Motion Powered by the P1D Cylinder Bore Sizes 40, 50, and 63mm Rod Lock Options Available 10 Bar (145 PSI) Air Service with Other Options Available
C2
P1D Series
ISO 6431 / ISO 15552 / VDMA 24562 Pneumatic Cylinders
C
P1A Contents
Features ............................................................................C4 Versions / Options ....................................................... C5-C7 Ordering Information.................................................... C8-C9 Specifications .......................................................... C10-C11 Technical Data ......................................................... C12-C14 Cylinder Dimensions................................................ C15-C20 Rod End Dimensions .......................................................C21 Duplex (3 & 4-Position) Cylinder Dimensions ..................C22 Cylinder Mountings .................................................. C23-C29 Piston Rod Mountings ............................................. C30-C31 Accessories .....................................................................C32 Service Kits .....................................................................C33
C3
P1D
Catalog 0900P-4
Features P1D Standard Version

Polyurethane endof-stroke bumpers are standard. They provide noise dampening from impact and act as durable end seals.
Air Cylinders P1D Series

C086
Aluminum heads and caps are anodized and designed to eliminate cavities or pockets where water and dirt could collect.
The aluminum cylinder body extrusion is anodized inside and outside for long life and low friction.
Rod seals and piston seals are polyurethane for maximized service life.
All P1D Versions have a magnetic piston as standard. High strength steel fastener connects the piston to the piston rod and is secured in place with anaerobic adhesive.
Zinc-plated fasteners for tough environments are standard. Sealing plugs and stainless steel fasteners are available as options.
One piston rod nut according to ISO 439B is included as standard.
All P1D versions have case hardened and chome-plated steel piston rods as standard. Chrome-plated stainless steel is also available.
P1D Standard Version is constructed entirely without copper, PTFE and silicone decisive for certain industries.
All P1D Versions (except for the Tie Rod Version) have an extruded aluminum profile cylinder body with integrated sensor grooves that accept the Global Sensor family without the need for an additional mounting bracket.
The cushioning has individual flow geometry for each cylinder size. This provides effective cushioning which is easier to set and adjust. All P1D Versions utilize a transparent, nontoxic, food-grade grease that is entirely free from PTFE and silicone.
P1D Standard Version

P1D Standard Version cylinders are available in 32125mm bores and utilize internal composite technology to save weight, while assuring the high performance and functionality expected of ISO cylinders. Cushions and bumpers at both ends and a magnetic piston are included as standard. The Standard Version serves all markets where performance at an affordable price is desired. International standards The new P1D Series complies with the current ISO 6431, ISO/DIS 15552, VDMA 24562 and AFNOR installation dimensional standards for customer reassurance world-wide. Mechanically protected sensor technology The body extrusion has recessed sensor grooves on three sides of the cylinder. The new Global Sensors drop into the sensor groove quickly and easily. Both the cable and the sensor are protected. Choose a sensor in a variety of cable lengths and with flying leads, 8mm connector or 12mm connector. Optimized cushioning Thanks to the plastic inserts in the end covers, each cylinder bore has been given individual flow geometry. This provides optimized cushioning, which is quicker and easier to set and adjust. Smooth, quiet operation and long service life All seals and end-of-stroke bumpers are made from polyurethane (PUR), the bearings and piston are made from proven engineering plastics with excellent bearing properties and all cylinders are greased at the factory with a transparent, food-grade grease. Altogether, this gives the P1D Series very long service life and smooth, quiet operation.
C4
Catalog 0900P-4
Versions
Air Cylinders P1D Series P1D Series Rod Lock Cylinder

C086
P1D Removable Gland Version

P1D Removable Gland Version cylinders are available in 32-200mm bores and utilize bar stock endcaps and a removable high-strength bronze bearing for traditional and custom applications. The bronze bearing assembly is externally removable for quick and easy maintenance. No other ISO cylinder manufacturer in the world produces a Removable Gland Version and meets these demands. This version covers all applications which require performance and customization at all bore sizes. Removable Gland An extra-long inboard bearing surface ensures lubrication from within the cylinder. Outboard of the bearing are two leak-proof seals. The rod wiper seal wipes away any dirt on the rod. This means less wear on bearing surfaces and internal parts. The result is positive, no-leak sealing, regardless of conditions. And with the famous Parker removable style gland, you can replace the rod seals and/or bearings when necessary without disassembling the rest of the cylinder and without the need of any special wrenches. Aluminum Piston Option For high temperature applications, an aluminum piston is available with fluorocarbon seals. The piston is threaded onto the piston rod and secured in place with anaerobic adhesive which is temperature sensitive. For applications above +121C (+250F) specify a pinned piston to rod connection. The polyurethane seals that are standard on the nylon piston are also an available option with the aluminum piston. The magnet that is cleverly hidden underneath the wear-band is also a standard feature on the aluminum piston. The durable wear-band prevents any metal-to-metal contact between the piston and the cylinder body wall increasing the overall life of the cylinder. Machined End Caps with Captive Cushion Screw Adjustment The end caps are made of precision lightweight aluminum. This allows for maximum flexibility and quick manufacturing for any customization that is required. The end caps also feature a captive cushion needle valve adjustment screw for optimized cushioning that is inherent throughout the P1D family of ISO cylinders.
The P1D Series Rod Lock Cylinder incorporates a powerful piston rod locking device, which clamps the piston rod and locks it in position. The locking device is a spring lock with an air pressure release and is integrated into the front (head) cover of the cylinder. In the absence of air signal pressure, full holding force is applied to the piston rod. When air is present at 4 Bar (58 psi), the locking device is released. The P1D Series Rod Lock Cylinder is available for cylinder bores 32-125mm. The design provides several valuable characteristics, such as: A holding force corresponding to a pressure of 7 Bar (102 psi) A clean design, with the front (head) end cover and locking device built into a common block for compact installation Easy to clean, well-sealed construction Exhaust air from the locking device can be piped away when there are high demands for a contaminant free environment
C
P1A P1D
P1D Series Rod Lock Cylinder with Manual Override

The P1D Series Rod Lock Cylinder with Manual Override is available for rod lock release during nonproduction activities. It incorporates the same features as the standard rod lock cylinder.
C5
Catalog 0900P-4
Versions
Convex shape for optimum hygiene What makes the P1D Clean version unique is its convex body extrusion, which allows the cylinder to be kept clean. Regardless of orientation, fluids will run off the cylinder body surfaces. Sealing plugs Plastic sealing plugs are installed in the end cover screws which are not used for the cylinder installation. To ensure the sealing function, the plugs cannot be re-used. When installed in the end cover screws, they are tapped lightly with a hammer for high axial force.

Cushioning screw with positive geometry To offer the best hygiene properties, the projecting cushioning screw is sealed against the end cover. This eliminates dirt-collecting cavities and gives the best hygiene, since it is so easy to clean.
C086
Up to four integral sensors Cylinders for two integral sensors have two undivided camshafts along the entire stroke. Free choice of cable exit, front or rear. There is also a version with divided camshafts for up to four sensors, which are installed two from each end cover, with cable exiting both front and rear.
P1D Clean Version

The P1D Clean Version is completely designed for the food industry. The stringent requirements for hygiene regarding choice of material and corrosion resistance have guided the development of this cylinder version. Available with BSPP ports (ISO 1179-1 with ISO 228-1 threads). All the main dimensions of the P1D Clean comply with ISO 6431, ISO/DIS 1555, VDMA 24562 and AFNOR standards except the somewhat larger footprint of the end covers and envelope of the body extrusion, due to the hygienic, convex, easy-to-clean geometry of the cushioning adjustment screw and the components of the integrated sensor system.
Patent applied for system of integrated standard sensors The Clean Version of the P1D cylinder has a system of sensors, which are fully integrated into the body extrusion to give the cylinders a clean external design. Up to four sensors chosen from the range of P1D standard sensors, can be mounted in two dedicated grooves beneath a transparent, sealed molding. Tightening the stop screw onto the cam shaft will lock each sensor in the desired position. The sensor LEDs are always fully visible, which facilitates initial set-up, adjustment and trouble-shooting. The entire sensor system has a hose-proof design equivalent to IP65.
P1D Tie-Rod Version

The P1D Tie-Rod Version cylinders are based on the same high level technology as the Standard Version. They accept either Standard Version or Removable Gland Version heads and caps. This cylinder is the perfect choice wherever a true tie-rod cylinder is needed. International standards The P1D Tie-Rod Version complies with ISO 6431, ISO/DIS 15552, VDMA 24562 and AFNOR installation dimension standards, for customer reassurance world-wide. Drop-in sensor The P1D Tie-Rod Version utilizes the same drop-in Global Sensors as the other versions. An ingenious multi-jointed adapter clamps the sensors to the tie rod in any chosen position along the stroke. Large Bore Sizes The P1D Tie-Rod Version is now available in 160 and 200mm bore sizes.
32-125mm bores
C6
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Options
Using P1D cylinders as a platform, a number of different designs can be produced to suit differing requirements. Please refer to the Ordering Information page for the designation of each variant. Alternative piston rod materials All P1D cylinders in all bores, 32-200 mm, can be ordered with the following piston rod materials: Steel, hard chrome plated (standard) Stainless steel, hard chrome plated Acid proof steel Double rod cylinders All bore sizes of all versions are available with a double rod. Cylinders with a double rod can take higher side forces thanks to the double support for the piston rod. In addition, this design makes it easier to install external mechanical position sensors as well as giving equal force and flow on both sides of the piston. High ambient temperature The Removable Gland Version can be supplied in special high ambient temperature version. The cylinders have seal systems, materials and grease for elevated temperature ranges. The high temperature version does not have a magnetic piston (no function at high temperatures). The aluminum piston option is required for service above +80C (+176F) and a pinned piston to rod connection is required for service above +121C (+250F). Ambient temperature range: -10C to +121C, peaks up to +150C (+14F to +250F, peaks up to +300F). Low pressure hydraulics All bore sizes of the Removable Gland Version can be supplied with special seals for operation with low pressure hydraulics up to 10 bar. Temperature range -20 C to +80 C (-4F to +176F). Duplex cylinder 3 and 4 position cylinders By installing two cylinders with the same or different stroke, it is possible to build a working unit with three or four positions. This type of unit is available as factoryfitted P1D Tie-Rod Version cylinders in all bore sizes. Other P1D cylinders can be flange mounted back-toback with a special mounting. Tandem cylinder The P1D Tie-Rod Version is also available as a tandem cylinder, i.e. two cylinders connected in series. This cylinder unit has almost twice the force, which is a great advantage in restricted spaces. Guided Cylinders For guided versions of the P1D, see the P5E Series and HB Series in Section F.

C086
Alternative Piston Rod Materials
C
P1A HB Series
Double Rod
High Ambient Temperature
3 and 4 Position Cylinders
Tandem Cylinders
P5E Series C7
P1D
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information
P1D
Piston Style Cushions None Cush B/E Cush head Piston Material Composite 1 M 3 J K Aluminum 2 Y 4 5 6 032 040 050 063 080 100 125 160 200

C086
032
Bore Size 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm 80mm 100mm 125mm 160mm 8 200mm 8
Continued on next page
Cush cap
1 Not available for 160-200mm bores. 2 Not available on Clean Version. 3 Must be placed in model code.
Cylinder Ports Front & Rear BSPP Ports (G Threads)** E NPTF Ports* Q BSPT Ports (RC Threads)* * Not available on Clean Version. ** ISO 1179-1 with ISO 228-1 threads.
8 Tie Rod Version E must be specified for these bores. Version Cylinder Body Profile Standard Die Cast End Caps 4 Removable Gland 5 (Machined Endcaps) Special
6
Rod Lock None S T C G E Fitted w/Std Rod Lock 7 L M D R 74 / Fitted w/Manual Override Rod Lock 7 N/A N/A N/A J Consult Factory
Tie Rod Clean Standard Tie Rod Any Special
4 Not available for 160-200mm bores or with fluorocarbon seals. 5 When Removable Gland Version is fitted with rod lock, gland cannot be replaced without disassembling cylinder. 6 If special cylinder is ordered (other than rod end), End Cap Style, Cylinder Body Profile and Rod Lock option must be given in addition to the special request. 7 Cylinders fitted with rod locks must be cushioned on both ends.
Function Fastener Type Standard end cover screws Stainless steel end cover screws 9 Rod Wiper Style Std scraper Metal scraper Std scraper Metal scraper Double Acting M Q A S Double Rod F R G T Tandem C J N/A N/A
9 Applies only to end cover screws for 32-125mm bores. For stainless steel tie rods and nuts (all bore sizes), change Version to special and request stainless steel tie rods and nuts. 10 If used for temperature above +80C (+176F), aluminum piston required. Not available with die cast end caps. Fluorocarbon seals for Rod Lock Versions are for chemical compatibility applications only, not for high temperature. 11 Hydraulic seal option valid for Removable Gland Version only. Adjustable cushion options and Rod Lock Versions not available. 12 Not available on Clean Version. 13 Only available on Clean Version.
Piston Rod & Seal Material Piston Rod Material Standard Chrome plated carbon steel 12 Chrome plated stainless steel 12 Stainless steel 13 Acid-resistant stainless steel C R S M Seal Material Fluorocarbon 10 G D N/A N 12 Hydraulic 11 J Z N/A N/A
C8
Catalog 0900P-4
0500
Stroke 1 Specify whole mm using 4 digits, i.e. 0500

C086
Rod End N Metric male 6 Metric female 3 Special* With Plugs 4 A 1 E 2 B 3 G P 4 5 R * Please provide desired dimensions for KK, AM and WH. If otherwise special, provide dimensioned sketch.
Rod Mountings & Plugs 2 Rod Mounting Swivel rod eye Swivel rod eye SS Swivel rod eye with clevis bracket GA Swivel rod eye SS with clevis bracket GA Clevis Clevis SS Flexco coupling One additional piston rod nut Stainless steel piston rod nut Acid-resistant nut None (piston rod nut only) Notes: 1 When specifying a stop tube, place a / in the version field. Then specify the version, amount of stop tube and amount of net stroke. The stroke used in the model code should be gross stroke (net stroke plus stop tube). 2 Please review Piston Rod Selection Chart in the Engineering Section to check for a rod buckling condition. 3 Clean Version comes standard with plugs. Use this column when ordering Clean Version. 4 Not available for 160-200mm bores. 5 For sensor part numbers and specifications, please refer to Electronic Sensors section. 6 P1D Clean Version ordered without sensors cannot be retrofitted with sensor capability. No Plugs 3 S T V W C D F X Y Z N
C
P1A P1D
Sensors 5 Prepared for Factory-fitted Sensors P1D Clean Version P1D all versions (except Clean) prepared for sensors or Clean Version without sensor capability 6 Cable Location Front or Left 6 Rear or Right 7 N Front & Rear 8
Mounting Style Standard Flange MF1 at head (front) end Flange MF2 at cap (rear) end Flanges MF1 and MF2 at both ends Foot brackets MS1 Clevis bracket GA aluminum Rear eye MP4 aluminum Rear swivel eye MP6 aluminum Clevis bracket MP2 aluminum Rear eye + clevis (MP4 + MP2) aluminum Clevis bracket MP2 + pivot hinge aluminum Clevis bracket GA aluminum + steel swivel hinge Rear swivel eye + clevis bracket GA aluminum Intermediate trunnion MT4 (requires XV dimension) Trunnion flange at head (front) end 4 Trunnion flange at cap (rear) end 4 1 B 2 F C E S T L X Q M G H J N Rotated 90 3 4 K R U V W Y Z 5 0 A 7 P 8 9
Double rod option is available with Mounting Styles MX0, MS1, MF1, MF2 and MT4. For double rod cylinders, it is assumed that the rod number and rod end are the same for both piston rods. On a double rod cylinder where the two rod ends are different, use a rod end of 3 and be sure to clearly state which rod end is to be assembled at which end.
Double Rod Cylinders
None (MX0)
C9
Catalog 0900P-4
General Specifications Specifications

Bore sizes 32-200mm Max stroke 2800mm Min stroke 25mm (must specify Tie Rod Version for strokes <25mm) Rod Ends 2 standard, specials to order Single rod end and double rod end styles Working pressure Max 10 Bar (145 PSI) Working temperature min max +80C (+176F) Standard -20C (-4F) High temp version -10C (+14F) +121C (+250F) Aluminum piston is required for service above +80C (+176F) Greased for life (non-lube), does not normally need additional lubrication. If air line lubrication is initiated, it must always be continued. Working medium Dry, filtered compressed air to ISO 8573-1 class 3. 4. 3. or better

P1D Rod Lock Version
Fluid Medium: Dry, filtered, compressed air Maximum Cylinder Operating Pressure: 10 Bar (145 PSI) Required Pressure to Unlock1: 4 Bar (58 PSI) Minimum Torque Required for Manual Override Version: 32mm Bore = 0.9 N-m / 8 in-lbs 40mm Bore = 0.9 N-m / 8 in-lbs 50mm Bore = 2.7 N-m / 24 in-lbs 63mm Bore = 2.7 N-m / 24 in-lbs 80mm Bore = 27.1 N-m / 240 in-lbs 100mm Bore = 36.6 N-m / 324 in-lbs 125mm Bore = 61.0 N-m / 540 in-lbs Maximum Operating Temperature: -10C to +75C, +14F to +167F Maximum Cylinder Operating Speed: 5 feet per second
1Signal
C086
P1D Clean Version

Min stroke Protection class Chemical resistance
Quick Reference
Bore Size 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 Cylinder Area, cm2
8.0 12.6 19.6 31.2 50.3 78.5 122.7 201.1 314.2
25mm Hose-proof in accordance with IP65 Tested for normally used industrial detergents, both acid and alkaline
pressure to port on locking device. Operation at pressures lower than 4 Bar (58 psi) may lead to inadvertent engagement of the rod lock device.
Piston Rod Dia. mm

12 16 20 20 25 25 32 40 40
Area, cm2
1.1 2.0 3.1 3.1 4.9 4.9 8.0 12.6 12.6
Male Thread
M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 M36x2 M36x2
Cushioning Length mm
17 19 20 23 23 27 30 38 38
Air Consumption 1 litre

0.105 0.162 0.253 0.414 0.669 1.043 1.662 2.724 4.256
Theoretical Cylinder Forces at 6 Bar (N) 2 Connection Thread 4

G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 G1/2 G3/4 G3/4
Extend Stroke
482 754 1178 1870 3016 4712 7363 12.064 18.850
Retract Stroke
414 633 989 1681 2721 4417 6880 11,310 18,096
Total Mass (kg) Cylinder Bore Size 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 0mm Stroke 3 Standard
0.55 0.80 1.20 1.73 2.45 4.00 6.87
Total Mass (kg) Moving Components Supplement per 10mm Stroke at 0mm Stroke Clean
0.047 0.063 0.094 0.101 0.142 0.168 0.248
Supplement per 10mm Stroke All Variants

0.009 0.016 0.025 0.025 0.039 0.039 0.063 Consult Factory Consult Factory
Tie-Rod
0.54 0.79 1.20 1.73 2.47 4.00 6.73 16.19 22.23
Clean
0.60 0.88 1.32 1.86 2.63 4.22 7.01
Standard
0.023 0.033 0.048 0.051 0.075 0.084 0.138
Tie-Rod
0.022 0.030 0.048 0.051 0.079 0.084 0.129 0.160 0.185
All Variants
0.13 0.24 0.42 0.50 0.90 1.10 2.34 Consult Factory Consult Factory
1 Free air consumption per 10 mm stroke for a double stroke at 6 bar 2 The values for cylinder forces are theoretical and should be reduced to suit working conditions. 3 Total Mass for composite piston for 32-125mm bores and aluminum piston for 160-200mm bores. 4 ISO 1179-1 with ISO 228-1 threads
C10
Catalog 0900P-4
Material Specifications Standard Version

Body extrusion End covers Clear anodized aluminium Powder coated or black anodized aluminum POM Zinc plated steel 8.8 Zinc plated steel Chrome-plated steel (standard) PUR POM POM POM Plastic bound magnetic material Zinc plated steel (composite piston) PUR Nitrile rubber, NBR PUR PUR PA
Air Cylinders P1D Series Additional/Substitute Specifications

P1D Clean Version
Transparent molding Transparent cover Screws, sensor system Upper seal, cover Lower seal, cover Sealing plugs Piston rod nut Silicone ABS Stainless steel EPDM Rubber PA Stainless steel
C086
Piston seal O-rings End-of-stroke bumpers and end seals Cushioning seals Cushioning screws
End covers End cover screws Cylinder Body Rod gland Rod seal Rod wiper Piston rod Piston rod nut Piston Piston seals Piston bearing Magnetic ring Piston fastener O-rings Cushioning seals Cushioning screws
Piston Rod Material Options

(or with equivalent properties):
Standard Chrome plated stainless steel Stainless steel Acid-resistant stainless steel Case-hardened, chrome plated carbon steel 17-4 PH, chrome plated stainless steel 303 stainless steel 316 stainless steel
Black anodized aluminum Zinc plated steel 8.8 (32-125mm bores) Clear anodized aluminum PTFE filled high strength bronze Buna Nitrile for sealing action Buna Nitrile for wiping action Case hardened chrome-plated steel Zinc plated steel POM (standard) Aluminum (optional) PUR POM or Molyguard wear band for aluminum piston Plastic bound magnetic material Zinc plated steel (composite piston) Buna Nitrile PUR Stainless steel (brass for 160 and 200mm bores)
Design Variants for Removable Gland Version

High temperature option includes: All seals Fluorocarbon Piston Aluminum (without magnetic ring) Low pressure hydraulic option includes: Rod seal Buna Nitrile PUR Rod wiper Piston seals Buna Nitrile Piston Aluminum (non-cushioned) Metallic Rod Scraper includes: Rod wiper Dual high strength bronze wipers with nitrile or fluorocarbon energizer
C11
P1A
P1D
End cover inserts End cover nuts/screws Piston rod nut Piston rod Rod wiperseal Piston rod bearing Piston Piston bearing Magnetic ring Piston fastener
P1D Tie-Rod Version

Tie-rods Blackened steel
P1D Removable Gland Version
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Cushioning Characteristics

The diagram below is used for sizing of cylinders related to the cushioning capacity. The maximum cushioning capacity shown in the diagram assumes the following: Low load, i.e. low pressure drop across the piston Equilibrium speed Correctly adjusted cushioning screw 6 bar at cylinder port

C086
The load is the sum of internal and external friction, plus any gravitational forces. At high relative load (pressure drop exceeding 1 bar), we recommend that for any given speed, the mass should be reduced by a factor of 2.5, or for a given mass, the speed should be reduced by a factor of 1.5. This is in relation to the maximum performance given in the diagram.
Speed [m/s]
4.0 3.0 2.0 1.5 1.0

3 2 4 0 5 6
00
0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2
25
0.1 1
3 4 5
10
20
30 40 50
100
200 300
500
1000
2000
Mass [kg]
Recommended Air Quality for Cylinders
For best possible service life and trouble-free operation, ISO 8573-1 quality class 3.4.3 should be used. This means 5 m filter (standard filter) dew point +3C (+37F) for indoor operation (a lower dew point should be selected for outdoor operation) and oil concentration 1.0 mg oil/m3, which is what a standard compressor with a standard filter gives.
ISO 8573-1 Quality Classes

Polution Quality Class 1 2 3 4 5 6 Particle Size (mm) 0.1 1 5 15 40 Max. Concentration (mg/m3) 0.1 1 5 8 10 Water Max Pressure Dew Point (C) -70 -40 -20 +3 +7 +10 (F) -94 -40 -4 +37 +44 +50 Oil Max. Concentration (mg/m3) 0.01 -0.1 1.0 5.0 25
C12
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Guide for Selecting Suitable Tubing

The selection of the correct size of tubing is often based on experience, with no great thought to optimizing energy efficiency and cylinder velocity. This is usually acceptable, but making a rough calculation can result in worthwhile economic gains. The following is the basic principle: 1. The primary line to the working valve could be over sized (this does not cause any extra air consumption and consequently does not create any extra costs in operation). 2. The tubes between the valve and the cylinder should, however, be optimized according to the principle that an insufficient bore throttles the flow and thus limits the cylinder speed, while an oversized pipe creates a dead volume which increases the air consumption and filling time. The chart below is intended to help when selecting the correct size of tube to use between the valve and the cylinder.

C086
The following prerequisites apply: The cylinder load should be about 50% of the theoretical force (= normal load). A lower load gives a higher velocity and vice versa. The tube size is selected as a function of the cylinder bore, the desired cylinder velocity and the tube length between the valve and the cylinder. If you want to use the capacity of the valve to its maximum, and obtain maximum speed, the tubing should be chosen so that they at least correspond with the equivalent restriction diameter (see description below), so that the tubing does not restrict the total flow. This means that a short tubing must have at least the equivalent restriction diameter. If the tubing is longer, choose it from the table below. Straight fittings should be chosen for highest flow rates. (Elbow and banjo fittings cause restriction.)
C
P1A P1D
Cylinder [mm]
Equivalent throttling bore 1)
Tube Out./Int. [mm]

/16 /15 /14
11 10 9 8 7 125 6 5
/12 14/11 12/10

Suitable valve Qn2) app 800 l/min Suitable valve Qn2) app 1000 l/min
100 80 63 50 40 32 25 20 16 10 0.2
10/8 4 3 2 1 8/6
6/4 5/3 4/2.7
Cylinder speed [m/s]
0.5
0.8
1.1
1.4
Length of tubing [m]
10
1)
The equivalent throttling bore is a long throttle (for example a tube) or a series of throttles (for example, through a valve) converted to a short throttle which gives a corresponding flow rate. This should not be confused with the orifice which is sometimes specified for valves. The value for the orifice does not normally take account of the fact that the valve contains a number of throttles. Qn is a measure of the valve flow capacity, with flow measured in litre per minute (l/min) at 6 bar(e) supply pressure and 1 bar pressure drop across the valve.
2)
C13
Suitable area for valve with Qn2) app 3000 l/min
/13
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data P1D Rod Lock Version Rod Lock Data

Connection

Sample Pneumatic Circuit
C086
Holding Forces
Bore Size 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm 80mm 100mm 125mm Holding Forces (N) 550 860 1345 2140 3450 5390 8425 (lbs) 123 193 303 481 755 1211 1894
3/2 LOCK VALVE (internal pilot) Auxiliary Supply
Main Supply
NOTE: All P1D Rod Lock Versions are not intended for use in water service applications, or in environments that have high humidity levels and/or splashing fluids present.
Use as a Brake
Speed [m/s] 2.0 1.5 1.0
The chart to the right shows the maximum values for speed and braking mass if the cylinder is used as a brake. The cylinder should not be exposed to additional compressive forces as this significantly reduces the external mass that can be braked. We recommend systems in which the cylinder does not act as a motor during braking. Heat is generated if the brake is used frequently, and this must be taken into account to ensure that the maximum temperature is not exceeded.
3
0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.5
2 40 50
00 125
10
20
30
50
100
200
Mass [Kg]
C14
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions P1D Standard Version

AM L12 BG

C086
PP EE PL OA RT
SS B D KK DIN 439B SW VD L2 WH VA G L8 + S G D4 TT
BA
R E
C
P1A P1D
L9 + 2 x S WH WH + S
S=Stroke
Dimensions
EE Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 AM mm 22 24 32 32 40 40 54 OA mm 6 6 8 8 6 6 8 B mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 PL mm 13 14 14 16 16 18 23 BA mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 PP mm 21.8 21.9 25.9 27.4 30.5 35.8 40.5 BG mm 16 16 16 16 17 17 20 R mm 32.5 38.0 46.5 56.5 72.0 89.0 110.0 D mm 12 16 20 20 25 25 32 RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 D4 mm 45.0 52.0 60.7 71.5 86.7 106.7 134.0 SS mm 4.0 8.0 4.0 6.5 0 0 0 E 50.0 57.4 69.4 82.4 99.4 116.0 139.0 SW mm 10 13 17 17 22 22 27 BSPP1 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 G1/2 TT mm 4.5 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 20.0 17.5 NPTF/ BSPT 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 VA mm 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 G mm 28.5 33.0 33.5 39.5 39.5 44.5 51.0 VD mm 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 WH mm 26 30 37 37 46 51 65 L2 mm 16.0 19.0 24.0 24.0 30.0 32.4 45.0 L8 mm 94 105 106 121 128 138 160 L9 mm 146 165 180 195 220 240 290 L12 mm 6.0 6.5 8.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 13.0
1 ISO 1179-1 with ISO 228-1 threads
Tolerances
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 B d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 BA mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 L8 mm 0.4 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 L9 mm 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 R mm 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 1.1 Stroke tolerance +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0
C15
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions P1D Removable Gland Version

BG AM D KK B L 12
EE

C086
PP PL SS BA TT OA
RT
DIN 439B SW
VD L2 WH G D 4 L8 + S L9+ 2 x S WH G
VA
R E
WH + S
Dimensions
EE Cylinder bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 Cylinder bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 AM mm 22 24 32 32 40 40 54 OA mm 6 6 8 8 6 6 B mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 PL mm 13 14 14 16 16 18 BA mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 PP mm 21.8 21.9 25.9 27.4 30.5 35.8 BG mm 16 16 16 16 17 17 20 R mm 32.5 38.0 46.5 56.5 72.0 89.0 D mm 12 16 20 20 25 25 32 RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 D4 mm 45.0 52.0 60.7 71.5 86.7 106.7 134.0 SS mm 6.5 8.0 4.0 6.5 0 0 0 E mm 46.5 52.0 63.5 76.0 95.5 114.5 140.0 SW mm 10 13 17 17 22 22 27 BSPP 1 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 G1/2 TT mm 4.5 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 20.0 17.5 NPTF/ BSPT 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 VA mm 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 5.5 G mm 28.5 33.0 33.5 39.5 39.5 44.5 51.0 VD mm 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 WH mm 26 30 37 37 46 51 65 L2 mm 18 20 26 26 33 33 41
S=Stroke
L8 mm 94 105 106 121 128 138 160
L9 mm 146 165 180 195 220 240 290
L12 mm 6.0 6.5 6.5 6.5 10.0 10.0 13.0
125 8 23 40.5 110.0 1 ISO 1179-1 with ISO 228-1 threads
Tolerances
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 B d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 BA mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 L8 mm 0.4 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 L9 mm 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 R mm 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 1.1 Stroke tolerance +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0
C16
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions P1D Rod Lock Version

(Version R or L)

C086
BG
EE
AM
L 12
G1/8
PP PL
RT
T
SS BA
OA
KK
B D
DIN 439B SW
C
R E
TT
D4
VA
VD
WH
L P H L 8 + Stroke
Dimensions
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 A mm 16 16 18 26 35 50 60 OA mm 6 6 8 8 AM mm 22 24 32 32 40 40 54 P mm 64.8 68.0 73.5 89.5 101.5 123.5 136.0 B mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 PL mm 13 14 14 16 16 18 23 BA mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 BG mm 16 16 16 16 17 17 20 PP mm 21.8 21.9 25.9 27.4 30.5 35.8 40.5 D mm 12 16 20 20 25 25 32 R mm 32.5 38.0 46.5 56.5 72.0 89.0 110.0 D4 mm 45.0 52.0 60.7 71.5 86.7 106.7 134.0 RT mm M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 E mm 46.5 52.0 63.5 76.0 95.5 114.5 140.0 S mm 7 9 8 8 9 12 12 EE 1 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 G1/2 SS mm 6.5 8.0 4.0 6.5 0 0 0 G mm 28.5 33.0 33.5 39.5 39.5 44.5 51.0 SW mm 10 13 17 17 22 22 27 H mm 71.5 77.0 80.5 96.5 110.5 132.5 145.0 T mm 2.5 2.0 4.0 2.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 TT mm 4.5 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 20.0 17.5 L mm 56.0 56.0 62.5 74.5 87.0 106.0 117.0 VA mm 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 5.5 L8 mm 137 149 153 178 199 226 254 VD mm 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 L12 mm 6.0 6.5 6.5 6.5 10.0 10.0 13.0 WH mm 15 16 17 17 20 20 27
Tolerances
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 B mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 R mm 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 1.1 L8 mm 0.4 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 BA mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 Stroke-length Tolerance mm +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0
C17
P1A
(M5 32 - 40) G 1/8 50 - 125)
P1D
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Rod Lock Version P1D Rod Lock Version with Manual Override
(Version J)

C086
MOUNTING SURFACE MR 1
L12
EE
PP
OA
NR
MR 2
BG T
N HEX
KK
AM
PL
SS
RT
B
D TT
BA
R E 6
DIN 439B SW
A L
D 4
VA
VD
WH
(M5 32 & 40) (G1/8" 50-125)
(M5 32 & 40) (G1/8" 50-125)

L 8 + Stroke
Dimensions
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 A mm 27.0 27.0 21.5 39.0 48.5 65.0 71.0 N mm 8 8 10 10 11 11 11 AM B BA mm mm mm 22 24 32 32 40 40 54 NR mm 10.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 12.5 12.5 12.5 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 OA mm 6 6 8 8 BG mm 16 16 16 16 17 17 20 P mm 64.8 68.0 73.5 89.5 111.5 133.5 146.0 D mm 12 16 20 20 25 25 32 PL mm 13 14 14 16 16 18 23 D4 mm 45.0 52.0 60.7 71.5 86.7 106.7 134.0 PP mm 21.8 21.9 25.9 27.4 30.5 35.8 40.5 E mm 46.5 52.0 63.5 76.0 95.5 114.5 140.0 R mm 32.5 38.0 46.5 56.5 72.0 89.0 110.0 EE 1 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 G1/2 RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 G mm 28.5 33.0 33.5 39.5 39.5 44.5 51.0 S mm 7 9 8 8 9 12 12 H mm 71.5 77.0 80.5 96.5 110.5 132.5 145.0 SS mm 6.5 8.0 4.0 6.5 0 0 0 KK M10X1.25 M12X1.25 M16X1.5 M16X1.5 M20X1.5 M20X1.5 M27X2 SW mm 10 13 17 17 22 22 27 L mm 56.0 56.0 62.5 74.5 97.0 116.0 127.0 T mm 2.5 2.0 4.0 2.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 L8 mm 137 149 153 178 TT mm 4.5 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 20.0 17.5 L12 mm 6.0 6.5 6.5 6.5 10.0 10.0 13.0 VA mm 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 5.5 MR1 mm 16.0 16.0 18.5 22.0 15.0 15.0 19.0 VD mm 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 MR2 mm 3.0 3.0 5.5 4.0 19. 8 20.8 23.0 WH mm 15 16 17 17 30 30 37
Tolerances
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 B mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 R mm 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 1.1 L8 mm 0.4 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 BA mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 Stroke-length Tolerance mm +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0
C18
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions P1D Tie-Rod Version (32-125mm)

C086
PP AM L12 EE PL OA RT
D6
SS D5 TT
BA
KK
DIN 439B SW VD L2 WH VA G L8 + S G R E
C
P1A P1D
P1D Clean Version

PP AM L12 EE PL RT E 2 max
SS
D7
TT
BA
KK
OA
DIN 439B SW VD L2 WH VA G L8 + S G R E
Dimensions
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 D5 mm 36 45 55 68 85 105 132 D6 mm 5.3 5.3 7.1 7.1 8.9 8.9 10.7 D7 mm 49.6 57.3 69.3 82.3 99.3 117.6 142.8 E1 mm 32 36 42 49 57 68 81 E2 max mm 5 6 6 5 5 6 6
Other dimensions, see page C15.
C19
E1
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions P1D Tie-Rod Version (160-200mm)

C086
Y WH E VD PJ + STROKE
TG
MM
C
TG DD VE G ZJ + STROKE BG EE G VD
ZM + (2 x STROKE) Y WH PJ + STROKE WH + STROKE
MM
MM
AM
AM
VE
EE ZJ + STROKE
VE
Rod End #1
Rod End #2
Dimensions
EE Cylinder Bore 160 200 AM mm 72 72 B mm 65 75
d11
BG mm 24 24
DD M16 M16
E mm 177 214
BSPP 3 G3/4 G3/4
NPTF/ BSPT 3/4 3/4
G mm 54 54
MM mm 40 40
TG mm 140 175
VD mm 6 6
VE mm 56 56
WH mm 80 95
Y mm 105 120
PJ 1 mm 130 130
ZJ 1 mm 260 275
ZM 2 mm 340 370
1 Add stroke 2 Add 2 stroke 3 ISO 1179-1 with ISO 228-1 threads
Double Rod Cylinders
Double rod option is available on Mounting Styles MX0, MS1, MF1, MF2 and MT4. For double rod cylinders, it is assumed that the rod number and rod end are the same for both piston rods. On a double rod cylinder where the two rod ends are different, use a rod end of 3 and be sure to clearly state which rod end is to be assembled at which end.
C20
Catalog 0900P-4
P1D Rod End Dimensions All Mountings Except MF1

Thread Style N
SW WRENCH FLATS WH VD SW WRENCH FLATS

NOTE: Dimensions do not apply to Rod Lock Versions.
C086
Thread Style 6
WH VD AM
Special Thread Style 3

Special thread, extension, rod eye, blank, etc are also available. To order, specify Style 3 and provide desired dimensions for KF or KK, AM and WH. If otherwise special, furnish dimensioned sketch.
BC NA KK
BC
NA
KF
L12 AM L2
L12 L2
C
P1A P1D
Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
D 12 16 20 20 25 25 32 40 40
KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 M36x2 M36x2
KF M8x1 M10x1.25 M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5 M24x2 M30x2 M30x2
AM 22 24 32 32 40 40 54 72 72
B
d11
BC 27 32 36 36 41 41 50 60 60
SW
across flats
L12 6 6.5 6.5 6.5 10 10 13 16 16
NA 11 15 19 19 24 24 31 39 39
VD 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 6 6
L2 18 20 26 26 33 33 41 56 56
WH 26 30 37 37 46 51 65 80 95
30 35 40 45 45 55 60 65 75
10 13 17 17 22 22 27 36 36
With MF1 Mounting

Thread Style N
W SW WRENCH FLATS MF
NOTE: Dimensions do not apply to Rod Lock Versions.
Thread Style 6
W SW WRENCH FLATS MF
Special Thread Style 3

Special thread, extension, rod eye, blank, etc are also available. To order, specify Style 3 and provide desired dimensions for KF or KK, AM and WH. If otherwise special, furnish dimensioned sketch.
AM
NA
KK
NA
KF
L12 AM L2 WH
L12
L2 WH
Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
D 12 16 20 20 25 25 32 40 40
KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 M36x2 M36x2
KF M8x1 M10x1.25 M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5 M24x2 M30x2 M30x2
AM 22 24 32 32 40 40 54 72 72
SW
across flats
L12 6 6.5 6.5 6.5 10 10 13 16 16
MF 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 20 25
NA 11 15 19 19 24 24 31 39 39
L2 18 20 26 26 33 33 41 56 56
W 16 20 25 25 30 35 45 60 70
WH 26 30 37 37 46 51 65 80 95
10 13 17 17 22 22 27 36 36
C21
Catalog 0900P-4
Duplex Cylinders 3 and 4 Position Cylinders

This type of cylinder function consists of two cylinders installed back to back. Two cylinders with the same stroke give a 3-position cylinder with a symmetrical centre position, whereas different strokes give a 4 position cylinder where the two central positions can be calculated from the different stroke lengths. 3 and 4 position cylinders can be ordered in two ways.

C086
Factory-fitted P1D-T
P1D Tie-Rod Version cylinders are completed at the factory and are joined together as one unit by special tie-rods. See function options in model code.
Installation Kit for all Designs

There is an installation kit for cylinder bores 32 100 mm which makes it possible to join any two P1D cylinders together at any time to make a 3 or 4-position cylinder. Please refer to cylinder mountings, page C28.
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 S=Stroke A (mm) P1D-T 247 277 293 323 355 385 461 P1D-S 256 286 306 336 373 403
3 position: A + 2 x S 4 position: A + S1 + S2
C22
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Mountings Flange MF1 Flange MF2

C086
R FB
Intended for fixed mounting of cylinder. Flange can be fitted to front or rear end cover of cylinder. Materials 32-100mm bore flange: Surface-treated aluminum, black 125-200mm bore flange: Steel, black Mounting screws acc. to DIN 6912: Zinc-plated steel 8.8 Supplied complete with mounting screws for attachment to cylinder.
UF d1
TG1 E
MF
TF
MF
I1
According to ISO MF1/MF2, VDMA 24 562, AFNOR

Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 d1 H11 mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 65 75 FB H13 mm 7 9 9 9 12 14 16 18 22 TG1 mm 32.5 38.0 46.5 56.5 72.0 89.0 110.0 140.0 175.0 E mm 45 52 65 75 95 115 140 190 228 R JS14 mm 32 36 45 50 63 75 90 115 135 MF JS14 mm 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 20 25 TF JS14 mm 64 72 90 100 126 150 180 230 270 UF 80 90 110 120 150 170 205 279 318 I1 -0.5 mm 5.0 5.0 6.5 6.5 8.0 8.0 10.5 7.0 13.0 W mm 16 20 25 25 30 35 45 60 70 ZF mm 130 145 155 170 190 205 245 280 300 ZB mm 123.5 138.5 146.5 161.5 177.5 192.5 230.5 266 281
ZB+S ZF+S
C
P1A P1D
Weight kg 0.23 0.28 0.53 0.71 1.59 2.19 3.78 C.F. C.F.
Part Number P1C-4KMBA P1C-4LMBA P1C-4MMBA P1C-4NMBA P1C-4PMBA P1C-4QMBA P1C-4RMB L075370160 L075370200
S = Stroke length
C.F. = Consult Factory
Foot Bracket MS1

Intended for fixed mounting of cylinder. Foot bracket can be fitted to front and rear end covers of cylinder. Materials Foot bracket: Surface-treated steel, black Mounting screws acc. to DIN 912: Zinc-plated steel 8.8 Supplied in pairs with mounting screws for attachment to cylinder.
AB AU AO
AH AT TR TGI E I9 I7
According to ISO MS1, VDMA 24 562, AFNOR

Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 AB H14 mm 7 9 9 9 12 14 16 18 22 TG1 mm 32.5 38.0 46.5 56.5 72.0 89.0 110.0 140.0 175.0 E mm 45 52 65 75 95 115 140 177 214 TR JS14 mm 32 36 45 50 63 75 90 115 135 AO mm 10 8 13 13 14 15 22 24 30 AU mm 24 28 32 32 41 41 45 60 70 AH JS15 mm 32 36 45 50 63 71 90 115 135 I7 mm 30 30 36 35 49 54 71 63.5 65 AT mm 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 8.0 4.75 8.0 I9 JS14 mm 17.0 18.5 25.0 27.5 40.5 43.5 60.0 63.5 65.0 SA mm 142 161 170 185 210 220 250 300 320
SA+S
Weight* kg 0.06 0.08 0.16 0.25 0.50 0.85 1.48 C.F. C.F.
Part Number P1C-4KMF P1C-4LMF P1C-4MMF P1C-4NMF P1C-4PMF P1C-4QMF P1C-4RMF L075380160 L075380200 *Weight per item
S = Stroke length
C23
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Mountings Pivot Bracket with Rigid Bearing

C086
R1
G1
Materials Pivot bracket: Surface-treated aluminium, black Bearing: Sintered oil-bronze bushing
K1 K2
S5
H6
CA
G2 G3
According to CETOP RP 107 P, VDMA 24 562, AFNOR
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
CK H9 mm 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 30 30
S5 H13 mm 6.6 6.6 9.0 9.0 11.0 11.0 14.0 14.0 16.0
K1 JS14 mm 38 41 50 52 66 76 94 118 122
K2 51 54 65 67 86 96 124 156 162
G1 JS14 mm 21 24 33 37 47 55 70 97 105
G2 JS14 mm 18 22 30 35 40 50 60 89 89
EM mm 25.5 27.0 31.0 39.0 49.0 59.0 69.0 88.5 88.5
G3 mm 31 35 45 50 60 70 90 126 130
CA JS15 mm 32 36 45 50 63 71 90 115 135
H6 mm 8 10 12 12 14 15 20 25 30
R1 mm 10.0 11.0 13.0 15.0 15.0 19.0 22.5 31.0 31.0
Weight kg 0.06 0.08 0.15 0.20 0.33 0.49 1.02 C.F. C.F.
Part Number P1C-4KMD P1C-4LMD P1C-4MMD P1C-4NMD P1C-4PMD P1C-4QMD P1C-4RMD L075480160 L075480200
Swivel Eye Bracket (MP6)

Intended for use together with clevis bracket GA Material Bracket: Surface-treated aluminium, black (Cast iron for 160-200mm bores) Swivel bearing acc. to DIN 648K: Hardened steel Supplied complete with mounting screws for attachment to cylinder.
CN
Z Z
B2 B1
FL
EN E
I2
R1 R2
According to VDMA 24 562, AFNOR

Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 E mm 45 52 65 75 95 115 140 177 214 B1 mm 10.5 12.0 15.0 15.0 18.0 18.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 B2 mm 51 EN mm 14 16 21 21 25 25 37 43 43 R1 mm 16 18 21 23 29 31 40 44 48 R2 mm 19 41 42 FL mm 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 55 60 I2 mm 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 4.0 8.0 L mm 12 15 15 20 20 25 30 41 42 CN mm 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 35
H7
XD+S
XD mm 142 160 170 190 210 230 275 315 335
Z 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 16 16
Weight kg 0.08 0.11 0.20 0.27 0.52 0.72 1.53 C.F. C.F.
Part Number P1C-4KMSA P1C-4LMSA P1C-4MMSA P1C-4NMSA P1C-4PMSA P1C-4QMSA P1C-4RMSA L075420160 L075420200
S = Stroke length
C24
CK
Intended for flexible mounting of cylinder. The pivot bracket can be combined with clevis bracket MP2.
EM
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Mountings Clevis bracket MP2

C086
C UB CB
Intended for flexible mounting of cylinder. Clevis bracket MP2 can be combined with clevis bracket MP4. Materials Clevis bracket: Surface-treated aluminium, black for 32-160mm bores; Cast iron for 200mm bore Pin: Surface hardened steel Circlips according to DIN 471: Spring steel Mounting screws acc. to DIN 912: Zinc-plated steel 8.8
MR
L CD
Now in aluminum!
Supplied complete with mounting screws for attachment to cylinder.

I2 FL XD+S
C
P1A
Weight kg 0.08 0.11 0.14 0.29 0.36 0.64 1.17 C.F. C.F. Part Number P1C-4KMT P1C-4LMT P1C-4MMT P1C-4NMT P1C-4PMT P1C-4QMT P1C-4RMT L075390160 L075390200
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
C mm 53 60 68 78 98 118 139 178 178
E mm 45 52 65 75 95 115 140 177 214
UB mm 45 52 60 70 90 110 130 170 170

h14
CB mm 26 28 32 40 50 60 70 90 90
H14
FL mm 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 55 60
0.2
L mm 13 16 16 21 22 27 30 36 41
I2 mm 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 18.0
CD mm 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 30 30
H9
MR mm 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 30 30
XD mm 142 160 170 190 210 230 275 315 335
S = Stroke length
Clevis Bracket MP4

Intended for flexible mounting of cylinder. Clevis bracket MP4 can be combined with clevis bracket MP2. Materials Clevis bracket: Surface-treated aluminium, black for 32-125mm bores; Cast iron for 160-200mm bores Mounting screws acc. to DIN 912: Zinc-plated steel 8.8 Supplied complete with mounting screws for attachment to cylinder.
FL
EW
L CD
MR
I2 XD+S
According to ISO MP4, VDMA 24 562, AFNOR

Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 E mm 45 52 65 75 95 115 140 177 214 EW mm 26 28 32 40 50 60 70 90 90 FL mm 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 55 60 L mm 13 16 16 21 22 27 30 36 41
0.2
I2 mm 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 13.5 18.0
CD mm 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 30 30
MR mm 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 30 30
H9
XD mm 142 160 170 190 210 230 275 315 335
Weight kg 0.09 0.13 0.17 0.36 0.46 0.83 1.53 C.F. C.F.
Part Number P1C-4KME P1C-4LME P1C-4MME P1C-4NME P1C-4PME P1C-4QME P1C-4RME L075410160 L075410200
S = Stroke length
C25
P1D
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Mountings Clevis Bracket GA

C086
Intended for flexible mounting of cylinder. Clevis bracket GA can be combined with pivot bracket with swivel bearing, swivel eye bracket and swivel rod eye. Materials Clevis bracket: Surface-treated aluminium Pin: Surface hardened steel Locking pin: Spring steel Circlips according to DIN 471: Spring steel Mounting screws acc. to DIN 912: Zinc-plated steel 8.8 Supplied complete with mounting screws for attachment to cylinder.
C B2 B1
FL L1 CN
L2
T E
Now in aluminium!
R1
C
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 C mm 41 48 54 60 75 85 110 140 175 E mm 45 52 65 75 95 115 140 178 218 B2 d12 mm 34 40 45 51 65 75 97 122 122
XD+S
According to VDMA 24 562, AFNOR

B1 H14 mm 14 16 21 21 25 25 37 43 43 T mm 3 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 B3 mm 3.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 R2 mm 17 20 22 25 30 32 42 46 49 L1 mm 11.5 12.0 14.0 14.0 16.0 16.0 24.0 26.5 26.5 FL 0.2 mm 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 55 60 I2 mm 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 11.5 L mm 12 15 17 20 20 25 30 37 40 CN F7 mm 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 h9 35 h9 R1 mm 11 13 18 18 22 22 30 36 38 XD mm 142 160 170 190 210 230 275 C.F. C.F. Weight kg 0.09 0.13 0.17 0.36 0.58 0.89 1.75 C.F. C.F. Part Number P1C-4KMCA P1C-4LMCA P1C-4MMCA P1C-4NMCA P1C-4PMCA P1C-4QMCA P1C-4RMCA L075510160 L075510200
S = Stroke length
Stainless Steel Pin Set GA
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Weight kg 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.17 0.31 0.54
Part Number 9301054311 9301054312 9301054313 9301054314 9301054315 9301054316 9301054317
Materials Pin: Stainless steel Locking pin: Stainless steel Circlips according to DIN 471: Stainless steel
C26
B3
R2
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Mountings Head Detachable Clevis MP7

C086
E X
Intended for flexible mounting of cylinder Materials Clevis bracket: Cast iron for 32-63mm bores; Surface treated aluminum, black for 80-200mm bores Mounting screws acc. to DIN 912: Zinc-plated steel 8.8 Supplied complete with mounting screws for attachment to cylinder.
FW UB XW MR
C
P1A
CN
CD

Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 CD mm 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 30 30 E mm 46.5 52 63.5 76 95.5 114.5 140 177 214 FL mm 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 55 60 FW mm 8 9 10 15 20 25 30 40 40 L mm 12 15 15 20 20 25 35 36 41 MR mm 10 12 13 16 17 21 25 30 30 UB mm 45 52 60 70 90 110 130 170 170
XW mm 4 5 10 5 10 10 15 25 35
Part Number L075400032 L075400040 L075400050 L075400063 L075400080 L075400100 L075400125 L075400160 L075400200
Pivot Bracket with Swivel Bearing

Intended for use together with clevis bracket GA. Material Pivot bracket: Surface-treated steel, black Swivel bearing acc. to DIN 648K: Hardened steel According to VDMA 24 562, AFNOR
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 CN H7 mm 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 S5 H13 mm 6.6 6.6 9.0 9.0 11.0 11.0 14.0 K1 JS14 mm 38 41 50 52 66 76 94 K2 mm 51 54 65 67 86 96 124 EU mm 10.5 12.0 15.0 15.0 18.0 18.0 25.0 G1 JS14 mm 21 24 33 37 47 55 70 G2 JS14 mm 18 22 30 35 40 50 60 EN mm 14 16 21 21 25 25 37 G3 mm 31 35 45 50 60 70 90 CH JS15 mm 32 36 45 50 63 71 90 H6 mm 10 10 12 12 14 15 20 ER mm 16 18 21 23 28 30 40 Z 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Weight kg 0.18 0.25 0.47 0.57 1.05 1.42 3.10 Part Number P1C-4KMA P1C-4LMA P1C-4MMA P1C-4NMA P1C-4PMA P1C-4QMA P1C-4RMA
Z Z EN EU ER G1
S5 K1 K2
H6
CH
G2 G3
C27
P1D
L FL
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Mountings Mounting Kit

C086
A MF
Mounting kit for back to back mounted cylinders, 3 and 4 position cylinders. Material Mounting: Aluminium Mounting screws: Zinc-plated steel 8.8
E TG
TG
BA FB
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100
E mm 50 60 66 80 100 118
TG mm 32.5 38.0 46.5 56.5 72.0 89.0
FB mm 6.5 6.5 8.5 8.5 10.5 10.5
MF mm 5 5 6 6 8 8
A mm 16 16 20 20 25 25
BA mm 30 35 40 45 45 55
Weight kg 0.060 0.078 0.162 0.194 0.450 0.672
Part Number P1E-6KB0 P1E-6LB0 P1E-6MB0 P1E-6NB0 P1E-6PB0 P1E-6QB0
Pivot Bracket for MT4

Intended for use together with central trunnion MT4. Material Pivot bracket: Surface-treated aluminium Bearing acc. to DIN 1850 C: Sintered oil-bronze bushing Supplied in pairs.
B2 d1
H2
A B1
d2
According to ISO, VDMA 24 562, AFNOR

Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 B1 mm 46 55 55 65 65 75 75 B2 mm 18.0 21.0 21.0 23.0 23.0 28.5 28.5 A mm 32 36 36 42 42 50 50 C mm 10.5 12.0 12.0 13.0 13.0 16.0 16.0 d1 mm 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 d2 H13 mm 6.6 9.0 9.0 11.0 11.0 14.0 14.0 H1 mm 30 36 36 40 40 50 50 H2 mm 15 18 18 20 20 25 25 fx45 min mm 1.0 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.0 2.0 Weight* kg 0.04 0.07 0.07 0.12 0.12 0.21 0.21 Part Number 9301054261 9301054262 9301054264 9301054266
*Weight per item
C28
H1
fx45
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Mountings Intermediate Trunnion MT4

C086
TL
TM
TL
Intended for articulated mounting of cylinder. The trunnion is factory-fitted at an optional location. Order by specifying Mounting Style G or 7 and providing the desired XV dimension (3-digit measure in mm). See page C9 for Ordering Information. Combined with pivot bracket for MT4 for 32-125mm bores.
Standard*
R
L1
Material: Trunnion: Zinc plated steel (Cast iron for 160-200mm bores) *Standard mounting is for the Standard cylinder body and is permanently affixed by the factory.
UW
TD
XVstd
C
P1A
L1
According to ISO MT4, VDMA 24 562, AFNOR

Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 TM h14 mm 50 63 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 TL h14 mm 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 32 32 TD e9 mm 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 32 32 R mm 1.0 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 UW mm 46 59 69 84 102 125 155 190 242 L1 mm 15 20 20 25 25 30 32 70 70 X1 mm 73.0 82.5 90.0 97.5 110.0 120.0 145.0 C.F. C.F. XVmin mm 62.0 73.0 80.5 89.5 98.0 110.5 132.0 169 184 X2 mm 84.0 92.0 99.5 106.0 122.0 129.5 158.0 C.F. C.F. Weight kg 0.13 0.31 0.37 0.69 0.89 1.58 2.60 C.F. C.F.
XVmax XVmin
XVstd = X1 + Stroke length/2
XVmax = X2 + Stroke length

TL
TM
Flange Mounted Trunnion

Intended for articulated mounting of cylinder. This trunnion can be flange mounted on the front or rear end cover of all P1D cylinders. If you choose, you can order a complete cylinder with factory-fitted flange mounted trunnion see the ordering information on pages C4 and C5. Individual trunnions have part numbers as shown below. Material Trunnion: zinc plated steel Screws: zinc plated steel, 8.8 Delivered complete with mounting screws for attachment to the cylinder According to ISO MT4, VDMA 24 562, AFNOR
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 TM h14 mm 50 63 75 90 110 132 TL h14 mm 12 16 16 20 20 25 TD e9 mm 12 16 16 20 20 25 R mm 1.0 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.0 UW mm 46 59 69 84 102 155 L1 mm 14 19 19 24 24 29 XV1 mm 19.0 20.5 27.5 25.0 34.0 36.5 X mm 127.0 144.5 152.5 170.0 186.0 203.5 Weight kg 0.17 0.43 0.55 1.10 1.66 3.00
TD
TL
UW
L1
XV1
XV2
Part Number P1D-4KMYF P1D-4LMYF P1D-4MMYF P1D-4NMYF P1D-4PMYF P1D-4QMYF
XV2 = X + Stroke length
C29
P1D
Tie Rod Version
Catalog 0900P-4
Piston Rod Mountings Swivel Rod Eye

C086
CN N ER
Swivel rod eye for articulated mounting of cylinder. Swivel rod eye can be combined with clevis bracket GA. Maintenance-free. Materials Swivel rod eye: Zinc-plated steel Swivel bearing according to DIN 648K: Hardened steel
B
Z KK
Z O EN
Stainless Steel Swivel Rod Eye
Materials Swivel rod eye: Stainless steel Swivel bearing according to DIN 648K: Stainless steel Use stainless steel nut (see page C31) with stainless steel swivel rod eye.
A CE
LE
According to ISO 8139

Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160/200 *H7 A mm 20 22 28 28 33 33 51 56 B min mm 48.0 56.0 72.0 72.0 87.0 87.0 123.5 C.F. B max mm 55 62 80 80 97 97 137 C.F. CE mm 43 50 64 64 77 77 110 125 CN H9 mm 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35* EN h12 mm 14 16 21 21 25 25 37 43 ER mm 14 16 21 21 25 25 35 40 KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 M36x2 LE min mm 15 17 22 22 26 26 36 40 N mm 17 19 22 22 32 32 41 50 O mm 10.5 12.0 15.0 15.0 18.0 18.0 25.0 28.0 Z 12 12 15 15 15 15 15 15 Weight kg 0.08 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.46 0.46 1.28 C.F. Part Number P1C-4KRS P1C-4LRS P1C-4MRS P1C-4PRS P1C-4RRS L075470036 Stainless Steel Part Number P1S-4JRT P1S-4LRT P1S-4MRT P1S-4PRT P1S-4RRT C.F.
Clevis
Clevis for articulated mounting of cylinder. Material Clevis, clip: Galvanized steel Pin: Hardened steel
KK
B
CK ER
Stainless Steel Clevis
Material Clevis: Stainless steel Pin: Stainless steel Circlips according to DIN 471: Stainless steel
A CE
LE
According to ISO 8140

Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160/200 A mm 20 24 32 32 40 40 56 71 B min mm 45.0 54.0 72.0 72.0 90.0 90.0 123.5 C.F. B max mm 52 60 80 80 100 100 137 C.F. CK CE h11/E9 mm mm 40 48 64 64 80 80 110 144 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 CL mm 20 24 32 32 40 40 55 70 CM mm 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 ER mm 16 19 25 25 32 32 45 57 KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 M36x2 LE mm 20 24 32 32 40 40 54 72 O mm 28.0 32.0 41.5 41.5 50.0 50.0 72.0 95 Weight kg 0.09 0.15 0.35 0.35 0.75 0.75 2.10 C.F. Part Number P1C-4KRC P1C-4LRC P1C-4MRC P1C-4PRC P1C-4RRC L075490036 Stainless Steel Part Number P1S-4JRD P1S-4LRD P1S-4MRD P1S-4PRD P1S-4RRD C.F.
C30
CM CL O
Catalog 0900P-4
Piston Rod Mountings Flexo Coupling

C086
Flexo coupling for articulated mounting of piston rod. Flexo fitting is intended to take up axial angle errors within a range of 4.
Z
ER
EN
EO
EP EQ
Material Flexo coupling, nut: Zinc-plated steel Socket: Hardened steel Supplied complete with galvanized adjustment nut.
DL
M EH EK
EI M EL B
DL
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160/200
B mm 36.0 37.0 53.0 53.0 57.0 57.0 75.5 C.F.

min
B mm 43 43 61 61 67 67 89 C.F.
max
DL M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 M36x2
EH mm 20 23 40 40 39 39 48 72
EI mm 23 23 32 32 42 42 48 78
EK mm 70 67 112 112 122 122 145 251
EL mm 31 31 45 45 56 56 60 C.F.
EN mm 12 12 19 19 19 19 24 36
EO mm 30 30 41 41 41 41 55 75
EP mm 30 30 41 41 41 41 55 75
EQ mm 19 19 30 30 30 30 32 50
ER mm 30 30 41 41 41 41 55 55
M mm 5.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 13.5 18.0
Z 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Weight kg 0.21 0.22 0.67 0.67 0.72 0.72 1.80 C.F.
Part Number P1C-4KRF P1C-4LRF P1C-4MRF P1C-4PRF P1C-4RRF L075530036
C
P1A P1D
Nuts
Intended for fixed mounting of accessories to the piston rod. Material: Zinc-plated steel All P1D cylinders are delivered with a zinc-plated steel piston rod nut, except P1D Clean, which is delivered with a stainless steel piston rod nut instead. Stainless Steel Nut Material: Stainless steel A2 All P1D cylinders are delivered with a zinc-plated steel piston rod nut, except P1D Clean, which is delivered with a stainless steel piston rod nut instead. Acid-proof nut Material: Acid-proof steel A4 Cylinders with acid-proof piston rod are supplied with nut of acid-proof steel
C A
According to DIN 439 B

Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160/200 A mm 17 19 24 24 30 30 41 55 B mm 5.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 13.5 18.0 C M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 M36x2 Weight kg 0.007 0.010 0.021 0.021 0.040 0.040 0.100 C.F. Part Numbers Steel 9128985601 0261109910 9128985603 0261109911 0261109912 L075540036 Stainless Steel 9126725404 9126725405 9126725406 0261109921 0261109922 C.F. Acid-Proof 0261109919 0261109920 0261109917 0261109916 0261109918 C.F.
C31
Catalog 0900P-4
Accessories Screw Set for MP2, MP4, MS1 and GA

C086
Set of stainless steel screws for fitting clevis brackets MP2, MP4 and GA onto the cylinder. The screws have an internal hexagonal head and are used in special environments, e.g. the food industry, or where there are extra demands for protection against corrosion.
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Weight kg 0.02 0.02 0.05 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.15
Part Number 9301054321 9301054321 9301054322 9301054322 9301054323 9301054323 9301054324
Material: According to DIN 912, Stainless steel, A2 4 pcs per pack.
Screw set for MF1/MF2

Set of stainless steel screws for fitting flanges MF1/MF2 onto the cylinder. The screws have an internal hexagonal head and are used in special environments, e.g. the food industry, or where there are extra demands for protection against corrosion. Material: According to DIN 6912, Stainless steel, A2 4 pcs per pack
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Weight kg 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.07 0.07 0.12
Part Number 9301054331 9301054331 9301054332 9301054332 9301054333 9301054333 9301054334
Sealing plugs
Set of sealing plugs to be fitted in unused end covers. The plugs can be used for all P1D cylinders to avoid collecting dirt and fluids in the end cover screw recesses. Material: Polyamid PA 4 pcs per pack
Bore mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Weight kg 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.03
Part Number 9121742201 9121742201 9121742202 9121742202 9121742203 9121742203 9121742204
Pivot Pin Sets for 160-200mm Bore Cylinder Accessories

For Clevis Bracket MP2
CL d4 Dia. EK Dia. CD L4
For Rear Swivel Eye MP6
L2
L1 L3
L2
Bore 160/200
CD 30
CL 170.50
Part Number L075500160
Bore 160/200
EK 35
d4 6
L1 119
L2 7
L3 131
L4 41
C32
Catalog 0900P-4

Cyl. Bore
mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Air Cylinders P1D Series Grease for P1D

P1D Cylinder Version
Standard P1D-S, P1D-T, P1D-C, P1D-F SK032P1D01 SK040P1D01 SK050P1D01 SK063P1D01 SK080P1D01 SK100P1D01 SK125P1D01 Standard 30g 9127394541
C086
C
RK-Rod Seal Kit Nitrile Seals
Consisting of: 1 each items #41, 45 & 104 Part No. RK0P1D0121 RK0P1D0161 RK0P1D0201 RK0P1D0251 RK0P1D0321
RG-Rod Gland Cartridge Kit Bore Size

mm 32 40 50 & 63 80 & 100 125
Consisting of: 1 each items #14, 41, 45 & 104 Part No. RG0P1D0121 RG0P1D0161 RG0P1D0201 RG0P1D0251 RG0P1D0321
Consisting of: 1 each items #14, 41, 45 & 104 Part No. RG0P1D0125 RG0P1D0165 RG0P1D0205 RG0P1D0255 RG0P1D0325
Consisting of: 1 each items #41, 45 & 104 Part No. RK0P1D0125 RK0P1D0165 RK0P1D0205 RK0P1D0255 RK0P1D0325
mm 12 16 20 25 32 1 1 1 1 1
Piston & End Seal Kits

PK Piston Seal Kit Bore Size
Consisting of: 2 each items # 42 & 47 plus 1 each items 121 and #159. NOTE: (Fluorocarbon seals do not include magnetic ring symbol #159.) Fluorocarbon Nitrile Seals Seals Part No. PK032P1D01 PK040P1D01 PK050P1D01 PK063P1D01 PK080P1D01 PK100P1D01 PK125P1D01 Part No. PK032P1D05 PK040P1D05 PK050P1D05 PK063P1D05 PK080P1D05 PK100P1D05 PK125P1D05
CB Cylinder Body End Seal Kit

Consisting of: 2 each item #47 Nitrile Seals Part No. CB032P1D01 CB040P1D01 CB050P1D01 CB063P1D01 CB080P1D01 CB100P1D01 CB125P1D01 Fluorocarbon Seals Part No. CB032P1D05 CB040P1D05 CB050P1D05 CB063P1D05 CB080P1D05 CB100P1D05 CB125P1D05
mm
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
C33
P1A
Rod Dia.
Rod No.
Nitrile Seals
Fluorocarbon Seals
Fluorocarbon Seals
P1D
Gland Seal Kits
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes

C086
C34
P1A Series
Mini ISO 6432 Pneumatic Cylinders
C
P1A Contents
Features ..........................................................................C36 Ordering Information/Stroke Lengths ..............................C37 Technical Data ......................................................... C38-C40 Dimensions ......................................................................C41 Cylinder Mountings .................................................. C42-C43
C35
P1D
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Low-friction piston rod seal.
Air Cylinders P1A Series

C086
Magnet for proximity sensing.
Anodized aluminium end caps.
Stainless steel piston rod.
C
Smooth stainless steel cylinder body. Low-friction piston.
The Parker P1A series of pneumatic cylinders are intended for use in a wide range of applications. These cylinders are particularly suitable for lighter duties in the packaging, food and textile industries. Hygienic design, the use of corrosion-resistant materials and initial lubrication with our food-grade grease makes the cylinders suitable for food industry applications. Proven design and high quality manufacturing throughout ensure long service life and optimum performance. Mounting dimensions are in accordance with ISO 6432 and CETOP RP52P. This greatly simplifies installation and worldwide interchangeability. The Mini ISO range is available with bumpers or adjustable pneumatic cushioning. Controlled by simple bleed screws for fine adjustment, the adjustable cushioned cylinders can be operated with higher mass loads and at higher speeds than those with fixed end cushioning bumpers. The Mini ISO range is also available in an all-stainless version with piston rod, cylinder body and end covers of stainless steel for use in extremely severe environments. Consult the Wadsworth, Ohio facility for more information. A complete range of sensors for proximity sensing is available as accessories: both reed and solid state sensors are available. Either can be supplied with flying leads or cable and multi-pin connector. See Electronic Sensors section for specifications and part numbers.
Double Acting
Double Acting, Double Rod
Single-Acting, Spring Return
Single-Acting, Spring Extend
C36
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information Order Key

C086
P1A S
016
0025
Stroke length, mm E.g. 0025 = 25 mm For standard stroke length and max length see table below. Sealing material
Cylinder Bore 010 012 016 020 025 10mm 12mm 16mm 20mm 25mm M
Cylinder Type / Function Double-acting, adjustable cushioning. 16-25 mm. Not for sealing material type F and L Double-acting, bumpers, 10 - 25 Double-acting, adjustable cushioning, double rod, 16-25 mm. Not for sealing material type F and L. Double-acting, bumpers, double rod, 10 - 25 Double-acting, adjustable cushioning, double rod (hollow), 20-25 mm, max. stroke 125 mm. Not for sealing material type F and L. Double-acting, bumpers, double rod (hollow), 20-25 mm, max. stroke 125 mm Single-acting, bumpers, spring return for retract stroke, 10-25 mm Single-acting, bumpers, spring extend for advance stroke, 16-25 mm
D F
K H
S T
Standard -20C to +80C (-4F to +176F) Magnetic piston High temperature: 10, 12 and 16 mm -10C to +120C (14F to 248F) 20 and 25 mm -10C to +150C. (14F to 302F) Non magnetic piston Low temperature -40C to +60C (-40F to +140F) Non magnetic piston No PTFE or copper Standard seals -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F) Magnetic piston External seals of fluorinated rubber -20C to +80C (-4F to +176F) Magnetic piston
C
P1A
l l l l l l l l
Stroke Lengths
Cylinder Model P1A-S 010 D P1A-S 012 D P1A-S 016 D P1A-S 020 D P1A-S 025 D P1A-S 016 M P1A-S 020 M P1A-S 025 M Single acting: P1A-S 010 SS P1A-S 012 SS P1A-S 016 SS(TS) P1A-S 020 SS(TS) P1A-S 025 SS(TS) 10 12 16 20 25 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l** l l Bore Size 10 12 16 20 25 16 20 25 Stroke Length (l = standard, l = non-standard, blank = N/A) 10 l l l l l 15 l l l l l 20 l l l l l l l l 25* l l l l l l l l 30 l l l l l l l l 40 l l l l l l l l 50* l l l l l l l l 80* l l l l l l l l 100* l l l l l l l l 125* l l l l l l l l 160* l l l l l l l l 200* l l l l l l l l 250* l l l l l l l l 320* l l l l l l l l 400* l l l l l l l l 500*
Double acting with fixed end-cushioning:
Double acting with adjustable end-cushioning:
*Standard stroke lengths in mm according to ISO 4393 ** Not for the TS version
Note: For sensor specifications and part numbers, please refer to the Electronic Sensors section. C37
P1D
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Standard Specifications

Working pressure max Working temperature 10bar (145 PSI) max min +80C (176F) 20C (4F)

C086
High-temperature version max min Low-temperature version
+150C (20 and 25 mm) 302F +120C (10, 12 and 16 mm) 248F 10C 14F
max +60C 140F min 40C -40F Prelubricated, further lubrication is not normally necessary. If additional lubrication is introduced it must be continued.
Piston rod Piston rod seal Piston rod bearing End covers O-ring, internal Cylinder barrel Piston, complete Magnet holder Magnet Return spring Cushioning screw
Material Specification
Stainless steel, DIN X 10 CrNiS 18 9 Fluorocarbon rubber FPM Multilayer PTFE/steel Anodized aluminium Nitrile rubber, NBR Stainless steel, DIN X 5 CrNi 18 10 Nitrile rubber, NBR/steel Thermoplastic elastomer Plastic-coated magnetic material Surface-treated steel Stainless steel, DIN X 10 CrNiS 18 9
Variants Mini ISO:

Low-temperature version, type L: Piston rod seal Nitrile rubber, NBR Piston complete Nitrile rubber, NBR/steel High-temperature version, type F: Piston rod seal Fluorocarbon rubber, FPM Piston complete, 10-16 HNBR/steel Piston complete, 20-25 FPM/steel PTFE and copper free cylinders, type N: Piston rod bearing PA plastic Cylinders with outer sealings in fluorcarbon, type V: Piston rod seal/ Scraper ring Fluorocarbon rubber, FPM Note: Spare part = new cylinder
Cylinders are supplied complete with nose mounting and piston rod nuts. Cylinders with double piston rods are supplied with two piston rod nuts
Quick Reference
Cylinder Model # Bore (mm) Area (cm2) Piston Rod Dia. (mm) Area (cm2) Thread Total Weight at 0mm Stroke (lbs) Additional Weight per 10mm Stroke (lbs) 0.007 0.009 0.012 0.015 0.025 0.012 0.015 0.025 0.007 0.009 0.012 0.015 0.025 Air Consumption Port Size
Double acting, cushioned stroke P1A-S 010 D P1A-S 012 D P1A-S 016 D P1A-S 020 D P1A-S 025 D P1A-S 016 M P1A-S 020 M P1A-S 025 M Single acting P1A-S 010 SS P1A-S 012 SS P1A-S 016 SS(TS) P1A-S 020 SS(TS) P1A-S 025 SS(TS) 10 12 16 20 25 0.78 1.13 2.01 3.14 4.91 4 6 6 8 10 0.13 0.28 0.28 0.50 0.78 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25 0.09 0.18 0.22 0.40 0.58 0.0002 1) 0.0003 1) 0.0005 1) 0.0008 1) 0.0013 1) M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 10 12 16 20 25 16 20 25 0.78 1.13 2.01 3.14 4.91 2.01 3.14 4.91 4 6 6 8 10 6 8 10 0.13 0.28 0.28 0.50 0.78 0.28 0.50 0.78 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25 M6 M8 M10x1.25 0.09 0.15 0.20 0.40 0.89 0.20 0.40 0.89 0.0004 1) 0.0005 1) 0.0009 1) 0.0010 1) 0.0023 1) 0.0009 1) 0.0010 1) 0.0023 1) M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 M5 G1/8 G1/8
Double acting, adjustable cushioning
1) Free air consumption per 10 mm stroke length for a double stroke at 6 bar (87 PSI)
C38
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Cylinder Forces

C086
Indicated cylinder forces are theoretical and should be reduced according to the working conditions.
Double Acting
Model Number P1A-S 010 D P1A-S 012 D P1A-S 016 D P1A-S 020 D P1A-S 025 D P1A-S 016 M P1A-S 020 M P1A-S 025 M Bore Size mm 10 12 16 20 25 16 20 25 Theoretical Piston Force (lbs) at 6 Bar (87 PSI) Extension 10.57 15.07 26.98 42.27 66.10 26.98 42.27 66.10 Retraction 8.76 11.25 23.15 35.52 55.53 23.16 35.52 55.53
C
P1A
lbs. min 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.7 1.7 3.1 3.1 2.7 3.3 3.1 2.7 4.0 (4.0) 3.8 (3.8) 3.3 (3.3) 3.1 (3.1) 2.7 (2.7) 2.9 (2.9) 5.6 (5.8) 5.4 (5.6) 4.7 (5.1) 4.9 (4.9) 4.5 (4.5) 4.0 (4.2) 8.5 (9.4) 8.1 (9.0) 7.2 (8.3) 7.4 (7.4) 6.7 (6.7) 6.7 (5.4)
Single Acting
Theoretical Piston Force (lbs) at 6 Bar (87 PSI) Model Number Stroke 10 15 P1A-S 010 SS 25 40 50 80 10 15 P1A-S 012 SS 25 40 50 80 10 15 P1A-S 016 SS(TS) 25 40 50 80 10 15 P1A-S 020 SS(TS) 25 40 50 80 10 15 P1A-S 025 SS(TS) 25 40 50 80 8.5 8.5 8.7 8.5 8.7 8.7 11.9 11.9 12.3 11.9 11.9 12.3 22.0 (19.1) 23.1 (19.3) 23.8 (19.8) 23.8 (20.3) 24.2 (20.4) 24.0 (21.3) 36.6 (29.6) 36.8 (29.8) 37.5 (30.3) 37.3 (31.0) 37.7 (31.4) 38.2 (31.2) 57.5 (46.1) 58.0 (46.5) 58.9 (47.2) 58.7 (48.1) 59.4 (48.8) 59.4 (50.1) Spring Retraction lbs max lbs. min 8.1 8.1 8.1 7.6 7.6 7.6 11.4 11.4 11.4 10.8 10.8 10.8 22.2 (18.8) 22.2 (18.8) 22.2 (18.8) 21.3 (18.8) 21.3 (18.8) 21.3 (18.8) 36.1 (29.2) 36.1 (29.2) 36.1 (29.2) 35.7 (29.2) 35.7 (29.2) 36.1 (24.2) 56.9 (45.6) 56.9 (45.6) 56.9 (45.6) 56.2 (45.6) 56.2 (45.6) 56.4 (46.3) 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.9 2.9 2.9 3.6 3.6 3.6 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.7 (4.2) 4.7 (4.2) 4.7 (4.2) 5.6 (4.2) 5.6 (4.2) 5.6 (4.2) 6.1 (6.3) 6.1 (6.3) 6.1 (6.3) 6.5 (6.3) 6.5 (6.3) 6.1 (11.2) 9.2 (9.9) 9.2 (9.9) 9.2 (9.9) 9.9 (9.9) 9.9 (9.9) 9.6 (9.2) Spring Extension lbs. max
C39
P1D
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data
Use the diagram below to determine the necessary size of cylinder to provide the requisite cushioning performance. The maximum cushioning performance, as indicated in the diagram, is based on the following assumptions: - Low load, i.e. low pressure drop across the piston - Steady-state piston speed - Correctly adjusted cushioning screw
Air Cylinders P1A Series Double-acting cushioned cylinders

C086
Cushioning
Adjustable pneumatic cushioning permits greater loads and higher operating speeds, making the cylinders suitable for more demanding applications. These cylinders are available in bores of 16, 20 and 25 mm, with stroke lengths from 20 mm to 500 mm.
The load is the sum of the internal and external friction, together with any gravity forces. At high relative loading it is recommended that, for a given speed, the load should be reduced by a factor of 2.5, or that, for a given mass, the speed should be reduced by a factor of 1.5. These factors apply in relation to the maximum performance as shown in the diagram.
Fixed End-Cushioning (Bumpers)

Speed Ft./Sec.
6.57 5.25 3.94 3.28 2.63 1.64 .98 .66
2 5 2 0 1 6 1 2 1 0
.33 .22
.44
.66
1.1
1.8 2.2
4.4
6.6
11 17.65 33 44 22.05
66
Weight Lbs.
Adjustable Pneumatic End-Cushioning

Speed Ft./Sec.
9.8 8.2 6.51 4.9 3.28 2.63
1.64 1.31 .98 .66 .66
1.1
1.8 2.2
3.3
4.4
6.6 8.8 11
17.65 22.05 33
44
66
Weight Lbs.
C40
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions
Double acting cylinders
ZJ XC

C EW AM
C086
BE
KK CD BE
AF P WH
SW
Double piston rod
BF
Single Acting
WH + stroke
AF EE
C
P1A P1D
BE
KK
Cylinder bore mm 10 12 161) 162) 20 25
AM 0/-2 mm 12 16 16 16 20 22
BE M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5
AF mm 12 18 18 18 20 22
BF mm 10 13 13 13 14 14
C mm 14.0 18.0 18.0 25.0 24.0 27.5
CD h9 mm 4 6 6 6 8 8
EE M5 M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8
EW mm 8 12 12 12 16 16
H mm 16.7 19.1 19.1 24.0 27.0 29.0
KK M4 M6 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25
L mm 6 9 9 9 12 12
SW mm 5 5 5 7 9
WH1.2 mm 16 22 22 22 24 28
1) P1A-S016DS/SS/TS Double acting cylinders Cylinder bore mm 10 12 16 20 25 XC mm
2) P1A-S016MS
ZJ mm 84 + stroke 99 + stroke 104 + stroke 125 + stroke 132 + stroke
P mm 46 + stroke 48 + stroke 53 + stroke 67 + stroke 68 + stroke
64 + stroke 75 + stroke 82 + stroke 95 + stroke 104 + stroke
Single-acting, spring return, type SS Cylinder Bore mm 10 12 16 20 25 XC (mm) at Various Strokes 10 74 85 92 105 114 15 79 90 97 110 119 25 89 100 107 120 129 40 126 132 122 135 144 50 136 142 132 145 154 80 174 185 184 191 201 10 94 109 114 135 142 ZJ (mm) at Various Strokes 15 99 114 119 140 147 25 109 124 129 150 157 40 146 156 144 165 172 50 156 166 154 175 182 80 194 209 206 221 229 10 56 58 63 77 78 P (mm) at Various Strokes 15 61 63 68 82 83 25 71 73 78 92 93 40 108 105 93 107 108 50 118 115 103 117 118 80 156 158 155 163 165
Single-acting, spring-extended, type TS Cylinder Bore mm 16 20 25 ZC 3) (mm) at Various Strokes 10 107 120 129 15 112 125 134 25 122 135 144 40 137 150 159 50 147 160 169 80 195 205 10 134 156 165 ZJ 3) (mm) at Various Strokes 15 139 161 170 25 149 171 180 40 164 186 195 50 174 196 205 80 231 241 10 78 92 93 P (mm) at Various Strokes 15 83 97 98 25 93 107 108 40 108 122 123 50 118 132 133 80 167 169
3) With piston rod retracted, as shown in the dimension drawing Length tolerances 1 mm Stroke length tolerance +1.5/0 mm
C41
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Mountings Flange - MF8

Intended for fixed attachment of the cylinder. The flange is designed for mounting on the front or rear end-covers. Material: Surface-treated steel This mounting is also available in stainless steel. Consult the Wadsworth, Ohio facility for additional information. Part Number P1A-4CMB Cylinder mm 10 12-16 20 25 A 4.5 5.5 6.6 6.6 B 30 40 50 50 C 40 52 66 66 D 22 30 40 40 E 3 4 5 5 F 13 18 19 23

C086
Weight lbs 0.025 0.055 0.100 0.100
B C
P1A-4DMB P1A-4HMB
D
E F
Foot - MS3
Intended for fixed attachement of the cylinder. The bracket is designed for mounting on the front or rear end-covers. This mounting is also available in stainless steel. Consult the Wadsworth, Ohio facility for additional information.
G
Material: Surface-treated steel
C D
Part Number P1A-4CMF P1A-4DMF P1A-4HMF
Cylinder mm 10 12-16 20 25
A mm 4.5 5.5 6.5 6.5
B mm 16 20 25 25
C mm 25 32 40 40
D mm 35 42 54 54
E mm 3 4 5 5
F mm 24 32 36 40
G mm 26.0 32.5 45.0 45.0
H mm 16 20 25 25
I mm 11 14 17 17
Weight lbs 0.045 0.08 0.18 0.18

A I F H
Cover Trunnion
Intended for articulated mounting of the cylinder. The flange is designed for mounting on the front or rear end-covers. Material: Stainless steel, DIN X 10 CrNiS 18 9
C B A
P1A-4CMJ P1A-4DMJ P1A-4HMJ
10 12-16 20 25
12.5 16.5 22.5 22.5
26 38 46 46
38 58 66 66
20 25 30 30
8 10 10 10
4 6 6 6
6 8 8 8
10 14 16 20
0.03 0.07 0.08 0.08

G H
Mounting Nut
Intended for fixed mounting of the cylinder. Cylinders are supplied complete with one mounting nut. Material: Galvanized steel This nut is also available in stainless steel. Consult the Wadsworth, Ohio facility for further information. Cylinder mm 10 12-16 20-25 A mm 16 20 27 B mm 3 4 5 C mm M12x1.25 M16x1.50 M22x1.50 Weight lbs 0.02 0.04 0.09
A
D E F
Part Number
Cylinder mm
A mm
B h14 mm
C mm
D mm
E e9 mm
F mm
G mm
H mm
Weight lbs
Part Number 9127385101 9127385102 9127385103
C42
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Mountings Clevis Bracket

Intended for articulated mounting of the cylinder. Supplied with shaft for mounting on the rear end cover. Material: Bracket: surface-treated steel, black Pin: surface hardened steel Circlips: according to DIN 471: Stainless steel This mounting is also available in stainless steel. Consult the Wadsworth, Ohio facility for additional information.

C086
H I
E F J
G + Stroke
Part Number P1A-4CMT P1A-4DMT P1A-4HMT
Cylinder A B C D mm mm mm mm mm 10 12 16 20 25 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 13 18 18 24 24 8 12 12 16 16 24 27 27 30 30
E F mm mm 12.5 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 20 25 25 32 32
G mm 65.3 73.0 80.0 91.0 100.0
H mm 5 7 7 10 10
I 160 170 170 165 165
J 17 15 15 10 10
Weight lbs 0.045 0.08 0.08 0.18 0.18

A C B
C
P1A
IJ
Clevis
According to ISO 8140. Intended for articulated mounting of the cylinder. This mounting is adjustable in the axial direction. Supplied complete with pin. Material: Galvanized steel This mounting is also available in stainless steel. Consult the Wadsworth, Ohio facility for additional information. Part Number P1A-4CRC P1A-4DRC P1A-4HRC P1A-4JRC Cylinder mm 10 12-16 20 25 A mm 4 6 8 10 B M4 M6 M8 M10x1.25 C mm 2.2 3.2 4.0 5.0 D mm 8 12 16 20 E mm 8 12 16 20 F mm 5 7 10 12 G mm 16 24 32 40 H mm 4 6 8 10 I mm 22.0 31.0 40.5 49.0 J mm 2.0 3.0 3.5 3.0 Weight lbs 0.015 0.05 0.10 0.21
B
G E F
Swivel Rod Eye
According to ISO 8139. Intended for articulated mounting of the cylinder. This mounting is adjustable in the axial direction. Material: Swivel rod eye: Galvanized steel Ball: hardened steel This mounting is also available in stainless steel. Consult the Wadsworth, Ohio facility for additional information. Part Number P1A-4CRS P1A-4DRS P1A-4HRS P1A-4JRS Cylinder A mm mm 10 12-16 20 25 5 6 8 10 B M4 M6 M8 M10x1.25 C mm 2.2 3.2 4.0 5.0 D mm 8 9 12 14 E mm 10 10 12 14 F mm 9 10 12 14 G mm 27 30 36 43 H mm 6.0 6.8 9.0 10.5 I mm 8 9 12 15 J mm 33.0 38.5 46.0 52.5 K mm 9 11 14 17 L mm 2.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
JL G
E F
Weight lbs 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.19
Rod Nut
Intended for fixed mounting on the piston rod. Cylinders are supplied complete with one rod nut. (cylinders with double piston rod are supplied with two rod nuts.) Material: Galvanized steel This nut is also available in stainless steel. Consult the Wadsworth, Ohio facility for additional information. Part Number 0261110600 0261210800 0261211000 9128985601 Cylinder mm 10 12-16 20 25 D mm M4 M6 M8 M10x1.25 F mm 7 10 13 17 E mm 2.2 3.2 4.0 5.0 Weight lbs 0.002 0.004 0.010 0.015
E F
C43
P1D
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes

C086
C44
Round Body Pneumatic Cylinders
Section D
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM D1
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Section D Overview
Section D Round Body Cylinders Non-Repairable Cylinders

SR Series
304 Stainless Steel Body 12 Bore Sizes: 5/16" through 3" 28 Mounting Styles 250 PSI Air Service
SRM Series
Piston Position Sensing 8 Bore Sizes, 9/16" through 2-1/2" 24 Mounting Styles
250 PSI Air Service
SRD / SRDM Series

304 Stainless Steel Body with Delrin End Caps 5 Bore Sizes, 9/16" through 2" 2 Mounting Styles Piston Position Sensing (SRDM Series Only) 100 PSI Air
SRX Series
Continuous Position Feedback Capability 5 Bore Sizes, 1-1/16" through 3" 3 Mounting Styles 3 Display Modules Available 150 PSI Air Service
Repairable Cylinders
P1L Series
High Performance Cylinder Metric, Aluminum Body Threaded Design 8 Bore Sizes, 20mm through 100mm 12 Mounting Styles Piston Position Sensing Capable Bumpers Standard, Cushions Available 150 PSI Air Service
P Series
Inch, Round Body Snap-Ring Design 6 Bore Sizes, 1-1/8" through 4" Universal or Tang Mounting Style Cushions Available Piston Position Sensing Capable 150 PSI Air Service

P5L Series (powered by P1L Cylinder)
3 Body Styles (Thrust, Reach, Base) Bore Sizes 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 and 100mm Maximum Strokes 400 to 1000mm Depending on Model 10 Bar (145 PSI) Air Service
Delrin is a registered trademark of Dupont.
D2
SR/SRM Series SRD/SRDM Series

Stainless Steel Body Air Cylinders
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM Contents
Features ............................................................................D4 Ordering Information..........................................................D5 Mounting Styles .................................................................D6 Specifications ....................................................................D7 Technical Data ...................................................................D8 Dimensions ................................................................ D9-D35 Air Reservoirs ..................................................................D36 Standard Options.............................................................D37 Adjustable Cushion Option ..............................................D38 Port Accessories...................................................... D39-D40
D3
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Stainless Steel Piston Rods Corrosion resistant stainless steel is now the standard piston rod material for all bore sizes up to and including 1.50 inch bore at no additional cost. The only exception to the stainless steel standard is when a hollow rod or nonrotating hexagonal rod option is specified. Stainless steel is also the standard material on block, trunnion and KDX mounts.
Stainless Steel Body Air Cylinders SR Series

Pre-Lubrication All SR Series cylinders are factory prelubricated for use with or without added lubrication. Seals All piston and Rod Bushings rod seals are Oil impregnated of a lipseal bronze, reamed construction. to a close Buna-N is tolerance standard on provides for all models. smooth operation Fluorocarbon and long life. seals are available as an option.
C086
Piston Body Pistons are precision machined aluminum construction. Piston rod connections are threaded and loctited to provide for leakproof and durable service.
Unitized Construction Precision double-rolled unitized construction provides durable, leakproof service and long life.
Heads and Caps Aluminum construction with precision machining provides a smooth break away. The tube-to-head connection is a strong double rolled construction.
Cylinder Tube Type 304 stainless steel, polished to a micro-inch finish on the I.D. provides low friction and long life. A matte finish on the O.D. provides smudge resistance.
Twelve Bore Sizes 5/16" thru 3". SR Series cylinders are designed to be dimensionally interchangeable with other major stainless steel cylinders.
SRM Series
The SRM Series air cylinder can be ordered with reed or solid state sensors that are easily adjustable anywhere on the cylinder body, with no special mounting rail required. NItrile-barium particle composite surrounds the entire piston diameter for non-contact sensing. Sensors are compatible with Programmable Controllers; an LED indicator is also standard. A shielded cable is standard, and can be extended to 32 feet maximum by the user.
SRD/SRDM Series
SRD/SRDM Series cylinders are designed to withstand a wide range of operating environments to tolerate moisture and many types of lubricants and solvents. The cylinders have a Delrin (acetal resin) head and cap, an anodized aluminum piston, stainless steel cylinder tube and stainless steel piston rod. Stainless steel accessories are available.
Delrin is a registered trademark of Dupont. For detailed information regarding the properties of Delrin, contact Dupont.
D4
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information How To Order SR Series Air Cylinders 1.06

Bore Size 1 .31 .44 .56 .75 .88 1.06 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.50 3.00 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3" Cushion Head 2 Use C only when cushion head is required. Double Rod Use K only when double rod is required. Available on DX and DXH mounting only. Mounting 1 N, NR, NRP, P, R, RP, D, DP, DXP, DX, DXH, A, RA, AP, AR, BRN, BRR, BFD, BRD, BFN, BFR, TRN, TRR, TFD, TRD, TFN or TFR. 1 2 3 4 B SRDM SRD SR SRM Series Standard Cylinder With Magnetic Piston With Delrin Caps With Delrin Caps and Magnetic Piston

C086
SR
2.00
Stroke Specify in inches.
Cushion Cap 2 Use C only when cushion cap is required. Non-Standard PIston Rod Use 3 only when special piston rod end is required. Specify CC, LE and A Dimensions (See below.) Non-Standard Rod Specify Y for stainless steel piston rod. Stainless steel is standard on all bore sizes up to and including 1.50" Bore.
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM P P1L SRX
Piston Blank No Bumpers With Bumpers 3
Special Use S only if special modifications are required, except piston rod end. Seals Blank Standard Seals V W Fluorocarbon Seals 4 Rod Wiper
Bore sizes and mounting styles are limited by series. See table on next page for availability. Cushions not available on SRD/SRDM series. Bumpers may increase cylinder length. See page D37 for adders. Fluorocarbon seals not available on SRM or SRDM series.
Non-Standard Rods
For non-standard rod dimensions, or undersized rod end threads, put a 3 in model number and describe the rod using the letters shown in the drawing. Specify CC, LE and A dimensions.
Full Diameter Rod End Threads

LE A C CC V* W AM*
Undersized Rod End Threads

LE W AM* A CC C V*
B* D WRENCH FLATS D WRENCH FLATS KM*
B*
MM*
MM* KM*
* Requires an S designation in model number.
D5
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Styles Available Mounting Styles

Mount Style N (2) NR (2) NRP (2) P (2) R (2) RP (2) D DP (2) DXP DX KDX KDXH (2) A (1,2) RA (1,2) AP (1,2) AR (1,2) BRN (2) BRR (2) BFD (2) BRD (2) BFN (2) BFR (2) TRN (2) TRR (2) TFD (2) TRD (2) TFN (2) TFR (2)

C086
Bore Size (Reference Notes 1 & 2 for availability) Description Nose mount, spring return Nose mount, spring return, hex rod (non-rotating) Pivot and nose mount, spring return, hex rod (non-rotating) Pivot mount, spring return Nose mount, spring extended Pivot and nose mount, spring extend Nose mount, double acting Pivot and nose mount, double acting, pivot pin Pivot and nose mount, double acting, no pivot pin Threaded both ends, double acting Threaded both ends, double acting, double rod Threaded both ends, double rod, hollow rod Nose mount, spring return, head adjustable stroke Nose mount, spring extend, cap adjustable stroke Pivot mount, spring return, head adjustable stroke Air reservoirs Rear block mount, single acting, Rear block mount, single acting, spring return Front block mount, double acting Rear block mount, double acting Front block mount, single acting spring return Front block mount, single acting spring extend Rear trunnion mount, single acting, spring return Rear trunnion mount, single acting spring extend Front trunnion mount, double acting Rear trunnion mount, double acting Front trunnion mount, single acting spring return Front trunnion mount, single acting spring extend
5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4"
(1,2) (1,2) (1,2) (2) (2)
2"
2-1/2"
(2)
3"
(1,2)
Max. Stroke (in.) 6" (3) 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 12"
See Note 4 See Note 4 32" See Note 5
Page D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D34 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33
l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l
See DXP
l l l l l l l l
See DXP
l l l l l l l l l
See DXP
l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l
See DXP
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l
s s s s l l
See DXP
l l l
l l l
See See DXP DXP
l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l
l l l
12" 6" 6" 6" 12" 6" 6" 12" 12" 6" 6" 6" 6" 12" 12" 6" 6"
s Recommended maximum stroke is 4" in models N, P, R & RP. 1 Not available on SRM (magnetic piston) cylinders. 2 Not available on SRD/DM (Delrin caps) cylinders. 3 Recommended maximum stroke is 4" for 5/16" bore models. 4 Max stroke 12" for bore sizes under 3/4"; 32" for bore sizes 3/4" and up. 5 Max stroke 6" for bore sizes under 3/4"; 12" for bore sizes 3/4" and up.
D6
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications / Technical Data Standard Specifications

304 stainless steel cylinder body. Aluminum heads and caps. Stainless steel piston rods are standard up to 1.50" bore. Nominal pressure rating 250 psi for SR and SRM 100 psi for SRD/SRDM Standard temperature -10F to +165F for SR +14F to +140F for SRM +32F to +160F for SRD/SRDM
In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, the specifications in this catalog are subject to change without notice.

C086
Twelve bore sizes 5/16" through 3" (see table for SRM and SRD/DM exclusions). 28 standard mounting styles (not all available on SRM and SRD/SRDM see table on previous page). Single and double acting Bumpers Adjustable cushions Rod wipers For additional mounting styles please consult factory.
For detailed information regarding the properties of Delrin contact Dupont.
Port Locations
Mounting Style AR BFR BFN BRD BFD BRR BRN TFR TFN TRD TFD TRR TRN AP RA A KDXH KDX DX DXP DP D RP R P NRP NR N Standard Head Port Location Face 2 None 2 2 2 None 1 None 1 1 1 None None 2 None 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 None None None None Standard Cap Port Location Face None Face 2 Face None 2 None Face 1 Face None 1 2 None Face 2 2 2 2 2 Face None None 2 2 Face Face Standard Vent Location None 2 2 None None 2 2 1 1 None None 1 1 2 2 2 None None None None None None 2 2 2 2 2 2
End View of Mountings for Port Location

Mounting Styles N, NR, D, R, AR
2 3 CAP VIEW 1 FACE 4
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM P
4 4
Standard location for cushion adjustment needle when cushions are specified on D mounts.
Mounting Styles P, RP, DXP, NRP, DP, AP

2
CAP VIEW 1 4 3
2 3
Mounting Styles BFD, BFN, BFR

4
HEAD VIEW 1
Mounting Styles BRN, BRR, BRD

2 2
CAP VIEW 1
Mounting Styles KDXH, KDX

4
HEAD VIEW 1
Mounting Style DX
2 2
CAP VIEW 1
Mounting Styles TFD, TFN, TFR

4
HEAD VIEW 1
Mounting Styles TRN, TRR, TRD

2 2
CAP VIEW 1
Cylinders will have ports at these locations unless otherwise specified.
D7
P1L
Mounting Style A
CAP VIEW 1 FACE
Mounting Style RA
CAP VIEW 1
SRX
Standard location for cushion adjustment needle when cushions are specified on DXP mounts.
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data

C086
Port Size Rod Diameter Spring Force Data

Bore Size .31 (5/16") .44 (7/16") .56 (9/16") .75 (3/4") .88 (7/8") 1.06 (1-1/16") 1.25 (1-1/4") 1.50 (1-1/2") 1.75 (1-3/4") 2.00 (2") 2.50 (2-1/2") 3.00 (3") Port Size #10-32 #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 3/8 NPTF
3/8"
Rod Diameter (or Hex) 1/8" 3/16" 3/16" 1/4" 1/4" 5/16"* 7/16" 7/16" 1/2" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4"
Force Factor Push 0.08 0.15 0.25 0.44 0.60 0.89 1.23 1.77 2.40 3.14 4.91 7.07 Pull 0.06 0.12 0.22 0.39 0.55 0.81 1.08 1.62 2.21 2.84 4.60 6.63
Spring Return (lbs) Normal 0.5 1 2 3 3 3 7.5 6 11 15 N/A N/A Extended 1 2 4 6 6 6 15 12 24 30 N/A N/A
Spring Extend (lbs) Normal 0.5 1 2 3 3 7.5 7.5 9 11 15 N/A N/A Extended 1 2 4 6 6 15 15 18 24 30 N/A N/A
* Non-rotating version uses hex. Block mount and trunnion mount spring return lbs. equals spring extend lbs.
Springs shot peened music wire for high cycle life. Spring spacers are provided for every one inch of stroke (1/2" for 5/16" and 7/16" bores) to insure uniform spring rate and prevent spring failure.
Option Availability
Option Bumpers Fluorocarbon Seals Rod Wiper Cushions = Available Options S = Available as Special X = Not Available Delrin is a registered trademark of Dupont. Bumpers Fluorocarbon Seals Rod Wipers X Cushions X S Delrin End Caps S
D8
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style N Nose Mount, Spring Return

Drawings are representative of cylinders. Certain bore sizes may not look exactly as shown.

C086
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH C A CC DIA. KK D WRENCH FLATS W

1.00 OF STROKE*
J E
AA
KM MOUNTING NUT
B DIA. PILOT
EE
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" A
SR l l l l l l l l l l
SRM
Std. Strokes (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4
Max Stroke (in) 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 D 0.25 0.38 0.38 7/16 0.50 E 0.36 0.38 0.50 0.62 0.62 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.25 1.25 EE
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
l l l l l l l
1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4 B C 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.38 0.38 CC 0.125 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.500 0.625
AA 0.36 0.50 0.62 0.81 0.93 1.12 1.34 1.56 1.84 2.08
J 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.31
KK #5-40 UNC #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF
KM 1/4-28 3/8-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 5/8-18 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 1-1/412
V 0 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.12
W 0.25 0.31 0.38 0.44 0.50 0.69 0.88 0.88 0.75 1.19
X 0.75** 0.94** 1.62 1.69 1.56 1.56 1.81 1.69 2.0
SR 1.12 1.31 1.53 1.50 1.84 2.06 2.66 2.44 2.97 s
SRM 1.76 1.75 2.31 2.78 2.69 3.09 s
0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88
#10-32 #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
0.374 0.437 0.499 0.624 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.031 1.374
s 5.66" for 1" stroke; 7.66" for 2" stroke; 8.91" for 3" stroke; 11.84" for 4" stroke. * To determine lengths for half inch stroke increments, determine length for next highest whole number stroke and subtract a half inch. ** For each 0.50" of stroke
D9
ZJ
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style NR


C086
Nose Mount, Spring Return, Hex Rod
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH C A W

1.00 OF STROKE*
J E
AA
CC DIA. KK D HEX
KM MOUNTING NUT
B DIA. PILOT
EE
Bore 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" Bore 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4"
SR l l l l l l l l A 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.25 0.88 0.88 0.88
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4 B 0.374 0.437 0.499 0.624 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.031 C 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.38 0.38 CC 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.500 D 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 3/8 7/16 7/16 1/2
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 E 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.25 EE #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
l l l l l l AA 1.12 1.34 1.56 1.84
J 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.25 0.25
KK #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF
KM 3/8-24
V 0.05
W 0.56 0.62 0.69 0.75 0.75 0.88 1.00 1.12
X 0.94 1.62 1.69 1.56 1.56 1.81 1.69 2.0
ZJ SR 1.56 1.78 1.75 2.09 2.19 2.66 2.56 3.03 SRM 2.03 2.00 2.44 2.78 2.81 3.15
7/16-20 0.06 1/2-20 5/8-18 5/8-18 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09
* To determine lengths for half inch stroke increments, determine length for next highest whole number stroke and subtract one half inch.
D10
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style NRP


C086
Pivot & Nose Mount, Spring Return, Hex Rod
A C CC DIA. KK G HEX W
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE* B DIA. PILOT EE L TD PIN KM XJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE* ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE*
AA UT
Bore Sizes 7/16" * 3/4"
PP
KP
D
Bore Sizes 9/16" * 7/8" * 11/16" * 11/4" 11/2" * 13/4"
*No Mounting Nuts
A C CC DIA. KK G HEX
B DIA. PILOT
KM
EE XJ PLUS X FOR
EACH 1.00 OF STROKE*
PP
E Z DIA. PIVOT PIN HOLE KM MOUNTING NUT

B 0.374 0.437 0.499 0.624 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.031 W 0.56 0.62 0.69 0.75 0.75 0.88 1.00 1.12 X 0.94 1.62 1.69 1.56 1.56 1.81 1.69 2.0 C 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.38 0.38 XJ SR 2.00 2.06 2.53 2.72 2.78 3.38 3.25 4.09 SRM 2.31 2.78 3.03 3.50 3.50 4.21 CC 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.500 E 0.31 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.62 0.62 Z 0.157 0.251 0.376
Bore 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" Bore 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4"
SR l l l l l l l l G HEX 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 3/8 7/16 7/16 1/2
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 PP 0.44 0.38 0.62 0.62 0.62 0.78 0.81 1.12
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.88 0.88 0.88
AA 0.74 0.62 0.86 0.93 1.12 1.34 1.56 1.84 V 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09
EE #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF ZJ SR 2.25 2.25 2.81 3.00 3.06 3.78 3.62 4.59 SRM 2.50 3.06 3.31 3.91 3.87 4.71
l l l l l l KK #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF
1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4 KM KP L 0.25 0.25 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.41 0.50 0.50
TD 0.156 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.251 0.375 0.376
UT 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.00 0.62
7/16-20 3/8-24 UNF 7/16-20 7/16-20 UNF 5/8-18 1/2-20 UNF 5/8-18 5/8-18 UNF 5/8-18 5/8-18 UNF 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14
D11
P1L
SRX
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
AA
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style P


C086
Pivot Mount, Spring Return

A V
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE* B DIA. PILOT EE
AA L TD PIN UT
Bore Sizes 5/16"* 7/16" 3/4"
*With Mounting Nuts
CC DIA. KK KM XJ PLUS X FOR

SE
KP
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.0 OF STROKE
D
CC DIA. KK D WRENCH FLATS
L A V V
AA E
B
DIA. PILOT
SE XJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.0 OF STROKE
Z DIA. FOR PIVOT PIN KM MOUNTING NUT BOTH ENDS EE
Bore Sizes 9/16"* 7/8"* 1-1/16"* 1-1/4" 1-1/2"* 1-3/4" 2" *

*No Mounting Nuts
Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" Bore
SR l l l l l l l l l l KK
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4
Max Stroke (in) 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 L 0.34 0.25 0.25 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.41 0.50 0.50 0.56 SE 0.25 0.31 0.38 0.44 0.50 0.50 0.63 0.63 0.75 0.81 T
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 TD UT 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.00
AA 0.39 0.74 0.62 0.86 0.93 1.12 1.34 1.56 1.84 2.08 V 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.12
B 0.374 0.437 0.499 0.624 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.031 1.374 X 0.75 0.94 1.62 1.69 1.56 1.56 1.81 1.81 2.0
CC 0.125 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.500 0.625 XJ SR 1.52 1.75 1.81 2.28 2.47 2.66 3.38 3.12 4.03 n
D 0.25 0.38 0.38 7/16 0.50 Z
E 0.25 0.31 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.62 0.62 0.75
EE #10-32 #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF ZJ SR 1.68 2.00 2.00 2.56 2.75 2.94 3.78 3.50 4.53 s SRM 2.25 2.81 3.19 3.50 3.75 4.65
l l l l l l l
1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4 KM KP 7/16-20 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 5/8-18 UNF 5/8-18 UNF 5/8-18 UNF
5/16" #5-40 UNC 3/8-24 7/16" #10-32 UNF 3/8-24 9/16" #10-32 UNF 7/16-20 3/4" 1/4-28 UNF 1/2-20 7/8" 1/4-28 UNF 5/8-18 1-1/16" 5/16-24 UNF 5/8-18 1-1/4" 7/16-20 UNF 3/4-16 1-1/2" 7/16-20 UNF 3/4-16 1-3/4" 1/2-20 UNF 1-14 2" 1/2-20 UNF 1-1/4-12
0.34 0.44 0.38 0.62 0.62 0.62 0.78 0.81 1.12 1.03
0.156 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.375
SRM 2.06 2.53 2.91 3.91 3.37 4.15 X
0.125 0.157 0.251 0.376
n 6.34" for 1" stroke, 8.34" for 2" stroke, 9.59" for 3" stroke, 12.53" for 4" stroke* s 6.78" for 1" stroke, 8.78" for 2" stroke, 10.03" for 3" stroke, 12.97" for 4" stroke* * To determine lengths for half inch stroke increments, determine length for next highest whole number stroke and subtract a half inch.
D12
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style R


C086
Nose Mount, Spring Extended
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH .50 OF STROKE A V W PLUS STROKE B DIA. PILOT E Q EE
AA
Bore Sizes 5/16" 7/16" 3/4"
CC DIA. KK KM MOUNTING NUT
SE WH
EE
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE* A CC DIA. KK D WRENCH FLATS KM MOUNTING NUT SE WH EE J R V W PLUS STROKE B DIA. PILOT E
AA
D
Bore Sizes 9/16" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" *
*No Mounting Nut
EE
Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2"
SR l l l l l l l l l l EE
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3
Max Stroke (in) 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 KM 3/8-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 5/8-18 5/8-18 5/8-18 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 1-1/4-12 Q 0.36 0.50 0.62 0.81
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75 1.25 0.88 0.88
AA 0.50 SQ. 0.74 0.62 0.86 0.93 1.12 1.34 1.56 1.84 2.08 V 0.05 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.12 W 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.06 1.19
B 0.437 0.437 0.624 0.624 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.031 1.374 WH 0.47 0.72 0.78 0.97 0.97 1.06 1.38 1.25 1.63 1.47
CC 0.125 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.500 0.625 X 1.25 1.44 2.62 2.69** 2.56 2.81 2.81 3.00 3.0
D 0.25 0.38 0.38 7/16 0.50 ZJ SR 1.49 1.94 2.00 2.31 2.31 2.62 3.47 3.19 4.03 s
E 0.38 0.50 0.88
l l l l l l l J 0.19 0.19 0.25
1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4 KK #5-40 UNC #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF
R 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.38
SE 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.62 0.75 0.81
#10-32 #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
SM 2.25 2.56 2.87 3.60 3.44 4.15
s 7.11" for 1" stroke, 10.11" for 2" stroke, 12.34" for 3" stroke, 16.34" for 4" stroke.* * To determine lengths for half inch stroke increments, determine length for next highest whole number stroke and subtract one half inch. ** For each 1.00" of stroke.
D13
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style RP


C086
Pivot and Nose Mount, Spring Extended

ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE* A CC DIA. KK KM SE WH EE E V W PLUS STROKE B DIA. PILOT L TD
PIN
AA UT
Bore Sizes 5/16"* 7/16" 3/4"
*With Mounting Nuts
D
W PLUS STROKE A CC DIA. KK D WRENCH FLATS R V
XJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE*
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE* LB PLUS U FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE* V B DIA. PILOT
AA
Bore Sizes 9/16"* 7/8"* 1-1/16"* 1-1/4" 1-1/2"* 1-3/4" 2" *
*No Mounting Nuts
SE EE WH XJ PLUS X FOR
E Z DIA. PIVOT PIN HOLE KM MOUNTING NUT
Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2"
SR l l l l l l l l l KM
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3
Max Stroke (in) 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75 1.25 .88
AA 0.50 SQ. 0.74 0.62 0.86 0.93 1.12 1.34 1.56 2.08 V 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.12
B 0.437 0.437 0.624 0.624 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.374 W 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.19
CC 0.125 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.625 WH 0.47 0.72 0.78 0.97 0.97 1.06 1.38 1.25 1.47
D 0.25 0.38 0.38 0.50 X 1.25 1.44 2.62 2.69 2.56 2.81 2.81 3.00
E 0.25 0.31 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.62 0.75
EE #10-32 #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF
KK #5-40 UNC #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 1/4-28 UNF
l l l l l l L 0.19 0.25 0.25 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.41 0.50 0.56
1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4

1/2,
1, 2, 3, 4
1/2, 1, 1- 1/2, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 LB 2.47 R 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.38 SE 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.62 0.81
1/8 NPTF 5/16-24 UNF 1/8 NPTF 7/16-20 UNF 1/8 NPTF 7/16-20 UNF 1/4 NPTF 1/2-20 UNF ZJ SRM 2.72 2.97 3.31 4.28 4.50
TD 0.156 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.375
U 1.81
UT 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.00
3/8-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 5/8-18 5/8-18 5/8-18 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-1/4 -12
SR 1.88 2.38 2.28 2.44 2.63 2.78 3.78 3.88 n
XJ Z SRM 2.53 0.157 2.69 3.03 3.91 0.251 4.13 X 0.376
SR 2.04 2.62 2.47 2.72 2.91 3.06 4.16 4.25 s
n 8.05" for 1" stroke, 11.05" for 2" stroke, 13.28" for 3" stroke, 17.28" for 4" stroke* s 8.50" for 1" stroke, 11.50" for 2" stroke, 13.72" for 3" stroke, 17.72" for 4" stroke* * To determine lengths for half inch stroke increments, determine length for next highest whole number stroke and subtract one half inch.
D14
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style D


C086
Nose Mount, Double Acting

ZJ PLUS STROKE B DIA. PILOT E Q EE WH ZJ PLUS STROKE W C A CC DIA. KK D WRENCH FLATS Y EE KM V B DIA. PILOT J E EE AA
Bore Sizes 9/16" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" * 2-1/2" * 3" *
*No Mounting Nuts
A CC DIA. KK KM MOUNTING NUT
W V
AA
Bore Sizes 5/16" 7/16" 3/4"
EE
D
MOUNTING NUT
Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3" Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3"
SR l l l l l l l l l l l l D 0.25 0.38 0.38 7/16 0.50 1/2 5/8
SRM
SRD SRDM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4
Max Stroke (in) 4 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 KM 3/8-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 5/8-18 5/8-18 5/8-18 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-3/8-12 1-1/2-12 Q 0.36 0.50 0.81
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.25
AA 0.50 SQ. 0.74 0.62 0.86 0.93 1.12 1.34 1.56 1.84 2.08 2.62 3.16 WH 0.47 0.72 0.78 0.97 0.97 1.63
B 0.437 0.437 0.624 0.624 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.031 1.374 1.500 1.630 Y 1.19 1.62 1.50 1.84 1.84 2.09
C 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.38 ZJ SR 1.64 2.12 2.28 2.97 2.94 3.25 4.00 3.69 4.69 4.69 4.69 5.25
CC 0.125 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.500 0.625 0.625 0.750
l l l l l l l l
l l l l l
1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4, 5, 6
E 0.38 0.50 0.62 0.62 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.25 1.25 1.75 2.00
EE #10-32 #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 3/8 NPTF
J 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.31 0.31 0.31
KK #5-40 UNC #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 5/8-18 UNF
V 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.13 0.19
W 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.06 1.19 1.19 1.38
SRM 2.53 2.97 3.41 4.03 3.94 4.69 4.97 4.69
D15
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style DP


C086
Pivot and Nose Mount, Double Acting, Pivot Pin
A CC DIA. KK KM
W V
ZJ PLUS STROKE B DIA. PILOT EE L TD PIN
AA UT
Bore Sizes 7/16" 3/4"
WH XJ PLUS STROKE ZJ PLUS STROKE C A W V B DIA. PILOT EE L
PP
KP
AA UT TD PIN E
Bore Sizes 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
CC DIA. KK D WRENCH FLATS KM
Y XJ PLUS STROKE
PP
KP
Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l l EE
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 KK #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF KM 7/16-20 5/8-18 5/8-18 3/4-16 KP 7/16-20 UNF 5/8-18 UNF 5/8-18 UNF L
Max Stroke (in) 12 12 12 12 PP 0.44 0.62 0.62 0.81 TD 0.156 0.250 0.250 0.375
SS Rod 3 3 3 3 UT
A 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75 V W
AA 0.74 0.86 1.12 1.56 WH
B 0.437 0.624 0.624 0.749
CC 0.188 0.250 0.312 0.437
D 0.25 0.38
E 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.62
l l l
#10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF
0.25 0.34 0.34 0.50
XJ ZJ Y SR SRM SR SRM 0.50 0.05 0.38 0.72 2.56 2.81 0.75 0.09 0.50 0.97 3.75 3.75 4.03 4.03 0.75 0.09 0.62 3.84 4.00 1.19 4.12 4.28 1.00 0.09 0.87 4.38 4.63 1.50 4.75 5.00
D16
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style DXP

Drawings are representative of cylinders. Certain bore sizes may not look exactly as shown. NOTE: Strokes over 12" must be supported at both ends.

C086
Pivot & Nose Mount, Double Acting, No Pivot Pin

W A CC DIA. KK KM
MOUNTING NUT
ZJ PLUS STROKE LB PLUS STROKE B DIA. PILOT
AA
Bore Sizes 5/16" 7/16" 3/4"
EE PP XJ PLUS STROKE ZJ PLUS STROKE LB PLUS STROKE V L V
Z DIA. PIVOT PIN HOLE KM
MOUNTING NUT
W A CC DIA.
AA E
KK D WRENCH FLATS Y
EE B DIA. PILOT KM MOUNTING NUT XJ PLUS STROKE
PP Z DIA. FOR PIVOT PIN KM

MOUNTING NUT
*No Mounting Nuts
Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3" Bore 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3"
SR l l l l l l l l l l l l EE
SRM
A 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.25 XJ SR 2.03 2.56 2.56 3.75 3.56 3.84 4.72 4.38 5.75 5.62 5.62 6.50
AA 0.50 SQ. 0.74 0.62 0.86 0.93 1.12 1.34 1.56 1.84 2.08 2.62 3.16 SRM 2.81 3.75 4.75 4.63 5.75 5.91 5.62
B 0.437 0.437 0.624 0.624 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.031 1.374 1.500 1.630 Y 0.72 0.78 0.97 0.97 1.19 1.62 1.50 1.94 1.84 2.09
CC 0.125 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.500 0.625 0.625 0.750 Z 0.125 0.157 0.157 0.251 0.251 0.251 0.251 0.376 0.376 0.376 0.376 0.500
D 0.25 0.38 0.38 7/16 0.50 1/2 5/8 ZJ SR 2.19 2.81 2.75 4.03 3.84 4.12 5.12 4.75 6.25 6.06 6.06 7.12
E 0.25 0.31 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.62 0.62 0.75 0.75 0.88 SRM 3.00 4.03 4.28 5.16 5.00 6.25 6.34 6.06
1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 l l l l l l l l l l l l l 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 KK #5-40 UNC #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 5/8-18 UNF KM 3/8-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 5/8-18 5/8-18 5/8-18 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-3/8-12 1-1/2-12 L 0.19 0.25 0.25 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.41 0.50 0.50 0.56 0.56 0.81 LB 1.94 2.91 4.19 PP 0.34 0.44 0.38 0.62 0.62 0.62 0.78 0.81 1.12 1.03 1.03 1.34 V 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.13 0.19
4 12 12 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 W
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
#10-32 #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 3/8 NPTF
0.31 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.06 1.19 1.19 1.38
D17
P1L
0.31
SRX
SRD SRDM
Std. Stroke (in)
Max SS Stroke Rod (in) Std
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Bore Sizes 9/16"* 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" * 2-1/2" * 3" *
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style DX

Drawing represents 1-1/2" bore size. For other sizes, reference art for DXP on previous page.

C086
Threaded Both Ends, Double Acting
ZJ PLUS STROKE W LB PLUS STROKE V B DIA. V AA
D
CC DIA.
C A
PILOT
KK D WRENCH FLATS KM MOUNTING NUT
EE Y
KM MOUNTING NUT
Bore 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2"
SR l l l l l l l l
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
Max Stroke (in) 12 12 32 32 32 32 32 32
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
l l l l l l l
Bore 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2"
A 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88
AA 0.74 0.62 0.86 0.93 1.12 0.34 1.56 2.08
B 0.437 0.437 0.624 0.624 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.374
C 0.25
CC 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.625
D 0.25 0.38 0.38 0.50
EE #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
KK
KM
#10-32 UNF 7/16-20 0.25 #10-32 UNF 7/16-20 0.25 1/4-28 UNF 5/8-18 0.34 1/4-28 UNF 5/8-18 0.34 5/16-20 UNF 5/8-18 0.34 7/16-20 UNF 3/4-16 0.41 7/16-20 UNF 3/4-16 0.31 1/2-20 UNF 1-1/4-12 0.56
LB SR SRM 1.94 2.91 3.00
V 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.12
W 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.19
Y 0.72 0.78 0.97 0.97 1.19 1.62 1.50
ZJ SR SRM 2.81 2.75 4.03 3.84 4.12 5.12 4.50 6.06
D18
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style KDX


C086
Threaded Both Ends, Double Acting, Double Rod

W A TT PLUS 2 TIMES STROKE LB PLUS STROKE V V B DIA. PILOT W PLUS STROKE AA A
Bore Sizes 7/16" 3/4"
CC DIA.
KK KM MOUNTING NUT WH
EE SE WH KM
MOUNTING NUT
KK
TT PLUS 2 TIMES STROKE LB PLUS STROKE W A CC DIA. EE B F WH

Bore 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3" Bore 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3" SR l l l l l l l l l l l D 0.25 0.38 0.38 7/16 0.50 1/2 5/8 EE #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 3/8 NPTF F 0.34 0.40 0.47 0.47 0.56 0.75 0.62 0.88 0.65 0.65 0.71 l l l l l l l l l l l l l SRM SRD SRDM Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 KK #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 7/16-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 5/8-18 UNF KM 7/16-20 7/16-20 5/8-18 5/8-18 5/8-18 3/4-16 3/4-16 1-14 1-1/2-12 1-1/4-12 1-3/8-12
DIA. PILOT
KK D WRENCH FLATS
F WH
KK D WRENCH FLATS KM MOUNTING NUT

A 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.25 SE 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.63 0.63 0.75 TT SR 2.81 2.94 4.00 3.91 4.00 5.56 5.12 6.56 6.56 6.56 7.31 SRM 3.19 4.00 4.53 5.59 5.38 6.56 6.84 6.56 AA 0.74 0.62 0.86 0.93 1.12 1.34 1.56 1.84 2.08 2.62 3.16 V 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.13 0.19 B 0.437 0.437 0.624 0.624 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.031 1.374 1.500 1.630 W 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.06 1.19 1.19 1.38
*No Mounting Nut
6 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 18 12 LB SR 2.06 2.19 3.00 2.91 2.75 3.81 3.38 4.44 4.19 4.19 4.56
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
0.188 0.188 0.250 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.500 0.625 0.625 0.750 WH 0.72 0.78 0.97 0.97 1.19 1.62 1.50 1.63 1.84 1.84 1.72 0.250
SRM 2.44 3.00 3.28 3.84 3.63 4.44 4.47 4.19
D19
P1L
Max Stroke (in)
SS Rod
CC
SRX
KM MOUNTING NUT
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
W PLUS STROKE V
AA
Bore Sizes 9/16" 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" * 2-1/2" * 3" *
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style KDXH


C086
Threaded Both Ends, Double Rod, Hollow Rod
D
W C A CC DIA. KK D WRENCH FLATS KM MOUNTING NUT Y V
TT PLUS 2 TIMES STROKE LB PLUS STROKE B DIA. PILOT V R W PLUS STROKE A AA
EE
F WH
FLATS KM MOUNTING NUT
KK D WRENCH
HOLE THRU PISTON ROD
AF DIA.
Bore 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" Bore 1-1/16" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4"
SR l l l l D 0.25 0.38 0.38 7/16
SRM l l l l EE 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
Std. Stroke (in) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 F 0.56 0.75 0.62 0.88 KK
Max Stroke (in) 12 12 12 12 KM LB SR 2.75 3.81 3.38 4.44
SS Rod N/A N/A N/A N/A
A 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 R 0.12 0.25 0.25
AA 1.12 1.34 1.56 1.84 TT SR 4.00 5.56 5.12 6.56 SRM 4.53 5.59 5.38 6.56
AF 0.187 0.250 0.250 0.328 V 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09
B 0.624 0.749 0.749 1.031 W 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.06
C 0.12 0.25 0.25
CC 0.312 0.437 0.437 0.500
5/16-24 UNF 5/8-18 7/16-20 UNF 3/4-16 7/16-20 UNF 3/4-16 1/2-20 UNF 1-14
SRM 3.28 3.84 3.63 4.44
WH 1.06 1.38 1.25 1.63
Y 1.19 1.62 1.50 1.63
D20
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style A


C086
Nose Mount, Spring Return, Head Adjustable Stroke
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE D WRENCH FLATS A CC DIA. DA KK R C NM MT AS PLUS CS FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE GW EE NPTF GH GM
BRASS BEARING AND STROKE ADJUSTER 4 SLOTS FOR MB MOUNTING BOLTS
D
TM RM
WRENCH FLATS X OP WIDE
Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l
SRM
Std. Stroke Stroke adjustment in 1" increments to 3": 1" stroke adjusts 0-1" 2" stroke adjusts 1-2" 3" stroke adjusts 2-3"
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 CS 1.69 1.56 2.00 OP 0.12
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 D 0.25 0.62 R 0.19 0.25 0.25 EE 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF RM 1.88 1.88 2.50 GH 0.81 0.81 1.00 TM 1.50 1.50 1.88 GM 1.38 1.38 1.78 X 1.69 1.56 2.00 GW 0.88 0.93 1.25 ZJ 3.12 3.63 4.00
A 0.50 0.50 0.75 KK 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF
AS 0.32 0.19 MB 0.250 0.250 0.250
C 1.19 1.25 1.25 MT 2.38 2.38 2.56
CC 0.250 0.312 0.437 NM 1.44 1.44 1.50
D21
P1L
SRX
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style RA


C086
Nose Mount, Spring Return, Cap Adjustable Stroke
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE W PLUS STROKE A V B DIA. PILOT

1.00 ADJUSTMENT
AA
Bore Sizes 3/4"
CC DIA. KK KM MOUNTING NUT SE WH EE
KP
MOUNTING NUT STROKE ADJUSTER
WRENCH FLATS
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE W PLUS STROKE R A CC DIA. KK D WRENCH FLATS KM MOUNTING NUT F EE E SE V B DIA. PILOT
1.00 ADJUSTMENT
AA
Bore Sizes 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
KP
MOUNTING NUT STROKE ADJUSTER
WRENCH FLATS
Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" 1-1/2"
SR l l l A 0.50 0.50 1.25
SRM
Std. Stroke Stroke adjustment in 1" increments to 3": 1" stroke adjusts 0-1" 2" stroke adjusts 1-2" 3" stroke adjusts 2-3" AS 1.69 0.32 0.19 KM 5/8-18 5/8-18 3/4-16 AA 0.86 1.12 1.56 SE 0.50 0.50 0.62 B 0.624 0.624 0.749 R 0.12 0.25
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 CC 0.250 0.312 0.437 V 0.09 0.09 0.09
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 D 0.25 0.38 W 0.53 0.50 0.88 E 0.34 0.50 0.62 WH 0.97 EE 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF X 2.69 2.56 2.00 F 0.56 0.62 ZJ 3.78 4.03 5.81
KK 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF
D22
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style AP


C086
Pivot Mount, Spring Return, Head Adjustable Stroke
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE

BRASS BEARING AND STROKE ADJUSTER
A CC DIA. KK RW
KM MOUNTING NUT L TD PIN D WRENCH FLATS EE
AA UT
Bore Sizes 3/4"
D
1.00 ADJUSTMENT
PP
XJ PLUS J FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE A CC DIA. KK DA WRENCH FLATS RW D WRENCH FLATS EE
1.00 ADJUSTMENT
KP
AA L TD PIN E UT
Bore Sizes 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
BRASS BEARING AND STROKE ADJUSTER
PP
KP
XJ PLUS J FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE
Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l A 0.50 0.50 0.75 KM 7/16-20 3/4-16
SRM
Std. Stroke Stroke adjustment in 1" increments to 3": 1" stroke adjusts 0-1" 2" stroke adjusts 1-2" 3" stroke adjusts 2-3" AA 0.86 1.12 1.56 CC 0.250 0.312 0.437 L 0.34 0.34 0.50 D 0.34 0.50 0.62 OP 0.25 PP 0.62 0.62 0.81 DA 0.25 0.38
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 E 0.38 0.38 0.62 RW 0.19 0.25 0.25
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 EE 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF TD 0.250 0.250 0.375 UT 0.75 0.75 1.00 J 1.69 1.56 2.00 X 1.69 1.56 2.00 KK 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF XJ 3.65 3.97 4.31 ZJ 3.93 4.25 4.69
KP 5/8-18 UNF 5/8-18 UNF
R 0.19 0.12 0.25
D23
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style BRN


C086
Rear Block Mount, Single Acting, Spring Return
D
AA DIA. CC DIA. KK D WRENCH FLATS
W C A
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE* V EE B DIA. PILOT SW E
E KM
2 S HOLES ON A BC DIA. BOLT CIRCLE
Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l l A 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.25 KK
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 AA 0.5 0.81 1.12 1.56 KM 3/8-24 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 6 B 0.374 0.499 0.624 0.749 SW 0.38 0.44 0.44 0.62 C 0.25 0.38 0.25 V
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 CC 0.188 0.250 0.312 0.437 W 0.31 0.62 0.88 0.88 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 X 0.94 1.69 1.81 2.00 E 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75 ZJ SR 1.62 2.31 2.81 3.06 SRM 2.56 3.06 3.31 EE #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
l l l
#10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF
0.05 0.09 0.09 0.09
D24
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style BRR


C086
Rear Block Mount, Single Acting, Spring Extend
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00 OF STROKE* W PLUS STROKE C PLUS STROKE A AA DIA. CC DIA. KK D WRENCH FLATS KM R V B DIA. PILOT EE E E
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
EE 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF ZJ SR 3.22 3.53 3.88 SRM 3.47 3.78 4.13
WH
2 S HOLES ON A BC DIA. BOLT CIRCLE
Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l A 0.75 0.75 1.25 KK
SRM l l l AA 0.86 1.12 1.56 KM 5/8-18 5/8-18 3/4-16
Std. Stroke (in) 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 B 0.624 0.624 0.749 R 0.25 0.25 0.25
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 BC 1.00 1.25 1.75 S #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-20 UNC V
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 C 0.25 0.38 0.25 W 0.75 0.88 0.88 CC 0.250 0.312 0.437 WH 0.97 1.06 1.25 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 X 2.69 2.81 3.00 E 1.00 1.25 1.75
1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF
0.09 0.09 0.09
D25
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style BFD


C086
Front Block Mount, Double Acting

A MB ZJ PLUS STROKE Q
Bore Sizes 5/16"
SB SQ.
CC DIA. HP F FH KK SB DB DIA. THRU (2 PLACES) EE ZJ PLUS STROKE CC DIA. A MB V HP DA

(2 HOLES)
EE
E AA DIA.
Bore Sizes 7/16"
SB B DIA. KK S HOLES ON A BC DIA. BOLT CIRCLE S HOLES ON A BC DIA. BOLT CIRCLE CC SB B

DIA.
CF
CP
EE PORT
OPPOSITE SIDE
EE J
ZJ PLUS STROKE W A R V MB HP J AA E DIA. FH EE

2 HOLES DRILLED & C'BORED FOR SC SCREWS. SO OPPOSITE SIDE
DIA.
Bore Sizes 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SB KK
F D WRENCH FLATS
Bore 5/16" 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 5/16" 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 5/16" 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l l l CF 0.31 KK
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4
Max Stroke (in) 4 12 12 12 12 DA #8-32 R 0.25 DB 0.11 S #8-32 UNC #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-20 UNC
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 3 E 0.38 0.62 0.88 0.88 SB 0.50 SQ 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75
A 0.38 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.25 EE #10-32 #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF SC #10-32 #10-32 1/4-20
AA 0.50 0.81 1.12 1.56 F 0.41 0.88 1.16 1.53 SO 1/4-20 UNC 1/4-20 UNC 5/16-18 UNC
B 0.437 0.624 0.750 1.00 FH 0.59 0.31 0.38 0.62 0.88 V 0.062 0.093 0.093 0.125 W 0.34 0.47 0.38
BC 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75 HP 0.34 0.44 0.62 0.81 1.12
CC 0.125 0.188 0.250 0.312 0.437 J 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 ZJ SR 1.72 2.12 3.22 3.75 4.19 SRM 3.22 3.91 4.44
l l l CP 0.44
1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 Q 0.36
MB 0.71 0.88 1.12 1.41 1.88
#5-40 UNC #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF
D26
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style BRD


C086
Rear Block Mount, Double Acting
ZJ PLUS STROKE C A
DIA. CC DIA.
W V B DIA. PILOT EE SB SW SB
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
KK #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF ZJ SR 2.44 3.78 4.00 4.38 SRM 3.78 4.16 4.63
AA
KK D WRENCH FLATS KM
S HOLES ON A BC DIA. BOLT CIRCLE
Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l l A 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.25 KM
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 AA 0.74 0.86 1.12 1.56 S #8-32 UNC #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-20 UNC B 0.437 0.624 0.624 0.749 SB 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75
Max Stroke (in) 12 12 12 12 BC 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75 SW 0.38 0.44 0.44 0.62
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 C 0.25 0.38 0.25 V 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.09 CC 0.188 0.250 0.312 0.437 W 0.43 0.75 0.88 0.88 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 Y 0.72 1.22 1.44 1.47 EE #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
l l l
7/16-20 UNF 5/8-18 UNF 5/8-18 UNF 3/4-16 UNF
D27
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style BFN


C086
Front Block Mount, Single Acting, Spring Return
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH

.50" OF STROKE
SB
CC DIA. A
MB V HP
DA (2 HOLES) E AA DIA.
Bore Sizes 7/16"
SB
B
DIA.
CF
KK S HOLES ON A BC DIA. BOLT CIRCLE S HOLES ON A BC DIA.

BOLT CIRCLE
CP ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE* W V A MB HP
EE PORT J
Bore Sizes 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
CC SB
DIA.
J AA E DIA.
DIA.
SB KK
FH D
WRENCH FLATS
EE
2 HOLES DRILLED & C'BORED FOR SC CAP SCREWS. SO OPPOSITE SIDE
Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l l A 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.25 HP 0.44 0.62 0.81 1.12
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 B 0.437 0.624 0.750 1.00 KK #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF BC 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75 MB 0.88 1.12 1.41 1.88
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 6 CC 0.188 0.250 0.312 0.437 S #8-32 UNC #10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4 UNC CF 0.31 SB 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 CP 0.44 SC D 0.22 0.25 0.38 SO DA #8-32 UNC V 0.062 0.093 0.093 0.125 E 0.38 0.62 0.88 0.88 W 0.34 0.47 0.38 EE #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF X 0.94 1.69 1.81 2.00 FH 0.31 0.38 0.62 0.88 ZJ SR 1.94 2.66 3.38 3.69 SRM 2.91 3.63 3.94
l l l AA 0.50 0.81 1.12 1.56 J 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25
#10-32 1/4-20 UNC #10-32 1/4-20 UNC 1/4-20 5/16-18 UNC
D28
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style BFR


C086
Front Block Mount, Single Acting, Spring Extend
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE* S HOLES ON A BC DIA. BOLT CIRCLE W PLUS STROKE R CC SB
DIA. DIA.
MB V HP J E AA DIA. FH EE F
2 HOLES DRILLED & C'BORED FOR SC CAP SCREWS. SO OPPOSITE SIDE
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
HP 0.62 0.81 1.12 ZJ SR 2.56 3.12 3.69 SRM 2.81 3.37 3.94 J 0.19 0.25
SB KK
D WRENCH FLATS
Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l A 0.75 0.75 1.25 KK
SRM l l l AA 0.81 1.12 1.56 MB 1.12 1.41 1.88
Std. Stroke (in) 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 B 0.624 0.750 1.00 R 0.25 0.25 0.25 BC 1.00 1.25 1.75 S
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 CC 0.250 0.312 0.437 SB 1.00 1.25 1.75
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 SC #10-32 #10-32 1/4-20 E 0.88 SO 1/4-20 UNC 1/4-20 UNC 5/16-18 UNC EE 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF V 0.093 0.093 0.125 F 0.88 1.16 1.53 W 0.34 0.47 0.38 FH 0.38 0.62 0.88 X 2.69 2.81 3.00
1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF
#10-32 UNF #10-32 UNF 1/4-20 UNC
D29
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style TRN


C086
Rear Trunnion Mount, Single Acting, Spring Return
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE* V EE B DIA. PILOT SW
C CC DIA. A
TD DIA.
AA
DIA.
SB UT TL XJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE KM SB
KK D WRENCH FLATS
Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l l A 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.25 SB 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 6 C 0.25 0.38 0.25 TL 0.50 0.38 0.38 0.38 UT 1.25 1.75 2.00 2.50 CC 0.188 0.250 0.312 0.437
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 V 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.09 W 0.32 0.62 0.88 0.88 EE #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF X 0.94** 1.69 1.81 2.00 KK #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF XJ SR 1.38 1.94 2.44 2.56 SRM 2.19 2.69 2.81 SR 1.62 2.31 2.81 3.06 KM 3/8-24 UNF 1/2-20 UNF 5/8-18 UNF 3/4-16 UNF ZJ SRM 2.56 3.06 3.31
l l l AA 0.50 0.81 1.12 1.56 SW 0.38 0.44 0.44 0.62
B 0.374 0.499 0.624 0.749 TD 0.374 0.500 0.500 0.500
* To determine lengths for half inch stroke increments, determine length for next highest whole number stroke and subtract one half inch. ** For each 0.50" of stroke.
D30
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style TRR


C086
Rear Trunnion Mount, Single Acting, Spring Extend
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE* W PLUS STROKE V

C PLUS STROKE
R CC DIA. AA
DIA.
B DIA. PILOT EE
TD DIA.
D
SB UT
KM KK D WRENCH FLATS Y XJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE WH SB
TL
Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l A 0.75 0.75 1.25 R 0.25 0.25 0.25
SRM l l l AA 0.86 1.12 1.56 SB 1.00 1.25 1.75
Std. Stroke (in) 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 B 0.624 0.624 0.749 TD 0.500 0.500 0.500 TL 0.38 0.38 0.38 C 0.25 0.38 0.25
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 CC 0.250 0.312 0.437 UT 1.75 2.00 2.50 V 0.09 0.09 0.09
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 W 0.75 0.88 0.88 EE 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF WH 0.72 0.68 1.25 X 2.69 2.81 3.00 KK 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF XJ SR 2.85 3.15 3.38 SRM 3.10 3.40 3.63 SR 3.22 3.53 3.88 KM 1/2-20 UNF 5/8-18 UNF 3/4-16 UNF ZJ SRM 3.47 3.78 4.13
D31
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style TFD


C086
Front Trunnion Mount, Double Acting
ZJ PLUS STROKE
W TD DIA. CC
DIA.
MB V A
UT SB
B
DIA.
E AA
DIA.
TL
SB KK
XJ D WRENCH FLATS
EE
Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l l A 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.25 MB 0.88 1.12 1.41 1.88
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 AA 0.50 0.81 1.12 1.56 SB 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75 B 0.437 0.624 0.750 1.000 TD 0.374 0.500 0.500 0.500
Max Stroke (in) 12 12 12 12 CC 0.188 0.250 0.312 0.437 TL 0.250 0.38 0.38 0.38 UT 1.25 1.75 2.00 2.50
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 V 0.062 0.093 0.093 0.125 E 0.38 0.62 0.88 0.88 W 0.34 0.47 0.38 EE #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF XJ 0.31 0.69 1.09 1.31 J 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 KK #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF ZJ SR 2.12 3.22 3.75 4.19 SRM 3.22 3.91 4.44
l l l
D32
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style TRD


C086
Rear Trunnion Mount, Double Acting
ZJ PLUS STROKE W C A V B DIA. PILOT EE AA

DIA.
SW
TD DIA.
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
SRM 3.78 4.16 4.63
SB UT CC DIA. KM KK Y XJ PLUS STROKE SB TL
D WRENCH FLATS
Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l l A 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.25 SB 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 AA 0.74 0.86 1.12 1.56 B 0.437 0.624 0.624 0.749 TD 0.374 0.500 0.500 0.500 TL 0.25 0.38 0.38 0.38
Max Stroke (in) 12 12 12 12 C 0.25 0.38 0.25 UT 1.25 1.75 2.00 2.50 CC 0.188 0.250 0.312 0.437 V 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.09
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 W 0.38 0.75 0.88 0.88 EE #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF XJ SR 2.19 3.41 3.62 3.88 SRM 3.41 3.62 4.13 KK #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF Y 0.72 1.22 1.44 1.47 KM 7/16-20 UNF 5/8-18 UNF 5/8-18 UNF 3/4-16 UNF ZJ SR 2.44 3.78 4.00 4.38
l l l
SW 0.38 0.44 0.44 0.62
D33
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style TFN


C086
Front Trunnion Mount, Single Acting, Spring Return
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE* W MB V CC

DIA.
TD DIA. A
UT SB TL SB
B
DIA.
E AA
DIA.
XJ KK D WRENCH FLATS
EE
Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 7/16" 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l l A 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.25 MB 0.88 1.12 1.41 1.88
SRM
Std. Stroke (in) 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2, 3 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 AA 0.50 0.81 1.12 1.56 B 0.437 0.624 0.750 1.000 TD 0.374 0.500 0.500 0.500 TL
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 6 CC 0.188 0.250 0.312 0.437 UT 1.25 1.75 2.00 2.50
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 3 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 V 0.062 0.093 0.093 0.125 E 0.38 0.62 0.88 0.88 W 0 0.34 0.47 0.38 EE #10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF X 0.94** 1.69 1.81 2.00 XJ 0.31 0.69 1.09 1.31 J 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 KK #10-32 UNF 1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF ZJ SR 1.94 2.66 3.38 3.69 SRM 2.91 3.63 3.94
l l l
SB 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.75
0.25 0.38 0.38 0.38
* To determine lengths for half inch stroke increments, determine length for next highest whole number stroke and subtract one half inch. ** For each 0.50" of stroke
D34
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Mounting Style TFR


C086
Front Trunnion Mount, Single Acting, Spring Extend
ZJ PLUS X FOR EACH 1.00" OF STROKE* W PLUS STROKE TD DIA. C A CC DIA. UT SB TL SB KK B

DIA.
MB V
D
E AA
DIA.
F XJ PLUS STROKE D WRENCH FLATS
EE
Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2"
SR l l l A 0.75 0.75 1.25 KK
SRM l l l AA 0.81 1.12 1.56
Std. Stroke (in) 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 B 0.624 0.750 1.000 SB 1.00 1.25 1.75
Max Stroke (in) 6 6 6 C 0.25 0.25 0.25 TD 0.500 0.500 0.500 TL 0.38 0.38 0.38
SS Rod Std 3 3 3 CC 0.250 0.312 0.437 UT 1.75 2.00 2.50 D 0.22 0.25 0.38 V 0.093 0.093 0.125 E 0 0 0.88 W 0.34 0.47 0.38 X 2.69 2.81 3.00 F 0.88 1.16 XJ 0.69 1.09 1.31 EE 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF ZJ SR 2.56 3.12 3.69 SRM 2.81 3.37 3.94 J 0.25
MB 1.12 1.41 1.88
1/4-28 UNF 5/16-24 UNF 7/16-20 UNF
D35
P1L
SRX
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Catalog 0900P-4
Air Reservoirs Mounting Style AR Air Reservoirs

Air Reservoirs installed can significantly reduce the pulsation of a system. In addition air reservoirs can be used as a means to store energy. Caution should always be used when storing energy. Air reservoirs if installed in the correct location and sized correctly can temporarily increase the flow of an actuator or cylinder. As always never exceed the rated pressure of the cylinder.

C086
How To Order SR Series Air Reservoirs
.75
AR
Mounting AR Air Reservoir
SR
2.00
Length Specify in inches. See table below.
Bore Size* .75 1.06 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3"
Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3"
Standard Lengths 1" increments to 4" 1" increments to 8" 1" increments to 16" 1" increments to 16" 1" increments to 16" 1" increments to 16"
Max Length 32" 32" 32" 32" 32" 32"
Volume (in3) 0.39 plus 0.44 per inch length 0.99 plus 0.89 per inch length 1.91 plus 1.77 per inch length 4.22 plus 3.14 per inch length 7.04 plus 4.91 per inch length 9.90 plus 7.07 per inch length
Dimensions
ZJ PLUS LENGTH J J E
EE
(BOTH ENDS)
AA
Bore 3/4" 1-1/16" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3"
AA 0.813 1.125 1.56 2.08 2.62 3.16
E 0.625 0.88 0.88 1.25 1.75 2.00
EE 1/8" NPTF 1/8" NPTF 1/8" NPTF 1/4" NPTF 1/4" NPTF 1/4" NPTF
J 0.19 0.19 0.250 0.312 0.312 0.312
ZJ 1.938 2.375 2.250 2.875 2.875 3.190
D36
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Bumpers
Bumpers are available at extra cost except where noted as standard. Add the following dimensions to the overall cylinder length by bore

C086
SR Bumper Adder
SR Series Bore Size 5/16" * * * N/A 7/16" 0.062" 0.125" 0.188" 0.250" 9/16" 0.062" 0.062" 0.125" 0.125" 3/4" 0.125" 0.125" ** ** 7/8" * * * * 1-1/16" 0.125" 0.125" 0.125" 0.500" 1-1/4" * * * * 1-1/2" ** ** 0.125" 0.125" 1-3/4" * * * * 2" 0.125" 0.125" 0.250" 0.250" 2-1/2" N/A N/A 0.250" 0.250" 3" N/A N/A N/A N/A
Cylinder Type Spring Return Spring Extend Double Acting K-type
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
*Bumpers are furnished as standard and do not affect overall length.
**Bumpers do not affect overall length.
SRM Bumper Adder

Cylinder Type Spring Return Spring Extend Double Acting K-type SRM Series Bore Size 9/16" 0.062" 0.062" 0.125" 0.125" 3/4" 0.125" 0.125" 0.250" 0.312" 1-1/16" 0.125" 0.125" 0.250" 0.250" 1-1/4" 0.125" 0.125" 0.250" 0.250" 1-1/2" 0.125" 0.125" 0.250" 0.250" 1-3/4" * * * * 2" 0.125" 0.125" 0.250" 0.250" 2-1/2" N/A N/A 0.250" 0.250"
Available on all bore sizes at extra cost. Not available on SRM or SRDM series.
Stainless Steel Piston Rods
Corrosion resistant stainless steel is the standard piston rod material for all bore sizes up to and including 1-1/2 inch bore at no additional cost. The only exception to the stainless steel standard is when a hollow rod, KDXH option is specified. Stainless steel is also the standard material on block, trunnion, hex/non-rotating and KDX mounts. Stainless steel is available on other sizes for an additional charge.
Rod Wiper
SR/SRM Series cylinders can be fitted with a rod wiper that is specially designed to prevent contaminants from clinging to the piston rod and damaging the piston rod seal. Available in 3/4", 1-1/16", and 1-1/2" bores, the piston rod wiper can be added to the SR/SRM and SRD/SRDM series.
D37
P1L
Fluorocarbon Seals
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Adjustable Cushion Option

Cushions can be selected on nine bore sizes, ranging from 0.75" bore to 3.0" bore with mounting styles D, front nose mount, and DXP, rear pivot mount. Adjustable cushions are not available with double rod SR Series cylinders.

C086
Cushion Adjusting Needle Valves
The fine-thread cushion needle valves make precise adjustment quick and easy. The needle valve is fully captured to allow for safe cushion adjustment while cylinder is pressurized. The brass needle valves are corrosion resistant. The standard position for needle valve adjustments is position 1, 90 from the port. See port location table for SR Series Cylinders.
D
Check Seal Cushion
The Check Seal system offers excellent cushioning efficiency and long cushion seal life. This seal is specifically designed for cushion applications and has a long proven history in our products. Extensive side by side testing of the check seal in SR Series cylinders significantly outlasted and outperformed competitors o-ring shaped seals. The Check Seals unique geometry exhibits the dynamic sealing capabilities of a lipseal. As the cushion sleeve enters the Check Seal at the end of stroke, the Check Seal blocks the air from exhausting directly through the port and forces the air through the adjustable needle valve orifice. The exhaust airflow is precisely metered to control the desired rate of deceleration of the cylinder piston. During stroke reversal, the check valve action of the Check Seal induces a fast out-of-cushion response. The Check Seal floats forward in the retainer groove as the cushion sleeve exits the Cushion Seal, thereby creating a path for maximum air flow around the Check Seal to access the piston face. The quick response of the Check Seal design yields faster cycle times and increased productivity.
Critical Mounting Dimensions for SR Series and SRM Cylinders with Adjustable Cushions
In most cases, cylinder mounting dimensions are not affected when cushions are specified. Standard catalog dimensions apply when cushions are specified at either end of a DXP mount and when specified at the head end only of a D mount. The only exception to standard catalog dimensions is when a cushion is specified on the cap end or both ends of a D mount. Please consult Table A for the critical mounting dimensions on D mount SR and SRM cylinders with cushions both ends or cushions cap end only. Table B shows the cushion lengths for SR and SRM cylinders. Table A: Critical Mounting Dimensions for D Mount SR and SRM Cylinders with Cushions Both Ends or Cushions Cap End Only.
Bore Size .75 .88 1.06 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.50 3.00 SR Dimensions A + Stroke 3.40 3.25 3.49 4.31 4.12 5.25 5.06 5.06 5.69 B 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.38 0.31 0.42 0.47 0.47 0.53 SRM Dimensions A + Stroke 3.40 N/A 3.65 4.34 4.37 5.25 5.34 5.06 N/A B 0.28 N/A 0.28 0.38 0.31 0.42 0.47 0.47 N/A
A + STROKE B
D Mount
Table B: Cushion Lengths for SR and SRM Cylinders.
Bore Size .75 .88 1.06 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.50 3.00 Head 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.875 0.875 0.875 0.875 Cap 0.625 0.625 06.25 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.750 0.750 1.000
D38
Catalog 0900P-4
Accessories Piston Rod Clevis

Assembly includes pin and (2) Retainer Rings and (1) Jam Nut. Part Number L071300025 Bore 5/16

C086
A #5-40 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 5/8-18
B .31 .38 .50 .50 .75 .75 1.00
C .44 .75 .94 .94
D .56 .94 1.19 1.19
E .38 .56 .68 .68 .94 .94
F .11 .12 .16 .19 .25 .31 .38
G #5-40 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 5/8-18
H .12 .19 .25 .25 .38 .38 .50
J .13 .19 .25 .25 .38 .38 .50
K .31 .38 .50 .50 .75 .75
L .50 .56 .69 .69 1.03 1.03
L071300100 7/16, 9/16 L077130100* L071300200 L077130200* L071300300 L077130300* L071300400 L077130400* L071300500 L077130500* L071300600 3/4, 7/8 1-1/16 1-1/4, 1-1/2 1-3/4, 2, 2-1/2 3
1.31 1.69 1.31 1.69
2.25 2.75 1.50
1.00 1.38
* Stainless Steel for use with SRD/SRDM cylinders.
D
Pivot Brackets
H
Part Number L071310100 L071310200 L071310300
Bore 7/16 3/4, 7/8, 1-1/16 1-1/2
A .76 1.19
B .56 .88
C .75 1.12
D .50 .75
E .12 .19 .25
F .06 .12 .12
G .19 .27 .27
H .20 .31 .38
J .160 .255 .380
K .28 .44 .62
L .50 .81 1.00
M .12 .25 .25
1.75 1.38 1.50 1.00
Pivot Bracket Assembly

Assembly includes pin and (2) Retainer Rings.
Part Number L071320025 L071320100 L077150100*
Bore 5/16 7/16, 9/16
A .53 .76
B .40 .56 .88 .88
C .62 .75 1.12 1.12
D .38 .50 .75 .75
E .12 .12 .19 .19 .25 .25 .25
F .04 .06 .12 .12 .25 .25 .25
G 16 .19 .27 27 .27 .27 .27
H .12 .19 .30 .30 .37 .37 50
J .12 .156 .250 .250 .375 .375 .50
K .26 .34 .38 .50 .62 .75 .88
L .91
M .36 1.34
.22 .38 .38 .44 .44 .62
L071320300 L071320400 L077150400*
1-1/4 1-1/2, 1-3/4
1.18
1.38 2.14 2.00 2.88 2.12 3.00 2.62 3.88
1.75 1.38 1.50 1.00
L071320500 2, 2-1/2 1.75 1.38 1.50 1.00 L077150500*

5/16" Bore Only
L071320600
2.25 1.75 1.75 1.25
SR Series Trunnion Brackets

Select brackets for SR Series Trunnion Mount Cylinders from the table below. (Note: Trunnion Brackets are ordered as a separate item from the cylinder.)
H Rad. K L J Dia. A
Part Number L076600100 L076600200

C
Bore Sizes 7/16 3/4, 11/16, 1-1/2
A 1.75 1.75
B 1.38 1.38
C 1.50 1.50
D 1 1
E .25 .25
F .25 .25
G .27 .27
H .38 .38
J .375 .500
K .69 .69
L 1.12 1.12
M .37 .37
M K L
F B
D39
P1L
L071320200 3/4, 7/8, 1.18 L077150200* 1-1/16
1.25 2.00
SRX
.18
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Catalog 0900P-4
Accessories Foot Brackets

Part Number L073790016 L073790023 L073790024 L073790028 L077160028* L073790032 L073790040 L077160040* L073790048 L077160048* L073790102 L073790124 L077160124* Bore 5/16 5/16 7/16 7/16, 9/16 3/4 3/4, 7/8, 1-1/16 1-1/4, 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3 A 1.00 1.00 1.38 1.38 1.62 1.88 2.50 3.00 3.12 3.75 4.37

C086
B .37 .37 .62 .62 .75 1.00 1.50 1.50 1.62 1.62 1.62
C .25 .25 .31 .38 .44 .56 .75 .87 1.00 1.00 1.00
D .13 .13 .19 .19 .19 .27 .27 .35 .34 .35 .35
E .37 .37 .50 .50 .62 .75 .94 1.12 1.12 1.44 1.75
F .31 .31 .31 .38 .41 .56 .75 .91 1.00 1.25 1.25
G .25 .38 .38 .44 .50 .63 .75 1.03 1.38 1.51 1.64
H .75 .75 .88 .94 1.09 1.38 1.75 2.16 2.50 3.00 3.14
J .06 .06 .07 .09 .10 .12 .12 .19 .25 .25 .25
K .44 .44 .56 .56 .69 .81 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 1.89
L .12 .12 .12 .12 .19 .25 .38 .50 .62 .75 .89
D
Mounting Nut
L073790132 L073790140
Part Number L073800200 L073800400 L073800500 L077170500* L073800600 L073800800 L077170800* L073800900 L077170900* L073801100 L073801200 L077171200* L073801400 L073801500
Bore 5/16 5/16, 7/16 7/16, 9/16 3/4 3/4, 7/8, 1-1/16 1-1/4, 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/2 3
A .44 .56 .69 .75 .94 1.12 1.50 1.88 2.06 2.25
B .16 .22 .25 .31 .38 .42 .55 .50 .78 .84
C 1/4-28 3/8-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-3/8-12 1-1/2-12
D40
Stainless Steel Body Air Cylinders with Continuous Position Feedback
SRX Series
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Contents Features ........................................................................... D42 Cylinder Ordering Information .......................................... D43 Specifications .................................................................. D44 Engineering Specifications ............................................... D45 Dimensions ................................................................D46-D50 Mechanical Accessories ................................................... D51 Connector Options............................................................ D52 Electrical Accessories ...............................................D53-D55 Controller Ordering Information ........................................ D56
D41
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Stainless Steel Body Air Cylinders SRX Series

C086
Piston Rod Hard chrome-plated piston rod polished to a 6-10 Ra surface finish with an anodized steel male rod stud for long seal life and minimal surface drag.
Cylinder Body 304 Stainless Steel cylinder body rated for non-lube service resists corrosion and minimizes maintenance.
LRT LRT can be easily removed for maintenance, saving cost of purchasing a new cylinder.
Bushing Oil impregnated bronze rod bushing provides maximum bearing surface area, minimal mod deflection and long service life.
Seals Standard "LipSeal" piston and rod seal provides maximum sealing capability and long life. Optional low friction piston seal is available.
Connector Optional "flying lead" or 3-pin connector allows maximum flexibility for the end user.
Outboard Rod Seal Minimizes dirt and contaminant migration into the cylinder.
Optional Bumpers Buna-N bumpers reduce noise and provide cushioning for the most demanding applications.
Unitized Construction Precision double-rolled unitized construction provides durable, leak proof service and long life.
End Caps Precision machined aluminum end caps provide excellent corrosion resistance and smooth breakaway.
D42
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Ordering Information 1.50"

Bore Size 1.06" 1.50" 2.00" 2.50" 3.00" Mounting Style D Nose Mount DXP Front Block Mount BFD Nose and Pivot Mount Connector Style P F Plug Flying Leads

C086
DXP
SRX
6.00"
Stroke Stroke in inches
Piston B Bumper* Leave blank if not required. Seals F Low Friction Leave blank if not required. 3 Non-Standard Rod Dimension Non-Standard Dimension Leave blank if special rod end dimension is not required.
NOTE: For non-standard / special rod ends, see below.
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Special S Special Leave blank if special modification is not required.
* Incorporating Bumpers adds 1/4" of overall length to the cylinder.
Non-standard Rods
For non-standard rod dimensions, or undersized rod end threads, put a 3 in model number and describe the rod using the letters shown in the drawing. It is necessary to specify only those dimensions that are non-standard.
Full Diameter Rod End Threads

LE A W AM* CC C V* CC
Undersized Rod End Threads

LE W AM* A C V*
B* D WRENCH FLATS D WRENCH FLATS KM*
B*
MM*
MM* KM*
*Requires an S designation in model number.
D43
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications General Specifications

Bore Sizes: 1-1/16", 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2", 3" Rod Sizes: 0.38" 0.75" Rod Ends: Standard Male Mounts: Nose Mount (D) Front Block Mount (BFD) Nose and Pivot Mount (DXP) Rated Air Pressure: 150 PSI Air Standard Temperature: 40F to 160F Strokes: Available in any practical stroke length up to 24"
Stainless Steel Body Air Cylinders SRX Series Available Mountings

C086
Style D Nose Mount
Style BFD Front Block Mount
Bumpers: Optional
Style DXP Nose and Pivot Mount
Theory of Operation
OUTPUT SIGNAL (White) GROUND (Black) INPUT VOLTAGE (Red)
STROKE = RETRACTED; OUTPUT VOLTAGE = 0 VOLTS (APPROX.) STROKE = EXTENDED; OUTPUT VOLTAGE = MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE (APPROX.)
The SRX Series Linear Resistive Transducer (LRT) is a position sensor that uses a resistive element, and wiper assembly, to provide a continuous analog output signal relative to the cylinders position. The LRT is a single element type linear potentiometer, with two independent elements mounted on either side of an anodized aluminum extrusion. The LRT operates as a voltage divider by creating a short between the wiper extrusion and the wiper assembly. The position of the wiper changes the resistive load proportionally to its position along the stroke length of the cylinder. Supplying a 5 to 24VDC voltage energizes the LRT. As the cylinder travels through its range of stroke, the resistive load
changes, thus causing a proportional voltage output change of the LRT. The output voltage, at the endpoint of cylinder stroke, is dictated by the input voltage applied across the device. The probe is mounted into the cap end of the cylinder and inserted into the hollow piston rod assembly. When replacing the probe, care must be taken to align the wiper block with the profile of the LRT extrusion. Please review the above schematic and cutaway drawing for reference purposes.
D44
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Specifications MLRT

Repeatability: 0.001" (interface electronics dependent) Non Linearity: 1% of Full stroke (18" stroke max.) Resolution: Infinite Signal Input: 5 to 24 VDC Signal Output (w/o controls): DC ratiometric voltage* Signal Output (w/controls): Maximum Speed: Rated Life of MLRT: Pressure Rating: Resistance Rating:

C086
0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA
50" per second 500 Million inches of wiper travel 150 psi 1,000 Ohms per inch 20% SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
L078320000 L078320001 L078320002 L078320003 L078320004 L078320005 L078320006 L078320007 L078320008 L078320009
Temperature Rating: +400 F to +1650F
Connection Options: 6" Flying leads or 3-pin nano connector

*1 Mega Ohm impedance interface device suggested for limiting sensor current if the controller is not used.
MLRT Circuit Diagram
OUTPUT SIGNAL (White) GROUND (Black) INPUT VOLTAGE (Red)
STROKE = RETRACTED; OUTPUT VOLTAGE = 0 VOLTS (APPROX.) STROKE = EXTENDED; OUTPUT VOLTAGE = MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE (APPROX.)
MLRT Replacement Kits

For each MLRT replacement kit order, please specify the part number listed below along with the cylinder stroke length and quantity. A Service Bulletin is included with each kit. MLRT with Flying Leads Part #L07831 Example: L07831, 6" Stroke, Qty. 1 MLRT with Plug Connector Select part number from table Example: L078320000, 4" Stroke, Qty. 1 Bore 1-1/16" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" Mount D, BFD DXP D, BFD DXP D, BFD DXP D, BFD DXP D, BFD DXP Plug Connector MLRT Kit Part Number
D45
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions - 1-1/16" Bore Cylinders Style D

C086
4.59 PLUS STROKE 1.75 1.06 .31 .63 .38 .08 .85 .44 .36 1.31
3/8-24 UNF-2A .31 FLATS 7/8-14 UNF-2A
1/8 NPTF PORTS .87 PILOT 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE
1.09
Style DXP
5.44 PLUS STROKE 5.06 PLUS STROKE 4.59 PLUS STROKE .47 .85 1.75 1.06 .31 .63 .08 .44 .36 .08 .31 1.31 .61
.38 3/8-24 UNF-2A .31 FLATS 7/8-14 UNF-2A 1/8 NPTF PORTS .87 PILOT .87 PILOT 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE 7/8-14 UNF-2A 1.09
Style BFD
4.59 PLUS STROKE 2.03 .75 .31 .63 1.38 .38 3/8-24 UNF-2A .31 FLATS 1/8 NPTF PORTS .33 C'BORE x .22 DEEP TYP. (4 HOLES FOR #10 S.H.C.S.) 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE 1.09 .88 .88 .85 .44 .36 1.38 1.31
D46
Catalog 0900P-4

C086
4.88 PLUS STROKE 1.72 1.13 .31 .88 .09 .84 .44 .36 1.57
.50
7/16-20 UNF-2A .44 FLATS 1-1/8-12 UNF-2A
1/4 NPTF PORTS 1.12 PILOT 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE
1.36
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Style DXP
5.91 PLUS STROKE 5.44 PLUS STROKE 4.88 PLUS STROKE .56 .84 1.72 1.13 .31 .88 .09 .44 .36 .09 .38 1.57 .74
.50
7/16-20 UNF-2A .44 FLATS 1-1/8-12 UNF-2A
1/4 NPTF PORTS 1.12 PILOT 1.12 PILOT 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE
1.36 1-1/8-12 UNF-2A
Style BFD
2.00 1.68 .69 .31 .88
4.88 PLUS STROKE .84 .44 1.25 .36
.75
1.75 1.57
1.75 .50 7/16-20 UNF-2A .44 FLATS
1/4 NPTF PORTS .41 C'BORE x .25 DEEP TYP. (4 HOLES FOR 1/4 S.H.C.S.) 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE
1.36
D47
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions - 2" Bore Cylinders Style D

2.09 1.38 .38 1.00 .11

C086
5.72 PLUS STROKE
.90 .50 .42 2.08
.63 1/2-20 UNF-2A
D
Style DXP
.50 FLATS 1-1/4-12 UNF-2A
1.62
6.88 PLUS STROKE 6.38 PLUS STROKE 5.72 PLUS STROKE .66 2.09 1.38 .38 1.00 .44 .11 .90 .50 .42 .11
2.08 .86
.63 1/2-20 UNF-2A .50 FLATS 1-1/4-12 UNF-2A 1/4 NPTF PORTS 1.25 PILOT 1.25 PILOT 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE 1.62 1-1/4-12 UNF-2A
Style BFD
.75 .38 1.00
5.72 PLUS STROKE 2.41 1.87 1.00 1.44 .90 .50 .42
2.25 2.08
2.25 .63 1/2-20 UNF-2A .50 FLATS 1/4 NPTF PORTS .58 C'BORE x .39 DEEP TYP. (4 HOLES FOR 3/8 S.H.C.S.) 1.62 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE
D48
Catalog 0900P-4

2.28 1.50 .44 1.25 .13

C086
6.41PLUS STROKE 1.12 .56 .49 2.62
.75 5/8-18 UNF-2A .63 FLATS 1-3/8-12 UNF-2A 3/8 NPTF PORTS 1.37 PILOT 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE 2.13
D
Style DXP
7.78 PLUS STROKE 7.16 PLUS STROKE 6.41 PLUS STROKE .75 1.12 2.28 1.50 .44 1.25 .13 .56 .49 .13 .50 2.62 .99
.75 5/8-18 UNF-2A .63 FLATS 1-3/8-12 UNF-2A
3/8 NPTF PORTS 1.37 PILOT 1.37 PILOT 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE
2.13 1-3/8-12 UNF-2A
Style BFD
.88 .44 1.25
6.41 PLUS STROKE 2.72 2.25 1.25 1.12 .56 .49 2.75 2.62
1.88
2.75 .75 5/8-18 UNF-2A .63 FLATS 3/8 NPTF PORTS .67 C'BORE x .45 DEEP TYP. (4 HOLES FOR 7/16 S.H.C.S.) 2.13 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE
D49
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions - 3" Bore Cylinders Style D

C086
6.78 PLUS STROKE 2.53 1.69 .44 1.25 .13 1.19 .63 .56 3.16
.75
5/8-18 UNF-2A .63 FLATS 1-1/2-12 UNF-2A 3/8 NPTF PORTS 1.62 PILOT 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE 2.44
Style DXP
8.22 PLUS STROKE 7.60 PLUS STROKE 6.78 PLUS STROKE .81 1.19 .44 1.25 2.53 1.69 .13 .63 .55 .13 3.16 .99
.50 .75 5/8-18 UNF-2A .63 FLATS 1-1/2-12 UNF-2A 1.62 PILOT
2.44 1-1/2-12 UNF-2A
Style BFD
2.91 1.38 6.78 PLUS STROKE 2.25 1.19 .63 .55 3.25 3.16
.94 .44 1.25
3.25 .75 5/8-18 UNF-2A .63 FLATS .77 C'BORE x .52 DEEP TYP. (4 HOLES FOR 1/2 S.H.C.S.) 3/8 NPTF PORTS 6" LEADS FROM LRT PROBE 2.44
D50
Catalog 0900P-4
Mechanical Accessories Piston Rod Clevis

A THD. B

C086
Part Number L071300350 L071300400
Bore 1-1/16 1-1/2 2 2-1/2, 3
A 3/824 7/1620 1/220 5/818
B .63 .75 .88 1.00
C 1.38 1.31 1.88 2.25
D 1.69 1.69 2.31 2.75
E .94 .94 1.31 1.50
F .22 .25 .31 .38
G 3/824 7/1620 1/220 5/818
H .31 .38 .44 .50
J .32 .38 .45 .51
K .63 .75 .88 1.00
L .88 1.03 1.14 1.38
C D F E J G NUT H DIA. PIN K L
L071300550 L071300600
Pivot Brackets
Part Number
H RAD. K L J DIA. G KL G D E M C BA F
Bore 1-1/16 1-1/2 2
A 1.31 1.63 1.81
B 1.00 1.25 1.38 1.63
C 1.31 1.63 1.81 2.13
D .81 1.00 1.19 1.38
E .25 .31 .31 .38
F .16 .19 .25 .25
G .28 .34 .34 .41
H .31 .38 .44 .50
J .315 .378 .440 .503
K .56 .69 .75 .88
L .88 1.13 1.19 1.38
M .28 .31 .38 .38
L071310400 L071310500 L071310600
D
L071310700 2-1/2, 3 2.13
Pivot Brackets
Part Number
K G N L M F AB E C D H J PIN DIA.
Bore 1-1/2 2
D .81
E .25 .31 .31 .38
F .16 .19 .25 .25
G .28 .34 .34 .41
H .31 .38 .44 .50
J .312 .375 .437
K .62 .75 .88
N .31 .44 .44 .50
L071320250 L071320350 L071320450
1-1/16 1.31 1.00 1.31
1.75 2.38 2.13 3.00 2.38 3.25
1.63 1.25 1.63 1.00 1.81 1.38 1.81 1.19
L071320550 2-1/2, 3 2.13 1.63 2.13 1.38
.500 1.00 2.75 3.75
Foot Brackets
A D E F RAD. E G DIA. H K L J B C
Part Number L073790056 L073790108 L073790116 L073790125 L073790140
Bore 1-1/16 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3
A 2.13 2.75 3.00 3.75 4.38
B 1.16 1.44 1.59 1.88 1.62
C .66 .81 .91 1.06 1.00
D .28 .35 .35 .41 .35
E .75 1.00 1.19 1.50 1.75
F .75 .94 1.06 1.19 1.25
G .88 1.13 1.26 1.38 1.64
H 1.75 2.19 2.44 2.81 3.14
J .16 .19 .22 .25 .25
K 1.00 1.25 1.38 1.63 1.89
L .38 .38 .44 .50 .89
Mounting Nut
A B
Part Number L073801000 L073801300 L073801200 L073801400 L073801500

C UNF-2B
Bore 1-1/16 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3
A 1.31 1.69 1.88 2.06 2.25
B .48 .61 .50 .78 .84
C 7/814 1-1/812 1-1/412 1-3/812 1-1/212
D51
Catalog 0900P-4
Connector Options 3-pin Nano Connector

C086
Wire Color
Wires Input Ground Output 6" Leads Red Black White Plug Option Brown Blue Black
Connectors
Cable Length 5 meters 2 meters Threaded Straight Connector 086620T005 086620T002 Threaded Right Angle Connector 086620R005 086620R002
Straight Connector
L 1.24 .17 .30
.17
Right-angle Connector
L 1.05 .73
.30
.22
.13
.40
.40
.13
.22
D52
Catalog 0900P-4
Electrical Accessories Dual Set Point Controller, Part #149344000__

C086
5.50
Model Number 1493440002 1493440003 1493440004 1493440005 Input Specifications 120 VAC 120 VAC 12-24 VDC 12-24 VDC Output Specifications 0-10 V 4-20 mA 0-10 V 4-20 mA
POWER
SET 2
SET 1
POWER NEUTRAL
OFFSET CYL GROUND ANALOG OUT
ANALOG GND
GAIN RELAY 1 ARM
RELAY 2 ARM
CYL OUTPUT
POWER LINE
RELAY 1 NO
RELAY 2 NO
RELAY 1 NC
RELAY 2 NC
CYL INPUT
0.19
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM P P1L
1.31
5.00 4.50 3.25
Dual Set Point Controller Specifications, Part #149344000__

Power Input Requirements ...................... 12 to 24 VDC, 0.1 amps, or 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.1 amps Output specifications Set Point ............. Relay (2) 2 amps @ 24 VDC or 120 VAC Output Specifications Scaleable ........... 0 to 10 V, 1 mA max. output current (10K ohm impedance min.) 4 to 20mA, into 500-ohm max. impedance Maximum Zero Offset .............................. 50% of cylinder stroke Minimum Span Range ............................. 50% of cylinder stroke Enclosure Dimensions ............................. 1.31" h x 5.50" w x 3.25" d Electronics Temperature Operating Range .............+40F to +160F
Please reference Parker Bulletin #0971-G-B2 for information regarding programming and operation of this controller. D53
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Electrical Accessories
(See page D56 for complete ordering instructions)
87.0

C086
CDRO Panel Meter Controller Dimensions, Part #149345 _ _ _ _
D
91.6 95.8 137.2 15.0
SP1
47.8
SP2 SP3 SP4
43.4
Prog.
41.1
5.3
116.9
11.9
CDRO Panel Meter Controller Specifications, Part #149345 _ _ _ _

Power Input Requirements ...................... High voltage, 85 265 VAC, or 95 370 VDC Low voltage, 15 48 VAC, OR 10 72 VDC Relay Output Options .............................. One 5A Form A Relay Dual 5A Form A Relays Four 5A Form A Relays Analog Output Specification .................... Isolated, 16-bit Current Output; 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA (Scaleable) Isolated, 16-bit Voltage Output; 0 10 VDC (Scaleable) Accuracy: 0.02% over Full Scale Resolution: 1/45,000 Update Rate: 7 Readings per second Internal Resolution .................................. 16 Bits Operating Temperature Range ................ 0 50C, +32F to +122F Warm-up Time ......................................... 10 Minutes Numerical Display.................................... Digital, 4 digits Display Range ......................................... -1,999 to +9,999 Setpoints.................................................. Setpoint 1 activates Relay 1 Setpoint 2 activates Relay 2 Setpoint 3 activates Relay 3 Setpoint 4 activates Relay 4 NEMA Rating ........................................... 4 (with cover, Part #087861000)
Please reference Parker Bulletin #0971-B1 for information regarding programming and operation of this controller. D54
Catalog 0900P-4
Electrical Accessories
(See page D56 for complete ordering instructions)

C086
CDBRO 101 Segment Bargraph Controller Dimensions, Part #149346 _ _ _ _
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
CDBRO 101 Segment Bargraph Controller Specifications, Part #149346 _ _ _ _

Power Input Requirements ...................... High voltage, 85 265 VAC, or 95 370 VDC Low voltage, 15 48 VAC, OR 10 72 VDC Relay Output Options .............................. One 5A Form A Relay Two 5A Form A Relays Dual 10A Form C & Dual 5A Form A Relays Analog Output Specification .................... Isolated, 16-bit Current Output; 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA (Scaleable) Isolated, 16-bit Voltage Output; 0 10 VDC (Scaleable) Accuracy: 0.02% over Full Scale Resolution: 1/45,000 Update Rate: 7 Readings per second Internal Resolution .................................. 16 Bits Operating Temperature Range ................ 0 50C, +32F to +122F Warm-up Time ......................................... 10 Minutes Vertical Display ........................................ VRR 101 Segment, Red LED Vertical Bar Graphic Display VTR 101 Segment, Tri-color Vertical Bar Graphic Display Annunciators............................................ Six, red LEDs on front panel; one annunciator per setpoint Numerical Display.................................... Digital, 4 digits Display Range ......................................... -1,999 to +9,999 Setpoints.................................................. Setpoint 1 activates Relay 1 Setpoint 2 activates Relay 2 Setpoint 3 activates Relay 3 Setpoint 4 activates Relay 4 NEMA Rating ........................................... 4 (with cover, Part #087867000)
Please reference Parker Bulletin #0971-B2 for information regarding programming and operation of this controller. D55
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Controller Ordering Information

C086
Ordering Code for CDRO Panel Meter Controller 1 4 9 3 4 5
Relay Output X R1 R2 R4 No Relay Output Single 5A Form A Relay Dual 5A Form A Relays Four 5A Form A Relays Analog Output
D
Notes: 15.0 1) Input requires a 3-wire potentiometer 1 kOhm min. (0 to 100.0). 2) See page D54 for complete electrical and dimensional specifications. 41.1
137.2
X C V
No Analog Output Isolated 16-bit Current Output, 4-20 mA Isolated 16-bit Voltage Output, 0-10 VDC
Power Supply 1 2 85-265 VAC / 95-370 VDC 18-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC
116.9 11.9 Ordering Code for CDBRO 101 Segment Bargraph Controller
6
Display
R T
Red LED Vertical Bargraph with 4-digit Red DPM Tri-color LED Vertical Bargraph with 4-digit Red DPM Power Supply 1 2 85-265 VAC / 95-370 VDC 18-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC Analog Output X C V No Analog Output Isolated 16-bit Current Output, 4-20 mA Isolated 16-bit Voltage Output, 0-10 VDC Relay Output X 1 2 3 No Relay Output Single 10A Form C Relay Dual 10A Form C Relays Dual 10A Form C & Single 5A Form A Relays Dual 10A Form C & Dual 5A Form A Relays Single 10A Form C & Dual 5A Form A Relays Single 10A Form C & Single 5A Form A Relays
Notes: 1) Input requires a 3-wire potentiometer 1 kOhm min. (0 to 100.0). 2) See page D55 for complete electrical and dimensional specifications.
4 5 6
D56
P1L Series
High Performance Repairable Pneumatic Cylinder
D
Features ........................................................................... D58 Ordering Information......................................................... D59 Specifications ................................................................... D60 Technical Information........................................................ D61 Dimensions ................................................................D62-D81 Mounting Brackets .....................................................D82-D85 Mounting Kits .............................................................D86-D88 Rod End Accessories ....................................................... D89 Mounting Kits & Accessories ............................................ D90
D57
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
High Performance Repairable Cylinder P1L Series

C086
Optional Piston Magnet Located under wear band, piston magnet is used for through-thebarrel sensors for electronic piston position indication. Does not add length to the piston. Z-Profile Piston Seal Dynamic nitrile piston seal features two rounded micro sealing edges for maximum wear compensation and rounded grooves for retaining lubrication. Dual lipseal for 40mm to 100mm bore sizes. High Strength Rod Bearing PTFE-coated bronze rod bearing is inboard of rod seal. Long rod bearing provides rigid support of piston while minimizing bearing stress. Rounded Lip Rod Wiper Seal Non-lube, urethane rod seal provides dual function as rod seal and rod wiper to eliminate leakage and prevent contamination from entering the cylinder. Ports Optional NPTF or BSPT ports provide full air flow to piston.
Aluminum Piston with UltraWide Nylon Wear Band Piston is permanently sealed and locked to rod with anaerobic adhesive. Ultra wide wear band prevents metal-to-metal contact and distributes piston loads across wide bearing area. Adjustable Cushion Option Available for high speed applications, it features fine-thread, brass needle valves with a captive design.
Bumpers Impact resistant urethane bumpers are standard for all bore sizes to provide noise reduction and impact resistance
Cylinder Body
Four Standard Piston Rod Ends Inch or metric with male or female to meet a variety of requirements.
Tapped Mounting Holes Inch or metric holes provide flush mounting from the head or cap face. Standard mounting kits can be bolted-on for adapting to a wide range of applications. Piston Rod Ground, polished hard chrome plated steel piston rod. Stainless steel is standard on 20 and 25mm bore. Smooth rod surface finish provides minimum friction and maximum seal life.
Smooth anodized aluminum tube provides wear-resistant surface. Clean tubular design eliminates area where contamination can accumulate.
Threaded End Cap Construction Precision-machined, aluminum alloy end caps are black anodized and removable from either end for easy cylinder repair. Construction minimizes cylinder size and weight.
D58
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information P1L N 032 D M N

C086
0200
N M
Construction1 Inch Mounting Threads Metric Mounting Threads Bores (mm) 020, 025, 032, 040, 050, 063, 080, 100
Rod Material Carbon Steel (std on 32-100mm bores) Stainless (std on 20-25mm bores)
D K
Function Double Acting, Single Rod Double Acting, Double Rod
N M F Y
N B
Port Type1 NPT Threads4 BSPT Threads5
B W /
Version 3 Basic With Options Special
Minimum and Maximum Stroke Length for Standard P1L Cylinders

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Min. Stroke (mm) 2 2 2 4 5 7 4 4 Max. Stroke (mm) 6 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Notes: 1 When selecting inch or metric construction, be advised that the piston rod end and porting thread will coincide with the mounting thread selected as the standard for the basic cylinder. For example, selecting M in the construction field will automatically provide a metric male piston rod end and BSPT ports as standard. 2 Not available with fluorocarbon seal option. 3 If cylinder contains no options, then use B as the last digit in the model code. The last 4 boxes are used only when W or / appears in this field. 4 Standard with Inch Construction 5 Standard with Metric Construction 6 Please consult factory for availability of stroke lengths longer than those listed.
For sensor part numbers and specifications, see the Electronic Sensors Section. D59
P1L
Stroke Specify in mm
SRX
N T
Seal Material Standard Seals Fluorocarbon
N J H B A F G E D
Mounting Style No Mountings Fitted (Std.) Front Flange Rear Flange Single Rear Clevis Double Rear Clevis Foot, Front & Rear Nose Mount Front Trunnion Rear Trunnion
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Cushions/Magnetic Piston No Cushion, No Magnetic Piston No Cushion, Magnetic Piston2 Cushioned Both Ends, No Magnetic Piston Cushioned Both Ends, Magnetic Piston2
N 6 5 9 3
Rod End Style1 Inch Male4 Metric Female Metric Male5 Inch Female Special
Catalog 0900P-4
General Specifications Specifications

Bore Sizes: 20 to 100mm (3/4" to 4") Rod Diameters: 8 to 32mm (5/16" to 1-1/4") Rod Ends: Four Standard, specials to order Bumpers standard on both ends Adjustable Cushions provided at both ends as an option Single End or Double End Mounting Mounting Styles: 9 standard Rated Air Pressure: 10 bar (145 psi) Non-Lube Strokes available in any practical stroke length Standard Temperature: -23C to + 74C (- 10F to + 165F) Optional High Temp Service: -23C to +121C (-10F to +250F)*
High Performance Repairable Cylinder P1L Series Cylinder Weights

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Base (Lb) 0.24 0.35 0.55 0.9 1.58 2.19 4 6.75 0.06 0.08 0.11 0.17 0.25 0.28 0.41 0.59
C086
Per 25mm of Stroke (Lb)
* Option intended for limited exposure to temperatures over +80C or +176F. This option is primarily for applications which subject the cylinder to fluids that have an adverse effect on external seals.
Available Mountings
STYLE N Basic No Mounts
STYLE B Single Rear Clevis
STYLE A Double Rear Clevis
STYLE F Foot Mount
STYLE J Front Flange
STYLE H Rear Flange
STYLE E Front Trunnion
STYLE D Rear Trunnion D60
STYLE G Nose Mount

Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Information Theoretical Push and Pull Forces in lbs.

Bore mm 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Rod Diameter mm 0 8 0 10 0 12 0 16 0 20 0 20 0 25 0 32 Action Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Effective Area in2 0.5 0.4 0.8 0.6 1.2 1.1 1.9 1.6 3.0 2.6 4.8 4.3 7.8 7.0 12.2 10.93

C086
Operating Pressure (PSI) 40 19 16 30 26 50 43 78 65 122 102 193 174 312 281 487 437 60 29 24 46 38 75 64 117 98 183 153 290 261 467 422 730 656 80 39 33 61 51 100 86 156 131 243 204 386 348 623 562 974 874 100 49 41 76 64 125 107 195 164 304 256 483 434 779 703 1217 1093 125 61 51 95 80 156 134 243 204 380 320 604 543 974 879 1522 1366
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
100
Use the graphs below to determine whether a cylinder will adequately decelerate a load without damage to the cylinder. Find the point on the graph where the piston rod speed intersects the weight of the load. Any cylinder bore size above the intersect point will adequately decelerate the load at that speed.
10 9 8
10 9 8
v e l o c i t y F P S
7 6 5 4 3
v e l o c i t y F P S
7 6 5 4 3
5 6 7 8 910
20
30 40
10
50
Weight (lb)
20 Bore 25 Bore 32 Bore 40 Bore 50 Bore
Weight (lb)
63 Bore 80 Bore 100 Bore
Note: Cushions are recommended for applications with cylinder velocities exceeding 1 ft/sec.
D61
20 mm through 40 mm Bores
50 mm through 100 mm Bores
P1L
SRX
Cushioning Capacity Charts
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic No Mount Dimensions Style N Basic No Mount

C086
ZB+STROKE LB+STROKE Y WF P+STROKE EE PORT (2) PLACES
Typical 20 to 100 mm Bore without air cushion

DD THREAD x BG DEEP (8) PLACES
MM
V R N
With adjustable air cushion - 20 to 25 mm bores

GA
GC
G
GB GD
GH
With adjustable air cushion - 32 to 100 mm bores (feature a flush-fit cushion adjustment screw)
GC
G
Rod End Details

MALE THREADS Inch Male - Style N Metric Male - Style 5
A LAF WF V
KF
FEMALE THREADS Inch Female - Style 9 Metric Female - Style 6
A WF V
KK
NA
MM
NA
MM
D WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS
SPECIAL ROD END THREADS

Thread Style 3 Special Metric or Inch threads, extension, blank, etc., are also available. To order, specify Style 3 and give desired dimensions for KK or KF, A and LAF or WF. If otherwise special, supply a dimensioned sketch.
D62
B V
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic No Mount Dimensions

C086
Metric Dimensions Envelope and Mounting Dimensions (mm)

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 13 13 19 19 22 22 38 48 B +0 -0.02 12 14 18 25 30 32 40 50 DD M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M5x0.8 M6x1 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75 BG (Depth) 7 7.6 7.6 12 16 16 22 22 D 6 8 10 12 16 16 20 26 E 27 32 39 48.5 59 72 90 110 EE 1/8* 1/8* 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 Thread KK Style 5 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 M26 x 1.5 Thread KF Style 6 M5 x 0.80 M6 x 1.00 M8 x 1.25 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M16 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 LAF 26 29 41 41 52 52 69 79 MM Rod Dia. 8 10 12 16 20 20 25 32 N 24 29 36 44 55 69 86 106 NA 11 14 18 18 23 30 R 14 16.5 20 26 32 38 50 60 V 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 WF 13 16 22 22 30 30 31 31
Y 28 30 40 42 53 53 59 57
*Ports are M5 for cushioned versions
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Add Stroke LB 69 69 71 78 90 90 108 108 P 45 46 43 49 53 52 64 66 ZB 83 86 95 102 122 122 142 142
Adjustable Air Cushion Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 GA 33 35 GB 14 14 GD

Hex
GC 13-1/2 15-1/2 10-1/2 10-1/2 10-1/2 15-1/2 15-1/2 15-1/2
G 25-1/2 20-1/2 30-1/2 22-1/2 23-1/2 20-1/2 25-1/2 25-1/2
GH 20.5 23
EE M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
Cushion Length 9 9 10 12 15 15 15 15
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
8 8
Inch Dimensions Envelope and Mounting Dimensions (inch)

Bore Size 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Ports
A 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 1.50 1.88
B +0 -0.001 0.472 0.551 0.709 0.984 1.181 1.260 1.575 1.968
DD (UNF) 8-32 10-32 10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 1/2-20
BG (Depth) 0.28 0.30 0.30 0.47 0.63 0.63 0.88 0.88
D 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.47 0.63 0.63 0.79 1.02
E 1.06 1.26 1.53 1.91 2.32 2.83 3.54 4.33
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
KK KF (UNF) (UNF) Style N Style 9 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 3/4-16 1-14 #10-32 1/4-28 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16
LAF 1.00 1.12 1.63 1.63 2.07 2.07 2.72 3.11
MM Rod Dia. 0.315 0.394 0.472 0.630 0.787 0.787 0.984 1.260
N 0.94 1.14 1.42 1.73 2.17 2.72 3.39 4.17
NA 0.43 0.55 0.71 0.71 0.91 1.18
R 0.55 0.65 0.79 1.02 1.26 1.50 1.97 2.36
V 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.12 0.12
WF 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.19 1.19 1.22 1.22
Y 1.10 1.18 1.57 1.65 2.09 2.09 2.32 2.24
7/16-20 5/16-24
are 10-32 for cushioned versions
Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Add Stroke LB 2.70 2.70 2.78 3.06 3.53 3.53 4.25 4.25 P 1.77 1.81 1.69 1.93 2.09 2.05 2.52 2.60 ZB 3.28 3.40 3.74 4.02 4.80 4.80 5.59 5.59
Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Adjustable Air Cushion GA 1.30 1.38 GB 0.55 0.55 GD Hex 0.31 0.31 GC 13-1/2 15-1/2 10-1/2 10-1/2 10-1/2 15-1/2 15-1/2 15-1/2 G 25-1/2 20-1/2 30-1/2 22-1/2 23-1/2 20-1/2 25-1/2 25-1/2 GH 0.81 0.91 EE 10-32 UNF 10-32 UNF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 3/8 NPTF 1/2 NPTF Cushion Length 0.35 0.35 0.39 0.47 0.59 0.59 0.59 0.59
D63
P1L
Thread
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Single Rear Clevis Dimensions Style B Single Rear Clevis

C086
Typical 20 to 100 mm Bore
XC+STROKE LB+STROKE Y WF P+STROKE EE PORT (2) PLACES G L M
CD (PIN O.D.)
MM
CE
SB HOLE V CM CY CW CN CX CZ
CT CH
ZX + STROKE
Mounting Bracket
Note: Mating Mounting Bracket and Pin must be ordered as separate items
Rod End Details

MALE THREADS Inch Male - Style N Metric Male - Style 5 FEMALE THREADS Inch Female - Style 9 Metric Female - Style 6
LAF A WF V KF
A WF V
KK
NA
MM
NA
MM
D WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS

D64
Catalog 0900P-4
Single Rear Clevis Dimensions

C086

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 13 13 19 19 22 22 38 48 B
+0 - 0.02
CD h9 6.35 6.35 6.35 9.52 9.52 9.52 19.07 19.07
D 6 8 10 12 16 16 20 26
E 27 32 39 48.5 59 72 90 110
EE (BSPT) 1/8* 1/8* 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
G 7 8 15.5 10 12 13 15 17
Thread KK Style 5 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 M26 x 1.5
Thread KF Style 6 M5 x 0.80 M6 x 1.00 M8 x 1.25 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M16 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5
L 18 17 27 22 23 23 35 43
LAF 26 29 41 41 52 52 69 79
M 7 7 10 10 11 11 19 19
MM Rod Dia. 8 10 12 16 20 20 25 32
NA 11 14 18 18 23 30
V 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
WF 13 16 22 22 30 30 31 31
Y 28 30 40 42 53 53 59 57
12 14 18 25 30 32 40 50
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
CE 35.5 38 41.5 59 64.5 80 96 115
CH 22 22 22 35 35 44 51 60
CM 5 5 5 6 6 6 13 13
CN 10 10 13 16 19 19 28 32
CT 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
CW 29 29 29 38 38 38 64 70
CX 32 32 35 47 54 54 72 76
CY 19 19 19 25 25 25 38 44
CZ 51 51 54 67 76 76 104 108
SB 7 7 7 7 7 7 11 14
Add Stroke LB 69 69 71 78 90 90 108 108 P 45 46 43 49 53 52 64 66 XC 99 102 120 122 143 143 173 189 ZX 120 123 141 151 172 172 218 240
D
* Ports are M5 for cushioned versions

Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
A 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 1.50 1.88
B
+0 - 0.001
CD
+0 - 0.002
D 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.47 0.63 0.63 0.79 1.02
E 1.06 1.26 1.53 1.91 2.32 2.83 3.54 4.33
EE (NTPF) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
G 0.26 0.27 0.57 0.36 0.43 0.46 0.54 0.64
Thread KK Style N 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 3/4-16 1-14
Thread KF Style 9 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16
L 0.70 0.68 1.07 0.88 0.91 0.91 1.38 1.69
LAF 1.00 1.12 1.63 1.63 2.07 2.07 2.72 3.11
M 0.28 0.28 0.39 0.38 0.44 0.44 0.75 0.75
MM Rod Dia. 0.315 0.394 0.472 0.630 0.787 0.787 0.984 1.260
NA
WF
0.472 0.551 0.709 0.984 1.181 1.260 1.575 1.968
0.250 0.250 0.250 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.751 0.751
0.08 0.50 1.10 0.08 0.62 1.18
0.43 0.08 0.88 1.57 0.55 0.08 0.88 1.65 0.71 0.08 1.19 2.09 0.71 0.08 1.19 2.09 0.91 0.12 1.22 2.32 1.18 0.12 1.22 2.24 Add Stroke
CE 1.39 1.49 1.63 2.31 2.52 3.17 3.77 4.54
CH 0.87 0.87 0.87 1.38 1.38 1.75 2.00 2.37
CM 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.50 0.50
CN 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.62 0.75 0.75 1.09 1.25
CT 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
CW 1.13 1.13 1.13 1.50 1.50 1.50 2.50 2.75
CX 1.25 1.25 1.38 1.86 2.12 2.12 2.84 3.00
CY 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.50 1.75
CZ 2.00 2.00 2.12 2.62 3.00 3.00 4.09 4.25
SB 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.42 0.55
LB 2.70 2.70 2.78 3.06 3.53 3.53 4.25 4.25
P 1.77 1.81 1.69 1.93 2.09 2.05 2.52 2.60
XC 3.91 4.00 4.72 4.81 5.63 5.63 6.82 7.44
ZX 4.74 4.83 5.55 5.94 6.76 6.76 8.57 9.44
Ports are 10-32 for cushioned versions
D65
Catalog 0900P-4
Double Rear Clevis Dimensions Style A Double Rear Clevis

Y WF

C086
LB+STROKE P+STROKE EE PORT (2) PLACES CD (PIN O.D.) L RR CZ C CB CB
MM
D
XC+STROKE ZD+STROKE
TY TW
TX TV TZ SB HOLE (4) PLACES
Mounting Bracket
Style A Double Rear Clevis

LB+STROKE Y WF P+STROKE EE PORT (2) PLACES L RR TZ CZ C CD (PIN O.D.)
MM
V TY TW XC+STROKE
CB
CX TX TV SB HOLE (4) PLACES
ZD+STROKE
Note: Mating Mounting Bracket and Pin must be ordered as separate items.
Mounting Bracket
Rod End Details

LAF A WF V
A WF V

Thread Style 3 Special Metric or Inch |threads, extension, blank, etc., are also available. To order, specify Style 3 and give desired dimensions for KK or KF, A and LAF or WF. If otherwise special, supply a dimensioned sketch.
B
KF
KK
NA
MM
NA
D WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS
D66
TH
MM
TE
TH
TE
Catalog 0900P-4
Double Rear Clevis Dimensions

C086

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 13 13 19 19 22 22 38 48 B
+0 -0.02
C 14 16.5 20 26 32 38 50 60
CB 3 3 4.5 4.5 6 8 11 12
CD
d9
CZ 29 33 40 49 60 74 56 64
CX 28 32
D 6 8 10 12 16 16 20 26
E 27 32 39 48.5 59 72 90 110
EE (BSPT) 1/8* 1/8* 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
Thread KK Style 5 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5
Thread KF Style 6 M5x0.80 M6x1.00 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M16x1.5 M20x1.5
L 14 16 20 22 25 30 35 43
LAF 26 29 41 41 52 52 69 79
MM Rod Dia. 8 10 12 16 20 20 25 32
NA 11 14 18 18 23 30
RR 11 13 15 18 20 22 18 22
V 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
WF 13 16 22 22 30 30 31 31
12 14 18 25 30 32 40 50
8 10 12 14 16 18 18 22
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
SB 5.5 5.5 7 7 9 11 11 13.5
TY 28 28 28 30 36 46 45 60
TV 35 39 49 58 72 90 110 130
TE 38 45.5 54 63.5 79 96 100 120
TH 25 30 35 40 50 60 55 65
TX 16 20 22 30 36 46 85 100
TW 42 42 48 56 64 74 72 93
TZ 43.4 48 59.4 71.4 86 105.4 64 72
Y 28 30 40 42 53 53 59 57
Add Stroke LB 69 69 71 78 90 90 108 108 P 45 46 43 49 53 52 64 66 XC 95 100 113 122 145 150 174 182 ZD 116 121 137 150 177 187 232.5 258.5
D

Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Ports
B
+0 -0.001
CB
CD
-0.001 -0.003
CZ
CX
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
Thread KK (UNF) Style N 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 3/4-16 1-14
Thread KF (UNF) Style 9 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16
LAF MM NA
RR
WF
0.50 0.472 0.55 0.12 0.50 0.551 0.65 0.12 0.75 0.709 0.79 0.18 0.75 0.984 1.02 0.18 0.88 1.181 1.26 0.25 0.88 1.260 1.50 0.31 1.50 1.575 1.97 0.43 1.88 1.968 2.36 0.47
0.315 1.14 0.394 1.30 0.472 1.57 0.551 1.93 0.630 2.36 0.709 2.91
0.24 1.06 0.31 1.26 0.39 1.53 0.47 1.91 0.63 2.32 0.63 2.83
0.55 1.00 0.315 0.63 1.12 0.394
0.43 0.08 0.50 0.51 0.08 0.62
0.79 1.63 0.472 0.43 0.59 0.08 0.88 0.87 1.63 0.630 0.55 0.71 0.08 0.88 0.98 2.07 0.787 0.71 0.79 0.08 1.19 1.18 2.07 0.787 0.71 0.87 0.08 1.19 1.38 2.72 0.984 0.91 0.71 0.12 1.22 1.69 3.11 1.260 1.18 0.87 0.12 1.22 Add Stroke LB 2.70 2.70 2.78 3.06 3.53 3.53 4.25 4.25 P 1.77 1.81 1.69 1.93 2.09 2.05 2.52 2.60 XC 3.75 3.95 4.45 4.81 5.70 5.90 6.85 7.17 ZD 4.58 4.78 5.39 5.91 6.96 7.36 9.15 10.18
0.709 2.20 1.10 0.79 3.54 0.866 2.52 1.26 1.02 4.33
SB 0.22 0.22 0.28 0.28 0.35 0.43 0.43 0.53
TY 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.18 1.42 1.81 1.77 2.36
TV 1.39 1.55 1.93 2.28 2.83 3.54 4.33 5.12
TE 1.50 1.79 2.13 2.50 3.11 3.78 3.94 4.72
TH 0.98 1.18 1.38 1.57 1.97 2.36 2.17 2.56
TX 0.63 0.79 0.87 1.18 1.42 1.81 3.35 3.94
TW 1.66 1.66 1.88 2.20 2.52 2.91 2.83 3.66
TZ 1.71 1.89 2.34 2.81 3.38 4.15 2.52 2.83
Y 1.10 1.18 1.57 1.65 2.09 2.09 2.32 2.24
D67
Catalog 0900P-4
Foot Mount Dimensions Style F Foot Mount

C086
LB+STROKE Y WF P+STROKE EE PORT (2) PLACES
AT
MM
AE
AH
SB SLOT
TF UF
SW
SU SS+STROKE
SU
E SW
Rod End Details

LAF A WF V
KF
A WF V
KK
NA
MM
NA
MM
D WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS

D68
Catalog 0900P-4
Foot Mount Dimensions

C086

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 13 13 19 19 22 22 38 48 AE 36.5 38.5 46.5 51 72 83.5 101 121 SU 14 14 19 18 25 25 28.5 30 AH 20.6 20.6 25.4 25.4 38.1 44.5 55 65 SW 11 11 19 20 16 16 14 16 AT 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 B
+0 -0.02
D 6 8 10 12 16 16 20 26
E 27 32 39 48.5 59 72 90 110 UF 48 48 63.5 63.5 79 95 125 150
EE (BSPT) 1/8* 1/8* 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 V 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
G 6 6.5 6.5 7 11 12 12 13
Thread KK Style 5 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 WF 13 16 22 22 30 30 31 31
Thread KF Style 6 M5x0.80 M6x1.00 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 Y 28 30 40 42 53 53 59 57
LAF 26 29 41 41 52 52 69 79
MM Rod Dia. 8 10 12 16 20 20 25 32
NA 11 14 18 18 23 30
SB 7 7 7 7 9 9 11 14
12 14 18 25 30 32 40 50 TF 38 38 48 48 57 73 100 120
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
A 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 1.50 1.88
AE 1.44 1.52 1.83 2.02 2.84 3.29 3.98 4.76
AH 0.81 0.81 1.00 1.00 1.50 1.75 2.17 2.56
AT 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
B
+0 -0.001
D 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.47 0.63 0.63 0.79 1.02
E 1.06 1.26 1.53 1.91 2.32 2.83 3.54 4.33
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
G 0.20 0.22 0.22 0.25 0.41 0.44 0.44 0.50
LAF 1.00 1.12 1.63 1.63 2.07 2.07 2.72 3.11
MM 0.315 0.394 0.472 0.630 0.787 0.787 0.984 1.260
NA 0.43 0.55 0.71 0.71 0.91 1.18
SB 0.27 0.27 0.28 0.28 0.34 0.34 0.43 0.55
0.472 0.551 0.709 0.984 1.181 1.260 1.575 1.968
SU 0.56 0.56 0.75 0.72 1.00 1.00 1.12 1.18
SW 0.44 0.44 0.75 0.78 0.62 0.62 0.55 0.63
TF 1.50 1.50 1.88 1.88 2.24 2.88 3.94 4.72
UF 1.88 1.88 2.50 2.50 3.12 3.75 4.92 5.91
V 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.12 0.12
WF 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.19 1.19 1.22 1.22
Y 1.10 1.18 1.57 1.65 2.09 2.09 2.32 2.24
Add Stroke LB 2.70 2.70 2.78 3.06 3.53 3.53 4.25 4.25 P 1.77 1.81 1.69 1.93 2.09 2.05 2.52 2.60 SS 3.82 3.82 4.28 4.50 5.53 5.53 6.49 6.61
D69
P1L
SRX
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
LB 69 69 71 78 90 90 108 108
Add Stroke P 45 46 43 49 53 52 64 66
SS 97 97 109 114 140 140 165 168
Catalog 0900P-4
Front Flange Dimensions Style J Front Flange

C086
ZB+STROKE FB HOLE (4) PLACES Y V EE PORT (2) PLACES LB+STROKE P+STROKE
MM
UF
TF
B V W F WF
TF UF
Rod End Details

LAF A WF V
KF
A WF V
KK
NA
MM
NA
MM
D WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS

D70
Catalog 0900P-4
Front Flange Dimensions

C086

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 13 13 19 19 22 22 38 48 B
+0 -0.02
D 6 8 10 12 16 16 20 26
E 27 32 39 48.5 59 72 90 110
EE (BSPT) 1/8* 1/8* 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
F 6 7 7 8 9 9 11 14
FB 5.5 5.5 7 7 9 11 11 14
LAF 26 29 41 41 52 52 69 79
MM Rod Dia. 8 10 12 16 20 20 25 32
NA 11 14 18 18 23 30
TF 28 32 38 46 58 70 82
UF 40 44 53 61 76 92 104
V 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
WF 13 16 22 22 30 30 31 31
W 7 9 15 14 21 21 20 17
Y 28 30 40 42 53 53 59 57
12 14 18 25 30 32 40 50
100 128

Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 1.50 1.88 B
+0 -0.001
D 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.47 0.63 0.63 0.79 1.02
E 1.06 1.26 1.53 1.91 2.32 2.83 3.54 4.33
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
F 0.24 0.28 0.28 0.31 0.35 0.35 0.43 0.55
FB 0.22 0.22 0.28 0.28 0.35 0.43 0.43 0.55
LAF
MM Rod Dia.
NA
TF
UF
WF
0.472 0.551 0.709 0.984 1.181 1.260 1.575 1.968
1.00 0.315 1.12 0.394
1.10 1.57 0.08 0.50 0.26 1.10 1.26 1.73 0.08 0.62 0.34 1.18
1.63 0.472 0.43 1.50 2.09 0.08 0.88 0.60 1.57 1.63 0.630 0.55 1.81 2.40 0.08 0.88 0.57 1.65 2.07 0.787 0.71 2.28 3.00 0.08 1.19 0.84 2.09 2.07 0.787 0.71 2.76 3.62 0.08 1.19 0.84 2.09 2.72 0.984 0.91 3.23 4.09 0.12 1.22 0.79 2.32 3.11 1.260 1.18 3.94 5.04 0.12 1.22 0.67 2.24
Add Stroke LB 2.70 2.70 2.78 3.06 3.53 3.53 4.25 4.25 P 1.77 1.81 1.69 1.93 2.09 2.05 2.52 2.60 ZB 3.28 3.40 3.74 4.02 4.80 4.80 5.59 5.59
D71
P1L
SRX
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
LB 69 69 71 78 90 90 108 108
Add Stroke P 45 46 43 49 53 52 64 66
ZB 83 86 95 102 122 122 142 142
Catalog 0900P-4
Rear Flange Dimensions Style H Rear Flange

C086
ZF+STROKE LB+STROKE Y WF EE PORT (2) PLACES P+STROKE FB HOLE (4) PLACES
MM
D
E B
V F
V TF UF
Rod End Details

LAF A WF V
KF
A WF V
KK
NA
MM
NA
MM
D WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS

D72
UF
TF
Catalog 0900P-4
Rear Flange Dimensions

C086

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 13 13 19 19 22 22 38 48 B
+0 -0.02
D 6 8 10 12 16 16 20 26
E 27 32 39 48.5 59 72 90 110
EE (BSPT) 1/8* 1/8* 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
F 6 7 7 8 9 9 11 14
FB 5.5 5.5 7 7 9 11 11 14
LAF 26 29 41 41 52 52 69 79
MM Rod Dia. 8 10 12 16 20 20 25 32
NA 11 14 18 18 23 30
TF 28 32 38 46 58 70 82 100
UF 40 44 53 61 76 92 104 128
V 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
WF 13 16 22 22 30 30 31 31
Y 28 30 40 42 53 53 59 57
12 14 18 25 30 32 40 50
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Add Stroke LB 69 69 71 78 90 90 108 108 P 45 46 43 49 53 52 64 66 ZF 87 91 100 108 129 129 150 153
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 F 0.24 0.28 0.28 0.31 0.35 0.35 0.43 0.55 FB 0.22 0.22 0.28 0.28 0.35 0.43 0.43 0.55 Thread KK (UNF) Style N 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 3/4-16 1-14 Thread KF (UNF) Style 9 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16 LAF 1.00 1.12 1.63 1.63 2.07 2.07 2.72 3.11 MM Rod Dia. 0.315 0.394 0.472 0.630 0.787 0.787 0.984 1.260 NA 0.43 0.55 0.71 0.71 0.91 1.18 TF 1.10 1.26 1.50 1.81 2.28 2.76 3.23 3.94 UF 1.57 1.73 2.09 2.40 3.00 3.62 4.09 5.04 V 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.12 0.12 WF 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.19 1.19 1.22 1.22 Y 1.10 1.18 1.57 1.65 2.09 2.09 2.32 2.24

Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Ports
A 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 1.50 1.88
B
+0 -0.001
D 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.47 0.63 0.63 0.79 1.02
E 1.06 1.26 1.53 1.91 2.32 2.83 3.54 4.33
0.472 0.551 0.709 0.984 1.181 1.260 1.575 1.968
Add Stroke LB 2.70 2.70 2.78 3.06 3.53 3.53 4.25 4.25 P 1.77 1.81 1.69 1.93 2.09 2.05 2.52 2.60 ZF 3.44 3.60 3.94 4.25 5.07 5.07 5.91 6.02
D73
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Front Trunnion Dimensions Style E Front Trunnion

C086
ZB+STROKE LB+STROKE UT Y BT THREAD (2) PLACES TS* EE PORT (2) PLACES P+STROKE
*ATTACHMENT
MOUNTING LIMITS
WF
MM
TD (PIN O.D.) (2) PLACES
TC
TE
TT
TX TV SB HOLE (4) PLACES XG
TY
Trunnion Bracket
TW
Note: Trunnion Bracket must be ordered as separate item
Rod End Details

LAF A WF V
KF
A WF V
KK
NA
MM
NA
MM
D WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS

D74
B V
Catalog 0900P-4
Front Trunnion Dimensions

C086

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 A 13 13 19 19 22 22 B
+0 -0.02
BT M5x0.80 M6x0.75 M8x1.00 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M14x1.50 TD

e8
D 6 8 10 12 16 16
E 27 32 39 48.5 59 72
EE (BSPT) 1/8* 1/8* 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Thread KK Style 5 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5
Thread KF Style 6 M5x0.80 M6x1.00 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
LAF 26 29 41 41 52 52
MM Rod Dia. 8 10 12 16 20 20
NA 11 14 18 18
V 2 2 2 2 2 2
WF 13 16 22 22 30 30
XG 24 27 33 34 43 43
Y 28 30 40 42 53 53
SB 5.5 5.5 7 7 9 11
12 14 18 25 30 32
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63
TC 25 30 35 40 50 60
TE 38.5 46 54.5 64 79.5 96
TS 28 33 40 49 60 74
TT 3 3 4.5 4.5 6 8
TV 35 39 49 58 72 90
TW 42 42 48 56 64 74
TX 16 20 22 30 36 46
TY 28 28 28 30 36 46
UT 47.5 53 68 79 99 119
Add Stroke LB 69 69 71 78 90 90 P 45 46 43 49 53 52 ZB 83 86 95 102 122 122

Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63
Ports
A 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88
B
+0 -0.001
BT M5x0.80 M6x0.75 M8x1.00
D 0.24 0.31 0.39
E 1.06 1.26 1.53 1.91 2.32 2.83
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Thread KK (UNF) Style N 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20
Thread KF (UNF) Style 9 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20
LAF 1.00 1.12 1.63 1.63 2.07 2.07
MM Rod Dia. 0.315 0.394 0.472 0.630 0.787 0.787
NA 0.43 0.55 0.71 0.71
V 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
WF 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.19 1.19
XG 0.93 1.05 1.31 1.35 1.70 1.70
Y 1.10 1.18 1.57 1.65 2.09 2.09
SB 0.22 0.22 0.28 0.28 0.35 0.43
0.472 0.551 0.709 0.984 1.181 1.260
M10x1.25 0.47 M12x1.25 0.63 M14x1.50 0.63
TC 0.98 1.18 1.38 1.57 1.97 2.36
TD 0.315 0.394 0.472 0.551 0.630 0.709
TE 1.51 1.81 2.15 2.53 3.13 3.78
TS 1.10 1.30 1.58 1.93 2.36 2.91
TT 0.12 0.12 0.18 0.18 0.25 0.31
TV 1.39 1.55 1.93 2.28 2.83 3.54
TW 1.66 1.66 1.88 2.20 2.52 2.91
TX 0.63 0.79 0.87 1.18 1.42 1.81
TY 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.18 1.42 1.81
UT 1.87 2.09 2.67 3.10 3.88 4.69
Add Stroke LB 2.70 2.70 2.78 3.06 3.53 3.53 P 1.77 1.81 1.69 1.93 2.09 2.05 ZB 3.28 3.40 3.74 4.02 4.80 4.80
D75
P1L
SRX
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
8 10 12 14 16 18
Catalog 0900P-4
Rear Trunnion Dimensions Style D Rear Trunnion

C086
ZB+STROKE LB+STROKE UT Y P+STROKE EE PORT (2) PLACES BT THREAD (2) PLACES TS*
WF
*ATTACHMENT
MOUNTING LIMITS
TY TW XJ+STROKE ZD+STROKE SB HOLE (4) PLACES TT
TX TV
Trunnion Bracket
Note: Trunnion Bracket must be ordered as separate item
Rod End Details

LAF A WF V
KF
A WF V
KK
NA
MM
NA
MM
D WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS

D76
TD (PIN O.D.) (2) PLACES
MM
TE TC
Catalog 0900P-4
Rear Trunnion Dimensions

C086

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 A 13 13 19 19 22 22 TD e8 8 10 12 14 16 18 B
+0 -0.02
BT M5x0.80 M6x0.75 M8x1.00 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M14x1.50
D 6 8 10 12 16 16
E 27 32 39 48.5 59 72
EE (BSPT) 1/8* 1/8* 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Thread KK Style 5 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5
Thread KF Style 6 M5x0.80 M6x1.00 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
LAF 26 29 41 41 52 52
MM Rod Dia. 8 10 12 16 20 20
NA 11 14 18 18
V 2 2 2 2 2 2
WF 13 16 22 22 30 30
Y 28 30 40 42 53 53
SB 5.5 5.5 7 7 9 11
TC 25 30 35 40 50 60
12 14 18 25 30 32
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63
TE 38.5 46 54.5 64 79.5 96
TS 28 33 40 49 60 74
TT 3 3 4.5 4.5 6 8
TV 35 39 49 58 72 90
TW 42 42 48 56 64 74
TX 16 20 22 30 36 46
TY 28 28 28 30 36 46
UT 47.5 53 68 79 99 119
Add Stroke LB 69 69 71 78 90 90 P 45 46 43 49 53 52 XJ 70 73 83 90 108 108 ZB 83 86 95 102 122 122 ZD 91 94 107 140 145 118
D
*Ports are M5 for cushioned versions

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63
A 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 TD

-0.001 -0.002
B +0 -0.001 0.472 0.551 0.709 0.984 1.181 1.260
BT M5x0.80 M6x0.75 M8x1.00 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M14x1.50
D 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.47 0.63 0.63
E 1.06 1.26 1.53 1.91 2.32 2.83
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Thread KK (UNF) Style N 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20
Thread KF (UNF) Style 9 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20
LAF 1.00 1.12 1.63 1.63 2.07 2.07
MM Rod Dia. 0.315 0.394 0.472 0.630 0.787 0.787
NA 0.43 0.55 0.71 0.71
V 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
WF 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.19 1.19
Y 1.10 1.18 1.57 1.65 2.09 2.09
SB 0.22 0.22 0.28 0.28 0.35 0.43
TC 0.98 1.18 1.38 1.57 1.97 2.36
TE 1.51 1.81 2.15 2.53 3.13 3.78
TS 1.10 1.30 1.58 1.93 2.36 2.91
TT 0.12 0.12 0.18 0.18 0.25 0.31
TV 1.39 1.55 1.93 2.28 2.83 3.54
TW 1.66 1.66 1.88 2.20 2.52 2.91
TX 0.63 0.79 0.87 1.18 1.42 1.81
TY 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.18 1.42 1.81
UT 1.87 2.09 2.67 3.10 3.88 4.69
Add Stroke LB 2.70 2.70 2.78 3.06 3.53 3.53 P 1.77 1.81 1.69 1.93 2.09 2.05 XJ 2.77 2.89 3.27 3.54 4.25 4.25 ZB 3.28 3.40 3.74 4.02 4.80 4.80 ZD 3.60 3.72 4.21 4.64 5.51 5.71
0.315 0.394 0.472 0.551 0.630 0.709
D77
Catalog 0900P-4
Nose Mount Dimensions Style G Nose Mount

C086
ZB1 +STROKE LB1 +STROKE Y WF VA P1 +STROKE EE PORT (2) PLACES
MM
BN
D
Bore 20 25 A 13 13 BN
+0 -0.08
NN THREADS WT
VB

D 6 8 E 27 32 EE (BSPT) 1/8* 1/8* Thread KK Style 5 M8x1.25 Thread KF Style 6 M5x0.80 LAF 35 35 MM Rod Dia. 8 10 NN 3/4-16 3/4-16 N 24 29 VA 3 3 VB 2 2 WF 22 22 WT 16 16 Y 32 32 Add Stroke LB1 66 66 P1 47 47 ZB1 90 90
19.02 19.02
M10x1.25 M6x1.00

Bore 20 25
A 0.50 0.50
BN
+0 -0.003
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/8
Thread KK (UNF) Style N 1/4-28 5/16-24
Thread KF LAF (UNF) Style 9 #10-32 1/4-28 1.38 1.38
MM Rod Dia.
Add Stroke NN N VA VB WF WT Y LB1 P1 ZB1
0.749 0.749
0.24 1.06 0.31 1.26
0.315 3/4-16 0.94 0.12 0.08 0.88 0.63 1.25 2.60 1.85 3.56 0.394 3/4-16 1.14 0.12 0.08 0.88 0.63 1.25 2.60 1.85 3.56
Rod End Details 20 and 25 mm Bore

LAF A WF VA KK KF A WF VA
BN
D WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS

BN
D78
Catalog 0900P-4
Nose Mount Dimensions Style G Nose Mount

C086
ZB +STROKE LB +STROKE Y W VA F EE PORT (2) PLACES P1+STROKE
1 1
Typical 32 to 63mm Bore
MM
BN
NA
NN THREAD R N WT
VB

Bore 32 40 50 63 A 19 19 22 22 BN
+0 -0.8
D
LB1 80 92 105 106 P1 43 49 53 52 ZB1 104 126 137 139 11 14 18 18 20 26 32 38 3 5 3 3 2 2 2 2 22 32 30 30 16 22 20.5 20.5 49 66 68 70
19.02 26.87 34.90 38.10
10 12 16 16
39 48.5 59 72
1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
9 14 15 16
M10x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5
M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
41 51 52 52
12 16 20 20
3/4-16 1-14 1-1/4-12 1-3/8-12
36 44 55 69
* See Inch Dimensions for NPTF Port Size.

Bore (mm) 32 40 50 63 A 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 BN +0 -0.003 0.749 1.058 1.374 1.500 D 0.39 0.47 0.63 0.63 E 1.53 1.91 2.32 2.83 EE* (NPTF) 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 F 0.37 0.56 0.59 0.63 Thread Thread KK KF (UNF) (UNF) Style N Style 9 7/16-20 7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 MM LA Rod Dia. 1.63 0.472 2.00 0.630 Add Stroke NN 3/4-16 1-14 N 1.42 1.73 NA 0.43 0.55 0.71 0.71 R 0.79 1.02 1.26 1.50 VA 0.12 0.19 0.12 0.12 VB 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 W 0.88 1.25 1.19 1.19 WT 0.63 0.88 0.81 0.81 Y 1.93 2.60 2.68 2.76 LB1 3.15 3.62 4.12 4.19 P1 1.69 1.93 2.09 2.05 ZB1 4.11 4.95 5.39 5.46
2.07 0.787 1-1/4-12 2.17 2.07 0.787 1-3/8-12 2.72
* See Metric Dimensions for BSPT Port Size.
Rod End Details 32 and 63 mm Bore

LA A W F KF A

W F
BN
BN
NA
KK
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
D WRENCH FLATS
Thread Style 3 Special Metric or Inch threads, extension, blank, etc., are also available. To order, specify Style 3 and give desired dimensions for KK or KF, A and LAF or WF (Note: LAF = LA+F and WF = W+F). If otherwise special, supply a dimensioned sketch.
D79
P1L
SRX
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
EE* (BSPT)
Thread KK Style 5
Thread KF Style 6
LA
MM Rod Dia.
NN
NA
VA
VB
WT
Add Stroke
Catalog 0900P-4
Double Rod Dimensions Double-Rod

Y WF

C086
ZM+ (2 x STROKE) LG+STROKE PK+STROKE EE PORT (2) PLACES
B MM
MM V V ZM1 + (2 x STROKE) LG +STROKE Y1 W F PK 1+STROKE EE PORT (2) PLACES

1
Double-Rod Nose Mount (32-63mm bore)
MM
R N
For detailed dimensions for the nose mount from 20 to 63 mm bore, please refer to pages D78 and 2D793.
Rod End Details

LAF A WF V

KF
A WF V
KK
NA
MM
NA
MM
D WRENCH FLATS
D WRENCH FLATS

Thread Style 3 Special Metric or Inch threads, extension, blank, etc., are also available. To order, specify Style 3 and give desired dimensions for KK or KF, A and LAF or WF. If otherwise special, supply a dimensioned sketch. When two rod ends are different on double rod cylinder, please clearly indicate what rod end should be provided on which end of the cylinder, or provide a sketch.
D80
MM
Catalog 0900P-4
Double Rod Dimensions

C086

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 13 13 19 19 22 22 38 48 B
+0 -0.02
D 6 8 10 12 16 16 20 26
E 27 32 39 48.5 59 72 90 110
F 9 14 15 17
EE (BSPT) 1/8* 1/8* 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
Thread KK Style 5 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x 1.5 M22 x1.5 M26x1.5
LAF 26 29 41 41 52 52 69 79
MM Rod Dia. 8 10 12 16 20 20 25 32
N 24 29 36 44 55 69 86 106
NA 11 14 18 18 23 30
R 14 16.5 20 26 32 38 50 60
V 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
W 22 32 30 30
WF 13 16 22 22 30 30 31 31
12 14 18 25 30 32 40 50
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Y 28 30 40 42 53 53 59 57
Y1 32 32 49 66 68 70
Add Stroke LG 75 75 78 87 100 100 119 119 LG1 70 70 97 115 130 133 PK 45 47 42 47 54 54 61 65 PK1 50 50 42 47 54 54 ZM 101 107 122 131 160 160 181 181 ZM1 95 141 179 190 194 101
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
N 0.94 1.14 1.42 1.73 2.17 2.72 3.39 4.17 NA 0.43 0.55 0.71 0.71 0.91 1.18 R 0.55 0.65 0.79 1.02 1.26 1.50 1.97 2.36 V 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.12 0.12 W 0.88 1.25 1.19 1.19 WF 0.50 0.62 0.88 0.88 1.19 1.19 1.22 1.22
INCH DIMENSIONS - Envelope and Mounting Dimensions (inch)

Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Ports
A 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 1.50 1.88
B +0 -0.001 0.472 0.551 0.709 0.984 1.181 1.260 1.575 1.968
D 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.47 0.63 0.63 0.79 1.02
E 1.06 1.26 1.53 1.91 2.32 2.83 3.54 4.33
F 0.37 0.56 0.59 0.66
EE (NPTF) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
Thread KK (UNF) Style N 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 3/4-16 1-14 Add Stroke
LAF 1.00 1.12 1.63 1.63 2.07 2.07 2.72 3.11
MM Rod Dia. 0.315 0.394 0.472 0.630 0.787 0.787 0.984 1.260
Y 1.10 1.18 1.57 1.65 2.09 2.09 2.32 2.24
Y1 1.25 1.25 1.93 2.60 2.68 2.76
LG 2.97 2.97 3.06 3.41 3.93 3.93 4.70 4.70
LG1 2.74 2.74 3.80 4.53 5.11 5.25
PK 1.77 1.85 1.65 1.85 2.13 2.13 2.40 2.56
PK1 1.97 1.97 1.65 1.85 2.13 2.13
ZM 3.97 4.21 4.82 5.17 6.31 6.31 7.14 7.14
ZM1 3.74 3.98 5.56 7.03 7.49 7.63
D81
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Brackets Single Clevis Brackets

K

C086
H CD (PIN O.D.)
G F
D
Single Clevis Pin
L M
D C
CZ CL
CD
Note :
Two snap rings shown are included with the pivot pin. Order clevis bracket separately.
Single Clevis Kit Assembly Instructions

Align the rear clevis with the port location as desired. Insert the four (4) screws through the bracket and thread them into the end caps until they are hand tight. Torque the screws to the values listed in the table below. Single Clevis Kit, bracket and pivot pin are ordered separately. Please see next page for part numbers.
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Fastener Size 8-32 10-32 10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M5x0.8 M6x1 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75
Torque 10-12 in-lbs 12-14 in-lbs 12-14 in-lbs 32-36 in-lbs 72-82 in-lbs 18-19 ft-lbs 18-19 ft-lbs 40-44 ft-lbs 1.1-1.4 Nm 1.4-1.6 Nm 1.4-1.6 Nm 3.6-4.1 Nm 8.1-9.3 Nm 24-26 Nm 24-26 Nm 54-60 Nm
D82
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Brackets Single Clevis Brackets

Metric Dimensions (mm) Part Number L077520075 L077520075 L077520125 L077520150 L077520200 L077520250 L077520312 L077520400 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 30 30 30 44 44 54 70 79 B 22 22 22 35 35 44 51 60 C 29 29 29 38 38 38 64 70 CD
h9

C086
D 19 19 19 25 25 25 38 44
F 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
G 7 7 7 7 7 7 11 14
H 8 8 8 9 9 9 19 19
K 10 10 13 16 19 19 28 32
L 32 32 35 47 54 54 72 76
M 51 51 54 67 76 76 104 108
N 9 9 9 10 11 11 16 16
6.35 6.35 6.35 9.52 9.52 9.52 19.07 19.07
Imperial Dimensions (Inch) Part Number L077520075 L077520075 L077520125 L077520150 L077520200 L077520250 L077520312 L077520400 Bore (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 1.17 1.17 1.17 1.75 1.75 2.12 2.75 3.12 B 0.87 0.87 0.87 1.38 1.38 1.75 2.00 2.37 C 1.13 1.13 1.13 1.50 1.50 1.50 2.50 2.75 CD
+0 -0.002
D
D 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.50 1.75 F 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 G 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.42 0.55 H 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 0.75 K 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.62 0.75 0.75 1.09 1.25 L 1.25 1.25 1.38 1.86 2.12 2.12 2.84 3.00 M 2.00 2.00 2.12 2.62 3.00 3.00 4.09 4.25 N 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.38 0.44 0.44 0.62 0.62
0.250 0.250 0.250 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.751 0.751
Single Clevis Pins

Metric Dimensions (mm) Part Number L077490075 L077490075 L077490125 L077490150 L077490200 L077490200 L077490312 L077490400 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 CD
h9
CL 16 16 19 23 32 32 41 45
CZ
6.35 6.35 9.52 9.52 9.52 19.07 19.07
22 25 29 39 39 51 55
Imperial Dimensions (Inch) Part Number L077490075 L077490075 L077490125 L077490150 L077490200 L077490200 L077490312 L077490400 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 CD
+0 -0.002
CL 0.63 0.63 0.76 0.89 1.27 1.27 1.63 1.79
CZ 0.85 0.85 0.97 1.15 1.53 1.53 2.00 2.16
0.250 0.250 0.250 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.751 0.751
D83
6.35
22
P1L
SRX
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Brackets Double Clevis Brackets

20-63 mm Bore Double Clevis Bracket

C086
80-100 mm Bore Double Clevis Bracket
TR TS
TB TE TW
TR TS
TD
TA
TA TH TH TG
TM Holes 4 Places TG
TF TW
TM x 4
TC
TF TW
TF TB
Double Clevis Pin

CZ CL
CD
Note:
Two snap rings shown are included with the pivot pin. Order clevis bracket separately.
Double Clevis 20-63 mm Bore
Double Clevis 80-100 mm Bore
Double Clevis Kit Assembly Instructions
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Fastener Size 8-32 10-32 10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M5x0.8 M6x1 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75
Torque 10-12 in-lbs 12-14 in-lbs 12-14 in-lbs 32-36 in-lbs 72-82 in-lbs 18-19 ft-lbs 18-19 ft-lbs 40-44 ft-lbs 1.1-1.4 Nm 1.4-1.6 Nm 1.4-1.6 Nm 3.6-4.1 Nm 8.1-9.3 Nm 24-26 Nm 24-26 Nm 54-60 Nm
Align the rear clevis with the port location as desired. Insert the four (4) screws through the bracket and thread them into the end caps until they are hand tight. Torque the screws to the values listed in the table beside. Double Clevis Kit, bracket and pivot pin are ordered separately. Please see next page for part numbers.
D84
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Brackets Double Clevis Brackets

Metric Dimensions (mm) Part Number L077510020 L077510025 L077510032 L077510040 L077510050 L077510063 L077510080 L077510100 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 TA 36 43 50 58 70 82 73 90 TB 38 42 53.4 64.4 78.8 96.6 110 130 TC 16 20 22 30 36 46 85 100 TD 29 33 40 49 60 74 28 32

C086
TE 35 39 49 58 72 90 110 130
TF 28 28 28 30 36 46 45 60
TG 3 3 4.5 4.5 6 8 11 12
TH 25 30 35 40 50 60 55 65
TM 5.5 5.5 7 7 9 11 11 13.5
TR 13 15 17 21 24 26 36 50
TS 49 8 10 12 14 16 18 18 22
TW 42 42 48 56 64 74 72 93
Imperial Dimensions (Inch) Part Number L077510020 L077510025 L077510032 L077510040 L077510050 L077510063 L077510080 L077510100 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 TA 1.42 1.69 1.97 2.28 2.76 3.23 2.87 3.54 TB 1.50 1.65 2.10 2.53 3.10 3.80 4.33 5.12 TC 0.63 0.79 0.87 1.18 1.42 1.81 3.35 3.94 TD 1.14 1.30 1.57 1.93 2.36 2.91 1.10 1.26 TE 1.39 1.55 1.93 2.28 2.83 3.54 4.33 5.12 TF 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.18 1.42 1.81 1.77 2.36 TG 0.12 0.12 0.18 0.18 0.25 0.31 0.43 0.47 TH 0.98 1.18 1.38 1.57 1.97 2.36 2.17 2.56 TM 0.22 0.22 0.28 0.28 0.35 0.43 0.43 0.53 TR 0.51 0.59 0.67 0.83 0.94 1.02 1.42 1.97 TS
+0.002, -0
TW 1.66 1.66 1.88 2.20 2.52 2.91 2.83 3.66
D
0.315 0.394 0.472 0.551 0.630 0.709 0.709 0.866
Double Clevis Pins

Metric Dimensions (mm) Part Number L077500020 L077500025 L077500032 L077500040 L077500050 L077500063 L077500080 L077500100 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 CD 8 10 12 14 16 18 18 22
d9
CL 38.6 42.6 54 65 79.6 97.8 56.2 64.2
CZ 43.4 48 59.4 71.4 86 105.4 64 72
Imperial Dimensions (Inch) Part Number L077500020 L077500025 L077500032 L077500040 L077500050 L077500063 L077500080 L077500100 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 CD
-0.001 -0.003
CL 1.52 1.68 2.12 2.56 3.13 3.85 2.21 2.53
CZ 1.71 1.89 2.34 2.81 3.38 4.15 2.52 2.83
0.315 0.394 0.472 0.551 0.630 0.709 0.709 0.866
D85
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Kits Front or Rear Flange Mount Kit

FB Hole (4) Places

C086
TF UF
TF UF
Metric Dimensions (mm)
Part Number L077560020 L077560025 L077560032 L077560040 L077560050 L077560063 L077560080 L077560100
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
B -0.02 12 14 18 25 30 32 40 50
+0
F 6 7 7 8 9 9 11 14
FB 5.5 5.5 7 7 9 11 11 14
UF 40 44 53 61 76 92 104 128
TF 28 32 38 46 58 70 82 100
V 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
Imperial Dimensions (Inch) Part Number L077450075 L077450100 L077450125 L077450150 L077450200 L077450250 L077450312 L077450400 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 B -0.001 0.472 0.551 0.709 0.984 1.181 1.260 1.575 1.968
+0
F 0.24 0.28 0.28 0.31 0.35 0.35 0.43 0.55
FB 0.22 0.22 0.28 0.28 0.35 0.43 0.43 0.55
UF 1.57 1.73 2.09 2.40 3.00 3.62 4.09 5.04
TF 1.10 1.26 1.50 1.81 2.28 2.76 3.23 3.94
V 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.12 0.12
Flange Mount Kit Installation Instructions
Insert the four (4) screws through the nose mount or the flange mounts and thread them into the cylinder head or cap until they are hand tight. Torque the screws to the values listed in the table below.
Bore Size 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Fastener Size 8-32 10-32 10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M5x0.8 M6x1 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75 Torque 10-12 in-lbs 12-14 in-lbs 12-14 in-lbs 32-36 in-lbs 72-82 in-lbs 18-19 ft-lbs 18-19 ft-lbs 40-44 ft-lbs 1.1-1.4 Nm 1.4-1.6 Nm 1.4-1.6 Nm 3.6-4.1 Nm 8.1-9.3 Nm 24-26 Nm 24-26 Nm 54-60 Nm
The Flange Mounting Bracket Kit includes 4 Bolts
D86
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Kits Foot Mount Bracket

CC Hole (4) Places

C086
P
B Hole
R
SB Slot
A
Metric Dimensions (mm) Part Number L077550020 L077550025 L077550032 L077550040 L077550050 L077550063 L077550080 L077550100 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 20.6 20.6 25.4 25.4 38.1 44.5 55 65 B -0
+0.15
R TF UF
SW
CC 5.00 5.80 5.80 7.50 9.00 11.50 11.50 14.50
P 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
R 14 16.5 20 26 32 38 50 60
S 16 18 21 26 34 39 46 56
SB 7 7 7 7 9 9 11 14
SU 14 14 19 18 25 25 28.5 30
SU
SW 11 11 19 20 16 16 14 16
TF 38 38 48 48 57 73 100 120
UF 48 48 63.5 63.5 79 95 125 150
12.2 14.2 18.2 25.2 30.2 32.2 40.2 50.2
D
Imperial Dimensions (inch) Part Number L077440075 L077440100 L077440125 L077440150 L077440200 L077440250 L077440312 L077440400 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 0.81 0.81 1.00 1.00 1.50 1.75 2.17 2.56 B +0.006 -0 0.480 0.559 0.717 0.992 1.189 1.268 1.583 1.976 CC 0.20 0.23 0.23 0.30 0.35 0.45 0.45 0.57 P 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 R 0.55 0.65 0.79 1.02 1.26 1.50 1.97 2.36 S 0.63 0.71 0.83 1.02 1.34 1.54 1.81 2.20 SB 0.27 0.27 0.28 0.28 0.34 0.34 0.43 0.55 SU 0.56 0.56 0.75 0.72 1.00 1.00 1.12 1.18 SW 0.44 0.44 0.75 0.78 0.62 0.62 0.55 0.63 TF 1.50 1.50 1.88 1.88 2.24 2.88 3.94 4.72 UF 1.88 1.88 2.50 2.50 3.12 3.75 4.92 5.91
Foot Mount Kit Assembly Instructions
Align each of the foot brackets with the port location as desired. Insert the four (4) screws through the foot mounts and thread them into the end caps until they are hand tight. Place the cylinder assembly on to a flat surface and torque the screws to the values listed in the table below. Make sure the foot mounts rest properly on a flat surface.
Bore Size 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Fastener Size 8-32 10-32 10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M5x0.8 M6x1 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75 Torque 10-12 in-lbs 12-14 in-lbs 12-14 in-lbs 32-36 in-lbs 72-82 in-lbs 18-19 ft-lbs 18-19 ft-lbs 40-44 ft-lbs 1.1-1.4 Nm 1.4-1.6 Nm 1.4-1.6 Nm 3.6-4.1 Nm 8.1-9.3 Nm 24-26 Nm 24-26 Nm 54-60 Nm
The Foot Mount Bracket Kit includes 8 Bolts
D87
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Kits Trunnion Mount Bracket

TR TS

C086
TB TE TW
TA TH TG
TF TW
TM x 4
TC
Metric Dimensions (mm)
Part Number L077510020 L077510025 L077510032 L077510040 L077510050 L077510063
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63
TA 36 43 50 58 70 82
TB 38 42 53.4 64.4 78.8 96.6
TC 16 20 22 30 36 46
TD 29 33 40 49 60 74
TE 35 39 49 58 72 90
TF 28 28 28 30 36 46
TG 3 3 4.5 4.5 6 8
TH 25 30 35 40 50 60
TM 5.5 5.5 7 7 9 11
TR 13 15 17 21 24 26
TS H9 8 10 12 14 16 18
TW 42 42 48 56 64 74
Imperial Dimensions (Inch) Part Number L077510020 L077510025 L077510032 L077510040 L077510050 L077510063 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 TA 1.42 1.69 1.97 2.28 2.76 3.23 TB 1.50 1.65 2.10 2.53 3.10 3.80 TC 0.63 0.79 0.87 1.18 1.42 1.81 TD 1.14 1.30 1.57 1.93 2.36 2.91 TE 1.39 1.55 1.93 2.28 2.83 3.54 TF 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.18 1.42 1.81 TG 0.12 0.12 0.18 0.18 0.25 0.31 TH 0.98 1.18 1.38 1.57 1.97 2.36 TM 0.22 0.22 0.28 0.28 0.35 0.43 TR 0.51 0.59 0.67 0.83 0.94 1.02 TS -0
+0.002
TW 1.66 1.66 1.88 2.20 2.52 2.91
0.315 0.394 0.472 0.551 0.630 0.709
Trunnion Mount Assembly Instructions
Align the bracket on the machine member providing cylinder rotation as desired. Securely mount the bracket to the machine member. Align the cylinder head or cap with the bracket. Insert the bearing, washer and pivot bolt on to each side of the cylinder as shown. Torque the pivot bolts to the values listed in the table below. Use only bolts provided, as they have a special adhesive coating for secure fastening.
Bore Size 20 25 32 40 50 63 Trunnion Pivot Bolt M5x0.8 M6x0.75 M8x1 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M14x1.5
Torque 12-14 in-lbs 32-36 in-lbs 72-82 in-lbs 18-19 ft-lbs 40-44 ft-lbs 70-74 ft-lbs 1.4-1.6 Nm 3.6-4.1 Nm 8.1-9.3 Nm 24-26 Nm 54-60 Nm 95-100 Nm
Notes
Order trunnion mounts by specifying E for front trunnion or D for rear trunnion in the Mounting Style digit of the model code. The bearings, washers and pivot bolts will be supplied with the cylinder. The trunnion bracket must be ordered as a separate item, using the part numbers shown above.
D88
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod End Accessories Rod Jam Nut

A B
High Performance Repairable Cylinder P1L Series Rod Jam Nut Dimensions
Metric Dimensions (mm) Part Number L075540008 L075540010 L075540014 L075540018 L075540022
C UNF-2B
C086
Bore 20 25-32 40 50-63 80 100
A 13 17 22 27 32 41
B 4 5 7 8 11 16
C M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 M26 x 1.5
L075540026
Rod Jam Nut should be ordered separately on all mounting styles
Imperial Dimensions (inch) Part Number Bore 20 25 32-40 50-63 80 100 A 0.44 0.50 0.69 0.75 1.12 1.50 B 0.16 0.19 0.25 0.31 0.42 0.55 C 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 3/4 -16 1-14
Piston Rod Clevis

D C A TH'D B
L077970025 L077970031 L077970044 L077970050 L077970075 L077970100
D
K L
A NUT
H DIA. (PIN O.D.)
Piston Rod Clevis Dimensions

Metric Dimensions (mm) Part Number L077590020 L077590025 L077590032 L077590040 L077590050 L077590050 PIM-4PRC L077590100 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 B 13 19 19 19 28 28 38 44 C 24 24 34 34 34 34 50 55 D 30 30 43 43 43 43 71 79 E 18 18 24 24 24 24 48 55 F 4 5 5 7 8 8 11 16 H h9 6.35 6.35 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52 18 22 J 6.5 6.5 10 10 10 10 28 32 K 13 19 19 19 28 28 56 63.5 L 17.5 24.5 26 26 36 36 64 72
Imperial Dimensions (inch) Part Number L077960025 L077960031 L077960044 L077960044 L077960050 L077960050 L077960075 L077960100 Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 1/4-28 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 3/4-16 1-14 B 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.25 1.50 C 0.94 0.94 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.81 2.63 D 1.19 1.19 1.69 1.69 1.69 1.69 2.38 3.38 E 0.69 0.69 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 1.31 1.81 F 0.16 0.19 0.25 0.25 0.31 0.31 0.42 0.55 H
+0 -0.002
J 0.26 0.26 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.52 0.64
K 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.25 1.50
L 0.69 0.69 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.66 1.91
0.250 0.250 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.437 0.500
D89
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Kits & Accessories

Foot Mounting Inch Metric L077440075 L077550020 L077440100 L077550025 L077440125 L077550032 L077440150 L077550040 L077440200 L077550050 L077440250 L077550063 L077440312 L077550080 L077440400 L077550100 Single Clevis Inch Metric L077470075 L077570020 L077470100 L077570025 L077470125 L077570032 L077470150 L077570040 L077470200 L077570050 L077470250 L077570063 L077470312 L077570080 L077470400 L077570100

C086
How to Order P1L Mounting Kits as a Separate Item

Bore Size 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore Size 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Flange Inch L077450075 L077450100 L077450125 L077450150 L077450200 L077450250 L077450312 L077450400 Metric L077560020 L077560025 L077560032 L077560040 L077560050 L077560063 L077560080 L077560100 Single Clevis Pin L077490075 L077490075 L077490125 L077490150 L077490200 L077490200 L077490312 L077490400 Double Clevis Pin L077500020 L077500025 L077500032 L077500040 L077500050 L077500063 L077500080 L077500100
Double Clevis Inch Metric L077480075 L077580020 L077480100 L077580025 L077480125 L077580032 L077480150 L077580040 L077480200 L077580050 L077480250 L077580063 L077480312 L077580080 L077480400 L077580100
Notes : Inch mounting kits include inch threaded bolts, while Metric mounting kits include metric threaded bolts. Please verify that the kit style matches the cylinder Construction type (code N or M) for which it is intended. Clevis pins may be used for either Inch or Metric mounting kits.
Mounting Brackets and Rod End Accessories

Bore Size 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Trunnion/ Double Clevis Bracket L077510020 L077510025 L077510032 L077510040 L077510050 L077510063 L077510080 L077510100 Single Clevis Bracket L077520075 L077520075 L077520125 L077520150 L077520200 L077520250 L077520312 L077520400 Piston Rod Clevis Inch L077960025 L077960031 L077960044 L077960044 L077960050 L077960050 L077960075 L077960100 Metric L077590020 L077590025 L077590032 L077590040 L077590050 L077590050 PIM-4PRC L077590100 Inch L077970025 L077970031 L077970044 L077970044 L077970050 L077970050 L077970075 L077970100 Rod Jam Nut Metric L075540008 L075540010 L075540010 L075540014 L075540018 L075540018 L075540022 L075540026
Service Kits
Single Rod Cylinder Repair Kits Double Rod Cylinder Repair Kits Bore Consisting of: 1 ea. Symbol #5, 7, 12, & 2 ea. Symbol #1, 8 11, 14 Consisting of: 1 ea. Symbol #5, 7, & 2 ea. Symbol #1, 8 11, 12, 14 Size Class 1 Seals, Std. Service Class 5 Seals, High Temp. Class 1 Seals, Std. Service Class 5 Seals, High Temp. mm 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Part No. P1L020D001 P1L025D001 P1L032D001 P1L040D001 P1L050D001 P1L063D001 P1L080D001 P1L100D001 Part No. P1L020D005 P1L025D005 P1L032D005 P1L040D005 P1L050D005 P1L063D005 P1L080D005 P1L100D005 Part No. P1L020K001 P1L025K001 P1L032K001 P1L040K001 P1L050K001 P1L063K001 P1L080K001 P1L100K001 Part No. P1L020K005 P1L025K005 P1L032K005 P1L040K005 P1L050K005 P1L063K005 P1L080K005 P1L100K005
D90
P Series
Round Aluminum Air Cylinders
D
Features ........................................................................... D92 Ordering Information......................................................... D93 Specifications ................................................................... D94 Dimensional Data ......................................................D95-D98 Mounting Accessories ...................................................... D99 Sensor Mounting ............................................................ D100 Service Kits .................................................................... D101
D91
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Round Body Cylinders P Series

C086
CAP END
Features
Heads and Caps are lightweight aluminum for
maximum corrosion resistance. The cap is provided with a steel pivot bushing.
The Cushion Adjustment Needle is recessed and retained for precise, safe adjustment on all adjustable cushions. The wear-compensating Rod Seal design conforms to pressure variations and provides maximum seal life. High Strength Steel Retaining Snap Ring (210,000 PSI ultimate) is precision made to securely lock the head and cap in place. Easily removed for quick disassembly. 11
O-Ring Static Tube Seal is standard for positive no-leak sealing.
Cylinder Body is hard anodized aluminum for corrosion and abrasion resistance. The smooth I.D. finish provides long seal life. The Piston is available with either O-Ring or Lipseal
design.
Piston Rod is chrome plated steel.* The piston is secured to the rod with anaerobic adhesive. Full diameter threads are provided for maximum strength. Wrench flats are standard. Adjustable Cushions are available on 2" thru 4"
bore sizes, while fixed cushions are available on 1-1/8" and 1-1/2" bore sizes.
12 Rod Bearing is low friction bronze for high performance and longer wear.
D92
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information 21/2"

Bore Size 1-1/8" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" Cushion Head End Blank No Cushion C Cushion Head End

C086
P
Series
X6"
Stroke Piston L Lipseal Piston Sensors available on Lipseal Pistons only. Ports U N.P.T.F. Cushion Cap End Seals Blank Buna-N V Fluorocarbon Spring E R Spring Extend Spring Return Blank No Cushion C Cushion Cap End Rod Thread Cap End 6 Standard 3 Special (For special rod end specify CC thread Dia. A and LE or LE1 or Dim. or submit sketch.) Rod Diameter Style 1 Standard. For Double Rod Cylinders specify rod code twice. Specify in inches. Show times symbol X just ahead of stroke length.
D
Double Rod Blank Single Rod K Double Rod
Mounting Style Blank Standard N No Tang, A Dual Tang
Special Number Use S symbol only if special feature is required (specify). NOTE: Do not use symbol S for rod end modification.
How to Order P Series Cylinders

When ordering P Series cylinders, specify each of the following: 1) Bore size. 2) Basic model number (see chart above). 3) Piston style O-ring or Lipseal. 4) Cushions (if required), specify head end, cap end, or both ends. 5) Spring return (if required). 6) Mounting accessories. 7) Special modifications (if required).
P Series Model Numbers

Each P Series cylinder can be specified by use of symbol numbers. To develop a model number from the chart above select only those symbols that represent the cylinder features desired, and place them in the sequence indicated by the example at the top of the chart. The example shown is a 2-1/2" bore, cushion head end, double rod cylinder, P SERIES, with Lipseal Piston, standard diameter rod and threads, cushion cap end 6" stroke. (A 2" bore cylinder with O-Ring piston, no cushions, standard seals and standard rod bearing, 4" stroke would be indicated as 2PU16 4.)
Safety Cushion Adjustment Location

1
HEAD END
With port in position 1, cushion location will be position 4.
D93
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications / Mountings Standard Specifications

Nominal Pressure up to 150 PSI air Repairable Design Bore Sizes: 1-1/8, 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 and 4 Double-Acting, Spring-Return and Spring-Extend Models Cushions optional at either or both ends Universal Nose and Tang Mounts Factory Pre-lubricated Standard Temperature Range: -10F to +165F. Fluorocarbon Seals for operation up to 250F are available at extra cost. Standard Stroke Lengths to 20 inches in one inch increments, plus 1-1/2", 2-1/2" and 3-1/2" strokes. Fraction strokes and strokes over 20 inches are available upon request.

C086
DANGER
The piston to rod threaded connection is secured with an anaerobic adhesive which is temperature sensitive. Operating cylinders in excess of the following recommendations can cause the piston and piston rod assembly to unthread. Cylinders ordered with standard seals (Buna-N) are assembled with an anaerobic adhesive with a maximum operating temperature rating of +165F. Cylinders ordered with Fluorocarbon seals are assembled with an anaerobic adhesive with a maximum operating temperature rating of +250F. Cylinders originally manufactured with standard seals (Buna-N) that will be exposed to an ambient temperature above +165F must be modified for higher temperature service. Contact your local factory immediately and arrange for the piston to piston rod connection to be properly modified for the higher temperature service.
Mounting Styles Available
Model P O-Ring Piston Single Rod 11/8" Bore thru 3" Bore Model PL Lipseal Piston Single Rod 11/8" Bore thru 4" Bore
Model KP O-Ring Piston Double Rod 11/8" Bore thru 3" Bore Model KPL Lipseal Piston Double Rod 11/8" Bore thru 4" Bore
Model AP O-Ring Piston Single Rod 11/8" Bore thru 3" Bore Model APL Lipseal Piston Single Rod 11/8" Bore thru 4" Bore
Model PR O-Ring Piston Spring Return Model PE O-Ring Piston Spring Extend 11/8" Bore thru 3" Bore Model PLR Lipseal Piston Spring Return Model PLE Lipseal Piston Spring Extend 11/8" Bore thru 4" Bore
Force Data
(to determine force multiply operating pressure by area figures below) Bore Size 1-1/8" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" Rod Dia. 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 3/4" 1" Major Area (sq. in.) 0.992 1.766 3.141 4.906 7.065 12.560 Minor Area (sq. in.) 0.882 1.570 2.835 4.464 6.623 11.775
Cylinder Cushion Lengths

Bore 1-1/8" 1-1/2" & 2" 2-1/2" & 3" 4" Head 0.560" 0.750" 0.875" 1.250" Cap 0.560" 0.750" 0.875" 1.250"
* 3/8" diameter rod is stainless steel.
D94
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensional Data
Model P O-Ring Piston Single Rod

C086
MODEL PO-RING PISTONSINGLE ROD

B O DIA. BB THREAD FF + STROKE AA NPTF B O DIA. CC THREAD O-RING PISTON BB THREAD
C DIA.
Z DIA. HH G E F LB + STROKE HH D LE
A H
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
Model P cylinders are available without tang covered by dimension E minus HH at no extra charge. To order specify Model NP.
Model KP MODEL O-Ring Piston Double Rod

BB THREAD CC THREAD
KPO-RING PISTONDOUBLE ROD

JJ + STROKE B O DIA. AA NPTF B O DIA. BB THREAD CC THREAD O-RING PISTON
C DIA.
FAR SIDE A HH LB + STROKE D LE H
A HH
H + STROKE
LE + STROKE
Mounting nuts not supplied with cylinder.
Dimensions Model P and KP Single and Double Rod Cylinders

Bore Size
1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3
Rod Dia.
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/4
LB
D
5/8 7/8 7/8 1 1
E
1 1-1/4 1-1/4 2 2
F
11/16 7/8 7/8 1-3/8 1-3/8
G
3/8 1/2 1/2
H
1
A
7/8
O
3/4
Z
1/4
AA
1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8
BB
3/4-16 1-14 1-14 1-3/8-12 1-3/8-12
CC
3/8-16 1/2-13 5/8-11 3/4-10 3/4-10
FF
3-3/8 4-3/8 4-3/8 5-3/8 5-3/8
HH
JJ
LE
1-5/8 2-5/16 2-5/16 2-11/16 2-11/16
2-1/16 13/32 1-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 3 3 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 1-3/4 2-1/4 2-3/4 3-1/4
3/32 3-5/16 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 4-3/8 4-3/8 5 5
1-7/16 1-1/4 1-1/16 5/16 1-7/16 1-1/4 1-1/16 5/16 1-3/8 1-3/8 7/16 7/16
5/8 1-11/16 1-1/2 5/8 1-11/16 1-1/2
Note: 4" bore size offered only with Lipseal Piston. FLUOROCARBON SEALS for operation to 250F are available at extra cost. Specify model PV or KPV.
D95
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensional Data
Model PL Lipseal Piston Single Rod

C086
MODEL PLLIPWEAL PISTONSINGLE ROD

B O DIA. BB THREAD LIPSEAL PISTON GG + STROKE AA NPTF B O DIA. CC THREAD BB THREAD
C DIA.
Z DIA. HH HH LB1 + STROKE D LE
A F E H
Model PL cylinders are available without tang covered by dimension E minus HH at no extra charge. To order specify Model NPL.
Model KPL Lipseal Piston Double Rod MODEL
KPLLIPWEAL PISTONDOUBLE ROD

KK + STROKE B AA NPTF B O DIA. LIPSEAL PISTON BB THREAD CC THREAD
BB THREAD CC THREAD
O DIA.
C DIA.
FAR SIDE A HH LB1 + STROKE D LE H
A HH
H + STROKE
LE + STROKE
Dimensions Model PL and KPL Single and Double Rod Cylinders

Bore Rod Size Dia.
1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/4 1
LB1
D
5/8 7/8 7/8 1 1
E
1 1-1/4 1-1/4 2 2
F
11/16 7/8 7/8 1-3/8 1-3/8
G
3/8 1/2 1/2
H
1
A
7/8
O
3/4
Z
1/4
AA
1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2
BB
3/4-16 1-14 1-14
CC
3/8-16 1/2-13 5/8-11
GG
4-3/8 5-3/8 5-3/8 6-3/8 6-3/8
HH
KK
LE
1-5/8 2-5/16 2-5/16 2-11/16 2-11/16 3-3/8
3-1/16 13/32 1-3/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 4 4 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 1-3/4 2-1/4 2-3/4 3-1/4
3/32 4-5/16 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 5-3/8 4-3/8 6 6
1-7/16 1-1/4 1-1/16 5/16 1-7/16 1-1/4 1-1/16 5/16 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/4 7/16 7/16 1/2
5/8 1-11/16 1-1/2 5/8 1-11/16 1-1/2 3/4 2-1/4 1-7/8
1-3/8-12 3/4-10 1-3/8-12 3/4-10 1-3/4-12 1-14
5-1/2 15/16 4-3/8 1-1/8 2-3/16 1-7/16
8-1/16 3/16 7-1/4
FLUOROCARBON SEALS for operation to 250F are available at extra cost. Specify model PLV or KPLV.
D96
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensional Data

C086
Model AP O-Ring Piston Single Rod 1-1/8 Bore thru 3 Bore MODEL APO-RING PISTONSINGLE ROD1.125" BORE THRU 3" BORE
B P DIA. V M + STROKE AA NPTF B O DIA. BB THREAD O-RING PISTON CC THREAD
C DIA.
A HH Z DIA. E F LB + STROKE D LE H
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM
LE1
1-5/8 3-3/8
Model APL Lipseal Piston Single RodMODEL APLLIPSEAL PISTONSINGLE ROD1.25" BORE THRU 4" BORE 1-1/8 Bore thru 4 Bore
B P DIA. V LIPSEAL PISTON C DIA. K L CC THREAD M1+ STROKE AA NPTF B O DIA. BB THREAD
A HH Z DIA. E F LB1 + STROKE D LE1 H1
Dimensions Models AP and APL only

Bore Rod Size Dia. LB LB1 B C D E
1
F
11/16
H
1
H1
1
M
4-3/8 6-7/8 7-1/2
M1
5-3/8
O
3/4
P
15/16
V
7/8
Z AA
BB
CC
HH
LE
1-5/8
1-1/8 3/8 2-1/16 3-1/16 13/32 1-3/8 5/8 1-1/2 1/2 2-5/8 3-5/8 2 5/8 2-5/8 3-5/8 3 3 4 4 1/2 1-3/4 7/8 1/2 2-1/4 7/8 5/8 2-3/4 5/8 3-1/4
7/8 15/16 3/8
3/8 1/8 3/4-16 3/8-16 3/32 1-14 1-14 1/2-13 1/8 5/8-11 1/8
1-5/8 15/16 2-7/16 1-7/16 1-1/4 1-1/4 1/2 2-1/4 1-9/16 2-7/16 1-7/16 1-1/4 1-1/2 1/2
6-7/8 1-1/16 1-1/4
1-1/2 3/8 1/4
3-5/16 2-5/16 3-5/16 2-5/16
7-1/2 1-1/16 1-11/16 1-3/4 1/2 1/4
2-1/2 3/4 3 4 3/4 1
1 1-13/16 1-1/8 3-11/16 2-11/16 1-1/2 1-1/2 1/2 8-13/16 8-13/16 1-3/8 1 2-5/16 1-5/8 3-11/16 2-11/16 1-1/2 1-1/2 1/2 9-5/16 9-5/16 1-3/8 2-1/4 1-7/8 2-1/4 3/4 10-3/4 1-3/4
2-1/4 1-11/16 1/2 3/8 1-3/8-12 3/4-10 3/16 4-11/16 3-11/16 2-1/4 3 1-3/4 1/2 3/8 1-3/8-12 3/4-10 3/16 4-11/16 3-11/16 2-1/2 3/4 1/2 1-3/4-12 1-14 3/16
5-1/2 15/16 4-3/8 1-1/8 2-7/8 1-7/8
FLUOROCARBON SEALS for operation to 250F are available at extra cost. Specify model ASPV or ASPLV.
D97
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensional Data
Model PR Spring Return Model PE Spring Extend O-Ring Piston
O-RING PISTON

MODEL PRSPRING RETURN MODEL PESPRING EXTEND
LL + (STROKE x 2) B O DIA. BB THREAD C DIA. Z DIA. A HH HH LB + (STROKE X 2) D LE H O-RING PISTON AA NPTF B O DIA. CC THREAD BB THREAD
C086
G E
Spring return cylinders are available without tail section covered by dimension E minus HH at no extra charge. To order, add letter N to model number.
Model PLR Spring Return Model PLE Spring Extend Lipseal Piston
MM + (STROKE x 2) B O DIA. BB THREAD LIPSEAL PISTON AA NPTF B O DIA. CC THREAD BB THREAD
Z DIA. A HH F E LB1 + (STROKE X 2) HH D LE H
Dimensions For Single Rod Spring Return Cylinders up to 6 Stroke (no load spring)
Spring Force Bore Rod Size Dia. 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 LB LB1 B C D E 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 2 2 F G H 1 A 7/8 O 3/4 Z 1/4 AA 1/8 BB 3/4-16 1-14 1-14 CC HH LL MM LE 1-5/8 2-5/16 2-5/16 Pre- Max. load Load (lbs.) (lbs.) 12 14 18 30 30 50 36 45 48 64 64 148
3/8 2-1/16 3-1/16 13/32 1-3/8 5/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/4 1 2-5/8 2-5/8 3 3 s 3-5/8 3-5/8 4 4 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 1-3/4 7/8 2-1/4 7-/8 2-3/4 31/4 1 1
11/16 3/8 7/8 7/8 1-3/8 1-3/8 1/2 1/2
3/8-16 3/32 3-3/8 4-3/8 1/2-13 5/8-11 1/8 4-3/8 5-3/8 1/8 4-3/8 5-3/8
1-7/16 1-1/4 1-1/16 5/16 1/4 1-7/16 1-1/4 1-1/16 5/16 1/4
5/8 1-11/16 1-1/2 1-3/8 7/16 3/8 1-3/8-12 3/4-10 3/16 5-3/8 6-3/8 2-11/16 5/8 1-11/16 1-1/2 1-3/8 7/16 3/8 1-3/8-12 3/4-10 3/16 5-3/8 6-3/8 2-11/16 2-1/4 1-7/8 1-3/4 1/2 1/2 1-3/4-12 1-14 3/16 s 8-1/16 3-3/8
5-1/2 15/16 4-3/8 1-1/8 2-3/16 1-7/16 3/4
s 4" bore spring return cylinders, available only with Lipseal Type Piston. **Net Stroke plus Stop Tube = Gross Stroke. FLUOROCARBON SEALS for operation to 250F are available at extra cost. Specify model PVR, PVE, PLVR or PLVE. *Dimensions shown are for cylinder with no load spring. For heavier springs or double rod spring return cylinders, consult factory.
D98
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Accessories Foot and Flange Mounts

NN

C086
NO TANG TYPE SHOWN. WHEN SPECIFIED THIS MODIFICATION IS AVAILABLE ON ALL P SERIES CYLINDERS
U HOLE SIZE
U HOLE SIZE FOOT MOUNT CAN BE ASSEMBLED IN REVERSE AS SHOWN BY DIMENSIONS R AND SS
O
HH
P M
SS*+ STROKE RR*+ STROKE
N GG
Foot Mount*
L069190000 L069200000 L069200000 L069210000 L069210000 L069220000
Flange Mount**
Bore Size
K
2-1/2
L
2
M
1-3/8 1-9/32 1-9/32
N
1-11/16 1-5/8 1-5/8 2-1/4 2-1/4 3-1/4
O
3/4 1-1/16 1-1/16 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/4
P
7/8 7/8 7/8 1-1/4 1-1/4
R
5/8 9/16 9/16 7/8 7/8
S
1-9/32 1-3/4 1-3/4 2-3/8 2-3/8
U
9/32 9/32 9/32 13/32 13/32
GG
HH
NN
RR
SS
13/16 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/4 1-1/4 2-7/8s
L069230000 1-1/8 5/8 L069240000 1-1/2 7/8 L069240000 2 7/8 1 1
2-11/16 3/32 11/16 3-13/16 2-7/16 2-7/16 3-9/16 3-9/16 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 4-3/8 4-3/8 5-1/2 5-1/2 9s
3-1/4 2-1/2 3-1/4 2-1/2
D
L069250000 2-1/2 L069250000 L069260000 3 4
4-1/2 3-3/8 1-29/32 4-1/2 3-3/8 1-29/32 4 2-17/32
1-1/8 5-1/4
1-3/4 1-5/16 3-3/16 15/32 4-13/16 3/16 2-3/16
sDimension shown is for Lipseal Piston Type. *Part number includes one foot mounting and one mounting nut. **Includes mounting nut.
Clevis Bracket
G Z DIA.
Part Number
L06730 0000
10 L U HOLE SIZE
Cylinder Bore
1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4
G
3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4
U
9/32 9/32 9/32 13/32 13/32
V
1-3/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 3 3
Z
1/4 5/16 5/16 7/16 7/16 1/2
1-9/32 2-1/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2-3/8 2-3/8 3-3/16 3 3 4 4 5
L06731 0000 L06731 0000 L06732 0000 L06732 0000
V SQUARE T SQUARE
V SQUARE T SQUARE
L06733 0000
15/32 3-3/4
Connecting Pin and Locknut furnished with Clevis Bracket.
Rod Clevis
W CC THREAD FF DEEP X Z DIA. ROD CLEVIS EE
Mounting Nut for Cylinders**

A
EE
DD
Part Number
L06734 0000 L06735 0000 L06736 0000 L06737 0000 L06737 0000 L06738 0000
Cyl. Rod Bore Dia.

1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/4 1
A
3/8-16 1/2-13 5/8-11
B
7/32 5/16 3/8
CC
3/8-16 1/2-13 5/8-11
DD
1-1/8 1-5/16 1-5/16
EE
3/4 1 1
FF
5/8
W
1-3/4
X
1-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/4
Y
5/16 3/8 3/8
Z
1/4 5/16 5/16 7/16 7/16 1/2
15/16 2-1/4 15/16 2-1/4
Bore
1-1/8 1-1/2 & 2 2-1/2 & 3 4
Part Number
083301 0048 083301 0100 083301 0124 083183 0000
A
3/4-16 1-14 1-3/8-12 1-3/4-12
B
27/64 35/64 25/32 15/16
3/4-10 27/64 3/4-10 3/4-10 27/64 3/4-10 1-14 35/64 1-14
1-5/16 1-1/4 1-1/16 2-3/8 1-13/16 1/2 1-5/16 1-1/4 1-1/16 2-3/8 1-13/16 1/2 1-13/16 1-1/2 1-9/16 3-3/8 2-5/8 5/8
Note: Rod End Jam Nut furnished with Rod Clevis.
D99
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensor Mounting Data / How to Order P Series Sensors

.87 .59

C086
Bore 1-1/8" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 1.38 4"
Piston Travel at Mid Stroke* (Sensor Activated) 0.33 0.37 0.49 0.44 0.40 0.33
* Sensing distance at End of Stroke can be adjusted from midstroke sensing distance to zero. For sensor specifications and part numbers, see Electronic Sensors section. Piston travel .01".
D
How To Order P Series Sensors
P Series sensors are not mounted to the cylinder prior to shipment. When ordering a cylinder to accommodate a P Series sensor: 1. Derive a proper cylinder number as shown on the Ordering Information page. 2. Place an S in the Special column. 3. Place an L in the Piston column. 4. Underneath the model number specify: 1) Cylinder prepared for sensor. 5. As a separate item specify the number of sensors required.* 6. As a third item specify the quantity of the proper clamp assembly.*
* For information regarding sensors, please refer to the Electronic Sensors section.
Example: To order a 1-1/2" x 6" cylinder with P Series sensors to sense the end of stroke at both head and cap end. Item Qty. Description 11/2 P L U S 16 6 A (1) (1) Cylinder prepared for sensor B (2) P8S-GPSHX Sensor C (2) P8S-TMC02 Clamp Assembly
D100
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits
Table A Seal Kit for Series "P" Cylinders with O-Ring Piston Contains: 2 each Symbol #15 & 1 each Symbol #16, 24 & 25 Bore Size 1-1/8" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" Standard Seal Kit Part Number L067680000 L067690000 L067700000 L067710000 L067720000 Table B Seal Kit for Series "P" Cylinders with Lipseal Piston Contains: 2 each Symbol #15 & 23 & 1 each Symbol #24 & 25 Bore Size 1-1/8" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" Standard Seal Kit Part Number L067780000 L067790000 L067800000 L067810000 L067820000 L067830000 Table C Cushion Seal Kit for Series "P Cylinders Contains: 2 each Symbol #19 & 21 (Symbol #21 not required or supplied for 1 1/8" & 1 1/2" bore size cylinders) Bore Size 1-1/8" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" Standard Seal Kit Part Number L067900000 L067910000 L067920000 L067930000 L067930000 L067940000 Hi - Temp Seal Kit Part Number L067950000 L067960000 L067970000 L067980000 L067980000 L067990000 Hi - Temp Seal Kit Part Number L067840000 L067850000 L067860000 L067870000 L067880000 L067890000 Hi - Temp Seal Kit Part Number L067730000 L067740000 L067750000 L067760000 L067770000

C086
D
SR/SRM, SRD/SRDM D101
P1L
SRX
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes

C086
D102
Compact Pneumatic Cylinders

Section E
E
P1M E1
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
P1M P1M Swing Clamp Tooling Plate
Catalog 0900P-4
Section E Overview
Section E Compact Pneumatic Cylinders

P1M Series
10 Bore Sizes: 12mm through 100mm Short Overall Length Smooth Extruded Exterior Flexible Porting Piston Position Sensing
P1M Series with Tooling Plate

32, 40 and 50 mm Bore Sizes Short Overall Length Flexible Porting Industry Interchangeable Non-Rotating Capability
P1M Series Swing Clamp

32, 40 and 50 mm Bore Sizes Short Overall Length 90 Clamping Rotation Right Hand or Left Hand Rotation Flexible Porting
LP / LPM Series
Low Profile Design 6 Mounting Styles 8 Bore Sizes from 9/16" to 4" Strokes from 1/8" to 6" Permanent Lubrication
C05 Series
6 Bore Sizes 8mm though 63mm Short Stroke Cylinder Block Style Mount Single and Double Acting Available
P1G Series
6, 10, and 16mm Bore Sizes 5, 10, and 15mm Stroke Lengths Cartridge Style Mount Single Acting, Non-Lube Design Nickel Plated Brass Body with Stainless Steel Rod for Corrosion
E2
P1M Series
Extra Low Profile Pneumatic Cylinder
E
P1M Contents
Features ..............................................................................E4 Ordering Information............................................................E5 Specifications ......................................................................E6 Technical Data .....................................................................E7 Dimensions .................................................................. E8-E11 Mounting Dimensions ................................................ E12-E15 Double Rod Style Dimensions ................................... E16-E17 Rod End Accessories ................................................ E18-E19 Service Kits .......................................................................E20
E3
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Unique Internal Transfer Tube Provides a passage that can be used for remote porting.
Extra Low Profile Pneumatic Cylinders P1M Series

Bumpers Optional bumpers provide noise reduction and impact resistance. Urethane for 12-25mm bore sizes, Hytrel for 32-100mm bore sizes.
C086
High Strength Rod Bearing Multilayer PTFE with steel backing.
Cylinder Body Smooth anodized aluminum exterior provides wearresistant surface.
Rounded Lip Rod Wiper Seal Non-lube urethane rod seal provides dual function as rod seal and rod wiper to eliminate leakage and prevent contamination from entering the cylinder.
Ports Optional NPTF or BSPP ports at no extra charge.
E
Z-Profile Piston Seal Dynamic piston seal features two rounded micro sealing edges for maximum wear compensation and rounded grooves for retaining lubrication.
Piston Magnet Located behind the piston in a separate magnet carrier, the piston magnet is used for electronic piston sensing. (Increases cylinder body length.)
Rod Ends Four standard piston rod ends to meet a variety of requirements.
Construction Innovative 3-piece bolted design.
Mounting Holes Counter bored tapped or through holes for mounting.
Piston Rod Stainless steel or hard chrome plated carbon steel piston rods (stainless steel standard on 25mm bore and under).
Sensors Recessed, flush position sensors available in PNP, NPN or REED styles.
Hytrel is a registered trademark of DuPont.
Extra Low Profile Version

The Extra Low Profile Bearing Version allows us to provide the most compact cylinder possible. This bearing version is recommended for applications that require shorter stroke lengths or that are light duty. It is available in stroke lengths up to 50mm in the smaller bore sizes and 150 mm in the larger bore sizes.
Long Bearing Version

The Long Bearing Version provides additional rod bearing and piston bearing support and also includes a magnetic piston with bearing strip for greater piston bearing support. This Long Bearing version is required for stroke lengths beyond the Extra Low Profile maximum stroke length and is recommended for higher duty applications.
E4
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information How to Order P1M Series Cylinders P1M 032 C / D

C086
012
Stroke in mm
Bore Size 012 016 020 025 032 040 050 063 080 100 12mm 16mm 20mm 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm 80mm 100mm
Insert / to denote Special
Piston Rod & Bearings Extra Low Profile Rod Bearing
Function D K R E Double Acting Double Rod Single Acting Spring Return Single Acting Spring Extend 4
Chrome Plated Steel Rod Not Available on 12-25mm Bores Stainless Steel Rod Standard on 12-25mm Bores and Spring Extend Models Long Rod Bearing 2
Ports BSPP G H J K Ported Each End Both Ports Head Both Ports Cap Both Ports Cap Face 3 NPTF (Not available on 12-25mm Bores) Ported Each End Both Ports Head Both Ports Cap Both Ports Cap Face 3
Cylinder Style C A B F J H Basic No Mtgs. Double Rear Clevis 1,3 Single Rear Clevis 1,3 Foot Mount 1,4 Front Flange 1 Rear Flange 1, 3
C Piston/Seal Material Without Magnet C G B No Bumpers Class 1 Std. Temp. Seals No Bumpers Class 5 Fluorocarbon Seals With Bumpers Class 1 Std. Temp. Seals A
Chrome Plated Steel Rod Not Available on 12-25mm Bores Stainless Steel Rod Standard on 12-25mm Bores and Spring Extend Models
N M L P
E
P1M
With Magnet 5 (Not available on Spring Extend Models) N No Bumpers Class 1 Std. Temp. Seals M With Bumpers Class 1 Std. Temp. Seals
Rod Threads Inch Male Female Metric (Not available on single acting models) 5 Male 6 Female 3 Special Rod End 4 9
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
50 100 100 100 100 150 150
8 9 7 13 18 23 18
200 320 320 320 500 500 500
32 40 50 63 80 100
* Minimum Stroke for Double Rod cylinders: 12-63mm Bores is 5mm 80 &100mm Bores is 10mm
E5
P1G
NOTES: 1 Fitted with Mounting Accessory 2 Magnetic Piston Option must be specified along with Long Rod Bearing option to achieve Long Bearing Version 3 Porting Options K and P (Both ports cap face) not available with rear mountings 4 Single Acting Spring Extend available with stainless steel rod only. 5 For information regarding sensors, please refer to Electronic Sensors section.
Maximum Stroke Lengths

Bore 12 16 20 25 ELP Bearing Version Min. Stroke* 3 3 3 Max. Stroke 50 50 50 Long Bearing Version Min. Stroke* 4 4 8 Max. Stroke 200 200 200
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications Material Specifications 1

Piston Rod
Extra Low Profile Pneumatic Cylinders P1M Series High Temperature Option
O-Rings Piston Rod Seal Piston Seal Additional Data Working Pressure Standard Temperature High Temperature Service Max.10 Bar Air -20C to +80C -4F to +176F -10C to +121C +14F to 250F Fluorocarbon, FPM Fluorocarbon, FPM Fluorocarbon, FPM
C086
12mm to 25mm bores: Stainless Steel 32mm to 100mm bores: Chrome Plated Carbon Steel Std., Optional Stainless Steel (Stainless Steel std. on single-acting spring extend) Piston Rod Seal Polyurethane Piston Rod Bearing 2 Multilayer PTFE with Steel Backing End Covers Anodized Aluminum Alloy Assembly Cap Screws Stainless Steel / Zinc-Plated Steel O-Rings Nitrile Rubber, NBR Cylinder Body Anodized Aluminum Alloy Piston Aluminum Alloy Piston Seal Nitrile Rubber, NBR 3 Brass (12-25mm) Magnetic Piston Bearing Nylon (32-100mm) Magnet Plastic Coated Magnetic Material Bumpers Polyurethane Return Spring Chrome Silicon Wire
1 Dimensions not otherwise noted are listed in millimeters (mm) 2 Excludes 12-25mm bore Rod Style Y 3 Magnetic Piston option is not available on Spring Extend models.
Single Acting Cylinders

Bore (mm) 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Return Loads Max (lbs) 2.8 3.5 3.5 4.7 6.0 7.2 14.3 14.3 26.0 26.0 Min (lbs) 1.0 1.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.7 6.0 6.0 14.0 14.0 Extend Loads Max (lbs) 2.5 4.0 5.0 6.0 6.5 7.0 18.0 18.0 25.0 25.0 Min (lbs) 1.1 2.0 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 Standard Stroke Lengths (mm) 2 5,10 5,10 5,10 5,10 5,10 5,10 10, 20, 25 10, 20, 25 10, 20, 25 10, 20, 25
Spring Return
Spring Extend
63 80 100
Additional Length for Bumper Option

Double Acting* Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Single Rod 1.4 1.6 2.2 2.2 1.0 1.0 0.8 1.0 0.8 1.0 Double Rod 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 1.0 1.0 0.8 1.0 0.8 1.0 Single Acting** Spring Return 0.6 0.7 0.7 Spring Extend 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5
NOTES: 1 Overall Length to be the same as double-acting models with comparable bearing, piston and porting configuration. 2 Single-acting cylinders are available in standard stroke lengths. Custom stroke lengths are available upon request. 3 Spring Extend cylinders available with stainless steel rod only. 4 Magnetic Piston Option is not available on Spring Extend Models.
* Bumpers at both ends ** Bumpers at end opposite of spring only.
E6
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Forces, Weights, Air Consumption

Bore (mm) 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Area (cm2) 1.13 2.01 3.14 4.91 8.0 12.6 19.6 31.2 50.3 78.5 Piston Rod Dia. (mm) 6 8 10 10 12 16 20 20 25 25 Area (cm2) Extend Force* (N) 67 120 188 294 482 754 1178 1870 3016 4712

C086
Retract Force* (N) 50 91 142 247 414 633 989 1681 2721 4417
Weight Zero Stroke (kg) 0.060 0.090 0.150 0.170 0.260 0.370 0.570 0.860 1.460 2.390 Per 10mm Stroke (kg) 0.016 0.022 0.032 0.034 0.044 0.060 0.085 0.098 0.146 0.155
Air Consumption (Liters)** 0.0139 0.0246 0.0385 0.0633 0.1050 0.1620 0.2530 0.4140 0.6690 1.0430
0.28 0.50 0.78 0.78 1.1 2.0 3.1 3.1 4.9 4.9
*Theoretical cylinder force at 600 kPa (6 bar). ** Free air consumption per 10mm stroke length for an extend and retract stroke at 600 kPa (6 bar)
Porting Configurations
Both Ports Cap Both Ports Head* Both Ports Cap Face Double Rod Both Ports One End
E
4 2
4
P1M P1G C05(S) LP(M)
Bores 32-50mm Bores 63-100mm
To retract cylinder apply air to port #2 To extend cylinder apply air to port #4 For a double rod cylinder, pressurize port #2 to retract the piston rod into the head containing the ports.
*For 12mm to 16mm bores, although the location of ports #2 and #4 are reversed, porting functions shown above apply.
Front Profiles by Bore Size
Bores 12-25mm
E7
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Extra Low Profile Version

C086
BOTH PORTS HEAD
ALL PORTING CONFIGURATIONS

L NB NB L
Bores 12-50mm:
PL I12
EE1 (Orifice ) 2 Places
(2) R2 Thru, 180 Apart. (4) R1 C'Bore; Bores 63-100mm: (4) R2 Thru, (8) R1 C'Bore
MOUNTING HOLE CONFIGURATION BOTH PORTS HEAD

R2 R1
MM
E1
E2
EE 2 Places WH I53 (I73) + Stroke ZL3 (ZH3) + Stroke
R SQ.
RT
HL I91 BG1
HL I92 BG2
OPTIONAL PORTING CONFIGURATIONS

BOTH PORTS CAP
I12 EE 2 Places
HEAD & CAP PORTED

PL I12
2
EE 2 Places
EE1 (Orifice ) 2 Places PL PL WH I51 (I71) + Stroke ZL1 (ZH1) + Stroke
WH
I51 (I71) + Stroke ZL1 (ZH1) + Stroke
4
EE 2 Places
BOTH PORTS CAP FACE

I12
P1 P2
2
P3 P4
WH
I51 (I71) + Stroke ZL1 (ZH1) + Stroke
MOUNTING HOLE CONFIGURATION

BOTH PORTS CAP OR CAP FACE, PORTS AT HEAD & CAP
R2 R1 RT I91 HL HL BG1 I91
Note: Magnetic Dimensions in Parentheses Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
E8
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Extra Low Profile Version

For special rod ends, specify 3 in model number and give desired WH, AM or AF and KK or KF.
SW Wrench Flats KK

C086
KF Thread x Depth AF
Jam nut is supplied when cylinder is ordered with Style 4 or Style 5 rod end.
AM
WH
WH
Style 6/Style 9 KK WH Style 4 #8-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16 I91 3.5 4 4.5 5 4 4 5 6.5 8.5 8.5 I92 3.5 4 4.5 5 4 4 5 8 10 10 Style 4, 9 & 6 3.5 3.5 4.5 5 7 7 8 8 10 12 L 26 20 20 20 25 20 20 20 20 20 Magnetic ZL3 20.5 22 24 27.5 35.5 36.5 40.5 42 53 60.5 I71 33 34.5 34 38.5 46 47.5 47.5 51.5 62.5 71.5 I73 28 29.5 29.5 32.5 37.5 39.5 41.5 46 53.5 63 ZH1 36.5 38 38.5 43.5 53 54.5 55.5 59.5 72.5 83.5 ZH3 31.5 33 34 37.5 44.5 46.5 49.5 54 63.5 75 Style 5 5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8 8 7.5 7.5 11 11 NB 5.5 7 8 8.5 9.5 11.5 14.5 17.5 25.5 31.5 P1 25 29.5 35 38.5 45.5 51 63 73.5 92 111.5 I12 3 3 4 4 5 5.5 5.5 5.5 6 6 SW 5 7 9 9 13 16 16 21 21 P2 9.5 9.5 13.5 14 16.5 12 54.5 64 79.5 97.5 10
Style 5/Style 4 AF Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Rod 6 8 10 10 12 16 20 20 25 25 BG1 16.5 17 19 21 25 25.5 29.5 34 43 44 P3 13.5 15.5 24.5 27.5 31.5 23 25 30 33 36.5 Style 6 6 8 7 12 13 13 15 15 21 27 BG2 11.5 12 14,5 15 17 17.5 23.5 28 34 35.5 P4 13.5 18 21.5 24.5 28.5 33 41.5 53 69.5 87.5 PL 5 5 5 7 8 7.5 8 8 11.5 12 Style 9 5.4 5.4 7 10 13.3 18.3 17.6 17.6 24.3 27 E 27 31.5 38.5 41.5 48 56 67 82 98 119 PM 8.5 9 9 9 10.5 9.5 10 11 11.5 12 Style 5 9 10 12 15 20.5 20.5 26 26 32.5 32.5 E1 31 35 42.5 45.5 56 62.5 74.5 86 106.5 126.5 R 15.5 20 25.5 28 34 40 50 60 77 94 E2 14 16 19,5 21 24 28 33.5 40.5 48.5 59.5 R1 5.8 7.4 9 9 10.5 10.5 13.5 13.5 16.5 17 R2* 3.5 3.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 9.5 11 11 AM Style 4 8 8 8 9.5 12.7 16 19.5 19.5 25.5 28.5 Style 6 M3x0.5 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M16x2.0 M20x2.5 EE BSPP M5 M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 RT M4 M4 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M10 M12 M12 NPTF 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 KF Style 9 #8-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16 EE1 1 1.2 1.3 1.8 2.7 3.4 4 5 5.5 6 Style 5 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1,5 HL 8 8 10 10 10 10 14 18 22 22
E
P1M P1G C05(S) LP(M) P1M P1M Swing Clamp Tooling Plate
Non-Magnetic I51 22 23.5 24 28.5 36.5 37.5 38.5 39.5 52 57 I53 17 18.5 19.5 22.5 28.5 29.5 32.5 34 43 48.5 ZL1 25.5 27 28.5 33.5 43.5 44.5 46.5 47.5 62 69
ELP Max Stroke 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 150 150
*R2 thru not available on 12 and 16mm Bores.
E9
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Long Bearing Version

ALL PORTING CONFIGURATIONS
L NB NB L
C086
Bores 12-50mm:
BOTH PORTS HEAD
PM I12
(2) R2 Thru, 180 Apart. (4) R1 C'Bore; Bores 63-100mm: (4) R2 Thru, (8) R1 C'Bore
MOUNTING HOLE CONFIGURATION BOTH PORTS HEAD

R2 R1 MM
R SQ.
E1
E2
EE 2 Places WH I72 + Stroke ZH2 + Stroke
RT
HL I9 BG
HL I92 BG2
E
I12
OPTIONAL PORTING CONFIGURATIONS

BOTH PORTS CAP HEAD & CAP PORTED
EE 2 Places PL I12
2
EE 2 Places
EE1 (Orifice ) 2 Places PL PL WH I7 + Stroke ZH + Stroke
WH
I7 + Stroke ZH + Stroke
EE 2 Places
BOTH PORTS CAP FACE

I12
4
P1 P2
2
P3 P4
WH
I7 + Stroke ZH + Stroke
MOUNTING HOLE CONFIGURATION

BOTH PORTS CAP OR CAP FACE, PORTS AT HEAD & CAP
R2 R1 RT HL I9 BG BG1 HL I91
E10
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Long Bearing Version

SW Wrench Flats KK

C086
Jam nut is supplied when Style 4 or Style 5 rod end is specified. Note: Magnetic piston and longer rod bearing are standard with Long Bearing Version.
AM
WH
WH
Style 6/Style 9
Style 5/Style 4
Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Rod MM 6 8 10 10 12 16 20 20 25 25 BG 21.5 22 24.5 24.5 27.5 27.5 31.5 37 43 44 NB 5.5 7 8 8.5 9.5 11.5 14.5 17.5 25.5 31.5
AF Style 6 6 8 7 12 13 13 15 15 21 27 BG1 16.5 17 19 21 25 25.5 29.5 34 43 44 P1 25 29.5 35 38.5 45.5 51 63 73.5 92 111.5 Style 9 5.4 5.4 7 10 13.3 18.3 17.6 17.6 24.3 27 BG2 11.5 12 14.5 15 17 17.5 23.5 28 34 35.5 P2 9.5 9.5 13.5 14 16.5 12 54.5 64 79.5 97.5
AM Style 5 9 10 12 15 20.5 20.5 26 26 32.5 32.5 E 27 31.5 38.5 41.5 48 56 67 82 98 119 P3 13.5 15.5 24.5 27.5 31.5 23 25 30 33 36.5 Style 4 8 8 8 9.5 12.7 16 19.5 19.5 25.5 28.5 E1 31 35 42.5 45.5 56 62.5 74.5 86 106.5 126.5 P4 13.5 18 21.5 24.5 28.5 33 41.5 53 69.5 87.5 Style 6 M3x0.5 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M16x2.0 M20x2.5 E2 14 16 19.5 21 24 28 33.5 40.5 48.5 59.5 PM 8.5 9 9 9 10.5 9.5 10 11 11.5 12
KF Style 9 #8-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16 EE BSPP NPTF M5 M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 R 15.5 20 25.5 28 34 40 50 60 77 94 18 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 R1 5.8 7.4 9 9 10.5 10.5 13.5 13.5 16.5 17 Style 5 M5x0.8 M6x1.0
KK Style 4 #8-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16 I7 38.5 40.5 40 42.5 48 49.5 49.5 54.5 62.5 71.5 ZH 42 44 44.5 47.5 55 56.5 57.5 62.5 72.5 83.5 I72 33.5 35.5 35.5 36.5 40 41.5 43.5 49 53.5 63 ZH2 37 39 40 41.5 47 48.5 51.5 57 62.5 75
WH Style 4, 9&6 3.5 3.5 4.5 5 7 7 8 8 10 12 I9 3.5 5.5 10.5 10.5 14 14 13 6.5 9.5 9.5 Style 5 5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8 8 7.5 7.5 11 11 I91 3.5 4 4.5 5 4 4 5 6.5 8.5 8.5 I12 3 3 4 4 5 5.5 5.5 5.5 6 6 I92 3.5 4 4.5 5 4 4 5 8 10 10 SW 5 7 9 9 13 16 16 21 21 L 26 20 20 20 25 20 20 20 20 20 10
M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 EE1 1 1.2 1.3 1.8 2.7 3.4 4 5 5.5 6 R2* 3.5 3.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 9.5 11 11 HL 8 8 10 10 10 10 14 18 22 22 RT M4 M4 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M10 M12 M12
E
Min Stroke 4 4 8 8 9 7 13 18 23 18
Max Stroke 200 200 200 200 320 320 320 500 500 500
* R2 thru not available on 12 and 16mm Bores.
E11
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions F Style Mounting Foot Mounting Style F

WF

C086
KF x AF Deep (See Opposite Page)
LY I7 AH
AT AU AJ SA 1-6* + Stroke ZA 1-6* + Stroke AU K1
TR E3
(4) - AB
Please note bearing, piston and porting configuration for selecting proper dimensions.
Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Kit Part Number P1M-4DMF P1M-4FMF P1M-4HMF P1M-4JMF P1M-4KMF P1M-4LMF P1M-4MMF P1M-4NMF P1M-4PMF P1M-4QMF
AB 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 9 11 13 13
AH 17 19 24 26 30 33 39 46 59 71
AJ 19.5 19.5 20.5 22.5 25 25 29.5 31 35 39
AT 2 2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 4.5 6
AU 8 8 9.2 10.7 11.2 11.2 14.7 16.2 19.5 23
E3 44 48 62 66 71 78 95 113 140 162
I7 29.5 33.5 42 46 54 61 72.5 32 42 53
K1 2.8 2.8 4 4 4 4 5 5 7 7
LY 34 38 47 50.5 62 67.5 80 91.5 117 138
TR 35 39 50 52 60 67 82 100 118 139
ELP Version Non-Magnetic Bore Both Ports Head SA1 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 5 6.5 7.5 7.5 12.5 13.5 9.5 8 13 14.5 ZA1* 35.3 36.8 41.2 44.7 52.5 53.7 58.7 60.2 74.5 83.5 Optional Porting SA2* 10 11.5 12 13.5 20.5 21.5 15.5 13.5 22 23 ZA2* 40.3 41.8 45.7 50.7 60.7 61.9 64.9 65.7 83.5 92 Min. ** Stroke 15 14 18 18 18 17 22 30 33 33
ELP Version Magnetic Both Ports Head SA3 16 17.5 17.5 17.5 21.5 23.5 18.5 20 23.5 29 ZA3* 46.3 47.8 51.2 54.7 61.7 63.7 67.7 72.2 85 98 Optional Porting SA4 21 22.5 22 23.5 29.5 31.5 24.5 25.5 32.5 37.5 ZA4* 51.3 52.8 55.7 60.7 69.9 71.9 73.9 77.7 94 106.5 Min.** Stroke 4 4 8 8 9 7 13 18 23 18
Long Bearing Version Both Ports Head SA5 21.5 23.5 23.5 21.5 24 25.5 20.5 23 23.5 29 ZA5* 51.8 53.8 57.2 58.7 64 65.7 69.7 75.2 85 98 Optional Porting SA6 26.5 28.5 28 27.5 32 33.5 26.5 28.5 32.5 37.5 ZA6* 56.8 58.8 61.9 64.7 72.2 73.9 75.9 80.7 94 106.5 Min.** Stroke 4 4 8 8 9 7 13 18 23 18
Style 5 End Length Adjustment 1.5 2 2 2.5 1 1 -0.5 -0.5 1 -1
* For strokes less than Min. Stroke, only one bracket will be supplied at rod end. ** Dimensions shown apply only for Rod End Styles 4, 6 and 9. For Rod End Style 5, please include the above length adjustment. Note: Foot Bracket mounting is not available with cap face porting
E12
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Style J Mounting Front Flange Mounting Style J

MF

C086
Bores 32-100mm
KF x AF Deep
Bores 12-25mm
E
E R (4) FB
(2) FB TF
W WF
ZB1-6* + Stroke
TF UF
UF
ELP Version Non-Magnetic Bore Kit Part Number E FB MF R TF UF Both Ports Head ZB1* 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 P1M-4DMB P1M-4FMB P1M-4HMB P1M-4JMB P1M-4KMB P1M-4LMB P1M-4MMB P1M-4NMB P1M-4PMB P1M-4QMB 25 30 39 42 48 54 67 80 99 117 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 9 11 11 5.5 5.5 8 8 8 8 9 9 11 11 34 40 50 60 77 94 45 45 50.5 53 58 66 79 97 116 137 55 55 62 65 68 76 90 112 134 154 30.5 32 34 37.5 45.5 46.5 50.5 52 63 70.5 Optional Porting ZB2* 35.5 37 38.5 43.5 53.5 54.5 56.5 57.5 72 79
ELP Version Magnetic Both Ports Head ZB3* 41.5 43 44 47.5 54.5 56.5 59.5 64 73.5 85 Optional Porting ZB4* 46.5 48 48.5 53.5 62.5 64.5 65.5 69.5 82.5 93.5
Long Bearing Version Both Ports Head ZB5* 47 49 50 51.5 57 58.5 61.5 67 73.5 85 Optional Porting ZB6* 52 54 54.5 57.5 65 66.5 67.5 72.5 82.5 93.5
Style 5 Rod End Length Adjustment
1.5 2 2 1 1 -0.5 1 -1 -0.5 2.5
E
P1M
7 9 9 10 13 16 16 21 21
* Dimensions shown apply only for Rod End Styles 4, 6 and 9.
For Rod End Style 5, please include the above length adjustment.
W
WF KF Thread x Depth AF
Rod End Dimensions Front Mounts F & J For special rod threads, specify 3 in model number and give desired AM or AF, WF and KK or KF.
SW Wrench Flats KK
SW Wrench Flats KK
AM
WF
AM
WF
WF
Foot Mounting - Style F
Foot Flange Mounting - Style J
Foot Mounting - Style F
Foot Flange Mounting - Style J
AF Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Style 9 5.4 5.4 7 10 13.3 18.3 17.6 17.6 24.3 27 Style 6 6 8 7 12 13 13 15 15 21 27
AM Style 4 8 8 8 9.5 12.7 16 19.5 19.5 25.5 28.5 Style 5 9 10 12 15 20.5 20.5 26 26 32.5 32.5 Style 9 #8-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16
KF Style 6 M3X0.5 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M16x2.0 M20x2.5 Style 4 #8-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16
KK Style 5 M5X0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 Styles 9, 6, 4 8 8 6.5 7 9 9 9 9 9 11
W Style 5 9.5 10 8.5 9.5 10 10 8.5 8.5 10 10
WF Styles 9, 6, 4 13.5 13.5 14.5 15 17 17 18 18 20 22 Style 5 15 15.5 16.5 17.5 18 18 17.5 17.5 21 21 SW 5
E13
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Style H Mounting Rear Flange Mounting Style H

C086
Bores 32-100mm
Bores 12-25mm
E R
(4) FB
E (2) FB
MF ZF1-6* + Stroke
TF UF
TF UF
E
Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Kit Part Number P1M-4DMB P1M-4FMB P1M-4HMB P1M-4JMB P1M-4KMB P1M-4LMB P1M-4MMB P1M-4NMB P1M-4PMB P1M-4QMB
E 25 30 39 42 48 54 67 80 99 117
FB 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 9 11 11
MF 5.5 5.5 8 8 8 8 9 9 11 11
R 34 40 50 60 77 94
TF 45 45 50.5 53 58 66 79 97 116 137
UF 55 55 62 65 68 76 90 112 134 154
ELP Version Non-Magnetic Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Both Ports Head ZF1* 26 27.5 32 35.5 43.5 44.5 49.5 51 64 71.5 Optional Porting ZF2* 31 32.5 36.5 41.5 51.5 52.5 55.5 57.5 73 80
ELP Version Magnetic Both Ports Head ZF3* 37 38.5 42 45.5 52.5 54.5 58.5 63 74.5 86 Optional Porting ZF4* 42 43.5 46.5 51.5 60.5 62.5 64.5 68.5 83.5 94.5
Long Bearing Version Both Ports Head ZF5* 42.5 44.5 48 49.5 55 56.5 60.5 66 74.5 86 Optional Porting ZF6* 47.5 49.5 52.5 55.5 63 64.5 66.5 71.5 83.5 94.5
Style 5 Rod End Length Adjustment 1.5 2 2 2.5 1 1 -0.5 -0.5 1 -1
Note: Rear Flange mounting is not available with cap face porting. * Dimensions shown apply only for Rod End Styles 4, 6 and 9. For Rod End Style 5, please include the above length adjustment.
E14
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Rear Clevis Mounts Styles A & B

C086
O
F
CD
EK h9
MR
L FL XD1-6* + Stroke
CB UB
EW
Style A
Style B
E
O 14.5 16.5 21 25.5 41.5 41.5 50.5 50.5 64 72 UB 10 12 16 20 36 36 44 44 56 64
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
P1M-4DMT P1M-4FMT P1M-4HMT P1M-4JMT P1M-4KMT P1M-4LMT P1M-4MMT P1M-4NMT P1M-4PMT P1M-4QMT
P1M-4DME P1M-4FME P1M-4HME P1M-4JME P1M-4KME P1M-4LME P1M-4MME P1M-4NME P1M-4PME P1M-4QME
5 6.5 8 10 18 18 22 22 28 32
5 5 8 10 10 10 14 14 18 22
5 6.5 8 10 18 18 22 22 28 32
4 4 5 5 5 6 7 8 10 13
14 15 18 20 20 22 28 30 38 45
10 11 13 15 15 16 21 22 28 32
6.5 6.5 10 11 10 10 14 14 18 22
ELP Version Non-Magnetic
ELP Version Magnetic Both Ports Head XD3* 45.5 48 52 57.5 64.5 68.5 77.5 84 101.5 120 Optional Porting XD4* 50.5 53 56.5 63.5 72.5 76.5 83.5 89.5 110.5 128.5
Long Bearing Version Both Ports Head XD5* 51 54 58 61.5 67 70.5 79.5 87 101.5 120 Optional Porting XD6* 56 59 62.5 67.5 75 78.5 85.5 92.5 110.5 128.5
Bore
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
34.5 37 42 47.5 55.5 58.5 68.5 72 91 105.5
39.5 42 46.5 53.5 63.5 66.5 74.5 78.5 100 114
1.5 2 2 2.5 1 1 -0.5 -0.5 1 -1
* Dimensions shown apply only for Rod End Styles 4, 6 and 9. For Rod End Style 5, please include the above length adjustment. ** Single Clevis Kit can be used as mounting bracket for double clevis cylinders. Double Clevis Kit can be used as mounting kit for single clevis cylinders. Note: Rear Clevis mounts are not available with cap face port.
E15
P1G
C05(S)
Both Ports Head XD1*
Optional Porting XD2*
Style 5 Rod End Length Adjustment
LP(M)
Bore
Double Clevis Kit Part Number
Single Clevis Kit Part Number**
CB
CD/EK
EW
FL
MR
P1M
Catalog 0900P-4
Double Rod Style C and J Basic Cylinder Style C Flange Mounting Style J
Heads Ported at Each End or One End
Refer to Single Rod (pages E6-E9) for dimensions not listed below. Both rods will be supplied with same rod ends unless called out as special.

C086
WH
WH + Stroke
WF
WH + Stroke
I75 / K51 / K71* + Stroke ZH5-7* + Stroke XH / XH1 / XH2* + 2x Stroke

Style C
ZB7-9* + Stroke
XH6-8* + 2x Stroke
Style J
E
Basic Cylinder Style C Bore K51 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 22 23.5 24 28.5 36.5 37.5 38.5 39.5 52 57 ELP Version Non-Magnetic XH2 29 30.5 33 38.5 50.5 51.5 54.5 55.5 72 81 ZH7 25.5 27 28.5 33.5 43.5 44.5 46.5 47.5 62 69 Min. Stroke 15 14 18 18 18 17 22 30 33 33 K71 40 40 38 38.5 46 47.5 47.5 51.5 62.5 71.5 ELP Version Magnetic XH1 47 47 47 48.5 60 61.5 63.5 67.5 82.5 95.5 ZH6 43.5 43.5 42.5 43.5 53 54.5 55.5 59.5 72.5 83.5 Min. Stroke 5 5 8 8 9 14 20 20 25 25 I75 45.5 46.5 46.5 46.5 50.5 51.5 51.5 57.5 62.5 71.5 Long Bearing Version XH 52.5 53.5 55.5 56.5 64.5 65.5 67.5 73.5 82.5 95.5 ZH5 49 50 51 51.5 57.5 58.5 59.5 65.5 72.5 83.5 Min. Stroke 5 5 8 8 9 12 20 20 25 25
Flange Mounting Style J Bore ELP Version Non-Magnetic XH6 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 39 40.5 43 48.5 60.5 61.5 64.5 65.5 82 91 ZB7 35.5 37 38.5 43.5 53.5 54.5 56.5 57.5 72 79 Min.* Stroke 5 5 8 18 18 17 22 30 33 33 ELP Version Magnetic XH7 57 57 57 58.5 70 71,5 73.5 77.5 92.5 105.5 ZB8 53.5 53.5 52.5 53.5 62.5 64.5 65.5 69.5 82.5 93.5 Min.* Stroke 5 5 8 8 9 14 20 20 25 25 Long Bearing Version XH8 62.5 63.5 65.5 66.5 74.5 75.5 77.5 83.5 92.5 105.5 ZB9 59 60 61 61.5 67.5 68.5 69.5 75.5 82.5 93.5 Min.* Stroke 5 5 8 8 9 12 20 20 25 25 Styles 4, 6, 9 13.5 13.5 14.5 15 17 17 18 18 20 22
Rod End Dimensions WF Style 5 15 15.5 16.5 17.5 18 18 17.5 17.5 21 21 Styles 4, 6, 9 3.5 3.5 4.5 5 7 7 8 8 10 12 WH Style 5 5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8 8 7.5 7.5 11 11
* Note: Please consult factory for cylinders that require shorter than minimum stroke length listed above.
E16
Catalog 0900P-4
Double Rod Style F Foot Mounting Style F

C086
WF
WF + Stroke
Heads Ported at Each End or One End

Refer to Single Rod (pages E6-E9) for dimensions not listed below. Both rods will be supplied with same rod ends unless called out as special.
SA7-9* + Stroke XH3-5* + 2x Stroke

Style F
E
Long Bearing Version SA9 33.5 34.5 34.5 31.5 34.5 35.5 28.5 31.5 32.5 37.5 XH5 72.5 73.5 75.5 76.5 84.5 85.5 87.5 93.5 102.5 115.5 Min.* Stroke 5 5 8 8 9 12 20 20 25 25
ELP Version Non-Magnetic Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 SA7 10 11.5 12 13.5 20.5 21.5 15.5 13.5 22 23 XH3 49 50.5 53 58.5 70.5 71.5 74.5 75.5 92 101 Min.* Stroke 5 5 8 8 8 7 12 20 23 23 SA8 28 28 26 23.5 29.5 31.5 24.5 25.5 32.5 37.5
ELP Version Magnetic XH4 67 67 67 68.5 80 81.5 83.5 87.5 102.5 115.5 Min.* Stroke 5 5 8 5 5 5 10 10 15 15
Rod End Dimensions Bore WF Styles 4, 6, 9 13.5 13.5 14.5 15 17 17 18 18 20 22 Style 5 15 15.5 16.5 17.5 18 18 17.5 17.5 21 21 Styles 4, 6, 9 3.5 3.5 4.5 5 7 7 8 8 10 12 WH Style 5 5 5.5 7.5 8 8 7.5 7.5 11 11 6.5
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
* Note: Please consult factory for cylinders that require shorter than minimum stroke length listed above.
E17
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
P1M
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod End Accessories Rod Clevis

O CL CM

C086
ER EK
LE CE
KK Th'd x A Depth E
Rod Clevis Metric

Bore 12 Kit Part Number P1M-4DRC P1M-4FRC P1M-4HRC P1M-4JRC P1M-4KRC P1M-4LRC P1M-4MRC P1M-4PRC P1M-4QRC A 7 11 8.5 10.5 16 16 20 23 24 E 9.5 11 16 19 22 Dia. 22 Dia. 28 Dia. 38 Dia. 44 Dia. CE 16 21 25 30 30 30 40 50 55 KK M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 ER 6.5 8 10.5 13 12 12 16 21 24 LE 7 10 11.5 14 14 14 20 27 31 EK (h9) 5 5 8 10 10 10 14 18 22 CM 5 6.5 8 10 18 18 22 28 32 CL 9.5 11 16 19 36 36 44 56 64 O 14.5 16.5 21 25.5 41.5 41.5 50.5 64 72
16 20 25 32 40 50/63 80 100
Rod Clevis Inch

Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50/63 80 100 Kit Part Number P1M-4DRC-T P1M-4FRC-T P1M-4HRC-T P1M-4JRC-T P1M-4KRC-T P1M-4LRC-T P1M-4MRC-T P1M-4PRC-T P1M-4QRC-T A 6 6 6 8 16 16 20 23 24 E 9.5 11 16 19 22 Dia. 22 Dia. 28 Dia. 38 Dia. 44 Dia. CE 16 21 25 30 30 30 40 50 55 KK #8-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16 ER 6.5 8 10.5 13 12 12 16 21 24 LE 7 10 11.5 14 14 14 20 27 31 EK (inch)
+0, -0.002
CM 5 6.5 8 10 18 18 22 28 32
CL (inch) 0.375 0.437 0.625 0.750 1.437 1.437 1.750 2.250 2.500
O (inch) 0.563 0.625 0.875 1.031 1.687 1.687 2.125 2.625 2.875
3/16 3/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/4 7/8
Jam Nuts
Jam Nut for Style 4

Bore Size 12 16 M 20 25 32 KK 40 50 63 80 100 Part Number L073800080 L073800080 L073800100 L073800200 L073800300 L073800400 L073800600 L073800600 L073800800 L073800900 KK #8-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16 M 1/8 1/8 1/8 5/32 3/16 7/32 5/16 5/16 3/8 27/64 S 11/32 11/32 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 3/4 3/4 15/16 1-1/8
Jam Nut for Style 5

Bore Size 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Part Number L075540005 L075540006 L075540008 L075540010 L075540012 L075540014 L075540018 L075540018 L075540022 L075540022 KK M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 M 2.7 3.2 4 5 6 7 8 8 11 11 S 18 10 13 17 19 22 27 27 32 32
Dimensions in inches
Dimensions in mm
E18
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod End Accessories Rod Eye

C086
EM ER CK
LE CA
KK Th'd x A Depth E
E
P1M
Rod Eye Metric

Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50/63 80 100 Kit Part Number P1M-4DRE P1M-4FRE P1M-4HRE P1M-4JRE P1M-4KRE P1M-4LRE P1M-4MRE P1M-4PRE P1M-4QRE A 7 8 8.5 10.5 15 14 18.5 22 22 E 9.5 Sq. 11 Sq. 16 Sq. 19 Sq. 22 Dia. 22 Dia. 28 Dia. 38 Dia. 44 Dia. CA 16 25 25 30 30 30 40 50 55 KK M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 ER 6.5 8 10.5 13 12 12 16 21 24 LE 7 14 11.5 14 14 14 20 27 31 CK 5 5 8 10 10 10 14 18 22 EM 5 6.5 8 10 18 18 22 28 32
Rod Eye Inch

Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50/63 80 100 Kit Part Number P1M-4DRE-T P1M-4FRE-T P1M-4HRE-T P1M-4JRE-T P1M-4KRE-T P1M-4LRE-T P1M-4MRE-T P1M-4PRE-T P1M-4QRE-T A 6 6 6 8 12 11 18 21 21 E 9.5 Sq. 11 Sq. 16 Sq. 19 Sq. 22 Dia. 22 Dia. 28 Dia. 38 Dia. 44 Dia. CA 16 25 25 30 30 30 40 50 55 KK #8-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-28 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16 ER 6.5 8 10.5 13 12 12 16 21 24 LE 7 14 11.5 14 14 14 20 27 31 CK (inch) 3/16 3/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/4 7/8 EM 5 6.5 8 10 18 18 22 28 32
E19
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits
Bore
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100

C086
Single Rod Cylinders Class 1 Seals

P1M-6DRN P1M-6FRN P1M-6HRN P1M-6JRN P1M-6KRN P1M-6LRN P1M-6MRN P1M-6NRN P1M-6PRN P1M-6QRN
Double Rod Cylinders Class 1 Seals

P1M-6DRT P1M-6FRT P1M-6HRT P1M-6JRT P1M-6KRT P1M-6LRT P1M-6MRT P1M-6NRT P1M-6PRT P1M-6QRT
Class 5 Seals*
P1M-6DRV P1M-6FRV P1M-6HRV P1M-6JRV P1M-6KRV P1M-6LRV P1M-6MRV P1M-6NRV P1M-6PRV P1M-6QRV
Class 5 Seals*
P1M-6DRP P1M-6FRP P1M-6HRP P1M-6JRP P1M-6KRP P1M-6LRP P1M-6MRP P1M-6NRP P1M-6PRP P1M-6QRP
* No Bumpers Included
E20
P1M Series Tooling Plate

Extra Low Profile Pneumatic Cylinder
E
P1M Contents
Features/Benefits ..............................................................E22 Ordering Information......................................................... E23 Cylinder Specifications ......................................................E24 Performance Data...................................................... E25-E27 Dimensions ................................................................ E28-E31 Mounting Dimensions ................................................ E32-E33 Double Rod Style Dimensions ................................... E34-E35 Mounting and Service Kits.................................................E36
E21
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features and Benefits
Tooling Plate Cylinder P1M Series

C086
Three piece bolted construction allows for quick servicing. Flush Sensor Groove provides protection and a clean design. Internal Transfer Tube allows for flexible porting, providing space savings. Long Bearing and Magnetic Piston provide maximum bearing support for increased load carrying capability. NPT, BSPP, or BSPT Ports offer flexibility.
E
Standard and custom mounting hole configuration available.
Anodized, smooth aluminum construction provides superior corrosion resistance.
P1M Series Tooling Plate Flexible Porting Options

Both Ports Head*
2
Both Ports Cap (Radial)

2
Both Ports Cap Face (Axial)
Head and Cap Ported (Radial)

2
2 4
4 4 4
Double Rod, Both Ports Head*

2
Double Rod, Head and Cap Ported (Radial)

2
ROD END #1
ROD END #2
Double Rod, Both Ports Cap (Radial)

2
ROD END #1
ROD END #2
To retract cylinder, apply air to port #2. To extend cylinder, apply air to port #4. * Both Ports Head [BSPP ports (M5) for 12-25mm bores and 1/8" NPTF ports for 32-50mm bores] is the standard porting configuration for the P1M Tooling Plate Cylinder. Alternate porting options are available at an additional cost.
ROD END #2
ROD END #1
E22
Catalog 0900P-4

C086
How to Order P1M Series Tooling Plate Cylinders P1M 032

Bore Size 012 12mm 016 16mm 010 20mm 025 25mm 032 32mm 040 40mm 050 50mm Cylinder Style C H F Basic, no mountings Rear Flange 1 Foot Mount 2 Cylinder Option F G B Guided Tool Plate Special MTO Tooling Plate 3 Blank Tooling Plate Function D K Double Acting Double Acting, Double Rod 4 N M L P Q R S T Rod Threads 6 3 Metric Female Special 4
020
Stroke in mm
Port Type & Location BSPP G H J K Head & Cap Radial Both in Head Both in Cap Radial Both in Cap Axial NPTF 7 Head & Cap Radial Both in Head Both in Cap Radial Both in Cap Axial BSPT 7 Head & Cap Radial Both in Head Both in Cap Radial Both in Cap Axial
E
Bumpers, Magnets, Seals B F M Std. Seals, Bumpers, No Magnet Fluorocarbon Seals, Bumpers 5, No Magnet Std. Seals, Bumpers, Magnetic Piston 6 A
Piston Rod & Bearings Long Bearing Stainless Steel Rod (standard for 12-25mm bores) Long Bearing Chrome Plated Rod (N/A for 12-25mm bores)
1 Porting options K, P, and T are not available with rear mountings. 2 When selecting the mount, stroke lengths below 10mm will not receive a head foot bracket. 3 Special Tooling Pate configuration. 4 When ordering double rod style cylinders, please be clear as to which end of the cylinder the tooling plate is to be incorporated as related to porting. The standard rod end configuration for Rod End # 2 (Non Tooling Plate end) is a designator # 6, metric female. Alternate rod ends are available and please consult Section A, P1M Cylinders for how to order. 5 Bumpers for this option are polyurethane. Piston, rod, and body end seals are fluorocarbon. Please review the following specification page for additional information. 6 For information regarding sensors, please refer to Electronic Sensors section. 7 Not available for 12-25mm bores.
Minimum/Maximum Stroke Lengths (mm)

Bore Size 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Minimum Stroke Single Rod Double Rod 5 5 5 5 5 8 5 8 5 9 5 12 5 20 Maximum Stroke Single or Double Rod 60 70 85 85 100 100 100
E23
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications Cylinder Specifications

Bore Sizes: 12, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50mm Maximum Operating Pressure: 10 Bar or 145 PSI Standard Operating Temperature: -20C to +80C, -4F to +176F Optional (limited exposure) High Temperature: -10C to +121C, +14F to +250F
Tooling Plate Cylinder P1M Series High Temperature/Chemical Compatibility Seal Option Material*
O-Rings: Fluorocarbon, FPM Piston Rod Seal: Fluorocarbon, FPM Piston Seal: Fluorocarbon, FPM Bumpers: Polyurethane (12-25mm bores) or Hytrel (32-50mm bores)
* Option intended for limited exposure to elevated temperatures over 80C, or 176F. Option is primarily for applications which subject the cylinder to fluids and or chemicals that have an adverse effect on external seals. If continued exposure to elevated temperatures is required, please consult the Actuator Division for alternative options. Hytrel is a registered trademark of DuPont.
C086
Material Specifications
Piston Rod and Guide Rods: Hard Chrome Plated Steel, 100,000 PSI Yield (303 Stainless Steel standard on 12-25mm bores) Piston Rod Seal: Polyurethane Piston Rod Bearing: Multilayer PTFE with Steel Backing
Tooling Plate Guide Rod Bearing: Multilayer PTFE with Steel Backing End Covers: Black Anodized Aluminum Assembly and Tooling Plate Fasteners: Stainless Steel / Zinc Plated Steel O-Rings: Nitrile Rubber, NBR Cylinder Body: Clear Anodized Aluminum Piston: Aluminum Alloy Piston Seal: Nitrile Rubber, NBR Magnet: Plastic Coated Magnetic Material Bumpers: Polyurethane (12-25mm bores) or Hytrel (32-50mm bores)
Forces, Weights, Air Consumption

Bore (mm) 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Area (cm2) 1.1 2.0 3.1 4.3 8.0 12.6 19.6 Piston Rod Dia. Area (mm) (cm2) 6 0.3 8 0.5 10 0.8 10 0.8 12 1.1 16 2.0 20 3.1 Extend Force* (N) 68 121 188 295 483 754 1178 Retract Force* (N) 51 90 141 247 415 633 990 Weight Zero Stroke Per 10mm (kg) Stroke (kg) 0.073 0.020 0.106 0.026 0.184 0.040 0.216 0.042 0.314 0.052 0.438 0.068 0.737 0.097 Air Consumption** (Liters) 0.0139 0.0246 0.0385 0.0633 0.1050 0.1620 0.2530
*Theoretical cylinder force at 600 kPa (6 Bar). **Free air consumption per 10mm stroke length for an extend and retract stroke at 600 kPa (6 Bar).
E24
Catalog 0900P-4
Performance Data

C086
P1M Series Tooling Plate Performance Data Standard Piston

The following graphs represent maximum loading capacities for the standard piston option. Use of the standard piston option provides space savings by reducing the piston thickness, thus reducing overall length. Please review the following graphs to determine if the application load falls into acceptable operating
ranges. In the event that the induced load falls out of the acceptable operating range, you may either increase the bore size or incorporate a magnetic piston for increased load capacity. For information regarding magnetic piston load carrying capability, please review the following page.
Side Load Capacity (Standard Piston)

Side Load (Kg-Force)
5 4 3 2 1 0 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 Stroke Length (mm) 12mm Bore 16mm Bore 20mm Bore 25mm Bore 32mm Bore 40mm Bore 50mm Bore
(SIDE LOAD)
E
P1M
Moment Load Capacity

1.40
Moment (N-m)
(MOMENT) OR
1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0.00 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 Stroke Length (mm)
12mm Bore 16mm Bore 20mm Bore 25mm Bore 32mm Bore 40mm Bore 50mm Bore
E25
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
1.20
Catalog 0900P-4
Performance Data

C086
P1M Series Tooling Plate Performance Data Magnetic Piston
Side Load Capacity (Magnetic Piston)

10 12mm Bore 8 6 4 2 16mm Bore 20mm Bore 25mm Bore 32mm Bore 40mm Bore 50mm Bore
(SIDE LOAD)
0 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 Stroke Length (mm)
Moment Load Capacity

1.40
Moment (N-m)
1.20 1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0.00 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 Stroke Length (mm)
12mm Bore 16mm Bore 20mm Bore 25mm Bore 32mm Bore 40mm Bore 50mm Bore
(MOMENT) OR
E26
Catalog 0900P-4
Performance Data

C086
P1M Series Tooling Plate Performance Data Tooling Plate Deflection

The following graph represents typical tooling plate deflection for P1M Tooling Plate Cylinders. The amount of tooling plate deflection is dependent on induced application load and the working stroke length of the
cylinder. Depicted deflection is typical of a cylinder operating within the allowable side load and maximum allowable moment ranges per a given bore size and piston option.
Tooling Plate Deflection

0.80 Deflection (mm) 0.70 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.30 0.20 0.10 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 Stroke Length (mm) 12&16mm Bore 20mm Bore 25mm Bore 32&40mm Bore 50mm Bore
E
DEFLECTION
E27
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Both Ports Head

C086
Y (2 PLACES 180APART) L NB RT (2 PLACES) L NB
(2 PLACES ALL BORES 180APART)
U W SQ.
Q SQ. E2
E1
Z (2 PLACES ONLY 32-50mm BORES 180APART)
W E VIEW A-A WH PM
R SQ. VIEW B-B
EE EE1 (ORIFICE ) (2 PLACES)
E
RT
SF (2 PLACES)
SW
I79 (I78) + STROKE
MOUNTING HOLE CONFIGURATION (2 PLACES)
HL I92 BG2
ZH9 (ZH8) + STROKE T9 (T8) + STROKE
Both Ports Head*

Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 BG2 11.5 12 14.5 15 17 17.5 21.5 I92 3.5 4 4.5 5 4 4 5 E 27 31.5 38.5 41.5 48 56 67 S 6 6 6.9 8.3 8.3 8.3 12.1 SF 4 4 7 7 7 7 9 E1 31 35 42.5 45.5 56 62.5 74.5 SW 5 7 9 9 10 13 16 E2 14 16 19.5 21 24 28 33.5 U 25.4 28.6 34.9 39 44.5 50.8 63.5 BSPP M5 M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 Q 20 20 26 26 32 32 38 EE BSPT Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 W 14 20 27 27 30 30 42.8 WH 3.5 3.5 4.5 5 7 7 8 NPTF 1/8 1/8 1/8 Y M3x0.5 M3x0.5 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 EE1 1 1.2 1.3 1.8 2.7 3.4 4 Z 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 5.2 5.2 6.4 HL 8 8 10 10 10 10 12 L 26 20 20 20 25 20 20 NB 5.5 7 8 8.5 9.5 11.5 14.5 PM 8.5 9 9 9 10.5 9.5 10 R 15.5 20 25.5 28 34 40 50 RT M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M8x1.25
Standard Piston I79 T9 ZH9 24 26.2 27.8 28.8 31.9 32.6 35.4 33.5 35.7 39.2 42.1 47.2 47.9 55.5 27.5 29.7 32.3 33.8 38.9 39.6 43.4
Magnetic Piston I78 T8 ZH8 34.9 37.1 37.7 38.7 41 42.5 44.3 44.4 46.6 49.1 52 56.3 57.8 64.4 38.4 40.6 42.2 43.7 48 49.5 52.3
* Both Ports Head [BSPP ports (M5) for 12-25mm bores and 1/8" NPTF ports for 32-50mm bores] is the standard porting configuration for the P1M Tooling Plate Cylinder. Alternate porting options are available at an additional cost.
E28
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Head and Cap Ported (Radial)

Z (2 PLACES ALL BORES 180APART)

C086
L RT (2 PLACES) NB L NB
Y (2 PLACES 180APART)
U W SQ
Q SQ E2
E1
Z (2 PLACES ONLY 32-50mm BORES 180APART)
W E VIEW A-A WH PM
R SQ. VIEW B-B EE EE1 (ORIFICE ) (2 PLACES) PL
A
SF (2 PLACES)
E
SW
RT
HL BG1
I91
I74 (I77) + STROKE ZH4 (ZH7) + STROKE T4 (T7) + STROKE
Head and Cap Ported (Radial

Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 BG1 16.5 17 19 21 25 25.5 27.6 I91 3.5 4 4.5 5 4 4 5 E 27 31.5 38.5 41.5 48 56 67 S 6 6 6.9 8.3 8.3 8.3 12.1 E1 31 35 42.5 45.5 56 62.5 74.5 SF 4 4 7 7 7 7 9 SW 5 7 9 9 10 13 16 E2 14 16 19.5 21 24 28 33.5 U 25.4 28.6 34.9 39 44.5 50.8 63.5 BSPP M5 M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 Q 20 20 26 26 32 32 38 EE BSPT Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 W 14 20 27 27 30 30 42.8 NPTF 1/8 1/8 1/8 WH 3.5 3.5 4.5 5 7 7 8 Y M3x0.5 M3x0.5 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 EE1 1 1.2 1.3 1.8 2.7 3.4 4 HL 8 8 10 10 10 10 12 Z 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 5.2 5.2 6.4 L 26 20 20 20 25 20 20 NB 5.5 7 8 8.5 9.5 11.5 14.5 PL 5 5 5 7 8 7.5 8 PM 8.5 9 9 9 10.5 9.5 10 R 15.5 20 25.5 28 34 40 50 RT M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M8x1.25
Magnetic Piston I77 T7 ZH7 39.9 49.4 43.4 42.1 51.6 45.6 42.2 53.6 46.7 44.7 58 49.7 49 64.3 56 50.5 65.8 57.5 50.3 70.4 58.3
E29
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
P1M
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Both Ports Cap (Radial)

C086
Z (2 PLACES ALL BORES 180APART)
L NB
L NB
RT (2 PLACES)
U SQ.
Q SQ. E2
E1
Z (2 PLACES ONLY BORES 32-50 180APART)
W E VIEW A-A
R SQ. VIEW B-B EE EE1 (ORIFICE ) (2 PLACES)
E
RT
A
SF (2 PLACES)
WH S
PL
SW
HL BG1
I91
I76 (I77) + STROKE ZH76 (ZH7) + STROKE T76 (T7) + STROKE
Both Ports Cap (Radial)

Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 BG1 16.5 17 19 21 25 25.5 27.6 I91 3.5 4 4.5 5 4 4 5 S 6 6 6.9 8.3 8.3 8.3 12.1 E 27 31.5 38.5 41.5 48 56 67 SF 4 4 7 7 7 7 9 E1 31 35 42.5 45.5 56 62.5 74.5 SW 5 7 9 9 10 13 16 E2 14 16 19.5 21 24 28 33.5 U 25.4 28.6 34.9 39 44.5 50.8 63.5 BSPP M5 M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 Q 20 20 26 26 32 32 38 W 14 20 27 27 30 30 42.8 EE BSPT Rc1/8 Rc1/8 Rc1/8 WH 3.5 3.5 4.5 5 7 7 8 NPTF 1/8 1/8 1/8 Y M3x0.5 M3x0.5 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 EE1 1 1.2 1.3 1.8 2.7 3.4 4 Z 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 5.2 5.2 6.4 HL 8 8 10 10 10 10 12 L 26 20 20 20 25 20 20 NB 5.5 7 8 8.5 9.5 11.5 14.5 PL 5 5 5 7 8 7.5 8 R 15.5 20 25.5 28 34 40 50 RT M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M8x1.25
E30
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Both Ports Cap Face (Axial)

C086
(2 PLACES ALL BORES 180APART)
P4 RT (2 PLACES) P3
U W SQ. E2
Z (2 PLACES ONLY BORES 32-50mm 180APART)
Q SQ. E1
P1
P2
W E VIEW A-A
EE EE1 (ORIFICE ) (2 PLACES)

WH S
R SQ. VIEW B-B
A
SF (2 PLACES)
E
P1M
SW
HL BG1
I91
I76 (I77) +STROKE ZH76 (ZH7) + STROKE T76 (T7) + STROKE
Both Ports Cap Face (Axial)

Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 BG1 16.5 17 19 21 25 25.5 27.6 I91 3.5 4 4.5 5 4 4 5 S 6 6 6.9 8.3 8.3 8.3 12.1 E 27 31.5 38.5 41.5 48 56 67 SF 4 4 7 7 7 7 9 E1 31 35 42.5 45.5 56 62.5 74.5 SW 5 7 9 9 10 13 16 E2 14 16 19.5 21 24 28 33.5 U 25.4 28.6 34.9 39 44.5 50.8 63.5 BSPP M5 M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 Q 20 20 26 26 32 32 38 W 14 20 27 27 30 30 42.8 EE BSPT Rc1/8 Rc1/8 Rc1/8 WH 3.5 3.5 4.5 5 7 7 8 NPTF 1/8 1/8 1/8 Y M3x0.5 M3x0.5 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 EE1 1 1.2 1.3 1.8 2.7 3.4 4 Z 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 5.2 5.2 6.4 HL 8 8 10 10 10 10 12 P1 25 29.5 35 38.5 45.5 51 63 P2 9.5 9.5 13.5 14 16.5 12 54.5 P3 13.5 15.5 24.5 27.5 31.5 23 25 P4 13.5 18 21.5 24.5 28.5 33 41.5 R 15.5 20 25.5 28 34 40 50 RT M4x0.7 M4x0.7 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M8x1.25
E31
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
RT
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Foot Mounted

C086
U W SQ. AH
Q SQ.
R SQ.
I7
LY
W VIEW A-A WF
TR E3 VIEW B-B
AT S
E
A
K1 AU AJ
(4) - AB
AT
AU
SA2 (SA3) + STROKE ZA2 (ZA3) + STROKE TA2 (TA3) + STROKE
Foot Mount
Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 AB 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 9 AH 17 19 24 26 30 33 39 AJ 19.5 19.5 20.5 22.5 25 25 29.5 AT 2 2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 AU 8 8 9.2 10.7 11.2 11.2 14.7 E3 44 48 62 66 71 78 95 I7 29.5 33.5 42 46 54 61 72.5 K1 2.8 2.8 4 4 4 4 5 LY 34 38 47 50.5 62 67.5 80 R 15.5 20 25.5 28 34 40 50 S 6 6 6.9 8.3 8.3 8.3 12.1 TR 35 39 50 52 60 67 82 WF 13.5 13.5 14.5 15 17 17 18
Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50
Note:
Both Ports Head Standard Piston Magnetic Piston SA2 TA2 ZA2 SA3 TA3 ZA3 12 48.3 42.3 22.9 59.2 53.2 14.2 15.8 13.8 15.9 16.6 12.4 50.5 56.4 59.3 64.4 65.1 73.7 44.5 49.5 51 56.1 56.8 61.6 25.1 25.7 23.7 25 26.5 21.3 61.4 66.3 69.2 73.5 75 82.6 55.4 59.4 60.9 65.2 66.7 70.5
Hand and Cap Ported (Radial) Standard Piston Magnetic Piston SA2 TA2 ZA2 SA3 TA3 ZA3 17 53.3 47.3 27.9 64.2 58.2 19.2 20.3 19.8 23.9 24.6 18.4 55.5 60.9 5.3 72.4 73.1 79.7 49.5 54 57 64.1 64.8 67.6 30.1 30.2 29.7 33 34.5 27.3 66.4 70.8 75.2 81.5 83 88.6 60.4 63.9 66.9 73.2 74.7 76.5
Both Ports Cap (Radial) Standard Piston Magnetic Piston SA2 TA2 ZA2 SA3 TA3 ZA3 17 53.3 47.3 27.9 64.2 58.2 19.2 20.3 19.8 23.9 24.6 18.4 55.5 60.9 65.3 72.4 73.1 79.7 49.5 54 57 64.1 64.8 67.6 30.1 30.2 29.7 33 34.5 27.3 66.4 70.8 75.2 81.5 83 88.6 60.4 63.9 66.9 73.2 74.7 76.5
Stroke lengths below 10mm do not receive a head foot bracket. Corner thru holes cannot be used with Foot Mount if fasteners are inserted from Tooling Plate inside face (interference).
E32
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Rear Flange Mount

C086
BORES 32-50mm BORES 12-25mm
Q SQ.
R SQ. TF W SQ. E VIEW A-A
(4) - FB
R SQ. TF UF
UF
VIEW B-B
VIEW B-B
E
P1M
A
WH ZF2 (ZF3) + STROKE TE2 (TE3) + STROKE MF
Rear Flange Mount

Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 E 25 30 39 42 48 54 67 FB 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 MF 5.5 5.5 8 8 8 8 9 R 34 40 50 S 6 6 6.9 8.3 8.3 8.3 12.1 TF 45 45 50.5 53 58 66 79 U 25.4 28.6 34.9 39 44.5 50.8 63.5 UF 55 55 62 65 68 76 90 W 14 20 27 27 30 30 42.8 WH 3.5 3.5 4.5 5 7 7 8
Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50
39 41.2 47.2 50.1 55.2 55.9 64.5
33 35.2 40.3 41.8 46.9 47.6 52.4
49.9 52.1 57.1 60 64.3 65.8 73.4
43.9 46.1 50.2 51.7 56 57.5 61.3
44 46.2 51.7 56.1 63.2 63.9 70.5
38 40.2 44.8 47.8 54.9 55.6 58.4
54.9 57.1 61.6 66 72.3 73.8 79.4
48.9 51.1 54.7 57.7 64 65.5 67.3
44 46.2 51.7 56.1 63.2 63.9 70.5
38 40.2 44.8 47.8 54.9 55.6 58.4
54.9 57.1 61.6 66 72.3 73.8 79.4
48.9 51.1 54.7 57.7 64 65.5 67.3
Rear Flange Mounting Kits can be ordered assembled to the cylinder or separately as needed. Please refer to the How To Order Code section to order the rear flange assembled to the cylinder. For separate mounting kits, please refer to page E36 for the proper kit per bore size.
E33
P1G
Both Ports Head Standard Piston Magnetic Piston TE2 ZF2 TE3 ZF3
Hand and Cap Ported (Radial) Standard Piston Magnetic Piston TE2 ZF2 TE3 ZF3
Both Ports Cap (Radial) Standard Piston Magnetic Piston TE2 ZF2 TE3 ZF3
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Double Rod Style

C086
Basic Mount
WH S AF S WF
Foot Mount
WF + STROKE
END 1
END 2 KF
END 1
END 2
I52 (I53) + STROKE ZH6 (ZH7) + STROKE ZH6 (ZH7) + 2X STROKE
WH + STROKE
SA4 (SA5) + STROKE XH8 (XH9) + 2X STROKE
Rear Flange Mount

WH S WF + STROKE
END 1
END 2
ZB2 (ZB3) + STROKE XH2 (XH3) + 2X STROKE
Double Rod
Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 S 6 6 6.9 8.3 8.3 8.3 12.1 AF 6 8 7 12 13 13 15 KF M3x0.5 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 WF 13.5 13.5 14.5 15 17 17 18 WH 3.5 3.5 4.5 5 7 7 8
The double rod dimensions differ from, or are in addition to, those for single rod cylinders depicted on previous pages. To determine dimensions for a double rod cylinder, first refer to the desired single rod porting style cylinder configuration you wish to incorporate on preceding pages of this catalog. After selecting the necessary dimensions from that drawing, return to this page and supplement the single rod dimensions with those shown on these dimensional tables.
Note: Double rod end 2 will have a Short Bearing head as standard.
Basic Mount - Style C Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Standard Piston I52 31.1 31.6 33.5 35.6 40.1 40.6 41.4 ZH6 40.6 41.1 44.9 48.9 55.4 55.9 61.5 XH6 44.1 44.6 49.4 53.9 62.4 62.9 69.5 Magnetic Piston I53 42 42.5 43.4 45.5 49.2 50.5 50.3 ZH7 51.5 52 54.8 58.8 64.5 65.8 70.4 XH7 55 55.5 59.3 63.8 71.5 72.8 78.4
Foot Mount - Style F Standard Piston SA4 19.1 19.6 20.6 20.6 24.1 24.6 18.4 XH8 64.1 64.6 68.5 73.9 82.4 82.9 89.5 Magnetic Piston SA5 30 305 305 305 33.2 34.5 27.3 XH9 75 75.5 78.4 83.8 91.5 92.8 98.4
Rear Flange Mount - Style J Standard Piston ZB2 46.1 46.6 52.9 56.9 63.4 63.9 70.5 XH2 54.1 54.6 59.4 63.9 72.4 72.9 79.5 Magnetic Piston ZB3 57 57.5 62.8 66.8 72.5 73.8 79.4 XH3 65 65.5 69.3 73.8 81.5 82.8 88.4
E34
Catalog 0900P-4
Double Rod Style Rod End Dimensions Rod End Dimensions

Basic Mount
SW Wrench Flats KK

C086
AM
WH
WH
E
Foot Mount
SW Wrench Flats KK
Rod End Dimensions
Foot Mount and Rear Flange Mount For special rod threads, specify 3 in model number and give desired AM or AF, WF and KK or KF.
SW Wrench Flats KK
AM
WF
AM
WF
WF KF Thread x Depth AF
W WF
E35
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Rear Flange Mount
P1M
Catalog 0900P-4
Mountings and Service Kits

Rear Flange Mount Kits
Bore Size 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Kit Number P1M-4DMB P1M-4FMB P1M-4HMB P1M-4JMB P1M-4KMB P1M-4LMB P1M-4MMB

Seal Kits
Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Single Rod Cylinders Class 1 Seals Class 5 Seals P1M-6DRN P1M-6DRV P1M-6FRN P1M-6FRV P1M-6HRN P1M-6HRV P1M-6JRN P1M-6JRV P1M-6KRN P1M-6KRV P1M-6LRN P1M-6LRV P1M-6MRN P1M-6MRV
C086
Double Rod Cylinders Class 1 Seals Class 5 Seals P1M-6DRT P1M-6DRP P1M-6FRT P1M-6FRP P1M-6HRT P1M-6HRP P1M-6JRT P1M-6JRP P1M-6KRT P1M-6KRP P1M-6LRT P1M-6LRP P1M-6MRT P1M-6MRP
Foot Bracket Mounting Kits

Bore Size 12 16 20 Stroke <10mm 10mm <10mm 10mm <10mm 10mm <10mm 10mm <10mm 10mm <10mm 10mm <10mm 10mm Kit Number L078290012 L078300012 L078290016 L078300016 L078290020 L078300020 L078290025 L078300025 L078290032 L078300032 L078290040 L078300040 L078290050 L078300050
Available Gripper Series and Sizes per P1M Tooling Plate Cylinder Bore Size
Bore Size 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Gripper Series* and Sizes P5G-AP3, P5G-AA3, P5G-AW3 P5G-AP3, P5G-AA3, P5G-AW3 P5G-AP4, P5G-AA4, P5G-AW4 P5G-AP4, P5G-AA4, P5G-AW4 P5G-AP5, P5G-AA5, P5G-AW5 P5G-AP5, P5G-AA5, P5G-AW5 P5G-AP6, P5G-AA6, P5G-AW6
25 32 40 50
Mounting Assembly Fastener Selection Chart

Fastener Thread Length L Mounting Configuration Head (Front End Cover) Style F - Foot Mount* , Short Style F - Foot Mount*, Std. Cap (Rear End Cover) Non-Ported Cap (Ports H, M, R) Style F - Foot Mount Style H - Rear Flange Mount Ported Cap (Ports G, J, K, N, L, P Q, S, T) Style F - Foot Mount Style H - Rear Flange Mount 2 2 20mm 20mm 20mm 20mm 23mm 23mm 23mm 23mm 30mm 30mm 30mm 30mm 30mm 30mm 2 2 12mm 12mm 12mm 12mm 18mm 18mm 18mm 18mm 20mm 20mm 20mm 20mm 25mm 25mm 2 N/A 23mm N/A 23mm N/A 28mm N/A 28mm N/A 30mm N/A 30mm N/A 32mm Qty 12mm Bore 16mm Bore 20mm Bore 25mm Bore 32mm Bore 40mm Bore 50mm Bore
*Use cylinder assembly fasteners to assemble front foot mount options.

Short = Stroke lengths <10mm and without magnet. Std. = Stroke lengths longer than or equal to 10mm or with magnet option. 1. Determine the bore size, stroke, porting and mounting configuration of the cylinder. 2. Select the appropriate thread length fastener for both the head and cap (end cover) 3. Use a quantity of (2) each to assemble mounts to the respective end covers. 4. Ensure sufficient thread length engagement (1-1.5 x thread diameter) into mating thread.
Example: 40mm bore, 15mm stroke, M porting, foot mount Head assembly fastener = 30mm thread length Cap assembly fastener = 20mm thread length (use quantity of 2 each)
Bore Size 12 16 20 25 32 40 50
Cylinder Assembly Fasteners Fastener Hex Fastener Torque Thread Key Size Nm in-lb Size M4x0.7 1.4-1.8 12-16 2.5 M4x0.7 1.4-1.8 12-16 2.5 M5x0.8 2.5-2.9 22-26 3 M5x0.8 2.5-2.9 22-26 3 M6x1.0 4.1-4.5 36-40 4 M6x1.0 4.1-4.5 36-40 4 M8x1.25 10.2-11.1 90-98 5
Piston Rod Fastener Fastener Thread Size M3x0.5 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 Fastener Torque Nm 0.6-0.9 1.4-1.8 2.5-2.9 4.1-4.5 10.2-11.1 10.2-11.1 21.5-22.6 in-lb 5-8 12-16 22-26 36-40 90-98 90-98 190-200 Hex Key Size 2 2.5 3 4 5 5 6
Guide Rod Fasteners Fastener Fastener Torque Thread Size Nm in-lb M3x0.5 0.6-0.9 5-8 M3x0.5 0.6-0.9 5-8 M4x0.7 1.4-1.8 12-16 M4x0.7 1.4-1.8 12-16 M4x0.7 1.4-1.8 12-16 M4x0.7 1.4-1.8 12-16 M5x0.8 2.5-2.9 22-26
Hex Key Size 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3
E36
P1M Series Swing Clamp

Extra Low Profile Pneumatic Cylinders
E
P1M Contents
Features and Benefits .......................................................E38 Ordering Information..........................................................E39 Cylinder Specifications ......................................................E40 Performance Data..............................................................E41 Dimensions ................................................................ E42-E48 Mechanical Accessories ....................................................E49 Service Kits .......................................................................E50
E37
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features and Benefits
Swing Clamp Cylinders P1M Series

C086
P1M Series Swing Clamp Flexible Porting Options

Both Ports Head*
2
Both Ports Cap

2
Both Ports Cap Face
Head and Cap Ported

2
* Both Ports Head (NPT) is the standard porting configuration for the P1M Swing Clamp Cylinder. Alternate porting options are available at an additional cost.
To retract cylinder, apply air to port #2. To extend cylinder, apply air to port #4.
E38
Catalog 0900P-4

C086
How to Order P1M Series Swing Clamp Cylinders P1M 032 C H F M C 6 M 020
Stroke in mm 6 Bore Size 032 32mm 040 40mm 050 50mm G H J K N M L P Q R S T
Port Type & Location BSPP G Threads Head & Cap Radial Both in Head Both in Cap Radial Both in Cap Axial NPT Threads Head & Cap Radial Both in Head 3 Both in Cap Radial Both in Cap Axial BSPT R Threads Head & Cap Radial Both in Head Both in Cap Radial Both in Cap Axial
Cylinder Style C H K L Basic, no mounting Rear Flange 1 Clamp Arm 1 Rear Flange & Clamp Arm 1
Cylinder Option H J Swing Clamp Swing Clamp Special (MTO) 5
E
Function F L Right Hand Rotation Left Hand Rotation 6 3
Rod Threads Metric Female Special 2
Bumpers, Magnets & Seals B F M V No Magnet, Bumpers, Standard Seals No Magnet, Bumpers, Fluorocarbon Seals 4 Magnetic Piston, Bumpers, Std. Seals Magnetic Piston, Bumpers, Fluorocarbon Seals 4
Piston Rod & Bearings C Chrome Plated Carbon Steel
1 Cylinder with mounting fitted 2 Designator #3 should be selected for special rod ends only. When selecting this option, please provide rod style (male or female), thread pitch, thread depth, and wrench flat dimension. 3 Both Ports Head NPT is the standard porting arrangement for this cylinder. Alternate porting arrangements are available at an additional cost. 4 Bumpers for this option are polyurethane. Piston, rod and body end seals are fluorocarbon. Please review the following specification page for additional information. 5 Designator J should be selected for cylinders that require a special option not covered in catalog. 6 See specification table for stroke lengths available per a given bore size. Note: For sensor specifications and part numbers, please refer to the Electronic Sensors section.
Seal Kit Part Numbers

Bore 32 40 50 Class 1 L078660032 L078660040 L078660050 Class 5 L078670032 L078670040 L078670050
Service kits of expendable parts for fluid power cylinders are stocked in principal industrial locations across the U.S.A. and other countries. For prompt delivery and complete information, contact your nearest distributor.
E39
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Specifications Cylinder Specifications


C086
Bore Sizes: 32, 40 and 50mm Maximum Operating Pressure: 10 Bar or 145 PSI Standard Operating Temperature: -20C to +80C or -4F to +176F Optional High Temperature: -10C to +121C or +14F to +250F
Right Hand (Clockwise) Clamping Rotation
Piston Rod: Hard Chrome Plated Steel, 100,000 PSI Yield
Piston Rod Bearing: Stress Proof Steel Piston Rod Seal: Polyurethane Outboard Rotating Mechanism Cover: 2011 T3 Aluminum End Covers: Black Anodized Aluminum End Cover Fasteners: Zinc Plated Carbon Steel Cylinder Body: Clear Anodized Aluminum O-Rings: Nitrile Rubber, NBR Piston: Aluminum Alloy Piston Seal: Nitrile Rubber, NBR Magnet: Plastic Coated Magnetic Material Bumpers: Polyurethane
Left Hand (Counter-Clockwise) Clamping Rotation
High Temperature Seal Option Material*

End Cover O-Rings: Fluorocarbon, FPM Piston Rod Seal: Fluorocarbon, FPM Piston Seal: Fluorocarbon, FPM
* Option intended for limited exposure to temperatures over 80C, or 176F. Option is primarily for applications which subject the cylinder to fluids and or chemicals that have an adverse effect on external seals. If continued exposure to elevated temperatures is required, please consult the Cylinder Division for alternative options.
Specifications
Bore (mm) 32 Rotary Stroke, mm Clamp Stroke, mm Allowable Moment, Nm (ft-lbs) Degree of Non-Rotation 1.0 27 (20) 15 10/20 47 (35) 1.0 40 50 19 20/50 107 (79) 0.8
Clamp Forces, N (lbs)

Bore (mm) 32 40 50 Rod Dia. (mm) 16 16 20 Net Area (cm2) 6.03 10.56 16.49 Force, N (lb) at Various Operating Pressures, Mpa (PSI) 0.2 (29) 121 (27) 211 (47) 330 (74) 0.4 (58) 241 (54) 422 (95) 660 (148) 0.6 (87) 362 (81) 633 (142) 990 (222) 0.8 (116) 483 (108) 844 (190) 1319 (297) 1.0 (145) 603 (136) 1056 (237) 1649 (371)
Cylinder Weights, g (lbs)

Bore (mm) 32 40 50 Clamp Stroke (mm) 10 20 10 20 20 50 Basic Mount 600 (1.32) 673 (1.48) 700 (1.54) 800 (1.76) 1355 (2.98) 1736 (3.82) Clamp Arm Mount 691 (1.52) 764 (1.68) 791 (1.74) 891 (1.96) 1527 (3.36) 1909 (4.20) Rear Flange Mount 664 (1.46) 736 (1.62) 782 (1.72) 882 (1.94) 1500 (3.30) 1882 (4.14) Arm & Flange Mount 755 (1.66) 827 (1.82) 873 (1.92) 973 (2.14) 1673 (3.68) 2055 (4.52)
E40
Catalog 0900P-4
Performance Data Guidelines for Custom Clamp Arms

The following graph represents maximum clamp arm lengths per a given bore and operating pressure. Care should be taken not to exceed maximum operating limits outlined in this graph.
250 225 200 175

C086
32mm & 40mm Bores 50mm Bore
Arm Length (mm)
150 125 100 75 50 25 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
E
P1M
Pressure (MPa) 32mm & 40mm Bores 50mm Bore
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
The following graph represents maximum operating speeds per a given inertia moment when incorporating a custom clamp arm. Exceeding the parameters outlined in the graph will lead to internal cylinder component damage. Please refer to the following page for examples and formulas when designing the clamp arm to be applied.
0.030
0.025
Moment of Inertia (kg-m2)
0.020
0.015
0.010
0.005
0.000
Cylinder Speed (mm/s)
E41
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Head Ported

C086
R1
HL
HL
R1
I91 BG1 MOUNTING HOLE CONFIGURATION (2 PLACES) NB BG2 I92
L NB
PM
2X EE PORT, EE1 ORIFICE
E
KF AF R E2 E1 SW
WH
I12 MM R E HL R1 I91 MTG. HOLES @180 2 PLACES EACH SIDE RT VD I79 (I78) + CLAMP STROKE ZH9 (ZH8) + 2X CLAMP STROKE
Head Ported Dimensions

Bore 32 40 50 AF 18 18 25 BG1 46.5 39 47.5 BG2 17 17.5 23.5 E 48 56 67 E1 56 62.5 74.5 E2 24 28 33.5 EE BSPP G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 BSPT Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 NPTF 1/8 1/8 1/8 EE1 1.1 1.5 2 HL 9 9 12 I12 5.5 5.5 5.5 I91 13.5 10 12 I92 4 4 5 KF M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75
Bore 32 40 50
L 25 20 20
MM 16 16 20
NB 9.5 11.5 14.5
PM 30.5 22 28
R 34 40 50
R1 10.5 10.5 13.5
RT M6x1 M6x1 M8x1.25
SW
-0.1 -0.2
VD 3 3 3.5
WH 6.5 6.5 7.5
Y 30 h9 30 h9 37 h9
Non-Magnetic I79 67 60 72.5 ZH9 92.5 92.5 113
Magnetic I78 76 70 81.5 ZH8 101.5 102.5 122
14 14 17
* Both Ports Head (NPT) is the standard porting configuration for the P1M Swing Clamp Cylinder. Alternate porting options are available at an additional cost.
E42
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Head and Cap Ported

C086
R1
HL
HL
R1
I91 BG1 L NB L NB MOUNTING HOLE CONFIGURATION (2 PLACES) EE PORT EE1 ORIFICE PM EE PORT EE2 ORIFICE BG2 I92
PL
WH KF AF
E
P1M
R E2
E1 SW I12
MM R E
RT
HL R1 I91 MTG. HOLES @180 2 PLACES EACH SIDE
VD I79 (I78) + CLAMP STROKE ZH9 (ZH8) + 2X CLAMP STROKE
Bore 32 40 50
AF 18 18 25
BG1 46.5 39 47.5
BG2 25 25.5 29.5
E 48 56 67
E1 56 62.5 74.5
E2 24 28 33.5
EE BSPP G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 BSPT Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 NPTF 1/8 1/8 1/8
EE1 1.1 1.5 2
EE2 2.7 3.4 4
HL 9 9 12
I12 5.5 5.5 5.5
I91 13.5 10 12
I92 11.5 12 11
KF M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75
Bore 32 40 50
L 25 20 20
MM 16 16 20
NB 9.5 11.5 14.5
PL 8 7.5 8
PM 30.5 22 28
R 34 40 50
R1 10.5 10.5 13.5
SW
-0.1 -0.2
VD 3 3 3.5
WH 6.5 6.5 7.5
Y 30 h9 30 h9 37 h9
Non-Magnetic I79 75 68 78.5 ZH9 100.5 100.5 119
Magnetic I78 84 78 87.5 ZH8 109.5 110.5 128
14 14 17
E43
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Head and Cap Ported Dimensions
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Cap Ported Radial

C086
HL R1 HL R1
I91 BG1 MOUNTING HOLE CONFIGURATION (2 PLACES) NB EE PORT EE1 ORIFICE BG2 I92
L NB
PL
E
WH KF R E2 E1 SW I12 MM R E RT HL R1 I91 MTG. HOLES @180 2 PLACES EACH SIDE VD AF Y
I79 (I78) + CLAMP STROKE ZH9 (ZH8) + 2X CLAMP STROKE
Cap Radial Ported Dimensions

Bore 32 40 50 AF 18 18 25 BG1 46.5 39 47.5 BG2 25 25.5 29.5 E 48 56 67 E1 56 62.5 74.5 E2 24 28 33.5 EE BSPP G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 BSPT Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 NPTF 1/8 1/8 1/8 EE1 1.1 1.5 2 HL 9 9 12 I12 5.5 5.5 5.5 I91 13.5 10 12 I92 11.5 12 11 KF M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75
Bore 32 40 50
L 25 20 20
MM 16 16 20
NB 9.5 11.5 14.5
PL 8 7.5 8
R 34 40 50
R1 10.5 10.5 13.5
SW
-0.1 -0.2
VD 3 3 3.5
WH 6.5 6.5 7.5
Y 30 h9 30 h9 37 h9
Non-Magnetic I79 75 68 78.5 ZH9 100.5 100.5 119
Magnetic I78 84 78 87.5 ZH8 109.5 110.5 128
14 14 17
E44
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Cap Rear Face Porting

C086
HL R1 HL R1
I91 BG1 MOUNTING HOLE CONFIGURATION (2 PLACES) I92 BG2 P4 WH KF AF Y P3
RT
HL R1 I91 MTG. HOLES @180 2 PLACES EACH SIDE
E
P1M
R E2
E1
P1 SW
P2
MM R E
I12 VD I79 (I78) + CLAMP STROKE ZH9 (ZH8) + 2X CLAMP STROKE 2X EE PORT, EE1 ORIFICE
Bore 32 40 50
AF 18 18 25
BG1 46.5 39 47.5
BG2 25 25.5 29.5
E 48 56 67
E1 56 62.5 74.5
E2 24 28 33.5
EE BSPP G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 BSPT Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8 NPTF 1/8 1/8 1/8
EE1 1.1 1.5 2
HL 9 9 12
I12 5.5 5.5 5.5
I91 13.5 10 12
I92 11.5 12 11
KF M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75
Bore 32 40 50
MM 16 16 20
P1 45.5 51 63
P2 16.5 12 54.5
P3 32 23 25
P4 28.5 33 41.5
R 34 40 50
R1 10.5 10.5 13.5
SW
-0.1 -0.2
VD 3 3 3.5
WH 6.5 6.5 7.5
Y 30 h9 30 h9 37 h9
Non-Magnetic I79 75 68 78.5 ZH9 100.5 100.5 119
Magnetic I78 84 78 87.5 ZH8 109.5 110.5 128
14 14 17
E45
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Cap Rear Face Ported Dimensions
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Clamp Arm Mount

C086
H + Clamp Stroke A
E
C
B G
10
Z9 (Z8) + 2X CLAMP STROKE T9 (T8) + 2X CLAMP STROKE
Clamp Arm Mount Dimensions

Bore 32 40 50 A 18 18 22 B 67 67 88 C 20 20 22 D 45 45 63 F 25 25 40 G M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 H 39 46 58
Head Ported Only Bore NonMagnetic T9 32 40 50 106 106 130.5 Z9 63 63 68.5 Magnetic T8 115 116 139.5 Z8 72 73 77.5
Head and Cap Ported NonMagnetic T9 114 114 136.5 Z9 71 71 74.5 Magnetic T8 123 124 145.5 Z8 80 81 83.5
Cap Radial Ported NonMagnetic T9 114 114 136.5 Z9 71 71 74.5 Magnetic T8 123 124 145.5 Z8 80 81 83.5
Cap Rear Face Ported NonMagnetic T9 114 114 136.5 Z9 71 71 74.5 Magnetic T8 123 124 145.5 Z8 80 81 83.5
E46
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Rear Flange Mount

C086
4X FB
E
MF ZF2 (ZF3) + 2X CLAMP STROKE R TF UF
Bore 32 40 50
E 48 54 67
FB 5.5 5.5 6.6
MF 8 8 9
R 34 40 50
TF 58 66 79
UF 68 76 90
Rear Flange Mounting Kits can be ordered assembled to the cylinder or separately as needed. Please refer to page E49 for proper rear flange mounting kits associated with a given bore size.
Head Ported Only Bore 32 40 50 Non-Magnetic ZF2 100.5 100.5 122 Magnetic ZF3 109.5 110.5 131
Head and Cap Ported Non-Magnetic ZF2 108.5 108.5 128 Magnetic ZF3 117.5 118.5 137
Cap Radial Ported Non-Magnetic ZF2 108.5 108.5 128 Magnetic ZF3 117.5 118.5 137
E47
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Rear Flange Mount Dimensions
P1M
Swing Clamp Cylinders Dimensions Rear Flange/Clamp Arm Mount P1M Series
Catalog 0900P-4
C086
H + CLAMP STROKE
4X FB
B G
D MF
10
Z2 (Z3) + 2X CLAMP STROKE T2 (T3) + 2X CLAMP STROKE
R R TF UF
Rear Flange and Clamp Arm Mount Dimensions

Bore 32 40 50 A 18 18 22 B 67 67 88 C 20 20 22 D 45 45 63 E 48 54 67 F 25 25 40 G M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 H 39 46 58 FB 5.5 5.5 6.5 MF 8 8 9 R 34 40 50 TF 58 66 79 UF 68 76 90
Head Ported Only Bore 8932 40 50 Non-Magnetic T2 114 114 139.5 Z2 71 71 77.5 Magnetic T3 123 124 148.5 Z3 80 81 86.5 T2 122 122 145.5
Head and Cap Ported Non-Magnetic Z2 79 79 83.5 Magnetic T3 131 132 154.5 Z3 88 89 92.5 T2 122 122 145.5
Cap Radial Ported Non-Magnetic Z2 79 79 83.5 Magnetic T3 131 132 154.5 Z3 88 89 92.5
32mm Bore Assembly
SPANNER WRENCH PART # 0116760000 GLAND WRENCH PART # 0883060000
To disassemble the front end cover, the rod cover must first be removed. To do this the ring nut must be unscrewed (right-hand thread) using the spanner and gland wrench shown to the left. Order each component separately.
E48
Catalog 0900P-4
Mechanical Accessories

C086
Clamp Arm Mounting Kit 32, 40, and 50mm Bore
1 5 4 2 3
Clamp Arm Mounting Kit

Bore 32 40 50 Part Number L078550000 L078550000 L078560000 Fastener Torque Nm 8 - 10 8 - 10 14 - 16 In-lbs 70 - 88 70 - 88 124 - 142
Component Identification
Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 Part Description Clamp Arm Clamp Bolt Hex Jam Nut Socket Head Cap Screw Lock Washer Material Aluminum Steel Steel Steel Steel
E
Note: To remove or install the arm on the piston rod, use a wrench to secure the arm while loosening or tightening the socket head cap screw. Do not secure any other part of the cylinder.
Rear Flange Mount Kit 32, 40, and 50mm Bore

2
2 1
Rear Flange Mounting Kit

Bore 32 40 50 Part Number P1M-4KMB P1M-4LMB P1M-4MMB Fastener Torque Nm 3.6 - 4.0 3.6 - 4.0 8.0 - 9.0 In-lbs 32 - 36 32 - 36 72 - 80
Component Identification
Item Number 1 2 Part Description Flange Socket Head Cap Screw Material Aluminum Steel
E49
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits
Seal Kits
Bore 32 40 50 Class 1 L078660032 L078660040 L078660050 Class 5 L078670032 L078670040 L078670050
E50
LP/LPM Series
Non-Lube Air Cylinder
E
P1M Contents
Features ............................................................................E52 Ordering Information..........................................................E53 Specifications ....................................................................E54 Basic Dimensions ..............................................................E55 Mounting Options ..............................................................E56 Spring Data .......................................................................E57 Rod Options.......................................................................E58 Accessories .......................................................................E59 Bumpers / Sensors ............................................................E60 Service Kits .......................................................................E61
E51
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Air Cylinders LP/LPM Series

C086
Piston Rod Seal

Buna-N quad seal provides positive sealing to keep pressure in and dirt out for less maintenance and trouble free performance.
Rod Bearing
High density iron provides maximum support for longer life.
Heads and Caps

Anodized aluminum alloy for solid, lightweight, high strength performance. This provides excellent corrosion resistance, durability, and a long lasting quality appearance.
Piston Rod
High strength steel, hard chrome plated for reliable smooth performance, long life, and extended seal life.
Piston Seal Cylinder Body

Hard coated heavy wall aluminum alloy. The tube I.D. coating has extreme hardness, excellent wear and seizure resistance, low coefficient of friction, and high corrosion resistance. This provides excellent wear qualities and quick break-a-ways. Buna-N quad seal provides positive sealing with air.
Piston
Attached securely to the rod to provide maximum strength and durability.
Reduces Design Height Light Weight Reduces Cylinder Overhang Specials Available
E52
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information How to Order LP/LPM Series Cylinders 1.50

Bore Size

C086
LP
1.25"
0.56" 0.75" 1.12" 1.50" 2.00" 2.50" 3.00" 4.00"
Stroke Series LP Standard LPM Magnetic Piston Specify in inches.
Rod End Thread Style Piston Seal 9 4 3 Standard Female Rod End Optional Male Rod End Special Rod End (specify dimensions or sketch)
Double Rod Cylinder Blank K Single Rod Double Rod
Blank L
Standard Seal Lipseal Piston Seal 3
Seals Mounting Style N Basic (Std.) Single Rod Styles Head Bolt 4F 4R Cap Bolt 2F Head Trunnion 1 2R Cap Trunnion 1 1 Cap Pivot Eye Double Rod Styles N Basic 4R Cap Bolt 2F Head Trunnion Hollow Rod Styles 2 N Basic 4RH Cap Bolt 2FH Head Trunnion Blank V Standard Class 5 Seals Blank S Bumpers Blank B H C No Bumpers Bumpers Both Ends Head End Only Cap End Only 4 Special Feature No Special Feature Special Feature
E
Spring Blank E R None Spring Extend Spring Return
1. Not available on 9/16" bore. 2. Hollow rods are used on double rod cylinders. All hollow rod options require the double rod prefix K. 3. Lipseal piston is not available on LPM Series. 4. Not available on spring extend.
Note: For sensor specifications and part numbers, please refer to the Electronic Sensors section.
E53
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications Specifications
Low Profile Design 6 Mounting Styles 8 Bore Sizes from 9/16" to 4" Temperature Range: -10F to 200F (LPM Series 140F max.) Strokes from 1/8" to 6" Permanent Lubrication Maximum Operating Pressure: 250 PSI Air

C086
Technical Data
Push/Pull Forces
Bore dia. 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 Rod area 0.048 0.076 0.196 0.307 0.442 0.442 .601 0.781 Piston area Push/Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull 0.248 0.200 0.442 0.366 0.994 0.798 1.767 1.460 3.141 2.699 4.908 4.466 7.069 6.468 12.57 11.79 40 10 8 17.5 14.6 40 32 71 58 126 108 196 178 283 259 503 471 50 12.5 10 22 18 50 40 88 73 157 135 245 223 353 324 628 589 60 15 12 26.5 22 60 48 106 88 188 162 294 268 424 389 754 707 80 20 16 35 29 80 64 141 117 251 216 393 357 566 519 1006 942 100 25 20 44 37 99 80 177 146 314 270 491 447 707 649 1257 1178 PSI 125 31 25 55 46 124 100 221 182 393 337 613 558 884 811 1571 1484 150 37 30 66 55 149 120 265 219 471 405 736 670 1060 973 1885 1767 175 43 35 77 64 174 140 309 256 550 472 859 781 1237 1135 2200 2062 200 50 40 88 73 200 160 353 292 628 540 982 893 1414 1297 2514 2356 250 62 50 111 92 249 200 443 365 785 675 1227 1116 1767 1622 3142 2945
Weights Basic Cylinders

Bore Dia. 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 Basic N Mount Weight in ounces* 1.1 2.0 5.0 8.5 11.7 18.6 25.1 51.1 Add per 1/8" of Stroke (ounces) 0.08 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.1
Tie Rod Torque

Bore 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 Torque (inch pounds) 8 - 10 20 - 25 20 - 25 35 - 40 35 - 40 50 - 60 70 - 80 150 - 160
* Base weight includes 1/8 inch of stroke. Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
E54
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Dimensions Mounting Style N

Cylinder Dimensions Double Acting Single Rod End, Female Rod Style No. 9 Temperature: -10F to 200F (optional Fluorocarbon seals). All air cylinders are permanently lubricated. LPM Series maximum temperature 140F.

C086
EE NPT(2)
DD threaded hole for mounting C Bore and drill thru for FB S.H.C.S. (basic model). (4) places equally spaced on AA dia. Bolt circle bore sizes 1-1/8" thru 4". (2) places 180 apart on AA dia. bolt circle bore sizes 9/16" and 3/4".
P* + stroke
AA Diameter Bolt Circle (Mounting Holes)
MM Rod Diameter
KK Thread A Deep 4 2
Customer rod end has neck down and chamfer for ease of assembly. 3
D Across Flats E Diameter
May be mounted from head or cap end
G C LB* + stroke ZB* + stroke
E
ZB* 3/4 25/32 1-3/64 1-1/8 1-3/16 1-3/8 1-13/32 1-3/4
9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4
0.40 0.44 0.62 0.62 0.70 0.70 0.75 0.75
1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8
7/32 1-1/8 1/4 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 1-1/2 2 2-5/8 3-1/8 3-3/4 4-1/4 5-1/2
23/64 23/64 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 43/64 27/32
23/64 23/64 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 43/64 27/32
11/32 3/8 27/64 1/2 9/16 5/8 21/32 49/64
17/64 17/64 3/8 3/8 3/8 7/16 7/16 17/32
0.875 1.219 1.687 2.187 2.687 3.250 3.781 4.937
#8-32 #10-32 #10-32 1/4-28 1/4-28 5/16-24 5/16-24 3/8-24
#10-32 #10-32 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8
#4 #6 #6 #10 #10 1/4 1/4 5/16
#8-32 #10-32 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16
5/8 21/32 59/64 1 1-1/16 1-1/4 1-9/32 1-5/8
1/4 5/16 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/4 7/8 1
1/8 7/16
* These dimensions are for the LP Series with standard piston. For strokes less than 0.25", A dimension = 0.66".
Added Length Table for LPM or Lipseal Piston Options

Bore Dia. 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 LPM Option* P 15/16 31/32 63/64 1-1/8 1-9/32 1-21/64 1-27/64 1-1/2 LB 1-7/32 1-1/4 1-31/64 1-5/8 1-25/32 1-61/64 2-3/64 2-23/64 XD 2 2-1/32 2-3/8 2-13/16 3-1/32 3-21/64 3-53/64 4-11/64 XJ 1-3/16 1-23/64 1-1/2 1-21/32 1-3/4 1-53/64 2 ZB 1-11/32 1-3/8 1-39/64 1-3/4 1-29/32 2-5/64 2-11/64 2-31/64 Stroke 1/2 1/2 9/16 7/16 7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 P 5/8 21/32 43/64 13/16 61/64 1 1-3/32 1-11/64 LP with Lipseal Piston Option LB 29/32 15/16 1-11/64 1-5/16 1-29/64 1-5/8 1-23/32 2-1/32 XD 1-11/16 1-23/32 2-1/16 2-1/2 2-45/64 3 3-1/2 3-27/32 XJ 7/8 1-3/64 1-3/16 1-21/64 1-27/64 1-1/2 1-43/64 ZB 1-1/32 1-1/16 1-19/64 1-7/16 1-37/64 1-3/4 1-27/32 2-5/32
Note minimum strokes for LPM option. These bore sizes not available for the LPM option with the hollow rod option. * The LPM option is only available with the standard quad seal.
E55
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Bore Dia.
P*
AA
DD
EE
FB
KK
LB*
MM
P1M
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Options Head Bolt Clearance Holes

Mounting Style 4F Available Head End
Clearance hole for FB Diameter S.H.C.S. on AA Diameter B.C. (See view on previous page for location)
Air Cylinders LP/LPM Series Cap Bolt Clearance Holes

Mounting Style 4R Available Cap End
(Bolts not included)
(Bolts not included)
C086
Clearance hole for FB Diameter S.H.C.S. on AA Diameter B.C. (See view on previous page for location)
Head Trunnion
Mounting Style 2F (9/16" bore not available)
Cap Trunnion
Mounting Style 2R (9/16" bore not available)
NITRITE COATED TD +.001 .000
TD +.001 .000
NITRITE COATED
TL UT
TL XG XJ* + STROKE
TL UT
TL
Bore Dia. 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4
TD 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.312 0.375
TL 5/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4
UT 2-1/8 3 3-5/8 4-1/8 5 5-1/2 7
XG 5/16 3/8 3/8 3/8 29/64 15/32 35/64
XJ* 19/32 51/64 7/8 15/16 1-3/64 1-1/16 1-17/64
* These dimensions are for the LP Series with standard piston.
Cap Pivot Eye

Mounting Style 1
Bore Dia. 9/16
CD Dia. for clevis pin
L 1/2 1/2 1/2 13/16 13/16 13/16 1-9/32 1-9/32
M 1/4 1/4 1/4 7/16 7/16 7/16 9/16 9/16
CB 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1
CD 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8
FL
XD*
XE
21/32 1-13/32 19/32 21/32 1-7/16 3/4 3/4 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-7/8 1-7/8 49/64 1-13/16 1-1/16 2-3/16 1-1/8 1-1/4 2-5/16 2-5/8
3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2

XE Dia.
2 2-1/2 3 4
1-21/32 3-1/16 1-11/16 3-7/16
L FL XD* + STROKE M
CB
Order clevis pin from accessories when required. *These dimensions are for the LP Series with standard piston. See table on the previous page for dimensions for the lipseal piston or LPM options.
E56
Catalog 0900P-4
Spring Data Spring Extend & Spring Return Cylinders

(Available through 2" stroke)
Spring Return Dims. Model NLPR
XW + STROKE XV + STROKE
Air Cylinders LP/LPM Series Double Rod Spring Extend & Spring Return Cylinders
(Available through 2" stroke)
1/8
C086
Spring Extend Dims. Model NLPE

1/8 + STROKE XY + STROKE XZ + 2 x STROKE 1/8 G G LD + STROKE ZM + 2 x STROKE
Bore Dia. 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4
1/8" to 1" Stroke XV 1 1-1/64 1-23/64 1-25/64 1-11/64 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-27/32 XW 1-1/8 1-9/64 1-31/64 1-33/64 1-19/64 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-31/32 XY 57/64 59/64 1-9/32 1-11/32 1-13/32 1-23/32 1-55/64 2-13/64 XZ 1-1/64 1-3/64 1-13/32 1-15/32 1-17/32 1-27/32 1-63/64 2-21/64 XV 1-11/16 1-45/64 1-63/64 2-1/64 1-51/64 2 2-1/8 2-15/32
Over 1" to 2" Stroke XW 1-13/16 1-53/64 2-7/64 2-9/64 1-59/64 2-1/8 2-1/4 2-19/32 XY 1-37/64 1-39/64 1-29/32 1-31/32 2-1/32 2-11/32 2-31/64 2-53/64 XZ 1-45/64 1-47/64 2-1/32 2-3/32 2-5/32 2-15/64 2-39/64 2-61/64
Add this length to XV, XW, XY, XZ for Lipseal Piston 9/32 9/32 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 13/32 25/64
E
P1M
ZM 2-17/32 2-37/64 2-13/16 3-1/16 2-61/64 3-13/64 3-27/64 3- 47/64
Spring Return/Extend LP Bore Dia. 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 G LD 23/64 23/64 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 43/64 27/32 1-1/8 1-11/64 1-1/2 1-11/16 1-31/64 1-3/4 1-29/32 2-1/4 1/8", 1" ZM 1-3/8 1-27/64 1-3/4 1-15/16 1-47/64 2 2-5/32 2-1/2 Min.* Stroke 5/16 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 LD 1-13/16 1-55/64 2-1/8 2-5/16 2-7/64 2-3/8 2-17/32 2-7/8 >1", 2" ZM 2-1/16 2-7/64 2-3/8 2-9/16 2-23/64 2-5/8 2-25/32 3-1/8 LD 1-23/32 1-49/64 2-1/16 2-5/16 2-13/64 2-29/64 2-43/64 2-63/64
Spring Return/Extend LPM 1/8", >1" ZM 1-27/32 1-57/64 2-3/16 2-7/16 2-21/64 2-37/64 2-51/64 3-7/64 Min.* Stroke 3/16 3/16 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/16 1/8 1/8 LD 2-13/32 2-29/64 2-11/16 2-15/16 2-53/64 3-5/64 3-19/64 3-39/64 >1", 2"
* Note minimum strokes for LPM option.
Spring Force Data

1/8" to 1" Stroke Bore dia. 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3&4 Max. Spring Force (lbs) 5.7 9 10 13 13 17.5 24 Spring Rate (lb/in) 4.25 6 6 5.5 5.5 6 6.5 Bore dia. 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3&4 Over 1" to 2" Stroke Max. Spring Force (lbs) 5.7 9 10 12 12 16 23 Spring Rate (lb/in) 1.75 2.5 2.5 2.25 2.25 2.5 2.75
E57
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod Options Optional Male Rod End

Specify #4
MM Rod Diameter KK Thread

C086
Bore Dia. 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3

A C
A 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.62 0.75 0.75
C 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8
KK #8-32 #10-32 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16
MM 1/4 5/16 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/4 7/8 1
Non-Standard Rods
For non-standard rod ends, please specify rod thread style 3 and provide the KK, A, and C dimensions as needed.
KK Thread
Double or Hollow Rod Cylinders

Note: Cylinders with hollow rod option should not be bottomed out during stroke.
B Dia. thru on Model KNH
1/8
G G LD + STROKE ZM + 2 x STROKE
LP Double or Hollow Rod Option, LPM, Lipseal Piston

Bore Dia. 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 B * 9/64 7/32 9/32 3/8 3/8 7/16 1/2 G 23/64 23/64 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 43/64 27/32 Standard Double Rod End or with Hollow Rod LD 3/4 13/16 1-3/16 1-19/64 1-3/8 1-5/8 1-11/16 2-1/32 ZM 1 1-1/16 1-7/16 1-35/64 1-5/8 1-7/8 1-15/16 2-9/32 LD 1-11/32 1-13/32 1-3/4 1-59/64 2-3/32 2-21/64 2-29/64 2-49/64 LPM Option ZM 1-15/32 1-17/32 1-7/8 2-3/64 2-7/32 2-29/64 2-37/64 2-57/64 LP with Lipseal Piston Option LD 1-1/32 1-3/32 1-7/16 1-39/64 1-49/64 2 2-1/8 2-7/16 ZM 1-9/32 1-11/32 1-11/16 1-55/64 2-1/64 2-1/4 2-3/8 2-11/16
*Hollow rod not available on 9/16" bore.
E58
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Accessories Rod Eye

C086
Bore 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 3
Part # L073810008 L073810010 L073810020 L073810024
A
3/8 3/8 9/16 5/8
CA
15/32 15/32 15/32 23/32
CB
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/4 3/4 1 1
CD
3/16 3/16 3/16 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8
CE
1-3/32 1-3/32 1-9/32 1-25/32 1-27/32 2-3/8 2-3/8
KK
#8-32 #10-32 5/16-24 3/8-24 1/2-20 5/8-18 3/4-16
KK Thread
CD Dia. for clevis pin
2-2-1/2 L073810032 21/32 23/32
CB sq.
L073810040 21/32 L073810048 21/32
1 1
A CE
CA
Clevis Bracket
(Supplied with Pin)
Part # L073820012
CD Dia. for clevis pin CB DD Dia. (4)
E
1
CB
CD
3/8 5/8
DD
9/64
FL
9/16
RE
3/4
13/32 7/32 25/64 3/16
L073820024 1-3/4 25/32 13/32 49/64 L073820040 2-1/2

1 9/16 1-1/64
11/64 15/16 1-3/8 17/64 1-1/4 2
E
RE
Use L073820012 on 9/16", 3/4" and 1-1/8" bore. Use L073820024 on 1-1/2", 2" and 2-1/2" bore. Use L073820040 on 3" and 4" bore. Note: The Clevis Bracket is an accessory for the rod eye or the cap pivot eye and cannot be mounted directly to the cylinder.
L FL
RE E sq.
Trunnion Bracket
TD +.001 .000 dia. thru SU SW SB bolt size
Part # L073840016
SB
1/4
ST
7/8 1
SU
13/16 15/16
SW
5/16 3/8
TD
.252 .314 .377
TL
1/2 5/8 3/4
TS
3/8
US
1-1/2
ST
L073840020 5/16
TS
29/64 1-5/8 35/64 1-7/8
L073840024
TL US
3/8
1-1/4 1- 1/16 7/16
Use L073840016 on 1-1/8", 1-1/2" and 2" bore. Use L073840020 on 2- 1/2" and 3" bore. Use L073840024 on 4" bore.
Clevis Pin
HP Diameter thru
Part # CD
3/16 3/8 5/8
HP
3/32 5/32 5/32
LH
1 1-5/8 2
LP
29/32 1-15/32 1-27/32
CD Diameter LP LH
L073830012 L073830024 L073830040
E59
Catalog 0900P-4
Bumpers / Sensor Mounting Noise Dampening Bumpers

Bumpers both ends B Bumpers rod end R Bumper cap end C* Bumpers are available at either or both ends of the cylinder to reduce noise for quieter operation. Bumper material is a 70 durometer nitrile. The table shows the distance the stroke is reduced when incorporating bumpers. This varies with operating pressure as indicated in the table. Example: 1.50 NL PB9 x 0.50" stroke. Bumpers both ends cylinder will have a working stroke of 0.43" instead of 0.50" operating at 80 psi. For special applications call the factory.
NOTES: Bumpers shorten actual strokes and are not practical on short stroke with low operating pressure. Bumpers on Cap End or Both Ends will add the BC length in chart to C dimension (rod extension). Bumpers on Double End Cylinders will add the BR length in chart to the C dimension (rod extension).
Air Cylinders LP/LPM Series Stroke Reduction (in.) Using Bumpers

Bore Dia. Bumper Location Cap End 0.56 Head End Both Ends Cap End 0.75 Head End Both Ends Cap End 1.12 Head End Both Ends Cap End 1.50 Head End Both Ends Cap End 2.00 Head End Both Ends Cap End 2.50 Head End Both Ends Cap End 3.00 Head End Both Ends Cap End 4.00 Head End Both Ends Dim. BC BR BB BC BR BB BC BR BB BC BR BB BC BR BB BC BR BB BC BR BB BC BR BB Operating Pressure (PSI) 0 0.03 0.07 0.10 0.07 0.07 0.14 0.10 0.10 0.20 0.11 0.10 0.21 0.11 0.10 0.21 0.08 0.10 0.18 0.10 0.14 0.24 0.10 0.21 0.31 20 0.02 0.07 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.13 0.09 0.09 0.18 0.10 0.08 0.18 0.09 0.08 0.17 0.06 0.07 0.13 0.06 0.09 0.15 0.08 0.15 0.23 40 0.02 0.06 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.17 0.09 0.08 0.17 0.08 0.06 0.14 0.05 0.06 0.11 0.04 0.08 0.12 0.05 0.13 0.18 60 0.01 0.06 0.07 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.07 0.07 0.14 0.08 0.07 0.15 0.07 0.06 0.13 0.03 0.05 0.08 0.03 0.08 0.11 0.03 0.12 0.15 80 0.01 0.05 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.09 0.07 0.07 0.14 0.07 0.06 0.13 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.03 0.05 0.08 0.02 0.07 0.09 0.03 0.11 0.14 100 0.01 0.04 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.03 0.04 0.07 0.01 0.07 0.08 0.02 0.11 0.13
C086
* Not available on spring extend.
Sensor Mounting Data

.86
Size
Piston Travel at Midstroke (in 0.01) (Sensor On) 0.20 0.23 0.32 0.32 0.35 0.42 0.47 0.47
Minimum Activation Distance from End of Stroke (in) Head 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.12 Cap 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.12
9/16 3/4 1-1/8

A
0.32 0.25 0.20 0.10 0.10 0.03 0.03 0.00
1-1/2 2
SET SCREWS
2-1/2 3 4
To sense piston position, mount sensor along tie rod using 2 each small set screws.
E60
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits
Seal Kits (Standard Piston)
Bore Size 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 Rod Dia. 1/4" 5/16" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 3/4" 7/8" 1" Single Rod Cylinders Class 1 Seals Part No. SKS05LP251 SKS07LP311 SKS12LP501 SKS15LP621 SKS20LP751 SKS25LP751 SKS30LP871 SKS40LP101 Class 5 Seals Part No. SKS05LP255 SKS07LP315 SKS12LP505 SKS15LP625 SKS20LP755 SKS25LP755 SKS30LP875 SKS40LP105

C086
Seal Kits (Lipseal Piston)

Bore Size 9/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 Rod Dia. 1/4" 5/16" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 3/4" 7/8" 1" Single Rod Cylinders Class 1 Seals Part No. KS05LPL251 KS07LPL311 KS12LPL501 KS15LPL621 KS20LPL751 KS25LPL751 KS30LPL871 KS40LPL101 Class 5 Seals Part No. KS05LPL255 KS07LPL315 KS12LPL505 KS15LPL625 KS20LPL755 KS25LPL755 KS30LPL875 KS40LPL105
E
P1M E61
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes

C086
E62
C05 & C05S Series

Short Stroke Pneumatic Cylinders
E
P1M Contents
Features ............................................................................E64 Ordering Information..........................................................E65 Product Specifications .......................................................E66 Basic Cylinder Dimensions ................................................E67
E63
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Short Stroke Pneumatic Cylinders C05 and C05S Series

C086
Compact installation dimensions.
Piston rod with internal thread.
Simple attachment with 2 or 4 through-going tapped attachment holes.
Clean external design.
Cylinders, type C05 and C05S

Compact short stroke cylinders available in single and double acting versions. Ideally suited for clamping and locking operations, the range includes bores from 8 to 63 mm, providing thrust forces of up to 3000 N. The design has been optimized to include the following features:
Clean design
The main body is machined from one piece, thus providing an easy to clean unit. Stainless steel piston rods are standard for corrosion resistance.
Maintenance free
The units are pre-lubricated for use without additional lubrication, reducing maintenance costs and providing an improved working environment.
Installation
The compact design (with mounting holes through the cylinder body) makes the unit easy to install in confined spaces.
E64
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information Model Code

C086
C05S
Cylinder type C05 Double acting 12-63 C05S Single acting
50
16
Piston Rod, mm
10
Stroke, mm
Cylinder Bore 8 12 20 32 50 63 8mm 12mm 20mm 32mm 50mm 63mm
Cylinder Type
Single Acting C05S
50 63 8 12 20 32 50 63
16/M8 16/M8 4/5/10/M5 12/M6 16/M8 16/M8
E65
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Double Acting C05
32
12/M6
P1M
Bore Size 12 20
Piston Rod 5/10/M5
Port Size M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4
E
Stroke 10 10 10 25 25 25 4 4 4 5 10 10
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications Performance Specifications

Working pressure Working temperature Max 10 bar (145 PSI) -20C to +70C (-4F to +158F)

C086
Pre-lubricated, further lubrication is not normally necessary. If additional lubrication is introduced it has to be continued.
Cylinder housing Front end cover Front end cover, single action 50-63 Piston rod bearing single action 50-63 Piston, 8-32 mm Piston, 50-63 mm Piston rod Seals Circlip Return spring Black anodized aluminium Brass Black anodized aluminium Brass/PTFE/lead Stainless steel Aluminium Stainless steel Nitrile, NBR Steel spring Surface treated steel spring
Quick Reference
Cylinder Cylinder C05S-8-4-4 C05S-12-5-4 C05S-20-10-4 C05S-32-12-5 C05S-50-16-10 C05S-63-16-10 C05-12-5-10 C05-20-1 0-10 C05-32-12-10 C05-32-12-25 C05-50-16-25 C05-63-16-25 Bore (mm) 8 12 20 32 50 63 12 20 32 32 50 63 Area (cm2) 0.5 1.1 3.1 8.0 19.6 31.1 1.1 3.1 8.0 8.0 19.6 31.1 Piston Rod Dia. (mm) 4 5 10 12 16 16 5 10 12 12 16 16 Area (cm2) 0.13 0.20 0.79 1.13 2.01 2.01 0.20 0.79 1.13 1.13 2.01 2.01 Theoretical Force at 6 Bar (N) Extend 28 65 184 463 1145 1825 68 190 480 480 1180 1870 Retract 56 143 415 415 1060 1750 Air 1) Consumption (I) 0.0045 0.0099 0.0151 0.0653 0.1695 0.2602 0.0186 0.0505 0.1236 0.1236 0.3167 0.4982 Spring Force (N) Max. 3 7 10 25 42 58 Min. 2 3 6 19 35 45 Stroke (mm) 4 4 4 5 10 10 10 10 10 25 25 25 Mass Weight (kg) 0.016 0.023 0.067 0.192 0.416 0.663 0.045 0.125 0.320 0.400 0.675 0.800
1) Consumption of free air per 10 mm stroke for a double stroke at 600 kPa (6 bar).
Important
Before attempting any external or internal work on the cylinder or any connected components, make sure the cylinder is vented and disconnect the air supply in order to ensure isolation of the air supply.
Note Air quality is essential for maximum cylinder service life (see ISO 8573). Note All technical data in this catalog is typical data only.
E66
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Cylinder Dimensions Single Acting

K

C086
N6
E R
M L
I G
Type C05S-8-4-4 C05S-12-5-4 C05S-20-10-4 C05S-32-12-5 C05S-50-16-10 C05S-63-16-10
A 20 25 40 55 80 90
B 16 16 20 26 30 35
C 18 20 32 45 65 80
D 0* 0* 0* 0* 50 62
E 11 13 20 32 50 62
F 5.5 7.0 9.0 14.0 22.5 19.0
G 6 6 10 10 11 15
H 3.4 3.4 5.0 5.0 6.5 9.0
I 3.4 3.4 5.5 5.5 6.5 9.0
J M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4
K 5.0 6.0 9.5 9.5 11.0 11.0
L 4 5 10 12 16 16
M M5 M6 M8 M8
N 13.5 15.0 24.0 32.0 47.5 50.0
O 8 12 12 14
P 17 17 21 27 31 36
R 9 14 14
E
Double Acting
KA K N
KB
E R
M L
I G
Type C05-12-5-10 C05-20-10-10 C05-32-12-10 C05-32-12-25 C05-50-16-25 C05-63-16-25
A 25 40 55 55 80 90
B 27 30 36 51 50 55
C 20 32 45 45 65 80
D 0* 0* 0* 0* 50 62
E 13 20 32 32 50 62
F 7,0 9,0 14,0 14,0 22,5 19,0
G 6 10 10 10 11 15
H 3.4 5.0 5.0 5.0 6.5 9.0
I 3.4 5.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 9.0
J M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4
K 6.0 6.0 9.5 9.5 11.0 11.0
KA 13.0 16.0 16.5 31.5 28.0 33.0
KB 3 6 14 0** 0** 0**
L 5 10 12 12 16 16
M M5 M6 M6 M8 M8
N 16.0 24.0 32.0 32.0 47.5 50.0
O 8 12 12 12 14
P 28 31 37 52 51 56
R 9 9 14 14
* Only two mounting holes (F). ** Connections in-line.
E67
Catalog 0900-4
Notes

C086
E68
P1G Series
Cartridge Cylinders
E
P1M Contents
Features ............................................................................E70 Ordering Information..........................................................E70 Technical Information.........................................................E70 Dimensions ........................................................................E70
E69
P1G
C05(S)
LP(M)
Catalog 0900-4
Features
Features
Bushing Nickel Plated Brass Nut Nickel Plated Steel Spring Stainless Steel
Cartridge Cylinders P1G Series

C086
Example: P1G-S006SS-10
Piston Rod Seal
P1G-S
006
SS-
10
Bore Size 006 6mm 010 10mm 016 16mm
Stroke 05 5mm 10 10mm 15 15mm
Technical Information
Temperature: -4F to +176F (-20C to +80C) Pressure:
max. 102 PSI (7 bar) min. 29 PSI (2 bar)
Piston Rod Stainless Steel
Non Lube Operation
Nut Nickel Plated Brass
Body Nickel Plated Brass
Caution
Use clean air. Avoid side loads on the piston rod. Avoid loading the piston rod during retraction. Do not operate the cylinders with excessive inertia.
Dimensions
N KV
Spring Forces (N)

6 B 10 16 Retract 1.5 2.5 4.5 Extended 4 6 11
KV1 J M F H G
Weights (g)
6 Strokes 5 10 27 70 10 13 32 78 15 15 36 87
Dimensions (mm)
G 6 10 16 A M10 X 1 B 8.5 C M5 D M3 X 0.5 M4 X 0.7 M5 X 0.8 E 9 14 20 F 5 5 6 5 10 15 32.5 H 9.0 J 9 KV A/ KV1 M F 14 19 27 5.5 7.0 8.0 3 4 5 N 2.4 3.2 4.0
10 16
18.5 25.5 20.5 27.0 23.5 29.5
M15 X 1.5 13.0 M5 M22 X 1.5 19.0 M5
34.0 11.5 11 36.0 14.0 12
E70
Guided Cylinders
Section F
F
P5T F1
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Section F Overview
Section F Guided Cylinders

P5T Series
Heavy Duty Short Stroke Applications Compact Housing with Integral Cylinder Bore Sizes 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 and 100mm Strokes 10 to 200mm Depending on Model Force Output at .5 Mpa (75 PSI): 23.6 to 913 lb (105 to 3927 N) Maximum Operating Pressure: 10 bar (145 PSI)
P5T2 Series
Heavy Duty Short Stroke Thruster Bore Sizes 12, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 And 100mm Stroke Lengths from 10mm to 200mm Depending on Model Force Output at .5 Mpa (75 PSI): 13 to 913 lb (59 to 4063 N) Maximum Operating Pressure: 10 bar (145 PSI) Through-body Mounting on All Models
P5TT/P5TD Series
Dual Cylinder Bores
Available with Single Tooling Plate (P5TT) or Dual Tooling Plate (P5TD) Bore Sizes 6, 10, 16, 20, 25 and 32mm Strokes 10 to 200mm Depending on Model Force Output at 80 PSI: 7 to 199 lb (31 to 888 N) Maximum Operating Pressure: (10.3 bar) 150 PSI
P5L Series
3 Body Styles (Thrust, Reach, Base) Bore Sizes 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 and 100mm Powered by P1L Cylinder Maximum Strokes 400 to 1000mm Depending on Model Force Output at 80 PSI (5.5 bar): 39 to 974 lb (173 to 4332 N) 10 bar (145 PSI) Air Service
HB Series
Medium Duty to Extremely Heavy Duty Linear Motion Powered by the P1D ISO Cylinder with NFPA Options Available Bore Sizes 40, 50 and 63mm Force Output at 80 PSI: 117 to 368 lb 10 bar (145 PSI) Air Service with Other Options Available
P5E Series
Low Profile Guided Assembly Powered by the P1D Cylinder Bore Sizes 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 and 100mm Strokes to Any Practical Length Rod Lock Options Available 10 bar (145 PSI) Air Service
F2
Catalog 0900P-4
Section F Overview Selection Guide

Basic performance features of the product line are shown below. See catalog sections for greater detail and ordering information. Consult factory for requirements beyond the scope of these guidelines.
Cylinder Type Series Bore Size Range Maximum Shaft Diameter Maximum Thrust (lbs) at 80 PSI Extend Retract NFPA/ISO HB 1 - 2 in NFPA 40 to 63mm ISO 35mm 393 368 42 in. 150 PSI Composite or Linear Ball Bushings l Solid State Sensor Options Reed Proximity Mounting & Porting Threads Stroke Adjustment Piston Magnet Standard Cushions Energy Dissipation Port Relocation 3-Position Rod Lock Option Hydraulic Service Option Alignment Coupler Fluorocarbon Seals Washdown Clean Room
l = Available from catalog C = Consult Factory
Round Body P5L 20 to 100mm 50mm 974 874 100mm 10 Bar (145 PSI) Composite or Linear Ball Bushings
ISO P5E 32 to 100mm 30mm 974 913 C 10 Bar (145 PSI) Composite or Linear Ball Bushings l P5T
Built-in P5TT/P5TD 6 to 32mm 16mm 199 150 200mm (8") 150 PSI Composite or Linear Ball Bushings l l l
16 to 100mm 35mm 913 856 200mm (8") 10 Bar (145 PSI) Composite or Linear Ball Bushings l l l
Maximum Suggested Stroke Maximum Pressure Rating Shaft Bearing Type Non-Lube Service
l l l C l l l l l l l l l l l l C C
l l l l l l
l l
F
P5T
Metric Inch
l C l l
l C l l
l l l
l l l l l l l l
Bumpers Shock Absorbers
l l l C C l l C l
F3
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
F4
P5T Series
Short Stroke Thruster
F
P5T Contents
Features ..............................................................................F6 Ordering Information............................................................F7 Specifications ................................................................ F8-F9 Engineering Data ....................................................... F10-F17 Dimensions ................................................................ F18-F19 Options ...................................................................... F20-F24 Sensors .............................................................................F25 Service Kits .......................................................................F26
F5
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Guided Cylinders P5T Series

A074
Compact, One-Piece Body Provides economy and minimum package size by integrating a low profile cylinder and support shafts into a single body.
Rear Porting Rear porting is standard. Optional side porting is available.
3D CAD FILES available for download at parker.com/pneumatics
Standard Dowel Holes Dowel holes on body provide simple, economical and precise mounting. Top Porting Top porting is standard. Optional side porting is available.
Internal Bumpers Are standard on all units. These provide energy dissipation and noise reduction which result in longer operating life.
Dowel Holes Standard dowel holes provide precision mounting and alignment on the tool plate.
Sensor Grooves Allow reed or solid state sensors to be mounted flush to the body. Magnetic piston is standard.
Tooling Plate Precision machined from steel, the tooling plate is thick and rigid to provide a durable connection. Composite Bushings or Linear Ball Bearings Parker uses a PTFE impregnated composite bushing which serves as a lubrication reservoir. This results in higher load carrying capabilities, both dynamic and static, with excellent resistance to shock loading. The impregnated lubricant also makes the bearings more dirt tolerant. Composite bushings with oversized shafting are available for high impact loads. Optional recirculating ball bearings provide precision operation with very low friction and wear.
F6
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information Model Code and Ordering Information

Example: P5T-J032DHSN100

A074
P5T
032
100
Stroke See table below for standard stroke lengths. Consult factory for special stroke lengths. Options
Shaft/Bearing Type J H C Composite Bearing, Chrome Plated Shaft (Std) Ball Bearing, Stainless Steel Shaft Composite Bearing, Stainless Steel Shaft N B A
Bore Size 016 020 025 032 040 050 063 080 100 16mm 20mm 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm 80mm 100mm
E G
D X
None (Std) High Load Bearings 2 Bumpers, Adjustable Stop Collars (Extend Only) and Dual Tool Plate (Side Ports Rec) 3, 4 Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars (Extend Only) 3 High Load Bearings, Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars (Extend Only) 2, 3 Dual Tool Plate 3, 4 Special
F
P5T P5E HB P5L P5TT/TD P5T2
Port Location/Mounting D R S Dowel Holes, Top Ports, Rear Plugged (Std) Dowel Holes, Rear Ports, Top Plugged (Std) Dowel Holes, Side Ports 1 H G P F
NOTES: 1 Cannot combine flow controls, side ports and 25mm stroke. 2 Not available with rear mounting and ports. 3 Not available with rear port location (R). 4 Includes high load bearings as standard.
Seals S F Nitrile (Std) Fluorocarbon (High Temp)
Port Style NPTF (Std) BSPP Flow Control, BSPP Port, Prestolok Tube (mm) 1 Flow Control, NPTF Port, Prestolok Tube (inch) 1 Flow Control, BSPP 1 Flow Control, NPTF 1
B N
Bore Size (mm) 16 20 25 32 - 100
10 l
25 l l l l
40 l l
50 l l l l
Standard Strokes (mm)* 75 100 125 l l l l l l l l l l l
150
175
200
l l
*Consult factory for special stroke lengths.
F7
Catalog 0900P-4
Maximum operating pressure: 1 MPa (10 bar/145 psi) Operating characteristics: Double acting Support rod sizes: 8 to 35mm Mounting: Unrestricted Operating temperature range (cylinder): Nitrile seals (standard) Fluorocarbon seals* -18 to 74C (0 to 165F) -18 to 121C (0 to 250F)
Guided Cylinders P5T Series Construction

A074
Body ........................................................................ Aluminum End Caps ................................................................. Aluminum Tool Plate .........................................................................Steel Piston Rod ...................................................... Stainless Steel Support Rods ...................................... Steel (Chrome Plated) Rod Bolts .........................................................................Steel
Mounting Bolts
Bore Size 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Note: Socket Head Cap M5 x .8 M5 x .8 M6 x 1.0 M8 x 1.25 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.5 M10 x 1.5 M12 x 1.75 M14 x 2.0
Filtration requirement: 40 micron, filtered dry air

* See Fluorocarbon seal option for high temperature applications.
When the P5T is used as an impact stopping system, mounting bolt thread engagement should be 1.5 times bolt diameter.
Quick Reference Data

Model (Bore Size) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Piston Rod (mm) 8 10 10 16 16 20 20 25 25 Bushings Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Support Rods (mm) 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 16 20 20 25 20 25 25 30 30 35 Piston Bore Ares Non-Rod Side mm2 200 200 316 316 490 490 804 804 1257 1257 1964 1964 3117 3117 5027 5027 7854 7854 in2 0.31 0.31 0.49 0.49 0.76 0.76 1.25 1.25 1.95 1.95 3.04 3.04 4.83 4.83 7.79 7.79 12.17 12.17 Max Stroke (mm) 100 100 125 125 150 150 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Theoretical Force Extend @75 PSI (0.5 MPa) N 105 105 164 164 254 254 402 402 628 628 982 982 1559 1559 2513 2513 3927 3927 lb 23.6 23.6 36.8 36.8 57 57 93 93 146 146 228 228 362 362 584 584 913 913 Retract @75 PSI (0.5 MPa) N 77.4 77.4 123 123 213.5 213.5 302 302 528 528 825 825 1492 1492 2268 2268 3574 3574 lb 17.4 17.4 27.8 27.8 48 48 70 70 123 123 192 192 326 326 527 527 856 856
F8
Catalog 0900P-4
Weights
Units with Composite Bushings
Weights in kg (lb)
Model 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100

A074
Standard Stroke (mm) 10 0.35 (0.77) 25 0.43 (0.95) 0.76 (1.66) 1.13 (2.48) 1.67 (3.68) 2.00 (4.40) 2.63 (5.78) 3.29 (7.24) 6.06 (13.33) 10.69 (23.52) 40 0.51 (1.13) 0.86 (1.90) 50 0.57 (1.25) 0.94 (2.06) 1.39 (3.05) 2.07 (4.55) 2.42 (5.32) 3.22 (7.08) 3.98 (8.75) 7.12 (15.66) 12.03 (26.47) 75 0.70 (1.54) 1.11 (2.45) 1.65 (3.63) 2.46 (5.42) 2.84 (6.25) 3.81 (8.38) 4.66 (10.25) 8.18 (18.00) 13.37 (29.42) 100 0.84 (1.84) 1.29 (2.85) 1.91 (4.20) 2.86 (6.29) 3.26 (7.17) 4.40 (9.69) 5.34 (11.75) 9.24 (20.33) 14.71 (32.37) 125 1.47 (3.24) 2.17 (4.77) 3.26 (7.17) 3.68 (8.10) 4.99 (10.99) 6.02 (13.25) 10.30 (22.66) 16.05 (35.32) 150 2.43 (5.35) 3.65 (8.04) 4.10 (9.02) 5.59 (12.29) 6.71 (14.76) 11.36 (24.99) 17.39 (38.27) 175 4.05 (8.91) 4.52 (9.94) 6.18 (13.59) 7.39 (16.26) 12.42 (27.33) 18.73 (41.22) 200 4.45 (9.78) 4.84 (10.65) 6.77 (14.89) 8.07 (17.76) 13.48 (29.66) 20.08 (44.17)
F
P5T
Weights in kg (lb)
Model 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Standard Stroke (mm) 10 0.32 (0.70) 25 0.39 (0.86) 0.70 (1.53) 0.98 (2.15) 1.51 (3.31) 1.82 (4.01) 2.35 (5.17) 2.99 (6.58) 5.66 (12.45) 10.16 (22.36) 40 0.46 (1.02) 0.80 (1.75) 50 0.51 (1.13) 0.86 (1.90) 1.20 (2.64) 1.86 (4.09) 2.20 (4.83) 2.87 (6.32) 3.60 (7.93) 6.63 (14.59) 11.40 (25.09) 75 0.64 (1.40) 1.03 (2.26) 1.43 (3.14) 2.21 (4.86) 2.57 (5.66) 3.39 (7.47) 4.22 (9.28) 7.61 (16.74) 12.64 (27.82) 100 0.76 (1.67) 1.19 (2.62) 1.65 (3.64) 2.56 (5.63) 2.95 (6.49) 3.92 (8.62) 4.83 (10.63) 8.58 (18.88) 13.89 (30.55) 125 1.36 (2.99) 1.88 (4.14) 2.91 (6.41) 3.32 (7.31) 4.44 (9.76) 5.45 (11.98) 9.56 (21.03) 15.13 (33.28) 150 2.11 (4.63) 3.27 (7.18) 3.70 (8.14) 4.96 (10.91) 6.06 (13.33) 10.53 (23.18) 16.37 (36.01) 175 3.62 (7.96) 4.08 (8.97) 5.48 (12.06) 6.67 (14.68) 11.51 (25.32) 17.61 (38.74) 200 3.97 (8.73) 4.45 (9.79) 6.01 (13.21) 7.29 (16.03) 12.49 (27.47) 18.85 (41.46)
F9
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
Units with Linear Ball Bushings
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Horizontal Load Capacity Standard Unit

P5T Series units will have the same load capacity regardless of orientation. The graphs below show maximum load capacity based on a unit life of 10 million cycles . EXAMPLE: A P5T-16 with stroke + d of 75mm and composite bushings would have a load capacity of 50N.

A074
d d
16mm Bore Size

200 (45) 150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 250 (56) 200 (45)
20mm Bore Size

300 (67) 250 (56)
25mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Composite
150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9)
Load, N (lb)
Composite
Composite Ball Bearing
200 (45) 150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

400 (90) Composite 300 (67) Ball Bearing 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (67) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 400 (90)
40mm Bore Size

500 (112) Composite 400 (90)
Ball Bearing
50mm Bore Size
Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
300 (67) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0
Ball Bearing
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
63mm Bore Size

500 (112) 400 (90) Composite 1000 (225) 800 (180)
80mm Bore Size

Composite 1500 (337) 1200 (269)
100mm Bore Size

Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
300 (67) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
900 (202) 600 (135) 300 (67) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F10
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Horizontal Load Capacity with High Load Bearings and Dual Tool Plate (D, A, B)
P5T Series units will have the same load capacity regardless of orientation. The graphs below show maximum load capacity based on a unit life of 10 million cycles. EXAMPLE: A P5T-20 with stroke + d of 100mm and high load composite bushings would have a load capacity of 125N.

A074
d d
16mm Bore Size

200 (45) 150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 250 (56) Ball Bearing 200 (45)
20mm Bore Size

Ball Bearing 300 (67) 250 (56)
25mm Bore Size

Ball Bearing
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9)
Composite
Load, N (lb)
200 (45) 150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0 Composite
Composite
F
0 Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

400 (90) 300 (67) 200 (45) Composite 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Ball Bearing 400 (90) 300 (67) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0
40mm Bore Size

Ball Bearing
50mm Bore Size

500 (112) 400 (90)
Ball Bearing
Load, N (lb)
300 (67) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0
Composite
Composite
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
63mm Bore Size

500 (112) 400 (90) Ball Bearing 1000 (225) 800 (180)
80mm Bore Size

Ball Bearing 1500 (337) 1200 (269)
100mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
300 (67) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
900 (202) 600 (135) 300 (67) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Composite
Composite
Composite
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F11
P5E
Ball Bearing
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
P5T2
P5T
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Load Stopping Capacity Standard Unit

P5T Series actuators are ideal for conveyor stopping applications. Units can be mounted horizontally or vertically. Composite bushings are strongly recommended for this type of application. EXAMPLE: A P5T-50 unit with a stroke up to 50mm will stop an object moving at 40 cm/second (15.75 in/s) that weighs up to 50 kg (110 lb).
Note: The following graphs are based on 50mm of stroke.

A074
50mm (1.97")
16mm Bore Size

25 (55) 20 (44) 15 (33) 10 (22) 5 (11) 0 0 10 (3.9) 60 20 30 40 50 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec)) 40 (88) 30 (66) 20 (44) 10 (22) 0 0
20mm Bore Size

80 (176) 60 (132) 40 (88) 20 (44) 0 10 (3.9) 50 20 30 40 60 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec) 0
25mm Bore Size
Mass, kg (lb)
Mass, kg (lb)
Mass, kg (lb)
10 (3.9)
40 50 20 30 60 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec)
32mm Bore Size

200 (440) 150 (330) 100 (220) 50 (110) 0 0 10 (3.9) 30 60 20 40 50 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec) 200 (440) 150 (330) 100 (220) 50 (110) 0 0
40mm Bore Size

400 (880) 300 (660) 200 (440) 100 (220) 0 10 (3.9) 30 40 60 50 20 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec) 0
50mm Bore Size
Mass, kg (lb)
Mass, kg (lb)
Mass, kg (lb)
10 (3.9)
63mm Bore Size

400 (880) 300 (660) 200 (440) 100 (220) 0 0 10 (3.9) 20 30 40 60 50 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec) 600 (1320) 500 (1100)
80mm Bore Size

1000 (2200) 800 (1760) 600 (1320) 400 (880) 200 (440) 0 0 10 (3.9) 30 20 40 50 60 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec) 0
100mm Bore Size
Mass, kg (lb)
Mass, kg (lb)
400 (880) 300 (660) 200 (440) 100 (220) 0
Mass, kg (lb)
10 (3.9)
F12
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Load Stopping Capacity with High Load Bearings and Dual Tool Plate (D, A, B)
P5T Series actuators are ideal for conveyor stopping applications. Units can be mounted horizontally or vertically. Composite bushings are strongly recommended for this type of application. EXAMPLE: A P5T-25 unit with a stroke up to 50mm will stop an object moving at 40 cm/second (15.7 in/s) that weighs up to 46 kg (101 lb).

A074
50mm (1.97")
16mm Bore Size

25 (55) 20 (44) 15 (33) 10 (22) 5 (11) 0 0 10 (3.9) 60 20 30 40 50 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec)) 40 (88) 30 (66) 20 (44) 10 (22) 0 0
20mm Bore Size

80 (176) 60 (132) 40 (88) 20 (44) 0
25mm Bore Size
Mass, kg (lb)
Mass, kg (lb)
Mass, kg (lb)
F
0 Speed, cm/sec (in/sec)
Speed, cm/sec (in/sec)
200 (440) 150 (330) 100 (220) 50 (110) 0 0 10 (3.9) 30 60 20 40 50 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec)
Mass, kg (lb)
Mass, kg (lb)
Mass, kg (lb)
63mm Bore Size

400 (880) 300 (660) 200 (440) 100 (220) 0 0 10 (3.9) 20 30 40 60 50 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec) 600 (1320) 500 (1100)
80mm Bore Size

1000 (2200) 800 (1760) 600 (1320) 400 (880) 200 (440) 0 0 10 (3.9) 30 20 40 50 60 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec) 0
100mm Bore Size
Mass, kg (lb)
Mass, kg (lb)
400 (880) 300 (660) 200 (440) 100 (220) 0
Mass, kg (lb)
10 (3.9)
F13
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
32mm Bore Size
40mm Bore Size
50mm Bore Size
P5T
10 (3.9)
50 20 30 40 60 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6)
10 (3.9)
40 50 20 30 60 (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6)
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Asymmetrical Torque Capacity Standard Unit

Asymmetrical loading occurs when the load is applied to one side of the unit. P5T Series units can resist torsional loads that are asymmetrical. EXAMPLE: A mechanism exerts an asymmetrical load of 15Nm on a P5T-50 with 50mm stroke+d. The P5T-50 with composite bushings will have adequate torsional capacity.

A074
Stroke d
16mm Bore Size

4 (35) 3 (27) 2 (18) 1 (9) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 6 (53)
20mm Bore Size

10 (89) Composite 8 (71) 6 (53) 4 (35) 2 (18) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0 0
25mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Composite
4 (35) Ball Bearing 2 (18)
Composite
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

16 (142) Composite 12 (106) 8 (71) 4 (35) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 20 (177) 15 (133) 10 (89) 5 (44) 0 0
40mm Bore Size

25 (221) 20 (177) 15 (133) 10 (89) 5 (44) 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0
50mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Composite
Ball Bearing
Composite
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
63mm Bore Size

30 (266) 25 (221) 80 (708) 60 (531) 40 (354) 20 (177) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0
80mm Bore Size

150 (1328) 120 (1062) 90 (797) 60 (531) 30 (266) 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0
100mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
20 (177) 15 (133) 10 (89) 5 (44) 0
Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Composite
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F14
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Asymmetrical Torque Capacity with High Load Bearings and Dual Tool Plate (D, A, B)
Asymmetrical loading occurs when the load is applied to one side of the unit. P5T Series units can resist torsional loads that are asymmetrical. EXAMPLE: A mechanism exerts an asymmetrical load of 15Nm on a P5T-50 with 50mm stroke+d. The P5T-50 with composite bushings will have adequate torsional capacity.

A074
Stroke d
16mm Bore Size

4 (35) Ball Bearing 3 (27) 2 (18) 1 (9) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 6 (53)
20mm Bore Size

10 (89) Ball Bearing 8 (71) 6 (53) 4 (35) 2 (18) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0
25mm Bore Size

Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
4 (35)
Composite
2 (18) Composite 0
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
F
50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

16 (142) 12 (106) 8 (71) 4 (35) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Composite 20 (177) 15 (133) 10 (89) 5 (44) 0 0
40mm Bore Size

25 (221) Composite 20 (177) 15 (133) 10 (89) 5 (44) 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0
50mm Bore Size

Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
63mm Bore Size

30 (266) 25 (221) 20 (177) 15 (133) 10 (89) 5 (44) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Composite Ball Bearing 80 (708)
80mm Bore Size

150 (1328) Composite 120 (1062) 90 (797) 60 (531) 30 (266) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0
100mm Bore Size

Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Ball Bearing
40 (354) 20 (177) 0
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
60 (531)
Ball Bearing
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F15
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
Ball Bearing
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Vertical Eccentric Load Capacity Standard Unit

P5T Series units mounted vertically will have the same eccentric load capacity regardless of orientation. The graphs provide maximum load capacity for an eccentric mounted load. The load is assumed to be mounted at the face of the tooling plate. These load curves illustrate load ratings based on the bearing system of the product. Load rating is a key selection criterion but is not the only one to consider in the selection of a product.

A074
y y
y = eccentricity distance
16mm Bore Size

200 (45)
Composite
20mm Bore Size

250 (56) 200 (45)
Composite
25mm Bore Size

300 (67) 250 (56)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Ball Bearing
100 (22) 50 (11) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Load, N (lb)
150 (34)
Ball Bearing
200 (45) 150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Eccentricity, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

400 (90) 300 (67) 200 (45)
Composite
40mm Bore Size

400 (90) 300 (67) 200 (45)
Composite
50mm Bore Size

500 (112) 400 (90)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
300 (67) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0
100 (22)
Ball Bearing
100 (22) 0
Composite
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
63mm Bore Size

500 (112) 400 (90) 1000 (225) 800 (180)
80mm Bore Size

1600 (359) 1200 (269) 800 (180)
100mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
300 (67) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Load, N (lb)
600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0 0 50 (1.9)
Load, N (lb)
Composite
Composite
400 (90)
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
0 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
F16
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Vertical Eccentric Load Capacity with High Load Bearings and Dual Tool Plate (D, A, B)
P5T Series units mounted vertically will have the same eccentric load capacity regardless of orientation. The graphs provide maximum load capacity for an eccentric mounted load. The load is assumed to be mounted at the face of the tooling plate. These load curves illustrate load ratings based on the bearing system of the product. Load rating is a key selection criterion but is not the only one to consider in the selection of a product.

A074
y y
y = eccentricity distance
16mm Bore Size

200 (45) 150 (34)
Ball Bearing
20mm Bore Size

250 (56) 200 (45) 300 (67) 250 (56)
25mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
100 (22) 50 (11) 0 0 50 (1.9)
Composite
150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0
Load, N (lb)
Ball Bearing Composite
200 (45) 150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0
F
0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
32mm Bore Size

400 (90) 300 (67) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 400 (90) 300 (67) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0
40mm Bore Size

500 (112) 400 (90)
50mm Bore Size
Ball Bearing
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Composite
Composite
200 (45) 100 (22) 0
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
63mm Bore Size

500 (112) 400 (90)
Ball Bearing
80mm Bore Size

1000 (225) 800 (180) 1600 (359) 1200 (269)
100mm Bore Size
Ball Bearing
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
300 (67)
Composite
600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0
Ball Bearing
Composite
200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
800 (180) 400 (90) 0
Composite
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
F17
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
Ball Bearing
300 (67)
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensional Data Basic Unit

2 x V DOWEL HOLES x W 2 x V DOWEL HOLES x W (FAR SIDE)

A074
A + STROKE M + STROKE LL
J/2 (M + STROKE)/2 HH EE GG 4 x AA x CC
2xF MM B P S U DD Z H KK NN 2 x FF D
T/2 4 x AA THRU T
N K G E
4 x AA x BB (FAR SIDE)
EE PP
F
C R
2xF
2 x V DOWEL HOLES x W
Note: On 16mm bore size only, one sensor groove is available. When utilizing two sensors on the 16mm bore size with 25mm stroke or less, use right angle short sensors.
F18
Catalog 0900P-4

Model
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100** Model 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Model 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A** 37.75 (1.49) 36 (1.42) 38 (1.50) 36 (1.42) 44 (1.73) 44.9 (1.77) 50.05 (1.97) 60.3 (2.37) 67.5 (2.60) M 7 (0.276) 10 (0.394) 10 (0.394) 5 (0.197) 10 (0.394) 10 (0.394) 10 (0.394) 15 (0.591) 15 (0.591) CC 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) 16 (0.63) 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 24 (0.94) 28 (1.10) B 64 (2.52) 74 (2.91) 88 (3.46 114 (4.49) 124 (4.88) 140 (5.51) 150 (5.91) 188 (7.40) 224 (8.82) N 7.94 (0.31) 7.94 (0.31) 7.94 (0.31) 11.1 (0.44) 11.1 (0.44) 12.7 (0.50) 12.7 (0.50) 16 (0.63) 16 (0.63) DD 54 (2.126) 64 (2.520) 76 (2.992) 100 (3.937) 110 (4.33) 124 (4.882) 132 (5.197) 166 (6.535) 200 (7.874) C 31 (1.22) 36 (1.42) 42 (1.65) 51 (2.00) 52 (2.05) 62 (2.44) 75 (2.95) 95 (3.74) 115 (4.53) P 62 (2.44) 72 (2.83) 86 (3.39) 112 (4.41) 122 (4.80) 138 (5.43) 148 (5.83) 185 (7.28) 221 (8.70) EE 8 (0.315) 10 (0.394) 11 (0.433) 14 (0.551) 14 (0.551) 16 (0.630) 18 (0.709) 22 (0.866) 24 (0.945) D1 8 (0.315) 10 (0.394) 12 (0.472) 16 (0.630) 16 (0.630) 20 (0.787) 20 (0.787) 25 (0.984) 30 (1.181) R 25.4 (1.00) 31.8 (1.25) 38 (1.50) 44.5 (1.75) 44.5 (1.75) 57.2 (2.25) 69.9 (2.75) 89 (3.50) 108 (4.25) FF 27 (1.063) 32 (1.260) 38 (1.496) 50 (1.969) 55 (2.165) 62 (2.441) 66 (2.598) 83 (3.268) 100 (3.937) D2 10 (0.394) 12 (0.472) 16 (0.630) 20 (0.787) 20 (0.787) 25 (0.984) 25 (0.984) 30 (1.181) 35 (1.38) S 52 (2.047) 60 (2.362) 70 (2.756) 96 (3.780) 106 (4.173) 120 (4.724) 130 (5.118) 160 (6.299) 190 (7.480) GG 15 (0.591) 17 (0.669) 21 (0.827) 26 (1.024) 26 (1.024) 30 (1.181) 36.5 (1.437) 46.5 (1.831) 56.5 (2.224) E** 10.1 (0.40) 19 (0.75) 21 (0.83) 10.26 (0.40) 12.10 (0.48) 14.5 (0.57) 16.4 (0.65) 17.5 (0.610) 21.9 (0.862) T 16 (.630) 18 (.709) 26 (1.024) 30 (1.181) 30 (1.181) 40 (1.575) 50 (1.969) 60 (2.362) 80 (3.150) HH 13.06 (0.514) 13.06 (0.514) 14.06 (0.553) 12.9 (0.508) 13.9 (0.547) 14.3 (0.563) 16.3 (0.642) 21 (0.83) 25 (0.98)

A074
F M5/10-32 1/8 NTPF OR BSPP 1/8 NPTF OR BSPP 1/8 NTPF OR BSPP 1/8 NPTF OR BSPP 1/4 NTPF OR BSPP 1/4 NPTF OR BSPP 3/8 NTPF OR BSPP 3/8 NPTF OR BSPP U 20 (0.787) 30 (1.181 34 (1.339) 50 (1.969) 60 (2.362) 60 (2.362) 72 (2.835) 92 (3.622) 114 (4.488) KK 42 (1.654) 52 (2.126) 62 (2.441) 80 (3.150) 90 (3.543) 100 (3.937) 110 (4.331) 140 (5.512) 170 (6.693) V 3 (0.118) 4 (0.157) 4 (0.157) 6 (0.236) 6 (0.236) 8 (0.315) 8 (0.315) 10 (0.394) 10 (0.394) LL 22.5 (0.88) 26.0 (1.02) 33.4 (1.31) 42 (1.65) 41 (1.61) 51 (2.01) 62 (2.44) 78 (3.07) 91.5 (3.60)
G 10.1 (0.40) 10 (0.39) 11.4 (0.45) 10.35 (0.41) 14.9 (0.59) 16.1 (0.63) 14.5 (0.57) 19 (0.75) 23 (0.91) W 6 (0.236) 6 (0.236) 6 (0.236) 6 (0.236) 6 (0.236) 8 (0.315) 8 (0.315) 10 (0.394) 10 (0.394) MM 11.25 (0.44) 15.4 (0.61) 17 (0.67) 20 (0.79) 24 (0.95) 29 (1.14) 36 (1.42) 45 (1.77) 53 (2.09)
H 6.95 (0.27) 15.8 (0.62) 15.5 (0.61) 18.42 (0.73) 22.53 (0.89) 27 (1.06) 33 (1.30) 37 (1.46) 40 (1.57) Z 42 (1.654) 52 (2.047) 62 (2.441) 80 (3.150) 90 (3.543) 100 (3.937) 110 (4.331) 140 (5.512) 170 (6.693) NN 9.7 (0.38) 15.4 (0.61) 17 (0.67) 21.7 (0.85) 26.4 (1.04) 33 (1.30) 37.75 (1.49) 48 (1.89) 51 (2.01)
J 22 (0.866) 26 (1.024) 32 (1.260) 38 (1.496) 38 (1.496) 44 (1.732) 44 (1.732) 56 (2.205) 62 (2.441) AA M5 X 0.8 M5 X 0.8 M6 X 1.0 M8 X 1.25 M8 X 1.25 M10 X 1.5 M10 X 1.5 M12 X 1.75 M14 X 2.0 PP 23.0 (0.91) 26.0 (1.0) 33.4 (1.31) 38 (1.50) 37.9 (1.49) 44 (1.73) 57.75 (2.27) 75.5 (2.97) 95.5 (3.76)
K 9.94 (0.39) 9.94 (0.39) 9.94 (0.39) 13.1 (0.52) 13.1 (.052) 14.7 (0.58) 14.7 (0.58) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) BB 7.5 (0.30) 7.5 (0.30) 9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 11 0.43) 12 (0.47) 15 (0.59) 18 (0.71) 21 (0.83) Piston Rod 8 (0.315) 10 (0.394) 10 (0.394) 16 (0.630) 16 (0.630) 20 (0.787) 20 (0.787) 25 (0.984) 25 (0.984)
F
D1 With linear ball bearing D2 With composite bushing ** For Model 100 with 25mm stroke, A = 100.3 (3.95") and E = 28 (1.10") All dimensions in mm (inch)
F19
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Shaft Bearings

Composite bushings are supplied as standard. Linear ball bearings are optional. Selection should be based on the following criteria:
Application Requirement Precision Friction Friction coefficient Precision over life of bearing Static Load Capacity Dynamic Load Capacity Vibration Resistance Contamination Resistance Washdown Compatibility Ball Excellent Low Constant Constant Good Good Fair Poor Poor Composite Good Higher Variable Variable Excellent Good with lower efficiency Excellent Excellent Excellent

A074
Composite Bushing (J,C)
For bearing load capacities, reference the Engineering Data section.
Recirculating Ball Bearing (H)
Corrosion Resistant Shafting (C, H)

Chrome-plated case hardened, high carbon alloy steel shafting with composite bearings is utilized for standard slides. This may corrode in some applications. Stainless steel corrosion resistant shafting is available.
Side Porting (S)
Model 16
2xF
SS mm (in)
24.1 (.95) 29.00 (1.15) 35.15 (1.38) 43.2 (1.70) 43.0 (1.69) 51.25 (2.02) 60.70 (2.39) 75.5 (2.97) 83.7 (3.30)
TT mm (in)
10 (.39) 10 (.39) 11.4 (.45) 10.35 (.41) 14.9 (.59) 16.1 (.64) 15.55 (.61) 19 (.75) 23 (.91)
UU mm (in)
20 (.79) 20 (.79) 24 (.94) 34 (1.34) 34 (1.34) 38 (1.50) 41.8 (1.65) 47 (1.85) 53.3 (2.10)
F
10-32 or M5 10-32 or M5 10-32 or M5 1/8 NTPF or BSPP 1/8 NPTF or BSPP 1/4 NTPF or BSPP 1/4 NPTF or BSPP 3/8 NTPF or BSPP 3/8 NPTF or BSPP
20
UU
TT
25 32
SS
40 50 63
NOTES: 1 Side ports not available on 100mm bore units with 25mm of stroke. 2 Cannot use flow controls with 25mm stroke on any bore size.
80 100
F20
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Flow Controls (B, F, N, P)

Right angle flow control valves allow precise adjustment of cylinder speed by metering exhaust air flow. Prestolok pushin or threaded ports provide 360 orientation capability.
Model 16, 20*, 25* 20, 25, 32, 40 50, 63 80, 100 A (in) 0.87 1.63 1.86 2.15 B (in) 0.96 1.38 1.64 1.90 C (in) 0.39 0.67 0.91 1.06 Imperial Prestolok NPT (N) (F) 5/32" 10-32 5/32" 1/8 1/4" 1/4 3/8" 3/8 Metric Prestolok (P) 4mm 6mm 6mm 10mm 10mm 12mm BSPP (B) M5 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8

A074
Model 16, 20*, 25* 20, 25, 32, 40 50 63 80 100 * Side ports only.
A (mm) 22.0 34.5 41.0 41.0 51.0 51.0
B (mm) 24.5 31.6 34.9 41.3 46.7 46.7
C (mm) 10.0 14.4 18.4 18.4 21.6 21.6
A Open
Note: When flow controls are specified with rear ports, a 90 right angle fitting is supplied to provide ample rod clearance in the rear.
F
P5T
Feature Bumpers Magnets Sensors Temperature Range -18 to 93C (0 to 200F) -18 to 74C (0 to 165F) -10 to 85C (14 to 185F)
Prestolok flow controls are not available on 32-100mm bore sizes with 25mm of stroke.
Standard abrasion resistant nitrile seals should be used for general purpose applications with temperatures of -18 to 74C (0 to 165F). Fluorocarbon seals are recommended for high temperature applications up to 121C (250F).
F21
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
Fluorocarbon Seals (F)
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Options

A074
Standard Length No Options (N),

L Model 16
L + STROKE
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Stroke (mm) 10*, 25, 40, 50, 75 100 25, 40, 50, 75 100, 125 25, 50, 75 100, 125, 150 25, 50, 75, 100 125, 150, 175, 200 25, 50, 75, 100 125, 150, 175, 200 25, 50, 75, 100 125, 150, 175, 200 25, 50, 75, 100 125, 150, 175, 200 25, 50, 75, 100 125, 150, 175, 200 25**, 50, 75, 100 125, 150, 175, 200
mm 60.2 75.2 66.9 91.9 69.9 91.9 77.9 116.0 77.9 116.0 84.0 124.1 84.0 124.1 101.8 140.0 120.3 158.4
inch 2.37 2.96 2.63 3.62 2.75 3.62 3.07 4.57 3.07 4.57 3.31 4.89 3.31 4.89 4.00 5.51 4.74 6.24
F
High Load Bearings (B)
The standard bearing configuration locates both sets of bearings at the tooling plate end of the actuator providing a compact actuator package. The high load bearings option (B) locates the bearings at the extreme ends of the housing, increasing the dynamic and static load capacity. The bearing centerlines increase as stroke length increases.
Note: Rear mounting and ports are not available with the high load bearing option.
* For Model 16 with 10mm stroke, L = 37.7 mm (1.48"). ** For Model 100 with 25mm stroke, L = 122.8mm (4.8").
Standard Bearings
High Load Bearings
Dimensions
X + (2 STROKE)
X Model 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 mm 49.7 47.0 49.9 51.1 59.1 61.6 66.8 79.6 86.1 inch 1.955 1.849 1.963 2.012 2.327 2.425 2.630 3.135 3.391
F22
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Dual Tool Plate (D)

X + (2 STROKE)

A074
Notes: 1. Load capacities increase on dual tool plate (D & A). For load capacities, use the high load bearing graphs. 2. Rear mounting holes and rear ports are not available with Options D, A, and E.
Model 16
Rod Dia. 8 10
X D option A option E option 70.7 62.7 57.7 (2.27) (2.78) (2.47) 70.7 62.7 57.7 (2.27) (2.78) (2.47) 67.9 59.9 54.7 (2.15) (2.67) (2.36) 72.6 64.6 54.7 (2.15) (2.86) (2.54) 76.5 68.1 58.8 (2.31) (3.01) (2.68) 78.5 70.1 58.8 (2.31) (3.09) (2.76) 81.9 70.8 62.2 (2.45) (3.22) (2.79) 83.9 72.8 62.2 (2.45) (3.30) (2.87) 89.9 78.8 70.2 (2.76) (3.54) (3.10) 91.9 80.8 70.2 (2.76) (3.62) (3.18) 96.0 83.3 74.3 (2.93) (3.78) (3.28) 96.0 83.3 74.3 (2.93) (3.78) (3.28) 101.2 88.5 79.5 (3.13) (3.98) (3.48) 101.2 88.5 79.5 (3.13) (3.98) (3.48) 96.1 117.8 101.9 (3.78) (4.64) (4.01) 117.8 101.9 96.1 (3.78) (4.64) (4.01) 125.8 109.1 103.3 (4.07) (4.95) (4.30) 125.8 109.1 103.3 (4.07) (4.95) (4.30) QQ 18.0 (0.71) 24.0 (0.95) 24.0 (0.95) 28.0 (1.10) 28.0 (1.10) 34.0 (1.34) 34.0 (1.34) 40.0 (1.57) 34.0 (1.34) 41.4 (1.63) 41.4 (1.63) 45.0 (1.77) 41.4 (1.63) 50.8 (2.00) 50.8 (2.00) 54.0 (2.13) 60.5 (2.38) 57.0 (2.24) RR 15.7 (0.62) 15.7 (0.62) 15.7 (0.62) 17.7 (0.70) 17.7 (0.70) 19.7 (0.78) 19.7 (0.78) 21.7 (0.85) 19.7 (0.78) 21.7 (0.85) 21.7 (0.85) 21.7 (0.85) 21.7 (0.85) 21.7 (0.85) 21.7 (0.85) 21.7 (0.85) 21.7 (0.85) 21.7 (0.85) XX 0 1 (0.04) 1 (0.04) 3 (0.12) 1 (0.04) 4 (0.16) 0 3.7 (0.15) 0 3.7 (0.15) 0.7 (0.03) 5.4 (0.21) 0.7 (0.03) 5.4 (0.21) 1.4 (0.06) 6.3 (0.25) 3.3 (0.13) 5.5 (0.22)
Bumpers, Stop Collars & Dual Tool Plate (A)

X + (2 STROKE)
10 20 12 12 25 16 16 32 20 16 40 20 20 50 25 20 63
F
Bumpers & Adjustable Stop Collars, Extend Only (E)

80
X + (2 STROKE)
25 25 30 30 100 35
QQ
XX RR
All dimensions in mm (inch)
F23
Catalog 0900P-4
Special Options Contaminant & Weld Flash Covers

A contaminant cover protects the guide rods and bearings from particles and fluid that could cause premature failure. A weld flash cover protects guide rods and bearings from weld spatter. Cover option can be ordered on models having the bearings both ends option. Consult factory to order.

Weld Flash Cover Specifications
A074
Coating Material (exposed side) ........................... PVC (Black) Base Material ............................................................... Nomex Coating Material (other side) ................................ PVC (Black) Material Thickness Range ................... .012" - .016" (.3-.4mm) Temperature Resistance (Nomex) Briefly ........................................................... 642F (450C) Continuously ......................... -22 to 572F (-30 to 300C) Temperature Resistance (Coating) Briefly ........................................................... 392F (200C) Continuously ......................... -22 to 302F (-30 to 150C) Resistant to..........................Chemicals, coolants, solvents, oil Characteristics ............... self-extinguishing, abrasion resistant Material Weight ................................. 400 grams/square meter
Dimensions
MODEL 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A
42 (1.65) 45 (1.77) 49 (1.93) 62 (2.44) 62 (2.44) 66 (2.60) 77 (3.03) 104 (4.09) 109 (4.29)
B
86 (3.39) 98 (3.86) 112 (4.41) 142 (5.59) 152 (5.98) 167 (6.57) 187 (7.36) 244 (9.61) 279 (10.98)
10
61.2 (2.41)
25
100.2 (3.94) 106.9 (4.21) 119.9 (4.72) 127.9 (5.04) 127.9 (5.04) 134 (5.28) 134 (5.28) 151.8 (5.98) 170.3 (6.70)
40
135.2 (5.32) 141.9 (5.59)
50
135.2 (5.32) 141.9 (5.59) 144.9 (5.70) 152.9 (6.02) 152.9 (6.02) 159 (6.26) 159 (6.26) 176.8 (6.96) 195.3 (7.69)
75
160.2 (6.31) 166.9 (6.57) 169.9 (6.69) 177.9 (7.00) 177.9 (7.00) 184 (7.24) 184 (7.24) 201.8 (7.94) 220.3 (8.67)
100
200.2 (7.88) 216.9 (8.54) 194.9 (7.67) 202.9 (7.99) 202.9 (7.99) 209 (8.23) 209 (8.23) 226.8 (8.93) 245.3 (9.66)
125
241.9 (9.52) 241.9 (9.52) 266 (10.47) 266 (10.47) 274.1 (10.79) 274.1 (10.79) 290 (11.42) 308.4 (12.14)
150
266.9 (10.51) 291 (11.46) 291 (11.46) 299.1 (11.78) 299.1 (11.78) 315 (12.40) 333.4 (13.13)
175
316 (12.44) 316 (12.44) 324.1 (12.76) 324.1 (12.76) 340 (13.39) 358.4 (14.11)
200
341 (13.43) 341 (13.43) 349.1 (13.74) 349.1 (13.74) 365 (14.37) 383.4 (15.09)
F24
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensors Reed and Solid State Sensors

Sensors are available in both short and standard configurations. Both styles mount in the sensor grooves on the P5T body. The standard sensors mount flush to the body. The short sensor extends out 4.5mm to the cable. Both styles are available with quick connector or flying leads. Magnetic piston is standard. See Electronic Sensors section for part numbers and specifications.
Slide-in Short Sensor

A074
Drop-in Sensor
F
P5T F25
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits
Seal Kits
Bore Size 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Seal Kit Part Number Nitrile Seals PSK-P5T16 PSK-P5T20 PSK-P5T25 PSK-P5T32 PSK-P5T40 PSK-P5T50 PSK-P5T63 PSK-P5T80 PSK-P5T100 Fluorocarbon Seals PSK-P5T16-F PSK-P5T20-F PSK-P5T25-F PSK-P5T32-F PSK-P5T40-F PSK-P5T50-F PSK-P5T63-F PSK-P5T80-F PSK-P5T100-F

A074
F26
P5T2 Series
Short Stroke Thruster
F
P5T Contents
Features ............................................................................F28 Ordering Information..........................................................F29 Specifications ............................................................ F30-F31 Engineering Data ....................................................... F32-F39 Dimensions ................................................................ F40-F43 Options ...................................................................... F44-F50 Sensors .............................................................................F51
F27
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Rod Lock True rod-lock mechanism stops unit in current position upon loss of air pressure.
Guided Cylinders P5T2 Series

A074
Compact, One-Piece Body The housing provides a small and economical package by integrating a low profile cylinder and support shafts into a single clear anodized body.
Porting Top porting is standard. Rear and side porting are available.
Tool Plate A precision machined steel tool plate provides a rigid, durable connection.
Single Tool Plate Model
Through-Hole Mounting Standard through-hole mounting patterns ensure drop-in capabilities for a variety of installations. Shock Absorbers Adjustable external mounted shock absorbers provide excellent impact dampening in aggressive applications.
Air Cushions Fully adjustable air cushions allow for superior energy absorption compared to rubber bumpers alone.
Dual Tool Plate
Sensor Grooves The global sensors are mounted flush to the outside of the housing. Both reed and solid state are available. Magnetic piston is standard. A new low-profile proximity sensor is also available which mounts in the same groove.
Dual Tool Plate Model

Bumpers and Stop Collars Bumpers and stop collars allow for adjustable retract and extend strokes.
Composite Bushings or Linear Ball Bearings A PTFE impregnated composite bushing is standard. This bushing provides high load carrying capabilities with excellent resistance to shock loading. Optional linear ball bearings provide precision operation with very low friction and wear.
F28
Catalog 0900P-4

Example: P5T2A032J1KN1BGR025A

A074
P5T2
032
J1
025
Construction 8 A E Standard, Metric Mounting Threads Cushions 6, Metric Mounting Threads Bore Size 012 016 020 025 032 040 050 063 080 100 12mm 16mm 20mm 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm 80mm 100mm Tool Plate Front Front & Rear 5
Gross Stroke Order standard stroke from tables below using 3 digits, i.e. 025 = 25mm
Other Options Seals Buna-N G H Fluorocarbon L M
Ports/Flow Controls Ports NPTF Flow Controls 5 None A B Prestolok E F Threaded P R
Bearings/Shaft J1 Composite Bushings, Chrome Plated Rod J3 Composite Bushings, Stainless Steel Rod K1 Composite High Load Bearings, Chrome Plated Rod 7 K3 Composite High Load Bearings, Stainless Steel Rod 7 H3 Linear Ball Bearings, Stainless Steel Rod L3 Linear Ball High Load Bearings, Stainless Steel Rod 7 Extend Options A K L N Shock Absorber 1, 10 Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars 2 Bumpers and Shock Absorbers 3, 10 None Retract Options A K L R N Shock Absorber 4, 10 Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars 4 Bumpers and Shock Absorber 4, 10 Rod Lock (Sizes 32-100 only) None Standard Strokes, Basic Units* Bore Size 12 - 16 20 - 25 32 - 100 10 l 20 l l l 25 30 l l 40 l l 50 l l l 75 l l l 100 l l l 125 l l l PNP NPN
BSPP or M5 Port Location 1 2 3 Top Side Rear
F
P5T
Sensor Option Type Connection Proximity Sensor 9 Extend Lead Type Plug in Lead Type Plug in U V W Y Retract A B C D Extend & Retract E F J K N None
150 l l l
175 l l l
200 l l l
Standard Strokes, Cushioned Units* Bore Size 20 - 63 80 - 100

*Consult factory for special stroke lengths.
10
20
25 l
30
40
50 l l
75 l l
100 l l
125 l l
150 l l
175 l l
200 l l
F29
P5E
HB
Solid state and reed sensors can be ordered separately from pages M2-M4.
NOTES: 1 Not available with rear or side port; not available with Retract Option L; not available on 100mm size with 25mm stroke. 2 Not available with rear ports. 3 Not available with rear or side ports; not available with Retract Option A. 4 Not available with Rod Lock. 5 Not available with rear ports. 6 Cushions not available on Sizes 12 &16. Cushions may not be effective in combination with shocks or bumpers/stop collars. 7 High load bearings option only available with 50mm and greater strokes. 8 Consult factory for SAE mounting. 9 Consult factory for retract proximity sensors on rodlock unit. 10 Shock absorbers not available on Sizes 12 & 16.
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Maximum operating pressure: 1 MPa (10 bar/145 psi) Operating characteristics: Double acting Support rod sizes: 8 to 35mm Mounting: Unrestricted Operating temperature range (cylinder): Nitrile seals (standard) Fluorocarbon seals* -18 to 74C (0 to 165F) -18 to 121C (0 to 250F)
Guided Cylinders P5T2 Series Mounting Bolts

Bore Size Bottom Hole Threads Thru Hole Socket Head Cap Screw Screw Size M4 M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12 Minimum Length (1.5 x dia. screw engagement) 28mm 32mm 38mm 44mm 50mm 56mm 68mm 82mm 100mm 96mm
A074
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Note:
M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.9 M6 x 1.0 M6 x 1.0 M8 x 1.25 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.5 M10 x 1.5 M12 x 1.75 M14 x 2.0
Filtration requirement: 40 micron, filtered dry air

* See Fluorocarbon seal option for high temperature applications.
Construction
Body ........................................................................Aluminum End Caps .................................................................Aluminum Tool Plate ........................................................................ Steel Piston Rod ...................................................... Stainless Steel Support Rods ................................................................. Steel Rod Bolts ........................................................................ Steel
When the P5T2 is used as an impact stopping system, mounting bolt thread engagement should be 1.5 times bolt diameter.
F
Model Bore Piston Rod Diameter (mm) 6 8 10 10 12 16 20 20 25 25 Bushings Support Rods (mm) N Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite Ball Composite 6 8 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 16 20 20 25 20 25 25 30 30 35 59 102 165 254 414 650 1015 1611 2599 4063 Force Output on Extension at 75 PSI lbs 13 23 37 57 93 146 228 362 584 913 N 44 78 120 214 356 547 854 1451 2345 3809 Force Output on Retraction at 75 PSI lbs 10 18 27 48 80 123 192 326 527 856
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
F30
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications Weights
Basic Units with Single Tool Plate
Support Rod Diameter 6 8 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 16 20 20 25 20 25 25 30 30 35 Standard Unit Weight Base Weight (zero stroke) kg 0.18 0.18 0.27 0.27 0.45 0.47 0.80 0.78 1.32 1.33 1.45 1.58 2.35 2.57 3.01 3.18 5.90 6.11 8.79 8.98 lbs 0.39 0.39 0.59 0.58 0.98 1.03 1.76 1.72 2.91 2.93 3.21 3.48 5.17 5.67 6.64 7.01 13.00 13.47 19.37 19.79 Stroke Multiplier (per 5mm) kg 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.08 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.20 0.21 0.20 0.22 lbs 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.13 0.15 0.16 0.18 0.24 0.27 0.28 0.31 0.43 0.47 0.44 0.48

A074
Cushioned Unit Weight Base Weight (zero stroke) kg NA NA NA NA 0.65 0.69 0.90 0.94 1.46 1.53 1.75 1.80 2.82 3.02 3.69 4.02 7.38 7.72 10.71 11.13 lbs NA NA NA NA 1.42 1.52 1.99 2.08 3.21 3.38 3.85 3.97 6.22 6.64 8.12 8.87 16.26 17.02 23.60 24.52 Stroke Multiplier (per 5mm) kg NA NA NA NA 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.08 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.20 0.21 0.21 0.23 lbs NA NA NA NA 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.19 0.24 0.27 0.28 0.31 0.47 0.45 0.50 0.43
Model Bore
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
See example below
F
Example: P5T2 size 40 cushioned unit, 20mm support rod with a 75mm stroke. Base Weight = 3.97 lbs Stroke Multiplier: 75mm 5 = 15 Stroke Weight = 15 0.19 lbs = 2.85 lbs Total Weight = 3.97 lbs + 2.85 lbs = 6.82 lbs
F31
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Horizontal Load Capacity with Standard Bearings (J1, J3, H3)
P5T2 Series units will have the same load capacity regardless of orientation. The graphs below show maximum load capacity based on a unit life of 10 million cycles. These load curves illustrate load ratings based on the bearing system of the product. Load rating is a key selection criterion but is not the only one to consider in the selection of a product. EXAMPLE: A P5T2-016 with stroke + d of 100mm and linear ball bearings would have a load capacity of 80 N. The capacity would be 135 N with composite bushings.

A074 d
12mm Bore Size

120 (27)
d
Load, N (lb)
100 (22) 80 (18) 60 (14) 40 (9) 20 (5) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9)
Ball Bearing
Composite
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
16mm Bore Size

150 (34) 120 (27) Composite 250 (56) 200 (45)
20mm Bore Size

400 (90) 300 (68)
25mm Bore Size
Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
90 (20) 60 (14) 30 (7) 0 0
Ball Bearing
150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0 Ball Bearing
Load, N (lb)
Composite 200 (45) Ball Bearing 100 (22) 0
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

500 (113) 400 (90) 500 (113) 400 (90)
40mm Bore Size

600 (135) 500 (113)
50mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Load, N (lb)
300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Load, N (lb)
Composite
Composite
Composite
400 (90) 300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
63mm Bore Size

600 (135) 500 (113)
Composite
80mm Bore Size

1200 (270) 1000 (225) Composite 1800 (405) 1500 (338)
100mm Bore Size

Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0
Ball Bearing
600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0
Ball Bearing
Load, N (lb)
400 (90)
800 (180)
1200 (270) 900 (203) 600 (135) 300 (68) 0 Ball Bearing
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F32
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Horizontal Load Capacity with High Load Bearings (K1, K3, L3)
P5T2 Series units will have the same load capacity regardless of orientation. The graphs below show maximum load capacity based on a unit life of 10 million cycles. These load curves illustrate load ratings based on the bearing system of the product. Load rating is a key selection criterion but is not the only one to consider in the selection of a product. EXAMPLE: A P5T2-020 with stroke + d of 100mm and high load composite bushings would have a load capacity of 300 N. With linear ball bearings, the capacity would be 190 N.

A074 d
12mm Bore Size

180 (41)
d
Load, N (lb)
150 (34) 120 (27) 90 (20) 60 (14) 30 (7) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) Composite
Ball Bearing
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
16mm Bore Size

240 (54) 200 (45) Composite 360 (81) 300 (68)
20mm Bore Size

500 (113) 400 (90)
25mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
160 (36) 120 (27) 80 (18) 40 (9) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Ball Bearing
240 (54) 180 (41) 120 (27) 60 (14) 0 0 50 (1.9)
Composite
Composite 300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
F
150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
600 (135) 500 (113)
600 (135) 500 (113)
800 (180) 600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Load, N (lb)
300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9)
Load, N (lb)
Ball Bearing
300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0
Load, N (lb)
400 (90)
400 (90)
Composite
Composite
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
63mm Bore Size

800 (180) 600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 1500 (338) 1200 (270)
80mm Bore Size

Composite 2000 (450) 1600 (360)
100mm Bore Size

Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
900 (203) 600 (135) 300 (68) 0 0
Load, N (lb)
Composite
Ball Bearing
1200 (270) 800 (180) 400 (90) 0
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F33
P5E
HB
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
P5L
P5TT/TD
Composite
P5T2
32mm Bore Size
40mm Bore Size
50mm Bore Size
P5T
200 (7.9)
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Vertical Eccentric Load Capacity

P5T2 Series units mounted vertically will have the same eccentric load capacity regardless of orientation. The graphs provide maximum load capacity for an eccentric mounted load. The load is assumed to be mounted at the face of the tool plate. These load curves illustrate load ratings based on the bearing system of the product. Load rating is a key selection criterion but is not the only one to consider in the selection of a product. EXAMPLE: A P5T2-050 unit will lift up to a 90-lb load, offset 170mm from actuator centerline.

A074 y y
y = distance from the center of gravity of the moveable load to the center of the actuator.
Standard Unit
12 - 40mm Bore Sizes
500 (113)

2000 (450)
32 & 40
400 (90)
1600 (360)
100
25
Load, N (lb)
300 (68)
Load, N (lb)
1200 (270) 800 (180)
80
20
200 (45)
16
100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) Eccentricity, mm (in) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
50 & 63
400 (90)
12
0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) Eccentricity, mm (in) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
High Load Bearings

600 (135) 2000 (450)

100
1600 (360)
32 & 40
500 (113)
25
Load, N (lb) Load, N (lb)
400 (90) 300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) Eccentricity, mm (in) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
80
1200 (270) 800 (180)
20 16 12
50 & 63
400 (90) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) Eccentricity, mm (in) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
F34
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Load Stopping Capacity

P5T2 Series actuators are ideal for conveyor stopping applications. Units can be mounted horizontally or vertically. These load curves illustrate load ratings based on the bearing system of the product. Load rating is a key selection criterion but is not the only one to consider in the selection of a product. Composite bushings are strongly recommended for this type of application. EXAMPLE: A P5T2-032 unit with a stroke up to 50mm will stop an object moving at 40 cm/second (15.7 in/s) that weighs up to 50 kg (110 lb).

A074
50mm (1.97)

200 (440) 1000 (2200)
150 (330)
32 & 40
Mass, kg (lb)
800 (1760)
100
Mass, kg (lb)
600 (1320) 400 (880)
100 (220)
80 50 & 63
F
P5T
10 (3.9) 20 (7.9) 30 (11.8) 40 (15.7) 50 (19.7) 60 (23.6) 70 (27.6) Speed, cm/sec (in/sec)
25 20
50 (110)
200 (440)
16 12
0 10 (3.9) 20 (7.9) 30 (11.8) 40 (15.7) 50 (19.7) 60 (23.6) 70 (27.6) 0
Speed, cm/sec (in/sec)
F35
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Asymmetrical Torque Capacity with Standard Bearings (J1, J3, H3)
Asymmetrical loading occurs when the load is applied to one side of the unit. P5T2 Series units can resist torsional loads that are asymmetrical up to the charted lines. EXAMPLE: A mechanism exerts an asymmetrical load of 15 Nm on a unit with 50mm stroke+d. The P5T2-050 with composite bushings will have adequate torsional capacity.

A074 Stroke
d Load
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
2.5 (22) 2.0 (18) 1.5 (13)
12mm Bore Size
Torque is calculated by multiplying the distance 'x' by the load. The torque will be either Nm or lb-in.
Ball Bearing 1.0 (9) 0.5 (4.4) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Composite
Stroke + d, mm (in)
16mm Bore Size

4 (36) 8 (71)
20mm Bore Size

12 (107) Composite 10 (89) 8 (71) 6 (53) 4 (36) 2 (18) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0
25mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
2 (18) 1 (9)
4 (36)
Ball Bearing
2 (18) Ball Bearing 0
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
3 (27)
6 (53)
Composite
Ball Bearing 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

20 (178) Composite 16 (142) 12 (107) 8 (71) 4 (36) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Ball Bearing 25 (222) 20 (178) 15 (133) 10 (89) 5 (44) 0 0
40mm Bore Size

36 (320) 30 (266) 24 (213) 18 (160) 12 (107) 6 (53) 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0
50mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Composite
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
63mm Bore Size

36 (320) 30 (266) 24 (213) 18 (160) 12 (107) 6 (53) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Ball Bearing Composite 100 (888) 75 (666)
80mm Bore Size

200 (1776) 150 (1332) 100 (888) 50 (444) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0
100mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Composite
Composite 50 (444) 25 (222) 0
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
50 (1.9)
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F36
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Asymmetrical Torque Capacity with High Load Bearings (K1, K3, L3)
Asymmetrical loading occurs when the load is applied to one side of the unit. P5T2 Series units can resist torsional loads that are asymmetrical. EXAMPLE: A mechanism exerts an asymmetrical load of 15 Nm on a unit with 50mm stroke+d. The P5T2-050 with composite bushings or ball bearings will have adequate torsional capacity.

A074 Stroke
d Load
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
4 (36)
12mm Bore Size
3 (27) 2 (18) 1 (9) 0 0 50 (1.9)
Torque is calculated by multiplying the distance 'x' by the load. The torque will be either Nm or lb-in.
100 (3.9)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
16mm Bore Size

6 (53) 5 (44) 10 (89)
20mm Bore Size

16 (142) Composite
25mm Bore Size

Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
4 (36) 3 (27) 2 (18) 1 (9) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Ball Bearing
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
6 (53) 4 (36) 2 (18) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Composite
8 (71)
12 (107) 8 (71) 4 (36) Ball Bearing 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
F
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Ball Bearing
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
25 (222) 20 (178) 15 (133) 10 (89) 5 (44) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) Ball Bearing
Composite
25 (222) Composite 20 (178) 15 (133) 10 (89) Ball Bearing 5 (44) 0
50 (444) 40 (355) 30 (266) 20 (178) 10 (89) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Ball Bearing Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
63mm Bore Size

50 (444) 40 (355) 30 (266) 20 (178) Ball Bearing 10 (89) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) 120 (1066) 100 (888)
80mm Bore Size

200 (1776) 150 (1332)
100mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
80 (710) 60 (533) 40 (355) 20 (178) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Composite
Composite
Composite 100 (888) 50 (444) 0 0 50 (1.9) 100 (3.9) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9) Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F37
P5E
HB
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
32mm Bore Size
40mm Bore Size
50mm Bore Size
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Kinetic Energy

Moving weight is defined as the weight of the carried load and the weight of any moving parts of the actuator (support rods, tool plate, etc.). The moving weight from the charts below should be considered when using the graphs on the following page. Actuator Moving Weight = Base Weight + [(Stroke/5) Stroke Multiplier] Total Moving Weight = Actuator Moving Weight + Carried Load

A074 Actuator Moving Weight (shaded areas)
CARRIED LOAD
Actuator Moving Weight Model Bore Support Rod Diameter Single Tool Plate Base @ Zero Stroke kg 20 25 10 12 12 16 16 20 16 20 20 25 20 25 25 30 30 35 0.16 0.19 0.22 0.31 0.45 0.58 0.50 0.65 0.87 1.11 1.05 1.30 2.02 2.37 3.26 3.73 lbs 0.35 0.43 0.48 0.69 0.98 1.27 1.11 1.43 1.92 2.44 2.31 2.86 4.46 5.22 7.18 8.23 Stroke Multiplier (per 5mm) kg 0.009 0.012 0.012 0.019 0.024 0.033 0.024 0.033 0.037 0.051 0.037 0.051 0.058 0.075 0.068 0.088 lbs 0.020 0.026 0.026 0.042 0.052 0.072 0.052 0.072 0.082 0.112 0.082 0.112 0.127 0.165 0.150 0.194 Dual Tool Plate Base @ Zero Stroke kg 0.211 0.251 0.293 0.394 0.604 0.749 0.669 0.827 1.210 1.485 1.465 1.753 2.947 3.348 4.816 5.390 lbs 0.47 0.55 0.65 0.87 1.33 1.65 1.48 1.82 2.67 3.27 3.23 3.87 6.50 7.38 10.62 11.88 Stroke Multiplier (per 5mm) kg 0.015 0.021 0.021 0.035 0.039 0.057 0.039 0.057 0.062 0.089 0.062 0.089 0.096 0.130 0.123 0.163 lbs 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.09 0.13 0.09 0.13 0.14 0.20 0.14 0.20 0.21 0.29 0.27 0.36
32 40 50 63 80 100 EXAMPLE:
See example below.
P5T2-032, 20mm support rods, dual tool plate, 100mm stroke Base Weight = 1.65 lbs Extra Weight for Stroke Length: (100 5) 0.13 lbs = 2.60 lbs Actuator Moving Weight = 1.65 lbs + 2.60 lbs = 4.25 lbs
F38
Catalog 0900P-4

These graphs illustrate the kinetic energy absorption of the P5T2 Series as a total moving weight versus speed chart for both air cushions and shock absorbers. Note: These charts are to be used only to determine the energy absorption of each guided cylinder and to determine if shocks or cushions are needed. 1 kg = 9.80 Newtons (N) 1 Newton = 0.225 lbs

A074
20mm Bore Size

250 (56) 200 (45) 400 (90) 300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (19.7) 100 (39.8) 150 (59.1) 0
25mm Bore Size

500 (113) 400 (90)
32mm Bore Size
Shock Absorber
Load, N (lb)
150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Shock Absorber
Shock Absorber Air Cushion
300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0
Air Cushion
Air Cushion
F
250 (98.4)
50 (19.7)
100 (39.8)
150 (59.1)
200 (78.7)
250 (98.4)
50 (19.7)
100 (39.8)
150 (59.1)
200 (78.7)
Velocity, cm/sec (in/sec)
500 (113) 400 (90)
600 (135) 500 (113)
Shock Absorber
600 (135) 500 (113)
Load, N (lb)
300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (19.7) 100 (39.8) 150 (59.1) 200 (78.7) 250 (98.4) Air Cushion
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Shock Absorber
400 (90) 300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (19.7) 100 (39.8) 150 (59.1) 200 (78.7) 250 (98.4) Air Cushion
400 (90) 300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (22) 0 0 50 (19.7) 100 (39.8)
Shock Absorber
Air Cushion
150 (59.1)
200 (78.7)
250 (98.4)
80mm Bore Size

1200 (270) 1000 (225) Shock Absorber 2000 (450) 1600 (360)
100mm Bore Size
Shock Absorber
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
800 (180) 600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0 0 50 (19.7) 100 (39.8) 150 (59.1) 200 (78.7) 250 (98.4) Air Cushion
1200 (270) 800 (180) 400 (90) 0 0 50 (19.7) 100 (39.8) 150 (59.1) 200 (78.7) 250 (98.4)
Air Cushion
F39
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
40mm Bore Size
50mm Bore Size
63mm Bore Size
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4

A074
MM X V SLOTTED DOWEL X PP (FAR SIDE) 4X AA THRU MM X V SLOTTED DOWEL X EE Y* M* HH K
A+ STROKE
4X THRU HOLE & C'BORE FOR BB SHCS RR TH'D X CC (FAR SIDE) J J/2 4X AA X CC MM X V SLOTTED DOWEL X PP
Z H
DD
2X FF D
TS KK
V DOWEL HOLE X EE
T/2 T R
N G JJ E
2X F V DOWEL HOLE X W (FAR SIDE) GG C
V DOWEL HOLE X W
F
* See page F42 for these stroke dependent dimensions.

C D1 D2 E F M5x0.8* M5x0.8* G H J K N P R S T U
Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
29 58 26 6 8 6.75 (1.14) (2.28) (1.02) (0.24) (0.31) (0.27) 33 64 30 8 10 6.2 (1.30) (2.52) (1.18) (0.31) (0.39) (0.24)
10.5 7.5 18 6 7 56 22 48 14 23 (0.41) (0.30) (0.71) (0.24) (0.28) (2.20) (0.87) (1.89) (0.55) (0.91) 12 16.5 22 5 8 62 25 54 16 24 (0.47) (0.65) (0.87) (0.20) (0.31) (2.44) (0.98) (2.13) (0.63) (0.94)
37 83 36 10 12 10 1/8 BSPP 11 25 24 8 8 81 30 70 18 28 (1.46) (3.27) (1.42) (0.39) (0.47) (0.39) 1/8 NPTF (0.43) (0.98) (0.94) (0.31) (0.31) (3.19) (1.18) (2.76) (0.71) (1.10) 37.5 93 42 12 16 10.5 1/8 BSPP 10.5 30 30 8 8 91 38 78 26 34 (1.48) (3.66) (1.65) (0.47) (0.63) (0.41) 1/8 NPTF (0.41) (1.18) (1.18) (0.31) (0.31) (3.58) (1.50) (3.07) (1.02) (1.34) 37.5 112 48 16 20 10.75 1/8 BSPP 11.75 37.5 34 10 12 110 44 96 30 42 (1.48) (4.41) (1.89) (0.63) (0.79) (0.42) 1/8 NPTF (0.46) (1.48) (1.34) (0.39) (0.47) (4.33) (1.73) (3.78) (1.18) (1.65) 44 120 54 16 20 11.5 1/8 BSPP 16 42 40 10 12 118 44 104 30 50 (1.73) (4.72) (2.13) (0.63) (0.79) (0.45) 1/8 NPTF (0.63) (1.65) (1.57) (0.39) (0.47) (4.65) (1.73) (4.09) (1.18) (1.97) 44 148 64 20 25 12.5 1/4 BSPP 16 49 46 15 13 146 60 130 40 66 (1.73) (5.83) (2.52) (0.79) (0.98) (0.49) 1/4 NPTF (0.63) (1.93) (1.81) (0.59) (0.51) (5.75) (2.36) (5.12) (1.57) (2.60) 49 162 78 20 25 13 1/4 BSPP 16 57 58 15 13 158 70 130 50 80 (1.93) (6.38) (3.07) (0.79) (0.98) (0.51) 1/4 NPTF (0.63) (2.24) (2.28) (0.59) (0.51) (6.22) (2.76) (5.12) (1.97) (3.15) 56.5 202 91.5 25 30 17 3/8 BSPP 18 74 54 18 22 198 75 174 52 100 (2.22) (7.95) (3.60) (0.98) (1.18) (0.67) 3/8 NPTF (0.71) (2.91) (2.13) (0.71) (0.87) (7.80) (2.95) (6.85) (2.05) (3.94) 66 240 112 30 35 20 3/8 BSPP 23 94 48 25 25 236 89 210 64 124 (2.60) (9.45) (4.41) (1.18) (1.38) (0.79) 3/8 NPTF (0.91) (3.70) (1.89) (0.98) (0.98) (9.29) (3.50) (8.27) (2.52) (4.88)
D1 with linear ball bearing; D2 with composite bushing *10-32 fittings will fit into M5x0.8 ports.
F40
Catalog 0900P-4

Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 V
+0.01 -0.00

A074
AA M4 x0.7 M5 x0.8 M5 x0.8 M6 x1.0
BB M4 M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
CC
DD
EE
FF
GG
HH
JJ
KK
MM**
PP
RR M5 x0.8 M5 x0.8 M6 x1.0 M6 x1.0
TS 37 (1.46) 38 (1.50) 44 (1.73) 50 (1.97)
3.06 6 41 (0.12) (0.24) (1.61) 3.06 6 46 (0.12) (0.24) (1.81) 3.06 6 54 (0.12) (0.24) (2.13) 4.06 6 64 (0.16) (0.24) (2.52)
10 23 4.5 11.5 13 18 23.5 50 3.5 3 (0.39) (0.91) (0.18) (0.45) (0.51) (0.71) (0.93) (1.97) (0.14) (0.12) 10 24 4.5 12 15 18 25 56 3.5 3 (0.39) (0.94) (0.18) (0.47) (0.59) (0.71) (0.98) (2.20) (0.14) (0.12) 12 28 4.5 14 18 33 27 72 3.5 3 (0.47) (1.10) (0.18) (0.55) (0.71) (1.30) (1.06) (2.83) (0.14) (0.12) 12 34 4.5 17 21 33 26.5 82 4.5 3 (0.47) (1.34) (0.18) (0.67) (0.83) (1.30) (1.04) (3.23) (0.18) (0.12)
4.06 6 78 M8 (0.16) (0.24) (3.07) x1.25 4.06 6 86 M8 (0.16) (0.24) (3.39) x1.25 5.04 8 110 (0.20) (0.31) (4.33) 5.04 8 124 (0.20) (0.31) (4.88) M10 x1.5 M10 x1.5
16 42 5.5 21 24 43 33.75 98 4.5 3 63 M8 (0.63) (1.65) (0.22) (0.83) (0.94) (1.69) (1.33) (3.86) (0.18) (0.12) x1.25 (2.48) 16 50 5.5 25 27 44 38 106 4.5 3 72 M8 (0.63) (1.97) (0.22) (0.98) (1.06) (1.73) (1.50) (4.17) (0.18) (0.12) x1.25 (2.83) 20 66 5.5 33 32 52 44 130 6 4 (0.79) (2.60) (0.22) (1.30) (1.26) (2.05) (1.73) (5.12) (0.24) (0.16) 20 80 5.5 40 39 52 44 142 6 4 (0.79) (3.15) (0.22) (1.57) (1.54) (2.05) (1.73) (5.59) (0.24) (0.16) M1 x1.5 M10 x1.5 92 (3.62) 110 (4.33)
6.04 10 156 M12 (0.24) (0.39) (6.14) x1.75 6.04 10 188 (0.24) (0.39) (7.40) M14 x2.0
24 100 7.0 50 46 68 58 180 7 5 140 M12 (0.94) (3.94) (0.28) (1.97) (1.81) (2.68) (2.28) (7.09) (0.28) (0.20) x1.75 (5.51) 28 124 7.0 62 56 61 73 221 7 5 (1.10) (4.88) (0.28) (2.44) (2.20) (2.40) (2.87) (8.70) (0.28) (0.20) M14 x2.0 166 (6.54)
** Slot length
F
P5T
T-Slot Detail
Bore 12 GA GC 16 20 25 GD GB GE 32 40 50 63 80 100 GA 7.4 (0.29) 7.4 (0.29) 8.5 (0.33) 8.5 (0.33) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 13.5 (0.53) 16.8 (0.66) 18.7 (0.74) 23.0 (0.91) GB 4.5 (0.18) 4.5 (0.18) 5.5 (0.22) 5.5 (0.22) 6.5 (0.26) 6.5 (0.26) 8.5 (0.33) 10.8 (0.43) 12.8 (0.50) 15.0 (0.59) GC 6.2 (0.24) 7.7 (0.30) 9.4 (0.37) 9.5 (0.37) 10.5 (0.41) 12.5 (0.49) 15.0 (0.59) 21.0 (0.83) 24.8 (0.98) 31.0 (1.22) GD 3.7 (0.15) 3.7 (0.15) 4.5 (0.18) 4.5 (0.18) 5.5 (0.22) 5.5 (0.22) 7.5 (0.30) 10.0 (0.39) 12.0 (0.47) 14.0 (0.55) GE 2.0 (0.08) 3.0 (0.12) 3.7 (0.15) 3.0 (0.12)
4.0 (0.16) 3.5 (0.14) 7.0 (0.28) 10.3 (0.41) 10.0 (0.39)
F41
P5E
3.5 (0.14)
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4

Stroke Dependent Dimensions
Size Dim M 12 Y M 16 Y M 20, 25 Y M 32 Y M 40 Y N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

A074
Standard Stroke Length (mm) 10 20 (0.79) 15 (0.59) 24 (0.94) 17 (0.67) N/A 20 20 (0.79) 15 (0.59) 24 (0.94) 17 (0.67) 24 (0.94) 29 (1.14) N/A 25 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 24 (0.94) 33 (1.30) 24 (0.94) 34 (1.34) 24 (0.94) 36 (1.42) 24 (0.94) 38 (1.50) 28 (1.10) 42 (1.65) 48 (1.89) 35 (1.38) 30 20 (0.79) 15 (0.59) 24 (0.94) 17 (0.67) 24 (0.94) 29 (1.14) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 40 40 (1.57) 25 (0.98) 44 (1.73) 27 (1.06) 44 (1.73) 39 (1.54) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 50 40 (1.57) 25 (0.98) 44 (1.73) 27 (1.06) 44 (1.73) 39 (1.54) 48 (1.89) 45 (1.77) 48 (1.89) 46 (1.81) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 52 (2.05) 50 (1.97) 52 (2.05) 54 (2.13) 72 (2.83) 47 (1.85) 75 40 (1.57) 25 (0.98) 44 (1.73) 27 (1.06) 44 (1.73) 39 (1.54) 48 (1.89) 45 (1.77) 48 (1.89) 46 (1.81) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 52 (2.05) 50 (1.97) 52 (2.05) 54 (2.13) 72 (2.83) 47 (1.85) 100 40 (1.57) 25 (0.98) 44 (1.73) 27 (1.06) 44 (1.73) 39 (1.54) 48 (1.89) 45 (1.77) 48 (1.89) 46 (1.81) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 52 (2.05) 50 (1.97) 52 (2.05) 54 (2.13) 72 (2.83) 47 (1.85) 125 110 (4.33) 60 (2.36) 110 (4.33) 60 (2.36) 120 (4.72) 77 (3.03) 124 (4.88) 83 (3.27) 124 (4.88) 84 (3.31) 124 (4.88) 86 (3.39) 128 (5.04) 88 (3.46) 128 (5.04) 92 (3.62) 148 (5.83) 85 (3.35) 150 110 (4.33) 60 (2.36) 110 (4.33) 60 (2.36) 120 (4.72) 77 (3.03) 124 (4.88) 83 (3.27) 124 (4.88) 84 (3.31) 124 (4.88) 86 (3.39) 128 (5.04) 88 (3.46) 128 (5.04) 92 (3.62) 148 (5.83) 85 (3.35) 175 110 (4.33) 60 (2.36) 110 (4.33) 60 (2.36) 120 (4.72) 77 (3.03) 124 (4.88) 83 (3.27) 124 (4.88) 84 (3.31) 124 (4.88) 86 (3.39) 128 (5.04) 88 (3.46) 128 (5.04) 92 (3.62) 148 (5.83) 85 (3.35) 200 110 (4.33) 60 (2.36) 110 (4.33) 60 (2.36) 120 (4.72) 77 (3.03) 124 (4.88) 83 (3.27) 124 (4.88) 84 (3.31) 124 (4.88) 86 (3.39) 128 (5.04) 88 (3.46) 128 (5.04) 92 (3.62) 148 (5.83) 85 (3.35)
M 50 Y M 63 Y M 80 Y M 100 Y
F42
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensional Data

A074
Overall Length without Extend and Retract Options

Single Tool Plate High Load Bearings
SB + (2STROKE)
Dual Tool Plate

SD + (2STROKE)
A single tool plate unit with no options has the same support rod lengths with or without cushions.
SS + STROKE
SE
2mm + STROKE
SIZE
10, 20, 30, SS at stroke 41 (1.61) 39 (1.54) SE at retract 0 0.00 0 0.00
Stroke 40, 50, 75, 100 SS at stroke 55 (2.17) 65 (2.56) SE at retract 13 (0.51) 19 (0.75)
SB @ zero stroke SD @ zero stroke 125, 150, 175, 200 SS at stroke 85 (3.35) 95 (3.74) SE at retract 43 (1.69) 49 (1.93) NonNonCushion Cushion cushion cushion 44 (1.73) 48 (1.89) N/A N/A 50 (1.97) 55 (2.17) N/A N/A YY2 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) PA 10 (0.39) 11 (0.43) PB 25 (0.98) 26 (1.02)
12 16
SIZE
20, 25, 30 SS at stroke 44 (1.73) 70 (2.74) SE at retract 0 0.00 16 (0.63)
Stroke 40, 50, 75, 100 SS at stroke 80 (3.15) 86 (3.37) SE at retract 27 (1.06) 32 (1.26)
SB @ zero stroke SD @ zero stroke 125, 150, 175, 200 SS at stroke 104 (4.09) 105 (4.11) SE at retract 51 (2.01) 51 (2.01) NonNonCushion Cushion cushion cushion 55 (2.17) 56 (2.19) 80 (3.15) 81 (3.17) 62.0 (2.44) 62.5 (2.46) 87.0 (3.43) 87.5 (3.44) YY2 17 (0.67) 19 (0.75) PA 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) PB 27 (1.06) 31 (1.22)
F
20 25
SIZE
25, 50 SS at stroke 84 (3.31) 85 (3.35) 93 (3.66) 93 (3.66) 123 (4.84) 103 (4.06) SE at retract 25 (0.96) 19 (0.75) 21 (0.83) 16 (0.63) 27 (1.04) 0 0.00
Stroke 75, 100 SS at stroke 98 (3.86) 98 (3.86) 114 (4.49) 114 (4.49) 142 (5.59) 162 (6.38) SE at retract 39 (1.52) 32 (1.26) 42 (1.65) 37 (1.46) 46 (1.79) 46 (1.81)
SB @ zero stroke SD @ zero stroke 125, 150, 175, 200 SS at stroke 118 (4.65) 118 (4.65) 134 (5.28) 134 (5.28) 142 (5.59) 162 (6.38) SE at retract 59 (2.30) 52 (2.05) 62 (2.44) 57 (2.24) 46 (1.79) 46 (1.81) NonNonCushion Cushion cushion cushion 63 (2.46) 69 (2.72) 75 (2.95) 80 (3.15) 100 (3.92) 119 (4.69) 88 (3.44) 94 (3.70) 100 (3.94) 105 (4.13) 125 (4.90) 144 (5.67) 73 (2.85) 79 (3.11) 86 (3.39) 91 (3.58) 120 (4.70) 142 (5.59) 97.5 (3.84) 104.0 (4.09) 111.0 (4.37) 116.0 (4.57) 144.5 (5.69) 167.0 (6.57) YY2 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) PA PB
32 40 50 63 80 100
12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 4 (0.16) 0 0.00
33 (1.30) 33 (1.30) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 25 (0.98) 18 (0.71)
Overall Length with Extend and Retract Options

Option Retract Option Extend Option Extend & Retract Option Single Tool Plate SS + STROKE + PA SB + (2 STROKE) + YY2 SB + (2 STROKE) + PB High Load Bearing SB + (2 STROKE) + PA SB + (2 STROKE) + YY2 SB + (2 STROKE) + PB Dual Tool Plate SD + (2 STROKE) + PA SD + (2 STROKE) + YY2 SD + (2 STROKE) + PB
Example: High load bearing style, 32mm bore, 175mm stroke with an extend option and a retract option. Overall Length = SB + (2STROKE) + PB = 63 + (2175) + 33 = 446mm
F43
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Cushions (E, F)

P5T2 units in bore sizes 20mm - 100mm are available with adjustable air cushions to absorb Kinetic energy at end of stroke. Internal cushions should be used in lieu of bumpers when more energy dissipation is required. Cushions are not available in 12mm and 16mm bore sizes. Cushions may not operate effectively when combined with shocks, adjustable stop collars and/or bumpers. See charts on pages F38-F39 for sizing. For additional mounting dimensions not shown, please refer to basic dimensions on pages F40-F41.

A074
MM X V SLOTTED DOWEL X PP DEEP (FAR SIDE) Y* M* HH K
A+STROKE
4X THRU HOLE & C'BORE FOR BB SHCS RR THREADS X CC DEEP (FAR SIDE) CUSHION ADJUSTMENT SCREW (20, 25, 50, 63, 80, 100)
DD H
Dimensions
Bore 20 25 32 A 62 (2.44) 62.5 (2.46) 62.5 (2.46) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 74 (2.91) 81.5 (3.21) 91 (3.58) D1 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) 16 (0.63) 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18) D2 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18) 35 (1.38) E 10 (0.39) 10.5 (0.41) 10.75 (0.42) 11.5 (0.45) 12.5 (0.49) 13 (0.51) 17 (0.67) 19.5 (0.77) F 1/8 BSPP 1/8 NPTF 1/8 BSPP 1/8 NPTF 1/8 BSPP 1/8 NPTF 1/8 BSPP 1/8 NPTF 1/4 BSPP 1/4 NPTF 1/4 BSPP 1/4 NPTF 3/8 BSPP 3/8 NPTF 3/8 BSPP 3/8 NPTF
N G JJ
2X F E CUSHION ADJUSTMENT SCREW (32, 40)
V DOWEL HOLE X W DEEP (FAR SIDE)
40 50 63 80 100
D1 D2
SEE PAGE F43 FOR OVERALL LENGTH
with Linear Ball Bearing with Composite Bushing
* See next page for stroke dependent dimensions.
Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
*Slot length
G 11 (0.43) 10.5 (0.41) 11.75 (0.46) 16 (0.63) 16 (0.63) 16 (0.63) 18 (0.71) 23 (0.91)
H 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18) 37.5 (1.48) 42 (1.65) 49 (1.93) 57 (2.24) 74 (2.91) 93.5 (3.68)
K 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 18 (0.71) 25 (0.98)
N 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 22 (0.87) 25 (0.98)
+0.01 -0.00
W 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39)
Z 54 (2.13) 64 (2.52) 78 (3.07) 86 (3.39) 110 (4.33) 124 (4.88) 156 (6.14) 188 (7.40)
BB M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
CC 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) 16 (0.63) 32 (1.26) 20 (0.79) 24 (0.94) 28 (1.10)
DD 28 (1.10) 34 (1.34) 42 (1.65) 50 (1.97) 66 (2.60) 80 (3.15) 100 (3.94) 124 (4.88)
HH 33 (1.30) 33 (1.30) 43 (1.69) 44 (1.73) 52 (2.05) 52 (2.05) 68 (2.68) 61 (2.40)
JJ 27 (1.06) 26.5 (1.04) 33.75 (1.33) 38 (1.50) 44 (1.73) 44 (1.73) 58 (2.28) 73 (2.87)
MM* 3.5 (0.14) 4.5 (0.18) 4.5 (0.18) 4.5 (0.18) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28)
PP 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16)
RR M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5
3.06 (0.12) 4.06 (0.16) 4.06 (0.16) 4.06 (0.16) 5.04 (0.20) 5.04 (0.20) 6.04 (0.24) 6.04 (0.24)
5 M12x1.75 (0.20) 5 (0.20) M14x2.0
F44
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Cushions
Size Dim M 20, 25 Y M 32 Y M 40 Y M 50 Y M 63 Y M 80 Y M 100 Y NA NA NA

A074
Stroke Length (mm) 25 44 (1.73) 39 (1.54) 48 (1.89) 45 (1.77) 48 (1.89) 46 (1.81) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 52 (2.05) 50 (1.97) NA 50 44 (1.73) 39 (1.54) 48 (1.89) 45 (1.77) 48 (1.89) 46 (1.81) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 52 (2.05) 50 (1.97) 52 (2.05) 54 (2.13) 72 (2.83) 47 (1.85) 75 44 (1.73) 39 (1.54) 48 (1.89) 45 (1.77) 48 (1.89) 46 (1.81) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 52 (2.05) 50 (1.97) 52 (2.05) 54 (2.13) 72 (2.83) 47 (1.85) 100 120 (4.72) 77 (3.03) 124 (4.88) 83 (3.27) 124 (4.88) 84 (3.31) 124 (4.88) 86 (3.39) 128 (5.04) 88 (3.46) 128 (5.04) 92 (3.62) 148 (5.83) 85 (3.35) 125 120 (4.72) 77 (3.03) 124 (4.88) 83 (3.27) 124 (4.88) 84 (3.31) 124 (4.88) 86 (3.39) 128 (5.04) 88 (3.46) 128 (5.04) 92 (3.62) 148 (5.83) 85 (3.35) 150 120 (4.72) 77 (3.03) 124 (4.88) 83 (3.27) 124 (4.88) 84 (3.31) 124 (4.88) 86 (3.39) 128 (5.04) 88 (3.46) 128 (5.04) 92 (3.62) 148 (5.83) 85 (3.35) 175 120 (4.72) 77 (3.03) 124 (4.88) 83 (3.27) 124 (4.88) 84 (3.31) 124 (4.88) 86 (3.39) 128 (5.04) 88 (3.46) 128 (5.04) 92 (3.62) 148 (5.83) 85 (3.35) 200 200 (7.87) 117 (4.61) 200 (7.87) 121 (4.76) 200 (7.87) 122 (4.80) 200 (7.87) 124 (4.88) 200 (7.87) 124 (4.88) 200 (7.87) 128 (5.04) 220 (8.66) 121 (4.76)
F
F45
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Shaft Bearings

Composite bushings are supplied as standard. Linear ball bearings are optional. Selection should be based on the following criteria:
Application Requirement Precision Friction Friction coefficient Precision over Static Load Capacity Dynamic Load Capacity Vibration Resistance Contamination Resistance Washdown Compatibility Ball Excellent Low Constant Constant Good Good Fair Poor Poor Composite Good Higher Variable Variable Excellent Good with lower efficiency Excellent Excellent Excellent

A074
Composite Bushing (J, K)
Linear Ball Bearing (H, L)
F
High Load Bearings (K1, K3, L3)
The standard bearing configuration locates both sets of bearings at the tool plate end of the actuator providing a compact actuator package. The High Load Bearings option locates the bearings at the extreme ends of the housing, increasing the dynamic and static load capacity. The bearing spacing increases as stroke length increases. The High Load Bearing spacing is not available on strokes less than 50mm.
STANDARD BEARING SPACING HIGH LOAD BEARING SPACING
Corrosion Resistant Shafting

Chrome-plated steel shafting with composite bearings is utilized for standard slides. Stainless steel corrosion resistant shafting is available for extreme conditions.
F46
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Extend and Retract Options

Shock Absorber (A) Bumpers & Adj. Stop Collars (K) Bumpers & Shock Absorber (L)

A074 RETRACT SHOCK ABSORBER
STRIKER PLATE EXTEND SHOCK ABSORBER
Shock Absorber Extend
Bumpers & Adj. Stop Collars Extend

N L
Shock Absorber Retract

NN
RETRACTED
Bumpers & Adj. Stop Collars Retract

N
YY2 + 1.0mm WW
TD
LL
UU ZZ ZZ
UU WW NN TD
RETRACTED
YY L YY2 + 1.0mm YY
F
P5T
Note: See page F43 for overall length. Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80* 100*
1 2 *
N/A N/A 9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 13 (0.51) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59)
N/A N/A 11 (0.43) 13 (0.51) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59)
7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 22 (0.87) 25 (0.98)
N/A N/A 33.0 (1.30) 39.0 (1.54) 45.0 (1.77) 45.0 (1.77) 54.0 (2.13) 54.0 (2.13) 71.0 (2.80) 76.0 (2.99)
N/A N/A 74 (2.91) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 99.5 (3.92) 117 (4.61) 117 (4.61) 140.5 (5.53) 140.5 (5.53)
N/A N/A M12x1.0 M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M25x1.5 M33x1.5 M36x1.5
N/A N/A 48 (1.89) 57 (2.24) 66 (2.60) 66 (2.60) 79 (3.11) 79 (3.11) 98 (3.86) 108 (4.25)
N/A N/A 19 (0.75) 24 (0.94) 24 (0.94) 35 (1.38) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 48 (1.89) 50 (1.97)
15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 17 (0.67) 19 (0.75) 19 (0.75) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83)
15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 17 (0.67) 19 (0.75) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 21 (0.83)
16 (0.63) 18 (0.71) 24 (0.94) 28 (1.10) 34 (1.34) 34 (1.34) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 45 (1.77) 54 (2.13)
18 (0.71) 24 (0.94) 28 (1.10) 34 (1.34) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 45 (1.77) 45 (1.77) 54 (2.13) 57 (2.24)
with Linear Ball Bearing with Composite Bushing Shocks not available with 25mm stroke.
F47
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
L1
L2
LL
NN
TD
UU
WW
YY1
YY2
ZZ1
ZZ2
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Rod Lock (R)

P5T2 Series units in 32mm - 100mm bore sizes are available with an integral rod lock mechanism. The powerful rod lock device is air/spring activated and enables the piston rod to be locked in any position. In the absence of air signal pressure, full holding force is applied to the piston rod. When an air signal pressure of 60 PSI (4 Bar) is applied, the locking device is released. Exhaust air can be piped away when a contaminant-free environment is required. Applications: Vertical guided cylinders In the event of pressure loss In the event of electrical control failure

A074
ROD LOCK CIRCUIT

Lock valve must be maintained energized during cylinder motion, otherwise rod lock is engaged and cylinder valve shifts to mid position. For manual override of the rod lock, insert a shuttle valve and an auxiliary air supply to disable rod lock.
Design Tip: The piston rod should not be moving when the locking device is activated. The locking device is not intended to repeatedly brake movement. See sample pneumatic circuit.
Technical Data
Maximum Pressure: 145 PSI (10 Bar) Pressure Required to Unlock: 60 PSI (4 Bar)
Bore Size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 Holding Force @7 Bar (102 PSI) lb 123 193 303 481 755 1211 N 550 860 1345 2140 3450 5390
3/2 LOCK VALVE (internal pilot) 5/3 CYLINDER VALVE (external pilot)
Dimensions
RA K RB Bore 32 40 1/8 NPT OR 1/8 BSPP 50 RD BREATHER 63 80 100 RA 56 (2.20) 58 (2.28) 66 (2.60) 83 (3.27) 100 (3.94) 116 (4.57) RB 46.5 (1.83) 50.8 (2.00) 63.5 (2.50) 76.2 (3.00) 95.25 (3.75) 111 (4.37) RC 5 (0.20) 6 (0.24) 0 0.00 7.4 (0.29) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) RD 14 (0.55) 10 (0.39) 14 (0.55) 18 (0.71) 26 (1.02) 43 (1.69) RE 46.5 (1.83) 50.8 (2.00) 63.5 (2.50) 76.2 (3.00) 92.75 (3.65) 111 (4.37) K 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 18 (0.71) 25 (0.98)
RC
RE
ROD LOCK ASSEMBLY
F48
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Optional Port Location (2, 3)

Top porting (1) is standard (see drawing on page F40). Optional side (2) and rear (3) porting is available. When ordering either optional port location, the top ports will also be present with threaded port plugs installed. Certain configurations cannot be used with side or rear ports. Reference Model Code & Ordering Information on page F29.

A074
Side Ports (2)

VF VR RW
Rear Ports (3)

TW
VH RH
TH
2X F
Bore 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 F M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8 1/8 BSPP 1/8 NPTF 1/8 BSPP 1/8 NPTF 1/8 BSPP 1/8 NPTF 1/8 BSPP 1/8 NPTF 1/4 BSPP 1/4 NPTF 1/4 BSPP 1/4 NPTF 3/8 BSPP 3/8 NPTF 3/8 BSPP 3/8 NPTF VH 21.5 (0.85) 25.5 (1.00) 29.5 (1.16) 34.5 (1.36) 40 (1.57) 46 (1.81) 53.75 (2.12) 63 (2.48) 74 (2.91) 83 (3.27) TT M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8 1/8 BSPP 1/8 NPTF 1/4 BSPP 1/4 NPTF 1/4 BSPP 1/4 NPTF 3/8 BSPP 3/8 NPTF 3/8 BSPP 3/8 NPTF VR 17.5 (0.69) 20 (0.79) 25.5 (1.00) 25 (0.98) 30.75 (1.21) 34 (1.34) 34 (1.34) 36 (1.42) 42 (1.65) 50 (1.97) VF 9.5 (0.37) 10 (0.39) 11 (0.43) 11.5 (0.45) 11.75 (0.46) 14 (0.55) 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) 13.5 (0.53) 18 (0.71)
2X TT
RW 10.5 (0.41) 12 (0.47) 20.5 (0.81) 26.1 (1.03) 29 (1.14) 33 (1.30) 38.5 (1.52) 45 (1.77) 61.5 (2.42) 68 (2.68) RH 17.5 (0.69) 20 (0.79) 28.5 (1.12) 34.75 (1.37) 37.8 (1.49) 45 (1.77) 48.5 (1.91) 63 (2.44) 75 (2.95) 76 (2.99) TW 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 20.5 (0.81) 26.1 (1.03) 29 (1.14) 33 (1.30) 38.5 (1.52) 45 (1.77) 61.5 (2.42) 68 (2.68) TH 18.5 (0.73) 20 (0.79) 28.5 (1.12) 34.8 (1.37) 37.8 (1.49) 45 (1.77) 48.5 (1.91) 62 (2.44) 75 (2.95) 76 (2.99)
F
F49
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Flow Controls

Right angle flow control valves allow precise adjustment of cylinder speed by metering exhaust air flow. Prestolok push-in tube fittings or threaded fittings provide 360 orientation capability. In some rear porting instances, the flow control may not have 360 of orientation due to support rod interference.

A074
A D
NPT Cylinder Ports Model A 12, 16 20, 25, 32, 40 50, 63 NA Threaded (P, S) B NA C NA D NA 1/8 1/4 3/8 A NA Prestolok (E, K) B NA C NA D NA 1/4"* tube 3/8" tube 3/8" tube A 10.0 (0.39) 14.4 (0.57) 18.4 (0.72) 21.6 (0.85) B 28.5 (1.12) 25.4 (1.00) 34.3 (1.35) 40.2 (1.58) C
BSPP Cylinder Ports Threaded (R, T) D M5 1/8 1/4 3/8 A 10.0 (0.39) 14.4 (0.57) 18.4 (0.72) 21.6 (0.85) 17.5 (0.69) 28.5 (1.12) 27.4 (1.08) 34 (1.34) Prestolok (F, N) B 18 (0.71) 31.6 (1.24) 41.3 (1.63) 46.7 (1.84) C 19.5 (0.77) 28.5 (1.12) 34 (1.34) 44 (1.73) D 4mm tube 6mm tube 10mm tube 12mm tube
17.2 28.4 55.4 (0.68) (1.12) (2.18) 17.2 32.4 65.2 (0.68) (1.28) (2.57) 25.0 39.0 80.2 (0.98) (1.54) (3.16)
17.2 25.2 55.4 (0.68) (0.99) (2.18) 17.2 38.3 65.2 (0.68) (1.51) (2.57) 30.0 47.4 98.0 (1.18) (1.87) (3.86)
80, 100
Fluorocarbon Seals (L, M)

Standard abrasion resistant Buna-N nitrile seals should be used for general purpose applications with temperatures of 18 to 74C (0 to 165F). Fluorocarbon seals are recommended for high temperature applications up to 121C (250F). Other components in the actuator may be affected by the higher temperatures. Please see chart for temperature ratings of other commonly used components.
Feature Bumpers Shock Absorbers Magnets Switches Temperature Range -18 to 93C (0 to 200F) 0 to 66C (32 to 150F) -18 to 74C (0 to 165F) -10 to 85C (14 to 185F)
F50
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensors Proximity Sensors 4mm

Proximity sensors are normally ordered with the unit as part of the model number. Use the part numbers below for spare parts only.
Type PNP NPN Quick Connect B8829-QC-P* B8829-QC-N** Flying Leads B8829-FL-P B8829-FL-N Bracket

A074
C D
HW-3
A E
* Order cordset B8757-P separately. ** Order cordset B8757-N separately.
Electrical Specifications
Voltage...................................... 10-30 VDC (3 wire) PNP or NPN No Load Current ....................... 3-10 mA Continuous Current .................. 100 mA Switching Speed ....................... 8 ms Switch Frequency ..................... 1800 Hz Switching Distance ................... Aluminum = 0.024 in (0.6mm) Brass = 0.041 in (1.05mm) Steel = 0.059 in (1.5mm) Overload Protection .................. Triggered at 170mA Reverse Polarity Protection ...... Incorporated Temp. Range............................. -13 to 158F (-25 to 70C) Enclosure Rating ...................... Meets NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13 and IEC IP67, fully encapsulated
Dimensions
Size Support Rod Dia. 6mm 12 8mm 8mm 16 10mm 10mm 20 12mm 12mm 25 A 8.0 (0.31) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 19.0 (0.75) 19.0 (0.75) 19.0 (0.75) 19.0 (0.75) 25.4 (1.00) 19.0 (0.75) 19.0 (0.75) 12.7 (0.50) B 14.3 (0.56) 16.0 (0.63) 16.0 (0.63) 19.0 (0.75) 19.0 (0.75) 21.5 (0.85) 21.5 (0.85) 24.5 (0.96) 24.5 (0.96) 26.8 (1.06) 24.5 (0.96) 26.8 (1.06) 37.0 (1.46) 37.2 (1.47) 37.0 (1.46) 37.2 (1.47) 45.1 (1.78) 44.5 (1.75) 44.5 (1.75) 38.1 (1.50) C 31.8 (1.25) 34.9 (1.38) 34.9 (1.38) 34.9 (1.38) 34.9 (1.38) 37.8 (1.49) 37.8 (1.49) 45.4 (1.79) 45.4 (1.79) 47.5 (1.87) 45.4 (1.79) 47.5 (1.87) 59.6 (2.35) 64.0 (2.52) 59.6 (2.35) 64.0 (2.52) 69.3 (2.73) 69.1 (2.72) 69.1 (2.72) 69.8 (2.75) D 24.1 (0.95) 26.5 (1.05) 26.5 (1.05) 26.5 (1.04) 26.5 (1.04) 30.8 (1.21) 30.8 (1.21) 37.4 (1.47) 37.4 (1.47) 37.4 (1.47) 37.4 (1.47) 37.4 (1.47) 50.8 (2.00) 50.8 (2.00) 50.8 (2.00) 50.8 (2.00) 58.4 (2.30) 58.4 (2.30) 58.4 (2.30) 52.1 (2.05) E 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38)
F
PNP WIRING CONNECTION

(BROWN) + (BLACK) (BLUE) LOAD DC 10-30V
16mm 16mm 32 20mm 16mm 40 20mm 20mm 50
NPN WIRING CONNECTION

9.5 (0.38) 12.7 (0.50) 9.5 (0.38) 12.7 (0.50) 12.7 (0.50) 12.7 (0.50) 12.7 (0.50) 12.7 (0.50)
25mm 20mm 63 25mm 25mm 80 30mm 30mm 100
35mm
F51
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes

A074
F52
P5TT/P5TD Series
Twin Rod Cylinders
F
P5T Contents
Features ........................................................................... F54 Ordering Information......................................................... F55 Specifications ................................................................... F56 Applications ...................................................................... F57 Engineering Data ....................................................... F58-F65 Dimensions ................................................................ F66-F67 Options ...................................................................... F68-F70 Mounting ........................................................................... F71 Sensors ............................................................................ F72
F53
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Features P5TT - Single Tooling Plate Version

Stroke Adjustment
5mm of retract stroke adjustment is standard.
Twin Rod Cylinders P5TT & P5TD Series

A074
Bushings
Hard coat anodized aluminum bushing or optional sealed, recirculating ball bearing provide smooth motion and high load carrying capability.
Sensor Grooves
Integral sensor grooves and a standard magnetic piston provide position sensing. Unique groove provides a high level of LED visibility.
Direct Mounting Capabilities

Direct mounting of multiple actuators with unique t-slot and t-nut direct mounting allows for very low cost multiaxis systems.
Porting
Side porting is standard with optional top or rear porting available. Oversized access holes from port to cylinder ensure high speed and high throughput.
Dual Cylinder Bores

Two cylinder bores provide twice the output force in a compact, lightweight package.
P5TD - Dual Tooling Plate Version

Gantry, Dual Tooling Plate Slide
Housing and tooling plate orientation provide the ability to use as either a gantry or dual tooling plate slide.
Porting
Side porting is standard with optional rod porting available. Oversized access holes from port to cylinder ensure high speed and high throughput.
Stroke Adjuster, Shock Absorbers

Stroke adjusters in both directions are standard. Optional shock absorbers provide smooth deceleration even under extreme applications. Shock absorber also acts as a stroke adjustment.
Bearings
Bearings are separated to extreme ends of the housing/carriage, significantly increasing load capacity.
F54
Catalog 0900P-4
Revised 10/30/08
Ordering Information Model Number Code

Example: P5TTA032P1NN1HNN200B

A074
P5T
Series P5T Pneumatic Thruster Version T D
032
200
Stroke ** See table below for standard strokes. Design Level
Twin Rod Thruster Twin Rod with Dual Tooling plate Construction A Standard Cylinder Bore Size 010 016 020 025 032 10mm * 16mm 20mm 25mm 32mm N
Current
Proximity Sensor Options None (Standard)
Seal Options N V Nitrile (Standard) Fluorocarbon 3 Port Options H G P F B N NPT BSPP BSPP, Prestolok Flow Control NPT, Prestolok Flow Control BSPP Threaded Flow Control NPT, Threaded Flow Control Port Location 1 2 3 Top Porting (N/A on P5TD) Side Porting Rear Porting (N/A on P5TD)
Bearing Type P H T E Standard Plain Bearing Linear Ball Bearing Double Plain Bearing (Dual Tooling Plate only) Double Ball Bearing (Dual Tooling Plate only)
F
Support Rod Types 1 3 Corrosion Resistant Shafts (Plain Bearing P & T only)1 Stainless Steel Shafts2
Extend Options N A None (Standard) Shock Absorber (Dual Tooling Plate only) Retract Options N None (Standard) A Shock Absorber (Dual Tooling Plate only)
* Not available with dual tooling plate. ** Consult factory for additional strokes. 1 Not available with 10mm P5TT units. Standard on 25mm & 32mm P5TT units.
Model P5TT010 P5TT016 P5TT020 P5TT025 P5TT032 P5TD016 P5TD020 P5TD025 P5TD032 25 25 25 25 25 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Stroke (mm) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 125
2 Standard on 10mm, 16mm & 20mm P5TT. 3 Not available with 10mm bore sizes.
* Stopper bolt and T-nut mounting provide flexibility and stroke adjustment.
F55
Catalog 0900P-4
Maximum operating pressure: 150 psi (air) Standard stroke lengths to 200mm Six bore sizes: 10, 16, 20, 25 and 32 mm - 6mm and 10mm only available with the single tooling plate version Stroke tolerance: +0.8, -0.0mm (+.030, -.000 inch) Operating temperature range (cylinder): Standard seals -18C to +74C (0 to 165F) Fluorocarbon seals* -18C to +121C (0 to 250F) Filtration requirement: 40 micron filtered, dry air
* See fluorocarbon seal option for high temperature applications.

A074
F
Unit Weight Piston Rod Diameter (mm) 6 8 10 12 16 Force Output on Extension at 80 psi* N 87 222 347 542 888 lbs 19 50 78 122 199 Force Output on Retraction at 80 psi N 55 166 260 417 666 lbs 12 37 58 94 150 N 1.2 1.8 3.4 5.2 10.1 Single Tool Plate Base lbs 0.26 0.40 0.77 1.16 2.26 Per 25mm N 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.3 2.1 Per Inch lbs 0.10 0.14 0.20 0.29 0.47 N N/A 3.6 5.9 8.7 17.8 Double Tool Plate Base lbs N/A 0.80 1.32 1.95 4.00 Per 25mm N N/A 0.8 1.2 1.7 2.8 Per Inch lbs N/A 0.18 0.26 0.39 0.65
Cylinder Bore 10 16 20 25 32
Maximum Stroke (mm) 75 150 200 200 200
*Note: Dual tool plate/base unit will have force output in both directions equal to the above retraction force.
F56
Catalog 0900P-4
Applications

Compatible with Parker IPS Structural Framing
A074
P5TT and P5TD units bolt directly to Parker IPS structural framing using standard fasteners. Consult factory for additional details.
Direct Mounting Capabilities

Direct mounting of multiple actuators with unique t-slot and t-nut direct mounting allows for very low cost multi-axis systems.
F
P5T
Typical Applications
Conveyor Equipment Conveyor stops High speed rejects Packaging Machinery Labeling Pushers Inserting Bag opening (with Parker vacuum solution) Positioning/centering Assembly Machinery Light duty pick-and-place High speed pick-and-place Clamping
F57
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Horizontal Load Capacity & Deflection

The plots on these two pages illustrate the side load vs. actuator stroke. Applied loads will cause a slight deflection of the support rod/piston rods. The graphs include the weight of the support rods and tooling plate and are based on a bearing life equivalent to 10 million cycles of dynamic loading. Increasing the dynamic load or actuation speed will reduce service life. For static loads, multiply the information in the graph by 1.5. Bearing life is not related to seal life.

Note: Actuator bearing life may vary depending on the severity of the following variables: Acceleration Velocity Vibration "d" Orientation
A074
Plain Bearing Linear Ball Bearing

200 (45)
Single Tooling Plate

10mm Bore Size
400 (90) 300 (68)
16mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
100 (23)
Load, N (lb)
150 (34)
200 (45)
50 (11)
100 (23) 0.10mm
0 0 20 (0.8) 40 (1.6) Stroke + "d", mm (inch) 60 (2.4) 80 (3.1)
0 0 25 (1.0) 50 (2.0) Stroke + "d", mm (inch) 75 (3.0) 100 (3.9)
20mm Bore Size

500 (113) 400 (90) 500 (113) 400 (90)
25mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (23) 0 0 25 (1.0) 50 (2.0) Stroke + "d", mm (inch) 75 (3.0) 100 (3.9)
300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (23) 0 0 25 (1.0) 50 (2.0) Stroke + "d", mm (inch) 75 (3.0) 100 (3.9)
32mm Bore Size

800 (180)
Load, N (lb)
600 (135)
400 (90) 200 (45) 0 0 25 (1.0) 50 (2.0) Stroke + "d", mm (inch) 75 (3.0) 100 (3.9)
F58
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Horizontal Load Capacity

A074
"d"
Dual Tooling Plate

10mm Bore Size
400 (90)
16mm Bore Size
No
a Av t
Load, N (lb)
il
l ab
300 (68)
200 (45)
100 (23)
F
0 50 (2.0) 100 (3.9) Stroke + "d", mm (inch) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
20mm Bore Size

500 (113) 400 (90) 500 (113) 400 (90)
25mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
200 (45) 100 (23) 0 0 50 (2.0) 100 (3.9) Stroke + "d", mm (inch) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
200 (45) 100 (23) 0 0 50 (2.0) 100 (3.9) Stroke + "d", mm (inch) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
32mm Bore Size

600 (135)
Load, N (lb)
400 (90)
200 (45)
0 0 50 (2.0) 100 (3.9) Stroke + "d", mm (inch) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
F59
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
300 (68)
300 (68)
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Asymmetrical Torque Capacity

Torsional loading occurs when an off-center load is applied to the unit. The graphs on these two pages show torsional load capacity for both single and dual tooling plate models. Torque = F m Note: Actuator bearing life may vary depending on the severity of the following variables: Acceleration Velocity Vibration Orientation
2.0 (17.8)

A074
"F" "m"

10mm Bore Size
5.0 (44) 4.0 (35)
16mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (in-lb)
Torque, Nm (in-lb)
1.5 (13.3)
1.0 (8.9)
3.0 (27) 2.0 (18) 1.0 (9) 0
0.5 (4.4)
0 0 20 (0.8) 40 (1.6) Stroke, mm (inch) 60 (2.4) 80 (3.1)
25 (1.0)
50 (2.0) Stroke, mm (inch)
75 (3.0)
100 (3.9)
20mm Bore Size

6.0 (53) 9.0 (80)
25mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (in-lb)
4.0 (35)
Torque, Nm (in-lb)
6.0 (53)
2.0 (18)
3.0 (27)
0 0 25 (1.0) 50 (2.0) Stroke, mm (inch) 75 (3.0) 100 (3.9)
0 0 25 (1.0) 50 (2.0) Stroke, mm (inch) 75 (3.0) 100 (3.9)
32mm Bore Size

20 (178)
Torque, Nm (in-lb)
15 (133) 10 (89)
5 (44)
0 0 25 (1.0) 50 (2.0) Stroke, mm (inch) 75 (3.0) 100 (3.9)
F60
Catalog 0900P-4

A074
"F" "m" "F" "m"
Dual Tooling Plate

10mm Bore Size
5.0 (44)
16mm Bore Size
No
i va tA
Torque, Nm (in-lb)
la
le
4.0 (35) 3.0 (27) 2.0 (18) 1.0 (9) 0 0 50 (2.0) 100 (3.9) Stroke, mm (inch) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
F
25mm Bore Size
20mm Bore Size

6.0 (53) 9.0 (80)
Torque, Nm (in-lb)
Torque, Nm (in-lb)
2.0 (18)
3.0 (27)
0 0 50 (2.0) 100 (3.9) Stroke, mm (inch) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
0 0 50 (2.0) 100 (3.9) Stroke, mm (inch) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
32mm Bore Size

15 (133)
Torque, Nm (in-lb)
10 (89)
5 (44)
0 0 50 (2.0) 100 (3.9) Stroke, mm (inch) 150 (5.9) 200 (7.9)
F61
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
4.0 (35)
6.0 (53)
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4

An eccentric load is defined as a load applied in the same direction as the motion of the cylinder, however acting at some distance (eccentricity "h") from the center of the tooling plate. The graphs on this page illustrate the maximum suggested eccentric load based on the indicated stroke length. Note: Actuator bearing life may vary depending on the severity of the following variables: Velocity Vibration Orientation Environment (dust, moisture, etc.)

A074
"h"

10mm Bore Size
100 (23) 80 (18) 200 (45)
16mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
60 (14) 40 (9) 20 (5) 0 0 20 (0.8) 40 (1.6) 60 (2.4) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9)
Load, N (lb)
150 (34)
100 (23)
50 (11)
0 0 20 (0.8) 40 (1.6) 60 (2.4) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9)
Eccentricity, mm (inch) Based on 75mm Stroke
20mm Bore Size

200 (45) 350 (79) 300 (68) 250 (56) 200 (45) 150 (34) 100 (23) 50 (11) 0 0 20 (0.8) 40 (1.6) 60 (2.4) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9) 0 20 (0.8)
25mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
150 (34) 100 (23)
50 (11) 0
Load, N (lb)
40 (1.6)
60 (2.4)
80 (3.1)
100 (3.9)
32mm Bore Size

350 (79) 300 (68)
Load, N (lb)
250 (56) 200 (45) 150 (34) 100 (23) 50 (11) 0 0 20 (0.8) 40 (1.6) 60 (2.4) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9)
F62
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Load Stopping Capacity with Single Tooling Plate Version
The P5TT may be used in conveyor stopping applications. Maximum capacity will vary with actuator stroke. The graphs on this page illustrate the maximum stopping or impact capacity for the P5TT based on a stroke of 50mm (2") and assuming that the load is moving perpendicularly to the support rods. Care should be taken to ensure that the support rods are not damaged during this type of loading. The load should be centered on the tooling plate.

A074
50mm (2")

10mm Bore Size
800 (180) 1600 (360) 1200 (270)
16mm Bore Size
Load Weight, N (lb)
400 (90)
Load Weight, N (lb)
600 (135)
800 (180)
200 (45)
400 (90)
F
0 0.2 (0.7) 0.4 (1.3) 0.6 (2.0) Load Velocity, m/sec (ft/sec)
0 0 0.2 (0.7) 0.4 (1.3) 0.6 (2.0)
20mm Bore Size

3600 (810) 6000 (1350)
25mm Bore Size
Load Weight, N (lb)
Load Weight, N (lb)
1200 (270)
2000 (450)
0 0 0.2 (0.7) 0.4 (1.3) 0.6 (2.0)
0 0 0.2 (0.7) 0.4 (1.3) 0.6 (2.0)
Load Velocity, m/sec (ft/sec)
32mm Bore Size

9000 (2025)
Load Weight, N (lb)
6000 (1350)
3000 (675)
0 0 0.2 (0.7) 0.4 (1.3) 0.6 (2.0)
F63
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
2400 (540)
4000 (900)
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4

The first chart below illustrates the stopping capacity of the standard bumpers. The second chart shows the stopping capacity of a P5TD with shock absorbers. The kinetic energy values given in the shock absorber chart are at 6 cycles per minute (16mm bore) and 33 cycles per minute (20, 25 and 32mm bores). If the cycle rate is greater, use the calculations on page F65 to determine shock capabilities. The correct actuator sizing is based on the weight of the load and the speed at which the load is moving. To ensure safe and proper operation, do not operate above the given line on each chart. Note: These charts are to be used only to determine the stopping capacity of each guided cylinder. Other charts may need to be consulted depending upon the applied loading.

A074
Bumper Absorption Capacity

500 (113) 600 (135) 32mm Bore
Kinetic Energy Capacity of Unit with Shock Absorbers
Moving Weight, N (lb)
400 (90) 300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (23) 0 0 0.2 (0.7)
500 (113) 400 (90) 300 (68) 200 (45) 100 (23) 0
32mm Bore 25mm Bore 20mm Bore
20 & 25mm Bore 10 & 16mm Bore
0.4 (1.3)
0.6 (2.0)
0.8 (2.6)
1.0 (3.3)
0.5 1.0 (1.6) (3.3)
1.5 2.0 (4.9) (6.6)
4.5 3.0 5.0 2.5 3.5 4.0 (8.2) (9.8) (11.5) (13.1) (14.8) (16.4)
Cylinder Speed m/sec (ft/sec)
Velocity, m/sec (ft/sec)
NOTES: 1. Bumper absorption capacity values are the same for single and dual tooling plate versions. 2. The moving weight is defined as the weight of the housing and the object being moved. See page F65 for base and stroke weights. (Moving weight = base weight + stroke weight + weight of object being moved)
F64
Catalog 0900P-4

Steps to sizing a guided cylinder with shocks:
1) Determine the "Moving Weight", W. Use Table 1 to determine the "Kinetic Energy Weight" of a given slide. This value should be added to the weight of the load the slide will be carrying. Moving Weight (lbs) = Kinetic Energy Weight (lbs) + Weight of Load (lbs) 2) Determine the velocity of the load, V (ft/second) 3) Determine the cylinder force output at the operating pressure, Fcylinder (lbs) 4) Determine the Kinetic Energy of the load: KE = 0.2 W V2 (lb-in) 5) Determine the Energy per Cycle, Ecycle (lb-in): Ecycle = KE + Fcylinder Shock Stroke This value should be less than the value listed in table 2 6) Determine the Energy per Hour: Ehour (in-lbs) Ehour = 2 Ecycle # of cycles in one hour (a cycle is defined as the extension and retraction of the slide) This value should be less than the value listed in table 2 7) Determine the Effective Weight of the load Ecycle Weffective = 0.2 V2 This value should be between the values listed in table 2

A074
Table 1
Model P5TD16 P5TD20 P5TD25 P5TD32 Base Weight kg (lb) 0.21 (0.47) 0.30 (0.67) 0.42 (0.92) 0.98 (2.16) Stroke Adder N/mm (lb/in) 0.02 (0.09) 0.02 (0.13) 0.03 (0.19) 0.05 (0.29) Shock Stroke mm (in) 10.2 (0.40) 12.4 (0.49) 12.4 (0.49) 12.4 (0.49)
Table 2
Total Energy per Cycle N-m |(lb-in) 4.0 (35) 17.0 (150) 17.0 (150) 17.0 (150) Total Energy per Hour N-m (in-lb) 5,991 (53,000) 33,909 (300,000) 33,909 (300,000) 33,909 (300,000) Effective Weight kg (lb) 6 - 57 (13 - 125) 0.91 - 91 (2 - 200) 0.91 - 91 (2 - 200) 0.91 - 91 (2 - 200) Velocity Range m/sec (ft/sec) 0.06 - 1.0 (0.2 - 3.3) 0.5 - 12 (6 - 144) 0.5 - 12 (6 - 144) 0.5 - 12 (6 - 144)
Model P5TD16 P5TD20 P5TD25 P5TD32
F
Example:
A P5TD25-100 with standard support rods and shock absorbers will be carrying a load of 20 lbs at a velocity of 36 in/second (cycling 1000 times per hour) while operating at 80psi. Is this unit properly sized? 1) Moving Weight = [0.92 + (4 0.19)] + 20 lbs = 21.68 lbs 2) V = 36 in/second = 3 ft/second 3) Fcylinder = 94 lbs 4) KE = 0.2 21.68 3.02 = 39.0 lb-in 5) Ecycle = 39.0 + (94 0.49) = 85.1 lb-in 6) Ehour = 2 85.1 1000 = 170,000 lb-in 7) Weffective = 85.1 lb-in = 47.3 lbs 0.2 (3.0)2
The shock will dissipate the energy of the load.
F65
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Dimensions P5TT Series Single Tooling Plate

N

A074
A + STROKE HH
2X AA TAP THRU (ACCEPTS W SHCS FROM OPPOSITE SIDE)
V MIN
MAX
DD ADJUSTABLE STOPPER BOLT** Z
2X BB TAP THRU FOR CC SHCS
4X W TAP SS DEEP H C R D 2X F (STD)
** DO NOT operate without stopper bolt.
GG
TT
UU
Bore Bore 10 16 20 25 32 A 55 (2.17) 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76) 72 (2.83) 82 (3.23) B 46 (1.81) 58 (2.28) 64 (2.52) 80 (3.15) 98 (3.86) C 17 (0.67) 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18) 38 (1.50) D 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) E 8.0 (0.32) 8.0 (0.32) 8.0 (0.32) 9.0 (0.35) 10.0 (0.39) F M5X0.8 M5X0.8 M5X0.8 1/8" NPT 1/8" NPT H 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) N 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) P 44 (1.73) 56 (2.20) 62 (2.44) 78 (3.07) 96 (3.78) 10 16 20 25 32
M, mm (inch) at various strokes* 10-25 30 (1.18) 10-25 25 (0.98) 10-25 30 (1.18) 10-25 30 (1.18) 10-25 40 (1.57) 30-50 40 (1.57) 30-50 35 (1.38) 30-50 40 (1.57) 30-50 40 (1.57) 30-50 50 (1.97) 55-75 50 (1.97) 55-80 45 (1.77) 55-100 60 (2.36) 55-100 60 (2.36) 55-100 70 (2.76) 85-100 55 (2.17)
*Consult factory for longer strokes.
Bore 10 16 20 25 32
R 15 (0.59) 18 (0.71) 23 (0.91) 28 (1.10) 36 (1.42)
S 35 (1.38) 45 (1.77) 50 (1.97) 60 (2.36) 75 (2.95)
V MIN 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55)
V MAX 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67) 19 (0.75)
W M3X0.5 M4X0.7 M4X0.7 M5X0.8 M5X0.8
Y 7.5 (0.30) 9 (0.35) 11.5 (0.45) 14 (0.55) 18 (0.71)
Z 22 (0.87) 25 (0.98) 28 (1.10) 35 (1.38) 44 (1.73)
AA M4X0.7 M5X0.8 M5X0.8 M6X1.0 M6X1.0
BB M4X0.7 M5X0.8 M6X1.0 M8X1.25 M8X1.25
CC M3 M4 M5 M6 M6
DD M4X0.7 M4X0.7 M5X0.8 M5X0.8 M6X1.0
GG 8.5 (0.83) 10 (0.39) 12.5 (0.49) 15 (0.59) 19 (0.75)
HH 20 (0.79) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)
SS 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31)
TT 30 (1.18) 38.5 (1.52) 45 (1.77) 46 (1.81) 56 (2.20)
UU 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 9 (0.35) 10 (0.39)
All dimensions in mm (in)
F66
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Dimensions P5TD Series Dual Tooling Plate

A074
L + 2STROKE T + 2STROKE 2X AA THRU N DD ADJUSTABLE STOPPER BOLT* A + STROKE V Z

MAX MIN
2X AA THRU
S S/2 S/2
2X W THD THRU OR FOR JJ SHCS H
M + STROKE 2X BB THRU OR FOR CC SHCS TT
FF SS
D 2X F UU
F
P5T
* DO NOT operate without stopper bolt.
Bore 16 20 25 32
A 95 (3.74) 110 (4.33) 112 (4.41) 133 (5.24) V MIN 9 (0.35) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55)
B 58 (2.28) 64 (2.52) 80 (3.15) 98 (3.86) V MAX 14 (0.55) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67) 19 (0.75)
C 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18) 38 (1.50) W M4X0.7 M4X0.7 M5X0.8 M5X0.8
D 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) Y 11 (0.43) 13.5 (0.53) 16 (0.63) 20 (0.79)
F M5X0.8 M5X0.8 1/8 NPT 1/8 NPT
G 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) AA M5X0.8 M5X0.8 M6X1.0 M6X1.0
H 5 (0.20) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) BB M5X0.8 M6X1.0 M8X1.25 M8X1.25
L 133 (5.24) 158 (6.22) 160 (6.30) 193 (7.60) CC M4 M5 M6 M6
M 45 (1.77) 50 (1.97) 52 (2.05) 73 (2.87) DD M4X0.7 M5X0.8 M5X0.8 M6X1.0
N 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) FF 21 (0.83) 26 (1.02) 31 (1.22) 39 (1.54)
P 56 (2.20) 62 (2.44) 78 (3.07) 96 (3.78) JJ M3 M3 M4 M4
R 18 (0.71) 23 (0.91) 28 (1.10) 36 (1.42) SS 11 (0.43) 13.5 (0.53) 16 (0.63) 20 (0.79)
S 45 (1.77) 50 (1.97) 60 (2.36) 75 (2.95) TT 38.5 (1.52) 44.5 (1.75) 46 (1.81) 56 (2.20)
T 123 (4.84) 146 (5.75) 148 (5.83) 177 (6.97) UU 38.5 (1.52) 44.5 (1.75) 46 (1.81) 56 (2.20)
Bore 16 20 25 32
Z 25 (0.98) 28 (1.10) 35 (1.38) 44 (1.73)
All dimensions in mm (in)
F67
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Bearing Type (P, H, T, E)

The Single Tool Plate version comes standard with two bearings (one per piston rod). The Dual Tool Plate version includes four bearings (two per piston rod). Bearing options include: Plain Bearing Two hard coat aluminum bearings available on Single Tooling Plate Version only Linear Ball Bearing Two recirculating ball bearings with integral rod wipers to aid in resisting contamination and containing factory installed lubrication, available on Single Tooling Plate Version only Double Plain Bearing Four hard coat aluminum bearings available on the Dual Tooling Plate Version only Double Ball Bearing Four recirculating ball bearings with integral rod wipers to aid in resisting contamination and containing factory installed lubrication, available on the Dual Tooling Plate Version only

A074
Application Requirement Friction Precision over Life of Bearing Static Load Capacity Washdown Compatibility
Ball Bearing Low Constant Good Poor
Composite Higher Variable Excellent Excellent
For bushing load capacities, reference the Engineering Data pages of this catalog.
Support Rod Types (1, 3)
The support rod (or piston rod) can be supplied in two styles available on both the single and dual tooling plate versions: Chrome plated carbon steel (not available in 6mm and 10mm bore) Stainless steel (not available with Rod Porting option)
F68
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Extend and Retract Options (N, A)

Single tooling plate versions (P5TT) come standard with a stroke adjuster for the retract position. Dual tooling plate versions (P5TD) come standard with a stroke adjuster for the extend and retract position. Optional shock absorbers replace the standard stopper bolts.

A074
M + 2STROKE L + 2STROKE AN Max T + 2STROKE AP Min
Shock Absorbers (A)

Adjustable shock absorbers are provided when this option is specified. Shock absorbers dissipate kinetic energy over a wide range of velocities and weights. Cylinder stroke is adjusted by threading the shock absorber in or out. Shock Absorber Adjustment Procedure: Proper adjustment is important to maximize a shock absorber's performance. With a range of zero to ten, shocks are factory pre-set at five. Cycle the slide to impact the shock absorber. Rotate the shock's adjustment knob to achieve smooth deceleration. Adjusting towards zero increases resistance. If the initial impact is too hard, rotate the knob towards ten to lessen the resistance. If the final setting is less than one, a larger shock and/or slide should be considered. Tighten the adjusting knob set screw to maintain resistance.
TD NN Retracted Shock Shock Flats Hex
F
Bore 16 20 25 32 L 133 (5.24) 158 (6.22) 160 (6.30) 193 (7.60) T 123 (4.84) 146 (5.75) 148 (5.83) 177 (6.97) M 246 (9.69) 273 (10.75) 275 (10.83) 296 (11.65) NN 74 (2.91) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) AN Max 56.5 (2.22) 57.5 (2.26) 57.5 (2.26) 57.5 (2.26) AP Min 9 (0.35) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55) TD M12X1.0 M14X1.5 M14X1.5 M14X1.5 Hex size 14 (0.55) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67) Shock Flats NA 12.7 (0.50) 12.7 (0.50) 12.7 (0.50) Shock Stroke 10.1 (0.40) 12.4 (0.49) 12.4 (0.49) 12.4 (0.49)
F69
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Port Location (1, 3, 4)

Top or side porting is standard. Top (1) or rear (3) porting is available on single tooling plate models.

Top Porting Rear Porting
A074
MM
NN
2X F G
2X J E LL
PP
Bore 10 16 20 25 32
E 8.0 (0.32) 8.0 (0.32) 8.0 (0.32) 9.0 (0.35) 10.0 (0.39)
F M5X0.8 M5X0.8 M5X0.8 1/8" NPT 1/8" NPT
G 30 (1.18) 38.5 (1.52) 45 (1.77) 46 (1.81) 56 (2.20)
J M3 M5 M5 M5 1/8" NPT
LL 4 (0.16) 5.5 (0.22) 8 (0.31) 9 (0.35) 12.5 (0.49)
MM 18.5 (0.73) 24.5 (0.96) 8 (0.31) 34 (1.34) 42 (1.65)
NN 18.5 (0.73) 24.5 (0.96) 27.5 (1.08) 34 (1.34) 42 (1.65)
PP 4 (0.16) 5.5 (0.22) 8 (0.31) 9 (0.35) 12.5 (0.49)
F
Flow Controls (F, G)
Right angle flow control valves allow adjustment of cylinder speed by metering exhaust air flow. Presto-Lok push-in or threaded ports provide 360 orientation capability. NPT Cylinder Ports
Bore 6, 10, 16, 20 25, 32 Threaded (N) A 10.0 (0.39) 17.0 (0.67) B 24.5 (0.96) 38.0 (1.50) D 10-32 1/8" NPT E 16.0 (0.63) 22.0 (0.87) A 7.0 (0.28) 10.0 (0.39) Presto-lok (F) B 26 (1.02) 27.5 (1.08) D 5/32" tube 5/32" tube E 17.0 (0.67) 18.5 (0.73)
D A B
BSPP Cylinder Ports

Bore 6, 10, 16, 20 25, 32 Threaded (B) A 10.0 (0.39) 14.4 (0.57) B 24.5 (0.96) 28.5 (1.12) D M5 1/8" BSPP E 16.0 (0.63) 17.5 (0.69) A 9.0 (0.35) 17.5 (0.69) Presto-lok (P) B 27 (1.06) 44 (1.73) D 4mm tube 6mm tube E 16.5 (0.65) 21.5 (0.85)
Fluorocarbon Seals (V)

Standard abrasion resistant nitrile seals should be used for general purpose applications with temperatures of -18C to +74C (0F to 165F). Fluorocarbon seals are recommended for high temperature applications up to 121C (250F).
Option Shock Absorbers Bumpers Piston Magnets Sensors
Temperature Range 0C to +66C (32F to 150F) -18C to +93C (0F to 200F) -18C to +74C (0F to 165F) -10C to +60C (14F to 140F)
F70
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Accessories T-Slot Mounting

T-slots provide quick and flexible direct mounting between thrust slides. Mounting kits include T-nuts 45 and bolts. The table below lists kit numbers for recommended combinations of slides. 0.8 Order mounting kit separately. (0.03) Single tapped hole T-nuts are also available: 5.1 Part # 20-044 M4 (0.20) M5 Part # 20-045

A074
1.0 6.9 (0.04) (0.27)
2.3 (0.09) 11.6 (0.46)
T-Slot Detail
P5TT (y-axis) Size P5TT (x-axis) 10 16 20 25 32 10 NK-P5TT010 NK-P5TT016 NK-P5TT020 N/A N/A 16 N/A NK-P5TT016 NK-P5TT020 NK-P5TT025 N/A 20 N/A N/A NK-P5TT020 NK-P5TT025 NK-P5TT032 25 N/A N/A N/A NK-P5TT025 NK-P5TT032 32 N/A N/A N/A N/A NK-P5TT032
Transition Plate Mounting

Base and thrust slides may be mounted together using transition plates. Kits include transition plate and required hardware. The table below lists kit numbers for recommended combinations of slides. Order plate kits separately.
F
P5T
N/A N/A TP2232-1-2120 TP2232-1-2125 TP2232-1-2132 32 N/A N/A TP2132-1-2120 TP2132-1-2125 TP2132-1-2132
Thrust-Base Plate Kits

P5TD Size 10 P5TT 16 20 25 32 16 TP2216-1-2110 TP2216-1-2116 N/A N/A N/A 20 TP2220-1-2110 TP2220-1-2116 TP2220-1-2120 N/A N/A 25 N/A TP2225-1-2116 TP2225-1-2120 TP2225-1-2125 N/A 32
P5TT Size 10 P5TT 16 20 25 32 16 TP2116-1-2110 TP2116-1-2116 N/A N/A N/A 20 TP2120-1-2110 TP2120-1-2116 TP2120-1-2120 N/A N/A 25 N/A TP2125-1-2116 TP2125-1-2120 TP2125-1-2125 N/A
F71
P5E
Thrust-Thrust Plate Kits
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensors Solid State and Reed Sensors

The P5TT/TD Series cylinders include a magnetic piston to allow for field installation of miniature solid state and reed sensors. The sensors mount flush to the body in sensor grooves that provide a high level of LED visibility. Sensors are available with quick connector or flying leads. Sensors must be ordered separately. See the Electronic Sensors Section M for part numbers and specifications.

A074
F72
P5L Series
Guided Cylinders
F
P5T Contents
Features ........................................................................... F74 Ordering Information......................................................... F75 Specifications ................................................................... F76 Multi-Axis Application ....................................................... F77 Engineering Data Thrust / Reach ...................................................... F78-F93 Base Slides .......................................................... F94-F104 Dimensions ............................................................ F105-F107 Options ........................................................................... F108 Reach / Thrust ................................................... F109-F114 Base Slides ........................................................ F115-F120 Fluorocarbon Seals ..................................................... F121 Flow Controls .............................................................. F121 Proximity Sensors ...................................................... F122 Service Kits .................................................................... F123
F73
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
P5L-R Reach Slide Shown
Bushings Composite bushings with standard or oversized shafts are available. For precision applications optional recirculating ball bearings can be specified and for extremely high loads self-aligning ball bearings are available.
Guided Cylinders P5L Series

Support Rods High strength, case hardened support rods available in chrome plated, carbon or stainless steel. The chrome plated and stainless steel shafts are available in oversized versions for high load applications.
Tooling Plate A precision machined, anodized aluminum tooling plate with standard tapped and counterbored mounting holes provides mounting from two faces. Dowel pin holes are also included for accurate positioning of custom tooling. The support rods are attached to the tooling plate using two socket head cap screws, providing maximum rigidity and support.
Body Extruded aluminum and anodized body with recessed through holes. Standard dowel pin holes to provide mounting accuracy. Integrated T-slots provide mounting flexibility and quick set up. T-slots are standard on 20mm to 40mm bore models and optional on 50mm to 100mm bore models.
Cylinder The all new P1L round body repairable cylinder (available in 20 to 100mm bore) is the driving force behind the P5L guided cylinder product line. Parker guided cylinders come standard with a magnetic piston for easy installation of reed or solid state sensors.
P5L-B Base Slide Shown
End Plates Precision machined, anodized aluminum end plates have counterbored through holes for mounting. For precision, one keyway and one dowel pin are included. The support rods are attached to the tooling plate using two socket head cap screws providing maximum rigidity and support.
Carriage Extruded aluminum and anodized carriage with recessed through holes. Standard dowel pin holes to provide mounting accuracy. Integrated t-slots provide mounting flexibility and quick set up. T-slots are standard on 20-40mm bore models and optional on 50-100mm bore models.
F74
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information Model Number Code

Example: P5L-RL100J1AANFN-0900-A
P5L
R
Series
100
J1
0900
T R B
Thrust Slide Reach Slide Base Slide Cylinder Type L P1L Cylinder A
Design Series Current Design
Stroke Bore Size 020 025 032 040 050 063 080 100 20mm Bore 25mm Bore 32mm Bore 40mm Bore 50mm Bore 63mm Bore 80mm Bore 100mm Bore Order in 1mm increments.
T-Slots Standard (Extruded T-slots on sizes 20-40, no T-slots on sizes 50-100) Machined T-slots (Sizes 50-100)**
** N/A on sizes 20-40 Bushings J1 J2 J3 J4 G1 Composite Bushing, Chrome Plated Shafts Composite Bushing, Oversized Chrome Plated Shafts Composite Bushing, Stainless Steel Shafts Composite Bushing, Oversized Stainless Steel Shafts Composite Bushing, Chrome Plated Shafts, Contaminent Tolerant Seals G3 Composite Bushing, Stainless Steel Shafts, Contaminent Tolerant Seals H3 Linear Ball Bearings, Stainless Steel Shafts H5 Linear Ball Bearings, Carbon Steel Shafts S3* Self Aligning Linear Ball Bearings, Stainless Steel Shafts S5* Self Aligning Linear Ball Bearings, Carbon Steel Shafts Extend Options N A B C E H K L None Shock/Stroke Adjusters Bumpers (Base Slides only) Cushions Both Ends Micro-adjusters and Cushions (both ends only) Cushions and Bumpers (includes Options C & K) Bumpers and Adjustable stop collars Shock absorbers and bumpers (N/A on Base Slides) Retract Options N A B C E H K L None Shock/Stroke Adjusters Bumpers Only Cushions Both Ends Micro-adjusters and Cushions (both ends only) Cushions and Bumpers (includes Options C & K) Bumpers and Adjustable stop collars Shock absorbers and bumpers (N/A on Base Slides) N V Proximity Sensor Options N P R S T W Z No Sensor PNP, Lead Type NPN, Lead Type PNP, Plug in Type NPN, Plug in Type Prox Ready, 8mm (No sensor supplied) Prox Ready, 12mm (No sensor supplied)
F
Note: Piston magnet is standard on all cylinders. Inductive proximity sensors are included with Options P, R, S & T.
Cylinder Port Style G H P F B N BSPT Ports NPTF Ports BSPT Ports w/ Presto-lok Flow Controls (mm) NPTF Ports w/ Presto-lok Flow Controls (inch) BSPT Ports w/ Flow Controls NPTF Ports w/ Flow Controls
Cylinder Seals Nitrile (Standard) Fluorocarbon (High Temperature)
* Not available on 20mm bore models Order P8S Series reed and solid state sensors separately from Electronic Sensors Section.
F75
Catalog 0900P-4
Maximum operating pressure: 10 bar (145 PSI) Operating characteristics: double acting Support rod sizes from 10mm to 60mm Operating temperature range (cylinder): Standard seals -17 to 74C (0 to 165F) Fluorocarbon seals* -17 to 121C (0 to 250F) Filtration requirement: 40 micron filtered, dry air
*See fluorocarbon seal option for high temperature applications.

Bore Standard Support Rod Diameter mm 20 25 32 40 10 12 16 20 25 30 40 50 (in) 0.39 0.47 0.63 0.79 0.98 1.18 1.57 1.97 Oversized Support Rod Diameter mm 12 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 in 0.47 0.63 0.79 0.98 1.18 1.57 1.97 2.36 Output Force on Extension @5.5 Bar (80 psi) N 173 271 445 694 1081 1717 2771 4332 lbs 39 61 100 156 243 386 623 974 Output Force on Retract @5.5 Bar (80 psi) N 147 227 383 583 907 1548 2500 3888 lbs 33 51 86 131 204 348 562 874 Maximum Suggested Stroke** mm 400 400 450 550 750 900 1000 1000 in 16 16 18 22 30 35 39 39
50 63 80 100
**Longer stroke lengths are available, but load capacities are greatly reduced. Consult factory with application parameters.
Weights
Actuator Weights (Standard Shaft) Bore Zero Stroke Unit Weight Thrust kg 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 0.69 1.24 1.99 3.5 7.3 12.6 22.5 40.7 lbs 1.5 2.7 4.4 7.7 16.2 27.8 49.5 89.8 Reach kg 0.96 1.77 2.84 4.9 11.2 18.6 34.4 61.7 lbs 2.1 3.9 6.3 10.9 24.6 41.0 75.8 136.0 kg 1.09 2.12 3.26 5.6 12.1 21.8 39.4 72.4 Base lbs 2.4 4.7 7.2 12.4 26.7 48.1 86.9 159.7 Per Inch Stroke kg 0.04 0.06 0.09 0.14 0.21 0.27 0.44 0.66 lbs 0.09 0.13 0.20 0.31 0.47 0.59 0.96 1.45 Thrust kg 0.77 1.45 2.32 4.1 8.5 15.1 26.8 42.1 lbs 1.7 3.2 5.1 9.1 18.8 33.3 59.2 92.8 Actuator Weights (Oversized Shaft) Zero Stroke Unit Weight Reach kg 1.07 2.05 3.25 5.9 12.8 22.3 40.5 63.9 lbs 2.3 4.5 7.2 13.0 28.1 49.2 89.3 140.9 kg 1.04 1.99 3.15 5.75 12.50 21.92 40.47 65.49 Base lbs 2.3 4.4 6.9 12.7 27.6 48.3 89.2 144.4 Per Inch Stroke kg 0.05 0.08 0.11 0.17 0.25 0.38 0.58 0.83 lbs 0.11 0.17 0.25 0.39 0.56 0.83 1.27 1.83
F76
Catalog 0900P-4
Multi-Axis
DIRECT MOUNTING Each thrust and reach version can direct mount to the indentically sized base version. Other size combinations can mount using transition plates.
T-SLOTS Integrated T-slots provide quick and flexible mounting between base, thrust and reach slides.
F
P5T
X-Z SYSTEMS Same size thrust and/or reach units direct mount to form simple X-Z systems.
F77
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
Parker has a complete line of pneumatic grippers for pick & place applications. Consult Parker Catalog 1900-2.
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Horizontal Load Capacity & Deflection with Standard Shafting
Standard Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods Recirculating Ball Bearings w/ Carbon or Stainless Steel Rods Self Aligning Ball Bearings w/ Carbon or Stainless Steel Rods The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested side load at a given actuator stroke and distance (d) from the face of the tooling plate. The graphs include the weight of the support rods and tooling plate and are based on a bearing life of 10 million cycles under a dynamic loading condition. For an equivalent static load capacity multiply the information in these graphs by 1.5. See the P5L options section of this catalog for more bearing selection information.
Dynamic loading is defined as a load which is affixed to the actuator tooling plate during the extend or retract motion of the actuator. Capacities are based on bearing and shafts only. Mounting bolts/hardware should be investigated per customer application. Note: The following variables commonly affect the bearing life of a guided cylinder: Velocity Vibration Orientation Environment (Dust, moisture, etc.)
P5L Thrust Slides

900 (202)
20mm Bore Size

2mm 4mm
F
Load, N (lb)
1500 (338) 1mm 4mm
25mm Bore Size
Standard Composite
Load, N (lb)
600 (135)
1000 (225)
Standard Composite
Ball Bearing 0.2mm 300 (67)
500 (113)
0.2mm
Ball Bearing
0 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 360 (14.2) 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 360 (14.2) 480 (18.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

1500 (337) 0.5mm 4mm 1200 (269)
Standard Composite
2000 (450)
40mm Bore Size

0.5mm 2mm
Standard Composite
1500 (338)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
900 (202)
Self-Aligning Ball Bearing
1000 (225)
600 (135)
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing 500 (113)
300 (67) 0.05mm 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
0.1mm 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F78
Catalog 0900P-4
Load
Deflection
P5L Thrust Slides

2500 (563) 0.5mm 2mm 2000 (450)
Standard Composite
50mm Bore Size
4000 (900) 0.5mm 2mm 3000 (675)
63mm Bore Size
F
Standard Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Ball Bearing 1000 (225) Self-Aligning Ball Bearing
2000 (450)
Ball Bearing
500 (113) 0.1mm
1000 (225) 0.1mm 0 0 240 (9.4) 480 (18.9) 720 (28.3) 0 240 (9.4) 480 (18.9) 720 (28.3)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

6000 (1350) 0.3mm 1mm
Standard Composite
10000 (2250) 0.5mm 1mm
100mm Bore Size
Standard Composite
7500 (1688)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
4000 (900)
Ball Bearing
5000 (1125)
Ball Bearing Self-Aligning Ball Bearing
2000 (450) 2500 (563) 0.1mm 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5) 0 0 200 (7.9) 0.05mm
400 (15.7)
600 (23.6)
800 (31.5)
1000 (39.4)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F79
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
P5T
1500 (338)
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Horizontal Load Capacity & Deflection with Oversized Shafting
Oversized Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested side load at a given actuator stroke and distance (d) from the face of the tooling plate. The graphs include the weight of the support rods and tooling plate and are based on a bearing life of 10 million cycles under a dynamic loading condition. For an equivalent static load capacity multiply the information in these graphs by 1.5. See the P5L options section of this catalog for more bearing selection information.
P5L Thrust Slides

1500 (338) 0.5mm 1mm 1200 (270)
Oversized Composite Oversized Composite
20mm Bore Size
F
Load, N (lb)
1500 (338) 0.3mm 1mm 1200 (270)
25mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
0.1mm
900 (202)
900 (203)
600 (135)
600 (135)
300 (67)
300 (67) 0.1mm 0
60 (2.4)
120 (4.7)
180 (7.1)
240 (9.4)
300 (11.8)
120 (4.7)
240 (9.4)
360 (14.2)
480 (18.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
2000 (450) 0.3mm 1500 (338)
32mm Bore Size
2400 (540) 0.2mm 0.5mm 1800 (405)
40mm Bore Size
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
0.6mm 1000 (225)
Load, N (lb)
Oversized Composite
1200 (270)
500 (113)
0.1mm
600 (135) 0.05mm
0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F80
Catalog 0900P-4
Load
Deflection
P5L Thrust Slides

3600 (810) 0.2mm 0.1mm 0.5mm 2400 (540)
Oversized Composite
50mm Bore Size
6000 (1350)
63mm Bore Size
0.3mm 4000 (900)
F
P5T
600 (23.6) 600 (23.6)
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
1200 (270) 2000 (450) 0.05mm 0.05mm 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

9000 (2025) 0.1mm 0.2mm
12000 (2700) 0.1mm
100mm Bore Size
9000 (2025)
Load, N (lb)
6000 (1350)
3000 (675) 3000 (675) 0.05mm 0.05mm 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F81
P5E
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
6000 (1350)
Oversized Composite
HB
0.2mm
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Recirculating Ball Bearings w/ Carbon or Stainless Steel Rods Self Aligning Ball Bearings w/ Carbon or Stainless Steel Rods The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested side load at a given actuator stroke and distance (d) from the face of the tooling plate. The graphs include the weight of the support rods and tooling plate and are based on a bearing life of 10 million cycles under a dynamic loading condition. For an equivalent static load capacity multiply the information in these graphs by 1.5. See the P5L options section of this catalog for more bearing selection information.
P5L Reach Slides

900 (202) 2mm 1200 (269)
Standard Composite Standard Composite
20mm Bore Size
F
Load, N (lb)
1500 (337) 2mm 5mm
25mm Bore Size
4mm 600 (135)
Ball Bearing
Load, N (lb)
900 (202)
300 (67)
600 (135)
Ball Bearing
300 (67) 0.2mm 0 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 360 (14.2) 0 160 (6.3) 320 (12.6) 480 (18.9) 640 (25.2) 0.5mm
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

1500 (337) 1mm 1200 (269)
1500 (337) 1mm
40mm Bore Size
Standard Composite
4mm
Standard Composite
1200 (269)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
900 (202)
900 (202)
600 (135)
Ball Bearing
600 (135)
4mm Ball Bearing
300 (67) 0.2mm 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
300 (67) 0.2mm 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F82
Catalog 0900P-4
Load
Deflection
P5L Reach Slides

3600 (809)
50mm Bore Size

5mm 2mm
Standard Composite
63mm Bore Size

4800 (1080) 1mm 4mm 3600 (810)
Standard Composite
F
P5T
Load, N (lb)
Ball Bearing
Load, N (lb)
2400 (539)
Self-Aligning Ball Bearing 1200 (270)
2400 (540)
Ball Bearing
1200 (270)
0.1mm 0 0 250 (9.8) 500 (19.7) 750 (29.5) 1000 (39.4) 0 0
0.2mm 300 (11.8) 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4) 1200 (47.2)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

8000 (1800) 2mm 6000 (1350)
12000 (2700) 1mm 3mm
100mm Bore Size
5mm
9000 (2025)
Load, N (lb)
Standard Composite
4000 (900)
6000 (1350)
Ball Bearing
2000 (450) 0.2mm 0 0 300 (11.8) 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4) 1200 (47.2)
3000 (675)
Ball Bearing
0.2mm 0 0 300 (11.8) 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4) 1200 (47.2) 1500 (59.1)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F83
P5E
Standard Composite
Load, N (lb)
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Oversized Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested side load at a given actuator stroke and distance (d) from the face of the tooling plate. The graphs include the weight of the support rods and tooling plate and are based on a bearing life of 10 million cycles under a dynamic loading condition. For an equivalent static load capacity multiply the information in these graphs by 1.5. See the P5L options section of this catalog for more bearing selection information.
P5L Reach Slides

20mm Bore Size
1200 (270) 1mm 3mm 900 (202) Oversized Composite 1200 (270)
Oversized Composite
1500 (338)
25mm Bore Size

0.5mm 2mm
F
Load, N (lb)
600 (135)
Load, N (lb)
0.2mm
900 (202)
600 (135)
300 (67)
300 (67)
0.1mm
0 0 60 (2.4) 120 (4.7) 180 (7.1) 240 (9.4) 300 (11.8)
0 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 360 (14.2) 480 (18.9)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

2400 (540) 0.5mm 1mm 1800 (405) 1800 (405) 2400 (540) 0.5mm 1mm
40mm Bore Size
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
1200 (270)
1200 (270)
600 (135) 0.1mm
600 (135) 0.1mm
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F84
Catalog 0900P-4
Load
Deflection
P5L Reach Slides

4000 (900)
50mm Bore Size

0.5mm 1mm
Oversized Composite
6000 (1350) 0.3mm 0.6mm
63mm Bore Size
3000 (675)
F
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
2000 (450)
2000 (450) 1000 (225) 0.1mm 0.1mm
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

9000 (2025) 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.5mm 9000 (2025) 6000 (1350) 0.4mm 12000 (2700)
100mm Bore Size
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Oversized Composite
6000 (1350)
3000 (675) 0.1mm 3000 (675) 0.1mm
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F85
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
P5T
4000 (900)
Catalog 0900P-4

Standard Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods Oversized Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods Recirculating Ball Bearings w/ Carbon or Stainless Steel Rods Self Aligning Ball Bearings w/ Carbon or Stainless Steel Rods The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested asymmetrical load at a given actuator stroke and distance (d) from the face of the tooling plate. The graphs include the weight of the support rods and tooling plate and are based on a bearing life of 10 million cycles under a dynamic loading condition. For an equivalent static load capacity multiply the information in these graphs by 1.5.
Dynamic loading is defined as a load which is affixed to the actuator tooling plate during the extend or retract motion of the actuator. Capacities are based on bearing and shafts only. Mounting bolts/hardware should be investigated per customer application. An asymmetrical load is defined as a perpendicular load applied at some horizontal distance, "m" from the center of the tooling plate.
P5L Thrust Slides

20mm Bore Size
40 (355) 30 (266) 20 (178) 10 (89) 0 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 300 (11.8) 60 (533)
25mm Bore Size

100 (888) 75 (666) 50 (444) 25 (222) 0 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 360 (14.2) 480 (18.9) 0
32mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
40 (355)
20 (178)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
200 (7.9)
400 (15.7)
600 (23.6)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
40mm Bore Size

160 (1421) 120 (1066) 80 (710) 40 (355) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 300 (2664) 240 (2131) 180 1598) 120 (1066) 60 (533) 0 0
50mm Bore Size

600 (5328)
63mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
400 (3552)
200 (1776)
0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

1000 (8880) 750 (6660) 500 (4440) 250 (2220) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 1500 (13320) 1200 (10656) 900 (7992) 600 (5328) 300 (2664) 0 0
100mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
LEGEND
Standard Composite Oversized Composite Recirculating Ball Bearing Self Aligning Ball Bearing
300 (11.8)
600 (23.6)
900 (35.4)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F86
Catalog 0900P-4

Note: The following variables commonly affect the bearing life of a guided cylinder: Velocity Vibration Orientation Environment (Dust, moisture, etc.)
Torsional Load m
P5L Reach Slides

20mm Bore Size
40 (355) 30 (266) 20 (178) 10 (89) 0 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 300 (11.8) 80 (710) 60 (533) 40 (355) 20 (178) 0 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 360 (14.2) 480 (18.9)
25mm Bore Size

100 (888) 75 (666) 50 (444) 25 (222) 0 0
32mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
F
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
40mm Bore Size

160 (1421) 120 (1066) 80 (710) 40 (355) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 300 (2664) 240 (2131) 180 1598) 120 (1066) 60 (533) 0 0
50mm Bore Size

600 (5328)
63mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
200 (1776)
0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5) 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

1000 (8880) 750 (6660) 500 (4440) 250 (2220) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5) 1500 (13320) 1200 (10656) 900 (7992) 600 (5328) 300 (2664) 0 0
100mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
LEGEND
200 (7.9)
400 (15.7)
600 (23.6)
800 (31.5)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F87
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
400 (3552)
P5T2
P5T
200 (7.9)
400 (15.7)
600 (23.6)
Catalog 0900P-4

Standard Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods Oversized Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods Recirculating Ball Bearings w/ Carbon or Stainless Steel Rods Self Aligning Ball Bearings w/ Carbon or Stainless Steel Rods The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested eccentric load based on a stroke of 100mm (4 inches). An eccentric load is defined as a load applied in the same direction as the motion of the cylinder however, acting at some
distance (eccentricity "h") from the center of the tooling plate. Capacities are based on bearing and shafts only. Mounting bolts/hardware should be investigated per customer application. Note: The following variables commonly affect the bearing life of a guided cylinder: Velocity Vibration Orientation Environment (Dust, moisture, etc.)
P5L Thrust Slides

20mm Bore Size
1600 (360) 1200 (270)
Load, N (lb)
25mm Bore Size

1600 (360) 1200 (270) 2400 (540) 1800 (405)
Load, N (lb)
32mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
800 (180) 400 (90) 0 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 360 (14.2)
800 (180) 400 (90) 0 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 360 (14.2) 480 (18.9)
1200 (270) 600 (135) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
40mm Bore Size

2800 (630) 2100 (473)
50mm Bore Size

4000 (900) 3000 (675) 2000 (450) 1000 (225) 0
Load, N (lb)
63mm Bore Size

6000 (1350)
4000 (900)
1400 (315) 700 (158) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
2000 (450)
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
80mm Bore Size

9000 (2025) 12000 (2700) 9000 (2025)
Load, N (lb)
100mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
6000 (1350)
LEGEND
6000 (1350) 3000 (675) 0
3000 (675)
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
200 (7.9)
400 (15.7)
600 (23.6)
F88
Catalog 0900P-4

h
Load
P5L Reach Slides

20mm Bore Size
1200 (270) 900 (203)
Load, N (lb)
25mm Bore Size

1600 (360) 1200 (270) 2400 (540) 1800 (405)
Load, N (lb)
32mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
600 (135) 300 (68) 0 0 60 (2.4) 120 (4.7) 180 (7.0) 240 (9.4) 300 (11.8)
800 (180) 400 (90) 0 0 120 (4.7) 240 (9.4) 360 (14.2) 480 (18.9)
1200 (270) 600 (135) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
F
40mm Bore Size

2800 (630) 2100 (473)
50mm Bore Size

4000 (900) 3000 (675) 2000 (450) 1000 (225) 0
Load, N (lb)
63mm Bore Size
1400 (315) 700 (158) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
2000 (450)
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5) 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
80mm Bore Size

9000 (2025) 12000 (2700) 9000 (2025)
Load, N (lb)
100mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
6000 (1350)
LEGEND
Standard Composite Oversized Composite Recirculating Ball Bearing
6000 (1350) 3000 (675) 0
3000 (675)
Self Aligning Ball Bearing
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
200 (7.9)
400 (15.7)
600 (23.6)
800 (31.5)
F89
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
4000 (900)
P5T2
6000 (1350)
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4

Standard Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods Oversized Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods The P5L series can be used in conveyor stopping applications. The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum stopping or impact capacity for the P5L Series. The maximum stopping capacity will vary with actuator stroke. These graphs are based on a stroke of 50mm (2 inches), assuming that the moving load is moving

perpendicularly to the support rods. Care should be taken to ensure that the support rods are not damaged during this type of loading. The load should also be centered on the tooling plate. Note: Ball bearings should not be used in this type of application.
P5L Thrust Slides

20mm Bore Size
360 (81) Oversized Composite 800 (180) Oversized Composite 600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0 0 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7) 0.6 (23.6) 0 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7) 0.6 (23.6)
25mm Bore Size

1600 (360) 1200 (270) 800 (180) 400 (90) 0 0
32mm Bore Size

Oversized Composite
Load Weight, N (lb)
Load Weight, N (lb)
240 (54)
120 (27)
Standard Composite
Load Weight, N (lb)
Standard Composite
Standard Composite 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7) 0.6 (23.6)
Load Velocity, m/sec (in/sec)
40mm Bore Size

3600 (810) Oversized Composite
Load Weight, N (lb) Load Weight, N (lb)
50mm Bore Size

6000 (1350) Oversized Composite 4000 (900)
Load Weight, N (lb)
63mm Bore Size

2400 (540)
1200 (270) Standard Composite 0 0 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7) 0.6 (23.6)
80mm Bore Size

12000 (2700) 9000 (2025) 6000 (1350) 3000 (675) 0 0 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7) 0.6 (23.6)
Load Weight, N (lb)
100mm Bore Size

16000 (3600) 12000 (2700) 8000 (1800) 4000 (900) 0 0 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7) 0.6 (23.6) Oversized Composite
Oversized Composite
Load Weight, N (lb)
Standard Composite
Standard Composite
F90
Catalog 0900P-4
50mm (1.97")
P5L Reach Slides

20mm Bore Size
360 (81) Oversized Composite
Load Weight, N (lb)
25mm Bore Size

800 (180) 600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0 Oversized Composite
Load Weight, N (lb)
32mm Bore Size

1600 (360) 1200 (270) 800 (180) 400 (90) 0 Oversized Composite
240 (54)
Load Weight, N (lb)
Standard Composite 0 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7) 0.6 (23.6)
Standard Composite 0 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7) 0.6 (23.6)
F
P5T
0.6 (23.6)
40mm Bore Size

3600 (810) Oversized Composite 2400 (540) 6000 (1350)
50mm Bore Size

63mm Bore Size
Load Weight, N (lb)
Load Weight, N (lb)
Load Weight, N (lb)
Oversized Composite 6000 (1350)
3000 (675) Standard Composite 0 0 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7)
80mm Bore Size

12000 (2700) 9000 (2025) 6000 (1350) 3000 (675) 0 0 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7) 0.6 (23.6)
Load Weight, N (lb)
100mm Bore Size

16000 (3600) 12000 (2700) 8000 (1800) 4000 (900) 0 0 0.2 (7.9) 0.4 (15.7) 0.6 (23.6) Oversized Composite
Load Weight, N (lb)
Standard Composite
Standard Composite
F91
P5E
Oversized Composite
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4

These graphs illustrate the kinetic energy absorption of the P5L series as a total moving weight versus speed chart for both air cushions and shock absorbers. Moving weight is defined as the weight of the carried load and the weight of any moving parts of the actuator (support rods, tooling plate, etc.). The moving weight from the charts on page F93 should be considered.

Actuator Moving Weight = Base Unit Weight + (Stroke Per Inch Weight) Total Moving Weight = Actuator Moving Weight + Carried Load Note: These charts are to be used only to determine the energy absorption of each guided cylinder and to determine if shocks or cushions are needed.
P5L Thrust Slides

20mm Bore Size
900 (203)
25mm Bore Size

1200 (270) 1600 (360) 1200 (270)
32mm Bore Size
600 (135) Air Cushion 300 (68)
Shock Absorber
Shock Absorber
900 (203) 600 (135)
Shock Absorber 800 (180) Air Cushion 400 (90) 0
Air Cushion 300 (68) 0
0 0 0.5 (19.7) 1.0 (39.4) 1.5 (59.1) 2.0 (78.7)
1.0 (39.4)
2.0 (78.7)
3.0 (118.1)
4.0 (157.5)
1.0 (39.4)
2.0 (78.7)
3.0 (118.1)
4.0 (157.5)
Velocity, m/sec (in/sec)
40mm Bore Size

900 (203)
Moving Weight, N (lb) Moving Weight, N (lb)
50mm Bore Size

2500 (563)
63mm Bore Size

4000 (900) 3000 (675) Shock Absorber 2000 (450) 1000 (225) 0
Shock Absorber 600 (135) Air Cushion 300 (68)
2000 (450) Shock Absorber 1500 (338) Air Cushion 1000 (225) 500 (113) 0
Air Cushion
0 0 1.0 (39.4) 2.0 (78.7) 3.0 (118.1) 4.0 (157.5)
1.0 (39.4)
2.0 (78.7)
3.0 (118.1)
4.0 (157.5)
1.0 (39.4)
2.0 (78.7)
3.0 (118.1)
4.0 (157.5)
80mm Bore Size

6000 (1350)
100mm Bore Size

9000 (2025)
Shock Absorber 4000 (900)
Air Cushion 2000 (450)
0 0 2.0 (78.7) 4.0 (157.5) 6.0 (236.2)
0 0 2.0 (78.7) 4.0 (157.5) 6.0 (236.2)
F92
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data
Moving Weights (Standard Shaft) Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Basic Thrust Unit kg 0.27 0.45 0.78 1.4 2.8 4.7 9.0 16.4 lbs 0.6 1.0 1.7 3.2 6.1 10.5 19.7 36.2 Basic Reach Unit kg 0.32 0.53 0.95 1.7 3.4 6.0 11.7 21.6 lbs 0.7 1.2 2.1 3.8 7.5 13.2 25.8 47.6 Per Inch kg 0.02 0.03 0.06 0.09 0.15 0.21 0.26 0.59 lbs

Moving Weights (Oversized Shaft) Basic Thrust Unit kg 0.35 0.68 1.15 2.2 4.0 7.5 13.9 18.1 lbs 0.8 1.5 2.5 4.7 8.8 16.6 30.7 40.0 Basic Reach Unit kg 0.43 0.85 1.45 2.82 5.21 10.27 19.08 25.57 lbs 0.96 1.88 3.20 6.2 11.5 22.6 42.1 56.4 Per Inch kg 0.03 0.06 0.09 0.15 0.21 0.38 0.59 0.84 lbs 0.07 0.13 0.21 0.32 0.47 0.83 1.29 1.86
0.05 0.07 0.13 0.21 0.32 0.47 0.58 1.29
P5L Reach Slides

20mm Bore Size
900 (203) Shock Absorber
25mm Bore Size

1200 (270) 1600 (360) 1200 (270)
32mm Bore Size
600 (135) Air Cushion 300 (68)
Shock Absorber
900 (203) 600 (135)
Shock Absorber 800 (180) Air Cushion 400 (90) 0
Air Cushion 300 (68) 0
F
4.0 (157.5)
0 0 0.5 (19.7) 1.0 (39.4) 1.5 (59.1) 2.0 (78.7)
1.0 (39.4)
2.0 (78.7)
3.0 (118.1)
4.0 (157.5)
1.0 (39.4)
2.0 (78.7)
3.0 (118.1)
40mm Bore Size

900 (203)
50mm Bore Size

2500 (563)
63mm Bore Size
2000 (450) 1500 (338) 1000 (225) 500 (113) 0
Shock Absorber
Shock Absorber 2000 (450) 1000 (225) 0
Air Cushion
Air Cushion
0 0 1.0 (39.4) 2.0 (78.7) 3.0 (118.1) 4.0 (157.5)
1.0 (39.4)
2.0 (78.7)
3.0 (118.1)
4.0 (157.5)
1.0 (39.4)
2.0 (78.7)
3.0 (118.1)
4.0 (157.5)
80mm Bore Size

6000 (1350)
100mm Bore Size

9000 (2025)
4000 (900)
Shock Absorber
6000 (1350)
Shock Absorber Air Cushion
2000 (450)
Air Cushion
3000 (675)
0 0 2.0 (78.7) 4.0 (157.5) 6.0 (236.2)
0 0 2.0 (78.7) 4.0 (157.5) 6.0 (236.2)
F93
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
3000 (675)
P5T2
4000 (900)
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Standard Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods Recirculating Ball Bearings w/ Carbon or Stainless Steel Rods Self Aligning Ball Bearings w/ Carbon or Stainless Steel Rods The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested side load at a given actuator stroke. The graphs include the weight of the carriage and are based on a bearing life of 10 million cycles under a dynamic loading condition. For an equivalent static load capacity multiply the information in these graphs by 1.5. See the P5L options section of this catalog for more bearing selection information.
P5L Base Slides
F
Load, N (lb)
3600 (810)
20mm Bore Size
4800 (1080)
25mm Bore Size
4mm 3600 (810) 1mm 5mm
Load, N (lb)
2400 (540)
1mm
0.1mm 1200 (270)
Standard Composite
2400 (540)
Standard Composite
Ball Bearing 1200 (270) 0.10mm 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7) 600 (23.6) 700 (27.6) 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7)
Ball Bearing
600 (23.6)
800 (31.5)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
32mm Bore Size

6000 (1350) 3mm 1mm 4000 (900)
9000 (2025)
40mm Bore Size
0.20mm
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
6000 (1350)
Standard Composite
Standard Composite
2000 (450)
Ball Bearing
3000 (675)
Ball Bearing
0.10mm 0 0 300 (11.8) 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4) 0
0.01mm 0
0.05mm 250 (9.8) 500 (19.7) 750 (29.5) 1000 (39.4)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
F94
Catalog 0900P-4
P5L Base Slides
12000 (2700) 1mm 9000 (2025)
50mm Bore Size
20000 (4500) 1mm 15000 (3375)
63mm Bore Size

5mm
5mm
F
P5T
Load, N (lb)
6000 (1350)
Standard Composite
Ball Bearing 3000 (675) 5000 (1125) 0.10mm
Ball Bearing
Standard Composite
0.05mm 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5) 1000 (39.4) 1200 (47.2) 1400 (55.1) 0 400 (15.7) 800 (31.5) 1200 (47.2) 1600 (62.9)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

30000 (6750) 3mm 24000 (5400) 1mm
40000 (9000)
100mm Bore Size
30000 (6750)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)

Standard Composite
20000 (4500)
12000 (2700)
Standard Composite
Ball Bearing 6000 (1350) 0.5mm 0 0 400 (15.7) 800 (31.5) 1200 (47.2) 1600 (62.9)
Ball Bearing
10000 (2250)
0.10mm
0 0 600 (23.6) 1200 (47.2) 1800 (70.9)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
F95
P5E
18000 (4050)
HB
1mm
3mm
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Load, N (lb)
10000 (2250)
Catalog 0900P-4
Oversized Composite w/ Chrome Plated or Stainless Steel Rods The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested side load at a given actuator stroke. The graphs include the weight of the carriage and are based on a bearing life of 10 million cycles under a dynamic loading condition. For an equivalent static load capacity multiply the information in these graphs by 1.5. See the P5L options section of this catalog for more bearing selection information.
P5L Base Slides
4800 (1080)
20mm Bore Size

0.5mm 1mm
6000 (1350) 0.2mm
25mm Bore Size
0.5mm
3600 (810)
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
2400 (540)
4000 (900)
Oversized Composite
0.1mm 1200 (270)
2000 (450)
0.05mm
0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
9000 (2025) 0.2mm
32mm Bore Size
10000 (2250) 0.1mm 0.3mm 7500 (1688)
40mm Bore Size
0.5mm
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
6000 (1350)
Oversized Composite
Oversized Composite
5000 (1125)
3000 (675) 0.05mm 2500 (563) 0.03mm
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F96
Catalog 0900P-4
P5L Base Slides
18000 (4050) 0.15mm 0.3mm 12000 (2700)
50mm Bore Size
30000 (6750) 0.1mm 0.2mm 24000 (5400)
63mm Bore Size
F
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
18000 (4050)
6000 (1350)
0.05mm 0.05mm 0 0 300 (11.8) 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4) 0 250 (9.8) 500 (19.7) 750 (29.5) 1000 (39.4)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

40000 (9000) 0.2mm 0.1mm 30000 (6750)
60000 (13500) 0.2mm 0.1mm
100mm Bore Size
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
40000 (9000)
20000 (4500)
Oversized Composite
Oversized Composite
20000 (4500) 10000 (2250) 0.05mm 0.05mm 0 0 300 (11.8) 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4) 1200 (47.2) 0 0 400 (15.7) 800 (31.5) 1200 (47.2) 1600 (63.0)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
Stroke + d, mm (in)
F97
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
6000 (1350)
P5T2
Oversized Composite
12000 (2700)
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Symmetrical Roll Torsional Loading

The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested roll load at a given actuator stroke. It is assumed that the moment loading is acting about the centerline of the carriage. The graphs include the weight of the carriage and are based on a bearing life of 10 million cycles under a dynamic loading condition. Capacities are based on bearing and shafts only. Mounting bolts/hardware should be investigated per customer application. For an equivalent static load capacity multiply the information in these graphs by 1.5.
Heavy lines show loading; lighter lines show various degrees of deflection. Note: The following variables commonly affect the bearing life of a guided cylinder: Velocity Vibration Orientation Environment (Dust, moisture, etc.)
Standard Shafting
20mm Bore Size
120 (1066) 90 (799) 60 (533) 200 (1776) 150 (1332) 1 100 (888)
25mm Bore Size

300 (2664) 240 (2131) 180 (1598) 120 (1066) 60 (533) 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7) 0
32mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
1
30 (266)
0.5
50 (444)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.3 0.05
200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
0.1
0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 (3.9) (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) (27.6) Stroke, mm (in) 0
0.1
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
40mm Bore Size

480 (4262) 360 (3197) 240 (2131) 120 (1066) 0.05 0 0 250 (9.8) 500 (19.7) Stroke, mm (in) 750 (29.5) 1000 (39.4) 0 0 800 (7104) 600 (5328) 0.05 400 (3552) 200 (1776)
50mm Bore Size

2000 (17760) 1500 (13320) 1000 (8880)
63mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
2.5
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.5
0.5
0.5 500 (4440) 0 0.05
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 (7.9) (15.7)(23.6) (31.5) (39.4) (47.2) (55.1) Stroke, mm (in)
400 (15.7)
800 (31.5)
1200 (47.2)
1600 (63.0)
Stroke, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

3600 (31968) 5000 (44400) 4000 (35520) 3000 (26640) 2000 (17760) 1000 (8880) 0.01 0 0 400 (15.7) 800 (31.5) 1200 (47.2) 1600 (63.0) 0 0
100mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
2400 (21312) 1 1200 (10656)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.6
0.1
LEGEND
Standard Composite Recirculating Ball Bearing
0.1
0.02
600 (23.6)
1200 (47.2)
1800 (70.9)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
F98
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Symmetrical Roll Torsional Loading
Oversized Shafting
20mm Bore Size
160 (1421) 120 (1066) 240 (2131) 180 (1598)
25mm Bore Size

400 (3552) 300 (2664)
32mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.8
80 (710) 40 (355) 0.1 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7)
0.4
120 (1066)
0.3
200 (1776) 100 (888)
0.4
0.1
0.2
60 (533) 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
0.05
0.05
0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6)
F
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
40mm Bore Size

600 (5328) 0.2
Torque, Nm (lb-in) Torque, Nm (lb-in)
50mm Bore Size

1200 (10656) 900 (7992) 0.20 600 (5328) 300 (2664) 0 3000 (26640) 2400 (21312) 1800 (15984) 1200 (10656) 600 (5328) 0 0 250 (9.8) 500 (19.7) Stroke, mm (in) 750 (29.5) 1000 (39.4) 0
63mm Bore Size
400 (3552) 0.05 200 (1776) 0.02 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) Stroke, mm (in) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.10
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.03
250 (9.8)
500 (19.7)
750 (29.5)
1000 (39.4)
Stroke, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

4800 (42624) 3600 (31968) 0.10 2400 (21312) 0.02 1200 (10656) 0 0
0.01
100mm Bore Size

7200 (63936) 0.05
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
4800 (42624) 0.02 0.01 2400 (21312)
0 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4) 1200 (47.2) 0 400 (15.7) 800 (31.5) 1200 (47.2) 1600 (63.0)
300 (11.8)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
F99
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Symmetrical Pitch Torsional Loading

The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested pitch load at a given actuator stroke. It is assumed that the moment loading is acting about the centerline of the carriage. The graphs include the weight of the carriage and are based on a bearing life of 10 million cycles under a dynamic loading condition. Capacities are based on bearing and shafts only. Mounting bolts/hardware should be investigated per customer application. For an equivalent static load capacity multiply the information in these graphs by 1.5.

Standard Shafting
20mm Bore Size
160 (1421) 120 (1066) 240 (2131) 180 (1598) 120 (1066) 60 (533)
25mm Bore Size

360 (3197)
32mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
5
80 (710) 40 (355)
240 (2131)
1 0.5
1
120 (1066)
0.3 0.05
0.1
0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 (3.9) (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) (27.6) Stroke, mm (in) 0 0 100 (3.9)
0.1
0 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7) 0
200 (7.9)
400 (15.7)
600 (23.6)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
40mm Bore Size

600 (5328) 1000 (8880) 750 (6660)
50mm Bore Size

2000 (17760) 1500 (13320)
63mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
400 (3552) 0.5 200 (1776)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
2.5 500 (4440) 250 (2220) 0.05 0 0.5
1000 (8880) 0.5 500 (4440) 0 0.05
0.05 0 0 250 (9.8) 500 (19.7) Stroke, mm (in) 750 (29.5) 1000 (39.4) 0
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 (7.9) (15.7)(23.6) (31.5) (39.4) (47.2) (55.1) Stroke, mm (in)
400 (15.7)
800 (31.5)
1200 (47.2)
1600 (63.0)
Stroke, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

4000 (35520) 3000 (26640) 1 2000 (17760) 1000 (8880) 0.01 0 0 400 (15.7) 800 (31.5) 1200 (47.2) 1600 (63.0) 0 0 0.1 8000 (71040) 6000 (53280)
100mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.6 4000 (35520) 0.1 2000 (17760) 0.02
LEGEND
Standard Composite Recirculating Ball Bearing Self Aligning Ball Bearing
600 (23.6)
1200 (47.2)
1800 (70.9)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
F100
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Symmetrical Pitch Torsional Loading
Oversized Shafting
20mm Bore Size
200 (1776) 150 (1332) 280 (2486) 210 (1865)
25mm Bore Size

480 (4262) 360 (3197)
32mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.4
100 (888) 50 (444)
0.8
0.4
140 (1243) 70 (622) 0
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.3
240 (2131) 120 (1066) 0
0.2
0.1
0.1
0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 0
0.05
0.05
F
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
40mm Bore Size

800 (7104) 600 (5328) 0.2 400 (3552) 200 (1776) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) Stroke, mm (in) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5) 1600 (14208) 1200 (10656)
50mm Bore Size

3600 (31968)
63mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.20 800 (7104) 400 (3552) 0 0 0.02 0.05
0.05
0.10
1200 (10656)
0.03
0.02
0.01 0 250 (9.8) 500 (19.7) Stroke, mm (in) 750 (29.5) 1000 (39.4) 0 250 (9.8) 500 (19.7) 750 (29.5) 1000 (39.4)
Stroke, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

6000 (53280) 9000 (79920)
100mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
4000 (35520) 0.10 2000 (17760)
6000 (53280) 0.05
0.02
3000 (26640)
0.02
0 0
0.01
0 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4) 1200 (47.2) 0
0.01 400 (15.7) 800 (31.5) 1200 (47.2) 1600 (63.0)
300 (11.8)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
F101
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
2400 (21312)
P5T2
P5T
100 (3.9)
200 (7.9)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
200 (7.9)
400 (15.7)
600 (23.6)
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Symmetrical Yaw Torsional Loading

The graphs on these two pages illustrate the maximum suggested yaw load at a given actuator stroke. It is assumed that the moment loading is acting about the centerline of the carriage. The graphs include the weight of the carriage and are based on a bearing life of 10 million cycles under a dynamic loading condition. Capacities are based on bearing and shafts only. Mounting bolts/hardware should be investigated per customer application. For an equivalent static load capacity multiply the information in these graphs by 1.5.

Standard Shafting
20mm Bore Size
160 (1421) 4
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
25mm Bore Size

240 (2131) 4 180 (1598) 120 (1066) 360 (3197)
32mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
120 (1066)
1
80 (710) 40 (355)
240 (2131)
0.5
1
60 (533)
120 (1066)
0.1
0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 (3.9) (7.9) (11.8) (15.7) (19.7) (23.6) (27.6) Stroke, mm (in) 0 0
0.1
0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5) 0
0.05
300 (11.8) 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
40mm Bore Size

600 (5328) 1000 (8880)
50mm Bore Size

2400 (21312) 3 1800 (15984)
63mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
400 (3552) 0.2 200 (1776) 0.02 0 0 250 (9.8) 500 (19.7) Stroke, mm (in) 750 (29.5) 1000 (39.4) 2
0.5 500 (4440) 250 (2220) 0.05 0 0 300 (11.8) 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4) 1200 (47.2) 1500 (59.1)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
750 (6660)
1200 (10656) 0.5 600 (5328) 0.02 0 0 400 (15.7) 800 (31.5) 1200 (47.2) 1600 (63.0)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

4000 (35520) 3000 (26640) 1 2000 (17760) 0.2 1000 (8880) 0.02 0 0 400 (15.7) 800 (31.5) 1200 (47.2) 1600 (23.6) 8000 (71040)
100mm Bore Size

0.8
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
6000 (53280) 0.2 4000 (35520) 2000 (17760) 0 0 600 (23.6) 1200 (47.2) 1800 (70.9)
LEGEND
Standard Composite Recirculating Ball Bearing Self Aligning Ball Bearing
0.02
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
F102
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Symmetrical Yaw Torsional Loading
Oversized Shafting
20mm Bore Size
200 (1776) 150 (1332) 100 (888) 50 (444) 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 280 (2486) 210 (1865)
25mm Bore Size

480 (4262) 360 (3197) 240 (2131) 120 (1066) 0 0
32mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.2
0.8
0.5
140 (1243)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.1
70 (622) 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
0.1
0.3
0.05
0.05
0.05
F
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
40mm Bore Size

800 (7104) 600 (5328)
400 (3552) 200 (1776) 0 0 200 (7.9) 400 (15.7) Stroke, mm (in) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.5) 1600 (14208) 1200 (10656) 800 (7104)
50mm Bore Size

3600 (31968)
63mm Bore Size
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.15
0.05
0.15
0.05 400 (3552) 0.02 0 0 300 (11.8) 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4)
0.1
1200 (10656) 0.01 0 0 250 (9.8) 500 (19.7) 750 (29.5) 1000 (39.4)
0.05
0.02
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
80mm Bore Size

4800 (42624) 3600 (31968) 2400 (21312)
0.02
100mm Bore Size

9000 (79920) 0.08
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
0.06
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
6000 (53280) 0.02 3000 (26640) 0.01
1200 (10656) 0.01 0 0 300 (11.8) 600 (23.6) 900 (35.4) 1200 (47.2)
0 0 400 (15.7) 800 (31.5) 1200 (47.2) 1600 (63.0)
Stroke, mm (in)
Stroke, mm (in)
F103
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
2400 (21312)
P5T2
P5T
200 (7.9)
400 (15.7)
600 (23.6)
Catalog 0900P-4

These graphs illustrate the kinetic energy absorption of the P5L series as a weight versus speed chart for both air cushions and shock absorbers. Moving weight is defined as the weight of the carried load and the weight of any moving parts of the actuator (support rods, tooling plate, etc.). The moving weight from the chart to the right should be considered. Note: These charts are to be used only to determine the energy absorption of each guided cylinder and to determine if shocks or cushions are needed.

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Moving Weights (Standard Shaft) kg 0.60 1.17 1.77 3.10 7.10 13.4 22.5 41.9 lbs 1.3 2.6 3.9 6.8 15.7 29.5 49.6 92.4 Moving Weights (Oversized Shaft) kg 0.51 1.01 1.51 2.70 6.70 10.9 19.3 33.9 lbs 1.1 2.2 3.3 5.9 14.8 24.0 42.6 746.5
Note: Cylinder moving parts considered negligible.
P5L Base Slides

20mm Bore Size
25mm Bore Size

800 (180) Shock Absorber 600 (135)
32mm Bore Size
240 (54) 180 (41) 120 (27) 60 (14) 0 0 0.5 (19.7) 1.0 (39.4) 1.5 (59.1) 2.0 (78.7)
600 (135) 400 (90) Air Cushion 200 (45) 0 0 1.0 (39.4) 2.0 (78.7) 3.0 (118.1) 4.0 (157.5)
Air Cushion
0 0 1.0 (39.4) 2.0 (78.7) 3.0 (118.1) 4.0 (157.5)
40mm Bore Size

900 (203)
50mm Bore Size

6000 (1350)
63mm Bore Size

2400 (540) 1800 (405) Air Cushion 1200 (270) 600 (135) 0
Air Cushion 300 (68)
2000 (450)
Air Cushion
0 0 1.0 (39.4) 2.0 (78.7) 3.0 (118.1)
0 0 1.0 (39.4) 2.0 (78.7) 3.0 (118.1) 4.0 (157.5)
0.5 (19.7)
1.0 (39.4)
1.5 (59.1)
2.0 (78.7)
2.5 (98.4)
80mm Bore Size

100mm Bore Size

6000 (1350)
12000 (2700) 8000 (1800) Air Cushion 4000 (900) 0 0 1.2 (47.2) 2.4 (94.5) 3.6 (141.7) 4.8 (188.9)
0 0 1.0 (39.4) 2.0 (78.7) 3.0 (118.1)
F104
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Dimensions Thrust Slides
M + STROKE
+0.03
2X V 0.00 W DOWEL HOLES
4X CC THREAD THRU FAR SIDE FOR BB SHCS
L + STROKE A K N E/2 FF + STROKE
U/2
T/2 T
2X THRU HOLE FOR AA SHCS
2X F KK Y 2X V 0.00 LL DOWEL HOLES (FAR SIDE)

+0.03
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
A
60 (2.4) 76 (3.0) 84 (3.3) 104 (4.1) 130 (5.1) 152 (6.0) 180 (7.1) 222 (8.7)
B
98 (3.9) 122 (4.8) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.5) 216 (8.5) 260 (10.2) 320 (12.6) 390 (15.4)
C
30 (1.2) 38 (1.5) 44 (1.7) 56 (2.2) 70 (2.8) 84 (3.3) 102 (4.0) 120 (4.7)
Ds*
10 (0.4) 12 (0.5) 16 (0.6) 20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 40 (1.6) 50 (2.0)
Do*
12 (0.5) 16 (0.6) 20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 40 (1.6) 50 (2.0) 60 (2.4)
E
68 (2.7) 84 (3.3) 92 (3.6) 116 (4.6) 148 (5.8) 176 (6.9) 220 (8.7) 260 (10.2)
F**
1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
K
20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 27 (1.1) 33 (1.3) 39 (1.5) 43 (1.7) 49 (1.9) 59 (2.3)
L
86 (3.4) 107 (4.2) 117 (4.6) 143 (5.6) 175 (6.9) 203 (8.0) 237 (9.3) 289 (11.4)
M
114 (4.5) 126 (5.0) 140 (5.5) 163 (6.4) 195 (7.7) 219 (8.6) 249 (9.8) 306 (12.0)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
P
96 (3.8) 119 (4.7) 137 (5.4) 161 (6.3) 211 (8.3) 255 (10.0) 315 (12.4) 383 (15.1)
R
26 (1.0) 33 (1.3) 39 (1.5) 51 (2.0) 63 (2.5) 77 (3.0) 95 (3.7) 111 (4.4)
F
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
S
40 (1.6) 48 (1.9) 50 (2.0) 70 (2.8) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9) 124 (4.9) 148 (5.8)
T
16 (0.6) 20 (0.8) 24 (0.9) 32 (1.3) 42 (1.7) 52 (2.0) 62 (2.4) 72 (2.8)
U
40 (1.6) 48 (1.9) 50 (2.0) 70 (2.8) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9) 124 (4.9) 148 (5.8)
V
4.03 (0.2) 5.03 (0.2) 6.03 (0.2) 8.03 (0.3) 8.03 (0.3) 10.03 (0.4) 12.03 (0.5) 12.03 (0.5)
W
4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 8 (0.3) 8 (0.3) 10 (0.4) 12 (0.5) 12 (0.5)
Y
36 (1.4) 46 (1.8) 53 (2.1) 65 (2.6) 83 (3.3) 101 (4.0) 127 (5.0) 154 (6.1)
AA
M5 M6 M8 M10 M10 M12 M16 M20
BB
M4 M5 M6 M8 M8 M10 M14 M16
CC
M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75 M16x1.5 M20x2.5
FF
45 (1.8) 46 (1.8) 43 (1.7) 49 (1.9) 53 (2.1) 52 (2.0) 64 (2.5) 66 (2.6)
KK
16 (0.6) 22 (0.9) 28 (1.1) 30 (1.2) 43 (1.7) 51 (2.0) 65 (2.6) 80 (3.1)
LL
4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 8 (0.3) 8 (0.3) 10 (0.4) 12 (0.5) 12 (0.5)
Dimensions in mm (in)
* s = standard, o = oversized
** NPTF or BSPT
w/cushions M5/10-32 Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
F105
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Dimensions Reach Slides
M + STROKE 2X V W DOWEL HOLES

+0.03 0.00
4X CC THREAD THRU FAR SIDE FOR BB SHCS
L + STROKE A K N U/2 FF + STROKE E/2
4X THRU HOLE FOR AA SHCS T/2 T C R KK DD Y 2X V 0.00 LL DOWEL HOLES (FAR SIDE)
+0.03
2X F D
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
A
98 (3.9) 122 (4.8) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.5) 216 (8.5) 260 (10.2) 320 (12.6) 390 (15.4)
B
98 (3.9) 122 (4.8) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.5) 216 (8.5) 260 (10.2) 320 (12.6) 390 (15.4)
C
30 (1.2) 38 (1.5) 44 (1.7) 56 (2.2) 70 (2.8) 84 (3.3) 102 (4.0) 120 (4.7)
Ds*
10 (0.4) 12 (0.5) 16 (0.6) 20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 40 (1.6) 50 (2.0)
Do*
12 (0.5) 16 (0.6) 20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 40 (1.6) 50 (2.0) 60 (2.4)
E
68 (2.7) 84 (3.3) 92 (3.6) 116 (4.6) 148 (5.8) 176 (6.9) 220 (8.7) 260 (10.2)
F**
1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
K
20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 27 (1.1) 33 (1.3) 39 (1.5) 43 (1.7) 49 (1.9) 59 (2.3)
L
124 (4.9) 153 (6.0) 173 (6.8) 205 (8.1) 261 (10.3) 311 (12.2) 377 (14.8) 457 (18.0)
M
152 (6.0) 172 (6.8) 196 (7.7) 225 (8.9) 281 (11.1) 327 (12.9) 389 (15.3) 474 (18.7)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
P
96 (3.8) 119 (4.7) 137 (5.4) 161 (6.3) 211 (8.3) 255 (10.0) 315 (12.4) 383 (15.1)
R
26 (1.0) 33 (1.3) 39 (1.5) 51 (2.0) 63 (2.5) 77 (3.0) 9 (3.7) 111 (4.4)
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
S
40 (1.6) 48 (1.9) 50 (2.0) 70 (2.8) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9) 124 (4.9) 148 (5.8)
T
16 (0.6) 20 (0.8) 24 (0.9) 32 (1.3) 42 (1.7) 52 (2.0) 62 (2.4) 72 (2.8)
U
40 (1.6) 48 (1.9) 50 (2.0) 70 (2.8) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9) 124 (4.9) 148 (5.8)
V
4.03 (0.2) 5.03 (0.2) 6.03 (0.2) 8.03 (0.3) 8.03 (0.3) 10.03 (0.4) 12.03 (0.5) 12.03 (0.5)
W
4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 8 (0.3) 8 (0.3) 10 (0.4) 12 (0.5) 12 (0.5)
Y
40 (1.6) 48 (1.9) 50 (2.0) 70 (2.8) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9) 124 (4.9) 148 (5.8)
AA
M5 M6 M8 M10 M10 M12 M16 M20
BB
M4 M5 M6 M8 M8 M10 M14 M16
CC
M5X0.8 M6X1.0 M8X1.25 M10X1.5 M10X1.5 M12X1.75 M16X1.5 M20X2.5
DD
36 (1.4) 46 (1.8) 53 (2.1) 65 (2.6) 83 (3.3) 101 (4.0) 127 (5.0) 154 (6.1)
FF
45 (1.8) 46 (1.8) 43 (1.7) 49 (1.9) 53 (2.1) 52 (2.0) 64 (2.5) 66 (2.6)
KK
16 (0.6) 22 (0.9) 28 (1.1) 30 (1.2) 43 (1.7) 51 (2.0) 65 (2.6) 80 (3.1)
LL
4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 8 (0.3) 8 (0.3) 10 (0.4) 12 (0.5) 12 (0.5)
** NPTF or BSPT
w/cushions M5/10-32 Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
F106
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Dimensions Base Slides
M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE A 2X CC THREAD THRU (SHOCK) H H/2 U B P 2X JJ 0.00 KK DOWEL HOLES E W X N
+0.03 +0.03 LL 0.00
J FF + STROKE MM 2X F B/2
S/2
DOWEL Z S G NN (FAR SIDE) 4X THRU HOLE FOR HH SHCS K EE
2X DRILL AND C'BORE FOR AA SHCS
V E
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
A
98 (3.9) 122 (4.8) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.5) 216 (8.5) 260 (10.2) 320 (12.6) 390 (15.4)
B
100 (3.9) 124 (4.9) 142 (5.6) 168 (6.6) 218 (8.6) 262 (10.3) 322 (12.7) 392 (15.4)
C
30 (1.2) 38 (1.5) 44 (1.7) 56 (2.2) 70 (2.8) 84 (3.3) 102 (4.0) 120 (4.7)
Ds*
10 (0.4) 12 (0.5) 16 (0.6) 20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 40 (1.6) 50 (2.0)
Do*
12 (0.5) 16 (0.6) 20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 40 (1.6) 50 (2.0) 60 (2.4)
E
8 (0.3) 14 (0.6) 12 (0.5) 13 (0.5) 16 (0.6) 19 (0.7) 24 (0.9) 28 (1.1)
F**
1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
G
98 (3.9) 122 (4.8) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.5) 216 (8.5) 260 (10.2) 320 (12.6) 390 (15.4)
H
40 (1.6) 48 (1.9) 50 (2.0) 70 (2.8) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9) 124 (4.9) 148 (5.8)
J
40 (1.6) 48 (1.9) 50 (2.0) 70 (2.8) 80 (3.1) 100 (3.9) 124 (4.9) 148 (5.8)
K
18 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 22 (0.9) 26 (1.0) 28 (1.1) 42 (1.7) 42 (1.7) 62 (2.4)
L
140 (5.5) 176 (6.9) 198 (7.8) 232 (9.1) 292 (11.5) 350 (13.8) 434 (17.1) 528 (20.8)
M
211 (8.3) 247 (9.7) 271 (10.7) 312 (12.3) 384 (15.1) 442 (17.4) 545 (21.5) 639 (25.2)
N
18 (0.7) 24 (0.9) 26 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 35 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 54 (2.1) 66 (2.6)
P+.03
5.03 (0.2) 6.03 (0.2) 6.03 (0.2) 10.03 (0.4) 10.03 (0.4) 12.03 (0.5) 16.03 (0.6) 16.03 (0.6)
R
30 (1.2) 38 (1.5) 44 (1.7) 56 (2.2) 70 (2.8) 84 (3.3) 102 (4.0) 120 (4.7)
S
68 (2.7) 84 (3.3) 92 (3.6) 116 (4.6) 148 (5.8) 176 (6.9) 220 (8.7) 260 (10.2)
F
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
T
120 (4.7) 156 (6.1) 170 (6.7) 198 (7.8) 254 (10.0) 304 (12.0) 374 (4.7) 452 (17.8)
U
11 (0.4) 12 (0.5) 11 (0.4) 20 (0.8) 22 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 36 (1.4)
V***
3 (0.1) 3 (0.1) 3 (0.1) 3 (0.1) 3 (0.1) 3 (0.1) 3 (0.1) 3 (0.1)
W
1 (0.0) 1 (0.0) 1 (0.0) 1 (0.0) 1 (0.0) 1 (0.0) 1 (0.0) 1 (0.0)
X
68 (2.7) 84 (3.3) 92 (3.6) 116 (4.6) 148 (5.8) 176 (6.9) 220 (8.7) 260 (10.2)
Y
14 (0.6) 18 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 27 (1.1) 34 (1.3) 41 (1.6) 50 (2.0) 59 (2.3)
Z
86 (3.4) 104 (4.1) 120 (4.7) 144 (5.7) 188 (7.4) 224 (8.8) 276 (10.9) 336 (13.2)
AA
M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30
CC
M12 M14 M14 M20 M25 M25 M33 M36
EE
16 (0.6) 20 (0.8) 23 (0.9) 29 (1.1) 36 (1.4) 43 (1.7) 52 (2.0) 61 (2.4)
FF
45 (1.8) 46 (1.8) 43 (1.7) 49 (1.9) 53 (2.1) 52 (2.0) 64 (2.5) 66 (2.6)
HH
M5 M6 M8 M10 M10 M12 M16 M20
JJ
4.03 (0.2) 5.03 (0.2) 6.03 (0.2) 8.03 (0.3) 8.03 (0.3) 10.03 (0.4) 12.03 (0.5) 12.03 (0.5)
KK
4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 8 (0.3) 8 (0.3) 10 (0.4) 12 (0.5) 12 (0.5)
LL
5.03 (0.2) 6.03 (0.2) 6.03 (0.2) 10.03 (0.4) 10.03 (0.4) 12.03 (0.5) 16.03 (0.6) 16.03 (0.6)
MM
5 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 10 (0.4) 10 (0.4) 12 (0.5) 16 (0.6) 16 (0.6)
NN
50 (2.0) 62 (2.4) 71 (2.8) 84 (3.3) 109 (4.3) 131 (5.2) 161 (6.3) 196 (7.7)
* s = standard; o = oversized ** NPTF or BSPT w/cushions M5/10-32 *** Space between housing and end plate in both extend and retract positions.
F107
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Bushings (J*, G*, H*, S*)

Several bushing, bearing and shaft options are available. To assure maximum life from the P5L guidance system, it is critical to match the bearing and shaft type to the application and environment it will be used in.
For bushing load capacities, reference the Engineering Data pages of this section.
Recirculating Ball Bearing
Composite Bushing
Bearing Type Composite Recirculating Ball Bearings Self-Aligning Recirculating Ball Bearings
Load Capacity Short Stroke Very Good Good* Good* Long Strokes Average Very Good Excellent
Stroke Lengths Short Long Longest
Wet Environment Excellent Poor Poor
Wear Characteristics Good Excellent Excellent
*It is not recommended to use ball bearings in extremely short strokes subject to rapid cycling Note: Stainless steel shafts should be used in damp or wet environments
Stainless Steel Shafts

Case hardened, high carbon alloy steel shafting is utilized for standard slides. Stainless steel shafting can be specified for corrosive applications. Note: Carbon steel rods should not be used in any application subject to any amount of moisture.
T-Slots (-, A)
Mounting T-slots provide quick and flexible mounting between base, thrust and reach slides. Extruded T-slots are standard on models with bore sizes 20-40mm. Machined T-slots are optional on models with bore sizes from 50-100mm.
Bore
20 25 32
C
A
10.0 (0.39) 12.0 (0.47) 15.0 (0.59) 19.0 (0.75) 19.0 (0.75) 21 (0.83) 27 (1.06) 33 (1.30)
B
5.8 (0.23) 6.8 (0.27) 8.8 (0.35) 10.8 (0.43) 10.8 (0.43) 12.8 (0.50) 16.8 (0.66) 21 (0.83)
C
9.0 (0.35) 12.0 (0.47) 14.0 (0.55) 15.0 (0.59) 16 (0.63) 21.5 (0.85) 29.5 (1.16) 35 (1.38)
D
7.0 (0.28) 9.0 (0.35) 11.0 (0.43) 12.0 (0.47) 13 (0.51) 18.5 (0.73) 24.5 (0.96) 30 (1.18)
E
2.0 (0.08) 3.0 (0.12) 3.5 (0.14) 3.0 (0.12) 4.0 (0.16) 7.5 (0.30) 9.5 (0.37) 12.5 (0.49)
40
E D
B A
50 63 80
100
F108
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Thrust / Reach Models Shock Absorbers

Optional adjustable shock absorbers are available on the P5L series. When specifying this option verify the kinetic energy on pages F92-F93. To achieve proper operation it is important to adjust the shock absorber per the application. To properly adjust the shock absorber, cycle the guided cylinder to impact the shock absorber. Rotate the shock adjustment knob, located on the front or the rear of the shock, to achieve a smooth deceleration. Reducing the setting (achieved by rotating the adjustment knob in the counterclockwise direction or towards 9) decreases the resistance. Increasing the setting (achieved by rotating the adjustment in the clockwise direction of towards 0) increases the resistance. A properly adjusted shock absorber will provide smooth deceleration through the stroke of the shock. The shock absorber option can also be used as a stroke adjuster. To adjust the stroke of the actuator, loosen the socket head cap screw on the striker plate. Note: Using the shock absorber option as a stroke adjuster will only reduce the actuator stroke from a maximum value given in the actuator part number and cannot add additional stroke.
Strike Plate
Shock Absorber
Shock Absorbers Extend and Retract (AA)

K N
M + STROKE L + STROKE NN (Retracted Shock)
F
P5T
TT G
FF + STROKE
MM
TD
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Gs*
9 (0.4) 11 (0.4) 13 (0.5) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 19 (0.7)
Ks*
26 (1.0) 33 (1.3) 37 (1.5) 45 (1.8) 51 (2.0) 55 (2.2) 61 (2.4) 75 (3.0)
Go*
11 (0.4) 13 (0.5) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 19 (0.7) 19 (0.7)
Ko*
28 (1.1) 35 (1.4) 39 (1.5) 45 (1.8) 51 (2.0) 55 (2.2) 65 (2.6) 75 (3.0)
Ls*
100 (3.9) 123 (4.8) 136 (5.4) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 258 (10.2) 318 (12.5)
Thrust Lo*
102 (4.0) 127 (5.0) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 266 (10.5) 318 (12.5)
M
126 (5.0) 140 (5.5) 156 (6.1) 181 (7.1) 213 (8.4) 237 (9.3) 267 (10.5) 328 (12.9)
Ls*
138 (5.4) 169 (6.7) 192 (7.6) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 398 (15.7) 486 (19.1)
Reach Lo*
140 (5.5) 173 (6.8) 196 (7.7) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 406 (15.6) 486 (19.1)
M
164 (6.5) 186 (7.3) 212 (8.3) 243 (9.6) 299 (11.8) 345 (13.6) 407 (16.0) 496 (19.5)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
FF
51 (2.0) 52 (2.0) 49 (1.9) 55 (2.2) 59 (2.3) 58 (2.3) 70 (2.8) 72 (2.8)
MM
136 (5.4) 170 (6.7) 188 (7.4) 236 (9.3) 296 (11.7) 340 (13.4) 416 (16.4) 498 (19.6)
NN
74 (2.9) 80.1 (3.2) 80.1 (3.2) 99.5 (3.9) 117.3 (4.6) 117.3 (4.6) 140.5 (5.5) 140.5 (5.5)
TD
M12X1.0 M14X1.5 M14X1.5 M20X1.5 M25X1.5 M25X1.5 M33X1.5 M36X1.5
TT
48 (1.9) 57 (2.2) 66 (2.6) 79 (3.1) 98 (3.9) 108 (4.3) 126 (5.0) 157 (6.2)
F109
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Thrust / Reach Models Shock Absorbers Extend Only (AN)

M + STROKE L + STROKE K N FF + STROKE
MM
TT
TD NN (Retracted Shock)
Bore
20 25 32 40
Gs*
9 (0.4) 11 (0.4) 13 (0.5) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 19 (0.7)
Go*
11 (0.4) 13 (0.5) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 19 (0.7) 19 (0.7)
K
20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 27 (1.1) 33 (1.3) 39 (1.5) 43 (1.7) 49 (1.9) 59 (2.3)
Ls*
100 (3.9) 123 (4.8) 136 (5.4) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 258 (10.2) 318 (12.5)
Thrust Lo*
102 (4.0) 127 (5.0) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 266 (10.5) 318 (12.5)
M
117 (4.6) 129 (5.1) 143 (5.6) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 222 (8.7) 252 (9.9) 309 (12.2)
Ls*
138 (5.4) 169 (6.7) 192 (7.6) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 398 (15.7) 486 (19.1)
Reach Lo* M
140 (5.5) 173 (6.8) 196 (7.7) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 406 (15.6) 486 (19.1 153 (6.0) 185 (7.3) 197 (7.8) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 330 (13.0) 388 (15.3) 477 (18.8)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
FF
48 (1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7)
MM
117 (4.6) 146 (5.7) 164 (6.5) 201 (7.9) 256 (10.1) 300 (11.8) 368 (14.5) 444 (17.5)
NN
74 (2.9) 80.1 (3.2) 80.1 (3.2) 99.5 (3.9) 117.3 (4.6) 117.3 (4.6) 140.5 (5.5) 140.5 (5.5)
TD
TT
48 (1.9) 57 (2.2) 66 (2.6) 79 (3.1) 98 (3.9) 108 (4.3) 126 (5.0) 157 (6.2)
50 63 80 100
Shock Absorbers Retract Only (NA)
NN (Retracted Shock) K G N
M + STROKE L + STROKE
TD
TT MM
FF + STROKE
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Gs*
9 (0.4) 11 (0.4) 13 (0.5) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 19 (0.7)
Ks*
26 (1.0) 33 (1.3) 37 (1.5) 45 (1.8) 51 (2.0) 55 (2.2) 61 (2.4) 75 (3.0)
Go*
11 (0.4) 13 (0.5) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 19 (0.7) 19 (0.7)
Ko*
28 (1.1) 35 (1.4) 39 (1.5) 45 (1.8) 51 (2.0) 55 (2.2) 65 (2.6) 75 (3.0)
Ls*
100 (3.9) 123 (4.8) 136 (5.4) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 258 (10.2) 318 (12.5)
Thrust Lo* M
102 (4.0) 127 (5.0) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.8) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 266 (10.5) 318 (12.5) 123 (4.8) 137 (5.4) 153 (6.0) 178 (7.0) 210 (8.3) 234 (9.2) 264 (10.4) 325 (12.8)
Reach Ls* Lo*

138 (5.4) 169 (6.7) 192 (7.6) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 398 (15.7) 486 (19.1) 140 (5.5) 173 (6.8) 196 (7.7) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 406 (15.6) 486 (19.1)
M
161 (6.3) 183 (7.2) 209 (8.2) 240 (9.4) 296 (11.7) 342 (13.5) 404 (15.9) 493 (19.4)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
FF
48 (1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7)
MM
117 (4.6) 146 (5.7) 164 (6.5) 201 (7.9) 256 (10.1) 300 (11.8) 368 (14.5) 444 (17.5)
NN
74 (2.9) 80.1 (3.2) 80.1 (3.2) 99.5 (3.9) 117.3 (4.6) 117.3 (4.6) 140.5 (5.5) 140.5 (5.5)
TD
TT
48 (1.9) 57 (2.2) 66 (2.6) 79 (3.1) 98 (3.9) 108 (4.3) 126 (5.0) 157 (6.2)
F110
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Thrust / Reach Models Cylinder Cushions

Fully adjustable cylinder cushions can be provided to reduce speed and energy at the end of cylinder stroke. Note: If stroke adjustment is used in conjunction with cylinder cushions, the cushion effectiveness may be affected.

Cushion Adjustment
Full Flow Port
Micro Adjust (EE)

Micro adjusters can be used as an accurate and fine adjustment of end of stroke position. Actual per end stroke adjustment depends on model size. See chart below. Micro adjusters must be ordered as both ends only. Caution should be used as cushion effectiveness may be affected. Note: Using micro adjusters will only reduce the actuator stroke from a maximum value given in the actuator part number and cannot add additional stroke.
Stroke Adjuster
M + STROKE L + STROKE FF + STROKE
F
P5T
Set Screw N K AZ
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Kmin
23 (0.9) 28 (1.1) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 62 (2.4)
Kmax
28 (1.1) 37 (1.5) 38 (1.5) 48 (1.9) 57 (2.2) 63 (2.5) 69 (2.7) 76 (3.0)
Ls*
100 (3.9) 123 (4.8) 136 (5.4) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 258 (10.2) 318 (12.5)
Thrust Lo*
102 (4.0) 127 (5.0) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 266 (10.5) 318 (12.5)
M
123 (4.8) 135 (5.3) 149 (5.9) 172 (6.8) 204 (8.0) 228 (9.0) 258 (10.2) 315 (12.4)
Ls*
138 (5.4) 169 (6.7) 192 (7.6) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 398 (15.7) 486 (19.1)
Reach Lo*
140 (5.5) 173 (6.8) 196 (7.7) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 406 (15.6) 486 (19.1)
M
161 (6.3) 181 (7.1) 205 (8.1) 234 (9.2) 290 (11.4) 336 (13.2) 398 (15.7) 483 (19.0)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
AZmin
3.5 (0.1) 3.5 (0.1) 4 (0.2) 5.3 (0.2) 6.4 (0.3) 7.5 (0.3) 7.5 (0.3) 10 (0.4)
AZmax
8.5 (0.3) 12.5 (0.5) 12 (0.5) 17.3 (0.7) 21.4 (0.8) 24.5 (1.0) 24.5 (1.0) 24 (0.9)
FF
51 (2.0) 52 (2.0) 49 (1.9) 55 (2.2) 59 (2.3) 58 (2.3) 70 (2.8) 72 (2.8)
F111
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Set Screw
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Thrust / Reach Models Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars

Bumpers provide end of stroke noise reduction. Bumpers can be used in conjunction with adjustable stop collars to provide adjustment. When a bumper is specified in the extend stroke a stop collar is provided. Bumpers provide minimal energy absorption. If high speeds are present consult the kinetic energy section of this catalog to determine if cylinder cushions or shock absorbers are recommended. A properly adjusted bumper and stop collar will prevent the cylinder from bottoming on the cylinder end cap thus increasing cylinder life.

Bumper with Adjustable Stop Collar, Extend
Bumper with Adjustable Stop Collar, Retract
P5L-T thrust slide shown
Bumpers Both Ends (KB)

K LL
FF + STROKE
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Hs*
24 (0.9) 28 (1.1) 34 (1.3) 40 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 54 (2.1) 60 (2.4) 78 (3.1)
Ho*
28 (1.1) 34 (1.3) 40 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 54 (2.1) 60 (2.4) 78 (3.1) 88 (3.5)
K
23 (0.9) 28 (1.1) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 62 (2.4)
Ls*
100 (3.9) 123 (4.8) 136 (5.4) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 258 (10.1) 318 (12.5)
Thrust Lo*
102 (4.0) 127 (5.0) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 266 (10.5) 318 (12.5)
M
123 (4.8) 135 (5.3) 149 (5.9) 172 (6.8) 204 (8.0) 228 (9.0) 258 (10.2) 315 (12.4)
Ls*
138 (5.4) 169 (6.6) 192 (7.6) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 398 (15.7) 486 (19.1)
Reach Lo*
140 (5.5) 173 (6.8) 248 (9.8) 290 (11.4) 370 (14.6) 440 (17.3) 538 (21.2) 654 (25.7)
M
161 (6.3) 181 (7.1) 205 (8.1) 234 (9.2) 290 (11.4) 336 (13.2) 398 (15.7) 483 (19.0)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
FF
51 (2.0) 52 (2.0) 49 (1.9) 55 (2.2) 59 (2.3) 58 (2.3) 70 (2.8) 72 (2.8)
LL
6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
F112
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Thrust / Reach Models Bumpers on Retract Only (NB)
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
K
23 (0.9) 28 (1.1) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 62 (2.4)
Ls*
Thrust Lo*
Ls*
138 (5.4) 169 (6.7) 192 (7.6) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 398 (15.7) 486 (19.1)
Reach Lo*
140 (5.5) 173 (6.8) 196 (7.7) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 406 (16.0) 486 (19.1)
M
158 (6.2) 178 (7.0) 202 (8.0) 231 (9.1) 287 (11.3) 333 (13.1) 395 (15.6) 480 (18.9)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
FF
48 (1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7)
LL
6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
M + STROKE L + STROKE K
100 102 120 (3.9) (4.0) (4.7) 123 127 132 (4.8) (5.0) (5.2) 136 140 146 (5.4) (5.5) (5.7) 166 166 169 (6.5) (6.5) (6.7) 198 198 201 (7.8) (7.8) (7.9) 224 224 225 (8.8) (8.8) (8.9) 258 266 255 (10.2) (10.5) (10.0) 318 318 312 (12.5) (12.5) (12.3)
N LL FF + STROKE
F
P5T
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Extend Only (KN)
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
K
20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 27 (1.1) 33 (1.3) 39 (1.5) 43 (1.7) 49 (1.9) 59 (2.3)
Ls*
Thrust Lo*
Lo*
147 (5.8) 180 (7.1) 204 (8.0) 240 (9.4) 296 (11.7) 344 (13.5) 411 (16.2) 498 (19.6)
Reach Ls*
149 (5.9) 184 (7.2) 208 (8.2) 240 (9.4) 296 (11.7) 344 (13.5) 419 (16.5) 498 (19.6)
M
155 (6.1) 175 (6.9) 199 (7.8) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 330 (13.0) 392 (15.4) 478 (18.8)
FF
48 (1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7)
F113
P5E
109 111 117 (4.3) (4.4) (4.6) 134 138 129 (5.3) (5.4) (5.1) 148 152 143 (5.8) (6.0) (5.6) 178 178 166 (7.0) (7.0) (6.5) 210 210 198 (8.3) (8.3) (7.8) 236 236 222 (9.3) (9.3) (8.7) 271 279 252 (10.7) (11.0) (9.9) 330 330 309 (13.0) (13.0) (12.2)
N FF + STROKE
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Thrust / Reach Models Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Retract Only (NK)
K
SS
FF + STROKE
Bore
20 25 32 40 50
Ks
32 (1.3) 39 (1.5) 43 (1.7) 51 (2.0) 57 (2.2) 61 (2.4) 67 (2.6) 81 (3.2)
Ko
34 (1.3) 41 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 51 (2.0) 57 (2.2) 61 (2.4) 71 (2.8) 81 (3.2)
Ls*
109 (4.3) 134 (5.3) 148 (5.8) 178 (7.0) 210 (8.3) 236 (9.3) 271 (10.7) 330 (13.0)
Thrust Lo* Ms*

111 (4.4) 138 (5.4) 152 (6.0) 178 (7.0) 210 (8.3) 236 (9.3) 279 (11.0) 330 (13.0) 129 (5.1) 143 (5.6) 159 (6.3) 184 (7.2) 216 (8.5) 240 (9.4) 270 (10.6) 331 (13.0)
Mo*
131 (5.2) 145 (5.7) 161 (6.3) 184 (7.2) 216 (8.5) 240 (9.4) 274 (10.8) 331 (13.0)
Ls*
147 (5.8) 180 (7.1) 204 (8.0) 240 (9.4) 296 (11.7) 344 (13.5) 411 (16.2) 492 (19.4)
Reach Lo* Ms*

149 (5.9) 184 (7.2) 208 (8.2) 240 (9.4) 296 (11.7) 344 (13.5) 419 (16.5) 492 (19.4) 167 (6.6) 189 (7.4) 215 (8.5) 246 (9.7) 302 (11.9) 348 (13.7) 410 (16.1) 499 (19.6)
Mo*
169 (6.7) 191 (7.5) 217 (8.5) 246 (9.7) 302 (11.9) 348 (13.7) 414 (16.3) 499 (19.6)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
FF
48 (1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7)
SSs*
15 (0.6) 17 (0.7) 19 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 25 (1.0)
SSo*
17 (0.7) 19 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 25 (1.0)
63 80 100
Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Both Ends (KK)

K
SS
FF + STROKE
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Hs*
24 (0.9) 28 (1.1) 34 (1.3) 40 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 54 (2.1) 60 (2.4) 78 (3.1)
Ho*
28 (1.1) 34 (1.3) 40 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 54 (2.1) 60 (2.4) 78 (3.1) 88 (3.5)
Ks*
32 (1.3) 39 (1.5) 43 (1.7) 51 (2.0) 57 (2.2) 61 (2.4) 67 (2.6) 81 (3.2)
Ko*
34 (1.3) 41 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 51 (2.0) 57 (2.2) 61 (2.4) 71 (2.8) 71 (2.8)
Ls*
109 (4.3) 134 (5.3) 148 (5.8) 178 (7.0) 210 (8.3) 236 (9.3) 271 (10.7) 330 (13.0)
Thrust Lo* Ms*

111 (4.4) 138 (5.4) 152 (6.0) 178 (7.0) 210 (8.3) 236 (9.3) 279 (11.0) 330 (13.0) 132 (5.2) 146 (5.7) 162 (6.4) 187 (7.4) 219 (8.6) 243 (9.6) 273 (10.7) 334 (13.1)
Mo*
134 (5.3) 148 (5.8) 164 (6.5) 187 (7.4) 219 (8.6) 243 (9.6) 277 (10.9) 334 (13.1)
Ls*
147 (5.8) 180 (7.1) 204 (8.0) 240 (9.4) 296 (11.7) 344 (13.5) 411 (16.2) 498 (19.6)
Reach Lo* Ms*

149 (5.9) 184 (7.2) 208 (8.2) 240 (9.4) 296 (11.7) 344 (13.5) 419 (16.5) 498 (19.6) 170 (6.7) 192 (7.6) 218 (8.6) 249 (9.8) 305 (12.0) 351 (13.8) 413 (16.3) 502 (19.8)
Mo*
172 (6.8) 194 (7.6) 220 (8.7) 249 (9.8) 305 (12.0) 351 (13.8) 417 (16.4) 502 (19.8)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
FF
51 (2.0) 52 (2.0) 49 (1.9) 55 (2.2) 59 (2.3) 55 (2.2) 69 (2.7) 71 (2.8)
SSs*
15 (0.6) 17 (0.7) 19 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 25 (1.0)
SSo*
17 (0.7) 19 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 25 (1.0)
F114
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Base Slides Shock Absorbers

Optional adjustable shock absorbers are available on the P5L series. When specifying this option verify the kinetic energy on page F104. To achieve proper operation it is important to adjust the shock absorber per the application. To properly adjust the shock absorber, cycle the guided cylinder to impact the shock absorber. Rotate the shock adjustment knob, located on the front or the rear of the shock, to achieve a smooth deceleration. Reducing the setting (achieved by rotating the adjustment knob in the counterclockwise direction or towards 9) decreases the resistance. Increasing the setting (achieved by rotating the adjustment in the clockwise direction of towards 0) increases the resistance. A properly adjusted shock absorber will provide smooth deceleration through the stroke of the shock. The shock absorber option can also be used as a stroke adjuster. To adjust the stroke of the actuator, loosen the jam nut and thread shock in/out. Note: Using the shock absorber option as a stroke adjuster will only reduce the actuator stroke from a maximum value given in the actuator part number and cannot add additional stroke.
F
Shock Absorbers Both Ends (AA)
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
L
140 (5.5) 176 (6.9) 198 (7.8) 232 (9.1) 292 (11.5) 350 (13.8) 434 (17.1) 528 (20.8)
M
217 (8.5) 253 (10.0) 277 (10.9) 318 (12.5) 390 (15.4) 448 (17.6) 551 (21.7) 645 (25.4)
T
120 (4.7) 156 (6.1) 170 (6.7) 198 (7.8) 254 (10.0) 304 (12.0) 374 (14.7) 452 (17.8)
FF
51 (2.0) 52 (2.0) 49 (1.9) 55 (2.2) 59 (2.3) 58 (2.3) 70 (2.8) 72 (2.8)
NN
74 (2.9) 80.1 (3.2) 80.1 (3.2) 99.5 (3.9) 117.3 (4.6) 117.3 (4.6) 140.5 (5.5) 140.5 (5.5)
TD
M12X1.0 M14X1.5 M14X1.5 M20X1.5
L + STROKE T + STROKE FF + STROKE
TD
M25X1.5 M25X1.5 M33X1.5 M36X1.5
NN (Retracted Shock)
F115
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
P5T
M + (2 STROKE)
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Base Slides Shock Absorber Extend Only (AN)

Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
L
140 (5.5) 176 (6.9) 198 (7.8) 232 (9.1) 292 (11.5) 350 (13.8) 434 (17.1) 528 (20.8)
M
214 (8.4) 250 (9.8) 274 (10.8) 315 (12.4) 387 (15.2) 445 (17.5) 548 (21.6) 642 (25.3)
T
120 (4.7) 156 (6.1) 170 (6.7) 198 (7.8) 254 (10.0) 304 (12.0) 374 (14.7) 452 (17.8)
FF
48 (1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7)
NN
74 (2.9) 80.1 (3.2) 80.1 (3.2) 99.5 (3.9) 117.3 (4.6) 117.3 (4.6) 140.5 (5.5) 140.5 (5.5)
TD
M12x1.0
M + (2 STROKE)
M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M25x1.5 M33x1.5 M36x1.5

TD
Shock Absorber Retract Only (NA)

Bore 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 L 140 (5.5) 176 (6.9) 198 (7.8) 232 (9.1) 292 (11.5) 350 (13.8) 434 (17.1) 528 (20.8) M 214 (8.4) 250 (9.8) 274 (10.8) 315 (12.4) 387 (15.2) 445 (17.5) 548 (21.6) 642 (25.3) T 120 (4.7) 156 (6.1) 170 (6.7) 198 (7.8) 254 (10.0) 304 (12.0) 374 (14.7) 452 (17.8) FF 48 (1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7) NN 74 (2.9) 80.1 (3.2) 80.1 (3.2) 99.5 (3.9) 117.3 (4.6) 117.3 (4.6) 140.5 (5.5) 140.5 (5.5) TD M12x1.0 M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M25x1.5
TD M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE FF + STROKE
M33x1.5 M36x1.5
F116
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Base Slides Bumpers (B)

Bumpers absorb shock, reduce noise and permit faster cycle times, thereby increasing production rates. They can be placed on the extend, retract or both positions.
Bumpers Both Ends (BB)

Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
K
24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 32 (1.3) 36 (1.4) 41 (1.6) 48 (1.9) 60 (2.4) 72 (2.8)
L
146 (5.7) 182 (7.2) 204 (8.0) 238 (9.4) 298 (11.7) 356 (14.0) 440 (17.3) 534 (21.0)
M
223 (8.8) 259 (10.2) 283 (11.1) 324 (12.8) 396 (15.6) 454 (17.9) 557 (21.9) 651 (25.6)
N
18 (0.7) 24 (0.9) 26 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 35 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 54 (2.1) 66 (2.6)
T
126 (5.0) 163 (6.4) 176 (6.9) 204 (8.0) 260 (10.2) 310 (12.2) 380 (15.0) 458 (18.0)
FF
51 (2.0) 52 (2.0) 49 (1.9) 55 (2.2) 59 (2.3) 58 (2.3) 70 (2.8) 72 (2.8)
LL
6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
LL N LL K M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE FF + STROKE
Bumpers, Extend Only (BN)

Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
K
24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 32 (1.3) 36 (1.4) 41 (1.6) 48 (1.9) 60 (2.4) 72 (2.8)
L
143 (5.6) 179 (7.0) 201 (7.9) 235 (9.3) 295 (11.6) 353 (13.9) 437 (17.2) 531 (20.9)
M
217 (8.5) 253 (10.0) 277 (10.9) 318 (12.5) 390 (15.4) 448 (17.6) 551 (21.7) 645 (25.4)
N
18 (0.7) 24 (0.9) 26 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 35 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 54 (2.1) 66 (2.6)
T
123 (4.8) 159 (6.3) 173 (6.8) 201 (7.9) 257 (10.1) 307 (12.1) 377 (14.8) 455 (17.9)
FF
48 (1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7)
LL
6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
LL N K M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE FF + STROKE
F
P5T P5E
K
Bumpers on Retract Only (NB)

Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
K
24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 32 (1.3) 36 (1.4) 41 (1.6) 48 (1.9) 60 (2.4) 72 (2.8)
L
143 (5.6) 179 (7.0) 201 (7.9) 235 (9.3) 295 (11.6) 353 (13.9) 437 (17.2) 531 (20.9)
M
217 (8.5) 253 (10.0) 277 (10.9) 318 (12.5) 390 (15.4) 448 (17.6) 551 (21.7) 645 (25.4)
N
18 (0.7) 24 (0.9) 26 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 35 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 54 (2.1) 66 (2.6)
T
123 (4.8) 159 (6.3) 173 (6.8) 201 (7.9) 257 (10.1) 307 (12.1) 377 (14.8) 455 (17.9)
FF
48 (1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7)
LL
6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
LL N
F117
HB
6 (0.2)
M + (2 STROKE)
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Base Slides Cylinder Cushions (CC)

Fully adjustable cylinder cushions can be provided to reduce speed and energy at the end of cylinder stroke. Cushions must be ordered as both ends only. Note: If stroke adjustment is used in conjunction with cylinder cushions, the cushion effectiveness may be affected.

Cushion Adjustment
Full Flow Port
Micro Adjusters (EE)

Micro adjusters can be used as an accurate and fine adjustment of end of stroke position. Actual per end stroke adjustment depends on model size. See chart below.
Micro adjusters must be ordered as both ends only. Caution should be used as cushion effectiveness may be affected. Note: Using micro adjusters will only reduce the actuator stroke from a maximum value given in the actuator part number and cannot additional stroke.
M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE
Micro Adjuster (Retract) TD
T + STROKE
FF + STROKE
Micro Adjuster (Extend)
AN AN
Set Screw
N K
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Kmin
21 (0.8) 27 (1.1) 29 (1.1) 33 (1.3) 38 (1.5) 45 (1.8) 57 (2.2) 69 (2.7)
Kmax
48 (1.9) 45 (1.8) 45 (1.8) 56 (2.2) 71 (2.8) 104 (4.1) 87 (3.4) 87 (3.4)
L
140 (5.5) 176 (6.9) 198 (7.8) 232 (9.1) 292 (11.5) 350 (13.8) 434 (17.1) 528 (20.8)
M
217 (8.5) 253 (10.0) 277 (10.9) 318 (12.5) 390 (15.4) 448 (17.6) 551 (21.7) 645 (25.4)
N
18 (0.7) 24 (0.9) 26 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 35 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 54 (2.1) 66 (2.6)
T
120 (4.7) 156 (6.1) 170 (6.7) 198 (7.8) 254 (10.0) 304 (12.0) 374 (14.7) 452 (17.8)
TD
FF
51 (2.0) 52 (2.0) 49 (1.9) 55 (2.2) 59 (2.3) 55 (2.2) 69 (2.7) 71 (2.8)
AN
42 (1.7) 36 (1.4) 34 (1.3) 42 (1.7) 53 (2.1) 77 (3.0) 52 (2.0) 40 (1.6)
F118
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Base Slides Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars

Bumpers provide end of stroke noise reduction. Bumpers can be used in conjunction with adjustable stop collars to provide adjustment. When a bumper is specified in the extend stroke a stop collar is provided. Bumpers provide little energy absorption. If high speeds are present consult the kinetic energy section of this catalog to determine if cylinder cushions or shock absorbers are recommended. A properly adjusted bumper and stop collar will prevent the cylinder from bottoming on the cylinder end cap thus increasing cylinder life.
Adjustable Stop Collar
Bumper
Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Both Ends (KK)

M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE H FF + STROKE
F
P5T
N SS
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Hs*
24 (0.9) 28 (1.1) 34 (1.3) 40 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 54 (2.1) 60 (2.4) 78 (3.1)
Ho*
28 (1.1) 34 (1.3) 40 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 54 (2.1) 60 (2.4) 78 (3.1) 88 (3.5)
Js*
2.5 (0.1) 3 (0.1) 4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
Jo*
3 (0.1) 4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
Ks*
33 (1.3) 41 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 51 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 63 (2.5) 75 (3.0) 91 (3.6)
Ko*
35 (1.4) 43 (1.7) 47 (1.9) 51 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 63 (2.5) 79 (3.1) 91 (3.6)
Ls*
164 (6.5) 204 (8.0) 230 (9.1) 268 (10.6) 328 (12.9) 396 (15.6) 470 (18.5) 572 (22.5)
Lo*
170 (6.7) 208 (8.2) 234 (9.2) 268 (10.6) 328 (12.9) 396 (15.6) 478 (18.8) 572 (22.5)
Ms*
241 (9.5) 281 (11.1) 309 (12.2) 354 (13.9) 426 (16.8) 484 (19.1) 587 (23.1) 689 (27.1)
Mo*
245 (9.6) 285 (11.2) 313 (12.3) 354 (13.9) 426 (16.8) 484 (19.1) 595 (23.4) 689 (27.1)
N
18 (0.7) 24 (0.9) 26 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 35 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 54 (2.1) 66 (2.6)
Ts*
144 (5.7) 184 (7.2) 202 (8.0) 234 (9.2) 290 (11.4) 340 (13.4) 410 (16.1) 496 (19.5)
To*
148 (5.8) 188 (7.4) 206 (8.1) 234 (9.2) 290 (11.4) 340 (13.4) 418 (16.5) 496 (19.5)
FF
51 (2.0) 52 (2.0) 49 (1.9) 55 (2.2) 59 (2.3) 58 (2.3) 70 (2.8) 72 (2.8)
SSs* SSo*
15 (0.6) 17 (0.7) 19 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 17 (0.7) 19 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 25 (1.0)
F119
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
J INTERNAL HEX
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Base Slides Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Extend Only (KN)
H M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE
FF + STROKE
N SS
J INTERNAL HEX
Bore 20
25 32 40 50
Hs* 24
(0.9) 28 (1.1) 34 (1.3) 40 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 54 (2.1) 60 (2.4) 78 (3.1)
Ho* 28
(1.1) 34 (1.3) 40 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 54 (2.1) 60 (2.4) 78 (3.1) 88 (3.5)
Js* 2.5
(0.1) 3 (0.1) 4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
Jo* 3
(0.1) 4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
Ks* 33
(1.3) 41 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 51 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 63 (2.5) 75 (3.0) 91 (3.6)
Ko* 35
(1.4) 43 (1.7) 47 (1.9) 51 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 63 (2.5) 79 (3.1) 91 (3.6)
Ls* 152
(6.0) 190 (7.5) 214 (8.4) 250 (9.8) 310 (12.2) 368 (14.5) 452 (17.8) 550 (21.7)
Lo* 156
(6.1) 194 (7.6) 218 (8.6) 250 (9.8) 310 (12.2) 368 (14.5) 460 (18.1) 550 (21.7)
Ms* 226
(8.9) 264 (10.4) 290 (11.4) 333 (13.1) 405 (15.9) 463 (18.2) 566 (22.3) 664 (26.1)
Mo* 230
(9.1) 268 (10.6) 294 (11.6) 333 (13.1) 405 (15.9) 463 (18.2) 574 (22.6) 664 (26.1)
N 18
(0.7) 24 (0.9) 26 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 35 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 54 (2.1) 66 (2.6)
Ts* 132
(5.2) 170 (6.7) 186 (7.3) 216 (8.5) 272 (10.7) 322 (12.7) 392 (15.4) 474 (18.7)
To* 136
(5.4) 174 (6.9) 190 (7.5) 216 (8.5) 272 (10.7) 322 (12.7) 400 (15.7) 474 (18.7)
FF 48
(1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7)
SSs* SSo* 15 17
(0.6) 17 (0.7) 19 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 25 (1.0) (0.7) 19 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 25 (1.0)
63 80 100
Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Retract Only (NK)
M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE FF + STROKE
J INTERNAL HEX
H N SS
Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Hs*
24 (0.9) 28 (1.1) 34 (1.3) 40 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 54 (2.1) 60 (2.4) 78 (3.1)
Ho*
28 (1.1) 34 (1.3) 40 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 54 (2.1) 60 (2.4) 78 (3.1) 88 (3.5)
Js*
2.5 (0.1) 3 (0.1) 4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
Jo*
3 (0.1) 4 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2)
Ks*
33 (1.3) 41 (1.6) 45 (1.8) 51 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 63 (2.5) 75 (3.0) 91 (3.6)
Ko*
35 (1.4) 43 (1.7) 47 (1.9) 51 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 63 (2.5) 79 (3.1) 91 (3.6)
Ls*
152 (6.0) 190 (7.5) 214 (8.4) 250 (9.8) 310 (12.2) 368 (14.5) 452 (17.8) 550 (21.7)
Lo*
156 (6.1) 194 (7.6) 218 (8.6) 250 (9.8) 310 (12.2) 368 (14.5) 460 (18.1) 555 (21.9)
Ms*
226 (8.9) 264 (10.4) 290 (11.4) 333 (13.1) 405 (15.9) 463 (18.2) 566 (22.3) 664 (26.1)
Mo*
230 (9.1) 268 (10.6) 294 (11.6) 333 (13.1) 405 (15.9) 463 (18.2) 574 (22.6) 664 (26.1)
N
18 (0.7) 24 (0.9) 26 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 35 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 54 (2.1) 66 (2.6)
Ts*
132 (5.2) 170 (6.7) 186 (7.3) 216 (8.5) 272 (10.7) 322 (12.7) 392 (15.4) 474 (18.7)
To*
136 (5.4) 174 (6.9) 190 (7.5) 216 (8.5) 272 (10.7) 322 (12.7) 400 (15.7) 474 (18.7)
FF
48 (1.9) 49 (1.9) 46 (1.8) 52 (2.0) 56 (2.2) 55 (2.2) 67 (2.6) 69 (2.7)
SSs* SSo*
15 (0.6) 17 (0.7) 19 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 17 (0.7) 19 (0.7) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 21 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 25 (1.0)
* s = standard; o = oversized
F120
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Fluorocarbon Seals (V)

Standard nitrile seals are used for applications within the temperatures of -18 to 74C (0 to 165F). For high temperature applications, up to 121C (250 F), fluorocarbon seals are available. When temperatures exceed 60C (140F) other components may not be applicable. See chart for temperature ratings of other commonly used components.

Option Shock Absorbers Bumpers Piston Magnets Sensors Temperature Range 0 to 66C -18 to 93C -18 to 74C -10 to 60C 32 - 150F 0 - 200F 0 - 165F 14 - 140F
Flow Controls (P, F, B, N)

Right angle flow controls provide speed control. It is recommended that applications involving heavy loads use flow controls to provide maximum cylinder life. Parker flow controls are available in Prestolok (push-in) and threaded style connections with the ability to rotate the head 360.
A
Thrust Reach
C
Base
C
F
P5T
D D
Bore A
20, 25, 32, 40 50, 63 80 100 17.2 (0.68) 17.2 (0.68) 25.0 (0.98) 30.0 (1.18)
28.4 (1.12) 32.4 (1.27) 39.0 (1.54) 45.5 (1.79)
55.4 (2.18) 65.2 (2.57) 80.2 (3.16) 98.0 (3.86)
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
17.2 (0.68) 17.2 (0.68) 30.0 (1.18) 30.0 (1.18)
25.2 (0.99) 38.3 (1.51) 47.4 (1.87) 51.4 (2.02)
55.4 (2.18) 65.2 (2.57) 98.0 (3.86) 98.0 (3.86)
1/4"* tube 3/8" tube 3/8" tube 1/2" tube
14.4 (0.57) 18.4 (0.72) 21.6 (0.85) 26.5 (1.04)
25.4 (1.00) 34.3 (1.35) 40.2 (1.58) 49.1 (1.93)
28.5 (1.12) 27.4 (1.08) 34.0 (1.34) 42.0 (1.65)
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
14.4 (0.57) 18.4 (0.72) 21.6 (0.85) 26.5 (1.04)
31.6 (1.24) 41.3 (1.63) 46.7 (1.84) 52.1 (2.05)
28.5 6mm (1.12) tube 34 10mm (1.34) tube 44 12mm (1.73) tube 52 12mm (2.05) tube
*1/8" on 20 and 25mm bore
Reed and Solid State Sensors

The P5L series guided cylinder includes a standard magnetic piston to allow for field installation of reed or solid state sensors. The sensor, bracket and cable must be ordered separately from the Electronic Sensors section of this catalog.
F121
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
NPT Cylinder Port Threaded (N) Presto-lok (F) B C D A B C
BSPT Cylinder Port Threaded (B) Presto-lok (P) B C D A B C
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Proximity Sensors

8mm proximity sensors may be ordered as part of the P5L ordering code. A P5L can also be ordered prepared for proximity sensors which would include all the brackets necessary to mount either 8mm or 12mm proximity sensors. See Electronic Sensors section for specifications and part numbers.

Thrust/Reach
Extend
Drawing illustrates proximity sensor and bumper options.

Retract
Base Slide
N RR
FF + STROKE PP
Dimensions Thrust / Reach

Bore
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
K
20 (0.8) 25 (1.0) 27 (1.1) 33 (1.3) 39 (1.5) 43 (1.7) 49 (1.9) 59 (2.3)
Ls*
100 (3.9) 123 (4.8) 136 (5.4) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 258 (10.2) 318 (12.5)
Thrust Lo*
102 (4.0) 127 (5.0) 140 (5.5) 166 (6.5) 198 (7.8) 224 (8.8) 266 (10.5) 318 (12.5)
M
120 (4.7) 132 (5.2) 146 (5.7) 169 (6.7) 201 (7.9) 225 (8.9) 255 (10.0) 312 (12.3)
Ls*
138 (5.4) 169 (6.7) 192 (7.6) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 398 (15.7) 486 (19.1)
Reach Lo*
140 (5.5) 173 (6.8) 196 (7.7) 228 (9.0) 284 (11.2) 332 (13.1) 406 (16.0) 486 (19.1)
M
158 (6.2) 178 (7.0) 202 (8.0) 231 (9.1) 287 (11.3) 333 (13.1) 395 (15.6) 480 (18.9)
N
17 (0.7) 22 (0.9) 24 (0.9) 30 (1.2) 36 (1.4) 40 (1.6) 46 (1.8) 56 (2.2)
FF
45 (1.8) 46 (1.8) 43 (1.7) 49 (1.9) 53 (2.1) 52 (2.0) 64 (2.5) 66 (2.6)
PP
13 (0.5) 13 (0.5) 12.5 (0.5) 13 (0.5) 13.5 (0.5) 13 (0.5) 13.5 (0.5) 13 (0.5)
RR 8mm 12mm
17 (0.7) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) 15 (0.6) NA 22 (0.9) 22 (0.9) 22 (0.9) 22 (0.9) 22 (0.9) 22 (0.9) 22 (0.9)
Dimensions Base Slides

M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE AU AW FF + STROKE
Bore
20 25 32
L
140 (5.5) 176 (6.9) 198 (7.8) 232 (9.1) 292 (11.5) 350 (13.8) 434 (17.1) 528 (20.8)
M
211 (8.3) 247 (9.7) 271 (10.7) 312 (12.3) 384 (15.1) 442 (17.4) 545 (21.5) 639 (25.2)
N
18 (0.7) 24 (0.9) 26 (1.0) 30 (1.2) 35 (1.4) 42 (1.7) 54 (2.1) 66 (2.6)
AU
22 (0.9) 29 (1.1) 35 (1.4) 47 (1.9) 60 (2.4) 73 (2.9) 92 (3.6) 109 (4.3)
AV
43 (1.7) 51 (2.0) 58 (2.3) 71 (2.8) 95 (3.7) 114 (4.5) 144 (5.7) 169 (6.7)
AW
51 (2.0) 62 (2.4) 69 (2.7) 80 (3.1) 101 (4.0) 121 (4.8) 145 (5.7) 180 (7.1)
FF
45 (1.8) 46 (1.8) 43 (1.7) 49 (1.9) 53 (2.1) 52 (2.0) 64 (2.5) 66 (2.6)
Set Screw N Set Screw AV
40 50 63 80
100
F122
Catalog 0900P-4

Bore 20mm 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm 80mm 100mm Nitrile P1L020D001 P1L025D001 P1L032D001 P1L040D001 P1L050D001 P1L063D001 P1L080D001 P1L0100D001 Fluorocarbon P1L020D005 P1L025D005 P1L032D005 P1L040D005 P1L050D005 P1L063D005 P1L080D005 P1L0100D005
Rod Rebuild Kit with Nitrile Seals

Kit includes one each of: gland rod wiper seal o-ring (head to gland)
Bore Size 32 40 50 63 80 100
Piston Rebuild Kit with Nitrile Seals

Kit includes: lip seal - piston (2) o-ring - end (2) wear strip (1)
Bore Size 32 40 50 63 80 100
Part Number RG0MP00121 RG0MP00161 RG0MP00201 RG0MP00201 RG0MP00251 RG0MP00251
Part Number PK032MP001 PK040MP001 PK063MP001 PK080MP001 PK100MP001 PK050MP001
F
F123
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
F124
HB Series
Guided Cylinders
F
P5T Contents
Features ..........................................................................F126 Ordering Information.............................................. F127-F128 Specifications ..................................................................F129 Engineering Data ................................................... F130-F143 Dimensions ............................................................ F144-F147 HBC/HBT/HBR Shock Absorbers, Bumpers.......... F148-F152 HBB Shock Absorbers, Bumpers, Stroke Adjusters ................................................ F153-F156 HB Options ............................................................ F157-F162 Sensors ................................................................. F163-F164 Service Kits .....................................................................F164
F125
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Model HBT Shown
Tooling Plate Precision machined from aluminum and then anodized, the tooling plate allows mounting on two sides. Standard dowel pin holes provide accurate mounting. Body A machined aluminum onepiece anodized body with tapped and counterbored through holes on three faces for mounting flexibility. Standard dowel pin holes provide accurate mounting.
Guided Cylinders HB Series
Cylinder Piston Aluminum piston with nylon wearband eliminates metal-to-metal contact. This increases cylinder life especially when the support shafts deflect under load. Magnetic piston is standard on all HB slides.
Anodized Aluminum Body Unitized lightweight design provides strength and eliminates areas where contaminants may collect.
F
Alignment Coupler For long stroke or heavy load applications, the alignment coupler allows the piston rod to self-center, thus increasing cylinder life. Not available for HBC Series due to shorter strokes. Support Shafts Case hardened to Rc 60 - 65, support shafts are machined from high carbon alloy steel and chrome plated. Stainless steel and oversized shafting are available. Bushings Composite bushings with oversized shafting are available for higher loads and lower cost. Sealed recirculating ball bearings provide precise alignment with very low friction and wear.
Piston Rod Hard chrome plated and polished piston rod of 100,000 PSI yield, high tensile strength steel, case hardened to Rc 50-54 for reliable performance, reduced friction and long rod seal life.
Model HBB Shown
End Plates Standard end plates are prepared for shock absorbers and stroke adjusters as standard. Carriage A machined aluminum one-piece anodized body with tapped and counterbored through holes on three faces for mounting flexibility. Standard dowel pin holes provide accurate mounting.
Threaded Stroke Adjusters Used to achieve precise end of stroke adjustment. Available with shock absorbers and optional shock pads to reduce noise.
Direct Mounting Tapped holes provide direct mounting capabilities to HBC Series.
F126
Catalog 0900P-4
Revised 08/05/08
Ordering Information Model Number Code for HBC, HBT and HBR
Example: HBT25-08AP1T1FEV-B
HBT
Series HBC HBT HBR Compact Slide Thrust Slide Reach Slide Model 15 20 25
25
08
P1
T1
B
Special Options Blank (STD) (Two digit code assigned by factory and applies when any "X" appears in the model number or when special options or features are required.) Design Series
1-1/2" Bore, 20mm Shaft 2" Bore, 25mm Shaft 2-1/2" Bore, 30mm Shaft Stroke Order in 1" increments. 4 For 3-position units, specify intermediate and total stroke separated by a "/", i.e. 02/06. Consult factory for strokes over 36". Slide Configuration Options B
Current Design Level
Cylinder Options (More than one selection is possible) Blank V L1 L3 None Fluorocarbon cylinder seals 3 Left hand assembly Cylinder ports at position 3 Cylinder Type 3A 4A 4J D D1 D2 E E1 E2 4L S 3MA NFPA Air Cylinder, NPTF Ports 2 4MA NFPA Air Cylinder, NPTF Ports 4MAJ NFPA Air Cylinder with Manual Override Rodlock, NPTF Ports, 100 PSIG max. P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, BSPP Ports
Blank None A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B B1 B2 B3 B4 C C1 C2 X Shock Absorber, Both Ends Shock Absorber, Extend only Shock Absorber, Retract only Shock Ready, Both Ends Shock Ready, Extend Shock Ready, Retract Bumpers Both Ends 1 Bumper & Adjustable Stop Collar, Extend only Bumper Retract only Bumper & Adjustable Stop Collar, Retract only Bumper & Adjustable Stop Collar, Both Ends Cushions on Cylinder, Both Ends 2 Cushion on Cylinder, Extend only 2 Cushion on Cylinder, Retract only 2 Special Slide Configuration (Please specify) Proximity Sensor Options Blank P N P1 N1 J J1 None PNP, Flying Lead Type NPN, Flying Lead Type PNP, Plug-in Connector NPN, Plug-in Connector 8mm Sensor Mounting Bracket, no sensor supplied 12mm Sensor Mounting Bracket, no sensor supplied
F
P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, Standard Rodlock, BSPP Ports P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, Manual Override Rodlock, BSPP Ports P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, NPTF Ports P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, Standard Rodlock, NPTF Ports P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, Manual Override Rodlock, NPTF Ports 4ML NFPA Hydraulic Cylinder, NPTF Ports, 400 PSIG max. 2 2A NFPA Steel Air Cylinder, 250 PSIG max. 3L NFPA Steel Hydraulic Cylinder, 750 PSIG max. No Cylinder, NFPA Cylinder Mounting No Cylinder, ISO Cylinder Mounting Special Cylinder Type (Please specify)
S1 Q Q1 X
Other Options (More than one selection is possible) Blank F G K None Flow Controls (Presto-Lok) Flow Controls (NPT) Stainless Steel Support Shafting Bushings T D T1 TC Composite (Standard) Linear Ball Bearing Composite with Oversized Support Shafts Composite with Contaminant-tolerant Seals
Note: 8mm inductive proximity sensors are included with Options P, N, P1, N1. Magnetic piston is standard for 3MA, 4MA, 4MAJ, 4ML and P1D cylinders. Order reed and solid state sensors separately for these cylinders from the Electronic Sensors section.
NOTES 1 Option B includes Options B1 and B2. 2 Cushions are not available for 3MA cylinders on HB products. 3 Fluorocarbon seals not available with 3MA or rodlock cylinders. 4 P1D cylinders have strokes only in whole mm. The HB inch stroke will be changed (rounded up) to reflect this.
F127
Catalog 0900P-4
Revised 08/05/08
Ordering Information Model Number Code for HBB

Example: HBB25-08AP1T1FLV-B
HBB
Series HBB Base Slide Model 15 20 25
25
08
P1
T1
3A
B
Special Options Blank (STD) (Two digit code assigned by factory applies when any "X" appears in the model number or when special options or features are required.) Design Series B Current Design Level
1" Bore, 20mm Shaft 2" Bore, 25mm Shaft 2" Bore, 30mm Shaft Stroke Order in 1" increments. 4 For 3-position units, specify intermediate and total stroke separated by a "/", i.e. 02/06. Consult factory for strokes over 36". Slide Configuration Options 3A 4A 4J D D1 D2 E E1 E2 4L S S1 Q Q1 X
Cylinder Options (More than one selection is possible) Blank None V Fluorocarbon Cylinder Seals 3 L3 Cylinder Ports at Position 3 Cylinder Type 3MA NFPA Air Cylinder, NPTF Ports 2 4MA NFPA Air Cylinder, NPTF Ports 4MAJ NFPA Air Cylinder with Manual Override Rodlock, NPTF Ports, 100 PSIG max. P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, BSPP Ports P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, Standard Rodlock, BSPP Ports P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, Manual Override Rodlock, BSPP Ports P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, NPTF Ports P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, Standard Rodlock, NPTF Ports P1D ISO Cylinder w/Removable Gland, Manual Override Rodlock, NPTF Ports 4ML NFPA Hydraulic Cylinder, NPTF Ports, 400 PSIG max. 2 2A NFPA Steel Air Cylinder, 250 PSIG max. 3L NFPA Steel Hydraulic Cylinder, 750 PSIG max. No Cylinder, NFPA Cylinder Mounting No Cylinder, ISO Cylinder Mounting Special Cylinder Type (Please specify)
Blank None
A A1 A2 A3 B B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 C C1 C2 E E1 E2 E3 X
Shock Absorber, Both Ends Shock Absorber, Extend only Shock Absorber, Retract only Shock Ready, Both Ends Bumpers Both Ends Bumper & Adjustable Stop Collar, Extend only Bumper Retract only Bumper & Adjustable Stop Collar, Retract only Bumpers & Adjustable Stop Collar, Extend only Bumper & Adjustable Stop Collar, Both Ends Cushions on Cylinder, Both Ends 2 Cushion on Cylinder, Extend only 2 Cushion on Cylinder, Retract only 2 Threaded Stroke Adjusters, Both Ends Stroke Adjusters with Shock Pads, Both Ends Stroke Adjusters with Shock Pads, Extend only Stroke Adjusters with Shock Pads, Retract only Special Slide Configuration (Please specify) Proximity Sensor Options Blank None P N P1 N1 J J1 PNP, Flying Lead Type NPN, Flying Lead Type PNP, Plug-in Connector NPN, Plug-in Connector 8mm Sensor Mounting Bracket, no sensor supplied 12mm Sensor Mounting Bracket, no sensor supplied
Other Options (More than one selection is possible) Blank F G K None Flow Controls (Presto-Lok) Flow Controls (NPT) Stainless Steel Guide Shafting Bushings T D T1 TC Composite (Standard) Linear Ball Bearings Composite with Oversized Support Shafts Composite with Contaminant-tolerant Seals
Note: 8mm inductive proximity sensors are included with Options P, N, P1, N1. Magnetic piston is standard for 3MA, 4MA, 4MAJ, 4ML and P1D cylinders. Order reed and solid state sensors separately for these cylinders from the Electronic Sensors section.
NOTES 1 Option B includes Options B1 and B2. 2 Cushions are not available for 3MA cylinders on HB products. 3 Fluorocarbon seals not available with 3MA or rodlock cylinders. 4 P1D cylinders have strokes only in whole mm. The HB inch stroke will be changed (rounded up) to reflect this.
F128
Catalog 0900P-4
Maximum operating pressure: 100 psi (air) 4MAJ cylinder 150 psi (air) P1D cylinder 250 psi (air) 2MA, 3MA, 4MA and 2A cylinders 250 psi (oil) 2ML cylinder only 400 psi (oil) 4ML cylinder only 750 psi (oil) 3L cylinder only Operating characteristics: double acting Four support shaft sizes: 20, 25, 30 and 35 mm Stroke tolerance: +.030, -.000 Mounting: unrestricted Operating temperature range (cylinder): Standard seals 0 to 165F Fluorocarbon seals* 0 to 250F Filtration requirement: 40 micron filtered, dry air or filtered hydraulic oil (2ML, 4ML or 3L)
* See fluorocarbon seal option for high temperature applications. Not available for 3MA or rod lock cylinders.

Model Support Shaft Diameter mm (in)
20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18)
15 20 25
25 (0.98) 30 (1.18) 35 (1.38)
1 2 2
40 50 63
142 251 393
117 226 368
Model
15 20 25 8 10 12
Base Unit HBC

6.54 11.57 20.57
HBC
HBT
24 30 36
HBR
30 36 42
HBB
30 36 42
HBT
8.86 14.35 24.45
HBR
12.76 24.02 42.03
HBB
11.05 18.65 31.78
Per Inch Stroke

0.48 0.64 0.85
Base Unit HBC

7.24 12.60 22.03
HBT
9.83 15.67 25.69
HBR
14.20 26.19 44.50
HBB
11.92 19.81 33.32
Per Inch Stroke

0.63 0.83 1.08
*Consult factory for longer strokes.
F129
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
Maximum Suggested Stroke, inches*
Weights, Standard Shaft (lb)
Weights, Oversized Shaft (lb)
P5T2
P5T
Oversized Shaft Diameter mm (in)
2MA, 3MA, 4MA, 4MAJ, 4ML NFPA Cylinder Bore Size (in)
P1D ISO Cylinder Bore Size (mm)
Force Output on Extend at 80 PSI (lb)
Force Output on Retract at 80 PSI (lb)
Catalog 0900P-4
The plots on these two pages illustrate the side load vs. actuator stroke for the three HB slide sizes. Applied loads will cause a slight deflection of the support rods. Deflection distance is also shown except for HBN, which should be used on non-rotating applications. The graphs include the weight of the support rods and tooling plate and are based on a bearing life equivalent to 10 million cycles for dynamic conditions. Higher dynamic loads will reduce cycle life. For static loads, multiply the information in the graph by 1.5. The vertical load for HBN does not include the weight of the tool plate and support rods.
Note: Actuator life may vary depending on the severity of the following variables: Acceleration Velocity Vibration Orientation
HBC15
80 100
HBT15
.012"
60
Standard Composite
Standard Composite
80
Load (lb)
.025"
40
Ball Bearing
Load (lb)
Ball Bearing
60
.025"
40
20
.005" .0005" .002"

20
.042" .012"
.005"
0 8 12 16 20 24 0 4
.002"
8 12 16 20 24
0 0 4 Stroke + "d"(inch)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBC20
160 200 120
Load (lb)
HBT20
.015"
80
Standard Composite
150
Load (lb)
.020"
100
Standard Composite
.001"
40
.030"
Ball Bearing
.040"
50
Ball Bearing
.002" .002" .005"

0 0 5 10 15 Stroke + "d" (inch) 20 25 30 0 0 5
.005"
.010"
10 15 Stroke + "d" (inch) 20 25 30
HBC25
250 300 250
Standard Composite
HBT25
200
200
Load (lb)
Load (lb)
150
.012"
100
Standard Composite
Ball Bearing
150
.020" .035"
100
Ball Bearing
.002"
50
.002" .004"
50
.001"
0 0 6
.007"
0 12 18 24 30 36 0 6
.005"
.010"
12 18 24 30 36
Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
F130
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data
d

HORIZONTAL LOAD
Load
Deflection
EXAMPLE: An HBT15 with ball bearings and a stroke+d of 12" would have a load capacity of 20 lbs.
DEFLECTION @ MID-STROKE
HBR15
150
Standard Composite
HBB15
400
Composite
120
Ball Bearing
300
Ball Bearing
Load (lb)
Load (lb)
90
200
60
.0007"
100
.002"
.004"
.008"
.002"
30
.007" .018"
.065" .035"
F
0 5 10 15 20 25
0 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBR20
300
Standard Composite
HBB20
Composite
250 600 200
Load (lb)
.100"
150
Ball Bearing
Load (lb)
.005"
400
.050"
100
.0025"
200
.002"
0 0 5
.007"
10
.020"
0 15 Stroke + "d" (inch) 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 Stroke (inch)
HBR25
1200 400
Standard Composite
HBB25
Composite
900 300
Load (lb)
.150
200
Ball Bearing
Load (lb)
.005"
600
Ball Bearing
.070"
100
.001"
300
.0025"
.002"
0 0 6
.010
.0003" .020"
0 12 18 24 30 36 0 5 10 15 20 25 Stroke + "d" (inch) Stroke (inch)
F131
P5E
HB
P5L
50
.0003"
.001"
P5TT/TD
Ball Bearing
P5T2
800
P5T
Stroke (inch)
Catalog 0900P-4
The plots on these two pages illustrate the side load vs. actuator stroke for the three HB slide sizes. Applied loads will cause a slight deflection of the support rods. Deflection distance is also shown. The graphs include the weight of the support rods and tooling plate and are based on a bearing life equivalent to 10 million cycles for dynamic conditions. Higher dynamic loads will reduce cycle life. For static loads, multiply the information in the graph by 1.5.
HBC15
80 100
HBT15
Oversized Composite
60
80
Oversized Composite
Load (lb)
Load (lb)
40
60 40
.003"
20
.008"
.001" .0002" .001" .005"

20 0 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 0 4 8 12
.020" .002" .005" .010"

16 20 24
0 Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBC20
150 200
HBT20
120
Oversized Composite
.008"
Load (lb)
90 60
Oversized Composite
150
Load (lb)
100
.003"
30
.003"
50
.015"
.0003"
0 0 5
.0010"
10
.005"
30 0 0
.0005"
.0012"
5 10
.008"
15 Stroke + "d" (inch)
20
25
15 Stroke + "d"(inch)
20
25
30
HBC25
250 300 250
HBT25
200
.008"
150
Oversized Composite
Oversized Composite
200
Load (lb)
Load (lb)
150 100
100
.0007"
50
.004"
.0035"
50
.015" .008"
12 18 24 30 36
.0002"
0 0 6
.002"
0 12 18 24 30 36 0
.0005" .0015"
6
Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
F132
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data
d

HORIZONTAL LOAD
Load
Deflection
EXAMPLE: An HBT15 with oversized composite bushings and a stroke+d of 8" would have a load capacity of 60 lbs.
DEFLECTION @ MID-STROKE
HBR15
150 400
HBB15
Oversized Composite
120 300
Oversized Composite
Load (lb)
.025"
60
Load (lb)
90
200
.0005"
100
.0015"
.004"
.007"
.015"
30
.0005"
0 0 4
.003"
.007"
0 8 12 16 20 24 0 5 10 15 20 25
F
HBB20
Oversized Composite
HBR20
300 250 600 200 800
Load (lb)
Oversized Composite
150
400
.035"
100
.0005"
200
.0015"
.004"
.007"
50 0 0
.003"
5 10
.008"
15
.020"
0 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25
Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke (inch)
HBR25
1200 400
Oversized Composite
HBB25
300
900
Load (lb)
Load (lb)
200
600
.010"
100
.040"
.0005"
300
.0015"
.004"
.007"
.002"
0 0 6
.004"
12
.020"
0 18 Stroke + "d" (inch) 24 30 36 0 5 10 15 Stroke (inch) 20 25
F133
P5E
Oversized Composite
HB
P5L
.001"
P5TT/TD
Load (lb)
P5T2
P5T
Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke (inch)
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Symmetrical Torque Capacity with Standard Shafting

The plots on these two pages provide the torsional load vs. actuator stroke for various slide sizes. Torsional loads will cause a slight amount of angular deflection of the tooling plate. Angular deflection is also shown except for HBN, which should be used in non-rotating applications. The data presented is based on a bearing life equivalent to 10 million cycles for dynamic conditions. Higher dynamic torques will reduce cycle life. For static torque, multiply the information in the graph by 1.5. The vertical load for HBN does not include the weight of the tool plate and support rods.
HBC15
80
Standard Composite
HBT15
120 100
Standard Composite Ball Bearing
60 Torque (lb-in) Torque (lb-in) 80
Ball Bearing
40
60
.03
20
1.50
40
.08 .08
.25
2.50
.25
8 12
1.50 .70
20
.70
0 16 20 24 0 4 8 12 16 20 24
0 0 4 Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBC20
400 500
Standard Composite
HBT20
Standard Composite
300 Torque (lb-in)
400
1.00
200
Torque (lb-in)
300
.50
200
1.00
Ball Bearing
.50
100
Ball Bearing
.03
100
.01
0 0 5
.05
10
.15
0 15 20 25 30 0 5
.10
10
.25
15 20 25 30 (762)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBC25
800
Standard Composite
HBT25
1000
800 600 Torque (lb-in) Torque (lb-in)

Standard Composite
600
Ball Bearing
400
.05
200
.01
.20 .38 .10
Ball Bearing
400
.38
200
.70
.03
0
.08
6 12
.20
18 24 30 36
0 0 6 12 18 24 30 36 Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
F134
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data
EXAMPLE:
Torque
An HBT25 with composite bushings and a stroke+d of 12" would have a torque capacity of 200 lb-in.
Torsional Deflection
HBR15
150
Standard Composite
120 Torque (lb-in)

Ball Bearing
90
60
3.80
30
.08
0 0 4
.35 .35
1.00
2.00
F
20 24
12
16
Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBR20
750 625 500 375
Standard Composite
Torque (lb-in)
2.00
250
.07
125
.40 .20
0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBR25
1500
Standard Composite
Torque (lb-in)
900
.60
600
2.40
Ball Bearing
1.20
300
.03
0 0 6
.20
12
18
24
30
36
Stroke + "d" (inch)
F135
P5E
1200
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
1.00
Ball Bearing
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Symmetrical Torque Capacity with Oversized Shafting

The plots on these two pages provide the torsional load vs. actuator stroke for various slide sizes. Torsional loads will cause a slight amount of angular deflection of the tooling plate. Angular deflection is also shown. The data presented is based on a bearing life equivalent to 10 million cycles for dynamic conditions. Higher dynamic torques will reduce cycle life. For static torque, multiply the information in the graph by 1.5.
HBC15
80
Oversized Composite
HBT15
120 100
Oversized Composite
60 Torque (lb-in) Torque (lb-in) 80
.70
60
40
.02
20
.50
1.20
40
.16 .05
20
.35
.10
0 0 4 8 12
.25
0 16 20 24 0 4
.05
8 12 16 20 24
Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBC20
400 500
HBT20
Oversized Composite
300 Torque (lb-in)

Oversized Composite
400 Torque (lb-in)
.15
200
.30
300
.50
200
.07
100
.03 .07 .01 .03

5 10 15
.30
100
.15
0 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0 0 Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBC25
800 1000
HBT25
800 600 Torque (lb-in)

Oversized Composite
.16
400
Oversized Composite
Torque (lb-in)
600
.16
400
.03
200
.01
.08 .06 .10

200
.32
.01
0 18 24 30 36 0 6
.03
12 18 24 30 36
0 0 6 12 Stroke + "d" (inch)
Stroke + "d" (inch)
F136
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data
EXAMPLE:
Torque
An HBT25 with oversized composite bushings and a stroke+d of 6" would have a torque capacity of 600 lb-in.
Torsional Deflection
HBR15
150
120 Torque (lb-in)

Oversized Composite
90
60
.05
30
.20
2.00 .45 1.00
F
20 24
0 0 4 8 12 16 Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBR20
625
Oversized Composite
Torque (lb-in)
500 375
.70
250
.03
125 0 0 5
.22 .10
.38
10
15
20
25
30
Stroke + "d" (inch)
HBR25
1500
1200 Torque (lb-in)

Oversized Composite
900
.45 .90
600
.03
300
.20 .10
0 0 6 12 18 24 30 36 Stroke + "d" (inch)
F137
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
750
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4

Asymmetrical loading occurs when the load is applied to one side of the unit. HB Series units can resist torsional loads that are asymmetrical. The graphs on these two pages show torsional load capacity for both standard and oversized shafting under dynamic conditions For static applications, multiply the information in the graphs by 1.5. The vertical load for HBN does not include the weight of the tool plate and support rods.

HBC15
120 80 100
Oversized Composite
HBT15
Oversized Composite Standard Composite Ball Bearing
Torque (lb-in)
Standard Composite
Torque (lb-in)
60
80 60 40 20
40
Ball Bearing
20
0 0 5 10 15 20 25 Stroke + "d" (inch)
0 0 5 10 15 20 25 Stroke + d (inch)
HBC20
400
Oversized Composite
HBT20
600
Oversized Composite
500
Standard Composite
300
Torque (lb-in)
Standard Composite
Torque (lb-in)
400 300 200 100

Ball Bearing
200
Ball Bearing
100
0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Stroke + "d" (inch)
0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Stroke + d (inch)
HBC25
1000
Oversized Composite
HBT25
1000
Standard Composite
800
800
Torque (lb-in)
600
Ball Bearing
Torque (lb-in)
Standard Composite
600
Oversized Composite
400
400
Ball Bearing
200
200
0 0 6 12 18 24 30 36
0 0 6 12 18 24 30 36 Stroke + "d" (inch) Stroke + d (inch)
F138
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data
Torsional Load
Torsional Load
EXAMPLE: An HBT-20 with standard composite bushings and a stroke + d of 10 inches would have an asymmetrical torque capacity of 80 lb-in.
HBR15
800 150
Oversized Composite Composite
HBB15
120
600
Torque (lb-in)
Torque (lb-in)
Standard Composite
Ball Bearing
90
Ball Bearing
400
60 30 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 Stroke + "d" (inch)
200
0 0 5 10 15 20 25 Stroke (inch)
F
HBB20
HBR20
800
Oversized Composite
2000
Composite
1600 600
Torque (lb-in)
Standard Composite
Torque (lb-in)
Ball Bearing
400
Ball Bearing
800
200
400
0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Stroke + "d" (inch)
0 0 5 10 15 Stroke (inch) 20 25
HBR25
1400 1200
Oversized Composite
HBB25
4000
Composite
Torque (lb-in)
800 600 400 200 0 0 6
Standard Composite
Torque (lb-in)
1000
3000
Ball Bearing
2000
Ball Bearing
1000
0 12 18 24 30 36 0 5 10 15 20 25 Stroke + "d" (inch) Stroke (inch)
F139
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
1200
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4

HB Series units mounted vertically will have the same eccentric load capacity regardless of orientation. The graphs provide maximum load capacity for an eccentric mounted load on a 4" stroke cylinder. The load is assumed to be mounted at the face of the tooling plate.

Note: Actuator life may vary depending on the severity of the following variables: Acceleration Velocity Vibration
HBC15
80
Oversized Composite
HBT15
120 100
60 80
Load (lb)
40
Standard Composite
Load (lb)
60
Oversized Composite
40
Standard Composite
20
Ball Bearing
20
Ball Bearing
0 0 5 10 Eccentricity (inch) 15 20
HBC20
160 (712) 250
HBT20
120 (534)
200
Oversized Composite
Load (lb)
80 (356)
Load (lb)
150
Oversized Composite
Standard Composite
100
Standard Composite
40 (178)
Ball Bearing
50
Ball Bearing
HBC25
250 400
HBT25
Standard Composite
200 300
Load (lb)
Oversized Composite
Load (lb)
150
200
Oversized Composite
100
Standard Composite
50
Ball Bearing
100
Ball Bearing
0 0 4 8 12 16 20 Eccentricity (inch)
F140
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data
Eccentricity Eccentricity
EXAMPLE: An HBT15 with ball bearings carrying an eccentric load with an eccentricity distance of 15" would have a load capacity of 40 lbs.
HBR15
150
120
Oversized Composite
Load (lb)
90
Ball Bearing
60
Standard Composite
30 0 0 5 10 Eccentricity (inch) 15 20
F
HBR20
300 250 200
Load (lb)
150
Standard Composite
100
Ball Bearing
50 0 0 5 10 Eccentricity (inch) 15 20
HBR25
400
300
Load (lb)
Oversized Composite
200
Standard Composite
100
Ball Bearing
F141
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
Oversized Composite
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4

These plots illustrate the stopping capacity of the HB Series with bumpers, cushions or cylinder only. This type of sizing is based on the weight of the load and the speed at which the load is moving. The bumper plots are based on a 0.020 deflection. For values above the cushion line, shock absorbers must be specified. Follow the shock absorber sizing steps on the following page to ensure proper stopping capacity.
HB*15
35
Note: These charts are to be used only to determine the stopping capacity of each guided cylinder.
Load (lbs)
30 Air Cushions 25 20 Shaft Bumpers 15 Cylinder Only 10 5 0 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 Speed (inch/sec)
F
800 700 600
HB*20
Air Cushions
Load (lbs)
500 400 Shaft Bumpers 300 200 100 0 0 3 6 9 Speed (inch/sec) 12 15 18 Cylinder Only
HB*25
1200
1000 Air Cushions 800
Load (lbs)
Shaft Bumpers 600 Cylinder Only 400
200
0 0 3 6 9 Speed (inch/sec) 12 15 18
F142
Catalog 0900P-4

Steps to sizing a guided cylinder with shocks:
1) Determine the "Moving Weight", W. Use Table 1 to determine the "Kinetic Energy Weight" of a given slide. This value should be added to the weight of the load the slide will be carrying. Moving Weight (lbs) = Kinetic Energy Weight (lbs) + Weight of Load (lbs) 2) Determine the velocity of the load, V (ft/second) 3) Determine the cylinder force output at the operating pressure, Fcylinder (lbs) 4) Determine the Kinetic Energy of the load: KE = 0.2 W V2 (lb-in) 5) Determine the Energy per Cycle, Ecycle (lb-in): Ecycle = KE + Fcylinder Shock Stroke (unless stroke adjusters are used, 1 inch is standard) This value should be less than the value listed in table 2 6) Determine the Energy per Hour: Ehour (in-lbs) Ehour = 2 Ecycle # of cycles in one hour (a cycle is defined as the extension and retraction of the slide) This value should be less than the value listed in table 2 7) Determine the Effective Weight of the load Ecycle Weffective = 0.2 V2 This value should be between the values listed in table 2 Example: An HBT20-10D-B with standard support rods and shock absorbers will be carrying a load of 40 lbs at a velocity of 17 in/second (cycling 15 times per hour) while operating at 80psi. Is this unit properly sized? 1) Moving Weight = [8.35 + (10 0.65)] + 40 lbs = 54.85 lbs 2) V = 17 in/second = 1.4 ft/second 3) Fcylinder = 251 lbs 4) KE = 0.2 54.85 1.42 = 21.5 lb-in 5) Ecycle = 21.5 + 251 = 272.5 lb-in 6) Ehour = 2 272.5 15 = 8175 lb-in 7) Weffective = 272.5 0.2 (1.4)2 = 695 lbs
Table 1
Model HBC15 HBC20 HBC25 HBT15 HBT20 HBT25 HBR15 HBR20 HBR25 HBB15* HBB20* HBB25* Base Weight (lb) 3.66 7.15 12.73 4.70 8.35 14.22 5.52 10.29 17.63 7.93 13.94 25.03 Stroke Adder (lb/inch) 0.36 0.65 1.04 0.36 0.65 1.04 0.36 0.65 1.04 0.09 0.22 0.42 Base Weight, Oversized (lb) 4.36 8.19 14.19 5.67 9.67 16.01 6.96 12.46 20.66 7.93 13.94 25.03 Stroke Adder (lb/inch) 0.52 0.84 1.27 0.52 0.84 1.27 0.52 0.84 1.27 0.09 0.22 0.42
*Support rods do not move with the carriage, so kinetic energy is the same for standard and oversized rods.
Table 2
Total Energy per Cycle (lb-in) 600 900 1500 Total Energy per Hour (lb-in) 600,000 800,000 670,000 Effective Weight (lb) 20 - 3000 30 - 4500 28 - 3800 Velocity Range (in/sec) 6 - 144 6 - 120
F
6 - 144
15 20 25
The shock will dissipate the energy of the load.
F143
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
P5T
Size
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Dimensions HBC Series
2X V .000 DOWEL HOLES (FARSIDE) 4X HH GG
+.001
W M + STROKE L + STROKE
K N A Y
FF + STROKE
4X AA THRU FOR BB SHCS (FAR SIDE) B P S U PORT POSITION

2X THRU DIA. & CTRBORE FOR LL SHCS MM
X
2X F
T/2
F
2X V .000 DOWEL HOLES (FAR SIDE)
+.001
KK CC
4X HH GG (FAR SIDE)
C R EE
JJ
8X HH GG
Model
15 20 25
A
3.25 4.00 5.00
B
6.00 7.25 9.00
C
2.25 2.75 3.25
Ds*
20mm (0.79) 25mm (0.98) 30mm (1.18)
Do**
25mm (0.98) 30mm (1.18) 35mm (1.38)
E
0.375 0.500 0.500
F
NPTF
F
BSPP
K
1.06 1.31 1.56
L
5.19 6.39 7.82
M
6.26 7.00 8.38
N
0.94 1.19 1.44
P
5.88 7.13 8.88
R
1.94 2.44 2.88
S
4.250 5.000 6.500
T
1.375 1.750 2.000
U
2.750 3.250 3.750
1/4 1 3/8 3/8
1/4 1/4 3/8
Model
15 20 25
V
0.251 0.313 0.376
W
0.27 0.33 0.39
X
2.750 3.250 4.000
Y
0.750 0.750 1.532
AA
0.28 0.34 0.41
BB
1/4 5/16 3/8
CC
1.750 2.250 3.000
EE
1.500 1.750 2.250
FF
2.31 2.31 2.38
GG
0.50 0.63 0.75
HH
1/4-20 5/16-18 3/8-16
JJ
2.50 3.00 4.00
KK
0.75 0.88 1.00
LL
3/8 3/8 1/2
MM
2.500 3.000 4.000
* Standard shafting ** Oversized shafting 1 Model 15 with Cylinder Type 3A (3MA cylinder) has 3/8" NPTF ports. All dimensions in inches unless otherwise noted.
F144
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Dimensions HBT Series
F
P5T
Model
15 20 25
A
5.0 5.5 6.5
B
6.00 7.25 9.00
C
2.25 2.75 3.25
Ds*
20mm (0.79) 25mm (0.98) 30mm (1.18)
Do**
25mm (0.98) 30mm (1.18) 35mm (1.38)
E
0.375 0.500 0.500
NPTF
BSPP
K
1.06 1.31 1.56
L
6.94 7.88 9.31
M
8.19 8.94 10.31
N
0.94 1.19 1.44
P
5.88 7.13 8.88
R
1.94 2.44 2.88
S
4.250 5.000 6.500
T
1.375 1.750 2.000
1/4 1 3/8 3/8
1/4 1/4 3/8
Model
15 20 25
U
2.750 3.250 3.750
V
0.251 0.313 0.376
W
0.27 0.33 0.39
X
2.750 3.250 4.000
Y
1.938 2.250 2.750
AA
0.28 0.34 0.41
BB
1/4 5/16 3/8
CC
2.500 2.750 3.500
EE
1.500 1.750 2.250
FF
2.31 2.31 2.38
GG
0.50 0.63 0.75
HH
1/4-20 5/16-18 3/8-16
JJ
4.25 4.50 5.50
KK
0.69 0.88 1.00
F145
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Dimensions HBR Series
M + STROKE L + STROKE K W A FF + STROKE
2X V .000 DOWEL HOLES (FARSIDE) 4X HH GG 4X AA THRU FOR BB SHCS (FARSIDE) B P S U PORT POSITION
+.001
U X 2X F
T/2 T
4X AA THRU FOR BB SHCS
KK
2X V .000 DOWEL HOLES W (FARSIDE) CC
+.001
F
4X HH GG (FARSIDE) Y
EE
E JJ
8X HH
GG
Model
15 20 25
A
8.00 10.00 12.00
B
6.00 7.25 9.00
C
2.25 2.75 3.25
Ds*
20mm (0.79) 25mm (0.98) 30mm (1.18)
Do**
25mm (0.98) 30mm (1.18) 35mm (1.38)
E
0.375 0.500 0.500
F
NPTF
F
BSPP
K
1.06 1.31 1.56
L
9.94 12.39 14.82
M
11.19 13.44 15.82
N
0.94 1.19 1.44
P
5.88 7.13 8.88
R
1.94 2.44 2.88
S
4.250 5.000 6.500
T
1.375 1.750 2.000
1/4 1 3/8 3/8
1/4 1/4 3/8
Model
15 20 25
U
2.750 3.250 3.750
V
0.251 0.313 0.376
W
0.27 0.33 0.39
X
2.750 3.250 4.000
Y
1.938 2.250 2.760
AA
0.28 0.34 0.41
BB
1/4 5/16 3/8
CC
5.500 7.250 9.000
EE
1.500 1.750 2.250
FF
2.31 2.31 2.38
GG
0.50 0.63 0.75
HH
1/4-20 5/16-18 3/8-16
JJ
7.25 9.00 11.00
KK
0.69 0.88 1.00
F146
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Dimensions HBB Series
M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE A X J
FF + STROKE S/2 B P* .001 U Z S G H GG x NN QQ K N 4X JJ DOWEL HOLES X KK W R

+.001 .000 +.001 .001
S/2
2X F
(FAR SIDE)*
3X CC
THREAD THRU (SHOCK MOUNT) DRILL THRU AND COUNTERBORE FOR AA SHCS *KEYWAY IN FRONT TOOLING PLATE
K V
(THIS SIDE)
2X 8mm PROXIMITY SWITCH HOLE *See QQ for location dimension.
4X LL THREAD MM
(FROM FAR SIDE) COUNTERBORE FOR HH SHCS
F
PP
Y D E C BB 8X DD THREAD X EE
Model
15 20 25
A
5.00 5.50 6.50
B
7.00 8.75 11.00
C
2.25 2.75 3.25
Ds*
20mm (0.79) 25mm (0.98) 30mm (1.18)
Do**
25mm (0.98) 30mm (1.18) 35mm (1.38)
E
0.375 0.500 0.500
F
NPTF
F
BSPP
G
6.875 8.625 10.875
H
3.50 4.50 6.00
J
2.50 2.50 3.00
K
0.50 0.50 0.50
L
7.00 8.00 9.50
M
11.13 12.13 13.75
1/4 1 3/8 3/8
1/4 1/4 3/8
15 20 25
0.94 1.19 1.44
0.313 0.313 0.313
2.25 2.75 3.25
5.25 6.50 8.50
6.13 6.63 7.63
1.88 2.25 3.50
0.13 0.13 0.13
0.06 0.06 0.06
4.25 4.25 5.00
1.188 1.438 1.688
6.375 8.000 10.000
5/16-18 3/8-16 1/2-13
4.25 4.50 5.50
Model
15 20 25
CC
25mm 25mm 1-12
DD
1/4-20 5/16-18 3/8-16
EE
0.50 0.63 0.75
FF
2.31 2.31 2.38
GG
0.313 0.313 0.313
HH
5/16-18 5/16-18 5/16-18
JJ
0.251 0.251 0.313
KK
0.27 0.27 0.33
LL
3/8-16 3/8-16 3/8-16
MM
0.75 0.75 0.75
NN
0.25 0.25 0.25
PP
1.50 1.75 2.75
QQ
0.500 0.594 0.719
F147
P5E
HB
Model
AA
BB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
HBC / HBT / HBR Options Shock Absorbers/Stroke Adjusters (A, A1, A2)
Adjustable shock absorbers are provided when this option is specified. These dissipate kinetic energy over a wide range of velocities and weights. Cylinder stroke is adjusted by moving the shock striker plate. Shock Absorber Adjustment Procedure: Proper adjustment is important to maximize a shock absorber's performance. With a range of zero to ten, shocks are factory preset at five. Cycle the slide to impact the shock absorber. Rotate the shock's adjustment knob to achieve smooth deceleration. Adjusting towards zero increases resistance. If the initial impact is too hard, rotate the knob towards ten to lessen the resistance. If the final setting is less than one, a larger shock and/or slide should be considered. Tighten the adjusting knob set screw to maintain resistance
Striker plate
Shock absorber - extend stroke
Shock Absorbers/Stroke Adjusters Extend and Retract (A) HBC

M + STROKE L + STROKE NN RETRACTED SHOCK
Model
HBC15 HBC20 HBC25 Model
G
0.59 0.69 0.88 FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
K
1.53 1.88 2.31 MM 8.75 10.00 12.50
L
5.66 6.95 8.57 NN 4.62 5.86 4.45
M
6.97 7.82 9.38 TD M25 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 1 1/4 - 12
N
0.94 1.19 1.44 TT 2.81 3.25 4.13
F
MM
K N
HBC15 HBC20
TT
HBC25
TD
G FF + STROKE
HBT / HBR
M + STROKE L + STROKE NN RETRACTED SHOCK TD FF + STROKE K
Model
HBT15 HBT20 HBT25 Model HBT15 HBT20 HBT25
G
0.59 0.69 0.88 FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
K
1.53 1.88 2.31 MM 8.75 10.00 12.50
L
7.31 8.44 10.06 NN 4.62 5.86 4.45
M
8.81 9.75 11.31 TD M25 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 1 1/4 - 12
N
0.94 1.19 1.44 TT 2.81 3.25 4.13
MM
Model
TT
G
0.59 0.69 0.88
K
1.53 1.88 2.31
L
10.41 12.95 15.57
M
11.90 14.26 16.82
N
0.94 1.19 1.44
HBR15 HBR20 HBR25
N G
Model
HBR15 HBR20 HBR25
FF
2.56 2.56 2.63
MM
8.75 10.00 12.50
NN
4.62 5.86 4.45
TD
M25 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 1 1/4 - 12
TT
2.81 3.25 4.13
All dimensions shown in inches.
F148
Catalog 0900P-4
HBC / HBT / HBR Options Shock Absorbers Extend Only (A1) HBC
TD NN RETRACTED SHOCK
Model
G
G
0.59 0.69 0.88
K
1.06 1.31 1.56
L
5.19 6.39 7.82
M
6.38 7.13 8.50
N
0.94 1.19 1.44
HBC15 HBC20 HBC25

MM
TT
Model
HBC15 HBC20
K FF + STROKE L + STROKE M + STROKE
FF
2.44 2.44 2.50
MM
7.38 8.63 10.75
NN
4.62 5.86 4.45
TD
M25 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 1 1/4 - 12
TT
2.81 3.25 4.13
HBC25
HBT / HBR
Model
HBT15 HBT20 HBT25
NN RETRACTED SHOCK
G
0.59 0.69 0.88
K
1.06 1.31 1.56
L
6.94 7.88 9.31
M
8.32 9.07 10.44
N
0.94 1.19 1.44
TD K
Model
HBT15 HBT20 HBT25
MM
FF
2.44 2.44 2.50 G 0.59 0.69 0.88 FF 2.44 2.44 2.50
MM
7.38 8.63 10.75 K 1.06 1.31 1.56 MM 7.38 8.63 10.75
NN
4.62 5.86 4.45 L 9.94 12.39 14.82 NN 4.62 5.86 4.45
TD
M25 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 1 1/4 - 12 M 11.31 13.57 15.94 TD M25 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 1 1/4 - 12
TT
2.81 3.25 4.13 N 0.94 1.19 1.44 TT 2.81 4.13 3.25
TT
Model HBR15
FF + STROKE L + STROKE M + STROKE
F
HBR20 HBR25 Model HBR15 HBR20 HBR25
Shock Absorbers Retract Only (A2)

K G NN RETRACTED SHOCK TD
TT
HBC
MM
Model
HBC15 HBC20 HBC25
FF + STROKE
L + STROKE M + STROKE
K
1.53 1.88 2.32
L
5.66 6.95 8.57
M
6.85 7.69 9.26
FF
2.44 2.44 2.50
G
0.59 0.69 0.88
MM
7.38 8.63 10.75
NN
4.62 5.86 4.45
TD
M25 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 1 1/4-12
TT
2.81 3.25 4.13
HBT / HBR
TT MM
K G
NN RETRACTED SHOCK
TD
Model
HBT15 HBT20 HBT25 Model HBR15
K
1.53 1.88 2.32 K 1.53 1.88 2.32
L
7.41 8.45 10.07 L 10.40 12.95 15.57
M
8.78 9.63 11.20 M 11.78 14.13 16.70
FF
2.44 2.44 2.50 FF 2.44 2.44 2.50
G
0.59 0.69 0.88 G 0.59 0.69 0.88
MM
7.38 8.63 10.75 MM 7.38 8.63 10.75
NN
4.62 5.86 4.45 NN 4.62 5.86 4.45
TD
M25 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 1 1/4-12 TD M25 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 1 1/4-12
TT
2.81 3.25 4.13 TT 2.81 3.25 4.13
FF + STROKE L + STROKE M + STROKE
HBR20 HBR25
F149
Catalog 0900P-4
HBC / HBT / HBR Options
Bumpers/Adjustable Stop Collars (B, B1, B2, B3, B4)

Bumpers absorb shock, reduce noise and permit faster cycle times thereby increasing production rates. They can be placed on the extend, retract or both positions. When bumpers are specified, an adjustable stop collar is supplied on the extend stroke as standard. An extend stop collar provides travel adjustment. A stop collar can also be specified for the retract stroke. This stop collar is optional and is only provided if requested.
Note: Stop collars must be adjusted evenly to avoid creating a moment between the guide rods.
Bumper with adjustable stop collar extend stroke
Bumper with adjustable stop collar retract stroke
HBT shown with B4 option
Bumpers Both Ends (B)
HBC
K M + STROKE L + STROKE
Model HBC15 HBC20 HBC25
K 1.19 1.44 1.69
L 5.32 6.51 7.94
M 6.62 7.38 8.75
FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
FF + STROKE
HBT / HBR
Model HBT15 HBT20 HBT25 Model HBR15 HBR20 HBR25

FF + STROKE
K 1.19 1.44 1.69 K 1.19 1.44 1.69
L 7.07 8.01 9.44 L 10.07 12.51 14.94
M 8.56 9.32 10.69 M 11.56 13.82 16.19
FF 2.56 2.56 2.63 FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
F150
Catalog 0900P-4
Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Extend Only (B1) HBC

K 1.06 1.31 1.56
L 5.19 6.39 7.82
M 6.37 7.13 8.50
FF 2.44 2.44 2.50
FF + STROKE
HBT / HBR

FF + STROKE
K 1.06 1.31 1.56 K 1.06 1.31 1.56
L 6.94 7.89 9.32 L 9.94 12.39 14.82
M 8.31 9.07 10.44 M 11.31 13.57 15.94
FF 2.44 2.44 2.50 FF 2.44 2.44 2.50
F
P5T
Bumpers on Retract Only (B2) HBC

M + STROKE L + STROKE K FF + STROKE
HBC15 HBC20 HBC25
1.19 1.44 1.69
5.32 6.51 7.94
6.51 7.26 8.63
0.94 1.19 1.44
2.44 2.44 2.50
0.25 0.25 0.25
HBT / HBR
Model HBT15 HBT20 HBT25 Model HBR15 HBR20

LL
K 1.19 1.44 1.69 K 1.19 1.44 1.69
L 7.07 8.01 9.44 L 10.07 12.51 14.94
M 8.44 9.19 10.57 M 11.44 13.70 16.07
N 0.94 1.19 1.44 N 0.94 1.19 1.44
FF 2.44 2.44 2.50 FF 2.44 2.44 2.50
LL 0.25 0.25 0.25 LL 0.25 0.25 0.25
HBR25
F151
P5E
HB
LL
P5L
P5TT/TD
Model
FF
LL
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Retract Only (B3) HBC

M + STROKE L + STROKE K FF+STROKE
K 1.78 2.03 2.28
L 5.91 7.10 8.53
M 7.10 7.84 9.22
FF 2.44 2.44 2.50
HBT / HBR

FF + STROKE
K 1.78 2.03 2.28 K 1.78 2.03 2.28
L 7.66 8.60 10.03 L 10.66 13.10 15.53
M 9.03 9.78 11.16 M 12.03 14.28 16.66
FF 2.44 2.44 2.50 FF 2.44 2.44 2.50
Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Both Ends (B4)
HBC
M + STROKE L + STROKE K N
H(s)* 1.57 1.77 2.12
H(o)** 1.77 2.12 2.23
J 3/16 3/16 3/16
K 1.78 2.03 2.28
L 5.91 7.10 8.53
M 7.22 7.97 9.34
N 0.94 1.19 1.44
FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
SS 0.84 0.84 0.84
H SS FF + STROKE J INTERNAL HEX
HBT / HBR
M + STROKE L + STROKE K FF + STROKE J INTERNAL HEX
Model HBT15 HBT20 HBT25 Model HBR15 HBR20

H
H(s)* 1.57 1.77 2.12 H(s)* 1.57 1.77 2.12
H(o)** 1.77 2.12 2.23 H(o)** 1.77 2.12 2.23
J 3/16 3/16 3/16 J 3/16 3/16 3/16
K 1.78 2.03 2.28 K 1.78 2.03 2.28
L 7.56 8.69 10.31 L 10.66 13.10 15.53
M 9.06 10.00 11.56 M 12.15 14.41 16.78
N 0.94 1.19 1.44 N 0.94 1.19 1.44
FF 2.56 2.56 2.63 FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
SS 0.84 0.84 0.84 SS 0.84 0.84 0.84
HBR25
N SS SS
F152
Catalog 0900P-4
HBB Options Shock Absorbers

Adjustable shock absorbers are provided when this option is specified. These dissipate kinetic energy over a wide range of velocities and weights. Cylinder stroke is adjusted by moving the threaded stroke adjuster. It is important to adjust the threaded stroke adjuster to prevent the shock from "bottoming". Maximum adjustment is 1/2". Shock Absorber Adjustment Procedure: Proper adjustment is important to maximize a shock absorber's performance. With a range of zero to ten, shocks are factory pre-set at five. Cycle the slide to impact the shock absorber. Rotate the shock's adjustment knob to achieve smooth deceleration. Adjusting towards zero increases resistance. If the initial impact is too hard, rotate the knob towards ten to lessen the resistance. If the final setting is less than one, a larger shock and/or slide should be considered. Tighten the adjusting knob set screw to maintain resistance.
Note: A standard HBB unit includes mounting holes in the end plates to allow field installation of the shock absorbers.
Shock Absorbers (A, A1, A2)
F
P5T
HBB
M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE SET SCREW FF + STROKE
Model HBB15 HBB20 HBB25
L 7.38 8.38 9.88
T 6.50 7.00 8.00
M 11.75 12.75 14.38
FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
MM 1.25 1.00 1.00
SET SCREW
MM
F153
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
HBB Options Bumpers/Adjustable Stop Collars (B, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5)
Bumpers absorb shock, reduce noise and permit faster cycle times thereby increasing production rates. They can be placed on the extend, retract or both positions. A stop collar can be provided for travel adjustment. This stop collar is optional and is only provided if requested.
Note: Stop collars must be adjusted evenly to avoid creating a moment between the guide rods.
Bumpers Both Ends (B) HBB

L 7.375 8.375 9.875
T 6.50 7.00 8.00
M 11.75 12.75 14.38
K 1.19 1.44 1.69
N 0.94 1.19 1.44
FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
LL 0.25 0.25 0.25
LL
LL
Bumpers, Extend Only (B1) HBB

L 7.25 8.25 9.75
T 6.38 6.88 7.88
M 11.50 12.50 14.13
K 1.19 1.44 1.69
N 0.94 1.19 1.44
FF 2.44 2.44 2.51
LL 0.25 0.25 0.25
LL N
Bumpers on Retract Only (B2) HBB

L 7.13 8.13 9.63
T 6.25 6.75 7.75
M 11.38 12.38 14.00
K 1.19 1.44 1.69
N 0.94 1.19 1.44
FF 2.44 2.44 2.51
LL 0.25 0.25 0.25
N LL
F154
Catalog 0900P-4
HBB Options
Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Retract Only (B3) HBB

Model HBB15 HBB20 HBB25 Model HBB15 HBB20

K
L 7.72 8.72 10.22 H(s)* 1.57 1.77 2.12
T 6.84 7.34 8.34 H(o)** 1.77 2.12 2.23
M 11.98 12.98 14.60 J 3/16 3/16 3/16
K 1.78 2.03 2.28 FF 2.44 2.44 2.50
N 0.94 1.19 1.44 SS 0.84 0.84 0.84
HBB25
H SS J INTERNAL HEX
Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Extend Only (B4) HBB

M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE H FF + STROKE
Model HBB15 HBB20 HBB25 Model HBB15 HBB20 HBB25
L 7.85 8.85 10.35 H(s)* 1.57 1.77 2.12
T 6.97 7.47 8.47 H(o)** 1.77 2.12 2.23
M 12.10 13.10 14.73 J 3/16 3/16 3/16
K 1.78 2.03 2.28 FF 2.44 2.44 2.50
N 0.94 1.19 1.44 SS 0.84 0.84 0.84
F
SS
J INTERNAL HEX
Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, Both Ends (B5) HBB

M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE
Model HBB15 HBB20 HBB25 Model

FF + STROKE
L 8.56 9.56 11.06 H(s)* 1.57 1.77 2.12
T 7.68 8.18 9.18 H(o)** 1.77 2.12 2.23
M 12.93 13.93 15.56 J 3/16 3/16 3/16
K 1.78 2.03 2.28 FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
N 0.94 1.19 1.44 SS 0.84 0.84 0.84
HBB15 HBB20 HBB25
* Standard support rods ** Oversized support rods

N H SS J INTERNAL HEX
SS
F155
Catalog 0900P-4
HBB Options Threaded Stroke Adjusters (E, E1, E2, E3)

The threaded stroke adjust option allows for precise end of stroke positioning. The maximum stroke adjustment is one inch (1"). Threaded stroke adjusters are standard with shock absorbers. Note: Not available with Bumper Options B, B1, B2, B3, B4.
Threaded Stroke Adjusters, Both Ends (E)
HBB
M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE MM
L 7.38 8.38 9.88
T 6.50 7.00 8.00
M 11.75 12.75 14.38
FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
MM 1.25 1.00 1.00
F
TRAVEL ADJUSTER SET SCREW
FF + STROKE
TRAVEL ADJUSTER SET SCREW
Stroke Adjusters and Shock Pads (E1, E2, E3)

Both Ends (E1)
HBB
M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE MM FF + STROKE
L 7.63 8.63 10.13
T 6.75 7.25 8.25
M 12.00 13.00 14.63
FF 2.56 2.56 2.63
MM 1.25 1.00 1.00
AJ 0.13 0.13 0.13
Extend Only (E2)

Model L 7.38 8.38 9.88 T 6.50 7.00 8.00 M 11.75 12.75 14.38 FF 2.56 2.56 2.63 MM 1.25 1.00 1.00 AJ 0.13 0.13 0.13 HBB15 HBB20
TRAVEL ADJUSTER SET SCREW SHOCK PAD AJ TRAVEL ADJUSTER SET SCREW SHOCK PAD
HBB25
Retract Only (E3)

Model HBB15 HBB20 HBB25 L 7.25 8.25 9.75 T 6.38 6.88 7.88 M 11.63 12.63 14.25 FF 2.56 2.56 2.63 MM 1.25 1.00 1.00 AJ 0.13 0.13 0.13
F156
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Cushions on Cylinder (C, C1, C2)

Optional cylinder cushions are available at either or both ends. The check seal cushions float radially to compensate for problems with misalignment. Flow paths molded on the circumference of the seal allow exceptionally rapid return stroke without the use of ball checks. A captive cushion screw provides safe cushion adjustment while the cylinder is pressurized. The brass adjustment screw provides maximum corrosion resistance. Cushion Location*: The cushion adjustment screws are located on the same face as the port unless specified otherwise. The port is machined off-center to allow space for the cushion screw. Note: Cushions not available with Cylinder Type 3A (3MA cylinder).
* For steel cylinders, the cushion adjustment screw is located on the face opposite the port. Consult factory for other locations.
Spear entering cushion cavity
Spear exiting cushion cavity
Bushings (D, T, T1, TC)

Selection should be based on the following criteria:
Application Requirement Precision Friction Friction Coefficient Precision over Life of Bearing Static Load Capacity Dynamic Load Capacity Lubrication Vibration Resistance Contamination Resistance Washdown Compatibility Ball Bearing Excellent Low Constant Constant Good Good Required Fair Fair Poor Composite Good Higher Variable Excellent Good with Lower Efficiency Not Required Excellent Excellent Excellent Recirculating Ball Bearing Composite Bushing Variable
F
P5T
For bushing load capacities, reference the Engineering Data pages of this section.
1.9 1.06 1.70 (OPEN) 1/4" (HBT15) or 3/8" (HBT20 & 25) NPT or Tube
Chrome plated, case-hardened carbon steel shafting is standard for slides. Stainless steel shafting can be specified for corrosive applications.
Flow Controls (F, G)

Right angle flow control valves allow precise adjustment of cylinder speed by metering exhaust air flow. Presto-Lok push-in or NPT ports provide 360 orientation capability.
F157
P5E
HB
P5L
Stainless Steel Shafts (K)
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Options NFPA Steel Air Cylinder (S)*

Parker's 2A Series NFPA steel air cylinder is available for extremely rugged applications. Magnetic pistons are not available with this option. Consult factory for other switching or sensing options.
Guided Cylinders HB Series 400 PSI NFPA Hydraulic Cylinder (4L)

Parker's 4ML Series aluminum NFPA cylinder is available for 400 PSI hydraulic service. Cushions are not available.
750 PSI NFPA Hydraulic Cylinder (S1)*
250 PSI NFPA Air Cylinder (3A, 4A)
Parker's 3L Series NFPA steel cylinder is available for hydraulic service requiring higher force and precise control. Magnetic pistons are not available with this option. Consult factory for other switching or sensing options. *If cushions are specified with this option, the adjustment screw is located on the face opposite the port. Consult factory for other locations.
A HBC C/F C/F C/F HBT 8.56 9.31 10.69 HBR 11.56 13.81 16.2 Cylinder Bore (in) 1-1/2 2 2-1/2
Parker's 3MA and 4MA Series aluminum NFPA air cylinders are available for general purpose use.
250 PSI NFPA Hydraulic Cylinder (L)
Parker's 2ML Series extruded aluminum NFPA cylinder is available for hydraulic service. Cushions are not available.
HBC HBT HBR
A + STROKE B + STROKE
Model 15 20 25
2xC NPTF
B 2.25 2.25 2.38
C 3/8 3/8 3/8
C/F = Consult Factory
HBB
Model 15 20 25
2xC NPTF
L 7.00 8.00 9.50
T 6.13 6.63 7.63
M C/F C/F C/F
C (NPTF) 3/8 3/8 3/8
FF 2.25 2.25 2.38
Cylinder Bore (in) 1-1/2 2 2-1/2
ISO Air Cylinder (D, E)

An ISO cylinder (Parker's P1D Series) is available for ISO or metric requirements. Magnetic pistons are standard. If sensors are required, they must be ordered from the Electronic Sensors section of this catalog.
HBC HBT HBR
Model 15
A HBC 6.77 7.55 9.39 HBT 8.69 9.48 11.32 HBR 11.70 13.99 16.83
B 2.95 2.83 3.50
C BSPP 1/4 1/4 3/8 NPTF 3/8 3/8 3/8
Bore (mm) 40 50 63
20 25
2xC
HBB
M + (2 STROKE) L + STROKE T + STROKE FF + STROKE D
Model 15 20
2X C
L 7.0 8.0 9.5
T 6.1 3 6.63 7.63
M 11.63 12.67 14.76
C BSPP NPTF 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 3/8
D 0.22 0.34 0.24
FF 2.95 2.83 3.50
Bore (mm) 40 50 63
25
F158
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Rod Lock Cylinder (D1, D2, E1, E2)

The P1D Series Rod Lock Cylinder incorporates a powerful piston rod locking device, which clamps the piston rod and locks it in position. The locking device is a spring lock with an air pressure release and is integrated into the front (head) cover of the cylinder. This increases the cylinder length as shown below. In the absence of air signal pressure, full holding force is applied to the piston rod. When air is present at 4 Bar (58 PSI), the locking device is released. A manual override rod lock version is also available. Applications: Vertical guided cylinders In the event of pressure loss In the event of electrical control failure

ROD LOCK CIRCUIT
Design Tip: The piston rod should not be moving when the locking device is activated. The locking device is not intended to repeatedly brake movement. See sample pneumatic circuit. Note: Rod locking cylinders automatically include cushions, but include cushions ("C") in model code. If sensors are required, they must be ordered from the Electronic Sensors section of this catalog.
3/2 LOCK VALVE (internal pilot) 5/3 CYLINDER VALVE (external pilot)
TECHNICAL DATA
Maximum Pressure: 145 PSI (10 Bar) Pressure Required to Unlock: 58 PSI (4 Bar) 1
1Signal
F
NOTES: Cushion adjust (head only) located at position #4 for bore sizes 32-63mm. Head end port and cushion cannot be repositioned. All P1D Rod Lock Versions are not intended for use in water service applications, or in environments that have high humidity levels and/or splashing fluids present.
pressure to port on locking device. Operation at pressures lower than 4 Bar (58 PSI) may lead to inadvertent engagement of the rod lock device. Model 15 20 25 Bore (mm) 40 50 63
A + STROKE B+ STROKE
Holding Force, lb (N) 193 (860) 303 (1345) 481 (2140)
HBC HBT HBR
Model
E
A HBC HBT HBR
C* 1/4 1/4 3/8
D 0.22 0.30 0.43
E 0.08 0.16 0.08
F* 1/8 1/8 1/8
Cylinder Bore (mm) 40 50 63
15 20 25
8.50 10.43 13.43 3.11 9.39 11.33 15.93 3.01 11.63 13.57 19.07 3.45
2xC F
*BSPP or NPTF
HBB
A + (2 STROKE) B + STROKE
HBB Model 15
E
A 13.37 14.52 17.00
B 3.11 3.01 3.45
C* 1/4 1/4 3/8
D 0.22 0.30 0.43
E 0.08 0.16 0.08
F* 1/8 1/8 1/8
Cylinder Bore (mm) 40 50 63
20 25
D F 2XC
*BSPP or NPTF
F159
Catalog 0900P-4
Options NFPA Rod Lock Cylinder (4J)

The 4MAJ Series Rod Lock Cylinder incorporates a powerful piston rod locking device, which clamps the piston rod and locks it in position. The locking device is a spring lock with an air pressure release and is attached to the front (head) cover of the cylinder. This increases the cylinder length as shown below. In the absence of air signal pressure, full holding force is applied to the piston rod. When air is present at 60 PSIG or greater, the locking device is released. The manual override version is standard. Applications: Vertical guided cylinders In the event of pressure loss In the event of electrical control failure

ROD LOCK CIRCUIT
Design Tip: The piston rod should not be moving when the locking device is activated. The locking device is not intended to repeatedly brake movement. See sample pneumatic circuit. Note: Rod locking cylinders automatically include cushions, but include cushions ("C") in model code. If sensors are required, they must be ordered from the Electronic Sensors section of this catalog.
3/2 LOCK VALVE (internal pilot)
TECHNICAL DATA
Maximum Pressure: 100 PSIG Pressure Required to Unlock: 60 PSIG 1
pressure to port on locking device. Operation at pressures lower than 60 PSIG may lead to inadvertent engagement of the rod lock device.
1 Signal
Model 15 20 25
Bore (inch) 1 2 2
Holding Force, lb 180 314 491
Note: All 4MAJ rod lock cylinders are not intended for use in water service applications, or in environments that have high humidity levels and/or splashing fluids present.
HBC HBT HBR
HBB
A + (2 x STROKE) B + STROKE
E E D F D F H MANUAL RELEASE .23 G HEX 2X C H 2X C MANUAL RELEASE G HEX
.23
Model 15 20 25
A HBC 8.89 9.88 11.26 HBT 10.82 11.82 13.19 HBR 13.82 16.32 18.70 HBB 14.26 15.51 17.13
B 2.31 2.31 2.38
C NPTF 3/8 3/8 3/8
D 0.31 0.31 0.31
E 0.31 0.31 0.31
F NPTF 1/8 1/8 1/8
G HEX 5/16 1/2 1/2
H 0.19 0.27 0.27
Cylinder Bore (inch) 1-1/2 2 2-1/2
F160
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Special (X)
Other common modifications are available. Consult factory for specifications. Examples include: NC9 Series NFPA Pneumatic Cylinder 2AN Series NFPA Pneumatic Cylinder 2MAE Clean Plus Series NFPA Pneumatic Cylinder for Corrosive Environments Cylinders with Continuous Position Feedback Bumpers on cylinder only
No Cylinder (Q, Q1)

The unit is supplied with cylinder mounting but no cylinder so that one may be field-added. Consult factory for required cylinder piston rod length.
Left Hand Assembly (L1)

Units with shock absorbers can be assembled with shocks on the opposite sides.
Standard Orientation
Left Hand Orientation
F
Port Location (L3)
Cylinder ports are located in position 3, opposite the standard position when L3 is specified. Port positions 2 and 4 are not possible.
2
4
2

Standard abrasion-resistant nitrile seals should be used for general purpose applications with temperatures of 0 - 165F. Fluorocarbon seals are recommended for high temperature applications up to 250F.
Note: Fluorocarbon seals are not available for the 3MA Series cylinder. Option Shock Absorbers Bumpers Piston Magnets Sensors Temperature Range (F) 32 - 150 0 - 200 0 - 165 14 - 140
F161
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
HBC HBT HBR
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Three Position Cylinder

The three position unit utilizes a duplex air cylinder to provide the center position. This option can be specified with all other options. However, bumpers and body mounted inductive proximity sensors operate on the fully extended and retracted positions only. Cylinder mounted reed and solid state sensors can be used to detect the center position of the slide.
Note: The Three Position Cylinder is not available for the 3MA Series cylinder.
SAMPLE CIRCUIT:
Consult factory for other control options.
Piston rods not connected A
POSITION B C
Main Piston Rod
Exhaust
F
Quick Exhaust Valve
OPERATION:
Position A (fully retracted) is obtained by applying pressure to Port 3 with Ports 2 and 1 vented to atmosphere. Position B (mid-position) is obtained by applying pressure to Port 1 while maintaining a lower pressure to Port 3. The pressure at Port 3 prevents the main piston rod from overtravelling. A quick exhaust valve can be used to maintain pressure while allowing full exhaust capability. Position C (fully extended) is obtained by applying pressure to Port 2.
HBC HBT HBR
A + STROKE C + STROKE
DIMENSIONAL DATA:
Three position units utilize a longer cylinder. All other dimensions remain the same.
Model 15 20 25 A HBC 10.38 11.12 12.57 HBT 12.31 13.06 14.50 HBR 15.31 17.56 20.01 HBB 15.25 16.25 17.94 B 2.38 2.38 2.38 C 2.31 2.31 2.38
B + STROKE
HBB
A + (2 STROKE)
C + STROKE
B + STROKE
F162
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensors Solid State and Reed Sensors

Sensors must be ordered separately. Magnetic piston is standard. See Electronic Sensors section for part numbers and sensor specifications.
Inductive Proximity Sensors

8mm barrel type proximity sensors may be ordered with the HB Series slides (options P, N, P1, N1). The slides can also be ordered prox ready (J, J1). A magnetic piston is standard. See Electronic Sensors section for sensor specifications.
Sensor Extend Stroke
F
Sensor Retract Stroke
HBC15
1.06 1.31 1.56 FF 2.31 2.31 2.38
5.19 6.39 7.82 PP 0.50 0.50 0.50
6.26 7.00 8.38 RR 8mm 0.63 0.63 0.63
0.94 1.19 1.44
HBC20 HBC25 Model HBC15 HBC20 HBC25
12mm 0.88 0.88 0.88
FF + STROKE N
RR
PP
F163
P5E
HB
P5L
HBC
Model
P5TT/TD
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensors & Service Kits Proximity Sensor Dimensions HBT HBR

Model HBT15 HBT20 HBT25 Model HBT15 HBT20 HBT25
K 1.06 1.31 1.56 FF 2.31 2.31 2.38
L 6.94 7.88 9.31 PP 0.50 0.50 0.50
M 8.19 8.94 10.31 RR 8mm 0.63 0.63 0.63
N 0.94 1.19 1.44
12mm 0.88 0.88 0.88
Model
N RR PP
K 1.06 1.31 1.56 FF 2.31 2.31 2.38
L 9.94 12.39 14.82 PP 0.50 0.50 0.50
M 11.19 13.44 15.82 RR 8mm 0.63 0.63 0.63
N 0.94 1.19 1.44
HBR15 HBR20 HBR25 Model HBR15 HBR20
12mm 0.88 0.88 0.88
F
HBB
AU SET SCREW
HBR25
AU 1.81 2.19 2.31
AV 1.94 2.63 2.75
SET SCREW
AV
Seal kits apply to all models of the same size.

Model HB*15 HB*20 HB*25 Nitrile PSK-HBT15 PSK-HBT20 PSK-HBT25 Fluorocarbon PSK-HBT15V PSK-HBT20V PSK-HBT25V
F164
P5E Series
P1D ISO Guided Cylinders
F
P5T Contents
Features ......................................................................... F166 Ordering Information....................................................... F167 Specifications ................................................................. F168 Engineering Data ................................................... F169-F174 Dimensions ............................................................ F175-F176 Rod Lock Options .................................................. F177-F179 Bumpers ......................................................................... F180 Sensors .......................................................................... F180 Mounting Kits .................................................................. F181 Service Kits .................................................................... F182
F165
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Guided Cylinders P5E Series
Bushings Composite bushings are standard. Composite bushings with oversize shafting are optional. Optional sealed recirculating ball bearings with stainless steel shafts provide precise alignment with very low friction and wear.
Cast Aluminum Body Lightweight, unitized design provides strength and 3 mounting faces.
Support Shafts Chrome plated, case hardened support shafts are machined from high carbon alloy steel. Stainless steel and oversized shafting are available.
Cylinder Piston Aluminum piston with nylon wear band eliminates metal-to-metal contact. This increases cylinder life expectancy when the support rods deflect under load. Magnetic piston standard. Cylinder Mounting Conforms to ISO 6431, ISO/DIS 15552, VDMA 24562 and AFNOR standards Alignment Coupler Allows piston rod to selfcenter, thus increasing cylinder life, especially when the support shafts deflect under load.
Tooling Plate Precision machined and anodized, the aluminum tooling plate allows mounting on two sides. Dowel pin holes provide accurate mounting.
F166
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering information Model Number Code

Example: P5E-J032PGN0250
P5E
032
0250
Stroke Specify whole millimeters, i.e. 0250 = 250mm stroke
Shaft/Bearing Type J M C H Composite Bearing, Chrome Plated Standard Shaft Composite Bearing , Chrome Plated Oversize Shaft 1 Composite Bearing, Stainless Steel Shaft Ball Bearing, Stainless Steel Shaft
Bumpers/Adjustable Stop Collars N B E Bore Size 032 040 050 063 080 100 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm 80mm 100mm H Port Style NPTF (Std) NPTF with Flow Controls (Std. Female Ports) BSPP with Flow Controls (ISO Female Ports) Flow Controls, NPTF Port, Prestolok Tube (inch) Flow Controls, BSPP Port, Prestolok Tube (mm) G N B F P BSPP T R S None Bumpers, retract only 2 Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars, extend only Bumpers both ends, Adjustable Stop Collars on extend 2 Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars on retract 2 Bumpers and Adjustable Stop Collars both ends 2
F
P5T
Cylinder Type 3 F G K S Q X P1D Removable Gland Cylinder P1D Removable Gland Cylinder with Cushions P1D Rod Lock Cylinder with Cushions P1D Manual Override Rod Lock Cylinder with Cushions No Cylinder Special please specify
1 Bumpers and adjustable stop collars are not available with oversize shaft option. 2 These options will increase the cylinder length. To achieve a specific usable stroke length with these options, add the corresponding value(s) in the Adder table on page F148 to the desired stroke length. See Bumper Options for explanation. Adders are not used when P1D Rod Lock (K) or P1D Manual Override Rod Lock (S) are specified with bumpers. 3 Tie Rod Version or composite piston option must be specified as Special (X).
F167
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4

Maximum Operating Pressure: 145 PSI (10 Bar) Support Shaft Sizes: 12 to 30mm Cylinder Mounting: ISO 6431, ISO/DIS 15552, VDMA 24 562 and AFNOR standards Mounting: Unrestricted Operating Temperature Range: -10C to +74C (14F to 165F) Filtration Requirement: 40 micron, dry filtered air

Model (Bore Size) Piston Rod (mm) Bushings Support Shafts (mm) 12 16 16 20 20 25 20 25 25 30 25 30 Piston Bore Area Non-Rod Side (mm2) 804 1257 1964 3117 5027 7854 (in2) 1.25 1.95 3.04 4.83 7.79 12.17 Theoretical Force Max.* Stroke (mm) Extend @80 PSI (5.5 Bar), N (lb) 444 (100) 694 (156) 1081 (243) 1717 (386) 2771 (623) 4333 (974) Retract @80 PSI (5.5 Bar), N (lb) 334 (75) 583 (131) 907 (204) 1544 (347) 2500 (562) 4061 (913) Weights Base Weight, kg (lb) 0.97 (2.14) 1.55 (3.41) 2.56 (5.64) 3.57 (7.84) 6.53 (14.4) 8.76 (19.32) Per 100 mm Stroke, kg (lb) 0.175 (0.39) 0.315 (0.69) 0.495 (1.09) 0.495 (1.09) 0.770 (1.70) 0.770 (1.70)
32 40 50 63 80 100
16 16 20 20 25 25
Standard Oversized Standard Oversized Standard Oversized Standard Oversized Standard Oversized Standard Oversized
500 625 775 950 1150 1350
* Ball bearings suggested on long-stroke applications. Consult factory for longer strokes.
F168
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Maximum Load Capacity with Standard Shaft

The following curves are based on 10 million cycles at a speed of 0.20 m/s (40 fpm). Higher dynamic loads will reduce cycle life. For static conditions, multiply the information in the graphs by 1.5. EXAMPLE: A P5E with 40mm bore, composite bushings and a stroke+d of 400mm will have a load capacity of 48N.

Distance (d) Load
Deflection
32mm Bore Size

200 (45)
Standard Composite
40mm Bore Size

300 (67) 250 (56)
150 (34)
Load, N (lb)
4.96 mm
100 (22) 50 (11) 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8)
Load, N (lb)
Ball Bearing
200 (45) 150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0
2.32 mm
.18 mm .08 mm
0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8)
.42 mm .99 mm
.32 mm .13 mm
.79 mm
1.98 mm
F
500 (19.7)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
400 (15.7)
50mm Bore Size

400 (90)
Standard Composite
63mm Bore Size

400 (90)
Standard Composite
300 (67)
300 (67)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
Ball Bearing
200 (45)
1.42 mm
.12 mm
200 (45)
.12 mm
100 (22)
1.69 mm
.29 mm .70 mm
100 (22)
.27 mm .05 mm
.62 mm
.05 mm
0 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7) 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
0 0 100 (3.9)
Stroke + d, mm (inch)
80mm Bore Size

800 (180)
100mm Bore Size

1000 (225)
600 (135)
Standard Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
.70 mm
400 (90)
600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0
.70 mm
Ball Bearing
.12 mm
200 (45)
1.69 mm
.29 mm
.05 mm
.12 mm .29 mm
1.69 mm
.05 mm
0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
100 (3.9)
200 (7.9)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
F169
P5E
800 (180)
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
Ball Bearing
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Maximum Load Capacity with Oversized Shaft

The following curves are based on 10 million cycles at a speed of 0.20 m/s (40 fpm). Higher dynamic loads will reduce cycle life. For static conditions, multiply the information in the graphs by 1.5. EXAMPLE: A P5E with 63mm bore, oversized support shafts and a stroke+d of 300mm would have a load capacity of 200N.
Distance (d) Load
Deflection
32mm Bore Size

200 (45)
Oversized Composite
40mm Bore Size

300 (67) 250 (56)
Oversized Composite
150 (34)
Load, N (lb)
100 (22)
Load, N (lb)
200 (45) 150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0
.03 mm
50 (11) 0 0 100 (3.9)
.18 mm
.47 mm
1.25 mm
.02 mm .31 mm .12 mm

0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9)
.81 mm .05 mm
.07 mm
200 (7.9)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
50mm Bore Size

400 (90)
Oversized Composite
63mm Bore Size

400 (90)
Oversized Composite
300 (67)
300 (67)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
200 (45)
.02 mm
100 (22)
.54 mm
200 (45)
.02 mm
.69 mm
.04 mm
.10 mm
.23 mm
100 (22) 0
.04 mm
.11 mm
.28 mm
0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
100 (3.9)
200 (7.9)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
Stroke+ d, mm (inch)
80mm Bore Size

800 (180)
Load Capacity
100mm Bore Size

1000 (225)
Oversized Composite
600 (135)
800 (180)
Load, N (lb)
400 (90)
Load, N (lb)
600 (135)
.69 mm
400 (90) 200 (45) 0
.02 mm
200 (45) 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9)
.25 mm
.59 mm
.02 mm
.11 mm
.04 mm
.28 mm
.04 mm
.10 mm
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
100 (3.9)
200 (7.9)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
Stroke+d, mm (inch)
F170
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Symmetrical Torque Capacity with Standard Shaft

These curves provide the maximum permissible torsional load vs. stroke for various slide sizes. The data presented is based on a bearing life equivalent to 10 million cycles for dynamic conditions. Higher dynamic torques will reduce cycle life. For static conditions, multiply the information in the graphs by 1.5. EXAMPLE: A P5E with 100mm bore, composite bushings and a stroke + d of 300mm would have a torque capacity of 20 Nm.
Torque d Torsional Deflection
32mm Bore Size

8 (71)
Standard Composite
40mm Bore Size

12 (106) Torque, Nm (lb-in) 10 (89) 8 (71) 6 (53) 4 (35) 2 (18) 0 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7) 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
6 (53)
Ball Bearing
4 (35)
.15
2 (18) 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8)
9.22 .42 1.18 3.30
.12
.64 .28
300 (11.8) 400 (15.7)
3.36 1.46
500 (19.7)
F
P5T
50mm Bore Size

20 (177) Torque, Nm (lb-in) 15 (133) 10 (89) 25 (221)
Standard Composite
63mm Bore Size

Standard Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
20 (177) 15 (133) 10 (89) 5 (44) 0
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
1.75
5 (44)
1.75 .09
0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9)
.09
.19
200 (7.9) 300 (11.8)
0 0 100 (3.9) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
80mm Bore Size

60 (531)
Standard Composite
100mm Bore Size

80 (708)
Standard Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
45 (398)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
60 (531)
.61
30 (266)
Ball Bearing
.57
40 (354)
Ball Bearing
1.40
15 (133)
.11
20 (177)
1.28 .25
.05
0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9)
.12
300 (11.8)
.27
0 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7) 0 100 (3.9)
.05
200 (7.9)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
F171
P5E
HB
P5L
.40
.83
.19
.40
.83
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Symmetrical Torque Capacity with Oversized Shaft

These curves provide the maximum permissible torsional load vs. stroke for various slide sizes. The data presented is based on a bearing life equivalent to 10 million cycles for dynamic conditions. Higher dynamic torques will reduce cycle life. For static conditions, multiply the information in the graphs by 1.5. EXAMPLE: A P5E with 50mm bore, oversized support shafts and a stroke + d of 400mm would have a torque capacity of 5 Nm.
Torque d Torsional Deflection
32mm Bore Size

8 (71) Torque, Nm (lb-in) Torque, Nm (lb-in) 12 (106) 10 (89) 8 (71) 6 (53) 4 (35) 2 (18) 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7) 0 100 (3.9)
40mm Bore Size
6 (53)
Oversized Composite
Oversized Composite
4 (35)
.06
1.40 .26 .05

200 (7.9)
2 (18) 0
.61
.15
.38
.94
2.34
.12
300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
50mm Bore Size

20 (177) Torque, Nm (lb-in) 15 (133) 10 (89) Torque, Nm (lb-in) 25 (221) 20 (177) 15 (133) 10 (89) 5 (44) 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7) 0 100 (3.9)
63mm Bore Size
Oversized Composite
Oversized Composite
.78 .02
.02 .05 .78 .13 .31
5 (44)
.05 .13
.31
200 (7.9)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
80mm Bore Size

60 (531) Torque, Nm (lb-in) Torque, Nm (lb-in) 80 (708)
100mm Bore Size
45 (398)
Oversized Composite
60 (531)
Oversized Composite
30 (266) 15 (133) 0 0
.02 .05 .11 .24

.56
40 (354) 20 (177)
.02 .05 .10
.51
.23
0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7) 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
F172
Catalog 0900P-4

Asymmetrical loading occurs when an off-center load is applied to the unit. P5E Series units can resist torsional loads that are asymmetrical. EXAMPLE: A P5E with 63mm bore, ball bearings and a stroke + d of 300mm would have an asymmetrical torque capacity of 5 Nm.
Load
32mm Bore Size

8 (71)
Oversized Composite
40mm Bore Size

12 (106)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
6 (53)
Standard Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
10 (89) 8 (71) 6 (53) 4 (35) 2 (18) 0

Ball Bearing
Oversized Composite Standard Composite
4 (35)
2 (18) 0 0
Ball Bearing
F
200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
100 (3.9)
200 (7.9)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
100 (3.9)
50mm Bore Size

20 (177)
Oversized Composite
63mm Bore Size

25 (221)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
15 (133)
Standard Composite
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
20 (177) 15 (133)
Oversized Composite
10 (89)
Standard Composite
10 (89) 5 (44) 0
5 (44)
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
100 (3.9)
200 (7.9)
300 (11.8)
400 (15.7)
500 (19.7)
80mm Bore Size

60 (531)
Oversized Composite
100mm Bore Size

80 (708)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
45 (398)
Torque, Nm (lb-in)
60 (531)
Oversized Composite
30 (266)
Ball Bearing Standard Composite
40 (354)
15 (133) 0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
20 (177)
0 0 100 (3.9) 200 (7.9) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 500 (19.7)
F173
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4

P5E Series units mounted vertically will have the same eccentric load capacity regardless of orientation. The graphs provide maximum load capacity for an eccentric mounted load. The load is assumed to be mounted at the face of the tooling plate. These load curves illustrate load ratings based on the bearing system of the product. Load rating is a key selection criterion but is not the only one to consider in the selection of a product.
Note: Charts are based on 100mm of stroke.
EXAMPLE: A P5E with a 40mm bore carrying an eccentric load located 300mm from the centerline has a capacity of approximately 200N (45 lbs).
40mm Bore Size
300 (67) 250 (56)
32mm Bore Size

250 (56) 200 (45)
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
150 (34) 100 (22) 50 (11) 0 0 150 (5.9) 300 (11.8) 450 (17.7) 600 (23.6) 750 (29.5)
200 (45) 150 (34)
Oversized Composite Standard Composite Ball Bearing
Standard Composite
100 (22) 50 (11)

0 0 150 (5.9)
Ball Bearing
300 (11.8)
450 (17.7)
600 (23.6)
750 (29.5)
Eccentricity, mm (inch)
50mm Bore Size

400 (90) 300 (67) 400 (90)
63mm Bore Size
Oversized Composite
300 (67)
Oversized Composite
Load, N (lb)
200 (45)
Standard Composite
Load, N (lb)
200 (45)
Standard Composite
100 (22)
Ball Bearing
100 (22) 0 0 150 (5.9) 300 (11.8) 450 (17.7) 600 (23.6) 750 (29.5) 0 150 (5.9) 300 (11.8)
Ball Bearing
450 (17.7)
600 (23.6)
750 (29.5)
80mm Bore Size

1000 (225) 800 (180)
Oversized Composite
100mm Bore Size

1000 (225) 800 (180)
Load, N (lb)
Load, N (lb)
600 (135) 400 (90) 200 (45) 0 0 150 (5.9) 300 (11.8) 450 (17.7) 600 (23.6) 750 (29.5)
600 (135)
Oversized Composite
Standard Composite
400 (90) 200 (45) 0 0 150 (5.9)
Standard Composite
Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
300 (11.8)
450 (17.7)
600 (23.6)
750 (29.5)
F174
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Basic Dimensions

L1 + STROKE A1 B1 B4 D2 B7 E2 B6 L2 B4 L3 + STROKE
MOUNTING SURFACE
C1
D6 A2 B2 B3 B4 45 B5
D1 G1
F1
B8
H1
C3 C2
D5, E1 DEEP
N1 ON FLATS L5 D3 D4 P2 B4
H2 L4
P1

D5, E1 DEEP 6 x 6mm-H7 DOWEL HOLES
B4
P3
A1
F
P5T
E3
Dimensions, mm (inch)
Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 A1 A2 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 C1 Std. C1 O.S. C2 C3 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 50 97 45 92 78 32.5 31.5 4 12.7 (1.97) (3.82) (1.77) (3.62) (3.07) (1.28) (1.24) (0.16) (0.50) 58 115 50.8 110 84 38 31.5 11 12.7 (2.28) (4.53) (2.00) (4.33) (3.31) (1.50) (1.24) (0.43) (0.50) 70 137 63 132 100 46.5 50 19 16 (2.76) (5.39) (2.48) (5.20) (3.94) (1.83) (1.97) (0.75) (0.63) 85 152 82.5 145 105 56.5 50 15 16 (3.35) (5.98) (3.25) (5.71) (4.13) (2.24) (1.97) (0.59) (0.63) 189 100 180 130 72 76 21 19 105 (4.13) (7.44) (3.94) (7.09) (5.12) (2.83) (2.99) (0.83) (0.75) 130 213 120 200 150 89 76 24.5 19 (5.12) (8.39) (4.72) (7.87) (5.91) (3.50) (2.99) (0.97) (0.75) 61 12 16 73.5 50 6.6 11 5.2 9 M6 4 (2.40) (0.47) (0.63) (2.89) (1.97) (0.26) (0.43) (0.20) (0.35) x 1.00 (0.16) 69 16 20 86.5 58 6.6 11 5.2 9 M6 4 (2.72) (0.63) (0.79) (3.41) (2.28) (0.27) (0.43) (0.20) (0.35) x 1.00 (0.16) 85 20 25 103.5 70 9 14 6.4 11 M8 4 (3.35) (0.79) (0.98) (4.07) (2.76) (0.35) (0.55) (0.25) (0.43) x 1.25 (0.16) 100 20 25 118.5 85 9 14 6.4 11 M8 4 (3.94) (0.79) (0.98) (4.67) (3.35) (0.35) (0.55) (0.25) (0.43) x 1.25 (0.16) 25 30 147 105 11 17 8.4 14 M10 6 130 (5.12) (0.98) (1.18) (5.79) (4.13) (0.43) (0.67) (0.33) (0.55) x 1.50 (0.24)
Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100
E1
E2
E3
12 7 4 30 17 (0.47) (0.28) (0.16) (1.18) (0.67) 12 7 4 35 24 (0.47) (0.28) (0.16) (1.38) (0.94) 16 9 9 40 27 (0.63) (0.35) (0.35) (1.57) (1.06) 16 9 9 45 27 (0.63) (0.35) (0.35) (1.77) (1.06) 45 32 20 11 5 (0.79) (0.43) (0.19) (1.77) (1.26) 20 11 5 55 32 (0.79) (0.43) (0.20) (2.17) (1.26)
81 16 153 120 (3.19) (0.63) (6.02) (4.72) 99 19 166 130 (3.90) (0.75) (6.54) (5.12) 119 23 194 150 (4.69) (0.91) (7.64) (5.90) 132 28 224 180 (5.20) (1.10) (8.82) (7.09) 166 36 252 200 (6.54) (1.42) (9.92) (7.87) 190 45 272 220 (7.48) (1.77) (10.71) (8.66)
17 71 64.7 17 36 31 40 (0.67) (2.80) (2.55) (0.67) (1.42) (1.22) (1.57) 20 71 74.7 17 36 36 44 (0.79) (2.80) (2.94) (0.67) (1.42) (1.42) (1.73) 25 79 90 24 42 44 50 (0.98) (3.11) (3.54) (0.94) (1.65) (1.73) (1.97) 25 109 90 24 58 44 60 (0.98) (4.29) (3.54) (0.94) (2.28) (1.73) (2.36) 30 113 109 30 50 52 70 (1.18) (4.45) (4.29) (1.18) (1.97) (2.05) (2.76) 30 128 114 30 49 51 70 (1.18) (5.04) (4.49) (1.18) (1.93) (2.01) (2.76)
1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2
M10 x 1.25 M12 x 1.25 M16 x 1.5 M16 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5
F175
P5E
F1
G1
H1
H2
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
N1
P1
P2
P3
Port Size NPT/ BSPP
Piston Rod Thread
HB
150 25 30 171.5 130 11 17 8.4 14 M10 6 (5.91) (0.98) (1.18) (6.75) (5.12) (0.43) (0.67) (0.33) (0.55) x 1.50 (0.24)
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions P1D Removable Gland Version
BG AM D KK B L 12
EE
PP PL SS BA TT OA
RT
DIN 439B SW
VD L2 WH G D 4 L8 + S L9+ 2 x S G
VA
R E
F
Dimensions
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100
S=Stroke
WH
WH + S
EE AM mm 22 24 32 32 40 40 OA mm 6 6 8 8 6 6 B mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 PL mm 13 14 14 16 16 18 BA mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 PP mm 21.8 21.9 25.9 27.4 30.5 35.8 BG mm 16 16 16 16 17 17 R mm 32.5 38.0 46.5 56.5 72.0 89.0 D mm 12 16 20 20 25 25 RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 D4 mm 45.0 52.0 60.7 71.5 86.7 106.7 SS mm 6.5 8.0 4.0 6.5 0 0 E mm 46.5 52.0 63.5 76.0 95.5 114.5 SW mm 10 13 17 17 22 22 BSPP G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 TT mm 4.5 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 20.0 NPTF/ BSPT 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 VA mm 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 G mm 28.5 33.0 33.5 39.5 39.5 44.5 VD mm 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 WH mm 26 30 37 37 46 51 L2 mm 18 20 26 26 33 33 L8 mm 94 105 106 121 128 138 L12 mm 6.0 6.5 6.5 6.5 10.0 10.0
Tolerances
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 B d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 BA mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 L8 mm 0.4 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0 L9 mm 2 2 2 2 3 3 R mm 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 Stroke Tolerance +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0
*Stroke Adder for Cylinder Bumper Options

Cylinder Bore 32, 40, 50 63, 80 100 Option B 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) T 25 (0.98) 5 (0.20) R 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) S 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) E 25 (0.98) 0
Adder dimensions in mm (inch) Note: Adders not used when P1D Rod Lock (K) and P1D Manual Override Rod Lock (S) are specified with bumpers.
F176
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod Lock Options P1D Rod Lock (K, S)

The P1D Series Rod Lock Cylinder incorporates a powerful piston rod locking device, which clamps the piston rod and locks it in position. The locking device is a spring lock with an air pressure release and is integrated into the front (head) cover of the cylinder. In the absence of air signal pressure, full holding force is applied to the piston rod. When air is present at 4 Bar (58 psi), the locking device is released. The design provides several valuable characteristics, such as: A holding force corresponding to a pressure of 7 Bar (102 psi) A clean design, with the front (head) end cover and locking device built into a common block for compact installation. Easy to clean, well-sealed construction. Exhaust air from the locking device can be piped away when there are high demands for contaminant free environment. Note: The P1D with rod lock product line is not intended for use in water service applications, or in environments that have high humidity levels and/or splashing fluids present.

Holding Forces
Bore Size 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm 80mm 100mm Holding Forces (N) 550 860 1345 2140 3450 5390 (lbs) 123 193 303 481 755 1211
Note: All P1D Rod Lock Versions are not intended for use in water service applications, or in environments that have high humidity levels and/or splashing fluids present.
Specifications
Fluid Medium: Dry, filtered, compressed air Maximum Cylinder Operating Pressure: 10 Bar (145 PSI) Required Pressure to Unlock1: 4 Bar (58 PSI) Minimum Torque Required for Override: 32mm Bore = 0.9 N-m / 8 in-lbs 40mm Bore = 0.9 N-m / 8 in-lbs 50mm Bore = 2.7 N-m / 24 in-lbs 63mm Bore = 2.7 N-m / 24 in-lbs 80mm Bore = 27.1 N-m / 240 in-lbs 100mm Bore = 36.6 N-m / 324 in-lbs Maximum Operating Temperature: -10C to +75C, +14F to +167F Maximum Cylinder Operating Speed: 5 feet per second
1Signal
F
3/2 LOCK VALVE (internal pilot) Auxiliary Supply Main Supply 5/3 CYLINDER VALVE (external pilot)
pressure to port on locking device. Operation at pressures lower than 4 Bar (58 psi) may lead to inadvertent engagement of the rod lock device.
Connection
F177
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod Lock Options P1D Rod Lock Version (K)
BG
EE
AM
L 12
G1/8
PP PL
RT
T
SS BA
OA
KK
B D
DIN 439B SW
TT
D4
VA
R E
VD
WH
L P H L 8 + Stroke
(M5 32 - 40) G 1/8 50 - 125)
F
Dimensions
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 A mm 16 16 18 26 35 50 OA mm 6 6 8 8 AM mm 22 24 32 32 40 40 P mm 64.8 68.0 73.5 89.5 101.5 123.5 B mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 PL mm 13 14 14 16 16 18 BA mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 BG mm 16 16 16 16 17 17 PP mm 21.8 21.9 25.9 27.4 30.5 35.8 D mm 12 16 20 20 25 25 R mm 32.5 38.0 46.5 56.5 72.0 89.0 D4 mm 45.0 52.0 60.7 71.5 86.7 106.7 RT mm M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 E mm 46.5 52.0 63.5 76.0 95.5 114.5 S mm 7 9 8 8 9 12 EE G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 SS mm 6.5 8.0 4.0 6.5 0 0 G mm 28.5 33.0 33.5 39.5 39.5 44.5 SW mm 10 13 17 17 22 22 H mm 71.5 77.0 80.5 96.5 110.5 132.5 T mm 2.5 2.0 4.0 2.0 5.0 6.0 KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 TT mm 4.5 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 20.0 L mm 56.0 56.0 62.5 74.5 87.0 106.0 VA mm 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 L8 mm 137 149 153 178 199 226 VD mm 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 L12 mm 6.0 6.5 6.5 6.5 10.0 10.0 WH mm 15 16 17 17 20 20
Tolerances
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 B mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 R mm 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 L8 mm 0.4 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0 BA mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 Stroke-length Tolerance mm +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0
F178
Catalog 0900P-4
Rod Lock Options
P1D Rod Lock Version with Manual Override (S)
MOUNTING SURFACE MR 1
L12
EE
PP
OA
NR
MR 2
BG T
N HEX
KK
AM
PL
SS
RT
B
D TT
BA
R E 6
DIN 439B SW
A L
D 4
VA
VD
WH
(M5 32 & 40) (G1/8" 50-125)
(M5 32 & 40) (G1/8" 50-125)

L 8 + Stroke
F
Dimensions
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 A mm 27.0 27.0 21.5 39.0 48.5 65.0 N mm 8 8 10 10 11 11 AM mm 22 24 32 32 40 40 NR mm 10.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 12.5 12.5 B mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 BA mm 30 35 40 45 45 55 OA mm 6 6 8 8 BG mm 16 16 16 16 17 17 P mm 64.8 68.0 73.5 89.5 111.5 133.5 D mm 12 16 20 20 25 25 PL mm 13 14 14 16 16 18 D4 mm 45.0 52.0 60.7 71.5 86.7 106.7 PP mm 21.8 21.9 25.9 27.4 30.5 35.8 E mm 46.5 52.0 63.5 76.0 95.5 114.5 R mm 32.5 38.0 46.5 56.5 72.0 89.0 EE G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 G mm 28.5 33.0 33.5 39.5 39.5 44.5 S mm 7 9 8 8 9 12 H mm 71.5 77.0 80.5 96.5 110.5 132.5 SS mm 6.5 8.0 4.0 6.5 0 0 KK M10X1.25 M12X1.25 M16X1.5 M16X1.5 M20X1.5 M20X1.5 SW mm 10 13 17 17 22 22 L mm 56.0 56.0 62.5 74.5 97.0 116.0 T mm 2.5 2.0 4.0 2.0 5.0 6.0 L8 mm 137 149 153 178 199 226 TT mm 4.5 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 20.0 L12 mm 6.0 6.5 6.5 6.5 10.0 10.0 VA mm 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 MR1 mm 16.0 16.0 18.5 22.0 15.0 15.0 VD mm 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 14 14 MR2 mm 3.0 3.0 5.5 4.0 19.8 20.8 WH mm 15 16 17 30 30 17
Tolerances
Cylinder Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100 B mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 R mm 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 L8 mm 0.4 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0 BA mm d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 Stroke-length Tolerance mm +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0 +1/-0
F179
P5E
HB
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
P5T
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Bumpers / Adjustable Stop Collars

Bumpers absorb shock, reduce noise and permit faster cycle times, thereby increasing production rates. They can be placed on the extend, retract or both positions. When bumpers are specified on the extend stroke, an adjustable stop collar is required and provides travel adjustment. An optional stop collar can also be specified for the retract stroke. OPTIONS: B Bumpers (retract only) E Bumpers, adjustable stop collars (extend only) R Bumpers, adjustable stop collars (retract only) S Bumpers, adjustable stop collars (both ends) T Bumpers both ends, adjustable stop collars on extend

Bumper with adjustable stop collar extend stroke
Bumper with optional adjustable stop collar retract stroke
NOTES: 1. Bumpers and adjustable stop collars are not available with oversize shaft options. 2. To achieve the desired useable stroke length with options B, E, T, R or S, the cylinder length will increase. See Stroke Adder table for cylinder dimensions adders. 3. Bumpers and adjustable stop collars on the extend stroke require additional cylinder stroke lengths on some bore sizes in order for the collars to clear the cylinder end cap. Therefore, cushions on extend stroke are not available with this option. See Stroke Adder table for cylinder dimension adders with options E, T or S.
Bumpers and adjustable stop collars, both ends (S)
Stroke Adder for Cylinder Bumper Options

Cylinder Bore 32, 40, 50 63, 80 100 Option B 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) T 25 (0.98) 5 (0.20) R 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) S 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) E 25 (0.98) 0
Adder dimensions in mm (inch)
Note: Adders not used when P1D Rod Lock (K) and P1D Manual Override Rod Lock (S) are specified with bumpers.
Sensors
Optional solid state and reed sensors sense the position of the magnetic ring on the cylinder piston. Drop-in Global Sensors are installed into the integral sensor grooves on the cylinder body and are easily positioned. Magnetic piston is standard. Order sensors separately. See Electronic Sensors section for part numbers and specifications.
F180
Catalog 0900P-4
Accessories Mounting Kits

Mounting kits conform to ISO 6431, ISO/DIS 15552, VDMA 24 562 and AFNOR standards. Kits include 4 mounting screws. Raw Material: Galvanized steel
Horizontal Mounting Kit (1)

A C
Vertical Mounting Kit (2)
B4
F B
E J E G
K H
F
P5T
Bore Size 32 40 50 63 80 100
Mounting (1) Horizontal 32-2801R 40-2801R 50-2801R 63-2801R 80-2801R 100-2801R
Mounting (2) Vertical PIC-4KMB PIC-4LMB PIC-4MMB PIC-4NMB PIC-4PMB PIC-4QMB
A 128 (5.04) 155 (6.10) 175 (6.89) 190 (7.48) 240 (9.45) 270 (10.63)
B 50 (1.97) 55 (2.16) 70 (2.76) 80 (3.15) 100 (3.94) 120 (4.72)
B4 32.5 (1.28) 38 (1.50) 46.5 (1.83) 56.5 (2.22) 72 (2.83) 89 (3.50)
C 116 (4.57) 140 (5.51) 160 (6.30) 175 (6.89) 218 (8.58) 245 (9.65)
D 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) 16 (0.63)
E 6.6 (0.26) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 13 (0.51)
F 60 (2.37) 63 (2.48) 70 (2.76) 74 (2.91) 89 (3.50) 90.5 (3.56)
G 80 (3.15) 92 (3.62) 113 (4.45) 129 (5.08) 153 (6.02) 186 (6.93)
H 47 (1.85) 53 (2.09) 65 (2.56) 74 (2.91) 97 (3.82) 111 (4.37)
J 64 (2.52) 72 (2.83) 90 (3.54) 100 (3.94) 126 (4.96) 150 (5.91)
K 32 (1.26) 36 (1.42) 45 (1.77) 50 (1.97) 63 (2.48) 75 (2.95)
L 60 (2.37) 64 (2.52) 71 (2.79) 77 (3.03) 93.5 (3.68) 97.5 (3.84)
Weight, g (lb) (1) (2) 500 230 (1.10) (0.51) 700 280 (1.54) (0.62) 1180 530 (2.60) (1.17) 1450 710 (3.20) (1.57) 3000 1590 (6.61) (3.51) 4100 2190 (9.04) (4.83)
Note: All dimensions in mm or (inch) unless otherwise noted.
F181
P5E
HB
Dimensions & Weights
P5L
P5TT/TD
P5T2
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits Rod Rebuild Kit with Nitrile Seals

Kit includes one each of: gland rod wiper seal o-ring (head to gland)
Bore Size 32 40 50 63 80 100
Guided Cylinders P5E Series Piston Rebuild Kit with Nitrile Seals
Kit includes: lip seal - piston (2) o-ring - end (2) wear strip (1)
Bore Size 32 40 50 63 80 100
Part Number RG0MP00121 RG0MP00161 RG0MP00201 RG0MP00201 RG0MP00251 RG0MP00251
Part Number PK032MP001 PK040MP001 PK050MP001 PK063MP001 PK080MP001 PK100MP001
F182
Rodless Pneumatic Cylinders
Section G
G
P1X
G1
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Section G Overview
Section G Rodless Pneumatic Cylinders

P1X Series
7 Bore Sizes 16mm through 63mm Two Port Locations Standard Large Carriage for Stability Integral Sensor Mounting Rail Optional Adjustable Stroke and Shock Absorbers
RC Series
5 Bore Sizes 25mm through 63mm Band Type Rodless Cylinder Load Support Bearings Optional Dual Ported End Caps Optional Piston Sensing
P1Z Series
3 Bore Sizes 16mm, 20mm and 32mm Magnetically Coupled Bandless Design for Increased Durability Available in Basic and Guided Versions Manufactured Globally
G2
P1X Series
Compact Rodless Air Cylinders
G
P1X Contents
Features and Benefits ........................................................ G4 Ordering Information........................................................... G5 Specifications, Weights and Forces .................................... G6 Technical Data ............................................................ G7-G10 Sensor Adapter Bracket.................................................... G11 Basic Dimensions ..................................................... G11-G12 Mounting Bracket Dimensions .................................. G13-G15 Accessories & Options ............................................. G16-G17 End Port Piping................................................................. G17 Shock Absorbers ...................................................... G18-G20 Stroke Adjustment Unit ............................................. G21-G22 Service Kits ...................................................................... G23 G3
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Features / Benefits
Rodless Air Cylinders P1X Series

C347
Large carriage with four strategically placed mounting holes ensures a high degree of stability and flexibility. Dust-seal belt located above the pressure seal belt, prevents contamination from entering the cylinder tube. Dust wiper keeps dust from accumulating between table and tube.
Spring-loaded tension arms located on the work table maintain constant pressure on the dust seal belt to ensure external sealing protection.
Slit-tube design incorporates a urethane pressure seal belt to provide a positive seal between the cylinder tube opening and the oval position.
Magnetic pistons are standard so that position sensing switches can be added at any time without modifying the cylinder. Compact yoke construction allows for reduced piston length resulting in reduced overall cylinder length. Unique oval piston design dramatically reduces overall cylinder height. Integral switch mounting rail provides convenient mounting location for position sensing switches. Switches available include Solid State and Reed, AC or DC, with or without indicator lights. Bi-Color switches are available with 2 indicators to identify when maximum efficiency of contact is made. Adjustable cushions for deceleration at end of stroke are standard.
Additional ports in one end cap for optional piping location.

Note: End cap ports shown on this view are for representation only. Actual end ports are at other end of cylinder in relation to standard side ports and end ports are normally furnished plugged.
Oval Piston Design

Oval piston design provides greater load carrying capacity than typical rodless cylinders with round pistons.
G4
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information Model Code P1X

Series Construction N M Inch Metric Bore Size 016 16mm 020 20mm 025 25mm 032 32mm 040 40mm 050 50mm 063 63mm Piston Style* A R L N H B C Cushions Both Ends (Standard) Cushion Right End Only** Cushion Left End Only** No Cushions or Shock Absorbers Shock Absorber Both Ends Shock Absorber Right End Only** Shock Absorber Left End Only** D Function Double Acting

C347
016
0500
Stroke Length
N
Porting Options N G Q NPTF BSPP BSPT*
Seal Material N Standard Basic or Options B W / Basic With Options Special (for factory use only) Carriage Mounting Style Standard D (std) A Inverted J G
* Not available with N Series
Carriage Mounting Single, Basic Mount Single, Swivel Mount Mounting Options
No Foot Mount N (std) H K T
End Mount Foot Bracket F M P R
Bottom Mount Foot Bracket A B C D
Intermediate Supports No Support One Support Two Supports Three Supports Sensors
G
P1X P1Z RC
* Magnetic piston standard. ** As viewed from port side of cylinder.
Essential Information Optional Features

When B is specified, the remaining digits in the part number are not necessary. If W is used, the remaining digits in the part number must be filled out.
C B S E A F D G H K J M N
P8S-GPFLX* (Qty 2) P8S-GPFTX* (Qty 2) P8S-GPSHX* (Qty 2) P8S-GPMHX* (Qty 2) P8S-GNFLX* (Qty 2) P8S-GNFTX* (Qty 2) P8S-GNSHX* (Qty 2) P8S-GNMHX* (Qty 2) P8S-GRFLX* (Qty 2) P8S-GRFTX* (Qty 2) P8S-GRSHX* (Qty 2) P8S-GRMHX* (Qty 2) None (standard)
Not available on 40, 50 and 63mm bore sizes.
Ordering Example #1
25mm bore, 350mm stroke standard cylinder with air cushions both ends, magnetic piston, inch mounting threads and NPTF ports. Cylinder Part # P1XN025DAN0350B
* Includes switch adapter bracket
Ordering Example #2
32mm bore, 1500mm stroke standard cylinder with shock absorbers both ends, magnetic piston, inch mounting threads, single swivel mount carriage, NPTF ports, bottom mounted foot brackets, 2 intermediate supports and 2 P8S-GNFLX sensors with brackets. Cylinder Part # P1XN032DHN1500WANCA G5
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications, Weights and Forces Specifications Operating Medium

Maximum Pressure Minimum Pressure Model

C347
P1X (Standard w/Switch) Compressed Air 100 PSI (7 BAR) 16, 20 Bores 25, 32, 40 Bores 50, 63 Bores 16 (5/8) M5 (10-32) M5 (10-32) 29 PSI (2 Bar) 14.5 PSI (1 Bar) 7 PSI (0.5 Bar) 50 (2), 63 (21/2) 3/8 NPT 3/8 Rc 0.120 to 196"
Proof Pressure Bore Size mm (inch nominal) Port Size N Series Port Size M Series Ambient Temperature F (C) Stroke Tolerance in. Piston Speed, *in./sec. 0.080 to 39"
152 PSI (10.5 Bar) 20 (3/4), 25 (1) 32 (1-1/4), 40 (1-1/2) 1/8 NPT 1/8 Rc 1/4 NPT 1/4 Rc 0.100 to 118"
40 to 140F (5 to 60C) 2-80 IPS with side ports on each end (16 & 20 bores 2-40 IPS with single end porting with 39" stroke) (25, 32, 40, 50 & 63 bores 2-40 IPS with single end porting with 78" stroke) Air Cushion Standard Not Required (if you choose to lubricate your system, continuing lubrication will be required.)
Cushion Lubrication
*Note: Actual piston speed with one end ports will vary depending on stroke length.
Weight & Theoretical Force Characteristics

Weights Bore Area In2 lbs 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 0.31 0.49 0.84 1.26 1.96 3.08 4.86 0.70 1.15 2.21 3.31 5.29 7.94 13.67 Weight at Zero Stroke M00 kg 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.4 3.6 6.2 lbs 0.73 1.19 2.43 3.53 5.51 8.16 14.33 MLB kg 0.3 0.5 1.1 1.6 2.5 3.7 6.5 MLB1 lbs 0.77 1.28 2.43 3.75 kg 0.4 0.6 1.1 1.7 Weight per 1" (25.4mm) Stroke lbs 0.07 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.27 0.40 0.63 kg 0.03 0.04 0.07 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.28 30 9 15 23 38 59 91 145 Theoretical Force (lbs) at Pressure (PSI) 40 12 20 30 50 78 122 193 60 19 29 46 69 117 182 290 80 25 39 61 100 156 243 386 100 31 49 76 125 195 304 483
G6
Catalog 0900P-4
Moments / Load and Deflection Moments

Figure 5 shows the maximum allowable moments for each of the three types of loading: pitch, roll and yaw. The sum total of each of these types of moments, divided by each of the maximum values, determines a Load-Moment Factor (LMF) should be equal to or less than 1.0. On horizontal mountings, the total load (L) should also be divided by the maximum load allowable (Figure 6) and factored into the equation. Horizontal Mountings:

Figure 6
Bore Size 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 Max. Allowable Load [L] N (lbs) Std. 141 (32) 198 (45) 356 (81) 616 (140) 959 (218) 1456 (331) 2297 (522) Inverted 70 (16) 101 (23) 180 (41) 308 (70) 480 (109) 726 (165) 1148 (261)
C347
Max. Unsupported Length mm (in) at Max. Load 450 (17.7) 551 (21.7) 899 (35.4) 749 (29.5) 1000 (39.4) 1300 (51.2) 1600 (63.0)
Vertical Mountings:
Acceptable length and load combinations for the various bore sizes can be determined from the charts in Figure 7. Figure 7
Figure 5
Maximum Allowable Moments N-m (lb-in)
[M] Bore Pitch Moment Std. 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 5 (44) 10 (89) 17 (150) 36 (319) 77 (682) Inverted 3.5 (31) 7 (62) 12 (106) 25 (221) 54 (478) [Ms] Roll Moment Std. 1 (9) 1.5 (13) 5 (44) 10 (89) 32 (283) Inverted 0.5 (4) 0.7 (6) 2.5 (22) 5 (44) 16 (142) 26 (230) [Mv] Yaw Moment Std. 1 (9) 3 (27) 10 (89) 21 (186) 42 (372) 76 (673) Inverted 1 (9) 3 (27) 10 (89) 21 (186) 26 (230) 42 (372) 76 (673)
150
32
125
L Lbs.
100 25 75
23 (204) 11.5 (102) 26 (230)
154 (1363) 108 (956)
275 (2434) 193 (1708) 52 (460)
50
20 16
G
48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Load and Deflection

Figure 6 shows the maximum load [L] that the cylinder can accept, as well as the maximum length [D] between supports at the maximum load.
HorizontalLoad Above
24
L
600 63
D Inches
D
HorizontalLoad Below
500
L Lbs.
400 50 300 40 200 100
L
HorizontalTube Support
24
48
72
96 120 144 168 192
D Inches
To determine cylinder deflections under the load (or resistive force perpendicular to the piston table) without mid-support, see the graphs on page G9.
D
G7
P1Z
RC
P1X
25
Catalog 0900P-4
Inertia Moment / External Stops Inertia Moment Consideration

When the weight is stopped at the end of the stroke by the cylinder cushion, inertial force is created. This inertial force (Fi) can be determined by using the formula: Fi = LG G = Inertia factor (Figure 8) Example: A speed of 40 in/sec corresponds to an inertia factor G of 13. The inertial force calculated would then be multiplied by the distance from the center of gravity of the load to the centerline of the cylinder, and added to the previously calculated M and Mv moments. This will give an M Total and Mv Total. Ensure that the M Total and the Mv Total do not exceed the [M] and [Mv] values shown in Figure 5 (previous page). If they exceed these values, consult the factory. See pages G18-G9 for additional information on shock absorbers. L = Load attached to the cylinder carriage (lbs.)

Figure 8
C347
40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5
Inertia Factor (G)
20
40
60
80
Speed (in. per sec) (V)
External Stops
Figure 9
When the load attached to the cylinder is stopped externally, it creates an additional moment equal to the cylinder force (Fa) times the distance (S). This additional moment, plus the previously calculated Load-Moment factor, should not exceed the allowable values. See previous page. When reducing the stroke with external stops, remember that the cushion length and the energy absorption capacity are not directly proportional. Reducing the cushioning distance by 50% corresponds to a reduction of 60-70% in cushion effectiveness.
Fa S M = Fa x S
G8
Catalog 0900P-4
Load and Deflection

L

C347
32 mm Bore
16 mm Bore
40 mm Bore
20 mm Bore
50 mm Bore
G
P1X
25 mm Bore
63 mm Bore
G9
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Piston Table Angular Deflection

C347
Piston Table Angular Deflection Due To Load Moments Applied

32 mm Bore
16 mm Bore
40 mm Bore
20 mm Bore
G
50 mm Bore
25 mm Bore
63 mm Bore
G10
Catalog 0900P-4
16-20 mm Bore Dimensions Basic Cylinder

C347
LL + STROKE L + STROKE TC TD J HB HA XB C B 2-Q XD XC DA XA A PQ HEX SOCKET HEAD BOLT DB E E F K STROKE P + STROKE F 4-M DEPTH N 2-Q (PLUG) G TA TB 4 - TE DEPTH TL LA J HB HA DC 2 - PLUG
Bore (mm) 16 20 inches mm inches mm
A 1.46 37 1.73 44 P 5.20 132 5.83 148
B 0.47 12 0.55 14 PQ 0.83 21 0.97 24.5
C 1.46 37 1.65 42
DA 0.47 12 0.55 14 Q
DB 0.55 14 0.63 16
DC 0.47 12 0.63 16 TA 3.47 88 3.94 100
E 0.34 8.5 0.41 10.5 TB 1.89 48 2.36 60
F 0.35 9 0.45 11.5 TC 1.26 32 1.50 38
G 1.06 27 1.22 31
HA 0.24 6 0.34 8.5 TD 0.59 15 0.71 18
HB 0.55 14 0.73 18.5 TE 5-40 M3 8-32 M4
J 0.69 17.5 0.87 22
K 2.24 57 2.46 62.5 TL 0.20 5 0.24 6
L 5.87 149 6.65 169 XA 0.91 23 1.10 28
LL 5.98 152 6.75 171.5 XB 0.43 11 0.63 16
LA 0.12 3 0.10 2.5 XC 0.26 6.5 0.24 6
M 5-40 M3 8-32 M4
N 0.20 5 0.26 6.5 XD 0.16 4 0.20 5
Bore (mm) 16 20 inches mm inches mm
10-32 NPT M5 1/8 NPT 1/8 Rc
G
P1X
Sensor Adapter Bracket

Part Number P8S-TMA0Y (Shown larger than actual size)
M3
35
G11
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
25-63 mm Bore Dimensions Basic Cylinder

C347
LL + STROKE TC XE TD J HB HA TA TB 4 - TE DEPTH TL L + STROKE J HB HA DC LA
XB C B HC G
XC
DB XA A
E F
4-M DEPTH N K STROKE
DD 2-Q E F P + STROKE 2-Q (PLUG)
Bore (mm) 25 32 40 50 63 inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
A 53 66 80 96 118 P 6.38 162 7.72 196 8.27 210 8.35 212 10.16 258
B 17 18.5 22 28 35
C 53 57 67 82 95 Q 1/8 NPT 1/8 Rc 1/4 NPT 1/4 Rc 1/4 NPT 1/4 Rc 3/8 NPT 3/8 Rc 3/8 NPT 3/8 Rc
DB 20 32 36 45 50
DC 26 27 35 35 39 TA 4.80 122 5.28 134 5.83 148 5.98 152 6.61 168
DD 19 21 28 35 42 TB 2.76 70 3.15 80 3.54 90 3.94 100 4.33 110
E 14 15 17 23 19
F 10 13 14 16 20 TC 1.89 48 2.21 56 2.68 68 3.15 80 4.02 102
G 40.5 43.5 51.5 61 74 TD 0.79 20 0.79 20 1.18 30 1.18 30 1.58 40
HA 7.5 10 13 15 15
HB 20
HC 18.9
J 24 28 31 39 39 TL 0.32 8 0.35 9 0.43 11 0.51 13 0.51 13
K 71 85 91 90 109 XA 1.50 38 1.89 48 2.36 60 2.91 74 3.78 96
L 190
LL 192
LA 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 XC 0.22 5.5 0.24 6 0.28 7 0.39 10 0.55 14
M 1/4-20 M6 1/4-20 M6 M8 M8 3/8-16 M10 XE
N 0.35 9 0.35 9 12 12 0.59 15
2.09 0.67 2.09 0.79 1.02 0.75 0.55 0.39 1.59 0.30 0.79 0.74 0.95 2.80 7.48 7.56 0.08 2.60 0.73 2.24 1.26 1.06 0.83 0.59 0.51 1.71 0.39 0.93 0.85 1.10 3.35 8.90 9.00 0.10 23.5 21.5 26 33 32 TE 10-24 M5 1/4-20 M6 1/4-20 M6 5/16-18 M8 5/16-18 M8 27 35.3 43 226 228.5 244 246.5 258 260.5 296 298.5 XB 0.91 23 0.98 25 1.18 30 1.42 36 1.65 42
3.15 0.87 2.64 1.42 1.38 1.10 0.67 0.55 2.03 0.51 1.02 1.06 1.22 3.58 9.61 9.71 0.10 5/16-18 0.47 3.78 1.10 3.23 1.77 1.38 1.38 0.91 0.63 2.40 0.59 1.30 1.39 1.54 3.54 10.16 10.26 0.10 5/16-18 0.47 4.65 1.38 3.74 1.97 1.54 1.65 0.75 0.79 2.91 0.59 1.26 1.69 1.54 4.29 11.65 11.75 0.10
Bore (mm) 25 32 40 50 63 inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
1.58 40 1.85 47 2.28 58 2.76 70 3.54 90
G12
Catalog 0900P-4
End Mount Foot Bracket Dimensions 16-32 mm Bore Sizes

C347
TF SB SA
V U W + STROKE
V U 4 - MB HEX SOCKET HEAD BOLT 4 - X
See page G17 for end port usage.
40-63 mm Bore Sizes

4 - XF CT BORE DEPTH XG
TF
SB SA
V U
4 - X U W + STROKE
4 - MB HEX SOCKET HEAD BOLT
G
P1X
16 20 25 32 40 50 63
inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
1.46 37 1.65 42 2.09 53 2.24 57 2.64 67 3.23 82 3.74 95
1.38 35 1.69 43 2.05 52 2.52 64 3.15 80 3.70 94 4.57 116
1.02 26 1.30 33 0.79 20 1.26 32 1.42 30 1.77 40 1.97 48
0.32 8 0.39 10 0.47 12 0.47 12 0.59 15 0.79 20 0.98 25
0.24 6 0.24 6 0.35 9 0.35 9 0.43 12.5 0.43 12.5 0.51 15
0.16 4 0.24 6 0.43 11 0.43 11 0.35 11.5 0.35 11.5 0.47 15
6.34 161 7.13 181 8.19 208 9.61 244 10.47 269 11.02 283 12.68 326
0.14 3.6 0.19 4.7 0.28 7 0.28 7 0.35 9 0.35 9 0.43 11 0.51 13 0.51 13 0.61 15.5 0.34 8.7 0.34 8.7 0.41 10.5
M3x10 M4x12 M5x50 M5x50 M6x55 M8x65 M8x70
G13
P1Z
Bore (mm)
SA
SB
TF
XF
XG
MB
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Bottom Mount Foot Bracket Dimensions 16-20 mm Bore Sizes

C347
2-Q (PLUG)
TY
TG
SB SA
U V W + STROKE
U V 4 - X 4 - MC HEX SOCKET HEAD BUTTON BOLT
25-32 mm Bore Sizes

2-Q (PLUG) C TY 4 - X
G
TG SB SA V U
4 - MC HEX SOCKET HEAD BOLT W + STROKE U
2-Q (PLUG)
Bore (mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
C 1.46 37 1.65 42 2.09 53 2.24 57 2.64 67 3.23 82 3.74 95
Q 10-32 M5 1/8 NPT 1/8 Rc 1/8 NPT 1/8 Rc 1/4 NPT 1/4 Rc 1/4 NPT 1/4 Rc 3/8 NPT 3/8 Rc 3/8 NPT 3/8 Rc
SA 1.38 35 1.69 43 1.97 50 2.52 64
SB 1.02 26 1.30 33 0.79 20 1.26 32
TG 0.24 6 0.32 8 0.39 10 0.39 10
TY 1.69 43 1.97 50 2.48 63 2.64 67
U 0.24 6 0.24 6 0.35 9 0.35 9
V 0.16 4 0.24 6 0.43 11 0.43 11
W 6.34 161 7.13 181 8.19 208 9.61 244
X 0.13 3.4 0.18 4.5 0.28 7 0.28 7
MC 5-40, 1/4 LG 8-32, 3/8 LG 1/4-20 x 1/2 LG 1/4-20 x 1/2 LG
G14
Catalog 0900P-4
Support Brackets Intermediate Support Brackets

End Mount

C347
CE
CA CB CC
CD
4 - CH
CF CG
CE
CK
CJ
Intermediate Support Brackets (2 per kit)

Bore 16 mm 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm 63 mm Bore 16 mm 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm 63 mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm CA 1.654 42 1.929 49 2.362 60 2.913 74 3.543 90 4.173 106 5.118 130 CJ 0.236 6 0.315 8 0.394 10 0.394 10 CB 2.205 56 2.52 64 2.992 76 3.465 88 4.252 108 4.882 124 5.984 152 CK 0.709 18 0.866 22 1.161 29.5 1.24 31.5 CC 2.52 64 2.953 75 3.465 88 3.937 100 4.882 124 5.512 140 6.772 172 CD 0.118 3 0.157 4 0.236 6 0.236 6 0.236 6 0.315 8 0.394 10 CE 0.472 12 0.551 14 0.768 19.5 0.846 21.5 0.965 24.5 1.201 30.5 1.516 38.5 CF 0.787 20 0.787 20 0.787 20 0.787 20 1.181 30 1.181 30 1.969 50 CG 1.378 35 1.496 38 1.575 40 1.575 40 2.362 60 2.362 60 3.543 90 CH 0.157 4 0.197 5 0.276 7 7 0.354 9 0.354 9 0.433 0.276
G
P1X P1Z RC
11
Kit Part Number End Mount or No Mount L078940016 L078940020 L078940025 L078940032 L078940040 L078940050 L078940063 Bottom Mount L078950016 L078950020 L078950025 L078950032
G15
Catalog 0900P-4
Accessories and Options Swivel Mount

Absorbs misalignment between cylinder and load

C347
FD FE FH 4 - FL
FG FF
FB
FA
FC C
FJ dimension is the maximum horizontal float
FK dimension is the maximum vertical float
Swivel Mounts
Bore 16 mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm FA 2.238 58 2.638 67 3.071 78 3.74 95 4.134 105 4.961 126 5.472 139 FI inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm 0.134 3.4 0.177 4.5 0.236 6 0.276 7 0.276 7 0.354 9 0.354 9 FB 0.827 21 0.984 25 0.984 25 1.496 38 1.496 38 1.732 44 1.732 44 FJ 0.118 3 0.118 3 0.118 3 0.197 5 0.197 5 0.197 5 0.197 5 FC 1.339 34 1.535 39 1.85 47 2.185 55.5 2.441 62 2.874 73 3.11 79 FK 0.118 3 0.118 3 0.118 3 0.197 5 0.197 5 0.197 5 0.197 5 FD 0.945 24 1.181 30 1.181 30 1.772 45 1.772 45 2.362 60 2.362 60 B 0.472 12 0.551 14 0.669 17 0.728 18.5 0.866 22 1.102 28 1.378 35 FE 0.673 16 0.787 20 0.787 20 1.181 30 1.181 30 1.575 40 1.575 40 C 1.457 37 1.654 42 2.087 53 2.244 57 2.638 67 3.228 82 3.74 95 FF 1.181 30 1.575 40 1.575 40 1.969 50 1.969 50 2.756 70 2.756 70 FG 1.575 40 2.205 56 2.205 56 2.756 70 2.756 70 3.543 90 3.543 90 Part Number L078930016 L078930020 L078930025 L078930032 L078930040 L078930050 L078930063
FH 0.118 3 0.157 4 0.157 4 0.236 6 0.236 6 0.315 8 0.315 8
20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm 63 mm Bore 16 mm 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm 63 mm
G16
Catalog 0900P-4
Accessories and Options Inverted Mount

Provides mounting surface 180 from carriage

C347
CL CK CJ CP 4 - CS CR CQ
CM CN
Inverted Mounts*
Bore 16 mm 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm 63 mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm CJ 0.591 15 0.709 18 0.787 20 0.787 20 1.181 30 1.181 30 1.575 40 CK 1.398 35.5 1.28 32.5 1.772 45 2.126 54 2.48 63 2.913 74 3.465 88 CL 1.969 50 1.969 50 2.717 69 3.209 81.5 3.76 95.5 4.449 113 5.433 138 CM 1.142 29 1.024 26 1.102 28 1.319 33.5 1.496 38 1.89 48 2.283 58 CN 2.362 60 2.362 60 2.795 71 3.15 80 3.602 91.5 4.429 112.5 5.157 131 CP 0.236 6 0.236 6 0.197 5 0.276 7 0.315 8 0.394 10 0.512 13 CQ 1.89 48 2.362 60 2.756 70 3.15 80 3.543 90 3.937 100 4.331 110 CR 3.465 88 3.937 100 4.567 116 5.039 128 5.433 138 5.591 142 6.22 158 5/16-18 L078960063 5/16-18 L078960050 1/4-20 L078960040 1/4-20 L078960032 10-24 L078960025 8-32 L078960020 CS 5-40 Part Number** L078960016
G
P1X P1Z RC
*Inverted mounts not available with adjustable stroke, shock absorber or tube center support bracket. **Use this part number when ordering as a separate part. When ordering with cylinder, use C option as part of cylinder part number.
End Port Piping

Refer to Figure 10 to determine when end port piping can be used with various types of mountings relative to fitting clearance. On all bore sizes with foot mounting, the end port pipe fittings will obstruct the mounting holes. To avoid this problem, mount the cylinder first and tighten the mounting bolts and then attach the pipe fittings to the cylinder ports. Figure 10
Bore Size (mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 C [O.D. of fittings - mm (in.)] No Mount 12 (0.472) 16 (0.630) 26 (1.024) 27 (1.065) 35 (1.378) 35 (1.378) 39 (1.535) 26 (1.024) 30 (1.181) 34 (1.339) End Port Piping Not Available End Mount Bottom Mount 12 (0.472) 16 (0.630) 26 (1.024) 27 (1.063)
G17
Catalog 0900P-4
Shock Absorbers Selection Criteria

The Shock Absorber Advantage
Increase equipment throughput Smoother deceleration of loads Adjustable end of stroke positioning

C347
Prevents impact damage Minimize shock loads on equipment Improves product performance
Four Steps to Great Performance

Step 1. Gather the Application Parameters Total load weight (pounds) Final velocity at impact (inches/second)* Cycle rate (cycles per hour) Step 2. Verify Shock Absorber Performance See charts on the following pages Determine that shock absorber will do the job
*If final velocity cannot be easily calculated, double the average velocity.
Step 3. Verify the Cycle Rate See shock specifications below and verify application is within cycle rate Step 4. Choose the Appropriate Option in Model Code
Shock Absorber Specifications

Figure 11 Specifications
Cylinder Shock Absorber No. Max. Energy Absorption - in-lbs (kgfm) Stroke - inches Energy Absorption/hour - in.-lbs/hour Max. Impact Velocity - in./sec. Max. Cycle Rate per Hour Ambient Temperature - F (C) Spring Return Force - lb. Extended Compressed Return Time - Sec. 0.65 1.01 0.3 0.45 0.97 0.3 16mm 0887790016 26.0 (0.3) 0.236 54,700 59 2100 20mm 0887790020 60.8 (0.7) 0.315 109,380 59 1800 25mm 0887790025 104.2 (1.2) 0.394 187,510 78.7 1800 0.65 1.33 0.3 32mm 0887790032 226 (2.6) 0.590 338,560 78.7 1500 1.33 2.65 0.3 40mm 0887790040 608 (7.0) 0.787 729,200 98.4 1200 2.20 4.86 0.4 50, 63mm 0887790050 1042 (12) 0.984 750,000 118.1 720 3.60 7.49 0.4
41-140 (5-60)
G18
Catalog 0900P-4
Shock Absorbers Performance Data (16 - 32mm Bores)

C347
Air Cushion w/back pressure (flow controls or other meter out device) Shock Absorber
16 mm Bore
100 100
20 mm Bore
Velocity (inches/sec)
10
10
1 1 10 Load (lbs) 100
1 1 10 Load (lbs) 100
25 mm Bore
100 100
32 mm Bore
G
P1X
1 1 10 Load (lbs) 100
1 1 10 Load (lbs) 100 1000
Notes: 1. If the cylinder is vertical in orientation, double the total load for bottom shock absorber. 2. Use the total load that is being moved by shock absorber. If a weight transfer application, this would include La. 3. If final velocity cannot be easily determined, use two times the stroke divided by the stroke time.
G19
P1Z
RC
10
10
Catalog 0900P-4
Shock Absorbers Performance Data (40 - 63mm Bores)

C347
Air Cushion w/back pressure (flow controls or other meter out device) Shock Absorber
40 mm Bore
100 100
50 mm Bore
10
Velocity (inches/sec) 1 10 Load (lbs) 100 1000
10
1 1 10 Load (lbs) 100 1000
G
63 mm Bore
100
10
1 1 10 Load (lbs) 100 1000
Notes: 1. If the cylinder is vertical in orientation, double the total load for bottom shock absorber. 2. Use the total load that is being moved by shock absorber. If a weight transfer application, this would include La. 3. If final velocity cannot be easily determined, use two times the stroke divided by the stroke time.
G20
Catalog 0900P-4
Accessories and Options

C347
Stroke Adjustment and Shock Absorber Dimensions 16-25 mm Bore Sizes
L + STROKE
SK SR ST SG SH
SC
SD
SD
SC SG
SP
SE
SF
SQ
SM
SJ
SJ
Bore (mm) 16 20 25 in. mm in. mm in. mm
SC 0.71 18 0.89 22.5 0.79 20
SD 0.16 4 0.14 3.5 0.10 2.5
SE 1.65 42 1.89 48 2.46 62.5
SF 1.38 35 1.57 40 2.03 51.5
SG Max 0.57 14.5 0.57 14.5 0.57 14.5 Min 0.18 4.5 0.18 4.5 0.18 4.5
SH in-lbs 26 61 104
SJ 0.98 25 1.54 39 1.97 50
SK 1.93 49 2.24 57 3.03 77
SP M3 M4 M6
SQ 1.34 34 1.50 38 1.97 50
SR 0.24 6 0.32 8 0.47 12
ST 0.16 4 0.20 5 0.39 10
C 1.46 37 1.65 42 2.09 53
L 5.87 149 6.65 169 7.48 190
G
P1X
SH = max. energy absorption
32-63 mm Bore Sizes

SK SR ST SG SC SD C SD L + STROKE SC SP SG
SE
SM SF SQ
SJ
SJ
Bore (mm) 32 40 50 63 in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
SC 0.87 22 1.26 32 1.50 38 1.50 38
SD 0.28 7 0.28 7 0.32 8 0.32 8
SE 2.62 66.5 3.09 78.5 3.90 99 4.41 112
SF 2.19 55.5 2.58 65.5 3.15 80 3.68 93.5
SG Max 1.06 27 1.34 34 2.17 55 1.73 44 Min 0.67 17 0.94 24 1.77 45 1.34 34
SH in-lbs 226 608 1042 1042
SJ 2.56 65 2.56 65 2.76 70 2.76 70
SK 3.86 98 4.41 112 5.35 136 6.22 158
SP M8 M10 M12 M16
SQ 2.11 53.5 2.50 63.5 3.05 77.5 3.50 89
SR 0.55 14 0.67 17 0.87 22 0.98 25
ST 0.47 12 0.47 12 0.67 17 0.79 20
C 2.24 57 2.64 67 3.23 82 3.74 95
L 8.90 226 9.61 244 10.16 258 11.65 296
SH = max. energy absorption
G21
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Stroke Adjustment Unit Positioning of Stroke Adjustment Unit

C347
16~25
(1) Moving the stroke adjustment unit. The stroke adjustment unit can be moved by loosening the mounting bolts. (2) Locking of stroke adjustment unit. After moving the stroke adjustment unit to the appropriate position, lock it there by tightening the mounting bolts to the torque values shown in Figure 12. Insufficient torque may cause the stroke adjustment unit to slip out of position.
32~63
(4) Adjustment of shock absorber. Adjust the absorption energy of the shock absorber by changing the operating stroke of the shock absorber. This is done by loosening the shock absorber nut and turning the unit. When adjustment is complete, tighten the shock absorber nut to the torque values shown in Figure 12a. (5) Notes on usage. The shock absorber absorbs rated energy with rated stroke. The factory setting allows a small amount of shock absorber stroke before it bottoms out. Readjust the location of the shock absorber so that the complete stroke of the absorber is utilized.
Figure 12
Torque values for tightening stroke adjustment unit.
Tightening Torque Bore Size Mounting Bolt (lb-in) 9-11 22-24 46-50 195-213 390-415 682-735 Stroke Adj. Plate Bolt (lb-in) 4-6 22-24
16mm 20mm 25mm 32mm 40mm 50, 63mm
Absorption energy as set at factory: Small margin with stroke of shock absorber.
(3) Stroke adjustment using the stopper bolt. Adjust the stroke by loosening the stopper bolt nut and turning the stopper bolt. After adjusting the stroke, tighten the stopper bolt nut to the torque values shown in Figure 12a. When adjusting the 16-25 mm cylinders, due to the small amount of clearance between the table and the stroke adjustment plate, adjust the stroke by moving the complete stroke adjustment unit.
Cylinder Stroke End
Adjust the position of the shock absorber until the plunger of the shock absorber is fully depressed.
Figure 12a
Torque values for tightening stopper bolt nut and shock absorber nut.
Tightening Torque Bore Size 16mm 20mm 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm Stopper Bolt Nut (lb-in) 10-11 22-24 73-84 195-213 390-425 682-735 1772-1914 Shock Absorber Nut (lb-in) 12-16 26-35 40-53 66-89 195-266 487-620 487-620
Cylinder Stroke End
G22
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits Table 2. Replacement Seal Kit Part Numbers

Bore Size Kit No. Parts In Kit Pressure Seal Belt Dust Seal Belt Cushion Seal Piston Seal Cylinder Body Seal 16mm L079020016 L079030016 L079040016 109358 109411 109380 20mm L079020020 L079030020 L079040020 109359 109412 109381 25mm L079020025 L079030025 L079040025 142367 109413 142724

C347
32mm L079020032 L079030032 L079040032 142384 109414 142741
40mm L079020040 L079030040 L079040040 142401 109415 142758
50mm L079020050 L079030050 L079040050 109347 109416 142775
63mm L079020063 L079030063 L079040063 109348 109417 142792
G
P1X
G23
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Stroke Adjustment Unit

C347
G24
RC Series
Rodless Air Cylinder
G
P1X
Contents
Features ...........................................................................G26 Ordering Information.........................................................G27 Specifications, Weights .....................................................G28 Force Data ........................................................................G28 Load and Moment Data ....................................................G29 Cushion Data ....................................................................G30 Porting Configurations/Cylinder Selection ........................G31 Intermediate Supports ..............................................G32-G33 25mm & 32mm Bore Dimensions .............................G34-G35 40mm & 63mm Bore Dimensions .............................G36-G37 50mm Bore Dimensions ...........................................G38-G39 Inverted Carriage Mounting Styles ...........................G40-G41 Sensors ............................................................................G42
G25
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Band Wipers: The wiper cleans and reseats the upper band, keeping dirt and contaminants from the sealing area of the cylinder. The wiper assembly also cleans the path of the Delrin support rods ensuring the piston carriage travels smoothly.
Rodless Air Cylinders RC Series

C347
Piston Carriage Supports Delrin rods support and guide carriage loads (not available in 25mm bore). This unique design transfers the loading from the piston to the support rods and increases seal life. The negative effects of moderate side loading are minimized.
VIEW A-A Position 1
Bearing Strips Located on the side of the piston carriage, the bearing strips slide along the slot in the cylinder tube. They reduce the effects of side loads on piston wear and cylinder life.
Retained Cushion Adjusting Screws The captive screw increases safety during machine operation and maintenance. It cannot be accidentally backed out too farcushion adjustment screw blowout is prevented.
Pos. 4
Pos. 2
Position 3
Transfer Tube The standard RC Series cylinder features a transfer tube which allows air to be directed to both sides of the piston from one end of the cylinder. Long tubing or hose runs can be eliminated. When double-porting is required for faster piston travel, an optional end cap design is available.
Self-Checking Cushion Seals Adjustable cushions, supplied as standard, decelerate piston smoothly at end of stroke.
Piston Seals Cylinder can be operated without the addition of lubrication. Seals ride a thin film of Teflon impregnated lubricant for smoother piston travel and extended seal life.
Magnetic Piston An optional magnetic piston, with reed or solid state sensors, provides piston position sensing. The sensor assembly is dovetail mounted; offering many sensor locations for desired feedback without the expensive and cumbersome, add-on track mounted sensors.
Integral Mounting Holes Two tapped holes on the bottom surface and four tapped holes on the face of each end cap add to mounting possibilities. The cylinder can be installed without the addition of any accessories. If needed, the optional foot mounts can be used.
Nylon Piston Wear Bands Nylon piston bearings increase cylinder life and load bearing capacity by the elimination of metal-to-metal contact. Friction resistance characteristics are also enhanced.
G26
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information Model Code

C347
Combination Mounting
40
Bore (mm) 25 32 40 50 63
RC
20
Piston Carriage Mount Standard Carriage D N T E A J Mounting Style B L* Basic Mount Basic Mount, Double Carriage Flange Mount Flange Mount, Double Carriage Swivel Mount Inverted Carriage Basic Mount Basic Mount, Double Carriage Flange Mount
Stroke Specify in inches.
Cushion End B C Standard
Cushion End A C Standard
Special Modifications Specify S if Special Modifications, including Magnetic Piston, are required. List Modifications in clear text.
F FM
Cylinder Only Cylinder with Foot Mount
K* Flange Mount, Double Carriage G* Swivel Mount

* Not available in 25mm & 32mm Bore.
Mounting Modifications Blank Standard D Double Porting Configuration
Not available in 63mm Bore.
Ports U NPTF
G
P1X
Combination Mounting Blank Combination mounting not required. C Intermediate Supports Blank
Combination Mounting Quantity/Location No Combination Mounting If required: 2nd Digit = Location 3 Standard Carriage, Position 3 4 Inverted Carriage, Position 4 2 Inverted Carriage, Position 2
Sensors
To order cylinder prepared for sensors, specify S for special modification and then list appropriate sensor code: RCRS Cylinder prepared for reed sensor operation RCSS Cylinder prepared for solid state sensor operation For sensor specifications and part numbers, please refer to the Electronic Sensors section.
G27
P1Z
RC
1st Digit = Quantity (1-9).
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications / Force Data Specifications

Anodized Aluminum End Caps, Body, Piston Carriage Stainless Steel Sealing Band Buna-N Piston Seals Retained Adjustable Cushions Integral Mounting Holes

C347
Transfer Port (optional) Nominal Pressure Rating 115 PSI Standard Operating Temperature -10F to 165F Strokes Available Up to 24 ft. Standard Fluid: Filtered, Lubricated or Non-Lubricated Air
Weight per Inch Stroke (lb) 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.48 0.65
Weights
Bore 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm
Base Weight (lb) by Mounting Style D,T,A 2.5 5.4 7.5 11.1 19.8 N,E 3.7 7.8 11.4 15.6 27.4 J 3.1 6.4 9.3 14.1 23.6 B 4.8 9.8 15.2 21.6 35.0 L N/A N/A 9.3 14.1 23.6 K N/A N/A 15.2 21.6 35.0 G N/A N/A 9.3 14.1 23.6
Force Data
To determine the thrust available from your RC Series cylinder, enter the graph along the base at the pressure to be supplied at the inlet of the cylinder. Project vertically to the appropriate thrust line. The corresponding value on the left axis is the available force from the cylinder. Static thrust values indicate the force available when the cylinder is not in motion. (Note: Rodless cylinders are not recommended for load holding applications. If used in this type of application a continuous pressure supply must be maintained).
G
Static and Dynamic Thrust (Lbs.)
Dynamic thrust values indicate the maximum recommended load capacity for a cylinder in motion. In a dynamic condition, there is pressure on the back side of the piston (dependent upon the plumbing and valving used in the system) which must be overcome in addition to moving a load. These factors, coupled with the compressibility of air and cylinder friction, result in dynamic thrust being a percentage of static thrust. This graph assumes average conditions relative to air line sizes, system layout, component sizes, friction, etc. The resulting dynamic thrust is approximately 50% of corresponding static values.
Force at Various Pressures

Thrust Developed (25 mm Bore)
100 90 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 105 115 100 110 120 0

260 240
STATIC THRUST DYNAMIC THRUST

80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
220 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 5 15 25
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
105 115 100 110 120
10
20
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
105 115 100 110 120
Pressure (psig)
Pressure (psig)
Pressure (psig)


400
600 550
Static and Dynamic Thrust (lbs.)
Static and Dynamic Thrust (lbs.)
350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 0 10 20
500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120
Pressure (psig)
Pressure (psig)
G28
Catalog 0900P-4
Load and Moment Data

Application of Parker RC Series Cylinders requires that external loading forces be considered. Exceeding design stresses by overloading the cylinders may affect the construction integrity and operation of the cylinder. Shown below are various loading characteristics inherent to rodless cylinder applications and RC Series load capacities. Load and Moment Data apply to both standard and inverted piston carriage construction. Each application should be within the limits for the appropriate bore size. Exceeding these boundaries can result in premature cylinder wear and/or failure of the cylinder.

C347
! CAUTION
The force of deceleration, especially if a large mass is attached to the carriage, should be considered when calculating loads to be carried by the rodless cylinder. A large mass, in conjunction with a high deceleration force, can cause damage to the cylinder and/or the loss of control of the load. Either can result in equipment damage and danger to nearby personnel. High deceleration forces may occur, but are not limited to the initial set-up of a machine. To minimize the potential danger, the following steps are suggested in addition to normal set-up procedures. A. The rodless cylinder should be plumbed with flow controls in a meter out mode. B. 1. Open the cushion needle valve adjustment screw 1/4 of a turn from completely closed. 2. Open the flow control valves 1/2 of a turn from completely closed. C. Cycle the cylinder. D. To adjust the speed of the cylinder, slowly open the flow control valves. To adjust the cushion, slowly adjust the cushion needle valve screw. E. Repeat the procedure until the required piston velocity and cushion performance is achieved.
Maximum Load L
L
Maximum Bending Moment M M=Fxr Standard Carriage Mount

F r
Inverted Carriage Mount

M=F x r F
r
G
P1X
Maximum Bending Moment Ms *Intermediate Mount

Ms
Inverted Carriage
Ms L
Maximum Torsional Moment Mv

Mv
*NOTE: Intermediate Mount Inverted Piston Load and Moment Data (see preceding page).
Top View
Maximum Bending Moment Bore Size 25 32 40 50 63 Standard Carriage M lbs-ft 5.5 13.3 22 43 74 Ms lbs-ft .38 1.5 1.5 4 4.8 Double Carriage M lbs-ft 14 30 50 85 148 Ms lbs-ft 0.8 3 3 8 9.5 Inverted Carriage M lbs-ft 5.5 13.3 22 42.5 74 Maximum Torsion Stress Standard Carriage Mv lbs-ft 1.2 5 5 13 14.5 Double Carriage Mv lbs-ft 1.9 25 15 61 67 Max Load (L) Standard/Double lbs 33 58 85 135 185 Inverted lbs 9 29 33 72 96
G29
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Cushion Data Cushion Data

Check the graph at right to determine whether a cylinder will adequately stop a load without damage to the cylinder. To determine the weight of the load and the maximum speed of the piston carriage, enter the graph at the base and project vertically to the required speed. This point of intersection should fall below the appropriate back pressure line.

C347
Cushion Data
Kinetic Energy Graph (25 mm Bore)
V e 100 l o c 50 i t y F P 10 M 10
20
30
40 50
100
200
300
Weight (lb)
---------- With Back Pressure No Back Pressure
Cushion Data
V e 200 l o 100 c i t y F P 10 M 10
1,000
Cushion Data
V e l o c i t y F P M
10 10 20 30 40 60 100 500 1,000 3,000 2,000
100
100
1,000 2,000
Weight (lb)
Weight (lb)
Cushion Data
1000 1000
Cushion Data
V e l o c i t 100 y F P M
V e l o c i t 100 y F P M
10
10 100 1000
10 10
100
1000
Weight (lb)
Weight (lb)
G30
Catalog 0900P-4
Porting Configurations / Cylinder Selection Porting Configurations

The RC Series cylinder is available in two porting/end cap configurations. In the standard configuration, End A is at your left when looking at the cylinder and viewing both ports. Looking at the face of the cap on End A with the tube slot at the top, position 1 is on top, with 2, 3, and 4 continuing in a clockwise direction. With the standard porting configuration, air can be directed to and exhausted from the End A side of the piston by using port #2 on End A. Air can be directed to and exhausted from the End B side of the piston by using either or both ports #2 on End B or #4 on End A.

C347
Main 1/8" NPTF 1/4" NPTF 1/4" NPTF 3/8" NPTF 3/8" NPTF
Transfer 1/8" NPTF 1/8" NPTF 1/4" NPTF 1/4" NPTF 3/8" NPTF
Top View
Transfer Port Position #4 (Supplied With Port Plug)
Top View
Main Port Position #4
End A
End B
G
P1X P1Z RC
Standard Porting Cylinder Configuration
Double Porting Cylinder Configuration
The double porting configuration has the same end caps on both sides. With the double porting configuration, each side of the piston can be fed and exhausted by two ports as explained
in the example above describing the End B side of the piston. Main pressure ports are located on opposite sides of the cylinder.
Cylinder Selection
How to Select Your Parker RC Series Cylinder
1. Consult Force Chart to determine the bore required. 2. Cushions are standard on the RC Series cylinder. Check the cushion data chart to verify that the cushions are sufficient to decelerate the load. If not, external means of deceleration must be considered. 3. Choose the cylinder mounting style and piston carriage. 4. For cylinders requiring sensors, configure sensor code for sensors required. 5. Determine if intermediate supports are necessary. For cylinders with the standard piston carriage, intermediate supports will be supplied in position #3 only. If the inverted piston carriage is used, select position #2 or position #4. Other intermediate support positions are available as a special order. 6. Consult the porting configuration diagrams for an illustration of available flow characteristics. Choose between the standard porting and the double porting configuration.
G31
Catalog 0900P-4
Supports Placing of Supports

A main advantage of the Parker RC Series air cylinder is its ability to act as its own support member as it spans the length of the carriage travel. The cylinder body does not require support over its entire stroke. In the example below, a cylinder with an end to end dimension of d, and with a load L can span a distance of d with no

C347
intermediate support required. If the stroke of the cylinder is in excess of distance d or if Load L increases even if d remains constant, an intermediate support member must be placed so that the distance d is not exceeded for the corresponding Load (L).
Parker RC Series cylinders can be fitted with intermediate supports that attach to dovetail mounts along the side of the cylinder. Consult the charts below to determine if intermediate supports are required on your cylinder. Points along the curve indicate the maximum distance allowed between supports for a corresponding load (L).
Intermediate supports are designed for use with the orientation shown below. For an application with any other orientation, consult factory.
Loading Conditions (25 mm Bore)
Intermediate Support
40 35

60 90 50 80
L o a d l b s
30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0 20 40 60 80 100
L o a d l b s
40
30
L o a d l b s
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
70 60 50 40
20
30 20 10
10
0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
Distance (inches)
Distance (inches)
Distance (inches)

150 200 175
125
L o a d l b s
100
75
L o a d l b s
150 125 100 75 50 25
50
25
20
40
60
80
100
120
20
40
60
80
100
120
Distance (inches)
Distance (inches)
G32
Catalog 0900P-4
Supports Intermediate Support

25mm & 32mm Bore Size

C347
40mm, 50mm & 63mm Bore Size
AK
AF AH AJ U DIA. (4) HOLES AP AN
AK
AF AH AJ U DIA. (4) HOLES AP AN
Unit in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
AF 0.94 23.9 1.43 36.3 1.50 38 2.01 51.1 2.24 56.9
AH 2.38 60.5 2.69 68.3 3.12 80 3.63 92.2 4.38 111.3
AJ 3.00 76.2 3.38 85.9 3.87 98 4.38 111.3 5.13 130.3
AK 0.24 6.10 0.46 11.7 0.43 11 0.57 14.5 0.53 13.5
AN 2.00 50.8 2.50 63.5 6.30 160 6.25 158.8 6.25 158.8
AP 1.25 31.8 1.75 44.5 4.75 121 4.75 120.7 4.75 120.7
U 0.22 5.59 0.22 5.59 0.35 9 0.35 8.9 0.35 8.9
Intermediate Supports Inverted Carriage Mounts

40mm, 50mm & 63mm Bore Size
AN AF AK AP AK
G
AF
AJ BY
AH
AJ
(32MM DETAILS SHOWN)
IU DIA. (4) HOLES
Unit in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
AF 1.44 36.6 1.55 39.37 1.80 45.72 2.01 51.1 2.38 60.45
AH 2.38 60.5 2.88 73.2 2.88 73.2 3.75 95.3 4.13 104.9
AJ 3.13 79.5 3.75 95.25 3.75 95.25 4.75 120.6 5.38 136.7
AK 0.50 12.7 0.50 12.7 0.50 12.7 0.5 12.7 0.50 12.7
AN 3.00 76.2 5.00 127 5.00 127 5.13 130.3 5.13 130.3
AP 2.25 57.15 4.25 107.95 4.25 107.95 4.25 107.9 4.25 107.9
BY 1.34 34 1.65 41.91 1.54 39.1 1.86 47.2 2.14 54.4
IU 0.28 7.1 0.28 7.1 0.28 7.1 0.35 8.9 0.35 8.9
Load & Moment Data for Intermediate Mount (Inverted Piston)*

Bore 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm *See following page. Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics Maximum Bending Moment Ms (ft-lbs) 0.38 1.5 1.5 4 4.8 Load (lbs) 33 58 85 108 108
G33
P1Z
RC
P1X
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Dimensions 25 & 32mm Bores Basic Mount Style D

J DI L DK THD. X DJ DEEP (2 HOLES) S T
Rodless Air Cylinders RC Series Basic Mount Double Carriage Style N

CL DI L DI L
C347
R DIA.
M O
See Table 1 for dimensions
Flange Mount Style T

FF HH GG
Flange Mount Double Carriage Style E

CL DD DD
J DD
R DIA. (4) HOLES EE
Swivel Mount Style A

R DIA. (2) HOLES J SS TT MM KK AR LL NN NN V DIA. Y
PP
AW AW 2
AS
G34
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Dimensions 25 & 32mm Bores Mount Dimensions

A CL* STROKE

C347
Double Carriage
UU B A D NPTF PORT STROKE + (2 X A) + CL* STROKE
UU B
H THD. X G DEEP (4) MTG. HOLES. EACH END XX ZZ E
Single Carriage
UU B D NPTF PORT STROKE + (2 X A)
UU B
AZ WW THD. X F DEEP (2) MTG. HOLES. EACH END
* For double carriage mounts, the piston carriages are not connected. The CL dimension is the minimum distance between the centerline of each carriage. The CL dimension can be increased, depending upon customer mounting. The effective stroke of the cylinder will be decreased by the same distance that the CL dimension is increased.
AC U DIA. (2) HOLES Z AF AE
G
E
Bore 25 mm 32 mm Bore 25mm 32mm
Unit in. mm in. mm Unit in. mm in. mm
GG 1.50 38.1 1.88 47.8 M 1.50 38.1 1.89 48.0
HH .19 4.83 .19 4.83 N 1.30 33.0 1.57 39.9
KK 2.05 52.1 2.60 66.0 O 0.70 17.8 0.97 24.6
LL 1.50 38.1 1.89 48.0 P 1.50 38.1 1.89 48.0
MM .79 20.1 1.18 30.0 R 0.22 5.59 0.28 7.11
NN .10 2.54 .16 4.06 S 1.02 25.9 1.26 32.0
PP 1.46 37.1 1.90 48.3 T 0.59 14.99 0.72 18.3
RR V 0.31 7.87 0.47 12.0
SS 1.25 31.8 2.75 69.9 DD 3.00 76.2 4.50 114.3
TT .63 16.0 1.97 50.0 DI 3.15 80 4.73 120.14
AR .20 5.08 .32 8.13 DJ 0.312 7.9 0.50 12.7
AS 1.65 41.9 2.28 57.9 DK #10-32 1/4-20
AW .19 4.83 .31 7.87 EE 1.75 44.5 2.20 55.9
J 4.98 126.5 6.56 166.6 FF 2.00 50.8 2.50 63.5
L 1.97 3.94 100.1 Y 0.12 3.05 1.16 4.06 50.0

Bore 25 mm Unit in. mm 32 mm in. mm A 3.94 B 0.97 C 1.58 40.1 D 1/8" NPTF E 1.06 26.9 1.42 36.1 F 0.25 6.35 0.19 4.8 G H U AB 1.06 26.9 1.42 36.1 AC 0.63 16.0 0.47 11.9 AD 0.87 22.1 0.79 20.1 AE 0.71 18.1 1.02 25.9 AF 0.94 23.9 1.43 36.3 AZ UU WW XX Z ZZ Min. CL 4.94
0.40 #10-32 0.22 10.2 5.5
0.38 0.56 #10-32 2.25 0.08 0.06 9.7 14.2 57.1 2.0
100.1 24.6 4.92 1.00
1.52 125.5 6.84
1/4" 2.09 NPTF
0.40 #10-32 0.28 10.2 7.11
0.63 0.63 1/4-20 2.25 0.13 0.05 16.0 16.0 57.1 3.3
125.0 25.4 53.1
1.27 173.7
G35
P1Z
RC
P1X
AD
AB
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Dimensions 40 & 63mm Bores Basic Mount Style D

J K L
Rodless Air Cylinders RC Series Basic Mount Long Style N

CL
C347
R DIA.
S T
K L
K L
M O
Flange Mount Long Style E
J DD
FF HH GG DD
CL DD
R DIA. (4) HOLES EE

R DIA. (4) HOLES J SS TT MM KK AR LL NN NN V DIA. Y
PP RR
AW AW 2
AS
G36
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Dimensions 40 & 63mm Bores Mount Dimensions

A CL*

C347
STROKE STROKE
Double Carriage
UU B
H THD. X G DEEP (4) MTG. HOLES. EACH END XX ZZ E
Single Carriage
UU B

AC
U (2) HOLES AF AE AB E
G
P1X
AD
Table 1. Envelope and Mounting Dimensions

Bore 40mm 63mm Bore 40mm 63mm Unit in. mm in. mm Unit in. mm in. mm GG 1.77 45 2.36 59.9 K 4.33 110 7.09 180.1 HH 0.24 6 0.28 7.1 L 2.17 55 3.54 89.9 KK 2.95 75 3.87 98.3 M 2.40 61 3.27 83.1 LL 2.00 51 2.81 71.4 N 1.93 49 2.68 68.1 MM 1.50 38 1.72 43.7 O 1.13 28.8 1.79 45.5 P 2.27 57.6 3.07 78.0 NN .30 8 .35 8.9 R 0.28 7 0.35 8.9 PP 2.76 70 3.54 89.9 S 1.10 28 1.19 30.2 RR 2.17 55 2.76 70.1 T 0.71 18 0.74 18.8 SS 3.54 90 4.72 119.9 V 0.47 12 0.63 16.0 TT 2.95 75 3.94 100.1 DD 3.15 80 5.12 130.0 AR 0.31 8 0.38 9.7 EE 2.60 66 3.51 89.2 AS 2.75 70 3.23 82.0 FF 2.36 60 3.15 80.0 AW 30 7.5 0.26 6.6 W 1.93 49 2.68 68.1 J 6.16 156 8.92 226.6 Y 0.24 6 0.25 6.4

Bore 40 mm 63 mm Unit in. mm in. mm A 5.91 150 8.47 215.1 B 1.18 30 1.50 38.1 C 2.83 72 4.17 D 1/4 NPT E 2.13 54 3.07 78 F 0.19 438 0.50 12.7 G 0.50 12.7 0.87 22.1 H 1/420 5/1618 U 0.35 9 0.41 10.4 AB 1.18 30 1.89 48 AC 0.49 12.5 0.59 15.0 AD 0.94 24 1.18 30 AE 0.94 24 1.58 40.1 AF 1350 38 2.24 56.9 AZ 0.63 16 0.63 16 UU 0.59 15 0.75 19.1 WW 1/420 XX 2.83 72 CL 8.21 208.6 ZZ 0.03 0.76 0.01 0.25
3/8 105.9 NPT
5/16- 4.17 12.18 18 105.9 309.4
G37
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Dimensions 50mm Bore Basic Mount Style D
Rodless Air Cylinders RC Series Basic Mount Double Carriage Style N

C347
DK THD. X DJ DEEP (2 HOLES) J DI L R DIA. S T DI L CL DI L
M N O P

FF HH GG
Flange Mount Double Carriage Style E
J DD
CL DD DD
R DIA. (4) HOLES EE

R DIA. (2) HOLES J SS TT MM KK AR LL NN NN V DIA. Y PP AW AW 2
AS
G38
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Dimensions 50mm Bore Mount Dimensions

A CL*

C347
STROKE
Double Carriage
UU B
H THD. X G DEEP (4) MTG. HOLES. EACH END XX E ZZ
Single Carriage
UU B

AC U DIA. (2) HOLES Z AF AE
G
P1X
AD
AB

Bore 50mm Bore 50mm Unit inch mm Unit inch mm GG 2.36 59.9 M 2.56 65.0 HH 0.28 7.1 N 2.17 55.1 KK 3.54 89.9 O 1.41 35.8 LL 2.56 65.0 P 2.56 65.0 MM 1.69 42.9 R 0.35 8.9 NN 0.24 6.1 S 1.34 34.0 PP 2.27 57.7 T 0.74 18.8 SS 3.94 100.1 V 0.63 16.0 TT 3.15 80.0 DD 5.12 130.0 AR 0.38 9.7 DI 6.30 160.0 AS 2.83 71.9 DJ 0.69 17.48 AW 0.24 6.1 DK 5/16-18 J 8.61 218.7 EE 3.02 76.7 L 5.51 140.0 FF 3.15 80.0 Y 0.19 4.8

Bore
50 mm Unit inch mm A 6.70 B 1.25 C 3.07 D 3/8 NPT E 2.13 54.1 F G H U 0.35 8.89 AB 2.13 54.1 AC 0.71 18.0 AD 1.10 27.9 AE 1.34 34.0 AF 2.01 51.1 AZ 0.63 16.0 UU WW XX 3.38 85.9 Z 0.14 3.6 ZZ .16 Min. CL 9.9
170.1 31.75 77.97
12.7 12.7
0.50 0.50 5/1618
16.0
0.63 5/1618
3.96 251.5
G39
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Inverted Carriage Mounting Styles Inverted Basic Mount Style J

25mm & 32mm Bore Sizes
BC DI L
Rodless Air Cylinders RC Series Inverted Basic Mount Double Carriage Style B
CL L
C347
DK THD (2) HOLES S BJ BM
DI
DI L
BG IC
BF
IC
P
R DIA. (4) HOLES
(32MM DETAILS SHOWN)
R DIA. (8) HOLES
Inverted Basic Mount Style J

40mm & 63mm Bore Size
BC K L BC K S T L
Inverted Basic Mount Double Carriage Style B

CL
S K T L K L K L
CL
K L
BG IC
BE
BG BG BE BH BF IC
BF
BH BG IC IC
R DIA.
BJ
R DIA. R DIA.
BJ
R DIA.
Inverted Basic Mount Style J

50mm Bore Size
BC K DI L IH THD (2) HOLES BC K S DI TL IH THD (2) HOLES S T CL BC DI K BC DI K
Inverted Basic Mount Double Carriage Style B

CL BC DI K BC DI K
BG
BE BF IC M P
BH
BG BG BE BF IC M P
BH
BG
IC
IC
R DIA.
BJ
R DIA.
BJ
R DIA.
R DIA.
Inverted Flange Mount Style L

40mm, 50mm & 63mm Bore Sizes
BC K DD L
Inverted Flange Mount Double Carriage Style K

K DD L CL K DD L
HH
FF GG S T
R DIA. (4) HOLES
BG IC
BM BF
BH
BG IC
P R DIA.
R DIA.
BJ
G40
Catalog 0900P-4
Inverted Piston Carriage Mounting Styles Inverted Swivel Mount Style G

40mm, 50mm & 63mm Bore Sizes

C347
Y MM BN
AS PP S T
R DIA. (4) HOLES 40mm, 63mm (2) HOLES 50mm NN
BC K SS TT
R DIA. (4) HOLES 40mm, 63mm (2) HOLES 50mm Y 50mm OUTLINE MM BN
PP AS RR S T
AW NN
NN V DIA. BH AR BG IC
NN V DIA. BH
50mm Bore
BE BP BF
BE BP BF
40 & 63mm Bore
R DIA. BJ BJ
G
Bore 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm 63 mm Bore 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm 63 mm Unit in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm Unit in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm K 4.33 110 5.51 7.09 180.0 BM 1.50 38.1 1.89 48.0 3.54 4.09 4.85 L 1.97 50.0 3.94 100.1 2.17 55 3.75 3.54 89.9 BN 3.89 4.61 5.21 M 2.40 61 2.56 65.0 3.27 83.1 BP 2.95 3.63 92.2 4.15 P 1.50 38.1 1.89 48.0 2.27 57.6 2.56 65.0 3.07 78.0 CL 4.94 125.5 6.84 173.7 8.2 9.90 12.18 R 0.22 5.59 0.28 7 0.28 7 0.35 8.9 0.35 8.9 DD 3.15 80 5.12 5.12 S 1.02 25.9 1.26 32 1.10 28 1.34 34.0 1.19 30.0 DI 3.15 80 4.73 120.14 6.3 T 0.71 18 0.74 18.8 0.74 18.8 DJ 0.69 V 0.47 12 0.63 16.0 0.63 16.0 DK #1032 1/420 5/1618 Y 0.24 6 0.19 4.8 0.21 5.5 FF 2.36 60 3.15 80.0 3.15 80.0 AR 0.31 8 0.38 9.7 0.38 9.7 GG 1.77 45 2.36 59.9 2.36 59.9 AS 2.75 70 2.83 71.9 3.23 82.0 HH 0.24 6 0.28 7.1 0.28 7.1 AW .30 7.5 0.24 6.1 0.26 6.6 IC 2.60 66 3.14 79.8 4.80 122 5.41 137.4 6.69 169.9 BC 4.25 107.95 5.67 144 5.43 137.9 7.24 183.9 8.19 208.0 MM 1.50 38 1.69 42.9 1.72 43.7 BE 3.34 84.9 3.63 92.2 4.61 117.1 NN 0.30 8 0.24 6.1 0.35 8.9 BF 1.07 27.2 1.25 31.75 2.31 58.7 2.46 62.5 3.23 82.0 PP 2.76 70 2.27 57.7 3.54 89.9 BG 1.30 33 1.57 39.9 2.87 72.9 3.24 82.3 4.01 101.9 RR 2.17 55 2.76 70.1 BH 3.19 81 3.63 92.2 4.41 112 SS 3.54 90 3.94 100.1 4.72 BJ 1.38 35.1 1.50 38.1 50.5 2.56 65.0 3 76.2 TT 2.95 75 3.15 80.0 3.94 1.99
139.9 95.25
89.92 98.81 74.93 208.6 103.9 117.1
251.5 130.0 160.0 17.48
123.2 132.3 105.4 309.4 130.0
119.9 100.1
G41
P1Z
RC
P1X
Inverted Carriage Mounts Dimensions
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensors & Service Kits Sensors

Solid state and reed sensors are available for use with the RC Series Cylinders. See the Electronic Sensors Section for specifications and part numbers.
1-3/4"

C347
9/32"
Service Kits
Bore Size (mm) 25
Outer Band Inner Band Single Carriage Double Carriage Single Carriage Double Carriage Piston Assembly L078470025 L078480025 L078450025 L078460025 1468750250
32
L078470032 L078480032 L078450032 L078460032 1468750320
40
L078470040 L078480040 L078450040 L078460040 1468750400
50
L078470050 L078480050 L078450050 L078460050 1468750500
63
L078470063 L078480063 L078450063 L078460063 1468750630
G42
P1Z Series
Magnetically Coupled Rodless Air Cylinders
G
P1X Contents
Basic Version Features ....................................................................... G44 Ordering Information .................................................... G45 Specifications............................................................... G46 Technical Data ............................................................. G47 Dimensions .................................................................. G48 Mountings .................................................................... G49 Guided Version Features ....................................................................... G50 Ordering Information .................................................... G51 Specifications....................................................... G52-G53 Technical Data ..................................................... G54-G55 Dimensions .................................................................. G56 Options ................................................................ G57-G58 Sensors........................................................................ G59 Spare Parts....................................................................... G60 G43
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Version / Features Basic Version
Rodless Magnetic Cylinders P1Z Series

C347
Hard anodized aluminum carriage
Endplate
Air supply ports
Non magnetic stainless steel tube (cylinder body)
Mounting holes to attach the load onto the carriage
Mobile piston
360 360
External magnets (built into the carriage) Internal magnets (on the piston)
Description
The magnetic rodless cylinder is a pneumatic cylinder featuring a mobile piston fitted with annular magnets. The mobile carriage is also equipped with magnets to provide magnetic coupling between the piston and carriage. It incorporates the following features: - end of stroke cushioning/bumpers - mounting: threaded endcaps optional foot mount optional flange mount
Cushioning
16 mm: non-adjustable bumper or adjustable pneumatic cushioning 20 and 32 mm: adjustable pneumatic cushioning
Mounting
The mobile carriage is free to rotate 360 around the cylinder axis. This feature facilitates the adaptation of the cylinder to various mounting arrangements. The load must be guided by an external device.
G44
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Version / Ordering Information

Standard cylinder (15 positions)

C347
Options (16 positions)
P 1 Z M
0 1 6
Bore 016 16 mm 020 20 mm 032 32 mm
N
Cushioning N A None ( 16 only)
0 5 0 0
Strokes 0200 200 mm
F
Mounting Kit* F L N Footmount Flanges None (std.)
Adjustable Cushions
1000 1000 mm
Options * B None W With options

Standard when B option is used.
Ports M Metric ( 16 only) B BSPP ( 20 & 32) R N BSPT ( 20 & 32) NPTF ( 20 & 32)
* Cylinders are supplied with mounting nuts fitted on each endplate.
16 20 32
Stroke (mm) 0 to 1000 0 to 1500 0 to 2000
(in) 0 to 39.4 0 to 59.1 0 to 78.7
G
P1X
- P1ZM016SNN0100B - P1ZM020SAN1000WFBN
16 mm bore 100 mm stroke cylinder supplied with mounting nut on each endplate
G45
P1Z
20 mm bore 1 m stroke cylinder with foot mount on each endplate
RC
Order code examples:
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Version Specifications General Features

Magnetic Rodless cylinder, basic version Available in 3 bores with stroke lengths up to 2000 mm. Adjustable air cushioning is available on all cylinders. The load is fixed onto the mobile carriage by 4 tapped holes. The cylinder is attached by the ends with jam nuts, flanges or foot mounts.

C347
Specifications for P1Z Series Magnetically Coupled Rodless

Operating Medium Maximum Pressure - Bar (PSI) Minimum Pressure - Bar (PSI) Bore Size mm (inch nominal) Port Size Ambient Temperature F (C) Maximum Stroke mm (inch) Stroke Tolerance mm Piston Speed m/s (inch/sec) Max. Coupling Force N (Lbs) Cushion 157 (35) 1000 (39.4) +1.5/-0 16 (5/8) M5 BSPP, 10-32 NPT Compressed Air 7 (100) 2 (29) 20 (3/4) 1/8 BSPP, 1/8 NPT 15 to 140F (-10 to 160C) 1500 (59.1) 0.1 to 0.4 (4 to 15.75) 236 (53) Air Cushion Standard Not Required (If you choose to lubricate your system, continuing lubrication will be required.) 703 (158) 2000 (78.7) <=1000 +1.5/-0; >1000 +2/-0 32 (1 1/4) 1/8 BSPP, 1/8 NPT
Lubrication
Technical Data
Bore Size mm 16 20 32 inch 5/8 3/4 1-1/4 Weights Weight at Zero Stroke kg 0.28 0.46 1.35 lbs 0.62 1.01 2.98 Weight per 25mm of Stroke kg 0.01 0.02 0.04 lbs 0.02 0.05 0.08
Conditions of Use
If external lubrication is added, this must always be continued. Working medium, air quality
Working medium Dry, filtered compressed air to ISO 8573-1 class 3. 4. 3. or better ISO 8573-1 Quality Classes
Quality Class Max. Pollution particules max. size concentration (m) (mg/m) Water max. pressure dew point (C) Oil max. concentration (mg/m)
Recommended air quality for cylinders For best possible service life and trouble-free operation, ISO 8573-1. quality class 3.4.3 should be used. This means 5 m filter (standard filter), dew point +3C for indoor operation (a lower dew point should be selected for outdoor operation) and oil concentration 1.0 mg oil/m, which is what a standard compressor with a standard filter gives.
1 2 3 4 5 6
0.1 1 5 15 40
0.1 1 5 8 10
-70 -40 -20 +3 +7 +10
0.01 0.1 1.0 5.0 25
G46
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Version Technical Data

C347
Pressure in the Cylinder / Pneumatic Holding Force

Pressure (PSI)
29 500 450 44 58 73 87 102 112 90 67
Example:
Holding Force (lbs)
Holding Force (N)
400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 2 3 4 5 6
32
Pressure: 5 bar Fmax = 322 N for 32 mm cylinder
20 16
44 22
Calculate the kinetic energy due to the load moved
0 7
Acceleration or deceleration should not exceed the magnetic coupling force of cylinder
Pressure (Bar)
Load Diagrams
Permissible radial loads, horizontal mounting
L
Load "L" (kg)
12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000
32
L Max. (kg) 3 5 10
(lbs.) 6.6 11.0 22.0
20 16
16 20 32
Stroke (mm)
L
The load must be guided by a device from outside the cylinder
Permissible axial loads, horizontal mounting

M = Fx * Zf
500
G
32
Force "Fx" (N)
Fx
400 300 200 100 0 5 15
Max. Moment M (Nm) (in-lbs.) 1.2 2.5 8.5 11 22 75
Max. Fx* (N) (lbs.) 112 175 450 25 39 101
16
20
20 32
25 35 50
Zf (mm)
* at 7 bar
! The load must be guided by a device from outside the cylinder
Permissible axial loads, vertical mounting

L
30 25 20 15 10 5 0 2 3 4 5 6 7
32
Load La
Load "LT" (kg)
Max. load T (kg) (lbs.) 5 10 24 11 22 53
Max. XA (mm) (in.) 122 142 174 4.8 5.6 6.8
* If force due friction is unknown, use 0.1 (L + La).
20 16
16 20 32
Xa
Pressure (Bar)
* at 6.5 bar
L = Load guided by external device La = Direct mounting onto the cylinder Ff = Force due to friction*
LT = Load weight + guiding device weight + force due to friction G47

P1Z
RC
Zf
16
P1X
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Version Dimensions Dimensions

** = Air supply Ports

C347
**P
4xMN
**P
EV
LJ
G
A B
AA
EH
E S + STROKE TL + STROKE
E B
16 20 32
A 32 (1.26) 38 (1.50) 60 (2.36)
AA
D 18 (0.71) 22.8 (0.90) 35 (1.38)
E 11 (0.43) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67)
EH 18 (0.71) 28 (1.10) 40 (1.57)
EV 18 (0.71) 24 (0.94) 36 (1.42)
FV
LJ
M 34 (1.34) 40 (1.57) 50 (1.97)
N 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18) 40 (1.57)
FV
2xNN
O 13.5 (0.53) 15.5 (0.61) 18.5 (0.73)
34 10 (1.34) (0.39) 40 14 (1.57) (0.55) 60 16 (2.36) (0.63)
4 14 5.5 (0.16) (0.55) (0.22) 8 26 9.5 (0.31) (1.02) (0.37) 8 32 9.5 (0.31) (1.26) (0.37)
15.5 61 16 (0.61) (2.40) (0.63) 22 71 19 (0.87) (2.80) (0.75) 23 87 30 (0.91) (3.43) (1.18)
16 20 32
P M5 x 0.8 (10-32) G 1/8 (1/8) G 1/8 (1/8)
MN M4 x 0.7 x 6 M5 x 0.8 x 8 M6 x 1 x 10
NN M10 x 1 x 6 M20 x 1.5 x 7 M26 x 1.5 x 7
S 92 (3.62) 115 (4.53) 133 (5.24)
TL 112 (4.41) 143 (5.63) 165 (6.50)
G48
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Version / Mountings Mountings

Flanges
Only on 16 mm
2xF
FZ

C347
4xFD
FY
2xF
FZ
FY
FX FW
FZ
FZ
4xFD
FX FW
LS + STROKE
16 20 32
F 5.2 (0.20)
FD
FW
FX
FW 42 (1.65) 52 (2.05) 80 (3.15)
FX 33 (1.30) 40 (1.57) 64 (2.52)
FX FW
FY
FZ 20 (0.79) 32 (1.26) 44 (1.73)
LS 92 (3.62) 115 (4.53) 133 (5.24)
Order code PDC15-FH
LS + STROKE
6 (0.24) 7 (0.28)
2.3 (0.09) 3 (0.12) 5 (0.20)
20 (0.78) 28 (1.10)
PK1A20-FH PK1A25-FH
Brackets
Only on 16 mm
LH LH
LH
LK
LH
LJ
2xLE
L
LK LJ
t
2xLE
G
LC
LY
LY
LX
LX
LY
LY
LX
LX
2x LD LF L
LF L LF
2x LD
XL + STROKE LS + STROKE
XL + STROKE
LC
LT + STROKE XM + STROKE LT + STROKE

XM + STROKE
* Set of 2 pcs ** Impossible mounting
16 20 32
LC
LD
LE 5.2 (0.20)
LF
LH
LJ
LK
LX
LY 42 (1.65) 43 (1.69) 62 (2.44)
LS 109.6 (4.32) 151 (5.94) 179 (7.05)
LT 79 (3.11) 85 (3.35) **
XL
XM
Order code PDC15-LB* PK1A20-LB* PK1A25-LB*
2.3 14.8 8.8 (0.09) (0.58) (0.35)
6 14 16 -2 33 (0.24) (0.55) (0.63) (-0.08) (1.30) 10 23 19 4 30 (0.39) (0.91) (0.75) (0.16) (1.18) 12 30 30 (0.47) (1.18) (1.18) 0 (0) 46 (1.81)
121.6 96.6 (4.79) (3.80) 171 121 (6.73) (4.76) 203 (7.99) **
3 28 18 6.2 (0.12) (1.10) (0.71) (0.24) 3 35 23 7 (0.12) (1.38) (0.91) (0.28)
G49
P1Z
RC
LF
LS + STROKE
P1X
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Version / Features Guided Version

Endplate Rail for mounting sensors laterally (on one side only shown on rear side)
C347
Mounting holes
Chrome plated steel guide rods
Adjustable Bumpers (Optional: hydraulic shock absorbers)
Non magnetic stainless steel (cylinder body) Hard anodized aluminum carriage
Ports on one side only on one of the endplate (transfer porting option)
Holes to mount the load onto the carriage Guide bushings Internal magnets (on the piston)
Mobile piston
External magnets (built into the carriage)
Description The magnetic rodless cylinder is a pneumatic cylinder featuring a mobile piston with annular magnets. The mobile carriage is also equipped with magnets to give magnetic coupling between the piston and carriage. The carriage slides along the main tube and is guided by two guide rods. It incorporates the following features: - Built-in guide rods - Adjustable end-of-stroke bumpers - Optional magnetic piston sensing - Optional transfer porting Guidance The guided version consists of a carriage fitted with 4 plain bearings, guided on 2 rods. This design provides high rigidity, accurate guidance and smooth movement of the carriage.
End of Stroke Each endplate can be fitted with an adjustable bumper or self-compensating shock absorbers. Optional transfer porting Cylinder air supply is located on one end only to facilitate cylinder installation and avoid long tube lengths for longer strokes. Options The following options are available to enhance the Magnetic Rodless cylinder functions: External bumpers: when low operating pressure, light loads and short strokes. External hydraulic shock absorbers: recommended for arduous applications. Reed and solid state sensors: provide sensing at an adjustable position along the entire stroke of the cylinder. G50
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Version / Ordering Information

Standard version (15 positions)

C347
Options (18 positions)
P 1 Z M
0 1 6
Bore 016 16 mm 020 20 mm 032 32 mm
0 5 0 0
Strokes 0200 200 mm 1000 1000 mm
M
Cyl. Port type
Cushioning N C H No stops** Adjustable stop Hydraul. shock absorber
M Metric ( 16 only) B BSP ( 20 and 32) R N Options B None With options W BSPT ( 20 and 32) NPTF ( 20 and 32)
Function G Guided T Guided with transfer porting
End of stroke sensing

NPN PNP L D K S Reed Sensors type (Qty: 2) With rail, no sensor 0.3 m with 8mm connector
A F G
H U W N (std.) P
C B E
3 m flying leads 10 m flying leads 0.3 m with M12 connector No sensor rail Proximity sensor in end caps
G
P1X P1Z RC
Standard when B option is used.
** Do not exceed coupling force on deceleration.
16 20 32
Maximum Strokes (mm) 0 to 750 0 to 1000 0 to 1500
(in.) 0 to 29.5 0 to 39.4 0 to 59.1
Order code examples: - P1ZM016GCN0100B - P1ZM020GHN1000WNBL 16 mm bore, 100 mm stroke cylinder supplied with adjustable stop 20 mm bore, 1 m stroke cylinder supplied with hydraulic shock absorbers and rail for sensors
G51
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Version / Range & Options Range

Magnetic Rodless Cylinder, guided version Available in 3 diameters with possible strokes up to 1500 mm (59 in). 4 tapped mounting holes on the carriage. Endcap mounting provided by 4 tapped and counterbored holes.

C347
Options
External adjustable bumpers Can be fitted on cylinder endcaps and provide noise reduction and adjustment at the end of stroke. Used when light loads and short strokes. Pneumatic air supply on one side only (transfer porting option).
G
External hydraulic shock absorbers Self-compensating hydraulic shock absorbers can be used instead of bumpers for a greater cushioning effect at the end of stroke. They are recommended for arduous applications.
Reed or Solid State Sensors: A rail fitted on one side only of the cylinder provides mounting and position adjustment of sensors. The rail is located on same side as the end of stroke stops.
G52
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Version / General Features General Features

C347
Specifications for P1Z Series Magnetically Coupled Rodless

Operating Medium Maximum Pressure Bar (PSI) Minimum Pressure Bar (IPS) Bore Size mm (inch nominal) Port Size Ambient Temperature F (C) Maximum Stroke mm (inch) Stroke Tolerance mm Piston Speed m/s (inch/sec) Max. Coupling Force N (Lbs) Cushion Lubrication 157 (35) 750 (29.5) +1.5/-0 16 (5/8) M5 BSPP, 10-32 NPT Compressed Air 7 (100) 2 (29) 20 (3/4) 1/8 BSPP, 1/8 NPT 15 to 140F (-10 to 160C) 1000 (39.4) 0.1 to 0.4 (4 to 15.75) 236 (53) Air Cushion Standard Not Required (If you choose to lubricate your system, continuing lubrication will be required.) 703 (158) 1500 (59.1) <=1000 +1.5/-0; >1000 +2/-0 32 (1 1/4) 1/8 BSPP, 1/8 NPT
Bore Size mm 16 20 32 inch 5/8 3/4 1-1/4
Weights Weight at Zero Stroke kg 0.9 1.52 3.63 lbs 1.98 3.35 8.00 Weight per 25mm of Stroke kg 0.05 0.08 0.13 lbs 0.11 0.17 0.29
G
P1X
Options
Function Detection External rubber bumpers Hydraulic shock absorbers Description Sensors mounting in T-slot Reed or solid state sensors (PNP or NPN) Supplied pre-fitted in endplates if chosen Self-compensating shock absorbers supplied pre-fitted in endplates if chosen
G53
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Version / Technical Data

C347
Pressure in the Cylinder / Pneumatic Holding Force

Pressure (PSI)
29 500 450 44 58 73 87 102 112 90 67
Example: Pressure: 5 bar (73 PSI)

Holding Force (lbs)
Holding Force (N)
400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 2 3 4 5 6
32
Fmax = 322 N (72 lbs.) for 32 mm cylinder
20 16
44 22
Calculate the kinetic energy due to the load moved.
Acceleration or deceleration should not exceed the magnetic coupling force of cylinder.
0 7
Pressure (Bar)
Load Diagrams
Permissible radial loads, horizontal mounting
Load "L" (kg)
35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0
32
Max. L (kg) (lbs.) 7 12 30 15 26 66
20 16
16 20 32
750 1000 1250 1500
G
Permissible axial loads, horizontal mounting
M = Fx * Zf Fx Zf Fy Zf
500
Stroke (mm)
Ms = Fy * Zf Fx Yf 21 44 133 G54
Mv = Fx * Yf
Max. moment M (Nm) (in-lbs.) 2.4 5 15 21 44 133
Max. moment Ms (Nm) (in-lbs.) 0.5 1 3 4.4 8.9 26.6
Max. moment Mv (Nm) (in-lbs.) 2.4 5 15
16 20 32
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Version / Technical Data Loads Diagram

Permissible axial loads, vertical mounting

C347
30
Load "LT" (kg)
Max. Load LT* (kg) 5 10 24
Max. XA (mm) 122 142 174
25 20 15 10 5 0 2 3 4 5
32
16 20 32
20 16
6 7
* at 6.5 bar
XA
Pressure (Bar)
L = Load guided by external device LA Charge LA M = LA * XA = Mounting direct onto cylinder
LT = Load weight + guiding device weight + force due to friction Ff* = Force due to friction *If force due to friction is unknown, use 0.1 * (L + LA)
G
P1X
Mv = Fy * Yf Yf Fy
G55
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Version / Dimensions Dimensions

C347
TL + STROKE TT G S + STROKE 4xMN T
A
2xPP
O A
M L
A
TA + STROKE
C
According to B view
HT
According to C view
4xM3x0.5 5
3
PW PG 12
**P
4xF
A-A
4x B
**P
12
2xNN
4x C
XA
XB
HS HG HP CC
** =
Air supply ports
16 20 32
A 8 (.31) 8 (.31) 13.5 (.53)
CC
F M5x0.8 x 10 M6x1 x 10 M10x1.5 x 15
HP
HG
HS
HT
MN M5 x 0.8 x 8 M6 x 1 x 10
4.3 8 4.5 17.4 12 (.17) (.31) (.18) (.69) (.47) 5.5 9.5 6.5 21.4 16 (.22) (.37) (.26) (.84) (.63) 8.7 14 8 33.6 20 (.34) (.55) (.31) (1.32) (.79)
6 34 33.5 25 12 (.24) (1.34) (1.32) (0.98) (.47) 6 42 40 28 12 (.24) (1.65) (1.57) (1.10) (.47) 10 66 64 46 20 (.39) (2.60) (2.52) (1.81) (.79)
21.5 65 34 30 (0.85) (2.56) (1.34) (1.18) 23.5 (.93) 75 40 36 (2.95) (1.57) (1.42)
41 91 60 50 M8 x 1.25 x 12 (1.61) (3.58) (2.36) (1.97)
16 20 32
NN M10 x 1 x 6 M14 x1.5 x 7 M20 x 1.5 x 7
O 15.5 (0.61) 17.5 (0.69) 15.5 (0.61)
P M5 x 0.8 G1/8 G1/8
PG 50 (1.97) 61 (2.40) 86 (3.39)
PW 70 (2.76) 90 (3.54) 122 (4.80)
PP 27 (1.06) 32 (1.26) 50 (1.97)
T 14 (0.55) 17 (0.67) 20 (0.79)
TT 23 (0.91) 26 (1.02) 28 (1.10)
TA
TL
XA
XB
69 81 106 68 (2.76) (3.19) (4.17) (2.68) 79 91 122 88 (3.11) (3.58) (4.80) (3.46) 97 117 145 118 (3.82) (4.61) (5.71) (4.65)
17 8 (0.67) (0.31) 20 11 (0.79) (0.43 22 14 (0.87) (0.55)
G56
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Version / Options Optional External Adjustable Bumpers

Dimensions Courbes

C347
NN
NN
AA
AB
16 20 32
AA 7.5 (0.30) 10 (0.39) 11 (0.43)
AB 6.5 (0.26) 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47)
B 12 (0.47) 11 (0.43) 20 (0.79)
C 10 (0.39) 14.5 (0.57) 18 (0.71)
D 14 (0.55) 18 (0.71) 26 (1.02)
E 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 8 (0.31)
NN M10 x 1 M14 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5
External Hydraulic Shock Absorbers

Loads / Speeds diagram
35
G
0 30
32
12
16 66
Load (lbs.)
Load (kg)
25 20 15 10 5 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

20 16
Speed (m/s)
Example: 32 mm cylinder with a 0.3 m/s speed and 25 kg load Choose the hydraulic shock absorber option 20mm cylinder with 0.2 m/s speed and 10 kg load Choose the adjustable bumpers option
G57
P1Z
If the intersection exhibits between speed and load is above the curves, it is imperative to use hydraulic shock absorbers to prevent cylinder damage.
44 22
RC
The diagram to the right exhibits the P1Z cylinders maximum capacities with an adjustable bumper.
P1X
Speed (in/s) 8
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Version / Options

C347
Optional External Hydraulic Shock Absorbers

Dimensions
NN
NN
AA
AB
16 20 32
AA 18 (0.71) 50 (1.97) 56 (2.20)
AB 27 (1.06) 59 (2.32) 66 (2.60)
B 12 (0.47) 11 (0.43) 20 (0.79)
C 10 (0.39) 14.5 (0.57) 18 (0.71)
D 13 (0.51) 17 (0.67) 24 (0.94)
E 3 (0.12) 5 (0.20) 6 (0.24)
NN M10 x 1 M14 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5
Optional Sensor Rail

Dimensions
2 (.08) 6.8 (.27)

3.5 (.14)
12 (.47)
20 (.79)
12 (.47)
3.4 (.13)
5.55 (.22)
G58
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Version / Technical Data Detection

Reed or Solid State Sensor mounting is possible on one cylinder side only. External aluminum profile integrates 1 T-slot for sensor mounting.

C347
Dimensions (mm)
Drop-in Global Sensor Sensors with connection at 90
4.5
31.5 10.3
5.3
20
Technical Data (see Electronic Sensors Section)
6.7
G
P1X
G59
P1Z
RC
Catalog 0900P-4
Spare Parts Spare Parts

End of stroke rubber bumpers (2 pieces)
16 20 32

C347
Order code
9129609AS 9129610AS 9129611AS
End of Stroke Hydraulic Shock Absorber (1 piece)
16 20 32
Order code
MC25MH-NB MC150MH SC300M-3 NB
G
Flow Controls (1 piece)
16 20 32
BSP Ports
PTFL4PB6-1/8 PTFL4PB6-1/8
Order code NPT Ports

0876300400 0876300400
Metric Ports
0876300300
Repair Kits
16 (Cushioned) 16 (Non-cushioned) 20 32
Basic version
P1ZM016SAN-R P1ZM016SNN-R P1ZM020SAN-R P1ZM032SAN-R
Guided version
P1ZM016GNN-R P1ZM020GNN-R P1ZM032GNN-R
G60
Rotary Actuators
Section H
H
PV H1
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Section H Overview
Section H Rotary Actuators Vane Actuators

PV Series
8 Model Sizes Single and Double Vale Models 2 Standard Rotations 7 to 1800 lb-in Output Torque at 100 PSIG Pressures to 150 PSI
PRN(A) Series
5 Miniature and 4 Standard Models Rotation Angles 90, 100, 270 and 280 Oscillating Reference Points of 40, 45 and 90 1.33 to 2355 in-lb torque at 100 PSI
WR Series
2 Models Adjustable Rotation from 30 to 205 15 and 65 lb-in Output Torque at 100 PSIG
Rack & Pinion Actuators

PTR Series
5 Bore Sizes from 1" to 3" 5 Standard Rotations 39 to 2250 lb-in Output Torque at 100 PSIG
Pressure to 250 PSI
B671 / F672 Series

4 Bore Sizes from 1" to 5" Hydro-Check Option 100 to 2500 lb-in Output Torque at 100 PSI Pressures to 140 PSI
HP Series
2 Large Bore Models 3 Standard Rotations 4,500 and 10,000 lb-in Output at 100 PSI
H2
Catalog 0900P-4
Section H Overview Selection Guide

Basic performance features of the rotator product line are shown below. See product sections for greater detail and ordering information.
Type Series Standard Rotations Maximum Torque at 100 PSI (lb-in) Maximum Air Pressure Rating (PSI) Shaft Bearing Type Non-Lube Service Metric (M) or Imperial (I) Hall Effect Switch Options Reed Proximity Sensor Double End Shaft Options Female Preload Keyway Special Stroke Adjust Rotation Options Cushions Bumpers Shock Absorbers Port Relocation 3-Position Air/Oil Zero Backlash Fluorocarbon Seals Flange Mount Washdown Clean Room from catalog = AvailableFactory C = Consult
1 2 3
Vane PV 95/100 1 275/280 2 1800 150 Ball or Composite Bushing l I l l PRN(A) 90/100 1 180 2 270/280 2 2540 100/140 Composite l M l l WR 210 65 150 Radial Ball Bushing l I C C l l l PTR 90 180 270 360 2000 250 Radial Ball Bushing l M,I l l l l l l C l l C l C l l l l l l C l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l C C l l l l C
Rack & Pinion B671 90 180 2500 140 Bronze Bushing l I C l HP 90 180 10,000 100 Bronze Bushing l I
C l
H
PV
l3
Double vane Hydro-check option
H3
HP
B671
Single vane
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
H4
PV Series
Pneumatic Vane Rotary Actuators
H
PV Contents
Features ............................................................................. H6 Ordering Information........................................................... H7 Specifications ..................................................................... H8 Engineering Data ................................................................ H9 Dimensions ....................................................................... H10 Options ..................................................................... H11-H14 Sensors ............................................................................ H14 Service Kits ...................................................................... H15
H5
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Rotary Actuators PV Series

A076
Heads Solid stock heads are precision machined from aluminum, then hard-coat anodized and permanently sealed to ensure long seal life and low breakaway pressure. Solid stock heads eliminate cavities where contaminants may collect and also allow rear porting.
Body The precision body extrusion is hard-coat anodized and permanently sealed, resulting in a smooth, slick seal surface. This guarantees minimum breakaway and maximum seal life. The unitized body incorporates the stator(s) for superior rigidity.
Shoulder Seal A nitrile energized, glassfilled Teflon seal is utilized. It reduces bypass flow and friction, providing superior performance and long life.
Shaft Seal The high quality, selflubricated, abrasion resistant nitrile seal is a multiple lobe construction for leakfree operation and greater reliability. (Cleanroom option available on sizes 22, 42, 44 and 46.)
Vane A hard-coat anodized, precision aluminum extrusion is permanently affixed to shaft. The lightweight vane reduces inertia allowing very fast rotational speeds.
Vane Seal A special self-lubricated, abrasion resistant nitrile compound is molded into a one-piece vane seal, providing low breakaway pressure and long life, even with no lubrication.
Shaft Stainless steel provides high strength and corrosion resistance for demanding applications.
Shaft Bearing Thermoplastic journal bearing provides washdown capability and low cost. Optional radial ball bushing offers greater precision.
H6
Catalog 0900P-4

Example: PV22D - 090BS - BB2V - B

A076
PV
22
090BS
Model 10 11 22 33 36 42 44 46
Special Options Omit - (STD) Two digit code assigned by factory when any "X" appears in the model number or when special options or features are required. Design Series B Current Design Series
Vanes/Maximum Rotation Omit D Single Vane, 280 Rotation (275 on PV10, PV11) Double Vane, 100 Rotation (95 on PV10, PV11)
Options Rotation Options (may order more than one) Omit 090A Standard Units (no stroke adjusters, bumpers or switches) Stroke Adjusters adjustable from 60 to maximum unit rotation (preadjusted to 90) Stroke Adjusters (single vane only) adjustable from 60 to 190 ( preadjusted to 180) Internal bumpers, 90 rotation4 Internal bumpers, 180 rotation (single vane only) Magnets1 added, 90 setting Magnets1 added, 180 setting (single vane only) B C Omit - None L Radial Ball Bushings V Fluorocarbon Seals Ports 2 7 NPTF Top (Std) (10-32 on PV10 & PV11) NPTF Rear 2 (10-32 on PV10 & PV11)
180A 090B 180B 090S 180S
Shaft Single Male Keyed (Std) Double End Male Keyed 2
H
PV
Mounting Omit None B Base/front (Std) R Rear Flange 2, 3 F Front Flange S Base/Rear Face 2
Note: Order Hall effect sensors and reed switches separately from the Electronic Sensors section.
H7
HP
B671
PTR
WR
1. Switches can be used with stroke adjusters or bumpers (example: PV22D-090BS-BB2-B). 2. Not available with switches or stroke adjusters. 3. No tapped mounting holes in face opposite the flange. 4. 90 bumpers (090B) not available on PV10/11 sizes.
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4

A076
Maximum operating pressure: 150 psi air Output torque @ 100 psi: 8 to 1800 lb-in Standard rotations: Single vane units: 280 1 (except size 10 & 11: 275 2.5) Double vane units: 100 1 (except size 10 & 11: 95 2.5) Also available with stroke adjusters and internal stops to provide 90 and 180 rotation Maximum breakaway pressure and bypass leakage: see table Mounting orientation: unrestricted Operating temperature range: Nitrile seals 0 to 180F Fluorocarbon seals* 0 to 250F Filtration requirement: 40 micron filtered, dry air
*See Fluorocarbon seal option for high temperature applications.

Model 10 10D 11 11D 22 22D 33 33D 36 36D 42 Maximum Rotation (Deg) 275 95 275 95 280 100 280 100 280 100 280 100 280 100 280 100 Actual Output Torque (lb-in) at Specified Input Pressure (PSI) 50 4 8 8 17 32 68 75 155 150 315 140 300 285 600 425 900 75 6 12 12 25 48 101 112 235 220 470 210 450 425 900 640 1350 100 8 16 16 33 64 135 150 315 300 630 285 600 570 1200 850 1800 Displacement (in3) 0.52 0.37 1.04 0.74 3.67 2.62 8.70 6.20 17.40 12.40 17.80 14.58 35.61 29.17 53.41 43.75 Maximum Breakaway Pressure (PSI) 25 20 20 15 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 Maximum Bypass Leakage @100 PSI (cfm) 0.15 0.20 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.20 0.25 0.20 0.25 0.20 0.25 0.20 0.25 0.20 0.25 Unit Weight (lb) 0.38 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 1.75 3.44 3.56 5.19 5.50 7.13 7.50 8.81 9.38 10.50 10.75
42D 44 44D 46 46D
Kinetic Energy Ratings and Bearing Load Capacities

Model 10 11 22 33 36 42 44 46 Composite Bushing Load Capacities (lb)* Radial 15 15 50 100 100 200 200 200 Thrust 7 7 25 50 50 75 75 75 Radial Ball Bushing Load Capacities (lb)* Radial 50 50 Thrust 15 15 Distance Between Centerline Bearings 0.88 1.50 2.38 3.50 6.50 2.75 4.75 6.75
RADIAL LOAD
Maximum Kinetic Energy Rating for Models Based on Configuration (in-lb) Standard 0.03 0.06 0.25 0.75 1.00 2.00 2.50 3.00 Stroke Adjusters 0.12 0.12 0.50 1.50 1.50 4.00 4.00 4.00 Bumpers 0.05 0.09 0.38 1.13 1.50 3.00 3.75 4.75
Consult Factory Consult Factory Consult Factory Consult Factory Consult Factory Consult Factory
* Bearing capacities only. Check Kinetic Energy ratings to determine if actuator will stop load.
THRUST LOAD
H8
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Kinetic Energy Basic Formula

KE = 1/2 Jm2 = 0.035 x Angle Traveled (Deg.) Rotation Time (Sec.)

where: KE = Kinetic Energy (in-lb) Jm = Rotational mass moment of inertia (in-lb-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight) = Peak Velocity (rad/sec) (Assuming twice average velocity) W = Weight of load (lb) g = Gravitational constant = 386.4 in/sec2 k = Radius of gyration (in)
A076
Moments of Inertia
POINT LOAD SOLID SPHERE Mounted on center THIN DISKEnd mounted on center
k k k
Jm =
W x k2 g
Jm =
2 x 5
x k2
Jm =
W x g
k2
THIN RECTANGULAR PLATE Mounted on center

a b
THIN RECTANGULAR PLATE Mounted off center

b a c
THIN DISKMounted on center
k W2 W1
H
W2 x g
4b2 + c2
THIN RECTANGULAR PLATEEnd mounted on center

a
SLENDER RODMounted on center
SLENDER ROD Mounted off center

b W2 W1
Jm =
H9
HP
a2 W x g 12
Jm =
W L2 x g 12
Jm =
W1 a2 W2 b2 x + x g 3 g 3
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Jm =
W x g
a2 + b2
12
Jm =
W1 x g
4a2 + c2
12
12
Jm =
W x g
k2
PV
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensional Data

A076
Standard Face/Base Mount (B) and Male Keyed Shaft (B)
KEYWAY LOCATION IN EXTREME CLOCKWISE POSITION
42 (SIZE 10, 11) 40 (all other sizes) C N N/2 "G" FULL KEYWAY E H C2
A B I C1 P PORTS
L M
F N/2
Note: Pressurizing C1 Port causes clockwise rotation (as viewed from shaft end)
D PORT OFFSET (SIZES 10 & 11 ONLY) 0.17 K
J O/2 O L "R" MOUNTING HOLES (4 PLACES FRONT END) (4 PLACES BASE MOUNT)
0.17
3D CAD FILES available for download at parker.com/automation
Model 10 11 22 33 36 42 44 46
A 2.280 2.905 4.340 6.180 9.180 6.280 8.280
B 1.38 2.00 3.06 4.40 7.40 4.00 6.00
C 0.88 0.88 1.25 1.75 1.75 2.25 2.25 2.25
D 0.312 0.311 0.312 0.311 0.500 0.499 0.749 0.748 0.749 0.748 0.999 0.998 0.999 0.998 0.999 0.998
E 0.258 0.253 0.258 0.253 0.423 0.418 0.644 0.639 0.644 0.639 0.859 0.854 0.859 0.854 0.859 0.854
F 0.094 0.095 0.094 0.095 0.125 0.126 0.188 0.189 0.188 0.189 0.250 0.251 0.250 0.251 0.250 0.251
G 0.63 0.63 0.94 1.38 1.38 2.00 2.00 2.00
H 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.35 0.35 0.50 0.50 0.50
I 1.00 1.63 2.56 3.70 6.70 3.00 5.00 7.00
N 1.220 1.220 2.000 2.436 2.436 3.500 3.500 3.500
O 0.750 0.750 1.250 1.500 1.500 2.375 2.375 2.375
P 10-32 10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
R 8-32 x 0.25 DP 8-32 x 0.25 DP 1/4-20NC x 0.38 DP 5/16-18NC x 0.47 DP 5/16-18NC x 0.47 DP 3/8-16NC x 0.75 DP 3/8-16NC x 0.75 DP 3/8-16NC x 0.75 DP
0.19 1.000 1.62 0.810 0.19 1.625 1.62 0.810 0.25 2.560 2.50 1.250 0.26 3.875 3.00 1.500 0.26 6.875 3.00 1.500 0.50 3.000 4.50 2.250 0.50 5.000 4.50 2.250 0.50 7.000 4.50 2.250
10.280 8.00
H10
Catalog 0900P-4
Option Dimensional Data Flange Mount (F, R)*

"G" DIA F

A076
Model 10 11 22
A 2.50 2.50 3.50 4.50 4.50 7.32 7.32 7.32
B 1.62 1.62 2.50 3.00 3.00 4.51 4.51 4.51
F 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.38 0.38 0.63 0.63 0.63
G 0.41 0.41 0.66 0.84 0.84 1.61 1.61 1.61
H N/A N/A 2.875 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
2.000 1.250 0.203 2.000 1.250 0.203 3.000 2.000 0.281 3.750 2.000 0.344 3.750 2.000 0.344 5.905 2.953 0.551 5.905 2.953 0.551 5.905 2.953 0.551
33 36 42 44
H C A
"E" DIA MTG HOLES (4 PLACES) (22 SIZE HOLES ARE SLOTTED)
46
Note: The face opposite the flange mount does not contain tapped mounting holes. Consult factory if needed.
Double End Male Keyed Shaft (C)

Model
A B C
A 2.75 3.38 5.06 7.15 10.15 7.53 9.53 11.53
B 0.88 0.88 1.25 1.75 1.75 2.25 2.25 2.25
C 0.50 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.28 1.28 1.28
D 0.312 0.311 0.312 0.311 0.500 0.499 0.749 0.748 0.749 0.748 0.999 0.998 0.999 0.998 0.999 0.998
E 0.28 0.28 0.44 0.56 0.56 0.72 0.72 0.72
F #302.5 #302.5 #404 #606 #606 #808 #808 #808
10 11
E "F" WOODRUFF KEY
H
PV HP B671 PTR WR PRN(A)
22 33 36
42 44
Note: Not available with switches or stroke adjustment. Consult factory for rear port option.
46
H11
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Adjustable Rotation Stop (090A, 180A)

A076
An adjustable positive stop is available to provide end of rotation adjustability in a compact package. Total adjustment range is 60 to 190 on single vane actuators, and 60 to 100 on double vane actuators (95 on PV10/11 sizes). The rotation is factory preset to a nominal 90 or 180 (090A or 180A) for convenient installation. NOTE: 1. Not available with double end shaft. 2. Not available with rear ports.
SINGLE VANE UNIT

+5, -60 PER END ADJUSTMENT CENTER OF ROTATION
DOUBLE VANE UNIT
90 (090A)
90 (090A) 180 (180A)
CENTER OF ROTATION
+5, -15 PER END ADJUSTMENT (+2.5, -15 FOR PV10/PV11D SIZES)
"F" HOLLOW HEX E D
B (MAX)
0.03 "A" SQUARE C
Model 10 11 22 33 36 42 44 46
A 1.62 1.62 2.50 3.00 3.00 4.50 4.50 4.50
B 0.63 0.63 1.00 1.16 1.16 1.38 1.38 1.38
C 0.47 0.47 0.72 0.97 0.97 1.25 1.25 1.25
D 0.24 0.24 0.36 0.48 0.48 0.56 0.56 0.56
E 0.75 0.75 1.25 1.56 1.56 2.25 2.25 2.25
F 3/32 3/32 5/32 3/16 3/16 7/32 7/32 7/32
H12
Catalog 0900P-4
Options 90 or 180 Bumpers (090B, 180B)

Bumpers are available to reduce noise and dissipate energy. This permits faster cycle times and increased production rates. Single vane units are available with 90 or 180 bumpers and double vane units are available with 90 bumpers.

A076
90 BUMPERS (090B)
CENTER OF ROTATION
180 BUMPERS (180B)
90 (+5 -0)
180 (+5 -0) CENTER OF ROTATION
90 or 180 Magnet (S)

Option "S" provides a magnet(s) attached to the actuator shaft. Hall effect or reed switches sense the position of these magnets. The switches are available in two nominal rotations, 90 or 180, and the adjustment is 20 for each switch to provide a total adjustment of 40. Adjustable stops, "A", or bumpers, "B", can be supplied in addition to magnets. Order switches separately.
1.63
0.94 0.56
H
PV
090S, 090AS, 090BS - Double vane actuator with magnet or with magnet and stroke adjusters or bumpers; or single vane actuator with magnet and bumpers: Keyway midstroke position at 9:00, magnet positioned to sense at 7:30 and 10:30.
H13
HP
B671
090S, 090AS - Single vane actuator with magnet or with magnet and stroke adjusters: Keyway midstroke position at 6:00, magnet positioned to sense at 4:30 and 7:30.
PTR
180S,180AS, 180BS - Single vane actuator with magnet or with magnet and stroke adjusters and/or bumpers: Keyway midstroke position at 6:00, magnet positioned to sense at 3:00 and 9:00.
WR
Please note the following keyway position and switch sensing locations, with respect to ordering codes and options, with porting at the 12:00 position as viewed from the output shaft end (as shipped from the factory).
PRN(A)
Example Ordering Codes, Keyway Positions and Switch Sensing Locations:
Catalog 0900P-4
Options & Sensors Rear Port (7)

Rear porting provides convenience for confined mounting on very small units being face mounted. This option is not available with switches or stroke adjustment. Consult factory for double end shaft option.

A076
B "C" PORTS B/2
Model 10 11 22 33 36 42 44 46
A 0.54 0.54 0.88 1.09 1.09 1.68 1.68 1.68
B 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.90 0.90 1.00 1.00 1.00
C 10-32 10-32 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
Bearings - Radial Ball Bushings (L)

Composite bushings should be used for washdown, highly contaminated, and low priced applications. Radial ball bushings provide greater precision. For bearing load capacities, reference the Engineering Data section of the catalog. Consult factory for pricing and availability.
Composite Bushing
Radial Ball Bushing
H
Standard self-lubricating, abrasion resistant nitrile seals should be used for general purpose applications with temperatures of 0 to 180F. Fluorocarbon seals are recommended for high temperature applications up to 250F.
Option Bumpers Magnets Switches
*Consult factory for higher temperature operation.
Temperature Range* (F) 0 - 200 0 - 155 14 - 185
Solid State (Hall Effect) and Reed Sensors

Sensors are available in a normally open or normally closed configuration. The low amp reed sensor is suitable for connection to PLCs or other low current devices. The high amp sensor can be used to drive sequencers, relays, coils or other devices directly. Sensors must be ordered separately from the Electronic Sensors section.
1 Brown 4 Black 3 Blue
6" Cord
60" Cord
H14
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits

A076
Seal Kit Ordering Information

PSK PV22D V Omit = Nitrile V = Fluorocarbon
Parker Seal Kit
Model Number
Seal Kit Installation Tool

Model (S) PV10 &11 (D) PV22 (D) PV33 & 36 (D) Items 21, 22 21, 22 21, 22 Seal Guide Kit Number ATS-PV1 ATS-PV2 ATS-PV3
H
PV H15
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes

A076
H16
PRNA/PRN Series
Vane Rotary Actuators
H
PV Contents
Features ........................................................................... H18 Ordering Information ........................................................ H19 Specifications ................................................................... H20 Engineering Data .....................................................H21-H22 Dimensions ................................................................H23-H25 Mounting Options ......................................................H26-H27 Shock Absorbers .............................................................. H28 Sensor Options................................................................. H29
H17
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features PRNA Series Miniature Sizes 1 to 30
Rotary Actuators PRNA / PRN Series

A076
Reference Point Multiple keyway or mill flat orientations are available. Shaft A standard, double ended shaft allows for manual override. Note: the rear shaft is square cut (sizes 20 and 30), and milled flat (sizes 1, 3, 10). Body A two piece, precision machined body incorporates a rounded vane design, virtually eliminating vane seal bypass.
Shaft & Vane A one piece shaft, vane and seal with a rounded vane design provides high strength while reducing vane seal bypass.
Single or Double Vane Options Shaft Bushings The shaft and vane assembly is supported by two composite bushings. Bumpers Internal stator with integral bumper design provides long life.
PRN Series Sizes 50 to 800
Reference Point Multiple keyway or mill flat orientations are available. Body A two piece, cast and machined body incorporates a rounded vane design, virtually eliminating vane seal bypass.
Shaft Bushings The shaft and vane assembly is supported by two composite bushings.
Shaft & Vane A one piece shaft, vane and seal with a rounded vane design provides high strength while reducing vane seal bypass.
Sensors Optional solid state sensors are available. Bumpers Internal stator with integral bumper design provides long life. Single or Double Vane Options
H18
Catalog 0900P-4

Example: PRNA20S - 90 - 90S

A076
PRNA
Type PRNA PRN Sizes 1-30 Sizes 50-800 1 50 3 150
20
Size 10 300 20 800 30
90
90
S
Porting Omit Standard Porting S Rear Porting (sizes 3-20 only)
Type S D Single Vane (all sizes) Double Vane (sizes 30 through 800 only)
Oscillating Reference Point* 40 45 90 40 45 90
Rotation Angle 90 100 180 270 280 90 (all sizes, single and double vane) 100 (sizes 50 through 800, double vane only) 180 (all sizes, single vane only) 270 (single vane only, not available on size 1) 280 (sizes 50 through 800, single vane only)
* See Specification Tables for availability of rotation angle/reference point combinations for the selected model.
Reference Point and Rotation Orientations

PRNA1S/D, PRNA3S/D, PRNA10S/D PRNA20S/D, PRN30S/D Reference Point at 45
45
Port Position Reference Point
PRN50, 150, 300, 800 Reference Point at 45

45
Port Position Reference Point
H
90 on tat Rotati ion
ta 90 Rotation tio n
0 18
270 Rotation
o R 180
270 R tation o
PRN1AS, PRNA3S PRNA10S, PRNA20S Reference Point at 90

Port Position
40
Port Position
Reference Point
ot a ti on
R 90 180 n Rotatio
180
280 Rotation
Ro
ta tio n
H19
HP
B671
Reference Point
90 Rotation 100 Rotation
90
PTR
WR
PRN50, 150, 300, 800 Reference Point at 40
PRN(A)
Ro
PV
Catalog 0900P-4
Maximum Operating Pressure: Output Torque @ 0.7 MPa:

A076
See tables on pages H21-H22
16 to 1120 Ncm (1.4 to 99 in-lb)
Standard Rotations: 90, 180, or 270 (See ordering information for limitations) Operating Temperature Range: -5 to 80C (-23 to 176) Filtration Requirement: 40 Micron Filtered, Dry Air
Quick Reference Data PRNA Miniature

Theoretical Output Torque Model 0.3 Mpa (45 PSI) Ncm PRNA1S PRNA3S Single Vane PRNA10S PRNA20S PRNA30S PRNA1D PRNA3D Double Vane PRNA10D PRNA20D PRNA30D 8 17 46 80 180 17 32 101 165 440 (in-lb) (0.7) (1.5) (4.1) (7.1) (16) (1.5) (2.9) (8.9) (15) (39) 0.5 MPa (75 PSI) Ncm 13 31 86 159 319 28 54 168 330 770 (in-lb) (1.2) (3) (7.6) (14) (28) (2.5) (4.8) (15) (29) (68) 0.7 MPa (100 PSI) Ncm 19 45 127 240 480 41 76 235 530 1120 (in-lb) (1.6) (4.0) (11) (21) (42) (3.6) (6.7) (21) (47) (99) 800 1660 350 720 (71) (147) 1.0 MPa (145 PSI) Ncm (31) (64) (in-lb) Maximum Breakaway Pressure MPa 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.07 0.07 0.06 0.08 PSI (12) (15) (15) (15) (15) (15) (10) (10) (9) (12) Unit Weight kg 0.04 0.07 0.14 0.25 0.47 0.04 0.07 0.15 0.26 0.48 lb (0.08) (0.15) (0.31) (0.55) (1.04) (0.09) (0.16) (0.33) (0.57) (1.06)
Quick Reference Data PRN

Theoretical Output Torque Model 0.3 Mpa (45 PSI) Ncm PRN50S Single Vane PRN150S PRN300S PRN800S PRN50D Double Vane PRN150D PRN300D PRN800D 259 850 1650 5910 579 1900 3900 12000 (in-lb) (23) (75) (146) (523) (51) (168) (345) (1062) 0.5 MPa (75 PSI) Ncm 479 1500 2850 10200 1040 3500 6800 20600 (in-lb) (42) (133) (252) (903) (92.0) (310) (602) (1823) 0.7 MPa (100 PSI) Ncm 700 2100 4050 14400 1510 4800 9700 28800 (in-lb) (62.0) (186) (358) (1274) (134) (425) (858) (2549) 1.0 MPa (145 PSI) Ncm 1060 3050 5750 20500 2250 6900 1370 41100 (in-lb) (94) (270) (509) (1814) (199) (611) (121) (3637) Maximum Breakaway Pressure MPa 0.10 0.08 0.08 0.05 0.08 0.06 0.06 0.05 PSI (15) (12) (12) (7) (12) (9) (9) (7) Unit Weight kg 0.8 2.0 3.7 13 0.8 2.0 4.3 13 (lb) (1.8) (4.4) (8.2) (28) (1.8) (4.4) (9.5) (28)
H20
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Sizes 1 to 30

Model Vane Rotation Rotational Tolerance Reference Point Port Size Operating Pressure Range Temperature Range Maximum Frequency* Displacement MPa psi C F cycle/min cm3 in3 Unit Degree Degree Degree MPa psi C F cycle/min cm3 in3 240 2 0.12 45 M5 0.3 to 0.7 45 to 100 45 M5 300 1.4 0.09 180 1.4 0.09 70 1.5 0.09 260 3.4 0.2 Degree Degree Degree 90 M5 0.3 to 0.7 45 to 100 45, 90 M5 90 180 270 90 Unit PRNA1S

A076
PRNA3S 180 270 45 90
PRNA10S Single Vane 180 +4, -0 45, 90 M5 0.2 to 0.7 30 to 100 -5 to 80 23 to 176 45 270 90
PRNA20S 180 270 45 0.2 to 1 30 to 150 90
PRNA30S 180 45 Rc 1/8 270
45, 90 M5
-5 to 60 23 to 140 150 9.8 0.6 100 12 0.7 210 17 1.0 120 17 1.0 60 21 1.3 180 37 2.3 90 60 43 2.6
160 3.4 0.2 PRNA3D 90
60 4 0.2
240 9.8 0.6
Model Vane Rotation Rotational Tolerance Reference Point Port Size Operating Pressure Range Temperature Range Maximum Frequency* Displacement
PRNA1D 90
PRNA10D Double Vane 90 +4, -0 45 M5 0.2 to 0.7 30 to 100 -5 to 80 23 to 176
PRNA20D 90 45 M5 0.2 to 1 30 to 150
PRNA30D 90 45 Rc 1/8
-5 to 60 23 to 140 240 5 0.3 200 10 0.6 200 34 2.1
240 2.4 0.1
H
PV

Bearing Load Capacities Model Number N PRNA1S PRNA3S PRNA10S PRNA20S PRNA30S 1 4 4 25 30 Thrust Load lb 0.2 0.9 0.9 5.6 6.7 N 10 40 50 300 400 Radial Load lb 2 9 11 67 90 Distance Between Centerline Bearings mm 15 20 30 42 48 in 0.6 0.8 1.2 1.7 1.9 Maximum Kinetic Energy Rating mJ 0.8 4 8 40 67 in-lb 0.01 0.03 0.07 0.35 0.60
H21
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Sizes 50 to 800

Model Vane Rotation Rotational Tolerance Reference Point Port Size Operating Pressure Range Temperature Range Maximum Frequency* Displacement MPa psi C F cycle/min cm3 in3 Unit Degree Degree Degree MPa psi C F cycle/min cm3 in3 65 754 46 45 869 53 1036 63 30 1046 64 45 40, 45 45 40 90 180 51 3.1 90 61 3.7 PRN800S 180 270 280 60 62 3.8 Degree Degree Degree 45 40, 45 45 40 90 180 270 280 Unit PRN50S

A076
PRN150S Double Vane 90 45 180 40, 45 270 +3 -0 45 40 45 280 90
PRN300S 180 40, 45 Rc 3/8 270 45 280 40
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/4 0.2 to 1.0 30 to 150 5 to 60 41 to 140 120 146 8.9 PRN50D 90 40, 45 100 +3, -0 40 45 40 45 80 179 10.9 50 185 11.3 90 244 14.9
60 283 17 352 21
40 365 22
Model Vane Rotation Rotational Tolerance Reference Point Port Size Operating Pressure Range Temperature Range Maximum Frequency* Displacement
PRN150D 90 100
PRN300D 90 100 40, 45
PRN800D 90 45 100 40
Double Vane
Rc 1/2
Rc 1/8 0.2 to 1.0 30 to 150 5 to 60 41 to 140 42 2.6 43 2.6
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/2
127 7.7
123 7.5
244 14.9
271 16.5
754 46
774 47
* Maximum frequency value given at a pressure of 0.5 MPa (73 psi) and under no load.

Bearing Load Capacities Model Thrust Load N PRN50S/D PRN150S/D PRN300S/D PRN800S/D 44.1 88.2 147 490 lb 9.9 19.8 33.0 110.2 Radial Load N 588 1176 1960 4900 lb 132 264 441 1102 Distance Between Centerline Bearings mm 66 79.5 97.5 138.5 in 2.6 3.1 3.8 5.5 Maximum Kinetic Energy Rating Standard Unit J 0.13 0.6 8.0 10.5 in-lb 1.2 5.3 70 92 Shock Absorber (per cycle) J 7.8 10 20 156 in-lb 69 231 462 1387 Shock Absorber (per cycle) J/hr 3100 11300 22000 56500 in-lb/hr 27000 100000 194000 500000
H22
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions
PRNA1S

A076
M3 Depth 3.5 (For Mounting Switch) R10.5 (0.41) 3.5 (0.14)
45
Reference Point 45 4-M3 Depth 6 (2 Points on Rear)

8h8 (0.31) 4h7 (0.16)
1717 90
23 (0.91)
Port 2-M5
4h7 (0.16)
3.5 (0.14)
Standard Port
4.1 (0.16)
Reference Point 90
29 (1.14)
10 (0.39) 3 (0.12) 16 (0.63) 1.2 (0.05) 20 10 (0.79) (0.39) 46 (1.81)
90 Rotation 180 Rotation 270 Rotation
4.5 8h8 (0.31) Port (0.18) 2-M3 6 (0.24) 8.9 (0.35) 2 (0.08)
9.6 (0.38)
Rear Port
PRNA3S/D
4.5 (0.18)
45
90 25 25
Reference Point 45 Reference Point 90

36.5 (1.44)
16.5 (0.65)
12h8 (0.47) 5h7 (0.20)
Port 2-M5
32 (1.26)
30 (1.18)
5h7 (0.20) 12h8 (0.47)
12.5 (0.49)
11.7 (0.46) Port 2-M5
15
60
60
10 (0.39)
4 (0.16) 19 (0.75)
2 (0.08) 26 (1.02) 55 (2.17)
7 (0.28) 10 (0.39)
60
4.5 (0.18)
4.5 60 (0.18)
60
60
2-M2 Depth 3 (For Mounting Switch) Rear Port
6-M3 Depth 6 (3 Points on Rear)
270 Rotation
Standard Port
H
PV
PRNA10S/D
3-M3 Depth 6 (For Mounting Switch)
45 90
Reference Point 45 Reference Point 90 25 (0.98)

14h8 (0.55) 6h7 (0.24) 42.5 (1.67)
35 (1.38)
5.5 (0.22)
6h7 (0.24) 14h8 (0.55)
60
60
Port 2-M5 14 5 (0.55) (0.20) 2 (0.08) 40 (1.57) 73 (2.87) 7 (0.28) 14 (0.55)
13 (0.51)
90 Rotation 3-M3 Depth 6

Dimensions are in mm (Inches)
23 (0.91)
10 (0.39)
60
H23
HP
60 Rear Port
B671
PTR
35 (1.38)
Standard Port
WR
60 25 25 60
Port 2-M5
5.5 (0.22)
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions
PRNA20S/D

A076
45
45
25 25 90
Reference Keyway 0.004 Point 45 Width 3 0.029+0.1 X depth 1.8 0 Reference Point 90
16h8 (0.63) 8h7 (0.31) 49.5 (1.95)
17.8 (0.70) 36.5 (1.44) Port 2-M5
16.6 (0.65)
Port 2-M5
40 (1.57)
0 60.1 (0.24)
16h8 (0.63)Rear Port
3 16 (0.12) (0.63) 5.5 (0.22) 28.5 (1.12) 55 (2.17) 93.5 (3.68) 2 (0.79)
7 (0.28)
35 (1.38) 40 (1.57)
90 Rotation 8-M5 Depth 8 (4 Points on Rear) 180 Rotation 270 Rotation
10 (0.39)
60 2-M3 Depth 6 (For Switch Mounting)

Standard Port
60
PRNA30S/D
H
45
45 25 25
Reference Point Keyway 0 Width 4 0.03 X depth 2.5 +0.1 0
20h8 (0.79) 10h7 (0.39) 64 (2.52)
36 (1.42)
Port 2-Rc 1/8

0 80.1 (0.31)
56 (2.20)
35 (1.38)
20h8 (0.79)
3 18 (0.12) (0.71) 90 Rotation 8-M5 Depth 8 (4 Points on Rear) 180 Rotation 270 Rotation 31.5 (1.24) 5.5 (0.22) 2.5 (0.10)
10 (0.39)
60
13.5 (0.53)
60
60 (2.36) 105 (4.13)
2-M3 Depth 6 (For Switch Mounting)
Dimensions are in mm (Inches)
H24
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions
PRN Sizes 50 to 800

A076
Port 2-P
DD EE
Y Hex. Sockethead Cap Screw 6-HH Z BB AA CC AA
Y Z BB
GG
Keyway
M Gh8 Fh7
0 K0.1
FF
Gh8
Q S 12-R (6 Points on Rear) E B J D L J C
H
P Q 45 (1.77) 70 (2.76) 80 (3.15) 120 (4.72) R M6 x 1, Depth 9 M8 x 1.25, Depth 12 M10 x 1.5, Depth 15 M12 x 1.75, Depth 18 S 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 10 (0.39)
Model No. PRN50 PRN150 PRN300 PRN800 Model No. PRN50 PRN150 PRN300 PRN800
mm (Inches)
A 79 (3.11) 110 (4.33) 141.5 (5.57) 196 (7.72) T 28 (1.10) 34 (1.34) 42 (1.65) 64 (2.52)
B 145 (5.71) 180 (7.09) 220 (8.66) 285 (11.22) U 29 (1.14) 34.5 (1.36) 41.5 (1.63) 53.5 (2.11)
C 19.5 (0.77) 23.5 (0.93) 30 (1.18) 44.5 (1.75) V 58 (2.28) 85.2 (3.35) 110 (4.33) 152 (5.98)
D 86 (3.39) 103 (4.06) 125 (4.92) 171 (6.73) Y 11 (0.43) 10.5 (0.41) 13 (0.51) 14.5 (0.57)
E 39.5 (1.56) 53.5 (2.11) 65 (2.56) 69.5 (2.74) Z 14 (0.55) 15.5 (0.61) 17.5 (0.69) 21.1 (0.83)
F 12 (0.47) 17 (0.67) 25 (0.98) 40 (1.57) AA 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 11.4 (0.45)
G 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18) 45 (1.77) 70 (2.76) BB 20 (0.79) 23.5 (0.93) 27.5 (1.08) 32.5 (1.28)
H 29 (1.14) 34.5 (1.36) 41.5 (1.63) 53.5 (2.11) CC 46 (1.81) 56 (2.20) 70 (2.76) 106 (4.17)
J 2.5 (0.10) 3 (0.12) 3.5 (0.14) 4.5 (0.18) DD 51 (2.01) 75 (2.95) 88.5 (3.48) 130 (5.12)
K 10 (0.39) 13 (0.51) 19 (0.75) 32 (1.26) EE 44 (1.73) 61 (2.40) 78 (3.07) 110 (4.33)
L 13 (0.51) 16 (0.63) 22 (0.87) 35 (1.38) FF 57 (2.24) 85 (3.35) 98.5 (3.88) 145 (5.71)
M 36 (1.42) 51 (2.01) 66 (2.60) 90 (3.54) GG 68 (2.68) 97 (3.82) 125 (4.92) 173 (6.81)
N 16 (0.63) 24 (0.94) 32 (1.26) 44 (1.73)
Rc1/8 Rc1/4 Rc3/8 Rc1/2
HH M5 x 30 M6 x 35 M8 x 45 M12 x 70
Keyway Width x Depth x Length 4 5 7 12

0 -0.03 0 -0.03 0 -0.036 0 -0.043
x 2.5 +0.1 x 20
0
x4 x5
+0.2 0 +0.2 0
x 40 x 40
H25
HP
B671
x3
+0.1 0
x 36
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
PV
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Options
Flange Mount Sizes 1 to 30
Note: Should not be used on rear face when rear ports (S) or switches are specified.

A076
A B
A B
C D
E F G
Dimensions
Part No. PRNA1-P PRNA3-P PRNA10-P PRNA20-P PRNA30-P
mm (Inches)
A 24 (0.94) 30 (1.18) 34 (1.34) 41 (1.61) 52 (2.05)
B 30 (1.18) 37 (1.46) 42 (1.65) 50 (1.97) 64 (2.52)
C 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16)
D 3.4 (0.13) 3.4 (0.13) 3.5 (0.14) 5.5 (0.22) 5.5 (0.22)
E 1 (0.04) 1.5 (0.06) 1.8 (0.07) 1.9 (0.07) 1.9 (0.07)
F 14 (0.55) 16.5 (0.65) 19.8 (0.78) 24.9 (0.98) 27.9 (1.10)
G 16 (0.63) 19 (0.75) 23 (0.91) 28.5 (1.12) 31.5 (1.24)
H 2 (0.08) 2.5 (0.10) 3.2 (0.13) 3.6 (0.14) 3.6 (0.14)
Foot Mount Sizes 1 to 30
Note: A foot plate can be rotated in intervals of 90. Only one plate included. Two plates must be purchased to mount from both sides (as shown). Should not be used on rear face when rear ports (S) or switches are specified.
H K
F E
A B
L C D
M N P
Dimensions
Part No. PRNA1-L PRNA3-L PRNA10-L PRNA20-L PRNA30-L
mm (Inches)
A 20 (0.79) 26 (1.02) 30 (1.18) 36 (1.42) 48 (1.89)
B 30 (1.18) 36 (1.41) 42 (1.65) 49 (1.93) 66 (2.60)
C 2 (0.08) 2 (0.08) 2 (0.08) 2 (0.08) 2 (0.08)
D 4.8 (0.19) 4.8 (0.19) 5.8 (0.23) 7 (0.28) 6.5 (0.26)
E 22 (0.87) 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18) 34 (1.34) 42 (1.65)
F 37 (1.46) 43 (1.69) 51 (2.01) 58.5 (2.30) 75 (2.95)
G 2 (0.08) 2.6 (0.10) 3.2 (0.13) 3.6 (0.14) 4.5 (0.18)
H 14 (0.55) 16.4 (0.65) 19.8 (0.78) 24.9 (0.98) 27 (1.06)
K 10.3 (0.41) 12.7 (0.50) 16.1 (0.63) 18.6 (0.73) 20.7 (0.81)
L 5 (0.20) 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47)
M 10 (0.39) 11 (0.43) 12 (0.47) 15 (0.59) 18 (0.71)
N 40 (1.57) 48 (1.89) 64 (2.52) 85 (3.35) 96 (3.78)
P 50 (1.97) 62 (2.44) 80 (3.15) 105 (4.13) 120 (4.72)
H26
Catalog 0900P-4
Mounting Options
Flange Mount Sizes 50 and 150
Note: A flange plate can be rotated in intervals of 60

A076
A B
A B
E 4 - C D
Dimensions
Part No. PRN50-P PRN150-P
mm (Inches)
80 39.5 4.5 64 7 35 (2.52) (3.15) (0.28) (1.56) (1.38) (0.18) 110 53.5 47.5 6 88 9 (3.46) (4.33) (0.35) (2.11) (1.87) (0.24)
Foot Mount Sizes 50 to 800

Note: A foot plate can be rotated in intervals of 60. Two foot plates (L2) are not available with the CR, FM, FC option.
F G
H
PV
E D
A B 2 - C
K L N
Dimensions
PRN50-L PRN150-L PRN300-L PRN800-L
mm (Inches)
75 45 35 4.5 25 156 55 11 82.5 27.5 10 136 (2.17) (2.95) (0.43) (1.77) (3.25) (1.38) (1.08) (0.18) (0.39) (0.98) (5.35) (6.14) 80 110 13 65 115 43.5 33.5 10 12 28 159 183 (3.15) (4.33) (0.51) (2.56) (4.53) (1.71) (1.32) (0.39) (0.47) (1.10) (6.26) (7.20) 100 140 15 80 135 53 40.5 12 13 32 189 215 (3.94) (5.51) (0.59) (3.15) (5.31) (2.09) (1.59) (0.47) (0.51) (1.26) (7.44) (8.46) 140 200 15 110 200 54.5 39.5 15 15 35 241 271 (5.51) (7.87) (0.59) (4.33) (7.87) (2.15) (1.56) (0.59) (0.59) (1.38) (9.49) (10.67)
H27
HP
B671
PTR
Part No.
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Shock Absorber

The CRN Series Shock Absorber should be used in applications involving high inertial loads. Inertial loads are a result of any or all of the following: High cycle speeds Heavy loads Physically / dimensionally large loads When any of these characteristics are present, it is important that some means of deceleration, such as the CRN, is used. Note: It is critical not to exceed the maximum kinetic energy values of the CRN. See chart below for kinetic energy calculations. When ordering a CRN, the shock absorber and the shock arm must be ordered separately. When a CRN is specified, maintain a minimum working pressure of 0.3 MPa.

A076
D
E G F
H C A B
Dimensions
Model No. CRN50 CRN150 CRN300 CRN800 A B C D E F G H
136.5 30 20.5 56 50 54 R38 34 (5.37) (1.18) (0.81) (2.20) (1.97) (2.13) (1.50) (1.34) 159.5 34 22.5 80 62 71.5 R51 46 (6.28) (1.34) (0.89) (3.15) (2.44) (2.81) (2.01) (1.81) 187.5 37 25.5 95 87 96 R68 62 (7.38) (1.46) (1.00) (3.74) (3.43) (3.78) (2.68) (2.44) 244 42 31 130 118 135 R78 90 (9.61) (1.65) (1.22) (5.12) (4.65) (5.31) (3.07) (3.54)
mm (Inches)
Shock Absorber Only
Shock Arm
CRN50
1
CRN50 90 45 T
1 2 3
1
Model CRN50 CRN150 CRN300 CRN800 for PRN50 for PRN150 for PRN300 for PRN800
2
Rotation 90 100 180 270 280 90 100 180 270 280
3
Reference Point 40 45 40 45
Relationship Between Rotation and Reference Point

Reference Point Options 40 45 Rotation 90 X X 180 X N/A 270 N/A X 280 X N/A
Note: Select a shock arm based on the reference point and rotation of the PRN to be used.
Model No. Kinetic Energy (per cycle) Maximum Angular Velocity Kinetic Energy (per hour) Temperature Range Deceleration Angle Weight
Unit J in-lb Degree/s J/hr in-lb/hr C F Degree g lb
CRN50 7.8 68 850 3100 26939
CRN150 10 85 750 11300 98197 5 to 50 41 to 122
CRN300 20 170 650 22000 191180
CRN800 156 1356 550 56500 490985
11 240 0.528
12 420 0.924
14 780 1.716
15 1620 3.564
H28
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensor Options
The FR Series variable position sensor provides the ability to adjust the sensor to sense along the full travel of the actuator. All switches and sensors must be ordered separately. See the Electronic Sensors section for part numbers and sensor specifications. Note: Not to be used in conjunction with rear ports (S).

A076
Variable Position Solid State (FR Series) Sensor
CT-3R
R15
Dimensions
Model PRNA1 PRNA3 PRNA10 PRNA20 PRNA30
mm (Inches)
CT-3L FR Switch Unit FU Switch Unit
A 31.9 (1.26) 30.7 (1.21) 34 (1.34) 34 (1.34) 34 (1.34)
B 1000 (39.37) 1000 (39.37) 1000 (39.37) 1000 (39.37) 1000 (39.37)
C 29 (1.14) 35 (1.38) 42 (1.65) 42 (1.65) 42 (1.65)
Fixed Position Solid State (SR / SU Series) Sensor

The SR or SU Series fixed position sensor senses the end of stroke only. All switches and sensors must be ordered separately. See the Electronic Sensors section for part numbers and sensor specifications. Note: Not to be used in conjunction with rear ports (S).
D D
H
PV HP H29
Dimensions
Model PRNA1 PRNA3 PRNA10 PRNA20 PRNA30
mm (Inches)
SR Switch Unit
SU Switch Unit
A N/A 18 (0.71) 18.3 (0.72) 18.3 (0.72) 21.8 (0.86)
B N/A 1000 (39.37) 1000 (39.37) 1000 (39.37) 1000 (39.37)
C N/A 36 (1.42) 42 (1.65) 49 (1.93) 49 (1.93)
D 30 (1.18) 25 (0.98) 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79)
B671
PTR
N/A
WR
LED1
LED2
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensor Options

A076
Variable Position Solid State (FR / FC Series) Sensor

The FR and FC Series variable position sensor provides the ability to adjust the sensor to sense along the full travel of the actuator. The FR Series sensor is to be used with the standard PRN sizes 50800, and the FC Series sensor is to be used when a CRN Series shock absorber is specified. See the Electronic Sensors section for part numbers and sensor specifications.
PRN50, 150, 300

D
E 5 B A C 50 1000 D
PRN800
Dimensions
Model No. PRN50 PRN150 PRN300 PRN800
mm (Inches)
A 115 (4.53) 131.7 (5.19) 161.2 (6.35) 215.5 (8.48)
B 87.2 (3.43) 104.2 (4.10) 126.2 (4.97) 174.2 (6.86)
C 27.5 (1.08) 27.5 (1.08) 35 (1.38) 41.3 (1.63)
D R47 (1.85) R61 (2.40) R69 (2.72) R60 (2.36)
E 69 (2.72) 97 (3.82) 113 (4.45) 108 (4.25)

E
H
D
PRN50, 150, 300
B A
PRN800
Dimensions
Model No. PRN50 PRN150 PRN300 PRN800
mm (Inches)
A 137.7 (5.42) 160.7 (6.33) 188.7 (7.43) 244 (9.61)
B 87.2 (3.43) 104.2 (4.10) 126.2 (4.97) 174.2 (6.86)
C 50.5 (1.99) 56.5 (2.22) 62.5 (2.46) 69.8 (2.75)
D R58.2 (2.29) R72.2 (2.84) R88.2 (3.47) R118.5 (4.67)
H30
WR Series
Wrist Rotator
H
PV Contents
Features ........................................................................... H32 Ordering Information......................................................... H32 Specifications ................................................................... H33 Engineering Data .............................................................. H33 Dimensions ....................................................................... H34
H31
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features, Ordering WR Series Wrist Rotator

The Wrist Rotate Series rotary actuator provides added features to allow use as a modular pick-and-place component or as a precision pneumatic rotary actuator. Rotation stops provide adjustable rotation from 30 to 205 and feature hydraulic shock absorbers or polyurethane bumpers. Optional plug-in style inductive proximity sensors provide an end of rotation signal. Piston magnet option is available for use with Hall Effect and reed sensors for full rotation position sensing. The body features anodized aluminum and stainless steel construction for corrosion resistance.
Rotary Actuators WR Series

A076
H
Ordering Information WR 1
Size 1 2 15 lb-in torque @ 100 psi 65 lb-in torque @ 100 psi F
205
A
Design Series
A - Current design series Right Angle Flow Controls Options 5/32 tube connection (Std)
B C
Bumpers (Std) Shock absorbers
Sensors Omit None P PNP Proximity Sensor N NPN Proximity Sensor S Magnets added*
*Order solid state (Hall Effect) and reed sensors separately from the Electronic Sensors section.
H32
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Information Specifications

A076
Maximum operating pressure: 150 psi air
Output torque @ 100 psi: 15 or 65 lb-in Rotation range: 30 to 205 Mounting orientation: unrestricted Operating temperature range: 0 to 180F Filtration requirement: 40 micron filtered, dry air
Quick Reference
Model 50 WR1 WR2 5 25 Actual Output Torque (lb-in) at Specified Input Pressure (PSI) 75 10 45 100 15 65 Displacement (in3) 1.04 3.67 Maximum Breakaway Pressure 20 15 Unit Weight (lb) 1.5 3.5
Sizing Information
TENSILE LOAD COMPRESSIVE LOAD
RADIAL LOAD
"L"
RADIAL LOAD
Maximum Dynamic Load Ratings Model WR1 WR2 Radial Load (lbs) 5 25 Compressive Load (lbs) 10 50 Tensile Load (lbs) 5 25 Moment Load (lb-in) 25 125
Max. Kinetic Energy (lb-in) With Bumpers .11 .57 With Shock Absorbers 6.00 30.10
H
Kinetic Energy Calculations

In many cases, the size and life of a rotary actuator is determined not by its torque output, but rather by its energy dissipation capability. This is based on the assumption that if the actuator is capable of stopping the load, it is certainly capable of starting the load. Both torque output and kinetic energy absorption must be considered if the actuator physically stops the load. To calculate Kinetic Energy, the following variables are required: 1. Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) 2. Total Rotation (Degrees) 3. Rotation Time (Seconds) where KE = Kinetic Energy (in-lb) Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (in-lb-sec2) = Peak Velocity (rad/sec) (Assuming twice average velocity)
KINETIC ENERGY BASIC FORMULA

KE = 1/2 Jm2 = 0.035 x Angle Traveled (deg.) Rotation Time (sec.)
H33
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions
.03 E K

A076
A F D
J3 (WITH BUMPER & SWITCH) J (WITH BUMPER)

1
J2 - RADIUS (WITH SHOCKS) "U" PRESTO-LOK TUBE (2 PLACES) "T" INTERNAL HEX (2 PLACES)
M N
H
30 205 H "S" MOUNTING HOLES (4 PLACES END MOUNT) (4 PLACES BASE MOUNT) P/2 P
O/2
Dimensions
Model WR1 WR2 A 3.97 5.65 B 3.00 4.75 C 2.00 3.06 D 0.88 1.25 E 0.312 0.311 0.499 0.498 N 0.810 1.250 O 1.220 2.000 F 0.352 0.347 0.548 0.543 P 0.750 1.250 G 0.094 0.093 0.125 0.124 H 3.63 5.25 J1 1.89 2.61 J2 2.54 4.26 J3 2.30
Model WR1 WR2
K 0.19 0.25
L 1.625 2.560
M 1.62 2.50
S 8-32 UNC x 0.25 DEEP 1/4-20 UNC x 0.38 DEEP
T 5/32 3/16
U 5/32 1/4
H34
PTR Series
Pneumatic Rack & Pinion Rotary Actuator
H
PV Contents
Features ........................................................................... H36 Ordering Information......................................................... H37 Specifications ................................................................... H38 Engineering Data ...................................................... H39-H40 Dimensions ....................................................................... H41 Mounting Options ............................................................. H42 Shaft Options .................................................................... H43 Port Locations................................................................... H43 Cushions and Bumpers .................................................... H44 Stroke Adjusters ............................................................... H45 3-Position Actuator ........................................................... H46 Antibacklash Actuator ....................................................... H47 Air / Oil Operation ............................................................. H48 Flow Controls.................................................................... H49 Shaft Seal Covers ............................................................. H49 Fluorocarbon Seals .......................................................... H49 Magnetic Piston and Sensors ........................................... H50 Service Kits ...................................................................... H51
H35
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Rotary Actuators PTR Series

A076
Tubing & Body Aluminum is hard-coat anodized and permanently sealed for maximum wear resistance and long life.
Rack & Pinion Heavy duty gear design is made from through hardened chrome alloy steel for maximum strength and shock resistance. The gear chamber is prelubricated to provide millions of trouble-free cycles.
Piston Seals Unique geometry of lipseal provides low breakaway pressure and long life. The specially formulated Nitroxile ELF compound incorporates a unique internal lubricant to provide the lowest breakaway and running friction, while maintaining the best wear resistance available. Can be operated with no added lubrication.
H
Sealed Ball Bearings Reduce friction and breakaway pressure while providing substantial pinion and shaft support. This ensures a rigid and long lasting assembly, even for high cycle applications.
Standard Male Keyed Shaft Is as large as possible to ensure superior strength; pinion and output shaft are one- piece to provide long life. A female shaft is available.
Pistons Floating Wear-Tech aluminum pistons are supported at both ends by rugged filled PTFE wear bands which prevent cylinder scoring, galling, and binding. A magnet groove is standard on all pistons, allowing field conversion to position sensors.
Optional Check Seal Cushions Unique molded flow passages combine the benefits of floating cushions with check valve action, providing effective cushioning and quick stroke reversal for higher cycle and production rates. This proven design eliminates failure-prone springs and ensures minimum wear. An adjustable needle valve and springless check valve allow exact "tailoring" of the cushion to match the application.
H36
Catalog 0900P-4
Model Code and Ordering Information Example: PTR251 - 0903FP - AB21MV - C

A076
PTR
25
1 090
P A
V C
Special Options Omit STD
(Two-digit code assigned by factory and applies when any "X" or "9" appears in the model number or when special options or features are required.)
Model 1 10 15 20 25 32 1" Bore 1" Bore 2" Bore 2" Bore 3" Bore Configuration 1 2 3 6 7 Single Rack Double Rack Three Position Actuator Air/Oil Operation Antibacklash Rotation 2 090 180 270 360 90 180 270 360 C Seals
Design Series Current
Omit Nitrile V Fluorocarbon X Special Standard Options Omit None M Magnetic Piston Ring S Shaft Seal Cover Q Prepped for External Air/Oil Tank L Air/Oil Cushion & Flow Control Adj. at Location 1 (opposite standard) Port Location 1 2 3 4 5 9 Position 1 (STD) Position 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position 5 6 Special Port Type 1 2 4 9 SAE Straight Thread NPTF BSPP (ISO 1179-1 with ISO 228-1 threads) Special Shaft A B C R X Female Keyed Single Male Keyed (STD) Double Male Keyed Preload Keyway Special Other Options Detail in clear text: Proximity Sensors Feedback Potentiometer
Or specify any other rotation.
Cushion/Bumpers Omit None 1 Cushioned CW Rotation 3 2 Cushioned CCW Rotation 3 3 Cushioned Both Rotations 4 Four Cushions 4 5 Bumper CW Rotation 3 6 Bumper CCW Rotation 3 7 Bumper Both Rotations 9 Special Stroke Adjusters Omit None D 0-30 CW rotation 3, 5 E 0-30 CCW Rotation 3, 5 F 0-30 Both Rotations 5 H Shock/Stroke Adj. CW Rotation 3 K Shock/Stroke Adj. CCW Rotation 3 L Shock/Stroke Adj. Both Rotations X Special Port Flow Controls Omit None P Flow Control Both Rotations R Flow Control CW Rotation 3 S Flow Control CCW Rotation 3 Mounting A F G P R X Face/Base (STD) Front Flange Foot Flange Pilot Ring Rear Flange Special 3 4 5 6 Order solid state (Hall effect) and reed sensors separately. See Electronic Sensors section for part numbers and specifications.
H
PV HP B671 PTR WR
NOTES: 1 Cylinder bore size. See appropriate tables for torque output. 2 For 3-position units, specify middle and total rotation separated by a "/", ie 090/180. To obtain equal rotation both sides of midstroke (theoretical 12:00), order unit with 5 longer rotation than standard with stroke adjusters.
Viewed from shaft end. Double rack models only. Reduces to 10 with cushions. Not available with cushions or stroke adjusters.
H37
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Maximum operating pressure: 250 PSI Output torque @ 100 psi: 39 lb-in to 2281 lb-in Standard rotations: 90, 180, 270, 360, 450 Maximum breakaway pressure: 5 PSI Zero internal and external leakage Mounting orientation: unrestricted Timing: keyway located at 12:00 position at midstroke of actuator Operating temperature range: Standard seals 0 to 180F Fluorocarbon seals 0 to 250F Filtration requirement: 40 micron filtered, dry air

A076
Unit Weights (lb)

Model PTR101 PTR102 PTR151 PTR152 PTR201 PTR202 PTR251 PTR252 PTR321 PTR322 Rotation 90 2-1/4 3-1/2 8-1/4 11-3/8 13-5/8 19-3/4 21-1/8 30-3/4 44-1/4 61-7/8 180 2-1/2 3-7/8 8-3/4 12-3/8 14-5/8 21-7/8 22-3/4 34 46-5/8 66-5/8 270 2-3/4 4-1/4 9-1/4 13-3/8 15-5/8 24 24-3/8 37-1/4 49 71-3/8 360 3 4-5/8 9-3/4 14-3/8 16-3/4 26-1/8 26 40-1/2 51-3/8 76-1/8

Model Single Rack 101 102 151 152 201 251 202 252 321 322 Double Rack Typ. Actual Output Torque @ 100 psi (lb-in) 35 70 100 200 250 375 500 750 1000 2000 Theoretical Output Torque* (lb-in) versus Input Pressure (psi) 50 19 39 59 118 141 215 282 430 570 1141 75 29 59 88 177 212 322 423 644 856 1711 100 39 79 118 236 282 430 565 859 1141 2281 250 98 197 294 590 705 1074 1410 2148 2852 5703 Displacement per Degree Rotation (in3/) 0.007 0.014 0.021 0.042 0.049 0.075 0.099 0.150 0.199 0.398 Maximum Angular Backlash (minutes) 60 60 45 45 35 35 35 35 25 25 Tolerance (degrees) -0, +5 -0, +5 -0, +4 -0, +4 -0, +3 -0, +3 -0, +3 -0, +3 -0, +2 -0, +2
* Allow 10% for friction loss. Allow 20% on air/oil units. Use the single rack torque values for all air/oil, three position, and anti-backlash actuators.
H38
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data

A076
Bearing Load Capacities and Kinetic Energy Ratings

Bearing Load Capacities* (lb) Model Radial 100 250 500 750 1000 Thrust 50 125 250 375 500 Distance Between Bearings 1.40 2.15 2.15 2.50 3.75 Maximum Kinetic Energy absorption Rating for Models Based on Configuration (lb-in) Standard or Stroke Adjusters 0.5 1.50 3.00 5.50 12.00 Bumper 0.75 2.25 4.50 8.25 18.00 Cushion** 5.00 15.00 35.00 55.00 155.00
Shock Absorbers (per Cycle/per Hour) 15/150,000 35/200,000 140/350,000 140/300,000 N/A
10 15 20 25 32
* Bearing capacities only. Check Kinetic Energy ratings to determine if actuator will stop load. ** Assuming positive back pressure provided by meter-out flow control.
Kinetic Energy Calculations
In many cases, the size and life of a rotary actuator is determined not by its torque output, but rather by its energy dissipation capability. This is based on the assumption that if the actuator is capable of stopping the load, it is certainly capable of starting the load. Both torque output and kinetic energy absorption must be considered if the actuator physically stops the load. To calculate Kinetic Energy, the following variables are required: 1. Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) See next page. 2. Total Rotation (Degrees) 3. Rotation Time (Seconds)
KINETIC ENERGY BASIC FORMULA

KE = 1/2 Jm2 = 0.035 x where KE = Kinetic Energy (in-lb) Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (in-lb-sec2) See next page for formulas. = Peak Velocity (rad/sec) (Assuming twice average velocity) Angle Traveled (deg.) Rotation Time (sec.)
H
PV
H39
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Engineering Data Kinetic Energy Basic Formula

KE = 1/2 Jm2 = 0.035 x Angle Traveled (Deg.) Rotation Time (Sec.)

where KE = Kinetic Energy (in-lb) Jm = Rotational mass moment of inertia (in-lb-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight) g = Peak Velocity (rad/sec) (Assuming twice average velocity) = Gravitational constant = 386.4 in/sec2 = Radius of gyration (in) W = Weight of load (lb) k
A076
Moments of Inertia
POINT LOAD
SOLID SPHERE Mounted on center
THIN DISKEnd mounted on center
k k k
Jm =
W x k2 g
Jm =
2 5
x k2
Jm =
W x g
k2
THIN RECTANGULAR PLATE Mounted on center

a b
THIN RECTANGULAR PLATE Mounted off center

b a c
THIN DISKMounted on center
H
W1
W2
Jm =
W a2 + b 2 x g 12
Jm =
W1 4a2 + c2 W2 4b2 + c2 x + x g 12 g 12
Jm =
W x g
k2
THIN RECTANGULAR PLATEEnd mounted on center

a
SLENDER RODMounted on center
SLENDER ROD Mounted off center

b W2
L W1
Jm =
a2 W x g 12
Jm =
W L2 x g 12
H40
Jm =
W1 a2 W2 b2 x + x g 3 g 3
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensional Data
Double Male Keyed Shaft (C) shown in phantom

A076
Standard Face Base Mount (A) and Male Keyed Shaft (B)
A T S A/2 M
M-KEYWAY SHOWN IN MID-STROKE POSITION* U-PORT SIZE (NPTF) L O
B B/2
.030R F V F/2 K- N DIA. SHAFT
R SQ. C
C/2
E/2 P-DIA. PINION JOURNAL E D
J-MTG. HOLES (4 BOTH SIDES) (4 BASE)
H/2 H
Model
Rotation Degrees 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360 O 5/8 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 3
A 6-11/16 8-1/4 11-7/16 9-1/8 11-3/16 15-3/8 11-3/16 14-1/16 19-11/16 12-9/16 15-1/2 20-5/8 16-5/8 21-1/8 29-3/8 P 0.59 0.98 1.18 1.38 1.77
J 1/4-20 x 3/8 DP 5/16-18 x 1/2 DP 3/8-16 x 1/2 DP 1/2-13 x 3/4 DP 3/4-10 x 1 DP
K 0.500 0.499 0.875 0.874 1.125 1.124 1.375 1.374 1.750 1.749
M 0.125 0.127 0.188 0.190 0.250 0.252 0.313 0.315 0.375 0.377
N 0.430 0.425 0.771 0.761
10
1.500
2.000
1.500
7/8
H
15
4-1/4
2.000
3.000
2.000
1-7/8
20
2.500
3.500
2.000
1-7/8
0.986
25
3-1/2
2.500
4.500
2.000
2-1/4
1.201 1.191 1.542 1.532
32
3.000
5.000
2. 500
3-1/2
Model 10 15 20 25 32
R 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-3/4
S 1/4 5/16 3/8 3/8 7/16
T 0.31 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.56
U 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8
V 3/4 1-1/16 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-15/16
*To obtain equal rotation both sides of midstroke (theoretical 12:00), order 5 longer rotation than standard with stroke adjusters.
H41
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Mounting Options (F, G, P, R)

Foot Flange (G)
F-DIA HOLES

A076
Model
D B
A 3.25 4.50 4.50 5.50 8.00
B 2.00 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00
C 2.625 3.875 3.875 4.500 6.500
D 1.375 2.125 3.375 3.000 3.500
E 0.250 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.750
F 0.281 0.406 0.406 0.531 0.781
10 15 20 25 32
C A
Note: Actuators are shipped with mounting flange installed unless otherwise noted.
Pilot Ring (P)
Model
+.002 -.000
A 1.124 2.000 2.167 2.679 3.348
B 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
10 15 20 25 32
A-PILOT RING DIA
PILOT RING
Front Flange (F) Rear Flange (R)

G-DIA HOLES F-DIA HOLES
Model
D B
A 4.25 5.75 6.50 8.25 12.00
B 2.00 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.00
C 3.625 5.125 5.875 7.250 10.000
D 1.375 2.125 3.375 3.000 3.000
E 0.250 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.750
F 0.281 0.406 0.406 0.531 0.781
G 0.625 1.000 1.250 1.625 2.000
10 15 20
C A
25 32
H42
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Shaft Options (C, A, R)

Units are equipped standard with single male keyed shaft (B). Double male keyed (C) also available as shown on page H37. Also available in female keyed and preload keyway options.

A076
A D PINION & KEYWAY LENGTH B B - KEYWAY C .030 R
H - DIA. (MIN) E
+.010 .000
G/2 F A - BORE E - DIA. PINION JOURNAL (ALL SHAFT SIZES) C D - R. MOUNTING FACE OF UNIT J - THREAD K - THREAD G
Note:
Female keyed pinion designed primarily for pneumatic service. Review shaft stresses before applying on hydraulic service.
Female Keyed (A)

Model 10 15 20 25 32 A 0.375 0.377 0.500 0.502 0.750 0.752 1.000 1.002 1.250 1.252 B 0.093 0.095 0.125 0.127 0.187 0.189 0.250 0.252 0.250 0.252 C D E 0.59 0.98 1.18 1.38 1.77 Model 10 15 20 25 32 A 7/8 B 5/8 C 0.375 0.417 1-13/32 0.422 0.560 2-11/16 0.565 0.837 2-23/32 0.847 1.083 1.093 1.367 1.377 3-1/8 4-9/16
PRELOAD KEY (R)

D 0.156 0.219 0.250 0.250 0.437 E 0.125 0.127 0.188 0.190 0.250 0.252 0.313 0.315 0.375 0.377 F 0.430 0.425 0.771 0.761 0.986 0.976 1.201 1.191 1.542 1.532 G H J K 10-32 x 3/8 DP 5/16-24 x 1/2 DP 3/8-24 x 9/16 DP 3/8-24 x 9/16 DP 1/2-20 x 3/4 DP 0.500 1-1/2 3/8-24 0.499 0.875 0.874 1.125 1.124 2 3 1/2-20 5/8-11
1-7/8 1-1/2 0.812 1-7/8 1-1/2 0.812 2-1/4 1-3/4 1.000 3-1/2 3 1.500
1.375 3-1/2 3/4-10 1.374 1.750 1.749 4 1-8
H
PV
Port Size and Location (1, 2, 3, 4)

2
2
Notes: 1. Port position 1 is standard. 2. Port positions 2, 3 and 4 are standard options available at no additional cost. 3. Port position 4 is for single rack only. 4, Port position 5 is not available with cushions or stroke adjusters.
Model 10 15 20 25 32
Optional SAE Straight Thread (1) 7/16 - 20 (SAE 4) 7/16 - 20 (SAE 4) 9/16 - 18 (SAE 6) 9/16 - 18 (SAE 6) 3/4 - 16 (SAE 8)
Standard NPT (2) 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4
H43
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Cushions (1, 2, 3, 4)

The standard cushions operate over the last 30 of rotation in either or both directions. A floating bushing ensures no binding of the cushion spear. For severe operating conditions, four cushions can be fitted on double rack units. All cushions are fully adjustable. On double rack units, cushions will be located on the upper cylinder.

A076
Standard Cushion Needle Locations

(Reference diagram on previous page)
FLOATING CUSHION BUSHING
Port Position 1 2 3 4* 5
Cushion Position 2 3 2 3 N/A
CUSHION ADJUSTMENT NEEDLE
*Single Rack only
Bumpers (5, 6, 7)
Built-in polyurethane bumper pads absorb shock and noise, thus permitting faster cycle times and increased production rates. Bumpers are available for pneumatic service only.
Add the bumper thickness to overall unit length "A" for each bumper specified. Model 10 15 20 25 32 Notes: 1. Available with or without stroke adjusters 2. Not available with cushions Bumper Only 0.13 0.19 0.25 0.25 0.25 Bumper with Stroke Adjuster 0.44 0.63 0.75 0.75 1.00
Bumper Thickness
H44
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Stroke Adjusters (D, E, F) 30

Stroke adjusters will reduce angle of rotation by 30 in either or both directions. Typical applications are for initial set-up purposes where exact rotation cannot be pre-determined or when rotation requirements may change between various operations. Not available with port position 5.
Notes: 1. Standard cushions operate over the last 30 of rotation. Stroke adjusters will decrease the effective cushion length by the same amount. For example, reducing the rotation by 5 yields a 25 cushion length. For effective cushions it is recommended that stroke adjustment not exceed 10 when used in conjunction with cushions. 2. Maximum unit rotation is equal to rotation specified in model code. Adjusters allow rotational positioning equal to or less than the maximum rotation. 3. 30 Stroke Adjusters are available with or without cushions. Double rack units will have cushions on upper rack and adjusters on lower rack. Single rack units with cushions (and double rack units with four cushions) and stroke adjusters will require additional A length. 4. Antibacklash can be achieved on double rack units with stroke adjusters as long as extra rotation is ordered. 5. When ordering cushions and stroke adjusters, the maximum adjustment is 10 per side.

A076 A
C-THREAD SIZE B HOLLOW HEX
30 Adjustment 10 Adjustment (1) w/o Cushioned w/Cushioned Model Turn End Cap, End Cap, Adj. A (Max) A (Max) 10 15 20 25 32 4.0 4.6 3.2 3.2 2.4 0.63 0.88 1.13 1.13 1.50 0.38 1.13 1.13 1.18 2.13
1/8 1/4-28 UNF 1/4 1/2-20 UNF 1/4 1/2-20 UNF 1/4 1/2-20 UNF 3/8 3/4-16 UNF
Shock / Stroke Adjusters (H, K, L)

Hydraulic shock absorbers reduce noise and allow increased operating speeds and loads while also providing adjustability for end of rotation position. Shocks are fixed orifice selfcompensating type and will provide constant deceleration despite changing energy conditions.
Notes: 1. Not available on Model 32 or with port position 5. 2. When specified with DOUBLE RACK UNITS: As a result of high energy levels and driving forces obtained with double rack units, all double rack actuators will contain four shock absorbers. 3. This option is not available in combination with the following options: a. b. c. d. e. f. Air/Oil (6) External Air/Oil (Q) Bumpers (5, 6, 7) Cushions (1, 2, 3, 4) Port Flow Controls (P, R, S) End Cap Mounted Proximity Sensors Model 10 15 20 25 (1) Turn Adjustment 6 5 5 5 A (Max) 2.20 2.40 3.66 3.66 Max. Adjustment 110 80 130 130 C Thread Size 9/16 - 18 UNF 1 - 12 UNF 1 - 12 UNF 3/4 - 16 UNF
C
H
PV
A
(Tie rod mounted reed and Hall effect sensors can be specified.)
H45
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Three Position Actuator (3)

In addition to the standard two position actuators, three position units are also available. All standard options are also available.

A076
C-3
STOP TUBE
C-4
POS. B
POS. A
POS. C
C-2
C-1
Operation:
A standard double rack unit is fitted with stop tubes on the upper rack. Pressurizing port C-2 (with ports C-1, C-3 exhausted) causes counter-clockwise pinion rotation to angular position A. Alternately applying pressure to C-1 (with C-2, and C-4 exhausted) will cause clockwise rotation to angular position C. Both positions A and C are at end of stroke, thus typical end cap options such as cushions, bumpers, and stroke adjusters will operate at these positions only. Position B is obtained by pressurizing all ports. Pressure applied to the upper floating pistons centers the rack between the stop tubes, rotating the pinion to position B. The lower rack is free floating as the forces are equal on both ends.
Model 103 153 203 253 323
Rotational Tolerances
Total Rotation, Degrees -0, +5 -0, +4 -0, +3 -0, +2 -0, +2 Between Positions, Degrees1 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/4 Backlash, Minutes2 50 40 30 30 15
Dimensional Data:
Three position actuator dimensions are identical to the standard double rack units. If stroke adjusters are specified they will be fitted to the upper rack, flow controls and cushions will be on the lower rack. Rotational tolerances are given in the chart at the right.
Output Torque:
Output torque of the multiple position actuator is equivalent to the torque output of the same size single rack unit. The chart to the right gives selected torque values for specified pressures.
1. Measured from centers of backlash. 2. Zero backlash can be achieved at positions A and C by using optional stroke adjusters.
Ordering Information:
Three position actuators can be ordered by inserting a 3 into the "configuration" space in the model code. The desired middle and total rotation should be stated in the model code separated by a "/". The beginning position, 0, need not be specified. For example: PTR153-045/180F-AB21-C is a standard pneumatic actuator, three position, with an output torque of 118 lb-in at 100 psi. Position A is 0, position B is 45, and position C is 180. Both positions A and C are adjustable by 30, as the stroke adjuster option "F" was ordered.
Model 103 153 203 253 323
Note:
Theoretical Output Torque (lb-in) at Specified Pressure

50 psi 19 59 141 215 570 100 psi 39 118 282 430 1141 250 psi 98 294 705 1074 2852
When magnetic piston ring option "M" is ordered, all pistons will be so equipped.
H46
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Antibacklash Actuator (7)

An antibacklash actuator is used to obtain precision positioning at the end of rotation. The backlash normally associated with rack and pinion actuators is eliminated by this unique configuration.

A076
C-1
Operation:
A double rack unit is modified for actuation on one end only. Alternately pressurizing C-1 or C-2 causes clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation, respectively. Backlash in the rack & pinion is eliminated as the pinion is tightly "trapped" between both racks at the end of stroke, preventing any further motion.
Dimensional Data:
Antibacklash actuators are similar in size and configuration to standard double rack units with one set of shorter cylinders. The table to the right shows dimensions for this shorter side. If cushions, stroke adjusters or port flow controls are ordered, they will be fitted to the powered rack side.
C-2
Output Torque:
Output torque of the antibacklash actuator is equivalent to the torque output of the same size single rack unit. The chart to the right gives selected torque valves for specified pressures.
Theoretical Output Torque, lb-in, at Specified Pressure

Model 107 157 207 257 327 50 psi 19 59 141 215 570 100 psi 39 118 282 430 1141 250 psi 98 294 705 1074 2852 107 Model Rotation 90 180 360 90 157 180 360 90 207 180 360 90 257 180 360 90 327 180 360
Dimensions
A 3-3/4 4-1/8 5-3/4 4-9/16 5-5/8 7-11/16 5-5/8 7-1/16 9-7/8 6-5/16 7-3/4 10-5/16 8-5/16 10-9/16 14-11/16 B 2-3/4 3-3/4 3-5/16 4-9/16 6-5/8 5-5/8 8-1/2 6-5/16 8-13/16 5-13/16 8-5/16 12-7/16 4-3/8 4-1/8 5
H
Antibacklash actuators can be ordered by inserting a "7" into the "configuration" space in the model code. For example: PTR157-180F-AR21-C is a pneumatic antibacklash actuator with a theoretical output torque of 118 lb-in at 100 psi. The optional stroke adjusters make the rotation variable between 120 and 180. The preload key option on the shaft is also specified to eliminate any backlash in the key and coupling interface. Note: Antibacklash can also be obtained on double rack actuators by implementing stroke adjusters at end of stroke. This will enable you to maintain double rack output torque.
H47
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Self-Contained Tandem Air / Oil Operation (6)

The Air-Oil Tandem actuator allows precise speed and motion control using standard pneumatic controls. This is possible through the use of a completely sealed oil system which effectively meters and controls actuator movement with no slipping, jerking, or bouncing.
C-1

A076
C-2
Operation:
A standard double rack unit is equipped with a built in hydraulic reservoir and flow controls. Air pressure is alternately applied to ports C-2 and C-1 to cause rotation in either direction. As oil is displaced from the opposite end of the drive rack it is metered precisely by the needle valve. A check valve allows free flow in the opposite direction so that independent speeds for rotation can be set. The reservoir is directly attached to the actuator, eliminating plumbing and leakage paths. It is spring loaded to compensate for oil volume changes due to temperature variations and has built in fill port.
Output Torque:
Theoretical output torques are shown in the table below. For design and sizing purposes an actuator should be selected with 20%-50% reserve capacity. For maximum speed of the Air/Oil actuators please consult the factory or local representative.
Air / Oil Tandem actuators can be ordered by placing a "6" into the "configuration" space in the model code. All Air / Oil Tandem actuators include as standard port flow controls and Quad-ring piston seals (oil side only), thus it is not necessary to include a "P" and/or "Q" in the model code. Other options, such as cushions, stroke adjusters and magnetic piston ring are also available. For example: PTR206-180F-AB21-C is a standard Air/Oil actuator, with a theoretical output torque of 282 lb-in at 100 psi. Rotation of the unit is 180, with optional cushions and stroke adjusters.
Dimensional Data:
Air / Oil Actuators are identical in size and configuration to standard double rack units, with the addition of the integral reservoir as shown.
D AIR BLEEDER
FLOW CONTROL ADJUSTMENT (P) OPTIONAL CUSHION ADJUSTMENT (C) OPTIONAL CUSHION ADJUSTMENT (C) FILL PORT (USE FILL GUN B161-003) FLOW CONTROL ADJUSTMENT (P)
AIR BLEEDER
Dimensions
Model 106 156 206 256 326
Note:
D 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.25 1.25
E 3.63 4.38 4.91 4.91 6.29 Model 106 156 206 256 326
Theoretical Output Torque, lb-in, at Specified Pressure

50 psi 19 59 141 215 570 100 psi 39 118 282 430 1141 250 psi 98 294 705 1074 2852
When magnetic piston ring option "M" is ordered, only the pneumatic pistons will be so equipped.
H48
Catalog 0900P-4
Options External Air / Oil Operation (Q)

The External Air/Oil actuator allows for connection to a separate air over oil control system. It can also be used for low pressure (less than 150 psi) non-shock hydraulic systems. Operation: A standard pneumatic rotary actuator is equipped with special piston seals for all pistons to ensure low breakaway pressure and no leakage. This allows smooth, jerk-free operation, even at very low pressures. Output Torque: Theoretical output torques are identical to the ones given at the beginning of the PTR section. For design and sizing purposes, an actuator should be selected with 20% - 50% reserve capacity.

A076
NOTE:
When cushions are specified, the actuator will be equipped with bronze cushion bushings in place of the standard nitrile cushion bushings.
Port Flow Controls (P, R, S)

Built in meter-out flow controls provide precise adjustment of actuator speed and eliminate the cost and space of externally plumbed components. A separate ball check is used to provide free flow in the opposite direction. Flow controls may be ordered in conjunction with cushions, bumpers, or stroke adjusters.
FLOW ADJUSTMENT NEEDLE
Standard Adjustment Needle Locations

Port Position 1 2 3 4*
*Single rack only Note: When both cushions and port flow controls are specified they will be stamped "C" and "P" respectively.
Needle Position 2 3 2 3
CHECK VALVE
Shaft Seal Covers (S)

Shaft seal covers are designed to prolong bearing life by isolating them from external contamination and pressure. They are designed for use with standard male shafts only (not hollow shafts).
A B C DIA +.000 -.002 (TYP)
Specifications
Max. Pressure Differential: 500 psi Material: Anodized Aluminum Shaft Seal: Double Lip Wiper Body Seal: O-Ring
H
PV
C 1.875 3.000 3.250 3.625 4.480 D 0.25 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 Temperature Range (F) 0 - 200 0 - 165 14 - 140
Model 10 15 20 25 32
A 7/8 1-7/8 1-7/8 2-1/4 3-1/2
B 1/2 1-5/16 1-5/16 1-5/8 2-7/8

Fluorocarbon seals are recommended for high temperature applications up to 250F. Standard abrasion resistant nitrile seals should be used for general purpose applications with temperatures of 0 to 180F.
Option Shock Absorbers Bumpers Piston Magnets Proximity Sensors Reed/Hall Effect Sensors
H49
HP
-4 - 150
B671
32 - 150
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Dimensions
Catalog 0900P-4
Options, Sensors Magnetic Piston (M)

This option prepares the actuator for use with reed and Hall effect sensors. The "M" option should be specified to provide a magnet on the cylinder piston. Order sensors separately from the Electronic Sensors section.
6"cord 39"Cord

A076
1.00
B 1/16 INT. HEX
1 BROWN 4 BLACK 3 BLUE
Model 10 15 20 25 32
A 0.84 0.99 1.27 1.45 1.71
B 1.22 1.46 1.68 1.89 2.20
Proximity Sensors
(Namco Cylindicators or Balluff Cylinder Indicator Sensor)

The inductive type proximity sensor provides end of rotation indication. The non-contact probe senses the presence of the ferrous cushion spear and has no springs, plungers, cams or dynamic seals that can wear out or go out of adjustment. The sensor is solid state and meets NEMA 1, 12 & 13 specifications. For ease of wiring the connector housing is rotatable through 360. To rotate, lift the cover latch, position and release.
1.55 (39) 0.48 (12) A
1.38 (35)
The sensor make/break activation point may occur at 0.125" to 0.125" from the end of stroke. Depending on the actuator size, this distance may cause activation at 2 to 15 from end of stroke. The standard proximity sensor controls 50-230 VAC/DC loads from 5 to 500 mA. The low 1.7 mA off-state leakage current can allow use for direct PLC input. The standard short circuit protection (SCP) protects the sensor from a short in the load or line upon sensing such a condition (5 amp or greater current) by assuming a non-conductive mode. The fault condition must be corrected and the power removed to reset the sensor preventing automatic restarts. The low voltage DC sensor is also available for use with 1030 VDC. The sensor is in a non-rotatable housing, but does incorporates the short circuit protection. Both sensors are equipped with two LEDs, "Ready" and "Target". The "Ready" LED is lit when power is applied and the cushion spear is not present. The "Target" LED will light and the "Ready" LED will go out when the sensor is closed, indicating the presence of the cushion spear. Both LEDs flashing indicates a short circuit condition.
NOTES: 1. Available with or without cushions. 2. Not available with stroke adjusters. 3. Pressure rating: 3000 psi 4. Operating temperature: -4F to 158F 5. Specify sensor type, orientation and voltage when ordering. 6. The low voltage DC sensor is available in non-rotatable style only; consult factory for further information.
EPS-5
EPS-6
EPS-7 A EPS-5 1.88 2.44 2.16 1.94 EPS-6 & 7 2.17 2.75 2.48 2.25
Model 15 20 25 32
Order proximity sensors separately. See Electronic Sensors section for specifications and ordering information.
H50
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits Seal Kit Ordering Information

Standard units are equipped with Nitrile seals. Optional seal compounds are available. See parts list for items contained in seal kit. Seal kit part numbers as shown:

A076
PSK Parker Seal Kit
PTR322 Base Model
V Omit - Standard V = Fluorocarbon Q = Quad Ring Piston Seals W = Carboxilated Nitrile Piston Seals
H
PV H51
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes

A076
H52
B671 / F672 Series

Heavy Duty Pneumatic Rack and Pinion Rotary Actuator
H
B671 and F672 Series Actuators utilize the durable and time-proven A2 Series cylinder design as the power source. PV Contents
Features ............................................................................H54 Ordering Information..........................................................H55 Specifications ....................................................................H56 Dimensions ........................................................................H57 Cushion Option ..................................................................H58
H53
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Bearings High quality bronze bearings reduce friction and Breakaway pressure while providing substantial pinion support. Keyway At 12:00 position of mid-stroke of actuator.
Rotary Actuators B671 / F672 Series

Piston Seals Low friction lipseals are fully dynamic and self-compensating for no-leak service and long life at all operating pressures. End Caps Precision machined from cold rolled steel to exacting NFPA specifications, then black oxide coated for greater reliability and durability.
A076
Ports Full area ports provide unrestricted flow for maximum operating speeds.
Optional Cushions Provide maximum performance and reduced shock in all applications. The floating polyurethane cushion seal provides maximum sealing effectiveness as the spear enters the cushion, yet allows fast "out-stroke" action by functioning as a springless check valve. Full adjustment of the cushion is obtained by the flush mounted adjustment needle.
Rack & Pinion Chromium alloy steel with flame hardening ensures maximum shock resistance and strength of the rack & pinion.
Housing A high strength aluminum housing is hard anodized for superior wear and corrosion resistance.
Tie Rods High tensile steel has precision rolled threads and black oxide coating for greater strength and fatigue resistance.
Side Tapped Mounting Holes Front and rear heads Cylinder Precision finished aluminum alloy tubing is hard anodized for maximum wear resistance and long seal life.
Female Shaft Designed for direct, on-shaft installation, eliminating the need for couplings and other connections.
Pistons Are one piece steel for high strength and piloted to the rack assembly to ensure concentricity. A nonmetallic wear strip is employed to provide a non-scoring bearing surface. This high quality assembly eliminates friction, wear and galling while providing smooth operation.
Hydro-Check Combination
The Rotary Actuator/Hydro-Check combination consists of the F672 Series Actuator axially linked to an F172-2 or F172-3 Series Hydro-Check. The Hydro-Check is a precision built adjustable hydraulic resistance unit designed to provide controlled feed rates. When coupled to an actuator, excellent rotational control is attained. The Rotary Actuator / Hydro-Check combination provides consistent torque with adjustable hydraulic resistance for a smooth controlled rotational feed rate. Axial coupling of these units eliminates eccentric loading of component parts. These actuators are available in three torque ranges to comply with varying load requirements. The Hydro-Check is capable of checking axial loads to 3,000 lbs. and is available with many controlling options (see Ordering Information). For information on Hydro-Checks not shown in this catalog, consult factory.
H54
Catalog 0900P-4

Example: B6712308

A076
B671
30
8
Cushions 5 8 No Cushions Cushioned Both Rotations
Series B671 F672 Pneumatic Rotary Actuator Pneumatic Rotary Actuator with Hydro-Check Mounting Interface Torque Output in lb-in @ 100 psi 1 100* 2 500 3 1000 4 2500 * 100 lb-in size unit not available in F672 Series
Degrees Rotation 10 20 30 90 180 360
F172 Inline Hydro-Check Ordering Information For Use with F672 Rotary Actuator
Example: F172-20103
F172
Hydro-Check Inline Assembly
20
10
3
Stroke (See stroke table)
Hydro-Check Stroke Table

Model Nominal Torque Output (lb-in) Rotation Range () 30-140 2 500 141-284 285-360 30-112 3 1000 113-227 228-341 342-360 Hydro-Check Stroke Required (in) 2 4 6 2 4 6
Checking Action 20 30 Single Acting Double Acting
Hydro-Check Valve Options Single Acting 01 02 11 12 13 14 Standard Standard Reverse Acting Stop & Skip Forward Acting Stop & Skip Reverse Acting Precision Precision Reverse Acting 01 36 37 52
Hydro-Check Valve Options Double Acting Standard Stop & Skip Precision Precision with Stop & Skip 4 2500
30-74 75-151 152-227 228-342 343-360
2 4 6
12
Notes: 1. Hydro-Check must be ordered separately. 2. When both Actuator and Hydro-Check are ordered from Actuator Division, they will be assembled together. 3. Specify voltage with stop and skip function - 12, 115, 220 or 440 VAC. 4. For availability of other Hydro-Check options not listed here, please consult factory.
H55
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
PV
1 2 3 4 5
2 in. 4 in. 6 in. 9 in. 12 in.
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications Overview
The B671 Series Pneumatic Rotary Actuator is designed to provide force in a reciprocating, rotational motion. It is ideal for any application requiring constant torque through a rotational distance: rotating or lifting heavy objects, positioning or bending operations. The F672 Series utilizes the same high quality construction found on the B671 Series with the addition of a coupling arrangement for a Hydro-Check. An F672 / Hydro-Check assembly will provide controlled feed rates and excellent rotational control with pneumatic power through adjustable hydraulic resistance. The B671 / F672 Series Pneumatic Rotary Actuator can be powered by shop air or inert gas. The actuators are pre-lubricated at assembly with NLG1 grade 2 grease with outstanding oxidation stability and corrosion resistant additives. This pre-lubrication is intended for use in pneumatic systems where airline lubrication is not used. However, to assure maximum service life of the cylinder, the air supply should be properly filtered and moisture free. The pneumatic rotary actuator can be controlled by any conventional 4-way valve - hand, foot, mechanically or electrically controlled. All four sizes of rotary actuators are designed for direct on-shaft installation - no flexible couplings, cam and roller or chain and sprocket combinations are required.
Rotary Actuators B671 / F672 Series Specifications

Maximum Operating Pressure: 140 psi Standard Rotations: 90, 180, 360 Output Torque @ 100 psi: 100 lb-in to 2500 lb-in Maximum Break-away Pressure: 10 psi Mounting Orientation: Unrestricted Operating Temperature: 0 F to 180 F Leakage: External: 0 cfm Internal: 0 cfm Theoretical Timing: Keyway located at 12:00 position at mid-stroke position of actuator
A076
H
Model 1 2 3 4 Cylinder Bore (in) 1-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 Actual Output Torque (lb-in) versus Specified Pressure (PSI) 50 50 250 500 1250 75 75 375 750 1875 100 100 500 1000 2500 125 125 625 1250 3125 Displacement per Degree Rotation (in3/) 0.021 0.116 0.219 0.514 Maximum Angular Backlash (minutes) 40 40 40 30 Maximum Rotational Tolerance () -0, +5 -0, +4 -0, +3 -0, +2
H56
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensional Data B671 Series

A076
B K KEYWAY (MID-STROKE POSITION) J BORE D N
T
1
R HUB DEPTH
S HUB DIA
P G
4 2
F U E
L THD M DEEP C
Model 1
Rotation 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360
A 2.16 3.35 5.35 2.50 3.75 6.25 3.00 4.56 7.96
B 6.45 7.53 9.68 7.95 9.21 11.72 8.46 10.03 13.17
C 3.36 4.44 6.60 3.9 2 5.17 7.69 4.23 5.80 8.94
D 3.42 4.50 6.66 3.99 5.25 7.76 4.30 5.87 9.01
E 2.19
F 0.62
G 2.94
H 1.92
N 3/8
P 0.560 0.570 0.964 0.974 1.117 1.127 1.668 1.678
R 0.16
S 1.00
T 1.69
U 2.00
0.500 0.12 x 1/4-20 0.38 0.502 1.31 0.875 0.19 x 1/2-13 0.75 0.877 2.62 1.000 0.25 x 1/2-13 0.75 1.002 2.88 1.500 0.38 x 5/8-11 0.94 1.502 3.50
2.81
1.50
4.44
3.12
1/2
0.22
1.25
3.12
3.75
3.00
2.06
5.25
3.69
1/2
0.24
1.62
3.38
4.50
3.56 10.51 5.28 5.35 5.75 12.87 7.63 7.71 10.75 17.58 12.34 12.42
3.88
2.69
6.88
4.75
1/2
0.31
2.50
4.12
5.50
F672 Series
T
1
H
S - HUB DIA. G
F U
F672 Actuator with Hydrocheck

Model 2 Rotation 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360 A B C D 4.05 5.31 7.82 4.36 5.93 9.07 E 2.81 F 1.50 G 4.44 H 3.12 J K L M N 1/2 P R S 1.25 T 3.12 U 3.75 V 2.50
2.50 7.80 3.92 3.75 9.06 5.17 6.25 11.57 7.69 3.00 8.30 4.23 4.56 9.87 5.80 7.96 13.01 8.94
0.875 0.19 x 1/2-13 0.75 0.877 2.62 1.000 0.25 x 1/2-13 0.75 1.002 2.88 1.500 0.38 x 5/8-11 0.94 1.502 3.50
0.964 0.22 0.974 1.117 0.24 1.127 1.668 0.31 1.678
3.00
2.06
5.25
3.69
1/2
1.62
3.38
4.50
2.50
H57
HP
3.56 10.22 5.28 5.41 5.75 12.58 7.63 7.77 3.88 10.75 17.29 12.34 12.48
2.69
6.88
4.75
1/2
2.50
4.12
5.50
2.50
B671
PTR
WR
L - TH'D M - DEEP C
PRN(A)
PV
R HUB DEPTH
B K - KEYWAY (MID-STROKE POSITION) J - BORE D
V N
Catalog 0900P-4
Options B671 / F672 Series Cushion Option

The standard cushions operate at the end of rotation to decelerate the actuator. A floating polyurethane cushion seal provides maximum sealing effectiveness going into the cushion. This durable material ensures millions of trouble free cycles with no wear. The cushion seal also acts as a check valve, allowing full air flow around the seal during outstroke, providing excellent break-away. Cushions, when so ordered, are installed both directions. They are available on both the B671 and F672 Series.

A076
H58
HP Series
Large Pneumatic Rack & Pinion Rotary Actuator
H
PV Contents
Features ........................................................................... H60 Ordering Information......................................................... H61 Specifications ................................................................... H62 Dimensions ....................................................................... H63 Options ............................................................................. H64 Proximity Sensors ............................................................. H65 Service Kits ...................................................................... H66
H59
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Rotary Actuators HP Series

A076
Mounting Mounting threaded inserts (4) each side. Housing & Pistons High strength aluminum with maximum ductility, hard coated and permanently lubricated for long life.
Large Female Pinion Fits customer's shaft, eliminates need for coupling.
Keyway In vertical position at midstroke of actuator.*
Bushings High strength bronze for long life.
Cylinders Precision micro finish honed seamless alloy steel tubing, chrome plated bore.
H
Tie Rods Medium alloy cold worked steel with precision threads. Rack & Pinion Specially heat treated and hardened chrome alloy steel for maximum shock resistance; heavy duty gear design is prelubricated. Cushion Adjustable optional cushion (clockwise and/or counterclockwise).
Seals Heavy-duty seals for long, trouble-free life.
H60
Catalog 0900P-4

Example: HP10-0903C-AA2V-14

A076
HP
Model 4.5 10
10
090
Special Options Omit - Standard Two digit code assigned by factory when any X or 9 appears in the model number or when special options or features are required.
4,500 lb-in output torque 10,000 lb-in output torque
Rotation 1 090 90 180 180 360 360 Specify other rotations.
Seals Omit - Nitrile (Std) V Fluorocarbon X Special
Cushions Omit - None 1 CW rotation 2 2 CCW rotation 2 3 Both rotation 9 Special
Port Type 2 9 NPTF (Std) Special
Shaft Configuration Stroke Adjusters Omit - None A 0-5 CW rotation 2 B 0-5 CCW rotation 2 C 0-5 Both rotation D 0-30 CW rotation 2, 3 E 0-30 CCW rotation 2, 3 F 0-30 Both rotation 3 X Special A B D E X Female Keyed Shaft Make Keyed Shaft Female SAE 10B Spline Male SAE 10B Spline Special
H
PV
Mounting Style A X Face (Std) Special
Notes: 1 To obtain equal rotation both sides of midstroke (theoretical 12:00), order 5 longer rotation than standard with stroke adjusters. 2 Viewed from shaft end. 3 Cannot combine with cushions.
H61
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Catalog 0900P-4
Maximum operating pressure: 100 psi Standard rotations: 90, 180, 360 * Standard output torque at 100 psi: 4,500 and 10,000 lb-in Operating temperature range: Nitrile seals 0 to 180F Fluorocarbon seals 0 to 250F Filtration requirement: 40 micron filtration

A076

Model Rotation* (degrees) 90 4.5 180 360 90 10 180 360 Displacement (cubic inches) 79.93 159.86 319.72 177.64 355.28 710.56 Weight (lb) 63 75 95 125 147 190 8" 10,000 -0, +2 15 6" 4,500 -0, +2 15 Bore Size Actual Torque Output at 100 PSI (lb-in) Maximum Rotational Tolerance (degrees) Maximum Angular Backlash (minutes)
* To obtain equal rotation both sides of midstroke (theoretical 12:00), order 5 longer rotation than standard with stroke adjusters.
Bearing Load Capacities and Kinetic Energy Ratings
Model 4.5 10
Radial Load (lb) per Bearing Dynamic 2,000 2,000 Static 3,000 3,000
Thrust Load (lb) Dynamic 300 500 Static 450 750
Distance between Bearings (in.) 2.77 3.63
Maximum Kinetic Energy Rating for Models Based on Configuration (in-lb) Standard 45 100 Stroke Adjusters 45 100 Cushion 650 1450
H62
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensional Data Standard Face Mount (A) and Female Keyed Shaft (A) Shown

A076
D M - MID J - MTG. HOLES M F/2 R.03 F

C-2 N C-1
D/2 E E/2 T K - BORE U O L
P Q SHAFT C
3
G
S A/2 A
2
B/2 B
H
Note: Numbers above represent possible mounting and port positions.
Model 4.5
Rotation 90 180 360 90
A 15-5/8 22-1/4 33 18 26-3/4 39-5/8 M 0.500 0.502 0.625 0.628
B 6.525
C 8-1/4
D 6.063
E 3.750
F 3.750
G 5.615
J 7/16-14 x 21/32 DP
K 2.000 2.003
10 Model 4.5 10
180 360 L 3-7/8 5
8.525 N 2.223 2.233 2.525 2.535
10-1/2 O 1-5/16 1-3/4
7.813 P 3-1/2 4-1/2
5.000 Q 4-1/8 5-1/4
5.000 R 6-1/2 8-1/2
7.265 S 5/8 3/4
5/8-11 x 15/16 DP T 0.69 0.69 U 3/4 NPTF 3/4 NPTF
2.250 2.253 V 2.35 3.00
Note: Pressure on C-1 port gives clockwise rotation. Pressure on C-2 port gives counterclockwise rotation.
H63
HP
B671
PTR
WR
PRN(A)
Dimensions
PV
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Cushions (1, 2, 3)

The standard cushions operate over the last 20 of rotation in either direction. A floating bushing ensures no binding of cushion spear. All cushions are fully adjustable and are located on the side opposite the port. For other cushion locations specify "9" and describe.

A076
Stroke Adjusters (A - F)
5 Stroke Adjust Option with Cushion Option
A JAM NUT C JAM NUT C HOLLOW HEX B WASHER THREAD SEAL WASHER THREAD SEAL SQUARE B
5 or 30 Stroke Adjust Option without Cushion Option

A
Cushioned End Cap Model 4.5 10 (1) Turn Adjust 2.5 2.0 A 2.50 2.50 B 5/8 15/16 C 1.00-14 1.50-12 (1) Turn Adjust 2.0 1.5
Non-Cushioned End Cap A 5 2.00 2.56 30 2.81 3.50 B 3/8 15/16 C 3/4-16 1-/2-12
Male Shaft (B)

A B C Model DE 4.5 10
MOUNTING FACE OF UNIT
A 2.61 4.38
B 2.38 3.38
C 0.561 0.562 0.625 0.627
D 1.928 1.933 1.888 1.893
E 2.249 2.250 2.249 2.250
Additional Shaft Options (D, E)
Hollowed key shaft is standard. Additional shaft options available are available as a special. Consult factory for information. Male splined (E) Female splined (D)
H64
Catalog 0900P-4
Options Fluorocarbon Seals (V)

Standard abrasion resistant nitrile seals should be used for general purpose applications with temperatures of 0 to 180F. Fluorocarbon seals are recommended for high temperature applications up to 250F.

A076
Proximity Sensors
(Namco Cylindicators or Balluff Cylinder Indicator Sensor)

The inductive type proximity sensor provides end of rotation indication. The non-contact probe senses the presence of the ferrous cushion spear and has no springs, plungers, cams or dynamic seals that can wear out or go out of adjustment. The sensor is solid state and meets NEMA 1, 12 & 13 specifications. For ease of wiring the connector housing is rotatable through 360. To rotate, lift the cover latch, position and release. The sensor make/break activation point may occur at 0.125" to 0.125" from the end of stroke. Depending on the actuator size, this distance may cause activation at 2 to 15 from end of stroke. The standard proximity sensor controls 50-230 VAC/DC loads from 5 to 500 mA. The low 1.7 mA off-state leakage current can allow use for direct PLC input. The standard short circuit protection (SCP) protects the sensor from a short in the load or line upon sensing such a condition (5 amp or greater current) by assuming a non-conductive mode. The fault condition must be corrected and the power removed to reset the sensor preventing automatic restarts. The low voltage DC sensor is also available for use with 10-30 VDC. The sensor is in a non-rotatable housing, but does incorporates the short circuit protection. Both sensors are equipped with two LEDs, "Ready" and "Target". The "Ready" LED is lit when power is applied and the cushion spear is not present. The "Target" LED will light and the "Ready" LED will go out when the sensor is closed, indicating the presence of the cushion spear. Both LEDs flashing indicates a short circuit condition.
NOTES: 1. Available with or without cushions. 2. Not available with stroke adjusters. 3. Pressure rating: 3000 psi 4. Operating temperature: -4F to 158F 5. Specify sensor type, orientation and voltage when ordering. 6. The low voltage DC sensor is available in non-rotatable style only; consult factory for further information. EPS-5
1.38 (35) 1.55 (39) 0.48 (12) A
H
EPS-6 EPS-7
Model 4.5 10
A (max) EPS-5 1.48 2.17 EPS-6 & 7 1.59 2.28
H65
HP
B671
PTR
Order proximity sensors separately. See Electronic Sensors section for specifications and ordering information.
WR
PRN(A)
PV
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits Seal Kit Ordering Information

Standard units are equipped with Nitrile seals. Optional seal compounds are available. See parts list for items contained in seal kit. Seal kit part numbers as shown:

A076
PSK Parker Seal Kit
HP4.5 Base Model
V Omit - Standard V = Fluorocarbon N = Non-Lube
H66
Pneumatic Grippers
Parallel, Angular and Three-Jaw
Section J
Contents
Introduction ..........................................................................J2 Parallel Gripper Selection Guide .........................................J3 Three-Jaw Gripper Selection Guide ....................................J4 Angular Gripper Selection Guide .........................................J4
J1
Catalog 0900P-4
Introduction Single Source Supplier for All Automation Needs

Selecting the right gripper for your handling task is easy with Parker Hannifins extensive offering of pneumatic grippers. Over 100 models are available with a wide variety of options.
Pneumatic Actuator Products Grippers
Specifications
Stroke Ranges: 0.12 to 6.0 inches Grip Forces: up to 3000 lbs Operating Characteristics: - Single acting - Double acting - Spring assist and spring return Cycle Life: 10 million cycles
Parallel and Angular Grippers

Universal Miniature Precision High Force Long Stroke Heavy Duty Compact Clean Sensors Dust Covers Stroke Adjuster Alternate Seals Spring Assist Cleanroom
Common Options
For complete information, refer to Catalog 1900-2.
Catalog 1900-2 Contents

Design Guidelines Application Forms Product Selection Guide Operation Characteristics Loading Information Ordering Information Dimensions
The more than 1000 possible configurations are sure to suit your unique application requirements.
Connectivity
Integration into your automation system is fast and simple with Parker Hannifin grippers. Standard transition plates and couplers reduce engineering and installation costs. A complete selection of electronic sensors assures control system compatibility.
J2
Catalog 0900P-4
Selection Guide Parallel Grippers

Max. Strokes 10-20 mm Total Grip Force (lb) 11-46 Metric Design X
Series GPR
Clean Room
Spring Spring Open Close
Synch
NonSynch
Reed Hall
Prox S
High Temp Seals
GPCR
4-14 mm
6-51
P5G-HPM P5G-HP (mini) P5G-HP
0.13-0.25 in
22-43
0.16-0.25 in
25-35
0.25-1.50 in
35-694
GPT
0.625 in
46-86
P5G-AP
5.3-17.9 mm
31-208
GPEL
16-22 mm
10-27
GPDL
16-80 mm
10-65
P5G-HPL
0.25-1 in
25-33
P5G-RH
4-18 mm
16-365
P5G-HP-P
0.5-3.0 in
23-498
GPK
24-50 mm
20-90
J
O
P5G-HPW
0.75-4.50 in
45-450
P5G-HPB
4-6 in
600
X = standard O = optional S = order separately
J3
Catalog 0900P-4
Selection Guide Three-Jaw Grippers

Series P5G-HPC . Stroke 0.3-1.38 in Total Grip Force (lb) 80-2800 Metric Design O
Dust Cover
Spring Open
Spring Close
NonSynch Synch X
Reed Hall S
Prox
High Temp Seals O
Angular Grippers
Series GVC Max. Stroke 30 Total Grip Force (lb) 1.25 - 36 Metric Design X Dust Cover Spring Open O Spring Close Synch X Reed Hall Prox S High Temp Seals
GAA
30
2.7 - 6.3
P5G-HA
30
11 - 134
P5G-AA
30
17.4 - 198
P5G-RK
30
7.4 - 521
P5G-HA
12
62 - 220
GVH
180
5 - 54
GAW
180
2.7 - 6.3
P5G-AW
180
14 - 65
P5G-RB
180
14 - 142
X = standard O = optional S = order separately
J4
Air Motors
P1V-S
Section K
K
Contents
Features ........................................................................ K2-K3 Technical Information..................................................... K4-K7 Marking of Products.............................................................K8 Brake Motors .......................................................................K9 Air Motor Selection .................................................... K10-K11 Technical Data ...................................................................K12 Ordering Information..........................................................K13 ATEX..................................................................................K14 Definitions & Temperatures................................................K15 Safety Instructions .............................................................K16 Marking ..............................................................................K17 Air Motor Ordering ..................................................... K18-K29 Brake Motor Ordering ................................................ K30-K32 Installation Brackets...........................................................K33 Dimensions ................................................................ K34-K41 Drilling, Milling & Grinding Motors ............................. K42-K54 Technical Data ........................................................... K55-K59 Service Kits ............................................................... K60-K62 Torque, Power & Air Consumption Chart ...........................K63
K1
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Features Overload safe Increased torque at higher loads Easy to limit torque Easy to vary speed Easy to limit power Reliability Robustness Installation cost Ease of service Safety in damp environments Safety in explosive atmospheres Safety risk with electrical installations Risk of oil leak Hydraulic system required Weight Power density High torque for size Noise level during operation Total energy consumption Service interval Compressor capacity required Purchase price Accuracy, speed Regulating dynamic Air Motor Hydraulic Motor
Pneumatic Actuator Products Air Motors

Electric Motor Electric Motor Regulated Electric Motor Regulated with Feedback
*** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** ** ** ** * * * * * * * *
*** ** *** *** *** *** *** * ** *** *** *** * * *** *** *** *** ** ** *** * ** * *
* * * * * *** * ** * * * * *** *** * * * ** *** *** *** *** * * *
** ** * *** ** *** * ** * * * * *** *** ** * * ** *** *** *** *** ** * ***
*** *** *** *** *** *** * ** * * * * *** *** * * * ** *** *** *** ** *** *** ***
Communication * = good
** = average *** = excellent
Important!
Before carrying out service activities, make sure the air motor is vented. Before disassembling the motor, disconnect the primary air hose to ensure that the air supply is interrupted.
NOTE!
All technical data in the catalog are typical values. The air quality is a major factor in the service life of the motor, see ISO 8573-1.
K2
Catalog 0900P-4
Features

Lubrication-free vanes for intermittent operation as standard. Compressed air connection Outlet
Fluor rubber O-ring Planetary gear
Fluor rubber seal
Polished stainless housing
Hardened stainless output shaft
Stainless Steel Air Motors, P1V-S Series

P1V-S is a range of air motors with all external components made of stainless steel, which means that they can be used in food grade applications, and in all other applications where there is a risk of corrosion. The range contains seven different sizes, with powers ranging from 20 to 1 200 Watts, and speeds from 5 to 24 000 rpm. The air motor and planetary reduction gear are built into a polished stainless steel housing, which is sealed by a fluor rubber O-ring. The output shaft, which is made of polished stainless steel, is also sealed by a fluor rubber seal . Consideration for achieving a clean, hygienic design was given early on in the development of this range of air motors. Thanks to the cylindrical shape, there are no pockets which can accumulate dirt or bacteria. Additionally, the two halves of the motor body are sealed with an o-ring to prevent contamination. The choice of materials reflects the fact that aggressive cleaning materials are used in food grade applications. The P1V-S series is designed to be operated in intermittent intervals under non-lubrication conditions. For this reason, no particles of lubricant escape with the exhaust air and the service costs are reduced. This means that the motors can be used directly in food grade applications. The planetary gear, which has one or more reduction stages, is lubricated with an USDA-H1 standard grease, approved for use in food grade applications.
Products particularly suitable for the food industry.
K3
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Information Principles of Motor Operation

4 3 1 2 4
Pneumatic Actuator Products Air Motors Torque, Power and Air Consumption Graphs
M (%) Inlet Q (%), P (%)
200 180 160 140 120 100
100
P Q
80
60
Outlet
Inlet, left Residual outlet Inlet, right
80 60 40 20 20 40
40
1 2 3
20
60
80
100
n (%)
Outlet 1 2 3 4
Outlet Rotor cylinder Rotor Vanes End piece with bearing
The curve is for 6 bar P = power Q = air consumption M = torque n = speed
Possible working range of motor. Optimum working range of motor.
Higher speeds = more vane wear Lower speeds with high torque = more gearbox wear The performance characteristics of each motor are shown in a family of curves as above, from which torque, power and air consumption can be read off as a function of speed. Power is zero when the motor is stationary and also when running at free speed (100%) with no load. Maximum power (100%) is normally developed when the motor is braked to approximately half the free speed (50%). Torque at free speed is zero, but increases as soon as a load is applied, rising linearly until the motor stalls. As the motor can stop with the vanes in various positions, it is not possible to specify an exact starting torque. However, a minimum starting torque is shown in all tables. Air consumption is greatest at free speed, and decreases with decreasing speed, as shown in the above diagram.
There are a number of designs of air motors. Parker Hannifin has chosen to use the vane rotor design, because of its simple design and reliable operation. The small external dimensions of vane motors make them suitable for all applications. The complete unit consists of a motor built together with a planetary reduction gear to give the required speed and torque at the output shaft.
The design of a vane air motor consists of a rotor which incorporates a given number of vanes all enclosed within a cylinder. The cylinder will include three ports; an inlet pressure port, an exhaust port and a residual port. Reliable starting is ensured by the fact that the inlet air presses the vanes against the cylinder wall prior to rotation. During operation, the vanes are pressed outwards by centrifugal force. The air pressure always acts at right angles to the vane surface, which means that the available torque is determined by the surface area of the vanes and by the air pressure. As each vane reached its lowest point air is released through the exhaust port. As the rotation continues air may be trapped and compressed between vanes. This compressed air is released through the residual port. The residual port doubles as the pressure port when the motor is operated in the reverse direction.
Please refer to the curve on page K63 for these pressures: 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 bar
K4
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Information Correction Diagram

Correction Factor
1,3 1,2 1,1 1,0 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 3 4 5 6 7 p [bar] P = f (p) M = f (p) Q = f (p) n = f (p)
Pneumatic Actuator Products Air Motors Speed Regulation

Throttling
Supply throttling, nonreversible motor.
Outlet throttling.
Supply throttling, reversible motor.
Torque curve change caused by throttling.
P = power M = torque
Q = air consumption n = speed
Pressure regulation at motor inlet.
All catalog data and curves are specified at a supply pressure of 6 bar (in the inlet port). This diagram shows the effect of pressure on speed, torque, power and air consumption. Start off on the curve at the pressure used and then look up to the lines for power, torque, air consumption or speed. Read off the correction factor on the Y axis for each curve and multiply this by the specified catalog data in the table or data read from the torque and power graphs. Example: at 4 bar supply pressure, the power is only 0,55 x power at 6 bar supply pressure. This example shows how rapidly the power rating of a motor decreases as the supply pressure is reduced. Therefore, it is critical to ensure that the proper pressure is supplied at the inlet port of the motor.
Torque curve change caused by pressure change.
The most common way to reduce the speed of a motor is to install a flow control in the air inlet. When the motor is used in applications where it must reverse and it is necessary to restrict the speed in both directions, flow controls with integral non-return function should be used in both directions. Restriction may also be applied to the main outlet which will control the speed in both directions.
Direction of Motor Rotation

The direction of rotation of reversible motors is controlled by supplying inlet L or inlet R with compressed air. Air motors can be stopped and started continually without damage.
Inlet Throttling
If the inlet air is restricted, the air supply is restricted and the free speed of the motor falls, but there is full pressure on the vanes at low speeds. This means full torque is available from the motor at low speed, despite the low air flow. Since the torque curve becomes steeper, this also means that we get a lower torque at any given speed than would be developed at full air flow.
Inlet, counterclockwise Residual outlet Main outlet Inlet, clockwise
Pressure Regulation
Residual outlet Main outlet The speed and torque can also be regulated by installing a pressure regulator in the inlet pipe. When the motor is constantly supplied with air at lower pressure and the motor is braked, it develops a lower torque on the output shaft. In brief: Inlet throttling gives reduced speed in one direction but maintains torque when braked. The torque curve becomes steeper. A restriction in the main inlet gives reduced speed in both directions but maintains torque when braked. The torque curve becomes steeper. Pressure regulation in the inlet cuts torque when the motor is braked, and also reduces speed. The torque curve is moved parallel.
As the motor begins to rotate air is trapped between the vanes and is compressed. This air is exhausted through the exhaust port. As the rotor continues its rotation, trapped air is compressed and exhausted through the residual port. If this air is not exhausted, the motor will be braked and maximum power will not be obtained.
K5
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Information Air Supply

3 1 2

The Table can be used as follows:
If you are using only one motor with each air treatment unit and valve, simply follow the table. If you are using more than one motor with the same air treatment unit: read the table values for selecting the air treatment unit and add them together, and select a suitable air treatment unit from the table showing air flows per treatment unit. Then read the values for selecting the valve from the bottom of the table, and select a suitable valve from the table showing air flows per valve family. The air treatment units have the following flows in Nl/Min at 7.5 bar supply pressure and 0,8 bar pressure drop FRL Series Air Flow in Nl/Min
550 1310 2770 9200 530 1480
Shut-off, filtering, pressure regulation and control valve
4 2
3 1
Reversible motor with 5/3 control valve
51 3
3 1 2
P3H, Moduflex FRL, 40 Series, G1/4 P3K, Moduflex FRL, 60 Series, G1/2 P3M, Moduflex FRL, 80 Series, G1 Standard Series FRL, G11/2 Stainless Series FRL PF, G1/4 Stainless Series FRL PF, G1/2
Reversible motor with two 3/2 control valves The air supplying the motor must be filtered and regulated. Directional valves are needed to control the pressurized air which will cause the motor to rotate. These valves can be equipped with several means of actuation, such as electric, manual or pneumatic control. When the motor is used in a non-reversible application, it is sufficient to use a 2/2 or 3/2 valve for supply. Either one 5/3 or two 3/2 valves are needed for a reversible motor, to ensure that the motor gets its compressed air and the residual outlet is vented. A flow control can be installed in the inlet pipe to regulate the motor speed if the motor is not used as a reversible motor. One flow control with by-pass is needed to regulate each direction of rotation if the motor is used as a reversible motor. The built-in check valve will then allow air from the residual air outlet to escape through the outlet port in the control valve. The compressed air supply must have sufficiently large pipes and valves to give the motor maximum power. The motor needs 6 bar at the supply port all the time. A reduction of pressure to 5 bar reduces the power developed to 77%, and to 55% at 4 bar.
Choice of Components for Air Supply

Since the supply pressure at the air motor inlet port is of considerable importance for obtaining the power, speed and torque quoted in the catalog, the recommendations below should be observed. The following data must be complied with:
Valve series with respective flows in Nl/minute Valve Series

Valvetronic Solstar Interface PS1 Adex A05 Moduflex Size 1, (2 x 3/2) Valvetronic PVL-B 5/3 Closed Center, 6 mm Push-In Moduflex Size 1, (4/2) B43 Manual and Mechanical Valvetronic PVL-B 2 x 2/3, 6 mm Push-In Valvetronic PVL-B 5/3 Closed Center, G1/8 Compact Isomax DX02 Valvetronic PVL-B 2 x 3/2 G1/8 Valvetronic PVL-B 5/2, 6 mm Push-In Valvetronic PVL-B 5/3 Vented Center, 6 mm Push-In Moduflex Size 2, (2 x 3/2) Flowstar P2V-A Valvetronic PVL-B 5/3 Vented Center, G1/8 Valvetronic PVL-B 5/2, G1/8 Valvetronic PVL-C 2 x 3/2, 8 mm Push-In Adex A12 Valvetronic PVL-C 2 x 3/2 G1/8 Compact Isomax DX01 VIKING Xtreme P2LAX Valvetronic PVL-C 5/3 Closed Center, 8 mm Push-In Valvetronic PVL-C 5/3 Vented Center, G1/4 B3-Series Valvetronic PVL-C 5/3 Vlosed Venter, G1/4 Moduflex size 2, (4/2) Valvetronic PVL-C 5/2, 8 mm push in Valvetronic PVL-C 5/3 Vented Center, 8 mm Push-In Valvetronic PVL-C 5/2, G1/4 Flowstar P2V-B ISOMAX DX1 B53 Manual and Mechanical B4-Series VIKING Xtreme P2LBX B5-Series, G1/4 Airline Isolator Valve VE22/23 ISOMAX DX2 VIKING Xtreme P2LCX, G3/8 VIKING Xtreme P2LDX, G1/2 ISOMAX DX3 Airline Isolator Valve VE42/43 Airline Isolator Valve VE82/83
Qn in Nl/Min
33 100 173 220 290 320 340 350 370 385 440 450 450 450 520 540 540 540 560 570 585 660 700 700 780 780 800 840 840 840 1090 1150 1160 1170 1290 1440 1470 2330 2460 2660 4050 5520 13680
Supply pressure to air treatment unit: Gauge pressure: Pipe length between air treatment unit and valve: Pipe length between valve and air motor: The pressure drop through air treatment unit - pipe valve - pipe means that 6 bar pressure is obtained at the motor inlet port.
Min 7.5 bar 6.7 bar Max. 1 m Max. 2 m
Please refer to the correction diagram on page K5, which shows what lower supply pressure means for power, speed and torque.
6.7 bar 6 bar
3 1
Min 7.5 bar
1m
2m
K6
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Information Air Motors

Air Motor Air flow required, Nl/s Air flow required, Nl/min Min. internal diameter of pipe, mm P1V-S002 1.7 102 4 P1V-S008 3.8 230 4
P1V-S012 5.0 300 6
P1V-S020 6.3 380 10
P1V-S030 8.0 480 10
P1V-S060 14.5 870 12
P1V-S120 27 1620 19
Choice of air treatment unit: recommended min. air flow in litres/minute at 7,5 bar air supply and 0,8 bar pressure drop 110 255 330 420 530 960 Choice of valve: recommended min. air flow in Qn in litres/minute (Qn is the flow through the valve at 6 bar supply pressure and 1 bar pressure drop over the valve). 123 280 360 440 660 1080
1780
2160
Drilling Motors
Drilling Motor Air flow required, Nl/s Air flow required, Nl/min Min. internal diameter of pipe, mm P1V-S008 3.8 230 4 P1V-S017 5,0 300 6 P1V-S025 6.3 380 6 P1V-S040 8.0 480 10
Choice of air treatment unit: recommended min. air flow in litres/minute at 7.5 bar air supply and 0.8 bar pressure drop 255 330 420 530 Choice of valve: recommended min. air flow in Qn in litres/minute (Qn is the flow through the valve at 6 bar supply pressure and 1 bar pressure drop over the valve). 280 360 440 580
Grinding and Milling Motors

Motor Air flow required, Nl/s Air flow required, Nl/min Min. internal diameter of pipe, mm Grinding P1V-S009 2.0 120 4 Grinding P1V-S020 6.3 380 6 Milling P1V-S040 8.0 480 10
Choice of air treatment unit: recommended min. air flow in litres/minute at 7.5 bar air supply and 0.8 bar pressure drop 135 420 530 Choice of valve: recommended min. air flow in Qn in litres/minute (Qn is the flow through the valve at 6 bar supply pressure and 1 bar pressure drop over the valve). 145 440 580
K7
Catalog 0900P-4
Marking of Products Silencing

Outlet silencer Central silencer
Pneumatic Actuator Products Air Motors Compressed Air Quality

Oil and oil mist are avoided whenever possible to ensure a clean work environment. In addition, purchasing, installation and maintenance of oil mist equipment can be expensive. All users in all industries now try to avoid using components which have to be lubricated. The P1V-S motor is equipped with vanes for intermittent lubrication free operation as standard, which is the most common application of air motors. The motor is also available with optional hard vanes for continuous lubrication-free operation (option C). The P1V-S motor is equipped as standard with food grade grease in the planetary gearbox. An oil which is approved by the food industry is also available if supplementary lubrication is required. Working pressure Working temperature Ambient temperature Max. 7 bar (Max. 6 bar in explosive atmospheres -30 C to +100 C -20 C to +40 C in explosive atmospheres 40 m filtered, oil mist or dry unlubricated compressed air
The noise from an air motor consists of both mechanical noise and a pulsating noise from the air flowing out of the outlet. The installation of the motor has a considerable effect on mechanical noise. It should be installed so that no mechanical resonance effects occur. The outlet air creates a noise level which can amount to 108 dB(A) if the air is allowed to exhaust freely into the atmosphere. To reduce noise levels, various types of outlet silencer are used. The most common type screws directly into the outlet port of the motor. A wide range of silencers are available. Many are made of sintered brass or sintered plastic. Since the motor function causes the exhaust air to pulsate, it is a good idea to allow the air to exhaust into some kind of chamber first, which reduces the pulsations before they reach the silencer. The best silencing method is to connect a soft hose to a central silencer allowing the speed of the air to reduce as much as possible. NOTE! Remember that if a silencer is too small or is blocked, back pressure is generated on the outlet side of the motor, which in turn reduces the motor power.
Medium
Dry Unlubricated Compressed Air
If unlubricated compressed air is used, the compressed air should comply with the purity standards below in order to guarantee the longest possible overall service life. If the unlubricated compressed air has a high water content, condensation forms inside the motor, causing corrosion in all internal components. A ballbearing can be destroyed in a remarkably short time if it comes into contact with a single water droplet. For indoor use, we recommend ISO8573-1 purity class 3.4.1. To achieve this, compressors must be fitted with aftercoolers, oil filters, refrigerant air dryers and air filters. For indoor / outdoor use, we recommend ISO8573-1 purity class 1.2.1. To achieve this, compressors must be fitted with aftercoolers, oil filters, adsorption dryers and dust filters.
Sound Levels
Sound levels are measured at free speed with the measuring instrument positioned 1 m away from the air motor, see the table below.
Oil Mist
If oil mist is used (approx. 1 drop of oil per m of compressed air), the oil not only acts as a lubricant but also protects against corrosion. This means that compressed air with a certain water content may be used without causing corrosion problems inside the motor. ISO8573-1 purity class 3.-.5 may be used without difficulty. The following oils are recommended for use in the foodstuffs industry: Shell Cassida Fluid HF 32 or Klberoil 4 UH 1-32
Air Motor
Free Outlet dB (A)
With Outlet Silencer dB (A)
Exhaust Air Removed with Pipes to Another Room dB (A)
P1V-S002 P1V-S008 P1V-S012 P1V-S020 P1V-S030 P1V-S060 P1V-S120
98 95 99 100 103 103 108
92 88 91 94 95
74 71 70 71 70 76 87
ISO 8573-1 Purity Classes

Contaminants Quality Class 1 2 3 4 5 6 Particle Size (m) 0.1 1 5 15 40 Water Oil Max. Pressure Max. Max. Dew Point Concentration Concentration (C) (mg/m) (mg/m) 0.1 1 5 8 10 -70 -40 -20 +3 +7 +10 0.01 0.1 1.0 5.0 25
Drilling, Milling and Grinding Motor
With Integrated Outlet Silencer dB (A)
Exhaust Air Removed with Pipes to Another Room dB (A)
P1V-S008 P1V-S009 P1V-S017 P1V-S025 P1V-S040
85 72 74 76 77
71 70 71 70
For example: compressed air to purity class 3.4.3 This means a 5 m filter (standard filter), dew point +3 C (refrigerant cooled) and an oil concentration of 1,0 mg oil/m (as supplied by a standard compressor with a standard filter).
K8
Catalog 0900P-4
Brake Motors Service Interval

Continuous lubrication-free operation of motors equipped with hard vanes (option C) Duty cycle : Continuous Filtration 40 m : Filtration 5 m : 750 hours of operation* 1000 hours of operation*
The first service is due after approximately 500 hours of operation. After the first service, the service interval is determined by the degree of vane wear*. The table below shows new dimensions and the minimum dimensions of worn vanes. The following normal service intervals should be applied to in order to guarantee problem-free operation in air motors working continuously at load speeds*.
CE marking
The air motors are supplied as Components for installation the installer is responsible for ensuring that the motors are installed safely in the overall system. Parker Pneumatic guarantees that its products are safe, and as a supplier of pneumatic equipment we ensure that the equipment is designed and manufactured in accordance with the applicable EU directive. Most of our products are classed as components as defined by various directives, and although we guarantee that the components satisfy the fundamental safety requirements of the directives to the extent that they are our responsibility, they do not usually carry the CE mark. Nevertheless, most P1V-S motors carry the CE mark because they are ATEX certified (for use in explosive atmospheres). The following are the currently applicable directives: Machinery Directive (essential health and safety requirements relating to the design and structure of machines and safety components) EMC Directive Simple Pressure Vessels Directive Low Voltage Directive ATEX Directive (ATEX = ATmosphere EXplosive)
Air Motor
Dimensions on New Vanes X(Mm), Type of Vanes Standard 3.3 4.3 4.2 6.5 6.8 9.0 14.7 Z 4.2 6.0 6.2 9.0 14.0 C 4.2 6.0 6.8 9.0 14.0 M 4.2 6.0 6.2 9.0 14.0

Air Motor

Drilling, Milling and
Minimum Dimensions on Vane X (mm), Type of Vanes Standard Z C M 3.0 4.0 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 5.8 5.3 5.3 5.3 6.0 5.2 6.0 5.2 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 14.2 13.5 13.5 13.5 New Dimensions X(Mm) 4.3 4.2 6.5 6.8 Minimum Dimensions X (Mm) 4.0 3.3 5.8 6.0
Grinding Motor P1V-S008 P1V-S017 P1V-S025 P1V-S040
Intermittent lubrication-free operation of motors with standard vanes Duty cycle : 70% Max. duration of intermittent use : 15 minutes Filtration 40 m : 750 hours of operation* Filtration 5 m : 1 000 hours of operation* Continuous operation of motors with standard vanes, with lubrication Duty cycle : Continuous Quantity of oil : 1 drop per m of air Filtration 40 m : 1 000 hours of operation* Filtration 5 m : 2 000 hours of operation* NOTE! After 1000 hours of operation, the grease in the planetary gearbox must be changed
* The specified hours of operation apply when the motor is running at the speed corresponding to maximum power (load speed). This is approximately half free speed. If the motor operates at higher speeds, the service interval is shorter. If the motor operates at lower speeds, the service interval is longer.
K9
Catalog 0900P-4
Air Motor Selection Choice of Air Motor

Torque at Maximum Power [Nm]
100 9 50 30 13 20 8 7 10 7 12 11 10 10 8 9 8 7 6
7 4 6 6 5 4 5 6 5 4 4 3 4 3 4 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 6 3 5
5.0 3.0 2.0
1.0 3 0.5 0.3 0.2 2
1 1
0.1
1 1
0.05
10
20
30
50
100
200 300
500
1000
2000 3000 5000 10000 20000

Speed at maximum power
The motor to be used should be selected by starting with the torque needed at a specific shaft speed. In other words, to choose the right motor, you have to know the required speed and torque. Since maximum power is reached at half the motors free speed, the motor should be chosen so that the oprating point is as close as possible to the maximum power of the motor. The design principle of the motor means that higher torque is generated when it is braked, which tends to increase the speed, etc. This means that the motor has a kind of speed self-regulation function built in. Use the above graph to choose the correct motor size. The graph contains the points for the maximum torque of each motor at maximum output. Add your operating point to the graph, then select a marked point above and to the right of your point. Then use the correct working diagram of the chosen motor to get more detailed technical data. Always select a motor whose requisite technical data are in the shaded area. Also use the correction diagram to find out what operation with different supply pressures would mean for the motor. Tip: Select a motor which is slightly too fast and powerful, then regulate its speed and torque with a pressure regulator and/or throttle to achieve the optimum working point.
K10
Catalog 0900P-4
Air Motor Selection

Air Motors in Diagram on Previous Page 1 2 P1V-S002A0130 P1V-S002A0095 Graphs for each motor, see page K19 P1V-S008A0Q00 P1V-S008A0700 P1V-S008A0190 P1V-S008A0130 Graphs for each motor, see page K19. P1V-S012A0N00, P1V-S012D0N00 P1V-S012A0550, P1V-S012D0550 P1V-S012A0360, P1V-S012D0360 P1V-S012A0140, P1V-S012D1400 P1V-S012A0090, P1V-S012D0090 P1V-S012A0060, P1V-S012D0060 P1V-S012A0010, P1V-S012D0010 Graphs for each motor, see page K21. P1V-S020A0E50, P1V-S020D0E50 P1V-S020A0460, P1V-S020D0460 P1V-S020A0240, P1V-S020D0240 P1V-S020A0140, P1V-S020D0140 P1V-S020A0070, P1V-S020D0070 P1V-S020A0035, P1V-S020D0035 P1V-S020A0018, P1V-S020D0018 P1V-S020A0011 P1V-S020A0006 P1V-S020A0005, P1V-S020D0005 P1V-S020A0002 P1V-S020A0001 P1V-S020A00005 Graphs for each motor, see page K23. P1V-S030A0E50, P1V-S030D0E50 P1V-S030A0460, P1V-S030D0460 P1V-S030A0240, P1V-S030D0240 P1V-S030A0140, P1V-S030D0140 P1V-S030A0060, P1V-S030D0060 P1V-S030A0028, P1V-S030D0028 P1V-S030A0023 P1V-S030A0018, P1V-S030D0018 P1V-S030A0010 P1V-S030A0005, P1V-S030D0005 Graphs for each motor, see page K25. P1V-S060A0E00 P1V-S060A0400 P1V-S060A0270 P1V-S060A0170 P1V-S060A0072 P1V-S060A0048 P1V-S060A0030 P1V-S060A0010 Graphs for each motor, see page K27. P1V-S120A0800 P1V-S120A0270 P1V-S120A0110 P1V-S120A0078 P1V-S120A0032 P1V-S120A0012 Graphs for each motor, see page K29.

20 Watt P1V-S002A 80 Watt P1V-S008A 120 Watt
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P1V-S012A 200 Watt
P1V-S012D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
P1V-S020A
P1V-S020D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
300 Watt
P1V-S030A
P1V-S030D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
600 Watt
K
P1V-S060A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1200 Watt
P1V-S120A K11
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Technical Data

Working pressure Working temperature Ambient temperature Medium Max. 7 bar (Max. 6 bar in explosive atmospheres) -30 C to +100 C -20 C to +40 C in explosive atmospheres 40 m filtered, oil mist or dry unlubricated compressed air
Pneumatic Actuator Products Air Motors Choice of Vanes

0 = Standard
Standard vanes = These motors are of the vane type for intermittent lubrication-free operation. They can operate 70% of the time for up to 15 minutes without lubrication. With lubrication, these motors can operation 100% of the time. Z = Spring Loaded (Standard) Vanes Standard vanes = These motors are of the vane type for intermittent lubrication-free operation. They can operate 70% of the time for up to 15 minutes without lubrication. With lubrication, these motors can operation 100% of the time. Spring loaded vanes = All vanes are spring loaded to ensure that they remain pressed against the cylinder when the motor stops. The spring loaded vane option also prevents the vanes from sliding down in their track if vibration is introduced. The spring loaded vanes therefore provide a higher starting torque, improved starting and low speed characteristics, because the leakage over the vanes is reduced to a minimum. C = Vanes for Continuous Lubrication-Free Operation C vanes = This motor is equipped with vanes for continuous lubrication-free operation. (To obtain the longest possible service life, we recommend no oil in the air.) M = Multi (Combination of Z+C) C vanes = This motor is equipped with vanes for continuous lubrication-free operation. (To obtain the longest possible service life, we recommend no oil in the air.) Spring loaded vanes = All vanes are spring loaded to ensure that they remain pressed against the cylinder when the motor stops. The spring loaded vane option also prevents the vanes from sliding down in their track if vibration is introduced. The spring loaded vanes therefore provide a higher starting torque, improved starting and low speed characteristics, because the leakage over the vanes is reduced to a minimum.
Table and Diagram Data

All values are typical values, with a tolerance of 10%
Option
Other variants on request
Planetary gearbox for: P1V-S060A0010 /30 /48 P1V-S120A0012 /32 Stainless steel, X46Cr13 Planetary gearbox for last planet stage incl. installation flange P1V-S020A0011 /06 P1V-S030A0023 /10 Black oxidised steel (not stainless) All other housings Spindle* Key* External seal Internal steel parts Planetary gear grease Stainless steel, X12CrMoS17 Hardened stainless steel, X20Cr13 Hardened stainless steel X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 Fluor rubber, FPM High grade steel (not stainless) USDA-h1 approved
* P1V-S020A0011/06 and P1V-S030A0023/10 Key and Shaft High grade steel (not stainless) Screws in housing in last planet stage Surface treated steel (not stainless) Flange bracket Stainless steel, X12CrMoS17 Foot bracket Stainless steel, X5CrNi18 Screws for bracket Stainless steel DIN A2
K12
Catalog 0900P-4
Ordering Information Order Key
P 1V - S
020
A
Function
E50
Optional Functions
0 Standard 0005 001 999 A00 E00 E50 N00 Q00
Motor Size
002 008 012 020 030 060 120 20 W 80 W 120 W 200 W 300 W 600 W 1200 W A D
Free Speed per min

5 10 9990 10000 14000 14500 22000 24000
Keyed Shaft, Reversible Threaded Shaft, Reversible
C* Continuous LubricationFree Operation Z* Spring Loaded Vanes M* Multi: Combination of C+Z D** Standard with Brake E** Option C with Brake F** Option Z with Brake
Air Motor Range

P1V-S Stainless Vane Motor
*
G** Option M with Brake

Not for P1V-S002 and P1V-S008
** Only for P1V-S020 and P1V-S030
Possible combinations
Please refer to pages K18 to K32.
K13
Catalog 0900P-4
ATEX Introduction to the ATEX directive

Explosive Atmospheres
Directive 94/9/EC defines an explosive atmosphere as a mixture of: a) flammable substances gases, vapors, mists or dusts b) with air c) under specific atmospheric conditions d) in which, after ignition has occurred, combustion spreads to the entire flammable mixture (NB: with regard to dust, it may be that not all dust is combusted after ignition has occurred) An atmosphere with the potential to become an explosive atmosphere during operating conditions and/or under the influence of the surroundings is defined as a potentially explosive atmosphere. Products covered by directive 94/9/EC are defined as intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres.

Harmonised European ATEX Standard
The European Union has adopted two harmonised directives in the field of health and safety. The directives are known as ATEX 100a and ATEX 137. Directive ATEX 100a (94/9/EC) lays down minimum safety requirements for products intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres in European Union member states. Directive ATEX 137 (99/92/EC) defines minimum requirements for health and safety at the workplace, for working conditions and for the handling of products and materials in potentially explosive atmospheres. This directive also divides the workplace into zones and defines criteria by which products are categorized within these zones. The table below describes the zones in an installation where there is a potential for explosive atmospheres. The owner of the installation must analyse and assess the area in which the explosive gas/dust mixture may occur, and if necessary must divide it into zones. This process of zoning then allows the correct plant and equipment to be selected for use in the area. The ATEX directive has been in force throughout the European Union since 1 July 2003, replacing the existing divergent national and European legislation relating to explosive atmospheres. Zone 1 Category 2
Zone 2 Category 3
Zone 0 Category 1
Zones Gas Dust G D 0 1 2 20 21 22
Presence of Potentially Explosive Atmosphere
Type of risk
Present continuously or for long periods Likely to occur in normal operation occasionally Not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for a short period only
Permanent Potential Minimal
Please note that for the first time, the directive covers mechanical, hydraulic and pneumatic equipment and not just electrical equipment as before. With regard to the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC, note that a number of external requirements in 94/9/EC refer to hazards arising from potentially explosive atmospheres, where the Machinery
directive only contains general requirements relating to explosion safety (Annex I 1.5.7). As a result, directive 94/9/EC (ATEX 100a) takes precedence over the Machinery directive with regard to explosion protection in potentially explosive atmospheres. The requirements in the Machinery directive are applicable to all other risks relating to machinery.
K14
Catalog 0900P-4
Definition & Temperatures

Levels of Protection for the Various Equipment Categories The various equipment categories must be capable of operating in accordance with the manufacturers operating specifications at defined levels of protection. Level of Protection
Very high Very high High High Normal M2 2 3
Category Group Group I II

M1
Type of protection
Two independent means of protection or safety, ensuring that the equipment remains functional even in the event of two faults occurring independently of each other
Operating Specifications
The equipment remains energised and and functional even with an explosive atmosphere present The equipment remains energised and functional in zones 0, 1, 2 (G) and/or zones 20, 21, 22 (D) The equipment is de-energised in the event of an explosive atmosphere The equipment remains energised and functional in zones 1, 2 (G) and/or zones 21, 22 (D) The equipment remains energised and functional in zones 2 (G) and/or zones 22 (D)
Two independent means of protection or safety, ensuring that the equipment remains functional even in the event of two faults occurring independently of each other Protection suitable for normal operation and severe operating conditions Protection suitable for normal operation and frequent faults, or equipment in which faults normally have to be taken into account Protection suitable for normal operation
Definition of Groups (EN 1127-1)

Group I Equipment intended for use in underground parts of mines as well as those parts of surface installations of such mines likely to be endangered by flammable vapors and/or flammable dusts. Group II Equipment intended for use in other places exposed to explosive atmospheres. Group Category Zone I Mines, Combustible Vapors M1 M2 G 0 II Other Potentially Explosive Atmospheres (Gases, Dust) 1 D 20 G 1 2 D 21 G 2 3 D 22
Atmosphere*
G = gas and D = dust Temperature Classes Classification of flammable gases and vapors on the basis of ignition temperature Temperature Class T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Ignition Temperature C Over 450 (300) 450 (200) 300 (135) 200 (100) 135 (85) - 100 Operation, Installation and Maintenance The installation manual of the product contains instructions relating to the safe storage, handling, operation and servicing of the product. The manual is available in different languages, and can be downloaded from www.parker.com/euro_pneumatic. This document must be made accessible in a suitable place near where the product is installed. It is used as a reference for all personnel authorized to work with the product throughout its service life. We, the manufacturer, reserve the right to modify, extend or improve the installation manual in the interests of the users.
Declaration of Conformity The product catalogs contain copies of the declaration of conformity demonstrating that the product meets the requirements of directive 94/9/EC. The declaration is only valid in conjunction with the instructions contained in the installation manual relating to the safe use of the product throughout its service life. The instructions relating to the conditions in the surrounding area are particularly important, as the certificate is invalidated if the instructions are found not to have been adhered to during operation of the product. If there is any doubt as to the validity of the certificate of conformity, contact Parker Hannifin customer service.
For more information about ATEX see EUs homepage: http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/atex/
K15
Catalog 0900P-4
Safety Instructions
Additional Safety Instructions For Installation In Explosive Atmospheres

SERIOUS, EVEN FATAL, DAMAGE OR INJURy MAy BE CAUSED By THE HOT MOVING PARTS OF THE P1V-S MOTORS IN THE PRESENCE OF EXPLOSIVE GAS MIXTURES AND CONCENTRATIONS OF DUST.
All installation, connection, commissioning, servicing and repair work on P1V-S motors must be carried out by qualified personnel taking account of the following
These instructions Notices on the motor All other planning documents, commissioning instructions and connection diagrams associated with the application. Provisions and requirements specific to the application Applicable national/international regulations (explosion protection, safety and accident prevention)
Installation Requirements In Potentially Explosive Atmospheres

The P1V-S may be installed in any position.
The temperature of the supply air must not exceed the ambient temperature. An air treatment unit must be attached to the inlet of the P1V-S air motor. In a potentially explosive atmosphere, none of the motor ports may be blocked because this may cause an increase in temperature. The air from the port must be taken to the silencer or, preferably, outside the potentially explosive area.
Real Life Applications

P1V-S motors are designed to provide rotary movement in industrial applications, and should only be used in accordance with the instructions in the technical specifications in the catalog, and within the operating range indicated on the motor housing. The motors meet the applicable standards and requirements of the Machinery Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
The P1V-S motor must be connected to ground at all times, through its support, a metallic tube or separate conductor. The outlet of the P1V-S motor must not open within a potentially explosive area, but must be passed to the silencer or, preferably, removed and released outside the potentially explosive area. The P1V-S motor may only drive units that are ATEX certified. Ensure that the motor is not exposed to forces greater than those permitted in accordance with the catalog.
The Motors Must Not Be Used As Brakes In Explosive Atmospheres.

Braking involves driving the motor against the direction of rotation for which the motor is supplied with compressed air. The motor is then operating as a compressor, and there is a corresponding increase in temperature. The motors must not be used underground in mines susceptible to firedamp and/or combustible dust. The motors are intended for use in areas in which explosive atmospheres caused by gases, vapors or mists of combustible liquids, or air/dust mixtures may be expected to occur during normal use (infrequently)
Measuring The Temperature On The Outside Of The P1V-S Motor (Only When Used In Potentially Explosive Areas)
During the commissioning process, it is essential to measure temperature increases at the indicated positions on the outside of the P1V-S motor. These measurements can be taken using standard thermometers.
Checking The Motor During Operation

The motor must be kept clean on the outside, and a layer of dirt thicker than 5 mm must never be allowed to form. Strong solvents should not be used for cleaning, because they can cause the seal (material NBR/FPM) around the drive shaft to swell, potentially increasing the temperature.
Checklist
Before using the motors in a potentially explosive atmosphere, you should check the following: Do the motor specifications match the classification of the area of use in accordance with Directive 94/9/EG (previously ATEX 100a)
Equipment group Equipment category Zone Temperature class Max. surface temperature
1. When installing the motor, is it certain that there is no potentially explosive atmosphere, oil, acids, gases, vapors or radiation? 2. Is the ambient temperature as specified in the technical data in the catalog at all times? 3. Is it certain that the P1V-S motor is adequately ventilated and that no additional heat is added (for example in the shaft connection)? 4. Are all the driven mechanical components ATEX certified?
K16
Catalog 0900P-4
Temperatures & Marking

For The P1V-S012, P1V-S020, P1V-S030 and P1V-S060 Series
The temperature is measured on the metal surface next to the seal around the output shaft on all P1V-S012, P1V-S020, P1V-S030 and P1V-S060 motors
Pneumatic Actuator Products Air Motors Marking of Products

For all P1V-S012, P1V-S020, P1V-S030 and P1V-S060
II2 GD c IIC T6 (80C) X

For the P1V-S120
Planetary Gearbox Seal
Motor Part

Communatut Europenne = EU CE marking shows that as a manufacturer, Parker Hannifin meets the guidelines specified by the EU Ex means that this product is intended for use in a potentially explosive area stands for the equipment group (I = mines and II = other places liable to be endangered) stands for equipment category 2G means the equipment can be used in zones 1 and 2 where there is a risk involving gas, vapour or mist of combustible liquids and 2D in zones 21 and 22 where there is a risk involving dust . 2GD means the equipment can be used in zones 1, 2, 21 and 22. Safe design (prEN 13463-5) Explosion group, P1V-S air motors are tested to the highest standards in terms of test gases, and can be installed in the presence of all gases without restriction. If equipment is in temperature class T6, the maximum surface temperature must not exceed 85C. (To guarantee this, the product has been tested to ensure that the maximum is 80C. This provides a safety margin of 5K.) If equipment is in temperature class T5, the maximum surface temperature must not exceed 100C. (To guarantee this, the product has been tested to ensure that the maximum is 95C. This provides a safety margin of 5K.) Maximum permitted surface temperature on the motor in atmospheres containing potentially explosive dust. Note special conditions Test certificate number IBExU04ATEXB004 X from IBExU Institut fr Sicherheitstechnik GmbH, D-09599 Freiberg, Germany
Motors P1V-S020A0011, P1V-S020A0006, P1V-S030A0023 and P1V-S030A0010
II 2GD
x
c IIC
Motor
x [mm]
P1V-S020A0011 P1V-S020A0006 P1V-S030A0023 P1V-S030A0010
133 133 146 147,5
T6
The maximum temperature is reached after approximately 1,5 hours of operation, and the difference in temperature between the motor and the ambient temperature must not exceed 40 C. If the temperature difference at the seal of a P1V-S012, P1V-S020, P1V-S030 or P1V-S060 exceeds 40 C, you should stop the motor immediately and contact Parker Hannifin.
T5
(80C) X
The following applies to the P1V-S120 series:

The temperature is measured on the metal surface at a point 45 mm from the port end of the motor housing, on all P1V-S120.
Planetary Gearbox
Motor Part
45
The maximum temperature is reached after approximately 1,5 hours of operation, and the difference in temperature between the motor and the ambient temperature must not exceed 55 C.
If the temperature difference at this point on a P1V-S120 exceeds 55 C, you should stop the motor immediately and contact Parker Hannifin.
K17
Catalog 0900P-4
NOTE! All technical data is based on a working pressure of 6 bar.
Data For Reversible Air Motor With Keyed Shaft, P1V-S002A Series
Max. Power kW 0.02 0.02 Free Speed rpm 1300 950 Speed At Max. Power rpm 650 475 Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.29 0.40 Min Start Torque Nm 0.44 0.60 Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 1.7 1.7 M5 M5 Connector Min. Pipe ID mm 3 3 Weight kg 0.16 0.16 Order Code
P1V-S002A0130 P1V-S002A0095
NOTE! Not with vane options C, Z or M. The P1V-S002A and P1V-S008A require oil mist for lubricating the gearbox.
Installation brackets, see page K33 Dimensions, see page K34 Permitted shaft loadings, see page K58 Service kits, see page K60
Max. Power kW 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
Free Speed rpm 24000 7000 1900 1300
Speed At Max. Power rpm 12000 3500 950 650
Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.06 0.22 0.80 1.20
Min Start Torque Nm 0.09 0.33 1.20 1.80
Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
Connector
Min. Pipe ID mm
Weight Kg 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22
Order Code
M8x0.75* M8x0.75* M8x00.75* M8x0.75*
4 4 4 4
P1V-S008A0Q00 P1V-S008A0700 P1V-S008A0190 P1V-S008A0130
* 3 push in nipples (F28PMB6M8SP) for plastic pipe 6/4 supplied NOTE! Not with vane options C, Z or M. The P1V-S002A and P1V-S008A require oil mist for lubricating the gearbox.
Installation brackets, see page 35 Dimensions, see page K34 Permitted shaft loadings, see page K58 Service kits, see page K60
K18
Catalog 0900P-4
Working Range
P1V-S002A0130
M, torque [Nm] P, power [W]
20

P1V-S002A0095
M, torque [Nm]
0.8
P, power [W]
20
M P
0.6
P M
15
0.6
15
0.4
10
0.4
10
0.2
0.2
300
600
900
1200
1500
200
400
600
800
1000
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
P1V-S008A0N00
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
P1V-S008A0700
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
P1V-S008A0190
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
0.12
M P
80
0.4
M P
80
1.6
80
M
60
1.2
60
0.3
60
0.06
40
0.2
40
0.8
40
20
0.1
20
0.4
20
4000
16000
24000
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
400
800
1200
1600
2000
n, speed [rpm] P, power [W]

80
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
P1V-S008A0130
M, torque [Nm]
2.4
M
1.8
60
1.2
40
0.6
20
300
600
900
1200
1500
n, speed [rpm]
Higher speeds = more vane wear Lower speeds with high torque = more gearbox wear
K19
Catalog 0900P-4
II2 GD c IIC T6 (80C) X Data For Reversible Air Motor With Keyed Shaft, P1V-S012A Series
Max. Power kW 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.090 Free Speed rpm 22000 5500 3600 1400 900 600 100 Speed At Max. Power rpm 11000 2750 1800 700 450 300 50 Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.10 0.42 0.64 1.64 2.54 3.82 5.00* Min Start Torque Nm 0.15 0.63 0.95 2.40 3.80 5.00* 5.00* Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 Connector Min. Pipe ID mm 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Weight kg 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.450 Order Code
P1V-S012A0N00 P1V-S012A0550 P1V-S012A0360 P1V-S012A0140 P1V-S012A0090 P1V-S012A0060 P1V-S012A0010
* Max. permitted torque In all P1V-S012 motors, torques exceeding 5 Nm may cause damage to the gearbox (e.g. when driving against a fixed stop or large oscillating weight)
II2 GD c IIC T6 (80C) X Data For Reversible Air Motor With Threaded Shaft, P1V-S012D Series
Max. Power Free Speed rpm 22000 5500 3600 1400 900 600 100 Speed At Max. Power rpm 11000 2750 1800 700 450 300 50 Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.10 0.42 0.64 1.64 2.54 3.82 5.00* Min Start Torque Nm 0.15 0.63 0.95 2.40 3.80 5.00* 5.00* Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 Connector Min. Pipe ID mm 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Weight kg 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.450 Order Code
kW 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.090
P1V-S012D0N00 P1V-S012D0550 P1V-S012D0360 P1V-S012D0140 P1V-S012D0090 P1V-S012D0060 P1V-S012D0010
* Max. permitted torque In all P1V-S012 motors, torques exceeding 5 Nm may cause damage to the gearbox (e.g. when driving against a fixed stop or large oscillating weight) NOTE! The P1V-S012D with threaded shaft may be reversed, but when operated counterclockwise, there is a risk that the driven unit may disconnect if it is not locked properly.
K20
Catalog 0900P-4
P1V-S012A0N00 P1V-S012D0N00
M, torque [Nm]

P1V-S012A0550 P1V-S012D0550
M, torque [Nm]
0.9
P, power [W]
P, power [W]
P1V-S012A0360 P1V-S012D0360
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
0.2
M P
120 105 90 75
0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1
M P
120 105 90 75 60 45 30 15 2000 4000 6000
1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 800 1600 2400 3200
120
105
90 75 60 45 30 15 4000
0.1
60 45 30 15 4000 16000 24000
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
P1V-S012A0140 P1V-S012D0140
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
P1V-S012A0090 P1V-S012D0090
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
P1V-S012A0060 P1V-S012D0060
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
4.0
120
5.00
3.0
105 90 75
M P
120 105 90 75
8.0
120
M
6.0
3.75
Max. permitted torque 5 Nm
105 90 75
2.0
60 45
2.50
60 45
4.0
60 45
1.0
30 15 300 600 900 1200 1500
1.25
30 15 200 400 600 800 1000
2.0
30 15 150 300 450 600 750
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
P1V-S012A0010 P1V-S012D0010
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
20
120 105 90 75
15
10

5
60 45 30 15
25
50
75
100
125
n, speed [rpm]
K21
Catalog 0900P-4
II2 GD c IIC T6 (80C) X Data For Reversible Air Motor With Keyed Shaft, P1V-S020A Series
Max. Power kW 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.100 0.200 0.200 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 Free Speed rpm 14500 4600 2400 1400 700 350 180 110 60 50 20 10 5 Speed At Max. Power rpm 7250 2300 1200 700 350 160 90 55 30 25 Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.26 0.80 1.60 2.70 5.40 12.00 10.50 33.00 72.00 20.00* 20.00* 20.00* 20.00* Min Start Torque Nm 0.40 1.20 2.40 4.10 8.20 18.00 15.00 49.50 108.00* 20.00* 20.00* 20.00* 20.00* Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 4.5 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 Connector Min. Pipe ID mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Weight kg 0.700 0.750 0.750 0.850 0.850 0.850 0.850 3.000 3.000 0.950 0.950 1.050 1.050 Order Code
P1V-S020A0E50 P1V-S020A0460 P1V-S020A0240 P1V-S020A0140 P1V-S020A0070 P1V-S020A0035 P1V-S020A0018 P1V-S020A0011 P1V-S020A0006 P1V-S020A0005 P1V-S020A0002 P1V-S020A0001 P1V-S020A00005
* Max. permitted torque
Max. Power Free Speed rpm 14500 4600 2400 1400 700 350 180 50 Speed At Max. Power rpm 7250 2300 1200 700 350 160 90 25 Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.26 0.80 1.60 2.70 5.40 12.00 10.50 20.00* Min Start Torque Nm 0.40 1.20 2.40 4.10 8.20 18.00 15.00 20.00* Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 4.5 6.3 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 Connector Min. Pipe ID mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Weight kg 0.700 0.750 0.750 0.850 0.850 0.850 0.850 0.950 Order Code
kW 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.100 0.180
P1V-S020D0E50 P1V-S020D0460 P1V-S020D0240 P1V-S020D0140 P1V-S020D0070 P1V-S020D0035 P1V-S020D0018 P1V-S020D0005
* Max. permitted torque NOTE! The P1V-S020D with threaded shaft may be reversed, but when operated counterclockwise, there is a risk that the driven unit may disconnect if it is not locked properly.
K22
Catalog 0900P-4
P1V-S020A0E50 P1V-S020D0E50
M, torque (Nm)
0.60

P1V-S020A0460, P1V-S020D0460
M, torque (Nm)
1.6
P, power (W)
200
P, power (W)
200
P1V-S020A0240 P1V-S020D0240
M, torque (Nm)
3.00
P, power (W)
200
0.45
175 150 125

1.2
175 150 125
2.25
175 150 125
0.30
100 75
0.8
100 75
1.50
100 75
0.15
50 25 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000
0.4
50 25 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
0.75
50 25 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
P1V-S020A0140 P1V-S020D0140
M, torque (Nm)
6.0
n, speed (rpm)
P, power (W)
200
P1V-S020A0070 P1V-S020D0070
M, torque (Nm)
12
n, speed (rpm)
P, power (W)
200
P1V-S020A0035 P1V-S020D0035
M, torque (Nm)
24
n, speed (rpm)
P, power (W)
200
M
4.5
175 150 125 9
175 150 125

18
M P
175 150 125
3.0
100 75
100 75
12
100 75
1.5
50 25
50 25
50 25
P1V-S020A0018 P1V-S020D0018
M, torque (Nm)
20.0 17.5 15.0 12.5 10.0 7.5 5.0 2.5
300
600
900
1200
n, speed (rpm)
1500
P1V-S020A0011
M, torque (Nm)
60
150
300
450
600
n, speed (rpm)
750
P1V-S020A0006
M, torque (Nm)
150 Max. per-
75
150
225
n, speed (rpm)
300
375
P, power (W)
200
P, power (W)
200
P, power (W)
200 175 150 125 100
M P
175 150 125 45
175 150 125 100
mitted torque 108 Nm
P M
100 75 50 25
30
100 75 50
75 50 25
15
50 25
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
P1V-S020A0005 P1V-S020D0005
M, torque (Nm)
80
n, speed (rpm)
30
60
90
P1V-S020A0002
M, torque (Nm)
80
n, speed (rpm)
120
150
P, power (W)
200
P, power (W)
200
P1V-S020A0001 P1V-S020A00005
M, torque (Nm)
60
20
40
n, speed (rpm)
60
P, power (W)
180
M P
175 150 125 60
M P
40
175 150 125 100 75 50 25 P1V-S020A0001 1 2 3 4 P1V-S020A00005 1 2 5 6 3 20 40
P M
150 120 90 60 30
60
40
100 75 50 25
20
20
8 4
10 5
10
20
30
40
50
10 12 14 16 18 20
n, speed (rpm)
n, speed (rpm)
n, speed (rpm)
Possible working range of motor.
Optimum working range of motor.
K23
Catalog 0900P-4
Max. Power kW 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.130 0.300 0.280 Free Speed rpm 14500 4600 2400 1400 600 280 230 180 100 50 Speed At Max. Power rpm 7250 2300 1200 700 300 140 115 90 50 25 Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.40 1.20 2.40 4.10 9.60 20.50 24.00 13.80 57.00 36.00* Min Start Torque Nm 0.60 1.90 3.60 6.10 14.30 26.00 36.00 21.00 85.50 36.00* Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 4.7 8.0 8.0 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 Connector Min. Pipe ID mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Weight kg 1.000 1.050 1.050 1.100 1.150 1.150 3.300 1.150 3.300 1.250 Order Code
P1V-S030A0E50 P1V-S030A0460 P1V-S030A0240 P1V-S030A0140 P1V-S030A0060 P1V-S030A0028 P1V-S030A0023 P1V-S030A0018 P1V-S030A0010 P1V-S030A0005
Max. Power Free Speed rpm 14500 4600 2400 1400 600 280 180 50 Speed At Max. Power rpm 7250 2300 1200 700 300 140 90 25 Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.40 1.20 2.40 4.10 9.60 20.50 13.80 36.00* Min Start Torque Nm 0.60 1.90 3.60 6.10 14.30 26.00 21.00 36.00* Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 8.,0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 4.7 8.0 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 Connector Min. Pipe ID mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Weight kg 1.000 1.050 1.050 1.100 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.250 Order Code
kW 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.130 0.280

NOTE!
P1V-S030D0E50 P1V-S030D0460 P1V-S030D0240 P1V-S030D0140 P1V-S030D0060 P1V-S030D0028 P1V-S030D0018 P1V-S030D0005
* Max. permitted torque The P1V-S030D with threaded shaft may be reversed, but when operated counterclockwise, there is a risk that the driven unit may disconnect if it is not locked properly.
K24
Catalog 0900P-4
P1V-S030A0E50 P1V-S030D0E50
M, torque [Nm]
0.8

P1V-S030A0460, P1V-S030D0460 P1V-S030A0240 P1V-S030D0240
M, torque [Nm]
4.0
P, power [W]
300
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
300
P, power [W]
300
2.4
M
0.6
P
200
M
1.8
P
200
3.0
P
200
0.4 100 0.2
1.2 100 0.6
2.0 100 1.0
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
P1V-S030A0140 P1V-S030D0140
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
300
P1V-S030A0060 P1V-S030D0060
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
300
P1V-S030A0028 P1V-S030D0028
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
300
8.0
20
P
200 15
40
P
200
P
200 30
6.0
4.0 100 2.0
10 100 5
20 100 10
300
600
900
1200
1500
150
300
450
600
750
100
200
300
P1V-S030A0023
M, torque [Nm]
n, speed [rpm]
P, power [W]
300
P1V-S030A0018 P1V-S030D0018
M, torque [Nm]
24
n, speed [rpm]
P1V-S030A0010
M, torque [Nm]
120
n, speed [rpm]
P, power [W]
300
P, power [W]
300
80
M
60
P
200
21 18 15
M
200
M
90
P
200
40 100 20
12 9 6 3 100 200 300
60 100 30 100
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
20
40
60
80
100
P1V-S030A0005 P1V-S030D0005
M, torque [Nm]
144
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
P, power [W]
300
M P
108
200
72
100
36

50
10
20
30
40
n, speed [rpm]
K25
Catalog 0900P-4
Max. Power kW 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.300 Free Speed rpm 14000 4000 2700 1700 720 480 300 100 Speed At Max. Power rpm 7000 2000 1350 850 360 240 150 50 Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.82 2.90 4.20 6.70 15.90 23.90 38.20 60.00* Min Start Torque Nm 1.23 4.30 6.40 10.10 24.00 36.00 57.00 60.00* Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 13.0 G3/8 G3/8 G3/8 G3/8 G3/8 G3/8 G3/8 G3/8 Connector Min. Pipe ID mm 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 Weight kg 2.000 2.100 2.100 2.100 2.200 2.200 2.300 2.300 Order Code
P1V-S060A0E00 P1V-S060A0400 P1V-S060A0270 P1V-S060A0170 P1V-S060A0072 P1V-S060A0048 P1V-S060A0030 P1V-S060A0010
K26
Catalog 0900P-4
P1V-S060A0E00,
600 1.6

P1V-S060A0400
600 6,0
P1V-S060A0270
600 8.0
P
400
M
4,5
P
400
P
400
1.2
6.0
0.8 200
0.4
3,0 200
1,5
4.0 200 2.0
3200
6400
9600
12800 16000
800
1600
2400
3200
4000
1000
2000
3000
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
P1V-S060A0170,
600 16
P1V-S060A0072
600 40
P1V-S060A0048
600
P M
400
P M
400
40
M P
12
30
30
400
8 200 4
20 200 10
20 200 10
600
1200
1800
250
500
750
100
200
300
400
500
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
P1V-S060A0030
600 80
P1V-S060A0010
P M
400
240
400
M
180
60
300
40 200 20
120
200
60
100
100
200
300
20
40
60
80
100
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
K27
Catalog 0900P-4
Max. Power kW 1.200 1.200 1.200 1.200 1.200 0.700 Free Speed rpm 8000 2700 1100 780 320 200 Speed At Max. Power rpm 4000 1350 550 390 160 100 Torque At Max. Power Nm 2.90 8.50 21.00 29.40 71.60 66.90 Min Start Torque Nm 4.30 12.70 31.00 44.00 107.00 110.00* Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 27 27 27 27 27 19 G3/4 G3/4 G3/4 G3/4 G3/4 G3/4 Connector Min Pipe ID mm 19 19 19 19 19 19 Weight kg 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.6 5.6 5.6 Order Code
P1V-S120A0800 P1V-S120A0270 P1V-S120A0110 P1V-S120A0078 P1V-S120A0032 P1V-S120A0012
K28
Catalog 0900P-4
P1V-S120A0800
1200 6.0 16

P1V-S120A0270,
1200
P1V-S120A0110
1200 40
M
4.5
P
800 12
P
800 30
P
800
3.0 400 1.5
8 400 4
20 400 10
2000
4000
6000
8000
1000
2000
3000
400
800
1200
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
P1V-S120A0078
1200 60
P1V-S120A0032
M, torque [Nm]
150
P1V-S120A0012
P, power [W]
1200
M, torque [Nm]
P, power [W]
M
45
M P
800 100
P
800
200
800
150
600
P
400
30 400 15 50 400
100
50
200
250
500
750
100
200
300
40
80
120
160
200
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
n, speed [rpm]
K29
Catalog 0900P-4
Brake Motors Brake Motor

Vent for Motor Brake 1. Piston
Control Port for Motor Brake 3. Shaft
2. Compression Spring
4. Brake Disks
Brake Motors
Applications
The integrated brake is a spring-loaded disk brake, which is released at a minimum air pressure of 5 bar. The brake is applied in the absence of pressure. As soon as the control port for the brake is placed under pressure, the piston (1) is pressurised and the spring (2) is compressed. The motor can now start and the torque is passed to the shaft (3). The ventilation air from the brake is connected with the atmosphere. In order to brake the motor, the control air to the brake is simply vented. The piston (1) is pushed to the right by the spring (2), and the axle (3) is jammed between the two brake disks (4). The technology and the size of air motors with integrated running and stationary brake make them ideal applications requiring repeated precise positioning. The motor can also be kept stationary in a specific position, and the stopping time for a rotating weight can be shortened significantly. Another typical application for brake motors is when the output shaft needs to be held in one position when the motor stops delivering torque. The brake can handle more than 1500 braking operations per hour at maximum braking torque.
Technical Data
Min braking torque for different motor types Motor size P1V-S020, 200 Watt Motor Max. Torque, Specified Nm 0.52 1.6 3.2 5.4 10.8 20.0 20.0 66.0 144.0 20.0* 20.0* 20.0* 20.0* Brake Min Braking Torque, Theoretical Nm 1.0 3.43 6.66 11.8 22.86 44.4 44.4 137.2 266.4 44.4 44.4 44.4 44.4 Gearbox Max. Torque, Permitted Nm 1.0 3.43 6.66 11.8 14.0 20.0 20.0 108.0 108.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
Braking Motor P1V-S020A/DDE50 P1V-S020A/DD460 P1V-S020A/DD240 P1V-S020A/DD140 P1V-S020A/DD070 P1V-S020A/DD035 P1V-S020A/DD018 P1V-S020A/D011 P1V-S020A/D006 P1V-S020A/DD005 P1V-S020A/D002 P1V-S020A/D001 P1V-S020A/D0005
Disassembly and Reassembly
Detach the connections with the motor and gearbox. Pull off the motor and gearbox part. The brake disks can be lifted off after the lock ring has been removed.
Motor Size P1V-S030, 300 Watt Motor Max. Torque, Specified Nm 0.8 2.4 4.8 8.2 19.2 41.0 48.0 114.0 36.0* Brake Min Braking Torque, Theoretical Nm 1.0 3.43 6.66 11.8 20.6 40.0 70.8 123.6 40.0 Gearbox Max. Torque, Permitted Nm 1.0 3.43 6.66 11.8 14.0 36.0 108.0 108.0 36.0
Service and Maintenance
After 20 000 braking operations as a stationary brake or 10,000 braking operations as an operating brake, the brake must be disassembled in order to check for wear.
Braking Motor P1V-S030A/DDE50 P1V-S030A/DD460 P1V-S030A/DD240 P1V-S030A/DD140 P1V-S030A/DD060 P1V-S030A/DD028 P1V-S030A/D023 P1V-S030A/D010 P1V-S030A/DD005
Warning:
If the number of braking operations is exceeded, the degree of wear might be greater than permitted and the braking effect might be lost. If this happens, you simply need to replace the worn brake linings. Tests show that the brake lining needs to be replaced after approx. 90,000 braking cycles.
NOTE!
Brake motors must only ever be supplied with unlubricated air, otherwise there is a risk of oil from the supply air getting into the brake unit, resulting in poor brake performance or no braking effect.
* Warning:
The permitted torque for the specific gearbox must not be exceeded!
Brake Release K30
Minimum pressure for brake release:
5 bar
Catalog 0900P-4
Data For Reversible Brake Motor With Keyed Shaft, P1V-S020AD Series
Max. Power kW 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.100 0.200 0.200 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 Free Speed rpm 14500 4600 2400 1400 700 350 180 110 60 50 20 10 5 Speed At Max. Power rpm 7250 2300 1200 700 350 160 90 55 30 25 Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.26 0.80 1.60 2.70 5.40 12.00 10.50 33.00 72.00 20.00* 20.00* 20.00* 20.00* Min Start Torque Nm 0.40 1.20 2.40 4.10 8.20 18.00 15.00 49.50 108.00* 20.00* 20.00* 20.00* 20.00* Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 4.5 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 Connector Min Pipe ID mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Weight kg 1.000 1.050 1.050 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 3.300 3.300 1.250 1.250 1.350 1.350 Order Code
P1V-S020ADE50 P1V-S020AD460 P1V-S020AD240 P1V-S020AD140 P1V-S020AD070 P1V-S020AD035 P1V-S020AD018 P1V-S020AD011 P1V-S020AD006 P1V-S020AD005 P1V-S020AD002 P1V-S020AD001 P1V-S020AD0005
Torque curves, see page K22 Installation brackets, see page K33 Dimensions, see page K40 Permitted shaft loadings, see page K58 Service kits, see page K60
K31
Catalog 0900P-4
Data For Reversible Brake Motor With Keyed Shaft, P1V-S030AD Series
Max. Power kW 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.280 Free Speed rpm 14500 4600 2400 1400 600 280 230 100 50 Speed At Max. Power rpm 7250 2300 1200 700 300 140 115 50 25 Torque At Max. Power Nm 0.40 1.20 2.40 4.10 9.60 20.50 24.00 57.00 36.00* Min Start Torque Nm 0.60 1.90 3.60 6.10 14.30 26.00 36.00 85.50 36.00* Air Consumption At Max. Power l/s 8,0 8,0 8,0 8,0 8,0 8,0 8,0 8,0 8,0 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 Connector Min Pipe ID mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Weight kg 1.350 1.400 1.400 1.450 1.500 1.500 3.650 3.650 1.600 Order Code
P1V-S030ADE50 P1V-S030AD460 P1V-S030AD240 P1V-S030AD140 P1V-S030AD060 P1V-S030AD028 P1V-S030AD023 P1V-S030AD010 P1V-S030AD005
Torque curves, see page K24 Installation brackets, see page K33 Dimensions, see page K40 Permitted shaft loadings, see page K58 Service kits, see page K60
K32
Catalog 0900P-4
Bracket Ordering Information Order Key
P 1V - S
Air Motor Range
P1V-S Stainless
4
Accessories
4 Bracket
012
Motor Size
002 20 W 008 80 W 012 120 W 020 200 W 030 300 W 060 600 W 120 1200 W
B
Bracket
B F C Flange Bracket Foot Bracket Foot Bracket, Large
Installation Brackets for P1V-S

Type For Air Motor For Drilling Motor Weight Kg Order Code
Flange Bracket
P1V-S002 P1V-S008 P1V-S012 P1V-S020 P1V-S030 P1V-S060 P1V-S120 P1V-S025 P1V-S040 P1V-S008 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.09 0.12 0.25 0.60
P1V-S4002B P1V-S4008B P1V-S4012B P1V-S4020B P1V-S4030B P1V-S4060B P1V-S4120B P1V-S4008F P1V-S4012F P1V-S4020F P1V-S4020C
Foot Bracket
P1V-S008 P1V-S012 P1V-S020 P1V-S020A0011 P1V-S020A0006 P1V-S030A0023 P1V-S030A0010 P1V-S030 P1V-S060 P1V-S120 P1V-S040 P1V-S025 P1V-S008 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.55
0.11 0.30 0.80
P1V-S4030F P1V-S4060F P1V-S4120F
All brackets supplied with fastening screws for the motor.
Dimensions, see pages K34 to K39
K33
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Motor P1V-S002

M5 Inlet Counterclockwise
132.5
M5 Inlet Clockwise
17 -0.1
13.5 10 120
27.5
1 -0.1
8 e8
M2.5 x 5
3.5 -0.1
4 k6
17 -0.1
35 70.5
17 e8
Clamping Area
Outlet
Flange Bracket for Motor P1V-S002

P1V-S4002B
26
20 e8
8 H7
1.5 2 5.5
3.2

123.5 100 M3 13 e8 13 12 50 6 2
32
Inlet Counterclockwise M8
x0 .75
L
M8
R
.7 x0
Inlet 5 Clockwise
5 -0.1
22 d9
15
2 6 k6 SW20
7.5
M8 x 0.75
Outlet
Clamping Area

P1V-S4008B
5
Foot Bracket for Motor P1V-S008

P1V-S4008F
13 H8 42 25 -0.2
5.5 25 5
4 x 90
30
40 4.5
13 H8
40 50
20 30
CAD drawings on the Internet Our home page www.parker.com/euro_pneumatic includes the AirCad Drawing Library with 2D and 3D drawings for the main versions.
K34
Catalog 0900P-4

18
A B 4 8
P1V-S012A
with shaft with keyed shaft
Inlet
Inlet
17 0.8
27e8
8 k6
13e8
SW24
27d9
4.5 M4x
G1 /8
6.8 6.8
/8 G1
21
A2x2x14 DIN 6885 Stainless Key with threaded shaft
7.69 4
24
Clamping Area 5/16"-24 UNF 12.5
P1V-S012D
G1/8 Outlet
19.5 9.5
11

P1V-S012A0N00, P1V-S012D0N00 P1V-S012A0550, P1V-S012D0550 P1V-S012A0360, P1V-S012D0360 P1V-S012A0140, P1V-S012D0140 P1V-S012A0090, P1V-S012D0090 P1V-S012A0060, P1V-S012D0060 P1V-S012A0010, P1V-S012D0010
A
117.0 117.0 117.0 129.5 129.5 129.5 142.0
B
46.5 46.5 46.5 59.0 59.0 59.0 71.5

P1V-S4012B
4 ,5
4 0
50

P1V-S4012F
13 H8
4.5
K
4.5
42
25 -0.2
5.5 20 30
13 H8
40 50
K35
Catalog 0900P-4

P1V-S020A
30

24 B 5 0,8 10 k6 19
G1 /8
G1 /8
Inlet
Inlet
M4x
23 38 e8 20e8 38 d9 SW34 34 7 8 8
A3x3x18 DIN 6885
Stainless Key
3/8"-24 UNF 26 15 16,5
Clamping Area
G1/4
Outlet
P1V-S020D
with threaded shaft
14
209.5
M6
40
15
148 143
19 k6
21.5
P1V-S020A0011 P1V-S020A0006
39 28 34
38 d9
99
74
85
Oil Plug
6 P9
M8 x 20
Black Oxidized Steel

249.5

P1V-S020A0E50, P1V-S020D0E50 P1V-S020A0460, P1V-S020D0460 P1V-S020A0240, P1V-S020D0240 P1V-S020A0140, P1V-S020D0140 P1V-S020A0070, P1V-S020D0070 P1V-S020A0035, P1V-S020D0035 P1V-S020A0018, P1V-S020D0018 P1V-S020A0005, P1V-S020D0005 P1V-S020A0002 P1V-S020A0001 P1V-S020A00005
A
127 127 127 143 143 143 143 159 159 175 175
B
63.5 63.5 63.5 79.5 79.5 79.5 79.5 95.5 95.5 111.5 111.5
5x45
P1V-S4020B
5.5
20 e8
Foot Bracket for Motor P1V-S020A0011 and P1V-S020A0006

P1V-S4020C
(9.5)
50
5.8
120 74
11
P1V-S4020F
4.5
85 110 35.5 50.5
70

20 H8
20 H8
60
34
47 30 -0.2
6.6 20 30
4.5
45 55
K36
(9.5)
Catalog 0900P-4

3 4 M5 x5, 5
Ek6 A C 5 0,8

B
Inlet
36 20
G1 /4
Inlet
P1V-S030A
D 24 e8 42 d9 42 d9 SW36
G1
/4
10
Stainless Key
27 3/8"-24 UNF
Clamping Area
G1/4
Outlet
P1V-S030D
with threaded shaft
15 16,5
14
M6
P1V-S030A0023 P1V-S030A0010
225.5 40 15 5 39 82 34 28 159
19 k6
21.5
42 d9
99
74
11
6,5
85
M8x20
6 p9
Oil Plug
Black Oxidised Steel

265.5
A
P1V-S030A0E50, P1V-S030D0E50 P1V-S030A0460, P1V-S030D0460 P1V-S030A0240, P1V-S030D0240 P1V-S030A0140, P1V-S030D0140 P1V-S030A0060, P1V-S030D0060 P1V-S030A0028, P1V-S030D0028 P1V-S030A0018, P1V-S030D0018 P1V-S030A0005, P1V-S030D0005 28.5 28.5 28.5 28.5 32.0 32.0 32.0 32.0
B
143 143 143 159 159 159 159 164
C
66 66 66 82 82 82 82 82
D
27 27 27 27 30 30 30 30
E
12 12 12 12 14 14 14 14
36
F
A4x4x20 DIN 6885 A4x4x20 DIN 6885 A4x4x20 DIN 6885 A4x4x20 DIN 6885 A5x5x20 DIN 6885 A5x5x20 DIN 6885 A5x5x20 DIN 6885 A5x5x20 DIN 6885

P1V-S4030B
55
65 24 e8 21 24 H8 6
Foot Bracket for Motor

P1V-S030A0023 and P1V-S030A0010 P1V-S4020C
5x45
(9.5)
K
120 74
11
5.5
6.8
P1V-S4030F
4.5
85
70
48
30 -0.2
24 H8
110
35.5 50.5
6.6 20 30
50 60
4.5
K37
(9.5)
Catalog 0900P-4
D C 8 1
Inlet
24 10
Inlet
6x
G3
/8
G3
/8
48
F
Stainless Key
Clamping Area
14 11,5
56 d10
35 e8
56 e8
k6
SW50
G1/2
Outlet
50
A
P1V-S060A0E00 P1V-S060A0400 P1V-S060A0270 P1V-S060A0170 P1V-S060A0072 P1V-S060A0048 P1V-S060A0030 P1V-S060A0010 194 194 194 194 212 212 217 217
B
162 162 162 162 180 180 180 180
C
62,4 62,4 62,4 62,4 62,4 80,4 80,4 80,4
D
30 30 30 30 30 30 35 35
E
14 14 14 14 14 19 19 19
F
A5x5x20 DIN 6885 A5x5x20 DIN 6885 A5x5x20 DIN 6885 A5x5x20 DIN 6885 A5x5x20 DIN 6885 A6x6x22 DIN 6885 A6x6x22 DIN 6885 A6x6x22 DIN 6885

P1V-S4060B

P1V-S4060F
0.5 x 45
6. 6
7 0
50
5.5
85 -1 35 e8 32
35 H8
35 H8 40 -0.2
70 -1
8.5
1.5
62
70 85 7.5 25
6,6
50 -1
K38
5.5
Catalog 0900P-4

P1V-S120A0800 P1V-S120A0270 P1V-S120A0110
M8x 14
234.5
Inlet
35 65 10 10 G 1/2 197 39
Inlet
SW70
68
19 k6 50 e8
82 d10
e9
82
12.5
A6x6x22 DIN 6885
Stainless Key Clamping Area

G3/4 SW70
22
Outlet
P1V-S120A0078 P1V-S120A0032 P1V-S120A0012

14 M8x
267.5
60 73 10
205 10
50 e8
SW70
68
28 k6 M10
20 1.5 A8x7x50 DIN 6885
Stainless Key
Clamping Area

P1V-S4120B

P1V-S4120F
62
9 0 10
82 d10
82 e9
11.5
9.5
K
11 9.5
50 H8
115 -1
50 e8
46
99.5
60 -0.2
92
10
35 50 -1
110
K39
50H8
+1
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Brake Motor P1V-S020

24

A B 5 0.8 10 k6 23 38 e8 20 e8 38 d9 SW34 M5
G1
Inlet
19
Inlet
P1V-S020AD
4 M4x
Brake connection
34 8 7
/8
G1
/8
30
A3x3x18 DIN 6885
P1V-S020DD
with threaded shaft
G1/4
Outlet
P1V-S020AD011 P1V-S020AD006
252.5
M6
40
15
119 186
39
19 k6 21.5
Brake Connection
34 M5
28
38 d9
99
74
85
M8 x 20
Oil Plug
6 P9

292.5

P1V-S020ADE50 P1V-S020AD460 P1V-S020AD240 P1V-S020AD140 P1V-S020AD070 P1V-S020AD035 P1V-S020AD018 P1V-S020AD005 P1V-S020AD002 P1V-S020AD001 P1V-S020AD0005
A
170 170 170 186 186 186 186 202 202 218 218
B
63.5 63.5 63.5 79.5 79.5 79.5 79.5 95.5 95.5 111.5 111.5

P1V-S4020B
5
Foot Bracket for Motor P1V-S020AD0011 and P1V-S020AD0006

P1V-S4020C
5x45
20 e8
20 H8
5.5
(9.5)
50
60
5.8
120 74
11

P1V-S4020F
4.5
85 110
70
34
35.5 50.5
47 30 -0.2
20 H8
6.6 20 30
4.5
45 55
K40
(9.5)
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Brake Motor P1V-S030

A C 5 0.8
E k6

B
Inlet Brake connection M5

G1 /4
Inlet
36 20
G1 /4
P1V-S030A
5.5 M5x
D 42 d9 42 d9 SW36 24 e8
11
P1V-S 030D
with threaded shaft
6.5
34
10
G1/4
Outlet
M6
P1V-S030AD023 P1V-S030AD010
268.5 40 15 5 39
19 k6 21.5
202 82 34
Brake Connection
M5
28
42 d9
99
74
85
M8x20
Oil Plug
6 p9

308.5
A
P1V-S030ADE50 P1V-S030AD460 P1V-S030AD240 P1V-S030AD140 P1V-S030AD060 P1V-S030AD028 28.5 28.5 28.5 28.5 32.0 32.0
B
186 186 186 202 202 202
C
66 66 66 82 82 82
D
27 27 27 27 30 30
E
12 12 12 12 14 14
36
F
A4x4x20 DIN 6885 A4x4x20 DIN 6885 A4x4x20 DIN 6885 A4x4x20 DIN 6885 A5x5x20 DIN 6885 A5x5x20 DIN 6885

P1V-S4030B
6
Foot Bracket for Motor P1V-S030AD0023 and P1V-S030AD0010

P1V-S4020C
5x45
(9.5)
55
5.5
74
65 24 e8
6.8
120
P1V-S4030F
4.5
85
70
Foot bracket for motor P1V-S030
21 24 H8
11
24 H8
110
35.5 50.5
48
30 -0.2
6.6 20 30
4.5
50 60
K41
(9.5)
Catalog 0900P-4
Drilling, Milling and Grinding Motors Features

A large number of drilling motors, milling motors and grinding motors have been developed using the P1V-S as the base motor in order to make it easier to install air motors in machining applications. These motors are all equipped with standard vanes for intermittent lubrication-free operation, although it is recommended to use oil mist if you are planning to operate them for extended periods. NOTE! These motors are not made of 100% stainless steel. Drilling motors are available with power ratings of 80, 170, 250 and 400 Watts, and several different speeds for the machining of a range of materials. They can be fitted with collet chucks, drill chucks and quick-release chucks. Many of them also have accessories allowing the exhaust air to be removed. The milling motor, with a power rating of 400 Watts, runs at a relatively high speed, and is fitted with a collet chuck for a shaft diameter of 8 mm. It is equipped with strong bearings able to handle greater shear forces on the spindle. The grinding motor, with a power rating of 200 Watts, is fitted with a collet chuck for a shaft diameter of 8 mm and runs at a relatively high speed. It is equipped with strong bearings able to handle greater shear forces on the spindle. The design principle of the 90 Watt grinding motor is different from the others. The turbine principle means that high speeds are possible without the need for lubrication.
Pneumatic Actuator Products Air Motors Technical Data:

Working pressure: Working temperature: Max. 7 bar -30 C to +100 C Medium: 40 m filtered oil mist (unlubricated for grinding motor P1V-S009) Other technical data See table for each motor
Drilling Motors P1V-S008N, P1V-S025N/M, P1V-S040M, Milling Motor P1V-S040N and Grinding Motor P1V-S020N Housing Shaft, collet chuck Shaft for drill chuck Stainless steel, X12Cr13 Hardened steel (not stainless) Hardened and tempered steel (not stainless)
Drilling Motors P1V-S017N/M and Grinding Motor P1V-S009N Housing Shaft, collet chuck Shaft for drill chuck All Internal parts Accessories High grade steel (not stainless) Surface treated steel, plastic aluminium High grade steel (not stainless) Hardened steel (not stainless) Hardened and tempered steel (not stainless)
Feed Movement in Drilling, Milling and Grinding Motors

A slow and even feed movement is necessary in machining applications. During drilling, the feed must not uncontrollably speed up once the drill breaks through the material. One good way of solving the problem is to use a pneumatic cylinder for the feed, which is able to provide force during drilling and a rapid approach before the actual drilling phase. Feed during the drilling phase is controlled using a hydraulic brake cylinder (HYDROCHECK) fitted in parallel with the pneumatic cylinder. This provides even, slow and safe feed movement, without the risk of the uncontrolled feed described above.
Order Key
P 1V - S
017
N
Function
Q00
Free Speed per min
035 999 A00 H00 L00 Q00 X00 A000 350 9990 10000 17000 20000 24000 30000 100000
Motor Size
008 80 W 009 90 W 017 170 W 025 250 W 030 300 W 040 400 W M N
B10 / B12 Shaft Collet Chuck
Air Motor Range

P1V-S Drilling, Milling and gGrinding Motors
Possible Combinations K42
Please refer to pages K43 to K50.

Catalog 0900P-4
Drilling Motors Standard Speeds for HSS Spiral Drills

Average Speed Material
Drilling mm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
35 m/min Unalloyed Steel up to 500 N/mm 28 m/min Unalloyed Steel from 500 to 700 N/mm 25 m/min Unalloyed Steel over 700 N/mm 14 m/min Alloyed Steel from 700 to 900 N/mm 11 m/min Alloyed Steel from 900 to 1100 N/mm 7 m/min Stainless Steel 22 m/min Cast Iron up to 180 N/mm 12 m/min Cast Iron over 180 N/mm 50 m/min Copper, Red Metal, Bronze, Brass 90 m/min Rough Light-alloy Metal, Screw Brass 165 m/min Hardened Light-alloy Meta 210 m/min Magnesium Alloy
11000 8800 7800 4400 3400 2200 7000 3800 16000 28000 52000 66000
5500 4400 3900 2200 1700 1100 3500 1900 8000 14000 26000 33000
3700 3000 2600 1500 1100 730 2300 1300 5300 9000 17300 22000
2800 2200 2000 1100 850 550 1700 950 4000 7000 13000 16500
2200 1800 1600 880 680 440 1400 760 3200 5600 10400 13200
1900 1500 1300 735 570 365 1200 630 2700 4800 8700 11000
1600 1300 1100 630 485 315 1000 540 2300 4000 7400 9400
1400 1100 975 550 425 275 875 475 2000 3500 6500 8300
1200 975 865 490 380 245 780 420 1800 3100 5800 7400
1100 880 780 440 340 220 700 380 1600 2800 5200 6600
1 Speeds for processing two-component plastics, cardboard or plastic-coated fabrics plaster, HSS drills must not be used - use a high-speed steel drill fitted with a hard metal K10 instead 2 Double the values for thermoplastics
Drilling Motor P1V-S008N

Our smallest and most versatile drilling motor for small-scale drilling operations. The standard collet chuck is for 3 mm shaft diameter. For other diameters, select a different collet chuck as an accessory. The motor has a port for a 6 mm hose to remove the exhaust air to a silencer.
Data for Drilling Motor P1V-S008N

Max. Power kW 0.080 0.080 0.080 0.080 Free Speed rpm 24000 7000 1900 1300 Version mm Collet Chuck 3 mm Collet Chuck 3 mm Collet Chuck 3 mm Collet Chuck 3 mm Drilling in Drilling in Steel Aluminium Air Consumption at Max.. Power mm 3 3 3 l/s 3 3 3 3 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 M8 x 0.75* M8 x 0.75* M8 x 0.75* M8 x 0.75* Conn. Min Pipe ID mm 4 4 4 4 Weight Kg 0.20 0.20 0.22 0.22 Order Code
P1V-S008N0Q00 P1V-S008N0700 P1V-S008N0190 P1V-S008N0130
* 2 push in nipples (F28PMB6M8SP) for plastic pipe 6/4 supplied
Accessories for Drilling Motor P1V-S008N

Collet Chucks Collet Chuck 2 mm Collet Chuck 3 mm Collet Chuck 3/32" Collet Chuck 1/8" Order Code
P1V-6/314693 Standard P1V-6/314694 P1V-6/314407

K43
Catalog 0900P-4
Drilling Motors Drilling Motor P1V-S017N

A small drilling motor for small-scale, lighter drilling operations. The standard collet chuck is for 6 mm shaft diameter. For other diameters, select a different collet chuck as an accessory. The motor has a built-in silencer for exhaust air. If lower noise levels are required, or if you want the exhaust air to be collected, the relevant accessories are available.

Max. Power kW 0.170 0.170 0.170 0.170 0.170 0.170 Free Speed rpm 24000 6000 4000 1500 1000 660 Version mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Drilling in Drilling in Steel Aluminium Air Consumption at Max.. Power mm 3 4 4 4 4 l/s 4 5 6 6 6 6 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o Conn. Min Pipe ID mm 6 6 6 6 6 6 Weight Kg 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 Order Code
P1V-S017N0Q00 P1V-S017N0600 P1V-S017N0400 P1V-S017N0150 P1V-S017N0100 P1V-S017N0066

Collet Chucks Collet Chuck 3 mm Collet Chuck 4 mm Collet Chuck 5 mm Order Code
P1V-6/312681 P1V-6/312684 P1V-6/312686 Standard P1V-6/312682 P1V-6/312689 P1V-6/806112 P1V-6/823221 P1V-6/302923A
Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 1/8" Collet chuck 1/4" Other Accessories Outlet Hose Seal for Outlet Hose Outlet Connection Parallel

Dimensions, see page K51 Permitted shaft loadings, see page K59 Service kits, see page K62
K44
Catalog 0900P-4
Drilling Motors Drilling Motor P1V-S017M

A small drilling motor for small-scale, lighter drilling operations. Select drill chucks as accessories. The motor has a built-in silencer for exhaust air. If lower noise levels are required, or if you want the exhaust air to be collected, the relevant accessories are available.

Max. Power kW 0.170 0.170 0.170 0.170 0.170 Free Speed rpm 6000 4000 1500 1500 660 Version mm For Drill Chuck B10 For Drill Chuck B10 For Drill Chuck B10 For Drill Chuck B10 For Drill Chuck B10 Drilling in Drilling in Steel Aluminium Air Consumption at Max. power mm 3 4 4 4 4 l/s 5 6 6 6 6 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o Conn. Min Pipe ID mm 6 6 6 6 6 Weight Kg 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 Order Code
P1V-S017M0600 P1V-S017M0400 P1V-S017M0150 P1V-S017M0100 P1V-S017M0066
Accessories for Drilling Motor P1V-S017M

Standard Drill Chuck Diameters 0.5 6 mm/B10 Other Accessories Outlet Hose Seal for Outlet Hose Outlet Connection Parallel Order Code
P1V-6/804655 P1V-6/806112 P1V-6/823221 P1V-6/302923A

K45
Catalog 0900P-4
Drilling Motors Drilling Motor P1V-S025N

A small drilling motor for moderately heavy drilling operations. The standard collet chuck is for 6 mm shaft diameter. For other diameters, select a different collet chuck as an accessory. The motor has a built-in silencer for exhaust air. If lower noise levels are required, or if you want the exhaust air to be collected, the relevant accessories are available.

Max. Power kW 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 Free Speed rpm 17000 4800 2500 1400 700 350 Version mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Drilling in Drilling in Steel Aluminium Air Consumption at Max. Power mm 4 6 6 6 6 l/s 6 6 6 6 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o Conn. Min Pipe ID mm 6 6 6 6 6 6 Weight Kg 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 Order Code
P1V-S025N0H00 P1V-S025N0480 P1V-S025N0250 P1V-S025N0140 P1V-S025N0070 P1V-S025N0035

Collet Chucks Collet Chuck 3 mm Collet Chuck 4 mm Collet Chuck 5 mm Order Code
P1V-6/312681 P1V-6/312684 P1V-6/312686 Standard P1V-6/312682 P1V-6/312689 P1V-6/313179A P1V-6/806110 P1V-6/388378A

Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 1/8" Collet Chuck 1/4" Other Accessories Outlet Connection Straight Outlet Hose 23 x 28 mm 0.75 m long Outlet Connection Parallel
K46
Catalog 0900P-4

A small drilling motor for moderately heavy drilling operations. Select drill chucks or quick-release chucks as accessories as necessary. The motor has a built-in silencer for exhaust air. If lower noise levels are required, or if you want the exhaust air to be collected, the relevant accessories are available.

Max. Power kW 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 Free Speed rpm 17000 4800 2500 1400 700 350 Version mm For Drill Chuck B12 For Drill Chuck B12 For Drill Chuck B12 For Drill Chuck B12 For Drill Chuck B12 For Drill Chuck B12 Drilling in Drilling in Steel Aluminium Air Consumption at Max. Power mm 4 6 8 10 10 l/s 6 6 8 10 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o Conn. Min Pipe ID mm 6 6 6 6 6 6 Weight Kg 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 Order Code
P1V-S025M0H00 P1V-S025M0480 P1V-S025M0250 P1V-S025M0140 P1V-S025M0070 P1V-S025M0035

Name Standard Drill Chuck Diameters 0.8 10 mm/B12 Quick-release Chuck Diameters 0.5 8 mm/B12 Other Accessories Outlet Connection Straight Outlet Hose 23 x 28 mm 0,75 m long Outlet Connection Parallel Order Code
P1V-6/804650 P1V-6/804661
P1V-6/3131179A P1V-6/806110 P1V-6/388378A

K47
Catalog 0900P-4

Our large drilling motor is used for small-scale heavy drilling operations requiring considerable feed force. Select drill chucks or quick-release chucks as accessories as necessary. The motor has a built-in silencer for exhaust air. If lower noise levels are required, or if you want the exhaust air to be collected, the relevant accessories are available.
Data for Drilling Motor P1V-S040M

Max. Power kW 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 Free Speed rpm 17000 4800 2500 1400 Version mm For Drill Chuck B12 For Drill Chuck B12 For Drill Chuck B12 For Drill Chuck B12 Drilling in Drilling in Steel Aluminium Air Consumption at Max. Power mm 4 6 6 l/s 6 6 8 10 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o G1/4o Conn. Min Pipe ID mm 6 6 6 6 Weight Kg 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 Order Code
P1V-S040M0H00 P1V-S040M0480 P1V-S040M0250 P1V-S040M0140

Name Standard Drill Chuck Diameters 0,8 10 mm/B12 Quick-release Chuck Diameters 0,5 8 mm/B12 (Cannot be used for Drilling Motor P1VS040M0H00) Other Accessories Outlet Connection Straight Outlet Hose 23 x 28 mm 0,75 m long Outlet Connection Parallel Order Code
P1V-6/804650
P1V-6/804661
P1V-6/3131179A P1V-6/806110 P1V-6/388378A

K48
Catalog 0900P-4
Milling Motors Milling motor P1V-S040N

This motor was designed for milling plastic components, but it can also be used for milling other materials. The motor has a built-in silencer for exhaust air. If lower noise levels are required, or if you want the exhaust air to be collected, the relevant accessories are available.

Max. Power kW 0.400 Free Speed rpm 20000 Version mm Collet Chuck 8 mm Drilling in Drilling in Steel Aluminium Air Consumption at Max. Power mm 8 l/s 10 5.0 G1/4o Conn. Min Pipe ID mm 6 Weight Kg 0.80 Order Code
P1V-S040N0H00

Collet Chucks Collet Chuck 3 mm Collet Chuck 4 mm Collet Chuck 5 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 8 mm Collet Chuck 1/8" Collet Chuck 1/4" Other Accessories Outlet Connection Straight Outlet Hose 23 x 28 mm 0.75 m long Outlet Connection Parallel Order Code
P1V-6/312690 P1V-6/312692 P1V-6/312693 P1V-6/312694 Standard P1V-6/312691 P1V-6/312695 P1V-6/313179A P1V-6/806110 P1V-6/388378A
K49
Catalog 0900P-4
Grinding Motors Grinding Motor P1V-S009N

The grinding motor is used for small-scale point grinding and smallscale milling where the high speed is an advantage. It has proved to be very useful for drilling small holes and milling thin slits in PCBs in the electronics industry. In this application, the high speed means that the holes and slits are free of burrs on the underside.
Data for Grinding Motor P1V-S009N

Max. Power kW 0.090 Free Speed rpm 100000 Version mm Collet Chuck 3 mm Point Grinding Diameter Max. mm 5 Milling Diameter Max. l/s 3 2.0 Pipe 6/4 Air Consumption at Max. Power Conn. Min Pipe ID mm 4 Weight Kg 0.3 Order Code
P1V-S009N0A000
Dimensions, see page K54 Permitted shaft loadings, see page K59
Grinding motor P1V-S020N

This grinding motor is used when larger-scale point grinding is required. The motor can also be used for light milling operations. The motor has a built-in silencer for exhaust air.
Data for Grinding Motor P1V-S020N

Max. Power kW Free Speed rpm 30000 Version mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Point Grinding Diameter Max. mm 25 Milling Diameter Max. l/s 10 6.3 G1/40 Air Consumption at Max. Power Conn. Min Pipe ID mm 6 Weight Kg 0.5 Order Code
0.200
P1V-S020N0X00
Accessories for Grinding Motor P1V-S020N

Collet Chucks Collet Chuck 3 mm Collet Chuck 4 mm Collet Chuck 5 mm Collet Chuck 6 mm Collet Chuck 1/8" Collet Chuck 1/4" Order Code
P1V-6/312681 P1V-6/312684 P1V-6/312686 Standard P1V-6/312682 P1V-6/312689

K50
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Drilling Motor P1V-S008N
A B
13 e8
50 Clamping Area
M
22 e9
M3
Inlet
15
10
x0
,7
SW9
Collet Chuck 3
SW20
M8 x 0,75
Outlet
A
P1V-S008N0Q00, P1V-S008N0700 P1V-S008N0190, P1V-S008N0130 98 107
B
96 105

33 11 22 200 167 118
Clamping Area
SW13
24.9
13 8
G1/4
Outlet Inlet
SW9 SW10
25d10
Outlet Hose P1V-6/806112
12
Collet Chuck 6
Seal for Outlet Hose P1V-6/823221
K
14
Outlet Connection Parallel P1V-6/302923A
47 22
2m
K51
G1/2
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Drilling Motor P1V-S017M

187.5
20.5 118
Clamping Area
SW13
13 8
25d10
24,9
For DrillChuck B10
Outlet Outlet Hose P1V-6/806112 Seal for Outlet Hose P1V-6/823221
53
30
14
G1/4
0 1
Inlet
Drill Chuck Dimensions 0.5 - 6 mm P1V-6/804655
47 22
2m

28 A B 5 0.8
Clamping Area Outlet
M4
x4
SW9
12 SW10
30
38
M35 x 0.75
38 e8
38 d9
20e8 34
34
SW17
Collet Chuck 6
G1/4
Inlet
Outlet Connection Straight P1V-6/313179A
G1/4
K
G1/4 62 26
15
28
Inlet Hose 12/6 Outlet Hose P1V-6/806110
R18
29.5
A
P1V-S025N0H00, P1V-S025N0480, P1V-S025N0250 P1V-S025N0H00, P1V-S025N0480, P1V-S025N0250 141 157
B
65 81
K52
25
G1/2
30
G1/2
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Drilling Motor P1V-S025M

27 B 5 0.8
Clamping Area

A
Outlet
M4
x4
30
38
M35 x 0.75
38 e8
38 d9
20 e8 34
34
SW17
For Drill Chuck B12 Drill Chuck Dimensions 0.8 - 10 mm P1V-6/804650 Outlet Connection Straight P1V-6/313179A
G1/4
Inlet
34
Inlet Hose 12/6
63.5
Quick-release Chuck Dimensions 0.5 - 8 mm (max 5000 rpm) P1V-6/804661 Outlet Connection Parallel P1V-6/388378A
15
28
35
G1/4
Outlet Hose P1V-6/806110
G1/4
A
P1V-S025M0H00, P1V-S025M0480, P1V-S025M0250 P1V-S025M0140, P1V-S025M0070, P1V-S025M0035 141 157
B
65 81
R18
29.5
Drilling Motor P1V-S040M

26.5 64 5 0.8
150
Outlet Clamping area
M4
x4
12.2
30
For Drill Chuck B12 Outlet Connection Straight P1V-6/3131179A
38
M35 x 0.75
38 e8
38 d9
20 e8 SW34
34
SW17
G1/4
Inlet
25
69
26
G1/2
62
30
K
Inlet Hose 12/ 6 Outlet Hose P1V-6/806110
Drill Chuck Dimensions 0.8 - 10 mm P1V-6/804650
34
15 63.5
Quick-release Chuck Dimensions 0.5 - 8 mm (max 5000 rpm) P1V-6/804661 (cannot be used for P00V-S040M0H00) Outlet Connection Parallel P1V-6/388378A
28
G1/4
G1/4
26
69
R18
29.5
K53
25
G1/2
35
62
30
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions Milling Motor P1V-S040N

SW12 SW17 SW36

Clamping Area
SW36
SW17
Outlet
38 e8 19 G1/4 20
Inlet
8 3 x 45 91 179 30 10
Outlet Connection Straight P1V-6/313179A
38
15
28
Inlet Hose 12/6 Outlet Hose P1V-6/806110

G1/4
G1/4
R18
29.5
Grinding Motor P1V-S009N0A000

142 16 10 51 21 49 0,4 m
Outlet
2m
SW 7
SW 9
4,25
Clamping Area
Grinding Motor P1V-S020N0X000

24 82
153 34 13 8
28 d11
28 e8
G1/4
12
Pipe 6/4 Inlet Inlet Outlet

21 d9
SW10 SW9 Collet Chuck 6

Clamping Area
32 d9
K54
30
20,5
25
26
G1/2
62
30
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Theoretical calculations

This section provides you with the background you need in order to select the right air motor for common applications. The first four parts explain the direct physical relationships between: Force - Torque - Speed - Power Requirement Before selecting an air motor, you need to know the torque required by the application at the necessary speed. Sometimes, the torque and the speed are not known but the power requirement and the speed of movement are. You can use the following formulas to calculate the speed and torque.

Speed
The required motor speed can be calculated if the speed of movement and the radius (diameter) are known. n r v n = v x 60/(2 x x r) n = motor speed in rpm v = speed of movement in m/sec r = radius in m = constant (3.14) In this example, the speed of movement is 1.5 m/s and the drum diameter is 300 m (radius r = 0.15 m)
Power
The power requirement is always calculated in N.
Formula: F=mxg F = power in N m = mass in kg g = gravitation (9.81) in m/s2 In this example, the mass is 150 kg F = 150 x 9.81 N F = 1470 N
F 150 kg
n = 1.5 x 60/(2 x x 0.15) rpm n = 96 rpm
Power Requirement
The power requirement can be calculated if the motor speed and torque are known. M, n
Torque
Torque is the force applied to produce rotational motion (rotational force) or the force applied in the opposite direction. It is the product of the rotational force F and the distance from the pivot point (radius or moment arm) M r Formula: M=mxgxr M = torque in Nm m = mass in kg g = gravitation (9.81) in m/s2 r = radius or moment arm in m 150 kg P = M x n/9550 P = power in kW M = torque in Nm n = rpm 9550 = conversion factor In this example, a torque of 1.25 Nm is required at a speed of 1500 rpm. P = 1.25 x 1500/9550 P = 0.196 kW or approx. 200 Watt
In this example, the drum diameter is 300 mm, which means the radius r = 0,15 m, and the mass is 150kg. M = 150 x 9,81 x 0.15 Nm M = 221 Nm
K55
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data
Frictional Forces Between Two Objects
A frictional force always occurs between two objects with surfaces in contact with each other. It is always exerted against the direction of movement. The frictional force is either static or kinetic. When selecting an air motor, we need to consider the larger of the two forces, static or kinetic. Fn Ffriction

Material
Bronze Bronze Grey Iron Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Wood Wood Leather Brake Lining Steel Bronze Grey Iron Grey Iron Bronze Ice Grey Iron Steel White Metal Ice Wood Grey Iron Steel Nylon (polyamide)
Coefficient of Static Friction 0 Dry

0.2 0.21 0.18 0.014 0.16 0.10 0.20 0.035 0.35 0.28 0.55 0.5
Lubricated
0.06 0.08 0.12 0.07 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.05 0.12 0.40 0.10
Fstatic Fkinetic The size of the static frictional force or the kinetic frictional force is the product of the normal force Fn and the coefficient of static friction (0), or the product of the normal force Fn and the coefficient of kinetic friction (). The size of the contact surface between the objects is irrelevant. Formula: Fstatic = Fn x 0 Fkinetic = Fn x Fn = m x g
Example: A steel component with a weight of 500 kg is to be pulled across bronze plate without lubrication. What will the frictional force be when the component moves? Fstatic = Fn x 0 Fkinetic = Fn x Fstatic = 500 x 9.81 x 0.27 = 1324 N Fkinetic = 500 x 9.81 x 0.18 = 883 N The static frictional force should always be compared with the force provided by the motor when it starts.
Kinetic Resistance
Fstatic = static friction in N Fkinetic = kinetic friction in N Fn = force from object in N m = mass in kg g = gravitation (9.81) in m/s2 Kinetic resistance is a term expressing the total resistance, consisting of rolling resistance and the frictional force in the bearing. Fn FF Formula:
Material
Bronze Bronze Grey Iron Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Wood Wood Leather Brake Lining Steel Bronze Grey Iron Grey Iron Bronze Ice Grey Iron Steel White Metal Ice Wood Grey Iron Steel Nylon (polyamide)
Coefficient of Static Friction 0 Dry Lubricated

0.11 0.16 0.16 0.11 0.10 0.10 0.16 0.22 0.28 0.28 0.27 0.027 0.20 0.15 0.65 0.55
FF = F x Fn FF = kinetic resistance in N F = coefficient of kinetic resistance Fn = force from object in N
Coefficient of Kinetic Resistance:

Object
Railway vehicle on steel rails Vehicle with rubber wheel on asphalt
Coefficient of Kinetic Resistance

0.0015 to 0.0030 0.015 to 0.03
Example: A railway carriage with a weight of 2 tons is to move over flat rails. What will the kinetic resistance be? FF = F x Fn FF = 0.0030 x 2 x 1000 x 9.81 FF = 4.86 N
K56
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data
Moving a component over a base, with friction between them
Fn Ftotal a

Moving a carriage over rails, with kinetic resistance between them
Fn a FF m F kinetic resistance Facc The force required to move the component consists of two parts - a kinetic resistance to move the component over the base, and an acceleration force Ftot = Fkinetic resistance + Facc Facc = m x a Ftot = Fkinetic resistance + m x a Ftot = the total force required in order to move the object in N Fkinetic resistance = total kinetic resistance in N Facc = acceleration force in N m = mass in kg a = acceleration in m/s2
2
m Ffriction Facc
The force required to move the component consists of two parts - a frictional force to move the component over the base, and an acceleration force Ftot = Ffriction + Facc Facc = m x a Ftot = Ffriction + m x a Ftot = the total force required in order to move the object in N Ffriction = frictional force in N (either Fstatic or Fkinetic depending on which is the greater force) Facc = acceleration force in N m = mass in kg a = acceleration in m/s
A steel component weighing 500 kg is to be pulled over a dry steel plate with an acceleration of 0.1 m/s2. What is the total force required to produce this movement? Ftot = Fkinetic + Facc Ftot = Fkinetic + m x a Ftot = Fn x u + m x a Ftot = 500 x 9,81 x 0.15 + 500 x 0.1 Ftot = 735.75 + 50 Ftot = 785.75 N Answer: A force of 780 N is required to produce this movement.
A carriage weighing 2500 kg is to be pulled over steel rails with an acceleration of 0,2 m/s2. What is the total force required to produce this movement? Ftot = Fkinetic resistance + Facc Ftot = uF x FN + m x a Ftot = 0.0030 x 2500 x 9.81 + 2500 x 0.2 Ftot = 6.1 + 500 Ftot = 506 N Answer: A force of 510 N is required to produce this movement.
In Practice
These calculations only produce values as they would be under optimum conditions. There must be no inclines in either direction. In applications using carriages, the rails must be perfectly flat without any inclines, the wheels must be perfectly round and there must be nothing on the rails (grains of sand, etc.). There must also be no effects from wind, etc. In addition, there is always uncertainty with regard to the compressed air supply. How can we guarantee a pressure of 6 bar to the inlet port of the air motor? Tip: calculate the required theoretical values for the air motor and assume a safety factor of 10 for the frictional force or kinetic resistance, and add this to the acceleration force. If the motor proves to be too powerful in practice, the supply air can always be regulated by throttling or pressure regulation. If you select a motor that is not powerful enough, on the other hand, the only option is to replace it.
K57
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Permitted Shaft Loadings

Air and Brakemotors
Max. permitted load on output shaft for motors (based on 10,000,000 rpm at input shaft with 90 % probable service life for ball bearings).
Fax
Fax
Frad
Frad
Fig 1: Load on output shaft for basic motor with keyed shaft.
Fig. 2: Load on output shaft for basic motor with threaded shaft.
Keyed Shaft
Order Code Fax (N) Frad (N) a (mm)
Threaded Shaft
Order Code Fax (N) Frad (N)
P1V-S002A P1V-S008A P1V-S012A P1V-S020A P1V-S020A0011 P1V-S020A0006 P1V-S030A0023 P1V-S030A0010 P1V-S030A0E50 P1V-S030A0460 P1V-S030A0240 P1V-S030A0140 P1V-S030A0060 P1V-S030A0028 P1V-S030A0018 P1V-S030A0005 P1V-S060A0E00 P1V-S060A0400 P1V-S060A0270 P1V-S060A0170 P1V-S060A0072 P1V-S060A0048 P1V-S060A0030 P1V-S060A0010 P1V-S120A0800 P1V-S120A0270 P1V-S120A0110 P1V-S120A0078 P1V-S120A0032 P1V-S120A0012
140 200 380 570 1100 1100 1100 1100 570 570 570 570 790 790 790 790 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1130 1130 1130 2330 2330 2330 2330 2330 2330
180 220 160 720 1200 1200 1200 1200 1130 1130 1130 1130 1070 1070 1070 1070 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 2090 2090 2090 2260 2260 2260 2700 2700 2700
6 7 9 12 22 22 22 22 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 18 18 18 18 18 18 30 30 30
P1V-S012D P1V-S020D P1V-S030D0E50 P1V-S030D0460 P1V-S030D0240 P1V-S030D0140 P1V-S030D0060 P1V-S030D0028 P1V-S030D0018 P1V-S030D0005
380 570 570 570 570 570 790 790 790 790
110 450 860 860 860 860 820 820 820 820
Frad = Radial loading (N) Fax = Axial loading (N)
K58
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Permitted Shaft Loadings

Drilling, Milling and Grinding Motors
Max. permitted load on output shaft for motors (based on 10,000,000 rpm at input shaft with 90 % probable service life for ball bearings).
Drilling Motors with Collet Chuck

P1V-S008N P1V-S017N P1V-S025N
200 380 750
75 50 260
25 25 25
Frad
Drilling Motors with Drill Chuck

Fax Frad
a
P1V-S017M P1V-S025M P1V-S040M
380 380 750
35 150 150
60 70
Fig 3: Load on output shaft for drilling, milling and grinding motors. 70
Milling Motor
P1V-S040N*
30
250
25
Grinding Motors
P1V-S009N* P1V-S020N*
2 16
10 70
25 25
Frad = Radial loading (N) Fax = Axial loading (N) * For the milling motor and grinding motor, these loadings are calculated for 1000 hours of operation
K59
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits Service Kits for P1V-S Motors

The following kits are available for the basic motors, consisting of vanes, (springs), silencers, O-rings, seals and 50 g of grease: (USDA-H1 approved):
Installation Tools
For Motor P1V-S012 Order Code For Motor P1V-S020, P1V-S030 Order Code
8204160049
8204160112
Service Kit, Vanes for Intermittent Lubrication-free Operation

For Motor P1V-S002A P1V-S008A P1V-S012A/D0 (to serial no 948688) P1V-S012A/D0 (from serial no 948689) P1V-S020A/D0 P1V-S030A/D0 P1V-S060A0E00 Order Code
Service Kit, Vanes for Continuous Lubrication-free Operation, Option C

For Motor P1V-S012A/DC (to serial no 948688) P1V-S012A/DC (from serial no 948689) P1V-S020A/DC P1V-S030A/DC P1V-S060ACE00 P1V-S060AC400 P1V-S060AC270 P1V-S060AC170 P1V-S060AC072 P1V-S060AC048 P1V-S060AC030 P1V-S060AC010 P1V-S120AC800 P1V-S120AC270 P1V-S120AC110 P1V-S120AC078 P1V-S120AC032 P1V-S120AC012 Order Code
P1V-6/446083A P1V-6/446084A 9121720601 9121720636 9121720602 9121720603 9121720604 9121720604 9121720604 9121720604 9121720604 9121720605 9121720605 9121720605 9121720606 9121720606 9121720606 9121720607 9121720607 9121720607
9121720608 9121720637 9121720609 9121720610 9121720611 9121720611 9121720611 9121720611 9121720611 9121720612 9121720612 9121720612 9121720613 9121720613 9121720613 9121720614 9121720614 9121720614
P1V-S060A0400 P1V-S060A0270 P1V-S060A0170 P1V-S060A0072 P1V-S060A0048 P1V-S060A0030 P1V-S060A0010 P1V-S120A0800 P1V-S120A0270 P1V-S120A0110 P1V-S120A0078 P1V-S120A0032 P1V-S120A0012
K60
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits Service Kits for P1V-S Motors

The following kits are available for the basic motors, consisting of vanes, (springs), silencers, O-rings, seals and 50 g of grease: (USDA-H1 approved):
Service Kit, Spring-loaded Vanes for Intermittent Lubrication-free Operation, Option Z

For Motor P1V-S012A/DZ (to serial no 948688) P1V-S012A/DZ (from serial no 948689) P1V-S020A/DZ P1V-S030A/DZ P1V-S060AZE00 P1V-S060AZ400 P1V-S060AZ270 P1V-S060AZ170 P1V-S060AZ072 P1V-S060AZ048 P1V-S060AZ030 P1V-S060AZ010 P1V-S120AZ800 P1V-S120AZ270 P1V-S120AZ110 P1V-S120AZ078 P1V-S120AZ032 P1V-S120AZ012 Order Code
Service Kit, Spring-loaded Vanes for Continuous Lubrication-free Operation, Option M

For Motor P1V-S012A/DM (to serial no 948688) P1V-S012A/DM (from serial no 948689) P1V-S020A/DM P1V-S030A/DM P1V-S060AME00 P1V-S060AM400 P1V-S060AM270 P1V-S060AM170 P1V-S060AM072 P1V-S060AM048 P1V-S060AM030 P1V-S060AM010 P1V-S120AM800 P1V-S120AM270 P1V-S120AM110 P1V-S120AM078 P1V-S120AM032 P1V-S120AM012 Order Code
9121720615 9121720638 9121720616 9121720617 9121720618 9121720618 9121720618 9121720618 9121720618 9121720619 9121720619 9121720619 9121720620 9121720620 9121720620 9121720621 9121720621 9121720621
9121720622 9121720639 9121720623 9121720624 9121720625 9121720625 9121720625 9121720625 9121720625 9121720626 9121720626 9121720626 9121720627 9121720627 9121720627 9121720628 9121720628 9121720628
Service Kit for Brake Module for Brake Motors

For Motor P1V-S020AD and P1V-S030AD Order Code
P1V-6/446096A
Comment: To perform a full service on a brake motor, you will need a normal service kit as well as a service kit for the brake module
K61
Catalog 0900P-4
Service Kits Service Kits for Drilling, Milling and Grinding Motors
The following kits are available for the motors, consisting of vanes, (springs), silencers, O-rings, seals and 50 g of grease: (USDA-H1 approved):
Service Kits
For Motor P1V-S008N P1V-S017N/M P1V-S025N/M P1V-S040M For Motor P1V-S040N For Motor P1V-S020N Order Code
P1V-6/446085A P1V-6/446086A P1V-6/446087A P1V-6/446088A

Order Code
P1V-6/446088A
Order Code
P1V-6/446090A
K62
Catalog 0900P-4
Technical Data Torque, Power and Air Consumption Graphs
M (%)
240 220 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 20 40 60 80
Q (%), P (%)
120
P Q
100
80
60
40
20
100
7 bar 6 bar 5 bar 4 bar 3 bar
n (%)
K
The curves in this graph are a combination of the torque, power and air consumption graphs on page 6. The values from the correction diagram on page 7 have also been used for the curves for the different pressure values. The graph also shows that is it very important to ensure that the pressure supplied to the inlet port of the motor is correct, in order to allow the motor to work at maximum capacity. If the valve supplying a large motor is too small, or if the supply line is underspecified, the pressure at the inlet port may be so low that the motor is unable to do its work. One solution would be to upgrade the valve and supply system, or alternatively you could replace the motor with a smaller motor with lower air consumption. The result would be increased pressure at the inlet port, which means that the smaller motor could carry out the necessary work. However, you may need to select a smaller motor with a lower free speed in order to obtain sufficient torque at the outgoing shaft.
P = power M = torque
Q = air consumption n = speed
K63
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
K64
Complementary Products
Section L
L1
Kits
Shocks
RL
3TK
FC
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Section L Overview
Section L Complementary Products

Linear Alignment Couplers
12 Different Thread Sizes Reduce Wear on Cylinder by Reducing Side Load Simplifies Cylinder Installation 6 of Total Movement
Flow Controls
Microlok Flow Controls - Miniature Right Angle Design - 2 Choices of Knobs - 3 Different Port Sizes Brass Flow Controls - Rugged Brass Construction - 3 Different Types of Connections - 4 Different Port Sizes Blocking Valves - 4 Different Port Sizes - 3 Types of Connections - Install Directly into Actuator Ports - Inexpensive Way to Obtain Position and Jogging Functions
3TK Air Oil Tanks

6 Standard Bore Sizes Lightweight Aluminum / Fiberglass Design 2 Fluid Flow Baffles Reduce Agitation and Aeration 3 Mounting Styles
RL Series Stand Alone Rod-Lock

5 Different Sizes Large Holding Forces 2 Different Mounting Styles R od Material Available
Shock Absorbers
Self-compensating and Adjustable Versions Available Light Duty to Extremely Heavy Duty Range PARKERSIZE Industrial Shock Absorber Sizing Program Available Online Stocking Program on Select Shock Absorbers for Immediate Delivery
Transition Kits
Plate Kits Attach Component to Slide / Guided Cylinder Coupler Kits Attach Component to Rotary Actuator
L2
Linear Alignment Couplers
L
Contents
Linear Alignment Couplers .................................................. L4
L3
Kits
Shocks
RL
3TK
FC
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Features Cost Saving Features and Benefits Include...

Maximum reliability for trouble-free operation, long life and lower operating costs Increased cylinder life by reducing wear on piston and rod bearings
Complementary Products Linear Alignment Couplers

C085
Linear Alignment Couplers are available in 12 standard thread sizes...

Simplifying cylinder installation and reducing assembly costs Increase rod bearing and rod seal life for lower maintenance costs
Alignment Coupler
B DIA.
See Table 1 for Part Numbers and Dimensions

K A THREAD
6 TOTAL MOVEMENT
J A THREAD E DEEP CENTERLINE
F DIA.
H ACROSS FLATS G ACROSS FLATS E C

Max. Pull Load (lbs.) 1200 2425 3250 4450 6800 9050 14450 19425 30500 30500 45750 58350 67550 Approx. Weight (lbs.) 0.35 0.35 0.55 0.55 0.55 1.4 1.4 4.8 4.8 6.9 9.8 9.8 19.8
Part No. 1347570031 1347570038 1347570044 1347570050 1347570063 1347570075 1347570088 1347570100 1347570125 1337390125 1337390150 1337390175 1337390188
A 5/16 -24 3/8 -24 7/16 -20 1/2 -20 5/8 -18 3/4 -16 7/8 -14 1-14 1-1/4 -12 1-1/4 -12 1-1/2 -12 1-3/4 -12 1-7/8 -12
B 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-3/8 1-3/8 2 2 3-1/8 3-1/8 3-1/2 4 4 5
C 1-3/4 1-3/4 2 2 2 2-5/16 2-5/16 3 3 4 4-3/8 4-3/8 5-5/8
D 15/16 15/16 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 2-3/8 2-3/8 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 3
E 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 3
F 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 1-5/16 1-5/16 1-7/16 1-7/16 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 2-1/4
G 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-15/16
H 3/4 3/4 7/8 7/8 7/8 1-5/16 1-5/16 1-7/8 1-7/8 1-11/16 1-15/16 1-15/16 2-5/8
J 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 7/16 7/16 3/4 3/4 3/4 7/8 7/8 1-3/8
K 15/16 15/16 1-3/32 1-3/32 1-3/32 1-9/32 1-9/32 1-25/32 1-25/32 2-1/2 2-3/4 2-3/4 3-3/8
How to Order Linear Alignment Couplers When ordering a cylinder with a threaded male rod end, specify the coupler of equal thread size by part number as listed in Table 1, i.e.; Piston Rod KK or CC dimension is 3/4" - 16", specify coupler part number 1347570075. L4
1/8 TOTAL MOVEMENT
1/16
D DIA.
Flow Controls
Right Angle Flow Controls and Port Accessories
L
Contents
Microlok Flow Controls ........................................................ L6 Brass Flow Controls ............................................................ L7 Blocking Valves .................................................................... L8
L5
Kits
Shocks
RL
3TK
FC
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Flow Controls & Connectors Miniature Exhaust Flow Control

Part Number 0876300100 0876300200 0876300300 0876300400 0876300500 Tube Size 5/32 5/32 1/4 1/4 1/4 Thread Size 10-32 1/8 10-32 1/8 1/4 C Hex mm 6 7 6 7 8 H Closed 0.925 1.000 0.925 1.000 1.083 H Open 1.023 1.083 1.023 1.083 1.180
Complementary Products Flow Controls

C085
L 0.846 0.935 0.885 0.957 1.013
M 0.669 0.708 0.708 0.730 0.748
Flow Dia. D 0.080 0.100 0.080 0.100 0.160
Knobless Miniature Exhaust Flow Control

Part Number 0876310100 0876310200 0876310300 Tube Size 5/32 1/4 1/4 Thread Size 10-32 1/8 1/4 C Hex mm 6 7 8 H Closed 0.650 0.708 0.826 H Open 0.787 0.860 0.964 L 0.846 0.956 1.013 M 0.669 0.730 0.748 Flow Dia. D 0.080 0.100 0.160
D
Global Connect Fittings

68GC Male Connector
Part No. 68GC-2-0 68GC-5/32-0 68GC-3-0 68GC-4-0 Tube Size 1/8 5/32 3/16 1/4 Pipe Thread 10-32 10-32 10-32 10-32 C Hex. 1/2 1/2 9/16 9/16 L 0.925 0.913 0.898 0.898
L
C Hex.
W68GC Male Connector

Part No. W68GC-2-1 W68GC-2-2 W68GC-2-4 W68GC-5/32-1 W68GC-5/32-2 W68GC-5/32-4 W68GC-3-2 W68GC-3-4 W68GC-4-1 W68GC-4-2 W68GC-4-4 W68GC-4-6 Tube Size 1/8 1/8 1/8 5/32 5/32 5/32 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 Pipe Thread 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/16 1/8 1/4 3/8 C Hex. 1/2 1/2 9/16 1/2 1/2 9/16 9/16 9/16 9/16 9/16 9/16 13/16 L 0.945 0.945 1.150 0.937 0.937 1.142 0.980 1.181 1.134 0.980 1.181 1.185
L
C Hex.
#10-32 to 1/8-27 Port Adapter P.N. 1442840000

1/8 NPT 7/16 RUBBER O-RING SEAL HEX
.09
1/4" O.D. Hose Barbed Fittings P.N. L06998 0000 (Pkg. of 10)
DIA. RUBBER GASKET
.750
1/4 HEX
.09
DIA.
.250 .750
#10-32 UNF-2A
#10-32 UNF-2A
Note: Due to insufficient port depth, port adapter fitting cannot be used for head end ports of 9/16" bore cylinders. Use barbed fitting.
L6
Catalog 0900P-4
Brass Right Angle Flow Controls

The Right Angle Flow Control is an ideal solution to cylinder speed control where space is at a premium. Costly fittings, connections and piping expenses can be eliminated because the valve can rotate 360, the piping alignment can be in any direction. It then locks into place. The 1/8" model can be rotated after final assembly. Install by threading male end directly into cylinder port. The free-flow and metered-flow direction is automatically predetermined. Free-flow direction is into cylinder and metered-flow is out of the cylinder. Flow is adjusted with an Allen wrench and locked with nut. Right Angle Flow Control also available with Prestolok fittings on inlet port to accommodate 5/32 - 3/8 tube sizes. This allows for quick connection and eliminates need for separate tube fitting.

C085
Threaded Inlet
Prestolok Inlet Fitting
Specifications
Body: Brass Plunger: Brass and Acetal Seals: Buna N Temperature Range: 0F to 140F (18C to 60C) Pressure Rating: 125 PSIG (8.6 Bar) max.
B B1 A Open C
Free Flow
Model Number Threaded Inlet 032510125 032510250 032510375 032510500 With Prestolok Fittings 032511215 032511225 032512525 032512538 032513838
Male Thread (NPT) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Thread (NPT) 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8
Female Thread (NPT) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Tube Size (OD) 5/32 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8
A Inch 1.74 1.99 2.28 2.69 A Inch 1.74 1.74 1.99 1.99 2.28 mm 44 44 51 51 58 Inch 1.18 1.18 1.40 1.40 1.71 mm 44 51 58 68 Inch 1.18 1.40 1.71 1.98
B mm 30 36 43 53 B1 mm 30 30 36 36 43 Inch .67 .67 .91 .91 1.06 Inch .67 .91 1.06 1.26
C mm 17 23 27 32 C mm 17 17 23 23 27
Weight oz. 2.0 4.5 7.0 11.0 kg 0.9 2.0 3.2 5.0
Cv Adjusted Flow 0.26 0.75 0.84 1.64 Cv Adjusted Flow 0.19 0.28 0.51 0.62 0.78 Free Flow 0.16 0.22 0.44 0.53 0.65 Free Flow 0.68 0.72 1.41
Weight oz. 2.0 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0 kg 0.9 0.9 2.0 2.0 3.2
! CAUTION: If it is possible that the ambient temperature may fall below freezing, the medium must be moisture-free to prevent internal
damage or unpredictable behavior.
L7
Kits
Shocks
RL
0.20
3TK
Model Selection and Dimensions
FC
Metered Flow
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Blocking Valves
Blocking valves are designed for precise, repeatable stopping of moving cylinders or to maintain the position of a cylinder in the event of an air pilot signal loss. Blockers are used for positioning and jogging purposes. A blocking valve has a spring loaded poppet which normally prevents flow through the valve in both directions. When an air pilot control signal (see pilot pressure chart below for required pilot signal pressure) is applied to the top of the valve, the poppet opens and allows the valve to flow in both directions like a standard fitting. When the pilot signal is removed, the poppet springs shut and prevents air from entering or leaving cylinder, thus stopping cylinder travel. Blocking valves are designed to be installed directly into actuator ports (up to 5" bore cylinders).

C085
Specifications
Operating Pressure: 0 to 145 PSI (0 to 10 Bar) Temperature Range: 5F to 140F (-15C to 60C) Maximum Operating Frequency: 10 Hz Life Expectancy: 10 million cycles @ 90 PSIG, 68F, dry filtered air and 1 Hz operating frequency Materials: Zinc alloy body; brass mounting screw and threads Pilot Pressure (PSI)
Operating Pressure 30 60 90 115 Cylinder Port Size 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" Pilot Depilot Pilot Depilot Pilot Depilot Pilot Depilot 34 22 34 22 36 21 45 26 40 26 40 26 40 25 50 31 45 31 45 31 45 30 54 35 50 35 50 35 50 34 59 41
Control
From Power Valve
To Cylinder Port
Model Selection
With Instant Tube Fittings
Cylinder Port 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" Tube Size (OD) 1/4" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" Pilot Tube (OD) 5/32" 5/32" 5/32" 5/32" Part Number PWBA3468 PWBA3469 PWBA3493 PWBA3412 Flow (Cv) 0.78 1.02 1.67 2.12 Wt. (oz) 5.1 5.3 6.3 17.5
Dimensions
1/8" NPT
C A
K
C
B
L
B
L
With NPT Threaded Connections & Tube Pilot Port

Cylinder Port 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" Female Port 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" Pilot Port 5/32"* 5/32"* 10-32 10-32 Part Number PWBA3888 PWBA3899 PWBA3833 PWBA3822 Flow (Cv) 0.78 1.02 1.67 2.12 Wt. (oz) 6.2 6.2 6.7 16.8 Cyl. Port Size 1/8"
PWBA34XX
PWBA38XXX
A Dia.
C Hex 15/16" 15/16" 15/16" 1-1/4"
H 59 (2.41) 53 (2.16) 53 (2.16) 66 (2.69)
K 19.5 (0.80) 13.5 (0.55) 14 (0.57) 24 (0.98)
L 39 (1.59) 39 (1.59) 50 (2.04) 66 (2.69)
L1 43.5 (1.78) 43.5 (1.78) 55.5 (2.27) 63 (2.57)
With NPT Threaded Connections & Pilot Port

Cylinder Port 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" Female Port 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" Pilot Port 1/8" 1/8" 1/8" 1/8" Part Number PWBA38887 PWBA38997 PWBA38337 PWBA38227 Flow (Cv) 0.78 1.02 1.67 2.12 Wt. (oz) 6.2 6.2 6.7 16.8
22 21 (0.90) (0.86) 22 21 1/4" (0.90) (0.86) 27 28 3/8" (1.10) (1.14) 31 33 1/2" (1.27) (1.35) Dimensions in mm (inch)
*Instant tube connection
L8
3TK Series
Air-Oil Tanks
L
Contents
Basic Air-Oil Circuit Operation ........................................... L10 How to Order ..................................................................... L10 Specifications .................................................................... L11 Mounting Dimensions ........................................................ L11
L9
Kits
Shocks
RL
3TK
FC
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Basic Air-Oil Circuit Operation

Air-Oil Tanks For Smoother Hydraulic Flow
Parker Air-Oil tanks provide a means to convert shop air pressure into hydraulic pressure. Compressed air is applied directly to the oil in the air-oil tank to convert it into hydraulic pressure. The hydraulic pressure is at a 1-to-1 ratio, i.e. 80 psi air produces 80 psi hydraulic pressure. All Parker Air-Oil tanks have a fiberglass tube which shows the proper oil level. They also contain two fluid flow baffles. The top baffle disperses the incoming air over the surface of the oil in such a way to avoid agitation and aeration. The bottom baffle insures a smooth flow pattern that minimizes oil turbulence and eliminates swirling, funneling or splashing which in turn could cause oil aeration or the oil to be blown from the tank into the exhaust air. Air-Oil tanks are used to smooth out the cylinder piston rod travel and to prevent chatter. They are mainly used in slow speed circuits. Fluid velocity in or out of the tank through standard ports should be less than 6 feet per second to prevent aeration of the oil. Since each tank is designed for a specific port size, increasing the port size in a tank to lower the fluid velocity is not recommended. A tank with a larger port size should be selected. In a basic air-oil circuit the advance tank is connected to the cap end port of a hydraulic cylinder and the return tank to the head end port. Shop air is applied alternately to the two tanks through a 4-way air control valve. The oil in the advance tank is forced into the cap end of the cylinder to cause the piston rod to extend. At the same time, oil from the head end port
Complementary Products 3TK Series

C086
is forced into the return tank, the air side of which is open to exhaust. To return cylinder to retract position, air pressure is applied to the oil in return tank. To limit the fluid velocity, flow controls should be applied to the air side of the tank to restrict the exhaust.
How to Select
Step 1: Determine the volume (cu. in.) of fluid required to fill the work cylinder at full stroke by taking the bore area times the stroke length. Step 2: Select the proper tank bore height from the chart. Since there are usually several combinations with similar capacities, select the one having a rated capacity closest to but slightly greater than your volume requirements. Generally, the most economical choice is a higher tank with a smaller bore.
Opt. Opt.
Air Oil Valve For Adjusting Tank Oil Level
Air Oil
Advance Tank
Return Tank
Table A Rated Capacities Cubic Inches

Bore Size 2 3 4 5 6 8 Bore Code C D E F G J Usable Tank Volume (cu. in.) per Internal Height of Tank 5 12 19 28 39 62 109 6 16.6 26 40 57 86 446 7 21.6 34 51 75 111 495 8 25.5 41 62 92 137 239 9 30 49 74 110 161 280 10 34 56 85 128 186 324 12 43 74 107 163 232 414 14 52 86 129 199 284 504 16 61 101 153 234 333 592 18 70 116 175 269 386 684 20 78 131 195 305 432 774
Model Code and Ordering Information

Example: 4.00CB3TKU 6.000
4.00
CB
3TK
6.000
Tank Diameter Bore size in inches
Tank Mounting Style CB Side End Angles F Side Tapped Holes TC Tie Rod Extended, Oil End TB Tie Rod Extended, Air End U
Ports NPTF
Tank Height Internal height in inches
Note: Standard air-oil tanks are designed for use with petroleum base hydraulic oil. If other fluids will be used, please consult the factory. For larger than 8" Bore Sizes consult factory.
L10
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications & Dimensions Specifications

Standard Bore Sizes 2-1/2" - 8" Operating Pressure 250 PSI Maximum Operating Temperature 165F Maximum Lightweight Aluminum / Fiberglass Design Larger Bore Sizes Available Upon Request

C086
Mounting Style CB Side end angles
AT
AH FILLER PORT E 4 R SQUARE
2 E/2
Mounting Dimensions
Mounting Style TC Tie rods extended - oil end (shown below) Mounting Style TB Tie rods extended - air end
3
EE NPTF AL E/2 E S
S/2 AO
AB (6) HOLES K
HIGH-FULL
OIL
LEVEL
LOW-REFILL
ZK + TANK HEIGHT ST + TANK HEIGHT
H + TANK HEIGHT
FILLER PORT 2 E/2 AA 4 R SQUARE
1 E/2 E K
Mounting Style F Side tapped holes

NT THREAD, ND DEEP 4 TAPPED MTG. HOLES TN 3
EE NPTF
HIGH-FULL
OIL
LEVEL
LOW-REFILL
H + TANK HEIGHT
E/2 E K
EE NPTF
HIGH-FULL
OIL LEVEL
LOW-REFILL
"H" + TANK HEIGHT
SN + TANK HEIGHT
L
SN TN 2-3/8 1-1/4 2-5/8 1-1/2 2-5/8 2-1/16 2-7/8 2-11/16 3-1/8 3-1/4 3-1/4 4-1/2
Bore 2-1/2 3-1/4 4 5 6 8
E H K R S 3 2 5/16 2.19 2-1/4 3-3/4 2-1/2 3/8 2.76 2-3/4 4-1/2 2-1/2 3/8 3.32 3-1/2 5-1/2 3 7/16 4.10 4-1/4 6-1/2 3 7/16 4.88 5-1/4 8-1/2 3 9/16 6.44 7-1/8
AB AH AL AO AT BB DD EE ST ZK NT 7/16 1-5/8 1 3/8 1/8 1-1/8 5/16-24 3/8 4 4-3/4 3/8-16 9/16 1-15/16 1-1/4 1/2 1/8 1-3/8 3/8-24 1/2 5 6 1/2-13 9/16 2-1/4 1-1/4 1/2 1/8 13/8 3/8-24 1/2 5 6 1/2-13 11/16 2-3/4 1-3/8 5/8 3/16 1-13/16 1/2-20 1/2 5-3/4 7 5/8-11 13/16 3-1/4 1-3/8 5/8 3/16 1-13/16 1/2-20 3/4 5-3/4 7 3/4-10 13/16 4-1/4 1-13/16 11/16 1/4 2-5/16 5/8-18 3/4 6-5/8 8 3/4-10
L11
Kits
Shocks
DD
BB
RL
FILLER PORT E 4 R SQUARE
3TK
FC
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes

C086
L12
RL Series
Stand Alone Rod Lock Device
L
Contents
Specifications .................................................................... L14 Ordering Information.......................................................... L14 Dimensions ........................................................................ L15 Options .............................................................................. L15
L13
Kits
Shocks
RL
3TK
FC
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Specifications / Ordering
The RL Series rod lock is used in applications where the locking of linear travel is required. It is commonly used in workholding applications and for locking tools and fixtures in the event of air pressure or electrical control failure.
Complementary Products RL Series Stand Alone Rod Lock Device

Technical Data
Working medium Working pressure Working temperature Locking pressure Holding Forces
Model 12TRL* 16TRL* 20TRL* 25TRL* 32TRL* Holding Force Pounds (lbs.) 123 193 481 1211 1894 Newtons (N) 550 860 2140 5390 8425
C086
Dry, filtered compressed air Max. 10 Bar (145 PSI) -20 to +80C (-4F to +176F) 4 Bar (58 PSI) 10%
Application
Clamping: Without an appropriate air signal to the rod lock
pressure port, the rod lock clamps to the precision metric rod and prevents rod movement in the axial direction. Delatching: When 4 Bar (58 PSI) of air pressure is applied to the port, the rod lock releases and allows free movement of the rod. This will be required for installation. Locking Direction: The rod lock is designed specifically to prevent rod movement in the axial direction only. It is not recommended for locking rotary rod motion. Rod Material: The Series RL rod lock is a precision locking device, therefore strict rod tolerances and rod material specifications are required to ensure safe and proper operation. Minimum requirements for the rod material include a chrome plated surface finish of 10 microinches or less and a surface hardness of 52 Rc. Rod material may be ordered separately in custom lengths. See next page for how to order. Environment: The rod lock is recommended for use in dry, clean conditions. Please take precautions to prevent moisture from entering the pressure port or the exhaust port of the locking device.
* Character reserved for port style
There should be no relative motion between the rod and the Rod Lock Device when the locking device is activated. The locking device is not intended to brake a movement in repeated sequences.
Considerations for Rod Sizing

When applying a rod lock device, it is important to consider the loading forces which will be imposed on the rod in the axial direction. For applications where the rod lock and its associated load impose a compressive force on the rod, please consider the axial compression force and rod length to select the appropriate rod diameter for preventing rod buckling. In situations where the rod lock and its associated load place the rod in tension, please take care to securely fasten the rod ends to the machine member.
Example: 25TRLU
25
TRL
Rod Diameter
Ports U R NPTF BSPP
Specify 12, 16, 20, 25 or 32 (mm)
L14
Catalog 0900P-4
Dimensions / Options
Basic Rod Lock
Mounting Surface DK 6 K DD MM B BG (4) places

Rod Lock with Flange Mount
C086
E R
TG Square E Square
VE
L1 H
G 1/8"
TF UF
MF FB 4 Holes
Table 1 Mounting Dimensions

Part 12TRL* 16TRL* 20TRL* 25TRL* 32TRL* Rod Dia. MM 12.00 (-.04) 16.00 (-.04) 20.00 (-.04) 25.00 (-.04) 32.00 (-.04) B
D11
BG 16 16 16 16 20
DD M6 M6 M8 M10 M12
DK 10 10 13 16 18
E 46.5 51 76 114.5 140
FB 7 9 9 14 16
H 76 81.2 100.8 146 165.2
K 5.5 5.5 7.5 8 9
L1 16 16 26 50 60
MF 10 10 12 16 20
R 32 36 50 75 90
TF 64 72 100 150 180
TG 32.5 38 56.5 89 110
UF 80 92 129 186 220
VE 4.5 4.5 5 4 6
30 35 45 55 60
* Character reserved for port style
Mounting kits are available separately from the rod lock device. Please use the following part numbers to order. Mounting fasteners are included with the kits.
12TRL* 16TRL* 20TRL* 25TRL* 32TRL* * Character reserved for port style
L075370032 L075370040 L075370100 L075370125 L075370063
Metric Rod Material

Rods will be supplied in the specified length with chamfered ends. Please note, the rod material is case hardened and requires annealing prior to machining. Parker is pleased to quote custom machined rods per customer supplied drawings.
! Caution: Using piston rod material which does not meet the tolerance and finished conditions as listed on the previous page may prevent the locking device from properly holding the intended load.
How to Order
Example: 25MMROD2500
L
MMROD 2500
Rod Length Specify length in mm (Maximum 3600 mm)
25
Rod Diameter Specify 12, 16, 20, 25 or 32 (mm)
L15
Kits
Shocks
RL
3TK
FC
Flange Mounting Kit
Model
Flange Mount
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes

C086
L16
Shock Absorbers
L
Contents
Features ............................................................................L18 Model Rating Charts.................................................. L19-L20
L17
Kits
Shocks
RL
3TK
FC
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Features
Parker Hannifin shock absorbers are built to the highest standards. A majority of Parker shock absorber bodies and inner pressure chambers are fully machined from solid alloy steel. A completely closedend, one-piece pressure chamber is provided without seals or retaining rings. The advantage of this design is that the Parker shock absorber is able to withstand much higher internal pressures or overload without damage, thereby providing a high operational safety margin. The features listed on this page are representative of the rugged, dependable components that are built into each Parker shock absorber.
Complementary Products Shock Absorbers
See Industrial Shock Absorber Catalog AU08-1022-1/NA for more information.
Piston Rod high tensile steel hardened and corrosion resistant
Main Bearing system lubricated
Piston Ring hardened for long life Pressure Chamber made from hardened alloy steel. Machined from solid with closed rear end to withstand internal pressures up to 14,500 psi (1000 bar).
Outer Body heavy-duty, one piece, fully machined from solid steel to ensure total reliability.
L18
Catalog 0900P-4
Model Rating Charts
Industrial Shock Absorbers are rated by capacity for the purpose of selecting the proper unit for an applications energy requirements. Ratings are determined by the effective weight that the shock absorber can stop and the energy it can absorb per cycle and per hour. These ratings relate to the mechanical and thermal capacity of a shock absorber because the mechanical energy is converted to heat and dissipated.
Self-Compensating Models
Model Number MC 9-1 MC 9-2 MC 10L MC 10H MC 25L MC 25 MC 25H MC 75-1 MC 75-2 MC 75-3 MC 150 MC 150H MC 150H2 MC 225 MC 225H MC 225H2 MC 600 MC 600H MC 600H2 SC 190-1 SC 190-2 SC 190-3 SC 190-4 SC 300-1 SC 300-2 SC 300-3 SC 300-4 SC 300-5 SC 300-6 SC 300-7 SC 300-8 SC 300-9 SC 650-1 SC 650-2 SC 650-3 SC 650-4 SC 650-5 SC 650-6 SC 650-7 SC 650-8 SC 650-9 SC 925-1 SC 925-2 SC 925-3 SC 925-4 MC 3325-1 MC 3325-2 MC 3325-3 MC 3325-4 MC 3350-1 MC 3350-2 MC 3350-3 MC 3350-4 MC 3625-1 MC 3625-2 MC 3625-3 MC 3625-4 MC 3650-1 MC 3650-2 MC 3650-3 MC 3650-4 MC 4525-1 MC 4525-2 MC 4525-3 MC 4525-4 MC 4550-1 MC 4550-2 MC 4550-3 MC 4550-4 MC 4575-1 MC 4575-2 MC 4575-3 MC 4575-4 MC 6450-1 MC 6450-2 MC 6450-3 MC 6450-4 MC 64100-1 MC 64100-2 MC 64100-3 MC 64100-4 MC 64150-1 MC 64150-2 MC 64150-3 MC 64150-4
Continued on next page
Stroke Inches 1 inch = 25.4mm 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.50 1.00
E3 Max Energy per Cycle in-lbs 1 in-lb = 0.11 Nm 9 4 7 20 75 150 225 600
0.63
225
0.75
300
0.59 0.59 1.00
650 620 650
0.91
1,860
1.58
975
0.91
1,350
0.91
1,350
670,000
1,100,000
1,500,000
0.91
3,000
950,000
1,400,000
1,700,000
1.91
6,000
1,000,000
1,700,000
2,200,000
2.91
9,000
1,300,000
2,000,000
2,500,000
1.91
15,000
1,300,000
2,600,000
3,400,000
3.91
30,000
1,700,000
3,400,000
4,400,000
5.91
45,000
2,200,000
4,400,000
5,700,000
L19
Kits
1.91
2,700
760,000
1,200,000
1,600,000
Shocks
1.91
2,700
We Effective Weight lbs 1 lb = 0.45 kg 1.35-7.0 1.75-9.0 0.75-6.0 1.5-11 1.5-5 4-12 10-30 0.5-2.5 2-14 6-80 2-22 20-200 150-450 5-55 50-500 400-2,000 20-300 250-2,500 880-5,000 3-15 8-40 20-100 50-225 3-18 10-60 30-180 70-450 25-100 75-300 200-400 300-1,500 700-4,300 17-100 50-300 150-900 450-2,600 50-250 200-800 700-2,400 1,700-5,800 4,000-14,000 30-200 90-600 250-1,600 750-4,600 20-80 68-272 230-920 780-3,120 40-160 136-544 460-1,840 1,560-6,240 20-80 68-272 230-920 780-3,120 40-160 136-544 460-1,840 1,560-6,240 50-20 170-680 575-2,300 1,950-7,800 100-400 340-1,360 1,150-4,600 3,900-15,600 150-600 510-2,040 1,730-6,920 5,850-23,400 300-1200 1,020-4,080 3,460-13,840 11,700-46,800 600-2,400 2,040-8,160 6,920-27,680 23,400-93,600 900-3,600 3,060-12,240 10,380-41,520 35,100-140,400
E4 Max Energy per hour, in lbs/hour 1 in lb/hour = 0.11 Nm/hour Self-Contained 18,000 35,000 120,000 250,000 300,000 400,000 600,000 A/O Tank N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A/O Recirculating N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
300,000
N/A
N/A
600,000
N/A
N/A
800,000
N/A
N/A
670,000
1,100,000
1,500,000
760,000
1,200,000
1,600,000
RL
3TK
FC
AC
400,000
N/A
N/A
Catalog 0900P-4
Model Rating Charts

Self-Compensating Models (continued)
Model Number CA 2x2-1 CA 2x2-2 CA 2x2-3 CA 2x2-4 CA 2x4-1 CA 2x4-2 CA 2x4-3 CA 2x4-4 CA 2x6-1 CA 2x6-2 CA 2x6-3 CA 2x6-4 CA 2x8-1 CA 2x8-2 CA 2x8-3 CA 2x8-4 CA 2x10-1 CA 2x10-2 CA 2x10-3 CA 2x10-4 CA 3x5-1 CA 3x5-2 CA 3x5-3 CA 3x5-4 CA 3x8-1 CA 3x8-2 CA 3x8-3 CA 3x8-4 CA 3x12-1 CA 3x12-2 CA 3x12-3 CA 3x12-4 CA 4x6-3 CA 4x6-5 CA 4x6-7 CA 4x8-3 CA 4x8-5 CA 4x8-7 CA 4x16-3 CA 4x16-5 CA 4x16-7 Stroke Inches 1 inch = 25.4mm 2.00 E3 Max Energy per Cycle in-lbs 1 in-lb = 0.11 Nm 32,000

We Effective Weight lbs 1 lb = 0.45 kg 1,600-4,800 4,000-12,000 10,000-30,000 25,000-75,000 3,200-9,600 8,000-24,000 20,000-60,000 50,000-150,000 4,800-14,400 12,000-36,000 30,000-90,000 75,000-225,000 6,400-19,200 16,000-48,000 40,000-120,000 100,000-300,000 8,000-24,000 20,000-60,000 50,000-150,000 125,000-375,000 6,400-19,200 16,000-48,000 40,000-120,000 100,000-300,000 10,240-30,720 25,600-76,800 64,000-192,000 160,000-480,000 15,360-46,080 38,400-115,200 96,000-288,000 240,000-720,000 8,000-19,000 19,000-41,000 41,000-94,000 11,000-25,000 25,000-55,000 55,000-125,000 22,000-50,000 50,000-110,000 110,000-250,000 E4 Max Energy per hour, in lbs/hour 1 in lb/hour = 0.11 Nm/hour Self-Contained 9,600,000 A/O Tank 12,000,000 A/O Recirculating 15,600,000
4.00
64,000
12,000,000
15,000,000
19,500,000
6.00
96,000
14,400,000
18,000,000
23,500,000
8.00
128,000
16,800,000
21,000,000
27,000,000
10.00
160,000
19,200,000
24,000,000
31,000,000
5.00
125,000
20,000,000
25,000,000
32,500,000
8.00
200,000
32,000,000
40,000,000
52,000,000
12.00
300,000
48,000,000
60,000,000
78,000,000
6.00 8.00 16.00
420,000 560,000 1,120,000
27,000,000 30,000,000 50,000,000
45,000,000 50,000,000 85,000,000
58,000,000 65,000,000 110,000,000
Adjustable Models
MA 35 MA 150 MA 225 MA 600 MA 900 MA 3325 MA 3350 MA 3625 MA 3650 MA 4525 MA 4550 MA 4575 MA 6450 MA 64100 MA 64150 1-1/2x2 1-1/2x3-1/2 1-1/2x5 1-1/2x6-1/2 A 2x2 A 2x4 A 2x6 A 2x8 A 2x10 A 3x5 A 3x8 A 3x12 0.40 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.58 0.91 1.91 0.91 1.91 0.91 1.91 2.91 1.91 3.91 5.91 2.00 3.50 5.00 6.50 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 5.00 8.00 12.00 35 150 225 600 900 1,500 3,000 1,500 3,000 3,450 6,900 10,350 18,000 36,000 54,000 16,000 28,000 40,000 52,000 32,000 80,000 120,000 170,000 210,000 140,000 250,000 390,000 13-125 2-200 5-500 20-3,000 30-4,500 20-3,800 28-5,400 20-3,800 28-5,400 95-22,000 150-32,000 155-33,000 480-110,000 600-115,000 730-175,000 430-70,000 480-80,000 500-90,000 680-100,000 560-170,000 510-160,000 570-190,000 580-200,000 720-250,000 1,050-340,000 1,200-400,000 1,350-450,000 53,000 300,000 400,000 600,000 800,000 670,000 760,000 670,000 760,000 950,000 1,000,000 1,300,000 1,300,000 1,700,000 2,200,000 3,200,000 5,600,000 8,000,000 10,400,000 9,600,000 12,000,000 14,400,000 16,800,000 19,200,000 20,000,000 32,000,000 48,000,000 N/A 1,100,000 1,200,000 1,100,000 1,200,000 1,400,000 1,700,000 2,000,000 2,600,000 3,400,000 4,400,000 4,000,000 7,000,000 10,000,000 13,000,000 12,000,000 15,000,000 18,000,000 21,000,000 24,000,000 25,000,000 40,000,000 60,000,000 N/A 1,500,000 1,600,000 1,500,000 1,600,000 1,700,000 2,200,000 2,500,000 3,400,000 4,400,000 5,700,000 5,200,000 9,100,000 13,000,000 17,000,000 15,600,000 19,500,000 23,500,000 27,000,000 31,000,000 32,500,000 52,000,000 78,000,000
Low Velocity Adjustable Models

ML 3325 ML 3350 ML 3625 ML 3650 ML 4525 ML 4550 ML 6425 ML 6450 0.91 1.91 0.91 1.91 0.91 1.91 0.91 1.91 1,500 3,000 1,500 3,000 3,450 6,900 9,000 18,000 0.05-1.5 0.05-1.5 0.05-1.5 0.05-1.5 670,000 760,000 670,000 760,000 950,000 1,000,000 1,100,000 1,300,000 1,100,000 1,200,000 1,100,000 1,200,000 1,400,000 1,700,000 2,200,000 2,600,000 1,500,000 1,600,000 1,500,000 1,600,000 1,700,000 2,200,000 2,900,000 3,400,000
L20
Transition Kits for Automation Components
L
Contents
How to Select a Transition Kit ............................................ L22 Transition Plates Used to attach a component to a slide ...................L23-L24 Transition Couplers Used to attach a component to a rotary actuator ...L25-L26
L21
Kits
Shocks
RL
3TK
FC
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Selecting a Kit Step 1

Establish the Primary and Secondary Units
The Primary Unit is established when the transition plate is mounted to the dynamic portion of the unit, i.e. tool plate, saddle on slides or shaft on rotary actuators. The Secondary Unit is established when the transition plate is mounted to the stationary portion of the unit, i.e. body mounts.
Complementary Products Transition Kits
Step 2
Properly Size All Components

For sizing of components, refer to the appropriate individual product section in this catalog. Remember to add the entire weight (component + tooling + transition plate + part, etc.) of the secondary unit when determining the size of the primary unit.
Step 3
Determine the Orientation Desired

Secondary units can be mounted in various orientations. From the orientation tables on the following pages, select the one that best illustrates your application.
Step 4
Determine the Keyhole Orientation (Rotary Components Only)

A hole pattern centerline the same as the keyway is standard. The hole pattern centerline can be rotated clockwise to keyway in increments of 5. Square hole patterns may be rotated up to 85. Rectangular hole patterns may be rotated up to 175. See examples below. Examples: HOLE PATTERN CENTERLINE SAME AS KEYWAY
KEYWAY C L
HOLE PATTERN CENTERLINE 20 CLOCKWISE TO KEYWAY

KEYWAY C L 20
Step 5
Consult Applications Department to Design Your Kit

Based on the information gathered above, the Applications Department will select the transition kit to fit your requirements.
L22
Catalog 0900P-4
Plate Kits Transition Plate Kits

Connect Components to Thrust, Reach or Base Slides
Primary Unit:
Thrust and Reach Slides
Rotary Actuators, Slides and Grippers
Secondary Units:
Rotary Actuators, Slides and Grippers
Primary Unit:
Base Slides L23
Kits
Shocks
RL
3TK
FC
AC
Secondary Units:
Catalog 0900P-4
Plate Kits Mounting Slide to Slide

PRIMARY SERIES
ORIENTATION 1 2 3 4
P5L P5E HBT/HBR XLT/XLR
P5L* HBB XLB
* Note: P5L Series units connect without transition plates in Orientation 1, where the thrust or reach version is mounted to a base slide version.
Mounting Rotary Actuator to Slide

PRIMARY SERIES
P5L P5E HBT/HBR XLT/XLR
ORIENTATION 1 2 3 4
P5L HBB XLB
Mounting Gripper to Slide

PRIMARY SERIES ORIENTATION 1 2 3 4
P5L HBC HBT/HBR P5E XLT/XLR
P5L HBB XLB
L24
Catalog 0900P-4
Coupler Kits Transition Couplers

Connect Components to Rotary Actuators
Secondary Units:
Slides, Rotary Actuators and Grippers
Primary Unit:
Primary Unit:
Vane Actuators
Secondary Units:
Grippers L25
Kits
Shocks
RL
3TK
Rack & Pinion Rotary Actuators
FC
AC
Catalog 0900P-4
Coupler Kits Mounting Slide to Rotary Actuator

HOLE PATTERN CENTERLINE SAME AS KEYWAY
KEYWAY C L

20
KEYWAY C L
PRIMARY SERIES
ORIENTATION 1 2 3
XR
PTR
Mounting Gripper to Rotary Actuator

HOLE PATTERN CENTERLINE SAME AS KEYWAY
KEYWAY C L

KEYWAY C L 20
Standard Orientation Standard orientation for each series is shown below. PV & WR Series coupler can accommodate two positions of the gripper. See drawing on previous page.
XR Series
PTR Series
PV & WR Series
L26
Electronic Sensors
Solid State, Reed and Proximity Sensors
Section M
Contents
Sensor Selection Guides ............................................ M2-M4 Global Drop-In Sensors .............................................. M5-M6 P8S Drop-In Sensors and Accessories .................... M7-M10 P1A Series Sensors and Accessories .................... M11-M12 LP/LPM Series Sensors ................................................. M13 RC Series Sensors ......................................................... M14 PRN Series ............................................................. M15-M16
PV, WR, XR Series Sensors ................................... M17-M18 PTR Series Sensors ............................................... M19-M20 Weld Immune Sensors ................................................... M21 Cordsets ......................................................................... M22 Valvetronic 110 Connection Block .................................. M23 NAMUR Sensors .................................................... M24-M26 End-of-Stroke Proximity Sensors............................ M27-M32
M1
Proximity
NAMUR
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
Selection Guide
Electronic Sensors Solid State and Reed PNP Solid State Sensor Selection Guide
8mm Quick Connect w/ 1 m Lead P8S-GPSCX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX N/A P8S-GPSCX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GPSCX N/A P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX N/A P8S-GPSCX N/A P8S-GPSCX N/A P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX P8S-GPSCX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Series P1M Standard Sensor P1M Right Angle Sensor
Bore Size or Type All All 9/16"
3m Flying Leads P8S-GPFLX P8S-SPELXD L076990000 2 L077000000 2 L077010000 2 L077020000 2 P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-MPFLX P8S-GPFLX P1A-2XMK 1 P1A-2XMK 1 P1A-2XMK 1 P1A-2XMK 1 P1A-2XMK 1 P8S-GPFLX P8S-MPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX L074820000 3 P8S-GPFLX P8S-SPELXD P8S-GPFLX P8S-MPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFLX SMH-1P 2 SMC-1P 2 N/A N/A N/A
10m Flying Leads P8S-GPFTX P8S-SPETXD N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-MPFTX P8S-GPFTX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GPFTX P8S-MPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX N/A P8S-GPFTX P8S-SPETXD P8S-GPFTX P8S-MPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPFTX N/A N/A N/A SWH-1P 3 SWH-2P 3
8mm Quick Connect P8S-GPSHX P8S-SPTHXD L07699000C L07700000C L07701000C L07702000C P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-MPSHX P8S-GPSHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GPSHX P8S-MPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX L07482000C P8S-GPSHX P8S-SPTHXD P8S-GPSHX P8S-MPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPSHX SMH-1PC SMC-1PC N/A SWH-1PC SWH-2PC
12mm Quick Connect P8S-GPMHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX N/A P8S-GPMHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GPMHX N/A P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX N/A P8S-GPMHX N/A P8S-GPMHX N/A P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPMHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Bracket
Sensor Bracket Page # Page # M5 M10 M13 M13 M13 M13 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M7 M5 M11 M11 M11 M11 M11 M5 M7 M5 M5 M5 M14 M5 M10 M5 M7 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M17 M17 M19 M19 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M11 M11 M11 M11 M11 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9
Compact Cylinders
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC03 P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC03 N/A P8S-TMA0X P8S-TMA0Z P8S-TMC01 P1A-2CCC P1A-2DCC P1A-2FCC P1A-2HCC P1A-2JCC N/A N/A P8S-TMA0X P8S-TMA0Y N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-TMA0X 4 P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC03 N/A N/A N/A Included Included
LPM
3/4" - 1-1/8" 1-1/2" - 2" 2-1/2" - 4"
20 - 25mm P1L 32 - 63mm 80 - 100mm SRM/SRDM 9/16" - 3/4" 1-1/16" - 2-1/2" 1-1/8" - 2-1/2" 3" - 4" 1-1/2" - 5" 6" - 8" 1-1/8" - 5" 10-25mm 10mm P1A Right Angle Sensor P1D Standard & Clean Profiles P1D Standard Profile Mini Sensors P1D Tie Rod Version 12mm 16mm 20mm 25mm All All All All All All Flush Mount Right Angle All All All All 20 - 25mm P5L 32 - 63mm 80 - 100mm Normally Open Normally Closed All 10, 15 20, 25, 32
P 3MA/4MA Standard Sensor 3MA/4MA 3MA/4MA MiniGlobal Sensor P1A Standard Sensor
ISO Cylinders
Tie Rod Cylinders
Rodless Cylinders
P1X P1Z RC P5T
Guided Cylinders
P5T2 P5TT & P5TD P5E HB
Rotary Actuators
PV WR XR PRN(A) PTR
1 Flying leads are 2 meters in length 2 Flying Leads are 1.5 meters in length 3 Flying leads are 1 meter in length
4 Not necessary for HB if it includes P1D cylinder Note: See page M21 for Weld Immune Sensors and pages M24-M26 for NAMUR Intrinsically Safe Sensors.
M2
Catalog 0900P-4
Selection Guide
Electronic Sensors Solid State and Reed NPN Solid State Sensor Selection Guide
8mm Quick Connect w/ 1m Lead P8S-GNSCX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX P8S-GPNSCX N/A P8S-GNSCX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GNSCX N/A P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX N/A P8S-GNSCX N/A P8S-GNSCX N/A P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX P8S-GNSCX N/A N/A See pages H15-H16 N/A N/A SWH-1N 3 SWH-2N 3 SWH-1NC SWH-2NC N/A N/A N/A N/A Included Included M19 M19
Bore Size or Type All All 9/16"
3m Flying Leads P8S-GNFLX P8S-SNELX L076950000 2 L076960000 2 L076970000 2 L076980000 2 P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-MNFLX P8S-GNFLX P1A-2XLK 1 P1A-2XLK 1 P1A-2XLK 1 P1A-2XLK 1 P1A-2XLK 1 P8S-GNFLX P8S-MNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX L074810000 3 P8S-GNFLX P8S-SNELX P8S-GNFLX P8S-MNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFLX SMH-1N 2 SMC-1N 2
10m Flying Leads P8S-GNFTX P8S-SNETX N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GPNFTX P8S-MNFTX P8S-GNFTX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GNFTX P8S-MNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX N/A P8S-GNFTX P8S-SNETX P8S-GNFTX P8S-MNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNFTX N/A N/A
8mm Quick Connect P8S-GNSHX P8S-SNTHX L07695000C L07696000C L07697000C L07698000C P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-MNSHX P8S-GNSHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GNSHX P8S-MNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX L07481000C P8S-GNSHX P8S-SNTHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-MNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNSHX SMH-1NC SMC-1NC
12mm Quick Connect P8S-GNMHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX N/A P8S-GNMHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GNMHX N/A P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX N/A P8S-GNMHX N/A P8S-GNMHX N/A P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNMHX N/A N/A
Bracket
Sensor Bracket Page # Page # M5 M10 M13 M13 M13 M13 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M7 M5 M11 M11 M11 M11 M11 M5 M7 M5 M5 M5 M14 M5 M10 M5 M7 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M17 M17 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M11 M11 M11 M11 M11 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9
Compact Cylinders
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC03 P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC03 N/A P8S-TMA0X P8S-TMA0Z P8S-TMC01 P1A-2CCC P1A-2DCC P1A-2FCC P1A-2HCC P1A-2JCC N/A N/A P8S-TMA0X P8S-TMA0Y N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-TMA0X 4 P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC03 N/A N/A
LPM
3/4" - 1-1/8" 1-1/2" - 2" 2-1/2" - 4"
20 - 25mm P1L 32 - 63mm 80 - 100mm SRM/SRDM 9/16" - 3/4" 1-1/16" - 2-1/2" 1-1/8" - 2-1/2" 3" - 4" 1-1/2" - 5" 6" - 8" 1-1/8" - 5" 10-25mm 10mm Bore P1A Right Angle Sensor P1D Standard & Clean Profiles P1D Standard Profile Mini Sensors P1D Tie Rod Version 12mm Bore 16mm Bore 20mm Bore 25mm Bore All All All All All All Flush Mount Right Angle All All All All 20 - 25mm P5L 32 - 63mm 80 - 100mm Normally Open Normally Closed All 10, 15 20, 25, 32
P 3MA/4MA Standard Sensor 3MA/4MA 3MA/4MA MiniGlobal Sensor P1A Standard Sensor
ISO Cylinders
Tie Rod Cylinders
Rodless Cylinders
P1X P1Z RC P5T
Guided Cylinders
P5T2 P5TT & P5TD P5E HB
Rotary Actuators
PV WR XR PRN(A) PTR
1 Flying leads are 2 meters in length 2 Flying Leads are 1.5 meters in length 3 Flying leads are 1 meter in length
4 Not necessary for HB if it includes P1D cylinder Note: See page M21 for Weld Immune Sensors and pages M24-M26 for NAMUR Intrinsically Safe Sensors.
M3
Proximity
NAMUR
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
Selection Guide
Electronic Sensors Solid State and Reed Reed Sensor Selection Guide
8 mm Quick Connect w/ 1 m Lead P8S-GRSCX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX N/A P8S-GRSCX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GRSCX N/A P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX N/A P8S-GRSCX N/A P8S-GRSCX N/A P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX P8S-GRSCX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Bore Size or Type All All 9/16" 3/4" - 1-1/8" 1-1/2" - 2" 2-1/2" - 4" 20 - 25mm
3m Flying Leads P8S-GRFLX P8S-SRELX L077030000 1 L077040000 1 L077050000 1 L077060000 1 P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-MRFLX P8S-GRFLX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GRFLX P8S-MRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX L074800000 2 P8S-GRFLX P8S-SRELX P8S-GRFLX P8S-MRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFLX SMR-1 1 SMR-1L 1 SMD-1L 1 SWR-1 2 SWR-2 2
10m Flying Leads P8S-GRFTX P8S-SRETX N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-MRFTX P8S-GRFTX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GRFTX P8S-MRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX N/A P8S-GRFTX P8S-SRETX P8S-GRFTX P8S-MRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRFTX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
8mm Quick Connect P8S-GRSHX P8S-SRTHX L07703000C L07704000C L07705000C L07706000C P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-MRSHX P8S-GRSHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GRSHX P8S-MRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX L07480000C P8S-GRSHX P8S-SRTHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-MRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRSHX SMR-1C SMR-1LC SMD-1LC SWR-1C SWR-2C Note:
12mm Quick Connect P8S-GRMHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX N/A P8S-GRMHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-GRMHX N/A P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX N/A P8S-GRMHX N/A P8S-GRMHX N/A P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRMHX N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Bracket
Sensor Page # M6 M10 M13 M13 M13 M13 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M6 M6 M8 M6 M6 M6 M14 M6 M10 M6 M8 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M18 M18 M18 M16 M20 M20
Bracket Page # M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9 M9
Compact Cylinders
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC03 P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC03 N/A P8S-TMA0X P8S-TMA0Z P8S-TMC01 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-TMA0X P8S-TMA0Y N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P8S-TMA0X 3 P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC03 N/A N/A N/A Included Included
LPM
P1L
32 - 63mm 80 - 100mm 9/16" - 3/4" 1-1/16" - 2-1/2" 1-1/8" - 2-1/2" 3" - 4" 1-1/2" - 5" 6" - 8" 1-1/8" - 5" 10-25mm 10mm Bore 12mm Bore 16mm Bore 20mm Bore 25mm Bore All All All All All All Flush Mount Right Angle All All All All 20 - 25mm 32 - 63mm 80 - 100mm N.O. High Amp N.O. Low Amp N.C. Low Amp 50 - 800 10, 15 20, 25, 32
SRM/SRDM P 3MA/4MA Standard Sensor 3MA/4MA 3MA/4MA MiniGlobal Sensor P1A Standard Sensor P1A Right Angle Sensor P1D Standard & Clean Profiles P1D Standard Profile Mini Sensors P1D Tie Rod Version
ISO Cylinders
Tie Rod Cylinders
Rodless Cylinders
P1X P1Z RC P5T
Guided Cylinders
P5T2 P5TT & P5TD P5E HB P5L
Rotary Actuators
PV WR XR PRN PTR
See Model Code
1 Flying Leads are 1.5 meters in length 2 Flying leads are 1 meter in length 3 Not necessary for HB if it includes P1D cylinder
See page M21 for Weld Immune Sensors and pages M24-M26 for NAMUR Intrinsically Safe Sensors.
M4
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensors Global Drop-In Solid State Sensors

Wiring 3m Flying Leads 10m Flying Leads 0.3m Lead with 8mm Connector 0.3m Lead with 12mm Connector 1m Lead with 8mm Connector PNP Sensor P8S-GPFLX P8S-GPFTX P8S-GPSHX P8S-GPMHX P8S-GPSCX
Electronic Sensors Solid State and Reed
NPN Sensor P8S-GNFLX P8S-GNFTX P8S-GNSHX P8S-GNMHX P8S-GNSCX
PNP Sensor ATEX Certified P8S-GPFLX/EX
N/A
Specifications
Type ......................................................... Electronic Output Function ....................................... Normally Open Sensor Output ......................................... PNP/NPN Operating Voltage .................................... 10 - 30VDC 4.3 Continuous Current ................................. 100 mA max. Response Sensitivity ............................... 28 Gauss min. 6.1 Switching Frequency ............................... 5 KHz Power Consumption ................................ 10 mA max. Voltage Drop ............................................ 2.5 VDC max. Ripple ...................................................... 10% of Operating Voltage Hysteresis ................................................ 1.5 mm max. Repeatability ............................................ 0.1 mm max. EMC......................................................... EN 60 947-5-2 Short-circuit Protection ............................ Yes Power-up Pulse Suppression .................. Yes Reverse Polarity Protection ..................... Yes Enclosure Rating ..................................... IP 68 Shock and Vibration Stress ..................... 30g, 11 ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm Operating Temperature Range ................ -25C to +75C (-13F to 167F) Housing Material ..................................... PA 12, Black Connector Cable...................................... PVC Connector ................................................ PUR cable w/8 or 12 mm connector
Sensing Face Center
9.7
L = 300
31.5
M8x1
36
SOLID STATE SENSOR WIRING CONNECTION

Flying Lead or 8 mm Connector (shown)
4 1 3
Pin 1 4 3 Wire Brown Black Blue Function Operating Voltage (+VDC) Output signal (N.O.) -VDC
12 mm Connector
2* 3 4
* Pin 2 not present.
Pin 1
Wire Brown Black White Blue
Function Operating Voltage (+VDC) Output Signal (N.O.) Not Used -VDC
4 2* 3
PNP
bn 1 +VDC 1
NPN
bn LOAD bk 4 LOAD bk 4 +VDC
PNP
bn bk bu
1 4 3
NPN
+ DC
bn bk bu
1 4 3
+ DC
bu
-VDC
bu
-VDC
M5
Proximity
NAMUR
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
Sensors Global Drop-In Reed Sensors
4.3
Wiring 3m Flying Leads 10m Flying Leads 0.3m Lead with 8mm Connector 0.3m Lead with 12mm Connector 1m Lead with 8mm Connector
Reed Sensor P8S-GRFLX P8S-GRFTX P8S-GRSHX P8S-GRMHX P8S-GRSCX
6.1
Sensing Face Center
14
L = 300
31.5
M8x1
Specifications
Type ............................................. 2-Wire Reed Output Function ........................... Normally Open Operating Voltage ........................ 10 - 120 VAC* 10 - 30 VDC Switching Power .......................... 6 W/VA Continuous Current ..................... 100 mA max. Response Sensitivity ................... 30 Gauss min. Switching Frequency ................... 400 Hz Voltage Drop ................................ 2.5 V max. Ripple .......................................... 10% of Operating Voltage Hysteresis .................................... 1.5 mm max. Repeatability ................................ 0.2 mm max. EMC............................................. EN 60 947-5-2 Reverse Polarity Protection ......... Yes Enclosure Rating ......................... IP 68 Shock and Vibration Stress ......... 30g, 11 ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm Operating Temperature Range .... -25C to +75C (-13F to 167F) Housing Material.......................... PA 12, Black Connector Cable.......................... PVC Connector .................................... PUR cable with 8 or 12 mm connector
*8mm connector rated for 50 VAC max.
36
REED SENSOR - WIRING CONNECTION Flying Lead or 8 mm Connector

4 1 3
Pin 1 4 3 Wire Brown Black Blue Function Operating Voltage (+V) Not Used Output Signal (-V or Ground)
12 mm Connector
2* 3 4 1
Pin 1 2*
* Pin 2 not present.
Wire Brown White Blue Black
Function Operating Voltage (+V) Not Used Output Signal (-V or Ground) Not Used
3 4
Circuit for Switching Contact Protection (For Inductive Loads, e.g. Solenoids, Relays)
(Required for proper operation 24V DC) Put Diode parallel to loads following polarity as shown below.
Brown Load D Blue
(Recommended for longer life 120 VAC) Put a resistor and capacitor in parallel with the load. Select the resistor and capacitor according to the load. Typical Example: CR: Relay coil (under 2W coil rating) R: Resistor 1 K - 5 K, 1/4 W C: Capacitor 0.1 F, 600 V
Brown Load R Blue C AC
D: Diode: select a Diode with the breakdown voltage and current rating according to the load. Typical Example100 Volt, 1 Amp Diode CR: Relay coil (under 0.5W coil rating)
DC
Caution
Use an ampmeter to test reed sensor current. Testing devices such as incandescent light bulbs may subject the reed sensor to high in-rush loads. NOTE: When checking an unpowered reed sensor for continuity with a digital ohmmeter the resistance reading will change from infinity to a very large resistance (2 M ohm) when the sensor is activated. This is due to the presence of a diode in the reed sensor. Anti-magnetic shielding is recommended for reed sensors exposed to high external RF or magnetic fields. The magnetic field strength of the piston magnet is designed to operate with our sensors. Other manufacturers sensors may not operate correctly in conjunction with these magnets.
Use relay coils for reed sensor contact protection. The operation of some 120 VAC PLCs (especially some older AllenBradley PLCs) can overload the reed sensor. The sensor may fail to release after the piston magnet has passed. This problem may be corrected by the placement of a 700 to 1K OHM resistor between the sensor and the PLC input terminal. Consult the manufacturer of the PLC for appropriate circuit. Sensors with long wire leads (greater than 15 feet) can cause capacitance build-up and sticking will result. Attach a resistor in series with the reed sensor (the resistor should be installed as close as possible to the sensor). The resistor should be selected such that R (ohms) >E/0.3.
M6
Catalog 0900P-4
P8S Drop-In Sensors Mini-Global Drop-In Solid State Sensors

Wiring 3m Flying Leads 10m Flying Leads 0.3m Lead with 8mm Connector PNP Sensor NPN Sensor P8S-MPFLX P8S-MPFTX P8S-MNFLX P8S-MNFTX
P8S-MPSHX P8S-MNSHX
Sensing Face Center
Solid State Sensor

SPECIFICATIONS Type ................................................... Electronic Output Function ................................. Normally Open Sensor Output ................................... PNP or NPN Operating Voltage .............................. 10 - 30VDC Continuous Current ........................... 70 mA Response Sensitivity ......................... 48 Gauss Switching Frequency ......................... 1000 Hz Power Consumption .......................... 8 mA without load Voltage Drop ...................................... 2.5 VDC Ripple ................................................ 10% of Operating Voltage Hysteresis .......................................... 15 Gauss Repeatability ...................................... 0.1 mm EMC................................................... EN 60 947-5-2 Short-circuit Protection ...................... Yes Power-up Pulse Suppression ............ No Reverse Polarity Protection ............... Yes Enclosure Rating ............................... IP 67 Shock and Vibration Stress ............... 30g, 11 ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm Operating Temperature Range .......... -25C to +75C (-13F to 167F) Housing Material ............................... PA 12 Connector Cable................................ PUR 3 x 0.09mm2 Connector .......................................... PUR cable w/8mm connector
3.6 25
6.2
L = 300
25
2.8
36
WIRING CONNECTION
4 1 3
Pin 1 4 3
Wire Brown Black Blue
Function +VDC NO - VDC
NPN
bn bk bu
1 4 3
+ DC
bn bk bu
1 4 3
+ DC
M7
Proximity
NAMUR
SS/Reed
PNP
M8x1
Catalog 0900P-4
P8S Drop-In Sensors Mini-Global Drop-In Reed Sensors

Wiring 3m Flying Leads 10m Flying Leads 0.3m Lead with 8mm Connector Reed Sensor P8S-MRFLX P8S-MRFTX P8S-MRSHX
Sensing Face Center 3.6

9.9
Specifications
Type ............................................... 3-Wire Reed Output Function ............................. Normally Open Operating Voltage .......................... 10 - 30 VAC, 10 - 30 VDC Switching Power ............................ 10 W/VA Continuous Current ....................... 500 mA max. Response Sensitivity ..................... 48 Gauss Switching Frequency ..................... 500 Hz Hysteresis ...................................... 7 Gauss Repeatability .................................. 0.1 mm EMC............................................... EN 60 947-5-2 / EN 40 050 Enclosure Rating ........................... IP 67 Shock and Vibration Stress ........... 30g, 11 ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm Operating Temperature Range ...... -25C to +75C (-13F to 167F) Housing Material............................ PA 12 Connector Cable............................ PUR 3 x 0.09 mm2 Connector ...................................... PUR cable w/8mm connector
25
L = 300
25
2.8
36
WIRING CONNECTION
Pin
4
Function Operating Voltage (+V) Output signal Ground (-V)
1
1 3
4 3
bn bk bu
1 4 3
AC/DC /+
Caution
Use an ampmeter to test reed sensor current. Testing devices such as incandescent light bulbs may subject the reed sensor to high in-rush loads. NOTE: When checking an unpowered reed sensor for continuity with a digital ohmmeter the resistance reading will change from infinity to a very large resistance (2 M ohm) when the sensor is activated. This is due to the presence of a diode in the reed sensor. Anti-magnetic shielding is recommended for reed sensors exposed to high external RF or magnetic fields. The magnetic field strength of the piston magnet is designed to operate with our sensors. Other manufacturers sensors may not operate correctly in conjunction with these magnets. Use relay coils for reed sensor contact protection. The operation of some 120 VAC PLCs (especially some older Allen-Bradley PLCs) can overload the reed sensor. The sensor may fail to release after the piston magnet has passed. This problem may be corrected by the placement of a 700 to 1K OHM resistor between the sensor and the PLC input terminal. Consult the manufacturer of the PLC for appropriate circuit. Sensors with long wire leads (greater than 15 feet) can cause capacitance build-up and sticking will result. Attach a resistor in series with the reed sensor (the resistor should be installed as close as possible to the sensor). The resistor should be selected such that R (ohms) >E/0.3.
M8
M8x1
+/
Catalog 0900P-4
P8S Drop-In Sensors

C086/A074
Tie Rod Bracket Assembly Part Number and Dimensions
Tie Rod Bracket Assembly is necessary for Global and Mini-Global Sensor installation on all tie rod construction cylinders. This includes all Intermediate Trunnion mounts (Style DD or MT4); some 1-1/8" bore 3MA Series mounts; and all 6"-8" bore Sensors and bracket assemblies must be ordered separately. Part number P8S-TMA0X fits 1-1/2" to 8" bores and 32-200mm bores for Global Sensors Part number P8S-TMA0Z fits 1-1/8" bore for Mini-Global Sensors
P8S-TMA0X
35 mm 15.7 mm
25 mm
P8S-TMA0Z
1.38 (35) .59 (15)
.31 (7.8)
.50 (12.8)
Round Body Bracket Assembly Part Numbers

Sensors and Brackets must be ordered separately.
Bore Size 9/16" - 1-1/16" 20 - 25mm 1-1/8" - 2-1/2" 32 - 63mm 3" - 4" 80 - 100mm Round Body Bracket P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC01 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC02 P8S-TMC03 P8S-TMC03
M9
Proximity
NAMUR
SS/Reed
.87 (22)
Catalog 0900P-4
P8S Right Angle Sensors Right Angle Solid State Sensors

Specifications
Type ............................................Electronic Output Function ..........................Normally Open Switching Output ........................PNP/NPN Operating Voltage .......................10 - 30VDC Continuous Current .................... 150 mA Response Sensitivity ..................30 Gauss min. Switching Frequency ..................5kHz Power Consumption ...................15 mA Voltage Drop ............................... 2 VDC Ripple ......................................... 10% of Operating Voltage Delay Time (24V) ........................Approx. 20 ms Time Delay before Availability..... 2 ms Hysteresis ................................... 1.5 mm Repeatability ............................... 0.2 mm EMC............................................EN 60 947-5-2 Short-circuit Protection ...............Yes Power-up Pulse Suppression .....Yes Reverse Polarity Protection ........Yes Enclosure Rating ........................IP 67 DIN 40050 Shock and Vibration Stress ........30g, 11ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm Ambient Temperature Range ......-25C to +75C (-13F to 167F) Housing Material.........................PA 12, Black Connector Cable.........................PVC Connector ...................................PUR cable w/8 mm connector

C086/A074
Wiring 0.2m Lead with 8mm Connector 3m Flying Leads 10m Flying Leads
PNP Sensors P8S-SPTHXD P8S-SPELXD P8S-SPETXD
NPN Sensors P8S-SNTHX P8S-SNELX P8S-SNETX
Wiring Connection
Pin 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
Function Operating Voltage (+VDC) Output signal (N.O.) -VDC
.47 .35 (12) (9)
Right Angle Reed Sensors

Specifications
Type ............................................2-Wire Reed Output Function ..........................Normally Open Output Voltage ............................10 - 110* VAC, 10 - 30 VDC Continuous Current .................... 100 mA Response Sensitivity ..................30 Gauss min. Switching Frequency ..................400 Hz Voltage Drop ............................... 3 V Ripple ......................................... 10% of Operating Voltage Time Delay (24V) ........................Approx. 20 ms Hysteresis ................................... 1.0 mm Repeatability ............................... 0.2 mm EMC............................................EN 60 947-5-2 Reverse Polarity Protection ........Yes Enclosure Rating ........................IP 67 Shock and Vibration Stress ........30g, 11ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm Ambient Temperature Range ...... -25C to +75C (-13F to 167F) Housing Material.........................PA 12, Black Connector Cable.........................PVC Connector ................................... PUR cable w/8 mm connector
*8mm connector rated for 50 VAC max.
.13 (3.4)
Center of Sensing Face .79 (20)
.26 (6.7)
.32 (8.1)
Center of Sensing Face .79 (20)
Solid State
Reed
Wiring 0.2m Lead with 8mm Connector 3m Flying Leads 10m Flying Leads
Reed Sensors P8S-SRTHX P8S-SRELX P8S-SRETX
Wiring Connection
2 1 3
Pin 1 3 2 Wire Brown Black Blue Function Operating Voltage (+V) Not Used Output Signal (-V or Ground)
M10
Catalog 0900P-4
P1A Series Sensors Solid State Sensors

These sensors are of solid-state type, with no moving parts. Short-circuit and transient protection is incorporated as standard. The integral electronics make these sensors suitable for applications with very high switching frequencies.

Electronic Sensors
Part Number P1A-2XMK, Rt. Angle P1A-2XLK, Rt. Angle P1A-2XHK P1A-2XEK P1A-2XJH P1A-2XFH Output PNP, N.O. NPN, N.O. PNP, N.O. NPN, N.O. PNP, N.O. NPN, N.O. Cable Length 2m 2m 2m 2m * *
C086
Weight (lb) 0.09 0.09 0.022 0.022 0.033 0.033
Mounting Brackets
Part Number P1A-2CCC P1A-2DCC P1A-2FCC P1A-2HCC P1A-2JCC Fits Cylinder Bore Size 10mm 12mm 16mm 20mm 25mm Weight (lb) 0.01 0.01 0.0176 0.0176 0.022
Solid State Sensor Wiring

P1A-2XMK
+ PNP White
P1A-2XLK Red Black

NPN White +
.75 (19)
.39 (10)
.47 (12)
Red
3 x 0.15 mm, 2 m
P1A-2XHK,P1A-2XJH
+ PNP Black
P1A-2XEK, P1A-2XFH Brown Blue

NPN Black +
Blue Brown
LED
M
.55 (14) .47 (12)
.75 (19)
M11
Proximity
Black
P1A-2XMK and P1A-2XLK
NAMUR
Design ...................................................... Hall element Output....................................................... PNP resp. NPN, N.O. Voltage range ........................................... 10-30 VDC Max permissible ripple ............................. 10% Max voltage drop ...................................... 0.5 V at 100 mA Max load current, P1A-2XMK, LK ............ 150 mA P1A-2XHK, EK, JH, FH ............................ 100 mA Max breaking power (resistive) ................ 6 W Internal consumption................................ <30 mA at 30 V Min actuating distance ............................. 5 mm Hysteresis................................................. 1.1 - 1.3 mm Repeatability accuracy ............................. 0.1 mm Max on/off switching frequency ................ 1 kHz Max on/off switching time ......................... 0.8/3.0 ms Encapsulation, P1A-2XJH, FH ................. IP 65 Encapsulation, P1A-2XHK, EK, MK, LK .... IP 67 Temperature range ................................... 10 C to +60 C (14F to 140F) Indication .................................................. LED Shock resistance ...................................... 40 g Material, housing ...................................... Polyamid 11 Material, mould......................................... Epoxy Cable ........................................................ PVC 3x0,15 mm2 Cable incl. female part connector ............. PVC 3x0,15 mm2 Connector ................................................. 8 mm snap on Mounting................................................... Mounting yoke Material, mounting.................................... Acetal/Stainless steel Material, screw ......................................... Stainless steel
Specifications
Cable for Sensors

Part Number 9126344341** 9126344342** Cable Length 3m 10 m Weight (lb) 0.12 0.4
* Cable ordered separately ** Cable includes female part connector for sensor
Dimensions
P1A-2XHK and P1A-2XEK
3 x 0.15 mm, 2 m LED
.54 (13.8)
.75 (19)
.39 (10)
.47 (12)
P1A-2XJH and P1A-2XFH

LED
.54 (13.8)
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
P1A Series Sensors Reed Sensors

The reed sensors incorporate a well-proven, universal-voltage, compact reed switch element; making them suitable for a wide range of applications. They can work with electronic control systems or conventional relay systems.

Electronic Sensors
Part Number P1A-2XRL P1A-2XSH Output Making (N.O.) Making (N.O.) Cable Length 3m *
C086
Weight (lb) 0.12 0.004
Mounting Brackets
Part Number P1A-2CCB P1A-2DCB P1A-2FCB P1A-2HCB P1A-2JCB Fits Cylinder Bore Size 10mm 12mm 16mm 20mm 25mm Weight (lb) 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.009 0.010
Cable for Sensors Specifications

Design ...................................................... Reed Output....................................................... Making (N.O.) Voltage range, P1A-2XRL ........................ 110 VAC/VDC Voltage range, P1A-2XSH........................ 60 VAC/VDC Max voltage drop ...................................... 2.8 V Max load current....................................... 180 mA Max breaking power (resistive) ................ 10 W Min actuating distance ............................. 5 mm Hysteresis................................................. 2 mm Repeatability accuracy ............................. 0.2 mm Max on/off switching frequency ................ 500 Hz Max on/off switching time ......................... 1 ms Encapsulation, P1A-2XRL ....................... IP 67 Encapsulation, P1A-2XSH ....................... IP 65 Temperature range ................................... 30 C to +80 C (22F to 176F) Indication .................................................. LED Shock resistance ...................................... 30 g Material, housing ...................................... Nylon 66 Material, mould......................................... Epoxy Cable ........................................................ PVC 2x0.2 mm2 Cable incl. female part connector ............. PVC 2x0.2 mm2 Mounting................................................... Mounting yoke Material, mounting.................................... Stainless steel Material, screw ......................................... Stainless steel Connector ................................................. 8 mm snap on Part Number 9126344341** 9126344342** Cable Length 3m 10 m Weight (lb) 0.12 0.4
* Cable ordered separately ** Cable includes female part connector for sensor
Dimensions
P1A-2XRL
.39 (10)
1.04 (26.5)
2 x 0,2 mm, 3 m
P1A-2XSH
.39 (10) Connector Diameter .31 (8) Snap On
1.28 (32.5)
Reed Sensor Wiring

+ Brown
- Blue
M12
Catalog 0900P-4
LP/LPM Series Sensors Part Numbers*

Bore 9/16" 3/4", 1-1/ 8" 1-1/ 2", 2" 2-1/2", 3", 4" Reed (Low AMP) L077030000 L077040000 L077050000 L077060000 NPN Sinking L076950000 L076960000 L076970000 L076980000

C086
PNP Sourcing L076990000 L077000000 L077010000 L077020000
* For sensors with an 8mm connector, replace the last digit with a C. For example: L07696000C.
Specifications
Solid State Sensors (NPN/PNP)
Switching Logic............................... N.O. NPN (Sinking) N.O. PNP (Sourcing) Supply Voltage Range .................... 5 - 30 VDC On-State Voltage Drop.................... 1.5 V max. at 100 mA Current Output Range .................... 100 mA Burden Current ............................... 7 mA at 12 V 14 mA at 24 V Leakage Current ............................. 0.01 mA LED Function .................................. NPN: Red (Target Present) PNP: Green (Target Present) Minimum Current to Light LED ....... 1 mA Operating Temperature ................... 14 to 158F (-10 to 70C) Storage Temperature ...................... -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) Enclosure Protection ...................... IEC standard IP 67 NEMA 6P Lead Wire ....................................... 3 conductor, 24 gauge Lead Wire Length ........................... 59 inches, 1.5 meter Color of Cable................................. Black Switching Response ....................... Max. 1k Hz Shock Resistance ........................... 50 G (490 m/s2) Vibration Resistance....................... Double Amplitude 1.5 mm (Frequency 10 to 55 Hz 1 scanning, 1 minute)
Reed Sensor (Low AMP)

Switching Logic............................... N.O. SPST (Form A) Supply Voltage Range .................... 3 - 125 V AC/DC On-State Voltage Drop.................... 1.8V max. at 20 mA DC Power Rating* ................................. 5 W (2.5 W) 5 VA (2.5 VA) Switching Current Range* .............. 5-40 mA (5-20 mA) Leakage Current ............................. 0 LED Function .................................. Red (Target Present) Minimum Current to Light LED ....... 3 mA Operating Temperature ................... 14 to 158F (-10 to 70C) Storage Temperature ...................... -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) Enclosure Protection ...................... IEC standard IP 67 NEMA 6P Lead Wire ....................................... 2 conductor, 24 gauge Lead Wire Length ........................... 59 inches, 1.5 meter Color of Cable................................. Gray Switching Response ....................... Max. 300 Hz Shock Resistance ........................... 30 G (300 m/s 2) Vibration Resistance....................... Double Amplitude 1.5 mm (Frequency 10 to 55 Hz 1 scanning, 1 minute) *Number in parentheses pertains to inductive loads.
Circuits
Reed Sensor
NOTE: Polarity must be observed for DC operation only.
Brown
NPN Sensor Sinking Output

Color of Cable.........................................Black On State Voltage Drop.......... 1.5V Maximum
Brown (Red*) (+) 5 to 30 VDC LOAD ()
PNP Sensor Sourcing Output

Color of Cable.........................................Black On State Voltage Drop.......... 1.5V Maximum
Brown (Red*) Black (White*) LOAD Blue (Black*) (+) 5 to 30 VDC ()
Load
AC
Blue
Blue (Black*)
*Wire colors in parentheses pertain to sensors manufactured before 10/15/93.
Circuit for Switching Contact Protection (Inductive Loads) for Reed Sensor Only
Brown
Load D
Blue
R Blue
! Caution
Use an ampmeter to test reed sensor current. Testing devices such as incandescent light bulbs may subject the reed sensor to high in-rush loads. NOTE: When checking an unpowered reed sensor for continuity with a digital ohmmeter the resistance reading will change from infinity to a very large resistance (2 M ohm) when the sensor is activated. This is due to the presence of a diode in the reed sensor. Anti-magnetic shielding is recommended for reed sensors exposed to high external RF or magnetic fields. The magnetic field strength of the piston magnet is designed to operate with our sensors. Other manufacturers sensors may not operate correctly in conjunction with these magnets. Current capabilities are relative to operational temperatures. Use relay coils for reed sensor contact protection. The operation of some 120 VAC PLCs (especially some older Allen-Bradley PLCs) can overload the reed sensor. The sensor may fail to release after the piston magnet has passed. This problem may be corrected by the placement of a 700 to 1K OHM resistor between the sensor and the PLC input terminal. Consult the manufacturer of the PLC for appropriate circuit. Sensors with long wire leads (greater than 15 feet) can cause capacitance build-up and sticking will result. Attach a resistor in series with the reed sensor (the resistor should be installed as close as possible to the sensor). The resistor should be selected such that R (ohms) >E/0.3.
M13
Proximity
Typical Example: CR: Relay coil (under 2W coil rating) R: Resistor 1 K 5 K, 1/4 W C: Capacitor 0.1 F, 600 V
Brown
Load
NAMUR
AC
(Recommended for longer life 125 VAC) Put a resistor and capacitor in parallel with the load. Select the resistor and capacitor according to the load.
SS/Reed
DC or
Black (White*)
DC
Catalog 0900P-4
RC Series Sensors Solid State Sensors

L074810000 NPN Sinking L074820000 PNP Sourcing Switching Logic............................... NPN or PNP Supply Voltage Range .................... 10-30 VDC On-State Voltage Drop.................... See Circuits Below Current Output Range .................... Up to 100 mA at 12 VDC Up to 200 mA at 24 VDC Burden Current ............................... 7 mA at 12 VDC 16 mA at 24 VDC Leakage Current ............................. 10A LED Function .................................. Red, Target Present Minimum Current to Light LED .................................... 1 mA Operating Temperature ................... 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C) Storage Temperature ...................... -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) Enclosure Protection ...................... Nema 6, IEC IP67 Lead Wire ....................................... 3 conductor, 24 Gauge Lead Wire Length ........................... 39 Inches, 1 Meter Color of Cable................................. See Below Switching Response ....................... 1000 Hz Maximum Part Numbers
Electronic Sensors Solid State and Reed Reed Sensors

C347
Switching Logic............................... Normally open, SPST (Form A) Supply Voltage Range .................... 85 to 125 VAC or 5-30 VDC1 On-State Voltage Drop.................... 1.7 V Maximum Power Rating .................................. 10 Watts (Resistive) 5 Watts (Capacitive) Switching Current Range................ 30 mA to 200 mA (Resistive) 30 mA to 100 mA (Capacitive) Leakage Current ............................. 0 LED Function .................................. Red, Target Present Minimum Current to Light LED .................................... 18 mA Operating Temperature ................... 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C) Storage Temperature ...................... -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Enclosure Protection ...................... Nema 6, IEC IP67 Lead Wire ....................................... 2 conductor, 24 Gauge Lead Wire Length ........................... 39 Inches, 1 Meter Color of Cable................................. Black Switching Response ....................... 300 Hz Maximum Shock Resistance .......................... 30g Vibration Resistance....................... 10-55 Hz, 1.5 mm, Double Amplitude
1Polarity
is restricted to DC operation: (+) to Brown (White*) (-) to Blue (Black*) If these connections are reversed the contacts will close, but the LED will not light.
Circuits
Reed Sensor
Part No................. L074800000
NOTE: Polarity must be observed for DC operation only.
Load DC
NPN Sensor Sinking Output

Part No................................................ L074810000 Color of Cable.................................................Black On State Voltage Drop...................0.7V Maximum
Brown (Red*)
AC or
PNP Sensor Sourcing Output

Part No........................................ L074820000 Color of Cable..........................................Gray On State Voltage Drop.......... 0.2V Maximum
Brown (Red*) Black (White*) LOAD () Blue (Black*) (+) 5 to 30 VDC ()
Brown
Black (White*) Blue (Black*)
(+) 5 to 30 VDC LOAD
Blue
*Wire colors in parentheses pertain to sensors manufactured before 10/15/93.
Circuit for Switching Contact Protection (Inductive Loads)

Brown Load D Blue
(Recommended for longer life 125 VAC) Put a resistor and capacitor in parallel with the load. Select the resistor and capacitor according to the load. Typical Example: CR: Relay coil (under 2W coil rating) R: Resistor 1 K 5 K, 1/4 W C: Capacitor 0.1 F, 600 V
Brown Load R Blue C
DC
AC
! Caution
Use an ampmeter to test reed sensor current. Testing devices such as incandescent light bulbs may subject the reed sensor to high in-rush loads. Current capabilities are relative to operational temperatures. Use relay coils for reed sensor contact protection. The operation of some 120 VAC PLCs (especially some older AllenBradley PLCs) can overload the reed sensor. The sensor may fail to release after the piston magnet has passed. This problem may be corrected by the placement of a 700 to 1K OHM resistor between the sensor and the PLC input terminal. Consult the manufacturer of the PLC for appropriate circuit. Sensors with long wire leads (greater than 15 feet) can cause capacitance build-up and sticking will result. Attach a resistor in series with the reed sensor (the resistor should be installed as close as possible to the sensor). The resistor should be selected such that R (ohms) >E/0.3.
NOTE: When checking an unpowered reed sensor for continuity with a digital ohmmeter the resistance reading will change from infinity to a very large resistance (2 M ohm) when the sensor is activated. This is due to the presence of a diode in the reed sensor. Anti-magnetic shielding is recommended for reed sensors exposed to high external RF or magnetic fields. The magnetic field strength of the piston magnet is designed to operate with our sensors. Other manufacturers sensors may not operate correctly in conjunction with these magnets.
M14
Catalog 0900P-4
PRNA Sizes 3 to 30 Fixed Position Sensor

Specifications
Part Number ............................. See Model Code Type of Sensor.......................... Solid State Application ................................ Relay, PLC, IC Circuit Output Method .......................... NPN Load Voltage ............................. 5 to 30VDC Load Current............................. 5 to 200 mA Max. Power Consumption of Switch Control ..................... Max. 200 mA at 24V Max. Leak Current .................... Max. 10 A Internal Voltage Drop ................ 1.5VDC or Less Mean Response Time............... 1 ms Shock Resistance ..................... 490 m/s2 Ambient Temperature ............... 5 to 60C Enclosure Rating ...................... IP67 Hysteresis ................................. Approximately 2 Response Range ...................... 15 +/- 7 Lead Wire Length ..................... 1 meter
Electronic Sensors Solid State and Reed Model Code and Ordering Information
Example: SR20 - 180 - 90
A076
SR
20
Size 3 10 20 30
180
Rotation 090 100 180 270 90 100 180 270
90
Reference Point 45 90 45 90
MA-2
(+)Brown RS
LED (-)Blue
Variable Position Sensor

Specifications
Type of Sensor.......................... Solid State Application ................................ Relay, PLC, IC Circuit Output Method .......................... NPN Load Voltage ............................. 5 to 30VDC Load Current............................. 5 to 200 mA Max. Power Consumption of Switch Control .......................... Max. 200 mA at 24V Max. Leak Current .................... Max. 10 A Internal Voltage Drop ................ 1.5VDC Mean Response Time............... 1 ms Shock Resistance ..................... 490 m/s2 Ambient Temperature ............... 5 to 60C Enclosure Rating ...................... IP67 Hysteresis ................................. Approximately 2 Response Range ...................... 23 +/- 7 Lead Wire Length ..................... 1 meter
Size 1 3 10 20 30 Part Number FR-1PRN FR-3PRN FR-10PRN FR-20PRN FR-30PRN
M15
Proximity
NAMUR
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
PRN Sizes 50 to 800 Solid State Sensors

Specifications
Application ................................ Relay, PLC, IC Circuit Output Method .......................... NPN Load Voltage ............................. 5 to 30VDC Load Current............................. 5 to 200 mA Max. Power Consumption of Switch Control ...................... Max. 20 mA at 24V Max. Leak Current .................... Max. 10 A Internal Voltage Drop ................ 1.5V or Less Mean Response Time............... 1 ms Shock Resistance ..................... 490 m/s2 Ambient Temperature ............... 5 to 60C Enclosure Rating ...................... IP67 Indicator Light ........................... Red LED Lead Wire Length ..................... 1 meter

A076
Model Code and Ordering Information

Example: FM50 - 90 - 45 - MA2
FM
50
Size 50 150 300 800
90
Rotation 090 180 270 90 180 270
45
MA
Reference Point 45 90 45 90 Sensor Type MA MG Reed Solid State Number Sensors 2 Standard
MG2
(+)Brown Main Circuit of Switch
LED Black
(-)Blue NPN OUTPUT
Reed Sensors
Specifications
Output Method .......................... NPN Load Current............................. 5 to 45 mA Internal Voltage Drop ................ 2V or Less Mean Response Time............... 1.0 ms Shock Resistance ..................... 294 m/s2 Ambient Temperature ............... 5 to 60C Indicator Light ........................... Red LED Lead Wire Length ..................... 1 meter
M
RS
MA-2
(+)Brown
LED (-)Blue
M16
Catalog 0900P-4
PV, WR & XR Series Sensors Solid State (Hall Effect) Sensors

Part Numbers
Part No. SMH-1P SMH-1N SMC-1P SMC-1N SMH-1PC SMH-1NC SMC-1PC SMC-1NC Type N.O. N.O. N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. N.C. LED Color Green Red Yellow White/Red Green Red Yellow White/Red Logic PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN 0.15m Black with Connector 1.5m Black with Leads Cable/Connector

A076
6" Cord
60" Cord
WIRING CONNECTION
BROWN
Specifications
Type ........................................ Solid State Type (PNP or NPN) Switching Logic....................... Normally Open or Normally Closed Supply Voltage Range ............ 6 - 30 VDC Max. Switch Current ............... 150 mA Current Consumption ............. 7 mA at 12 VDC, 14 mA at 24 VDC Switching Response ............... 500 Hz Maximum Residual Voltage ..................... 0.8 V Maximum (150 mA) Leakage Current ..................... 10 uA Maximum Insulation Resistance ............. 100 M ohm min. Min. Current for LED ............... 1mA Operating Temperature ........... -10 to 85C (14 to 185F)** Lead Termination .................... 1500 mm (60 in) or 150 mm (6 in) with connector Enclosure Rating .................... IP67 Shock Resistance ................... 50 Gs, 490 m/sec2
+
LOAD 6 - 30VDC
PNP
SENSOR
BLACK
BLUE BROWN
_ +
LOAD 6 - 30VDC
NPN
SENSOR
BLACK
BLUE
PROTECTION CIRCUIT*
BROWN BLACK
+
LOAD
SENSOR
BLUE
* When connecting an inductive load (relay, solenoid valve, etc.), a protection circuit is recommended. Use a 100V, 1A diode. (NPN connection shown.)
M17
Proximity
NAMUR
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
PV, WR & XR Series Sensors Reed Sensors

Reed sensors are available in a normally open or normally closed configuration. The low amp sensor is suitable for connection to PLCs or other low current devices. The high amp sensor can be used to drive sequencers, relays, coils, or other devices directly.

Part Numbers
Part No. SMR-1 SMR-1L SMD-1L SMR-1C SMR-1LC SMD-1LD Type N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. LED Color Green Red Yellow Green Red Yellow Rating High Amp Low Amp Low Amp High Amp Low Amp Low Amp
A076
Cable/Connector 1.5m Gray with Leads
SMR-1L or SMD-1L Low Amp Reed Sensor Specifications

Switching Logic................................... Normally Open (SMR-1L) Normally Closed (SMD-1L) Voltage Rating .................................... 85-125 VAC or 6-30 VDC* (N.O.) 6-30 VAC, 6-30 VDC* (N.C.) Power Rating: AC or DC Resistive Load ................ 10 watts (N.O.) AC or DC Inductive Load ................ 5 watts (N.O.) AC or DC ........................................ 3 watts (N.C.) Switching Current Range: Resistive Load (PC, Sequencer) .... 5-40 mA (N.O.), 5-25 mA (N.C.) Inductive Load (Relay) .................... 5-25 mA Minimum Current for LED ................... 5 mA Switching Response ........................... 300 Hz (N.O.), 200 Hz (N.C.) Breakdown Voltage ............................. 200 VDC Contact Resistance ............................ 100 M ohm min. Operating Temperature ....................... -10 to 85C (14 to 185F) Lead Termination ................................ 1.5m (60 in) or 0.15m (6 in) with connector Enclosure Rating ................................ IP67 Shock Resistance ............................... 30 Gs, 300 m/sec2
0.15m Gray with Connector
Integral Circuit for Switching Contact Protection

(Required for proper operation 24V DC) Put Diode parallel to load (CR) with polarity as shown below. (BROWN) (BLUE)
+
12VDC
CR
D: Diode: select a Diode with the breakdown voltage and current rating according to the load. CR: Relay coil (under 0.5 W coil rating)
(Recommended for longer sensor life 125V AC) Put resistor and capacitor parallel to load (CR).
(BROWN) R C
(BLUE)
SMR-1 High Amp Reed Sensor Specifications

Switching Logic................................... Normally Open Voltage Rating .................................... 85-125 VAC or 5-30 VDC* Power Rating: AC or DC Resistive Load ................ 10 watts AC or DC Inductive Load ................ 5 watts Switching Current Range: Resistive Load (PC, Sequencer) .... 30-300 mA Inductive Load (Relay) .................... 30-100 mA Minimum Current for LED ................... 18 mA Switching Response ........................... 300 Hz Maximum Breakdown Voltage ............................. 200 VDC Contact Resistance ............................ 100 M ohm min. Operating Temperature ....................... -10 to 85C (14 to 185F) Lead Termination ................................ 1.5m (60 in) or 0.15m (6 in) with connector Enclosure Rating ................................ IP67 Shock Resistance ............................... 30 Gs, 300 m/sec2 * Polarity is restricted for DC operation (+) to Brown (-) to Blue If these connections are reversed the contacts will close, but the LED will not light. Note: Care must be taken not to exceed the Power Rating of the sensor while still observing the voltage and current limitations. 125VAC CR
CR: Relay coil (under 2 W coil ratings) R: Resistor under 1 K ohm C: Capacitor 0.1 F
M18
Catalog 0900P-4
PTR Series Sensors Solid State (Hall Effect) Sensors

Part Numbers
PNP PTR Model 10 15 20 25 32 With 6" Male Quick Connect SWH-1PC SWH-1PC SWH-2PC SWH-2PC SWH-2PC With 39" Potted-in Leads SWH-1P SWH-1P SWH-2P SWH-2P SWH-2P NPN With 6" Male Quick Connect SWH-1NC SWH-1NC SWH-2NC SWH-2NC SWH-2NC With 39" Potted-in Leads SWH-1N SWH-1N SWH-2N SWH-2N SWH-2N

A076
6"Cord
39"Cord
Note: Sensors with male quick connect option require female cordsets to be ordered separately. See page H21.
WIRING CONNECTION Specifications

Type ............................... Solid State (PNP or NPN) Switching Logic.............. Normally Open Supply Voltage Range ... 6 - 30VDC Current Output Range ... Up to 100 mA at 5 VDC, Up to 200 mA at 12 VDC and 24 VDC Current Consumption .... 7 mA at 5 VDC, 15 mA at 12 VDC, and 30 mA at 24 VDC Switching Response ...... 1000 Hz Maximum Residual Voltage ............ 1.5V Maximum Leakage Current ............ 10uA Maximum Breakdown Voltage ........ 1.8kVACrms for 1 sec., lead to case Min. Current for LED ...... 1mA Operating Temperature .. 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C) Enclosure Rating ........... Meets IEC IP67, fully encapsulated Lead Wire ...................... 3 conductor, 24 gauge Lead Wire Length .......... 39 in (1 m) Vibration Resistance...... 10-55 Hz, 1.5mm double amplitude PNP
SENSOR BROWN
+
LOAD
BLACK
6 - 30VDC
BLUE BROWN
_ +
LOAD 6 - 30VDC
NPN
SENSOR
BLACK
BLUE
PROTECTION CIRCUIT*
BROWN BLACK
+
LOAD
SENSOR
BLUE
M19
Proximity
NAMUR
* When connecting an inductive load (relay, solenoid valve, etc.), a protection circuit is recommended. Use a 100V, 1A diode. (NPN connection shown.)
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
PTR Series Sensors Reed Sensors

Part Numbers
PTR Model 10 15 20 25 32 With 6" Male Quick Connect SWR-1C SWR-1C SWR-2C SWR-2C SWR-2C With 39" Potted-in Leads SWR-1 SWR-1 SWR-2 SWR-2 SWR-2

A076
PROTECTION CIRCUIT (INDUCTIVE LOADS)

(Required for proper operation 24VDC) Select a diode with a breakdown voltage and current rating according to the load. Place a diode in parallel to the load with the polarity as indicated: +
BROWN D CR
Sensors with male quick connect option require female cordsets to be ordered separately. See page H21.
24VDC
-
BLUE
CR: Relay coil (under 0.5W coil rating)
Specifications
Switching Logic..................Normally Open Voltage Rating ...................85-125 VAC or 6-30 VDC* Power Rating .....................10 Watts AC or DC/ Resistive Load 5 Watts AC or DC/Inductive Load Switching Current Range...10-200 mA/Resistive Load (PC, Sequencer) 10-100 mA/Inductive Load (Relay) Switching Response ..........300 Hz Maximum Breakdown Voltage ............1.8kVACrms for 1 sec., lead to case Min. Current for LED ..........18mA Operating Temperature ......14 to 140F (-10 to 60C) Enclosure Rating ...............Meets IEC IP67, fully encapsulated Lead Wire ..........................2 conductor, 22 Gauge Lead Wire Length ..............39 in (1 m) Vibration Resistance..........10-55 Hz, 1.5mm double amplitude
* Polarity is restricted for DC operation (+) to White (-) to Black If these connections are reversed the contacts will close, but the LED will not light.
(Recommended for longer sensor life 125VAC) Select a resistor and capacitor according to the load. Place a resistor and capacitor in parallel to the load: +
BROWN R = C = CR
125VAC
-
BLUE
CR: Relay coil (under 2W coil rating) R: Resistor under 1 K ohm C: Capacitor 0.1 F
M20
Catalog 0900P-4
Weld Immune Sensors Weld Immune Sensors

Weld immune in all welding applications (AC, DC and medium frequency welding). Sensor locks the output during the welding process; when welding process stops, the sensor updates the output accordingly. NOTE: Tie rod construction of the P1D Series can be ordered directly in the model code (please see page C8).
Part Number 0886600000 0886620000
Description Weld Immune Sensor Tie Rod Bracket Kit
48 5.5 9
M12x1 28 23 M4 11 30.5 7.5 LED
Specifications
Type ...................................................Electronic Output function ..................................Normally Open Switching Output ...............................PNP (3-Wire) Operating voltage ..............................10-30 VDC Response sensitivity .......................... 30 Gauss Switching frequency ..........................40 Hz Residual ripple ................................... 10% of Supply Voltage Voltage drop ...................................... 2 VDC Power consumption, attenuated ........ 32mA Power consumption, unattenuated .... 18mA Continuous current ............................ 300mA Hysteresis .......................................... 1.5mm Repeatability ...................................... 0.1mm EMC...................................................EN 60 947-5-2 Wire break protection ........................Yes Short circuit protected .......................Yes Reverse polarity protected .................Yes Power-up pulse suppression .............Yes Enclosure rating.................................IP67 Shock/vibration stress .......................30 g, 11ms, 10-55 Hz, 1mm Operating temperature ...................... -25C to +75C (-13F to +167F) Housing material................................ Die-cast zinc with PTFE coating LEDs ..................................................Status Indicator (yellow) Function Indicator (green) Connector ..........................................M12 connector
0886600000
10.8
33.5
0886620000
43
Wiring Connection
2
1
18
M6
29.5
3
Pin 1 4 3 2
PNP
0886620001
Function Operating Voltage (+VDC) Output Signal (N.O.) -VDC Not used
23 .7
40.1
M6
0886620002
29.5
1 4
+
8.7 8.7 4.3
DC
0.5 7.4
M21
Parker Hannifin Corporation 0886630000 Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics
Proximity
.1
NAMUR
SS/Reed
64.2
8.2
18
Catalog 0900P-4
Cordset Specifications 8mm Cordset with Female Quick Connect

A female connector is available for all sensors with the male 8mm quick connect option. The male plug will accept a snapon or threaded connector. Cordset part numbers are listed below:
Cable Length 5 meters 2 meters Threaded Connector 086620T005 086620T002 Snap On Connector 086620S005 086620S002

Cordset Specifications
C086/A074/A076
Connector ................... Oil resistant polyurethane body material, PA 6 (Nylon) contact carrier, spacings to VDE 0110 Group C, (150 AC/DC) Contacts ..................... Gold plated beryllium copper, machined from solid stock Coupling Method ........ Snap-Lock or chrome plated brass nut Cord Construction ...... Oil resistant black PUR jacket, nonwicking, non-hygroscopic, 300V. Cable end is stripped and tinned. Conductors ................. Extra high flex stranding, PVC insulation Temperature ............... -40 to 194F (-40 to 90C) Protection ................... NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6P and IEC 1P67 Cable Length .............. 6.56 ft (2m) or 16.4 ft (5m)
Snap-On Straight Connector

Cable Length (M) (See Table) .318 (8.1) .177 (4.5) Cable Minimum Bend Radius: 100mm
.177 (4.5)
Threaded Straight Connector

Cable Length (M) (See Table)
M8x1 .378 (9.6) .276 (7.0) 1.26 (32.0)
1.110 (28.2) 1.181 (30.0)
.224 (5.7)
Cable Minimum Bend Radius: 100mm
12mm Cordset with Female Quick Connect

M12 Straight Connector Cable Length 5 meters 2 meters Part Number 9126487205 9126487202
M12 Right Angle Connector Cable Length 5 meters 2 meters Part Number 9126487305 9126487302
Straight Connector
CABLE LENGTH (m) (SEE TABLE)
A female connector is available for all sensors with the male 12mm quick connect option. The cordsets are available with a right angle or straight connector. Cordset part numbers are listed above.
PIN 2 / WHT PIN 3 / BLU .57 (14.5) .06 (1.5)
1.65 (42)
Cordset Specifications
Connector ................... Polyvinylchloride (PVC) body material, PVC contact carrier, spacing to VDE 0110 Group C, (250VAC / 300VDC) Contacts ..................... Gold Plated Copper Tin (CuSn), stamped from stock. Coupling Method ........ Threaded nut: Chrome plated brass. Cord Construction....... PVC non-wicking, non-hygroscopic, 250VAC / 300VDC. Cable end is stripped. Conductors ................. Extra high flex stranding with PVC insulation Temperature ............... -13F to 158F (-25C to 70C) Protection ................... NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6P and IEC 1P67 Cable Length .............. 6.56 ft (2m) or 16.4 ft (5m)
PIN 1 / BRN
M12 X 1 PIN 4 / BLK CABLE MINIMUM BEND RADIUS: 100mm
Right Angle Connector

PIN 2 / WHT .57 (14.5) PIN 3 / BLU
PIN 1 / BRN
PIN 4 / BLK 1.51 (38.3)
CABLE MINIMUM BEND RADIUS: 100mm
1.04 (26.5) .06 (1.5)
CABLE LENGTH (SEE TABLE)
M12 X 1
M22
Catalog 0900P-4
Connection Block Connection Block Valvetronic 110

The Valvetronic 110 is a connection block that can be used for collecting signals from sensors at various points on a machine and connecting them to the control system via a multicore cable. Valvetronic 110 can also be used for central connection of the multi-core cable to the outputs of a control system, and can be laid to a machine where the output signals can be connected. The connection block has ten 8 mm snap-in connectors and a multi-core cable which is available in lengths of 3 or 10 m. The connections on the block are numbered from 1 to 10. Blanking plugs are available for unused connections, as labels for marking the connections of each block.

C086
Technical Data
Connections
Ten 3-pole numbered 8 mm round snap-in female contacts Input block 2 Pin 1 Common, +24 VDC 1 3 Pin 2 Input signal Pin 3 Common, 0V
2 3 1
Mechanical Data
Enclosure.................... IP 67, DIN 40050 with fitted contacts and/or blanking plugs. Temperature ............... 20 C to +70 C
Output block Pin 1 Common, GND Pin 2 Output signal Pin 3 Common, 0V
Material
Body ........................... PA 6,6 VD according to UL 94 Contact holder ............ PBTP Snap-in ring ................ LDPE Moulding mass ........... Epoxy Seal ............................ NBR Screws ........................ Plated steel
Electrical Data
Voltage........................ 24 VDC (max. 60 V AC/75 V DC) Insulation group .......... according to DIN 0110 class C Load............................ max. 1 A per connection total max. 3 A
Industrial Durability
Good chemical and oil resistance. Tests should be performed in aggressive environments.
Cable
Length......................... 3 m or 10 m Type of cable .............. LifYY11Y Conductor ................... 12 Area ............................ 0.34 mm2 Color marking ............. According to DIN 47 100
Part Number 9121719001 9121719002 9121719003 9121719004
Designation Connection block Valvetronic 110 with 3 m cable Connection block Valvetronic 110 with 10 m cable Blanking plugs (pack of 10) Use blanking plugs to close unused connections. Labels (pack of 10) White labels to insert in grooves on the side of the connection
Weight kg 0.32 0.95 0.02 0.02
Conductor 1 2
.74 (18.7) .49 (12.5) .31 (8)
M3
2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
Color Pink Grey Yellow Green White Red Black Violet Grey-Pink Red-Blue Blue Brown
Input Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal 4 Signal 5 Signal 6 Signal 7 Signal 8 Signal 9 Signal 10 0V +24 V
Output Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal 4 Signal 5 Signal 6 Signal 7 Signal 8 Signal 9 Signal 10 0V PE
1.20 (30.5)
6
3
7
3
8
3
9
3
10
3
3 4
5 31 7 9 4 2 6 8 10 B
2
5 6 7 8 9 10 A B
.47 (12) .98 (25)

.36 (9.2)
3.35 (85) 2.95 (75)
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1
L
.81 (20.5)
M23
Proximity
Dimensions and Wiring Diagrams
NAMUR
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
NAMUR Sensors NAMUR Intrinsically Safe Sensors

For Tie Rod Style Cylinders
Part Number 089779001 089779002 089779003 089779004 089779005 089779006
Electronic Sensors Intrinsically Safe Sensors

C086
Sensor Description
Fits 1-1/8" to 4" bore and 32-100mm bore (2m flying lead) Fits 1-1/8" to 4" bore and 32-100mm bore (12mm connector) Fits 5" to 6" bore and 125-160mm bore (2m flying lead) Fits 5" to 6" bore and 125-160mm bore (12mm connector) Fits 8" bore and 200mm bore (2m flying lead) Fits 8" bore and 200mm bore (12mm connector)
Specifications
Electrical configuration ................... NAMUR 2-Wire Output function ............................... NAMUR Supply voltage ................................ 5-25 VDC Response sensitivity ....................... 30 Gauss Switching frequency ....................... 5 kHz Switching output ............................. Control current dependent on switching Residual ripple ................................ 5% of Supply Voltage Power consumption, attenuated ..... 2.5mA Power consumption, unattenuated . 1mA Internal capacitance ....................... 15nF Internal inductance ......................... 25 H Cable resistance ............................. 50 Ohm Hysteresis ....................................... 1mm Repeatability ................................... 0.1mm EMC................................................ EN 60 947-5-6 Short circuit protected .................... Yes Reverse polarity protected .............. Yes Enclosure rating.............................. IP67 Shock/vibration stress .................... 30 g, 11ms, 10-55 Hz, 1mm Operating temperature ................... -25C to +70C (-13F to +158F) Housing material............................. aluminum, plastic Connector cable ............................. PVC with Flying Leads (shown) Connector (option) .......................... M12 connector Classification .................................. TV 99 ATEX 1398 II 2G EEx ib IIC T6
.59 (15) M6 .91 (23) .41 (10.5) 1.18 (30)
1.18 (30)
0897790001
M6 .91 (23) 1.00 (25.4)
.59 (15) 1.47 (37.3)
0897790003
1.18 (30) LED
Data for Connecting Power Supplies or other approved isolating amplifiers:

Short circuit current 1Kmax ............... 30mA No load voltage............................... 16VDC Power loss ...................................... 75mW Note: Intrinsically safe solutions must include a NAMUR Power Supply
1.26 (32)
.75 (19)
M6 1.32 (33.5)
Wiring Connection
2 3 1 4
Pin 1 4 2 3 Wire Brown Blue Function Operating Voltage (+VDC) -VDC Not Used Not Used
NAMUR Power Supply/ Isolating Unit bn bu 1 4 + 1.18 (30)
1.61 (40.8)
0897790005
M24
Catalog 0900P-4
NAMUR Sensors NAMUR Intrinsically Safe Sensors

For Round Body Cylinders
Part Number 0897790007 0897800001 0897800002 0897800003 0897800004 0897800005 0897800006 0897800007 0897800008 Description NAMUR Sensor for round body cylinder Bracket for 18-29mm (0.71"-1.14") outer diameter Bracket for 28-39mm (1.10"-1.54") outer diameter Bracket for 38-49mm (1.50"-1.93") outer diameter Bracket for 48-59mm (1.89"-2.32") outer diameter Bracket for 58-69mm (2.28"-2.72") outer diameter Bracket for 68-79mm (2.68"-3.11") outer diameter Bracket for 88-99mm (3.46"-3.90") outer diameter Bracket for 98-109mm (3.86"-4.29") outer diameter

C086
.47 (12)
1.18 (30)
12 .47 0897790007 (12)
Specifications
Electrical configuration ......................NAMUR 2-Wire Output function ..................................NAMUR Supply voltage ...................................5-25 VDC Response sensitivity .......................... 30 Gauss Switching frequency ..........................5 kHz Switching output ................................Control current dependent on switching Residual ripple ................................... 5% of Supply Voltage Power consumption, attenuated ........ 2.5mA Power consumption, unattenuated .... 1mA Internal capacitance .......................... 15nF Internal inductance ............................ 25 H Cable resistance ................................ 50 Ohm Hysteresis .......................................... 1mm Repeatability ...................................... 0.1mm EMC...................................................EN 60 947-5-6 Short circuit protected .......................Yes Reverse polarity protected .................Yes Enclosure rating.................................IP67 Shock/vibration stress .......................30 g, 11ms, 10-55 Hz, 1mm Operating temperature ......................-25C to +70C (-13F to +158F) Housing material................................aluminum, plastic Connector cable ................................PVC with Flying Leads (shown) Classification .....................................TV 99 ATEX 1398 II 2G EEx ib IIC T6
.31 (8)
.19 (5)
Round Body Brackets
Wiring Connection
4 1 3
Pin 1 3 4 Wire Brown Blue Function Operating Voltage (+VDC) -VDC Not Used
bn bu
1 3
+ -
Short circuit current 1Kmax .................. 30mA No load voltage.................................. 16VDC Power loss ......................................... 75mW Note: Intrinsically safe solutions must include a NAMUR Power Supply
M25
Proximity
Data for Connecting Power Supplies or other approved isolating amplifiers:
NAMUR Power Supply/ Isolating Unit
NAMUR
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
NAMUR Sensors NAMUR Sensor Power Supply

For All NAMUR Sensors
Part Number 0897810001 0897810002 0897810003 Supply Voltage 115VAC 230VAC 24VDC

C086
Reliable DC-decoupling between input, output and supply voltage in accordance with VDE 0100 Part 410 2-channel with one relay output SPDT respectively Intrinsically safe inputs complying with [EEx 1a] IIC Housing with snap fastening for support rail DIN 46277
Specifications
Supply voltage ................................ 115 VAC (p/n 0897810001) 230 VAC (p/n 0897810002) 24 VDC (p/n 0897810003) Mains frequency ............................. 48-62 Hz Switching frequency ....................... 20 Hz Power consumption per channel .... Approximately 1.5 VA Approximately 0.7 W only for p/n 0897810003 Inputs .............................................. 2 sensors No load voltage............................... 8.5 VDC Short circuit current ........................ 6mA Permissible external capacitance ... 567nF Permissible external inductance ..... 5 mH Switching outputs ........................... 1 relay per input: SPDT Switching voltage............................ 250 VAC Switching current ............................ 5 A Switching output ............................. 100 VA Permit ............................................. PTB no. Ex-95.C.2003X VDE protection class ...................... I Enclosure rating.............................. IP20 Operating temperature ................... -25C to +60C (-13F to +140F) Approximate weight ........................ 250g (8.8 oz.) Housing material............................. Plastic
4.01 (102) 3.42 (87)
red
yellow
4.21 (107)
red
yellow
green
1.65 (42)
.87 (22)
M26
Catalog 0900P-4
EPS-5, 6 & 7 / CLS-1 & 4 Ordering Information

Sensor Type Style Sensor Part Number 6' Cable 12' Cable 6' Cable, Right Angle **** Part Number Suffix: EPS-7 148897**** 0853550006 0853550012 0875470006 Inductive Proximity EPS-5 146617**** 0853550006 0853550012 0875470006
Electronic Sensors End-of-Stroke Proximity Sensors

C052
Non-contacting Magnetically Actuated EPS-6 148896**** 0859170006 0859170012 CLS-1 148275**** 0853550006 0853550012 0875470006 CLS-4 149109****
**** 4-digit suffix indicates probe length: 0125=1.25", 0206=2.06", 0288=2.875", 0456=4.562"
Specifications
Style Code Designator Sensor Type EPS-7 H Inductive proximity EPS-5 R Inductive proximity EPS-6 D Inductive Proximity CLS-1 F Non-contacting magnetically actuated Functional replacement for AB (Mechanical) Limit Switches in many applications, or where customer needs NC contacts, zero leakage, zero voltage drop, higher or lower load current than EPS-style. 24 to 240 VAC/DC NA 4 AMPS @ 120 VAC 3 AMPS @ 24 VDC NA -40F to +221 F 3-pin mini NEMA 1, 2, 3, 4, 4x, 5, 6, 6P, 11, 12, 12K, 13 No No Yes SPDT (Single Pole Double Throw), Normally Open/Normally Closed, Form C UL or CSA CLS-4 B Non-contacting magnetically actuated Functional replacement for AB (Mechanical) Limit Switches in many High Temperature applications, or where customer needs NC contacts, zero leakage, zero voltage drop, higher or lower load current than EPS-style. 24 to 240 VAC/DC NA 4 AMPS @ 120 VAC 3 AMPS @ 24 VDC NA -40 F to +400 F 144" PTFE Coated Flying Leads with 1/2" conduit hub NEMA 1, 2, 3, 4, 4x, 5 No No Yes SPDT (Single Pole Double Throw), Normally Open/Normally Closed, Form C UL or CSA
Description
Economical, General Purpose, 2 wire device, primarily for AC applications, not suitable for 24 VDC applications. Use EPS-5 only for automotive industry customers who specify them.
Economical, General Purpose, 3 wire, DC sensor, dual output: sinking and sourcing
Supply Voltage Load Current, min Load Current, max Leakage Current: Voltage Drop Operating Temperature Connection Enclosure Rating LED indication Short Circuit Protection Weld Field Immunity Output Approvals/Marks Make/Break Location
20 to 250 VAC/DC 8 mA 300 mA 1.7 mA, max. 7 V, max. -14 to +158 F 3-pin mini IEC IP67 Yes Yes Yes 2 wire, Normally Open with leakage current CE, UL, CSA Pin 1: AC Ground (Green) Pin 2: Output (Black)
20 to 230 VAC/DC 5 mA 500 mA 1.7 mA, max. 10 V, max -4 to +158 F 3-pin mini NEMA 4, 6, 12, 13 Yes Yes Yes 2 wire, Normally Open with leakage current UL Pin 1: AC Ground (Green) Pin 2: Output (Black) Pin 3: AC Line (White)
10 to 30 VDC NA 200 mA 10 micro amps max. 2 VDC max. -14 to +158 F 5-pin mini IEC IP67 Yes Yes Yes Dual output: DC Sinking and DC Sourcing, user selectable via wiring CE, UL, CSA Pin 1) +10 to 30 VDC (White) Pin 2) Sourcing Output (Red) Pin 3) Grounded (not connected or required) Pin 4) Sinking Output (Orange) Pin 5) DC Common (Black)
Pin 1: Common (Green) Pin 2: Normally Closed (Black) Pin 3: Normally Open (White)
Common: (Black) Normally Open: (Blue) Normally Closed: (Red)
Wiring Instructions
Pin 3: AC Line (White)
M27
Proximity
0.125" from end of stroke, typical. Tolerance is 0/-0.125"
NAMUR
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
EPS-5, 6 & 7 / CLS-1 & 4 Series and Parallel Wiring

When Parker EPS-5, 6 or 7 proximity sensors are used as inputs to programmable controllers, the preferred practice is to connect each sensor to a separate input channel of the PC. Series or parallel operations may then be accomplished by the internal PC programming. Parker EPS-5, 6 or 7 sensors may be hard wired for series operation, but the voltage drop through the sensors (see specifications) must not reduce the available voltage below what is needed to actuate the load.

C052
Parker EPS-5, 6 or 7 sensors may also be hard wired for parallel operation. However, the leakage current of each sensor will pass through the load. The total of all leakage currents must not exceed the current required to actuate the load. In most cases, the use of two or more EPS-5, 6 or 7 sensors in parallel will require the use of a bypass (shunt) resistor.
EPS-5 Automotive Applications

(Meets some Automotive Manufacturers Specifications)
2 (50.8) 1.38 (35)
1.56 (39)
.66 (17)
2.22 (56)
.88 (22) A C
.88 (22)
EPS-7 & EPS-6 Sensors
CLS-1 & 4 Sensors
.49 (12)
2.58 (66)
1.49 (38) A C
2.00 (51) A C
Connector Pin Numbering

3-Pin Mini
Series A max. 1.55" C max. 1.30"
5-Pin Mini
Male Receptacle End View AC DC L2 or (+ / -) L1 or (- / +)
3 4 5 2 1
2A, 4MA, 4MAJ
For exact dimensions, see Bulletin 0840-G-E1
Male Receptacle End View White Load

3 2 1
Black
(-)
Black Green
N.O.
N.O. Load Source Red White (+) N.O. Load Sink
Orange
M28
Catalog 0900P-4
How to Specify Sensors for 2A, 2AN How to Specify EPS Sensors
Parker EPS proximity sensors may be ordered on 2A, 2AN, 4MA and 4MAJ Series cylinders as follows: 1) Complete the basic cylinder model number. 2) Place an S in the model number to denote sensors and/or special features. 3) Mounting styles D, DB, JB, or HB should be used with caution because of possible mounting interferences. Consult bulletin 0840-G-E1 for additional information. 4) Special modifications to cylinders other than sensors must have a written description. Head End
R Specify: R = EPS-5 H = EPS-7 D = EPS-6 F = CLS-1 B = CLS-4 N = Prep for sensors only 1 Port Location See Figure 1. 3 Sensor Location See Figure 1. A Sensor Orientation See Figure 2 for EPS-7 and EPS-6 only. GG Actuation Point GG = End of Stroke FF** = Stroke to Go; See Bulletin 0840-G-E1 for stroke remaining.

5) Specify letter prefix H for EPS-7, D for EPS-6, R for EPS-5, F for CLS-1, or B for CLS-4, then fill in the four fields specifying port location, sensor orientation and actuation point for both head and cap. If only one sensor is used, place XXXX in the unused fields. Example = H13CGG-XXXX denotes a sensor on the head end only, EPS-7 Example = BXXXX-42BGG denotes a sensor on the cap end only, CLS-4
Cap End
4 Port Location See Figure 1. 2 Sensor Location See Figure 1. B Sensor Orientation See Figure 2 for EPS-7 and EPS-6 only. GG Actuation Point GG = End of Stroke FF** = Stroke to Go; See Bulletin 0840-G-E1 for stroke remaining.
Note: All specified sensor and port locations are as seen from rod end of cylinder. *EPS-5 sensors will be oriented so that the connectors face each other. **Consult the Wadsworth, Ohio facility for this option with 4MA and 4MAJ Series cylinders.
Figure 1
Figure 2
Example: 4.00 CJ4MAUS14AC 12.000 S = H13CGG-13CGG
M29
Proximity
NAMUR
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
Cordset Specifications EPS-5 & EPS-7

Connectors
The male quick disconnect on the Parker EPS-5 or 7 is a Brad Harrison 40909 connector. Female connects must be purchased with one of the following cable lengths.
Cable Length 3' 6' 9' 12' Parker Part Number Automotive Standard 085356003 0853550003 085356006 0853550006 085356009 0853560012 0853550012

C052
AC White (3) EPS-5 or 7 L1 L2
Load Black (2) Internally Short Circuit Protected Green
Pin STANDARD Receptacle 1. Green AC 2. Black Color Code 3. White AUTOMOTIVE 1. Green 1 2. Red 2 3 3. Red
EPS-6
Connectors
The male quick disconnect on the Parker EPS-6 is a Brad Harrison 41310 connector.
White 1 (+) Orange 4 Sink (NPN)
Plug Pin and Cable Identification

1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Cable Length 3 6 12
+10 to 30 VDC (White) Source (Red) Grounded not connected nor required Sink (Orange) Common (Black)
Black 5 (-) Red 2 Source (PNP)
LED Function Power Applied (No Target) Target Present Short Circuit Condition
Ready ON OFF FLASH
Target OFF ON FLASH
Parker Part Number 0859170003 0859170006 0859170012
3 4 5 2 1
CLS
Connectors
The male quick disconnect on the Parker CLS-1 is a Brad Harrison 40909 connector. Female connects must be purchased with one of the following cable lengths.
Cable Length 3' 6' 9' 12' Parker Part Number 0853550003 0853550006 0853550012
AC White (3) L1 CLS-1 L2 Load Black (2) Internally Short Circuit Protected Green
Pin STANDARD Receptacle 1. Green AC 2. Black Color Code 3. White

1 2 3
The connection for the CLS-4 are 144" PTFE insulated flying leads with 1/2" conduit hub. 3-wire: Common (black), Normally open (blue), and Normally closed (red).
M30
Catalog 0900P-4
PTR and HP Series Proximity Sensors

The inductive type proximity sensor provides end of rotation indication. The non-contact probe senses the presence of the ferrous cushion spear and has no springs, plungers, cams or dynamic seals that can wear out or go out of adjustment. The sensor is solid state and meets NEMA 3, 4, & 13 specifications. For ease of wiring, the connector housing is rotatable through 360. To rotate, lift the cover latch, position, and release. A standard proximity sensor controls 20-230 VAC/DC loads from 5 to 500 mA. The low 1.7 mA off-state leakage current can allow use for direct PLC input. The standard short circuit protection (SCP) protects the sensor from a short in the load or line upon sensing such a condition (5 amp or greater current) by assuming a non-conductive mode. The fault condition must be corrected and the power removed to reset the sensor preventing automatic restarts. The low voltage DC sensor is also available for use with 1030 VDC. This sensor is in a non-rotatable housing, but does incorporate the short circuit protection. Both sensors are equipped with two LEDs, Ready and Target. The Ready LED is lit when power is applied and the cushion spear is not present. The Target LED will light and the Ready LED will go out when the sensor is closed, indicating the presence of the cushion spear. Both LEDs flashing indicates a short circuit condition. For Low Voltage DC Sensor (10-30 VDC) information, please refer to pages H27 and H30. For High Voltage Sensor (20-230 VAC/DC) information, please refer to pages H27 and H30.
Notes: 1. Available with or without cushions. 2. Not available with stroke adjusters. 3. Pressure rating: 3000 PSI 4. Operating temperature: -4F to 150F 5. Specify sensor type, orientation and voltage when ordering. 6. The low voltage DC sensor is available in non-rotatable style only, consult representative for further information.

A076
M31
Proximity
NAMUR
SS/Reed
Catalog 0900P-4
8mm Barrel Type Inductive Proximity Sensors 8mm Barrel Type

A074/A076
Proximity sensors are normally ordered with the unit as part of the model number. Use these part numbers for replacement parts only.
Part Numbers
PNP Series HB P5L WR Quick* Connect B8830-P B8830-P B8830-P Flying Leads 913090000 913090000 913090000 Quick ** Connect B8830-N B8830-N B8830-N NPN Flying Leads 913090100 913090100 913090100
* Order cordset B8757-P separately. ** Order cordset B8757-N separately.
Electrical Specifications
Voltage...................................... 10-30 VDC (3 wire) PNP or NPN No Load Current ....................... 5.5-9.5 mA Continuous Current .................. 150mA Switching Speed ....................... 8 ms Switch Frequency ..................... 5000 Hz Switching Distance ................... Aluminum = 0.016 in (0.4mm) Brass = 0.028 in (0.7 mm) Steel = 0.039 in (1.0 mm) Overload Protection .................. Triggered at 170mA Reverse Polarity Protection ...... Incorporated Temp. Range............................. -13 to 158F (-25 to 70oC) Enclosure Rating ...................... Meets NEMA 1,3,4,6,13 and IEC IP67, fully encapsulated
PNP WIRING CONNECTION

NPN WIRING CONNECTION

POTTED-IN SENSOR Lead type sensor with 20 ft. (6m) cord length
LED M8 x 1 .177 4.5 .157 4.0 1.181 30.0
PLUG-IN SENSOR A threaded right angle cordset must be ordered separately. The cordset contains two LEDs: 1 - power, 2 - target indication. Cordset length is 20 ft. (6m).
LED
2.225 56.5
M8 x 1
.177 4.5
1.181 30.0 1.575 40.0
M32
Fax Forms, Safety Guide, Offer of Sale

Section N
Contents
Application Fax Forms Pneumatic Cylinders....................................................N2 Guided Cylinders .........................................................N3 Rotary Actuators ..........................................................N4 Pneumatic Grippers .....................................................N5 Safety Guide .................................................................. N8-N9 Offer of Sale ......................................................................N10
N
N1
Catalog 0900P-4
Cylinder Application Fax Form

ContaCt InformatIon:
Pneumatic Actuator Products General Information
Fax completed form to 330-334-3335 or email to actuatorsales@parker.com. Name ________________________________ Phone _______________ Company _____________________________ email ________________ City, State, Zip _______________________________________________
applICatIon SketCh
Please include the critical dimensions in your sketch. In order to achieve the best solution, it is important that you provide as much information as possible. For other considerations, please use another sheet of paper.
operatIng envIronment
Media (check one) ___ Air ___ Oil ___ Other ______________ Pressure Min. _________ Max. _________ Temperature Ambient __________ Fluid ____________ Conditions ___ Std. Factory ___ Chemical ___ Corrosive ___ Outdoor ___ Other _________________ Cushions Head: ___ Yes ___ No Cap: ___ Yes ___ No Position # (refer to catalog) _______ Magnetic Piston ___ Yes ___ No
teChnICal SpeCIfICatIonS
Mounting/Cylinder Orientation Style (refer to catalog) ___________ ___ Vertical ___ Rod Up ___ Rod Down ___ Horizontal Degrees from Vertical ______ Port Type Head: ___ NPTF ___ BSPP ___ SAE Cap: ___ NPTF ___ BSPP ___ SAE Position # (refer to catalog) _______ Other ________________________
load InformatIon
Push (lbs) _____________ Pull (lbs) ______________ Known Side Load (lbs) ___________ Extend Speed (inches/sec) __________ Retract Speed (inches/sec) __________ Dwell Time __________________ Cycles/Min __________________
rod end detaIlS

Male
LA A C KK W V KK 1/8
Female
A
Check One
Rod End Connection Fixed and rigidly guided Pivoted and rigidly guided Supported but not rigidly guided Pivoted and rigidly guided Pivoted and rigidly guided Pivoted and rigidly guided
Case
MM B D WRENCH FLATS D WRENCH FLATS NA 1/8 NA C W V
MM B
If rod end is different from above, please submit sketch. Piston rod diameter and rod end threads vary with the application. Please supply the dimensions below.
Male Rod End KK = _______ A = ________ LA or LAF = _________
Female Rod End KK = _______ A = ________ W or WF = _________
N2
Catalog 0900P-4
Guided Cylinder Application Fax Form

EXAMPLES
ORIENTATION
Fax completed form to 330-334-3335 or email to actuator sales @parker.com.
Name ___________________________Phone __________________________ Company ________________________email ___________________________ City, State, Zip ____________________________________________________
applICatIon SketCh
VERTICAL LOAD
F
Please include the critical dimensions in your sketch. In order to achieve the best solution, it is important that you provide as much information as possible. LOAD STOPPING
applICatIon detaIlS
1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
TORSIONAL REQUIREMENTS
6. 7. 8.
SYMMETRICAL
Application Type: Using the examples on the left, circle the letter that most closely matches your application. A B C D E F G H Required stroke (mm): ___________________ Force Requirements (lbs): Extend ____________ Retract ____________ Side Loading (lbs): ______________________ Load Stopping: Weight (lbs) ______________ Velocity (in/sec) _______________ Torques (lb-in): _____________ Torsional Requirements (check one): _____ Symmetrical _____ Asymmetrical Cycle Times: a. Duty Cycles (cycles/hr) ________________ b. Extend Time ________________________ c. Retract Time ________________________ d. Dwell Time _________________________
envIronmental CondItIonS
1.
ASYMMETRICAL
Operating Temperature: Max _________ Min _________ 2. Contamination (check one): _____ Particle _____ Liquid Other Special Considerations for the Application: ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________
N3
Catalog 0900P-4
Rotary Actuator Application Fax Form EXAMPLES

ROTATE THIN DISK
Fax completed form to 330-334-3335 or email to actuatorsales@parker. com.
Name ________________________________ Phone _______________ Company _____________________________ email ________________ City, State, Zip _______________________________________________
applICatIon SketCh
End mounted on center Mounted on center
ROTATE THIN RECTANGULAR PLATE
Mounted on center
Mounted off center
Please include the critical dimensions in your sketch. In order to achieve the best solution, it is important that you provide as much information as possible.
End mounted on center Point load 1. 2.
Operating Temperature: Max _________ Min ________ Contamination: Particle _______ Liquid ______
applICatIon detaIlS
Type of Actuator (check one): ____ Vane ____ Rack & Pinion 2. Type of Application (circle letter of example at left that most closely represents your application): A B C D E F G H 3. Torque Requirements (lb-in or Nm), if known: ___________ 4. Operating Media: ____ Air ____Oil 5. Operating Pressure (psi): _______ 6. Required Rotation (in degrees): _______ 7. Rotation Time (seconds to complete rotation in one direction): _________ 8. Is Rotation Adjustment Needed? ___ No ___Yes If yes, how much? ________ 9. Weight of object being rotated (lbs): ______________ a. Will external stops be utilized? ____ No ____ Yes b. Will the actuator be used to decelerate or stop the load? ____ No ____ Yes 10. Shaft Orientation (circle one): UP SIDE DOWN 1.
ROTATE SLENDER ROD
Mounted on center
Mounted off center
Other Considerations: _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ ______________________________
11. 12. 13. 14.
Distance from center of shaft to center of load (inches): ___________ Shaft (check one): ___ Male ___ Female Options (check one): ___ Shocks ___ Cushions ___ Bumpers Sensing (check one): ___ Proximity ___ Hall Effect ___ Reed
N4
Catalog 0900P-4
Gripper Application Fax Form

Fax completed form to 330-334-3335 or email to actuatorsales@parker.com. Name ________________________________ Phone _______________ Company _____________________________ email ________________ City, State, Zip _______________________________________________
applICatIon SketCh
Please include the critical dimensions in your sketch. In order to achieve the best solution, it is important that you provide as much information as possible.
fIngerS
1.
Type of Fingers (check one): ____ Friction ____ Encompassing
other grIpper optIonS (check)

___ Spring Close ___ Spring Assist ___ Spring Open ___ Non-Synchronous Fingers ___ Clean Room ___ Dust
1. 2. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Gripper Stroke ___________ Length of Fingers ___________ Weight of workpiece: ____________ Workpiece hardness: ____________ Workpiece temperature: ____________ Workpiece positioning tolerance: ____________ Workpiece shape (illustrate in the space below): Operating Temperature: Max _________ Min _________ Contamination (check one): ___ Particle ___ Liquid Type: ____________________________
WorkpIeCe data
aCtuator InformatIon
1. 2. 3. 4.
Type of actuator the gripper is mounted to: _________________________________________ Maximum Acceleration: ______________________ Supply Air Pressure: ________________________ Any External Forces (check one)? ____ Yes ____ No If yes, please describe: _______________________ __________________________________________
other SpeCIal ConSIderatIonS grIpper SenSIng and ControlS

1. 2. 3. ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ Type of position sensors: ______________________ Number of sensors: ________ Flow controls*: ______________________________
*Flow controls are recommended on angular grippers.
N5
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
N
N6
Catalog 0900P-4
Notes
N
N7
Catalog 0900P-4
Safety Guide
Safety Guide for Selecting and Using Hydraulic, Pneumatic Cylinders and Their Accessories
WARNING: ! FAILURE OF THE CYLINDER, ITS PARTS, ITS MOUNTING, ITS CONNECTIONS TO OTHER OBjECTS, OR ITS CONTROLS CAN RESULT IN: Unanticipated or uncontrolled movement of the cylinder or objects connected to it. Falling of the cylinder or objects held up by it. Fluid escaping from the cylinder, potentially at high velocity. THESE EVENTS COULD CAUSE DEATH OR PERSONAL INjURY BY, FOR EXAMPLE, PERSONS FALLING FROM HIGH LOCATIONS, BEING CRUSHED OR STRUCK BY HEAVY OR FAST MOVING OBjECTS, BEING PUSHED INTO DANGEROUS EQUIPMENT OR SITUATIONS, OR SLIPPING ON ESCAPED FLUID.
Before selecting or using Parker (The Company) cylinders or related accessories, it is important that you read, understand and follow the following safety information. Training is advised before selecting and using The Companys products. 1.0 General Instructions 1.1 Scope This safety guide provides instructions for selecting and using (including assembling, installing, and maintaining) cylinder products. This safety guide is a supplement to and is to be used with the specific Company publications for the specific cylinder products that are being considered for use. 1.2 Fail Safe Cylinder products can and do fail without warning for many reasons. All systems and equipment should be designed in a fail-safe mode so that if the failure of a cylinder product occurs people and property wont be endangered. 1.3 Distribution Provide a free copy of this safety guide to each person responsible for selecting or using cylinder products. Do not select or use The Companys cylinders without thoroughly reading and understanding this safety guide as well as the specific Company publications for the products considered or selected. 1.4 User Responsibility Due to very wide variety of cylinder applications and cylinder operating conditions, The Company does not warrant that any particular cylinder is suitable for any specific application. This safety guide does not analyze all technical parameters that must be considered in selecting a product. The hydraulic and pneumatic cylinders outlined in this catalog are designed to The Companys design guidelines and do not necessarily meet the design guideline of other agencies such as American Bureau of Shipping, ASME Pressure Vessel Code etc. The user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for: Making the final selection of the cylinders and related accessories. Determining if the cylinders are required to meet specific design requirements as required by the Agency(s) or industry standards covering the design of the users equipment. Assuring that the users requirements are met, OSHA requirements are met, and safety guidelines from the applicable agencies such as but not limited to ANSI are followed and that the use presents no health or safety hazards. Providing all appropriate health and safety warnings on the equipment on which the cylinders are used. 1.5 Additional Questions Call the appropriate Company technical service department if you have any questions or require any additional information. See the Company publication for the product being considered or used, or call 1-800-CPARKER, or go to www.parker.com, for telephone numbers of the appropriate technical service department. 2.0 Cylinder and Accessories Selection 2.1 Seals Part of the process of selecting a cylinder is the selection of seal compounds. Before making this selection, consult the seal information page(s) of the publication for the series of cylinders of interest. The application of cylinders may allow fluids such as cutting fluids, wash down fluids etc. to come in contact with the external area of the cylinder. These fluids may attack the piston rod wiper and or the primary seal and must be taken into account when selecting and specifying seal compounds. Dynamic seals will wear. The rate of wear will depend on many operating factors. Wear can be rapid if a cylinder is mis-aligned or if the cylinder has been improperly serviced. The user must take seal wear into consideration in the application of cylinders. 2.2 Piston Rods Possible consequences of piston rod failure or separation of the piston rod from the piston include, but are not limited to are: Piston rod and or attached load thrown off at high speed. Unexpected detachment of the machine member from the piston rod. Failure of the pressurized fluid delivery system (hoses, fittings, valves, pumps, compressors) which maintain cylinder position. Catastrophic cylinder seal failure leading to sudden loss of pressurized fluid. Failure of the machine control system. Follow the recommendations of the Piston Rod Selection Chart and Data in the publication for the series of cylinders of interest. The suggested piston rod diameter in these charts must be followed in order to avoid piston rod buckling. Piston rods are not normally designed to absorb bending moments or loads which are perpendicular to the axis of piston rod motion. These additional loads can cause the piston rod to fail. If these types of additional loads are expected to be imposed on the piston rod, their magnitude should be made known to our engineering department. The cylinder user should always make sure that the piston rod is securely attached to the machine member. On occasion cylinders are ordered with double rods (a piston rod extended from both ends of the cylinder). In some cases a stop is threaded on to one of the piston rods and used as an external stroke adjuster. On occasions spacers are attached to the machine member connected to the piston rod and also used as a stroke adjuster. In both cases the stops will create a pinch point and the user should consider appropriate use of guards. If these external stops are not perpendicular to the mating contact surface, or if debris is trapped between the contact surfaces, a bending moment will be placed on the piston rod, which can lead to piston rod failure. An external stop will also negate the effect of cushioning and will subject the piston rod to impact loading. Those two (2) conditions can cause piston rod failure. Internal stroke adjusters are available with and without cushions. The use of external stroke adjusters should be reviewed with our engineering department. The piston rod to piston and the stud to piston rod threaded connections are secured with an anaerobic adhesive. The strength of the adhesive decreases with increasing temperature. Cylinders which can be exposed to temperatures above +250F (+121C) are to be ordered with a non studded piston rod and a pinned piston to rod joint. 2.3 Cushions Cushions should be considered for cylinder applications when the piston velocity is expected to be over 4 inches/second. Cylinder cushions are normally designed to absorb the energy of a linear applied load. A rotating mass has considerably more energy than the same mass moving in a linear mode. Cushioning for a rotating mass application should be review by our engineering department. 2.4 Cylinder Mountings Some cylinder mounting configurations may have certain limitations such as but not limited to minimum stroke for side or foot mounting cylinders or pressure de-ratings for certain mounts. Carefully review the catalog for these types of restrictions. Always mount cylinders using the largest possible high tensile alloy steel socket head cap screws that can fit in the cylinder mounting holes and torque them to the manufacturers recommendations for their size. 2.5 Port Fittings Hydraulic cylinders applied with meter out or deceleration circuits are subject to intensified pressure at piston rod end. The rod end pressure is approximately equal to: operating pressure x effective cap end area effective rod end piston area Contact your connector supplier for the pressure rating of individual connectors. 3.0 Cylinder and Accessories Installation and Mounting 3.1 Installation 3.1.1 Cleanliness is an important consideration, and cylinders are shipped with the ports plugged to protect them from contaminants entering the ports. These plugs should not be removed until the piping is to be installed. Before making the connection to the cylinder ports, piping should be thoroughly cleaned to remove all chips or burrs which might have resulted from threading or flaring operations.
High velocity fluid discharge. Piston rod extending when pressure is applied in the piston retract mode. Piston rods or machine members attached to the piston rod may move suddenly and without warning as a consequence of other conditions occurring to the machine such as, but not limited to:
N8
Catalog 0900P-4
Safety Guide
3.1.2 Cylinders operating in an environment where air drying materials are present such as fast-drying chemicals, paint, or weld splatter, or other hazardous conditions such as excessive heat, should have shields installed to prevent damage to the piston rod and piston rod seals. 3.1.3 Proper alignment of the cylinder piston rod and its mating component on the machine should be checked in both the extended and retracted positions. Improper alignment will result in excessive rod gland and/or cylinder bore wear. On fixed mounting cylinders attaching the piston rod while the rod is retracted will help in achieving proper alignment. 3.1.4 Sometimes it may be necessary to rotate the piston rod in order to thread the piston rod into the machine member. This operation must always be done with zero pressure being applied to either side of the piston. Failure to follow this procedure may result in loosening the piston to rod-threaded connection. In some rare cases the turning of the piston rod may rotate a threaded piston rod gland and loosen it from the cylinder head. Confirm that this condition is not occurring. If it does, re-tighten the piston rod gland firmly against the cylinder head. For double rod cylinders it is also important that when attaching or detaching the piston rod from the machine member that the torque be applied to the piston rod end of the cylinder that is directly attaching to the machine member with the opposite end unrestrained. If the design of the machine is such that only the rod end of the cylinder opposite to where the rod attaches to the machine member can be rotated, consult the factory for further instructions. 3.2 Mounting Recommendations 3.2.1 Always mount cylinders using the largest possible high tensile alloy steel socket head screws that can fit in the cylinder mounting holes and torque them to the manufacturers recommendations for their size. 3.2.2 Side-Mounted Cylinders In addition to the mounting bolts, cylinders of this type should be equipped with thrust keys or dowel pins located so as to resist the major load. 3.2.3 Tie Rod Mounting Cylinders with tie rod mountings are recommended for applications where mounting space is limited. The standard tie rod extension is shown as BB in dimension tables. Longer or shorter extensions can be supplied. Nuts used for this mounting style should be torqued to the same value as the tie rods for that bore size. 3.2.4 Flange Mount Cylinders The controlled diameter of the rod gland extension on head end flange mount cylinders can be used as a pilot to locate the cylinders in relation to the machine. After alignment has been obtained, the flanges may be drilled for pins or dowels to prevent shifting. 3.2.5 Trunnion Mountings Cylinders require lubricated bearing blocks with minimum bearing clearances. Bearing blocks should be carefully aligned and rigidly mounted so the trunnions will not be subjected to bending moments. The rod end should also be pivoted with the pivot pin in line and parallel to axis of the trunnion pins. 3.2.6 Clevis Mountings Cylinders should be pivoted at both ends with centerline of pins parallel to each other. After cylinder is mounted, be sure to check to assure that the cylinder is free to swing through its working arc without interference from other machine parts. 4.0 Cylinder and Accessories Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Replacement 4.1 Storage At times cylinders are delivered before a customer is ready to install them and must be stored for a period of time. When storage is required the following procedures are recommended. 4.1.1 Store the cylinders in an indoor area which has a dry, clean and noncorrosive atmosphere. Take care to protect the cylinder from both internal corrosion and external damage. 4.1.2 Whenever possible cylinders should be stored in a vertical position (piston rod up). This will minimize corrosion due to possible condensation which could occur inside the cylinder. This will also minimize seal damage. 4.1.3 Port protector plugs should be left in the cylinder until the time of installation. 4.1.4 If a cylinder is stored full of hydraulic fluid, expansion of the fluid due to temperature changes must be considered. Installing a check valve with free flow out of the cylinder is one method. 4.1.5 When cylinders are mounted on equipment that is stored outside for extended periods, exposed unpainted surfaces, e.g. piston rod, must be coated with a rust-inhibiting compound to prevent corrosion. 4.2 Cylinder Trouble Shooting 4.2.1 External Leakage 4.2.1.1 Rod seal leakage can generally be traced to worn or

damaged seals. Examine the piston rod for dents, gouges or score marks, and replace piston rod if surface is rough. Rod seal leakage could also be traced to gland wear. If clearance is excessive, replace rod bushing and seal. Rod seal leakage can also be traced to seal deterioration. If seals are soft or gummy or brittle, check compatibility of seal material with lubricant used if air cylinder, or operating fluid if hydraulic cylinder. Replace with seal material, which is compatible with these fluids. If the seals are hard or have lost elasticity, it is usually due to exposure to temperatures in excess of 165F. (+74C). Shield the cylinder from the heat source to limit temperature to 350F. (+177C.) and replace with fluorocarbon seals. 4.2.1.2 Cylinder body seal leak can generally be traced to loose tie rods. Torque the tie rods to manufacturers recommendation for that bore size. Excessive pressure can also result in cylinder body seal leak. Determine maximum pressure to rated limits. Replace seals and retorque tie rods as in paragraph above. Excessive pressure can also result in cylinder body seal leak. Determine if the pressure rating of the cylinder has been exceeded. If so, bring the operating pressure down to the rating of the cylinder and have the tie rods replaced. Pinched or extruded cylinder body seal will also result in a leak. Replace cylinder body seal and retorque as in paragraph above. Cylinder body seal leakage due to loss of radial squeeze which shows up in the form of flat spots or due to wear on the O.D. or I.D. Either of these are symptoms of normal wear due to high cycle rate or length of service. Replace seals as per paragraph above. 4.2.2 Internal Leakage 4.2.2.1 Piston seal leak (by-pass) 1 to 3 cubic inches per minute leakage is considered normal for piston ring construction. Virtually no static leak with lipseal type seals on piston should be expected. Piston seal wear is a usual cause of piston seal leakage. Replace seals as required. 4.2.2.2 With lipseal type piston seals excessive back pressure due to over-adjustment of speed control valves could be a direct cause of rapid seal wear. Contamination in a hydraulic system can result in a scored cylinder bore, resulting in rapid seal wear. In either case, replace piston seals as required. 4.2.2.3 What appears to be piston seal leak, evidenced by the fact that the cylinder drifts, is not always traceable to the piston. To make sure, it is suggested that one side of the cylinder piston be pressurized and the fluid line at the opposite port be disconnected. Observe leakage. If none is evident, seek the cause of cylinder drift in other component parts in the circuit. 4.2.3 Cylinder Fails to Move the Load 4.2.3.1 Pneumatic or hydraulic pressure is too low. Check the pressure at the cylinder to make sure it is to circuit requirements. 4.2.3.2 Piston Seal Leak Operate the valve to cycle the cylinder and observe fluid flow at valve exhaust ports at end of cylinder stroke. Replace piston seals if flow is excessive. 4.2.3.3 Cylinder is undersized for the load Replace cylinder with one of a larger bore size. 4.3 Erratic or Chatter Operation 4.3.1 Excessive friction at rod gland or piston bearing due to load misalignment Correct cylinder-to-load alignment. 4.3.2 Cylinder sized too close to load requirements Reduce load or install larger cylinder. 4.3.3 Erratic operation could be traced to the difference between static and kinetic friction. Install speed control valves to provide a back pressure to control the stroke. 4.4 Cylinder Modifications, Repairs, or Failed Component Cylinders as shipped from the factory are not to be disassembled and or modified. If cylinders require modifications, these modifications must be done at company locations or by The Companys certified facilities. The Cylinder Division Engineering Department must be notified in the event of a mechanical fracture or permanent deformation of any cylinder component (excluding seals). This includes a broken piston rod, tie rod, mounting accessory or any other cylinder component. The notification should include all operation and application details. This information will be used to provide an engineered repair that will prevent recurrence of the failure. It is allowed to disassemble cylinders for the purpose of replacing seals or seal assemblies. However, this work must be done by strictly following all the instructions provided with the seal kits.
N9
Catalog 0900P-4
Offer of Sale
Offer of Sale
The items described in this document and other documents or descriptions provided by Parker Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries and Divisions (Company) and its authorized distributors, are hereby offered for sale at prices to be established by the Company, its subsidiaries and its authorized distributors. This offer and its acceptance by any customer (Buyer) shall be governed by all of the following Terms and Conditions. Buyers order for any such item, when communicated to the Company, its subsidiary or an authorized distributor (Seller) verbally or in writing, shall constitute acceptance of this offer. 1. Terms and Conditions of Sale: All descriptions, quotations, proposals, offers, acknowledgments, acceptances and sales of Sellers products are subject to and shall be governed exclusively by the terms and conditions stated herein. Buyers acceptance of any offer to sell is limited to these terms and conditions. Any terms or conditions in addition to, or inconsistent with those stated herein, proposed by Buyer in any acceptance of an offer by Seller, are hereby objected to. No such additional, different or inconsistent terms and conditions shall become part of the contract between Buyer and Seller unless expressly accepted in writing by Seller. Sellers acceptance of any offer to purchase by Buyer is expressly conditional upon Buyers assent to all the terms and conditions stated herein, including any terms in addition to, or inconsistent with those contained in Buyers offer. Acceptance of Sellers products shall in all events constitute such assent. 2. Payment: Payment shall be made by Buyer net 30 days from the date of delivery of the items purchased hereunder. Amounts not timely paid shall bear interest at the maximum rate permitted by law for each month or portion thereof that the Buyer is late in making payment. Any claims by Buyer for omissions or shortages in a shipment shall be waived unless Seller receives notice thereof within 30 days after Buyers receipt of the shipment. 3. Delivery: Unless otherwise provided on the face hereof, delivery shall be made F.O.B. Sellers plant. Regardless of the method of delivery, however, risk of loss shall pass to Buyer upon Sellers delivery to a carrier. Any delivery dates shown are approximate only and Seller shall have no liability for any delays in delivery. 4. Warranty: Seller warrants that the items sold hereunder shall be free from defects in material or workmanship for a period of 18 months from date of shipment from the Company. THIS WARRANTY COMPRISES THE SOLE AND ENTIRE WARRANTY PERTAINING TO ITEMS PROVIDED HEREUNDER. SELLER MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY, GUARANTEE, OR REPRESENTATION OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PURPOSE, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR ARISING BY OPERATION OF LAW, TRADE USAGE, OR COURSE OF DEALING ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. NOTWITHSTANDINGTHE FOREGOING,THERE ARE NOWARRANTIES WHATSOEVER ON ITEMS BUILT OR ACQUIRED WHOLLY OR PARTIALLY, TO BUYERS DESIGN OR SPECIFICATIONS. 5. Limitation of Remedy: SELLERS LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE ITEMS SOLD OR THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE ITEMS SOLD OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY BUYER, AT SELLERS SOLE OPTION. IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS ARISING FROM OR IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR ITEMS SOLD HEREUNDER, WHETHER ALLEGED TO ARISE FROM BREACH OF CONTRACT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, OR IN TORT, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, NEGLIGENCE, FAILURETO WARN OR STRICT LIABILITY. 6. Changes, Reschedules and Cancellations: Buyer may request to modify the designs or specifications for the items sold hereunder as well as the quantities and delivery dates thereof, or may request to cancel all or part of this order, however, no such requested modification or cancellation shall become part of the contract between Buyer and Seller unless accepted by Seller in a written amendment to this Agreement. Acceptance of any such requested modification or cancellation shall be at Sellers discretion, and shall be upon such terms and conditions as Seller may require. 7. Special Tooling: A tooling charge may be imposed for any special tooling, including without limitations, dies, fixtures, molds and patterns, acquired to manufacture items sold pursuant to this contract. Such special tooling shall be and remain Sellers property notwithstanding payment of any charges by Buyer. In no event will Buyer acquire any interest in apparatus belonging to Seller which is utilized in the manufacture of the items sold hereunder, even if such apparatus has been specially converted or adapted for such manufacture and notwithstanding any charges paid by Buyer. Unless otherwise agreed, Seller shall have the right to alter,
2008 Parker Hannifin Corporation
discard or otherwise dispose of any special tooling or other property in its sole discretion at any time. 8. Buyers Property: Any designs, tools, patterns, materials, drawings, confidential information or equipment furnished by Buyer, or any other items which become Buyers property, may be considered obsolete and may be destroyed by Seller after two (2) consecutive years have elapsed without Buyer placing an order for the items which are manufactured using such property. Seller shall not be responsible for any loss or damage to such property while it is in Sellers possession or control. 9. Taxes: Unless otherwise indicated on the face hereof, all prices and charges are exclusive of excise, sales, use, property, occupational or like taxes which may be imposed by any taxing authority upon the manufacture, sale or delivery of the items sold hereunder. If any such taxes must be paid by Seller or if Seller is liable for the collection of such tax, the amount thereof shall be in addition to the amounts for the items sold. Buyer agrees to pay all such taxes or to reimburse Seller therefore upon receipt of its invoice. If Buyer claims exemption from any sales, use or other tax imposed by any taxing authority, Buyer shall save Seller harmless from and against any such tax, together with any interest or penalties thereon which may be assessed if the items are held to be taxable. 10. Indemnity For Infringement of Intellectual Property Rights: Seller shall have no liability for infringement of any patents, trademarks, copyrights, trade dress, trade secrets or similar rights except as provided in this Part 10. Seller will defend and indemnify Buyer against allegations of infringement of U.S. patents, U.S. trademarks, copyrights, trade dress and trade secrets (hereinafter Intellectual Property Rights). Seller will defend at its expense and will pay the cost of any settlement or damages awarded in an action brought against Buyer based on an allegation that an item sold pursuant to this contract infringes the Intellectual Property Rights of a third party. Sellers obligation to defend and indemnify Buyer is contingent on Buyer notifying Seller within ten (10) days after Buyer becomes aware of such allegations of infringement, and Seller having sole control over the defense of any allegations or actions including all negotiations for settlement or compromise. If an item sold hereunder is subject to a claim that it infringes the Intellectual Property Rights of a third party, Seller may, at its sole expense and option, procure for Buyer the right to continue using said item, replace or modify said item so as to make it noninfringing, or offer to accept return of said item and return the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Seller shall have no liability for claims of infringement based on information provided by Buyer, or directed to items delivered hereunder for which the designs are specified in whole or part by Buyer, or infringements resulting from the modification, combination or use in a system of any item sold hereunder. The foregoing provisions of this Part 10 shall constitute Sellers sole and exclusive liability and Buyers sole and exclusive remedy for infringement of Intellectual Property Rights. If a claim is based on information provided by Buyer or if the design for an item delivered hereunder is specified in whole or in part by Buyer, Buyer shall defend and indemnify Seller for all costs, expenses or judgements resulting from any claim that such item infringes any patent, trademark, copyright, trade dress, trade secret or any similar right. 11. Force Majeure: Seller does not assume the risk of and shall not be liable for delay or failure to perform any of Sellers obligations by reason of circumstances beyond the reasonable control of Seller (hereinafter Events of Force Majeure). Events of Force Majeure shall include without limitation, accidents, acts of God, strikes or labor disputes, acts, laws, rules or regulations of any government or government agency, fires, floods, delays or failures in delivery of carriers or suppliers, shortages of materials and any other cause beyond Sellers control. 12. Entire Agreement/Governing Law: The terms and conditions set forth herein, together with any amendments, modifications and any different terms or conditions expressly accepted by Seller in writing, shall constitute the entire Agreement concerning the items sold, and there are no oral or other representations or agreements which pertain thereto. This Agreement shall be governed in all respects by the law of the State of Ohio. No actions arising out of sale of the items sold hereunder or this Agreement may be brought by either party more than two (2) years after the cause of action accrues.
Printed in U.S.A. May, 2008
N10
Catalog 0900P-4
03/2008
Parker Hannifin Corporation Actuator Division 135 Quadral Drive Wadsworth, OH 44281 USA Tel: 330 336 3511 Fax: 330 334 3335 Web site: www.parker.com/pneumatics actuatorsales@parker.com

0900P-4 Complete

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

0900P-4 Complete

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Pneumatic Actuator Products

Cylinders, Guided Cylinders and Rotary Actuators

Productsnotshowingthisiconarestillsoldanddistributed worldwide.However,TheGlobalPneumaticsiconrepresents productsthatcustomerscanexpectthebestlevelofsupport. Ifyouareamulti-nationalcompany,seekglobalsourcingor shipglobally,dependonParkerPneumaticforPREMIER CUSTOMER SERVICE.

ParkerHannifinCorporation PneumaticDivision Wadsworth,Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Pneumatic Actuator Products Product Selection Chart

P1D Series, P1A Series

P1X Series, RC Series, P1Z Series

For Complete Information, Refer to Catalog 1900-2

Solid State, Reed and Proximity Sensors

Application FAX Forms

Fax Forms, Safety Guide, Offer of Sale

Round Body Cylinders

Tie Rod Cylinders

Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data

Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data

Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Pneumatic Actuator Products Product Selection Chart

Cylinder Series 6mm

Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data

N/A S N/A S S S N/A m m S m l l S S S m m

Delrin is a registered trademark of Dupont

Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Fluids, Temperature Range and Warranty

Pneumatic Actuator Products Product Selection Chart

Standard Seals (class 1)

Water Base Fluid Seals (class 2)

Ethylene Propylene (E.P.R.) Seals (class 3)

Low Temperature Nitrile Seals (class 4)

Non-Lubricated Air Cylinders

Fluorocarbon Seals (class 5)

3 Special (E.P.R.) (At extra cost)

Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Operating Principles and Construction Fundamental Cylinders

Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data

Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Push and Pull Forces

Pneumatic Actuator Products Product Selection Chart

Calculation of Cylinder Forces Inch Based Product

Displacement Per Inch of Stroke (ft3)

Deductions for Pull Force and Displacement

Displacement Per Inch of Stroke (ft3)

Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data

Straight Line Force Transfer (Group 1)

Tie rods extended head end, Style TB

Tie rods extended cap end, Style TC

Tie rods extended both ends, Style TD J

Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Straight Line Force Transfer (Group 3)

Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data

Pivot Force Transfer (Group 2)

Clevis Mount Cylinder

Trunion Mount Cylinder

Parker Hannifin Corporation Pneumatic Division Wadsworth, Ohio www.parker.com/pneumatics

Pneumatic Actuator Products Application Engineering Data

Clevis Mount Cylinder

T Effective Thrust F Cylinder Thrust Angle (A)

Removable Trunnion Pins

Power Factor Table

Bore Size -/,

36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168

Note: 5" through 4" bore sizes no supports required.

Mounting style CB recommended for maximum pressure of 50 PSI.

Bore -/ -/ 3-/4 4 5

Rating with Back Pressure 4 n/a 8 5 0 9 4 3 7 6 8 8 3 3 35 34

-/ -/ 3-/4 4 5 6 8

-3/4 3-3/8 .3